diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10673-0.txt | 12584 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10673-8.txt | 13012 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10673-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 306958 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10673.txt | 13012 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10673.zip | bin | 0 -> 306156 bytes |
8 files changed, 38624 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/10673-0.txt b/10673-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3012b89 --- /dev/null +++ b/10673-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12584 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 10673 *** + +THE PRINCIPAL +Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques, +AND +Discoveries +OF THE ENGLISH NATION. + +Collected by + +RICHARD HAKLUYT, PREACHER + +AND + +Edited by + +EDMUND GOLDSMID, F.R.H.S. + +VOL. IX. + +ASIA. PART II. + + + + +Nauigations, Voyages, Traffiques, and Discoueries + +OF THE ENGLISH NATION IN ASIA. + + + +CAPVT. 38. + +De territorio Cathay, et moribus Tartarorum. + +Totum Imperium Imperatoris Grand Can distinctum est in 12. magnas +prouincias, iuxta numerum duodecim filiorum primi Genitoris Can, quarum +quælibet in se continet circiter 6. millia ciuitatum, præter villas non +numeratas quæ sunt Velut ábsque numero. Habent et singulæ prouinciæ regem +principalem, hoc est 12. reges prouinciales, et horum quisque sub se reges +Insularum plurimos, alij 50. alij centum, alij plures, qui omnes et singuli +subiectissimè obediunt Grand Can Imperatori. Harum prouinciarum maior, et +nobilior dÃcitur Cathay, qui consistit in Asia profunda. Tres enim sunt +Asiæ, scilicet quæ profunda dicitur, et Asia dicta maior quæ nobis est +satis propinquior et tertia minor intra quam est Ephesus beati Ioannis +Euangelistæ sepultura, de qua habes in præcedentibus. Audistis statum +magnatum et nobilium esse permagnificum, et gloriosum, sed sciatis longè +secus esse apud communes et priuatos homines tam in ciuitatibus quam in +forensibus totius Tartariae. In prouincijs autem Cathay habetur tantum de +mercimonijs specierum, et de operibus sericosis; quòd multis facilius +acquirere esset praetiosum indumentam, quà m camisium de lino. Vnde et +quicunque sunt alicuius honestatis non carent desuper precioso vestimento. + +Omnes tam viri quam faemina similibus in forma vestibus inducuntur, +videlicet valdè latis, et breuibus vsque ad genua cum apertura in lateribus +quam firmant (dum volunt) ansis quibusdam, nam vtérque sexus est brachijs +seu femoralibus plenè tectus. Nunquam vtuntur toga aut collobio, sed nec +caputio vndè nec per aspectum indumentorum potest haberi differentia inter +virum et mulierem innuptam. Sed nupta (vt supra dictum est) gestat per +aliquod tegumentum in capite formam pedes viri. + +Nubit illic vir quotquot placet mulieribus, vt nonnulli habeant decem vel +duodecim vxores aut plures. Nam quÃsque maritus iungitur licentèr cuilibet +mulieri, exceptis matre, et amita, sorore, et filia. Sicut viri equitant, +tendunt, et currunt per patriam pro negotijs sic et mulieres, quoniam et +ipse operantur omnia ferè artificia mechanica sicut pannos et quicquid +efficiter de panno, corio, sericoque, minantque carrucas, et vehicula, sed +viri fabricant de ferro et de omni metallo, lapidibus atque ligno, nec vir +nec mulier nobilis aut degener comedit vltra semel in die communiter. Multa +nutriunt pecora sed nullos porcos, parum comeditur ibi de pane exceptis +magnatibus et diuitibus, sed carnes edunt pecorum, bestiarum, et +bestiolarum vtpote boum, ouium, caprarum, equorum, asinorum, canum, +cattorum, murium, et rattorum, ius carnium sorbentes, et omnis generis lac +bibentes. + +Nobiles autem bibunt lac equarum, seu lamentorum, pro nobilissimo potu et +pauperes aquam bullitam cum modico mellis, quia nec vinum ibi habetur, nec +ceruisia confictur: et multi ac plurimi fontes consulunt in sua siti, per +villas, et rura. Domus, et habitacula rotundae sunt formae, compositae et +contextae paruis lignis, et flexilibus virgulis, ad modum cauearum quas nos +facimus pro auiculis, habentes rotundam in culmine aperturam praestantem +duo beneficia habitationi, quoniam et ignis quem in medio domus +constituunt, fumum emittit, et pro aspiciendo lumen immittit. Intrinsecus +sunt parietes vndÃque de filtro, sed et tectum filtreum est: has domus, dum +locum habitandi mutare volunt, vel dum indiuitina expeditione procedunt, +ducunt secum in plaustris quasi tentoria. + +Multas superuacuas obseruant ceremonias, quia respiciunt in vanitates et +insanias falsas: solem et lunam praecipuè adorant, eisque frequentèr genua +curuant, et ad nouilunium, quicquid est magni estimant inchoandum. + +Nullus omnino vtitur calcaribus in equitando, sed cogunt equum flagello +scorpione, reputantes peccatum non leue si quis ad hoc flagellum appodiat, +aut iumentum percuteret suo freno, pleráque similia, quæ parum aut nihil +nocent, ponderant vt grauia, sicut imponere cultellum in igne, os osse +confringere, lac seu aliud potabile in terram effundere, nec non et +huiusmodi multa. + +[Sidenote: Mingere intra dominum peccatum capitale.] Sed super hæc, tenent +pro grauiori admisso mingere intra domum quæ inhabitatur, et qui de tanto +crimine proclamaretur assuetus, mitteretur ad mortem. Et de singulis +necesse est vt confiteatur peccator Flamini suæ legis, et soluat summam +pecuniarum delicti. Et si peccatum deturpationis habitaculi venerit in +publicum, oportebit reconciliari domum per sacerdotem, priusquam vllus +audebit intrare. Insuper et peccatorem necesse erit pertransire ignem, +semel, bis, dut ter iuxta iudicium Flaminis, quatenus per ignis acrimoniam +purgetur à tanti inquinatione peccati. + +Neminem hominum prohibent inter se habitare, sed indifferentèr receptant, +Iudæos, Christiános, Saracenos, et homines cuiuscúnque nationis, vel legis, +dicentes se satis putare suum ritum non ita securum ad salutem, nisi +quandóque; traherentur ad ritum magis salutarem, quem tamen determinate +nunc ignorant, imò multi de nobilibus sunt iam in Christianitate baptizati. + +Attamen qui illorum sunt curiales Imperatoris non vellent in palatio +publicari. + +Poenè oblitus eram, quod nunc hic dico notandum, quia dum ab extra +Imperium, quis veniens nuntius aut legatus cupit tradere proprijs manibus +literas Imperatori [Marginal note: Seu Gubernatorum.], vel deponere coram +illo mandata, non permittitur, donec prius in puris transeat liueas ad +venum ad minus regurn pro sui purgatione, ne quid forsitan afferat cuius +visu, vel odoratu seu tactu rex possit grauari. + +[Sidenote: Arma Tartarorum.] Porrò Tartari in præcincto expeditionis habent +singuli duos arcus, cum magna pluralitate teloram: Nam omnes sunt +sagittarij ad manum et cum rigida et longa lancea. Nobilis autem in equis +preciosè phaleratis ferunt gladios, ver spatas breues et latas, scindentes +pro vno latere, et in capitibus galeas, de corio cocto, non altas, sed ad +capitis formara depressas. + +Quicúnque de suis fugerit de prælio, ipso facto conseriptus est, vt +siquando inuentus fuerit occidatur. Si Castrum vel ciuitas obsessa se illis +reddere voluerit, nullam acceptant conditionem nisi cum morte omnium +inimicorum, vel si quis homo singularis se dederit victum nihilominus +ábsque vlla miseratione occidunt, detruncantes illi protinus aures, quas +postea coquentes, et in aceto (dum habuerint) ponentes mittunt inuicem ad +conuiuia pro extremo ferculo: [Sidenote: Tartari retro sagittantes.] dumque +ipsi in bellis arte fugam simulant, periculosum est eos insequi, quoniam +iaciunt sagittas à tergo, quibus equos et homines occidere norunt. Et +quando in prima acie comparant ad bellandum, mirabilitèr sese constringunt, +vt media pars numeri eoram vix credatur. + +Generalitèr noueritis, omnes Tartaros habere paruos oculos, et modicam vel +raram barbam: in proprijs locis raro inter se litigant, contendunt, aut +pugnant, timentes legum pergraues emendas. Et inuenitur ibi rarius +vespilio, latro, fur, homicida, iniurians, adulter, aut fornicarius, quia +tales criminatores inuestigatione sollicita requiruntur, et sine +redemptione aliqua perimuntur. + +Dum quis decumbit infirmus figitur lancea iuxta illum in terra, et cum +appropinquauerit morti, nullus remanet ìuxta ipsum, cum verò mortuus esse +scitur, confestim in campis, et cum lancea sepelitur. + + +The English Version. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, that the empire of this gret Chane is devyded +in 12 provynces; and every provynce hathe mo than 2000 cytees; and of +townes with outen nombre. This contree is fulle gret. For it hathe 12 +pryncypalle kynges, in 12 provynces. And every of tho kynges han many +kynges undre hem; and alle thei ben obeyssant to the gret Chane. And his +lond and his lordschipe durethe so ferre that a man may not gon from on hed +to another, nouther be see ne lond, the space of 7 zeer. And thorghe the +desertes of his lordschipe, there as men may fynde no townes, there ben +innes ordeyned be every iorneye, to resceyve bothe man and hors; in the +whiche thei schalle fynde plentee of vytaylle, and of alle thing, that hem +nedethe, for to go be the contree. + +And there is a marveylouse custom in that contree, (but is profitable) that +zif ony contrarious thing, that scholde ben preiudice or grevance to the +Emperour, in ony kynde, anon the Emperour hathe tydynges there of and fulle +knowleche in a day, thoughe it be 3 or 4 iorneys fro him or more. For his +ambassedours taken here dromedaries or hire hors, and thei priken in alle +that evere thei may toward on of the innes: and whan thei comen there, anon +thei blowen an horne; and anon thei of the in knowen wel y now that there +ben tydynges to warnen the Emperour of sum rebellyoun azenst him. And +thanne anon thei maken other men redy, in alle haste that thei may, to +beren lettres, and pryken in alle that evere thei may, tille thei come to +the other innes with here lettres: and thanne thei maken fressche men redy, +to pryke forthe with the lettres, toward the Emperour; whille that the +laste bryngere reste him, and bayte his dromedarie or his hors. And so fro +in to in, tille it come to the Emperour. And thus anon hathe he hasty +tydynges of ony thing, that berethe charge, be his corrours, that rennen so +hastyly, thorghe out alle the contree. And also whan the Emperour sendethe +his corrours hastyly, thorghe out his lond, everyche of hem hathe a large +thong fulle of smale belles; and whan thei neyghen nere to the innes of +other corroures, that ben also ordeyned be the iorneyes, thei ryngen here +belles, and anon the other corrours maken hem redy, and rennen here weye +unto another in: and thus rennethe on to other, fulle spedyly and swyftly, +till the Emperours entent be served, in alle haste. And theise currours ben +clept chydydo, aftre here langage, that is to seye, a messagere. + +Also whan the Emperour gothe from o contree to another, as I have told you +here before, and he passe thorghe cytees and townes, every man makethe a +fuyr before his dore, and puttethe there inne poudre of gode gommes, that +ben swete smellynge, for to make gode savour to the Emperour. And alle the +peple knelethe doun azenst him, and don him gret reverence. And there where +religyouse Cristene men dwellen, as thei don in many cytees in thei lond, +thei gon before him with processioun with cros and holy watre; and thei +seyngen, _Veni Creator, spiritus_, with an highe voys, and gon towardes +him. And whan he herethe hem, he commaundethe to his lordes to ryde besyde +him, that the religiouse men may come to him. And whan thei ben nyghe him, +with the cros, thanne he dothe a down his galaothe, that syt upon his hede, +in manere of a chapelet, that is made of gold and preciouse stone and grete +perles. And it is so ryche, that, men preysen it to the value of a roialme, +in that contre. And than he knelethe to the cros. And than the prelate of +the religiouse men seythe before him certeyn orisouns, and zevethe him a +blessynge with the cros: and he enclynethe to the blessynge fulle devoutly. +And thanne the prelate zevethe him sum maner frute, to the nombre of 9, in +a platere of sylver, with peres or apples or other manere frute. And he +takethe on; and than men zeven to the othere lordes, that ben aboute him. +For the custom is suche, that no straungere schalle come before him, but +zif he zeve hym sum manere thing, aftre the olde lawe, that seythe, _Nemo +accedat in conspectu meo vacuus_. And thanne the Emperour seythe to the +religious men, that thei withdrawe hem azen, that thei ne be hurt ne harmed +of the gret multytude of hors that comen behynde him. And also in the same +maner don the religious men, that dwellen there, to the Emperesses, that +passen by hem, and to his eldest sone; and to every of hem, thei presenten +frute. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, that the people, that he hathe so many hostes +offe, abouten hym and aboute his wyfes and his sone, thei dwelle not +contynuelle with him: but alle weys, whan him lykethe, thei ben sent fore; +and aftre whan thei han don, thei retournen to hire owne housholdes; saf +only thei that ben dwellynge with hym in houshold, for to serven him and +his wyfes and his sones, for to governen his houshold. And alle be it, that +the othere ben departed fro him, aftre that thei han perfourmed hire +servyse, zit there abydethe contynuelly with him in court, 50000 men at +horse, and 200000 men a fote; with outen mynstrelles, and tho that kepen +wylde bestes and dyverse briddes, of the whiche I have tolde zou the nombre +before. + +Undre the firmament, is not so gret a lord, ne so myghty, ne so riche, as +the gret Chane: nought Prestre Johan, that is Emperour of the highe Ynde, +ne the Sowdan of Babylone, ne the Emperour of Persye. Alle theise ne ben +not in comparisoun to the grete Chane; nouther of myght, ne of noblesse, ne +of ryaltee, ne of richesse: for in alle theise, he passethe alle erthely +princes. Wherfore it is gret harm, that he belevethe not feithfully in God. +And natheles he wil gladly here speke of God; and he suffrethe wel, that +Cristene men duelle in his lordschipe, and that men of his feythe ben made +Cristene men, zif thei wile, thorghe out alle his contree. For he +defendethe no man to holde no lawe, other than him lykethe. + +In that contree, sum man hathe an 100 wyfes, summe 60, mo, somme lesse. And +thei taken the nexte of hire kyn, to hire wyfes, saf only, that thei out +taken hire modres, hire doughtres, and hire sustres on the fadir syde, of +another womman, thei may wel take; and hire bretheres wyfes also aftre here +dethe; and here step modres also in the same wyse. + + +Of the Lawe and customs of the Tartarienes, duellynge in Chatay; and how + that men don, whan the Emperour schal dye, and how he schal be chosen. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXIII.] The folk of that contree usen alle longe clothes, +with outen furroures. And thei ben clothed with precious clothes of +Tartarye; and of clothes of gold. And here clothes ben slytt at the syde; +and thei ben festned with laces of silk. And thei clothen hem also with +pylches, and the hyde with outen. And thei usen nouther cappe ne hood. And +in the same maner as the men gon, the wommen gon; so that no man may unethe +knowe the men fro the wommen, saf only tho wommen, that ben maryed, that +beren the tokne upon hire hedes of a mannes foot, in signe that thei ben +undre mannes fote and undre subieccioun of man. And here wyfes ne dwelle +not to gydere but every of hem be hire self. And the husbonde may ligge +with whom of hem, that him lykethe. Everyche hathe his hous, bothe man and +womman. And here houses ben made rounde of staves; and it hathe a rounde +wyndowe aboven, that zevethe hem light, and also that servethe for +delyverance of smoke. And the helynge of here houses, and the wowes and the +dores ben alle of wode. + +And whan thei gon to werre, thei leiden hire houses with hem, upon +chariottes; as men don tentes or pavyllouns. And thei maken hire fuyr, in +the myddes of hire houses. And thei han gret multytude of alle maner of +bestes, saf only of swyn: for thei bryngen non forthe. And thei beleeven +wel, o God, that made and formede alle thinges. And natheles zit han thei +ydoles of gold and sylver, and of tree, and of clothe. And to tho ydoles, +thei offren alle weys hyre first mylk of hire bestes, and also of hire +metes, and of hire drynkes, before thei eten. And thei offren often tymes +hors and bestes. And the clepen the God of Kynde, Yroga. And hire Emperour +also, what name that evere behave, thei putten evermore therto Chane. And +whan I was there, hire Emperour had to name Thiaut; so that he was clept +Thiaut Chane. And his eldeste sone was clept Tossue. And whanne he schalle +ben emperour, he schalle ben clept Tossue Chane. And at that tyme, the +Emperour hadde 12 sones, with outen him; that were named, Cuncy, Ordii, +Chahaday, Buryn, Negu, Nocab, Cadu, Siban, Cuten, Balacy, Babylan and +Garegan, And of his 3 wyfes, the firste and the pryncypalle, that was +Prestre Johnes doughtre, hadde to name Serioche Chan; and the tother Borak +Chan; and the tother Karanke Chan. + +The folk of that contree begynnen alle hire thinges in the newe mone: and +thei worschipen moche the mone and the sonne, and often tyme knelen azenst +hem. And alle the folk of the contree ryden comounly with outen spores: but +thei beren alle weys a lytille whippe in hire hondes, for to chacen with +hire hors. And thei had gret conscience, and holden it for a gret synne, to +casten a knyf in the fuyr, and for to drawe flessche out of a pot with a +knyf, and for to smyte an hors with the handille of a whippe, or to smyte +an hors with a brydille, or to breke o bon with another, or for to caste +mylk or ony lykour, that men may drynke, upon the erthe, or for to take and +sle lytil children. And the moste synne, that ony man may do, is to pissen +in hire houses, that thei dwellen in. And who so that may be founden with +that synne, sykerly thei slen hym. And of everyche of theise synnes, it +behovethe hem to ben schryven of hire prestes, and to paye gret somme of +silver for hire penance. And it behovethe also, that the place, that men +han pissed in, be halewed azen; and elles dar no man entren there inne. And +whan thei han payed hire penance, men maken hem passen thorghe a fuyr or +thorghe 2, for to clensen hem of hire synnes. And also whan ony messangere +comethe and bryngethe lettres or ony present to the Emperour, it behovethe +him, that he with the thing that he bryngethe, passe thorghe 2 brennynge +fuyres, for to purgen hem, that he brynge no poysoun ne venym, ne no wykked +thing, that myght be grevance to the lord. And also, zif ony man or womman +be taken in avowtery or fornycacyoun, anon thei sleen him. Men of that +contree ben alle gode archeres, and schooten right welle, bothe men and +women, als wel on hors bak, prykynge, as on fote, rennynge. And the wommen +maken alle thinges and alle maner mysteres and craftes; as of clothes, +botes and other thinges; and thei dryven cartes, plowes and waynes and +chariottes; and thei maken houses and alle maner of mysteres, out taken +bowes and arwes and armures, that men maken. And alle the wommen weren +breech, as wel as men. Alle the folk of that contree ben fulle obeyssant to +hire sovereynes; ne thei fighten not ne chiden not, on with another. And +there ben nouther thefes ne robboures in that contree; and every man +worschipethe othere: but no man there dothe no reverence to no straungeres, +but zif thei ben grete princes. And thei eten houndes, lyounes, lyberdes, +mares and foles, asses, rattes and mees, and alle maner of bestes, grete +and smale; saf only swyn, and bestes that weren defended by the olde lawe. +And thei eaten alle the bestes, with outen and with inne, with outen +castynge awey of ony thing, saf only the filthe. And thei eten but litille +bred, but zif it be in courtes of grete lordes. And thei have not, in many +places, nouther pesen ne benes, ne non other potages, but the brothe of the +flessche. For littile ete thei ony thing, but flessche and the brothe. And +whan thei han eten, thei wypen hire hondes upon hire skirtes: for thei use +non naperye, ne towaylles, but zif it be before grete lordes: but the +common peple hathe none. And whan thei han eten, thei putten hire dissches +unwasschen in to the pot or cawdroun, with remenant of the flessche and of +the brothe, till thei wole eten azen. And the ryche men drynken mylk of +mares or of camaylles or of asses or of other bestes. And thei wil ben +lightly dronken of mylk, or of another drynk, that is made of hony and of +watre soden to gidre. For in that contree is nouther wyn ne ale. Thei lyven +fulle wrecched liche; and thei eten but ones in the day, and that but +lyttle, nouther in courtes ne in other places. And in soothe, o man allone +in this contree wil ete more in a day, than on of hem will ete in 3 dayes. +And zif ony straunge messagre come there to a lord, men maken him to ete +but ones a day, and that fulle litille. + +And whan thei werren, thei werren fulle wisely, and alle weys don here +besynes, to destroyen hire enemyes. Every man there berethe 2 bowes or 3, +and of arwes gret plentee, and a gret ax. And the gentyles han schorte +speres and large, and fulle trenchant on that o syde: and thei han plates +and helmes, made of quyrboylle; and hire hors covertoures of the same. And +who so fleethe fro the bataylle, thei sle him. And whan thei holden ony +sege abouten castelle or toun, that is walled and defensable, thei behoten +to hem that ben with inne, to don alle the profite and gode, that it is +marveylle to here: and thei graunten also to hem that ben with inne, alle +that thei wille asken hem. And aftre that thei ben zolden, anon thei sleen +hem alle, and kutten of hire eres, and sowcen hem in vynegre, and there of +thei maken gret servyse for lordes. Alle here lust and alle here +ymaginacioun, is for to putten alle londes undre hire subieccioun. And thei +seyn, that thei knowen wel be hire prophecyes, that thei schulle ben +overcomen by archieres, and be strengthe of hem: but they knowe not of what +nacioun, ne of what lawe thei schulle ben offe, that schulle overcomen hem. +And therfore thei suffren, that folk of alle lawes may peysibely duellen +amonges hem. + +Also whan thei wille make hire ydoles, or an ymage of ony of hire frendes, +for to have remembrance of hym, thei maken alle weys the ymage alle naked, +with outen any maner of clothinge. For thei seyn, that in gode love scholde +be no coverynge, that man scholde not love for the faire clothinge, ne for +the riche aray, but only for the body, suche as God hathe made it, and for +the gode vertues that the body is endowed with of nature; but only for fair +clothinge, that is not of kyndely nature. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, that it is gret drede for to pursue the +Tartarines, zif thei fleen in bataylle. For in fleynge, thei schooten +behynden hem, and sleen bothe men and hors. And whan thei wil fighte, thei +wille schokken hem to gidre in a plomp; that zif there be 20000 men, men +schalle not wenen, that there be scant 10000. And thei cone wel wynnen lond +of straungeres, but thei cone not kepen it. For thei han grettre lust to +lye in tentes with outen, than for to lye in castelle or in townes. And +thei preysen no thing the wytt of other naciouns. And amonges hem, oyle of +olyve is fulle dere: for thei holden it for fulle noble medicyne. And alle +the Tartarienes han smale eyen and litille of berd, and not thikke hered, +but schiere. And thei ben false and traytoures: and thei lasten noghte that +thei behoten. Thei ben fulle harde folk, and moche peyne and wo mow suffren +and disese, more than ony other folk: for thei ben taughte therto in hire +owne contree, of Zouthe: and therfore thei spenden, as who seythe, right +nought. + +And whan ony man schalle dye, men setter a spere besyde him: and whan he +drawethe towardes the dethe, every man fleethe out of the hous, tille he be +ded; and aftre that, thei buryen him in the feldes. + + +CAPVT. 39. + +De sepultura Imperatoris Grand Can, et creatione successoris. + +Imperator Grand Can postquam eius cognita fuerit defunctio defertur mox à +paucis viris in parco palatij, ad præuisum locum vbi debeat sepeliri. Et +nudato prius toto illo loco à graminibus cum cespite figitur ibi tentorium, +in quo velut in solio regali de ligno corpus defuncti residens collocatur, +paraturque mensa plena coram eo cibarijs præciosis, et potu de lacte +iumentorum. Instabulatur ibi et equa cum suo pullo, sed et ipse albus, +nobilitèr phaleratus, et onustatus certo pondere auri et argenti. Et est +totum Tentorij pauimentum de mundo stramine stratum. + +Tuncque effodiunt in circuitu fossam latam valdè, et profundam vt totum +tentorium cum omnibus contentis descendat in illam. Eoque facto ita +equalitèr terram planificantes adoperiunt graminibus, vt in omni tempore +locus sepulturæ non valeat apparere. Et quoniam ignorantiæ nubilo turpiter +excæcati putant in alio seculo homines delectationibus frui, dicunt quòd +tentorium erit ei pro hospitio, cibi ad edendum, lac ad potandum, equus ad +equitandum, aurum et argentum ad respiciendum, sed et equa lac sempèr +præstabit, et pullos equinos successiue generabit. + +Post has itaque Imperatoris defuncti miseras exequias, nullus omnino +audebit de ipso loqui coram vxoribus et filijs, et propinquis, sed nec +nominare, quia per hoc putarent derogari paci, et quieti illius, qua non +dubitant eum dominari, in maiori satis gloria Paradisi quam hic stetit. + +Igitur Imperatore Grand Can sepulto obliuioni tradito, conueniunt quà m citò +nobiles de septem tribubus prouinciæ Cathay, et cui Imperium ex +propinquitate competit, dicunt sic. + + Ecce volumus, ordinamus, atque precamur, vt sis noster Dominus et + Imperator. + +Qui respondet + + Si vultis me super vos, sicut et iuris mei est, imperare, oportebit + vos fore mihi obedientes tam ad mortem quà m ad vitam. + +Et respondentes dicunt. + + Nos faciemus quicquid praeceperitis. + +Túncque Imperator addit hæc verba: Ergo scitote, quod ex nunc verbum meum +acutum et scindens erit vt meus ensis: [Sidenote: i. cathedra.] Pergit +quóque sessum in suo Philtro nigro super pauimentum in conspectu throni +expanso, et cum ipso Philtro eleuatur ab omnibus, et infertur Imperij +solio, ac coronatur diademate præcedentis Imperatoris. + +De inde singuli principes, et singuæ ciuitates, oppida, et villæ per +vniuersum imperium mittunt ei munera iocalia, vasa, pannos, equos, +elephantes, aurum, argentum, et lapides preciosos, quorum, qualium, et +quantorum vix vel in numero haberi potest aestimatio. + + +CAPVT. 40. + +De multis regionibus Imperio Tartariae subiectis. + +Breuitèr et nunc intendo cursum describere aliquarum magnarum regionum et +Insularum Imperij Tartariæ. Et primò illas quæ descendunt à prouincia +Cathay per septentrionalem plagam, vsque ad fines Christianitatis Prussiae, +et Russiae. + +Ergò prouincia Cathay descendens in sui oriente à regno Tharsis iungitur ab +occidente regno Turquescen, in quo et sunt plurimae ciuitates, quarum +formosior dicitur Octopar. Ipsum autem Turquescen regnum iungitur ad +occidentem sui regno, seu Imperio. Persiae, et ad septentrionem regno +Corasinae, quod spaciosum este valde, habens versus orientem sui vltra +centum diaetas deserti: hoc regnum est multis bonis abundans, et appellatur +eius melior ciuitas etiam Corasine. + +Isti quoque regno iungitur in occidente versus partes nostras regnum +Commanorum, quod et similiter longum est, et latum, sed in paucis sui locis +inhabitatum: Nam in quibusdam est frigus nimium, in alijs nimius calor, et +in nonnullis nimia muscarum multitudo. + +De istis Commanis venit olim fugata quædam pluralitas populi vsque in +terram Ægypti quae ibidem succreta nunc ita inualuit, vt suppressis +indigenis videatur regnare: Nam et de seipsis constituerunt hunc, qui modo +est Soldanus, Melech Mandibron. Per Commanorum regnum decurrit Grandis +fluuius Echil, qui omni hyemali tempore in magna spissitudine gelatur; in +superiori quoque parte huius regni inter duo freta Caspiæ, et Oceani, mons +sublimis est valde Chocas. Nota quod à nostris partibus non possit vsque in +Indiam superiorem duci magnus exercitus per terras, nisi per tres +tantummodo transitus, quorum iste est vnus, qui tamen non valet transiri +nisi tempore glaciei, et hic appellatus est Lodekonc. + +Alter per Turquescen, et per Persiam, tamen ibi sunt deserta plurium +dietarum, in quibus nisi esset exercitus bene prouisus, posset perire. + +Tertius ad primos fines regni Commanorum, transfretando tamen mare vsque in +regnum Abchaz: principalis ciuitas Commanorum dicitur Sarach. + +Ab hoc regno versus partes nostras inuenitur regio Laiton quae est vltima +paganismi, iungitur iste finis terræ Christianitatitis regno Prussiæ, et +Russiæ. + +Post potestatem Imperij Tartariæ descendendo à prouincia Cathay in +Australem plagam venitur versus Persiam, Syriam, et Greciam. Versus terram +Christianorum possum aliqualiter in summa (quantum conuenit huic scripto) +connotare. Dixi supra iam prouinciam Cathay iungi regno Turquescen ad +occidentem, et illud quòque iungi regno seu Imperio Persiæ. Ad quod +sciendum, quamuis rex Persiæ habet etiam ab olim nomen Imperatoris; quia +(cum tenet aliquas terras sui Imperij ab Imperatore Tartarorum) necesse est +vt in tanto subiectus sit illi. + +Sunt autem in Persia duæ regiones: vna altæ Persiæ, quæ à regno Turquescen +descendens, iungitur ad occidentem sui fluuis Pyson. In ista habentur +renominatæ ciuitates, quarum meliores duæ dicuntur Bocura et Seonargant, +quam aliqui appellant Samarkand. Et altera Regio bassæ Persiæ, descendens à +flumine Pyson, qui ad sui occidentem iungiter regno Mediæ et terræ minoris +Armeniæ, et ad Aquilonem mari Caspio, et ad Austrum terræ minoris Indiæ. + +In hac bassa Persia tres principaliores ciuitates sunt Aessabor, Saphaon, +Sarmasaule. In terra autem maioris Armeniæ quondam habebantur quatuor regna +quæ nunc dicuntur subesse Imperio Persarum, habétque famam terræ nobilis, +et ad occidentem sui iungitur Regno Turciæ. + +Hec Armenia multas valdè bonas continet ciuitates, quarum famosior est +Taurisa. Regnum Mediæ quod subest Regi Persarum quamuis non latum est, +tamen longum est, et ad occidentem sui regno Chaldeæ coniunctum. In Media +meliores duæ ciuitates sunt, Seras, et Keremen. + +[Sidenote: Georgia. Abchas, alià s Alchaz.] Hinc ad occidentem sui, iuncta +est regio Georgiæ, quæ modo constat diuisa in duo regna: Nam pars superior, +quæ iungitur Mediæ, reseruauit sibi nomen Georgiæ, sed inferior pars +dicitur regnum Abchaz. Ambo hæc regna, et regis eorum, sunt de fide +Christiana, et homines ita deuoti vt ad minus semel in hebdomada +communicent sacramentis, iuxta ritum Græcorum confectis. Et quidem regnum +Georgiæ subiacet imperio Grand Can: sed Abchaz nunquam ab ipso Imperatore +Tartariæ, neque Persarum, neque Medorum domino subdi potuit, eo quòd +munitum est aquis et rupibus et alijs prouisionibus contra impugnationes +hostiles. + +[Sidenote: In parte regni Georgiæ sunt tenebrae.] Iuxta hoc regnum Abchaz +habetur vnum minum et mirabile, nam magnus est territorij locus dictus +Hamson, et continens in circuitu spacium viæ quatuor diætarum: videter +semper opertus tenebris densis vt nemo audeat illic intrare profundè, +quoniam si qui presumpserint, non sunt visi reuerti. Attamen fatentur +vicini sub illis se tenebris audisse nonnunquam clamores hominum, hinnitus, +mugitus, rugitus, et boatus pecudum, et bestiarum, sed et cantus gallorum, +vt per hæc et alia signa constet ibi habitare gentes: nam et fluuius +decurrens monstrat signa sæpè certissima in suo exitu: ignoratur tamen si +tenebræ per totum territorium sint eiusdem densitatis, an forte sint in +circuitu per aliquod spacium, et intrinsecus plus luminosum. + +Dicuntur autem tenebræ istæ olim per diuinum miraculum aduenisse. Saboere +enim Imperatore Persarum, circa annum Gratiæ ducentessimum quinquagessimum +in persecutione Christianorum tendente cum pleno exercitu per hunc locum, +et Christianis tyrannidem eius fugientibus, contigit ex improuiso eos ità +arctari, vt se effugere desperarent, quapropter statim ad orationis +refugium omnes se sternentes clamauerunt ad Christum auxiliatorem suum: Et +deus, qui pro puro corde Christianos ad se orantes semper exaudit, expleuit +illic literam vaticinij Isaiæ: quia ecce tenebræ operient terram et caligo +populos, monstrans per tenebram terrenam, quam eis superduxit, quas passuri +essent inimici nominis Christi tenebras infernales, indicansque per +temporalem vitam, quam sibi fidelibus conseruauit, eam quam possessuri sunt +viri Christiani vitam perpetuam, et coelestem. + +Itaque hoc regnum Abchaz ad occidentem sui iungitur regno Turciæ, quod in +longo et lato valdè extensum multas continet prouincias scilicet Iconiæ, +Cappadociæ, Sauræ, Brike, Besicon, Patan, et Gennoch; hij omnes Turci, cum +tota Syria et Arabia vsque ad Galliziam Hispaniæ, subsunt Imperatori +Babyloniæ Soldano, et sunt in singulis prouinciis et regionibus ciuitates +magnæ, ac multæ nimis. Consequentèr huic regno Turciæ ad Occidentem sui in +ciuitate Cathasa [Marginal note: Vel Sathata.] iungitur per mare Greciæ +superior pars potestatis Imperatoris Constantinopolitani, et quasi ad +Aquilonem contiguatur regno Syriæ: cuius vna prouincia est terra +promissionis, prout hoc satis dictum est suprà . Sunt et aliæ terre, et +Insulæ, et patriæ latæ, et spatiosæ, continentes in se multa regna, et +reges, et gentes diuersas, de quibus nunc per singula pertractare non est +consilij. + +Ad supradictam Chaldæam iungitur Mesopotamia, et minor Armenia, et velut ad +Austrum eius Æthiopia, Mauritania, Lybia alta et bassa, et Nubia. +[Sidenote: Extensio Imperij Grand Can.] Excepto ergò duntaxat districtu +Imperij Persiæ, et potestate Soldani, omnes sæpè pertractatæ terræ, +regiones, regna et Insulæ descendendo tam par Aquilonem, quam ad Austrum à +prouincia Cathay, vsque ad Christianitatem sunt de Imperio Tartariæ Grand +Can. [Sidenote: Distantia à Roma ad Cathayam per Institores.] Et notandum +de spacio distantiæ, quod institores de Roma, vel Venetia festinantes tam +per terras, quà m per mare, expendunt de tempore 11. menses, et quandoque +duodecim, priusquam in Cathay valeant peruenire. + +Hijs itaque visis describam saltem aliquas à prouincia Cathay in orientem +terras Imperij Tartarorum. [Sidenote: Cadilla Regio orientalior Cathay. +Angli nostri hanc bestiolam nuper viderunt in Persia.] Illic habetur regio +Cadilla spaciosa multum, simul et speciosa: crescunt namque in ea fructus +ad quantitatem magnorum Cawardorum, in quibus inuenitur vna bestiola, in +carne et sanguine ad formam agnelli absque lana, et manducatur totus +fructus cum bestiola. Sunt et alij plures diuersi fructus, quorum penes nos +non est respectus nec vsus. Nam et sunt ibi nonnullæ speciales vites +ferentes botros incredibiliter magnos, quorum vnum vix virilis vir valet in +hasta portare. + +Et deinde in meridiem per aliquas diætas, potest perueniri ad primas Caspiæ +alpes, quæ descendendo descendunt vsque ad Amazoniam, insulam mulierum, de +qua tractatum est. Inter has Alpes retinetur maxima multitudo Iudæorum +decem tribum Israel, per Dei voluntatem ita inclusa, vt in copiosa +numerositate non possint à nostra parte exire, quamuis aliqui pauci +nonnunquam sunt visi transisse. Haberent autem competentem exitum circa +insulam Amazoniæ, sed illum diligenter regina obseruat. + +[Sidenote: Bacchariæ Regnum vel Boghariæ.] Porrò de regione Cadilla in +orientem venitur ad regnum Backariae, in qua mali et multum crudeles +habitant homines, nec est securum itinerare per illam, quòd ad modicam +occasionem (si Deus non conseruaret) occiderent viatorem et manducarent. +[Sidenote: Arbor Lanifera.] Illic sunt arbores ferentes lanam velut ouium, +ex qua texunt pannos ad vestimenta. Hypocentauri sunt ibi pro media +superiori parte in forma humana, et pro inferiori figura equorum, seu +taurorum, venantes in terris, et piscantes in aquis quod comedunt, et super +omnia carnes hominum, quos capere possunt. [Sidenote: Gryphones, de quibus +Paulus Venetæ] Nec non et gryphi illic apparent pro media posteriori parte +in forma leonis, pro anteriori in forma aquilæ. Sed sciatis, corpus magni +gryphi maius esse octo leonibus de partibus istis. Nam postquam equum, +bouem vel hominem, etiam asinum occiderit, leuat et asportat pleno volatu: +tanquam cornua bouis aut vaccae sunt illi vngulæ, de quibus etiam fieri +solent ciphi ad bibendum, qui plurimùm reputantur preciosi. Fiunt quóque de +pennis alarum eius arcus rigidi, et fortes ad iaciendum missilia et +sagittas. Ad istius regni Baccariae extremitates in Orientum finitur terra +potestatis Grand Can: Et iungitur ei terra potestatis magni Imperatoris +Indiæ, qui semper vocatur Præsbyter Ioannes. Notandum, quoties per +prouincias totius Imperij Grand Can, quicquam accidit, quod Imperatorem non +oportet latere, confestim mittuntur per reges aut barones nuncij in +dromedarijs aut equis, qui celerrimè festinant ad certa hospitia, ad hoc +ipsum, velut ábsque numero per imperium instituta: Isque nuncius hospitio +appropinquans, et cornu resonans, dum auditor paratur minicius alter, qui +de manu suscipiens literas, per recentem dromedarium festinat ad aliud +hospitium, et sic in breui tempore perferuntur rumores ad curia aures. +[Sidenote: Cursores, Chidibo Tartaricè dicti.] Similique modo nuncij +pedites permutantur de hospitio in hospitium, vt citiùs percipiatur +negocium huius nuncij: appellantur sua lingua Chidibo. + +[Sidenote: Charita Mandeuilli.] Ergò per præmissa satis elucet magnam esse +nobilitatem, potestatem, reuerentiam, et dominationem Imperatoris Tartariæ +Grand Can de Cathay, et quòd nullus ab ista parte Imperator nec Persiæ, nec +Babylonia, nec Greciæ, sed nec Romæ est illi comparandus. Vndè et multum +miserandum est, quia ipse cùm toto Imperio nec est fide Catholica +illustratus, nec salutari lauachro regeneratus: et hoc oremus vt in breui +eueniat, per Iesum Christum Dominum nostrum. + +Explicit pars secunda huius opens. + + +The English Version. + +And whan the emperour dyethe, men setten him in a chayere in myddes the +place of his tent: and men setten a table before him clene, covered with a +clothe, and there upon flesche and dyverse vyaundes, and a cuppe fulle of +mares mylk: And men putten a mare besyde him, with hire fole, and an hors +saddled and brydeled; and thei leyn upon the hors gold and silver gret +quantytee: and thei putten abouten him gret plentee of stree: and than men +maken a gret pytt and a large; and with the tent and alle theise other +thinges, then putten him in erthe. And thei seyn, that whan he schalle come +in to another world, he schalle not ben with outen an hows, ne with owten +hors, ne with outen gold and sylver: and the mare schalle zeven him mylk, +and bryngen him forthe mo hors, tille he be wel stored in the tother world. +For thei trowen, that aftre hire dethe, thei schulle be etynge and +drynkynge in that other world, and solacynge hem with hire wifes, as thei +diden here. And aftre tyme, that the emperour is thus entered, no man +schalle be so hardy to speke of him before his frendes, And zit natheles +somtyme fallethe of manye, that thei maken hem to ben entered prevylly be +nyghte, in wylde places, and putten azen the grasse over the pytt for to +growe: or elle men coveren the pytt with gravelle and sond, that no man +schalle perceyve where, ne knowe where the pytt is, to that entent, that +never aftre, non of his frendes schulle han mynde ne rememberance of him. +And thanne thei seyn, that he is ravissht in to another world where he is a +grettre lord, than he was here. And thanne aftre the dethe of the emperour, +the 7 lynages assemblen hem to gidere, and chesen his eldest sone, or the +nexte aftre him, of his blood: and thus thei seye to him; wee wolen and wee +preyen and ordeynen, that zee ben oure lord and oure emperour. And thanne +he answerethe, zif yee wile, that I regne over zou, as lord, do eyeryche of +zou, that I schalle commanden him, outher to abyde or to go; and whom +soever that I commaunde to ben slayn, that anon he be slayn. And thei +answeren alle with o voys, what so evere zee commanden, it schalle be don. +Thanne seythe the emperour, now undirstondethe wel, that my woord from hens +forthe, is scharp and bytynge as a swerd. After men setten him upon a blak +stede, and so men bryngen him to a cheyere fulle richely arrayed, and there +thei crownen hym. And thanne alle the cytees and gode townes senden hym +ryche presentes; so that at that iourneye, he schalle have more than 60 +chariottes charged with gold and sylver, with outen jewelles of gold and +precyouse stones, that lordes zeven hym, that ben withouten estymacioun: +and with outen hors and clothes of gold and of Camakaas and Tartarynes, +that ben with outen nombre. + + +Of the Roialme of Thurse and the Londes and Kyngdomes towardes the + Septentrionale parties, in comynge down from the Lond of Cathay. + +This lond of Cathay is in Asye the depe. And aftre, on this half, is +Asyetthe more. The kyngdom of Cathay marchethe toward the west, unto the +kyngdom of Tharse; the whiche was on of the kinges, that cam to presente +our Lord in Betheleem. And thei that ben of the lynage of that kyng, arn +somme Cristene. In Tharse, thei eten no flessche, ne thei drynken no wyn. +And on this half, towardes the west, is the kyngdom of Turquesten, that +strecchethe him toward the west, to the kyngdom of Persie; and toward the +Septrentionalle, to the kyngdom of Chorasme. In the contre of Turquesten, +ben but fewe gode cytees: but the beste cytee of that lond highte Octorar. +There ben grete pastures; but fewe Coornes; and therfore, for the most +partie, thei ben alle herdemen: and thei lyzn in tentes, and thei drynken a +maner ale, made of hony. + +And aftre, on this half, is the kyngdom of Chorasme, that is a gode lond +and a plentevous, with outen wyn. And it hathe a desert toward the est, +that lastethe more than an 100 iourneyes. And the beste cytee of that +contree is clept Chorasme. And of that cytee, berethe the contree his name. +The folk of that contree ben hardy werryoures. And on this half is the +kyngdom of Comanye, where of the Comayns that dwelleden in Grece, somtyme +weren chaced out. This is on of the grettest kyngdomes of the world: but it +is not alle enhabyted. For at on of the parties, there is so gret cold, +that no man may dwelle there: and in another partie, there is so grete +hete, that no man may endure it. And also there ben so many flyes, that no +man may knowe on what syde he may turne him. In that contree is but lytille +arberye, ne trees that beren frute, ne othere. Thei lyzn in tentes. And +thei brenen the dong of bestes for defaute of wode. + +This kyngdom descendeth on this half toward us, and toward Pruysse, and +toward Rossye. And thorghe that contree rennethe the ryvere of Ethille, +that is on of the grettest ryveres of the world. And it fresethe so +strongly alle zeres, that many tymes men han foughten upon the Ise with +grete hostes, bothe parties on fote, and hire hors voyded for the tyme: and +what on hors and on fote, mo than 200000 persones on every syde. And +betweene that ryvere and the grete see ocean, that thei clepen the see +maure, lyzn alle theise Roialmes. And toward the hede benethe in that +Roialme, is the mount Chotaz, that is the hiest mount of the world: and it +is betwene the see Maure and the see Caspy. There is fulle streyt and +dangerous passage, for to go toward Ynde. And therfore Kyng Alysandre leet +make there a strong cytee, that men clepen Alizandre, for to kepe the +contree, that no man scholde passe with outen his leve. And now men clepen +that cytee, the Zate of Helle. And the princypalle cytee of Comenye is +clept Sarak, that is on of the 3 weyes for to go in to Ynde: but be the +weye, ne may not passe no gret multytude of peple, but zif it be in wyntre. +And that passage men clepen the Derbent. The tother weye is for to go fro +the citee of Turquesten, be Persie: and be that weye, ben manye iourneyes +be desert. And the thridde weye is that comethe fro Comanye, and than to go +be the grete see and be the kyngdom of Abchaz. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, that alle theise kyngdomes and alle theise +londes aboveseyd, unto Pruysse and to Rossye, ben alle obeyssant to the +grete Chane of Cathay; and many othere contrees, that marchen to other +costes. Wherfore his powere and his lordschipe is fulle gret, and fulle +myghty. + + +Of the Emperour of Persye, and of the lond of darknesse and of other + Kyngdomes, that belongen to the grete Chane of Cathay, and other Londes + of his, unto the See of Greece. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXV.] Now sithe I have devysed zou the londes and the +kyngdoms toward the parties septentrionales, in comynge down from the lond +of Cathay, unto the londes of the Cristene, towardes Pruysse and Rossye; +now schalle I devyse zou of other londes and kyngdomes, comynge doun be +other costes, toward the right syde, unto the see of Grece, toward the lond +of Cristene men: and therfore that, aftre Ynde and aftre Cathay, the +Emperour of Persie is the gretteste lord. Therfore I schalle telle zou of +the kyngdom of Persie. First, where he hathe 2 kyngdomes; the firste +kyngdom begynnethe toward the est, toward the kyngdom of Turquesten, and it +strecchethe toward the west, unto the ryyere of Phison, that is on of the 4 +ryveres, that comen out of paradys. And on another syde, it strecchethe +toward the septemtrion, unto the see of Caspye: and also toward the southe, +unto the desert of Ynde. And this contree is gode and pleyn and fulle of +peple. And there ben manye gode cytees. But the 2 princypalle cytees ben +theise, Boyturra and Seornergant, that sum men clepen Sormagant. The tother +kyngdom of Persie strecchethe toward the ryvere of Phison, and the parties +of the west, unto the kyngdom of Mede: and fro the grete Armenye, and +toward the septemtrion, to the see of Caspie; and toward the southe, to the +land of Ynde. That is also a gode lond and a plentefous; and it hath 3 +grete princypalle cytees, Messabor, Caphon and Sarmassane. + +And thanne aftre is Armenye, in the which weren wont to ben 4 kyngdomes: +that is a noble contree, and fulle of godes. And it begyinnethe at Persie, +and strecchethe toward the west in lengthe, unto Turkye. And in largenesse, +it durethe to the cytee of Alizandre, that now is clept the Zate of Helle, +that I spak offe beforn, undre the kyngdom of Mede. In this Armenye ben +fulle manye gode cytees: but Tanrizo is most of name. + +Aftre this, is the kyngdom of Mede, that is fulle long: but it is not fulle +large, that begynnethe toward the est, to the land of Persie, and to Ynde +the lesse. And it strecchethe toward the west, toward the kyngdom of +Caldee, and toward the septemtrion, descendynge toward the litille Armenye. +In that kyngdom of Medee, ther ben many grere hilles, and litille of pleyn +erthe. There duellen Sarazines, and another maner of folk, that men clepen +Cordynes. The beste 2 cytees of that kyngdom, ben Sarras and Karemen. + +Aftre that, is the kyngdom of George, that begynnethe toward the est; to +the gret mountayne, that is clept Abzor; where that duellen many dyverse +folk of dyverse naciouns. And men clepen the contree Alamo. This kyngdom +strecchethe him towardes Turkye, and toward the grete see: and toward the +south, it marchethe to the grete Armenye. And there ben 2 kyngomes in that +contree; that on is the kyngdom of Georgie, and that other is the kyngdom +of Abcaz. And alle weys in that contree ben 2 kynges, and thei ben bothe +Cristene: but the Kyng of Georgie is in subieccioun to the grete Chane. And +the King of Abcaz hathe the more strong contree: and he alle weyes +vigerously defendethe his contree; azenst alle tho that assaylen him; so +that no man may make him in subieccioun to no man. In that kyngdom of Abcaz +is a gret marvaylle. For a provynce of the contree, that hathe wel in +circuyt 3 iorneyes, that men clepen Hanyson, is alle covered with +derknesse, with outen ony brightnesse or light; so that no man may see ne +here, ne no man dar entren in to hem. And natheles, thei of the contree +seyn, that som tyme men heren voys of folk, and hors nyzenge, and cokkes +crowynge. And men witen wel, that men duellen there: but thei knowe not +what men. And thei seyn, that the derknesse befelle be myracle of God. For +a cursed Emperour of Persie, that highte Saures, pursuede alle Cristene +men, to destroye hem, and to compelle hem to make sacrifise to his ydoles; +and rood with grete host, in alle that ever he myghte, for to confounde the +Cristene men. And thanne in that contree, dwellen manye gode Cristene men, +the whiche that laften hire godes, and wolde han fled in to Grece: and whan +they weren in a playn, that highte Megon, anon this cursed emperour mett +with hem, with his hoost, for to have slayn hem, and hewen hem to peces. +And anon the Cristene men kneleden to the grounde, and made hire preyeres +to God to sokoure hem. And anon a gret thikke clowde cam, and covered the +emperour and alle his hoost: and so thei enduren in that manere, that thei +ne mowe not gon out, on no syde; and so schulle thei ever more abyden in +derknesse, tille the day of dome, be the myracle of God. And thanne the +Cristene men wenten, where hem lykede best, at hire own plesance, with +outen lettynge of ony creature; and hire enemyes enclosed and confounded in +derknesse, with outen ony strok. Wherfore we may wel seye, with David, _A +Domino factum est istud; et est mirable in oculis nostris_. And that was a +gret myracle, that God made for hem. Wherfore methinkethe, that Cristene +men scholden ben more devoute, to serven oure Lord God, than ony other men +of ony other secte. For with outen ony drede, ne were cursednesse and synne +of Cristene men, thei scholden be lordes of alle the world. For the banere +of Jesu Crist is alle weys displayed, and redy on alle sydes, to the help +of his trewe lovynge servauntes: in so moche, that o gode Cristene man, in +gode beleeve, scholde overcomen and out chacen a 1000 cursed mysbeleevynge +men: as David seyth in the Psautere, _Quoniam persequebatur unus mille, et +duo fugarent decem milia_. Et, _Cadent a latere tuo mille, et decem milia a +dextris tuis_. And how that it myghte ben, that on scholde chacen a 1000, +David himself seythe, folewynge, _Quia manus Domini fecit hæc omnia_. And +oure Lord himself seythe, be the prophetes mouth, _Si in viis meis +ambulaveritis, super tribulantes vos misissem manum meam_. So that wee may +seen apertely, that zif wee wil be gode men, non enemye ne may not enduren +azenst us. Also zee schulle undirstonde, that out of that lond of +derknesse, gothe out a gret ryvere, that schewethe wel, that there ben folk +dwellynge, be many redy tokenes: but no man dar not entre in to it. + +And wytethe well, that in the kyngdoms of Georgie, of Abchaz and of the +litile Armenye, ben gode Cristene men and devoute. For thei schryven hem +and howsele hem evermore ones or twyes in the woke. And there ben many of +hem, that howsele hem every day: and so do wee not on this half; alle be it +that Seynt Poul commandethe it, seyenge, _Omnibus diebus dominicis ad +communicandum hortor_. Thei kepen that commandement: but wee ne kepen it +not. + +Also aftre, on this half, is Turkye, that marchethe to the gret Armenye. +And there ben many provynces, as Capadoche, Saure, Brique, Quesiton, Pytan +and Gemethe. And in everyche of theise ben many gode cytees. This Turkye +strecchethe unto the cytee of Sachala, that sittethe upon the see of Grece; +and so it marchethe to Syrie. Syrie is a gret contree and a gode, as I have +told zou before. And also it hathe, aboven toward Ynde, the kyngdom of +Caldee, that strecchethe fro the mountaynes of Calde, toward the est, unto +the cytee of Nynyvee, that sittethe upon the ryvere of Tygre: and in +largenesse, it begynnethe toward the northe, to the cytee of Maraga; and it +strecchethe toward the southe, unto the see occean. In Caldee is a pleyn +contree, and fewe hilles and few ryveres. + +Aftre is the kyngdom of Mesopotayme, that begynnethe toward the est, to the +flom of Tygre, unto a cytee that is clept Moselle: and it strecchethe +toward the west, to the flom of Eufrate, unto a cytee that is clept Roianz: +and in lengthe it gothe to the mount of Armenye, unto the desert of Ynde +the lesse. This is a gode contree and a pleyn; but it hathe fewe ryveres. +It hathe but 2 mountaynes in that contree: of the whiche, on highte Symar, +and that other Lyson. And this lond marchethe to the kyngdom of Caldee. + +Zit there is, toward the parties meridionales, many contrees and many +regyouns; as the lond of Ethiope, that marchethe, toward the est, to the +grete desertes; toward the west, to the kyngdom of Nubye; toward the +southe, to the kyngdom of Moretane; and toward the north to the Rede See. +Aftre is Moretane, that durethe fro the mountaynes of Ethiope, unto Lybie +the hize. And that contree lyzth a long fro the see ocean, toward the +southe; and toward the northe, it marchethe to Nubye, and to the highe +Lybye. (Theise men of Nubye ben Cristene.) And it marchethe fro the londes +aboveseyd to the desertes of Egypt. And that is the Egypt, that I have +spoken of before. And aftre is Libye the hye, and Lybye the lowe, that +descendethe down lowe, toward the grete see of Spayne. In the whiche +contree ben many kyngdomes and many dyverse folk. Now I have devysed zou +many contrees, on this half the kyngdom of Cathay: of the whiche, many ben +obeyssant to the grete Chane. + + +Of the Contrees and Yles, that ben bezonde the Lond of Cathay; and of the + Frutes there; and of 22 Kynges enclosed within the Mountaynes. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXVI.] + +Now schalle I seye zou sewyngly of contrees and yles, that ben bezonde the +contrees that I have spoken of. Wherfore I seye zou, in passynge be the +lond of Cathaye, toward the highe Ynde, and toward Bacharye, men passen be +a kyngdom, that men clepen Caldilhe; that is a fulle fair contree. And +there growethe a maner of fruyt, as thoughe it weren gowrdes: and whan thei +ben rype, men kutten hem a to, and men fynden with inne a lytylle best, in +flessche, in bon and blode, as though it were a lytylle lomb, with outen +wolle. And men eten bothe the frut and the best: and that is a gret +marveylle. Of that frute I have eten; alle thoughe it were wondirfulle: but +that I knowe wel, that God is marveyllous in his werkes. And natheles I +told hem, of als gret a marveylle to hem, that is amonges us: and that was +of the Bernakes. For I tolde hem, that in oure contree weren trees, that +beren a fruyt, that becomen briddes fleeynge: and tho that fellen in the +water, lyven; and thei that fallen on the erthe, dyen anon: and thei ben +right gode to mannes mete. And here of had thei als gret marvaylle, that +summe of hem trowed, it were an impossible thing to be. [Footnote: The +Barnacle-bearing trees are said to have grown in Ireland.] In that contree +ben longe apples of gode savour; where of ben mo than 100 in a clustre, and +als manye in another; and thei han gret longe leves and large, of 2 fote +long or more. And in that contree, and in other contrees there abouten, +growen many trees, that beren clowe gylofres and notemuges, and grete notes +of Ynde and of canelle and of many other spices. And there ben vynes, that +beren so grete grapes, that a strong man scholde have y now to done, for to +bere o clustre with alle the grapes. In that same regioun ben the +mountaynes of Caspye, that men clepen Uber in the contree. Betwene the +mountaynes, the Jewes of 10 lynages ben enclosed, that men clepen Gothe and +Magothe: and thei mowe not gon out on no syde. There weren enclosed 22 +kynges with hire peple, that duelleden betwene the mountaynes of Sythye. +There Kyng Alisandre chacede hem betwene tho mountaynes; and there he +thoughte for to enclose hem thorghe werk of his men. But whan he saughe, +that he myghte not don it, ne bryng it to an ende, he preyed to God of +Nature, that he wolde parforme that that he had begonne. And alle were it +so, that he was a Payneme and not worthi to ben herd, zit God of his grace +closed the mountaynes to gydre: so that thei dwellen there, alle faste y +lokked and enclosed with highe mountaynes alle aboute, saf only on o syde; +and on that syde is the see of Caspye. Now may sum men asken, Sithe that +the see is on that o syde, wherfore go thei not out on the see syde, for to +go where that hem lykethe? But to this question, I schal answere, That see +of Caspye gothe out be londe, undre the mountaynes, and rennethe be the +desert at o syde of the contree; and aftre it strecchethe unto the endes of +Persie. And alle thoughe it be clept a see, it is no see, ne it touchethe +to non other see; but it is a lake, the grettest of the world. And thoughe +thei wolden putten hem in to that see, thei ne wysten never, where that +thei scholde arryven. And also thei conen no langage, but only hire owne, +that no man knowethe but thei: and therfore mowe thei not gon out. And also +zee schulle undirstond, that the Jewes han no propre lond of hire owne for +to dwellen inne, in alle the world, but only that lond betwene the +mountaynes. And zit thei zelden tribute for that lond to the Queen of +Amazoine, the whiche makethe hem to ben kept in cloos fulle diligently, +that thei schalle not gon out on no syde, but be the cost of hire lond. For +hire lond marchethe to tho mountaynes. And often it hathe befallen, that +summe of the Jewes han gon up the mountaynes, and avaled down to the +valeyes: but gret nombre of folk ne may not do so. For the mountaynes ben +so hye and so streghte up, that thei moste abyde there, maugre hire myghte. +For thei mowe not gon out, but be a littille issue, that was made be +strengthe of men; and it lastethe wel a 4 gret myle. And aftre, is there +zit a lond alle desert, where men may fynde no watre, ne for dyggynge, ne +for non other thing. Wherfore men may not dwellen in that place: so it is +fulle of dragounes, of serpentes and of other venymous bestes, that no man +dar not passe, but zif it be strong wyntre. And that streyt passage, men +clepen in that contree, Clyron. And that is the passage, that the Queen of +Amazoine makethe to ben kept. And thoghe it happene, sum of hem, be +fortune, to gon out; thei conen no maner of langage but Ebrow: so that thei +can not speke to the peple. And zit natheles, men seyn, thei schalle gon +out in the tyme of Antecrist, and that thei schulle maken gret slaughtre of +Cristene men. And therfore alle the Jewes, that dwellen in alle londes, +lernen alle weys to speken Ebrew, in hope that whan the other Jewes schulle +gon out, that thei may undirstonden hire speche, and to leden hem in to +Cristendom, for to destroye the Cristene peple. For the Jewes seyn, that +they knowen wel, be hire Prophecyes, that thei of Caspye schulle been undre +hire subieccioun, als longe as they had ben in subieccioun of hem. And zif +that zee wil wyte, how that thei schulle fynden hire Weye, aftre that I +have herd seye, I schalle telle zou. In the time of Antecrist, a fox +schalle make there his trayne, and mynen an hole, where Kyng Alisandre leet +make the Zates: and so longe he schalle mynen and perce the erthe, till +that he schalle passe thorghe, towardes that folk. And whan thei seen the +fox thei schulle have gret marveylle of him, be cause that thei saughe +never suche a best. For of alle other bestes, thei han enclosed amonges +hem, saf only the fox. And thanne thei schullen chacen him and pursuen him +so streyte, tille that he come to the same place, that he cam fro. And +thanne thei schullen dyggen and mynen so strongly, tille that thei fynden +the zates, that Kyng Alisandre leet make of grete stones and passynge huge, +wel symented and made stronge for the maystrie. And tho zates thei schulle +breken, and so gon out, be fyndynge of that issue. + +Fro that lond, gon men toward the lond of Bacharie, where ben fulle +cruelle. In that lond ben trees, that beren wolle, as thoghe it were of +scheep; where of men maken clothes, and alle thing that may ben made of +wolle. In that contree ben many Ipotaynes, that dwellen somtyme in the +watre, and somtyme on the lond: and thei ben half man and half hors, as I +have seyd before: and thei eten men, whan thei may take hem. And there ben +ryveres of watres, that ben fulle byttere, three sythes more than is the +watir of the see. In that contree ben many Griffounes, more plentee than in +ony other contree. Sum men seyn, that thei han the body upward, as an +eagle, and benethe as a Lyoun: and treuly thei seyn sothe, that thei ben of +that schapp. But o griffoun hathe the body more gret and is more strong +thanne 8 lyouns, of suche lyouns as ben o this half; and more gret and +strongere, than an 100 egles, suche as we han amonges us. For o griffoun +there will bere, fleynge to his neste, a gret hors, or 2 oxen zoked to +gidere, as thei gon at the plowghe. For he hathe his talouns so longe and +so large and grete, upon his feet, as thoughe thei weren hornes of grete +oxen or of bugles or of Kyzn; so that men maken cuppes of hem, to drynken +of: and of hire ribbes and of the pennes and of hire wenges, men maken +bowes fulle stronge, to schote with arwes and quarelle. From thens gon men, +be many iourneyes, thorghe the lond of Prestre John, the grete Emperour of +Ynde. And men clepen his Roialme, the Yle of Pentexoire, + + +END OF PART II. + + + +MANDEVILLE'S VOYAGES. + +PART III. + + +Tertia pars. + +CAPVT. 41. + +De magnificentia Imperatoris Indiæ et preciositate Palatij. + +[Sidenote: Seu Pentoxoria Ciuitas Nyse] Cum in præcedentibus Imperator +Indiæ dictus sit magnus, restat de illius magnificentia aliquid poni hoc +loco: cuius vtique gloria, nobilitas, et potestas, dici non habetur minor, +est tamen in aliquibus satis maior, quia omne æquale non est idem cum illo +cui æquatur: itáque à finibus regni Bachariæ supradicti vbi contiguatur +Imperio Indiæ, eundo per multas diætas intratur in Pentoxyriæ quod est +magnæ latitudinis, et abundantiæ in multis bonis: huius nominatior ciuitas, +dicitur Nyse, et in ea habet Imperator palatium Imperiale, in quo residet +dum sibi placet. Imperator iste semper vocitatus est Præsbyter Ioannes, +cuius nominis causam audieram quandoque non veram: sed in illis partibus +accepi rationem indubitatam, quam breuiter hîc enarro. [Sidenote: Narratio +de rebus gestis Ogeri Ducis Daniæ.] Circa annum ab incarnatione Domini +octingentessimum, dux Ogerus de Danemarchia, cum quindecim cognationis suæ +baronibus, et armatis viginti milibus transiuit mare Greciæ, et fauente +sibi Deo conquisiuit Christianitati per multa prælia pené omnes terras, +regiones, et insulas, quas esse de potestate Grand Can prædixi, nec non et +omnes, quæ sunt de potestate Imperij huius Imperatoris Indiæ. Eratque inter +Barones vnus denominatus Ioannes filius Goudebucf, regis Frisonum: qui +dictus Ioannes Deo deuotus fuit, et dum licuit Ecclesiarum limina iniuit, +vnde et barones ei dabant quasi per iocum Præsbyter Ioannes vocabulum. +[Sidenote: Vndè Presbyter Ioannis sit dictus. 4000. Insulæ.] Dum ergo +Ogerus dictas regiones expugnatas diuideret in hijs quindecim suis +cognatis, et quemlibet eorum in suo loco constitueret regem, quatenus +Christiana religio in illa orbis superficie semper stabilis permaneret, +tradidit isti Præsbytero Ioanni superiorem Indiam, cum 4000. insulis, +regionibus, et ipsum præfecit Imperatorem super reliquos cognatos, vt ei +certa tributa impenderent, et in omnibus obedirent, átque ex tunc omnes +successores Indiæ sunt vocati Præsbyter Ioannes et vsque in hodiernum +tempus boni manserunt Christiani, et religionis æmulatores. Interim cum +causa matrimoniorum aut procurationis filiorum dispersa est primi Imperij +integritas, et multæ de insulis conuersæ vel potius peruersæ retrocesserunt +ad vetustum squalorem paganismi primi. Nota. Recedens à Cambalu versus +orientem post 50. dietas ad terram Præsbyteri Ioannes, principalis ciuitas +terræ vocatur Cosan, satis parua sicut Vincentia: habet etiam sub se multas +alias ciuitates. Ex pacto semper habet in vxorem vnam de filiabus Grand +Can. + +Per multas peruenitur ad prouinciam Casan, quæ est secunda melior de mundo, +vbi subtilior est, habet dietas 50. longior, 60. et est vna de duodecim +partibus Imperij Grand Can. Odericus. Vide infra capitulo 49. de Cassan, et +de Epulone. Deinde venitur in Thebeth prouinciam, quæ India est confinis. +Itaque Rex et Imperator iste tenet spatiosissimum Imperium plenum valdè +multis Regionibus et Insulis amplis, diuisum inter quatuor flumina magna de +Paradiso terrestri descendentia, Pyson, Gyon, Tygrim, et Euphratem. Nam +vltra fines orientales eius Imperij, et terrestram Paradisum, nullus +hominum habitat vel domitatur. + +Præterea imperat multis alijs regionibus et insulis quæ distinguntur per +brachia maris Oceani, et in quibus singulis continetur grandis numerositas +ciuitatum ac villarum, et multitudo innumera populorum præ abundantia, et +præciositate omnium terrenorum bonorum. + +Imperium Indiæ habetur famosum per vniuersum orbem. Sed et famosius +haberetur si mercatores mundi communitèr possint et auderent adire sicut +Cathay, Nostratibus enim perrarus est illic accessus, tam præ +longinquitate, quà m præ marinis periculis. Nam exceptis alijs sunt ibi +quamplures Adamantini colles, ad oram maris, et intra mare, qui sua virtute +attrahunt sibi naues ferrum continentes. Quoniam et mihi nauiganti +monstrabatur per nautas à remotis quasi paruula Insula in mari, quam +asserebant totalitèr ab antiquis temporibus paulatim ibi cumulatam de +nauibus per Adamantes retentis. + +[Sidenote: Latitudo Imperij Præsbyteri Ioannis est 4. mensium iter.] +Estimatur autem latitudo huius Imperij per dietas quatuor mensium, sed +longitudini non datur estimatio, eo quòd tenditur vsque Paradisum vbi +nullus accedit. + +Distinctum est Imperium per duodecim prouincias, quibus totidem præsunt +reges principales seu prouinciales, et quorum singuli habent sub se Reges, +Duces, Marchiones, et Barones, praestantes atque reddentes Praesbytero +Ioanni promptam obedientiam, et certa tributa. Saepius et communitèr tenet +Sedem Imperator in palatio vrbis Imperialis Suse. Hoc autem Palatium tale +et tantum est, vt per me non credatur debite estimandum. Istud tamen dico +audentèr in summa, quòd grandius, nobilius, preciosius, et placidius est, +in auro, gemmis, structuris, et schemate supra descripto palatio Grand Can +in Caydo. + +Et ex speciali sciatis, istius palatij principales portas esse de +Sardonico, vndìque in ebore circumcluso: sed et transuersæ lineæ sunt omnes +Eburneæ, aularum et cubiculorum fenestræ christallinæ. Mensarum quaedam +Smaragdinæ, aliquæ Haematistinæ, caeterorumque lapidum preciosorum per +aurum sibimet coniunctorum. Et nonnullæ in toto aureæ vel gemmunculis +disseminatæ, et vnaquaeque de mensis cum stabilimento proprij generis. De +throni quoque preciositate, quia meæ demonstrationis excellit modum, +solummodo dico, singulos ascensionis gradus esse singulorum lapidum +preciosorum: Primum onychis, secundum christallai, tertium iaspidis, +quartum haematisti, quintum sardij, sextum cornelij. Et septimus qui est +sub sedentis Imperatoris pedibus, ipse est, chrysolitus, omnes circumfusi, +et inclusoria arte formati, auro splendida relucentes. Sed et ambo throni +reclinatoria ex smaragdis auro combinatis, eoque distincto nobilissimis +granis, et gemmis: cuncti pilarij in camera Regis dormitoria consistunt de +auro fuluo, disseminati baccis, et quampluribus carbunculorum rubetis, +totum de nocte habitaculum illustrantibus. + +Et nihilominus in ea christallina lampas plena balsamo pistico sed ardens +et lucens, tam pro augendo lumine, quà m pro corrigendo aere, tamen etiam +pro ministrando optimo odore. + +Forma lecti Imperatoris compacta est de puris et nobilissimis Saphyris, +conclusi vtique aureis vel eburneis ligaturis, vt virtute lapidum capiat +suauem somnum, motusque carnis inhonesti stimuli, in eo refrenentur. +Nunquam enim iungitur mulieri nisi soli coniugi propriæ, sed nec illi nisi +quatuor quindenis anni videlicet in capite hyemis, veris, æstatis, et +autumni causa sobolis generandæ. + +Vtque breuitèr transeam de multa huius palatij nobilitate, mirabile hoc +solummodò praemissis super addo. Quia circa medium illius in summo apice +turris maioris, duo sunt nodi seu pomella de decoctissimi auri metallo miræ +magnitudinis, et serenæ resplendentiæ, et in ipsis formati duo carbunculi +grandes, et lati, sua virtute tenebras effugantes, et velut splendorem +plenilunij nocturno tempore mentientes. + + +The English Version. + +Of the Ryalle estate of Prestre John; and of a riche man, that made a + marveyllous Castelle, and cleped it Paradys; and of his Sotyltee. + +[Sidenote: Chap. XXVII.] This Emperour Prestre John holt fulle gret lond, +and hathe many fulle noble cytees and gode townes in his royalme, and many +grete dyvene yles ond large. For alle the contree of Ynde is devysed in +yles, for the grete flodes, that comen from Paradys, that departen alle the +lond in many parties. And also in the see, he hathe fulle manye yles. And +the beste cytee in the yle of Pentexoire is Nyse, that is a fulle ryalle +cytee and a noble, and fulle riche. This Prestre John hathe undre him many +kynges and many yles and many dyverse folk of dyverse condiciouns. And this +lond is fulle gode and ryche; but not so riche as is the lond of the grete +Chane. For the marchauntes come not thidre so comounly, for to bye +marchandises, as thei don in the lond of the gret Chane: for it is to fer +to travaylle to. And on that other partie, in the yle of Cathay, men fynden +alle maner thing, that is nede to man; clothes of gold, of silk, and +spycerie. And therfore, alle be it that men han grettre chep in the yle of +Prestre John, natheles men dreden the longe wey and the grete periles in +the see, in tho parties. For in many places of the see ben grete roches of +stones of the adamant, that of his propre nature drawethe iren to him. And +therfore there passen no schippes, that han outher bondes or nayles of iren +with in hem: and zif there do, anon the roches of the adamantes drawen hem +to hem, that never thei may go thens. I my self have seen o ferrom in that +see, as thoughe it hadde ben a gret yle fulle of trees and buscaylle, fulle +of thornes and breres, gret plentee. And the schipmen tolde us, that alle +that was of schippes, that weren drawen thidre be the adamauntes, for the +iren that was in hem. And of the rotenesse and other thing that was with in +the schippes, grewen suche buscaylle and thornes and breres and grene +grasse and suche maner of thing; and of the mastes and the seylle zerdes; +it semed a gret wode or a grove. And suche roches ben in many places there +abouten. And therfore dur not the marchauntes passen there, but zif thei +knowen wel the passages, or elle that thei han gode lodes men. And also +thei dreden the longe weye: and therfore thei gon to Cathay; for it is more +nyghe: and zit is not so nyghe, but that men moste ben travayllynge be see +and lond, 11 monethes or 12, from Gene or from Venyse, or he come to +Cathay. And zit is the lond of Prestre John more ferr, be many dredfulle +iourneyes. And the marchauntes passen be the kyngdom of Persie, and gon to +a cytee that is clept Hermes: for Hermes the philosophre founded it. And +aftre that, thei passen an arm of the see, and thanne thei gon to another +cytee that is clept Golbache: and there thei fynden marchandises, and of +popengayes, as gret plentee as men fynden here of gees. And zif thei will +passen ferthere, thei may gon sykerly i now. In that contree is but lytylle +whete or berley: and therfore thei eten ryzs and hony and mylk and chese +and frute. + +This Emperour Prestre John takethe alle weys to his wif, the doughtre of +the grete Chane: and the gret Chane also in the same wise, the doughtre of +Prestre John. For theise 2 ben the grettest lordes undir the firmament. + +In the lond of Prestre John, ben manye dyverse thinges and many precious +stones, so gret and so large, that men maken of hem vesselle: as plateres, +dissches and cuppes. And many other marveylles ben there; that it were to +cumbrous and to long to putten it in scripture of bokes. + + +CAPVT 42. + +De frequentia palatij et comitatu Imperatoris. + +Seruiunt et praestò sunt iugitèr Domino Imperatori septem reges, qui in +capite singulorum mensium, alijs septem regibus pro illis palatium +ingredientibus recedunt ad propria, donec reuoluatur eis tempus statutum. +Hij curam habent de gubernatione administrationum in aula maiori per +subiectos eis 72. duces, et 300. et 63. comites seu barones, quorum +vnusquisque optimè nouit et diligentèr intendit proprio ministerio. + +Nam isti sunt Imperatoris Cubicularij, isti Camerarij, isti scindunt Regi +morsellos: alij de apponendis curam gerunt ferculis et deponendis, +deafferendis, deasportandis, alij pincernæ, Archimandritæ, ostiarij, et sic +de singulis. + +Nec non absque iam dictis, manducant omni die in aula corà m Imperatore, +duodecim Archiepiscopi, 220. Episcopi, quibus etiam alij totidem certis +temporibus succedunt per vices. Verumtamem ad quotidianas expensas vsque +praemissas, veniunt de Curia 300. millia personarum, sed non ampliùs: sed +sicut praedixi de Curia praecedentis Imperatoris sic nullus hic, +cuiuscunque sit status, aut sexus, comedit vltrà semel in die, et hoc ipsum +sobriè satis: quoniam prout æstimare possum, expensæ duodecim hominum de +nostris communitèr compensarent triginta hominum in partibus illis. + +Dum Ioannem Presbyterum contingit procedere cum exercitu in plena +exhibitione, non deferuntur vexilla, sed tredecim cruces magnæ altitudinis +et grossitudinis, de auro distincto pretiosissimis petris, in honorem +Christi et suorum Apostolorum duodecim. Hæ vectantur in singulis curribus, +et singularum ad hoc maximis curribus cum custodia cuiuscunque crucis, +decem mille equitum, et centum mille peditum, nec tamen hic numerus auget +vel minuit principalem exercitum Paganorum. + +Tempore pacis per terras proprias de palatio ad palatium, aut de regno ad +regnum, dum tendere ei placet, comitatur vtique magna multitudine hominum +antè et retrò, et ex vtroque laterum. + +Tùncque portantur corà m eo tria valdè notabilia, quæ tam illi quà m omnibus +ea dignè notantibus esse possunt salutaria. Praecedit enim eum in spatio +circiter octodecim passuum discus onustus velut omni genere pretiosorum +vasorum auri et argenti, gemmarum, et inæstimabilis artificij. Illumque +discum subsequitur propinquiùs Imperatori ad spatium centum passuum, alia +crux lignea nullo penitùs auro, nulloue colore aut preciositate +artificialis operis adornata. + +Dehinc ad sex passuum succedit ibidem propinquans Imperatori discus aureus +terra nigerrima plenus. Sunt enim prædicti comitatus in custodiam et +honorem personæ Imperatoris, discus vassorum in ostensionem diuitiarum, et +maiestatis Imperialis. Crux in recordatione passionis et mortis, quam in +cruce ligni simplice Christus passus est pro nobis. Et terra nigra in +memoriam diræ mortis, qua caro ipsius Imperatoris, quæ terra est, in terram +ibit corruptionis. + + +The English Version. + +But of the princypalle yles and of his estate and of his lawe, I schalle +telle zou som partye. This Emperour Prestre John is Cristene; and a gret +partie of his contree also; but zit thei have not alle the articles of oure +feythe, as wee have. Thei beleven wel in the Fadre, in the Sone and in the +Holy Gost: and thei ben fulle devoute, and righte trewe on to another. And +thei sette not be no barettes, ne by cawteles, ne of no disceytes. And he +hathe undre him 72 provynces; and in every provynce is a kyng. And theise +kynges han kynges undre hem; and alle ben tributaries to Prestre John. + + +CAPVT. 43. + +De quibusdam miris per regiones Indiæ. + +Licèt plurima mira habeantur in terra Imperij Presbyteri Ioannis, ne +materia operis nimiùm proteletur, multa tego silentio: et solùm de +quibusdam in principalibus Insulis narro. [Sidenote: Magnum mare arenosum] +Ergò in primis dico vidisse me magnum mare arenosum, quod de solùm minuta +arena sine vlla aqua cum lapillorum granellis currit, et fluit per altas +eleuationes, et depressiones ad similitudinem maris aquæ, nec vnquam +quiescit: et quòd ipse non cesso stupere, inueniuntur pisces ad littus +proiecti, qui cum sint alterius formæ et speciei, quà m de nostro mari, +videntur tamen gustui in edendo delicatiores. [Sidenote: In orientali India +vsque hodie venti anniuersarij arenis ostia fluminum suffocant.] Nullo +tamen humano ingenio videtur hoc mare transuadari, aut nauigari, aut illo +piscari, sed nec propter sui longitudinem, et plura impedimenta de propè +circuiri. + +Item ab hoc latere maris per tres dietas habentur magnæ montium alpes, +inter quas venit quasi oriens de Paradiso fluuius decurrentibus petris, +nihil penitùs habens aquæ, in quibus æstimandæ sunt plurimum magnarum esse +virtutum, quamuis de singulis humanæ scientiæ constare non potest. + +Hîc petrarum fluuius currit ad intercisum tempus, quasi in tribus septimanæ +diebus, per spatium deserti Indiæ plurium dietarum, velut fluuius, quousque +tandem se perdat in mare arenosum praedictum, atque ex tunc ipsi lapides +penitùs non comparent. Tempore autem sui cursus nullus appropinquare +praesumit, præ strepitu eius et motu: sed tempore quietis aditur sine +periculo vitæ. + +In Orientem versus fluuij originem ad ingressum deserti magni inter quosdam +de montibus, cernitur grandis terræ planicies tanquam spatiosi campi +totalitèr arenosi, in quo videntur ad Solis ortum exurgere de arena, et +secundùm eleuationem Solis excrescere quaedam virgulta, atque in feruore +meridiei producere fructum. Ac de illo in Solis decliuo fructus cum +arbustulis paulatim minui, et in occasu penitùs deperire, vnde et nullus +hominum audet illorum vti fructibus, ne sit quid fantasticum et nociuum. + +In huius deserti interioribus, vidi homines in toto syluestres, qui etsi in +superioribus formam praetendere videantur humanam, descendunt in +subterioribus ad formam bestiæ alicuius. + +Horum quidam frontes gerunt cornibus asperatas, grinientes vt feræ vel +apri: alij nonnulla vti videntur loquela, quam nemo rationalium nonit, et +quibusdam signis concepta depromunt. Et est illic pluralitas syluestrium +canum, qui dicuntur papiones, quibus postquam edomiti, et ad venandum +instructi fuerint, valent capi multæ bestiæ per desertum. [Sidenote: +Papagalli.] Est et copiositas papingonum auium viridium in colore quas +appellant phicake, et quarum diuersa sunt genera, nobiliores habent latas +in rostro linguas, et in vtroque pede digitos duos. Et quaedam ex istis +naturaliter loquuntur verba aut prouerbia, seu salutationes, in patriæ +idiomate, vt euidenter salutes, concedant, et reddant viatoribus, et +nonnunquam debitum iter errantibus per desertum ostendant. Minus autem +nobiles non loquuntur ex natura, sed si latas habent linguas, et non sunt +vltrà duorum annorum ætatis, possunt per assiduitatem instrui ad loquelam. + +Aliæ nec loquuntur, nec eradiuntur, sed solùm clamitant pro voce milui, et +nisi tres digitos habent in pede. + +Nota: in quarta orientali Deus dedit fratribus minoribus magnam gratiam, +vnde in magna Tartaria ita expellunt ab obsessis daemones, sicut de domo +canes: vnde quandoque per decem dietas ad eos adducuntur daemoniaci +alligati, et statim fratribus praecipientibus in nomine Iesu Christi, +exeunt, et liberati baptizantur, et comburunt idola, et plures credunt, et +quandoque exeunt idola de igne, et fratres proijciunt aquam benedictam, et +clamat daemon, Vide, de meo habitaculo expellor propter fratres minores. +Ita multi credunt, et baptizantur. Odericus. + +[Sidenote Melescorde Regio. Vel regionis.] Item nota: dum recederem de +terra Praesbyteri Ioannis versos occidentem, applicui ad contratam vnam, +quæ dicitur Melescorde, quæ pulchra est, et multùm fertilis: inter montes +duos huius contratæ fecerat quidam murum circundantem montem, et in eo +fontes nobilissimos, et omne detectabile. Et hunc locum dicebant paradisum, +sicut hic ferè continetur. Ideò Odericus, qui posteà narrat de valle +infausta in hoc se terminat. + +[Sidenote: Mischorach.] Ad supradictum Indiæ regnum Pentexoriæ satis propè, +et lata est et longa Insula, Mischorach, bonis copiosè referta, de qua vnum +scribo praeteritum mirum. + +Ante paucos hos annos, villanus ditissimus, sibi valdè preciosum +construxerat palatium, quasi pro Paradiso terrestri, circundatum, munitum +fortalitijs, ac repletum omnibus corporalibus delicijs. + +Illic areæ, turres, cameræ, cubicula, cum alijs ædificijs, in multo numero, +et gloria permagnifica, ac historiarum picturis, inter quas, nonnunquam +prodigioso artificio bestiæ et bestiolæ, aues et auiculæ discurrebant, +volitibant, et per pugnas, garritus, collusiones, mentiebantur viuere. + +[Sidenote: Ditissimi villani paradisus fictitius.] Illic prata, et pometa, +et seruatoria circà deliciosi collis congestum, distincta velut omni genere +florum, arborum, et herbarum, cum multis fontibus et riuulis, quorum +perspicuitas, et fluxus in glaris suauem et auditui praestabant +refectionem, et super aliquos fuerunt exceptioris artificij, circumstructi +auro, et argento, et gemmis, et tres principales fontes emittentes ad +palatium Domini per occultas conductas, riuulos vini, lactis, et mellis. + +Copiosus quoque numerus formosorum puerorum, et puellarum, ætatis inter +decem et sex decem annos, indutorum torquibus, et cycladibus exauratis, +exercentium inter iocos cantus et spectacula, ac seruientium suo Domino +prope nutum. Audiebantur ex turrium custodibus, nec non videbantur +dulcisonæ, symphoniæ, generum diuersorum, vt certissimè putares, non +hominum, sed Angelorum: et in istis, ac similibus, deliciebatur iste +villanus. + +Sed et aurum liuido nil iuuat, imò nocet: quia enim hic inuidiæ et otij +facibus super ingenuitatem mentis omnium generaliter nobilium principum +verebatur in corde: (ingenuitas enim, et rusticitas nunquam cohabitant in +cordis vno domicilio) Composuerat ista sibi in hunc finem, vt per se +singulos aduocaret aliquos vasallos corpore robustos, menteque audaces, +atque ad omnem proteruiam benè procliues: et cuilibet pro placitis +muneribus commisit vt illum seu illum principem seu Baronem, quem dicebat +sibi aduersarium, clà m per insidias vel impetum, occideret, promittens +quenquam post factum ad se recepturum perpetuò in hunc locum: sed et velut +vaticinans pseudo praedicauit, si quem illorum pro his flagitijs contigeret +corporaliter tradi morti, nihilominùs animam eius in hunc amoenum Paridisum +recipi, et viuere in æeternum. + +[Sidenote: Mandeuillus oculatus testis.] Per hunc igitur modum nonnulis +nobilibus occisis, et interfectis, tandem nudabatur eius nequitia tanta, et +congregati regionis Barones miserum occiderunt, eius opera destruentes. +Ipse ego inibi ductus vidi fontium loca, et multa rei vestigia. + + +CAPVT. 44. + +De loco et dispositione vallis infaustæ. + +Huius ad insulæ extremitates non procul à fluuio Pyson, habetur locus +mirabilis pariter et terribilis, vltrà omne mundanum, penè et procul: de +euentibus, ac laboribus infinitis, quæ mihi meÃsque in tempore +itinerationis acciderunt hucusque subticui, cùm iam vnum de maioribus ecce +narro. + +Est illic in alpibus vallis infausta, quatuor fermè leucarum: longitudo +vallis, quasi ad quatuor milliaria Lombardica, appellata vallis +incantationis, seu periculosa, seu propiùs daemoniosa: intrà quam diebus ac +noctibus resonant boatus et tumultus tonitruorum, tempestatum, clamorum, et +stridorum, diuersique generis sonituum terribilium, quos illic exercet +multitudo spirituum malignorum. + +Propè ad vallis medium sub vna rupium, apparet omni tempore visibiliter +integrum ac maximum caput daemonis vsque ad humeros tantùm, cuius speciem +præ horrore nullus pleno intuitu humanus audet diu oculus sustinere: nam +respicientes contrà aspicit truculentèr, agitans oculos minacitèr, tanquam +ex palpebris eiecturus (quæ et scintillant) flammas in altum. Totumque +caput sese rotat ad minas, et variat terribilitèr modum et continentiam sub +repentè diuersis maneriebus. Exitque de illo per totum ignis obscuratus +fumo, et foetor, tantus, quòd per magnum spatium viæ pessimam vallem +infectat. + +Ingredi autem volentibus, apparet semper ad introitum vallis, magna copia +auri, argenti, vasorum, vestium, et rerum pretiosarum, quas proculdubio ibi +daemones confingunt, quibus et ab olim multi insipientium hominum +concupiscentia tracti intrarunt, et vsque nunc intrant pro colligendo +thesauro: sed de Infidelibus paucissimi reuertuntur, imò nec de +Christianis, qui auaritiæ causa ingrediuntur: per vallis autem semitam, quæ +inter montes et monticulos, tortuosa et aspera est, gradientes vident, et +audiunt, daemoniacos spiritus multos volutantes, et imaginibus corporum +visibilium, serpentum, volucrum, vlularum, lamiarum, et huiusmodi specierum +horribilium dentibus minitantes, vngulas erigentes, incognitos sibilos +spirantes propè super capita ad aures transgredientium. Sempérque minuitur +lumen aeris, donec ventum fuerit ad terribilissimum locum capitis +antedicti. + +Si quis autem sinceræ fidei Christianus per contritionem veram et +confessionem, se posuerit in statu saluationis, munitus corporis Christi +mysterijs, ac signo crucis, cum intentione ibidem agendi poenitentiam de +admissis, et cauendi de admittendis, putatur posse hanc transire vallem +securus quidem à morte, non tamen liber à laboribus, horroribus, et +tormentis, et exire, de omnibus culpis praeteritis corruptis, ac de futuris +magis solito cautus, sicut scriptum est, territi purgabuntur. + +Nota aliud mirabile magnum. Vidi cùm irem per vnam vallem positam iuxta +flumen quod egreditur de paradiso, vidi in ea multa corpora mortuorum, in +qua etiam audiui multa genera Musicorum, qui ibi mirabilitèr pulsabant: +tantus erat ibi tinnitus Musicorum, quòd incussit mihi timorem horribilem. + +Est autem longitudo illius vallis quasi ad quatuor milliaria Lombardica, in +qua si vnus Infidelis intrat, nunquam egreditur, sed sine mora moritur: Et +licet sciui, quòd intrantes moriuntur, tamen acceptaui intrare, vt viderem +quid ibi esset. Dum intrassem tot humana cadauera ibi vidi, quod nisi quis +videret, credere non posset. + +In hac valle, ab vno eius latere, vidi faciem hominis valdè horribilem, qui +tantum horrorem mihi incussit, quòd putaui me spiritum exhalare, propter +quod saepè repetij verbum vitæ, scilicet, verbum Caro factum est. + +Ad illam faciem non audebam accedere, nisi ad distantiam octo passuum: +posteà iui ad caput vallis, et ascendi super montem arenosum, in quo +vndique circumspiciens, nihil videbam, nisi instrumenta musicalia, quæ +audiebam fortitèr pulsare. Cùm fuissem in capite montis, reperi multum +argentum congregatum ibi in similitudinem squamarum piscium, vnde posui in +gremio, sed quod de ipso non curabam, dimisi illud, et sic illaesus +transiui Deo concedente. + +Sarraceni cùm hoc scirent, reuerebantur me esse baptizatum, et sanctum: +mortuos nunc in valle dicebant, homines infernales. + +Odericus ad literam hic terminat suum librum: non fuit tot perpessus in +valle, sicut ego. Anno Domini 1331. Ianuarij nono, migrauit ad Christum, in +conuentu Minorum: cuius vitam statim in fine, et vsque nunc claris +miraculis diuina prouidentia approbat, et commendat, prout continebatur in +quaterno, à quo concordantias hic superseminaui. + + +CAPVT. 45. + +De periculo et tormentis in valle eadem. + +Itaque dico vobis, cùm sodalibus, qui simul eramus, quatuordecim diuersarum +nationum ante ingressum huius tanti periculi peruenissemus, nos tractatu +longo, et deliberatione acuta consiliabamur, vtrùmnam ingredi deberemus, et +quidam affirmabant, alii verò negabant. Erant autem in numero duo deuoti +fratres, de religione beati Francisci, natione Lombardi, qui videbantur pro +seipsis non multum curare ingressum, nisi quia noluerunt nos animare ad +ingressum, dicentes, si qui nostrum per confessionem, et Eucharistiæ +susceptionem se ibidem praemunirent, ingrederentur cum illis: quo, ab +omnibus mediante debita prouisione, quam ipsi fratres penes se gerebant +peracto, parauimus mentes nostras cum pedibus ad intrandum. + +Sed ecce quinque de nobis, duo Graeci et tres Hispani, semetipsos ab alijs +segregantes, visi sunt alium requirere introitum nos praecedere cupientes, +et certè nos illos exinde non vidimus, et quid eis acciderit an periculum +subierint, velne ignoramus. + +Nos autem nouem per vallem processimus in silentio, et cum cordis ea +deuotione, quam quisque sibi potuerit obtinere: et ecce in breui transacto +spatio apparuerunt cumuli massarum auri et argenti, et preciosorum copia +vasorum. Sed dico vobis pro parte mea, quia nihil horum tetigi, reputans id +fallaciam daemonum confinxisse ad mittendum concupiscentiam in cor nostram, +imò sine intermissione conabar cor meum custodire ad deuotionem inceptam. + +Procedentibus igitur nobis lux coeli minuebator paulatim et augebatur +horror, quoniam propè nos vndique etiam sub pedibus nostris apparebant +iacere cadauera mortuorum hominum penitùs defuncta: alia adhuc spirantia, +et nonulla semiuiua, super quæ dum nos aliquando calcare contingeret, +conquerebantur, ac dolorosè submurmurabant. + +Et licèt non certum id habebam, æstimaui hoc fieri in parte vel in toto +fictione daemonum, reputans in breui tempore tantam multitudinem hominum +spontaneè vallem intrasse, et si à longo tempore in ea perijssent +putrefactos fuisse. + +Ergò in initio nostri processus quasi propè leucam inuenitur iter sub +pedibus satis promptum, sed lumine tanquam ad medium nobis sufficiente, via +torquebatur nimis, et asperabatur: et ecce figuræ daemonum, circum et suprà +in aere se ferentium, ad imagines horribilium luporum, leonum, laruarum, +megerarum, iuxtà cuiuscunque genus vlulantium, rugentium, stridentium, +gannientium, hiantes ore, intentantes dentibus, rostris, ac vnguibus, nos +terrere, mordere, discerpere, deglutire. + +Quapropter pro breui interdum soluto silentio nos inuicèm hortabamur, ne +quis pro pusillanimitate terrori cederet, et tanto deficeret in agone. Hoc +igitur modo per secundam leucam expirante nobis vsque ad tenebras lumine, +quousque quis vix vmbram proximi agnoscere possit, praeter praedicta in +aere tormenta, incurrebant nobis ad tibias, et pedes pluralitas quasi +porcorum, vrsorum, et caprarum grinnientium, et impellentium nos ad lapsum, +quod vel ad tertium, vel quartum, aut sextum passum solatenus cadebamus in +palmas, seu genua, vel prosternebamur in faciem, aut supini. + +Ac superuenere praeter hoc ventorum turbines, fulgurum coruscationes, +tonitruorum boatus, drandium casus et exundatio pluuiarum, quantas et +quales nunquam accepimus in hoc mundo, quibus iactabamur, ruebamus, +quassabamur, et periclitati fuimus extrà narrandum. + +Interdum quoque sensimus tanquam graues baculorum ictus, per humeros, +dorsa, latera, et ad renes, alij quidem grauiores, alij vt puta secundum +demeritum vniuscuiusque. Et certè dum per tanta tormenta, quasi exhaustis +totis viribus, iam propè medium locum vallis erat ventum, accidit repentè, +sub vnico instanti temporis, quibusdam nostrum expalmatio ita dura, vt +omnes paritèr collisi, et prostrati iaceremus in extasi per vnam vul duas +forsitan horas. + +Et isto defectu vidit quilibet suo modo spiritualem visionem +supermirabilem, et excedentem omne dictum, et scriptum. + +Ego verò de visione mea nihil ausus sum scribere, vel loqui, quia et +fratres singuli inhibuerunt, nisi de his, quæ corporalitèr intuebamur, et +passi sumus. + +Grauissimum singuli sustinuimus ictum per corporis loca diuersa, vnus in +facie, alius in pectore, ad costas, in dorso, vel ad humerum, et mansit +cuique signum percussuræ nigerrimum, ad formam virilis manus humanæ: + +[Sidenote: Mirabilis ictus.] Ictum autem meum in colli ceruice tali ac +tanta passione, vt putabam caput abscissum de corpore auolare: et hinc ad +octodecimum annum mansit mihi in prima magnitudine signum: sed et vsque +nunc variato colore locus ille demonstrat penissimè cicatricem, donec cum +cadauere tota mutabitur in sepulchro: porrò vbi nos ab extasi in his +tenebris separauimus singuli per diuinam gratiam respirando, loquendo, +palpando, erigendo nos ipsos mutua humanitate, vt potuimus, recollegimus, +et cohortabamur, cùm subitò nobis apparuit sub tenebroso lumine, vel potiùs +fumosa caligine, locus ille spatiosus mediæ vallis, continens antedictum +horribile caput daemonis, plenus foetore inaestimabili, et iugi occupatus +exercitatione innumerorum spirituum malignorum. + +Hunc ergo locum ineptum cùm vitare vellemus in toto nequiuimus extremitatem +eius, quocunque girantes, nullus nostrorum perfecto aspectu audebat +respicere quæ gerebantur ibidem, quia inuadens tremor statuebat +horripilationem extrahebat, sudorem, et pudorem omnes extinguere +videbantur. Nec tamen potuit esse consilium de reuertendo, ne propter +immutatum propositum confestim à daemonibus strangularemur. + +Transiuimus, Dei gratia nobis opitulante, sed non sine maximo horroris, +foetorisque tormento: rursumque ex tunc procedentes nos apprehendebat +tenebrosa, validaque tempestas, ventorum, coruscationum, tonitruum, +grandinum, et pluuiarum, cuius, quassatione collabebamur in facies, et in +dorso dextrorsum, et sinistrorsum, interuoluente ad tibias, sicut priùs +multitudine grinnientium bestiarum, nec dubito scribere quoque ampliùs, +quà m 500. vicibus per hanc vallem quisque nostrum sternebatur ad terram. + +Post verò exactam tertiam leucam, coepit nobis augeri lux aeris, ex quo +animosiores effecti, in vno tranquilliori loco nos parùm pausantes, gratias +Deo palmis extensis in caelum, reddidimus immensas, et praecipuè quod +nullus deesset de nouenario numero sociorum. + +Nihilominùs tamen spiritus in aere nobis minari non cessabant, pretendentes +in derisionem sua pudenda simul, et foeda virilia et posteriora. + +Pro certo ergò habeatis de his quæ vidi, et sensi, nullam possum vobis +tradere æquipollentiam verborum, cùm quia grauissima erant, tum quia, +singulis ne mihi deuotionem minueret non attendebam, tum etiam, quod præ +horrore, labore, et dolore multa memoriæ non commendabam. + +Per quartam autem leucam (ductrice gratia) leuiùs transeuntes, sustinuimus +tamen sub pedibus hominum cadauera mortuorum, propè vallis exitum rerum +tentamina preciosarum. + +Nunc itaque obsecro magno cordis effectu, haec legentes et audientes ego, +qui in illa hora quid erga me agebat misericordissimi Dei pietas ignorabam, +vt velitis pro me, simul et mecum ex mentis intimo collaudare ipsum +Dominum, qui tunc de potestate tenebrarum illarum eripuit me indignum, et +prout confido, à delictis iuuentutis me purgauit, quatenùs de posteà +commissis, et committendis, mihi propitiùs fore dignetur, cùm iam senior +sim effectus. Quoniam etsi ex tunc proposui mores corrigere, ex nunc statuo +in melius emendare, per filium eius Iesum Christum Dominum nostrum. + +Ad hoc, addo breuitèr, quòd non auderem hortari quenquam, me consulentem, +vt spontaneè ingrederetur hanc vallem infaustam, quamuis ego curiosus +intraui. Venientes posthac ad proximas habitationes, necesse fuit nobis +intendere ad recreandum corpora cibarijs, et balneis, et ad medendum +vulneribus, et quassaturis, donec per aliquod tempus vnusquisque acciperet +deliberationem super suo futuro. + +CAPVT. 46. + +De quibusdam alijs admirandis per Indorum insulas. + +[Sidenote: Gigantes Anthropophagi.] Vt modò procedam in tractatu. Sciatis +ad paucas inde dietas grandem insulam haberi gigantum, ad straturam +altitudinis viginti quinque pedum nostrorum, de quibus ipse vidi nonnullos, +sed extrà terram eorum, et audiuimus esse intrinsecùs quosdam triginta +pedum, et vltrà : hi operiuntur non vestibus, sed bestiarum pellibus +vtcunque sibi appensis, comedentes animalium carnes crudas, et lac pro potu +sorbentes, atque appetentes super omnem esum carnes humanas. + +Istorum non curaui intrare insulam: nam et audiui quòd ad maris littus +solent insidiari nauigantibus, nauesque submergere, nisi interdum +redimantur tribus aut quatuor per sortem hominibus sibi datis. + +[Sidenote: Letiferi aspectus mulierum.] Versus Austrum hinc in mari Oceano, +habetur inter alias insulas vna, vbi crudelibus quibusdam mulieribus +nascitur in oculis lapis rarus, et malus, quæ si per iram respexerint +hominem, more Basilisci interficiunt solo visu. + +Et vltrà hanc insulam alia maior et populosior, vbi cùm multi sint vsus +nobis insueti, vnum describo. + +[Sidenote: Insula vbi virgines vitiantur antequam nubant.] Dum +desponsauerit vir puellam, virginem, mandat hominem incompositum, velut +ribaldum, qui sua idonea claue per expertos super hoc diligentèr +considerata, si reputatur idonea reseret et vestiget sub nocte vnica +virginalem conclauem, pro mercede sibi tradita competenti. Et si postera +nocte accedens sponsus ita non inuenerit, poterit, et consueuit hominem +impetere ad mortis iudicium indeclinabile. Cumque huius moris discere +voluissem causam, accepi responsum, pro certis temporibus apud eos, +virgines habuisse in matricibus paruos serpentes, quibus nocebantur primi +ad illas intrantes. + +Ideoque et viri, que pro mercede tantum subeunt periculum, vocant sua +loquela cadibrum, est, stultos desperatos. + +Ex hac, apparet Insula in qua inter alios vsus, peruersæ sunt matres contra +naturam et scripturam, cum pepererent contristantur, et dum proles moritur +iocundantur, iactantes in magno igne cum conuiuio et exultatione, dumque +maritus ante vxorem decidit, patebit vxoris plena dilectio, si cum corpore +mariti, quod rogo traditur se iactat cremandum, vt quia in isto seculo +steterunt amoris vinculo colligati, non sint alio separati. + +Nec tamen intelligunt illud seculum, nisi quod sibi confingunt terrestrem +Paradisum. Purum aut minorem annis, trahet mater secum si placet, sed +ætatis puer perfectæ, eliget pro proprio placito viuere superstes, aut mori +iuxta parentes. + +Hic etiam non succedunt Reges per generationem sed per electionem, vt +assumatur non nobilior, aut fortior, sed morigeratior, et iustior, 50 ad +minus annorum, nullam habens sobolem aut vxorem, seruaturque illic iusticiæ +rigor in plena censura, in omnibus et contra omnes, etiamsi forefecerit +ipse Rex, qui nec eximitur a traditis legibus pro concupiscentia vel +contemptione quarumlibet personarum. + +Veruntamen Rex si peccauerit non occiditur ob reuerentiam, sed quòd sub +poena mortis, publicè inhibetur, ne quispiam in Regione ei verbo vel vllo +facto communicet, et quoniam sui loco alter rex constituitur, necesse est +illi breui vita degere vel perpetuò exulare. Constat post ipsam, et alia +Insula, multis bonis locuples, et hominibus populosa, de qua recolo +scribendum, quod nulla occasione comedunt tria genera carnium, gallinarum, +leporam, et aucarum, quas etsi nutriant in copijs, vtuntur duntaxat +pellibus aut plumis. + +Caeterarum vero bestiarum et animalium licitè vescuntur carnibus pro victu, +et lacte pro potu. Ibi quisque vir licitè potest coniungi cuique mulieri; +quantumcunque propinquet, exceptis progenitoribus, patre matre. Nam +cohabitatio, et commixtio omnium virorum ad singulas mulieres apparet ibi +communis, vnde mater natum paruulum suum, adicit pro sui placito cuicunque +viro, qui circa generationis tempus secumn dormierit, nec valet vllus +virorum esse certus de proprio generato, quem modum exlegem arbitror et +turpem. + +Sicut ergò praefatus sum, multa mira videntur per Regiones Indorum, mira +quidem nobis, sed illis assueta, quibus si nostra recitarentur assueta, +audirent pro miris. Nam et dum quibusdam dixi aucas viuas apud nos nasci in +arboribus, admirati sunt satis. In multis locis seminatur singulis annis +sementum de Cothon, quod nos dicimus lanam arboream, exurgunt ei modica +arbusta, vel potius arbustula de quibus talis lana habetur: est arbor +luniperus, de cuius ligno desiccato, si carbones viuos sub proprijs +cineribus tenueris diligenter opertos, igniti seruabuntur ad annum. + +Est et genus Nucum incredibilis magnitudinis ad quantitatem magni capitis: +et bestia vocata, oraflans, vel serfans, corpore in nostrorum aldtudine +caballorum, et collo in 20 longitudine cubitorum ad prospiciendum vltra +domos et muros, quorum posteriora apparent vt hinniculi siue lerni. + +Genus est etiam Camelionum ad formam hynnulorum, qui semper patulo tendunt +ore, vel nil manducantes. Viuunt de aere, quæ etiam ad suum libitum +videntur sibi variare colorem, exceptis (vt dicitur) albo vel rubeo. + +Maximi quóque serpentes, inuicem qualitate, et genere differentes +atque colore. + +Aliqui cristam in capite gerunt, quidam more hominum ad duos pedes erecti +incedunt, et nonnulli qui dicuntur Reguli, venenum per ora distillare non +cessant, nec non quam plures cocodrilli, de quibus aliquid in +praecedentibus retuli; [Sidenote: Apri ingentes. Leones albi. Louheraus.] +et apri in nostrorum magnitudine boum, spinosi ericij, in quantitate +porcorum, leones albi in altitudine dextrariorum. Louheraus, seu Edouches +per Indiam habentur, quod ferarum genus satis est maius nostris communibus +equis, geren in fronte tetri capitis tria longa cornua, ad formam pugionis, +ex vtraque parte scindentia, vt eis nonnunquam interficiant Elephantes. + +Aliæ quoque bestiæ crudeles vt vrsi cum capitibus ferè aprorum et habentes +pedes senos, qui finduntur latis vngulis bis acutis, et cum caudis leonum +siue pardorum. + +Et quod vix credetur, mures pro quantitate, 10, aut 12. nostrorum et +vespertiliones ad modum coruorum. + +Sed et aucæ in triplo maiores nostris, plumis indutæ rubris, nisi quod in +pectore et collo apparet nigredo. + +Et breuiter tam ibi quà m alibi, habentur pisces, bestiæ, volucres, aut +vermes diuersorum generum, aut specierum, de quibus hoc loco, vel inutilis, +vel prolixa posset fieri narratio, quod nec illis qui nunquam propria +exierunt, credibilis videretur. + + +The English Version. + +And he hathe in his lordschipes many grete marveyles. For in his contree, +is the see that men clepen the Gravely See, that is alle gravelle and sond, +with outen ony drope of watre: and it ebbethe and flowethe in grete wawes, +as other sees don: and it is never stille ne in pes, in no maner cesoun. +And no man may passe that see be navye, be no maner of craft: and therfore +may no man knowe, what lond is bezond that see. And alle be it that it have +no watre, zit men fynden there in and on the bankes, fulle gode fissche of +other maner of kynde and schappe, thanne men fynden in ony other see; and +thei ben of right goode tast, and delycious to mannes mete. + +And a 3 iourneys long fro that see, ben gret mountaynes; out of the whiche +gothe out a gret flood, that comethe out of paradys: and it is fulle of +precious stones, with outen ony drope of water: and it rennethe thorghe the +desert, on that o syde; so that it makethe the see gravely: and it berethe +in to that see, and there it endethe. And that flomme rennethe also, 3 +dayes in the woke, and bryngethe with him grete stones, and the roches also +therewith, and that gret plentee. And anon as thei ben entred in to the +gravely see, thei ben seyn no more; but lost for evere more. And in tho 3 +dayes, that that ryvere rennethe, no man dar entren in to it: but in the +other dayes, men dar entren wel y now. Also bezonde that flomme, more +upward to the desertes, is a gret pleyn alle gravelly betwene the +mountaynes: and in that playn, every day at the sonne risynge, begynnen to +growe smale trees; and thei growen til mydday, berynge frute: but no man +dar taken of that frute; for it is a thing of fayrye. And aftre mydday, +thei discrecen and entren azen in to the Erthe, so that at the goynge doun +of the Sonne, thei apperen no more; and so thei don every day; and that is +a gret marvaille. + +In that desert ben many wylde men, that ben hidouse to loken on: for thei +ben horned; and thei speken nought, but thei gronten, as pygges. And there +is also gret plentee of wylde Houndes. And there ben manye popegayes, that +thei clepen psitakes in hire langage: and thei speken of hire propre +nature, and salven men that gon thorghe the desertes, and speken to hem als +appertely, as thoughe it were a man. And thei that speken wel, han a large +tonge, and han 5 toos upon a Fote. And there ben also of other manere, that +han but 3 toos upon a fote; and thei speken not, or but litille: for thei +cone not but cryen. + +This Emperour Prestre John, whan he gothe in to battaylle, azenst ony other +Lord, he hathe no baneres born before him: but he hathe 3 crosses of gold, +fyn, grete and hye, fulle of precious stones: and every of the crosses ben +sett in a chariot, fulle richely arrayed. And for to kepen every cros, ben +ordeyned 10000 men at Armes, and mo than 100000 men on Fote, in maner as +men wolde kepe a Stondard in oure Contrees, whan that wee ben in lond of +werre. And this nombre of folk is with outen the pryncipalle Hoost, and +with outen Wenges ordeynd for the bataylle. And he hathe no werre, but +ridethe with a pryvy meynee, thanne he hathe bore before him but o cross of +tree, with outen peynte peynture, and with outen gold or silver or precious +stones; in remembrance, that Jesus suffred dethe upon a cros of tree. And +he hathe born before him also a plater of gold fulle of erthe, in tokene +that his noblesse and his myghte and his flessche schalle turnen to erthe. +And he hathe born before him also a vesselle of silver, fulle of noble +jewelles of gold fulle riche, and of precious stones, in tokene of his +lordschipe and of his noblesse and of his myght. He duellethe comounly in +the cytee of Suse; and there is his principalle palays, that is so riche +and so noble, that no man wil trowe it by estymacioun, but he had seen it. +And aboven the chief tour of the palays, ben 2 rounde pomeles of gold; and +in everyche of hem ben 2 carboncles grete and large, that schynen fulle +brighte upon the nyght. And the principalle zates of his palays ben of +precious ston, that men clepen sardoyne: and the bordure and the barres ben +of ivorye: and the wyndowes of the halles and chambres ben of cristalle: +and the tables where on men eten, somme ben of emeraudes, summe of amatyst +and summe of gold, fulle of precious stones; and the pileres, that beren up +the tables, ben of the same precious stones. And the degrees to gon up to +his throne, where he sittethe at the mete, on is of oniche, another is of +cristalle, and another of jaspre grene, another of amatyst, another of +sardyne, another of corneline, and the sevene that he settethe on his feet, +is of crisolyte. And alle theise degrees ben bordured with fyn gold, with +the tother precious stones, sett with grete perles oryent. And the sydes of +the sege of his throne ben of emeraudes, and bordured with gold fulle +nobely, and dubbed with other precious stones and grete perles. And alle +the pileres in his chambre, ben of fyne gold with precious stones, and with +many carboncles, that zeven gret lyght upon the nyght to alle peple. And +alle be it that the charboncle zeve lyght right y now, natheles at alle +tymes brennethe a vesselle of cristalle fulle of bawme, for to zeven gode +smelle, and odour to the emperour, and to voyden awey alle wykkede eyres +and corrupciouns. And the forme of his bedd is of fyne saphires bended with +gold, for to make him slepen wel, and to refreynen him from lecherye. For +he wille not lyze with his wyfes, but 4 sithes in the zeer, aftre the four +cesouns: and that is only for to engendre children. He hathe also a fulle +fayr palays and a noble, at the cytee of Nyse, where that he dwellethe, +whan him best lykethe; but the ayr is not so attempree, as it is at the +cytee of Suse. And zee schulle undirstonde, that in alle his contree, ne in +the contrees there alle aboute, men eten noghte but ones in the day, as men +don in the court of the grete Chane. And so thei eten every day in his +court, mo than 30000 persones, with outen goeres and comeres. But the 30000 +persones of his contree, ne of the contree of the grete Chane, ne spenden +noghte so moche gode, as don 12000 of oure contree. This Emperour Prestre +John hathe evere more 7 kynges with him, to serve him: and thei departen +hire service be certeyn monethes. And with theise kynges serven alle weys +72 dukes and 360 erles. And alle the dayes of the zeer, there eten in his +houshold and in his court, 12 erchebysshoppes and 20 bisshoppes. And the +patriark of Seynt Thomas is there, as is the Pope here. And the +erchebisshoppes and the bisshoppes and the abboties in that contree, ben +alle kynges. And everyche of theise grete lordes knowen wel y now the +attendance of hire servyse. This on is mayster of his houshold, another is +his chamberleyn, another servethe him of a dissche, another of the cuppe, +another is styward, another is mareschalle, another is prynce of his armes: +and thus is he fulle nobely and ryally served. And his lond durethe in +verry brede 4 moneths iorneyes, and in lengthe out of measure; that is to +seyn, alle the yles undir erthe, that wee supposen to ben undir us. + +Besyde the yle of Pentexoire, that is the lond of Prestre John, is a gret +yle long and brode, that men clepen Milsterak; and it is in the lordschipe +of Prestre John. In that yle is gret plentee of godes. There was dwellynge +somtyme a ryche man, and it is not longe sithen, and men clept him +Gatholonabes; and he was fulle of cauteles and of sotylle disceytes; and he +hadde a fulle fair castelle, and a strong, in a mountayne, so strong and so +noble, that no man cowde devise a fairere ne a strangere. And he had let +muren alle the mountayne aboute with a strong walle and a fair. And with +inne tho walles he had the fairest gardyn, that ony man myghte beholde; and +therein were trees berynge alle maner of frutes, that ony man cowde devyse; +and there in were also alle maner vertuous herbes of gode smelle, and alle +other herbes also, that beren faire floures. And he had also in that +gardyn, many faire welles; and beside tho welles, he had lete make faire +halles and faire chambres, depeynted alle with gold and azure. And there +weren in that place many a dyverse thinges and many dyverse stories: and of +bestes and of bryddes, that songen fulle delectabely; and meveden be craft, +that it semede that thei weren quyke. And he had also in his gardyn alle +maner of foules and of bestes that ony man myghte thenke on, for to have +pley or desport to beholde hem. And he had also in that place, the faireste +zonge Damyseles, that myghte ben founde undir the age of 15 zere, and the +faireste zonge striplynges, that men myghte gete of that same age: and alle +thei weren clothed in clothes of gold fully richely: and he seyde, that tho +weren aungeles. And he had also let make 3 welles, faire and noble, and +alle envyround with ston of jaspre, of cristalle, pyapred with gold, and +sett with precious stones and grete orient perles. And he had made a +conduyt undir erthe, so that the 3 weles, at his list, on scholde renne +milk, another wyn, and another hony. And that place he clept paradys. And +whan that ony gode knyghte, that was hardy and noble, cam to see this +rialtee, he wolde lede him into his paradys, and schewen him theise +wondirfulle thinges, to his desport, and the marveyllous and delicious song +of dyverse briddes, and the faire damyseles, and the faire welles of mylk, +wyn and hony, plentevous rennynge. And he wolde let make dyyerse +Instrumentes of Musick to sownen in an highe Tour, so merily that it was +joye for to here; and no man scholde see the craft thereof: and tho, he +seyde, weren aungeles of God, and that place was paradys, that God had +behighte to his frendes, seyenge, _Dabo vobis terram fluentem lacte et +mel_. And thanne wolde he maken hem to drynken of certeyn drynk, where of +anon thei scholden be dronken. And thanne wolde hem thinken gretter delyt, +than thei hadden before. And than wolde he seye to hem, that zif thei wolde +dyen for him and for his love, that aftir hire dethe, thei scholde come to +his paradys; and thei scholde ben of the age of the damyseles, and thei +scholde pleyen with hem, and zit ben maydenes. And aftir thai, zit scholde +he putten hem in a fayrere paradys, where that thei schold see God of +Nature visibely, in His majestee and in His blisse. And than wolde He +schewe hem His entent, and seye hem, that zif thei wolde go sle suche a +Lord, or suche a man, that was his enemye, or contrarious to his list, that +thei scholde not dred to done it, and for to be slayn therefore hemself: +for aftir hire dethe, he wold putten hem into another paradys, that was an +100 fold fairer than ony of the tothere; and there schode thei dwellen with +the most fairest damyselles that myghte be, and play with hem ever more. +And thus wenten many dyverse lusty bacheleres for to sle grete lords, in +dyverse countrees, that weren his enemyes, and maden hem self to ben slayn, +in hope to have that paradys. And thus often tyme, he was revenged of his +enemyes, be his sotylle disceytes and false cauteles. And whan the worthi +men of the contree hadden perceyved this sotylle falshod of this +Gatholonabes, thei assembled hem with force, and assayleden his castelle, +and slowen him, and destroyden alle the faire places, and alle the +nobletees of that paradys. The place of the welles and of the walles and of +many other thinges, ben zit apertly sene: but the richesse is voyded clene. +And it is not longe gon, sithe that place was destroyed. + + +Of the Develes Hede in the Valeye perilous; and of the Customs of folk in + dyverse Yles, that ben abouten, in the Lordschipe of Prestre John. + +[Sidenote: Chap. XXVIII.] Besyde that Yle of Mistorak, upon the left syde, +nyghe to the ryvere of Phison, is a marveylous thing. There is a vale +betwene the mountaynes, that durethe nyghe a 4 myle: and summen clepen it +the Vale Enchaunted; some clepen it the Vale of Develes, and some clepen it +the Vale Perilous. In that vale, heren men often tyme grete tempestes and +thondres and grete murmures and noyses, alle dayes and nyghtes: and gret +noyse, as it were sown of tabours and of nakeres and trompes, as thoughe it +were of a gret feste; This ale is alle fulle of develes, and hathe ben alle +weyes. And men seyn there, that it is on of the entrees of helle. In that +vale is gret plentee of gold and sylver: wherefore many mysbelevynge men, +and manye Christene men also, gon in often tyme, for to have of the +thresoure, that there is: but fewe comen azen; and namely of the mys +belevynge men, ne of the Cristene men nouther: for thei ben anon strangled +of develes. And in mydde place of that vale, undir a roche, is an hed and +the visage of a devyl bodyliche, fulle horrible and dreadfulle to see, and +it schewethe not but the hed, to the schuldres. But there is no man in the +world so hardy, Cristene man ne other, but that he wolde ben a drad for to +beholde it: and that it wolde semen him to dye for drede; so is it hidous +for to beholde. For he beholdethe even man so scharply, with dreadfulle +eyen, that ben evere more mevynge and sparklynge, as fuyr, and chaungethe +and sterethe so often in dyverse manere, with so horrible countenance, that +no man dar not neighen towardes him. And fro him comethe out smoke and +stynk and fuyr, and so moche abhomynacioun, that unethe no man may there +endure. But the gode Cristene men, that ben stable in the feythe, entren +welle withouten perile. For thei wil first schryven hem, and marken hem +with the tokene of the Holy Cros; so that the fendes ne han no power over +hem. But alle be it that thei ben with outen perile, zit natheles ne ben +thei not with outen drede, whan that thei seen the develes visibely and +bodyly alle aboute hem, that maken fully dyverse assautes and manaces in +eyr and in erthe, and agasten hem with strokes of thondre blastes and of +tempestes. And the most drede is, that God wole taken vengeance thanne, of +that men han mys don azen his wille. And zee schulle undirstonde, that whan +my fellows and I weren in that vale, wee weren in gret thought, whether +that wee dursten putten oure bodyes in aventure, to gon in or non, in the +proteccioun of God. And somme of oure fellowes accordeden to enter, and +somme noght. So there weren with us 2 worthi men, Frere Menoures, that +weren of Lombardye, that seyden, that zif ony man wolde entren, thei wolde +gon in with us. And when thei hadden seyd so, upon the gracyous trust of +God and of hem, wee leet synge masse, and made every man to ben schryven +and houseld: and thanne wee entreden 14 personnes; but at oure goynge out, +wee weren but 9. And so we wisten nevere, whether that oure fellowes weren +lost, or elle turned azen for drede: but wee ne saughe hem never after: and +tho weren 2 men of Grece and 3 of Spayne. And oure other fellows, that +wolden not gon in with us, thei wenten by another coste, to ben before us, +and so thei were. And thus wee passeden that perilous vale, and founden +thereinne gold and sylver and precious stones and riche jewelles gret +plentee, both here and there, as us semed: but whether that it was, as us +semede, I wot nere: for I touched none, because that the develes ben so +subtyle to make a thing to seme otherwise than it is, for to disceyve +mankynde; and therfore I towched none; and also because that I wolde not +ben put out of my devocioun: for I was more devout thanne, than evere I was +before or after, and alle for the drede of fendes, that I saughe in dyverse +figures; and also for the gret multytude of dede bodyes, that I saughe +there liggynge be the weye, be alle the vale, as thoughe there had ben a +bataylle betwene 2 kynges and the myghtyest of the contree, and that the +gretter partye had ben discomfyted and slayn. And I trowe, that unethe +scholde ony contree have so moche peple with in him, as lay slayn in that +vale, as us thoughte; the whiche was an hidouse sight to seen. And I +merveylled moche, that there weren so manye, and the bodyes all hole, with +outen rotynge. But I trowe, that fendes made hem semen to ben so hole, with +outen rotynge. But that myghte not ben to myn avys, that so manye scholde +have entred so newely, ne so manye newely slayn, with outen stynkynge and +rotynge. And manye of hem were in habite of Cristene men: but I trowe wel, +that it weren of suche, that wenten in for covetyse of the thresoure, that +was there, and hadden over moche feblenesse in feithe; so that hire hertes +ne myghte not enduren in the beleve for drede. And therfore weren wee the +more devout a gret del: and zit wee weren cast doun and beten down many +tymes to the hard erthe, be wyndes and thondres and tempestes: but evere +more God of His grace halp us: and so we passed that perilous vale, with +outen perile and with outen encombrance. Thanked be alle myghty Godd. + +Aftre this, bezonde the vale, is a gret yle, where the folk ben grete +geauntes of 28 fote longe or of 30 fote longe; and thei han no clothinge, +but of skynnes of bestes, that thei hangen upon hem: and thei eten no +breed, but alle raw flesche: and thei drynken mylk of bestes; for thei han +plentee of alle bestaylle. And thei have none houses, to lyen inne. And +thei eten more gladly mannes flessche, thanne ony other flesche. In to that +yle dar no man gladly entren: and zif thei seen a schipp and men there +inne, anon thei entren in to the see, for to take hem. + +And men seyden us, that in an yle bezonde that, weren geantes of grettere +stature: summe of 45 fote, or 50 fote long, and as some men seyn, summe of +50 cubytes long: but I saghe none of tho; for I hadde no lust to go to tho +parties, because that no man comethe nouther in to that yle ne in to the +other, but zif he be devoured anon. And among tho geauntes ben scheep, als +grete as oxen here; and thei beren gret wolle and roughe. Of the scheep I +have seyn many tymes. And men han seyn many tymes tho geauntes taken men in +the see out of hire schippes, and broughte hem to lond, 2 in on hond and 2 +in another, etynge hem goynge, alle rawe and alle quyk. + +Another yle is there toward the northe, in the see occean, where that ben +fulle cruele and ful evele wommen of nature; and thei han precious stones +in hire eyen: and thei ben of that kynde, that zif thei beholden ony man +with wratthe, thei slen him anon with the beholdynge, as dothe the +basilisk. + +Another yle is there, fulle fair and gode and gret, and fulle of peple, +where the custom is suche, that the firste nyght that thei ben maryed, thei +maken another man to lye be hire wifes, for to have hire maydenhode: and +therfore thei taken gret huyre and gret thank. And ther ben certeyn men in +every town, that serven of non other thing; and thei clepen hem Cadeberiz, +that is to seyne, the foles of Wanhope. For thei of the contree holden it +so gret a thing and so perilous, for to haven the maydenhode of a woman, +that hem semethe that thei that haven first the maydenhode, puttethe him in +aventure of his lif. And zif the husbonde fynde his wif mayden, that other +next nyghte, aftre that she scholde have ben leyn by of the man, that is +assigned therefore, perauntes for dronkenesse or for some other cause, the +husbonde schalle pleyne upon him, that he hathe not don his deveer, in +suche cruelle wise, as thoughe he wolde have him slayn therfore. But after +the firste nyght, that they ben leyn by, thei kepen hem so streytely, that +thei ben not so hardy to speke with no man. And I asked hem the cause, whi +that thei helden suche custom: and thei seyden me, that of old tyme, men +hadden ben dede for deflourynge of maydenes, that hadden serpentes in hire +bodyes, that stongen men upon hire zerdes, that thei dyeden anon: and +therfore thei helden that custom, to make other men, ordeyn'd therefore, to +lye be hire wyfes, for drede of dethe, and to assaye the passage be +another, rather than for to putte hem in that aventure. + +Aftre that, is another yle, where that wommen maken gret sorwe, whan hire +children ben y born: and whan thei dyen, thei maken gret feste and gret +joye and revelle, and thanne thei casten hem into a gret fuyr brennynge. +And tho that loven wel hire husbondes, zif hire husbondes ben dede, thei +casten hem also in the fuyr, with hire children, and brennen hem. And thei +seyn, that the fuyr schalle clensen hem of alle filthes and of alle vices, +and thei schulle gon pured and clene in to another world, to hire +husbondes, and thei schulle leden hire children with hem. And the cause whi +that they wepen, when hire children ben born, is this, for whan thei comen +in to this world, thei comen to labour, sorwe and hevynesse: and whi thei +maken ioye and gladnesse at hire dyenge, is be cause that, as thei seyn, +thanne thei gon to Paradys, where the ryveres rennen mylk and hony, where +that men seen hem in ioye and in habundance of godes, with outen sorwe and +labour. In that yle men maken hire kyng evere more be eleccioun: and thei +ne chese him nought for no noblesse ne for no ricchesse, but suche an on as +is of gode maneres and of gode condiciouns, and therewith alle rightfulle; +and also that he be of gret age, and that he have no children. In that yle +men ben fulle rightfulle, and thei don rightfulle iuggementes in every +cause, bothe of riche and pore, smale and grete, aftre the quantytee of the +trespas, that is mys don. And the kyng may nought deme no man to dethe, +with outen assent of his barouns and other wyse men of conseille, and that +alle the court accorde therto. And zif the kyng him self do ony homycydie +or ony cryme, as to sle a man, or ony suche cas, he schalle dye therefore; +but he schalle not be slayn, as another man, but men schulle defende in +peyne of dethe, that no man be so hardy to make him companye, ne to speke +with hym, ne that no man zeve him ne selle him ne serve him nouther of mete +ne drynk: and so schalle he dye in myschef. Thei spare no man that hath +trespaced, nouther for love ne for favour ne for ricchesse ne for noblesse, +but that he schalle have aftre that he hathe don. + +Bezonde that yle, is another yle, where is gret multytude of folk; and thei +wole not for nothing eten flesche of hares, ne of hennes, ne of gees: and +zit thei bryngen forthe y now, for to seen hem and to beholden hem only. +But thei eten Flesche of alle other bestes, and drynken mylk. In that +contre, thei taken hire doughtres and hire sustres to here wyfes, and hire +other kynneswomen. And zif there ben 10 or 12 men or mo dwellynge in an +hows, the wif of eyeryche of hem schalle ben comoun to hem alle, that +duellen in that hows; so that every man may liggen with whom he wole of +hem, on o nyght. And zif sche have ony child, sche may zeve it to what man +sche list, that hathe companyed with hire; so that no man knoweth there, +whether the child be his or anotheres. And zif ony man seye to hem, that +thei norrischen other mennes children, thei answeren, that so don other men +hires. In that contre and be all Ynde, ben gret plentee of cokodrilles, +that is the maner of a longe serpent, as I haye seyd before. And in the +nyght, thei dwellen in the watir, and on the day, upon the lond, in roches +and caves. And thei ete no mete in all the wynter: but thei lyzn as in a +drem, as don the serpentes. Theise serpentes slen men, and thei eten hem +wepynge: and whan thei eten, thei meven the over Jowe, and noughte the +nether Jowe; and thei have no Tonge. In that contree, and in many other +bezonde that, and also in manye on this half, men putten in werke the sede +of cotoun: and thei sowen it every zeer, and than growthe it in smale +trees, that beren cotoun. And so don men every zeer; so that there is +plentee of cotoun, at alle tymes. Item, in this yle and in many other, +there is a manner of wode, hard and strong: who so coverethe the coles of +that wode undir the assches there offe, the coles wil duellen and abyden +alle quyk, a zere or more. And that tre hathe many leves, as the gynypre +hathe. And there ben also many trees, that of nature thei wole never brenne +ne rote in no manere. And there ben note trees, that beren notes, als grete +as a mannes hed. There also ben many bestes, that ben clept orafles. +[Footnote: Giraffes.] In Arabye, thei ben clept gerfauntz; that is a best +pomelee or apotted; that is but a litylle more highe, than is a stede; but +he hathe the necke a 20 cubytes long: and his croup and his tayl is as of +an hert: and he may loken over a gret highe Hous. And there ben also in +that contree manye camles, that is a lytille best as a goot, that is wylde +and he lyvethe be the eyr, and etethe nought ne drynkethe nought at no +tyme. And he chaungethe his colour often tyme: for men seen him often +scithes, now in o colour and now in another colour: and he may chaunge him +in to alle maner of coloures that him list, saf only in to red and white. +There ben also in that contree passynge grete serpentes, sume of 120 Fote +long, and thei ben of dyverse coloures, as rayed, rede, grene and zalowe, +blewe and blake, and alle spekelede. And there ben othere, that han crestes +upon hire hedes: and thei gon upon hire feet upright: and thei ben wel a 4 +fadme gret or more: and thei duellen alle weye in roches or in mountaynes: +and thei han alle wey the throte open, of whens thei droppen venym alle +weys. And there ben also wylde swyn of many coloures, als gret as ben oxen +in oure contree, and thei ben alle spotted, as ben zonge fownes. And there +ben also urchounes, als gret as wylde swyn here. Wee clepen hem poriz de +spyne. And ther ben lyouns alle whyte gret and myghty. And ther ben also of +other bestes, als grete and more gretter than is a destrere: and men clepen +hem loerancz: and sum men clepen hem odenthos: and thei han a blak hed and +3 longe hornes trenchant in the front, scharpe as a sword; and the body is +sclender. And he is a fulle felonous best: and he chacethe and sleethe the +olifaunt. There ben also manye other bestes, fullye wykked and cruelle, +that ben not mocheles more than a bere; and thei han the hed lyche a bore; +and thei han 6 feet: and on every foote 2 large clawes trenchant: and the +body is lyche a bere, and the tayl as a lyoun. And there ben also myse, als +gret as houndes; and zalowe myse, als grete as ravenes. And ther ben gees +alle rede, thre sithes more gret than oure here: and thei han the hed, the +necke and the brest alle black. And many other dyverse bestes ben in tho +contrees, and elle where there abouten: and manye dyverse briddes also; of +the whiche, it were to longe for to telle zou: and therefore I passe over +at this tyme. + + +CAPVT. 47. + +De Bracmannorum et aliorum Insulis. + +Bracmannorum Insula quasi ad medium Imperij consistit Praesbyteri Ioannis. +Hic licet Christiani non sunt, viuunt tamen naturali optimo more. Rudes +enim et incomparati, simplices, et inscij omnis artis apparent. Non cupidi, +superbi, inuidi, iracundi, gulosi, aut luxuriosi nec iurant, fraudant, aut +mentiuntur. Laborant corpora, sed intendunt animo implere quo ad valent +naturale mandatum, hoc facias alijs quod tibi vis fieri: credentes et +adorantes omnium creatorum Deum, et sperantes ab ipso simpliciter +Paradisum. + +Sobrij quoque sunt, quapropter et longo tempore viuunt: et si quis ab eorum +moribus degenerat, proscribitur perpetuò sine mora, omnibus nulla posita +differentia personarum, vnde et in iusto Dei iudicio, quòd naturalem +exercere iustitiam contendunt, Elementa eis naturaliter obsequuntur, et +rarò eos tangit tempestas, aut fames, pestilentia aut gladius. + +[Sidenote: Flumen Chene.] Magna riparia dicta Chene currit per Insulam, +ministrans piscium et aquarum copiam: Istos olim Alexander rex Grecorum +debellare cupiens, misit eis literas comminationis, cui inter caetera +notabilia remandauerunt, nihil se habere curiosi, quod Rex tantus deberet +concupiscere, nihilque ita se timere perdituros sicut pacem bonam, quam +hactenus habuerunt inconcussam: sicque diuino nutu est actum vt Rex +truculentus ad alia se verteret, atque in breui postmodùm caderet, quia +dissipat Dominus eos, qui bella volunt, et istis manet pax multa +diligentibus eam. + +[Sidenote: Pytan.] Pytan Insula breuis continet paucos et breues +habitatores, Pygmaeis modico longiores, qui decoris vultibus nullo vnquam +cibo vescentes, specialis pomi quod secum portant sustentantur odore, quo +si carerent ad parum, color in vultu marcesceret, et die tertia vita +periret. + +Discretio et rationabilitas ijs adest modica, nec enim habent laborare nisi +pro vestitu, quem sibi circa arbusta colligunt: Et conficit vnusquisque pro +12 annis vitæ suæ. + +Vltra hanc Insulam siluestres, et fortes habentur homines, sed bestiales, +vestiti per totum corpus proprijs capillis et pilis, exceptis palmis, et +faciebus, qui videntur penitus gubernatione et politia carere: venantur +carnes per siluas, et discurrunt piscantes in aquis, omnia cruda vorantes. + +[Sidenote: Fluius Briemer.] Huius ad terræ metas manat fluuius Briemer +latitudinis duarum leucarum, et semis, quem nos transire nequiuimus, nec +ausi fuimus. Quoniam illo transmisso instant deserta 15, aut plurium +diætatum inhabitata nunc temporis (prout audieramus) diuersis et nobis +ignotis generibus bestiarum, serpentum, draconum, gryphium, aspidum, +dypsarum, et colubrorum in multitudine tanta, vt centum millia armatorum +simul pertingere vsquè ad arbores, quæ ibi dicuntur solis et lunæ, vix +possent. Attamen suo tempore Alexander magnus scribitur pertigisse, et +quaedam ab arboribus fictitia succepisse responsa. + +[Sidenote: Balsamum indicum.] Circa has arbores excolitur Balsamum, cuius +liquoris comparatio nusquam scitur contineri sub coelo. Nam ibidem homines, +de istarum arborum fructibus et Balsamo vtentes dicuntur illorum virtute +quadringentis aut pluribus annis viuere. + +Peruenit autem et Dux Danus Ogerus, ac manducauit de illis, vnde et +nonnulli præ sensus stoliditate vel fidei leuitate putant ipsum adhuc alibi +viuere in terris. Ego autem quia tantum pro dilatanda Christianitate +laborauit arbitror magis, eum regnare cum Christo in coelis. + +[Sidenote: Taprobana Insula, et eius descriptio.] Versus Orientales partes +Indorum consistit magna regio Taprobane exuberans optimis terrenorum +bonorum, in quam nauigio intrauimus in octo vel circa diaetis per aquam +satis tenuem, haud profundam. Ibi, sicut et in alijs multis Insulis, rex +non nascitur sed eligitur per partes terræ: et est haec vna de quindecim +nominatis Regionibus conquisitionis Ogeri. Ista, cum modicum declinet à +circulo terræ sub Æquatore, patitur in anno duas æstates, et duas hyemes, +si tamen hyems aliqua dici debeat, et non magis æstas, quia nullus hic dies +anni caret fructu, flore, germine. + +Habitatores sunt discreti, et honesti, vnde et mercatores de remotis +partibus libenter cum ijs communicant: et sparsim per regionem habitant +plurimi diuites Christiani. + +[Sidenote: Orilla. Argita.] Hijs iunguntur duæ insulæ (quas nos vocamus, +Orilla, et Argita), quanquam illa lingua aliter nominentur. In quarum prima +sunt multæ mineriæ auri, in secunda argenti, et propter quandam +crassitudinem aeris continuam, perpauca apparent sydera, praeter vnum quod +dicunt Canopum, quod æstimo planetam Veneris. [Sidenote: Hunc locum notat +Gerardus Mercator in sua charta generali.] Et quod mirum est valdè de omni +lunatione ijs apparet nisi 2. quarta. Cuius rei probabilis ratio effugit +etiam Astronomos valdè peritos. Atque per has Insulas quoddam rubrum mare à +mari Oceano segregatur. + +Itaque in Orilla in locis multis effoditur, colligitur, et conflatur +optimum auri metallum, per viros, mulieres, et paruulos in hoc instructos, +sed et in nonnullis ibi montibus monstrantur congregationes bestiolarum in +quantitate nostrorum catulorum, in formicarum forma ac natura totali: qui +pro suis viribus effodiunt, purificant, et colligunt cum intenta +occupatione auri minutias, eas reponentes, et repositas retrahentes de +cauernis et specubus in cauernas et specus. Et in conseruando sum +diligentes et acres, vt nemo audeat de facili propinquare, nisi quod +interdum ab illis pausantibus; seu ab æstu se occultantibus, aliqui non +sine periculo in dromedarijs et veredarijs rapiunt, vel furantur. + +Solet etiam ab eis obtineri, quòd excogitato ingenio super equam quæ nuper +foetum ediderit, imponentes homines duas de ligno cistulas, seu cophinos +nouos, vacuos, et apertos à lateribus dependentes propè terram: hanc +famelicam dimittunt vt se pascat ad herbas in montem: Quam formicæ videntes +solam salientes et iocantes, colludunt ad eam et ad eius confines pro +nouitate: et quoniam eis est naturale, vt circa se omne vacuum implere +conentur comportant certatim aurum suum in vasculis suis mundis. Cumque +homines a remotis tempus obseruauerint, emittunt pellum equæ vt videat +matrem, cuius aspectu iam diu stetit priuatus, ad cuius hinnitum protinus +equa reuertitur onusta de auro. Hijs ergò et similibus modis homines aurum +diripiunt à formicis. + + +CAPVT. 48. + +Aliquid de loco Paradisi terrestris per auditum. + +A Finibus Imperij Indiæ recta linea in orientem nihil est habitatum vel +habitabile, propter rupium, et montium altitudinem, et asperitatem, et +propter aeris inter Alpes diuersitatem: nam in multis locis, licet +quandoque aer sit serenus, nunc fit spissus nunc fumosus, vel venenosus, et +frequenter die medio tenebrosus. Durantque aut potius aggrauescunt +huiusmodi difficultates, vsque ad illum amænissimum Paradisi locum, quem +protoplausti per inobedientiam sibi et posteris perdidisse noscuntur, quod +spacium si metiri posset, est multarum vtique diætarum. Quia iam non +vlterius processi, nec procedere quiui, pauca duntaxat de illo loco referam +verisimilia, quæ didici per auditum. + +[Sidenote: Descriptio Paradisi.] Paradisus terrestris dicitur locus +spaciosus ad amplitudinem quasi quinque Insularum nostrarum, Angliæ, +Normanniæ, Hiberniæ, Scotiæ, et Noruegiæ, aut forsan satis plurium. Cuius +situs est pertingens in altitudine ad aeris supremam superficiem, eò quod +illic terra vel terræ orbis sit multum spissior quà m alibi per modum +excentricum à vero centro mundi, nec valet hoc deinde ab aliquo experto +refelli, scriptura veritatis clamante, quòd ibi sit fons irrigans vniuersam +superficiem terrae: aquae enim est natura semper fluere ad Ima. + +Exeunt autem ab illo fonte versus nostri partes hemispherij, hoc est nobis +de illo loco in occidentem quatuor flumina, Pyson, Gyon, Tygris, et +Euphrates, ab ista dimidia parte terrae circa Æquatoris circulum terrae +influentes, quapropter et merito credendum videtur, exire de eodem fonte et +alia quatuor flumina irrigantia terram oppositam, quae est circa alteram +dimidiam partem circuli Æquatoris, quamuis nos eorum fluminum loca, +virtutes, et nomina ignoramus, quòd homines habitant ab alia parte +Æquinoctij. + +[Sidenote: Gentes ad austrum Aequatoris.] Hoc tamen volo sciri pro vero et +audiui, illic terræ faciem inhabitatam in maxima multitudine ciuitatum, +vrbium, et regionum, quoniam et eorum institores Indiam frequentant, et +nunciant sibi inuicem gentes et principes per literas, ac alijs modis +destinare sunt visi. + +[Sidenote: Ganges fluuius.] Vnus nostrorum fluuiorum Pyson currit per +Indiam, et per eius deserta quandoque sub terra, sed saepiùs supra, qui et +Ganges illic appellatus est, ab illo vltimo Paganitatis rege, quem Dux +Ogerus deuictum cùm baptizari renueret in ipso flumine proiectum submersit. + +Ad littus huius reperiuntur multi lapides praeciositatis immensæ et metalli +grani carissimi, nec non et auri mineriæ, multumque descendit in eo natans +lignum Aloes ex Paradiso, quod rebus miræ virtutis inserit Salomon in +Canticis. + +Hinc secundus fluuius Gyon, currit per Aethiopiam, vnde dum venit in +Ægyptum, accipit nomen Nilus. Tertius Tygris veniens per Assyriam influit +maiorem Armeniam et Persiam: tandemque fluuij singuli per loca singula se +iactant in mare per quod defluunt vsque ad Nador, id est, ad oppositum +diametrum paradisi: Ideoque merito æstimantur omnes vniuerso orbe aquæ +dulces originem capere, à supradicto paradisi fonte, quamuis secundum +distantiam maiorem vel minorem, et secundum naturas rerum per quas meant +diuersos habere inueniuntur sapores, atque virtutes. + +Porrò ipsum Paradisi locum audiui à tribus plagis, orientali, meridionali, +et septentrionali, inaccessibilem tam hominibus quà m bestijs, eo quòd +apparet ripis perpendiculariter abscissa, tanquam inestimabilis +altitudinis. Et ab occidente id est nostra parte tanquam super omnium +humanorum intuitum rogus ardens, qui in scripturis rumphea flammea +appellator, vt nulli creaturæ terrenæ ascensus in eum credatur nisi +quibusdam volatilibus, prout decreuit iusti iudicij Deus. + +Ambulantibus enim illuc siue repentibus hominibus obstarent tenebræ imo +rupes, aer infestus, bestiæ, serpentes, frigus, et camua. Nauigare autem +contra ictum fluminis nitentes impediret intrinsecus recursus, ac +impetuosus et quandoque subterraneus aquæ cursus descendentis cum +vehementia ab euectissimo, vt dictum est, loco, qui suo quoque strepitu, +per petras atque strictos aliosque diuersos cadens gurgites, efficeret +surdos, et aeris mutatio caecos, vnde et multi tam nobiles quà m ignobiles, +fatua sese audacia in isto ponentes periculo perierunt, alijs excoecatis, +alijs absurdatis, et nonnullis in ipso accessu subitanea morte peremptis. +Ex quo nimirum credi habetur isto Deum displicere conatum. + +Quapropter et ego ex illo loco statui animum ad repatriandum, quatenus Deo +propitio, Anglia quæ me produxit seculo viuentem, usciperet morientem. + + +Of the Godenesse of the folk of the Yle of Bragman. Of Kyng Alisandre: and + wherfore the Emperour of Ynde is clept Prestre John. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXIX.] And bezonde that yle, is another yle, gret and gode, +and, plentyfous, where that ben gode folk and trewe, and of gode lyvynge, +aftre hire beleve, and of gode feythe. And alle be it that thei ben not +cristned, ne have no perfyt lawe, zit natheles of kyndely lawe, thei ben +fulle of alle vertue, and thei eschewen alle vices and alle malices and +alle synnes. For thei ben not proude ne coveytous ne envyous ne wrathefulle +ne glotouns ne leccherous; ne thei don to no man other wise than thei wolde +that other men diden to hem: and in this poynt, thei fullefillen the 10 +commandementes of God: and thei zive no charge of aveer ne of ricchesse: +and thei lye not, ne thei swere not, for non occasioun; but thei seyn +symply, ze and nay. For thei seyn, He that swerethe, wil disceyve his +neyghbore: and therfore alle that thei don, thei don it with outen othe. +And men clepen that yle, the Yle of Bragman: and somme men clepen it the +Lond of Feythe. And thorgh that lond runnethe a gret ryvere, that is clept +Thebe. And in generalle, alle the men of tho yles and of alle the marches +there abouten, ben more trewe than in ony othere contrees there abouten, +and more righte fulle than othere, in alle thinges. In that yle is no +thief, ne mordrere, ne comoun woman, ne pore beggere, ne nevere was man +slayn in that contree. And thei ben so chast, and leden so gode lif, as tho +thei weren religious men: and thei fasten alle dayes. And because thei ben +so trewe and so rightfulle and so fulle of alle gode condiciouns, thei +weren nevere greved with tempestes ne with thondre ne with leyt ne with +hayl ne with pestylence ne with werre ne with hungre ne with non other +tribulaccioun, as wee ben many tymes amonges us, for our synnes. Wherfore +it semethe wel, that God lovethe hem and is plesed with hire creance, for +hire gode dedes. Thei beleven wel in God, that made alle thinges; and him +thei worschipen. And thei preysen non erthely ricchesse; and so thei ben +alle right fulle. And thei lyven fulle ordynatly, and so sobrely in met and +drynk, that thei lyven right longe. And the most part of hem dyen with +outen syknesse, whan nature faylethe hem for elde. And it befelle in Kyng +Alisandres tyme, that he purposed him to conquere that yle, and to maken +hem to holden of him. And whan thei of the contree herden it, thei senten +messangeres to him with lettres, that seyden thus: What may ben y now to +that man, to whom alle the world is insuffisant: thou schalt fynde no thing +in us, that may cause the to warren azenst us: for wee have no ricchesse, +ne none wee coveyten: and alle the godes of our contree ben in comoun. Oure +mete, that we susteyne with alle oure bodyes, is our richesse: and in stede +of tresoure of gold and sylver, wee maken oure tresoure of accord and pees, +and for to love every man other. And for to apparaylle with oure bodyes, +wee usen a sely litylle clout, for to wrappen in oure carcynes. Oure wyfes +ne ben not arrayed for to make no man plesance, but only connable array, +for to eschewe folye. Whan men peynen hem to arraye the body, for to make +it semen fayrere than God made it, thei don gret synne. For man scholde not +devise no aske grettre beautee, than God hathe ordeyned man to ben at his +birthe. The erthe mynystrethe to us 2 thynges; our liflode, that comethe of +the erthe that wee lyve by, and oure sepulture aftre oure dethe. Wee have +ben in perpetuelle pees tille now, that thou come to disherite us; and also +wee have a kyng, nought for to do justice to every man, for he schalle +fynde no forfete amonge us; but for to kepe noblesse, and for to schewe +that wee ben obeyssant, wee have a kyng. For justice ne hathe not among us +no place: for wee don no man otherwise than wee desiren that man don to us; +so that rightwisnesse ne vengeance han nought to don amonges us; so that no +thing thou may take fro us, but oure god pes, that alle weys hath dured +amonge us. And whan Kyng Alisandre had rad theise lettres, he thoughte that +he scholde do gret synne, for to trouble hem: and thanne he sente hem +surteez, that thei scholde not ben aferd of him, and that thei scholde +kepen hire gode maneres and hire gode pees, as thei hadden used before of +custom; and so he let hem allone. + +Another yle there is, that men clepen Oxidrate; and another yle, that men +clepen Gynosophe, where there is also gode folk, and fulle of gode feythe: +and thei holden for the most partye the gode condiciouns and customs and +gode maneres, as men of the contree above seyd: but thei gon alle naked. In +to that yle entred Kyng Alisandre, to see the manere. And when he saughe +hire gret feythe and hire trouthe, that was amonges hem, he seyde that he +wolde not greven hem: and bad hem aske of him, what that they wolde have of +hym, ricchesse or ony thing elles; and thei scholde have it with gode +wille. And thei answerden, that he was riche y now, that hadde mete and +drynke to susteyne the body with. For the ricchesse of this world, that is +transitorie, is not worthe: but zif it were in his power to make hem +immortalle, there of wolde thei preyen him, and thanken him. And Alisandre +answerde hem, that it was not in his powere to don it, because he was +mortelle, as thei were. And thanne thei asked him, whi he was so proud and +so fierce and so besy, for to putten alle the world undre his subieccioun, +righte as thou were a god; and hast no terme of this lif, neither day ne +hour; and wylnest to have alle the world at thi commandement, that schalle +leve the with outen fayle, or thou leve it. And righte as it hathe ben to +other men before the, right so it schalle ben to othere aftre the: and from +hens schal thou bere no thyng; but as thou were born naked, righte so alle +naked schalle thi body ben turned in to erthe, that thou were made of. +Wherfore thou scholdest thenke and impresse it in thi mynde, that nothing +is immortalle, but only God, that made alle thing. Be the whiche answere, +Alisandre was gretly astoneyed and abayst; and alle confuse departe from +hem. And alle be it that theyse folk han not the articles of oure feythe, +as wee han, natheles for hire gode feythe naturelle, and for hire gode +entent, I trowe fulle, that God lovethe hem, and that God take hire servyse +to gree, right as he did of Job, that was a Paynem, and held him for his +trewe servaunt. And therfore alle be it that there ben many dyverse lawes +in the world, zit I trowe, that God lovethe alweys hem that loven him, and +serven him mekely in trouthe; and namely, hem that dispysen the veyn glorie +of this world; as this folk don, and as Job did also: and therfore seyde +oure Lorde, be the mouthe of Ozee the prophete, _Ponam eis multiplices +leges meas_. And also in another place, _Qui totum orbem subdit suis +legibus_. And also our Lord seythe in the Gospelle, _Alias oves habeo, que +non sunt ex hoc ovili_; that is to seyne, that he hadde othere servauntes, +than tho that ben undre Cristene lawe. And to that acordethe the avisioun, +that Seynt Petir saughe at Jaffe, how the aungel cam from Hevene, and +broughte before him diverse bestes, as serpentes and other crepynge bestes +of the erthe, and of other also gret plentee, and bad him take and ete. And +Seynt Petir answerde; I ete never, quoth he, of unclene bestes. And thanne +seyde the aungelle, _Non dices immunda, que Deus mundavit_. And that was in +tokene, that no man scholde have in despite non erthely man, for here +diverse lawes: for wee knowe not whom God lovethe, ne whom God hatethe. And +for that ensample, whan men seyn _De profundis_, thei seyn it in comoun and +in generalle, with the Cristene, _pro animabus omnium defunctorum, pro +quibus sit orandum_. And therfore seye I of this folk, that ben so trewe +and so feythefulle, that God lovethe hem. For he hathe amonges hem many of +the prophetes, and alle weye hathe had. And in tho yles, thei prophecyed +the incarnacioun of oure Lord Jesu Crist, how he scholde ben born of a +mayden; 3000 zeer or more or oure Lord was born of the Virgyne Marie. And +thei beleeven wel in the incarnacioun, and that fulle perfitely: but thei +knowe not the manere, how be suffred his passioun and dethe for us. + +And bezonde theise yles, there is another yle, that is clept Pytan. The +folk of that contree ne tyle not, ne laboure not the erthe: for thei eten +no manere thing: and thei ben of gode colour, and of faire schap, aftre +hire gretnesse: but the smalle ben as dwerghes: but not so litylle, as ben +the pigmeyes. Theise men lyven be the smelle of wylde apples, and whan thei +gon ony fer weye, thei beren the apples with hem. For zif the hadde lost +the savour of the apples, thei scholde dyen anon. Thei ne ben not fulle +resonable: but thei ben symple and bestyalle. + +Aftre that, is another yle, where the folk ben alle skynned, roughe heer, +as a rough best, saf only the face and the pawme of the hond. Theise folk +gon als wel undir the watir of the see, as thei don above the lond, alle +drye. And thei eten bothe flessche and fissche alle raughe. In this yle is +a great ryvere, that is wel a 2 myle and an half of brede, that is clept +Beumare. And fro that rivere a 15 journeyes in lengthe, goynge be the +desertes of the tother syde of the ryvere, (whoso myght gon it, for I was +not there: but it was told us of hem of the contree, that with inne tho +desertes) weren the trees of the sonne, and of the mone, that spaken to +Kyng Alisandre, and warned him of his dethe. And men seyn, that the folk +that kepen tho trees, and eten of the frute and of the bawme that growethe +there, lyven wel 400 zeere or 500 zere, be vertue of the frut and of the +bawme. For men seyn, that bawme growethe there in gret plentee, and no +where elles, saf only at Babyloyne, as I have told zou before. Wee wolde +han gon toward the trees fulle gladly, zif wee had myght: but I trowe, that +100000 men of armes myghte not passen the desertes safly, for the gret +multytude of wylde bestes, and of grete dragouns, and of grete multytude +serpentes, that there ben, that slen and devouren alle that comen aneyntes +hem. In that contre ben manye white olifantes with outen nombre, and of +unycornes, and of lyouns of many maneres, and many of suche bestes, that I +have told before, and of many other hydouse bestes with outen nombre. + +Many other yles there ben in the lond of Prestre John, and many grete +marveyles, that weren to long to tellen alle, bothe of his ricchesse and of +his noblesse, and of the gret plentee also of precious stones, that he +hathe. I trow that zee knowe wel y now, and have herd seye, wherefore the +Emperour is clept Prestre John. But nathales for hem that knowen not, I +schalle seye zou the cause. It was somtyme an Emperour there, that was a +worthi and a fulle noble prynce, that hadde Cristene knyghtes in his +companye, as he hathe that is how. So it befelle, that he hadde gret list +for to see the service in the chirche, among Cristen men. And than dured +Cristendom bezonde the zee, alle Turkye, Surrye, Tartarie, Jerusalem, +Palestyne, Arabye, Halappee, and alle the lond of Egypte. So it befelle, +that this emperour cam, with a Cristene knyght with him, into a chirche in +Egypt: and it was the Saterday in Wyttson woke. And the bishop made ordres. +And he beheld and listend the servyse fulle tentyfly: and he askede the +Cristene knight, what men of degree thei scholden ben prestes. And than the +emperour seyde, that he wolde no longer ben clept kyng ne emperour, but +preest; and that he wolde have the name of the first preest, that went out +of the chirche: and his name was John. And so evere more sithens, he is +cleped Prestre John. + +In his lond ben manye Cristene men of gode feythe and of gode lawe; and +namely of hem of the same contree; and han comounly hire prestes, that +syngen the messe, and maken the sacrement of the awtier of bred, right as +the Grekes don: but thei seyn not so many thinges as the messe, as men don +here. For thei seye not but only that, that the apostles seyden, as oure +Lord taughte hem: righte as seynt Peter and seynt Thomas and the other +apostles songen the messe, seyenge the Pater-noster, and the wordes of the +sacrement. But wee have many mo addiciouns, that dyverse popes han made, +that thei ne knowe not offe; + + +Of the Hilles of Gold, that Pissemyres kepen: and of the 4 Flodes, that + comen fro Paradys terrestre. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXX.] Toward the est partye of Prestre Johnes lond, is an +yle gode an gret, that men clepen Taprobane, that is fulle noble and fulle +fructuous: and the kyng thereof is fulle ryche, and is undre the obeyssance +of Prestre John. And alle weys there thei make hire king be eleccyoun. In +that ile ben 2 someres and 2 wyntres; and men harvesten the corn twyes a +zeer. And in alle the cesouns of the zeer ben the gardynes florisht. There +dwellen gode folke and resonable, and manye Cristene men amonges hem, that +ben so riche, that thei wyte not what to done with hire godes. Of olde +tyme, whan men passed from the lond of Prestre John unto that yle, men +maden ordynance for to passe by schippe, 23 dayes or more: but now men +passen by schippe in 7 dayes. And men may see the botme of the see in many +places: for it is not fulle depe. + +Besyde that yle, toward the est, ben 2 other yles: and men clepen that on +Orille, and that other Argyte; of the whiche alle the lond is myne of gold +and sylver. And tho yles ben right where that the Rede See departethe fro +the see occean. And in tho yles men seen ther no sterres so clerly as in +other places: for there apperen no sterres, but only o clere sterre, that +men clepen Canapos. And there is not the mone seyn in alle the lunacioun, +saf only the seconde quarteroun. In the yle also of this Taprobane ben gret +hilles of gold, that Pissemyres kepen fulle diligently. And thei fynen the +pured gold, and casten away the unpured. And theise Pissemyres ben gret as +houndes: so that no man dar come to tho hilles: for the Pissemyres wolde +assaylen hem and devouren hem anon; so that no man may gete of that gold, +but be gret sleighte. And therfore whan it is gret hete, the Pissemyres +resten hem in the erthe, from pryme of the day in to noon: and than the +folk of the con tree taken camayles, dromedaries and hors and other bestes +and gon thidre, and chargen hem in alle haste that thei may. And aftre that +thei fleen away, in alle haste that the bestes may go, or the Pissemyres +comen out of the erthe. And in other tymes, whan it is not so hote, and +that he Pissemyres ne resten hem not in the erthe, than thei geten gold be +this sotyltee: thei taken mares, that han zonge coltes or foles, and leyn +upon the mares voyde vesselles made therfore; and thei ben alle open +aboven, and hangynge lowe to the erthe: and thanne thei sende forth tho +mares for to pasturen aboute the hilles, and with holden the foles with hem +at home. And whan the Pissemyres sen tho vesselles, thei lepen in anon, and +thei han this kynde, that thei lete no thing ben empty among hem, but anon +thei fillen it, be it what maner of thing that it be: and so thei fillen +tho vesselles with gold. And whan that the folk supposen, that the vesselle +ben fulle, thei putten forthe anon the zonge foles, and maken hem to nyzen +aftre hire dames; and than anon the mares retornen towardes hire foles, +with hire charges of gold; and than men dischargen hem, and geten gold y +now be this sotyltee. For the Pissemyres wole suffren bestes to gon and +pasturen amonges hem; but no man in no wyse. + +And bezonde the lond and the yles and the desertes of Prestre Johnes +lordschipe, in goynge streyght toward the est, men fynde nothing but +mountaynes and roches fulle grete: and there is the derke regyoun, where no +man may see, nouther be day ne be nyght, as thei of the contree seyn. And +that desert, and that place of derknesse, duren fro this cost unto Paradys +terrestre; where that Adam oure foremost fader, and Eve weren putt, that +dwelleden there but lytylle while; and that is towards the est, at the +begynnynge of the erthe. But that is not that est, that wee clep oure est, +on this half, where the sonne risethe to us: for whenne the sonne is est in +tho partyes, toward Paradys terrestre, it is thanne mydnyght in oure +parties o this half, for the rowndenesse of the erthe, of the whiche I have +towched to zou before. For oure Lord God made the erthe alle round, in the +mydde place of the firmament. And there as mountaynes and hilles ben, and +valeyes, that is not but only of Noes flode, that wasted the softe ground +and the tendre, and felle doun into valeyes: and the harde erthe, and the +roche abyden mountaynes, whan the soft erthe and tendre wax nessche, +throghe the water, and felle and becamen valeyes. + +Of Paradys, ne can not I speken propurly: for I was not there. It is fer +bezonde; and that forthinkethe me: and also I was not worthi. But as I have +herd seye of wyse men bezonde, I schalle telle zou with gode wille. Paradys +terrestre, as wise men seyn, is the highest place of erthe, that is in alle +the world: and it is so highe, that it touchethe nyghe to the cercle of the +mone, there as the mone makethe hire torn. For sche is so highe, that the +flode of Noe ne myght not come to hire, that wolde have covered alle the +erthe of the world alle aboute, and aboven and benethen, saf Paradys only +allone. And this Paradys is enclosed alle aboute with a walle; and men wyte +not wherof it is. For the walles ben covered alle over with mosse; as it +semethe. And it semethe not that the walle is ston of nature. And that +walle strecchethe fro the southe to the northe; and it hathe not but on +entree, that is closed with fyre brennynge; so that no man, that is +mortalle, ne dar not entren. And in the moste highe place of Paradys, evene +in the myddel place, is a welle, that castethe out the 4 flodes, that +rennen be dyverse londes: of the whiche, the first is clept Phison or +Ganges, that is alle on: and it rennethe thorghe out Ynde or Emlak: in the +whiche ryvere ben manye preciouse stones, and mochel of lignum aloes, and +moche gravelle of gold. And that other ryvere is clept Nilus or Gyson, that +gothe be Ethiope, and aftre be Egypt. And that other is clept Tigris, that +rennethe be Assirye and be Armenye the grete. And that other is clept +Eufrate, that rennethe also be Medee and be Armonye and be Persye. And men +there bezonde seyn, that alle the swete watres of the world aboven and +benethen, taken hire begynnynge of the welle of Paradys: and out of that +welle, alle watres comen and gon. The firste ryvere is clept Phison, that +is to seyne in hire langage, Assemblee: for many other ryveres meten hem +there, and gon in to that ryvere. And sum men clepen it Ganges; for a kyng +that was in Ynde, that highte Gangeres, and that it ran thorge out his +lond. And that water is in sum place clere, and in sum place trouble: in +sum place hoot, and in sum place cole. The seconde ryvere is clept Nilus or +Gyson: for it is alle weye trouble: and Gyson, in the langage of Ethiope, +is to seye trouble: and in the langage of Egipt also. The thridde ryvere, +that is clept Tigris, is as moche for to seye as faste rennynge: for he +rennethe more faste than ony of the tother. And also there is a best, that +is cleped Tigris, that is faste rennynge. The fourthe ryvere is clept +Eufrates, that is to seyne, wel berynge: for there growen manye godes upon +that ryvere, as cornes, frutes, and othere godes y nowe plentee. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, that no man that is mortelle, ne may not +approchen to that paradys. For be londe no man may go for wylde bestes, +that ben in the desertes, and for the highe mountaynes and gret huge +roches, that no man may passe by, for the derke places that ben there, and +that manye: and be the ryveres may no man go; for the water rennethe so +rudely and so scharply, because that it comethe doun so outrageously from +the highe places aboven, that it rennethe in so grete wawes, that no schipp +may not rowe ne seyle azenes it: and the watre rorethe so, and makethe so +huge noyse, and so gret tempest, that no man may here other in the schipp, +thoughe he cryede with alle the craft that he cowde, in the hyeste voys +that he myghte. Many grete lordes han assayed with gret wille many tymes +for to passen be tho ryveres toward paradys, with fulle grete companyes: +but thei myghte not speden in hire viage; and manye dyeden for werynesse of +rowynge azenst tho stronge wawes; and many of hem becamen blynde, and many +deve, for the noyse of the water: and summe weren perisscht and loste, with +inne the wawes: so that no mortelle man may approche to that place, with +outen specyalle grace of God: so that of that place I can seye zou no more. +And therfore I schall holde me stille, and retornen to that that I have +seen. + + +CAPVT. 49. + +In reuertendo de Cassan, et Riboth, et de diuite Epulone. + +[Sidenote: Via per quam Mandeuillus redijt in Angliam.] Ex hinc de illis +quæ in reuertendo vidi scribo cursim pauca, ne modum excedere videatur +materia. [Sidenote: Cassan.] Reuertebar itaque quasi per Aquilonare latus +Imperij Presbyteri Ioannis, et nunc terræ, non mari nos commendantes, +transiuimus Deo Ductore, multas Insulas in multis diaetis, et peruenimus ad +regionem magnam Cassan: haec cum sit vna de quindecim habens longitudinem +diaetarum 60. et latitudinem propè 30. posset esse nominatior omnibus ibi +circa prouincijs, si a nostris frequentaretur. + +Notandum. Cassan (secundum Odericum) est melior prouincia de mundo, vbi +strictior est, habet diaetas 50. vbi longior 60, et est vna de 12. +prouincijs Imperij Grand Can. Est ista populosa, distincta ciuitatibus, vt +quisque à quacunque plaga de vna exeat ciuitate nouerit aliam in media +diaeta propinquam. Tenétque istam regionem Cassan rex diues et potens, pro +parte de Imperio Praebyteri Ioannis, et pro parte de Imperio Grand Can. + +[Sidenote: Riboth.] De ista in reuersione nostra venimus ad Regnum Riboth, +quod similiter est vnum de quindecim, latum, et speciosum, in quo de multis +bonis, habetur plena copia. Hoc tenetur in toto de Imperio Tartarorum. + +[Sidenote: Labassi, summus idolorum pontifex.] Vna est ibi inter et super +omnes ciuitas Sacerdotalis, et Regia, in qua Rex habet suum magnificum +palatium, et summus Idolorum Pontifex quem Labassi appellant, cui omnes +Regni obediunt et populi sicut Domino Papæ nos Christiani quoniam et iubet, +et benedicit, ac confert sacerdotibus beneficia idolorum. + +Ciuitatis vndique muri sunt compacti albis et nigris lapidibus conquadratis +ad modum scakarij, omnesque contractæ simili pauimento sunt stratæ. Tanta +est illic reuerentia sacrificiorum vt si quis vel in modica quantitate, +sanguinem hominis, seu immolaticiæ pecudis fudisse deprehensus fuerit, +nequaquam iudicium mortis euadet. Et inter innumeras superstitiones est +illic vna talis. + +Haeres cuius pater defungitur, si alicuius vult esse reputationis, mandat +cognatos, amicos, Relligiosos, et sacerdotes pro posse, qui certo Die +conuenientes sub magno Symphoniæ festo, corportant defuncti cadauer, in +montis sublime cacumen. Ibi accedens dignior Praelatorum, funeris caput +abscindit, tradens haeredi in aureo disco decantanti sub deuotione suas +orationes cum suis in propria lingua. Atque interim aues regionis rapaces, +et immundæ, vt corui, vultures, et aquilæ, quæ pro consuetudine optimè +morem norunt, aduolant magno numero in aere: Tuncque Relligiosi cum +sacerdotibus detruncant corpus in frusta velut in macello, proijcientes +pecias in altum auibus, ac decantantes certam ad hoc compositam orationem, +tanquam si nostri sacerdotes cantarent. Subuenite sancti Dei, etc. + +Et habet eorum oratio, hunc sensum in sua lingua. Respice quà m iustus et +sanctus extitit homo iste, quem Angeli Dei conueniunt accipere et in +Paradisum deferre. Talique diabolico errore delusi, putant filius, et +amici, quod defunctus sit in Paradisum translatus, viuat illic sempiterne +beatus, quoniam, vbi plures conuenere volucrum, ibi maiorem laetantur et +iactant fuisse numerum Angelorum. + +Hinc deinde reuertentes, cum choris, et resonantia Musicorum, filius +paratum praestat omnibus conuiuium, in cuius fine pro extremo ferculo, +tradit singulis particulam, de patris capite summa cum devotione. Hanc +etiam capitis caluariam filius facit postmodum debitè formari et poliri +sibi pro cypho, in quo bibit in conuijs, ob recordationem amantissimi +patris. + +Ab hoc Regno decem dietis per potestatem Imperatoris Grand Can, inuenitur +Insula delectabilis, et speciosa satis: cuius Rex est praepotens in gloria, +et in diuitijs superabundans, et de multis quæ illic geruntur admirandis +vnum recito solum. + +[Sidenote: Diues Epulo.] Quòd est ibi homo quidam ditissimus nullius +dignitatis nomine honoratus, sed bysso, ac serico adornatus, et splendide +omni tempore epulatus: non ergo vult dici princeps, Dux, comes, miles, aut +huiusmodi, licet superioritatem habeat super marchiones aliquos et barones. +Eius possessionis valor æstimatur in anno 30. cuman de assinarijs bladi, et +risi, nec quærit nisi delitiosè viuere in isto seculo, vt cum diuite +Epulone sepeliatur in inferno. Cum etiam sibi derelictus sit, iste viuendi +modus a retrogenitoribus, eum et ipse posteris derelinquet. Hic tanquam +Imperiali residet palatio, cuius muri ambitus ad tractum leucæ tenditur, +continens arbusta, vineta, rinulos, fontes et stagna, aulas, et cubicula +auro strata depictaque mirè, et sculpta artificiosè, vltra quam vales +explicare, et inter omnia ad medium palatium in celso vertice atrium +amaenum, valdè tamen modico, sed cunctis praeciosius, ædificio, quasi ad +seema nostrarum Ecclesiarium, cum turribus, pilarijs, et columnis, in +quibus nihil prominet indignius auro. Nunquam vel rarò hic exit de suo +palatio cum solis pulchris quos sibi conuocat et conuariat paruis pueris et +puellis, non excedentibus 16. annos ætatis. Tendit dum libet pedibus, +quandoque vectatur equo, interdum ducitur vehiculo, nonnunquam vult ferri +gestatorio, vel certè puellaribus brachijs, et visitat saepissimè praefatum +praeciosius ædificium: atque hijs et modis alijs excogitat delectare visum +pulchris, auditum suauibus, olfactum redolentibus, tactum lenibus, et +gustum pascere delicatis. Electas semper habet praesto 50. puellas ei, et +de proximo exquisitissimè ministrantes tam ad mensam quà m ad cubiculum, et +ad omne libitum. + +[Sidenote: Versus.] Hæ ad prandium recumbenti afferunt processionis more +pro singulo ferculo semper 5. genera dapum nobilium cum dulcisonæ +resonantia cantilenæ, quarum aliquæ ei singulos detruncant genu flexo +morsellos, aliquæ ponunt in ore, mundis tergentes comedentis labia mappis. + +Nam ipse quidem in mensa continet iacentes manus puras et quietas. Post +deseruitionem ferculi primi, seruitur pro secundo in 5. alijs dapum +generibus modo quo supra, et renouatur in apponendo cantus suauior melodia. + +Ista à bsque vlla Domini cura per ministros quotidiè reparantur etiam in +maiori satis quam effor nobilitate, nisi dum ipse pro placito iusserit, +quandoque temperari. + +Deliciosius igitur quo vult deducit carnem, non curans animam, sed nec +probitatem curans terrenam, pascit sterilem, et viduæ non benefacit. Et + + Quia viuit sicut porcus, + Morientem suscipit orcus. + +[Sidenote: Longitudo vnguium. Vtunturetiam in Florida principes longis +vnguibus.] Porrò quod eum dixi manus tenere quietas, noueritis nimirum nil +posse manibus capere vel tenere, propter longitudinem, et recuruitatem +vnguium in digitis, qui sibi nullo tempore praescinduntur. Seruatur enim +hoc pro nobili more patriæ, et viri diuites delicati, qui proprios possunt +habere ministros nunquà m sibi dimittunt vngues resecare, vnde et nonnullis +circumdantur vndique manus, acsi uiderentur armatæ. + +[Sidenote: Noua historia Chinensis hoc testatur.] Foeminarum autem mos est +nobilis si habeant paruos pedes, vnde et generosarum in cunis strictissimè +simè obuoluuntur, vt vix ad medium debitæ quantitatis excrescere possint. + + +The English Version. + +Of the Customs of Kynges, and othere that dwellen in the Yles costynge to + Prestre Johnes Lond. And of the Worschipe that the Sone dothe to the + Fader, whan he is dede. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXXI.] From tho yles, that I have spoken of before, in the +lond of Prestre John, that ben undre erthe as to us, that ben o this half, +and of other yles, that ben more furthere bezonde; who so wil, pursuen hem, +for to comen azen right to pursuen hem, for to comen azen right to the +parties that he cam fro; and so environne alle erthe: but what for the +yles, what for the see, and what for strong rowynge, fewe folk assayen for +to passen that passage; alle be it that men myghte don it wel, that myght +ben of power to dresse him thereto; as I have seyd zou before. And therfore +men returnen from tho yles aboveseyd, be other yles costynge fro the lond +of Prestre John. And thanne comen men in returnynge to an yle, that is +clept Casson: and that yle hathe wel 60 jorrneyes in lengthe, and more than +50 in brede. This is the beste yle, and the beste kyngdom, that is in alle +tho partyes, out taken Cathay. And zif the merchauntes useden als moche +that contre an thei don Cathay, it wolde ben better than Cathay, in a +schort while. This contree is fulle well enhabyted, and so fulle of cytees, +and of gode townes, and enhabyted with peple, that whan a man gothe out of +o cytee, men seen another cytee, evene before hem: and that is what partye +that a man go, in alle that contree. In that yle is gret plentee of alle +godes for to lyve with, and of alle manere of spices. And there ben grete +forestes of chesteynes. The kyng of that yle is fulle ryche and fulle +myghty: and natheles he holt his lond of the grete Chane, and is obeyssant +to hym. For it is on of the 12 provynces, that the grete Chane hathe undre +him, with outen his propre lond, and with outen other lesse yles, that he +hathe: for he hathe fulle manye. + +From that kyngdom comen men, in returnynge, to another yle, that is clept +Rybothe: and it is also under the grete Chane. That is a fulle gode +contree, and fulle plentefous of alle godes and of wynes and frut, and alle +other ricchesse. And the folk of that contree han none houses: but thei +dwellen and lyggen all under tentes, made of black ferne, by alle the +contree. And the princypalle cytee, and the most royalle, is alle walled +with black ston and white. And alle the stretes also ben pathed of the same +stones. In that cytee is no man so hardy, to schede Blode of no man, ne of +no best, for the reverence of an ydole, that is worschipt there. And in +that yle dwellethe the pope of hire lawe, that they clepen Lobassy. This +Lobassy zevethe alle the benefices, and alle other dignytees, and all other +thinges, that belongen to the ydole. And alle tho that holden ony thing of +hire chirches, religious and othere, obeyen to him; as men don here to the +Pope of Rome. + +In that yle thei han a custom, be alle the contree, that whan the fader is +ded of ony man, and the sone list to do gret worchipe to his fader, he +sendethe to alle his frendes, and to all his kyn, and for religious men and +preestes, and for mynstralle also, gret plentee. And thanne men beren the +dede body unto a gret hille, with gret joye and solempnyte. And when thei +han brought it thider, the chief prelate smytethe of the hede, and leythe +it upon a gret platere of Gold and of sylver, zif so be he be a riche man; +and than he takethe the hede to the sone; and thanne the sone and his other +kyn syngen and seyn manye orisouns: and thanne the prestes, and the +religious men, smyten alle the body of the dede man in peces: and thanne +thei seyn certeyn orisouns. And the fowles of raveyne of alle the contree +abouten knowen the custom of long tyme before, and comen fleenge aboyen in +the eyr, as egles, gledes, ravenes and othere foules of raveyne, that eten +flesche. And than the preestes casten the gobettes of the flesche; and than +the foules eche of hem takethe that he may, and gothe a litille thens and +etethe it: and so thei don whils ony pece lastethe of the dede body. And +aftre that, as preestes amonges us syngen for the dede, _Subvenite sancti +Dei_, &c. right so the preestes syngen with highe voys in hire langage, +beholdethe how so worthi a man, and how gode a man this was, that the +aungeles of God comen for to sechen him, and for to bryngen him in to +paradys. And thanne semethe in to the sone, that he is highliche worschipt, +whan that many briddes and foules and raveyne comen and eten his fader. And +he that hathe most nombre of foules, is most worschiped. Thanne the sone +bryngethe hoom with him alle his kyn, and his frendes, and alle the othere +to his hows, and makethe hem a gret feste. And thanne alle his frendes +maken hire avaunt and hire dalyance, how the fowles comen thider, here 5, +here 6, here 10, and there 20, and so forthe: and thei rejoyssen hem hugely +for to speke there of. And whan thei ben at mete, the sone let brynge +forthe the hede of his fader, and there of he zevethe of the flesche to his +most specyalle frendes, in stede of entre messe, or a sukkarke. And of the +brayn panne, he letethe make a cuppe, and there of drynkethe he and his +other frendes also, with great devocioun, in remembrance of the holy man, +that the aungeles of God han eten. And that cuppe the sone schalle kepe to +drynken of, alle his lif tyme, in remembrance of his fadir. + +From that lond, in returnynge be 10 jorneyes thorghe out the lond of the +grete Chane, is another gode yle, and a gret kyngdom, where the kyng is +fulle riche and myghty. And amonges the riche men of his contree, is a +passynge riche man, that is no prince, ne duke ne erl; but he hathe mo that +holden of him londes and other lordschipes: for he is more riche. For he +hathe every zeer of annuelle rente 300000 hors charged with corn of dyverse +greynes and of ryzs: and so he ledethe a fulle noble lif, and a delycate, +aftre the custom of the contree. For he hathe every day, 50 fair damyseles, +alle maydenes, that serven him everemore at his mete, and for to lye be hem +o nyght, and for to do with hem that is to his pleasance. And whan he is at +the table, they bryngen him hys mete at every tyme, 5 and 5 to gedre. And +in bryngynge hire servyse, thei syngen a song. And aftre that, thei kutten +his mete, and putten it in his mouthe; for he touchethe no thing ne +handlethe nought, but holdethe evere more his hondes before him, upon the +table. For he hathe so long nayles, that he may take no thing, ne handle no +thing. For the noblesse of that contree is to have longe nayles, and to +make hem growen alle weys to ben as longe as men may. And there ben manye +in that contree, that han hire nayles so longe, that thei envyronne alle +the hond: and that is a gret noblesse. And the noblesse of the wommen, is +for to haven smale feet and litille: and therfore anon as thei ben born, +they leet bynde hire feet so streyte, that thei may not growen half as +nature wolde; and alle weys theise damyseles, that I spak of beforn, syngen +alle the tyme that this riche man etethe: and whan that he etethe no more +of his firste cours, than other 5 and 5 of faire damyseles bryngen him his +seconde cours, alle weys syngynge, as thei dide beforn. And so thei don +contynuelly every day, to the ende of his mete. And in this manere he +ledethe his lif. And so dide thei before him, that weren his auncestres; +and so schulle thei that comen aftre him, with outen doynge of ony dedes of +armes: but lyven evere more thus in ese, as a swyn, that is fedde in sty, +for to ben made fatte. He hathe a fulle fair palays and fulle riche, where +that he dwellethe inne: of the whiche, the walles ben in circuyt 2 myle: +and he hathe with inne many faire gardynes, and many faire halles and +chambres, and the pawment of his halles and chambres ben of gold and +sylver. And in the myd place of on of his gardynes, is a lytylle mountayne, +wher there is a litylle medewe: and in that medewe, is a litylle toothille +with toures and pynacles, alle of gold: and in that litylle toothille wole +he sytten often tyme, for to taken the ayr and to desporten hym: for that +place is made for no thing elles, but only for his desport. + +Fro that contree men comen be the lond of the grete Chane also, that I have +spoken of before. + +And ze schulle undirstonde, that of alle theise contrees, and of alle +theise yles, and of alle the dyverse folk, that I have spoken of before, +and of dyverse lawes, and of dyverse beleeves that thei han; zit is there +non of hem alle, but that thei han sum resoun with in hem and +undirstondynge, but zif it be the fewere: and that han certeyn articles of +oure feithe and summe gode poyntes of oure beleeve: and that thei beleeven +in God, that formede alle thinges and made the world; and clepen him God of +Nature, aftre that the prophete seythe, _Et metuent cum omnes fines terre_: +and also in another place, _Omnes gentes servient ei_; that is to seyn, +_Alle folke schalle serven Him_. But zit thei cone not speken perfytly; +(for there is no man to techen hem) but only that thei cone devyse be hire +naturelle wytt. For thei han no knouleche of the Sone, ne of the Holy Gost: +but thei cone alle speken of the Bible: and namely of Genesis, of the +prophetes lawes, and of the Bokes of Moyses. And thei seyn wel, that the +creatures, that thei worschipen, ne ben no goddes: but thei worschipen hem, +for the vertue that is in hem, that may not be, but only be the grace of +God. And of simulacres and of ydoles, thei seyn, that there ben no folk, +but that thei han simulacres: and that thei seyn, for we Cristene men han +ymages, as of Oure Lady, and of othere seyntes, that wee worschipen; nohte +the ymages of tree or of ston, but the seyntes, in whoos name thei ben made +aftre. For righte as the bokes of the Scripture of hem techen the clerkes, +how and in what manere thei schulle beleeven, righte so the ymages and the +peyntynges techen the lewed folk to worschipen the seyntes, and to have hem +in hire mynde, in whoos name that the ymages ben made aftre. Thei seyn +also, that the aungeles of God speken to hem in tho ydoles, and that thei +don manye grete myracles. And thei seyn sothe, that there is an aungele +with in hem: for there ben 2 maner of aungeles, a gode and an evelle; as +the Grekes seyn, Cacho and Calo; this Cacho is the wykked aungelle, and +Calo is the gode aungelle: but the tother is not the gode aungelle, but the +wykked aungelle, that is with inne the ydoles, for to disceyven hem, and +for to meyntenen hem in hire errour. + + +CAPVT. 50. + +De compositione huius tractatus in nobili ciuitate Leodiensi. + +In reuertendo igitur venitur ab hac insula per prouincias magnas Imperij +Tartarorum, in quibus semper noua, semper mira, imo nonnunquam incredibilia +viator potest videre, percipere, et audire. + +Et Noueritis, vt praedixi, me pauca eorum vidisse, quæ in terris sunt +mirabilium, sed nec hic scripsisse centessimam partem eorum quæ vidi, quod +nec omnia memoriæ commendare potui, et de commendatis multa subticui, +proptèr modestiam, quam decet omnibus actibus addi. + +Idcirco vt et alijs, qui vel antè me in partibus illis steterunt, vel ituri +sunt, maneat locus narrandi siue scribendi, modum huius pono tractatus, +potius decurtans quà m complens, quoniam alià s loquendi non esset finis, nec +aures implerentur auditu. + +[Sidenote: Concludit opus suum.] Ità que anno à natiuitate Domini nostri +Iesu Christi 1355. in patriando, cum ad nobilem Legiæ, seu Leodij ciuitatem +peruenissem, et præ grandeuitate ac artericis guttis illic decumberem in +vico qui dicitur, Bassessanemi, consului causa conualescendi aliquos +medicos ciuitatis: Et accidit, Dei nutu, vnum intrare physicum super alios +ætate simul et canicie venerandum, ac in sua arte euidenter expertum, qui +ibidem dicebatur communiter, Magister Ioannes ad barbam. + +Is, dum paritèr colloqueremur, interseruit aliquid dictis, per quod tandem +nostra inuicem renouabatur antiqua notitia, quam quondam habueramus in Cayr +Aegypti apud Melech Mandibron Soldanum, prout suprà tetigi in 7. capitulo +libri. + +Qui cum in me experientiam artis suæ excellenter monstrasset, adhortabatur +ac praecabatur instanter, vt de hijs quæ videram tempore peregrinationis, +et itinerationis meæ per mundum, aliquid digererem in scriptis ad legendum, +et audiendum pro vtilitate. + +Sicque tandem illius monitu et adiutorio, compositus est iste tractatus, de +quo certè nil scribere proposueram, donec saltem ad partes proprias in +Anglia peruenissem. [Sidenote: Edwardus tertius.] Et credo praemissa circa +me, per prouidentiam et gratiam Dei contigisse, quoniam à tempore quo +recessi, duo reges nostri Angliæ, et Franciæ, non cessauerunt inuicem +exercere destructiones, depraedationes, insidias, et interfectiones, inter +quas, nisi à Domino custoditus, non transissem sine morte, vel mortis +periculo, et sine criminum grandi cumulo. Et ecce nunc egressionis meæ anno +33. constitutus in Leodij ciuitate, quæ à mari Angliæ distat solum per duas +diætas, audio dictas Dominorum inimicitias, per gartiam Dei consopitas: +quapropter et spero, ac propono de reliquo secundum maturiorem ætatem me +posse in proprijs, intendere corporis quieti, animaeque saluti. + +Hie itaque finis sit scripti, in nomine Patris, et Filij, et spiritus +sancti, AMEN. + +Explicit itinerarium à terra Angliæ, in partes Hierosolimitanas, et in + vlteriores transmarinas, editum primò in lingua Gallicana, à Domino + Ioanne Mandeuille milite, suo authore, Anno incarnationis Domini 1355. in + Ciuitate Leodiensi: Et Paulò post in eadem ciuitate, translatum in dictam + formam Latinam. + + +The English Version. + +There ben manye other dyverse contrees and manye other marveyles bezonde, +that I have not seen: wherfore of hem I can not speke propurly, to telle +zou the manere of hem. And also in the contrees where I have ben, ben many +dyversitees of manye wondir fulle thinges, mo thanne I make mencioun of. +For it were to longe thing to devyse zou the manere. And therfore that that +I have devised zou of certeyn contrees, that I have spoken of before, I +beseche zoure worthi and excellent noblesse, that it suffise to zou at this +tyme. For zif that I devysed zou alle that is bezonde the see, another man +peraunter, that wolde peynen him and travaylle his body for to go in to tho +marches, for to encerche tho contrees, myghten ben blamed be my wordes, in +rehercynge many straunge thynges. For he myghten not seye no thing of newe, +in the whiche the hereres myghten haven outher solace or desport or lust or +lykynge in the herynge. For men seyn alle weys, that newe thynges and newe +tydynges ben plesant to here. Wherfore I wole holde me stille, with outen +ony more rehercyng of dyversiteez or of marvaylles, that ben bezonde, to +that entent and ende, that who so wil gon in to the contrees, he schalle +fynde y nowe to speke of, that I have not touched of in no wyse. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, zif it lyke zou, that at myn hom comynge, I +cam to Rome, and schewed my lif to oure holy fadir the Pope, and was +assoylled of alle that lay in my conscience, of many a dyverse grevous +poynt: as men mosten nedes, that ben in company, dwellyng amonges so many a +dyverse folk of dyverse secte and of beleeve, as I have ben. And amonges +alle, I schewed hym this tretys, that I had made aftre informacioun of men, +that knewen of thinges, that I had not seen my self; and also of marveyles +and customes, that I hadde seen my self; as fer as God wolde zeve me grace: +and besoughte his holy fadirhode, that my boke myghten be examyned and +corrected be avys of his wyse and discreet conscille. And oure holy fadir, +of his special grace, remytted my boke to ben examyned and preved be the +avys of his seyd conscille. Be the whiche, my boke was preeved for trewe; +in so moche that thei schewed me a boke, that my boke was examynde by, that +comprehended fulle moche more, ben an hundred part; be the whiche, the +_Mappa Mundi_ was made after. And so my boke (alle be it that many men ne +list not to zeve credence to no thing, but to that that thei seen with hire +eye, ne be the auctour ne the persone never so trewe) is affermed and +preved be oure holy fadir, in maner and forme as I have seyd. + +And I John Maundevylle knyghte aboveseyd, (alle thoughe I ben unworthi) +that departed from oure contrees and passed the see, the zeer of grace +1322, that have passed many londes and manye yles and contrees, and cerched +manye fulle straunge places, and have ben in manye a fulle gode honourable +comyanye, and at many a faire dede of armes, (alle be it that I dide none +my self, for myn unable insuffisance) now I am comen hom (mawgree my self) +to reste: for gowtes, artetykes, that me distreynen, tho diffynen the ende +of my labour, azenst my wille (God knowethe). And thus takynge solace in my +wrecched reste, recordynge the tyme passed, I have fulfilled theise thinges +and putte hem wryten in this boke, as it wolde come in to my mynde, the +zeer of grace 1356 in the 34 zeer that I departede from oure contrees. +Wherfore I preye to alle the rederes and hereres of this boke, zif it plese +hem, that thei wolde preyen to God for me: and I schalle preye for hem. And +alle tho that seyn for me a _Pater nostre_, with an _Ave Maria_, that God +forzeve me my synnes, I make hem parteneres, and graunte hem part of alle +the gode pilgrymages and of alle the gode dedes, that I have don, zif ony +be to his plesance: and noghte only of tho, but of alle that evere I +schalle do unto my lyfes ende. And I beseche Almighty God, fro whom alle +godenesse and grace comethe fro, that he vouchesaf, of his excellent mercy +and habundant grace, to fulle fylle hire soules with inspiracioun of the +Holy Gost, in makynge defence of alle hire gostly enemyes here in erthe, to +hire salvacioun, bothe of body and soule; to worschipe and thankynge of +Him, that is three and on, with outen begynnynge and withouten endynge; +that is, with outen qualitee, good, and with outen quantytee, gret; that in +alle places is present, and alle thinges conteynynge; the whiche that no +goodnesse may amende, ne non evelle empeyre; that in perfeyte Trynytee +lyvethe and regnethe God, be alle worldes and be alle tymes. Amen, Amen, +Amen. + + * * * * * + +Richardi Hakluyti breuis admonitio ad Lectorem. + +Ioannem Mandeuillum nostratem, eruditum et insignem Authorem (Balaeo, +Mercatore, Ortelio, et alijs, testibus) ab innumeris Scribarum et +Typographorum mendis repurgando, ex multorum, eorumque optimorum +exemplarium collatione, quid praestiterim, virorum doctorum, et eorum +praecipuè, qui Geographiæ et Antiquitatis periti sunt, esto iudicium. Quæ +autem habet de monstriferis hominum formis itinerarij sui praecedentis +capitibus trigessimo, trigessimo primo, trigessimo tertio, et sparsim in +sequentibus, quanquam non negem ab illo fortasse quædam eorum alicubi visa +fuisse, maiori tamen ex parte ex Caio Plinio secundo hausta videntur, vt +facile patebit ca cum his Plinianis, hic ideo a me appositis, collaturo, +quæ idem Plinius, singulis suis authoribus singula refert, in eorum +plærisque fidem suam minimè obstringens. Vale, atque aut meliora dato, aut +his vtere mecum. + + * * * * * + +Ex libro sexto Naturalis historiæ C. Plinij secundi. Cap. 30. + +Vniuersa verò gens Ætheria appellata est, deinde Atlantia, mox à Vulcani +filio Æthiope Æthiopia. Animalium hominumque effigies monstriferas circa +extremitates eius gigni minimè mirum, artifici ad formanda corpora +effigiésque caelandas mobilitate ignea. Ferunt certè ab Orientis parte +intimatgentes esse sine naribus. æquali totius oris planitie. Alias +superiore labro orbas, alias sine linguis. Pars etiam ore concreto et +naribus carens, vno tantùm foramine spirat, potùmque calamis auenæ trahit, +et grana eiusdem auenæ, sponte prouenientis ad vescendum; Quibusdam pro +sermone nutus motùsque membrorum est, &c. + + * * * * * + +Ex libro eiusdem Plinij septimo. Cap. 2. cui titulus est, De Scythis, et + aliarum diversitate gentium. + +Esse Scytharum genera, et quidem plura, quæ corporibus humanis vescerentur, +indicauimus. Idipsum incredibile fortasse, ni cogitimus in medio orbe +terrarum, ac Sicilia et Italia fuisse, gentes huius monstri, Cyclopas et +Laestrigonas, et nuperrimè trans Alpes hominem immolari gentium carum more +solitum: quod paulum à mandendo abest. Sed et iuxta eos, qui sunt ad +Septentrionem versi, haud procul ab ipso Aquilonis exortu, specuque eius +dicto, quem locum Gesclitron appellant, produntur Arimaspi, duos diximus, +vno oculo in fronte media insignes: quibus assiduè bellum esse circa +metalla cum gryphis, ferarum volucri genere, quale vulgò traditur, eruente +ex cuniculis aurum, mira cupiditate et feris custodientibus, et Arimaspis +rapientibus, multi, sed maximè illustres Herodotus, et Aristeas +Proconnesius scribunt. Super alios autem Anthropophagos Scythas, in quadam +conualle magna Imai montis, regio est, quæ vocatur Abarimon, in qua +syluestres viuunt homines, auersis post crura plantis, eximiæ velocitatis, +passim cum feris vagantes. Hos in alio non spirare coelo, ideoque ad +finitimos reges non pertrahi, neque ad Alexandrum magnum pertractos, Beton +itinerum eius mensor prodidit. Priores Anthropophagos, quos ad +Septentrionem esse diximus decem dierum itinere supra Borysthenem amnem, +ossibus humanorum capitum bibere, cutibusque cum capillo pro mantelibus +ante pectora vti, Isigonus Nicænsis. Idem in Albania gigni quosdam glauca +oculorum acie, à pueritia statim canos, qui noctu plusquà m interdiu +cernant. Idem itinere dierum x. supra Borysthenem, Sauromatas tertio die +cibum capere semper. Crates Pergamenus in Hellesponto circa Parium, genus +hominum fuisse tradit, quos Ophiogenes vocat serpentum ictus contactu +leuare solitos, et manu imposita venena extrahere corpori. Varro etiam nunc +esse paucos ibi, quorum saliuæ contra ictus serpentum medeantur. Similis et +in Africa gens Psyllorum fuit, vt Agatharchides scribit, à Psyllo rege +dicta, cuius sepulchrum in parte Syrtium maiorum est. Horum corpori +ingenitum fuit virus exitiale serpentibus, vt cuius odore sopirent eas. Mos +verò, liberos genitos protinus obijciendi saeuissimis earum, eòque genere +pudicitiam coniugum experiendi, non profugientibus adulterino sanguine +natos serpentibus. Haec gens ipsa quidem prope internicione sublata est à +Nasamonibus, qui nunc eas tenent sedes: genus tamen hominum ex his qui +profugerant, aut cùm pugnatum est, abfuerant, hodièque remanent in paucis. +Simile et in Italia Marsorum gentis durat, quos à Circes filio ortos +seruant, et ideo inesse ijs vim naturalem eam. Et tamen omnibus hominibus +contra serpentes inest venenum: ferùntque ictas saliua, vt feruentis aquæ +contactum fugere. Quòd si in fauces penetrauerit, etiam mori: idque maximè +humani ieiuni oris. Supra Nasamonis confinésque illis Machlyas, Androginos +esse vtriusque naturæ, inter se vicibus coeuntes, Calliphanes tradit. +Aristoteles adijcit, dextram mamman ijs virilem, lacuam muliebrem esse. In +eadem Africa familias quasdam effascinantium, Isigonus et Nymphodorus +tradunt quarum laudatione intereant probata, arescant arbores, emoriantur +infantes. Esse eiusdem generis in Triballis et Illyrijs, adijcit Isigonus, +qui visu quoque effascinent, interimantque quos diutius intueantur. Iratis +praecipuè oculis: quod eorum malum faciliùs sentire puberes. Notabilius +esse quòd pupillas binas in oculis singulis habeant. Huius generis et +foeminas in Scythia, quæ vocantur Bithyæ, prodit Apollonides. Philarchus et +in Ponto Thibiorum genus, multosque alios eiusdem naturæ: quorum notas +tradit in altero oculo geminam pupillam, in altero equi effigiem. Eosdem +praetereà non posse mergi, ne veste quidem degrauatos. Haud dissimile ijs +genus Pharnacum in Æthiopia prodidit Damon, quorum sudor tabem contactis +corporibus afferat. Foeminas quidem omnes vbique visu nocere, quæ duplices +pupillas habeant, Cicero quoque apud nos autor est. Adeò naturæ, cùm +ferarum morem vescendi humanis visceribus in homine genuisset, gignere +etiam in toto corpore et in quorundam oculis quoque venena placuit: ne quid +vsquam mali esset, quod in homine non esset. Haud procul vrbe Roma in +Faliscorum agro familiæ sum paucæ, quæ vocantur Hirpiæ: quæ sacrificio +annuo, quod fit ad montem Soractem Apollini, super ambustam ligni struem +ambulantes non aduruntur. Et ob id perpetuo senatusconsulto militiæ +omniumque aliorum numerum vacationem habent. Quorundam corpore partes +nascuntur ad aliqua mirabiles sicut Pyrrho regi pollex in dextero pede: +cuius tactu lienosis medebatur. Hunc cremari cum reliquo corpore non +potuisse tradunt, conditumque loculo in templo. Praecipuè India Æthiopumque +tractus, miraculis scatent. Maxima in India gignuntur animalia, Indicio +sunt canes grandioris caeteris. Arbores quidem tantæ proceritatis +traduntur, vt sagittis superari nequeant. Haec facit vbertas soli, +temperies coeli, aquarum abundantia (si libeat credere) vt sub vna ficu +turmæ condantur equitum. Arundines verò tantæ proceritatis, vt singula +internodia alueo nauigabili ternos interdum homines ferant. Multos ibi +quina cubita constat longitudine excedere: non expuere: non capitis, aut +dentium, aut oculorum vllo dolore affici, rarò aliarum corporis partium: +tam moderato Solis vapore durari. Philosophos eorum quos Gymnosophystas +vocant, ab exortu ad Occasum praestare, contuentes Solem immobilibus +oculis: feruentibus harenis toto die alternis pedibus insistere. In monte +cui nomen est Milo, homines esse auersis plantis, octonos digitos in +singulis pedibus habentes, autor est Megasthenes. In multis autem montibus +genus hominum capitibus caninis, ferarum pellibus velari, pro voce latratum +edere, vnguibus armatum venatu et aucupio vesci. Horum supra centum viginti +millia fuisse prodente se, Ctesias scribit: et in quadam gente Indiæ, +foeminas semel in vita parere, genitosque confestim canescere. Item hominum +genus, qui Monosceli vocarentur, singulis cruribus, miræ pernicitatis ad +saltum: eosdemque Sciopodas vocari, quòd in maiori æstu humi iacentes +resupini, vmbra se pedum protegant, non longè eos à Troglodytis abesse. +Rursusque ab his Occidentem versus quosdam sine ceruice, oculos in humeris +habentes. Sunt et Satyri subsolanis Indorum montibus (Cartadalorum dicitur +Regio) pernicissimum animal, tum quadrupedes, tum rectè currentes humana +effigie propter velocitatem, nisi senes aut ægri, non capiuntur. +Choromandarum gentem vocat Tauron siluestrem sine voce, stridoris horrendi, +hirtis corporibus, oculis glaucis, dentibus caninis. Eudoxus in meridianis +Indiæ viris plantas esse cubitales, foeminis adeò paruas, vt Struthopodes +appellentur. Megastenes gentem inter Nomadas Indos narium loco foramina +tantùm habentem, anguium modo loripedem, vocarit Syrictas. Ad extremos +fines Indiæ ab Oriente, circa fontem Gangis, Astomorum gentem sine ore, +corpore toto hirtam vestiri frondium lanugine, halitu tantùm viuentem et +odore quem naribus trahant: nullum illis cibum, nullumque potum: tantum +radicum florumque varios odores et syluestrium malorum, quæ secum portant +longiore itinere, ne desit olfactus, grauiore paulò odore haud difficulter +examinari. Supra hos extrema in parte montium Spithamaei Pygmaei narrantur, +ternas spithamas longitudine, hoc est, ternos dodrantos non excedentes, +salubri caelo, sempérque vernante, montibus ab Aquilone oppositis, quos à +gruibus infestari Homerus quoque prodidit: Fama est, insidentes arietum, +caprarumque dorsis, armatos sagittis, veris tempore, vniuerso agmine ad +mare descendere, et oua pullosque earum alitum consumere, ternis +expeditionem eam mensibus confici, aliter futuris gregibus non resisti. +Casas eorum luto, pennisque, et ouorum putaminibus construi. Aristotelis in +cauernis viuere Pygmaeos tradit. Caetera de his, vt reliqui. Cyrnos Indorum +genus Isigonus annis centenis quadragenis viuere. Item Aethiopas +Marcrobios, et Seras existimat, et qui Athon montem incolant: hos quidem +quia viperinis carnibus alantur, itaque nec capiti, nec vestibus eorum +noxia corpori inesse animalia. Onesicritus, quibus in locis Indiæ vmbræ non +sint, corpora hominum cubitorum quinum, et binorum palmorum existere, et +viuere annos centum triginta, nec senescere, sed vt medio æuo mori. Crates +Pergamenus Indos, qui centenos annos excedant Gymnætas appelat, non pauci +Macrobios. Ctesias gentem ex his, quæ appellatur Pandore, in conuallibus +sitam, annos ducenos viuere, in iuuenta candido capillo, qui in senectute +nigrescat. Contra alios quadragenos non excedere annos, iunctos Macrobijs, +quorum foeminæ semel pariant: idque et Agatharchides tradit, prætereà +locustis eos ali, et esse pernices. Mandrorum nomen ijs dedit Clitarchus et +Megastenes, trecentosque eorum vicos annumerat. Foeminas septimo ætatis +anno parere, senectam quadragesimo anno accedere. Artemidorus, in Taprobana +insula longissimam vitam sine vllo corporis languore traduci. Duris, +Indorum quosdam cum feris coire, mistosque et semiferos esse partus. In +Calingis eiusdem Indiæ gente quinquennes concipere foeminas, octauum vitæ +annum non excedere, et alibi cauda villosa homines nasci pernicitatis +eximiæ, alios auribus totos contegi. Oritas ab Indis Arbis fluuius +disterminat. Ii nullum alium cibum nouere, quà m piscium, quos vnguibus +dissectos sole torreant, atque ita panem ex his faciunt, vt refert +Clitarchus. Troglodytas super Aethiopiam velociores esse equis, Pergamenus +Crates. Item Aethiopas octona cubita longitudine excedere. Syrbotas vocari +gentem eam Nomadum Aethiopum, secundùm flumen Astapum ad Septentrionem +vregentium. [Marginal note: Vel vergentium.] Gens Menisminorum appellata, +abest ab oceana dierum itinere viginti, animalium que Cynocephalos vocamus, +lacte viuit, quorum armenta pacscit maribus interemptis, praeterquam +sobolis causa. In Africæ solitudinibus hominum species obuiæ subinde fiunt, +momentoque euanescunt. Haec atque talia, ex hominum genere ludibria sibi, +nobis miracula, ingeniosa fecit natura: et singula quidem, quæ facit +indies, ac propè horas, quis enumerare valeat? Ad detegendam eius +potentiam, satis sit inter prodigia posuisse gentes. + + +END OF MANDEVILLE'S VOYAGES. + + * * * * * + +Anthony Beck bishop of Durisme was elected Patriarch of Hierusalem, and + confirmed by Clement the fift bishop of Rome: in the 34 yere of Edward + the first. Lelandus. + +Antonius Beckus episcopus Dunelmensis fuit, regnante Edwardo eius +appelationis ab aduentu Gulielmi magni in Angliam primo. Electus est in +patriarcham Hierosolymitanum anno Christo 1305, et a Clemente quinto Rom. +pontifice confirmatus. Splendidus erat supra quà m decebat episcopum. +Construxit castrum Achelandæ, quatuor passuum millibus a Dunelmo in ripa +Vnduglessi fluuioli. Elteshamum etiam vicinum Grenouico, ac Somaridunum +castellum Lindianæ prouinciæ, ædificijs illustria reddidit. Deinde et +palatium Londini erexit, quod nunc Edwardi principis est. Tandem ex +splendore nimio, et potentia conflauit sibi apud nobilitatem ingentem +inuidiam, quam viuens nunquam extinguere potuit. Sed de Antonio, et eius +scriptis fusiùs in opere, cuius titulus de pontificibus Britannicis, +dicemus. Obijt Antonius anno a nato in salutem nostram Christo, 1310, +Edwardo secundo regnante. + + +The same in English. + +Anthony Beck was bishop of Durisme in the time of the reigne of Edward the +first of that name after the inuasion of William the great into England. +This Anthony was elected patriarch of Ierusalem in the yeere of our Lord +God 1305, and was confirmed by Clement the fift, pope of Rome. He was of +greater magnificence then for the calling of a bishop. He founded also the +castle of Acheland foure miles from Durisme, on the shore of a prety riuer +called Vnduglesme. [Footnote: Probably Barnard Castle, on the Tees.] He +much beautified with new buildings Eltham mannor nere vnto Greenwich, and +the castle Somaridune in the county of Lindsey. [Footnote: Lindsey is the +popular name for the north part of County Lincoln.] And lastly, he built +new out of the ground the palace of London, which now is in possession of +prince Edward. Insomuch, that at length, through his ouer great +magnificence and power he procured to himselfe great enuy among the +nobility, which he could not asswage during the rest of his life. But of +this Anthony and of his writings we will speake more at large in our booke +intituled of the Britain bishops. This Anthony finished his life in the +yere of our Lord God, 1310, and in the reigne of king Edward the second. + + * * * * * + +Incipit Itinerarium fratris Odorici fratrum minorum de mirabilibus + Orientalium Tartarorum. + +Licet multa et varia de ritibus et conditionibus huius mundi enarrentur a +multis, ego tamen frater Odoricus de foro Iulij de portu Vahonis, volens ad +partes infidelium transfretare, magna et mira vidi et audiui, quæ possum +veracitèr enarrare. Primò transiens Mare Maius me de Pera iuxta +Constantinopolim transtuli Trapesundam, quæ antiquitùs Pontus vocabatur: +Haec terra benè situata est, sicut scala quaedam Persarum et Medorum, et +eorum qui sunt vltra mare. In hac terra vidi mirabile quod mihi placuit, +scilicet hominem ducentem secum plusquam 4000 perdicum. Homo autem per +terram gradiebatur, perdices vero volabant per aera, quas ipse ad quoddam +castrum dictum Zauena duxit, distans à Trapesunda per tres dietas. Hæ +perdices illius conditionis erant, cùm homo ille quiescere voluit, omnes se +aptabant circa ipsum, more pullorum gallinarum, et per illum modum duxit +eas vsque ad Trapesundam, et vsque ad palatium imperatoris, qui de illis +sumpsit quot voluit, et residuas vir ille ad locum vnde venerat, adduxit. +In hac ciuitate requiescit corpus Athanasij supra portem ciuitatis. +[Sidenote: Armenis maior.] Vltra transiui vsque in Armeniam maiorem, ad +quandam ciuitatem quæ vocatur Azaron, quæ erat multùm opulenta antiquitus, +sed Tartari eam pro magna parte destruxterunt: In ea erat abundantia panis +et carnium, et aliorum omnium victualium praeterquam vini et fructuum. Hæc +ciuitas est multum frigida, et de illa dicitur quòd altius situatur quà m +aliqua alia in hoc mundo: haec optimas habet aquas, nam venæ illarum +aquarum oriri videntur et scaturire à flumine magno Euphrate quod per vnam +dietam ab ciuitate distat: haec ciuitas via media eundi Taurisium. Vltra +progressus sum ad quendam montem dictum Sobissacato. In ilia contrau est +mons ille supra quem requicscit arca Noe; in quem libenter ascendissem, si +societas mea me praestolare voluisset: A gente tamen illius contratæ +dicitur quòd nullus vnquam illum montem ascendere potuit, quia vt dicitur, +hoc Deo altissimo non placet. [Sidenote: Tauris ciuitas Persiæ.] Vltra veni +Tauris ciuitatem magnam et regalem, quæ antiquitus Susis dicta est. Haec +ciuitas melior pro mercenarijs reputatur, quà m aliqua quæ sit in mundo, nam +nihil comestibile, nec aliquid quod ad mercimonium pertinet, reperitur, +quod illic in bona copia non habetur. Haec ciuitas multum benè situatur: +Nam ad eam quasi totus mundus pro mercimonijs confluere potest: De hac +dicunt Christiani qui ibi sunt, quòd credunt Imperatorem plus de ea +accipere, quám Regem Franciæ de toto regno suo: Iuxta illam ciuitatem est +mons salinus praebens sal ciuitati, et de illo sale vnusquisque tantum +accipit, quantum vult, nihil soluendo alicui. In hac ciuitate multi +Christiani de omni natione commorantur, quibus Saraceni in omnibus +dominantur. [Sidenote: Sultania.] Vltra iui per decem dietas ad ciuitatem +dictam Soldania, in qua imperator Persarum tempore æstiuo commoratur; In +hyeme autem vadit ad ciuitatem aliam sitam supra mare vocatam Bakuc: +Praedicta autem ciuitas magna est, et frigida, in se habens bonas aquas, ad +quam multa mercimonia portantur. Vltra cum quadam societate Carauanorum iui +versus Indiam superiorem, ad quam dum transissem per multas dietas perueni +ad ciuitatem trium Magorum quæ vocatur Cassan, [Marginal note: Vel +Cassibin.] quæ regia ciuitas est et nobilis, nisi quod Tartari eam in +magnaparte destruxerunt: haec abundat pane, vino, et alijsbonis multis. Ab +hac ciuitate vsque Ierusalem quo Magi iuerunt miraculosè, sunt L. dietiæ, +et multa mirabilia sunt in hac ciuitate quæ pertranseo. [Sidenote: Gest.] +Inde recessi ad quandam ciuitatem vocatam Gest a qua distat mare arenosum +per vnam dietam, quod mirè est mirabile et periculosum: In hac ciuitate est +abundantia omnium victualium, et ficuum potissimè, et vuarum siccarum et +viridium, plus vt credo quà m in alia parte mundi. Haec est tertia cuitas +melior quam Rex Persarum habet in toto regno suo: De illa dicunt Saraceni, +quod in ea nullus Christianus vltra annum viuere vnquam potest. [Sidenote: +Como.] Vltra per multas dietas iui ad quandam ciuitatem dictam Comum quæ +maxima ciuitas antiquitùs erat, cuius ambitus erat ferè L. Miliaria, quæ +magna damna intulit Romanis antiquis temporibus. In ea sunt palatia integra +non habitata, tamen multis victualibus abundat. Vltra per multas terras +transiens, perueni ad terram Iob nomine Hus quæ omnium victualium +plenissima est, et pulcherrimè situata; iuxta eam sunt montes in quibus +sunt pascua multa pro animilibus: Ibi manna in magna copia reperitur. Ibi +habentur quatuor perdices pro minori, quam pro vno grosso: In ea sunt +pulcherrimi senes, vbi homines nent et filant, et faeminæ non: haec terra +correspondet Chaldeæ versus transmontana. + + +De moribus Chaldæorum, et de India. + +Indè iui in Chaldaeam quæ est regnum magnum, et transiui iuxta turrim +Babel: Haec regio suam linguam propriam habet, et ibi sunt homines formosi, +et foeminæ turpes: et homines illius regionis vadunt compti crinibus, et +ornati, vt hîc mulieres, et portant super capita sua fasciola aurea cum +gemmis, et margaritis; mulieres verò solum vnam vilem camisiam attingentem +vsque ad genua, habentem manicas longas et largas, quæ vsque ad terram +protenduntur: Et vadunt discalceatæ portantes Serablans vsque ad terram. +Triceas non portant, sed capilli earum circumquaque disperguntur: et alia +multa et mirabilia sunt ibidem. Indé veni in Indiam quæ infra terram est, +quam Tartari multum destruxerunt; et in ea vt plurimum homines tantum +dactilos comedunt, quarum xlij, libræ habentur pro minori quam pro vno +grosso. [Sidenote: Ormus.] Vltra transsiui per multas dietas ad mare +oceanum, et prima terra, ad quam applicui, vocatur Ormes, quæ est optime +murata, et multa mercimonia et diuitiæ in ea sunt; in ea tantus calor est, +quod virilia hominum exeunt corpus et descendunt vsque ad mediam tibiarum: +ideò homines illius terræ volentes viuere, faciunt vnctionum, et vngunt +illa, et sic vncta in quibusdam sacculis ponunt circa se cingentes, et +aliter morerentur: In hac terra homines vtuntur nauigio quæ vocatur Iase, +suitium sparto. [Sidenote: Thana.] Ego autem ascendi in vnum illorum in quo +nullum ferrum potui reperrire, et in viginta octo dietis perueni ad +ciuitaten Thana, in qua pro fide Christi quatuor de fratribus nostris +martyrizati sunt. Hæc terra est optimè situata, et in ea abundantia panis +et vini, et aliorum victualium. Hæc terra antiquitus fuit valde magna, et +fuit regis Pori, qui cum rege Alexandro prælium magnum commisit. Huius +terræ populus Idolatrat, adorans ignem serpentes, et arbores: Et istam +terram regunt Saraceni, qui vio lenter eam acceperunt, et subiacent imperio +regis Daldili. Ibi sunt diuersa genera bestiarum, leones nigri in maxima +quantitate: sunt et ibi simiæ, gatimaymones, et noctuae magnæ sicut hic +habentur columbæ; ibi mures magni sunt, sicut sunt hîc scepi, et ideò canes +capiunt ibi mures, quia murelegi non valent. Ad hæc, in illa terra quilibet +homo habet ante domum suam vnum pedem fasciculorum, ita magnum sicut esset +vna columna, et pes ille non desiccatur, dummodò adhibeatur sibi aqua. +Multæ nouitates sunt ibi, quas pulcherrimum esset audire. + + +De martyrio fratrum. + +Martyrium autem quatuor fratrum nostrorum in illa ciuitate Thana fuit per +istum modum; dum praedicti fratres fuerant in Ormes, fecerunt pactum cum +vna naui vt nauigarent vsque Polumbrum, et violentèr deportati sunt vsque +Thanam vbi sunt 15. domus Christianorum, qui Nestoriani sunt et +Schismatici, et cum illic essent, hospitati sunt in domo cuiusdam illorum; +contigit dum ibi manerent litem oriri inter virum domus, et vxorem eius, +quam sero ver fortiter verberauit, quæ suo Kadi, i. Episcopo conquesta est; +à qua interrogauit Kadi, vtrum hoc probari posset? quæ dixit, quod sic; +quia 4. Franchi, i. viri religiosi erant in domo hoc videntes, ipsos +interrogate, qui dicent vobis veritatem: Muliere autem sic dicente, Ecce +vnus de Alexandria praesens rogauit Kadi vt mitteret pro eis, dicens eos +esse homines maximæ scientiæ et scripturas bene scire, et ideo dixit bonum +esse cum illis de fide disputare: Qui misit pro illis, et adducti sunt isti +quatuor, quorum nomina sunt frater de Tolentino de Marchia, frater Iacobus +de Padua, frater Demetrius Laicus, Petrus de Senis. Dimisso autem fratre +Petro, vt res suas custodiret, ad Kadi perrexerunt, qui coepit cum illis de +fide nostra disputare; dicens Christum tantum hominem esse et non Deum. E +contra frater Thomas rationibus et exemplis Christum verum Deum et hominem +esse euidenter ostendit, et in tantum confudit Kadi, et infideles qui cum +eo tenuerunt, quod non habuerunt quid rationabiliter contradicere: Tunc +videns Kadi se sic confusum, incepit clamare sic; Et quid dicis de +Machometo? Respondit frater Thomas: Si tibi probauimus Christum verum Deum +et hominem esse, qui legem posuit inter homines, et Machometus è contrario +venit, et legem contrariam docuit, si sapiens sis optime scire poteris, +quid de eo dicendum sit. Iterum Kadi et alij Saraceni clamabant, Et tu quid +iterum de Machometo dicis? Tunc frater T. respondit: vos omnes videre +potestis, quid dico de eo. Tum ex quo vultis quod plane loquar de eo, dico +quod Machometus vester filius perditionis est, et in inferno cum Diabolo +patre suo. Et non solum ipse, sed omnes ibi erunt qui tenent legem hanc, +quia ipsa tota pestifera est, et falsa, et contra Deum, et contra salutem +animæ. Hoc audientes Saraceni, coeperunt clamare, moriatur, moriatur ille, +qui sic contra Prophetam locutus est. Tunc acceperunt fratres et in sole +vrente stare permiserunt, vt ex calore solis adusti, dira morte interirent. +Tantus enim est calor solis ibi, quòd si homo in eo per spacium vnius missæ +persisteret, moreretur; fratres tamen illi sani et hilares à tertia vsque +ad nonam laudantes et glorificantes dominum in ardore solis permanserunt, +quod videntes Saraceni stupefacti ad fratres venerunt, et dixerunt, volumus +ignem accendere copiosum, et in illum vos proijcere, et si fides vestra sit +vt dicitis, ignis non poterit vos comburere: si autem vos combusserit, +patebit quòd fides vestra nulla sit. Responderunt fratres; parati sumus pro +fide nostra ignem, carcerem, et vincula, et omnium tormentorum genera +tolerare: verum tamen scire debetis, quòd si ignis potestatem habeat +comburendi nos hoc non erit propter fidem nostram, sed propter peccata +nostra: fides enim nostra perfectissima et verissima est, et non est alia +in mundo in qua animsæ hominum possunt saluæ fieri; Dum autem ordinaretur +quòd fratres conburerentur, rumor insonuit per totam ciuitatem, de qua +omnes senes, et iuuenes, viri et mulieres, qui ire poterant, accurrerunt ad +illud spectaculum intuendum. Fratres autem ducti fuerunt ad plateam +ciuitatis, vbi accensus est ignis copiosus, in quen frater Thomas voluit se +proijcere, sed quidam Saracenus cepit eam per caputium et retraxit dicens; +Non vadus tu cum sis senex, quia carmen aliquod vel experimentum habere +posses super te, quare te ignis non posset laedere, sed alium ire in ignem +permittas. Tunc 4 Saraceni sumentes fratrem Iacobum, eum in ignem proijcere +volebant; quibus ille, permittatis, me quia libenter pro fide mea ignem +intrabo: Cui Saraceni non adquiescentes eum violentèr in ignem proiecerunt: +ignis autem ita accensus erat, quòd nullus eum videre poteret, vocem tamen +eius audierunt, inuocantem semper nomen virginis gloriosæ; Igne autem +totalitèr consumpto stetit frater Iacobus super prunas illaesus, et laetus, +manibus in modum crucis eleuatis, in coelum respiciens, et Deum laudans et +glorificans, qui sic declararet fidem suam: nihil autem in eo nec pannus, +nec capillus laesus per ignem inuentus est; Quod videns populus vnanimitèr +conclamare coepit, sancti sunt, sancti sunt, nefas est offendere eos, modò +videmus quia fides eorum bona et sancta est. Tunc clamare coepit Kadi: +sanctus non est ille, quia combustus non est, quia tunica quam portat est +de lana terræ Habraæ, et ideò nudus exspolietur, et in ignem proijciatur, +et videbitur si comburetur vel non. Tunc Saraceni pessimi ad praeceptum +Kadi ignem in duplo magis quà m priùs accenderunt, et fratrem Iacobum +nudantes, corpus suum abluerunt, et oleo abundantissimè vnxerunt, insuper +et oleum maximum in struem lignorum ex quibus ignis fieret, fuderunt, et +igne accenso fratrem in ipsum proiecerunt. Frater autem Thomas, et frater +Demetrius extra populum in loco separato flexis genibus orantes cum +lachrymis deuotioni se dederunt Frater autem Iocobus iterum ignem exiuit +illaesus sicut prius fecerat: quod videns omnis populus clamare coepit, +peccatum est, deccatum est, offendere eos, quià sancti sunt. Hoc autem +tantum miraculum videns Melich. i. potestas ciuitatis, vocauit ad se +fratrem Iacobum, et fecit eum ponere indumenta, sua, et dixit, videte +fratres, Ite cum gratia Dei, quia nullum malum patiemini a nobis, modò benè +videmus vos sanctos esse, et fidem vestram bonam ac veram esse; et ideo +consulimus vobis, vt de ista terra exeatis, quà m citiùs poteritis, quia +Kadi pro posse suo vobis nocere curabit, quia sic confudistis eum: Hora +autem tunc erat quasi completorij, et dixerunt illi de populo, attoniti, +admirati, et stupefacti, tot, et tanta mirabilia vidimus ab istis +hominibus, quòd nescimus quid tenere et obseruare debemus. Melich verò +fecit duci illos tres fratres vltra vnum paruum brachium maris in quendam +Burgum modicum ab illa ciuitate distantem: ad quem etiam ille in cuius iam +domo fuerant hospitati associauit eos, vbi in domo cuiusdam idolatri +recepti sunt. Dum haec argerenter, Kadi iuit ad Melich, dicens quid +facimus? Lex Machometi destructa est, veruntamen hoc scire debes, quod +Machomet praecepit in suo Alcorano, quod si quis vnum Christianum +interficeret, tantum mereretur, ac si in Mecha ad ipsum peregrinaretur. Est +enim Alkoranus lex Sarracenorum sicut Euangelium, Mecha, verò est locus vbi +iacet Machomet. Quem locum ita visitant Saraceni, sicut Christiani +sepulchram Christi. Tunc Melich respondet, vade, et fac sicut vis: quo +dicto statim Kadi accepit quatuor homines armatos vt irent, et illos +fratres interficerent, qui cùm aquam transijssent, facta est nox, et illo +sero eos non inuenerunt, statim Melieh omnes Christianos in ciuitate capi +fecit, et incarcerauit, media autem nocte fratres surrexerunt dicere +matutinum, quos illi Saraceni qui missi fuerant, inuenerunt, et extra +burgum, sub quadam arbore adduxerunt, dixerunt eis. Sciatis fratres nos +mandatum habere a Kadi et Melich interficere vos, quod tamen faciemus +inuiti, quia vos estis boni homines et sancti, sed non audemus aliter +facere; quia si iussa sua non perficeremus, et nos cum liberis nostris et +vxoribus moreremur. Tunc fratres responderunt, vos qui huc venistis, et +tale mandatum recepistis, vt per mortem temporalem vitam æternam +adipiscamur, quod vobis iniunctum est perficite; quia pro amore domini +nostri Iesu Christi, qui pro nobis crucifigi et mori dignatus est, et pro +fide nostra, parati sumus omnia tormenta, et etiam mortem libenter +sustinere. Christianas autem qui fratres comitabatur, multum cum illis +quatuor armatis altercatus est dicens, quod si gladium haberet, vel eos à +nece tam sanctorum hominum impediret, vel ipse cum eis interfectus esset. +Tunc armati fecerunt fratres se exspoliare, et frater Thomas primus iunctis +manibus in modum crucis genuflectens capitis abscissionem suscepit: Fratrem +verò Iacobum vnus percussit in capite, et eum vsque ad oculos scidit, et +alio ictu totum caput abscidit. Frater autem Demetrius, primò percussus est +cum gladio in pectore, et secundò caput suum abscissum est: Statim vt +fratres suum martyrium compleuerunt, aer ita lucidus effectus est, quod +omnes admirati sunt, et luna maximam claritatem ostendit. Statim quasi +subito tanta tonitrua, et fulgura, et coruscationes, et obscuritas fiebant, +quòd omnes mori crediderunt: Nauis etiam illa quæ illos debuerat deportasse +submersa est cum omnibus quæ in se habuit, ita quod nunquam de illa posteà +aliquid scitum est. Facto mane misit Kadi pro rebus fratrum prædictorum +nostrorum, et tunc inuentus est frater Petrus de Senis quartus socius +fratrum prædictorum, quem ad Kadi duxerunt: Cui Kadi, et alij Saraceni +maxima promittentes persuaserunt quòd fidem suam renueret, et legem +Machometi confiteretur, et teneret. Frater autem Petrus de illis truffabat, +eos multum deridendo, quem de mane vsque ad meridiem diuersis pænarum ac +tormentorum generibus affixerunt ipso semper constantissimè in fide, et in +Dei laudibus persistente, et fidem illorum Machometi deridente et +destruente. Videntes autem Saraceni eum non posse a suo proposito euelli, +eum super quandam arborem suspenderunt, in qua de nona vsque ad noctem +viuus et illaesus pependit: nocte verò ipsum de arbore sumpserunt, et +videntes illum laetum, viuum et illaesum per medium suum corpus diuiserunt, +mane autem facto nihil de corpore eius inuentum est, vni tamen personæ fide +dignæ reuelatum est, quod Deus corpus eius occultauerat reuelandum in certo +tempore, quandò Deo placuerit Sanctorum corpora manifestare. Vt autem Deus +ostenderet animas suorum martyrum iam in coelis consistere, et congaudere +cum Deo et Angelis et alijs Sanctis eius, die sequenti post martyrium +fratrum praedictorum Melich dormitioni se dedit, et ecce apparuerunt sibi +isti fratres gloriosi, et sicut Sol, lucidi, singulos enses tenentes in +manibus, et supra eum eos sic vibrantes, quod vt si eum perfodere ac +diuidere vellent: qui excitatus horribilitèr exclamauit sic, quòd totam +familiam terruit: quæ sibi accurrens quaesiuit, quid sibi esset? quibus +ille, Illi Raban Franchi quos interfici iussi, venerunt hac ad me cum +ensibus, volentes me interficere. Et statim Melich misit pro Kadi, referens +sibi visionem et petens consilium, et consolationem, quia timuit per eos +finaliter interire. Tunc Kadi sibi consuluit, vt illis maximas eleemosynas +faceret, si de manibus interfectorum euadere vellet. Tunc misit pro +Christianis quos in carcere intrudi praeceperat: A quibus cum ad eum +venissent indulgentiam petijt pro facto suo, dicens se esse amodo socium +eorum, et confratrem: Praecepit autem et legem statuit, quòd pro tempore +suo, si quis aliquem Christianum offenderet, statim moreretur, et sic omnes +illaesos, et indemnes abire permisit: Pro illis autem quatuor fratribus +interfectis quatuor mosquetas. (i.) Ecclesias ædificari fecit, quas per +Sacerdotes Saracenorum inhabitari fecit. Audiens autem imperator Dodsi +istos tres fratres talem sententiam subijsse, misit pro Melich, vt vinctus +ad eum duceretur, A quo cùm adductus esset, quaesiuit imperator, quare ita +crudeliter illos fratres iusserat interfici, respondit, quia subuertere +volebant legem nostram, et malum et blasphemiam de propheta nostro +dicebant: et imperator ad eum; O crudelissime canis, cùm videres quod Deus +omnipotens bis ab igne eos liberauerit, quo modo ausus fuisti illis mortem +inferre tam crudelem. Et edicta sententia, ipsum Melich cum tota sua +familia per medium scindi fecit, sicut ipse talem mortem fratri inflixerat. +Kadi verò audiens, de terra illa, et etiam de imperatoris illius dominio +clà m fugit, et sic euasit. + + +De miraculis quatuor fratrum occisorum + +Est autem consuetudo in terra illa, quòd corpora mortua non traduntur +sepulturæ, sed in campis dimittuntur, et ex calore Solis citò resoluuntur, +et sic consumantur: Corpora autem trium fratrum praedictorum per 14. dies +illic in fuerore Solis iacuerunt, et ita recentia et redolentia inuenta +fuerunt sicut illa die quandò martirizati erant: quod videntes Christiani +qui in illa terra habitabant, praedicta corpora ceperunt, et honorificè +sepelierunt. Ego autem Odoricus audiens factum et martyrium illorum +fratrum, iui illuc, et corpora eorum effodi, et ossa omnia mecum accepi, et +in pulchris towallijs colligaui, et in Indiam superiorem ad vnum locum +fratrum nostrorum ea deportaui, habens mecum socium, et vnum famulum. Cum +autem essemus in via, hospitabamus in domo cuiusdam hospitarij, et ipsa +ossa capiti meo supposui, et dormiui: Et dùm dormirem domus illa à +Saracenis subitò accendebatur, vt me cum domo comburerent. Domo autem sic +accensa, socius meus et famulus de domo exierunt, et me solum cum ossibus +dimiserunt, qui videns ignem supra me, ossa accepi et cum illis in angulos +domus recollegi. Tres autem anguli domus statim combusti fuerunt, angulo in +quo steti cum ossibus saluo remanente: Supra me autem ignis se tenuit in +modum aeris lucidi, nec descendit quamdiu ibi persistebam; quà m citò autem +cum ossibus exiui, statim tota pars illa sicut aliæ priores igne consumpta +est, et multa alia loca circumadiacentia combusta sunt. Aliud miraculum +contigit, me cum ossibus per mare proficiente ad ciuitatem Polumbrum vbi +piper nascitur abundantèr, quia nobis ventus totaliter defecit: quapropter +venerunt Idolatræ adorantes Deos suos pro vento prospero, quem tamen non +obtinuerunt: Tunc Saraceni suas inuocationes, et adorationes laboriose +fecerunt, sed nihil profecerunt: Et praeceptum est mihi et socio meo vt +orationes funderemus Deo nostro: Et dixit rector nauis in Armenico mihi, +quod alij non intelligerent: quòd nisi possemus ventum prosperum à Deo +nostro impetrare, nos cum ossibus in mare proijcerent: Tunc ego et socius +fecimus orationes, vouentes multas missas de beata virgine celebrare, sic +quòd ventum placeret sibi nobis impetrare. Cum autem tempus transiret, et +ventus non veniret, accepi vnum de ossibus, et dedi famulo, vt ad caput +nauis iret, et clà m in mare proijceret; quo proiecto statim affuit ventus +prosper qui nunquam nobis defecit, vsquequò peruenimus ad portum, meritis +istorum martyrum cum salute. Deinde ascendimus aliam nauem vt in Indiam +superiorem iremus; Et venimus ad quandam ciuitatem vocatam Carchan in qua +sunt duo loca fratrum nostrorum, et ibi reponere istas reliquias volebamus. +In naui autem illa erant plus 700. mercatores et alij: Nunc illi Idolatræ +istam consuetudinem habebant, quòd semper antequà m ad portum applicuerint, +totam nauem perquirerent, si isti aliqua ossa mortuorum animalium +inuenirent, qui reperta statim in mare proijcerent, et per hoc bonum portum +attingere, et mortis periculum euadere crederent. Cùm autem frequentèr +perquirerent, et illa ossa frequenter tangerent, semper oculi delusi +fuerunt, sic quòd illa non perpenderunt; et sic ad locum fratrum +deportauimus cum omni reuerentia, vbi in pace requiescunt; vbi etiam inter +idolatras Deus continuè miracula operatur. Cum enim aliquo morbo grauantur, +in terra illa vbi fratres passi sunt ipsi vadunt; et de terra vbi corpora +sanguinolenta iacuerunt sumunt quam abluunt, et ablutionem bibunt, et sic +ab infirmitatibus suis liberantur. + + +Quo modo habetur Piper, et vbi nascitur. + +[Sidenote: Malabar.] Vt autem videatur quo modo habetur piper, sciendum +quòd in quodam imperio ad quod applicui, nomine Minibar, nascitur, et in +nulla parte mundi tantum, quantum ibi; Nemus enim in quo nascitur, continet +octodecim dietas, et in ipso nemore sunt duæ ciuitates vna nomine +Flandrini, alia nomine Cyncilim: In Flandrina habitant Iudaei aliqui et +aliqui Christiani, inter quos est bellum frequenter, sed Christiani vincunt +Iudaeos semper: In isto nemore habetur piper per istum modum. Nam primò +nascitur in folijs olerum, quæ iuxta magnas arbores plantantur, sicut nos +ponimus vites; et producunt fructum, sicut racemi nostri producunt vuas; +sed quandò maturescunt sunt viridis coloris, et sic vindemiantur vt inter +nos vindemiantut vuæ, et ponuntur grana ad solem vt desiccentur: quæ +desiccata reponuntur in vasis terreis, et sic fit piper, et custoditur. In +isto autem nemore sunt flumina multa in quibus sunt Crocodili multi, et +multi alij serpentes sunt in illo nemore, quos homines per stupam et paleas +comburunt, et sic ad colligendum piper securé accedunt. [Sidenote: +Polumbrum ciuitas. Adoratio bouis.] A capite illius nemoris versus meridiem +est ciuitas Polumbrum in qua maxima mercimonia cuiuscunque generis +reperiuntur Omnes autem de terra illa bouem viuum sicut Deum suum adorant, +quem 6. annis faciunt laborare, et in septimo faciunt ipsum quiescere ab +omni opere; ponentes ipsum in loco solemni, et communi, et dicentes ipsum +esse animal sanctum. Hunc autem ritum obseruant: quolibet mane accipiunt +duas pelues de auro, vel de argento, et vnam submittunt vrinæ bouis, et +aliam stercori, de vrina lauant sibi faciem et oculos, et omnes 5. sensus: +de stercore verò ponunt in vtròque oculo, posteà liniunt summitates +genarum, et tertiò pectus, et ex tunc dicunt se sanctificatos pro toto die +illo: et sicut facit populus, ita etiam facit rex et regina. Isti etiam +aliud idolum mortuum adorant, quod in medietate vna superior est homo, et +in alia est bos, et iliud idolum dat eis responsa, et aliquotièns pro +stipendio petit sanguinem, 40. virginum: et ideo homines illius regionis +ita vouent filias suas et filios, sicut Christiani aliqui alicui religioni, +vel sancto in coelis. Et per istum modum immolant filios et filias, et +multi homines per istum ritum moriuntur ante idolum illud, et multa alia +abominabilia facit populus iste bestialis, et multa mirabilia vidi inter +eos quæ nolui hic inserere. [Sidenote: Combustio mortuorum.] Aliam +consuetudinem vilissimam habet gens illa: Nam quamdo homo moritur, +comburunt ipsum mortuum, et si vxorem habet, ipsam comburunt viuam, quia +dicunt quod ipsa ibit in aratura, et cultura cum viro suo in alio mundo: si +autem vxor illa habeat liberos ex viro suo, potest manere cum eis si velit +sine verecundia et improperio, communiter tamen omnes praeeligunt comburi +cum marito; si autem vxor praemoriatur viro, lex illa non obligat virum, +sed potest aliam vxorem ducere. Aliam consuetudinem habet gens illa, quòd +foeminæ ibi bibunt vinum, et homines non: foeminæ etiam faciunt sibi radi +cilia, et supercilia, et barbam, et homines non: et sic de multis alijs +vilibus contra naturam sexus eorum. [Sidenote: Mobar regnum vel Maliapor.] +Ab isto regno iui decem dietas ad iliud regnum dictum Mobar, quod habet in +se multas ciuitates, et in illo requiescit in vna ecclesia corpus beati +Thomæ Apostoli, et est ecclesia illa plena idolis, et in circuitu ecclesiæ +simul Cononici viuunt in 15 domibus Nestoriani, id est, mali Christiani, et +schismatici. + + +De quodam idolo mirabili, et de quibusdam ritibus eorum. + +In hoc regno est vnum Idolum mirabile, quod omnes Indi reuerentur: et est +statura hominis ita magni, sicut noster Christophorus depictus, et est +totum de auro purissimo et splendidissimo, et circa collum habet vnam +chordulam sericam cum lapidibus pretiosissimis, quorum aliquis valet plus +quà m vnum regnum: Domus idoli est tota de auro, scilicet in tecto, et +pauimento, et superficie parietum interius et exterius. Ad illud idolum +peregrinantur Indi, sicut nos ad S. Petrum: Alij veniunt cum chorda ad +collum, alij cum manibus retro ligatis, alij cum cultello in brachio vel +tibia defixo, et si post peregrinationem fiat brachium marcidum, illum +reputant sanctum, et benè cum Deo suo. Iuxta ecclesiam illius idoli est +lacus vnus manufactus, et manifestus, in quem peregrini proijciunt aurum et +argentum, et lapides pretiosos in honorem Idoli, et ad ædificationem +ecclesiæ suæ, et ideo quando aliquid debet ornari, vel reparari, vadunt +homines ad hunc lacum, et proiecta extrahunt: die autem annua +constructionis illius idoli, rex et regina, cum toto populo et omnibus +peregrinis accedunt, et ponunt illud idolum in vno curru pretiosissimo +ipsum de ecclesia educentes cum Canticis, et omni genere musicorum, et +multae virgines antecedunt ipsum binæ et binæ, processionaliter combinatæ +modulantes: [Sidenote: Crudelissima Satanæ tyrannis, et carnificina.] +Peregrini etiam multi ponunt se sub curru, vt transeat Deus supra eos; et +omnes super quos currus transit, comminuit, et per medium scindit, et +interficit, et per hoc reputant se mori pro deo suo, sanctè et securè: et +in omni anno hoc modo moriuntur in via sub idolo plusquam 500. homines, +quorum corpora comburuntur, et cineres sicut reliquiæ custodiuntur, quia +sic pro Deo suo moriuntur. Alium ritum habent, quando aliquis homo offert +se mori pro deo suo, conueniunt omnes amici eius et parentes cum +histrionibus multis, facientes sibi festum magnum, et post festum appendunt +collo eius 5 cultellos acutissimos ducentes eum ante idolum, quo cum +peruenerit, sumit vnum ex cultellis, et clamat alta voce, pro deo meo +incido mihi de carne mea, et frustum incisum proijcit in faciem idoli: +vltima vero incisione per quam seipsum interficit, dicit, me mori pro deo +meo permitto, quo mortuo corpus eius comburitur, et sanctum fore ab omnibus +creditur. Rex illius regionis est ditissimus in auro et argento, et gemmis +pretiosis; ibi etiam sunt margaritæ pulchriores de mundo. Indè transiens +iui per mare oceanum versus meridiem per 50 dietas ad unam terram vocatam +Lammori, in qua ex immensitate caloris, tam viri quam foeminæ omnes +incedunt nudi in toto corpore: Qui videntes me vestitum, deridebant me, +dicentes Deum, Adam et Euam fecisse nudos. In illa regione omnes mulieres +sunt communes, ita quod nullus potest dicere, haec est vxor mea, et cùm +mulier aliqua parit filium vel filiam dat cui vult de hijs qui +concubuerunt: Tota etiam terra illius regionis habetur in communi, ita quod +non meum et tuum in diuisione terrarum, domos tamen habent speciales: +Carnes humanæ quando homo est pinguis ita benè comeduntur, sicut inter nos +bouinæ: et licet gens sit pestifera, tamen terra optima est, et abundat in +omnibus bonis, carnibus, bladis, riso, auro, argento, et lignis Aloe, +canfari, et multis alijs. Mercatores autem cum accedunt ad hanc regionem +ducunt secum homines pingues vendentes illos genti illius regionis, sicut +nos vendimus porcos, qui statim occidunt eos et comedunt. [Sidenote: +Simoltra vel Samotra.] In hac insula versus meridiem est aliud regnum +vocatum Symolcra, in quo tam viri quam mulieres signant se ferro calido in +facie, in 12. partibus, Et hij semper bellant cum hominibus nudis in alia +regione. Vltra transiú ad aliam insulam quæ vocatur Iaua cuius ambitus per +mare est trium millium milliarium, et rex illius insulæ habet sub se 7. +reges coronatos, et haec insula optimè inhabitatur, et melior secunda de +mundo reputatur. In ea nascuntur in copia garyophylli, cubibez, et nuces +muscatæ: et breuiter omnes species ibi sunt, et maxima abundantia omnium +victualium praeterquam vini. Rex illius terræ habet palatium nobilissimum +inter omnia quæ vidi altissime stat, et gradus et scalas habet altissimos, +quorum semper vnus gradus est aureus, alius argenteus: Pauimentum vero vnum +laterem habet de auro, alium de argento. Parietes vero omnes interius sunt +laminati laminis aureis, in quibus sculpti sunt Equites de auro habentes +circa caput circulum aureum plenum lapidibus pretiosis: Tectum est de auro +puro. Cum isto rege ille magnus Canis de Katay frequenter fuit in bello: +Quem tamen semper ille Rex vicit et superauit. + + +De arboribus dantibus farinam, et mel, et venenum. + +Iuxta istam Insulam est alia contrata vocata Panten, vel alio nomine +Tathalamasim, [Marginal note: Vel Malasmi.] et Rex illius contratæ multas +insulas habet sub se. In illa terra sunt arbores dantes farinam, et mel, et +vinum, et etiam venenum periculosius quod sit in mundo, quia contra illud +non est remedium, nisi vnum solum, et est illud. Si aliquis illud venenum +sumpsisset, si velit liberari, sumat stercus hominis et cum aqua temperet, +et in bona quantitate bÃbat, et statim fugat venenum faciens exire per +inferiores partes. Farinam autem faciunt arbores hoc modo, sunt magnæ et +bassæ, et quandò inciduntur cum securi propè terram, exit de stipite liquor +quidam secut gummæ, quem accipiunt homines et ponunt in sacculis de folijs +factis, et per quindecim dies in sole dimittunt, et in fine decimi quinti +diei ex isto liquore desiccato fit farina, quam primò ponunt in aqua maris, +posteà lauant eam cum aqua dulci, et fit pasta valdè bona et odorifera, de +qua faciunt cibos vel panes sicut placet eis. De quibus panibus ego comedi, +et est panis exterius pulcher, sed interius aliquantulum niger. [Sidenote: +Mare quod semper currit versus meridiem.] In hac contrata est mare mortuum +quod semper currit versus meridiem, in quod si homo ceciderit, nunquam +posteà comparet. In contrata illa inueniuntur Cannæ longissimæ plures +passus habentes quà m 60 et sunt magnæ vt arbores. Aliæ etiam Cannæ sunt ibi +quæ vocantur Cassan quæ per terram diriguntur vt gramen, et in quolibet +nodo earum ramuli producuntur qui etiam prolongantur super terram per vnum +miliare ferè: in hijs Cannis reperiuntur lapides, quorum si quis vnum super +se portauerit, hon poterit incidi aliquo ferro, et ideò, communiter homines +illius contratæ portant illos lapides super: Multi etiam faciunt pueros +suos dum sunt parui incidi in vno brachio, et in vulnere ponunt vnum de +illis lapidibus, et faciunt vulnus recludere se per vnum puluerem de quodam +pisce, cuius nomen ignoro, qui puluis statim vulnus consolidat et sanat: et +virtute illorum lapidum communitèr isti homines triumphant in bellis, et in +mari, nec possent isti homines laedi per aliqua arma ferra: Vnum tamen +remedium est, quod aduersarij illius gentis scientes virtutem lapidum, +prouident sibi propugnacula ferrea contra spicula illorum, et arma venenata +de veneno arborum, et in manu portant palos ligneos accutissimos et ita +duros in extremitate sicut esset ferrum: Similitér sagittant cum sagittis +sino ferro, et sic confundunt aliquos et perforant inermes ex lapidum +securitate. [Sidenote: Vela ex arundinibus facta.] De istis etiam Cannis +Cassan faciunt sibi vela pro suis nauibus et domunculas paruas, et multa +sibi necessaria. [Sidenote: Campa.] Inde recessi per multas dietas ad aliud +regnum vocatum Campa, pulcherrimum, et opulentissimum in omnibus +victualibus. Cuius rex quamdo fui ibi tot habuit vxores, et alias mulieres, +quod de illis 300. filios et filias habuit. Iste rex habet decies millesies +et quatuor elephantum domesticorum, quos ita facit custodiri sicut inter +nos custodiunt boues, vel greges in pascuis. + + +De multitudine Piscium, qui se proijciunt in aridam. + +In hac contrata vnum mirabile valde reperitur, quod vnaquaeque generatio +piscium in mari ad istam contratam venit in tanta quantitate, quod per +magnum spatium maris nil videtur nisi dorsa piscium, et super aridam se +proijciunt quando prope ripam sunt, et permittunt homines per tres dies +venire, et de illis sumere quantum placuerint, et tunc redeunt ad mare: +Post illam speciem per illum modum venit alia species, et offert se, et sic +de omnibus speciebus, semel tamen tantum hoc faciunt in anno. Et quaesiui à +gente illa quomodo et qualiter hoc possit fieri? responderunt quod hoc modo +pisces per naturam docentur venire, et imperatorem suum reuereri. +[Sidenote: Testitudines magnæ.] Ibi etiam sunt testudines ita magnæ sicut +est vnus furnus, et multa alia vidi quæ incredibilia forent, nisi homo illa +vidisset. In illa etiam contrata homo mortuus conburitur, et vxor viua cum +eo, sicut superius de alia contrata dictum est, quia dicunt homines illi +quod illa vadit ad alium mundum ad morandum cum eo, ne ibi aliam vxorem +accipiat. [Sidenote: Moumoran.] Vltra transiui per mare Oceanum versus +meridiem, et transiui per multas contratas et insulas, quarum vna vocatur +Moumoran, et habet in circuitu 2000. milliaria, in qua homines portant +facies caninas et mulieres similitèr, et vnum bouem adorant pro Deo suo, et +ideo quilibet vnum bouem aureum vel argenteum in fronte portat: Homines +illius contratæ et mulieres vadunt totaliter nudi, nisi quod vnum pannum +lineum portant ante verenda sua. Homines illius regionis sunt maximi et +fortissimi, et quia vadunt nudi, quando debent bellare, portant vnum scutum +de ferro, quod cooperit eos à capite vsque ad pedes, et si contingat eos +aliquem de aduersarijs capere in bello qui pecunia non possit redimi, +statim comedunt eum; si autem possit se redimere pecunia, illum abire +permittunt: Rex eorum portat 300. margaritas ad collum suum maximas et +pulcherrimas, et 300. orationes omni die dicit Deo suo: Hic etiam portat in +digito suo vnum lapidem longitudinis vnius spansæ, et dum habet illum +videtur ab alijs quasi vna flamma ignis, et ideò nullus audet sibi +appropinquare, et dicitur quòd non est lapis in mundo pretiosior illo. +Magnus autem imperator Tartarorum de Katai, nunquam vi, nec pecunia, nec +ingenio illum obtinere potuit, cùm tamen circa hoc laborauerit. + + +De Insula Ceilan, et de monte vbi Adam planxit Abel filium suum. + +[Sidenote: Ceilan insula.] Transiui per aliam insulam vocatam Ceilan, quæ +habet in ambitu plusquam duo millia milliaria, in qua sunt serpentes quasi +infiniti, et maxima multitudo leonum, vrsarum, et omnium animalium +rapacium, et siluestrium, et potissimè elephantum. In illa contrata est +mons maximus, in quo dicunt gentes illius regionis quod Adam planxit Abel +filium suum 500. annis. In medio illius montis est planicies pulcherrima, +in qua est lacus paruus multum habens de aqua, et homines illi dicunt aquam +illam fuisse de lachrymis Adæ et Euæ, sed probaui hoc falsum esse, quia +vidi aquam in lacu scaturire: haec aqua plena est hirudinibus et +sanguisugis, et lapidibus pretiosis; istos lapides rex non accepit sibi, +sed semel vel bis in anno permittit pauperes sub aqua ire pro lapidibus, et +omnes quot possunt colligere illis concedit, vt orent pro anima sua. Vt +autem possint sub aqua ire accipiunt lymones, et cum illis vngunt se valdè +benè, et sic nudos se in aquam submergunt, et sanguisugæ illis nocere non +possunt. Ab isto lacu aqua exit et currit vsque ad mare, et in transitu +quando retrahit se, fodiuntur Rubiæ, et adamantes, et margaritæ, et aliæ +gemmæ pretiosæ: vndè opinio est quod rex ille magis abundat lapidibus +pretiosis, quà m aliquis in mundo. In contrata illa sunt quasi omnia genera +animalium et auium; et dixerunt mihi gentes illæ quod animalia illa nullum +forensem inuadunt, nec offendunt, sed tantum homines illius regionis. Vidi +in illa insula aues ita magnas sicut sunt hic anseres, habentes duo capita, +et alia mirabilia quæ non scribo. [Sidenote: Bodin Insula.] Vltra versus +meridiem transiui, et applicui, ad insulam quandam quæ vocatur Bodin, quod +idem est quod immundum in lingua nostra. In ea morantur pessimi homines, +qui comedunt carnes crudas, et omnem immunditiam faciunt quæ quasi +excogitari non poterit; nam pater comedit filium et filius patrem, et +maritus vxorem, et è contrario, et hoc per hunc modum: si pater alicuius +infirmetur, filius vadet ad Astrologum sacerdotem, scz. rogans eum quod +consulat Deum suum, si pater de tali infirmitate euadet, vel non. Tunc ambo +vadunt ad idolum aureum, vel argenteum, facientes orationes in hac forma. +Domine, tu es Deus noster, te adoramus, et rogamus vt nobis respondeas, +debetnè talis à tali infirmitate mori vel liberari? Tunc Daemon respondet, +et si dicat, viuet, filius vadit et ministrat illi vsque ad plenam +conualescentiam: Si autem dicat, morietur, Sacerdos ibit ad eum, et vnum +pannum super os eius ponet, et suffocabit eum, et ipsum mortuum incidet in +frusta, et inuitabuntur omnes amici, et parentes eius ad comedendum eum cum +canticis, et omni laetitia, ossa tamen eius honorificè sepelient. Cum autem +ego eos de tali ritu reprehendi, quaerens causam: Respondit vnus mihi, hoc +facimus ne vermes carnes eius comedant, tunc eius anima magnam poenam +sustinerit, nec poteram euellere eos ab isto errore: et multæ aliæ +nouitates sunt ibi, quas non crederent, nisi qui viderent. Ego autem coram +Deo nihil hic refero, nisi illud de quo certus sum sicut homo certificari +poterit. De ista insula inquisiui à multis expertis, qui omnes vno ore +responderunt mihi, dicentes, quod ista India 4400. insulas continet sub se, +siue in se, in qua etiam sunt 64. reges coronati, et etiam dicunt quod +maior pars illius insulæ benè inhabitatur. Et hic istius Indiæ facio finem. + + +De india superiori, et de Prouincia Manci. + +In primis refero, quòd cum transirem per mare Oceanum per multas dietas +versus Orientem, perueni ad illam magnam prouinciam Manci, quæ India +vocatur à Latinis. De ista India superiori inquisiui à Christianis, +Saracenis, idolatris, et omnibus, qui officiales sunt domini Canis magni, +qui omnes vno ore responderunt, quod hæ prouincia Manci habet plusquam +2000, magnarum ciuitatum, et in ipsa est maxima copia omnium victualium, +puta, panis, vini, risi, carnium, piscium, &c. Omnes homines istius +prouinciæ sunt artifices et mercatores, qui pro quacunque penuria, dummodo +proprijs manibus iuuare se possent per labores, nunquam ab aliquo +eleemosynam peterent. Viri istius prouinciæ sunt satis formosi, sed +pallidi, et rasas et paruas barbas habentes; foeminæ vero sunt pulcherrimæ +inter omnes do mundo. Prima ciuitas ad quam veni de ista India vocatur +Ceuskalon, [Marginal note: Vel Ceuscala.] et distat à mari per vnam dietam, +positaque est super flumen, cuius aqua propè mare cui contignatur, ascendit +super terram per 12. dietas. Totus populus illius Indiæ idolatrat. Ista +autem ciuitas tantum nauigium habet, quod incredibile foret nisi videnti. +[Sidenote: Hi sunt alcatrarsi vel onocratoli.] In hac ciuitate vidi quod +300. libræ de bono et recenti zinzibero habentur pro minori quam pro vno +grosso: Ibi sunt anseres grossiores et pulchriores, et maius forum de +illis, quam sit in mundo, vt credo, et sunt albissimi sicut lac, et habent +vnum os super caput quantitatis oui, et habet colorem sanguineum, sub gula +habent vnam pellem pendentem semipedalem: Pinguissimi sunt, et optimi fori: +et ita est de anatibus, et gallinis, quæ magnæ sunt valdé in illa terra +plusquam duæ de nostris. Ibi sunt serpentes maximi, et capiuntur et a gente +illa comeduntur: vnde qui faceret festum solemne, et non daret serpentes, +nihil reputaret se facere; breuiter in hac ciuitate sunt omnia victualia in +maxima abundantia. Indè transiui per ciuitates multas, et veni ad ciuitatem +nomine Kaitan, [Marginal note: Vel Zaiton.] in qua fratres Minores habent +duo loca, ad quæ portaui de ossibus fratrum nostrorum pro fidi Christi +interfectorum, de quibus supra. In hac est copia omnium victualium pro +leuissimo foro, haec ciuitas ita magna est, sicut bis Bononia, et in ea +multa monasteria religiosorum, qui omnes idolis seruiunt. In vno autem +istorum monasteriorum ego fui, et dictum est mihi quòd inerant 3000. +religiosorum habentium 11000. idoloram, et vnum illorum, quod quasi paruum +inter caetera mihi videbatur, est ita magnum sicut Christophorus noster. +Isti religiosi omni die pascunt Deos suos, vnde semel iui ad videntum +comestionem illam, et vidi quòd illa quæ detulerunt sibi comestibilia sunt, +et calidissima, et multum fumigantia, ita quòd fumus ascendit ad idola, et +dixerunt Deos illo fumo recreari. Totum autem cibum illi reportauerunt et +comederunt, et sic de fumo tantum Deos suos pauerunt. + + +De Ciuitate Fuko. + +Vltra versus Orientem veni ad ciuitatem quæ vocatur Fuko, [Marginal note: +Vel Foqaien.] cuius circuitus continet 30. milliaria, in qua sunt Galli +maximi et pulcherrimi, et gallinæ ita albæ sicut nix, lanam solum pro +pennis habentes sicut pecudes. Haec ciuitas pulcherrima est, et sita supra +mare. Vltra iui per 18. dietas, et pertransij multas terras et ciuitates, +et in transitu veni ad quendam montem magnum, et vidi quod in vno latere +montis omnia animalia erant nigra vt carbo, et homines et mulieres diuersum +modum viuendi habent: ab alio autem latere omnia animalia erant alba sicut +nix, et homines totaliter diuersè ab alijs vixerunt. Ibi omnes foeminæ quæ +sunt desponsatæ portant in signum quod habent maritos vnum magnum barile de +cornu in capita. [Sidenote: Magnum flumen.] Inde transiui per 18. dietas +alias, et veni ad quoddam magnum flumen, et intraui ciuitatem vnam, quæ +transuersum illius fluminis habet pontem maximum, et hospitabar in domo +vnius hospitarij, qui volens mihi complacere, dixit mihi: si velis videre +piscari, veni mecum; et duxit me super pontem, et vidi in brachijs suis +mergos ligatos super perticas, ad quorum gulam vbi ille ligauit vnum filum, +ne illi capientes pisces, comederent eos: Postea in brachio vno posuit 3. +cistas magnas, et tunc dissoluit mergos de perticis, qui statim in aquam +intrauerunt, et pisces ceperunt, et cistas illas repleuerunt in pania hora, +quibus repletis vir ille dissoluit fila à collis eorum, et ipsi reintrantes +flumen se de piscibus recreauerunt, et recreati ad perticas redierunt, et +se ligari sicut priùs permiserunt: Ego autem de illis piscibus comedi, et +optimi mihi videbantur. [Sidenote: Aliâs Cansai, vel Quinzai.] Inde +transiens per multas dietas veni ad vnam ciuitatem quæ vocatur Kanasia, quæ +sonat in lingua nostro ciuitas coeli: Nunquam ita magnam ciuitatem vidi, +Circuitus enim eus continet 100. millaria, nec in ea vidi spatium quin benè +inhabitaretur; Imo vidi multas domus habentes 10. vel 12. solaria vnum +supra aliud: haec habet suburbia maxima continentia maiorem populum quà m +ipsa ciuitas contineat 12. portas habet principales, et in via de qualibet +illarum portarum ad 8. milliaria sunt ciuitates fortè maiores vt æstimo, +quà m est ciuitas Venetiarum, et Padua. Haec ciuitas sita est in aquis quæ +semper stant, et nec fluunt, nec refluunt, vallum tamen habet propter +ventum sicut ciuitas Venetiarum. In ea sunt plus decem mille et 2. pontium, +quorum multos numeraui et transiui, et in qualibet ponte stant custodes +ciuitatis continuè custodientes ciuitatem pro magno Cane imperatore Catai. +Vnum mandatum dicunt gentes illius ciuitatis a domino se recepisse. Nam +quilibet ignis soluit vnum balis, i. 5. cartas bombicis, qui unum florenum +cum dimidio valent, et 10. vel 12. supellectiles facient vnum ignem, et sic +pro vno igne soluent. Isti ignes sunt benè 85. Thuman, eum alijs 4. +Saracenorum quæ faciunt 89. Thuma vero vnum decem milia ignium facit, +reliqui autem de populo ciuitatis sunt alij Christiani, alij mercatores, et +alij transeuntes per terram, vndè maximè fui miratus quo modo tot corpora +hominum poterant simul habitare: in ea est maxima copia victualium, scz. +panis et vini, et carnium de porco praecipué cum alijs necessarijs. + + +De monasterio vbi sunt multa animalia diuersa in quodam monte. + +In illa ciuitate 4. fratres nostri conuerterant vnum potentem ad fidem +Christi, in cuius hospitio continué habitabam, dum fui ibi, qui semèl dixit +mihi, Ara, i. pater, vis tu venire et videre ciuitatem istam: et dixi quòd +sic, et ascendimus vnam barcham, et iuimus ad vnum monasterium maximum, de +quo vocauit vnum religiosum sibi notum, et dixit sibi de me. Iste Raban +Francus, i. religiosus venit de indé vbi sol occidit, et nunc vadit +Cambaleth, vt deprecetur vitam pro magno Cane, et ideò ostendas sibi +aliquid, quòd si reuertatur ad contratas suas possit referre quod tale quid +nouum vidi in Canasia ciuitate: tunc sumpsit ille religiosus duos mastellos +magnos repletos reliquijs quæ supererant de mensa, et duxit me ad vnam +perclusam paruam, quam aperuit cum claue, et aparuit, viridarium gratiosum +et magnum in quod intrauimus, et in illo viridario stat vnas monticulus +sicut vnum campanile, repletus amoenis herbis et arboribus, et dum staremus +ibi, ipse sumpsit cymbalum, et incoepit percutere ipsum sicut percutitur +quando monachi intrant refectorium, ad cuius sonitum multa animalia diuersa +descenderunt de monte illo, aliqua vt simiæ, aliqua vt Cati, Maymones, et +aliqua faciem hominis habentia, et dum sic starem congregauerunt se circa +ipsum, 4000. de illis animalibus, et se in ordinibus collocauerunt, coram +quibus posuit paropsidem et dabat eis comedere, et cum comedissent iterum +cymbalum percussit, et omnia ad loca propria redierunt. Tunc admiratus +inquisiui quæ essent animalia ista? Et respondit mihi quod sunt animæ +nobilium virorum, quas nos hic pascimus amore Dei, qui regit orbem, et +sicut vnus homo fuit nobilis, ita anima eius post mortem in corpus nobilis +animalis intrat. Animæ verò simplicium et rusticorum, corpora vilium +animalium intrant. Incoepi istam abusionem improbare, sed nihil valuit +sibi, non enim poterat credere, quòd aliqua anima posset sine corpore +manere. [Sidenote: Chilenso.] Indè transiui ad quandam ciuitatem nomine +Chilenso, cuius muri per 40. milliaria circuerunt. In ista ciuitate sunt +360. pontes lapidei pulchriores quà m vnquam viderim, et benè inhabitatur, +et nauigium maxinium habet, et copiam omnium victualium et aliorum bonorum. +[Sidenote: Thalay. Kakam.] Inde iui ad quoddam flumen dictum Thalay, quod +vbi est strictius habet in latitudine 7. milliaria, et illud flumen per +medium terræ Pygmæorum transit, quorum ciuitas vocatur Kakam, quæ de +pulchrioribus ciuitatibus mundi est. Isti Pigmaei habent longitudinem trium +spansarum mearum, et faciunt maiora et meliora goton, et bombicinam quà m +aliqui homines in mundo. Indè per illud flumen transiens, veni ad vnam +ciuitatem Ianzu, in qua est vnus locus fratrum nostrorum, et sunt in ea +tres ecclesiæ Nestorianorum: haec ciuitas nobilis est, et magna, habens in +se 48. Thuman ignium, et in ea omnia victualia, et animalia in magna copia, +de quo Christiani viuunt: Dominus istius ciuitatis solum de sale habet in +redditibus 50. Thuman Balisi, et valet balisus vnum florenum cum dimidio: +Ita quod vnum Thuman facit 15. millia florenorum, vnam tamen gratiam facit +dominus populo, quia dimittit ei, ne sit caristia in eo, 200. Thuman. Habet +haec ciuitas consuetudinem, quod quando vnus vult facere conuiuium amicis +suis, ad hoc sunt hospitia deputata, et vbi ille circuit per hospites, +dicens sibi tales amicos meos habebis, quos festabis nomine meo, et tantum +in festo volo expendere, et per illum modum meliùs conuiuant amici in +pluribus hospitijs quam facerent in vno. [Sidenote: Montu.] Per 10. +milliaria ab ista ciuitate in capite fluminis Thalay est vna ciuitas vocata +Montu, quæ maius nauigium habet, quà m viderim in toto mundo; Et omnes naues +ibi sunt albæ sicùt nix, et in ipsis sunt hospitia, et multa alia quæ +nullus homo crederet nisi viderentur. + + +De ciuitate Cambaleth. + +[Sidenote: Caramoran.] Indè transiui per 8. dietas per multas terras et +ciuitates, et veni tandem per aquam dulcem ad quandam ciuitatem nomine +Leneyn, quæ est posita super flumen vocatum Caramoran, quod per medium +Catai transit, et magnum damnum sibi infert, quando erumpit. Indè transiens +per flumen versus Orientem per multas dietas et ciuitates, veni ad vnam +ciuitatem nomine Sumacoto, quæ maiorem copiam habet de serico, quà m aliqua +ciuitas in mundo: Quando enim est maior caristia Serici, ibi 40. libræ +habentur pro minori quà m pro 8. grossis. In ea est copia omnium +mercimoniorum et omnium victualium, panis, vini, carnium, piscium, et +omnium specierum electarum. [Sidenote: Cambalec.] Inde transiui versus +Orientem per multas ciuitates, et veni ad illam nobilem, et nominatam +Cambaleth quæ est ciuitas multum antiqua, et veni ad Catai, et eam ceperunt +Tartari: Et iuxta eam ad dimidium miliare aliam ciuitatem fecerunt, quæ +vocatur Caido et haec 12. portas habet, et semper inter vnam et aliam sunt +duo miliaria, et medium inter illas ciuitates benè inhabitatur, ita quòd +faciunt quasi vnam ciuitatem; Et ambitus istarum duarum ciuitatum est +plusquà m 40. milliaria. [Sidenote: Mandeuil cap. 33.] In hac ciuitate +magnus imperator Canis habet sedem suam principalem, et suum magnum +palatium, cuius muri bene 4. miliaria continent; et infra illud palatium +sunt multa alia palatia dominorum de familia sua. In palatio etiam illo est +vnus mons pulcherrimus consitus arboribus, propter quod mons viridis +nominatur, et in monte palatium amoenissimum in quo communitèr Canis +residet: A latere autem montis est vnus lacus magnus, supra quem pons +pulcherrimus est factus, et in illo lacu est magna copia anserum et anatum, +et omnium auium aquaticarum; et in silua montis copia omnium auium et +ferarum siluestrium, et ideo quando dominus Canis vult venari non oportet +eum exire palatium suum. Palatium vero principale, in quo sedes sua est, +est magnum valde, et habet interius 14. columnas aureas, et omnes muri eius +cooperti sunt pellibus rubeis quæ dicuntur nobiliores pelles de mundo: Et +in medio palatij est vna pigna altitudinis duorum passuum, quæ tota est de +vno lapide pretioso nomine merdochas; et est tota circumligata auro, et in +quolibet angulo eius est vnum serpens de auro qui verberatos fortissimé: +Habet etiam haec pignaretia de margaritis, et per istam pignam defertur +potus per meatus et conductus qui in curia regis habetur; et iuxta eam +pendent multa vasa aurea cum quibus volentes bibere possunt. In hoc autem +palatio sunt multi pauones de auro; et cùm aliquis Tartarus facit festum +domino suo, tunc quando conuiuantes collidunt manus suas præ gaudio et +læticia, pauones emittunt alas suas, et expandunt caudas, et videntur +tripudiare; Et hoc credo factura arte Magica, vel aliqua cautela +subterranea. + + +De gloria magni Canis. + +Qvando autem magnus ille Imperator Canis in sede sua imperiali residet, +tunc a sinistro latere sedet Regina, et per vnum gradum inferius duo +mulieres quas ipse tenet pro se; quando non potest ad Reginam accedere: In +infimo autem gradu resident omnes dominae de sua parentela. Omnes autem +mulieres nuptæ portant supra caput suum vnum pedem hominis, longitudinis +vnius brachij cum dimidio; et subter illum pedem sunt pennæ gruis, et totus +ille pes ornatur maximis margaritis. A latero verò dextro ipsius Canis +residet filius eius primogenitus, regnaturus post ipsum, et inferius ipso +omnes qui sunt de sanguine regio: Ibi etiam sunt 4. scriptores scribentes +omnia verba quæ dicit rex; Ante cuius conspectum sunt Barones sui, et multi +alij nobiles cum sua gente maxima, quorum nullus audet loqui nisi a domino +licentia petatur exceptis fatuis et histrionibus, qui suum dominum +consolari habent; Illi etiam nihil audent facere, nisi secundum quod +Dominus voluerit eis legem imponere. Ante portam palatij sunt Barones +custodientes, ne aliquis limen portæ tangat. Cùm autem ille Canis voluerit +facere conuiuium, habet secum 14000. Barones portantes circulos, et +coronulas in capite, et domino suo seruientes; Et quilibet portat vnam +vestem de auro et margaritis tot quot valent plus quam decies millies +florenorum. Curia eius optime ordinatur per denarios, centenarios, et +millenarios, et taliter quòd quilibet in suo ordine peragit officium sibi +deputatum, nec aliquis defectus reperitur. Ego frater Odoricus fui ibi per +tres annos, et multotiens in istis festis suis fui, quià nos fratres +minores in sua curia habemus locum nobis deputatum, et oportet nos semper +ire, et dare sibi nostram benedictionem: et inquisiui ab illis de curia, de +numero illorum qui sunt in curia domini, et responderunt mihi quod de +histrionibus sunt bene 18. Thuman; Custodes autem canum et bestiarum, et +auium sunt. 15. Thuman; Medici vero pro corpore Regis sunt 400. Christiani +autem 8. et vnus Saracenus. Et ego quando fui ibi, hij omnes omnia +necessaria tam ad victum, quam ad vestitum habebant de Curia domini Canis. +Quando autem vult equitare de vna terra ad aliam, habet 4. exercitus +equitum, et vnus per vnam dietam ipsum antecedit, secundus aliam, et +tertius similitèr, et quartus; ita quod semper ipse se tenet in medio in +modum crucis; et ita omnes exercitus habent omnes dietas suas ordinatas, +quod inueniunt omnia victualia parata sine defectu. Illémet autem dominus +Canis per illum modum vadit; Sedet in curru cum duabus rotis in quo facta +est pulcherrima sella tota de lignis Aloe, et auro ornata, et margaritis +maximis, et lapidibus pretiosis; et 4. Elephantes bene ordinati ducunt +istum currum, quos praecedunt 4. equi altissimi optime cooperti. Iuxta +currum à lateribus sunt 4. Barones tenentes currum, ne aliquis appropinquet +domino suo. Supra currum sedent duo Gerfalcones albissimi, et dùm videt +aues quos vult capere, dimittit Falcones volare, et capiunt eas; Et sic +habet solatium suum equitando, et per iactum vnius lapidis nullus audet +appropinquare currui nisi populus assignatus: vnde incredibile esset homini +qui non vidisset de numero gentis suæ, et reginæ, et primogeniei sui. Istæ +Dominus Canis imperium suum diuisit in 12. partes, et vna habet sub se 200. +magnarum ciuitatum: vnde ita latum et longum est suum imperium, quod ad +quamcunque partem iret, satis haberes facere in sex mensibus, exceptis +insulis, quæ sunt bene 5000. + + +De hospitijs paratis per totum imperium pro transeuntibus. + +Iste Dominus, vt transeuntes habeant omnia necessaria sua per totum suum +imperium, fecit hospitia praeparari vbique per vias; in quibus sunt omnia +parata quæ ad victualia pertinent: Cum autem aliqua nouitas oritur in +imperio suo, tunc si distat, ambassiatores super equos vel dromedarios +festinant, et cùm lassantur in cursu, pulsant cornu, et proximum hospitium +parat vnum similitèr, equum, qui quando alius venit fessus accipit literam, +et currit ad hospitium, et sic per hospitia, et per diuersos cursores rumor +per 30. dietas, vno die naturali venit ad imperatorem; et ideò nihil +ponderis potest fieri in imperio suo, quin statim scitur ab eo. Cum autem +ipse Canis vult ire venatum; istum modum habet. Extra Cambaleth ad 20. +dietas, est vna foresta quæ 6. dietas continet in ambitu; in qua sunt tot +genera animalium et auium quòd mirabile est dicere: Ad illud nemus vadit in +fine trium annorum vel quatuor cum tota gente, cum qua ipsum circuit, et +canes intrare permittit, qui animalia, scilicet leones, ceruos, et alia +animalia reducunt ad vnam planitiem pulcherrimam in medio nemoris, quia ex +clamoribus canum maximè tremunt omnes bestiæ syluæ. Tunc accedit magnus +Canis super tres elephantes et 5. sagittas mittit in totam multitudinem +animalium, et post ipsum omnes Barones, et post ipsos alij de familia sua +emittunt sagittas suas; et omnes sagittæ sunt signatæ certis signis et +diuersis: Tunc vadit ad animalia interfecta, dimittens viua nemus reintrare +vt alià s habeat ex eis venationem suam, et quilibet illud animal habebit in +cuius corpere inuenit sagittam suam quam iaciebat. + + +De quatuor festis quæ tenet in anno Canis in curia. + +Quatuor magna festa in anno facit Dominus Canis, scilicet festum +natiuitatis, festum circumcisionis, coronationis, et desponsationis suæ; et +ad ista festa conuocat omnes Barones, et histriones, et omnes de parentela +sua. Tunc domino Cane in suo throno sedente, accedunt Barones cum circulis +et coronis in capite, vestiti vario modo, quia aliqui de viridi, scilicet +primi, secundi de sanguineo, et tertij de croceo, et tenent in manibus vnam +tabulam eburneam de dentibus Elephantum, et cinguntur cingulis aureis vno +semisse latis, et stant pedibus silentium tenentes. Circa illos stant +histriones cum suis instrumentis: In vno autem angulo cuiusdam magni +palatij resident Philosophi omnes ad certas horas, et puncta attendentes: +et cum deuenitur ad punctumn et horam petitam à philosopho, vnus praeco +clamat valentèr. Inclinetis vos omnes imperatori vestro: tunc omnes Barones +cadunt ad terram; et iterum clamat, Surgite omnes, et illi statim surgunt. +Iterum philosophi ad aliud punctum attendunt, et cùm peruentum fuerit, +iterum praeco clamat; ponite digitum in aurem, et statim dicit, extrahite +ipsum; iterùm ad aliud punctum clamat, Buratate farinam: et multa alia +faciunt, quæ omnia dicunt certam signifcationem habere, quæ scriberi nolui, +nec curaui, quia vana sunt et risu digna. Cùm autem peruentum fuerit ad +horam histrionum, time Philosophi dicunt, facite festum domino, et omnes +pulsant instrumenta sua, et faciunt maximum sonitum; et statim alius +clamat; Taceant omnes, et omnes tacent: Tunc accedunt histrionatrices ante +dominum dulcitèr modulantes, quod mihi plus placuit. Tunc veniunt leones, +et faciunt reuerentiam domino Cani; Et tunc histriones faciunt ciphos +aureos plenos vino volare per aerem, et ad ora hominum se applicare vt +bibant. Haec et multa alia mirabilia in curia illius Canis vidi, quæ nullus +crederet nisi videret; et ideò dimitto ea. De alio mirabili audiui à fide +dignis, quòd in vno regno istius Canis in quo sunt montes Kapsei (et +dicitur illud regnum Kalor) nascuntur pepones maximi, qui quando sunt +maturi aperiuntur, et intùs inuenitur vna bestiola similis vni agnello: +sicut audiui quòd in mari Hybernico stant arbores supra ripam maris et +portant fructum sicut essent cucurbitæ, quæ certo tempore cadunt in aquam +et fiunt aues vocatæ Bernakles, et illud est verum. + + +De diuersis Prouincijs et ciuitatibus. + +De isto imperio Katay recessi post tres annos, et transiui 50. dietas +versus Occidentem; et tandem veni ad terram Pretegoani, cuius ciuitas +principalis Kosan vocatur, quæ multas habet sub se ciuitates. [Sidenote: +Casan.] Vltra per multas dietas iui, et perueni ad vnam prouinciam vocatam +Kasan; et haec est secunda melior prouincia mundi, vt dicitur, et est +optimè habitata: Sic quod quando exitur à porta vnius ciuitatis, videntur +portæ alterius ciuitatis, sicut egomet vidi de multis. Latitudo Prouinciæ +est 50. dietarum, et longitudo plusquam 60. In ea est maxima copia omnium +victualium, et maximè castaneorum; et haec est vna de 12. prouincijs magni +Canis. [Sidenote: Tibec regio alià s Tebet Guillielmo de Rubricis.] Vltra +veni ad vnum regnum vocatum Tibek quod est subiectum Cani, in quo est maior +copia panis et vini, quam sit in toto mundo vt credo. Gens illius terræ +moratur communiter in tenorijs factis ex feltris nigris: Principalis +ciuitas sua murata est pulcherrimè ex lapidibus albissimis, et nigerrimis +interescalariter dispositis et curiosè compositis, et omnes viæ eius optimè +pouatæ. In ista contrata nullus audet effundere sanguinem hominis, nec +alicuius animalis, ob reuerentiam vnius Idoli. In ista ciuitate moratur +Abassi i. Papa eorum, qui est caput et princeps omnium Idolatrarum; quibus +dat et distribuit beneficia secundum morem eorum; sicut noster Papa Romanus +est caput omnium Christianorum. Foeminæ in hoc regno portant plusquam +centum tricas, et habent duos dentes in ore ita longos sicut apri. Quando +etiam pater alicuius moritur, tunc filius conuocat omnes sacerdotes et +histriones, et dicit se velle patrem suum honorare, et facit eum ad campum +duci sequentibus parentibus omnibus, amicis, et vicinis, vbi sacerdotes cum +magna solemnitate amputant caput suum, dantes illud filio suo, et tunc +totum corpus in frusta concidunt, et ibi dimittunt, cum orationibus cum eo +redeuntes; [Sidenote: Eadem historia de eodem populo apud Guilielmum de +Rubricis.] Tunc veniunt vultures, de monte assuefacti ad huiusmodi, et +carnes omnes asportant: Et ex tunc currit fama de eo quòd sanctus est, quia +angeli domini ipsum portant in paradisum: Et iste est maximus honor, quem +reputat filius posse fieri patri suo mortuo: Tunc filius sumit caput +patris, et coquit ipsum, et comedit, de testa eius faciens ciphum in quo +ipse cum omnibus de domo et cognatione eius bibunt cum solemnitate et +laetitia in memoriam patris comesti. Et multa vilia et abominabilia facit +gens illa quæ non scribo, quia non valent, nec homines crederent nisi +viderent. + + +De diuite qui pascitur à 50. Virginibus. + +Dum fui in prouincia Manzi transiui iuxta palatium vnius hominis popularis, +qui habuit 50. domicellas virgines sibi continuè ministrantes, in omnibus +pascentes eum sicut auis auiculas, et habet semper 5. fercula triplicata; +et quando pascunt eum, continuè cantant dulcissimè: Iste habet in +redditibus Tagaris risi 30. Thuman, quorum quodlibet decies millies facit: +vnum autem Tagar pondus est asini. Palatium suum duo millaria tenet in +ambitu; cuius pauimentum semper vnum laterem habet aureum, alium argenteum: +Iuxta ambitum istius palatij est vnus monticulus artificialis de auro et +argento, super quo stant Monasteria, et campanilia, et alia delectabilia +pro solatio illius popularis; Et dictum fuit mihi, quòd quatuor tales +homines sunt in regno illo. [Sidenote: Mulierum parui pedes.] Nobilitas +virorum est longos habere vngues in digitis, praecipue pollicis quibus +circueunt sibi manus: Nobilitas autem et pulchritudo mulierem est pauos +habere pedes: Et ideò matres quando filiæ suæ sunt tenellæ ligant pedes +earum, et non dimittunt crescere. [Sidenote: Milestorite.] Vltra transiens +versus meridiem applicui ad quandam contratam, quæ vocatur Milestorite, quæ +pulchra est valdè et fertilis: Et in ista contrata erat vnus vocatus Senex +de monte, qui inter duos montes fecerat sibi vnum murum circumuentem istos +montes. Infra istum murum erant fontes pulcherrimi de mundo; Et iuxta +fontes erant pulcherrimæ virgines in maximo numero, et equi pulcherrimi, et +omni illud quod ad suauitatem, et delectationem corporis fieri poterit, et +ideo illum locum vocant homines illius contratæ Paradisum. Iste senex cùm +viderit aliquem iuuenem formosum et robustum, posuit eum in illo paradiso; +Per quosdam autem conductus descendere facit vinum et lac abundantèr. Iste +Senex cùm voluerit se vindicare, vel interficere regem aliquem vel Baronem, +dicit illi qui præerat illi paradiso vt aliquem de notis illius regis, vel +Baronis introduceret in paradisum illum, et illum delicijs frui +permitteret, et tunc daret sibi potionem vnam, quæ ipsum sopiebat in +tantum, quòd insensibilem redderet, et ipsum sic dormientem faceret extra +paradisum deportari: qui excitatus et se extra paradisum conspiciens, in +tanta tristitia positus foret, quòd nesciret quid faceret: Tunc ad illum +senem iret, rogans eum, vt interùm in paradisum introduceretur: qui sibi +dicit, tu illic introduci non poteris, nisi talem vel talem interficias; et +siue interfeceris, siue non, reponam te in paradiso, et ibidem poteris +semper manere; Tunc ille sic faceret, et omnes seni odiosos interficeret; +Et ideò omnes reges orientales illum senem timuerunt, et sibi tributum +magnum dederunt. + + +De morte Senis de monte. + +Cum autem Tartari magnam partem mundi cepissent, venerunt ad istum Senem, +et dominium illius Paradisi ab eo abstulerunt, qui multos sicarios de +Paradiso illo emisit, et nobiliores Tartarorum interfici fecit. Tartari +autem hoc videntes ciuitatem, in qua erat senex obsederunt, eum ceperunt, +et pessima morte interfecerunt. Hanc gratiam habent fratres ibidem, quod +citissimè per virtutem nominis Christi Iesu, et in virtute illius sanguinis +pretiosi, quem effudit in cruce pro salute generis humani, daemonia ab +obsessis corporibus expellunt; et quia multi ibidem sum obsessi, ducuntur +per decem dietas ad fratres ligati, qui liberati statim credunt in +Christum, qui liberauit ebs habentes ipsum pro Deo suo, et baptizati sunt, +et idola sua, et pecorum suorum statim dant fratribus, quæ sunt communitèr +de feltro, et de crinibus mulierum et fratres ignem in communi loci faciunt +ad quem populus confluit, vt videat Deos vicinorum suorum comburi et +fratres coram populo Idola in ignem proijciunt; Et prima vice de igne +exierunt; Tunc fratres ignem cum aqua benedicta conspercerunt, et interùm +Idola in ignem proiecerunt, et daemones in effigie fumi nigerrimi fugerunt, +et Idola remanserunt, et combusta sunt. Posteà auditor clamor per aerem +talis, vide, vide, quo modo de habitatione mea expulsus sum. Et per istum +modum fratres maximam multitudinem baptizant, qui citò recidiuant ad idola +pecorum: qui fratres continuò quasi stent cum illis, et illos informent. +Aliud terribile fuit quod ego vidi ibi. Nam cùm irem per vnam vallem quæ +sita est iuxta fluuium deliciarum, multa corpora mortua vidi, et in illa +valle audiui sonos musicos dulces et diuersos, et maximè de cytharis, vndè +multum timui. Haec vallis habet longitudinem septem, vel octo milliarium ad +plus, in quam si quis intrat, moritur, et nunquam viuus potest transire per +medium illius vallis, et ideò omnes de contrata declinant à latere: Et +tentatus eram intrare, et videre, quid hoc esset. Tandem oratis et Deo me +recommendans, et cruce signans, in nomine Iesu intraui, et vidi tot corpora +mortua ibi, quòd nullus crederet nisi videret In hac valle ab vno eius +latere, in vno saxo vnam faciem hominis vidi, quæ ita terribilitèr me +respexit, quòd omnino credidi ibi fuisse mortuus: Sed semper hoc verbum +(verbum caro factum est et habitauit in nobis) protuli, et cruce me +signaui, nec propiùs quà m per 7. passus, vel 8. accedere capiti ausus fui: +Iui autem fugiens ad aliud caput vallis, et super vnum monticulum arenosum +ascendi, in quo vndique circumspiciens nihil vidi nisi cytharas illas, quas +per se (vt mihi videbatur) pulsari et resonare mirabiliter audiui. Cùm vero +fui in cacumine montis, inueni ibi argentum in maxima quantitate, quasi +fuissent squamæ piscium. Congregans autem inde in gremio meo pro mirabili +ostendendo, sed ductus conscientia, in terram proieci, nihil mecum +reseruans, et sic per gratiam Dei liber exiui. Cùm autem homines illius +contratæ sciuerunt me viuum exisse, reuerebantur me multum, dicentes me +baptizatum et sanctum: et corpora illa fuisse daemonum infernalium qui +pulsant cytharas vt homines alliciant intare, et interficiant. Haec de +visis certudinalitér ego frater Odoricus hic inscripsi; et multa mirabilia +omisi ponere, quia homines hon credidissent nisi vidissent. + + +De honore et reuerentia factis Domino Cani. + +Vnum tantùm referam de magno Cane quod vidi. Consuetudo est in partibus +illis quòd quando praedictus dominus per aliquam contratam transit, homines +ante ostia sua accendunt ignem et apponunt aromata, ac faciunt fumum, vt +dominus transiens suauem sentiat adorem, et multi obuiam sibi vadunt. Dum +autem semel veniret in Cambeleth, et fama vndique diuulgaretur de suo +aduentu, vnus noster Episcopus, et aliqui nostri minores fratres et ego +iuimus obuià m sibi benè per duas dietas: Et dum appropinquaremus ad eum, +posuimus crucem super lignum, et ego habebam mecum in manu thuribulum, et +incepimus cantare alta voce dicentes: Veni creator spiritus: Et dum sic +cantaremus audiuit voces, nostras, fecÃtque nos vocari, ac iussit nos ad +eum accedere; cùm vt suprà dictum est, nullus audeat appropinquare currui +suo ad iactum lapidis, nisi vocatus, exceptis illis qui currum custodiunt. +Et dum iuissemus ad eum, ipse deposuit galerum suum, sine capellum +inestimabilis quasi valoris, et fecit reuerentiam Cruci; et statim incensum +posui in thuribulo; Episcopus noster accepit thuribulum, et thurificauit +eum; ac sibi praedictus Episcopus dedit benedictionem suam. Accedentes verò +ad praedictum dominum, sempèr sibi aliquid offerendum deferunt; secum illam +antiquam legem obseruantes; Non apparebis in conspectu meo vacuus; Idcirco +portauimus nobiscum poma, et ea sibi super vnum incisorium reuerentèr +obtulimus; et ipse duo accepit, et de vno aliquantulum comedit: Et tunc +fecit nobis signum quod recederemus, ne equi venientes in aliquo nos +offenderent; statimque ab eo discessimus, atque diuertimus, et iuimus ad +aliquos Barones per fratres nostri ordinis ad fidem conuersos, qui in +exercitu eius erant, et eis obtulimus de pomis praedictis, qui cum maximo +gaudio ipsa accipientes ita videbantur laetari, ac si praebuissemus eis +familiaritèr magnum munus. Haec praedicta frater Guilelmus de Solangna in +scriptis redegit, sicùt praedictus frater Odoricus ore tenus exprimebat. +Anno Domini 1330, mense Maij in loco Sancti Antonij de Padua; Nec curauit +de latino difficili, et stilo ornato; Sed sicut ipse narrabat ad hoc vt +homines faciliùs intelligerent quæ dicuntur. Ego frater Odoricus de Foro +Iulij de quadam terra quæ dicitur Portus Vahonis de ordine minorum +testificor, et testimonium perhibeo reuerendo patri Guidoto ministro +prouinciæ Sancti Antonij in Marchia Triuisana, cùm ab eo fuerim per +obedientiam requisitus, quòd haec omnia quæ superiùs scripta sunt, aut +proprijs oculis ego vidi, aut a fide dignis audiui: Communis etiam loquutio +illarum terrarum illa quæ nec vidi testatur esse; Multa etiam alia ego +dimisissem, nisi illa proprijs oculis conspexissem. Ego autem de die in +diem me propono contratas seu terras accedere, in quibus mori, et viuere me +dispono, si placuerit Deo meo. + + +De morte fratris Odorici. + +Anno igitur Domini 1331. disponente se praedicto fratre Odorico ad +perficiendum iter suæ peregrinationis, prout mente conceperat, et etiam vt +via et labor esset sibi magnis ad meritum, decreuit primò praesentiam adire +Domini et patris omnium summi Pontificis Domini Ioannis Papæ 22: cuius +benedictione obedientiaque recepta cum societate fratrum secum ire +volentium ad partes infidelium se transferret: Cùmque sic eundo versus +summum Pontificem, non multum distaret à ciuitate Pisana, in quadam via +occurrit sibi quidam senex in habitu peregrini eum salutans ex nomine, Aue +(inquiens) frater Odorice: Et cùm frater quaereret quo modo ipsius haberet +noticiam? Respondit, Dum eras in India noui te, tuùm qui noui sanctum +propositum; Sed et tu modò ad conuentum vndè venisti reuertere, quia die +sequenti decimo ex hoc mundo migrabis. Verbis igitur senis attonitus et +stupefactus, praesertim cùm Senex ille statim post dictum ab eius aspectu +disparuit; reuerti decreuit; Et reuersus est in bona prosperitate nullam +sentiens grauedinem corporis, seu aliquam infirmitatem; Cùmque esset in +conuentu suo Vtinensi. N. in prouincia Paduana decimo die, prout facti sibi +fuir reuelatio, accepta communione, ipsoque ad Deum disponente, etiam +corpore existens incolumis in Domino foeliciter requieuit: Cuius sacer +obitus Domino summo Pontifici praefato sub manu Notarij publici +transmittitur; qui sic scribet. + +Anno Domini 1331. decima quarta die mensis Ianuarij obijt in Christo Beatus +Odoricus ordinis fratrum Minorum, cuius precibus omnipotens Deus multa, et +varia miracula demonstrauit; quæ ego Guetelus notarius communis Vtini, +filius domini Damiani de portu Gruario, de mandato et voluntate nobilis +viri Domini Conradi de Buardigio Castaldionis, et consilij Vtini, scripsi, +sicut potui, bona fide, et fratribus Minoribus exemplum dedi; sed non de +omnibus, quià sunt innumerabilia, et mihi difficilia ad scribendum. + + +The same in English. + +Here beginneth the iournall of Frier Odoricus, one of the order of the + Minorites, concerning strange things which hee sawe among the Tarters of + the East. + +Albeit many and sundry things are reported by diuers authors concerning the +fashions and conditions of this world: notwithstanding I frier Odoricus of +Friuli, de portu Vahonis being desirous to trauel vnto the foreign and +remote nations of infidels, sawe and heard great and miraculous things, +which I am able truely to auoch. [Sidenote: Pera. Trapesunda.] First of al +therefore sayling from Pera by Constantinople, I arrived at Trapesunda. +This place is right commodiously situate, as being an hauen for the +Persians and Medes, and other countreis beyonde the sea. In this lande I +behelde with great delight a very strange spectacle, namely a certaine man +leading about with him more then foure thousande partriges. The man +himselfe walked vpon the ground, and the partriges flew in the aire, which +he ledde vnto a certaine castle called Zauena, being three dayes iourney +distant from Trapesunda. The saide partriges were so tame, that when the +man was desirous to lie downe and rest, they would all come flocking about +him like chickens. And so hee led them vnto Trapesunda, and vnto the palace +of the Emperour, who tooke as many of them as he pleased, and the rest the +saide man carried vnto the place from whence he came. In this citie lyeth +the body of Athanasius, vpon the gate of the citie. [Sidenote: The citie of +Azaron in Armenia maior.] And then I passed on further vnto Armenia maior, +to a certaine citie called Azaron, which had bene very rich in olde time, +but nowe the Tarters haue almost layde it waste. In the saide citie there +was abundance of bread and flesh, and of all other victuals except wine and +fruites. This citie also is very colde, and is reported to be higher +situated, then any other city in the world. It hath most holesome and +sweete waters about it: for the veines of the said waters seeme to spring +and flow from the mighty riuer of Euphrates, which is but a dayes iourney +from the saide city. Also, the said citie stands directly in the way to +Tauris. [Sidenote: Sobissacalo.] And I passed on vnto a certaine mountaine +called Sobissacalo. In the foresaide countrey there is the very same +mountalne whereupon the Arke of Noah rested: vnto the which I would +willingly haue ascended, if my company would haue stayed for me. Howbeit +the people of that countrey report, that no man could euer ascend the said +mountaine, because (say they) it pleaseth not the highest God. [Sidenote: +Tauris a citie of Persia.] And I trauailed on further vnto Tauris that +great and royal city, which was in old time called Susis. This city is +accompted for traffique of marchandize the chiefe city of the world: for +there is no kinde of victuals, nor anything else belonging vnto +marchandize, which is not to be had there in great abundance. This city +stands very commodiously: for vnto it all the nations of the whole worlde +in a maner may resort for traffique. Concerning the saide citie, the +Christians in those parts are of opinion, that the Persian Emperour +receiues more tribute out of it, then the King of France out of all his +dominions. Neare vnto the said city there is a salt-hill yeelding salt vnto +the city: and of that salt ech man may take what pleaseth him, not paying +ought to any man therefore. In this city many Christians of all nations do +inhabite, ouer whom the Saracens beare rule in alle things. Then I +traueiled on further vnto a city called Soldania, [Marginal note: Or, +Sultania.] wherein the Persian Emperour lieth all Sommer time: but in +winter hee takes his progresse vnto another city standing upon the sea +called Baku. [Marginal note: The Caspian sea.] Also the foresaid city is +very great and colde, hauing good and holesome waters therein, vnto the +which also store of marchandize is brought. Moreouer I trauelled with a +certaine company of Carauans toward vpper India: and in the way, after many +days iourney, I came vnto the citie of the three wise men called Cassan +[Marginal Note: Or Cassibin.], which is a noble and renowmed city, sauing +that the Tartars haue destroyed a great part thereof, and it aboundeth with +bread, wine, and many other commodities. From this city vnto Ierusalem +(whither the three foresaid wise-men were miraculously led) it is fiftie +days iourney. There be many wonders in this citie also, which, for +breuities sake, I omit [Sidenote: Geste.] From thence I departed vnto a +certaine city called Geste, whence the Sea of Sand is distant, one dayes +iourney, which is a most wonderful and dangerous thing. In this city there +is abundance of all kinds of victuals, and especially of figs, reisins, and +grapes; more (as I suppose) then in any part of the whole world besides. +This is one of the three principall cities in all the Persian Empire. Of +this city the Saracens report, that no Christian can by any meanes liue +therein aboue a yeere. [Sidenote: Como.] Then passing many dayes ioumey on +forward, I came vnto a certaine citie called Comum, which was an huge and +mightie Citie in olde time, conteyning well nigh fiftie miles in circuite, +and hath done in times past great damage vnto the Romanes. In it there are +stately palaces altogether destitute of inhabitants, notwithstanding it +aboundeth with great store of victuals. From hence traueiling through many +countreys, at length I came vnto the land of Iob named Hus, which is fulle +of all kinde of victuals, and very pleasantly situated. Thereabouts are +certaine mountains hauing good pastures for cattell upon them. Here also +Manna is found in great aboundance. Four partriges are here solde for lesse +than a groat In this countrey there are most comely olde men. Here also the +men spin and card, and not the women. This land bordereth vpon the North +part of Chalddæa. + + +Of the maners of the Chaldaeans, and of India. + +[Sidenote: The Tower of Babel.] From thence I traueled into Chaldæa which +is a great kingdome, and I passed by the tower of Babel. This region hath a +language peculiar vnto it selfe, and there are beautifull men, and deformed +women. The men of the same countrey vse to haue their haire kempt, and +trimmed like vnto our women: and they weare golden turbants vpon their +heades richly set with pearle, and pretious stones. The women are clad in a +coarse smock onely reaching to their knees, and hauing long sleeues hanging +downe to the ground. And they goe bare-footed, wearing breeches which reach +to the ground also. Thei weare no attire vpon their heads, but their haire +hangs disheaueled about their eares: and there be many other strange things +also. From thence I came into the lower India, which the Tartars ouerran +and wasted. And in this countrey the people eat dates for the most part, +whereof 42. li. are there sold for lesse than a groat. [Sidenote: Ormus.] I +passed further also many dayes iourney vnto the Ocean sea, and the first +land where I arriued, is called Ormes, being well fortified, and hauing +great store of marchandize and treasure therein. Such and so extreme is the +heat in that countrey, that the priuities of men come out of their bodies +and hang down euen vnto their mid-legs. And therefore the inhabitants of +the same place, to preserue their own liues, do make a certaine ointment, +and anointing their priuie members therewith, do lap them up in certaine +bags fastened vnto their bodies, for otherwise they must needs die. Here +also they vse a kinde of Bark or shippe called Iase being compact together +onely with hempe. [Sidenote: Thana, whereof Frederick Cæsar maketh +mention.] And I went on bourd into one of them, wherein I could not finde +any yron at all, and in the space of 28 dayes I arriued at the city of +Thana, wherein foure of our friers were martyred for the faith of Christ. +This countrey is well situate, hauing abundance of bread and wine, and of +other victuals therein. This kingdome in olde time was very large and vnder +the dominion of king Porus, who fought a great battell with Alexander the +great. The people of this countrey are idolaters worshipping fire, serpents +and trees. And ouer all this land the Saracen do beare rule, who tooke it +by maine force, and they themselues are in subjection unto King Daldilus. +There be diuers kinds of beasts, as namely blacke lyouns in great +abundance, and apes also, and monkeis, and battes as bigge as our doues. +Also there are mise as bigge as our countrey dogs, because cats are not +able to incounter them. Moreouer in the same countrey euery man hath a +bundle of great boughs standing in a water-pot before his doore, which +bundle is as great as a pillar, and it will not wither, so long as water is +applied thereunto: with many other nouelties and strange things, the +relation whereof would breed great delight. + + +How peper is had: and where it groweth. + +[Sidenote: Malabar.] Moreouer, that it may be manifest how peper is had, it +is to be vnderstood that it groweth in a certaine kingdome whereat I my +selfe arriued, being called Minibar, and it is not so plentifull in any +other part of the worlde as it is there. For the wood wherein it growes +conteineth in circuit 18 dayes iourney. And in the said wood or forrest +there are two cities, one called Flandrina, and the other Cyncilim. In +Flandrina both Iewes and Christians doe inhabite, betweene whom there is +often contention and warre: howbeit the Christians ouercome the Iewes at +all times. In the foresaid wood pepper is had after this maner: first it +groweth in leaues like vnto pot-hearbs, which they plant neere vnto great +trees as we do our vines, and they bring forth pepper in clusters, as our +vines doe yeeld grapes, but being ripe, they are of a greene colour, and +are gathered as we gather grapes, and then the graines are layed in the +Sunne to be dried, and being dried are put into earthen vessels: and thus +is pepper made and kept. Now, in the same wood there be many riuers, +wherein are great store of Crocodiles, and of other serpents, which the +inhabitants thereabout do burne vp with straw and with other dry fewel, and +so they go to gather their pepper without danger. [Sidenote: Polumbrum.] At +the South end of the said forrest stands the city of Polumbrum, which +aboundeth with marchandize of all kinds. All the inhabitants of that +countrey do worship a liuing oxe, as their god, whom they put to labour for +sixe yeres, and in the seuenth yere they cause him to rest from al his +worke, placing him in a solemne and publique place, and calling him an holy +beast Moreouer they vse this foolish ceremonie: Euery morning they take two +basons, either of siluer, or of gold, and with one they receiue the vrine +of the oxe, and with the other his dung. With the vrine they wash their +face, their eyes, and all their fiue senses. Of the dung they put into both +their eyes, then they anoint the bals of the cheeks therewith, and thirdly +their breast: and then they say that they are sanctified for all that day; +And as the, people doe, euen so doe their King and Queene. This people +worshippeth also a dead idole, which, from the nauel vpward, resembleth a +man, and from the nauel downeward an oxe. The very same Idol deliuers +oracles vnto them, and sometimes requireth the blood of fourtie virgins for +his hire. And therefore the men of that region do consecrate their +daughters and their sonnes vnto their idols, euen as Christians do their +children vnto some Religion or Saint in heauen. Likewise they sacrifice +their sonnes and their daughters, and so, much people is put to death +before the said Idol by reason of that accursed ceremony. Also, many other +hainous and abominable villanies doeth that brutish beastly people commit: +and I sawe many moe strange things among them which I meane not here to +insert. [Sidenote: The burning of their dead.] Another most vile custome +the foresaide nation doeth retaine: for when any man dieth they burne his +dead corps to ashes: and if his wife suruiueth him, her they burne quicke, +because (say they) she shall accompany her husband in his tilthe and +husbandry, when he is come into a new world. Howbeit the said wife hauing +children by her husband, may if she will, remain with them, without shame +or reproach; notwithstanding, for the most part, they all of them make +choice to be burnt with their husbands. Now, albeit the wife dieth before +her husband, that law bindeth not the husband to any such inconuenience, +but he may mary another wife also. Likewise, the said nation hath another +strange custome, in that their women drink wine, but their men do not. Also +the Women haue the lids and brows of their eyes and beards shauen, but the +men haue not: with many other base and filthy fashions which the said women +do vse contrary to the nature of their sexe. [Sidenote: Mobar, or +Maliapor.] From that kingdom I traueiled 10. daies iourney vnto another +kingdome called Mobar, which containeth many cities. Within a certaine +church of the same countrey, the body of S. Thomas the Apostle is interred, +the very same church being full of idols: and in 15. houses round about the +said Church, there dwell certaine priests who are Nestorians, that is to +say, false, and bad Christians, and schismatiques. + + +Of a strange and vncouth idole: and of certaine customes and ceremonies. + +In the said kingdome of Mobar there is a wonderfull strange idole, being +made after the shape and resemblance of a man, as big as the image of our +Christopher, et [sic passim--KTH] consisting all of most pure and +glittering gold. And about the neck thereof hangeth a silke riband, ful of +most rich and precious stones, some one of which is of more value then a +whole kingdome. The house of this idol is all of beaten gold, namely the +roofe, the pauement, and the sieling of the wall within and without. Vnto +this idol the Indians go on pilgrimage, as we do vnto S. Peter. Some go +with halters about their necks, some with their hands bound behind them, +some others with kniues sticking on their armes or legs: and if after their +peregrination, the flesh of their wounded arme festereth or corrupteth, +they esteeme that limme to be holy, and thinke that their God is wel +pleased with them. Neare vnto the temple of that idol is a lake made by the +hands of men in an open et common place, whereinto the pilgrimes cast gold, +siluer, and precious stones, for the honour of the idol and the repairing +of his temple. And therefore when any thing is to be adorned or mended, +they go vnto this lake taking vp the treasure which was cast in. Moreouer +at euery yerely feast of the making or repairing of the said idol, the king +and queene, with the whole multitude of the people, and all the pilgrimes +assemble themselues, and placing the said idol in a most stately and rich +chariot, they cary him out of their temple with songs, and with all kind of +musical harmonie, and a great company of virgins go procession-wise two and +two in a rank singing before him. Many pilgrims also put themselues vnder +the chariot wheeles, to the end that their false god may go ouer them: and +al they ouer whom the chariot runneth, are crushed in pieces, and diuided +asunder in the midst, and slaine right out. Yea, and in doing this, they +think themselues to die most holily and securely, in the seruice of their +god. And by this meanes euery yere, there die vnder the said filthy idol, +mo then 500. persons, whose carkases are burned, and their ashes are kept +for reliques, because they died in that sort for their god. Moreouer they +haue another detestable ceremony. For when any man offers to die in the +seruice of his false god, his parents, and all his friends assemble +themselues together with a consort of musicians, making him a great and +solemne feast: which feast being ended, they hange 5. sharpe kniues about +his neck carying him before the idol, and so soone as he is come thither, +he taketh one of his kniues crying with a loud voice, For the worship of my +god do I cut this my flesh, and then he casteth the morsel which is cut, at +the face of his idol: but at the very last wound wherewith he murthereth +himselfe, he vttereth these words: Now do I yeeld my self to death in the +behalfe of my god, and being dead, his body is burned, and is esteemed by +al men to be holy. The king of the said region is most rich in gold, +siluer, and precious stones, and there be the fairest vnions in al the +world. Traueling from thence by the Ocean sea 50. daies iourney southward, +I came vnto a certain land named Lammori, [Marginal note: Perhaps he +meaneth Comori.] where, in regard of extreeme heat, the people both men and +women go stark-naked from top to toe: who seeing me apparelled scoffed at +me, saying that God made Adam et Eue naked. In this countrey al women are +common, so that no man can say, this is my wife. Also when any of the said +women beareth a son or a daughter, she bestowes it vpon any one that hath +lien with her, whom she pleaseth. Likewise al the land of that region is +possessed in common, so that there is not mine and thine, or any propriety +of possession in the diuision of lands: howbeit euery man hath is owne +house peculiar vnto himselfe. Mans flesh, if it be fat, is eaten as +ordinarily there, as beefe in our country. And albeit the people are most +lewd, yet the country is exceedingly good, abounding with al commodities, +as flesh, corne, rise, siluer, gold, wood of aloes, Campheir, and many +other things. Marchants comming vnto this region for traffique do vsually +bring with them fat men, selling them vnto the inhabitants as we sel hogs, +who immediatly kil and eat them. [Sidenote: Sumatra.] In this island +towards south, there is the another kingdome called Simoltra, where both +men and women marke themselues with red-hot yron in 12. sundry spots of +their faces: and this nation is at continual warre with certaine naked +people in another region. [Sidenote: Iaffa.] Then I traueled further vnto +another island called Iaua, the compasse whereof by sea is 3000. miles. The +king of this Iland hath 7. other crowned kings vnder his iurisdiction. The +said Island is throughly inhabited, and is thought to be one of the +principall Ilands of the whole world. In the same Iland there groweth great +plenty of cloues, cubibez, and nutmegs, and in a word all kinds of spices +are there to be had, and great abundance of all victuals except wine. The +king of the said land of Iaua hath a most braue and sumptuous pallace, the +most loftily built, that euer I saw any, and it hath most high greeses and +stayers to ascend vp to the roomes therein contained, one stayre being of +siluer, and another of gold, throughout the whole building. Also the lower +roomes were paued all ouer with one square plate of siluer, and another of +gold. All the wals vpon the inner side were seeled ouer with plates of +beaten gold, whereupon were engrauen the pictures of knights, hauing about +their temples, ech of them a wreath of golde, adorned with precious stones. +The roofe of the palace was of pure gold. With this king of Iaua the great +Can of Catay hath had many conflictes in war: whom notwithstanding the said +king hath alwayes ouercome and vanquished. + + +Of certaine trees yeelding meale, hony, and poyson. + +Nere vnto the said Iland is another countrey called Panten, or +Tathalamasin. And the king of the same country hath many Ilands vnder his +dominion: In this land there are trees yeelding meale, hony, and wine, and +the most deadly poison in all the whole world: for against it there is but +one only remedy: and that is this: if any man hath taken of the poyson, and +would be deliuered from the danger thereof, let him temper the dung of a +man in water, and so drinke a good quantitie thereof, and it expels the +poyson immediatly, making it to auoid at the fundament. Meale is produced +out of the said trees after this maner. They be mighty huge trees, and when +they are cut with an axe by the ground, there issueth out of the stocke a +certain licour like vnto gumme, which they take and put into bags made of +leaues, laying them for 15 daies together abroad in the sun, and at the end +of those 15 dayes, when the said licour is throughly parched, it becommeth +meale. Then they steepe it first in sea water, washing it afterward with +fresh water, and so it is made very good and sauorie paste, whereof they +make either meat or bread, as they thinke good. Of which bread I my selfe +did eate, and it is fayrer without and somewhat browne within. [Sidenote: A +sea running still Southward.] By this countrey is the sea called Mare +mortuum, which runneth continually Southward, into the which whoseuer +falleth is neuer seene after. In this countrey also are found canes of an +incredible length, namely 60 paces high or more, and they are as bigge as +trees. Other canes there be also called Cassan, which overspread the earth +like grasse, and out of euery knot of them spring foorth certaine branches, +which are continued vpon the ground almost for the space of a mile. In the +sayd canes there are found certaine stones, one of which stones, whoseuer +carryeth about with him, cannot be wounded with any yron: and therefore the +men of that countrey for most part, carry such stones with them, +whithersoeuer they goe. Many also cause one of the armes of their children, +while they are yong, to be launced, putting one of the said stones in the +wound, healing also, and closing vp the said wound with the powder of a +certaine fish (the name whereof I do not know) which powder doth immediatly +consolidate and cure the said wound. And by the vertue of these stones, the +people aforesaid doe for the most part triumph both on sea and land. +Howbeit there is one kind of stratageme, which the enemies of this nation, +knowing the vertue of the sayd stones, doe practise against them: namely, +they prouide themselues armour of yron or steele against their arrowes, and +weapons also poisoned with the poyson of trees, and they carry in their +hands wooden stakes most sharpe and hard-pointed, as if they were yron: +likewise they shoot arrowes without yron heads, and so they confound and +slay some of their vnarmed foes trusting too securely vnto the vertue of +their stones. [Sidenote: Sayles made of reedes.] Also Of the foresayd canes +called Cassan they make sayles for their ships, and litle houses, and many +other necessaries. [Sidenote: Campa.] From thence after many dayes trauell, +I arrived at another kingdome called Campa, a most beautiful and rich +countrey, and abounding with all kind of victuals: the king whereof, at my +being there, had so many wiues and concubines, that he had 300 sonnes and +daughters by them. This king hath 10004 tame Elephants, which are kept euen +as we keepe droues of oxen, or flocks of sheepe in pasture. + + +Of the abundance of fishes, which cast themselues vpon the shore. + +In this countrey there is one strange thing to be obserued, that euery +seueral kind of fishes in those seas come swimming towards the said +countrey in such abundance, that, for a great distance into the sea, +nothing can be seene but the backs of fishes: which, casting themselues +vpon the shore when they come neare vnto it, do suffer men, for the space +of 3. daies, to come and to take as many of them as they please, and then +they returne againe vnto the sea. After that kind of fishes comes another +kind, offering it selfe after the same maner, and so in like sort all other +kinds whatsoeuer: notwithstanding they do this but once in a yere. And I +demaunded of the inhabitants there, how, or by what meanes this strange +accident could come to passe: They answered, that fishes were taught, euen +by nature, to come and to do homage vnto their Emperour. [Sidenote: +Tortoises.] There be Tortoises also as bigge as an ouen. Many other things +I saw which are incredible, vnlesse a man should see them with his own +eies. In this country also dead men are burned, and their wiues are burned +aliue with them, as in the city of Polumbrum above mentioned: for the men +of that country say that she goeth to accompany him in another world, that +he should take none other wife in marriage. [Sidenote: Moumoran.] Moreouer +I traueled on further by the ocean-sea towards the south, and passed +through many countries and islands, whereof one is called Moumoran, and it +containeth in compasse ii. M. miles, wherein men and women haue dog faces, +and worship an oxe for their god: and therefore euery one of them cary the +image of an oxe of gold or siluer vpon their foreheads. The men and the +women of this country go all naked, sauing that they hang a linen cloth +before their priuities. The men of the said country are very tall and +mighty, and by reason that they goe naked, when they are to make battell, +they cary yron or steele targets before them, which do couer and defend +their bodies from top to toe: and whomsoeuer of their foes they take in +battel not being able to ransom himselfe for money, they presently deuoure +him: but if he be able to redeeme himselfe for money, they let him go free. +Their king weareth about his necke 300. great and most beautifull vnions, +and saith euery day 300. prayers vnto his god. He weareth vpon his finger +also a stone of a span long which seemeth to be a flame of fire, and +therefore when he weareth it, no man dare once approch vnto him: and they +say that there is not any stone in the whole world of more value then it. +Neither could at any time the great Tartarian Emperour of Katay either by +force, money, or policie obtaine it at his hands: notwithstanding that he +hath done the vtmost of his indeuour for this purpose. + + +Of the Island of Sylan: and of the mountaine where Adam mourned for his + sonne Abel. + +I passed also by another island called Sylan, which conteineth in compasse +aboue ii. M. miles: wherein are an infinit number of serpents, and great +store of lions, beares, and al kinds of rauening and wild beasts, and +especially of elephants. In the said country there is an huge mountaine, +whereupon the inhabitants of that region do report that Adam mourned for +his son Abel the space of 500. yeres. In the midst of this mountain there +is a most beautiful plain, wherin is a litle lake conteining great plenty +of water, which water the inhabitants report to haue proceeded from the +teares of Adam and Eue: howbeit I proued that to be false, because I saw +the water flow in the lake. This water is ful of hors-leeches, and +blood-suckers, and of precious stones also: which precious stones the king +taketh not vnto his owne vse, but once or twise euery yere he permitteth +certaine poore people to diue vnder the water for the said stones, and al +that they can get he bestoweth vpon them, to the end they may pray for his +soule. But that they may with lesse danger diue vnder the water, they take +limons which they pil, anointing themselues throughly with the iuice +therof, and so they may diue naked vnder the water, the hors-leeches not +being able to hurt them. From this lake the water runneth euen vnto the +sea, and at a low ebbe the inhabitants dig rubies, diamonds, pearls, and +other pretious stones out of the shore: wherupon it is thought, that the +king of this island hath greater abundance of pretious stones, then any +other monarch in the whole earth besides. In the said country there be al +kinds of beasts and foules: and the people told me, that those beasts would +not inuade nor hurt any stranger, but only the natural inhabitants. I saw +in this island fouls as big as our countrey geese, hauing two heads, and +other miraculous things, which I will not here write off. Traueling on +further toward the south, I arriued at a certain island called Bodin, +[Marginal note: Or, Dadin.] which signifieth in our language vnclean. In +this island there do inhabit most wicked persons, who deuour and eat raw +flesh committing al kinds of vncleannes and abominations in such sort, as +it is incredible. For the father eateth his son, and the son his father, +the husbande his owne wife, and the wife her husband: and that after this +maner. If any mans father be sick, the son straight goes vnto the +soothsaying or prognosticating priest, requesting him to demand of his god, +whether his father shall recouer of that infirmity of no: Then both of them +go vnto an idol of gold or of siluer, making their praiers vnto it in maner +folowing: Lord, thou art our God, and thee we do adore, beseeching thee to +resolue vs, whether such a man must die, or recouer of such an infirmity or +no: Then the diuel answereth out of the foresaid idol: if he saith (he shal +liue) then returneth his son and ministreth things necessary vnto him, til +he hath attained vnto his former health: but if he saith (he shal die) then +goes the priest vnto him, and putting a cloth into his mouth doth strangle +him therewith: which being done, he cuts his dead body into morsels, and al +his friends and kinsfolks are inuited vnto the eating thereof, with musique +and all kinde of mirth: howbeit his bones are solemnely buried. And when I +found fault with that custome demanding a reason thereof, one of them gaue +me this answer: this we doe, least the wormes should eat his flesh, for +then his soule should suffer great torments, neither could I by any meanes +remooue them from that errour. Many other nouelties and strange things +there bee in this countrey, which no man would credite, vnles he saw them +with his owne eyes. Howbeit, I (before almighty God) do here make relation +of nothing but of that only, whereof I am as sure, as a man may be sure. +Concerning the foresaid islands I inquired of diuers wel-experienced +persons, who al of them, as it were with one consent, answered me saying, +That this India contained 4400. islands vnder it, or within it: in which +islands there are sixtie and foure crowned kings: and they say moreouer, +that the greater part of those islands are wel inhabited. And here I +conclude concerning that part of India. + + +Of the vpper India: and of the prouince of Mancy. + +First of al therefore, hauing traueled many dayes iourney vpon the +Ocean-sea toward the East, at length I arriued at a certaine great prouince +called Mancy, being in Latine named India. Concerning this India I inquired +of Christians, of Saracens, and of Idolaters, and of al such as bare any +office vnder the great Can. Who all of them with one consent answered, that +this prouince of Mancy hath mo then 2000. great cities within the precincts +thereof, and that it aboundeth with all plenty of victuals, as namely with +bread, wine, rise, flesh, and fish. All the men of this prouince be +artificers and marchants, who, though they be in neuer so extreme penurie, +so long as they can helpe themselues by the labor of their hands, wil neuer +beg almes of any man. The men of this prouince are of a faire and comely +personage, but somewhat pale, hauing their heads shauen but a litle: but +the women are the most beautiful vnder the sunne. The first city of the +said India which I came vnto, is called Ceuskalon, [Marginal note: Or, +Ceuskala.] which being a daies iourney distant from the sea, stands vpon a +riuer, the water whereof, nere vnto the mouth, where it exonerateth it +selfe into the sea, doth ouerflow the land for the space of 12. daies +iourney. All the inhabitants of this India are worshippers of idols. The +foresaid city of Ceuskalon hath such an huge nauy belonging thereunto, that +no man would beleeue it vnlesse he should see it. In this city I saw 300. +li. of good and new ginger sold for lesse than a groat. There are the +greatest, and the fairest geese, and most plenty of them to be sold in al +the whole world, as I suppose: [Sidenote: He meaneth Pellicans, which the +Spaniards cal Alcatrarzi.] they are as white as milke, and haue a bone vpon +the crowne of their heads as bigge as an egge, being of the colour of +blood: vnder their throat they haue a skin or bag hanging downe halfe a +foot. They are exceeding fat and wel sold. Also they haue ducks and hens in +that country, one as big as two of ours. There be monstrous great serpents +likewise, which are taken by the inhabitants and eaten: whereupon a solemne +feast among them without serpents is not set by: and to be briefe, in this +city there are al kinds of victuals in great abundance. From thence I +passed by many cities, and at length I came vnto a city named Caitan, +[Marginal note: Or, Zaiton.] wherin the friers Minorites haue two places of +aboad, vnto the which I transported the bones of the dead friers, which +suffred martyrdom for the faith of Christ, as it is aboue mentioned. In +this city there is abundance of al kind of victuals very cheap. The said +city is as big as two of Bononia, and in it are many monasteries of +religious persons, al which do worship idols. I my selfe was in one of +those Monasteries, and it was told me, that there were in it iii. M. +religious men, hauing xi. M. idols: and one of the said idols which seemed +vnto me but litle in regard of the rest, was as big as our Christopher. +These religious men euery day do feed their idol-gods: wherupon at a +certeine time I went to behold the banquet: and indeed those things which +they brought vnto them were good to eat, and fuming hote, insomuch that the +steame of the smoke thereof ascended vp vnto their idols, and they said +that their gods were refreshed with the smoke: howbeit all the meat they +conueyed away, eating it vp their owne selues, and so they fed their dumb +gods with the smoke onely. + + +Of the citie Fuco. + +Traueling more eastward, I came vnto a city named Fuco, which conteineth +30. miles in circuit, wherin be exceeding great and faire cocks, and al +their hens are as white as the very snow, hauing wol in stead of feathers, +like vnto sheep. It is a most stately and beautiful city, and standeth vpon +the sea. Then I went 18. dates iourney on further, and passed by many +prouinces and cities, and in the way I went ouer a certain great mountaine, +vpon the one side whereof I beheld al liuing creatures to be as black as a +cole, and the men and women on that side differed somwhat in maner of +liuing from others: howbeit, on the other side of the said hil euery liuing +thing was snow-white, and the inhabitants in their maner of liuing, were +altogether vnlike vnto others. There, all maried women cary in token that +they haue husbands, a great trunke of horne vpon their heads. [Sidenote: A +great riuer.] From thence I trauelled 18. dayes journey further, and came +vnto a certaine great riuer, and entered also into a city, whereunto +belongeth a mighty bridge, to passe the said riuer. And mine hoste, with +whom I soiourned, being desirous to shew me some sport, said vnto me: Sir, +if you will see any fish taken, goe with me. [Sidenote: Foules catching +fish.] Then he led me vnto the foresaid bridge, carying in his armes with +him certaine diue-doppers or water-foules, bound vnto a company of poles, +and about euery one of their necks he tied a threed, lest they should eat +the fish as fast as they tooke them: and he carried 3. great baskets with +him also: then loosed he the diue doppers from the poles, which presently +went into the water, and within lesse then the space of one houre, caught +as many fishes as filled the 3. baskets: which being full, mine hoste +vntyed the threeds from about their neckes, and entering the second time +into the riuer they fed themselues with fish, and being satisfied they +returned and suffered themselues to be bound vnto the saide poles as they +were before. And when I did eate of those fishes, me thought they were +exceeding good. Trauailing thence many dayes iourneys, at length I arriued +at another city called Canasia, [Marginal note: Or Cansai, or Quinzai.] +which signifieth in our language, the city of heauen. Neuer in all my life +did I see so great a citie; for it conteineth in circuit an hundreth miles: +neither sawe I any plot thereof, which was not throughly inhabited: yea, I +sawe many houses of tenne or twelue stories high, one aboue another. It +hath mightie large suburbs containing more people than the city it selfe. +Also it hath twelue principall gates: and about the distance of eight +miles, in the high way vnto euery one of the saide gates standeth a city as +big by estimation as Venice, and Padua. The foresaid city of Canasia is +situated in waters or marshes, which alwayes stand still, neither ebbing +nor flowing: howbeit it hath a defence for the winde like vnto Venice. In +this city there are mo than 10002. bridges, many whereof I numbred and +passed ouer them: [Sidenote: The Italian copy in Ramusius, hath 11000. +bridges.] and vpon euery of those bridges stand certaine watchmen of the +citie, keeping continuall watch and ward about the said city, for the great +Can the Emperour of Catay. The people of this countrey say, that they haue +one duetie inioyned vnto them by their lord: for euery fire payeth one +Balis in regard of tribute: and a Balis is fiue papers or pieces of silke, +which are worth one floren and an halfe of our coine. Tenne or twelue +housholds are accompted for one fire, and so pay tribute but for one fire +onely. Al those tributary fires amount vnto the number of 85. Thuman, with +other foure Thuman of the Saracens, which make 89. in al; And one Thuman +consisteth of 10000. fires. The residue of the people of the city are some +of them Christians, some marchants, and some traueilers through the +countrey: whereupon I marueiled much howe such an infinite number of +persons could inhabite and liue together. There is great aboundance of +victuals in this citie, as namely of bread and wine, and especially of +hogs-flesh, with other necessaries. + + +Of a Monastery where many strange beastes of diuers kindes doe liue vpon an + hill. + +In the foresaide citie foure of our friers had conuerted a mighty and riche +man vnto the faith of Christ, at whose house I continually abode, for so +long time as I remained in the citie. Who vpon a certaine time saide vnto +me: Ara, that is to say, Father, will you goe and beholde the citie? And I +said, yea. Then embarqued we our selues, and directed our course vnto a +certaine great Monastery: where being arrived, he called a religious person +with whom he was acquainted, saying vnto him concerning me: this Raban +Francus, that is to say, this religious Frenchman commeth from the Westerne +parts of the world, and is now going to the city of Cambaleth to pray for +the life of the great Can, and therefore you must shew him some rare thing, +that when hee returnes into his owne countrey, he may say, this strange +sight or nouelty haue I seene in the city of Canasia. Then the said +religious man tooke two great baskets full of broken reliques which +remained of the table, and led me vnto a little walled parke, the doore +whereof he vnlocked with his key, and there appeared vnto vs a pleasant +faire green plot, into the which we entred. In the said greene stands a +litle mount in forme of a steeple, replenished with fragrant herbes and +fine shady trees. And while we stood there, he tooke a cymball or bell, and +rang therewith, as they vse to ring to dinner or beuoir in cloisters, at +the sound whereof many creatures of diuers kinds came downe from the mount, +some like apes, some like cats, some like monkeys and some hauing faces +like men. And while I stood beholding of them, they gathered themselues +together about him, to the number of 4200. of those creatures, putting +themselues in good order, before whom he set a platter, and gaue them the +said fragments to eate. And when they had eaten he rang vpon his cymbal the +second time, and they al returned vnto their former places. Then, wondring +greatly at the matter, I demanded what kind of creatures those might be? +They are (quoth he) the soules of noble men which we do here feed, for the +loue of God who gouerneth the world: and as a man was honorable or noble in +this life, so his soule after death, entreth into the body of some +excellent beast or other, but the soules of simple and rusticall people do +possesse the bodies of more vile and brutish creatures. Then I began to +refute that foule error: howbeit my speach did nothing at all preuaile with +him: for he could not be perswaded that any soule might remaine without a +body. [Sidenote: Chilenso.] From thence I departed vhto a certaine citie +named Chilenso, the walls whereof conteined 40. miles in circuit. In this +city there are 360. bridges of stone, the fairest that euer I saw: and it +is wel inhabited, hauing a great nauie belonging thereunto, and abounding +with all kinds of victuals and other commodities. [Sidenote: Thalay.] And +thence I went vnto a certaine riuer called Thalay, which where it is most +narrow, is 7. miles broad: [Sidenote: Cakam.] and it runneth through the +midst of the land of Pygmæi, whose chiefe city is called Cakam, and is one +of the goodliest cities in the world. These Pigmæans are three of my spans +high, and they make larger and better cloth of cotten and silke, then any +other nation vnder the sunne. [Sidenote: Ianzu.] And coasting along by the +saide riuer, I came vnto a certaine citie named Ianzu, in which citie there +is one receptacle for the Friers of our order, and there be also three +Churches of the Nestorians. This Ianzu is a noble and great citie, +containing 48 Thuman of tributarie fiers, and in it are all kindes of +victuals, and great plenty of such beastes, foules and fishes, as +Christians doe vsually liue vpon. The lord of the same citie hath in +yeerely reuenues for salt onely, fiftie Thuman of balis, and one balis is +worth a floren and a halfe of our coyne: insomuch that one Thuman of balis +amounteth vnto the value of fifteene thousand florens. Howbeit the sayd +lord fauoureth his people in one respect, for sometimes he forgiueth them +freely two hundred Thuman, least there should be any scarcity or dearth +among them. There is a custome in this citie, that when any man is +determined to banquet his friends, going about vnto certaine tauernes or +cookes houses appointed for the same purpose, he sayth vnto euery +particular hoste, you shall haue such, and such of my friendes, whom you +must intertaine in my name, and so much I will bestowe vpon the banquet. +And by that means his friendes are better feasted at diuerse places, then +they should haue beene at one. Tenne miles from the sayde citie, about the +head of the foresayd riuer of Thalay, there is a certaine other citie +called Montu, which hath the greatest nauy that I saw in the whole world. +All their ships are as white as snow, and they haue banqueting houses in +them, and many other rare things also, which no man would beleeue, vnlesse +he had seene them with his owne eyes. + + +Of the citie of Cambaleth. + +[Sidenote: Karamoron.] Traueiling eight dayes iourney further by diuers +territories and cities, at length I came by fresh water vnto a certaine +citie named Lencyn, standing vpon the riuer of Karauoran, which runneth +through the midst of Cataie, and doeth great harme in the countrey when it +ouerfloweth the bankes, or breaketh foorth of the chanell. [Sidenote: +Sumacoto.] From thence passing along the riuer Eastward, after many dayes +trauell, and the sight of the diuers cities, I arriued at a citie called +Sumakoto, which aboundeth more with silke then any other citie in the +world: for when there is great scarcitie of silke, fortie pound is sold for +lesse then eight groates. In this citie there is abundance of all +merchandize, and all kindes of victuals also, as of bread, wine, flesh, +fish, with all choise and delicate spices. Then traueiling on still towards +the East by many cities, I came vnto the noble and renowmed citie of +Cambaleth, which is of great antiquitie being situate in the prouince of +Cataie. This citie the Tartars tooke, and neare vnto it within the space of +halfe a mile, they built another citie called Caido. The citie of Caido +hath twelue gates, being each of them two miles distant from another. Also +the space lying in the midst betweene the two foresayd cities is very well +and throughly inhabited, so that they make as it were but one citie +betweene them both. The whole compasse or circuit of both cities together, +is 40. miles. In this citie the great emperour Can hath his principall +seat, and his Imperiall palace, the wals of which palace containe foure +miles in circuit: and neere vnto this his palace are many other palaces and +houses, of his nobles which belong vnto his court. Within the precincts of +the sayd palace Imperiall, there is a most beautiful mount, set and +replenished with trees, for which cause it is called the Greene mount, +hauing a most royall and sumptuous palace standing thereupon, in which, for +the most part, the great Can is resident. Vpon the one side of the sayd +mount there is a great lake, whereupon a most stately bridge is built, in +which lake is great abundance of geese, ducks, and all kindes of water +foules: and in the wood growing vpon the mount there is great store of all +birds, and wilde beasts. And therefore when the great Can will solace +himselfe with hunting or hauking, he needs not so much as once to step +forth of his palace. Moreouer, the principall palace, wherein he maketh his +abode, is very large, hauing within it 14 pillers of golde, and all the +walles thereof are hanged with red skinnes, which are sayd to be the most +costly skinnes in all the world. In the midst of the palace standes a +cisterne of two yards high, which consisteth of a precious stone called +Merdochas, and is wreathed about with golde, and at ech corner thereof is +the golden image of a serpent, as it were, furiously shaking and casting +forth his head. This cisterne also hath a kind of networke of pearle +wrought about it. Likewise by the sayd cisterne there is drinke conueyed +thorow certeine pipes and conducts, such as vseth to be drunke in the +emperors court, vpon the which also there hang many vessels of golde, +wherein, whosoeuer will may drinke of the sayd licour. In the foresayd +palace there are many peacocks of golde: and when any Tartar maketh a +banquet vnto his lord, if the guests chance to clap their hands for ioy and +mirth, the sayd golden peacocks also will spread abroad their wings, and +lift vp their traines, seeming as if they danced: and this I suppose to be +done by arte magike or by some secret engine vnder the ground. + + +Of the glory and magnificence of the great Can. + +Moreouer, when the great emperor Can sitteth in his imperiall throne of +estate, on his left hand sitteth his queene or empresse, and vpon another +inferior seate there sit two other women, which are to accompany the +emperor, when his spouse is absent, but in the lowest place of all, there +sit all the ladies of his kindred. All the maried women weare vpon their +heads a kind of ornament in shape like vnto a mans foote, of a cubite and a +halfe in length, and the lower part of the sayd foote is adorned with +cranes feathers, and is all ouer thicke set with great and orient pearles. +Vpon the right hand of the great Can sitteth his first begotten sonne and +heire apparent vnto his empire, and vnder him sit all the nobles of the +blood royall. There bee also foure Secretaries, which put all things in +writing that the emperor speaketh. In whose presence likewise stand his +Barons and diuers others of his nobilitie, with great traines of folowers +after them, of whom none dare speake so much as one word, vnlease they haue +obtained licence of the emperor so to doe, except his iesters and +stage-players, who are appointed of purpose to solace their lord. Neither +yet dare they attempt to doe ought, but onely according to the pleasure of +their emperor, and as hee inioineth them by lawe. About the palace gate +stand certaine Barons to keepe all men from treading vpon the threshold of +the sayd gate. When it pleassth the great Can to solemnize a feast, he hath +about him 14000. Barons, carying wreathes and litle crownes vpon their +heads, and giuing attendance vpon their lord, and euery one of them weareth +a garment of gold and precious stones, which is woorth ten thousand +Florens. His court is kept in very good order, by gouernours of tens, +gouernours of hundreds, and gouernours of thousands, insomuch that euery +one in his place performeth his duetie committed vnto him, neither is there +any defect to bee found. I Frier Odoricus was there present in person for +the space of three yeeres, and was often at the sayd banquets; for we +friers Minorites haue a place of aboad appointed out for vs in the emperors +court, and are enioined to goe and to bestow our blessing vpon him. And I +enquired of certaine Courtiers concerning the number of persons pertaining +to the emperors court? And they answered mee that of stage-players, +musicians, and such like, there were eighteene Thuman at the least, and +that the keepers of dogs, beasts and foules were fifteene Thuman, and the +physicians for the emperours body were foure hundred; the Christians also +were eight in number, together with one Saracen. At my being there, all the +foresayd number of persons had all kind of necessaries both for apparell +and victuals out of the emperors court. Moreouer, when he will make his +progresse from one countrey to another, hee hath foure troupes of horsemen, +one being appointed to goe a dayes iourney before, and another to come a +dayes iourney after him, the third to march on his right hand, and the +fourth on his left, in the manner of a crosse, he himselfe being in the +midst, and so euery particular troupe haue their daily iourneys limited +vnto them, to the ende they may prouide sufficient victuals without defect. +Nowe the great Can himselfe is caried in maner following; hee rideth in a +chariot with two wheeles, vpon which a maiesticall throne is built of the +wood of Aloe, being adorned with gold and great pearles, and precious +stones, and foure elephants brauely furnished doe drawe the sayd chariot, +before which elephants, foure great horses richly trapped and couered doe +lead the way. Hard by the chariot on both sides thereof, are foure Barons +laying hold and attending thereupon, to keepe all persons from approaching +neere vnto their emperour. Vpon the chariot also two milke-white +Ier-falcons doe sit, and seeing any game which hee would take, hee letteth +them flie, and so they take it, and after this maner doeth hee solace +himselfe as hee rideth. Moreover, no man dare come within a stones cast of +the chariot, but such as are appointed. The number of his owne followers, +of his wiues attendants, and of the traine of his first begotten sonne and +heire apparent, would seeme incredible vnto any man, vnlesse hee had seene +it with his owne eyes. The foresayd great Can hath diuided his Empire into +twelue partes or Prouinces, and one of the sayd prouinces hath two thousand +great cities within the precincts thereof. Whereupon his empire is of that +length and breadth, that vnto whatsoeuer part thereof he intendeth his +iourny, he hath space enough for six moneths continual progresse, except +his Islands which are at the least 5000. + + +Of certaine Innes or hospitals appointed for trauailers throughout the + whole empire. + +The foresayd Emperor (to the end that trauailers may haue all things +necessary throughout his whole empire) hath caused certaine Innes to be +prouided in sundry places vpon the high wayes, where all things pertaining +vnto victuals are in a continuall readinesse. And when any alteration or +newes happen in any part of his Empire, if he chance to be farre absent +from that part, his ambassadors vpon horses or dromedaries ride post vnto +him, and when themselues and their beasts are weary, they blow their horne, +at the noise whereof, the next Inne likewise prouideth a horse and a man, +who takes the letter of him that is weary and runneth vnto another Inne: +and so by diuers Innes, and diuers postes, the report, which ordinarily +could skarce come in 30. dayes, is in one naturall day brought vnto the +emperor: and therefore no matter of any moment can be done in his empire, +but straightway he hath intelligence thereof. Moreouer, when the great Can +himselfe will go on hunting, he vseth this custome. Some twenty dayes +iourney from the citie of Kambaleth there is a forrest containing sixe +dayes iourney in circuit, in which forrest there are so many kinds of +beasts and birds, as it is incredible to report. Vnto this forrest, at the +ende of euery third or fourth yere, himselfe with his whole traine +resorteth, and they all of them together enuiron the sayd forrest, sending +dogs into the same, which by hunting do bring foorth the beasts: namely, +lions and stags, and other creatures, vnto a most beautifull plaine in the +midst of the forrest, because all the beasts of the forrest doe tremble, +especially at the cry of hounds. Then commeth the great Can himselfe, being +caried vpon three elephants, and shooteth fine arrowes into the whole herd +of beasts, and after him all his Barons, and after them the rest of his +courtiers and family doe all in like maner discharge their arrowes also, +and euery mans arrow hath a sundry marke. Then they all goe vnto the beasts +which are slaine (suffering the liuing beasts to returne into the wood that +they may haue more sport with them another time) and euery man enjoyeth +that beast as his owne, wherein he findeth his arrow sticking. + + +Of the foure feasts which the great Can solemnizeth euery yeere in his + Court. + +Foure great feasts in a yeere doeth the emperor Can celebrate: namely the +feast of his birth, the feast of his circumcision, the feast of his +coronation, and the feast of his mariage. And vnto these feasts he inuiteth +all his Barons, his stage-players, and all such as are of his kinred. Then +the great Can sitting in his throne, all his Barons present themselues +before him, with wreaths and crownes vpon their heads, being diuersly +attired, for some of them are in greene, namely the principall: the second +are in red, and the third in yellow, and they hold each man in his hand a +little Iuorie table of elephants tooth, and they are girt with golden +girdles of halfe a foote broad, and they stand vpon their feete keeping +silence. About them stand the stage-players or musicians with their +instruments. And in one of the corners of a certaine great pallace, all the +Philosophers or Magicians remaine for certaine howers, and doe attend vpon +points or characters: and when the point and hower which the sayd +Philosophers expected for, is come, a certaine crier crieth out with a loud +voyce, saying, Incline or bowe your selues before your Emperour: with that +all the Barons fall flat vpon the earth. Then hee crieth out againe; Arise +all, and immediately they all arise. Likewise the Philosophers attend vpon +a point or character the second time, and when it is fulfilled, the crier +crieth out amaine; Put your fingers in your eares: and foorthwith againe he +saieth; Plucke them out. Againe, at the third point he crieth, Boult this +meale. Many other circumstances also doe they performe, all which they say +haue some certaine signification: howbeit, neither would I write them, nor +giue any heed vnto them, because they are vaine and ridiculous. And when +the musicians hower is come, then the Philosophers say, Solemnize a feast +vnto your Lord: with that all of them sound their instruments, making a +great and a melodious noyse. And immediately another crieth, Peace, peace, +and they are all whist. Then come the women-musicians and sing sweetly +before the Emperour, which musike was more delightfull vnto me. After them +come in the lions and doe their obeisance vnto the great Can. Then the +iuglers cause golden cups full of wine to flie vp and downe in the ayre, +and to apply themselues vnto mens mouthes that they may drinke of them. +These and many other strange things I sawe in the court of the great Can, +which no man would beleeue vnlesse he had seen with his owne eies, and +therefore I omit to speake of them. [Sidenote: A lambe in a gourd.] I was +informed also by certaine credible persons, of another miraculous thing, +namely, that in a certaine kingdome of the sayd Can, wherein stand the +mountains called Kapsei (the kingdomes name is Kalor) there grewe great +Gourds or Pompions, which being ripe, doe open at the tops, and within them +is found a little beast like vnto a yong lambe, euen as I my selfe haue +heard reported, that there stand certaine trees vpon the shore of the Irish +sea, bearing fruit like vnto a gourd, which, at a certaine time of the +yeere doe fall into the water, and become birds called Bernacles, and this +is most true. [Footnote: This report is first found in the writings of +Giraldus Cambreusis, tutor to King John.] + + +Of diuers prouinces and cities. + +And after three yeeres I departed out of the empire of Cataie, trauailing +fiftie dayes iourney towards the West. [Sidenote: His returne Westward.] +And at length I came vnto the empire of Pretegoani, whose principall citie +is Kosan, which hath many other cities vnder it. [Sidenote: Casan] From +thence passing many dayes trauell, I came vnto a prouince called Casan, +which is for good commodities, one of the onely prouinces vnder the Sunne, +and is very well inhabited, insomuch that when we depart out of the gates +of one city we may beholde the gates of another city, as I my selfe saw in +diuers of them. The breadth of the sayd prouince is fifty dayes iourney, +and the length aboue sixty. In it there is great plenty of all victuals, +and especially of chesnuts, and it is one of the twelue prouinces of the +great Can. Going on further, I came vnto a certaine kingdome called Tebek, +[Marginal note: Or Thebet.] which is in subiection vnto the great Can also, +wherein I thinke there is more plenty of bread and wine then in any other +part of the whole world besides. The people of the sayd countrey do, for +the most part, inhabit in tents made of blacke felt. Their principall city +is inuironed with faire and beautifull walles, being built of most white +and blacke stones, which are disposed chekerwise one by another, and +curiously compiled together: likewise all the high wayes in this countrey +are exceedingly well paued. In the sayd countrey none dare shed the bloud +of a man, or of any beast, for the reuerence of a certaine idole. In the +foresayd city their Abassi, that is to say, their Pope is resident, being +the head and prince of all idolaters (vpon whom he bestoweth and +distributeth gifts after his maner) euen as our pope of Rome accounts +himselfe to be the head of all Christians. The women of this countrey weare +aboue an hundreth tricks and trifles about them, and they haue two teeth in +their mouthes as long as the tushes of a boare. When any mans father +deceaseth among them, his sonne assembleth together all the priests and +musicians that he can get, saying that he is determined to honour his +father: then causeth he him to be caried into the field (all his kinsfolks, +friends, and neighbours, accompanying him in the sayd action) where the +priests with great solemnity cut off the father's head, giuing it vnto his +sonne, which being done, they diuide the whole body into morsels, and so +leaue it behinde them, returning home with prayers in the company of the +sayd sonne. So soone as they are departed, certaine vultures, which are +accustomed to such bankets, come flying from the mountaines, and cary away +all the sayd morsels of flesh: and from thenceforth a fame is spread +abroad, that the sayd party deceased was holy, because the angels of God +carried him into paradise. And this is the greatest and highest honour, +that the sonne can deuise to performe vnto his deceased father. [Sidenote: +The same story concerning the very same people is in William de Rubricis.] +Then the sayd sonne taketh his fathers head, seething it and eating the +flesh thereof, but of the skull he makes a drinking cup, wherein himselfe +with all his family and kindred do drinke with great solemnity and mirth, +in the remembrance of his dead and deuoured father. Many other vile and +abominable things doth the said nation commit, which I meane not to write, +because men neither can nor will beleeue, except they should haue the sight +of them. + + +Of a certaine rich man, who is fed and nourished by fiftie virgins. + +While I was in the prouince of Mancy, I passed by the palace of a certaine +famous man, which hath fifty virgin damosels continually attending vpon +him, feeding him euery meale, as a bird feeds her yoong ones. Also he hath +sundry kindes of meat serued in at his table, and three dishes of ech +kinde; and when the sayd virgins feed him, they sing most sweetly. This man +hath in yeerely reuenues thirty thuman of tagars of rise, euery of which +thuman yeeldeth tenne thousand tagars, and one tagar is the burthen of an +asse. His palace is two miles in circuit, the pauement whereof is one plate +of golde, and another of siluer. Neere vnto the wall of the sayd palace +there is a mount artificially wrought with golde and siluer, whereupon +stand turrets and steeples and other delectable things for the solace and +recreation of the foresayd great man. And it was tolde me that there were +foure such men in the sayd kingdome. [Sidenote: Long nailes.] It is +accounted a great grace for the men of that countrey to haue long nailes +vpon their fingers, and especially vpon their thumbes which nailes they may +fold about their hands: but the grace and beauty of their women is to haue +small and slender feet: and therefore the mothers when their daughters are +yoong, do binde vp their feet, that they may not grow great. [Sidenote: +Melistorte.] Trauelling on further towards the South, I arriued at a +certaine countrey called Melistorte, which is a pleasant and fertile place. +And in this countrey there was a certeine man called Senex de monte, who +round about two mountaines had built a wall to inclose the sayd mountaines. +Within this wall there were the fairest and most chrystall fountaines in +the whole world: and about the sayd fountaines there were most beautifull +virgins in great number, and goodly horses also, and in a word, euery thing +that could be deuised for bodily solace and delight, and therefore the +inhabitants of the countrey call the same place by the name of Paradise. + +The sayd olde Senex, when he saw any proper and valiant yoong man, he would +admit him into his paradise. Moreouer, by certaine conducts he makes, wine +and milke to flow abundantly. This Senex, when he hath a minde to reuenge +himselfe or to slay any king or baron, commandeth him that is gouernor of +the sayd paradise, to bring thereunto some of the acquaintance of the sayd +king or baron, permitting him a while to take his pleasure therein, and +then to giue him a certaine potion being of force, to cast him into such a +slumber as should make him quite voide of all sense, and so being in a +profound sleepe to conuey him out of his paradise: who being awaked, and +seeing himselfe thrust out of the paradise would become so sorrowfull, that +he could not in the world deuise what to do, or whither to turne him. Then +would he goe vnto the foresaid old man, beseeching him that he might be +admitted againe into his paradise: who saith vnto him, You cannot be +admitted thither, vnlesse you will slay such or such a man for my sake, and +if you will giue the attempt onely, whether you kill him or no, I will +place you againe in paradise, that there you may remaine alwayes: then +would the party without faile put the same in execution, indeuouring to +murther all those against whom the sayd olde man had conceiued any hatred. +And therefore all the kings of the east stood in awe of the sayd olde man, +and gaue vnto him great tribute. + + +Of the death of Senex de monte. + +And when the Tartars had subdued a great part of the world, they came vnto +the sayd olde man, and tooke from him the custody of his paradise: who +being incensed thereat, sent abroad diuers desperate and resolute persons +out of his forenamed paradise, and caused many of the Tartarian nobles to +be slaine. The Tartars seeing this, went and besieged the city wherein the +said olde man was, tooke him, and put him to a most cruell and ignominious +death. The friers in that place haue this speciall gift and prerogatiue: +namely, that by the vertue of the name of Christ Iesu, and in the vertue of +his pretious bloud, which he shedde vpon the crosse for the saluation of +mankinde, they doe cast foorth deuils out of them that are possessed. And +because there are many possessed men in those parts, they are bound and +brought ten dayes iourney unto the sayd friers, who being dispossessed of +the vncleane spirits, do presently beleeue in Christ who deliuered them, +accounting him for their God, and being baptized in his name, and also +deliuering immediatly vnto the friers all their idols, and the idols of +their cattell, which are commonly made of felt or of womens haire: then the +sayd friers kindle a fire in a publike place (whereunto the people resort, +that they may see the false gods of their neighbors burnt) and cast the +sayd idols thereinto: howbeit at the first those idols came out of the fire +againe. Then the friers sprinkled the sayd fire with holy water, casting +the idols into it the second time, and with that the deuils fled in the +likenesse of blacke smoake, and the idols still remained till they were +consumed vnto ashes. Afterward, this noise and outcry was heard in the +ayre: Beholde and see how I am expelled out of my habitation. And by these +meanes the friers doe baptize great multitudes, who presently reuolt againe +vnto their idols: insomuch that the sayd friers must eftsoones, as it were, +vnderprop them, and informe them anew. There was another terrible thing +which I saw there: for passing by a certaine valley, which is situate +beside a pleasant riuer, I saw many dead bodies, and in the sayd valley +also I heard diuers sweet sounds and harmonies of musike, especially the +noise of citherns, whereat I was greatly amazed. This valley conteineth in +length seuen or eight miles at the least; into the which whosoeuer entreth, +dieth presently, and can by no meanes passe aliue thorow the middest +thereof: for which cause all the inhabitants thereabout decline vnto the +one side. Moreouer, I was tempted to go in, and to see what it was. At +length, making my prayers, and recommending my selfe to God in the name of +Iesu, I entred, and saw such swarmes of dead bodies there, as no man would +beleeue vnlesse he were an eye witnesse thereof. At the one side of the +foresayd valley vpon a certaine stone, I saw the visage of a man, which +beheld me with such a terrible aspect, that I thought verily I should haue +died in the same place. But alwayes this sentence, the word became flesh, +and dwelt amongst vs, I ceased not to pronounce, signing my selfe with the +signe of the crosse, and neerer then seuen or eight pases I durst not +approach vnto the said head: but I departed and fled vnto another place in +the sayd valley, ascending vp into a little sand mountaine, where looking +round about, I saw nothing but the sayd citherns, which me thought I heard +miraculously sounding and playing by themselues without the help of +musicians. And being vpon the toppe of the mountaine, I found siluer there +like the scales of fishes in great abundance: and I gathered some part +thereof into my bosome to shew for a wonder, but my conscience rebuking me, +I cast it vpon the earth, reseruing no whit at all vnto my selfe, and so, +by Gods grace I departed without danger. And when the men of the countrey +knew that I was returned out of the valley aliue, they reuerenced me much, +saying that I was baptised and holy, and that the foresayd bodies were men +subiect vnto the deuils infernall, who vsed to play vpon citherns, to the +end they might allure people to enter, and so murther them. Thus much +concerning those things which I beheld most certainely with mine eyes, I +frier Odoricus haue heere written: many strange things also I haue of +purpose omitted, because men will not beleeue them vnlesse they should see +them. + + +Of the honour and reuerence done vnto the great Can. + +I will report one thing more, which I saw, concerning the great Can. It is +an vsuall custome in those parts, that when the forsayd Can traueileth +thorow any countrey, his subiects kindle fires before their doores, casting +spices thereinto to make a perfume, that their lord passing by may smell +the sweet and delectable odours thereof, and much people come forth to meet +him. And vpon a certaine time when he was cumming towardes Cambaleth, the +fame of his approch being published, a bishop of ours with certaine of our +minorite friers and my selfe went two dayes iourney to meet him: and being +come nigh vnto him, we put a crosse vpon wood, I my selfe hauing a censer +in my hand, and began to sing with a loud voice: Veni creator spiritus. And +as we were singing on this wise, he caused vs to be called, commanding vs +to come vnto him: notwithstanding (as it is aboue mentioned) that no man +dare approach within a stones cast of his chariot, vnlesse he be called, +but such onely as keepe his chariot. And when we came neere vnto him, he +vailed his hat or bonet being of an inestimable price, doing reuerance vnto +the crosse. And immediatly I put incense into the censer, and our bishop +taking the censer perfumed him, and gaue him his benediction. Moreouer, +they that come before the sayd Can do alwayes bring some oblation to +present vnto him, obseruing the antient law: Thou shall not appeare in my +presence with an empty hand. And for that cause we carried apples with vs, +and offered them in a platter with reuerence vnto him: and taking out two +of them he did eat some part of one. And then he signified vnto vs, that we +should go apart, least the horses comming on might in ought offend vs. With +that we departed from him, and turned aside, going vnto certaine of his +barons, which had bene conuerted to the faith by certeine friers of our +order, being at the same time in his army: and we offered vnto them of the +foresayd apples, who receiued them at our hands with great ioy, seeming +vnto vs to be as glad, as if we had giuen them some great gift. + +All the premisses abouewritten friar William de Solanga hath put downe in +writing euen as the foresayd frier Odoricus vttered them by word of mouth, +in the yeere of our Lord 1330. in the moneth of May, and in the place of S. +Anthony of Padua. Neither did he regard to write them in difficult Latine +or in an eloquent stile, but euen as Odoricus himselfe rehearsed them, to +the end that men might the more easily vnderstand the things reported. I +frier Odoricus of Friuli, of a certaine territory called Portus Vahonis, +and of the order of the minorites, do testifie and beare wimesse vnto the +reuerend father Guidotus minister of the prouince of S. Anthony, in the +marquesate of Treuiso (being by him required vpon mine obedience so to doe) +that all the premisses aboue written, either I saw with mine owne eyes, or +heard the same reported by credible and substantiall persons. The common +report also of the countreyes where I was, testifieth those things, which I +saw, to be true. Many other things I haue omitted, because I beheld them +not with mine owne eyes. Howbeit from day to day I purpose with my selfe to +trauell countreyes or lands, in which action I dispose myselfe to die or to +liue, as it shall please my God. + + +Of the death of frier Odoricus. + +In the yeere therefore of our Lord 1331 the foresayd frier Odoricus +preparing himselfe for the performance of his intended iourney, that his +trauel and labour might be to greater purpose, he determined to present +himselfe vnto Pope Iohn the two and twentieth, whose benediction and +obedience being receiued, he with a certaine number of friers willing to +beare him company, might conuey himselfe vnto all the countreyes of +infidels. And as he was trauelling towards the pope, and not farre distant +from the city of Pisa, there meets him by the waye a certaine olde man, in +the habit and attire of a pilgrime, saluting him by name, and saying: All +haile frier Odoricus. And when the frier demaunded how he had knowledge of +him: he answered: Whiles, you were in India I knew you full well, yea, and +I knew your holy purpose also: but see that you returne immediatly vnto the +couer from whence you came, for tenne dayes hence you shall depart out of +this present world. Wherefore being astonished and amazed at these wordes +(especially the olde man vanishing out of his sight, presently after he had +spoken them) he determined to returne. And so he returned in perfect +health, feeling no crazednesse nor infirmity of body. And being in his +couen at Vdene in the prouince of Padua, the tenth day after the foresayd +vision, hauing receiued the Communion, and preparing himselfe vnto God, +yea, being strong and sound of body, hee happily rested in the Lord; whose +sacred departure was signified vnto the Pope aforesaid, vnder the hand of +the publique notary in these words following. + +In the yeere of our Lord 1331, the 14. day of Ianuarie, Beatus Odoricus a +Frier minorite deceased in Christ, at whose prayers God shewed many and +sundry miracles, which I Guetelus publique notarie of Vtina, sonne of M. +Damianus de Porto Gruaro, at the commandement and direction of the +honorable Conradus of the Borough of Gastaldion, and one of the Councell of +Vtina, haue written as faithfully as I could, and haue deliuered a copie +thereof vnto the Friers minorites: howbeit not of all, because they are +innumerable, and too difficult for me to write. + + * * * * * + +The voyage of the Lord Iohn of Holland, Earle of Huntington, brother by the + mothers side to King Richard the second, to Ierusalem and Saint Katherins + mount. + +[Sidenote: 1394. Froyssart.] The Lord Iohn of Holland, Earle of Huntington, +was as then on his way to Ierusalem, and to Saint Katherins mount, and +purposed to returne by the Realme of Hungarie. For as he passed through +France (where he had great cheere of the King, and of his brother and +vncles) hee heard how the king of Hungary and the great Turke should haue +battell together: therefore he thought surely to be at that iourney. + + * * * * * + +The voiage of Thomas lord Moubray duke of Norfolke to Ierusalem, in the + yeere of our Lord 1399. written by Holinshed, pag. 1233. + +Thomas lord Moubray, second sonne of Elizabeth Segraue and Iohn lord +Moubray her husband, was advanced to the dukedome of Norfolke in the 21. +yeere of the reigne of Richard the 2. Shortly after which, hee was appealed +by Henry earle of Bullingbroke of treason; and caried to the castle of +Windsore, where he was strongly and safely garded, hauing a time of combate +granted to determine the cause betweene the two dukes, the 16. day of +September, in the 22. of the sayd king, being the yeere of our redemption +1398. But in the end the matter was so ordered, that this duke of Norfolke +was banished for euer: whereupon taking his iourney to Ierusalem, he died +at Venice in his returne from the said citie of Ierusalem, in the first +yeere of King Henry the 4. about the yeere of our redemption, 1399. + + * * * * * + +The Voiage of the bishop of Winchester to Ierusalem, in the sixt yeere of + the reigne of Henry the fift, which was the yeere of our Lord, 1417. + Thomas Walsingham. + +Vltimo die mensis Octobris, episcopus Wintoniensis accessit ad concilium +Constanciense, peregrinaturus Hierosolymam post electionem summi pontificis +celebratam, vbi tantum valuit eius facunda persuasio, vt et excitaret +dominos Cardinales ad concordiam, et ad electionem summi pontificis se +ocyùs præpararent. + + +The same in English. + +The last day of October the bishop of Winchester came to the Councell of +Constance, which after the chusing of the Pope determined to take his +iourney to Ierusalem: where his eloquent perswasion so much preuailed, that +he both perswaded my lords the Cardinals to vnity and concord, and also +moued them to proceed more speedily to the election of the Pope. + + * * * * * + +A preparation of a voyage of King Henrie the fourth to the Holy land + against the infidels in the yere 1413, being the last yere of his reigne: + wherein he was preuented by death: written by Walsingham, Fabian, + Polydore Virgile, and Holenshed. + +[Sidenote: Order taken for building of ships and gallies.] In this +fourteenth and last yere of king Henries reigne a councell was holden in +the White friers in London, at the which among other things, order was +taken for ships and gallies to be builded and made ready, and all other +things necessary to be prouided for a voyage, which he meant to make into +the Holy land, there to recouer the city of Ierusalem from the infidels: +for it grieued him to consider the great malice of Christian princes, that +were bent vpon a mischieuous purpose to destroy one another, to the perill +of their owne soules, rather than to make warre against the enemies of the +Christian faith, as in conscience, it seemed to him, they were bound. We +finde, sayeth Fabian in his Chronicle, that he was taken with his last +sickeness, while he was making his prayers at Saint Edwards shrine, there +as it were, to take his leaue, and so to proceede foorth on his iourney. He +was so suddenly and grieuously taken, that such as were about him feared +least he would haue died presently: wherefore to relieue him, if it were +possible, they bare him into a chamber that was next at hand, belonging to +the Abbot of Westminster, where they layd him on a pallet before the fire, +and vsed all remedies to reuiue him. At length he recouered his speech, and +perceiuing himselfe in a strange place which he knew not, he willed to +knowe if the chamber had any particular name, whereunto answere was made, +that it was called Ierusalem. Then sayde the king, Laudes be giuen to the +father of heauen: for now I knowe that I shall die here in this chamber, +according to the prophesie of mee declared, that I should depart this life +in Ierusalem. + + * * * * * + +Of this intended voyage Polydore Virgile writeth in manner following. + +Post haec Henricus Rex memor nihil homini debere esse antiquius, quà m ad +officium iustitiæ, quæ ad hominum vtilitatem pertinet, omne suum studium +conferre, protinùs omisso ciuili bello, quo pudebat videre Christianos omni +tempore turpitèr occupari, de republica Anglica benè gubernanda, de bello +in hostes communes sumendo, de Hierosolymis tandem aliquando recipiendis +plura destinabat, classemque iam parabat, cum ei talia agenti atque +meditanti casus mortem attulit: subito enim morbo tentatus, nulla medicina +subleuari potuit. Mortuus est apud Westmonasterium, annum agens +quadragesimum sextum, qui fuit annus salutis humanæ, 1413. + + +The same in English. + +Afterward, King Henry calling to minde, that nothing ought to be more +highly esteemed by any man, then to doe the vtmost of his indeuour for the +performance of iustice, which tendeth to the good and benefite of mankinde; +altogether abondoning ciuill warre (wherewith he was ashamed to see, how +Christians at all times were dishonourably busied) entered into a more +deepe consideration of well gouerning his Realme of England, of waging +warre against the common enemie, and of recouering, in processe of time the +citie of Ierusalem, yea, and was prouiding a nauie for the same purpose, +whenas in the very midst of this his heroicall action and enterprise, he +was surprised with death: for falling into a sudden disease, he could not +be cured by any kinde of physicke. He deceased at Westminster in the 46 +yeare of his age, which was in the yeere of our Lord, 1413. + + * * * * * + +The voyage of M. Iohn Locke to Ierusalem. + +In my voyage to Ierusalem, I imbarked my selfe the 26 of March 1553 in the +good shippe called the Mathew Gonson, which was bound for Liuorno, or +Legorne and Candia. It fell out that we touched in the beginning of Aprill +next ensuing at Cades in Andalozia, where the Spaniardes, according to +their accustomed maner with all shippes of extraordinarie goodnes and +burden, picked a quarell against the company, meaning to haue forfeited, or +at least to haue arrested the sayd shippe. And they grew so malicious in +their wrongfull purpose that I being vtterly out of hope of any speedie +release, to the ende that my intention should not be ouerthrowen, was +inforced to take this course following. Notwithstanding this hard +beginning, it fell out so luckily, that I found in the roade a great shippe +called the Caualla of Venice, wherein after agreement made with the patron, +I shipped my selfe the 24. of May in the said yere 1553. and the 25 by +reason of the winde blowing hard and contrary, we were not able to enter +the straits of Gibraltar, but were put to the coast of Barbarie, where we +ankered in the maine sea 2. leagues from shore, and continued so vntill two +houres before sunne set, and then we weighed againe, and turned our course +towards the Straits, where we entered the 26 day aforesayd, the winde being +calme, but the current of the straites very fauourable. The same day the +winde beganne to rise somewhat, and blew a furthering gale, and so +continued at Northwest vntill we arriued at Legorne the third of Iune. And +from thence riding ouer land vnto Venice, I prepared for my voyage to +Ierusalem in the Pilgrimes shippe. + +[Sidenote: The ship Fila Cauena departeth for Ierusalem. Rouigno a port in +Istria.] I John Locke, accompanied with Maister Anthony Rastwold, and +diuers other, Hollanders, Zelanders, Almaines and French pilgrimes entered +the good shippe called Fila Cauena of Venice, the 16 of July 1553. and the +17 in the morning we weighed our anker and sailed towardes the coast of +Istria, to the port of Rouigno, and the said day there came aboard of our +ship the Perceuena of the shippe named Tamisari, for to receiue the rest of +all the pilgrimes money, which was in all after the rate of 55. Crownes for +euery man for that voyage, after the rate of fiue shillings starling to the +crowne: This done, he returned to Venice. + +[Sidenote: Sancta Eufemia.] The 19 day we tooke fresh victuals aboard, and +with the bote that brought the fresh provision we went on land to the +Towne, and went to see the Church of Sancta Eufemia, where we sawe the +bodie of the sayd Saint. + +[Sidenote: Monte de Ancona.] The 20 day wee departed from Rouignio, and +about noone we had sight of Monte de Ancona, and the hilles of Dalmatia, or +else of Sclauonia both at one time, and by report they are 100. miles +distant from ech other, and more. + +[Sidenote: Il Pomo.] The 21 we sayled still in sight of Dalmatia, and a +little before noone, we had a sight of a rocke in the midst of the sea, +called in the Italian il Pomo, it appeareth a farre off to be in shape like +a sugarloafe. [Sidenote: Sant Andrea.] Also we sawe another rocke about two +miles compasse called Sant Andrea; on this rocke is only one Monasterie of +Friers: [Sidenote: Lissa an Iland.] we sayled betweene them both, and left +S. Andrea on the left hand of vs, and we had also kenning of another Iland +called Lissa, all on the left hande, these three Ilands lie East and West +in the sea, and at the sunne setting we had passed them. [Sidenote: Lezina +Iland.] Il pomo is distant from Sant Andrea 18 miles, and S. Andrea from +Lissa ten miles, and Lissa from another Iland called Lezina, which standeth +betweene the maine of Dalmatia and Lissa, tenne miles. This Iland is +inhabited and hath great plentie of wine and frutes and hereagainst we were +becalmed. + +[Sidenote: Catza. Pelagosa.] The 22. we had sight of another small Iland +called Catza, which is desolate and on the left hand, and on the right +hand, a very dangerous Iland called Pelagosa, this is also desolate, and +lyeth in the midst of the sea betweene both the maines: it is very +dangerous and low land, and it hath a long ledge of rockes lying out sixe +miles into the sea, so that many ships by night are cast away vpon them. +There is betweene Catza and Pelagosa 30 miles, and these two Ilands are +distant from Venice 400. miles. [Sidenote: Augusta.] There is also about +twelue miles eastward, a great Iland called Augusta, about 14 miles in +length, somewhat hillie, and well inhabited, and fruitfull of vines, corne +and other fruit, this also we left on the left hand: and we haue hitherto +kept our course from Rouignio East southeast. [Sidenote: Meleda. Mount Sant +Angelo.] This Iland is vnder the Signiorie or gouernement of Ragusa, it is +distant from Ragusa 50 miles, and there is by that Iland a greater, named +Meleda, which is also vnder the gouernement of Ragusa, it is about 30 miles +in length, and inhabited, and hath good portes, it lyeth by East from +Augusta, and ouer against this Iland lyeth a hill called Monte S. Angelo, +vpon the coast of Puglia in Italy, and we had sight of both landes at one +time. + +The 23 we sayled all the day long by the bowline alongst the coast of +Ragusa, and towardes night we were within 7. or 8. miles of Ragusa, that we +might see the white walles, but because it was night, we cast about to the +sea, minding at the second watch, to beare in againe to Ragusa, for to know +the newes of the Turkes armie, but the winde blew so hard and contrary, +that we could not. [Sidenote: Ragusa paieth 14000. Sechinos to the Turke +yerely.] This citie of Ragusa paieth tribute to the Turke yerely fourteene +thousand Sechinos, and euery Sechino is of Venetian money eight liuers and +two soldes, besides other presents which they giue to the Turkes Bassas +when they come thither. The Venetians haue a rocke or cragge within a mile +of the said towne, for the which the Raguseos would giue much money, but +they doe keepe it more for the namesake, then for profite. This rocke lieth +on the Southside of the towne, and is called Il Cromo, there is nothing on +it but onely a Monasterie called Sant Ieronimo. The maine of the Turkes +countrie is bordering on it within one mile, for the which cause they are +in great subiection. This night we were put backe by contrarie winds, and +ankered at Melleda. + +The 24 being at an anker vnder Melleda, we would haue gone on land, but the +winde came so faire that we presently set sayle and went our course, and +left on the right hand of vs the forenamed Iland, and on the left hand +betweene vs and the maine the Iland of Zupanna, and within a mile of that +vnder the maine by East, another Iland called Isola de Mezo. This Iland +hath two Monasteries in it, one called Santa Maria de Bizo, and the other +Sant Nicholo. Also there is a third rocke with a Frierie called Sant +Andrea: these Ilands are from the maine but two miles, and the channell +betweene Melleda and Zupanna is but foure or fiue miles ouer by gesse, but +very deepe, for we had at an anker fortie fathoms. The two Ilands of +Zupanno and Mezo are well inhabited, and very faire buildings, but nothing +plentie saue wine onely. This night toward sunne set it waxed calme, and we +sayled little or nothing. + +The 24 we were past Ragusa 14 miles, and there we mette with two Venetian +ships, which came from Cyprus, we thought they would haue spoken with vs, +for we were desirous to talke with them, to knowe the newes of the Turkes +armie, and to haue sent some letters by them to Venice. About noone, we had +scant sight of Castel nouo, which Castell a fewe yeeres past the Turke +tooke from the Emperour, in which fight were slaine three hundred Spanish +souldiers, besides the rest which were taken prisoners, and made gallie +slaves. This Castell is hard at the mouth of a channell called Boca de +Cataro. The Venetians haue a hold within the channell called Cataro, this +channell goeth vp to Budoa, and further vp into the countrey. About sunne +set we were ouer against the hilles of Antiueri in Sclauonia, in the which +hilles the Venetians haue a towne called Antiueri, and the Turkes haue +another against it called Marcheuetti, the which two townes continually +skirmish together with much slaughter. At the end of these hils endeth the +Countrey of Sclauonia, and Albania beginneth. These hilles are thirtie +miles distant from Ragusa. + +The 27 we kept our course towards Puglia, and left Albania on the left +hand. The 28. we had sight of both the maines, but we were neere the coast +of Puglia, for feare of Foystes. It is betweene Cape Chimera in Albania and +Cape Otranto in Puglia 60 miles. Puglia is a plaine low lande, and Chimera +in Albania is very high land, so that it is seene the further. Thus sayling +our course along the coast of Puglia, we saw diuerse white Towers, which +serue for sea-markes. About three of the clocke in the after noone, we had +sight of a rocke called Il fano, 48 miles from Corfu, and by sunne set we +discouered Corfu. Thus we kept on our course with a prosperous winde, and +made our way after twelue mile euery houre. Most part of this way we were +accompanied with certaine fishes called in the Italian tongue Palomide, it +is a fish three quarters of a yard in length, in colour, eating, and making +like a Makarell, somewhat bigge and thick in body, and the tayle forked +like a halfe moone, for the which cause it is said that the Turke will not +suffer them to be taken in all his dominions. + +The 29 in the morning we were in sight of an Iland, which we left on our +left hande called Cephalonia, it is vnder the Venetians, and well +inhabited, with a faire towne strongly situated on a hill of which hill the +Iland beareth her name, it hath also a very strong fortresse or Castle, and +plentie of corne and wine, their language is Greek, it is distant from the +maine of Morea, thirtie miles, it is in compasse 80 miles. One houre within +night we sayled by the towne standing on the South cape of Cephalonia, +whereby we might perceiue their lights. There come oftentimes into the +creeks and riuers, the Turkes foystes and gallies where at their arriual, +the Countrey people doe signifie vnto their neighbours by so many lights, +as there are foistes or gallies in the Iland, and thus they doe from one to +another the whole Iland ouer. Aboute three of the clocke in the afternoone +the winde scanted, and wee minded to haue gone to Zante, but we could not +for that night. [Sidenote: Zante.] This Iland of Zante is distant from +Cephalonia, 12 or 14 miles, but the towne of Cephalonia, from the towne of +Zante, is distant fortie miles. This night we went but little forward. + +The 30 day we remained still turning vp and downe because the winde was +contrary, and towards night the winde mended, so that we entered the +channell betweene Cephalonia, and Zante, the which chanell is about eight +or tenne miles ouer, and these two beare East and by South, and West and by +North from the other. The towne of Zante lieth within a point of the land, +where we came to an anker, at nine of the clocke at night. + +[Sidenote: Iohn Locke, and fiue Hollanders goe on land.] The 31 about sixe +of the clocke in the morning, I with fiue Hollanders went on land, and +hosted at the house of Pedro de Venetia. After breakfast we went to see the +towne, and passing along we went into some of the Greeke churches, wherein +we sawe their Altares, images, and other ornaments. [Sidenote: Santa Maria +de la Croce.] This done, wee went to a Monasterie of Friers called Sancta +Maria de la Croce, these are westerne Christians, for the Greekes haue +nothing to doe with them, nor they with the Greekes, for they differ very +much in religion. There are but 2. Friers in this Friery. [Sidenote: The +tombe of M. T. Cicero.] In this Monasterie we saw the tombe that M. T. +Cicero was buried in, with Terentia Antonia, his wife. This tombe was +founde about sixe yeeres since, when the Monastery was built, there was in +time past a streete where the tombe stoode. At the finding of the tombe +there was also found a yard vnder ground, a square stone somewhat longer +then broad, vpon which stone was found a writing of two seuerall handes +writing, the one as it seemed, for himselfe, and the other for his wife, +and vnder the same stone was found a glasse somewhat proportioned like an +vrinall, but that it was eight square and very thicke, wherein were the +ashes of the head and right arme of Mar. T. Cicero, for as stories make +mention he was beheaded as I remember at Capua, for insurrection. And his +wife hauing got his head and right arme, (which was brought to Rome to the +Emperor) went from Rome, and came to Zante, and there buried his head and +arme, and wrote vpon his tombe this style M. T Cicero. Haue. [Marginal +note: Or, Aue.] Then followeth in other letters, _Et tu Terentia Antonia_, +which difference of letters declare that they were not written both at one +time. [Sidenote: The Description of the tombe.] The tombe is long and +narrowe, and deepe, walled on euery side like a graue, in the botome +whereof was found the sayd stone with the writing on it, and the said +glasse of ashes, and also another litle glasse of the same proportion, +wherein, as they say, are the teares of his friendes, and in those dayes +they did vse to gather and bury with them, as they did vse in Italy and +Spaine to teare their haire, to bury with their friendes. In the sayde +tombe were a fewe bones. After dinner we rested vntill it drew towards +euening by reason of the heat. [Sidenote: Sant Elia, but one Frier.] And +about foure of the clocke we walked to another Frierie a mile out of the +towne called Sant Elia, these are white Friers, there were two, but one is +dead, not sixe dayes since. This Frierie hath a garden very pleasant, and +well furnished with Orenges, Lemons, pomegranates, and diuers other good +fruites. The way to it is somewhat ragged, vp hill and downe, and very +stonie, and in winter very durtie. It standeth very plesantly in a clift +betweene two hilles, with a good prospect. From thence we ascended the hill +to the Castle, which is situated on the very toppe of a hill. [Sidenote: +The description of the Castle of Zante.] This Castle is very strong, in +compasse a large mile and a halfe, which being victualed, (as it is neuer +vnfurnished) and manned with men of trust, it may defende itselfe against +any Princes power. This Castle taketh the iust compasse of the hill, and no +other hill neere it, it is so steepe downe, and so high and ragged, that it +will tyre any man or euer he be halfe way vp. Very nature hath fortified +the walles and bulwarkes: It is by nature foure square, and it commandeth +the towne and porte. The Venetians haue alwayes their Podesta, or +Gouernour, with his two Counsellours resident therein. The towne is welle +inhabited, and hath great quantity of housholders. The Iland by report is +threescore and tenne miles about, it is able to make twentie thousand +fighting men. They say they have alwayes fiue or sixe hundred horsemen +readie at an houres warning. They saye the Turke hath assayed it with 100. +Gallies, but he could neuer bring his purpose to passe. It is strange to +mee how they should maintains so many men in this Iland, for their best +sustenance is wine, and the rest but miserable. + +The first of August we were warned aboord by the patron, and towards +euening we set sayle, and had sight of a Castle called Torneste, which is +the Turkes, and is ten miles from Zante, it did belong to the Venetians, +but they haue now lost it, it standeth also on a hill on the sea side in +Morea. All that night we bare into the sea, because we had newes at Zante +of twelue of the Turkes gallies, that came from Rhodes, which were about +Modon, Coron, and Candia, for which cause we kept at the sea. + +The second of August, we had no sight of land, but kept our course, and +about the thirde watch the winde scanted, so that we bare with the shore, +and had sight of Modon and Coron. + +The third we had sight of Cauo Mattapan, and all that day by reason of +contrary windes, which blew somewhat hard, we lay a hull vntill morning. + +The fourth we were still vnder the sayd Cape, and so continued that day, +and towardes night there grewe a contention in the ship amongst the +Hollanders, and it had like to haue bene a great inconuenience, for we had +all our weapons, yea euen our kniues, taken from vs that night. + +The fift, we sayled by the Bowline, and out of the toppe we had sight of +the Iland of Candia, and towardes noone we might see it plaine, and towards +night the winde waxed calme. + +The sixt toward the breake of day we saw two small Ilands called Gozi, and +towards noone we were betweene them: the one of these Ilands is fifteene +miles about, and the other 10. miles. In those Ilands are nourished store +of cattell for butter and cheese. There are to the number of fiftie or +sixtie inhabitants, which are Greekes, and they liue chiefly on milke and +cheese. The Iland of Candia is 700 miles about, it is in length, from Cape +Spada, to Cape Salomon, 300 miles, it is as they say, able to make one +hundred thousand fighting men. We sayled betweene the Gozi, and Candia, and +they are distant from Candia 5 or 6 miles. The Candiots are strong men, and +very good archers, and shoot neere the marke. This Ilande is from Zante 300 +miles. + +The seuenth we sayled all along the sayd Iland with little winde and +vnstable, and the eight day towards night we drew to the East end of the +Iland. + +The 9 and 10 we sayled along with a prosperous winde and saw no land. + +The 11 in the morning, we had sight of the Iland of Cyprus, and towards +noone we were thwart the Cape called Ponta Malota, and about foure of the +clocke we were as farre as Baffo, and about sunne set we passed Cauo +Bianco, and towards nine of the clocke at night we doubled Cauo de la +gatte, and ankered afore Limisso, but the wind blew so hard, that we could +not come neere the towne, neither durst any man goe on land. The towne is +from Cauo de le gatte twelue miles distant. + +The 12. of August in the morning wee went on land to Limisso: this towne is +ruinated and nothing in it worth writing, saue onely in the midst of the +towne there hath bene a fortresse, which is now decayed, and the wals part +ouerthrowen, which a Turkish Rouer with certaine gallies did destroy about +10. or 12. yeeres past. [Sidenote: Caualette is a certaine vermine in the +Island of Cyprus.] This day walking to see the towne, we chanced to see in +the market place, a great quantitie of certaine vermine called in the +Italian tongue Caualette. It is as I can learne, both in shape and bignesse +like a grassehopper, for I can iudge but little difference. Of these many +yeeres they haue had such quantitie that they destroy all their corne. They +are so plagued with them, that almost euery yeere they doe well nie loose +halfe their corne, whether it be the nature of the countrey, or the plague +of God, that let them iudge that can best define. But that there may no +default be laied to their negligence for the destruction of them, they haue +throughout the whole land a constituted order, that euery Farmor or +husbandmen (which are euen as slaues bought and sold to their lord) shall +euery yeere pay according to his territorie, a measure full of the seede or +egges of these forenamed Caualette, the which they are bound to bring to +the market, and present to the officer appointed for the same, the which +officer taketh of them very straight measure, and writeth the names of the +presenters, and putteth the sayd egges or seed, into a house appointed for +the same, and hauing the house full, they beate them to pouder, and cast +them into the sea, and by this pollicie they doe as much as in them lieth +for the destruction of them. This vermine breedeth or ingendereth at the +time of corne being ripe, and the corne beyng had away, in the clods of the +same ground do the husbandmen find the nestes, or, as I may rather terme +them, cases of the egges, of the same vermine. Their nests are much like to +the keies of a hasel-nut tree, when they be dried, and of the same length, +but somewhat bigger, which case being broken you shall see the egges lie +much like vnto antes egges, but somewhat lesser. This much I haue written +at this time, because I had no more time of knowledge, but I trust at my +returne to note more of this island, with the commodities of the same at +large. + +[Sidenote: The pilgrimes going to the Greeke churches.] The 13. day we went +in the morning to the Greeks church, to see the order of their ceremonies, +and of their communion, of the which to declare the whole order with the +number of their ceremonious crossings, it were to long. Wherefore least I +should offend any man, I leaue it vnwritten: but onely that I noted well, +that in all their Communion or seruice, not one did euer kneele, nor yet in +any of their Churches could I euer see any grauen images, but painted or +portrayed. Also they haue store of lampes alight, almost for euery image +one. Their women are alwayes separated from the men, and generally they are +in the lower ende of the Church. This night we went aboord the ship, +although the wind were contrary, we did it because the patrone should not +find any lacke of vs, as sometimes he did: when as tarying vpon his owne +businesse, he would colour it with the delay of the pilgrimes. + +The 14. day in the morning we set saile, and lost sight of the Island of +Cyprus, and the 15. day we were likewise at Sea, and sawe no land: and the +16. day towards night, we looked for land, but we sawe none. But because we +supposed our selues to be neere our port, we tooke in all our sailes except +onely the foresaile and the mizzen, and so we remained all that night. + +The 17. day in the morning, we kept by report of the Mariners, some sixe +miles from Iaffa, but it prooued contrary. But because we would be sure, +wee made to an anker seuen miles from the shore, and sent the skiffe with +the Pilot and the master gunner, to learne the coast, but they returned, +not hauing seen tree nor house, nor spoken with any man. But when they came +to the sea side againe, they went vp a little hill standing hard by the +brinke, whereon as they thought, they sawe the hill of Ierusalem, by the +which the Pilot knew (after his iudgement) that we were past our port. And +so this place where we rode was, as the mariners sayd, about 50. mile from +Iaffa. This coast all alongst is very lowe, plaine, white, sandie, and +desert, for which cause it hath fewe markes or none, so that we rode here +as it were in a gulfe betweene two Capes. + +[Sidenote: A great currant.] The 18. day we abode still at anker, looking +for a gale to returne backe, but it was contrary: and the 19. we set saile, +but the currant hauing more force then the winde, we were driuen backe, +insomuch that the ship being vnder saile, we cast the sounding lead, and +(notwithstanding the wind) it remained before the shippe, there wee had +muddie ground at fifteene fadome. The same day about 4. of the clocke, wee +set saile againe, and sayled West alongst the coast with a fresh +side-winde. [Sidenote: A Cat fallen into the sea and recouered.] It chanced +by fortune that the shippes Cat lept into the Sea, which being downe, kept +her selfe very valiauntly aboue water, notwithstanding the great waues, +still swimming, the which the master knowing, he caused the Skiffe with +halfe a dozen men to goe towards her and fetch her againe, when she was +almost halfe a mile from the shippe, and all this while the ship lay on +staies. I hardly beleeue they would haue made such haste and meanes if one +of the company had bene in the like perill. They made the more haste +because it was the patrons cat. This I haue written onely to note the +estimation that cats are in, among the Italians, for generally they esteeme +their cattes, as in England we esteeme a good Spaniell. The same night +about tenne of the clocke the winde calmed, and because none of the shippe +knewe where we were, we let fall an anker about 6 mile from the place we +were at before, and there wee had muddie ground at twelue fathome. + +The 20 it was still calme, and the current so strong still one way, that we +were not able to stemme the streame: moreouer we knew not where we were, +whereupon doubting whither wee were past, or short of our port, the Master, +Pilot, and other Officers of the shippe entered into counsell what was best +to doe, wherevpon they agreed to sende the bote on lande againe, to seeke +some man to speake with all, but they returned as wise as they went. Then +we set sayle againe and sounded euery mile or halfe mile, and found still +one depth, so we not knowing where we were, came againe to an anker, seuen +or eight miles by West from the place we were at. Thus still doubting where +we were, the bote went on land againe, and brought newes that wee were +short 80 miles of the place, whereas we thought wee had beene ouershot by +east fiftie miles. Thus in these doubts we lost foure dayes, and neuer a +man in the shippe able to tell where we were, notwithstanding there were +diuerse in the shippe that had beene there before. [Sidenote: They met with +two Moores on land.] Then sayd the Pylot, that at his comming to the shore, +by chance he saw two wayfaring men, which were Moores, and he cryed to them +in Turkish, insomuch that the Moores, partly for feare, and partly for +lacke of vnderstanding, (seeing them to be Christians) beganne to flie, yet +in the end with much a doe, they stayed to speake with them, which men when +they came together, were not able to vnderstand ech other, but our men made +to them the signe of the Crosse on the sande, to giue them to vnderstand +that they were of the shippe that brought the pilgrims. Then the Moores +knowing (as al the country else doth) that it was the vse of Christians to +go to Ierusalem, shewed them to be yet by west of Iaffa. Thus we remained +ail that night at anker, and the farther west that we sayled, the lesse +water we had. + +The 21 we set sayle againe and kept our course Northeast, but because we +would not goe along the shore by night, wee came to an anker in foure and +twentie fathome water. [Sidenote: The two towers of Iaffa. Scolio di Santo +Petro.] Then the next morning being the 22 we set sayle againe, and kept +our course as before, and about three of the clocke in the afternoone, wee +had sight of the two towers of Iaffa, and about fiue of the clocke, wee +were with a rocke, called in the Italian tongue, Scolio di Santo Petro, on +the which rocke they say he fished, when Christ bid him cast his net on the +right side, and caught so many fishes. This rocke is now almost worne away. +It is from Iaffa two or three mile: here before the two towers we came to +an anker. Then the pilgrimes after supper, in salutation of the holy lande, +sang to the prayse of God, Te Deum laudamus, with Magnificat, and +Benedictus, but in the shippe was a Frier of Santo Francisco, who for anger +because he was not called and warned, would not sing with vs, so that he +stood so much vpon his dignitie, that he forgot his simplicitie, and +neglected his deuotion to the holy land for that time, saying that first +they ought to haue called him yer they did beginne, because he was a Fryer, +and had beene there, and knewe the orders. + +[Sidenote: A messenger departeth for Ierusalem.] The 23 we sent the bote on +land with a messenger to the Padre Guardian of Ierusalem. [Sidenote: +Mahomet is clothed in green.] This day it was notified vnto mee by one of +the shippe that had beene a slaue in Turkie, that no man might weare greene +in this land, because their prophet Mahomet went in greene. This came to my +knowledge by reason of the Scriuanello, who had a greene cap, which was +forbidden him to weare on the land. + +The 24. 25. and 26 we taryed in the shippe still looking for the comming of +the Padre guardian, and the 26 at night we had a storme which lasted all +the next day. + +[Sidenote: The Guardian of Ierusalem commeth to Iaffa, with the Cady, and +Subassi.] The 27 in the morning, came the Cadi, the Subassi, and the +Meniwe, with the Padre guardian, but they could not come at vs by reason of +the stormy weather: in the afternoone we assayed to send the bote on land, +but the weather would not suffer us. Then againe towards night the bote +went a shore, but it returned not that night. [Sidenote: A cloud called of +the Italians Cion most dangerous.] The same day in the afternoone we sawe +in the element, a cloud with a long tayle, like vnto the tayle of a +serpent, which cloud is called in Italian Cion, the tayle of this cloud did +hang as it were into the sea: and we did see the water vnder the sayde +cloude ascend, as it were like a smoke or myste, the which this Cion drew +vp to it. The Marriners reported to vs that it had this propertie, that if +it should happen to haue lighted on any part of the shippe, that it would +rent and wreth sayles, mast, shroudes and shippe and all in manner like a +wyth: on the land, trees, houses, in whatsoeuer else it lighteth on, it +would rent and wreth. [Sidenote: A coniuration.] These marriners did vse a +certaine coniuration to breake the said tayle, or cut it in two, which as +they say doth preuaile. They did take a blacke hafted knife, and with the +edge of the same did crosse the said taile as if they would cut it in +twain, saying these words, Hold thou Cion, eat this, and then they stucke +the knife on the ship side with the edge towards the said cloude, and I saw +it therewith vanish in lesse than one quarter of an houre. But whether it +was then consumed, or whether by vertue of the Inchantment it did vanish I +knowe not, but it was gone. Hereof let them iudge that know more then I. +This afternoone we had no winde, but the sea very stormy, insomuch that +neither cheste, pot, nor any thing else could stand in the shippe, and wee +were driuen to keepe our meate in one hand, and the pot in the other, and +so sit downe vpon the hatches to eate, for stand we could not, for that the +Seas in the very port at an anker went so high as if wee had bene in the +bay of Portugall with stormy weather. The reason is, as the Mariners said +to me, because that there meete all the waues from all places of the +Straights of Gibralter, and there breake, and that in most calmes there go +greatest seas, whether the winde blow or not. + +The 28. the weather growing somewhat calme, we went on land and rested our +selues for that day, and the next day we set forward toward the city of +Ierusalem. + +What I did, and what places of deuotion I visited in Ierusalem, and other +parts of the Holy land, from this my departure from Iaffa, vntill my +returne to the said port, may briefly be seene in my Testimoniall, vnder +the hand and seale of the Vicar generall of Mount Sion, which for the +contentment of the Reader I thought good here to interlace. + +Vniuersis et singulis præsentes litteras inspecturis salutem in Domino +nostro Iesu Christo. Attestamur vobis ac alijs quibuscunque qualiter +honorabilis vir Iohannes Lok ciuis Londoniensis, filius honorabilis viri +Guilhelmi Lok equitis aurati, ad sacratissima terræ sanctæ loca +personaliter se contulit, sanctissimum Domini nostri Iesu Christi +sepulchrum, equo die tertia gloriosus à mortuis resurrexit, sacratissimum +Caluariæ montem, in quo pro nobis omnibus cruci affixus mori dignatus est, +Sion etiam montem vbi coenam illam mirificam cum discipulis suis fecit, et +vbi spiritus sanctus in die sancto Pentecostes in discipulos eosdem in +linguis igneis descendit, Oliuetique montem vbi mirabiliter coelos +ascendit, intemeratæ virginis Mariæ Mausoleum in Iosaphat vallis medio +situm, Bethaniam quoque Bethlehem ciuitatem Dauid in qua de purissima +virgine Maria natus est, ibique inter animalia reclinatus, pluraque loca +alia tam in Hierusalem ciuitate sancta terre Iudææ, quà m extra, à modernis +peregrinis visitari solita, deuotissimè visitauit, pariterque adorauit. In +quorum fidem, ego frater Anthonius de Bergamo ordinis fratrum minorum +regularis obseruantiæ prouinciæ diui Anthonij Sacri conuentus montis Sion +vicarius (licet indignus) necnon aliorum locorum terræ Sanctæ, apostolica +authoritate comissarius et rector, has Sigillo maiori nostri officij +nostraque subscriptione muniri volui. Datum Hierosolymis apud sacratissimum +domini coenaculum in sæpè memorato monte Sion, Anno Domini millesimo +quingentesimo, quinquagesimo tertio, die vero sexto mensis Septembris. + +Frater Antonius qui supra. + +[Sidenote: The pilgrims returne from Ierusalem. Mount Carmel.] The 15. of +September being come from our pilgrimage, we went aborde our shippe, and +set saile, and kept our course West toward the Island of Cyprus, but al +that night it was calme, and the 16. the winde freshed, and we passed by +Mount Carmel. + +The 17. the winde was very scant, yet we kept the sea, and towards night +wee had a guste of raine whereby wee were constrained to strike our sailes, +but it was not very stormie, nor lasted very long. + +The 18. 19. 20. and 21. we kept still the sea and saw no land because we +had very little winde, and that not very fauourable. + +The 22. at noone the Boatswaine sent some of the Mariners into the boat, +(which we toed asterne from Iaffa) for certaine necessaries belonging to +the ship, wherein the Mariners found a certaine fish in proportion like a +Dace, about 6 inches long (yet the Mariners said they had seene the like a +foote long and more) the which fish had on euery side a wing, and toward +the taile two other lesser as it were finnes, on either side one, but in +proportion they were wings and of a good length. These wings grow out +betweene the gils and the carkasse of the same fish. [Sidenote: Pesce +columbini.] They are called in the Italian tongue Pesce columbini, for in +deede, the wings being spred it is like to a flying doue, they say it will +flie farre and very high. So it seemeth that being weary of her flight she +fell into the boate, and not being able to rise againe died there. + +The 23. 24. and 25. we sailed our direct course with a small gale of winde, +and this day we had sight of the Island of Cyprus. [Sidenote: Cauo de la +Griega.] The first land that we discouered was a headland called Cauo de la +Criega, and about midnight we ankered by North of the Gape. This cape is a +high hil, long and square, and on the East corner it hath a high cop, that +appeareth vnto those at the sea, like a white cloud, for toward the sea it +is white, and it lieth into the sea Southwest. This coast of Cyprus is high +declining toward the sea, but it hath no cliffes. + +The 26. we set saile againe, and toward noone we came into the port of +Salini, where we went on land and lodged that night at a towne one mile +from thence called Arnacho di Salini, this is but a village called in +Italian, Casalia. This is distant from Iaffa 250. Italian miles. + +The 27. we rested, and the 28. we hired horses to ride from Arnacho to +Sulina, which is a good mile. The salt pit is very neere two miles in +compasse, very plaine and leuell, into the which they let runne at the time +of raine a quantitie of water comming from the mountaines, which water is +let in vntil the pit be full to a certaine marke, which when it is full, +the rest is conueyed by a trench into the sea. The water is let runne in +about October, or sooner or later, as the time of the yeere doth afforde. +There they let it remaine vntill the ende of Iuly or the middest of August, +out of which pits at that time, in stead of water that they let in they +gather very faire white salt, without any further art or labour, for it is +only done by the great heate of the sunne. This the Venetians haue, and doe +maintaine to the vse of S. Marke, and the Venetian ships that come to this +Island are bound to cast out their ballast, and to lade with salt for +Venice. Also there may none in all the Iland buy salt but of these men, who +maintaine these pits for S. Marke. This place is watched by night with 6. +horsemen to the end it be not stolne by night. Also vnder the Venetians +dominions no towne may spende any salt, but they must buy it of Saint +Marke, neither may any man buy any salt at one towne to carie to another, +but euery one must buy his salt in the towne where he dwelleth. Neither may +any man in Venice buy more salt then he spendeth in the city, for if he be +knowen to carte but one ounce out of the due and be accused, hee looseth an +eare. The most part of all the salt they haue in Venice commeth from these +Salines, and they have it so plentifull, that they are not able, neuer a +yeere to gather the one halfe, for they onely gather in Iuly, August, and +September, and not fully these three moneths. Yet notwithstanding the +abundance that the shippes carie away yeerely, there remaine heapes like +hilles, some heapes able to lade nine or tenne shippes, and there are +heapes of two yeeres gathering, some of three and some of nine or tenne +yeeres making, to the value of a great somme of golde, and when the ships +do lade, they neuer take it by measure, but when they come at Venice they +measure it. This salt as it lyeth in the pit is like so much ice, and it is +sixe inches thicke: they digge it with axes, and cause their slaues to cary +it to the heapes. This night at midnight we rode to Famagusta, which is +eight leagues from Salina, which is 24 English miles. + +The 29 about two houres before day we alighted at Famagusta, and after we +were refreshed we went to see the towne. This is a very faire strong holde, +and the strongest and greatest in the Iland. The walks are faire and new, +and strongly rampired with foure principall bulwarkes, and bettweene them +turrions responding one to another, these walks did the Venetians make. +They haue also on the hauen side of it a Castle, and the hauen is chained, +the citie hath onely two gates, to say, one for the lande and another for +the sea, they haue in the towne continually, be it peace or warres, 800 +souldiers, and fortie and sixe gunners, besides Captaines, petie Captaines, +Gouernour and Generall The lande gate hath alwayes fiftie souldiers, pikes +and gunners with their harnes, watching thereat night and day. At the sea +gate fiue and twenties upon the walles euery night doe watch fifteene men +in watch houses, for euery watch house fiue men, and in the market place 30 +souldiers continually. There may no souldier serue there aboue 5 yeres, +neither will they without friendship suffer them to depart afore 5. yeres +be expired, and there may serue of all nations except Greekes. [Sidenote: +Morenigo.] They haue euery pay which is 45 dayes, 15 Morenigos, which is 15 +shillings sterling. [Sidenote: Solde of Venice] Their horsemen haue only +sixe soldes Venetian a day, and prouender for their horses, but truth I +maruell how they liue being so hardly fed, for all the sommer they feede +only vpon chopt strawe and barley, for hay they haue none, and yet they be +faire, fat and seruiceable. [Sidenote: Castellani] The Venetians send euery +two yeres new rulers, which they call Castellani. The towne hath allotted +it also two gallies continually armed and furnished. + +[Sidenote: Saint Katherens Chappel in old Famagusta.] The 30. in the +morning we ridde to a chappell, where they say Saint Katherin was borne. +This Chappell is in olde Famagusta, the which was destroyed by Englishmen, +and is cleane ouerthrowne to the ground, to this day desolate and not +inhabited by any person, it was of a great circuit, and there be to this +day mountaines of faire, great, and strong buildings, and not onely there, +but also in many places of the Iland. [Sidenote: Diuvers coines vnder +ground.] Moreouer when they digge, plowe, or trench they finde sometimes +olde antient coines, some of golde, some of siluer, and some of copper, yea +and many tombes and vautes with sepulchers in them. This olde Famagusta is +from the other, foure miles, and standeth on a hill, but the new towne on a +plaine. [Sidenote: Cornari, a family of Venice maried to king Iaques.] +Thence we returned to new Famagusta againe to dinner, and toward euening we +went about the towne, and in the great Church we sawe the tombe of king +Iaques, which was the last king of Cyprus, and was buried in the yere of +Christ one thousand foure hundred seuentie and three, and had to wife one +of the daughters of Venice, of the house of Cornari, the which family at +this day hath great reuenues in this Island, and by means of that mariage +the Venetians, chalenge the kingdome of Cyprus. + +The first of October in the morning, we went to see the reliefe of the +watches. That done, we went to one of the Greekes Churches to see a pot or +Iarre of stone, which is sayd to bee one of the seuen Iarres of water, the +which the Lord God at the mariage conuerted into wine. It is a pot of earth +very faire, white enamelled, and faireiy wrought vpon with drawen worke, +and hath on either side of it, instead of handles, eares made in fourme as +the painters make angels wings, it was about an elle high, and small at the +bottome, with a long necke and correspondent in circuit to the botome, the +belly very great and round, it holdeth full twelue gallons, and hath a +tap-hole to drawe wine out thereat, the Iarre is very auncient, but whether +it be one of them or no, I know not. The aire of Famagusta is very +vnwholesome, as they say, by reason of certaine marish ground adioyning +vnto it. They haue also a certaine yeerely sicknesse raigning in the same +towne, aboue all the rest of the Island: yet neuerthelesse, they haue it in +other townes, but not so much. It is a certaine rednesse and paine of the +eyes, the which if it bee not quickly holpen, it taketh away their sight, +so that yeerely almost in that towne, they haue about twentie that lose +their sight, either of one eye or both, and it commeth for the most part in +this moneth of October, and the last moneth: for I haue met diuers times +three and foure at once in companies, both men and women. [Sidenote: No +vitailes must be sold out of the city of Famagusta.] Their liuing is better +cheape in Famagusta then in any other place of the Island, because there +may no kinde of prouision within their libertie bee solde out of the Citie. + +The second of October we returned to Arnacho, where wee rested vntill the +sixt day. [Sidenote: Greate ruines in Cyprus.] This towne is a pretie +Village, there are thereby toward the Sea side diuers monuments, that there +hath bene great ouerthrow of buildings, for to this day there is no yere +when they finde not, digging vnder ground, either coines, caues, and +sepulcres of antiquities, as we walking, did see many, so that in effect, +all alongst the Sea coast, throughout the whole Island, there is much ruine +and ouerthrow of buildings, [Sidenote: Cyprus 36. yeres disinhabited for +lacke of water.] for as they say, it was disinhabited sixe and thirtie +yeres, before Saint Helens time for lacke of water. [Sidenote: Cypr. +ruinated by Rich. the I.] And since that time it hath bene ruinated and +ouerthrowen by Richard the first of that name king of England, which he did +in reuenge of his sisters rauishment comming to Ierusalem, the which +inforcement was done to her by the king of Famagusta. + +The sixt day we rid to Nicosia, which is from Arnacho seuen Cyprus miles, +which are one and twentie Italian miles. This is the ancientest citie of +the Iland, and is walled about, but it is not strong neither of walles nor +situation: It is by report three Cyprus miles about, it is not throughly +inhabited, but hath many great gardens in it, and also very many Date +trees, and plentie of Pomegranates and other fruites. There dwell all the +Gentilitie of the Island, and there hath euery Cauallier or Conte of the +Island an habitation. [Sidenote: A fountaine that watereth al the gardens +in the citie.] There is in this citie one fountaine rented by saint Marke, +which is bound euery eight dayes once, to water all the gardens in the +towne, and the keeper of this fountaine hath for euery tree a Bizantin, +which is twelue soldes Venice, and sixpence sterling. [Sidenote: A Bizantin +is 6. d. sterling.] He that hath that to farme, with a faire and profitable +garden thereto belonging, paieth euery yeere to saint Marke, fifteene +hundred crownes. The streetes of the citie are not paued, which maketh it +with the quantitie of the gardens, to seeme but a rurall habitation. But +there be many faire buildings in the Citie, there be also Monasteries both +of Franks and Greekes. [Sidenote: S. Sophia is a Cathedral church of +Nicosia.] The Cathedrall church is called Santa Sophia, in the which there +is an old tombe of Iaspis stone, all of one piece, made in forme of a +cariage coffer, twelue spannes long, sixe spannes broad, and seuen spannes +high, which they say was found vnder ground. It is as faire a stone as euer +I haue seene. + +The seuenth day we rid to a Greeke Frierie halfe a mile without the towne. +It is a very pleasaunt place, and the Friers feasted vs according to their +abilitie. These Friers are such as haue bene Priests, and their wiues dying +they must become Friers of this place, and neuer after eate flesh, for if +they do, they are depriued from saying masse: neither, after they haue +taken vpon them this order, may they marry againe, but they may keepe a +single woman. These Greekish Friers are very continent and chast, and +surely I haue seldome seen (which I haue well noted) any of them fat. + +The 8. day we returned to Arnacho, and rested there. [Sidenote: Monte de la +Croce.] The 9. after midnight my company rid to the hill called Monte de la +Croce (but I not disposed would not go) which hill is from Arnacho 15. +Italian miles. Vpon the sayd hill is a certaine crosse, which is, they say, +a holy Crosse. This Crosse in times past did by their report of the Island, +hang in the ayre, but by a certaine earthquake, the crosse and the chappeil +it hung in, were ouerthrowen, so that neuer since it would hang againe in +the aire. But it is now couered with siluer, and hath 3. drops of our +lordes blood on it (as they say) and there is in the midst of the great +crosse, a little crosse made of the crosse of Christ; but it is closed in +the siluer, you must (if you will) beleeue it is so, for see it you cannot. +This crosse hangeth nowe by both endes in the wall, that you may swing it +vp and downe, in token that it did once hang in the aire. This was told me +by my fellow pilgrimes, for I sawe it not. + +The 10. at night we went aboard by warning of the patron: and the 11. in +the morning we set saile, and crept along the shore, but at night we +ankered by reason of contrary windes. + +[Sidenote: Limisso.] The 12. we set saile toward Limisso, which is from +Salines 50. miles, and there we went on land that night. + +The 13. and 14. we remained still on land, and the 15. the patrone sent for +vs; but by reason that one of our company was not well, we went not +presently, but we were forced afterward to hire a boate, and to ouertake +the ship tenne miles into the sea. At this Limisso all the Venetian ships +lade wine for their prouision, and some for to sell, and also vineger. +[Sidenote: Carrobi.] They lade also great store of Carrobi: for all the +countrey thereabout adioning, and all the mountaines are full of Carrobi +trees, they lade also cotton wooll there. [Sidenote: Vulture.] In the sayd +towne we did see a certaine foule of the land (whereof there are many in +this Island) named in the Italian tongue Vulture. It is a foule that is as +big as a Swanne, and it liueth vpon carion. The skinne is full of soft +doune, like to a fine furre, which they vse to occupie when they haue euill +stomocks, and it maketh good digestion. This bird (as they say) will eat as +much at one meale as shall serue him fortie dayes after, and within the +compasse of that time careth for no more meate. The countrey people, when +they have any dead beast, they cary it into the mountaines, or where they +suppose the sayd Vultures to haunt, they seeing the carion doe immediately +greedily seize vpon it, and doe so ingraft their talents, that they cannot +speedily rise agayne, by reason whereof the people come and kill them: +sometimes they kill them with dogs, and sometimes with such weapons as they +haue. This foule is very great and hardy, much like an Eagle in the +feathers of her wings and backe, but vnder her great feathers she is onely +doune, her necke also long and full of doune. She hath on the necke bone, +betweene the necke and the shoulders a heape of fethers like a Tassell, her +thighs vnto her knees are couered with doune, her legs strong and great, +and dareth with her talents assault a man. [Sidenote: Great pleny of very +fat birds.] They haue also in this Island a certaine small bird, much like +vnto a Wagtaile in fethers and making, these are so extreme fat that you +can perceiue nothing els in all their bodies: these birds are now in +season. They take great quantitie of them, and they vse to pickle them with +vineger and salt, and to put them in pots and send them to Venice and other +places of Italy for presents of great estimation. They say they send almost +1200. Iarres or pots to Venice, besides those which are consumed in the +Island, which are a great number. These are so plentifull that when there +is no shipping, you may buy then for 10. Carchies, which coine are 4. to a +Venetian Soldo, which is peny farthing the dozen, and when there is store +of shipping, 2 pence the dozen, after that rate of their money. [Sidenote: +The Famagustans obserue the French statutes.] They of the limites of +Famagusta do keep the statutes of the Frenchmen which sometimes did rule +there. And the people of Nicosia, obserue the order of the Genoueses, who +sometimes also did rule them. All this day we lay in the sea with little +wind. + +The 16. we met a Venetian ship, and they willing to speake with vs, and we +with them, made towards each other, but by reason of the euil stirrage of +the other ship, we had almost boorded each other to our great danger. +[Sidenote: Cauo Bianco.] Toward night we ankered vnder Cauo Bianco, but +because the winde grew faire, we set saile againe presently. + +[Sidenote: Another Cion.] The 17. 18. 19, and 20 we were at sea with calme +sommer weather, and the 20. we had some raine, and saw another Cion in the +element. [Sidenote: A ship called el Bonna.] This day also we sawe, and +spake with a Venetian ship called el Bonna, bound for ciprus. + +The 21. we sailed with a reasonable gale, and saw no land vntil the 4. of +Nouember. [Sidenote: A great tempest.] This day we had raine, thunder, +lightening, and much wind and stormie weather, but God be praised we +escaped all dangers. + +[Sidenote: Candia, Gozi.] The 4. of Nouember we had sight of the Island of +Candia, and we fell with the Islands called Gozi, by south of Candia. +[Sidenote: Antonie Gelber departed this life.] This day departed this +present life, one of our company named Anthonie Gelber of Prussia, who +onely tooke his surfet of Cyprus wine. This night we determined to ride a +trie, because the wind was contrary, and the weather troublesome. + +The 5. we had very rough stormie weather. This day was the sayd Anthonie +Gelber sowed in a Chauina filled with stones and throwen into the sea. By +reason of the freshnes of the wind we would haue made toward the shore, but +the wind put vs to the sea, where we endured a great storme and a +troublesome night. + +The 6. 7. and 8. we were continually at the sea, and this day at noone the +wind came faire, whereby we recouered the way which we had lost, and sayled +out of sight of Candia. + +[Sidenote: Cauo Matapan. Modon.] The 9. we sailed all day with a prosperous +wind after 14. mile an houre: and the 10. in the morning, wee had sight of +Cauo Matapan, and by noone of Cauo Gallo, in Morea, with which land we made +by reason of contrary wind, likewise we had sight of Modon, vnder the which +place we ankered. This Modon is a strong towne, and built into the sea, +with a peere for litle ships and galleis to harbour in. [Sidenote: +Sapientia.] It hath on the South side of the chanell, the Iland of +Sapientia, with other litle Ilands all disinhabited. The chanell lieth +Southwest and Northeast betweene the Islands and Morea, which is firme +land. This Modon was built by the Venetians, but as some say it was taken +from them by force of the Turke, and others say by composition: [Sidenote: +Coron. Napolis de Romania.] in like case Coron, and Napolis de Romania, +which is also in Morea. This night the Flemmish pilgrimes being drunke, +would have slaine the patrone because he ankered here. + +The 11. day we set saile againe, and as we passed by Modon, we saluted them +with ordinance, for they that passe by this place, must salute with +ordinance, (if they haue) or els by striking their top sailes, for if they +doe not, the towne will shoot at them. [Sidenote: Prodeno. Zante and +Cephalonia.] This day toward 2. of the clocke wee passed by the Island of +Prodeno, which is but litle, and desert, vnder the Turke. About 2. houres +before night, we had sight of the Islands of Zante and Cephalonia, which +are from Modon one hundreth miles. + +The 12. day in the morning, with the wind at West, we doubled between +Castle Torneste, and the Island of Zante. [Sidenote: Castle Torneste vnder +the Turke.] This castle is on the firme land vnder the Turke. This night we +ankered afore the towne of Zante, where we that night went on land, and +rested there the 13. 14. and 15. at night we were warned aboord by the +patrone. This night the ship tooke in vitailes and other necessaries. + +The 16. in the morning we set saile with a prosperous wind, and the 17. we +had sight of Cauo de santa Maria in Albania on our right hand, and Corfu on +the left hand. This night we ankered before the castles of Corfu, and went +on land and refreshed our selues. + +[Sidenote: The description of the force of Corfu.] The 18. by meanes of a +friend we were licenced to enter the castle or fortresse of Corfu, which is +not onely of situation the strongest I haue seene, but also of edification. +It hath for the Inner warde two strong castles situated on the top of two +high cragges of a rocke, a bow shoot distant the one from the other: the +rocke is vnassaultable, for the second warde it hath strong walles with +rampiers and trenches made as well as any arte can deuise. For the third +warde and vttermost, it hath very strong walles with rampires of the rocke +it selfe cut out by force and trenched about with the sea. The bulwarkes of +the vttermost warde are not yet finished, which are in number but two: +there are continually in the castle seuen hundred souldiours. Also it hath +continually foure wardes, to wit, for the land entrie one, for the sea +entrie another, and two other wardes. Artillerie and other munition of +defence alwayes readie planted it hath sufficient, besides the store +remaining in their storehouses. The Venetians hold this for the key of all +their dominions, and for strength it may be no lesse. This Island is very +fruitfull and plentifull of wine and corne very good, and oliues great +store. This Island is parted from Albania with a chanell, in some places +eight and ten, and in other but three miles. Albania is vnder the Turke, +but in it are many Christians. All the horseman of Corfu are Albaneses; the +Island is not aboue 80. or 90. miles in compasse. + +The 19. 20. and 21. we remained in the towne of Corfu. + +The 22. day wee went aboord and set saile, the wind being very calme wee +toed the ship all that day, and toward Sunne set, the castle sent a +Fragatta vnto us to giue vs warning of three Foistes comming after vs, for +whose comming wee prepared and watched all night, but they came not. + +The 23. day in the morning being calme, wee toed out of the Streight, +vntill wee came to the olde towne, whereof there is no thing standing but +the walles. There is also a new Church of the Greekes called Santa Maria di +Cassopo, and the townes name is called Cassopo. It is a good porte. About +noone wee passed the Streight, and drew toward the ende of the Iland, +hauing almost no wind. This night after supper, by reason of a certaine +Hollander that was drunke, there arose in the ship such a troublesome +disturbance, that all the ship was in an vprore with weapons, and had it +not bene rather by Gods helpe, and the wisedome and patience of the +patrone, more then by our procurement, there had bene that night a great +slaughter. But as God would, there was no hurt, but onely the beginner was +put vnder hatches, and with the fall hurt his face very sore. All that +night the wind blew at Southeast, and sent vs forward. + +The 24. in the morning wee found ourselues before an Island called Saseno, +which is in the entrie to Valona, and the wind prosperous. + +The 25. day we were before the hils of Antiueri, and about sunne set wee +passed Ragusa, and three houres within night we ankered within Meleda, +hauing Sclauonia or Dalmatia on the right hand of vs, and the winde +Southwest. + +The 26. in the morning we set sayle, and passed the chanell between +Sclauonia and Meleda, which may be eight mile ouer at the most. This Iland +is vnder the Raguses. At after noone with a hard gale at west and by north +we entered the chanell betweene the Iland Curzola and the hilles of +Dalmatia, in which channell be many rockes, and the channell not past 3 +miles ouer, and we ankered before the towne of Curzolo. This is a pretie +towne walled about and built vpon the sea side, hauing on the toppe of a +round hill a faire Church. This Iland is vnder the Venetians, there grow +very good vines, also that part toward Dalmatia is well peopled and +husbanded, especially for wines. In the said Iland we met with the Venetian +armie, to wit, tennie gallies, and three foystes. All that night we +remained there. + +The 27 we set sayle and passed along the Iland, and towards afternoone we +passed in before the Iland of Augusta, and about sunne set before the towne +of Lesina, whereas I am informed by the Italians, they take all the +Sardinas that they spend in Italy. This day we had a prosperous winde at +Southeast. The Iland of Lesina is vnder the Venetians, a very fruitfull +Iland adioyning to the maine of Dalmatia, we left it on our right hand, and +passed along. + +[Sidenote: The gulfe of Quernero. Rouigno.] The 28 in the morning we were +in the Gulfe of Quernero, and about two houres after noone we were before +the cape of Istria, and at sunne set we were at anker afore Rouignio which +is also in Istria and vnder the Venetians, where all ships Venetian and +others are bound by order from Venice to take in their pilots to goe for +Venice. All the sommer the Pilots lie at Rouignio, and in winter at +Parenzo, which is from Rouignio 18 miles by West. + +[Sidenote: Parenzo.] The 29 we set sayle and went as farre as Parenzo, and +ankered there that day, and went no further. + +[Sidenote: S. Nicolo an Iland.] The 30 in the morning we rowed to Sant +Nicolo a litle Island hard by vninhabited, but only it hath a Monastery, +and is full of Oliue trees, after masse wee returned and went aboord. This +day we hired a Barke to imbarke the pilgrims for Venice, but they departed +not. In the afternoone we went to see the towne of Parenzo, it is a pretie +handsome towne, vnder the Venetians. After supper wee imbarked our selues +againe, and that night wee sayled towardes Venice. + +The first of December we past a towne of the Venetians, standing on the +entery to the Palude or marshes of Venice: which towne is called Caorle, +and by contrary windes we were driuen thither to take port. This is 60 +miles from Parenzo, and forty from Venice, there we remayned that night. + +The second two houres before day, with the winde at Southeast, we sayled +towards Venice, where we arriued (God be praysed) at two of the clocke +after dinner, and landed about foure, we were kept so long from landing, +because we durst not land vntill we had presented to the Prouidor de la +Sanita, our letter of health. + + * * * * * + +The first voyage or iourney, made by Master Laurence Aldersey, Marchant of + London, to the Cities of Ierusalem, and Tripolis, &c. in the yeere 1581. + Penned and set downe by himselfe. + +I departed from London the first day of April in the yeere of our Lord +1581, passing through the Nether-land and vp the riuer Rhene by Colen, and +other cities of Germanie. And vpon Thursday, the thirde day of May, I came +to Augusta, where I deliuered the letter I had to Master Ienise, and Master +Castler, whom I found very willing to pleasure me, in any thing that I +could or would reasonably demaund. He first furnished me with a horse to +Venice, for my money, and then tooke me with him a walking, to shew me the +Citie, for that I had a day to tary there, for him that was to be my guide. +He shewed me first the Statehouse, which is very faire, and beautiful: then +be brought mee to the finest garden, and orchard, that euer I sawe in my +life: for there was in it a place for Canarie birdes, as large as a faire +Chamber, trimmed with wier both aboue and beneath, with fine little +branches of trees for them to sit in, vhich was full of those Canarie +birdes. There was such an other for Turtle dooues: also there were two +pigeon houses ioyning to them, hauing in them store of Turtle dooues and +pigeons. In the same garden also were sixe or seuen fishponds, all railed +about, and full of very good fish. Also, seuen or eight fine fountaines, or +water springs, of diuers fashions: as for fruite, there wanted none of all +sorts, as Orenges, figges, raisons, wallnuts, grapes, besides apples, +peares, fillbirds, small nuts, and such other fruite, as wee haue in +England. + +Then did hee bring mee to the water tower of the same Citie, that by a +sleight and deuise hath the water brought vp as high as any Church in the +towne, and to tel you the strange deuises of all, it passeth my capacitie. +Then he brought me to another faire garden, called the Shooters hoose, +where are buts for the long bowe, the cross bowe, the stone bowe, the long +peece, and for diuers other exercises more. + +After this, we walked about the walles of the Citie, where is a great, +broade, and deepe ditch, vpon one side of the towne, so full of fish, as +euer I saw any pond in my life, and it is reserued onely for the States of +the Citie. And vpon the other side of the Citie is also a deepe place all +greene, wherein Deere are kept, and when it pleaseth the States to hunt for +their pleasure, thither they resort, and haue their courses with +grayhounds, which are kept for that purpose. + +The fift of May, I departed from Augusta towards Venice, and came thither +vpon Whitsunday the thirteenth of the same moneth. It is needlesse to +speake of the height of the mountaines that I passed ouer, and of the +danger thereof, it is so wel knowen already to the world: the heigth of +them is marueilous, and I was the space of sixe dayes in passing them. + +I came to Venice at the time of a Faire, which lasted foureteene dayes, +wherein I sawe very many, and faire shewes of wares. I came thither too +short for the first passage, which went away from Venice about the seuenth +or eight of May, and with them about three score pilgrims, which shippe was +cast away at a towne called Estria, two miles from Venice, and all the men +in her, sauing thirtie, or thereabout, lost. + +Within eight dayes after fell Corpus Christi day, which was a day amongst +them of procession, in which was shewed the plate and treasure of Venice, +which is esteemed to be worth two millions of pounds, but I do not accompt +it woorth halfe a quarter of that money, except there be more than I sawe. +To speake of the sumptuousnesse of the Copes and Vestments of the Church, I +leaue, but the trueth is, they be very sumptuous, many of them set all ouer +with pearle, and made of cloth of golde. And for the Iesuits, I thinke +there be as many at Venice, as there be in Colen. + +The number of Iewes is there thought to be 1000, who dwell in a certaine +place of the Citie, and haue also a place, to which they resort to pray, +which is called the Iewes Sinagogue. They all, and their offspring vse to +weare red caps, (for so they are commaunded) because they may thereby be +knowen from other men. For my further knowledge of these people, I went +into their Sinagogue vpon a Saturday, which is their Sabbath day: and I +found them in their seruice or prayers, very deuoute: they receiue the fiue +bookes of Moses, and honour them by carying them about their Church, as the +Papists doe their crosse. + +Their Synagogue is in forme round, and the people sit round about it, and +in the midst, there is a place for him that readeth to the rest: as for +their apparell, all of them weare a large white lawne ouer their garments, +which reacheth from their head, downe to the ground. + +The Psalmes they sing as wee doe, hauing no image, nor vsing any maner of +idolatrie: their error is, that they beleeue not in Christ, nor yet receiue +the New Testament. This Citie of Venice is very faire, and greatly to bee +commended, wherein is good order for all things: and also it is very strong +and populous: it standeth vpon the maine Sea, and hath many Islands about +it, that belong to it. + +To tell you of the duke of Venice, and of the Seigniory: there is one +chosen that euer beareth the name of a duke, but in trueth hee is but +seruant of his Seigniorie, for of himselfe hee can doe litle: it is no +otherwise with him, then with a Priest that is at Masse vpon a festiual +day, which putting on his golden garment, seemeth to be a great man, but if +any man come vnto him, and craue some friendship at his handes, hee will +say, you must goe to the Masters of the Parish, for I cannot pleasure you, +otherwise then by preferring to your suite: and so it is with the duke of +Venice, if any man hauing a suite, come to him and make his complaint, and +deliuer his supplication, it is not in him to helpe him, but hee will tell +him, You must come this day, or that day, and then I will preferre your +suite to the Seigniorie, and doe you the best friendship that I may. +Furthermore, if any man bring a letter vnto him, hee may not open it, but +in the presence of the Seigniorie, and they are to see it first, which +being read, perhaps they will deliuer it to him, perhaps not. Of the +Seigniory there be about three hundreth, and about fourtie of the priuie +Counsell of Venice, who vsually are arayed in gownes of crimsen Satten, or +crimsen Damaske, when they sit in Counsell. + +In the citie of Venice, no man may weare a weapon, except he be a souldier +for the Seigniorie, or a scholler of Padua, or a gentleman of great +countenance, and yet he may not do that without licence. + +As for the women of Venice, they be rather monsters then women. Euery +Shoomakers or Taylors wife will haue a gowne of silke, and one to carie vp +her traine, wearing their shooes very neere halfe a yarde high from the +ground: if a stranger meete one of them, he will surely thinke by the state +that she goeth with, that he meeteth a Lady. + +I departed from this citie of Venice, vpon Midsommer day, being +the foure and twentieth of Iune, and thinking that the ship would +the next day depart, I stayed, and lay a shippeboord all night, and +we were made beleeue from time to time, that we should this day, +and that day depart, but we taried still, till the fourteenth of July, +and then with scant winde we set sayle, and sayled that day and +that night, not aboue fiftie Italian miles: and vpon the sixteene +day at night the winde turned flat contrary, so that the Master +knewe not what to doe: and about the fift houre of the night, +which we reckon to be about one of the clocke after midnight, the +Pilot descried a saile, and at last perceiued it to be a Gallie of the +Turkes, whereupon we were in great feare. + +The Master being a wise fellowe, and a good sayler, beganne to deuise howe +to escape the danger, and to loose litle of our way: and while both he, and +all of vs were in our dumps, God sent vs a merry gale of winde, that we +ranne threescore and tenne leagues before it was twelue a clocke the next +day, and in sixe dayes after we were seuen leagues past Zante. And vpon +Munday morning, being the three and twentie of the same moneth, we came in +the sight of Candia which day the winde came contrary, with great blasts +and stormes, vntill the eight and twentie of the same moneth: in which +time, the Mariners cried out vpon me, because I was an English man, and +sayd, I was no good Christian, and wished that I were in the middest of the +Sea, saying, that they, and the shippe, were the worse for me. I answered, +truely it may well be, for I thinke my selfe the worst creature in the +worlde, and consider you your selues also, as I doe my selfe, and then vse +your discretion. The Frier preached, and the sermon being done, I was +demaunded whether I did vnderstand him: I answered, yea, and tolde the +Frier himselfe, thus you saide in your sermon, that we were not all good +Christians, or else it were not possible for vs to haue such weather: to +which I answered, be you well assured, that we are not indeede all good +Christians, for there are in the ship some that hold very vnchristian +opinions: so for that time I satisfied him, although (they said) that I +would not see, when they said the procession, and honoured their images, +and prayed to our Lady and S. Marke. + +There was also a Gentleman, an Italian, which was a passenger in the ship, +and he tolde me what they said of me, because I would not sing, Salue +Regina and Aue Maria, as they did: I told them, that they that praied to so +many, or sought helpe of any other, then of God the Father, or of Iesus +Christ his onely sonne, goe a wrong way to worke, and robbed God of his +honour, and wrought their owne destructions. + +All this was told of the Friers, but I heard nothing of it in three daies +after: and then at euening prayer, they sent the purser about with the +image of our Lady to euery one to kisse, and I perceiuing it went another +way from him, and would not see it: yet at last he fetched his course +about, so that he came to me, and offered it to me as he did to others, but +I refused it: whereupon there was a great stirre: the patron and all the +friers were told of it, and euery one saide I was a Lutheran, and so called +me: but two of the friers that were of greatest authoritie, seemed to beare +me better good will then the rest, and trauelled to the patron in my +behalfe, and made all well againe. + +The second day of August we arriued in Cyprus, at a towne called Missagh: +the people there be very rude, and like beasts, and no better they eat +their meat sitting vpon the ground, with their legges a crosse like +tailors, their beds for the most part be hard stones, but yet some of them +haue faire mattraces to lie vpon. + +Vpon Thursday the eight of August we came to Ioppa in a small barke, which +we hired betwixt Missagh and Salina, and could not be suffered to come on +land till noone the next day, and then we were permitted by the great +Basha, who sate vpon the top of a hill to see vs sent away. Being come on +land, we might not enter into any house for victuals, but were to content +our selues with our owne prouision, and that which we bought to carie with +vs was taken from vs. I had a paire of stirrops, which I bought at Venice +to serue me in my journey, and trying to make them fit for me, when the +Basha saw me vp before the rest of the companie, he sent one to dismount +me, and to strike me, whereupon I turned me to the Basha, and made a long +legge, saying, Grand mercie Signior: and after a while we were horsed vpon +litle asses, and sent away, with about fiftie light horsemen to be our +conduct through the wildernesse, called Deserta foelix, who made vs good +sport by the way with their pikes, gunnes, and fauchins. + +That day being S. Laurence day we came to Rama, which is tenne Italian +miles from Ioppa, and there we stayed that night, and payed to the captaine +of the castell euery man a chekin, which is seuen shillings and two pence +sterling. So then we had a new gard of souldiers, and left the other. + +The house we lodged in at Rama had a doore so low to enter into, that I was +faine to creepe in, as it were vpon my knees, and within it are three +roomes to lodge trauellers that come that way: there are no beds, except a +man buy a mat, and lay it on the ground, that is all the prouision, without +stooles or benches to sit vpon. Our victuals were brought vs out of the +towne, as hennes, egges, bread, great store of fruite, as pomgranates, +figges, grapes, oringes, and such like, and drinke we drue out of the well. +The towne it selfe is so ruinated that I take it rather to be a heape of +stones then a towne. + +Then the next morning we thought to haue gone away, but we could not be +permitted that day, so we stayed there till two of the clocke the next +morning, and then with a fresh gard of souldiers we departed toward +Ierusalem. We had not ridde fiue English miles, but we were incountred with +a great number of the Arabians, who stayed vs, and would not suffer vs to +passe till they had somewhat, so it cost vs for all our gard aboue twentie +shillings a man betwixt Ioppa and Ierusalem. These Arabians troubled vs +oftentimes. Our Truchman that payed the money for vs was striken down, and +had his head broken because be would not giue them as much as they asked: +and they that should haue rescued both him and vs, stood sill and durst do +nothing, which was to our cost. + +Being come within sight of Ierusalem, the maner is to kneele downe, and +giue God thankes, that it hath pleased him to bring vs to that holy place, +where he himselfe had beene: and there we leaue our horses and go on foote +to the towne, and being come to the gates, there they tooke our names, and +our fathers names, and so we were permitted to go to our lodgings. + +The gouernour of the house met vs a mile out of the towne, and very +curteously bade vs all welcome, and brought vs to the monasterie. The gates +of the citie are all couered with yron, the entrance into the house of the +Christians is a very low and narrow doore, barred or plated with yron, and +then come we into a very darke entry: the place is a monastery: there we +lay, and dieted of free cost, we fared reasonable well, the bread and wine +was excellent good, the chambers cleane, and all the meat well serued in, +with cleane linnen. + +We lay at the monasterie two days, Friday and Saturday, and then we went to +Bethlem with two or three of the friers of the house with vs: in the way +thither we saw many monuments, as: + +The mountaine where the Angell tooke vp Abacuck by the haire, and brought +him to Daniel in the Lions denne. + +The fountaine of the prophet Ieremie. + +The place where the wise men met that went to Bethlem to worship Christ, +where is a fountaine of stone. + +Being come to Bethlem we sawe the place where Christ was borne, which is +now a chappell with two altars, whereupon they say masse: the place is +built with gray marble, and hath bene beautifull, but now it is partly +decayed. + +Neere thereto is the sepulchre of the innocents slaine by Herod, the +sepulchres of Paul, of Ierome, and of Eusebius. + +Also a little from this monasterie is a place vnder the ground, where the +virgine Mary abode with Christ when Herod sought him to destroy him. + +We stayed at Bethlem that night, and the next day we went from thence to +the mountaines of Iudea, which are about eight miles from Ierusalem, where +are the ruines of an olde monasterie. In the mid way from the monasterie to +Ierusalem is the place where Iohn Baptist was borne, being now an olde +monasterie, and cattell kept in it. Also a mile from Ierusalem is a place +called Inuentio sanctæ crucis, where the wood was found that made the +crosse. + +In the citie of Ierusalem we saw the hall where Pilate sate in iudgement +when Christ was condemned, the staires whereof are at Rome, as they told +vs. A litle from thence is the house where the virgin Mary was borne. + +There is also the piscina or fishpoole where the sicke folkes were healed, +which is by the wals of Ierusalem. But the poole is now dry. + +The mount of Caluaria is a great church, and within the doore thereof, +which is litle, and barred with yron, and fiue great holes in it to looke +in, like the holes of taverne doores in London, they sit that are appointed +to receiue our money with a carpet vnder them vpon a banke of stone, and +their legges a crosse like tailors: hauing paid our money, we are permitted +to go into the church: right against the church doore is the graue where +Christ was buried, with a great long stone of white marble ouer it, and +rayled about, the outside of the sepulchre is very foule, by meanes that +euery man scrapes his name and marke vpon it, and is ill kept. + +Within the sepulchre is a partition, and in the further part thereof is a +place like an altar, where they say masse, and at the doore thereof is the +stone whereupon the Angell sate when he sayde to Marie, He is risen, which +stone was also rowled to the doore of the sepulchre. + +The altar stone within the sepulchre is of white marble, the place able to +confeine but foure persons, right ouer the sepulchre is a deuise or +lanterne for light, and ouer that a great louer such as are in England in +ancient houses. There is also the chappell of the sepulchre, and in the +mids thereof is a canopie as it were of a bed, with a great sort of +Estridge egges hanging at it, with tassels of silke and lampes. + +Behinde the sepulchre is a litle chappell for the Chaldeans and Syrians. + +Vpon the right hand comming into the church is the tombe of Baldwine king +of France, and of his sonne: and in the same place the tombe of +Melchisedech. + +There is a chappell also in the same church erected to S. Helen, through +which we go vp to the place where Christ was crucified: the stayres are +fiftie steps high, there are two altars in it: before the high altar is the +place where the crosse stood, the hole whereof is trimmed about with +siluer, and the depth of it is halfe a mans arme deepe: the rent also of +the mountaine is there to be seene in the creuis, wherein a man may put his +arme. + +Vpon the other side of the mount of Caluarie is the place where Abraham +would haue sacrificed his sonne. Where also is a chapell, and the place +paued with stones of diuers colours. + +There is also the house of Annas the high Priest, and the Oliue tree +whereunto Christ was bound to when he was whipt. Also the house of Caiphas, +and by it the prison where Christ was kept, which is but the roome of one +man, and hath no light but the opening of the doore. + +Without Ierusalem in the vally of Iosaphat is a church vnder the ground, +like to the shrouds in Pauls, where the sepulchre of the virgin Mary is: +the staires be very broad, and vpon the staires going downe are two +sepulchres: vpon the left hand lieth Iosaphat, and vpon the right hand +lieth Ioachim and Anna, the father and mother of the virgin Mary. + +Going out of the valley of Iosaphat we came to mount Oliuet, where Christ +praied vnto his father before his death: and there is to be seene (as they +tolde me) the water and blood that fell from the eyes of Christ. A litle +higher vpon the same mount is the place where the Apostles slept, and +watched not. At the foot of the mount is the place where Christ was +imprisoned. + +Vpon the mountaine also is the place where Christ stood when he wept ouer +Ierusalem, and where he ascended into heauen. + +Now hauing seene all these monuments, I with my company set from Ierusalem, +the 20 day of August, and came againe to Ioppa the 22 of the same moneth, +where wee tooke shipping presently for Tripolis, and in foure dayes we came +to Mecina the place where the ships lie that come for Tripolis. + +The citie of Tripolis is a mile and a halfe within the land, so that no +ship can come further then Mecina: so that night I came thither, where I +lay nine daies for passage, and at last we imbarked our selues in a good +ship of Venice called the Naue Ragasona. We entred the ship the second of +September, the fourth we set saile, the seuenth we came to Salina, which is +140 miles from Tripolis: there we stayed foure dayes to take in more +lading, in which meane time I fell sicke of an ague, but recouered againe, +I praise God. + +Salina is a ruinated citie, and was destroyed by the Turke ten yeeres past: +there are in it now but seuenteene persons, women and children. A litle +from this citie of Salina is a salt piece of ground, where the water +groweth salt that raineth vpon it. + +Thursday the 21 of September, we came to Missagh, and there we stayed eight +dayes for our lading: the 18 of September before we came to Missagh, and +within ten miles of the towne, as we lay at an anker, because the winde was +contrary, there came a great boat full of men to boord vs, they made an +excuse to seeke for foure men which (they said) our ship had taken from +theirs about Tripolis, but our captaine would not suffer any of them to +come into vs. + +The next morning they came to vs againe with a great gally, manned with 500 +men at the least, whereupon our captaine sent the boat to them with twelue +men to know their pleasure: they said they sought for 4 men, and therefore +would talke with our maister: so then the maisters mate was sent them, and +him they kept, and went their way; the next morning they came againe with +him, and with three other gallies, and then would needes speake with our +captaine, who went to them in a gowne of crimson damaske, and other very +braue apparell, and fiue or sixe other gentlemen richly apparelled also. +They hauing the Turkes safe conduct, shewed it to the captaine of the +gallies, and laid it vpon his head, charging him to obey it: so with much +adoe, and with the gift of 100 pieces of golde we were quit of them, and +had our man againe. + +That day as aforesaid, we came to Missagh, and there stayed eight dayes, +and at last departed towards Candie, with a scant winde. + +The 11 day of October we were boorded with foure gallies, manned with 1200 +men, which also made a sleeuelesse arrant, and troubled us very much, but +our captaines pasport, and the gift of 100 chekins discharged all. + +The 27 of October we passed by Zante with a merrie winde, the 29 by Corfu, +and the third of Nouember we arriued at Istria, and there we left our great +ship, and tooke small boates to bring vs to Venice. + +The 9 of Nouember I arriued again at Venice in good health, where I staied +nine daies, and the 25 of the same moneth I came to Augusta, and staied +there but one day. + +The 27 of Nouember I set towards Nuremberg where I came the 29, and there +staied till the 9 of December, and was very well interteined of the English +marchants there: and the gouernors of the towne sent me and my company +sixteene gallons of excellent good wine. + +From thence I went to Frankford, from Frankford to Collen, from Collen to +Arnam, from Arnam to Vtreight, from Vtreight to Dort, from Dort to +Antwerpe, from Antwerpe to Flushing, from Flushing to London, where I +arriued vpon Twelue eue in safetie, and gaue thanks to God, hauing finished +my iourney to Ierusalem and home againe, in the space of nine moneths and +fiue dayes. + + * * * * * + +The passeport made by the great Maister of Malta vnto the Englishmen in the + barke Raynolds. 1582. + +Frere Hugo de Loubeux Verdala, Dei gratia sacræ domus hospitalis sancti +Ioannis Hierosolymitani, magister humilis, pauperumque Iesu Christi custos, +vniuersis et singulis principibus ecclesiasticis et secularibus, +archiepiscopis, episcopis, ducibus, marchionibus, baronibus, nobilibus, +capitaneis, vicedominis, præfectis, castellanis, admiralijs, et +quibuscunque triremium vel aliorum nauigiorum patronis, ac ciuitatum +rectoribus, potestatibus ac magistratibus, cæterisque officialibus, et +quibuscunque personis cuiusuis dignitatis, gradus, status et conditionis +fuerint, vbilibet locorum et terrarum constitutis, salutem. + +Notum facimus et in verbo veritatis attestamur, come nel mese di Maggio +prossime passato le nostre galere vennero dal viaggio di Barberia, doue +hauendo mandato per socorrere a vn galionetto de Christiani che hauea dato +trauerso in quelle parti, essendo arriuati sopra questa isola alla parte de +ponente trouarono vno naue Inglesa, sopra cargo de essa il magnifico +Giouanni Keale, et Dauid Filly patrono, volendo la reconoscere che naue +fosse, han visto, che se metteua in ordine per defendersi, dubitando che +dette nostre galere fossero de inimici: et per che vn marinaro riuoltose +contra la volonta de detti magnifico Giouanni Keale et Dauid Filly, habbi +tirato vn tiro di artiglieria verso vna de dette galere, et che non se +amangnaua la vela de la Maiestra secondo la volonta de detti magnifico +Giouanni Keale et Dauid Filly patrono, furimensata detta naue nel presente +general porto di Malta, secondo l'ordine del venerando Generale de dette +galere, et essendo qua, monsignor Inquisitore ha impedita quella per conto +del sancto officio, et si diede parte alla santita di nostro signor +Gregorio papa xiij. A la fin fu licenciata per andarsene al suo viaggio. +Han donque humilmente supplicato detti magnifico Giouanni Keale et Dauid +Filly per nome et parte delli magnifici Edwardo Osborn senatore et Richardo +Staper merchanti Inglesi della nobile citta di Londra, et anco di Tomaso +Wilkinson scriuano, piloti, nocheri, et marinari, gli volessimo dare le +nostre lettere patente et saluo condutto, accioche potranno andare et +ritornare quando gli parera commodo con alcuna roba et mercantia a loro +benuista: si come noi, essendo cosa giusta et che retornera commoda a +nostra relligione et a questi forrestieri, per tenor de li presenti se gli +habiamo concesse con le conditione però infra scritte, videlicet: + +Che ogni volta che detti mercadanti con sopradetta naue o con altra non +porterano mercantie de contrabando, et che constara per fede authentica et +con lettere patente de sanita, poteran liberalmente victualiarse de tutte +le victuarie necessarie, et praticare in questa isola et dominij, et poi +partisene et seguire suo viaggio per doue volessero in leuante o altroue, +come tutti altri vaselli et specialmente de Francesi et aitri nationi, et +die venderi et comprare qual si voglia mercantia a loro benuista. + +Item, che potera portare poluere de canone et di archibuso, salnitro, +carboni di petra rosetta, platine de rame, stagno, acciale, ferro, carisée +commune, tela grossa bianca per far tende de galere, balle de ferro de +calibro, petre de molino fine, arbore et antenne de galere, bastardi et +alteri. Et in conclusione, hauenda visto che loro per il tempo che +restarano qua, si portorno da fideli et Catholici Christiani, et che sua +sanctita habbia trouata bono il saluo condutto del gran Turko a loro +concesso, per il timor della armata Turkesca et di altri vaselli de +inimici, inherendo alla volonta di sua sanctità , et massime per che hauera +de andare et passare per diuersi lochi et tanto lontani come Ingilterra, +Flandra, et tutti patri di ponente, et in altroue, a noi ha parso farle le +presente nostre lettere patente com fidele conuersatore nostro, accio piu +securamente et sensa obstaculo possa andare et ritornare quando li parera +con detta naue o con altre, a loro benuista. Per tanto donque tutti et +ciascun di voi sudetti affectuosamente pregamo, che per qual si voglia de +vostra iurisditione, alla quale detto magnifico Giouanni Keale et Dauid +Filly anome quo supra con la naue et marinari de detti loro principali o +altri caschera, nauigare, passare, et venire sicuramente, alla libera, +sensa alcuno disturbo o altro impedimento li lasciate, et facciate +lasciare, stare, et passare, tornare, et quando li parera partire, talmente +che per amore et contemplatione nostra il detto magnifico Giouanni Keale a +nome quo supra con le naue, marinari, et mercantia non habbi difficulta, +fastidio et ritentione alcuna, anzi se gli dia ogni agiuto et fauore, cosa +degnadi voi, giusta, et a noi gratissima, de recompensaruila con vagule et +maggior seruitio, quando dall'occasione ne saremo rechiesti. Et finalmente +commandammo a tutti et qual si voglia relligiosi et frati de nostra +relligione di qual si voglia conditione, grado et stato che siano, et a +tutti riceuitori et procuratori nostri in tutti et qual si voglia priorati +nostri deputati et deputandi in vertu di santa obedientia, et attuti nostri +vassalli et alla giurisditione di nostri relligione sogetti, che in tale et +per tale tenghino et reputino il detto magnifico Giouanni Keale a nome vt +supra, naue, marinari, et mercantia, sensa permittere, che nel detto suo +viaggio, o in alcun altro Iuogo sia molestato, o in qual si voglia manera +impedito, anzi rutte le cose sue et negotij loro sian da voi agioutati et +continuamente fauoriti. In cuius rei testimonium Bulla nostra magistralis +in cera nigra præsentibus est impressa. Datæ Melitæ in conuentu nostro die +duodecimo Mensis Iulij. 1582. + + +The same in English + +Frier Hugo of Loubeux Verdala, by the grace of God, master of the holy +house, the hospital of S. Iohn at Ierusalem, and an humble keeper of the +poore of Iesus Christ, to all and euery prince ecclesiastical and secular, +archbishops, bishops, Dukes, Marqueses, Barons, Capteines, Vicelords, +Maiors, Castellanes, Admirals, and whatsoeuer patrons of Gallies, or other +greater officers and persons whatsoeuer, of what dignitie, degree, state +and condition soeuer they be, dwelling in all places and landes, greeting. + +We make it knowne, and in the word of truth do witnesse, that in the moneth +of May last past, our gallies came on the voyage from Barbarie, where +hauing commandement to succour a little ship of the Christians which was +driuen ouer into that part being arriued vpon this Iland on the West part +they found one English ship vnder the charge of the worshipfull Iohn Keele, +and Dauid Fillie master: and our men willing to know what ship it was, they +seemed to put themselues in order for their defence, doubting that the said +our gallies were of the enemies, and therefore one mariner attempted +contrary to the will of the worshipfull Iohn Keele, and Dauid Fillie +maister: and had shot off a piece of artillerie against one of the said +gallies, and because she would not strike amaine her sayle, according to +the will of the saide worshipfull Iohn Keele, and Dauid Fillie master, the +said ship was brought backe again vnto the present port of Malta, according +to the order of the reuerend generall of the said gallies: and in being +there maister Inquisitor staid it by authoritie of the holy office, and in +that behalfe by the holinesse of our Lord pope Gregorie the thirteenth, in +the end was licenced to depart on her voyage. They therefore the said +worshipfull Iohn Keele and Dauid Fillie, in the name and behalfe of the +worshipfull master Edward Osborne and Alderman, and Richard Staper, English +marchants of the noble citie of London, haue humbly besought together with +Thomas Wilkinson the purser, pilots, master and mariners, that we would +giue our letters patents, and safe conducts, that they might goe and +returne, when they shall see opportunitie, with their goods and +marchandizes at their pleasure: whereupon the thing seeming vnto vs iust, +and that it might be for the profite of our religion, and of these +strangers, by the tenor of these presents we haue graunted the same to +them: yet, with the conditions hereunder written, viz. + +That euery time the said marchants of the said ship, or with any other, +shall not bring such merchandize as is forbidden, and that sufficient +proofe and letters testimonial it appeareth that they are free from the +infections of the plague, they may vituall themselues with all necessarie +victuals, and traffike with vs, and in this Iland and dominion, and +afterwarde may depart and follow their voyage whither they will into the +Luant or else where, as all other vessels, and especially of France and +other nations do, and sell and buy whatsoeuer marchandize they shal thinke +good. + +Item, that they may bring powder for cannon and harquebush, saltpeeter, +cole of Newcastle, plates of lattin, tinne, steele, yron, common karsies +white, course canuas to make saile for the gallies, balles of yron for +shot, fine milstones, trees and masts for gallies, litle and others, and in +conclusion, hauing seene that they for the time of their abode here, did +behaue themselues like faithfull and catholike Christians, and that his +holines hath allowed the safeconduct of the great Turke to them granted for +feare of the Turkish armie, and other vessels of the enemie, submitting our +selues to the pleasures of his holinesse, and especially because our people +haue occasion to passe by diuers places so farre off, as England, Flanders, +and all parts Westwards, and in other places, we haue vouchsafed to make +these our letters patents, as our faithfull assistant, so as more surely, +and with let they may go and returne when they shall thinke good, with the +said ship or with others at their pleasure. We therefore pray all and euery +of your subiects effectually that by what part soeuer of your iurisdiction, +vnto the which the said worshipful Iohn Keele and Daniel Fillie by name +abouesaid, with the ship and mariners of the said principall place or +other, shall haue accesse, saile, and passe, and come safely with libertie +without any disturbance or other impediment, that you giue leaue, and cause +leaue to be giuen that they may passe, stay and returne, and when they +please, depart, in such sort, that for loue and contention the said +worshipfull Iohn Keele, with the ship and mariners haue no let, hinderance, +or retention, also that you giue all helpe and fauour, a thing worthy of +your iustice, and to vs most acceptable, to be recompenced with equall and +greater seruice, when vpon occasion it shalbe required. + +And finally, we command all, and whatsoeuer religious people, and brothers +of our religion, of whatsoeuer condition, degree, and state they be, and +all other receiuers and procurators, in all and whatsoeuer our priories +deputed, and to be deputed by vertue of the holy obedience, and all our +people, and all that are subiect to the iurisdiction of our religion, that +in, and by the same they hold, and repute the said worshipfull Iohn Keele +in the name as abouesaid, the ship, mariners, and merchandize, without let +in the same their voyage, or in any other place, that they be not molested, +not in any wise hindered, but that in all their causes and businesse they +be of you holpen, and furthered continually. In witnesse whereof, our seale +of gouernment is impressed to these presents in blacke waxe. Giuen at Malta +in our Conuent, the twelfth of the moneth of Iuly, in the yeere 1582. + + * * * * * + +Commission giuen by M. William Harebourne the English Ambassadour, to + Richard Foster, authorising him Consul of the English nation in the parts + of Alepo, Damasco, Aman, Tripolis, Ierusalem, &c. + +I William Harborne, her Maiesties Ambassadour, Ligier with the Grand +Signior, for the affaires of the Leuant doe in her Maiesties name confirme +and appoint Richart Foster Gentleman, my Deputie and Consull in the parts +of Alepo, Damasco, Aman, Tripolis, Ierusalem and all other ports whatsoeuer +in the prouinces of Syria, Palestina, and Iurie, to execute the office of +Consull ouer all our Nation her Maiesties subiects, of what estate or +quality soeuer: giuing him hereby full power to defend, protect, and +maintaine all such her Maiesties subiects as to him shall be obedient, in +all honest and iest causes whatsoeuer: and in like case no lesse power to +imprison, punish, and correct any and all such as he shall finde +disobedient to him in the like causes, euen in such order as I myselfe +might doe by virtue to her Maiesties Commission giuen me the 26 of Nouember +1582, the copie whereof I haue annexed to this present vnder her Maiesties +Seale deliuered me to that vse. Straightly charging and commanding all her +Maiesties subiects in those parts, as they will auoid her Highnesse +displeasure and their owne harmes, to honour his authoritie, and haue due +respect vnto the same, aiding and assisting him there with their persons +and goods in any cause requisit to her Maiesties good seruice and +commoditie of her dominions. In witnesse whereof I haue confirmed and +sealed these these presents at Rapamat my house by Pera ouer against +Constantinople, to 20 of Iune 1583. + + * * * * * + +A letter of directions of the English Ambassadour to M. Richard Forster, + appointed the first English Consull at Tripolis in Syria. + +Cousin Forster, these few words are for your remembrance when it shall +please the Almighty to send you safe arriuall in Tripolis of Syria. When it +shall please God to send you thither, you are to certifie our Nation at +Tripolis of the certaine day of your landing, to the end they both may haue +their house in a readinesse, and also meet you personally at your entrance +to accompany you, being your selfe apparelled in the best manner. The next, +second, or third day, after your comming, giue it out that you be crazed +and not well disposed, by meanes of your trauell at Sea, during which time, +you and those there are most wisely to determine in what manner your are to +present your selfe to the Beglerbi, Cadi, and other officers: who euery of +them are to be presented according to the order accustomed of others +formerly in like office: which after the note of Iohn Blanke, late +Vice-consull of Tripolis for the French, deliuered you heerewith, is very +much: and therefore, if thereof you can saue any thing, I pray you doe it, +as I doubt not but you will. They are to giue you there also another +Ianizarie according as the French hath: whose outward procedings you are to +imitate and follow, in such sort as you be not his inferour, according as +those of our Nation heeretofore with him resident can informe you. Touching +your demeanour after your placing, your [sic--KTH] are wisely to proceede +considering both French and Venetian will haue an enuious eye on you: whome +if they perceiue wise and well aduised, they will feare to offer you any +iniurie. But if they shall perceiue any insufficiencie in you, they will +not omitte any occasion to harme you. They are subtile, malicious, and +disembling people, wherefore you must alwayes haue their doings for +suspected, and warily walke in all your actions: wherein if you call for +Gods diuine assistance, as doth become euery faithfull good Christian, the +same shall in such sort direct you as he shall be glorified, your selfe +preserued, your doings blessed, and your enemies confounded. Which if +contrarywise you omit and forget, your enemies malice shalbe satisfied with +your confusion, which God defend, and for his mercies sake keepe you. +Touching any outlopers of our nation, which may happen to come thither to +traffike, you are not to suffer, but to imprison the chiefe officers, and +suffer the rest not to traffike at any time, and together enter in such +bonds as you thinke meete, that both they shall not deale in the Grand +Signiors dominions, and also not harme, during their voyage, any his +subiects shippes, vessels, or whatsoeuer other, but quitely depart out of +the same country without any harme doing. And touching those there for the +company, your are to defend them according to your priuiledge and such +commandements as you haue had hence, in the best order you may. In all and +euery your actions, at any hand, beware of rashnesse and anger, after both +which repentance followeth. Touching your dealings in their affaires of +marchandise, you are not to deale otherwise then in secret and counsell. +You are carefully to foresee the charge of the house, that the same may be +in all honest measure to the companies profit and your owne health through +moderation in diet, and at the best hand, and in due time to prouide things +needfull to saue what may be: for he that buyeth euery thing when he needed +it, harmeth his owne house, and helpeth the retailer. So as it is, in mine +opinion, wisdome to foresee the buying of all things in their natiue soile, +in due time, and at the first hand euery yeere, as you are to send the +company the particular accounts of the same expenses. Touching your selfe, +your [sic--KTH] are to cause to be employed fifty or threescore ducats, +videlicet, twenty in Sope, and the rest in Spices, whereof the most part to +be Pepper, whereof we spend very much. The Spices are to be prouided by our +friend William Barrat, and the Sope buy you at your first arriuall, for +that this shippe lading the same commodity will cause it to amount in +price. From our mansion Rapamat, the fift of September 1583. + + * * * * * + +A commandement for Chio. + +Vobis, Beg et Cadi et Ermini, qui estis in Chio, significamus: quòd +serenissimæ Reginæ Maiestatis Angliæ orator, qui est in excelsa porta per +literas significauit nobis, quod ex nauibus Anglicis vna nauis venisset ad +portum Chico, et illinc Constantinopolim recto cursu voluisset venire, et +contra priuilegium detenuistis, et non siuistis venire. Hæc prædictus +orator significauit nobis: et petiuit a nobis in hoc negocio hoc mandatum, +vt naues Anglicæ veniant et rediant in nostras ditiones Cæsareas. +Priuilegium datum et concessum est ex parte Serenitatis Cæsareæ nostræ: et +huius priuilegij copia data est sub insigni nostro: Et contra nostrum +priuilegium Cæsareum quod ita agitur, quæ est causa? Quando cum hoc mandato +nostro homines illorum ad vos venerint ex prædicta Anglia, si nauis venerit +ad portum vestrum, et si res et merces ex naue exemerint, et vendiderint, +et tricessimam secundam partem reddiderint, et res quæ manserint +Constantinopolim auferre velint, patiantur: Et si aliquis contra +priuilegium et articulos eius aliquid ageret, non sinatis, nec vos facite: +et impediri non sinatis eos, vt rectà Constantinopolim venientes in suis +negotiationibus sine molestia esse possint. Et quicunque contra hoc +mandatum et priuilegium nostrum aliquid fecerit, nobis significate. Huic +mandato nostro et insigni fidem adhibete. In principio mensis Decembris. + + * * * * * + +A description of the yeerely voyage or pilgrimage of the Mahumitans, Turkes + and Moores vnto Mecca in Arabia. + +Of the Citie of Alexandria. + +Alexandria the most ancient citie in Africa situated by the seaside +containeth seuen miles in circuite, and is enuironed with two walles one +neere to the other with high towers, but the walles within be farre higher +than those without, with a great ditch round about the same: yet is not +this Citie very strong by reason of the great antiquitie, being almost +halfe destroyed and ruinated. The greatnesse of this Citie is such, that if +it were of double habitation, as it is compassed with a double wall, it +might be truely said, that there were two Alexandrias one builded vpon +another, because vnder the foundations of the said City are great +habitations, and incredible huge pillers. True it is, that this part +vnderneath remaineth at this day inhabitable, because of the corrupt aire, +as also for that by time, which consumeth all things, it is greately +ruinated. It might well be sayd, that the founder hereof, as he was worthy +in all his enterprises, so likewise in building hereof he did a worke +worthy of himselfe, naming it after his owne name. This Citie hath one +defect, for it is subiect to an euill ayre, which onely proceedeth of that +hollownesse vnderneath, out of the which issueth infinite moisture: and +that this is true the ayre without doth evidently testifie, which is more +subtile and holesome then that beneath. The waters hereof be salt, by +reason that the soile of it selfe is likewise so. And therefore the +inhabitants, at such time as the riuer Nilus floweth, are accustomed to +open a great ditch, the head wherof extendeth into the said riuer, and from +thence they conueigh the same within halfe a mile of Alexandria, and so +consequently by meanes of conduct-pipes the water commeth vnto the +cesternes of Alexandria, which being full serue the citie from one +inundation to another. Within the citie is a Pyramide mentioned of in +Histories, but not of great importance. Without the citie is La colonna di +Pompeio, or the pillar of Pompey, being of such height and thicknesse, that +it is supposed there is not the like in the whole world besides. Within the +citie there is nothing of importance saue a litle castle which is guarded +with 60 Ianizaries. Alexandria hath three portes, one towardes Rossetto, +another to the land ward, and the third to the sea ward, which is called +Babelbar, without which appeareth a broad Iland called Ghesira in the +Moores tongue, which is not wholy an Iland, because a litle point or corner +thereof toucheth the firme lande, and therefore may be called Peninsula, +that is to say, almost an Iland. Hereupon are builded many houses of the +Iewes, in respect of the aire. This Peninsula is situate betweene two very +good ports, one of them being much more safe then the other, called The old +port, into the which only the vessels of Barbarie, and the sixe Gallies of +the Grand Signior deputeth for the guard of Alexandria doe enter. And this +port hath vpon the right hand at the mouth or enterance thereof a castle of +small importance, and guarded but with fifteene men or thereabouts On the +other side of this Iland is the other called The new port, which name is +not vnfitly giuen vnto it, for that in all mens iudgement in times past +there hath not beene water there, because in the midst of this port, where +the water is very deepe, there are discouered and found great sepulchres +and other buildings, out of the which are dayly digged with engines Iaspar +and Porphyrie stones of great value, of the which great store are sent to +Constantinople for the ornament of the Mesquitas or Turkish Temples, and of +other buildings of the Grand Signior. Into this port enter all such vessels +as traffique to this place. This port hath on ech side a castle, whereof +that vpon the Peninsula is called Faraone, vpon the toppe whereof euery +night there is a light set in a great lanterne for direction of the ships, +and for the guard thereof are appointed 200 Ianizaries: the other on the +other side is but a litle castle kept by 18. men. It is certeine, that this +hauen of Alexandria is one of the chiefest hauens in the world: for hither +come to traffique people of euery Nation, and all sorts of vessels which +goe round about the citie. It is more inhabited by strangers, marchants, +and Christians, then by men of the countrey which are but a few in number. +[Sidenote: Fontecho signifieth an house of trafique, as the Stilyard.] +Within the citie are fiue Fontechi, that is to say, one of the Frenchmen, +where the Consul is resident, and this is the fairest and most commodious +of all the rest. Of the other foure, two belong to the Venetians, one to +the Raguseans, and the fourth to the Genoueses. And all strangers which +come to traffique there, except the Venetians, are vnder the French +Consull. It is also to be vnderstood, that all the Christians dwell within +their Fontechi, and euery euening at the going downe of the sunne, they +which are appointed for that office goe about and shut all the gates of the +saide Fontechi outward, and the Christians shut the same within: and so +likewise they doe on the Friday (which is the Moores and the Turkes +Sabboth) till their deuotions be expired. And by this meanes all parties +are secure and voide of feare: for in so doing the Christians may sleepe +quietly and not feare robbing, and the Moores neede not doubt whiles they +sleepe or pray, that the Christians should make any tumult, as in times +past hath happened. + + +Of the coast of Alexandria. + +[Sidenote: Bichier.] On the side towardes Barbarie along the sea-coast for +a great space there is founde neither hold, nor any thing worthy of +mention: but on the other side towards Syria 13 miles from Alexandria +standeth a litle castle called Bichier kept by fiftie Turkes, which castle +is very olde and weake, and hath a port which in times past was good, but +at this present is vtterly decayed and full of sand, so that the vessels +which come thither dare not come neere the shoare, but ride far off into +the sea. [Sidenote: Rossetto] Fortie miles further is Rossetto, which is a +litle towne without walles, and is situate vpon the banke of Nilus three +miles from the sea, at which place many times they build ships and other +vessels, for gouernement whereof is appointed a Saniacbey, without any +other guard: it is a place of traffique, and the inhabitants are very rich, +but naughtie varlets and traytours. Further downe along the sea-side and +the riuer banke is another litle castle like vnto the abouesayde, and +because the Moores beleeue, that Mecca will in short time be conquered by +the Christians, they holde opinion, that the same being lost shall be +renued in this place of Rossetto, namely, that all their prayers, vowes, +and pilgrimages shall be transported to Rossetto, as the religious order of +Saint Iohn of the Rhodes is translated thence to Malta. Further forwarde +thirtie miles standes another castle of small importance called Brulles, +kept continually by fourtie Turkes, which hath a good and secure port, in +forme like to a very great lake or ponde, wherein is taken great quantitie +of fish, whith they salt, and the marchants of Candie and Cyprus come +thither to lade the same, and it is greatly esteemed, especially of the +Candiots, who hauing great abundance of wine aduenture abroad to seeke +meate fitte for the taste of the sayd wine. Distant from Brulles fiue and +thirtie miles there is anothet castle like vnto the abouesayd kept by an +Aga with fourtie men or thereabout. More within the lande by the riuers +side is Damiata an auncient citie enuironed with walles contayning fiue +miles in circuit, and but of small strength. For the gouernement of this +place is a Sanjaco with all his housholde and no other companie. This citie +is very large, delightfull, and pleasant, abounding with gardens and faire +fountaines. Other fortie miles further is Latma, a castle of very small +importance, and kept as other with fortie Turkes vnder an Aga. In this +place is no port, but a roade very daungerous, and without other +habitation. Passing this place we enter Iudea. But because our intent is to +reason simply of the voyage to Mecca, we will proceede no further this way, +but returning to our first way, let it suffice to say, that from Alexandria +to Cairo are two hundred miles, in which way I finde nothing woorthie of +memorie. + + +Of the mightie Citie of Cairo. + +Cairo containeth in circuit eighteene miles, being so inhabited and +replenished with people, that almost it cannot receiue more; and therefore +they haue begunne to builde newe houses without the citie and about the +walles. In Cairo are people of all Nations, as Christians, Armenians, +Abexins, Turkes, Moores, Iewes, Indians, Medians, Persians, Arabians, and +other sortes of people, which resort thither by reason of the great +traffique. This citie is gouerned by a Basha, which ministreth iustice, +together with the Cadie throughout the whole kingdome. Also there are two +and twentie Saniackes, whose office is onely to ouersee and guarde the +kingdome of euery good respect. There are also seuen thousand Turkes in +pay, to wit, three thousand Ianizaries, and foure thousand horsemen: The +rest of the people in Cairo are for the most part marchants which goe and +come, and the remnant are Moores and other base people. About two miles +from Cairo there is another little Cairo called The olde Cairo, which +containeth in circuit litle more then tenne miles, and the better halfe is +not inhabited, but destroyed, whereof I neede not make any other mention. +The new Cairo answereth euery yeere in tribute to the grand Signior, 600000 +ducates of gold, neat and free of all charges growing on the same, which +money is sent to Constantinople, about the fine of September, by the way of +Aleppo, alwayes by lande, vnder the custodie of three hundred horsemen, and +two hundred Ianizaries footmen. The citie of Cairo is adorned with many +faire Mesquitas rich, great, and of goodly and gorgeous building, among +which are fiue principall. The first is called Morastano, that is to say, +The hospitall, which hath of rent fiue hundred ducats of golde euery day +left vnto it by a king of Damasco from auncient times; which king hauing +conquered Cairo, for the space of fiue daies continually put the people +thereof to the sword, and in the end repenting him of so great +manslaughter, caused this cruelty to cease, and to obtaine remission for +this sinne committed, caused this hospitall to be built, enriching it as is +abouesaid. The second famous monument of Cairo is called Neffisa, of one +Neffisa buried there, who was a Dame of honour, and mooued by lust, yeelded +her body voluntarily without rewarde, to any that required the same, and +sayde she bestowed this almes for the loue of her Prophet Mahomet, and +therefore at this day they adore her, reuerence her, and finally haue +canonized her for a Saint, affirming that shee did many miracles. The third +is called Zauia della Innachari, who was one of the foure Doctors in the +law. The fourth is called Imamsciafij, where is buried Sciafij the second +Doctor of this law. Of the other two Doctors one is buried in Damasco, the +other in Aleppo. The fift and last famous monument is Giamalazar, that is, +the house of Lazarus: and this is the generall Vniuersity of the whole +kingdome of Egypt. [Sidenote: 1566.] In this place Anno 1566 in the moneth +of Ianuary by misfortune of fire were burned nine thousand bookes of great +value, as well for that they were written by hand, as also wrought so +richly with golde, that they were worth 300 and 400 ducats a piece, one +with another. And because it could neuer be knowen yet how this fire +beganne, they haue and doe holde the same for a most sinister augurie, and +an euident and manifest signe of their vtter ruine. The houses of Cairo +without are very faire, and within the greater number richly adorned with +hangings wrought with golde. Euery person which resorteth to this place for +traffiques sake, is bound to pay halfe a duckat, except the gentlemen +Venetians, Siotes, and Rhaguseans, because they are tributarie to the Grand +Signior. [Sidenote: The description of Cairo.] Cairo is distant from the +riuer Nilus a mile and more, being situate on a plaine, saue that on the +one side it hath a faire little hill, on the toppe, whereof stands a faire +castle, but not strong, for that it may be battered on euery side, but very +rich and large, compassed about with faire gardens into the which they +conueigh water for their necessitie out of Nilus, with certaine wheeles and +other like engines. This magnificent citie is adorned with very fruitfull +gardens both pleasant and commodious, with great plenty of pondes to water +the same. Notwithstanding the great pleasures of Cairo are in the moneth of +August, when by meanes of the great raine in Ethiopia the riuer Nilus +ouerfloweth apd watereth all the countrey, and then they open the mouth of +a great ditch, which extendeth into the riuer, and passeth through the +midst of the citie, and entring there are innumerable barkes rowing too and +fro laden with gallant girles and beautifull dames, which with singing, +eating, drinking and feasting, take their solace. The women of this +countrey are most beautifull, and goe in rich attire bedeked with gold, +pretious stones, and iewels of great value, but chiefely perfumed with +odours, and are very libidinous, and the men likewise, but foule and hard +fauoured. The soile is very fertile and abundant, the flesh fat which they +sell without bones, their candles they make of the marowe of cattell, +because the Moores eate the tallow. They vse also certaine litle furnaces +made of purpose, vnder the which they make fire, putting into the furnace +foure or fiue hundred egges, and the said fire they nourish by litle and +litle, vntill the chickens be hatched, which after they be hatched, and +become somewhat bigger, they sell them by measure in such sort, as we sell +and measure nuts and chestnuts and such like. + + +Of certaine notable monuments without the citie of Cairo. + +Without the Citie, sixe miles higher into the land, are to be seene neere +vnto the riuer diuerse Piramides, among which are three marueilous great, +and very artificially wrought. Out of one of these are dayly digged the +bodies of auncient men, not rotten, but all whole, the cause whereof is the +qualitie of the Egyptian soile, which will not consume the flesh of man, +but rather dry and harden the same, and so alwayes conserueth it. And these +dead bodies are the Mummie which the Phisitians and Apothecaries doe +against our willes make vs to swallow. Also by digging in these Pyramides +oftentimes are found certaine Idoles or Images of gold, siluer, and other +mettall, but vnder the other piramides the bodies are not taken vp so whole +as in this, but there are found legges and armes comparable to the limmes +of giants. Neare to these piramides appeareth out of the sand a great head +of stone somewhat like marble, which is discouered so farre as the necke +ioyneth with the shoulders, being all whole, sauing that it wanteth a +little tippe of the nose. The necke of this head contayneth in circuit +about sixe and thirty foot, so that it may be according to the necke +considered, what greatnesse the head is of. The riuer Nilus is a mile +broad, wherein are very many great Croccodiles from Cairo vpward, but lower +than Cairo passeth no such creature: and this, they say, is by reason of an +inchantment made long since which hindereth their passage for comming any +lower then Cairo. Moreouer of these creatures there are sometimes found +some of an incredible bignesse, that is to say, of fourtie foot about. The +males haue their members like to a man, and the females like to a woman. +These monsters oftentimes issue out of the water to feede, and finding any +small beasts, as sheepe, lambes, goates, or other like, doe great harme. +And whiles they are foorth of the water, if they happen at vnawares vpon +any man, woman or childe, whom they can ouercome, they spare not their +liues. In the yeere of our Lord one thousand fiue hundred and sixtie it +happened, that certaine poore Christians trauelling by Cairo towardes the +countrey of Prete Ianni to rescue certaine slaues, were guided by a Chaus, +and iourneyed alongst the banke of the said riuer. The Chaus remained +lingering alone behinde to make his prayers (as their custome is) at a +place called Tana, whom being busie in his double deuotion one of these +Crocodiles ceazed by the shoulders, and drew him vnder water, so that he +was neuer after seene. And for this cause they haue made in sundry places +certaine hedges as bankes within the water, so that betwixt the hedge and +banke of the riuer there remaineth so much water, that the women washing +may take water without danger at their pleasure. This countrey is so +fruitfull, that it causeth the women as other creatures to bring foorth +one, two, and oft-times three at a birth. Fiue miles southwarde of Cairo is +a place called Matarea, where the balme is refined: and therefore some will +say, that the trees which beare the balme growe in the said place, wherein +they are deceiued: for the sayde trees growe two dayes iourney from Mecca, +in a place called Bedrihone, which yeeldeth balme in great plenty, but +saluage, wilde, and without vertue, and therefore the Moores carying the +same within litle chests from Bedrihone to Matarea, where the trees being +replanted (be it by vertue of the soyle, or the water, aire, or any other +thing whatsoeuer) it sufficeth that heare they beare the true balme and +licour so much in these dayes esteemed of. In this place of Matarea there +are certaine little houses, with most goodly gardens, and a chappell of +antiquity, where the very Moores themselues affirme, that the mother of the +blessed Christ fleeing from the fury of wicked Herode there saued her selfe +with the childe, wherein that saying of the Prophet was fulfilled, Ex +Ægypto vocaui fillium meum. The which Chappell in the yeare of our Lorde +one thousand fiue hundred and foure, the Magnifico Daniel Barbaro first +Consull of that place went to visite, and caused it to be renued and +reedified, so that in these dayes there resort thither many Christians, who +oftentimes bring with them a Priest, to say masse there. Also about an +Harque-buz-shotte from Matarea is a spire of great height like to that at +Rome, and more beautifull to beholde. Neere vnto the olde Cairo are yet +twelue storehouses of great antiquitie, but now very much decayed, and +these till late dayes serued to keepe corne for behoofe of the kingdome, +concerning which many are of opinion, that the founder hereof was Ioseph +the sonne of Iacob, for consideration of the seuen deare yeares. [Sidenote: +Olde Thebes.] Also passing higher vp by the banke of Nilus, there is to bee +seene a fayre Citie ouerflowed with water, the which at such time as Nilus +floweth lyeth vnder water, but when the water returneth to the marke, there +plainely appeare princely palaces, and stately pillars, being of some +called Thebes, where they say that Pharao was resident. Moroeuer three +dayes iourney higher vp are two great images of speckled marble, all whole, +and somewhat sunke into the earth, being things wonderfull to consider of, +for the nose of either is two spannes and a halfe long, and the space from +one eare to the other conteineth tenne spannes, the bodies being +correspondent to their heads, and grauen in excellent proportion, so that +they are shapes of maruellous hugenesse, and these they call The wife, and +The daughter of Pharao. + + +Of the patriarke of Greece. + +In Cairo are two Patriarkes, one of the Greekes, and another of the +Iacobites. The Greeke Patriarke called Gioechni, being about the age of one +hundred and thirteene yeeres, was a very good and holy man. They say, that +when Soldan Gauri of Egypt reigned, there was done this miracle following; +this good patriarke being enuied at by the Iewes of the countrey, for none +other cause, but for his good workes, and holy life, it happened (I say) +that being in disputation with certaine of the Hebrewes in presence of the +Sultan, and reasoning of their lawe and faith, it was sayd vnto him by one +of these Miscreants: sith thou beleeuest in the faith of Christ, take and +drinke this potion which I will giue thee; and if thy Christ be true +Messias and true God, he will (sayd he) deliuer thee from daunger. To whom +the auncient patriarke answered, that he was content: whereupon that cursed +Iewe brought him a cuppe of the most venemous and deadly poyson that could +be found, which the holy Patriarke hauing perceiued, said: In the name of +the father, of the sonne, and of the holy Ghost: and hauing so sayde he +dranke it quite vp; which done, he tooke a droppe of pure water, putting it +into that very cup, and gaue it vnto the Iewe, saying vnto him, I in the +name of my Christe haue drunke thy poyson, and therefore in the name of thy +expected Messias drinke this water of mine within thine owne cuppe. +Whereupon the Iewe tooke the cup out of the hand of the Patriarke, and +hauing drunke the water, within halfe an houre burst a sunder. And the +Patriarke had none other hurt, saue that he became somewhat pale in sight, +and so remained euer after. And this miracle (which meriteth to be called +no lesse) was done to the great commendation of the holy Patriarke in the +presence of a thousand persons, and namely of the Soldan of Egypt: who +seeing the despight of the Iewes, vnto their owne cost and confusion +compelled them to make the conduct, which with so many engines commeth into +the castle from Nilus aboue mentioned. And this triumphant Patriarke not +long since was aliue, and in perfect health, which God continue long time. + + +Of the preparation of the Carouan to goe to Mecca. + +As touching the Carouan which goeth to Mecca, it is to be vnderstoode, that +the Mahometans obserue a kinde of lent continuing one whole moone, and +being a moueable ceremonie, which sometimes falleth high, sometimes lowe in +the yeere called in their tongue Ramazan, and their feast is called Bairam. +During this time of lent all they which intende to goe vnto Mecca resort +vnto Cairo, because that twentie dayes after the feast the Carouan is +readie to depart on the voyage: and thither resort a great multitude of +people from Asia, Grecia, and Barbaria to goe on this voyage, some mooued +by deuotion, and some for traffiques sake, and some to passe away the time. +Nowe, within fewe dayes after the feast they which goe on the voyage depart +out of the citie two leagues vnto a place called Birca, where they expect +the Captaine of the Carouan. This place hath a great pond caused by the +inundation of Nilus, and so made that the camels and other beastes may +drinke therein: whereof, namely, of Mules, Camels, and Dromedaries there +are at least fortie thousand, and the persons which followe the Carouan +euerie yeere are about fiftie thousand, fewe more or lesse, according to +the times. Moreouer euery three yeeres they renue the Captaine of the +Carouan, called in the Arabian tongue Amarilla Haggi, that is, the Captaine +of the Pilgrimes, to whom the Grand Signior giueth euery voyage eighteene +purses, conteyning each of them sixe hundred twentie and fiue ducates of +golde, and these be for the behoofe of the Carouan, and also to doe almes +vnto the needfull pilgrimes. This Captaine, besides other seruingmen which +follow him, hath also foure Chausi to serue him. Likewise he hath with him +for the securitie of the Carouan foure hundred souldiers, to wit, two +hundred Spachi or horsemen mounted on Dromedaries, and two hundred +Ianizaries riding vpon Camels. The Chausi and the Spachi are at the charge +of the Captaine, but the Ianizaries not so, for their prouision is made +them from Cairo. The Spachi weare caps or bonnets like to the caps of +Sergeants, but the Ianizaries after another sort, with a lappe falling +downe behinde like a French-hoode, and hauing before a great piece of +wrought siluer on their heads. The charge of these is to cause the Carouan +to march in good array when neede requireth; these are not at the +commaundement of any but of the Captaine of the Carouan. Moreouer the +Captaine hath for his guide eight pilots, the office of whom is alwayes +stable and firme from heire to heire, and these goe before guiding the +Carouan, and shewing the way, as being well experienced in the place, and +in the night they gouerne them as the mariners, by the starre. [Sidenote: +Pieces of dry wood in stead of torches.] These also vse to sende before +foure or fiue men carying pieces of dry wood which giue light, because they +should not goe out of the way, and if at any time through their ill hap +they wander astray out of the way, they are caste downe and beaten with so +many bastonadoes vpon the soles of their feete, as serue them for a +perpetuall remembrance. The Captaine of the Carouan hath his Lieutenant +accompanied continually with fifteene Spachi, and he hath the charge to set +the Carouan in order, and to cause them to depart on their iourney when +neede requireth: and during the voyage their office is some whiles to goe +before with the forewarde, sometimes to come behinde with the rereward, +sometimes to march on the one side, and sometimes on the other, to spy, +that the coast be cleare. The Carouan carrieth with it sixe pieces of +ordinance drawen by 12 camels, which serue to terrifie the Arabians, as +also to make triumph at Mecca, and other places. The marchants which +followe the Carouan, some carry for marchandise cloth of silke, some +Corall, some tinne, others wheat, rise, and all sorts of graine. Some sell +by the way, some at Mecca, so that euery one bringeth something to gaine +by, because all marchandise that goeth by land payeth no custome, but that +which goeth by sea is bound to pay tenne in the hundred. + + +The beginning of the voyage. + +The feast before the Carouan setteth forth, the Captaine with all his +retinue and officers resort vnto the castle of Cairo before the Basha, +which giueth vnto euery man a garment, and that of the Captaine is wrought +with golde, and the others are serued according to their degree. Moreouer +he deliuereth vnto him the Chisua Talnabi, which signifieth in the Arabian +tongue, The garment of the Prophet: this vesture is of silke, wrought in +the midst with letters of golde, which signifie: La illa ill'alla Mahumet +Resullala: that is to say, There are no gods but God, and his ambassadour +Mahumet. This garment is made of purpose to couer from top to botome a +litle house in Mecca standing in the midst of the Mesquita, the which house +(they say) was builded by Abraham or by his sonne Ismael. After this he +deliuereth to him a gate made of purpose for the foresaid house of Abraham +wrought all with fine golde, and being of excellent workmanship, and it is +a thing of great value. Besides, he deliuereth vnto him a couering of +greene veluet made in maner of a pyramis, about nine palmes high, and +artificially wrought with most fine golde, and this is to couer the tombe +of their prophet within Medina, which tombe is built in manner of a +pyramis: and besides that couering there are brought many others of golde +and silke, for the ornament of the sayde tombe. Which things being +consigned, the Basha departeth not from his place; but the Captaine of the +Carouan taketh his leaue with all his officers and souldiers, and departeth +accompanied with all the people of Cairo orderly in manner of a procession, +with singing, shouting and a thousand other ceremonies too long to recite. +From the castle they goe to a gate of the citie called Bab-Nassera, without +the which standes a Mosquita, and therein they lay vp the sayd vestures +very well kept and guarded. And of this ceremony they make so great +account, that the world commeth to see this sight, yea the women great with +childe, and others with children in their armes, neither is it lawfull for +any man to forbid his wife the going to this feast, for that in so doing +the wife may separate her selfe from her husband, and may lie with any +other man, in regard of so great a trespasse. Now this procession +proceeding from the castle towardes the Mosquita, the Camels which bring +the vestures are all adorned with cloth of golde, with many little belles, +and passing along the streete you may see the multitude casting vpon the +said vesture thousands of beautifull flowers of diuers colours, and sweete +water, others bringing towels and fine cloth touch the same, which euer +after they keepe as reliques with great reuerence. Afterward hauing left +the vesture in the Mosquita, as is aforesaid, they returne againe into the +citie, where they remaine the space of 20 dayes, and then the captaine +departeth with his company, and taking the vestures out of the Mosquita, +carieth the same to the foresaid place of Birca, where the Captaine hauing +pitched his tent with the standard of the grand Signior ouer the gate, and +the other principall tents standing about his, stayeth there some tenne +dayes and no more: in which time all those resort thither that meane to +follow the Carouan in this voyage to Mecca. Where you shall see certaine +women which intend to goe on this voiage accompanied with their parents and +friends mounted vpon Camels, adorned with so many tryfles, tassels, and +knots, that in beholding the same a man cannot refraine from laughter. The +last night before their departure they make great feasting and triumph +within the Carouan, with castles and other infinite deuises of fireworke, +the Ianizaries alwayes standing round about the tent of the Captaine with +such shouting and ioy, that on euery side the earth resoundeth, and this +night they discharge all their ordinance, foure or sixe times, and after at +the breake of the day vpon the sound of a trumpet they march forward on +their way. + + +What times the Carouan trauelleth, and when it resteth. + +It is to be noted, that from Cairo to Mecca they make 40 dayes iourney or +thereabout, and the same great dayes iourneies. For the custome of the +Carouan is to trauell much and rest little, and ordinarily they iourney in +this maner: They trauell from two a clock in the morning vntill the sunne +rising, then hauing rested till noone, they set forward, and so continue +till night, and then also rest againe, as is abouesaid, till two of the +clocke; and this order they obserue vntill the end of the voiage, neuer +changing the same, except in some places, whereof we will hereafter speake, +where for respect of water they rest sometimes a day and an halfe, and this +they obserue to refresh themselues, otherwise both man and beast would die. + + +In what order the Carouan trauelleth. + +The maner and order which the Carouan obserueth in marching is this. It +goeth diuided into three parts, to wit, the foreward, the maine battell, +and the rereward. In the foreward go the 8 Pilots before with a Chaus, +which hath foure knaues, and ech knaue carrieth a sinew of a bul, to the +end that if occasion requireth, the bastonado may be giuen to such as +deserue the same. These knaues cast offendours downe, turning vp the soles +of their feete made fast to a staffe, giuing them a perpetuall remembrance +for them and the beholders. This Chaus is as the Captaine of the foreward, +which commandeth lights to be carried before when they trauell in the +night. Also there go in this foreward 6 Santones with red turbants vpon +their heads, and these eat and ride at the cost of the Captaine of the +Carouan. These Santones when the Carouan arriueth at any good lodging, +suddenly after they haue escried the place, cry with an horrible voyce +saying, good cheare, good cheare, we are neere to the wished lodging. For +which good newes the chiefe of the company bestow their beneuolence vpon +them. In this foreward goeth very neere the third part of the people of the +Carouan, behind whom go alwayes 25 Spachi armed with swords, bowes and +arrowes to defend them from thieues. Next vnto the foreward, within a +quarter of a mile, followeth the maine battell, and before the same are +drawen the sayd sixe pieces of ordinance, with their gunners, and fifteene +Spachi Archers. And next vnto these commeth the chiefe physicion, who is an +olde man of authoritie, hauing with him many medicines, oyntments, salues, +and other like refreshings for the sicke, hauing also camels with him for +the sicke to ride on, which haue no horse nor beast. Next vnto him goeth +one Camell alone, the fairest that can be found: for with great industrie +is sought the greatest and fairest which may be found within the dominions +of the Grand Signior. This camell also is decked with cloth of golde and +silke, and carieth a little chest made of pure Legmame made in likenesse of +the arke of the olde Testament: but, as is abouesayd, made of pure Legmame, +without golde or any other thing of cost. Within this chest is the Alcoran +all written with great letters of golde, bound betweene two tables of +massie golde, and the chest during their voyage is couered with Silke, but +at their entring into Mecca it is all couered with cloth of golde adorned +with iewels, and the like at the enterance into Medina. The Camell +aforesayd which carrieth the chest, is compassed about with many Arabian +singers and musicians, alwayes singing and playing vpon instruments. After +this folow fiftene other most faire Camels, euery one carying one of the +abouesayd vestures, being couered from toppe to toe with silke. Behind +these goe twentie other Camels which carrie the money, apparell, and +prouision of the Amir el Cheggi captaine of the Carouan. After foloweth the +royall Standard of the Grand Signior, accompanied continually with the +musicians of the captaine, and fiue and twentie Spachi archers, with a +Chaus before them, and about these marueilous things goe all the people and +Camels which follow the Carouan. Behind these, lesse then a mile, foloweth +the rereward, whereof the greater part are pilgrimes: the occasion whereof +is, for that the merchants seeke alwayes to be in the foreward for the +securitie of their goods, but the pilgrimes which haue litle to loose care +not though they come behind. Behind these alwayes goe fiue and twentie +other Spachi well armed with another Chaus their captaine, and fortie +Arabians all Archers for guard of the rereward. And because the Carouan +goeth alwayes along the red sea banke, which in going forth they haue on +their right hand, therfore the two hundred Ianissaries parted into three +companies goe vpon their left hand well armed and mounted vpon Camels bound +one to another, for vpon that side is all the danger of thieues, and on the +other no danger at all, the captaine of the Carouan alwayes going about his +people, sometimes on the one side, and sometimes on the other, neuer +keeping any firme place, being continually accompanied with a Chaus and 25. +Spachi, armed and mounted vpon Dromedaries, and 8. musicians with violes in +their handes, which cease not sounding till the captaine take his rest, +vpon whom they attend, till such time as he entreth his pauillion, and then +licencing all his attendants and folowers to depart, they goe each man to +their lodging. + + +Of things notable which are seene in this voyage by the way. + +Because in the way there are not many things found woorthy memorie, for +that the Carouan seldome resteth in places of habitation, of which in the +way there are but fewe, yea rather the Carouan resteth altogether in the +field: therefore in this our voyage wee will onely make mention of certaine +Castles found in the way, which bee these, namely Agerut, Nachel, Acba, +Biritem, Muel and Ezlem. Of which fiue the two first are kept of Moores, +and the other three of Turkes, and for guard they haue eight men or tenne +at the most in euery Castle, with foure or fiue Smerigli, which serue to +keepe the water from the Arabians, so that the Carouan comming thither may +haue wherewithall to refresh it selfe. Agerut is distant from Suez a port +of the red sea eight miles, where are alwayes resident fiue and twentie +gallies of the Grand Signior for the keeping of that Sea. Nachel is distant +from the Sea a dayes iourney. The walles of Acba are founded vpon the red +Sea banke. Biritem and Muel likewise are dashed by the waues of the Sea. +Ezlem is distant from thence aboue a dayes iourney. These fiue Castles +abouesayd are not of force altogether to defend themselues agaynst an +hundred men. The Carouan departing from Birca vntill Agerut findeth no +water by the way to drinke, neither from Agerut till Nachel, nor from +Nachel till Acba, but betweene Acba and Biritem are found two waters, one +called Agiam el Cassap, and the other Magarraxiaibi, that is to say, the +riuer of Iethro the father in lawe of Moses, for this is the place +mentioned in the second chapter of Exodus, whither it is sayd that Moses +fledde from the anger of Pharao, who would haue killed him, because hee had +slaine the Ægyptian, which fought with the Hebrew, in which place stoode +the citie of Midian; and there are yet the pondes, neere vnto the which +Moses sate downe. And from that place forward they finde more store of +water by the way, and in more places, though not so good. It is also to bee +noted, that in this voiage it is needfull and an vsuall thing, that the +captaine put his hand to his purse, in these places, and bestow presents, +garments, and turbants vpon certaine of the chiefe of the Arabians, to the +ende they may giue him and his Carouan, free passage: who also promise, +that their followers likewise shall doe no damage to the Carouan, and bind +themselues to accomplish the same, promising also by worde of mouth, that +if the Carouan bee robbed, they will make restitution of such things as are +stollen: but notwithstanding the Carouan is by them oftentimes damnified, +and those which are robbed haue no other restitution at the Arabians handes +then the shewing of them a paire of heeles, flying into such places as it +is impossible to finde them. Nowe the Carouan continuing her accustomed +iourneys, and hauing passed the abouesayd castles, and others not woorthie +mention, at length commeth to a place called Iehbir, which is the beginning +and confine of the state and realme of Serifo the king of Mecca: where, at +their approching issueth out to meete them the gouernour of the land, with +all his people to receiue the Carouan, with such shouting and triumph, as +is impossible to expresse, where they staie one whole day. This place +aboundeth with fresh and cleare waters, which with streames fall downe from +the high mountaines. Moreouer, in this place are great store of dates, and +flesh great store and good cheape, and especially laced muttons which +willingly fall downe, and here the weary pilgrimes haue cummoditie to +refresh themselues, saying, that this wicked fact purgeth them from a +multitude of sinnes, and besides increaseth deuotion to prosecute the +voiage. Touching the building in these places, it is to bee iudged by the +houses halfe ruinated, that it hath bene a magnificent citie: but because +it was in times past inhabited more with thieues then true men, it was +therefore altogether destroyed by Soldan Gauri king of Ægypt, who going on +pilgrimage vnto Mecca, and passing by this place, there was by the +inhabitants hereof some iniurie done vnto his Carauan, which he +vnderstandeng of, dissembled till his returne from Mecca, and then caused +it to bee burned and destroyed in pitifull sort for reuenge of the iniurie +done vnto the Carouan. The Carouan hauing rested and being refreshed as is +abouesayd, the next day departed on the way, and the first place they +arriue at woorthy mention is called Bedrihonem, in which place (as is +aforesayd) grow those little shrubbes whereout Balme issueth. And before +the Carouan arriueth at this place a mile from the citie is a large and +great field enuironed about with most high and huge mountaines. And in this +field, according to the Alcoran, their prophet Mahomet had a most fierce +and cruel battell giuen by the Christians of the countrey and other people +which set themselues agaynst them, and withstood his opinion, so that hee +was ouercome and vanquished of the Christians, and almost halfe of his +people slaine in the battell. Whereupon the Phrophet seeing himselfe in +such extremitie, fell to his prayers, and they say, that God hauing +compassion vpon his deare friend and prophet, heard him, and sent him +infinite thousands of angels, wherewith returning to the battell, they +conquered and ouercame the conquerour. And therefore in memorie of this +victorie, the Carouan lodgeth euery yeere one night in this place, making +great bonefires with great mirth. And they say that as yet there is heard +vpon the mountaines a litle drumme, which while the Carouan passeth, neuer +ceaseth sounding. And they say further, that the sayd drumme is sounded by +the angels in signe of that great victory graunted of God to their prophet. +Also the Mahumetan writings affirme, that after the ende of the sayd +battell, the prophet commaunded certaine of his people to goe and burie all +the Mahumetans which were dead in the fields, who going, knew not the one +from the other, because as yet they vsed not circumcision, so they returned +vnto him, answering, that they had bene to doe his commaundement, but they +knew not the Musulmans from the Christians. To whom the prophet answered, +saying. Turne againe, and all those which you shall finde with their faces +downeward, leaue them, because all they are misbeleeuers: and the other +which you shall finde with their faces turned vpward, them burie, for they +are the true Musulmani, and so his commaundement was done. + +The next morning by Sunne rising, the Carouan arriueth at Bedrihomen, in +which place euery man washeth himselfe from toppe to toe, as well men as +women, and leauing off their apparell, hauing each a cloth about their +priuities, called in their tongue Photah, and another white one vpon their +shoulders, all which can goe to Mecca in this habite, doe so, and are +thought to merite more then the other, but they which cannot doe so make a +vowe to sacrifice a Ramme at the mountaine of pardons; and after they bee +washed, it is not lawfull for any man or women, to kill either flea or +lowse with their handes, neither yet to take them with their nailes, vntill +they haue accomplished their vowed orations in the mountaine of pardons +abouesayd: and therefore they cary with them certaine stickes made of +purpose in maner of a File, called in their language Arca, Cassah Guch, +with which they grate their shoulders. And so the Carouan marching, commeth +within two miles of Mecca, where they rest that night. In the morning at +the breake of day, with all pompe possible they set forward toward Mecca, +and drawing neere thereunto, the Seripho issueth foorth of the citie with +his guard, accompanied with an infinite number of people, shouting, and +making great triumph. And being come out of the citie a boweshoote into a +faire field, where a great multitude of tents are pitched, and in the +middest the pauillion of the captaine, who meeting with the Serifo, after +salutations on each side, they light from their horses and enter the +pauillion, where the king of Mecca depriueth himselfe of all authoritie and +power, and committeth the same to the aboue named captaine, giuing him full +licence and authoritie to commaund, gouerne, and minister Justice during +his aboad in Mecca with his company, and on the other side the captaine to +requite this liberalitie vsed toward him by the Serifo giueth him a garment +of cloth of gold of great value, with certaine iewels and other like +things. After this, sitting downe together vpon carpets and hides they eate +together, and rising from thence with certaine of the chiefest, and taking +with them the gate abouesayd, they goe directly to the Mosxuita, attended +on but with a fewe, and being entered, they cause the olde to be pulled +downe, and put the newe couerture vpon the house of Abraham, and the olde +vesture is the eunuchs which serue in the sayde Mosquita, who after sell it +vnto the pilgrimes at foure or fiue serafines the pike: and happy doth that +man thinke himselfe, which can get neuer so litle a piece thereof, to +conserue euer after as a most holy relique: and they say, that putting the +same vnder the head of a man at the houre of his death, through vertue +thereof all his sinnes are forgiuen. Also they take away the old doore, +setting in the place the new doore, and the old by custome they giue vnto +the Serifo. After hauing made their praiers with certaine ordinarie and +woonted ceremonies, the Serifo rematneth in the citie, and the captaine of +the pilgrimage returneth vnto his pauillion. + + +Of the Serifo the king of Mecca. + +The Serifo is descended of the prophet Mahomet by Fatma daughter of that +good prophet, and Alli husband to her, and sonne in lawe to Mahumet, who +had no issue male, saue this stocke of the Serifo, to the eldest sonne +whereof the realme commeth by succession. This realme hath of reuenues +royall, euery yeere halfe a million of golde, or litle more: and all such +as are of the prophets kinred, or descended of that blood (which are almost +innumerable) are called Emyri, that is to say, lordes. These all goe +clothed in greene, or at the least haue their turbant greene, to bee knowen +from the other. Neither is it permitted that any of those Christians which +dwell or traffique in their Countrey goe clothed in greene, neither may +they haue any thing of green about them: for they say it is not lawfull for +misbeleeuers to weare that colour, wherein that great friend the prophet of +God Mahomet was woont to be apparelled. + + +Of the citie of Mecca. + +The Citie of Mecca in the Arabian tongue is called Macca, that is to say, +an habitation. This citie is inuironed about with exceeding high and barren +mountaines, and in the plaine betweene the sayde mountaines and the citie +are many pleasant gardens, where groweth great abundaunce of figges, +grapes, apples, and melons. There is also great abundance of good water and +fleshe, but not of bread. This citie hath no walles about it, and +containeth in circuite fiue miles. The houses are very handsome and +commodious, and are built like to the houses in Italie. The palace of the +Serifo is sumptuous and gorgeously adorned. The women of the place are +courteous, iocund, and louely, faire, with alluring eyes, being hote and +libidinous, and the most of them naughtie packes. The men of this place are +giuen to that abhominable, cursed, and opprobrious vice, whereof both men +and women make but small account by reason of the pond Zun Zun, wherein +hauing washed themselues, their opinion is, that although like the dog they +returne to their vomite, yet they are clensed from all sinne whatsoeuer, of +which sin we will hereafter more largely discourse. In the midst of the +city is the great Mosquita, with the house of Abraham standing in the very +middest thereof, which Mosquita was built in the time when their prophet +liued. It is foure square, and so great, that it containeth two miles in +circuit, that is to say, halfe a mile each side. Also it is made in maner +of a cloister, for that in the midst thereof separate from the rest, is the +abouesayd house of Abraham, also the galleries round about are in maner of +4. streetes, and the partitions which diuide the one street from the other +are pillars, whereof some are of marble, and others of lime and stone. This +famous and sumptuous Mosquita hath 99. gates, and 5. steeples, from whence +the Talismani call the people to the Mosquita. And the pilgrimes which are +not prouided of tents, resort hither, and for more deuotion the men and +women lie together aloft and beneath, one vpon another, so that their house +of praier becommeth worse sometimes then a den of thieues. + + +Of the house of Abraham. + +The house of Abraham is also foure square, and made of speckled stone, 20. +paces high, and 40 in circuit. And vpon one side of this house within the +wall, there is a stone of a span long, and halfe a span broad, which stone +(as they say) before this house was builded, fell downe from heauen, at the +fall whereof was heard a voyce, that wheresoeuer this stone fell, there +should be built the house of God, wherein God will heare sinners. Moreouer, +they say that when this stone fell from heauen, it was not blacke as now, +but as white as the whitest snow, and by reason it hath bene so oft kissed +by sinners, it is therewith become blacke: for all the pilgrimes are bound +to kisse this stone, otherwise they cary their sinnes home with them again. +The entrance into this house is very small, made in maner of a window, and +as high from the ground as a man can reach, so that it is painful to enter. +This house hath without 31. pillars of brasse, set vpon cubike or square +stones being red and greene, the which pillars sustaine not ought els saue +a threed of copper, which reacheth from one to another, whereunto are +fastened many burning lampes. These pillars of brasse were caused to be +made by Sultan Soliman grandfather to Sultan Amurath now Emperor. After +this, hauing entred with the difficultie abouesayd, there stand at the +entrance two pillars of marble, to wit, on each side one. In the midst +there are three of Aloes-wood not very thicke, and couered with tiles of +India 1000. colours which serue to vnderproppe the Terratza. It is so +darke, that they can hardly see within for want of light, not without an +euill smell. Without the gate fiue pases is the abouesayd pond Zun Zun, +which is that blessed pond that the angell of the Lord shewed vnto Agar +whiles she went seeking water for her sonne Ismael to drinke. + + +Of the ceremonies of the pilgrimes. + +In the beginning we haue sayd how the Mahumetans haue two feasts in the +yeere. The one they call Pascha di Ramazaco, that is to say, The feast of +fasting, and this feast of fasting is holden thirtie dayes after the feast, +wherein the Carouan trauelleth to Mecca. The other is called the feast of +the Ramme, wherin all they which are of abilitie are bound to sacrifice a +Ramme, and this they call Bine Bairam, that is to say, The great feast. And +as the Carouan departeth from Cairo, thirtie dayes after the little feast, +so likewise they come hither fiue or sixe dayes before the great feast, to +the ende the pilgrimes may haue time before the feast to finish their rites +and ceremonies, which are these. Departing from the Carouan, and being +guided by such as are experienced in the way, they goe vnto the citie +twentie or thirtie in a company as they thinke good, walking through a +streete which ascendeth by litle and litle till they come vnto a certaine +gate, whereupon is written on each side in marble stone, Babel Salema, +which in the Arabian tongue signifieth, the gate of health. And from this +place is descried the great Mosquita, which enuironeth the house of +Abraham, which being descried, they reuerently salute twise, saying, Salem +Alech Iara sul Alia, that is to say, Peace to thee, ambassadour of God. +This salutation being ended, proceeding on the way, they finde an arche +vpon their right hand, whereon they ascend fiue steps, vpon the which is a +great voyd place made of stone: after, descending other fiue steps, and +proceeding the space of a flight-shoot, they finde another arche like vnto +the first, and this way from the one arche to the other they go and come 7. +times, saying alwaies some of their prayers, which (they say) the afflicted +Agar sayd, whiles she sought and found not water for her sonne Ismael to +drinke. This ceremonie being ended, the pilgrimes enter into the Mosquita, +and drawing neere vnto the house of Abraham, they goe round about it other +seuen times, alwayes saying: This is the house of God, and of his seruant +Abraham: This done they goe to kisse the black stone abouesayd. After they +go vnto the pond Zun Zun, and in their apparell as they be, they wash +themselues from head to foote, saying, Tobah Allah, Tobah Allah, that is to +say, Pardon Lord, Pardon Lord, drinking also of that waier, which is both +mudie, filthie, and of an ill sauour, and in this wise washed and watered, +euery one returneth to his place of abode, and these ceremonies euery one +is bound to doe once at the least. But those which haue a mind to ouergoe +their fellowes, and to goe into paradise before the rest, doe the same once +a day while the Carouan remaineth there. + + +What the Carouan doeth after hauing rested at Mecca. + +[Sidenote: The mountaine of pardons.] The Carouan hauing abode within the +citie of Mecca fiue dayes, the night before the euening of their feast, the +captaine with all his company setteth forward towards the mountaine of +pardons, which they call in the Arabian tongue, Iabel Arafata. This +mountaine is distant from Mecca 15. miles, and in the mid way thereto is a +place called Mina, that is to say, The hauen, and a litle from thence are +4. great pillars, of which hereafter we will speake. Now first touching the +mountaine of Pardons, which is rather to be called a litle hill, then a +mountain, for that it is low, litle, delightful and pleasant, containing in +circuit two miles, and enuironed round about with the goodliest plaine that +euer with mans eie could be seen, and the plaine likewise compassed with +exceeding high mountains, in such sort that this is one of the goodliest +situations in the world: and it seemeth verily, that nature hath therein +shewed all her cunning, in making this place vnder the mountaine of pardons +so broad and pleasant. Vpon the side towards Mecca there are many pipes of +water cleare, faire, and fresh, and aboue all most wholesome, falling down +into certaine vessels made of purpose, where the people refresh and wash +themselues, and water their cattel. And when Adam and Euah were cast out of +paradise by the angel of the Lord, the Mahumetans say, they came to +inhabite this litle mountaine of pardons. Also they say, that they had lost +one another, and were separated for the space of 40. yeeres, and in the end +met at this place with great ioy and gladnesse, and builded a litle house +vpon the top of this mountaine, the which at this day they call Beyt Adam, +that is to say, the house of Adam. + + +Of the three Carouans. + +The same day that the Carouan of Cairo commeth to this place, hither come +2. Carouans also, one of Damasco, the other of Arabia, and in like maner +all the inhabitants for ten dayes iourney round about, so that at one time +there is to be seene aboue 200000. persons, and more then 300000. cattell. +Now all this company meeting together in this place the night before the +feast, the three hostes cast themselues into a triangle, setting the +mountaine in the midst of them: and all that night there is nothing to be +heard nor seene, but gunshot and fireworkes of sundry sortes, with such +singing, sounding, shouting, halowing, rumors, feasting, and triumphing, as +is wonderfull. After this, the day of the feast being come, they are all at +rest and silence, and that day they attend on no other thing, then to +sacrifice oblations and prayers vnto God, and in the euening all they which +haue horses mount thereon, and approch as nigh vnto the mountaine as they +can, and those which haue no horses make the best shift they can on foote, +giuing euer vnto the captaine of Cairo the chiefe place, the second to the +captaine of Damasco, and the third to the captaine of Arabia, and being all +approched as is abouesayd, there commeth a square squire, one of the +Santones, mounted on a camell well furnished, who at the other side of the +mountain ascendeth fiue steps into a pulpit made for that purpose, and all +being silent, turning his face towards the people he maketh a short sermon +of the tenour folowing. + +The summe of the Santones sermon. + +The summe of this double doctors sermon is thus much in briefe. He sheweth +them how many and how great benefits God hath giuen to the Mahumetan people +by the hand of his beloued friend and prophet Mahomet, hauing deliuered +them from the seruitude of sinne and from idolatry, in which before time +they were drowned, and how he gaue vnto them the house of Abraham wherein +they should be heard, and likewise the mountaine of pardons, by meanes +whereof they might obtaine grace and remission of their sinnes: adding, +that the mercifull God, who is a liberall giuer of all good things, +commaunded his secretarie Abraham to build him an house in Mecca, where his +successours might make their prayers vnto him and bee heard, at which time +all the mountains in the world came together thither with sufficiencie of +stones for building hereof, except that litle and low hill, which for +pouertie could not go to discharge this debt, for the which it became +sorrowful, weeping beyond all measure for the space of thirtie yeeres, at +the ende whereof the eternall God hauing pitie and compassion vpon this +poore Mountaine, saide vnto it: Weepe no more (my daughter) for thy bitter +plaints haue ascended vp into mine eares, therefore comfort thy selfe: for +I will cause all those that shall goe to visite the house of my friend +Abraham, that they shall not be absolued from their sinnes, vnlesse they +first come to doe thee reuerence, and to keepe in this place their holiest +feast. And this I haue commanded vnto my people by the mouth of my friend +and prophet Mahumet. This said, he exhorteth them vnto the loue of God, and +to prayer and almes. The sermon being done at the Sunne-setting they make +3. prayers, namely the first for the Serifo, the second for the Grand +Signior with his hoste, and the third for all the people: to which prayers +all with one voice cry saying; Amni Ia Alla, Amni Ia Alla, that is to say, +Be it so lord, be it so Lord. Thus hauing had the Santones blessing and +saluted the Mountaine of pardons, they returne the way they came vnto Mina, +whereof wee haue made mention. In returning at the end of the plaine are +the abouesaid 4. pillers, to wit, two on ech side of the way, through the +midst whereof they say it is needfull that euery one passe, saying, that +who so passeth without looseth all that merit which in his pilgrimage he +had gotten. Also from the mountaine of pardons vntill they be passed the +said pillers none dare looke backward, for feare least the sinnes which he +hath left in the mountains returne to him againe. Being past these pillers +eueryone lighteth downe, seeking in this sandy field 50. or 60. litle +stones, which being gathered and bound in an hankerchiffe they carry to the +abouesaid place of Mina, where they stay 5. dayes, because at that time +there is a faire free and franke of al custome. And in this place are other +3. pillers, not together, but set in diuers places, where (as their prophet +saith) were the three apparitions which the diuel made vnto Abraham, and to +Ismael his sonne; for amongst them they make no mention of Isaac, as if he +had neuer bene borne. So they say, that the blessed God hauing commanded +Abraham his faithfull seruant to sacrifice his first begotten Ismael, the +old Abraham went to do according to God's wil, and met with the infernall +enemie in the shape of a man, and being of him demanded whither he went, he +answered, that he went to sacrifice his sonne Ismael, as God had commanded +him. Against whom the diuel exclaiming said: Oh doting old man, sith God in +thine old age hath marueilously giuen thee this son (in whom all nations +shalbe blessed) wherefore giuing credite vnto vaine dreames, wilt thou kill +him whom so much thou hast desired, and so intirely loued. But Abraham +shaking him off proceeded on his way, whereupon the diuel seeing his words +could not preuaile with the father attempted the sonne, saying; Ismael, +haue regard vnto thyselfe betimes in this thing which is so dangerous. +Wherefore? answered the childe. Because (saith the diuel) thy doting father +seeketh to take away thy life. For what occasion, said Ismael? Because +(saith the enemie) he saith, that God hath commanded him. Which Ismael +hearing hee tooke vp stones and threw at him, saying, Auzu billahi minal +scia itanil ragini, which is to say, I defend me with God from the diuel +the offender, as who would say, wee ought to obey the commandement of God +and resist the diuel with al our force. But to returne to our purpose, the +pilgrimes during their abode there goe to visite these three pillers, +throwing away the little stones which before they gathered, whiles they +repeat the same words which they say, that Ismael said to the diuell, when +he withstoode him. From hence halfe a mile is a mountaine, whither Abraham +went to sacrifice his sonne, as is abouesaid. In this mountaine is a great +den whither the pilgrims resort to make their prayers, and there is a great +stone naturally separated in the midst; and they say, that Ismael, while +his father Abraham was busie about the sacrifice, tooke the knife in hand +to prooue how it would cut, and making triall diuided the stone in two +parts. The fiue dayes being expired, the captaine ariseth with all the +Carouan, and returneth againe to Mecca, where they remaine other fiue +dayes. And while these rest, we will treat of the city and port of Grida +vpon the Red Sea. + + +Of Grida. + +[Grida a port neere Mecca.] Therefore wee say that from Mecca to Grida they +make two small dayes iourney: and because in those places it is ill +traueiling in the day-time by reason of the great heat of the Sunne, +therefore they depart in the euening from Mecca, and in the morning before +Sunne-rising they are arriued halfe way, where there certaine habitations +well furnished, and good Innes to lodge in, but especially women ynough +which voluntarily bestowe their almes vpon the poore pilgrims: likewise +departing the next euening, the morning after, they come vnto Grida. This +citie is founded vpon the Red Sea banke, enuironed with wals and towers to +the land-ward, but through continuance of time almost consumed and wasted: +on the side to seaward it stands vnwalled. Grida hath three gates, one on +eche side, and the thirde in the midst towarde the lande, which is called +the port of Mecca, neere vnto which are 6. or 7. Turks vpon the old towers +for guard thereof with foure faulcons vpon one of the corners of the city +to the land-ward. Also to sea-ward where the wall ioyneth with the water, +there is lately made a fort like vnto a bulwarke, where they haue planted +25 pieces of the best ordinance that might be had, which are very well kept +and guarded. More outward towards the sea vpon the farthest olde tower are +other fiue good pieces with 30 men to guard them. [Sidenote: The Portugals +greatly feared in the Red Sea.] On the other side of the city at the end of +the wall there is lately builded a bulwarke strong and well guarded by a +Saniaccho with 150 Turks wel prouided with ordinance and all other +necessaries and munition, and all these fortifyings are for none other +cause then for feare and suspition of the Portugals. And if the port were +good this were in vaine: but the port cannot be worse nor more dangerous; +being all full of rocks and sands, in such wise, that the ships cannot come +neere, but perforce ride at the least two miles off. [Sidenote: Forty or +fifty rich ships arriue yeerely at Grida.] At this port arriue euery yeere +forty or fifty great shippes laden with spices and other rich marchandize +which yeeld in custome 150000 ducats, the halfe whereof goeth vnto the +Grand Signior, and the other halfe to the Serifo. And because there is none +other thing worthy mention in Grida we wil returne to our Carouan which +hath almost rested enough. + + +Of their going to Medina. + +The Carouan departeth for Medina returning the same way they came vnto +Bedrihonem abouesayd, where they leaue their ordinance and other cariages, +whereof they haue no need, with the pilgrims which haue seene Medina +aforetime, and desire not to see it againe, but stay in that place, +expecting the carouan, and resting vntill the carouan go from Bedrihonem to +Medina, where they alwayes finde goodly habitations, with abundance of +sweet waters, and dates enough, and being within foureteene miles of Medina +they come vnto a great plaine called by them Iabel el salema, that is to +say, the mountaine of health, from which they begin to descry the citie and +tombe of Mahomet, at which sight they light from their horses in token of +reuerence. And being ascended vp the sayd mountaine with shouting which +pierceth the skies they say, Sala tuua salema Alaccha Iarah sul Allah. Sala +tuua Salema Alaccha Ianabi Allah, Sala tuua Salema Allaccha Iahabit Allah: +which words in the Arabian tongue signifie: Prayer and health be vnto thee, +oh prophet of God: prayer and health be vpon thee, oh beloued of God. And +hauing pronounced this salutacion, they proceed on their iourney, so that +they lodge that night within three miles of Medina: and the next morning +the captaine of the pilgrimage ariseth, and proceeding towards the city, +and drawing neere, there commeth the gouernour vnder the Serifo, +accompanied with his people to receiue the Carouan, hauing pitched their +tents in the midst of a goodly field where they lodge. + + +Of Medina. + +Medina is a little city of great antiquity, containing in circuit not aboue +two miles, hauing therein but one castle, which is olde and weake, guarded +by an Aga with fifty pieces of artillery, but not very good. The houses +thereof are faire and well situated, built of lime and stone, and in the +midst of the city stands a fouresquare Mosquita, not so great as that of +Mecca, but more goodly, rich, and sumptuous in building. Within the same in +a corner thereof is a tombe built vpon foure pillers with a vault, as if it +were vnder a pauement, which bindeth all the foure pillers together. The +tombe is so high, that it farre exceedeth in heighth the Mosquita, being +couered with lead, and the top all inamelled with golde, with an halfe +moone vpon the top: and within the pauement it is all very artificially +wrought with golde. Below there are round about very great staires of yron +ascending vp vntill the midst of the pillers, and in the very midst thereof +is buried the body of Mahomet, and not in a chest of yron cleauing to the +adamant, as many affirme that know not the trueth thereof. Moreouer, ouer +the body they haue built a tombe of speckled stone a brace and a halfe +high, [Marginal note: Or, a fathom.] and ouer the same another of Legmame +fouresquare in maner of a pyramis. After this, round about the sepulture +there hangeth a curtaine of silke, which letteth the sight of those without +that they cannot see the sepulture. Beyond this in the same Mosquita are +other two sepulchres couered with greene cloth, and in the one of them is +buried Fatma the daughter of Mahomet, and Alli is buried in the other, who +was the husband of the sayd Fatma. The attendants vpon these sepulchres are +fifty eunuches white and tawny, neither is it granted to any of them to +enter within the tombe, sauing to three white eunuches the oldest and best +of credit; vnto whom it is lawfull to enter but twise in the day, to light +the lamps, and to doe other seruices. All the other eunuchs attend without +to the seruice of the Mosquita, and the other two sepulchres of Fatma, and +Alli, where euery one may go and touch at his pleasure, and take of the +earth for deuotion, as many do. + + +Of things without the City. + +Without the city and on euery side are most faire gardens, with many +fountaines of most sweet water, infinite pondes, abundance of fruit, with +much honest liuing, so that this place is very pleasant and delightfull. +This city hath three gates, one of which is an hospitall caused to be built +by Cassachi, called the Rosel who was wife to Sultan Solimam grandfather to +this emperour. The sayd Hospitall hath nought els woorthy mention, saue +that it is fairely built, and hath large reuenues belonging thereunto, and +nourisheth many poore people. A mile from the city are certaine houses +whereof they affirme one to be the same, where Mahumet in his lifetime +dwelt. This house hath on euery side very many faire date trees, amongst +which there are two which grow out of one stocke exceeding high, and these, +they say, their Prophet graffed with his owne hand: the fruit thereof is +alwayes sent to Constantinople, to be presented vnto the Grand Signior, and +is sayd to be that blessed fruit of the Prophet. Nere vnto the date trees +is a faire fountaine of cleere and sweet water, the which by a conduct pipe +is brought into the city of Medina. Also there is a little Mosquita, +wherein three places are counted holy, and greatly reuerenced: the first +they affirme, that their Prophet made his first prayer in, after he knew +God: the second is that whither he went when he would see the holy house of +Abraham, where when he sate down to that intent, they say the mountaines +opened from toppe to bottome to shew him the house, and after closed againe +as before: the third holy place is in the midst of the sayd Mosquita, where +is a tombe made of lime and stone fouresquare, and full of sand, wherein, +they say, was buried that blessed camel which Mahumet was alwayes woont to +ride vpon. On the other side of the city are other tombes of holy +Mahumetans, and euery one or them hath a tombe built vpon foure pillers, +amongst which three were the companions of Mahumet, to wit, Abubacar; +Ottoman, and Omar; all which are visited of the pilgrims as holy places. + + +The offering of the vestures vnto the sepulchres. + +The Carouan being come to Medina two houres before day, and resting there +till the euening, the captaine then with his company and other pilgrims +setteth forward, with the greatest pompe possible: and taking with him the +vesture which is made in maner of a pyramis, with many other of golde and +silke, departeth, going thorow the midst of the city, vntill he come to the +Mosquita, where hauing praied, he presenteth vnto the tombe of his prophet +(where the eunuchs receiuing hands are ready) the vesture for the sayd +tombe: and certaine eunuchs entring in take away the old vesture, and lay +on the new, burning the olde one, and diuiding the golde thereof into +equall portions. After this are presented other vestures for the ornament +of the Mosquita. Also the people without deliuer vnto the eunuchs ech man +somewhat to touch the tombe therewith, which they keepe as a relique with +great deuotion. This ceremony being ended, the captaine resteth in Medina +two dayes, to the end the pilgrims may finish their deuotion and +ceremonies: and after they depart to Iambor. A good dayes iourney thence is +a steepe mountaine, ouer which is no passage, sauing by one narrow path +called Demir Capi, which was in times past called the yron gate. Of this +gate the Mahumetans say, that Ally the companion and sonne in law of +Mahumet, being here pursued by many Christians, and comming vnto this +mountaine, not seeing any way whereby to flee, drew out his sword, and +striking the said mountaine, diuided it in sunder, and passing thorow saued +his life on the other side. Moreouer, this Alli among the Persians is had +in greater reuerence than Mahumet, who affirme, that the sayd Alli hath +done greater things and more miraculous than Mahumet, and therefore they +esteeme him for God almighty his fellow. But to returne to our matter, the +captaine with the carouan within two dayes after returneth for Cairo, and +comming to Ezlem, findeth there a captaine with threescore horses come +thither to bring refreshments to the said captaine of the pilgrimage, as +also to sell vnto the pilgrims some victuals. From thence they set forward, +and comming to Birca within two leagues of Cairo, there is the master of +the house of the Bassha of Cairo with all his horsemen come thither to +receiue him with a sumptuous and costly banket made at the cost of the +Basha for the captaine and his retinue, who after he is well refreshed +departeth toward the castle of Cairo to salute the Basha, who receiuing him +with great ioy and gladnesse in token of good wil presenteth him with a +garment of cloth of golde very rich: and the captaine taking the Alcaron +out of the chest presenteth it to the Basha, who hauing kissed it, +commandeth to lay it vp againe. Some there are which affirme, that being +arriued at Cairo, they kill that goodly camell which caried the Alcaron, +and eate him; which is nothing so: for they are so superstitious to the +contrary, that to gaine all the world they would not kill him. But if by +casuality he should die, in this case happy and blessed they thinke +themselues, which can get a morsell to eat. And thus much concerning the +voyage of the captaine of the carouan of Cairo. + + * * * * * + +The voyage and trauell of M. Cæsar Fredericke, Marchant of Venice, into the + East India, and beyond the Indies. Wherein are conteined the customes and + rites of those countries, the merchandises and commodities, as well of + golde and siluer, as spices, drugges, pearles, and other iewels: + translated out of Italian by M. Thomas Hickocke. + +Cæsare Fredericke to the Reader. + +[Sidenote: Cæsare Fredericke trauelled eighteene yeeres in the East +Indies.] I hauing (gentle Reader) for the space of eighteene yeeres +continually coasted and trauelled, as it were, all the East Indies, and +many other countreys beyond the Indies, wherein I haue had both good and +ill successe in my trauels: and hauing seene and vnderstood many things +woorthy the noting, and to be knowen to all the world, the which were neuer +as yet written of any: I thought it good (seeing the Almighty had giuen me +grace, after so long perils in passing such a long voyage to returne into +mine owne countrey, the noble city of Venice) I say, I thought it good, as +briefly as I could, to write and set forth this voyage made by me, with the +maruellous things I haue seene in my trauels in the Indies: The mighty +Princes that gouerne those countreys, their religion and faith that they +haue, the rites and customes which they vse, and liue by, of the diuers +successe that happened vnto me, and how many of these countreys are +abounding with spices, drugs, and iewels, giuing also profitable +aduertisement to all those that haue a desire to make such a voyage. And +because that the whole world may more commodiously reioyce at this my +trauell, I haue caused it to be printed in this order: and now I present it +vnto you (gentle and louing Readers) to whom for the varieties of things +heerein contented, I hope that it shall be with great delight receiued. And +thus God of his goodnesse keepe you. + + +A voyage to the East Indies, and beyond the Indies, &c. + +[Sidenote: The authours going from Venice to Cyprus and Tripoly.] In the +yere of our Lord God 1653, I Cæsar Fredericke being in Venice, and very +desirous to see the East parts of the world, shipped my selfe in a shippe +called the Gradaige of Venice, with certaine marchandise, gouerned by M. +Iacomo Vatica, which was bound to Cyprus with his ship, with whom I went: +and when we were arriued in Cyprus, I left that ship, and went in a lesser +to Tripoly in Soria, where I stayed a while. Afterward, I tooke my iourney +to Alepo, and there I acquainted my selfe with marchants of Armenia, and +Moores, that were marchants, and consorted to go with them to Ormus, and +wee departed from Alepo, and in two dayes iourney and a halfe, we came to a +city called Bir. + + +Of the city called Bir. + +Bir is a small city very scarse of all maner of victuals, and nere vnto the +walles of the city runneth the riuer of Euphrates. [Sidenote: The river +Euphrates.] In this city the marchants diuide themselues into companies, +according to their merchandise that they haue, and there either they buy or +make a boat to carry them and their goods to Babylon downe the riuer +Euphrates, with charge of a master and mariners to conduct the boat in the +voyage: these boats are in a maner flat bottomed, yet they be very strong: +and for all that they are so strong, they will serue but for one voyage. +They are made according to the sholdnesse of the riuer, because that the +riuer is in many places full of great stones, which greatly hinder and +trouble those that goe downe the riuer. These boats serue but for one +voyage downe the riuer vnto a village called Feluchia, because it is +impossible to bring them vp the riuer backe againe. [Sidenote: Feluchia a +small city on Euphrates.] At Feluchia the marchants plucke their boats in +pieces, or else sell them for a small price, for that at Bir they cost the +marchants forty or fifty chickens a piece, and they sell them at Feluchia +for seuen or eight chickens a piece, because that when the marchants +returne from Babylon backe againe, if they haue marchandise or goods that +oweth custome, then they make their returne in forty dayes thorow the +wildernesse, passing that way with a great deale lesser charges then the +other way. [Sidenote: Mosul.] And if they haue not marchandise that oweth +custome, then they goe by the way of Mosul, where it costeth them great +charges both the Carouan and company. From Bir where the marchants imbarke +themselues to Feluchia ouer agains Babylon, if the riuer haue good store of +water, they shall make their voyage in fifteene or eighteene dayes downe +the riuer, and if the water be lowe, and it hath not rained, then it is +much trouble, and it will be forty or fifty dayes journey downe, because +that when the barks strike on the stones that be in the riuer, then they +must vnlade them, which is great trouble, and then lade them againe when +they haue mended them: therefore it is not necessary, neither doe the +marchants go with one boat alone, but with two or three, that if one boat +split and be lost with striking on the sholdes, they may haue another ready +to take in their goods, vntil such time as they haue mended the broken +boat, and if they draw the broken boat on land to mend her, it is hard to +defend her in the night from the great multitude of Arabians that will come +downe there to robbe you: [Sidenote: The Arabian theeues are in number like +to Ants.] and in the riuers euery night, when you make fast your boat to +the banckeside, you must keepe good watch against the Arabians which are +theeues in number like to ants, yet when they come to robbe, they will not +kill, but steale and run away. Harquebuzes are very good weapons against +them, for that they stand greatly in feare of the shot. And as you passe +the riuer Euphrates from Bir to Feluchia, there are certein places which +you must passe by, where you pay custome certaine medines vpon a bale, +which custome is belonging to the sonne of Aborise king of the Arabians and +of the desert, who hath certaine cities and villages on the riuer +Euphrates. + + +Feluchia and Babylon. + +[Sidenote: The olde Babylon hath great trade with marchants still.] +Feluchia is a village where they that come from Bir doe vnbarke themselues +and vnlade their goods, and it is distant from Babylon a dayes iourney and +an halfe by land: Babylon is no great city but it is very populous, and of +great trade of strangers because it is a great thorowfare for Persia, +Turkia, and Arabia: and very often times there goe out from thence Carouans +into diuers countreys: and the city is very copious of victuals, which +comme out of Armenia downe the riuer of Tygris, on certaine Zattares or +Raffes made of blowen hides or skinnes called Vtrij. This riuer Tygris +doeth wash the walles of the city. These Raffes are bound fast together, +and then they lay boards on the aforesayd blowen skinnes, and on the boards +they lade the commodities, and so come they to Babylon, where they vnlade +them, and being vnladen, they let out the winde out of the skinnes, and +lade them on cammels to make another voyage. This city of Babylon is +situate in the kingdome of Persia, but now gouerned by the Turks. On the +other side of the riuer towards Arabia, ouer against the city, there is a +faire place or towne, and in it a faire Bazarro for marchants, with very +many lodgings, where the greatest part of the marchants strangers which +come to Babylon do lie with their marchandize. [Sidenote: A bridge made of +boats.] The passing ouer Tygris from Babylon to this Borough is by a long +bridge made of boates chained together with great chaines: prouided, that +when the riuer waxeth great with the abundance of raine that falleth, then +they open the bridge in the middle, where the one halfe of the bridge +falleth to the walles of Babylon, and the other to the brinks of this +Borough, on the other side of the riuer: and as long as the bridge is open, +they passe the riuer in small boats with great danger, because of the +smalnesse of the boats, and the ouerlading of them, that with the +fiercenesse of the streame they be ouerthrowen, or els the streame doth +cary them away, so that by this meanes, many people are lost and drowned: +this thing by proofe I haue many times seene. + +Of the tower of Babylon. + +The Tower of Nimrod or Babel is situate on that side of Tygris that Arabia +is, and in a very great plaine distant from Babylon seuen or eight miles: +which tower is ruinated on euery side, and with the falling of it there is +made a great mountaine, so that it hath no forme at all, yet there is a +great part of it standing which is compassed and almost couered with the +aforesayd fallings: this Tower was builded and made of foure square +Brickes, which Brickes were made of earth, and dried in the Sunne in maner +and forme following: first they layed a lay of Brickes, [Footnote: These +bricks be in thicknes six or seuen inches, and a foot and a halfe square.] +then a Mat made of Canes, square as the Brickes, and in stead of lime, they +daubed it with earth: these Mats of Canes are at this time so strong, that +it is a thing woonderfull to beholde, being of such great antiquity: I haue +gone round about it, and haue not found any place where there hath bene any +doore or entrance: it may be in my iudgement in circuit about a mile, and +rather lesse then more. + +This Tower in effect is contrary to all other things which are seene afar +off, for they seeme small, and the more nere a man commeth to them the +bigger they be: but this tower afar off seemeth a very great thing, and the +nerer you come to it the lesser. My iudgment and reason of this is, that +because the Tower is set in a very great plaine, and hath nothing more +about to make any shew sauing the ruines of it which it hath made round +about, and for this respect descrying it a farre off, that piece of the +Tower which yet standeth with the mountaine that is made of the substance +that hath fallen from it, maketh a greater shew then you shall finde +comming neere to it. + + +Babylon and Basora. + +From Babylon I departed for Basora, shipping my selfe in one of the barks +that vse to go in the riuer Tigris from Babylon to Basora, and from Basora +to Babylon: which barks are made after the maner of Fusts or Galliots with +a Speron and a couered poope: they haue no pumpe in them because of the +great abundance of pitch which they haue to pitch them with all: which +pitch they haue in abundance two dayes iourney from Babylon. Nere vnto the +riuer Euphrates, there is a city called Heit, nere vnto which city there is +a great plaine full of pitch, very maruellous to beholde, a thing almost +incredible, that out of a hole [Footnote: This hole where out commeth this +pitch is most true, and the water and pitch runneth into the valley or +Iland where the pitch resteth, and the water runneth into the riuer +Euphrates, and it maketh all the riuer to be as it were brackish with the +smell of pitch and brimstone.] in the earth, which continually throweth out +pitch into the aire with continuall smoake, this pitch is throwen with such +force, that being hot it falleth like as it were sprinckled ouer all the +plaine, in such abundance that the plaine is alwayes full of pitch: the +Mores and Arabians of that place say, that that hole is the mouth of hell: +and in trueth, it is a thing very notable to be marked: and by this pitch +the whole people haue great benefit to pitch their barks, which barks they +call Daneck and Saffin. When the riuer of Tygris is well replenished with +water, you may passe from Babylon to Basora in eight or nine dayes, and +sometimes more and sometimes lesse: we were halfe so much more which is 14 +or 15 daies, because the waters were low: they may saile day and night, and +there are some places in this way where you pay so many medins on a baile: +if the waters be lowe, it is 18 dayes iourney. + + +Basora. + +[Sidenote: Zizarij an ancient people.] Basora is a city of the Arabians, +which of olde time was gouerned by those Arabians called Zizarij, but now +it is gouerned by the great Turke where he keepeth an army to his great +charges. + +The Arabians called Zizarij haue the possession of a great countrey, and +cannot be ouercome by the Turke, because that the sea hath deuided their +countrey into an Iland by channels with the ebbing and flowing of the sea, +and for that cause the Turke cannot bring an army against them, neither by +sea nor by land, and another reason is, the inhabitants of that Iland are +very strong and warlike men. [Sidenote: At the castle of Corna the riuer +Euphrates and Tygris do meet.] A dayes iourney before you come to Basora, +you shall haue a little castle or fort, which is set on that point of the +land where the riuers of Euphrates and Tygris meet together, and the castle +is called Corna: at this point, the two riuers make a monstrous great +riuer, that runneth into the sea, which is called the gulfe of Persia, +which is towards the South: Basora is distant from the sea fifteene miles, +and it is a city of great trade of spices and drugges which come from +Ormus. Also there is a great store of corne, Rice, and Dates, which the +countrey doth yeeld. [Sidenote: Ormus is the barrenest Iland in all the +world.] I shipped my selfe in Basora to go for Ormus, and so we sailed, +thorow the Persian sea six hundred miles, which is the distance from Basora +to Ormus, and we sailed in small ships made of boards, bound together with +small cords or ropes, and in stead of calking they lay betweene euery board +certaine straw which they haue, and so they sowe board and board together, +with the straw betweene, wherethorow there commeth much water, and they are +very dangerous. [Sidenote: Carichij an Iland in the gulfe of Persia.] +Departing from Basora we passed 200 miles with the sea on our right hand, +along the gulfe, vntil at length we arriued at an Iland called Carichij, +fro whence we sailed to Ormus in sight of the Persian shore on the left +side, and on the right side towards Arabia we discouered infinite Ilands. + + +Ormus. + +Ormus [Footnote: Ormus is alwayes replenished with abundance of victuall, +and yet there is none that groweth in the Iland.] is an Iland in circuit +fiue and twenty or thirty miles, and it is the barrenest and most drie +Iland in all the world, because that in it there is nothing to be had, but +salt water, and wood, all other things necessary for mans life are brought +out of Persia twelue miles off, and out of other Ilands neere thereunto +adioyning, in such abundance and quantity, that the city is alwayes +replenished with all maner of store: there is standing neere vnto the +waters side a very faire castell, in the which the captaine of the king of +Portugall is alwayes resident with a good band of Portugalles, and before +this castell is a very faire prospect: in the city dwell the maried men, +souldiers and marchants of euery nation, amongst whom there are Moores and +Gentiles. [Sidenote: Great trade of merchandise in Ormus.] In this city +there is very great trade for all sorts of spices, drugges, silke, cloth of +silke, brocardo, and diuers other sorts of marchandise come out of Persia: +and amongst all other trades of marchandise, the trade of Horses is very +great there, which they carry from thence into the Indies. This Iland hath +a Moore king of the race of the Persians, who is created and made king by +the Captaine of the castle, in the name of the king of Portugall. At the +creation of this king I was there, and saw the ceremonies that they vse in +it, which are as followeth. The olde King being dead, the Captaine of the +Portugals chuseth another of the blood royall, and maketh this election in +the castle with great ceremonies, and when hee is elected, the Captaine +sweareth him to be true and faithfull to the King of Portugall, as his Lord +and Gouernour, and then he giueth him the Scepter regall. After this with +great feasting and pompe, and with great company, he is brought into the +royall palace in the city. This King keepeth a good traine, and hath +sufficient reuenues to maintaine himselfe without troubling of any, because +the Captaine of the castle doth mainteine and defend his right, and when +that the Captaine and he ride together, he is honoured as a king, yet be +cannot ride abroad with his traine, without the consent of the Captaine +first had: it behooueth them to doe this, and it is necessary, because of +the great trade that is in the city: their proper language is the Persian +tongue. There I shipped my selfe to goe for Goa, a city in the Indies, in a +shippe that had fourescore horses in her. [Sidenote: A priuilege for +Marchants.] This is to aduertise those Marchants that go from Ormus to Goa +to shippe themselues in those shippes that carry horses, because euery +shippe that carrieth twenty horses and vpwards is priuileged, that all the +marchandise whatsoeuer they carry shall pay no custome, whereas the shippes +that carry no horses are bound to pay eight per cento of all goods they +bring. + + +Goa, Diu, and Cambaia. + +Goa is the principall city that the Portugals haue in the Indies, where is +resident the Viceroy with his Court and ministers of the King of Portugall. +From Ormus to Goa is nine hundred foure score and ten miles distance, in +which passage the first city that you come to in the Indies, is called Diu, +[Footnote: Off South extremity of Kathiawar Peninsula, Bombay Presidency.] +and is situate in a little Iland in the kingdome of Cambaia, which is the +greatest strength that the Portugals haue in all the Indies, yet a small +city, but of great trade, because there they lade very many great ships for +the straights of Mecca and Ormus with merchandise, and these shippes belong +to the Moores and Christians, but the Moores can not trade neither saile +into those seas without the licence of the Viceroy of the King of +Portugall, otherwise they are taken and made good prises. The marchandise +that they lade these ships withall commeth from Cambaietta a port in the +kingdome of Cambaia, which they bring from thence in small barks, because +there can no great shippes come thither, by reason of the sholdnesse of the +water thereabouts, and these sholds are an hundred or fourescore miles +about in a straight or gulfe, which they call Macareo, which is as much as +to say, as a race of a tide, because the waters there run out of that place +without measure, so that there is no place like to it, vnlesse it be in the +kingdome of Pegu, where there is another Macareo, where the waters run out +with more force than these doe. The principall city in Cambaia is called +Amadauar, it is a dayes iourney and an halfe from Cambaietta, it is a very +great city and very populous, and for a city of the Gentiles it is very +well made and builded with faire houses and large streets, with a faire +place in it with many shippes, and in shew like to Cairo, but not so great: +also Cambaietta is situate on the seas side, and is a very faire city. The +time that I was there, the city was in great calamity and scarsenesse, so +that I haue seene the men of the countrey that were Gentiles take their +children, their sonnes and their daughters, and haue desired the Portugals +to buy them, and I haue seene them sold for eight or ten larines a piece, +which may be of our money x.s. or xiii.s. iiii.d. For all this if I had not +seene it, I could not haue beleeued that there should be such a trade at +Cambaietta as there is: for in the time of euery new Moone and euery full +Moone, the small barks (innumerable) come in and out, for at those times of +the Moone the tides and waters are higher then at other times they be. +These barkes be laden with all sorts of spices, with silke of China, with +Sandols, with Elephants teeth, Veluets of Vercini, great quantity of +Pannina, which commeth from Mecca, Chickinos which be pieces of golde +woorth seuen shillings a piece sterling, with money, and with diuers sorts +of other marchandize. Also these barks lade out, as it were, an infinite +quantity of cloth made of Bumbast of all sorts, as white stamped and +painted, with great quantity of Indico, dried ginger and conserued, +Myrabolans drie and condite, Boraso in paste, great store of sugar, great +quantity of Cotton, abundance of Opium, Assa Fetida, Puchio, with many +other sorts of drugges, turbants made in Diu, great stones like to +Corneolaes, Granats, Agats, Diaspry, Calcidonij, Hematists, and some kinde +of naturall diamonds. There is in the city of Cambaietta an order, but no +man is bound to keepe it, but they that will; but all the Portugall +marchants keepe it, the which is this. There are in this city certain +Brokers which are Gentiles and of great authority, and haue euery one of +them fifteene or twenty seruants, and the Marchants that vse that countrey +haue their Brokers, with which they be serued: and they that haue not bene +there are informed by their friends of the order, and of what Broker they +shall be serued. [Sidenote: Marchants that trauell to the Indies must cary +their prouision of houshold with them.] Now euery fifteene dayes (as +abouesayd) that the fleet of small shippes entreth into the port, the +Brokers come to the water side, and these Marchants assoone as they are +come on land, do giue the cargason of all their goods to that Broker that +they will haue to do their businesse for them, with the marks of all the +fardles and packs they haue; and the marchant hauing taken on land all his +furniture for his house, because it is needful that the Marchants that +trade to the Indies carry prouision of housholde with them, because that in +euery place where they come they must haue a new house, the Broker that +hath receiued his cargason, commandeth his seruants to carry the Marchants +furniture for his house home, and load it on some cart, and carry it into +the city, where the Brokers haue diuers empty houses meet for the lodging +of Marchants, furnished onely with bedsteads, tables, chaires, and empty +iarres for water: then the Broker sayth to the Marchant, Goe and repose +your selfe, and take your rest in the city. The Broker tarrieth at the +water side with the cargason, and causeth all his goods to be discharged +out of the ship, and payeth the custome, and causeth it to be brought into +the house where the marchant lieth, the Marchant not knowing any thing +thereof, neither custome, nor charges. These goods being brought to this +passe into the house of the Marchant, the Broker demandeth of the Marchant +if he haue any desire to sell his goods or marchandise, at the prises that +such wares are worth at that present time? And if he hath a desire to sell +his goods presently, then at that instant the Broker selleth them away. +After this the Broker sayth to the Marchant, you haue so much of euery sort +of marchandise neat and cleare of euery charge, and so much ready money. +And if the Marchant will employ his money in other commodities, then the +Broker telleth him that such and such commodities will cost so much, put +aboord without any maner of charges. The Marchant vnderstanding the effect, +maketh his account; and if he thinke to buy or sell at the prices currant, +he giueth order to make his marchandise away: and if he hath commodity for +20000 dukets, all shalbe bartred or solde away in fifteene dayes without +any care or trouble: and when as the Marchant thinketh that he cannot sell +his goods at the prise currant, he may tary as long as he will, but they +cannot be solde by any man but by that Broker that hath taken them on land +and payed the custome: and purchance tarying sometimes for sale of their +commodity, they make good profit, and sometimes losse: but those +marchandise that come not ordinarily euery fifteene dayes, in tarying for +the sale of them, there is great profit. [Sidenote: Great store of men of +warre and rouers on the coast of Cambaia.] The barks that lade in +Cambaietta go for Diu to lade the ships that go from thence for the +streights of Mecca and Ormus, and some go to Chaul and Goa: and these ships +be very well appointed, or els are guarded by the Armada of the Portugals, +for that there are many Corsaires or Pyrats which goe coursing alongst that +coast, robbing and spoiling: and for feare of these theeues there is no +safe sailing in those seas, but with ships very well appointed and armed, +or els with the fleet of the Portugals, as is aforesayd. In fine the +kingdome of Cambaia is a place of great trade, and hath much doings and +traffique with all men, although hitherto it hath bene in the hands of +tyrants, because that at 75 yeeres of age the true king being at the +assault of Diu, was there slaine: whose name Sultan Badu. At that time +foure or fiue captaines of the army diuided the kingdome amongst +themselues, and euery one of them shewed in his countrey what tyranny he +could: but twelue yeeres ago the great Mogul a Moore king of Agra and +Delly, forty dayes iourny within the land of Amadauar, became the gouernour +of all the kingdome of Cambaia without any resistance, because he being of +great power and force, deuising which way to enter the land with his +people, there was not any man that would make him any resistance, although +they were tyrants and a beastly people, they were soone brought vnder +obedience. [Sidenote: A maruellous fond delight in women.] During the time +I dwelt in Cambaietta I saw very maruellous things: there were an infinite +number of artificers that made bracelets called Mannij, or bracelets of +elephants teeth, of diuers colours, for the women of the Gentiles, which +haue their armes full decked with them. And in this occupation there are +spent euery yeere many thousands of crownes: the reason whereof is this, +that when there dieth any whatsoeuer of their kindred, then in signe and +token of mourning and sorrow, they breake all their bracelets from their +armes, and presently they go and buy new againe, because that they had +rather be without their meat then without their bracelets. + + +Daman. Basan. Tana. + +Hauing passed Diu, I came to the second city that the Portugals haue, +called Daman, situated in the territory of Cambaia, distant from Diu an +hundred and twenty miles: it is no towne of merchandise, saue Rice and +corne, and hath many villages vnder it, where in time of peace the +Portugals take their pleasure, but in time of warre the enemies haue the +spoile of them; in such wise that the Portugals haue little benefit by +them. Next vnto Daman you shall haue Basan, which is a filthy place in +respect of Daman: in this place is Rice, Corne, and Timber to make shippes +and gallies. And a small distance beyond Bassan is a little Iland called +Tana, a place very populous with Portugals, Moores, and Gentiles: these +haue nothing but Rice, there are many makers of Armesie, and weauers of +girdles of wooll and bumbast blacke and redde like to Moocharies. + + +Of the cities of Chaul, and of the Palmer tree. + +Beyond this Iland you shall finde Chaul in the firme land; and they are two +cities, one of the Portugals, and the other of the Moores: that city which +the Portugals haue is situate lower then the other, and gouerneth the mouth +of the harbour, and is very strongly walled: and as it were a mile and an +halfe distant from this is the city of Moores, gouerned by their king +Zamalluco. In the time of warres there cannot any great ships come to the +city of the Moores, because the Portugals with their ordinance will sincke +them, for that they must perforce passe by the castles of the Portugals: +both the cities are ports of the sea, and are great cities, and haue vnto +them great traffique and trade of merchandise, of all sorts of spices, +drugges, silke, cloth of silke, Sandols, Marsine, Versin, Porcelane of +China, Veluets and Scarlets that come from Portugall and from Meca: with +many other sortes of merchandise. There come euery yeere from Cochin, and +from Cananor tenne or fifteene great shippes laden with great Nuts cured, +and with sugar made of the selfe same Nuts called Giagra: the tree whereon +these Nuts doe grow is called the Palmer tree: and thorowout all the +Indies, and especially from this place to Goa there is great abundance of +them, and it is like to the Date tree. In the whole world there is not a +tree more profitable and of more goodnesse then this tree is, neither doe +men reape so much benefit of any other tree as they doe of this, there is +not any part of it but serueth for some vse, and none of it is woorthy to +be burnt. With the timber of this tree they make shippes without the +mixture of any other tree, and with the leaues thereof they make sailes, +and with the fruit thereof, which be a kinde of Nuts, they make wine, and +of the wine they make Sugar and Placetto, which wine they gather in the +spring of the yeere: out of the middle of the tree where continually there +goeth or runneth out white liquour like vnto water, in that time of the +yeere they put a vessel vnder euery tree, and euery euening and morning +they take it away full, and then distilling it with fire it maketh a very +strong liquour: and then they put it into buts, with a quantity of Zibibbo, +white or blacke and in short time it is made a perfect wine. After this +they make of the Nuts great store of oile: of the tree they make great +quantity of boordes and quarters for buildings. Of the barke of this tree +they make cables, ropes, and other furniture for shippes, and, as they say, +these ropes be better then they that are made of Hempe. They make of the +bowes, bedsteds, after the Indies fashion, and Scauasches for merchandise. +The leaues they cut very small, and weaue them, and so make sailes of them, +for all maner of shipping, or els very fine mats. And then the first rinde +of the Nut they stampe, and make thereof perfect Ockam to calke shippes, +great and small: and of the hard barke thereof they make spoones and other +vessels for meat, in such wise that there is no part thereof throwen away +or cast to the fire. When these Mats be greene they are full of an +excellent sweet water to drinke: and if a man be thirsty, with the liquour +of one of the Mats he may satisfie himselfe: and as this Nut ripeneth, the +liquour thereof turneth all to kernell. There goeth out of Chaul for +Mallaca, for the Indies, for Macao, for Portugall, for the coasts of +Melinde, for Ormus, as it were an infinite number and quantity of goods and +merchandise that come out of the kingdome of Cambaia, as cloth of bumbast +white, painted, printed, great quantity of Indico, Opium, Cotton, Silke of +euery sort, great store of Boraso in Paste, great store of Fetida, great +store of yron, corne, and other merchandise. [Sidenote: Great ordinance +made in pieces, and yet seruiceable.] The Moore king Zamalluco is of great +power, as one that at need may command, and hath in his camp, two hundred +thousand men of warre, and hath great store of artillery, some of them made +in pieces, which for their greatnesse can not bee carried to and fro: yet +although they bee made in pieces, they are so commodious that they worke +with them maruellous well, whose shotte is of stone, and there hath bene of +that shot sent vnto the king of Portugall for the rarenes of the thing. The +city where the king Zamalluco hath his being, is within the land of Chaul +seuen or eight dayes iourney, which city is called Abneger. Three score and +tenne miles from Chaul, towards the Indies, is the port of Dabul, an hauen +of the king Zamalluco: from thence to Goa is an hundred and fifty miles. + + +Goa. + +[Sidenote: The chiefe place the Portugals have in the Indies.] Goa is the +principall city that the Portugals haue in the Indies, wherein the Viceroy +with his royall Court is resident, and is in an Iland which may be in +circuit fiue and twenty or thirty miles: and the city with the boroughs is +reasonable bigge, and for a citie of the Indies it is reasonable faire, but +the Iland is farre more fairer: for it is as it were full of goodly +gardens, replenished with diuers trees and with the Palmer trees as is +aforesayd. This city is of great trafique for all sorts of marchandise +which they trade withall in those parts: and the fleet which commeth euery +yeere from Portugall, which are fiue or sixe great shippes that come +directly for Goa, arriue there ordinarily the sixth or tenth of September, +and there they remaine forty or fifty dayes, and from thence they goe to +Cochin, where they lade for Portugall, and often times they lade one shippe +at Goa and the other at Cochin for Portugall. Cochin is distant from Goa +three hundred miles. The city of Goa is situate in the kingdome of Dialcan +a king of the Moores, whose chiefe city is vp in the countrey eight dayes +iourney, and is called Bisapor: the king is of great power, for when I was +in Goa in the yeere of our Lord 1570, this king came to giue assault to +Goa, being encamped neere vnto it by a riuer side with an army of two +hundred thousand men of warre, and he lay at this siege foureteene moneths +in which time there was peace concluded, and as report went amongst his +people, there was great calamity and mortality which bred amongst them in +the time of Winter, and also killed very many elephants. [Sidenote: A very +good sale for horses.] Then in the yeere of our Lord 1567, I went from Goa +to Bezeneger the chiefe city of the king dome of Narsinga eight dayes +iourney from Goa, within the land, in the company of two other merchants +which carried with them three hundred Arabian horses to that king: because +the horses of that countrey are of a small stature, and they pay well for +the Arabian horses: and is requisite that the merchants sell them well, for +that they stand them in great charges to bring them out of Persia to Ormus, +and from Ormus to Goa, where the ship that bringeth twenty horses and +vpwards payeth no custome, neither ship nor goods whatsoeuer; whereas if +they bring no horses, they pay 8 per cento of all their goods: and at the +going out of Goa the horses pay custome, two and forty pagodies for euery +horse, which pagody may be of sterling money sixe shillings eight pence, +they be pieces of golde of that value. So that the Arabian horses are of +great value in those countreys, as 300, 400, 500 duckets a horse, and to +1000 duckets a horse. + + +Bezeneger. + +The city of Bezeneger was sacked in the yeere 1565, by foure kings of the +Moores, which were of great power and might: the names of these foure kings +were these following, the first was called Dialcan, the second Zamaluc, the +third Cotamaluc, and the fourth Viridy: and yet these foure kings were not +able to ouercome the city and the king of Bezeneger, but by treason. The +king of Bezeneger was a Gentile, and had, amongst all other of his +captaines, two which were notable, and they were Moores: and these two +captaines had either of them in charge threescore and ten or fourescore +thousand men. These two captaines being of one religion with the foure +kings which were Moores, wrought meanes with them to betray their owne king +into their hands. [Footnote: A most vnkind and wicked treason against their +prince: this they haue for giuing credit to strangers, rather then to their +owne natiue people.] The king of Bezeneger esteemed not the force of the +foure kings his enemies, but went out of his city to wage battell with them +in the fieldes; and when the armies were ioyned, the battell lasted but a +while not the space of foure houres, because the two traitourous captaines, +in the chiefest of the fight, with their companies turned their faces +against their king, and made such disorder in his armie, that as astonied +they set themselues to flight. Thirty yeeres was this kingdome gouerned by +three brethren which were tyrants, the which keeping the rightful king in +prison, it was their vse euery yeere once to shew him to the people, and +they at their pleasures ruled as they listed. These brethren were three +captaines belonging to the father of the king they kept in prison, which +when he died, left his sonne very yong, and then they tooke the gouernment +to themselues. The chiefest of these three was called Ramaragio, and sate +in the royall throne, and was called the king: the second was called +Temiragio, and he tooke the gouernment on him: the third was called +Bengatre, and he was captaine generall of the army. These three brethren +were in this battell, in the which the chiefest and the last were neuer +heard of quicke nor dead. [Sidenote: The sacking of the city.] Onely +Temiragio fled in the battel, hauing lost one of his eyes: when the newes +came to the city of the ouerthrow in the battell, the wiues and children of +these three tyrants, with their lawfull king (kept prisoner) fled away, +spoiled as they were, and the foure kings of the Moores entred the city +Bezeneger with great triumph, and there they remained sixe moneths, +searching vnder houses and in all places for money and other things that +were hidden, and then they departed to their owne kingdomes because they +were not able to maintaine such a kingdome as that was, so farre distant +from their owne countrey. + +When the kings were departed from Bezeneger, this Temiragio returned to the +city, and then beganne for to repopulate it, and sent word to Goa to the +Merchants, if they had any horses, to bring them to him, and he would pay +well for them, and for this cause the foresayd two Merchants that I went in +company withall, carried those horses that they had to Bezeneger. +[Sidenote: An excellent good policy to intrap men.] Also this Tyrant made +an order or lawe, that if any Merchant had any of the horses that were +taken in the foresayd battell or warres, although they were of his owne +marke, that he would giue as much for them as they would: and besides he +gaue generall safe conduct to all that should bring them. When by this +meanes he saw that there were great store of horses brought thither vnto +him, hee gaue the Merchants faire wordes, vntill such time as he saw they +could bring no more. Then he licenced the Merchants to depart, without +giuing them any thing for their horses, which when the poore men saw, they +were desperate, and as it were mad with sorrow and griefe. + +I rested in Bezeneger seuen moneths; although in one moneth I might haue +discharged all my businesse, for it was necessary to rest there vntill the +wayes were cleere of theeues, which at that time ranged vp and downe. And +in the time I rested there, I saw many strange and beastly deeds done by +the Gentiles. First, when there is any Noble man or woman dead, they burne +their bodies: and if a married man die, his wife must burne herselfe aliue, +for the loue of her husband, and with the body of her husband: so that when +any man dieth, his wife will take a moneths leaue, two or three, or as shee +will, to burne her selfe in, and that day being come, wherein shee ought to +be burnt, that morning shee goeth out of her house very earely, either on +horsebacke or on an eliphant, or else is borne by eight men on a smal +stage: in one of these orders she goeth, being apparelled like to a Bride, +carried round about the City, with her haire downe about her shoulders, +garnished with iewels and flowers, according to the estate of the party, +and they goe with as great ioy as Brides doe in Venice to their nuptials: +shee carrieth in her left hand a looking glasse, and in her right hand an +arrow, and singeth thorow the City as she passeth, and sayth, that she +goeth to sleepe with her deere spowse and husband. [Sidenote: A discription +of the burning place.] She is accompanied with her kindred and friends +vntill it be one or two of the clocke in the afternoone, then they goe out +of the City, and going along the riuers side called Nigondin, which runneth +vnder the walles of the City, vntill they come vnto a place where they vse +to make this burning of women, being widdowes, there is prepared in this +place a great square caue, with a little pinnacle hard by it, foure or fiue +steppes vp: the foresayd caue is full of dried wood. [Sidenote: Feasting +and dancing when they should mourne.] The woman being come thither, +accompanied with a great number of people which come to see the thing, then +they make ready a great banquet, and she that shall be burned eateth with +as great ioy and gladnesse, as though it were her wedding day: and the +feast being ended, then they goe to dancing and singing a certeine time, +according as she will. After this, the woman of her owne accord, commandeth +them to make the fire in the square caue where the drie wood is, and when +it is kindled, they come and certifie her thereof, then presently she +leaueth the feast, and taketh the neerest kinseman of her husband by the +hand, and they both goe together to the banke of the foresayd riuer, where +shee putteth off all her iewels and all her clothes, and giueth them to her +parents or kinsefolke and couering herselfe with a cloth, because she will +not be seene of the people being naked, she throweth herselfe into the +riuer, saying, O wretches, wash away your sinnes. Comming out of the water, +she rowleth herselfe into a yellow cloth of fourteene braces long: and +againe she taketh her husbands kinseman by the hand, and they go both +together vp to the pinnacle of the square caue wherein the fire is made. +When she is on the pinnacle, shee talketh and reasoneth with the people, +recommending vnto them her children and kindred. Before the pinnacle they +vse to set a mat, because they shall not see the fiercenesse of the fire, +yet there are many that will haue them plucked away, shewing therein an +heart not fearefull, and that they are not affrayd of that sight. When this +silly woman hath reasoned with the people a good while to her content, +there is another women that taketh a pot with oile, and sprinckleth it ouer +her head, and with the same she anoynteth all her body, and afterwards +throweth the pot into the fornace, and both the woman and the pot goe +together into the fire, and presently the people that are round about the +fornace throw after her into the caue great pieces of wood, so by this +meanes, with the fire and with the blowes that she hath with the wood +throwen after her, she is quickly dead, and after this there groweth such +sorrow and such lamentation among the people, that all their mirth is +turned into howling and weeping, in such wise, that a man could scarse +beare the hearing of it. [Sidenote: Mourning when they should reioice.] I +haue seene many burnt in this maner, because my house was neere to the gate +where they goe out to the place of burning: and when there dieth any great +man, his wife with all his slaues with whom hee hath had carnall +copulation, burne themselues together with him. Also in this kingdome I +haue seene amongst the base sort of people this vse and order, that the man +being dead, he is carried to the place where they will make his sepulchre, +and setting him as it were vpright, then commeth his wife before him on her +knees, casting her armes about his necke, with imbracing and clasping him, +vntill such time as the Masons haue made a wall round about them, and when +the wall is as high as their neckes, there commeth a man behinde the women +and strangleth her: then when she is dead, the workemen finish the wall +ouer their heads, and so they lie buried both together. Besides these, +there are an infinite number of beastly qualities amongst them, of which I +haue no desire to write. [Sidenote: The cause why the women do so burne +themselues.] I was desirous to know the cause why these women would so +wilfully burne themselues against nature and law, and it was told mee that +this law was of an antient time, to make prouision against the slaughters +which women made of their husbands. For in those dayes before this law was +made, the women for euery little displeasure that their husbands had done +vnto them, would presently poison their husbands, and take other men, and +now by reason of this law they are more faithfull vnto their husbands, and +count their liues as deare as their owne, because that after his death her +owne followeth presently. + +In the yeere of our Lord God 1567, for the ille successe that the people of +Bezeneger had, in that their City was sacked by the foure kings, the king +with his Court went to dwell in a castle eight dayes iourney vp in the land +from Bezenger, called Penegonde. Also sixe dayes iourney from Bezenger, is +the place where they get Diamants: I was not there, but it was tolde me +that it is a great place, compassed with a wall, and that they sell the +earth within the wall, for so much a squadron, and the limits are set how +deepe or how low they shall digge. Those Diamante that are of a certaine +sise and bigger then that sise, are all for the king, it is many yeeres +agone, since they got any there, for the troubles that haue bene in that +kingdome. The first cause of this trouble was, because the sonne of this +Temeragio had put to death the lawfull king which he had in prison, for +which cause the Barons and Noblemen in that kingdome would not acknowledge +him to be their king, and by this meanes there are many kings, and great +diuision in that kingdome, and the city of Bezeneger is not altogether +destroyed, yet the houses stand still, but empty, and there is dwelling in +them nothing, as is reported, but Tygers and other wilde beasts. The +circuit of this city is foure and twentie miles about, and within the +walles are certeine mountaines. The houses stand walled with earth, and +plaine, all sauing the three palaces of the three tyrant brethren, and the +Pagodes which are idole houses: these are made with lime and fine marble. I +haue seene many kings Courts, and yet haue I seene none in greatnesse like +to this of Bezeneger, I say, for the ordes of his palace, for it hath nine +gates or ports. First when you goe into the place where the king did lodge, +there are fiue great ports or gates: these are kept with Captaines and +souldiers: then within these there are foure lesser gates: which are kept +with Porters. Without the first gate there is a little porch, where there +is a Captaine with fiue and twentie souldiers, that keepeth watch and ward +night and day: and within that another, with the like guard, wherethorow +they come to a very faire Court, and at the end of that Court there is +another porch as the first, with the like guard, and within that another +Court. And in this wise are the first fiue gates guarded and kept with +those Captaines: and then the lesser gates within are kept with a guard of +Porters: which gates stand open the greatest part of the night, because the +custome of the Gentiles is to doe their businesse, and make their feasts in +the night, rather then by day. The city is very safe from theeues, for the +Portugall merchants sleepe in the streets, or vnder porches, for the great +heat which is there, and yet they neuer had any harme in the night. At the +end of two monethes, I determined to goe for Goa in the company of two +other Portugall Marchants, which were making ready to depart, with two +palanchines or little litters, which are very commodious for the way, with +eight Falchines which are men hired to cary the palanchines, eight for a +palanchine, foure at a time: they carry them as we vse to carry barrowes. +[Sidenote: Men ride on bullocks and trauell with them on the way.] And I +bought me two bullocks, one of them to ride on, and the other to carry my +victuals and prouision, for in that countrey they ride on bullocks with +pannels, as we terme them, girts and bridles, and they haue a very good +commodious pace. From Bezeneger to Goa in Summer it is eight dayes iourney, +but we went in the midst of Winter, in the moneth of Iuly, and were +fifteene dayes comming to Ancola on the sea coast, so in eight dayes I had +lost my two bullocks: for he that carried my victuals, was weake and could +not goe, the other when I came vnto a riuer where was a little bridge to +passe ouer, I put my bullocke to swimming, and in the middest of the riuer +there was a little Iland, vnto the which my bullocke went, and finding +pasture, there he remained still, and in no wise we could come to him: and +so perforce, I was forced to leaue him, and at that time there was much +raine, and I was forced to go seuen dayes a foot with great paines: and by +great chance I met with Falchines by the way, whom I hired to carry my +clothes and victuals. We had great trouble in our iourney, for that euery +day wee were taken prisoners, by reason of the great dissension in that +kingdome: and euery morning at our departure we must pay rescat foure or +fiue pagies a man. And another trouble wee had as bad as this, that when as +wee came into a new gouernours countrey, as euery day we did, although they +were al tributary to the king of Bezeneger, yet euery one of them stamped a +seueral coine of Copper, so that the money that we tooke this day would not +serue the next: at length, by the helpe of God, we came safe to Ancola, +which is a country of the Queene of Gargopam, tributary to the king of +Bezeneger. [Sidenote: The marchandise that come in and out to Bezeneger +euery yere.] The marchandise that went euery yere from Goa to Bezeneger +were Arabian Horses, Veluets, Damasks, and Sattens, Armesine of Portugall, +and pieces of China, Saffron, and Skarlets: and from Bezeneger they had in +Turky for their commodities, iewels, and Pagodies which be ducats of golde: +[Sidenote: the apparell of those people.] the apparell that they vse in +Bezeneger is Veluet, Satten, Damaske, Scarlet, or white Bumbast cloth, +according, to the estate of the person with long hats on their heads, +called Colae, made of Veluet, Satten, Damaske, or Scarlet, girding +themselues in stead of girdles with some fine white bombast doth: they +haue breeches after the order of the Turks: they weare on their feet plaine +high things called of them Aspergh, and at their eares they haue hanging +great plenty of golde. + +Returning to my voyage, when we were together in Ancola, one of my +companions that had nothing to lose, tooke a guide, and went to Goa, +whither they goe in foure dayes, the other Portugall not being disposed to +go, tarried in Ancola for that Winter. [Sidenote: Their Winter is our +Summer.] The Winter in those parts of the Indies beginneth the fifteenth of +May, and lasteth vnto the end of October: and as we were in Ancola, there +came another Marchant of horses in a palanchine, and two Portugall +souldiers which came from Zeilan, and two cariers of letters, which were +Christians borne in the Indies; all these consorted to goe to Goa together, +and I determined to goe with them, and caused a pallanchine to be made for +me very poorely of Canes; and in one of them Canes I hid priuily all the +iewels I had, and according to the order, I tooke eight Falchines to cary +me: and one day about eleuen of the clocke wee set forwards on our iourney, +and about two of the clocke in the afternoone, as we passed a mountains +which diuideth the territory of Ancola and Dialcan, I being a little +behinde my company was assaulted by eight theeues, foure of them had +swordes and targets, and the other foure had bowes and arrowes. When the +Falchines that carried me vnderstood the noise of the assault, they let the +pallanchine and me fall to the ground, and ranne away and left me alone, +with my clothes wrapped about me: presently the theeues were on my necke +and rifeling me, they stripped me starke naked, and I fained my selfe +sicke, because I would not leaue the pallanchine, and I had made me a +little bedde of my clothes; the theeues sought it very narrowly and +subtilly, and found two pursses that I had, well bound vp together, wherein +I had put my Copper money which I had changed for foure pagodies in Ancola. +The theeues thinking it had beene so many duckats of golde, searched no +further: then they threw all my clothes in a bush, and hied them away, and +as God would haue it, at their departure there fell from them an +handkercher, and when I saw it, I rose from my Pallanchine or couch, and +tooke it vp, and wrapped it together within my Pallanchine. Then these my +Falchines were of so good condition, that they returned to seeke mee, +whereas I thought I should not haue found so much goodnesse in them: +because they were payed their mony aforehand, as is the vse, I had thought +to haue seene them no more. Before their comming I was determined to plucke +the Cane wherein my iewels were hidden, out of my coutch, and to haue made +me a walking staffe to carry in my hand to Goa, thinking that I should haue +gone thither on foot, but by the faithfullness of my Falchines, I was rid +of that trouble, and so in foure dayes they carried me to Goa, in which +time I made hard fare, for the theeues left me neither money, golde, nor +siluer, and that which I did eat was giuen me of my men for Gods sake: and +after at my comming to Goa I payed them for euery thing royally that I had +of them. [Sidenote: Foure small fortes of the Portugals.] From Goa I +departed for Cochin, which is a voyage of three hundred miles, and betweene +these two cities are many holdes of the Portugals, as Onor, Mangalor, +Barzelor, and Cananor. The Holde or Fort that you shall haue from Goa to +Cochin that belongeth to the Portugals is called Onor, which is in the +kingdome of the queene of Battacella, which is tributary to the king of +Bezeneger: there is no trade there, but onely a charge with the Captaine +and company he keepeth there. And passing this place, you shall come to +another small castle of the Portugals called Mangalor, and there is very +small trade but onely for a little Rice: and from thence you goe to a +little fort called Bazelor, there they haue good store of Rice which is +carried to Goa: and from thence you shall goe to a city called Cananor, +which is a harquebush shot distant from the chiefest city that the king of +Cananor hath in his kingdome being a king of the Gentiles: and he and his +are very naughty and malicious people, alwayes hauing delight to be in +warres with the Portugales, and when they are in peace, it is for their +interest to let their merchandize passe: there goeth out of this kingdom of +Cananor, all the Cardamomum, great store of Pepper, Ginger, Honie, ships +laden with great Nuts, great quantitie of Archa, which is a fruit of the +bignesse of Nutmegs, which fruite they eate in all those partes of the +Indies and beyond the Indies, with the leafe of an Herbe which they call +Bettell, the which is like vnto our Iuie leafe, but a litle lesser and +thinner: [Sidenote: Bettel is a very profitable herbe in that countrey.] +they eate it made in plaisters with the lime made of Oistershels, and +thorow the Indies they spend great quantitie of money in this composition, +and it is vsed daily, which thing I would not haue beleeued, if I had not +seene it. The customers get great profite by these Herbes, for that they +haue custome for them. When this people eate and chawe this in their +mouthes, it maketh their spittle to bee red like vnto blood, and they say, +that it maketh a man to haue a very good stomacke and a sweete breath, but +sure in my iudgement they eate it rather to fulfill their filthie lustes, +and of a knauerie, for this Herbe is moyst and hote, and maketh a very +strong expulsion. [Sidenote: Enimies to the king of Portugall.] From +Cananor you go to Cranganor, which is another smal Fort of the Portugales +in the land of the king of Cranganor, which is another king of the +Gentiles, and a countrey of small importance, and of an hundreth and +twentie miles, full of thieues, being vnder the king of Calicut, a king +also of the Gentiles, and a great enemie to the Portugales, which when hee +is alwayes in warres, hee and his countrey is the nest and resting for +stranger theeues, and those bee called Moores of Carposa, because they +weare on their heads long red hats, and these thieues part the spoyles that +they take on the Sea with the king of Calicut, for hee giueth leaue vnto +all that will goe a rouing, liberally to goe, in such wise, that all along +that coast there is such a number of thieues, that there is no sailing in +those Seas but with great ships and very well armed, or els they must go in +company with the army of the Portugals from Cranganor to Cochin is 15. +miles. + + +Cochin. + +[Sidenote: Within Cochin is the kingdom of Pepper.] Cochin is, next vnto +Goa, the chiefest place that the Portugales haue in the Indies, and there +is great trade of Spices, drugges, and all other sortes of merchandize for +the kingdome of Portugale, and there within the land is the kingdome of +Pepper, which Pepper the Portugales lade in their shippes by bulke and not +in sackes: [Marginal note: The Pepper that the Portugals bring, is not so +good as that which goeth for Mecca, which is brought hither by the +streights.] the Pepper that goeth for Portugale is not so good as that +which goeth for Mecca, because that in times past the officers of the king +of Portugale made a contract with the king of Cochin, in the name of the +king of Portugale, for the prizes of Pepper, and by reason of that +agreement betweene them at that time made, the price can neither rise nor +fall, which is a very lowe and base price, and for this cause the villaines +bring it to the Portugales, greene and full of filthe. The Moores of Mecca +that giue a better price, haue it cleane and drie, and better conditioned. +All the Spices and drugs that are brought to Mecca, are stollen from thence +as Contrabanda. Cochin is two cities, one of the Portugales, and another of +the king of Cochin: that of the Portugales is situate neerest vnto the Sea, +and that of the king of Cochin is a mile and a halfe vp higher in the land, +but they are both set on the bankes of one riuer which is very great and of +a good depth of water, which riuer commeth out of the mountaines of the +king of the Pepper, which is a king of the Gentiles, in whose kingdom are +many Christians of saint Thomas order: the king of Cochin is also a king of +the Gentiles and a great faithfull friend to the king of Portugale, and to +those Portugales which are married, and are Citizens in the Citie Cochin of +the Portugales. And by this name of Portugales throughout all the Indies, +they call all the Christians that come out of the West, whether they bee +Italians, Frenchmen, or Almaines, and all they that marrie in Cochin do get +an office according to the trade he is of: [Sidenote: Great priuiledges +that the citizens of Cochin haue.] this they haue by the great priuileges +which the Citizens haue of that city, because there are two principal +commodities that they deale withal in that place, which are these. The +great store of Silke that commeth from China, and the great store of Sugar +which commeth from Bengala: the married Citizens pay not any custome for +these two commodities: for they pay 4. per cento custome to the king of +Cochin, rating their goods at their owne pleasure. Those which are not +married and strangers, pay in Cochin to the king of Portugale eight per +cento of all maner of merchandise. I was in Cochin when the Viceroy of the +king of Portugale wrought what hee coulde to breake the priuilege of the +Citizens, and to make them to pay custome as other did: at which time the +Citizens were glad to waigh their Pepper in the night that they laded the +ships withall that went to Portugale and stole the custome in the night. +The king of Cochin hauing vnderstanding of this, would not suffer any more +Pepper to bee weighed. Then presently after this, the marchants were +licensed to doe as they did before, and there was no more speach of this +matter, nor any wrong done. This king of Cochin is of a small power in +respect of the other kings of the Indies, for hee can make but seuentie +thousand men of armes in his campe: hee hath a great number of Gentlemen +which hee calleth Amochi, and some are called Nairi: these two sorts of men +esteeme not their liues any thing, so that it may be for the honour of +their king, they will thrust themselues forward in euery danger, although +they know they shall die. These men goe naked from the girdle vpwardes, +with a clothe rolled about their thighs, going barefooted, and hauing their +haire very long and rolled vp together on the toppe of their heads, and +alwayes they carrie their Bucklers or Targets with them and their swordes +naked, these Nairi haue their wiues common amongst themselues, and when any +of them goe into the house of any of these women, hee leaueth his sworde +and target at the doore, and the time that hee is there, there dare not any +bee so hardie as to come into that house. The kings children shall not +inherite the kingdome after their father, because they hold this opinion, +that perchance they were not begotten of the king their father, but of some +other man, therfore they accept for their king, one of the sonnes of the +kings sisters, or of some other woman of the blood roial, for that they be +sure, they are of the blood roiall. + +[Sidenote: A very strange thing hardly to be beleeued.] The Nairi and their +wiues vse for a brauerie to make great holes in their eares, and so bigge +and wide, that it is incredible, holding this opinion, that the greater the +holes bee, the more noble they esteeme themselues. I had leaue of one of +them to measure the circumference of one of them with a threed, and within +that circumference I put my arme vp to the shoulder, clothed as it was, so +that in effect they are monstrous great. Thus they doe make them when they +be litle, for then they open the eare, and hang a piece of gold or lead +thereat, and within the opening, in the whole they put a certaine leafe +that they haue for that purpose, which maketh the hole so great. They lade +ships in Cochin for Portugale and for Ormus, but they that goe for Ormus +carrie no Pepper but by Contrabanda, as for Sinamome they easilie get leaue +to carrie that away, for all other Spices and drugs they may liberally +carie them to Ormus or Cambaia, and so all other merchandize which come +from other places, but out of the kingdom of Cochin properly they cary away +with them into Portugale great abundance of Pepper, great quantitie of +Ginger dried and conserued, wild Sinamon, good quantity of Arecca, great +store of Cordage of Cairo, made of the barke of the tree of the great Nut, +and better then that of Hempe, of which they carrie great store into +Portugale. + +[Sidenote: Note the departing of ships from Cochin.] The shippes euery +yeere depart from Cochin to goe for Portugall, on the fift day December, or +the fift day of Ianuary. Nowe to follow my voyage for the Indies: from +Cochin I went to Coulam, distant from Cochin seuentie and two miles, which +Coulam is a small Fort of the king of Portugales, situate in the kingdom of +Coulam, which is a king of the Gentiles, and of small trade: at that place +they lade onely halfe a ship of Pepper, and then she goeth to Cochin to +take in the rest, and from thence to Cao Comori is seuentie and two miles, +and there endeth the coast of the Indies: and alongst this coast, neere to +the water side, and also to Cao Comori, downe to the lowe land of Chialon, +which is about two hundred miles, the people there are as it were all +turned to the Christian faith: there are also Churches of the Friers of S. +Pauls order, which Friers doe very much good in those places in turning the +people, and in conuerting them, and take great paines in instructing them +in the law of Christ. + + +The fishing for Pearles. + +[Sidenote: The order how they fish for pearles.] The Sea that lieth +betweene the coast which descendeth from Cao Comori, to the lowe land of +Chiaoal, and the Iland Zeilan, they call the fishing of Pearles, which +fishing they make euery yeere, beginning in March or Aprill, and it lasteth +fiftie dayes, but they doe not fishe euery yeere in one place, but one +yeere in one place, and another yeere in another place of the same sea. +When the time of this fishing draweth neere, then they send very good +Diuers, that goe to discouer where the greatest heapes of Oisters bee vnder +water, and right agaynst that place where greatest store of Oisters bee, +there they make or plant a village with houses and a Bazaro, all of stone, +which standeth as long as the fishing time lasteth, and it is furnished +with all things necessarie, and nowe and then it is neere vnto places that +are inhabited, and other times farre off, according to the place where they +fishe. The Fishermen are all Christians of the countrey, and who so will +may goe to fishing, paying a certaine dutie to the king of Portugall, and +to the Churches of the Friers of Saint Paule, which are in that coast. All +the while that they are fishing, there are three or foure Fustes armed to +defend the Fishermen from Rouers. It was my chance to bee there one time in +my passage, and I saw the order that they vsed in fishing, which is this. +There are three or foure Barkes that make consort together, which are like +to our litle Pilot boates, and a litle lesse, there goe seuen or eight men +in a boate: and I haue seene in a morning a great number of them goe out, +and anker in fifteene or eighteene fadome of water, which is the Ordinarie +depth of all that coast. When they are at anker, they cast a rope into the +Sea, and at the ende of the rope, they make fast a great stone, and then +there is readie a man that hath his nose and his eares well stopped, and +annointed with oyle, and a basket about his necke, or vnder his left arme, +then hee goeth downe by the rope to the bottome of the Sea, and as fast as +he can he filleth the basket, and when it is full, he shaketh the rope, and +his fellowes that are in the Barke hale him vp with the basket: and in such +wise they goe one by one vntill they haue laden their barke with oysters, +and at euening they come to the village, and then euery company maketh +their mountaine or heape of oysters one distant from another, in such wise +that you shall see a great long rowe of mountaines or heapes of oysters, +and they are not touched vntill such time as the fishing bee ended, and at +the ende of the fishing euery companie sitteth round about their mountaine +or heape of oysters, and fall to opening of them, which they may easilie +doe because they bee dead, drie and brittle: and if euery oyster had +pearles in them, it would bee a very good purchase, but there are very many +that haue no pearles in them: when the fishing is ended, then they see +whether it bee a great gathering or a badde: there are certaine expert in +the pearles whom they call Chitini, which set and make the price of pearles +[Marginal note: These pearles are prised according to the caracts which +they weigh, euery caract is 4. graines, and these men that prise hem haue +an instrument of copper with holes in it, which be made by degrees for to +sort the perles withall.] according to their carracts, beautie, and +goodnesse, making foure sortes of them. The first sort bee the round +pearles, and they be called Aia of Portugale, because the Portugales doe +buy them. The second sorte which are not round, are called Aia of Bengala. +The third sort which are not so good as the second, they call Aia of +Canara, that is to say, the kingdome of Bezeneger. The fourth and last +sort, which are the least and worst sort, are called Aia of Cambaia. Thus +the price being set, there are merchants of euery countrey which are readie +with their money in their handes, so that in a fewe dayes all is bought vp +at the prises set according to the goodnesse and caracts of the pearles. + +In this Sea of the fishing of pearles is an Iland called Manar, which is +inhabited by Christians of the countrey which first were Gentiles, and haue +a small hold of the Portugales being situate ouer agaynst Zeilan: and +betweene these two Ilands there is a chanell, but not very big, and hath +but a small depth therein; by reason whereof there cannot any great shippe +passe that way, but small ships, and with the increase of the water which +is at the change or the full of the Moone, and yet for all this they must +vnlade them and put their goods into small vessels to lighten them before +they can passe that way for feare of Sholdes that lie in the chanell, and +after lade them into their shippes to goe for the Indies, and this doe all +small shippes that passe that way, but those shippes that goe for the +Indies Eastwardes, passe by the coast of Coromandel, on the other side by +the land of Chilao which is betweene the firme land and the Iland Manor: +and going from the Indies to the coast of Coromandel, they loose some +shippes, but they bee emptie, because that the shippes that passe that way +discharge their goods at an Iland called Peripatane, and there land their +goods into small flat bottomed boates which drawe litle water, and are +called Tane, and can run ouer euery Shold without either danger or losse of +any thing, for that they tarrie in Peripatane vntill such time as it bee +faire weather. Before they depart to passe the Sholds, the small shippes +and flat bottomed boates goe together in companie, and when they haue +sailed sixe and thirtie miles, they arriue at the place where the Sholdes +are, and at that place the windes blowe so forciblie, that they are forced +to goe thorowe, not hauing any other refuge to saue themselues. The flat +bottomed boates goe safe thorow, where as the small shippes if they misse +the aforesayd chanell, sticke fast on the Sholdes, and by this meanes many +are lost: and comming backe for the Indies, they goe not that way, but +passe by the chanell of Manar as is abouesayd, whose chanell is Oazie, and +if the shippes sticke fast, it is a great chance if there be any danger at +all. The reason why this chanell is not more sure to goe thither, is, +because the windes that raigne or blowe betweene Zeilan and Manar, make the +chanell so shalow with water, that almost there is not any passage. From +Coa Comori to the Iland of Zeilan is 120. miles ouerthwart. + + +Zeilan. [Footnote: Ceylon.] + +Zeilan is an Iland, in my iudgement, a great deale bigger then Cyprus: on +that side towards the Indies lying Westward is the citie called Columba, +which is a hold of the Portugales, but without walles or enimies. It hath +towards the Sea a free port, the awfull king of that Iland is in Colombo, +and is turned Christian, and maintained by the king of Portugall, being +depriued of his kingdome. The king of the Gentiles, to whom this kingdome +did belong, was called Madoni, which had two sonnes, the first named +Barbinas the prince; and the second Ragine. This king by the pollicie of +his yoonger sonne, was depriued of his kingdome, who because hee had +entised and done that which pleased the armie and souldiours, in despight +of his father and brother being prince, vsurped the kingdome, and became a +great warriour. First, this Iland had three kings; the King of Cotta with +his conquered prisoners: the king of Candia, which is a part of that Iland, +and is so called by the name of Candia, which had a reasonable power, and +was a great friend to the Portugals, which sayd that hee liued secretly a +Christian; the third was the king of Gianifampatan. In thirteene yeeres +that this Ragine gouerned this Iland, he became a great tyrant. + +In this Iland there groweth fine Sinamom, great store of Pepper, great +store of Nuttes and Arochoe: there they make great store of Cairo +[Footnote: Cairo is a stuffe that they make rope with, the which is the +barke of a tree.] to make Cordage: it bringeth foorth great store of +Christall Cats eyes, or Ochi de Gati, and they say that they finde there +some Rubies, but I haue sold Rubies well there that I brought with me from +Pegu. I was desirous to see how they gather the Sinamom, or take it from +the tree that it groweth on, and so much the rather, because the time that +I was there, was the season which they gather it in, which was in the +moneth of Aprill, at which time the Portugals were in armes, and in the +field, with the king of the countrey; yet I to satisfie my desire, although +in great danger, tooke a guide with mee and went into a wood three miles +from the Citie, in which wood was great store of Sinamome trees growing +together among other wilde trees; and this Sinamome tree is a small tree, +and not very high, and hath leaues like to our Baie tree. In the moneth of +March or Aprill, when the sappe goeth vp to the toppe of the tree, then +they take the Sinamom from that tree in this wise. [Sidenote: The cutting +and gathering of Sinamom.] They cut the barke of the tree round about in +length from knot to knot, or from ioint to ioint, aboue and belowe, and +then easilie with their handes they take it away, laying it in the Sunne to +drie, and in this wise it is gathered, and yet for all this the tree dieth +not, [Sidenote: A rare thing.] but agaynst the next yeere it will haue a +new barke, and that which is gathered euery yeere is the best Sinamome: for +that which groweth two or three yeares is great, and not so good as the +other is; and in these woods groweth much Pepper. + + +Negapatan. + +From the Iland of Zeilan men vse to goe with small shippes to Negapatan, +within the firme land, and seuentie two miles off is a very great Citie, +and very populous of Portugals and Christians of the countrey, and part +Gentiles: it is a countrey of small trade, neither haue they any trade +there, saue a good quantitie of Rice, and cloth of Bumbast which they carie +into diuers partes: it was a very plentifull countrey of victuals but now +it hath a great deale lesse; and that abundance of victuals caused many +Portugales to goe thither and build houses, and dwell there with small +charge. + +This Citie belongeth to a nobleman of the kingdome of Bezeneger being a +Gentile, neuerthelesse the Portugales and other Christians are well +intreated there, and haue their Churches there with a monasterie of Saint +Francis order, with great deuotion and very well accommodated, with houses +round about: yet for all this, they are amongst tyrants, which alwayes at +their pleasure may doe them some harme, as it happened in the yeere of our +Lord God one thousand fiue hundred, sixtie and fiue: [Sidenote: A foolish +feare of Portugals.] for I remember very well, how that the Nayer, that is +to say, the lord of the citie, sent to the citizens to demaund of them +certaine Arabian horses, and they hauing denied them vnto him, and +gainesayd his demaund, it came to passe that this lord had a desire to see +the Sea, which when the poore citizens vnderstood, they doubted some euill, +to heare a thing which was not woont to bee, they thought that this man +would come to sacke the Citie, and presently they embarked themselues the +best they could with their mooueables, marchandize, iewels, money, and all +that they had, and caused the shippes to put from the shore. When this was +done, as their euill chance would haue it, the next night following, there +came such a great storme that it put all the shippes on land perforce, and +brake them to pieces, and all the goods that came on land and were saued, +were taken from them by the souldiours and armie of this lord which came +downe with him to see the Sea, and were attendant at the Sea side, not +thinking that any such thing would haue happened. + + +Saint Thomas or San Tome. + +[Sidenote: St. Thomas his sepulchre.] From Negapatan following my voyage +towards the East an hundred and fiftie miles, I found the house of blessed +Saint Thomas, which is a Church of great deuotion, and greatly regarded of +the Gentiles for the great miracles they haue heard to haue bene done by +that blessed Apostle: neere vnto this Church the Portugals haue builded +them a Citie in the countrey subiect to the king of Bezeneger, which Citie +although it bee not very great, yet in my iudgement, it is the fairest in +all that part of the Indies: and it hath very faire houses and faire +gardens in vacant places very well accommodated: it hath streetes large and +streight, with many Churches of great deuotion, their houses be set close +one vnto another, with little doores, euery house hath his defence, so that +by that meanes it is of force sufficient to defend the Portugals against +the people of that countrey. The Portugals there haue no other possession +but their gardens and houses that are within the citie: the customes belong +to the king of Bezeneger, which are very small and easie, for that it is a +countrey of great riches and great trade: there come euery yeere two or +three great ships very rich, besides many other small ships: one of the two +great ships goeth for Pegu, and the other for Malacca, laden with fine +Bumbast [Marginal Note: A painted kind of cloth and died of diuers colours +which those people delight much in, and esteeme them of great price.] cloth +of euery sort, painted, which is a rare thing, because those kinde of +clothes shew as they were gilded, with diuers colours, and the more they be +washed, the liuelier the colours will shew. Also there is other cloth of +Bumbast which is wouen with diuers colours, and is of great value: also +they make in Sant Tome great store of red Yarne, which they die with a +roote called Saia, and this colour will neuer waste, but the more it is +washed, the more redder it will shew: they lade this yarne the greatest +part of it for Pegu, because that there they worke and weaue it to make +cloth according to their owne fashion, and with lesser charges. It is a +maruelous thing to them which haue not seene the lading and vnlading of men +and marchandize in S. Tome as they do: it is a place so dangerous, that a +man cannot bee serued with small barkes, neither can they doe their +businesse with the boates of the shippes, because they would be beaten in a +thousand pieces, but they make certaine barkes (of purpose) high, which +they call Masadie, they be made of litle boards; one board being sowed to +another with small cordes, and in this order are they made. And when they +are thus made, and the owners will embarke any thing in them, either men or +goods, they lade them on land, and when they are laden, the Barke-men +thrust the boate with her lading into the streame, and with great speed +they make haste all that they are able to rowe out against the huge waues +of the sea that are on that shore, vntill that they carie them to the +ships: and in like maner they lade these Masadies at the shippes with +merchandise and men. When they come neere the shore, the Barke-men leap out +of the Barke into the Sea to keepe the Barke right that she cast not +athwart the shore, and being kept right, the Suffe of the Sea setteth her +lading dry on land without any hurt or danger, and sometimes there are some +of them that are ouerthrowen, but there can be no great losse, because they +lade but a litle at a time. All the marchandize they lade outwards, they +emball it well with Oxe hides, so that if it take wet, it can haue no great +harme. + +[Sidenote: In the Iland of Banda they lade Nutmegs for there they grow.] In +my voyage, returning in the yeere of our Lord God one thousand, fiue +hundred, sixtie and sixe, I went from Goa vnto Malacca, in a shippe or +Gallion of the king of Portugal, which went vnto Banda for to lade Nutmegs +and Maces: from Goa to Malacca are one thousand eight hundred miles, we +passed without the Iland Zeilan, and went through the chanell of Nicubar, +or els through the chanell of Sombero, which is by the middle of the Iland +of Sumatra, called in olde time Taprobana: [Sidenote: In the Ilands of +Andemaon, they eate one another.] and from Necubar to Pegu is as it were a +rowe or chaine of an infinite number of Ilands, of which many are inhabited +with wilde people, and they call those Ilands the Ilands of Andemaon, and +they call their people sauage or wilde, because they eate one another: also +these Ilands haue warre one with another, for they haue small Barkes, and +with them they take one another, and so eate one another: and if by euil +chance any ship be lost on those Ilands, as many haue bene, there is not +one man of those ships lost there that escapeth vneaten or vnslaine. These +people haue not any acquaintance with any other people, neither haue they +trade with any, but liue onely of such fruites as those Ilands yeeld: and +if any ship come neere vnto that place or coast as they passe that way, as +in my voyage it happened as I came from Malacca through the chanell of +Sombrero, there came two of their Barkes neere vnto our ship laden with +fruite, as with Mouces which wee call Adam apples, with fresh Nuts, and +with a fruite called Inani, which fruite is like to our Turneps, but is +very sweete and good to eate: they would not come into the shippe for any +thing that wee could doe: neither would they take any money for their +fruite, but they would trucke for olde shirtes or pieces of olde linnen +breeches, these ragges they let downe with a rope into their Barke vnto +them, and looke what they thought those things to bee woorth, so much +fruite they would make fast to the rope and let vs hale it in: and it was +told me that at sometimes a man shall haue for an old shirt a good piece of +Amber. + + +Sumatra. + +This Iland of Sumatra is a great Iland and deuided and gouerned by many +kings, and deuided into many chanels, where through there is passage: upon +the headland towardes the West is the kingdom of Assi gouerned by a Moore +king: this king is of great force and strength, as he that beside his great +kingdom, hath many Foists and Gallies. In his kingdom groweth great store +of Pepper, Ginger, Beniamin: he is an vtter enemy to the Portugals, and +hath diuers times bene at Malacca to fight against it, and hath done great +harme to the boroughes thereof, but the citie alway withstood him +valiantly, and with their ordinance did great spoile to his campe. At +length I came to the citie of Malacca. + + +The Citie Malacca. + +Malacca is a Citie of marueilous great trade of all kind of marchandize, +which come from diuers partes, because that all the shippes that saile in +these seas, both great and small, are bound to touch at Malacca to paie +their custome there, although they vnlade nothing at all, as we do at +Elsinor: and if by night they escape away, and pay not their custome, then +they fall into a greater danger after: for if they come into the Indies and +haue not the seale of Malacca, they pay double custome. I haue not passed +further then Malacca towards the East, but that which I wil speake of here +is by good information of them that haue bene there. The sailing from +Malacca towards the East is not common for all men, as to China and Iapan, +and so forwards to go who will, but onely for the king of Portugall and his +nobles, with leaue granted vnto them of the king to make such voiage, or to +the iurisdiction of the captaine of Malacca, where he expecteth to know +what voiages they make from Malacca thither, and these are the kings +voiages, that euery yere there departeth from Malacca 2. gallions of the +kings, one of them goeth to the Moluccos to lade Cloues, and the other +goeth to Banda to lade Nutmegs and Maces. These two gallions are laden for +the king, neither doe they carie any particular mans goods, sauing the +portage of the Mariners and souldiers, and for this cause they are not +voiages for marchants, because that going thither, they shal not haue where +to lade their goods of returne; and besides this, the captaine wil not cary +any marchants for either of these two places. There goe small shippes of +the Moores thither, which come from the coast of Iaua, and change or guild +their commodities in the kingdom of Assa, and these be the Maces, Cloues, +and Nutmegs, which go for the streights of Mecca. The voiages that the king +of Portugall granteth to his nobles are these, of China and Iapan, from +China to Iapan, and from Iapan to China, and from China to the Indies, and +the voyage of Bengala, Maluco, and Sonda, with the lading of fine cloth, +and euery sort of Bumbast cloth. Sonda is an Iland of the Moores neere to +the coast of Iaua, and there they lade pepper for China. [Sidenote: The +ship of drugs, so termed of the Portugals.] The ship that goeth euery yeere +from the Indies to China, is called the ship of Drugs, because she carieth +diuers drugs of Cambaia, but the greatest part of her lading is siluer. +From Malacca to China is eighteene hundred miles: and from China to Iapan +goeth euery yeere a shippe of great importance laden with Silke, which for +returne of their Silke bringeth barres of siluer which they trucke in +China. The distance betweene China and Iapan is foure and twentie hundred +miles, and in this way there are diuers Ilands not very bigge, in which the +Friers of saint Paul, by the helpe of God, make many Christians there like +to themselues. From these Ilands hitherwards the place is not yet +discouered for the great sholdnesse of Sandes that they find. The Portugals +haue made a small citie neere vnto the coast of China called Macao, whose +church and houses are of wood, and it hath a bishoprike, but the customs +belong to the king of China, and they goe and pay the same at a citie +called Canton which is a citie of great importance and very beautifull two +dayes iourney and a halfe from Macao. The people of China are Gentiles, and +are so iealous and fearefull, that they would not haue a stranger to put +his foote within their land: so that when the Portugals go thither to pay +their custome, and to buy their merchandize, they will not consent that +they shall lie or lodge within the citie, but send them foorth into the +suburbes. The countrey of China [Marginal note: China is vnder the +gouernment of the great Tartar.] is neere the kingdom of great Tartria, and +is a very great countrey of the Gentiles and of great importance, which may +be iudged by the rich and precious marchandize that come from thence, then +which I beleeue there are not better nor in greater quantitie, in the whole +world besides. + +First, great store of golde, which they carie to the Indies, made in plates +like to little shippes, and in value three and twentie caracts a peece, +very great aboundance of fine silke, cloth of damaske and taffata, great +quantitie of muske, great quantitie of Occam in barres, great quantitie of +quicksiluer and of Cinaper, great store of Camfora, an infinite quantitie +of Porcellane, made in vessels of diuerse sortes, great quantitie of +painted cloth and squares, infinite store of the rootes of China: and euery +yeere there commeth from China to the Indies, two or three great shippes, +laden with most rich and precious merchandise. [Sidenote: A yeerely Carouan +from Persia to China.] The Rubarbe commeth from thence ouer lande, by the +way of Persia, because that euery yeere there goeth a great Carouan from +Persia to China, which is in going thither sixe moneths. The Carouan +arriueth at a Citie called Lanchin, the place where the king is resident +with his Court. I spake with a Persian that was three yeeres in that citie +of Lanchin, and he tolde me that it was a great Citie and of great +importance. The voiages of Malacca which are in the iurisdiction of the +Captaine of the castle, are these: Euery yeere he sendeth a small shippe to +Timor to lade white Sandols, for all the best commeth from this Iland: +there commeth some also from Solor, but that is not so good: also he +sendeth another small ship euery yere to Cauchin China, to lade there wood +of Aloes, for that all the wood of Aloes commeth from this place, which is +in the firme land neere vnto China, and in that kingdome I could not knowe +how that wood groweth by any meanes. [Sidenote: A market kept aboord of the +ships.] For that the people of the countrey will not suffer the Portugales +to come within the land, but onely for wood and water, and as for all other +things that they wanted, as victuals or marchandise, the people bring that +a boord the ship in small barkes, so that euery day there is a mart kept in +the ship, vntill such time as she be laden: also there goeth another ship +for the said Captaine of Malacca to Sion, to lade Verzino: all these +voiages are for the Captaine of the castle of Malacca, and when he is not +disposed to make these voiages he selleth them to another. + + +The citie of Sion, or Siam. + +[Sidenote: A prince of marueilous strength and power.] Sion was the +imperiall seat, and a great Citie, but in the yeere of our Lord God one +thousand five hundred sixtie and seuen, it was taken by the king of Pegu, +which king made a voyage or came by lande foure moneths iourney with an +armie of men through his lande, and the number of his armie was a million +and foure hundreth thousand men of warre: when hee came to the Citie, he +gaue assault to it, and besieged it one and twentie moneths before he could +winne it, with great losse of his people, this I know, for that I was in +Pegu sixe moneths after his departure, and sawe when that his officers that +were in Pegu, sent fiue hundreth thousand men of warre to furnish the +places of them that were slaine and lost in that assault: yet for all this, +if there had not beene treason against the citie, it had not beene lost: +for on a night there was one of the gates set open, through the which with +great trouble the king gate into the citie, and became gouernour of Sion: +and when the Emperour sawe that he was betrayed, and that his enemie was in +the citie, he poysoned himselfe: and his wiues and children, friends and +noblemen, that were not slaine in the first affront of the entrance into +the citie, were all caried captiues into Pegu, where I was at the comming +home of the king with his triumphs and victorie, which comming home and +returning from the warres was a goodly sight to behold, to see the +Elephants come home in a square, laden with golde, siluer, iewels, and with +Noble men and women that were taken prisoners in that citie. + +Now to returne to my yoyage: I departed from Malacca in a great shippe +which went for Saint Tome, being a Citie situate on the coast of +Coromandel: and because the Captaine of the castles of Malacca had +vnderstanding by aduise that the king of Assi [Marginal note: Or Achem.] +would come with a great armie and power of men against them, therefore vpon +this he would not giue licence that any shippes should depart: Wherefore in +this ship wee departed from thence in the night, without making any +prouision of our water: and wee were in that shippe foure hundreth and odde +men: [Sidenote: The mountaines of Zerzeline.] we departed from thence with +intention to goe to an Iland to take in water, but the windes were so +contrary, that they would not suffer vs to fetch it, so that by this meanes +wee were two and fortie dayes in the sea as it were lost, and we were +driuen too and fro, so that the first lande that we discouered, was beyonde +Saint Tome, more then fiue hundreth miles, which were the mountaines of +Zerzerline, neere vnto the kingdome of Orisa, and so wee came to Orisa with +many sicke, and more that were dead for want of water: and they that were +sicke in foure dayes dyed; and I for the space of a yeere after had my +throat so sore and hoarse, that I could neuer satisfie my thirst in +drinking of water: I iudge the reason of my hoarsenesse to bee with soppes +that I wet in vineger and oyle, wherewith I susteyned my selfe many dayes. +There was not any want of bread nor of wine: but the wines of that countrey +are so hot that being drunke without water they will kill a man: neither +are they able to drinke them: when we beganne to want water, I sawe +certaine Moores that were officers in the ship, that solde a small dish +full for a duckat, after this I sawe one that would haue giuen a barre of +Pepper, which is two quintalles and a halfe, for a litle measure of water, +and he could not haue it. Truely I beleeue that I had died with my slaue, +whom then I had to serue mee, which cost mee verie deare: but to prouide +for the daunger at hand, I solde my slaue for halfe that he was worth, +because that I would saue his drinke that he drunke, to serue my owne +purpose, and to saue my life. + + +Of the kingdome of Orisa, and the riuer Ganges. + +Orisa was a faire kingdome and trustie, through the which a man might haue +gone with golde in his hande without any daunger at all, as long as the +lawefull King reigned which was a Gentile, who continued in the citie +called Catecha, which was within the lande size dayes iourney. This king +loued strangers marueilous well, especially marchants which had traffique +in and out of his kingdome, in such wise that hee would take no custome of +them, neither any other grieuous thing. [Sidenote: The commodities that go +out of Orisa.] Onely the shippe that came thither payde a small thing +according to her portage, and euery yeere in the port of Orisa were laden +fiue and twentie or thirtie ships great and small, with ryce and diuers +sortes of fine white bumbaste cloth, oyle of Zerzeline which they make of a +seed, and it is very good to eate and to fry fish withal, great store of +butter, Lacca, long pepper, Ginger, Mirabolans dry and condite, great store +of cloth of herbes, which is a kinde of silke which groweth amongst the +woods without any labour of man, [Marginal note: This cloth we call Nettle +cloth.] and when the bole thereof is growen round as bigge as an Orenge, +then they take care onely to gather them. About sixteene yeeres past, this +king with his kingdome were destroyed by the king of Patane, which was also +king of the greatest part of Bengala, and when he had got the kingdome, he +set custome there twenty pro cento, as Marchants paide in his kingdome: but +this tyrant enioyed his kingdome but a small time, but was conquered by +another tyrant, which was the great Mogol king of Agra, Delly, and of all +Cambaia, without any resistance. I departed from Orisa to Bengala, to the +harbour Piqueno, which is distant from Orisa towardes the East a hundred +and seuentie miles. [Sidenote: The riuer of Ganges.] They goe as it were +rowing alongst the coast fiftie and foure miles, and then we enter into the +riuer Ganges: from the mouth of this riuer, to a citie called Satagan, +where the marchants gather themselues together with their trade, are a +hundred miles, which they rowe in eighteene houres with the increase of the +water: in which riuer it floweth and ebbeth as it doth in the Thamis, and +when the ebbing water is come, they are not able to rowe against it, by +reason of the swiftnesse of the water, yet their barkes be light and armed +with oares, like to Foistes, yet they cannot preuaile against that streame, +but for refuge must make them fast to the banke of the riuer vntill the +next flowing water, and they call these barkes Bazaras and Patuas: they +rowe as well as a Galliot, or as well as euer I haue seene any. A good +tides rowing before you come to Satagan, you shall haue a place which is +called Buttor, and from thence vpwards the ships doe not goe, because that +vpwardes the riuer is very shallowe, and litle water. Euery yeere at Buttor +they make and vnmake a Village, with houses and shoppes made of strawe, and +with all things necessarie to their vses, and this village standeth as long +as the ships ride there, and till they depart for the Indies, and when they +are departed, euery man goeth to his plot of houses, and there setteth fire +on them, which thing made me to maruaile. For as I passed vp to Satagan, I +sawe this village standing with a great number of people, with an infinite +number of ships and Bazars, and at my returne comming downe with my +Captaine of the last ship, for whom I tarried, I was al amazed to see such +a place so soone razed and burnt, and nothing left but the signe of the +burnt houses. The small ships go to Satagan, and there they lade. + + +Of the citie of Satagan. + +[Sidenote: The commodities that are laden in Satagan.] In the port of +Satagan euery yeere lade thirtie or fiue and thirtie ships great and small, +with rice, cloth of Bombast of diuerse sortes, Lacca, great abundance of +sugar, Mirabolans dried and preserued, long pepper, oyle of Zerzeline, and +many other sorts of marchandise. The citie of Satagan is a reasonable faire +citie for a citie of the Moores, abounding with all things, and was +gouerned by the king of Patane, and now is subiect to the great Mogol. I +was in this kingdome foure moneths, whereas many marchants did buy or +fraight boates for their benefites, and with these barkes they goe vp and +downe the riuer of Ganges to faires, buying their commoditie with a great +aduantage, because that euery day in the weeke they haue a faire, now in +one place, and now in another, and I also hired a barke, and went vp and +downe the riuer and did my businesse, and so in the night I saw many +strange things. The kingdome of Bengala in times past hath bene as it were +in the power of Moores, neuerthelesse there is great store of Gentiles +among them; alwayes whereas I haue spoken of Gentiles, is to be vnderstood +Idolaters, and whereas I speak of Moores I meane Mahomets sect. [Sidenote: +A ceremony of the gentiles when they be dead.] Those people especially that +be within the land doe greatly worship the riuer of Ganges: for when any is +sicke, he is brought out of the countrey to the banke of the riuer, and +there they make him a small cottage of strawe, and euery day they wet him +with that water, whereof there are many that die, and when they are dead, +they make a heape of stickes and boughes and lay the dead bodie thereon, +and putting fire thereunto, they let the bodie alone vntill it be halfe +rosted, and then they take it off from the fire, and make an emptie iarre +fas about his necke, and so throw him into the riuer. These things euery +night as I passed vp and downe the riuer I saw for the space of two +moneths, as I passed to the fayres to buy my commodities with the +marchants. And this is the cause that the Portugales will not drinke of the +water of the riuer Ganges, yet to the sight it is more perfect and clearer +then the water of Nilus is. From the port Piqueno I went to Cochin, and +from Cochin to Malacca, from whence I departed for Pegu being eight hundred +miles distant. That voyage is woont to be made in fiue and twentie or +thirtie dayes, but we were foure moneths, and at the ende of three moneths +our ship was without victuals. The Pilot told vs that wee were by his +altitude not farre from a citie called Tanasary, in the kingdome of Pegu, +and these his words were not true, but we were (as it were) in the middle +of many Ilands, and many vninhabited rockes, and there were also some +Portugales that affirmed that they knew the land, and knewe also where the +citie of Tanasari was. + +[Sidenote: Marchandise comming from Sion.] This citie of right belongeth to +the kingdome of Sion, which is situate on a great riuers side, which +commeth out of the kingdome of Sion: and where this riuer runneth into the +sea, there is a village called Mirgim, in whose harbour euery yeere there +lade some ships with Verzina, Nypa, and Beniamin, a few cloues, nutmegs and +maces which come from the coast of Sion, but the greatest marchandise there +is Verzin and Nypa, which is an excellent wine, which is made of the flower +of a tree called Nyper. [Sidenote: Niper wine good to cure the French +disease.] Whose licquour they distill, and so make an excellent drinke +cleare as christall, good to the mouth, and better to the stomake, and it +hath an excellent gentle vertue, that if one were rotten with the French +pockes, drinking good store of this, he shall be whole againe, and I haue +seene it proued, because that when I was in Cochin, there was a friend of +mine, whose nose beganne to drop away with that disease, and he was +counselled of the doctors of phisicke, that he should goe to Tanasary at +the time of the new wines, and that he should drinke of the myper wine, +night and day, as much as he could before it was distilled, which at that +time is most delicate, but after that it is distilled, it is more strong, +and if you drinke much of it, it will fume into the head with drunkennesse. +This man went thither, and did so, and I haue seene him after with a good +colour and sound. This wine is very much esteemed in the Indies, and for +that it is brought so farre off, it is very deare: in Pegu ordinarily it it +good cheape, because it is neerer to the place where they make it, and +there is euery yeere great quantitie made thereof. And returning to my +purpose, I say, being amongst these rockes, and farre from the land which +is ouer against Tanasary, with great scarcitie of victuals, and that by the +saying of the Pylot and two Portugales, holding then firme that wee were in +front of the aforesayd harbour, we determined to goe thither with our boat +and fetch victuals, and that the shippe should stay for vs in a place +assigned. We were twentie and eight persons in the boat that went for +victuals, and on a day about twelue of the clocke we went from the ship, +assuring our selues to bee in the harbour before night in the aforesaid +port, wee rowed all that day and a great part of the next night, and all +the next day without finding harbour, or any signe of good landing, and +this came to passe through the euill counsell of the two Portugales that +were with vs. + +For we had ouershot the harbour and left it behind vs, in such wise that we +had lost the lande inhabited, together with the shippe, and we eight and +twentie men had no maner of victuall with vs in the boate, but it was the +Lords will that one of the Mariners had brought a little rice with him in +the boate to barter away for some other thing, and it was not so much but +that three or foure men would haue eaten it at a meale: I tooke the +gouernment of this Ryce, promising that by the helpe of God that Ryce +should be nourishment for vs vntil it pleased God to send vs to some place +that was inhabited: [Sidenote: Great extemitie at sea.] and when I slept I +put the ryce into my bosome because they should not rob it from me: we were +nine daies rowing alongst the coast, without finding any thing but +countreys vninhabited, and desert Ilands, where if we had found but grasse +it would haue seemed sugar vnto vs, but wee could not finde any, yet we +found a fewe leaues of a tree, and they were so hard that we could not +chewe them, we had water and wood sufficient, and as wee rowed, we could +goe but by flowing water, for when it was ebbing water, wee made fast our +boat to the banke of one of those Ilandes, and in these nine dayes that we +rowed, we found a caue or nest of Tortoises egges, wherein were one hundred +fortie and foure egges, the which was a great helpe vnto vs: these egges +are as bigge as a hennes egge, and haue no shell about them but a tender +skinne, euery day we sodde a kettle full of those egges, with an handfull +of rice in the broth thereof: it pleased God that at the ende of nine dayes +we discouered certaine fisher men, a fishing with small barkes, and we +rowed towardes them, With a good cheare, for I thinke there were neuer men +more glad then we were, for wee were so sore afflicted with penurie, that +we could scarce stande on our legges. Yet according to the order that we +set for our ryce, when we sawe those fisher men, there was left sufficient +for foure dayes. [Sidenote: Tauay under the king of Pegu.] The first +village that we came to was in the gulfe of Tauay, vnder the king of Pegu, +whereas we found great store of victuals: then for two or three dayes after +our arriuall there, we would eate but litle meate any of vs, and yet for +all this, we were at the point of death the most part of vs. From Tauay to +Martauan, in the kingdome of Pegu, are seuentie two miles. We laded our +bote with victuals which were aboundantly sufficient for sixe moneths, from +whence we departed for the port and Citie of Martauan, where in short time +we arriued, but we found not our ship there as we had thought we should, +from whence presently we made out two barkes to goe to looke for her. And +they found her in great calamitie and neede of water, being at an anker +with a contrary winde, which came very ill to passe, because that she +wanted her boat a moneth, which should haue made her prouision of wood and +water, the shippe also by the grace of God arriued safely in the aforesaid +port of Martauan. + + +The Citie of Martauan. + +[Sidenote: Martauan a citie vnder the king of Pegu.] We found in the Citie +of Martauan ninetie Portugales of Merchants and other base of men, which +had fallen at difference with the Retor or gouernour of the citie, and all +for this cause, that certaine vagabondes of the Portugales had slaine fiue +falchines of the king of Pegu, which chaunced about a moneth after the king +of Pegu was gone with a million and foure hundred thousand men to conquere +the kingdome of Sion. [Sidenote: A custome that these people haue when the +king is in the warres.] They haue for custome in this Countrey and +kingdome, the king being wheresoeuer his pleasure is to bee out of his +kingdome, that euery fifteene dayes there goeth from Pegu a Carouan of +Falchines, with euery one a basket on his head full of some fruites or +other delicates or refreshings, and with cleane clothes: it chaunced that +this Carauan passing by Martauan, and resting themselues there a night, +there happened betweene the Portugales and them wordes of despight, and +from wordes to blowes, and because it was thought that the Portugales had +the worse, the night following, when the Falchines were a sleepe with their +companie, the Portugales went and cut off their heads. [Sidenote: A law in +Pegu for killing of men.] Now there is a law in Pegu, that whosoeuer +killeth a man, he shall buy the shed blood with his money, according to the +estate of the person that is slaine, but these Falchines being the seruants +of the king, the Retors durst hot doe any thing in the matter, without the +consent of the king, because it was necessarie that the king should knowe +of such a matter. When the king had knowledge thereof, he gaue +commaundement that the malefactors should be kept vntill his comming home, +and then be would duely minister iustice, but the Captaine of the +Portugales would not deliuer those men, but rather set himselfe with all +the rest in armes, and went euery day through the Citie marching with his +Drumme und ensignes displayd. [Sidenote: Great pride of the Portugales.] +For at that time the Citie was emptie of men, by reason they were gone all +to the warres, and in businesse of the king: in the middest of this rumour +wee came thither, and I thought it, a strange thing to see the Portugales +vse such insolencie in another mans Citie. And I stoode in doubt of that +which came to passe, and would not vnlade my goods because that they were +more sure in the shippe then on the land, the greatest part of the lading +was the owners of the shippe, who was in Malacca, yet there were diuerse +marchants there, but their goods were of small importance, all those +marchants tolde me that they would not vnlade any of their goods there, +vnlesse I would vnlade first, yet after they left my counsell and followed +their owne, and put their goods a lande and lost euery whit. The Retor with +the customer sent for mee, and demaunded why I put not my goods a lande, +and payed my custome as other men did? To whom I answered, that I was a +marchant that was newly come thither, and seeing such disorder amongst the +Portugales, I doubted the losse of my goods which cost me very deare, with +the sweate of my face, and for this cause I was determined not to put my +goods on lande, vntil such time as his honour would assure me in the name +of the king, that I should haue no losse, and although there came harme to +the Portugales, that neither I nor my goods should haue any hurt, because I +had neither part nor any difference with them in this tumult: my reason +sounded well in the Retors eares, and so presently he sent for the Bargits, +which are as Counsellors of the Citie, and then they promised mee on the +kings head or in the behalfe of the king, that neither I nor my goods +should haue any harme, but that we should be safe and sure: of which +promise there were made publike notes. And then I sent for my goods and had +them on land, and payde my custome, which is in that countrey ten in the +hundreth of the same goods, and for my more securitie I tooke a house right +against the Retors house. The Captaine of the Portugales, and all the +Portugall marchants were put out of the Citie, and I with twentie and two +poore men which were officers in the shippe had my dwelling in the Citie. +[Sidenote: A reuenge on the Portugales.] After this the Gentiles deuised to +be reuenged of the Portugales; but they would not put it in execution, +vntil such time as our small shippe had discharged all her goods, and then +the next night following came from Pegu foure thousand souldiers with some +Elephants of warre; and before that they made any tumult in the citie, the +Retor sent, and gaue commaundement to all Portugales that were in the +Citie, when they heard any rumour or noyse, that for any thing they should +not goe out of their houses, as they tendered their owne health. Then foure +houres within night I heard a great rumour and noyse of men of warre, with +Elephants which threw downe the doores of the ware-houses of the +Portugales, and their houses of wood and strawe, in the which tumult there +were some Portugales wounded, and one of them slaine; and others without +making proofe of their manhoode, which the day before did so bragge, at +that time put themselues to flight most shamefully, and saued themselues a +boord of litle shippes, that were at an anker in the harbour, and some that +were in their beds fled away naked, and that night they caried away all the +Portugalles goods out of the suburbes into the Citie, and those Portugales +that had their goods in the suburbes also. After this the Portugales that +were fledde into the shippes to saue themselues, tooke a newe courage to +themselues, and came on lande and set fire on the houses in the suburbes, +which houses being made of boorde and strawe, and the winde blowing fresh, +in small time were burnt and consumed, with which fire halfe the Citie had +like to haue beene burnt; when the Portugales had done this, they were +without all hope to recouer any part of their goods againe, which goods +might amount to the summe of sixteene thousand duckats, which, if they had +not set fire to the towne, they might haue had againe without any losse at +all. Then the Portugales vnderstanding that this thing was not done by the +consent of the king, but by his Lieutenant and the Retor of the citie were +very ill content, knowing that they had made a great fault, yet the next +morning following, the Portugales beganne to bende and shoot their +ordinance against the Citie, which batterie of theirs continued foure +dayes, but all was in vaine, for the shotte neuer hit the Citie, but +lighted on the top of a small hill neere vnto it, so that the citie had no +harme. When the Retor perceiued that the Portugales made battery against +the Citie, be tooke one and twentie Portugales that were there in the +Citie, and sent them foure miles into the Countrey, there to tarry vntill +such time as the other Portugales were departed, that made the batterie, +who after their departure let them goe at their owne libertie without any +harme done vnto them. I my selfe was alwayes in my house with a good guard +appointed me by the Retor, that no man should doe me iniurie, nor harme me +nor my goods; in such wise that hee perfourmed all that he had promised me +in the name of the king, but he would not let me depart before the comming +of the king, which was greatly to my hinderance, because I was twenty and +one moneths sequestred, that I could not buy nor sell any kinde of +marchandise. Those commodities that I brought thither, were peper, sandols, +and Porcellan of China: so when the king was come home, I made my +supplication vnto him, and I was licenced to depart when I would. + +From Martauan I departed to goe to the chiefest Citie in the kingdome of +Pegu, which is also called after the name of the kingdome, which voyage is +made by sea in three or foure daies: they may goe also by lande, but it is +better for him that hath marchandize to goe by sea and lesser charge. And +in this voyage you shall haue a Macareo, which is one of the most +marueilous things [Marginal note: A thing most marueilous, that at the +comming of a tide the earth should quake.] in the world that Nature hath +wrought, and I neuer saw any thing so hard to be beleeued as this, to wit, +the great increasing and diminishing of the water there at one push or +instant, and the horrible earthquake and great noyse that the said Macareo +maketh where it commeth. We departed from Martauan in barkes, which are +like to our Pylot boates, with the increase of the water, and they goe as +swift as an arrowe out of a bow, so long as the tide runneth with them, and +when the water is at the highest, then they drawe themselues out of the +Channell towardes some banke, and there they come to anker, and when the +water is diminished, then they rest on dry land: and when the barkes rest +dry, they are as high from the bottome of the Chanell, as any house top is +high from the ground. [Sidenote: This tide is like to the tides in our +riuer of Seuerne.] They let their barkes lie so high for this respect, that +if there should any shippe rest or ride in the Chanell, with such force +commeth in the water, that it would ouerthrowe shippe or barke: yet for all +this, that the barkes be so farre out of the Chanell, and though the water +hath lost her greatest strength and furie before it come so high, yet they +make fast their prowe to the streme, and oftentimes it maketh them very +fearefull, and if the anker did not holde her prowe vp by strength, shee +would be ouerthrowen and lost with men and goods. [Sidenote: These tides +make their iust coarse as ours doe.] When the water beginneth to increase, +it maketh such a noyse and so great that you would think it an earthquake, +and presently at the first it maketh three waues. So that the first washeth +ouer the barke, from stemme to sterne, the second is not so furious as the +first, and the thirde rayseth the Anker, and then for the space of sixe +houres while the water encreaseth, they rowe with such swiftnesse that you +would thinke they did fly: in these tydes there must be lost no iot of +time, for if you arriue not at the stagions before the tyde be spent, you +must turne back from whence you came. For there is no staying at any place, +but at these stagions, and there is more daunger at one of these places +then at another, as they be higher and lower one then another. When as you +returne from Pegu to Martauan, they goe but halfe the tide at a time, +because they will lay their barkes vp aloft on the bankes, for the reason +aforesayd. I could neuer gather any reason of the noyse that this water +maketh in the increase of the tide, and in deminishing of the water. There +is another Macareo in Cambaya, [Sidenote: The Macareo is a tide or a +currant.] but that is nothing in comparison of this. By the helpe of God we +came safe to Pegu, which are two cities, the olde and the newe, in the olde +citie are the Marchant strangers, and marchants of the Countrey, for there +are the greatest doings and the greatest trade. This citie is not very +great, but it hath very great suburbes. Their houses be made with canes, +and couered with leaues, or with strawe, but the marehants haue all one +house or Magason, which house they call Godon which is made of brickes, and +there they put all their goods of any valure, to saue them from the often +mischances that there happen to houses made of such stuffe. In the newe +citie is the pallace of the king, and his abiding place with all his barons +and nobles, and other gentlemen; and in the time that I was there, they +finished the building of the new citie: it is a great citie, very plaine +and flat, and foure square, walled round about and with ditches that +compasse the wals about with water, in which ditches are many crocodils, it +hath no drawe bridges, yet it hath twentie gates, fiue for euery square on +the walles, there are many places made for centinels to watch, made of wood +and couered or guilt with gold, the streetes thereof are the fayrest that I +haue seene, they are as straight as a line from one gate to another, and +standing at the one gate you may discouer to the other, and they are as +broad as 10 or 12 men may ride a breast in them: [Sidenote: A rich and +stately palace.] and those streetes that be thwart are faire and large, +these streetes, both on the one side and on the other, are planted at the +doores of the houses, with nut trees of India, which make a very commodious +shadowe, the houses be made of wood and couered with a kind of tiles in +forme of cups, very necessary for their vse, the kings palace is in the +middle of the citie, made in forme of a walled castle, with ditches full of +water round about it, the lodgings within are made of wood all ouer gilded, +with fine pinacles, and very costly worke, couered with plates of golde. +Truely it may be a kings house: within the gate there is a faire large +court, from the one side to the other, wherein there are made places for +the strongest and stoutest Eliphants appointed for the seruice of the kings +person, and amongst all other Eliphants, he hath foure that be white, a +thing so rare that a man shall hardly finde another king that hath any +such, and if this king knowe any other that hath white Eliphantes, he +sendeth for them as for a gift. The time that I was there, there were two +brought out of a farre Countrey, and that cost me something the sight of +them, for they commaund the marchants to goe to see them, and then they +must giue somewhat to the men that bring them: the brokers of the marchants +giue for euery man halfe a duckat, which they call a Tansa, [Marginal note: +This money called Tansa is halfe a duckat which may be three shillings and +foure pence.] which amounteth to a great summe, for the number of merchants +that are in that citie; and when they haue payde the aforesayde Tansa, they +may chuse whether they will see them at that time or no, because that when +they are in the kings stall, euery man may see them that will: but at that +time they must goe and see them, for it is the kings pleasure it should be +so. This king amongst all other his titles, is called the King of the white +Eliphantes and it is reported that if this king knewe any other king that +had any of these white Eliphantes, and woud not send them vnto him, that he +would hazard his whole kingdome to conquer them, he esteemeth these white +Eliphantes very deerely, and they are had in great regard, and kept with +very meete seruice, euery one of them is in a house, all guilded ouer, and +they haue their meate giuen them in vessels of siluer and golde, there is +one blacke Eliphant the greatest that hath bene seene, and is kept +according to his bignesse, he is nine cubites high, which is a marueilous +thing. [Sidenote: A warlike policie.] It is reported that this king hath +foure thousand Eliphantes of warre, and all haue their teeth, and they vse +to put on their two vppermost teeth sharpe spikes of yron, and make them +fast with rings, because these beastes fight, and make battell with their +teeth; hee hath also very many yong Eliphants that haue not their teeth +sprowted foorth: also this king hath a braue deuise in hunting to take +these Eliphantes when hee will, two miles from the Citie. [Sidenote: An +excellent deuise to hunt, and take wilde Elephants.] He hath builded a +faire pallace all guilded, and within it a faire Court, and within it and +rounde about there are made an infinite number of places for men to stande +to see this hunting: neere vnto this Pallace is a mighty great wood, +through the which the hunts-men of the king ride continually on the backs +of the feminine Eliphants, teaching them in this businesse. Euery hunter +carieth out with him fiue or sixe of these feminines, and they say that +they anoynt the secret places with a certaine composition that they haue, +that when the wilde Eliphant doeth smell thereunto, they followe the +feminines and cannot leaue them: when the hunts-men haue made prouision and +the Eliphant is so entangled, they guide the feminines towards the Pallace +which is called Tambell, and this Pallace hath a doore which doth open and +shut with engines, before which doore there is a long streight way with +trees on both the sides, which couereth the way in such wise as it is like +darkenesse in a corner: the wilde Eliphant when he commeth to this way, +thinketh that he is in the woods. At end of this darke way there is a great +field, when the hunters haue gotten this praye, when they first come to +this field, they send presently to giue knowledge thereof to the Citie, and +with all speed there go out fiftie or sixtie men on horsebacke, and doe +beset the fielde rounde about: in the great fielde then the females which +are taught in this businesse goe directly to the mouth of the darke way, +and when as the wilde Eliphant is entred in there, the hunters shoute and +make a great noyse, as much as is possible, to make the wilde Eliphant +enter in at the gate of that Pallace, which is then open, and as soone as +he is in, the gate is shut without any noyse, and so the hunters with the +female Eliphants and the wilde one are all in the Court together, and then +within a small time the females withdraw themselues away one by one out of +the Court, leauing the wilde Eliphant alone: [Sidenote: An excellent +pastime of the Eliphants.] and when he perceiueth that he is left alone, he +is so madde that for two or three houres to see him, it is the greatest +pleasure in the world: he weepeth, hee flingeth, hee runneth, he iustleth, +hee thrusteth vnder the places where the people stand to see him, thinking +to kil some of them, but the posts and timber is so strong and great, that +hee cannot hurt any body, yet hee oftentimes breaketh his teeth in the +grates; at length when hee is weary and hath laboured his body that hee is +all wet with sweat, then hee plucketh in his truncke into his mouth, and +then hee throweth out so much water out of his belly, that he sprinckleth +it ouer the heades of the lookers on, to the vttermost of them, although it +bee very high: and then when they see him very weary, there goe certaine +officers into the Court with long sharpe canes [Marginal note: These canes +are like to them in Spain which they call Ioco de tore.] in their hands, +and prick him that they make him to goe into one of the houses that is made +alongst the Court for the same purpose: as there are many which are made +long and narrow, and when the Eliphant is in, he cannot turne himself to go +backe againe. And it is requisite that these men should be very wary and +swift, for although their canes be long, yet the Eliphant would kill them +if they were not swift to saue themselues: at length when they haue gotten +him into one of those houses, they stand ouer him in a loft and get ropes +vnder his belly and about his necke, and about his legges, and binde him +fast, and so let him stand foure or fiue dayes, and giue him neither meate +nor drinke. At the ende of these foure or fiue dayes, they vnloose him and +put one of the females vnto him, and giue him meate and drinke, and in +eight dayes he is become tame. In my. iudgement there is not a beast so +intellectiue as are these Eliphants, nor of more vnderstanding in al the +world: for he wil do all things that his keeper saith, so that he lacketh +nothing but humaine speech. + +It is reported that the greatest strength that the king of Pegu hath is in +these Eliphants, for when they goe to battell, they set on their backes a +Castle of wood bound thereto, with bands vnder their bellies: and in euery +Castle foure men very commodiously set to fight with harqubushes, with +bowes and arrowes, with darts and pikes, and other launcing weapons: and +they say that the skinne of this Eliphant is so hard, that an harquebusse +will not pierce it, vnlesse it bee in the eye, temples, or some other +tender place of his body. [Sidenote: A goodly order in a barbarous people.] +And besides this, they are of great strength, and haue a very excellent +order in their battel, as I haue seene at their feastes which they make in +the yeere, in which feastes the king maketh triumphes, which is a rare +thing and worthy memorie, that in so barbarous a people should be such +goodly orders as they haue in their armies, which be distinct in squares of +Eliphants, of horsemen, of harquebushers and pikemen, that truly the number +of men are infinite: but their armour and weapons are very nought and weake +as well the one as the other: they haue very bad pikes, their swords are +worse made, like long kniues without points, his harquebushes are most +excellent, and alway in his warres he hath eightie thousand harquebushes, +and the number of them encreaseth dayly. Because the king will haue them +shoote every day at the Plancke, and so by continuall exercise they become +most excellent shot: also hee hath great ordinance made of very good +mettall; to conclude there is not a King on the earth that hath more power +or strength then this king of Pegu, because hee hath twentie and sixe +crowned kings at his commaunde. He can make in his campe a million and a +halfe of men of warre in the fielde against his enemies. The state of his +kingdome and maintenance of his army, is a thing incredible to consider, +and the victuals that should maintaine such a number of people in the +warres: but he that knoweth the nature and quality of that people, will +easily beleeue it. [Sidenote: Eating of serpents.] I haue seene with mine +eyes, that those people and souldiers haue eaten of all sorts of wild +beastes that are on the earth, whether it bee very filthie or otherwise all +serueth for their mouthes: yea, I haue seene them eate Scorpions and +Serpents, also they feed of all kinde of herbes and grasse. So that if such +a great armie want not water and salt, they will maintaine themselues a +long time in a bush with rootes, flowers and leaues of trees, they cary +rice with them for their voyage, and that serueth them in stead of comfits; +it is so daintie vnto them. This king of Pegu hath not any army or power by +sea, but in the land, for people, dominions, golde and siluer, he farre +exceeds the power of the great Turke in treasure and strength. [Sidenote: +The riches of the king of Pegu.] This king hath diuers Magasons full of +treasure, as gold, and siluer, and euery day he encreaseth it more and +more, and it is neuer diminished. Also hee is Lord of the Mines of Rubies, +Safires and Spinels. Neere vnto his royall pallace there is an inestimable +treasure whereof hee maketh no accompt, for that it standeth in such a +place that euery one may see it, and the place where this treasure is, is a +great Court walled round about with walles of stone, with two gates which +stand open euery day. And within this place or Court are foure gilded +houses couered with lead, and in euery one of these are certaine heathenish +idoles of a very great valure. In the first house there is a stature of the +image of a man of gold very great, and on his head a crowne of gold beset +with most rare Rubies and Safires, and round about him are 4. litle +children of gold. In the second house there is the stature of a man of +siluer, that is set as it were sitting on heapes of money: whose stature in +height, as hee sitteth, is so high, that his highnesse exceeds the height +of any one roofe of an house; I measured his feete, and found that they +were as long as all my body was in height, with a crowne on his head like +to the first. And in the thirde house, there is a stature of brasse of the +same bignesse, with a like crowne on his head. In the 4. and last house +there is a stature of a man as big as the other, which is made of Gansa, +which is the metall they make their money of, and this metall is made of +copper and leade mingled together. This stature also hath a crowne on his +head like the first: this treasure being of such a value as it is, standeth +in an open place that euery man at his pleasure may go and see it: for the +keepers therof neuer forbid any man the sight thereof. I say as I haue said +before, that this king euery yere in his feastes triumpheth: and because it +is worthy of the noting, I thinke it meet to write therof, which is as +foloweth. [Sidenote: The great pompe of the king.] The king rideth on a +triumphant cart or wagon all gilded, which is drawen by 16. goodly horses: +and this cart is very high with a goodly canopy ouer it, behind the cart +goe 20. of his Lords and nobles, with euery one a rope in his hand made +fast to the cart for to hold it vpright that it fal not. The king sitteth +in the middle of the cart; and vpon the same cart about the king stande 4. +of his nobles most fauored of him, and before this cart wherein the king is +goeth all his army as aforesaid, and in the middle of his army goeth all +his nobilitie, round about the cart, that are in his dominions, a +marueilous thing it is to see so many people, such riches and such good +order in a people so barbarous as they be. This king of Pegu hath one +principal wife which is kept in a Seralio, he hath 300. concubines, of whom +it is reported that he hath 90. children. [Sidenote: The order of Iustice.] +This king sitteth euery day in person to heare the suites of his subiects, +but he nor they neuer speake one to another, but by supplications made in +this order. [Sidenote: No difference of persons before the King in +controuersies or in iustice.] The king sitteth vp aloft, in a great hall, +on a tribunall seat, and lower vnder him sit all his Barons round about, +then those that demaund audience enter into a great Court before the king, +and there set them downe on the ground 40. paces distant from the kings +person, and amongst those people there is no difference in matters of +audience before the king, but all alike, and there they sit with their +supplications in their hands, which are made of long leaues of a tree, +these leaues are 3. quarters of a yard long, and two fingers broad, which +are written with a sharpe iron made for that purpose, and in those leaues +are their supplications written, and with their supplications, they haue in +their hands a present or gift, according to the waightines of their matter. +Then come the secretaries downe to read these supplications, taking them +and reading them before the king, and if the king think it good to do to +them that fauour or iustice that they demaund, then he commandeth to take +the presents out of their hands: but if he thinke their demand be not iust +or according to right, he commandeth them away without taking of their +gifts or presents. In the Indies there is not any marchandise that is good +to bring to Pegu, vnlesse it bee at some times by chance to bring Opium of +Cambaia, and if he bring money he shall lose by it. Now the commodities +that come from S. Tome are the onely marchandise for that place, which is +the great quantity of cloth made, which they vse in Pegu: which cloth is +made of bombast wouen and painted, so that the more that kinde of cloth is +washed, the more liuelie they shewe their colours, which is a rare thing, +and there is made such accompt of this kinde of cloth which is so great +importance, that a small bale of it will cost a thousand or two thousand +duckets. Also from S. Tome they layd great store of red yarne, of bombast +died with a roote which they call Saia, as aforesayd, which colour will +neuer out. With which marchandise euery yeere there goeth a great shippe +from S. Tome to Pegu, of great importance, and they vsually depart from S. +Tome to Pegu the 11. or 12. of September, and if she stay vntill the +twelfth, it is a great hap if she returne not without making of her voiage. +Their vse was to depart the sixt of September, and then they made sure +voyages, and now because there is a great labour about that kind of cloth +to bring it to perfection, and that it be well dried, as also the +greedinesse of the Captaine that would made an extraordinary gaine of his +fraight, thinking to haue the wind alwayes to serue their turne, they stay +so long, that at sometimes the winde turneth. For in those parts the windes +blow firmely for certaine times, with the which they goe to Pegu with the +winde in poope, and if they arriue not there before the winde change, and +get ground to anker, perforce they must returne backe againe: for that the +gales of the winde blowe there for three or foure moneths together in one +place with great force. But if they get the coast and anker there, then +with great labour they may saue their voyage. Also there goeth another +great shippe from Bengala euery yeere, laden with fine cloth of bombast of +all sorts, which arriueth in the harbour of Pegu, when the ship that +commeth from S. Tome departeth. The harbour where these two ships arriue is +called Cosmin. From Malaca to Martauan, which is a port in Pegu, there come +many small ships, and great, laden with pepper, Sandolo, Porcellan of +China, Camfora, Bruneo and other marchandise. The ships that come from +Mecca enter into the port of Pegu and Cirion, and those shippes bring cloth +of Wooll, Scarlets, Veluets, Opium, and Chickinos, [Sidenote: The Chikinos +are pieces of gold worth sterling 7. shillings.] by the which they lose, +and they bring them because they haue no other thing that is good for Pegu: +but they esteeme not the losse of them, for they make such great gaine of +their commodities that they cary from thence out of that kingdome. Also the +king of Assi his ships come thither into the same port laden with peper; +from the coast of S. Tome of Bengala, out of the Sea of Bara to Pegu are +three hundreth miles, and they go it vp the riuer in foure daies, with the +encreasing water, or with the flood, to a City called Cosmin, and there +they discharge their ships, whither the Customers of Pegu come to take the +note and markes of all the goods of euery man, and take the charge of the +goods on them, and conuey them to Pegu, into the kings house, wherein they +make the custome of the marchandize. When the Customers haue taken the +charge of the goods and put them into barks, the Retor of the City giueth +licence to the Marchants to take barke, and goe vp to Pegu with their +marchandize; and so three or foure of them take a barke and goe vp to Pegu +in company. [Sidenote: Great rigour for the stealing of customes.] God +deliuer euery man that hee giue not a wrong note, and entrie, or thinke to +steale any custome: for if they do, for the least trifle that is, he is +vtterly vndone, for the king doeth take it for a most great affront to bee +deceiued of his custome: and therefore they make diligent searches, three +times at the lading and vnlading of the goods, and at the taking of them a +land. In Pegu this search they make when they goe out of the ship for +Diamonds, Pearles, and fine cloth which taketh little roome: for because +that all the iewels that come into Pegu, and are not found of that +countrey, pay custome, but Rubies, Safyres, and Spinels pay no custome in +nor out: because they are found growing in that Countrey. I haue spoken +before, how that all Marchants that meane to goe thorow the Indies, must +cary al manor of houshold stuffe with them which is necessary for a house, +because that there is not any lodging nor Innes nor hostes, nor chamber +roome in that Countrey, but the first thing a man doth when he commeth to +that City is to hier a house, either by the yeere or by the moneth, or as +he meanes to stay in those parts. + +In Pegu their order is to hire their houses for sixe moneths. Nowe from +Cosmin to the Citie of Pegu they goe in sixe houres with the flood, and if +it be ebbing water, then they make fast their boate to the riuer side, and +there tary vntil the water flow againe. [Sidenote: Description of the +fruitfulnesse of that soyle.] It is a very commodious and pleasant voyage, +hauing on both sides of the riuers many great vilages, which they call +Cities: in the which hennes, pigeons, egges, milke, rice, and other things +be very goode cheape. It is all plaine, and a goodly Countrey, and in eight +dayes you may make your voyage vp to Macceo, distant from Pegu twelue +miles, and there they discharge their goods, and lade them in Carts or +waines drawen with oxen, and the Marchants are caried in a closet which +they call Deling, [Sidenote: Deling is a small litter carried with men as +is aforesaid.] in the which a man shall be very well accommodated, with +cushions under his head, and couered for the defence of the Sunne and +raine, and there he may sleep if he haue will thereunto: and his foure +Falchines cary him running away, changing two at one time and two at +another. The custome of Pegu and fraight thither, may amount vnto twentie +or twentie two per cento, and 23. according as he hath more or lesse stolen +from him that day they custome the goods. It is requisite that a man haue +his eyes watchfull, and to be carefull, and to haue many friendes, for when +they custome in the great hall of the king, there come many gentlemen +accompanied with a number of their slaues, and these gentlemen haue no +shame that their slaues rob strangers; whether it be cloth in shewing of it +or any other thing, they laugh at it. And although the Marchants helpe one +another to keepe watch, and looke to their goods, they cannot looke therto +so narrowly but one or other will rob something, either more or lesse, +according as their marchandise is more or lesse: and yet on this day there +is a worse thing then this: although you haue set so many eyes to looke +there for your benefit, that you escape vnrobbed of the slaues, a man +cannot choose but that he must be robbed of the officers of the custome +house. For paying the custome with the same goods oftentimes they take the +best that you haue, and not by rate of euery sort as they ought to do, by +which meanes a man payeth more then his dutie. At length when the goods be +dispatched out of the custome house in this order, the Marchant causeth +them to be caried to his house, and may do with them at his pleasure. + +There are in Pegu 8. brokers of the kings, which are called Tareghe, who +are bound to sell all the marchandize which come to Pegu, at the common or +the currant price: then if the marchants wil sell their goods at that +price, they sel them away, and the brokers haue two in the hundreth of +euery sort of marchandise, and they are bound to make good the debts of +those goods, because they be sold by their hands or meanes, and on their +wordes, and oftentimes the marchant knoweth not to whom he giueth his +goods, yet he cannot lose anything thereby, for that the broker is bound in +any wise to pay him, and if the marchant sel his goods without the consent +of the broker, yet neuerthelesse he must pay him two per cento, and be in +danger of his money: [Sidenote: A lawe for Bankrupts.] but this is very +seldom seene, because the wife, children, and slaues of the debtor are +bound to the creditor, and when his time is expired and paiment not made, +the creditor may take the debtor and cary him home to his house, and shut +him vp in a Magasin, whereby presently he hath his money, and not being +able to pay the creditor, he may take the wife, children, and slaues of the +debtor and sel them, for so is the lawe of that kingdome. [Sidenote: Euery +man may stampe what money he wil.] The currant money that is in this city, +and throughout all this kingdom is called Gansa or Ganza, which is made of +Copper and leade: It is not the money of the king, but euery man may stamp +it that wil, because it hath his iust partition or value: but they make +many of them false, by putting ouermuch lead into them, and those will not +passe, neither will any take them. With this money Ganza, you may buy golde +or siluer, Rubies and Muske, and other things. For there is no other money +currant amongst them. And Golde, siluer and other marchandize are at one +time dearer than another, as all other things be. + +This Ganza goeth by weight of Byze, and this name of Byza goeth for the +accompt of the weight, and commonly a Byza of a Ganza is worth (after our +accompt) halfe a ducat, litle more or lesse: and albeit that Gold and +siluer is more or lesse in price, yet the Byza neuer changeth: euery Byza +maketh a hundreth Ganza of weight, and so the number of the money is Byza. +[Sidenote: How a man may dispose himselfe for the trade in Pegu.] He that +goeth to Pegu to buy Iewels, if he wil do well, it behoueth him to be a +whole yere there to do his businesse. For if so be that he would return +with the ship he came in, he cannot do any thing so conueniently for the +breuitie of the time, because that when they custome their goods in Pegu +that come from S. Tome in their ships, it is as it were about Christmas: +and when they haue customed their goods, then must they sell them for their +credits sake for a moneth or two: and then at the beginning of March the +ships depart. The Marchants that come from S. Tome take for the paiment of +their goods, gold and siluer, which is neuer wanting there. [Sidenote: Good +instructions.] And 8. or 10. daies before their departure they are all +satisfied: also they may haue Rubies in paiment, but they make no accompt +of them: and they that will winter there for another yere, it is needfull +that they be aduertized, that in the sale of their goods, they specifie in +their bargaine, the terme of two or 3. moneths paiment, and that their +paiment shal be in so many Ganza, and neither golde nor siluer: because +that with the Ganza they may buy and sel euery thing with great aduantage. +And how needfull is it to be aduertized, when they wil recouer their +paiments, in what order they shal receiue their Ganza? Because he that is +not experienced may do himselfe great wrong in the weight of the Gansa, as +also in the falsenesse of them: in the weight he may be greatly deceiued, +because that from place to place it doth rise and fall greatly: and +therefore when any wil receiue money or make paiment, he must take a +publique wayer of money, a day or two before he go about his businesse, and +giue him in paiment for his labour two Byzaes a moneth, and for this he is +bound to make good all your money, and to maintaine it for good, for that +hee receiueth it and seales the bags with his scale: and when hee hath +receiued any store, then hee causeth it to bee brought into the Magason of +the Marchant, that is the owner of it. + +That money is very weightie, for fortie Byza is a strong Porters burden; +and also where the Marchant hath any payment to be made for those goods +which he buyeth, the Common wayer of money that receiueth his money must +make the payment thereof. So that by this meanes, the Marchant with the +charges of two Byzes a moneth, receiueth and payeth out his money without +losse or trouble. [Sidenote: The marchandizes that goe out of Pegu.] The +Marchandizes that goe out of Pegu are Gold, Siluer, Rubies, Saphyres, +Spinelles, great store of Beniamin, long peper, Leade, Lacca, rice, wine, +some sugar, yet there might be great store of sugar made in the Countrey, +for that they haue aboundance of Canes, but they giue them to Eliphants to +eate, and the people consume great store of them for food, and many more +doe they consume in vaine things, as these following. In that kingdome they +spend many of these Sugar canes in making of houses and tents which they +call Varely for their idoles, which they call Pagodes, whereof there are +great aboundance, great and smal, and these houses are made in forme of +little hilles, like to Sugar loaues or to Bells, and some of these houses +are as high as a reasonable steeple, at the foote they are very large, some +of them be in circuit a quarter of a mile. The saide houses within are full +of earth, and walled round about with brickes and dirt in steade of lime, +and without forme, from the top to the foote they make a couering for them +with Sugar canes, and plaister it with lime all ouer, for otherwise they +would bee spoyled, by the great aboundance of raine that falleth in those +Countreys. [Sidenote: Idol houses couered with gold.] Also they consume +about these Varely or idol houses great store of leafe-gold, for that they +ouerlay all the tops of the houses with gold, and some of them are couered +with golde from the top to the foote: in couering whereof there is great +store of gold spent, for that euery 10. yeeres they new ouerlay them with +gold, from the top to the foote, so that with this vanitie they spend great +aboundance of golde. For euery 10. yeres the raine doth consume the gold +from these houses. And by this meanes they make golde dearer in Pegu then +it would bee, if they consumed not so much in this vanitie. Also it is a +thing to bee noted in the buying of iewels in Pegu, that he that hath no +knowledge shall haue as good iewels, and as good cheap, as he that hath +bene practized there a long time, which is a good order, and it is in this +wise. There are in Pegu foure men of good reputation, which are called +Tareghe, or brokers of Iewels. These foure men haue all the Iewels or +Rubies in their handes, and the Marchant that wil buy commeth to one of +these Tareghe and telleth him, that he hath so much money to imploy in +Rubies. [Sidenote: Rubies exceeding cheape in Pegu.] For through the hands +of these foure men passe all the Rubies: for they haue such quantitie, that +they knowe not what to doe with them, but sell them at most vile and base +prices. When the Marchant hath broken his mind to one of these brokers or +Tareghe, they cary him home to one of their Shops, although he hath no +knowledge in Iewels: and when the Iewellers perceiue that hee will employ a +good round summe, they will make a bargaine, and if not, they let him +alone. The vse generally of this Citie is this: that when any Marchant hath +bought any great quantitie of Rubies, and hath agreed for them, hee carieth +them home to his house, let them be of what value they will, he shall haue +space to looke on them and peruse them two or three dayes: and if he hath +no knowledge in them, he shall alwayes haue many Marchants in that Citie +that haue very good knowledge in Iewels; with whom he may alwayes conferre +and take counsell, and may shew them vnto whom he will; and if he finde +that hee hath not employed his money well, hee may returne his Iewels backe +to them whom hee had them of, without any losse at all. Which thing is such +a shame to the Tareghe to haue his Iewels returned, that he had rather +beare a blow on the face then that it should be thought that he solde them +so deere to haue them returned. [Sidenote: An honest care of heathen +people.] For these men haue alwayes great care that they afford good +peniworths, especially to those that haue no knowledge. This they doe, +because they woulde not loose their credite: and when those Marchants that +haue knowledge in Iewels buy any, if they buy them deere, it is their own +faults and not the brokers: yet it is good to haue knowledge in Iewels, by +reason that it may somewhat ease the price. [Sidenote: Bargaines made with +the nipping of fingers vnder a cloth.] There is also a very good order +which they haue in buying of Iewels, which is this; There are many +Marchants that stand by at the making of the bargaine, and because they +shall not vnderstand howe the Iewels be solde, the Broker and the Marchants +haue their hands vnder a cloth, and by touching of fingers and nipping the +ioynts they know what is done, what is bidden, and what is asked. So that +the standers by knowe not what is demaunded for them, although it be for a +thousand or 10. thousand duckets. For euery ioynt and euery finger hath his +signification. For if the Marchants that stande by should vnderstand the +bargaine, it would breede great controuersie amongst them. And at my being +in Pegu in the moneth of August, in Anno 1569, hauing gotten well by my +endeuour, I was desirous to see mine owne Countrey, and I thought it good +to goe by the way of S. Tome, but then I should tary vntil March. + +In which iourney I was counsailed, yea, and fully resolued to go by the way +of Bengala, with a shippe there ready to depart for that voyage. And then +wee departed from Pegu to Chatigan a great harbour or port, from whence +there goe smal ships to Cochin, before the fleete depart for Portugall, in +which ships I was fully determined to goe to Lisbon, and so to Venice. +[Sidenote: This Touffon is an extraordinary storme at Sea.] When I had thus +resolued my selfe, I went a boord of the shippe of Bengala, at which time +it was the yeere of Touffon: concerning which Touffon ye are to vnderstand, +that in the East Indies often times, there are not stormes as in other +countreys; but euery 10. or 12. yeeres there are such tempests and stormes, +that it is a thing incredible, but to those that haue seene it, neither do +they know certainly what yeere they wil come. + +[Sidenote: The Touffon commeth but euery 10. or 12. yeeres.] Vnfortunate +are they that are at sea in that yere and time of the Touffon, because few +there are that escape that danger. In this yere it was our chance to be at +sea with the like storme, but it happened well vnto vs, for that our ship +was newly ouer-plancked, and had not any thing in her saue victuall and +balasts, Siluer and golde, which from Pegu they cary to Bengala, and no +other kinde of Marchandise. This Touffon or cruel storme endured three +dayes and three nights: in which time it caried away our sailes, yards, and +rudder; and because the shippe laboured in the Sea, wee cut our mast ouer +boord: which when we had done she laboured a great deale more then before, +in such wise, that she was almost full with water that came ouer the +highest part of her and so went downe: and for the space of three dayes and +three nights sixtie men did nothing but hale water out of her in this wise, +twentie men in one place, and twentie men in another place, and twentie in +a thirde place: and for all this storme, the shippe was so good, that shee +tooke not one iot of water below through her sides, but all ran downe +through the hatches, so that those sixtie men did nothing but cast the Sea +into the Sea. And thus driuing too and fro as the winde and Sea would, we +were in a darke night about foure of the clocke cast on a sholde: yet when +it was day, we could neither see land on one side nor other, and knew not +where we were: And as it pleased the diuine power, there came a great waue +of the Sea, which draue vs beyonde the should. [Sidenote: A manifest token +of the ebbing and flowing in those Countries.] And when wee felt the shippe +aflote, we rose vp as men reuiued, because the Sea was calme and smooth +water, and then sounding we found twelue fadome water, and within a while +after wee had but sixe fadome, and then presently we came to anker with a +small anker that was left vs at the sterne, for all our other were lost in +the storme: and by and by the shippe stroke a ground, and then we did prop +her that she should not ouerthrow. + +When it was day the shippe was all dry, and wee found her a good mile from +the Sea on drie land. [Sidenote: This Island is called Sondiua.] This +Touffon being ended, we discouered an Island not farre from vs, and we went +from the shippe on the sands to see what Island it was: and wee found it a +place inhabited, and, to my iudgement, the fertilest Island in all the +world, the which is diuided into two parts by a chanell which passeth +betweene it, and with great trouble we brought our ship into the same +chanel, which parteth the Island at flowing water, and there we determined +to stay 40. dayes to refresh vs. And when the people of the Island saw the +ship, and that we were comming a land: presently they made a place of bazar +or a market, with shops right ouer against the ship with all maner of +prouision of victuals to eate, which they brought downe in great abundance, +and sold it so good cheape, that we were amazed at the cheapenesse thereof. +I bought many salted kine there, for the prouision of the ship, for halfe a +Larine a piece, which Larine may be 12. shillings sixe pence, being very +good and fat; and 4. wilde hogges ready dressed for a Larine, great fat +hennes for a Bizze a piece, which is at the most a pennie: and the people +told vs that we were deceiued the halfe of our money, because we bought +things so deare. Also a sacke of fine rice for a thing of nothing, and +consequently all other things for humaine sustenance were there in such +aboundance, that it is a thing incredible but to them that haue seene it. +[Sidenote: Sondiua is the fruitfullest Countrey in al the world.] This +Island is called Sondiua belonging to the kingdome of Bengala, distant 120. +miles from Chatigan, to which place wee were bound. The people are Moores, +and the king a very good man of a Moore king, for if he had bin a tyrant as +others be, he might haue robbed vs of all, because the Portugall captaine +of Chatigan was in armes against the Retor of that place, and euery day +there were some slaine, at which newes we rested there with no smal feare, +keeping good watch and ward aboord euery night as the vse is, but the +gouernour of the towne did comfort vs, and bad vs that we should feare +nothing, but that we should repose our selues securely without any danger, +although the Portugales of Chatigan had slaine the gouernour of that City, +and said that we were not culpable in that fact: and moreouer he did vs +euery day what pleasure he could, which was a thing contrary to our +expectations considering that they and the people of Chatigan were both +subiects to one king. [Sidenote: Chatigan is a port in Bengala, whither the +Portugales go with their ships.] We departed from Sondiua, and came to +Chatigan the great port of Bengala, at the same time when the Portugales +had made peace and taken a truce with the gouernours of the towne, with +this condition that the chiefe Captaine of the Portugales with his ship +should depart without any lading: for there were then at that time 18. +ships of Portugales great and small. This Captaine being a Gentleman and of +good courage, was notwithstanding contented to depart to his greatest +hinderance, rather than hee would seeke to hinder so many of his friends as +were there, as also because the time of the yeere was spent to go to the +Indies. The night before he departed, euery ship that had any lading +therein, put it aboord of the Captaine to helpe to ease his charge and to +recompense his courtesies. [Sidenote: The King of Rachim, or Aracam, +neighbour to Bengala.] In this time there came a messenger from the king of +Rachim to this Portugal Captaine, who saide in the behalfe of his king, +that hee had heard of the courage and valure of him, desiring him gently +that he would vouchsafe to come with the ship into his port, and comming +thither he should be very wel intreated. This Portugal went thither and was +very well satisfied of this King. + +This King of Rachim hath his seate in the middle coast betweene Bengala and +Pegu, and the greatest enemie he hath is the king of Pegu: which king of +Pegu deuiseth night and day how to make this king of Rachim his subiect, +but by no meanes hee is able to doe it: because the king of Pegu hath no +power nor armie by Sea. And this king of Rachim [Marginal note: Or, +Aracam.] may arme two hundreth Galleyes or Fusts by Sea, and by land he +hath certaine sluses with the which when the king of Pegu pretendeth any +harme towards him, hee may at his pleasure drowne a great part of the +Countrey. So that by this meanes hee cutteth off the way whereby the king +of Pegu should come with his power to hurt him. + +[Sidenote: The commodities that goe from Chatigan to the Indies.] From the +great port of Chatigan they cary for the Indies great store of rice, very +great quantitie of Bombast cloth of euery sort, Suger, corne, and money, +with other marchandize. And by reason of the warres in Chatigan, the +Portugall ships taried there so long, that they arriued not at Cochin so +soone as they were wont to doe other yeeres. For which cause the fleete +that was at Cochin [Marginal note: The Portugal ships depart toward +Portugall out of the harbor of Cochin.] was departed for Portugal before +they arriued there, and I being in one of the small shippes before the +fleete, in discouering of Cochin, we also discouered the last shippe of the +Fleete that went from Cochin to Portugall, where shee made saile, for which +I was marueilously discomforted, because that all the yeere following, +there was no going for Portugale, and when we arriued at Cochin I was fully +determined to goe for Venice by the way of Ormus, [Sidenote: Goa was +besieged.] and at that time the Citie of Goa was besieged by the people of +Dialcan, but the Citizens forced not this assault, because they supposed +that it would not continue long. For all this I embarked my selfe in a +Galley that went for Goa, meaning there to shippe my selfe for Ormus: but +when we came to Goa, the Viceroy would not suffer any Portugal to depart, +by reason of the warres. And being in Goa but a small time, I fell sicke of +an infirmitie that helde mee foure moneths: which with phisicke and diet +cost me eight hundreth duckets, and there I was constrained to sell a smal +quantitie of Rubies to sustaine my neede: and I solde that for fiue +hundreth duckets, that was worth a thousand. And when I beganne to waxe +well of my disease, I had but little of that money left, euery thing was so +scarse: For euery chicken (and yet not good) cost mee seuen or eight +Liuers, which is sixe shillings, or sixe shillings eight pence. Beside this +great charges, the Apothecaries with their medicines were no small charge +to me. At the ende of sixe moneths they raised the siege, and then I +beganne to worke, for Iewels were risen in their prices: for whereas before +I sold a few of refused Rubies, I determined then to sell the rest of all +my Iewels that I had there, and to make an other voyage to Pegu. [Sidenote: +Opium a good commoditie in Pegu.] And for because that at my departure from +Pegu, Opium was in great request, I went then to Cambaya to imploy a good +round summe of money in Opium, and there I bought 60. percels of Opium, +which cost me two thousand and a hundreth duckets, euery ducket at foure +shillings two pence. Moreouer I bought three bales of Bombast cloth, which +cost me eight hundred duckats, which was a good commoditie for Pegu: when I +had bought these things, the Viceroy commanded that the custome of the +Opium should be paide in Goa, and paying custome there I might cary it +whither I would. I shipped my 3. bales of cloth at Chaul in a shippe that +went for Cochin, and I went to Goa to pay the aforesaid custome for my +Opium, and from Goa I departed to Cochin in a ship that was for the voyage +of Pegu, and went to winter then at S. Tome. When I come to Cochin, I +vnderstood that the ship that had my three bales of cloth was cast away and +lost, so that I lost my 800. Serafins or duckats: and departing from Cochin +to goe for S. Tome, in casting about for the Island of Zeilan the Pilote +was deceiued, for that the Cape of the Island of Zeilan lieth farre out +into the sea, and the Pilot thinking that he might haue passed hard aboord +the Cape, and paying roomer in the night; when it was morning we were farre +within the Cape, and past all remedy to go out, by reason the winds blew so +fiercely against vs. So that by this meanes we lost our voyage for that +yere, and we went to Manar with the ship to winter there, the ship hauing +lost her mastes, and with great dilligence we hardly saued her, with great +losses to the Captaine of the ship, because he was forced to fraight +another ship in S. Tome for Pegu with great losses and interest, and I with +my friends agreed together in Manar to take a bark to cary vs to S. Tome; +which thing we did with al the rest of the marchants; and arriuing at S. +Tome I had news through or by the way of Bengala, that in Pegu Opium was +very deare, and I knew that in S. Tome there was no Opium but mine to go +for Pegu that yere, so that I was holden of al the marchants there to be +very rich: and so it would haue proued, if my aduerse fortune had not bin +contrary to my hope, which was this. At that time there went a great ship +from Cambaya, to the king of Assi, with great quantitie of Opium, and there +to lade peper: in which voyage there came such a storme, that the ship was +forced with wether to goe roomer 800. miles, and by this meanes came to +Pegu, whereas they arriued a day before mee; so that Opium which was before +very deare, was now at a base price: so that which was sold for fiftie +Bizze before, was solde for 2. Bizze and an halfe, there was such quantitie +came in that ship; so that I was glad to stay two yeres in Pegu vnlesse I +would haue giuen away my commoditie: and at the end of two yeres of my +2100. duckets which I bestowed in Cambaya, I made but a thousand duckets. +Then I departed againe from Pegu to goe for the Indies for Chaul, and from +Chaul to Cochin, and from Cochin to Pegu. Once more I lost occasion to make +me riche, for whereas I might haue brought good store of Opium againe, I +brought but a little, being fearefull of my other voyage before. In this +small quantitie I made good profite. And now againe I determined to go for +my Countrey, and departing from Pegu, I tarried and wintered in Cochin, and +then I left the Indies and came for Ormus. + +I thinke it very necessary before I ende my voyage, to reason somewhat, and +to shewe what fruits the Indies do yeeld and bring forth. First, In the +Indies and other East parts of India there is Peper and ginger, which +groweth in all parts of India. And in some parts of the Indies, the +greatest quantitie of peper groweth amongst wilde bushes, without any maner +of labour: sauing, that when it is ripe they goe and gather it. The tree +that the peper groweth on is like to our Iuie, which runneth vp to the tops +of trees wheresoeuer it groweth: and if it should not take holde of some +tree, it would lie flat and rot on the ground. This peper tree hath his +floure and berry like in all parts to our Iuie berry, and those berries be +graines of peper: so that when they gather them they be greene, and then +they lay them in the Sunne, and they become blacke. + +The Ginger groweth in this wise: the land is tilled and sowen, and the +herbe is like to Panizzo, and the roote is the ginger. These two spices +grow in diuers places. + +The Cloues come all from the Moluccas, which Moluccas are two Islands, not +very great, and the tree that they grow on is like to our Lawrell tree. + +The Nutmegs and Maces, which grow both together, are brought from the +Island of Banda, whose tree is like to our walnut tree, but not so big. + +All the good white Sandol is brought from the Island of Timor. Canfora +being compound commeth all from China, and all that which groweth in canes +commeth from Borneo, and I thinke that this Canfora commeth not into these +parts: for that in India they consume great store, and that is very deare. +The good Lignum Aloes commeth from Cauchinchina. + +The Beniamin commeth from the kingdome of Assi and Sion. + +Long pepper groweth in Bengala, Pegu, and Iaua. + +Muske [Marginal note: This Muske the Iewes doe counterfeit and take out +halfe the good muske and beat the flesh of an asse and put in the roome of +it.] commeth from Tartaria, which they make in this order, as by good +information I haue bene told. There is a certaine beast in Tartaria, which +is wilde and as big as a wolfe, which beast they take aliue, and beat him +to death with small staues that his blood may be spread through his whole +body, then they cut it in pieces and take out all the bones, and beat the +flesh with the blood in a morter very smal, and dry it, and make purses to +put it in of the skin, and these be the cods of muske. + +Truely I know not whereof the Amber is made, and there are diuers opinions +of it, but this is most certaine, it is cast out of the Sea, and throwne on +land, and found vpon the sea bankes. + +The Rubies, Saphyres, and the Spinels be gotten in the kingdome of Pegu. +The Diamants come from diuers places; and I know but three sorts of them. +That sort of Diamants that is called Chiappe, commeth from Bezeneger. Those +that be pointed naturally come from the land of Delly, and from Iaua, but +the Diamants of Iaua are more waightie then the other. I could neuer +vnderstand from whence they that are called Balassi come. [Sidenote: The +Balassi grow in Zeilan.] + +Pearles they fish in diuers places, as before in this booke is showne. + +From Cambaza commeth the Spodiom which congeleth in certaine canes, whereof +I found many in Pegu, when I made my house there, because that (as I haue +sayd before) they make their houses there of wouen canes like to mats. From +Chaul they trade alongst the coast of Melinde in Ethiopia, [Marginal note: +On the coast of Melynde in Ethiopia, in the land of Cafraria, the great +trade that the Portugals haue.] within the land of Cafraria: on that coast +are many good harbors kept by the Moores. Thither the Portugals bring a +kinde of Bombast cloth of a low price, and great store of Paternosters or +beads made of paltrie glasse, which they make in Chaul according to the vse +of the Countrey: and from thence they cary Elephants teeth for India, +slaues called Cafari, and some Amber and Gold. On this coast the king of +Portugall hath his castle called Mozambique, which is of as great +importance as any castle that hee hath in all his Indies vnder his +protection, and the Captaine of this castle hath certaine voyages to this +Cafraria, to which places no Marchants may goe, but by the Agent of this +Captaine: [Sidenote: Buying and selling without words one to another.] and +they vse to goe in small shippes, and trade with the Cafars, and their +trade in buying and selling is without any speach one to the other. In this +wise the Portugals bring their goods by litle and litle alongst the Sea +coast, and lay them downe: and so depart, and the Cafar Marchants come and +see the goods, and there they put downe as much gold as they thinke the +goods are worth, and so goe their way and leaue their golde and the goods +together, then commeth the Portugal, and finding the golde to his content, +hee taketh it and goeth his way into his ship, and then commeth the Cafar, +and taketh the goods and carieth them away: and if he finde the golde there +still, it is a signe that the Portugals are not contented, and if the Cafar +thinke he hath put too little, he addeth more, as he thinketh the thing is +worth: and the Portugales must not stand with them too strickt; for if they +doe, then they will haue no more trade with them: For they disdaine to be +refused, when they thinke that they haue offered ynough, for they bee a +peeuish people, and haue dealt so of a long time: [Sidenote: Golden trades +that the Portugals haue.] and by this trade the Portugals change their +commodities into gold, and cary it to the Castle of Mozambique, which is an +Island not farre distant from the firme land of Cafraria on the coast of +Ethiopia, and is distant from India 2800. miles. Nowe to returne to my +voyage, when I came to Ormus, I found there Master Francis Berettin of +Venice, and we fraighted a bark together to goe for Basora for 70. duckets, +and with vs there went other Marchants, which did ease our fraight, and +very commodiously wee came to Basora and there we stayed 40. dayes for +prouiding a Carouan of barks to go to Babylon, because they vse not to goe +two or 3. barkes at once, but 25. or 30. because in the night they cannot +go, but must make them fast to the banks of the riuer, and then we must +make a very good and strong guard, and be wel prouided of armor, for +respect and safegard of our goods, because the number of theeues is great +that come to spoile and rob the marchants. And when we depart for Babylon +we goe a litle with our saile, and the voyage is 38. or 40. dayes long, but +we were 50. dayes on it. When we came to Babylon we stayed there 4. +moneths, vntill the Carouan was ready to go ouer the wildernes, or desert +for Alepo; in this city we were 6. Marchants that accompanied together, +fiue Venetians and a Portugal: whose names were as followeth, Messer +Florinasa with one of his kinsmen, Messer Andrea de Pola, the Portugal and +M. Francis Berettin and I, and so wee furnished our selues with victuals +and beanes for our horses for 40. dayes; [Marginal note: An order how to +prouide to goe ouer the Desert from Babylon to Alepo.] and wee bought +horses and mules, for that they bee very good cheape there, I my selfe +bought a horse there for 11. akens, and solde him after in Alepo for 30. +duckets. Also we bought a Tent which did vs very great pleasure: we had +also amongst vs 32. Camels laden with marchandise: for the which we paid 2. +duckets for euery camels lading, and for euery 10. camels they made 11, for +so is their vse and custome. We take also with vs 3. men to serue vs in the +voyage, which are vsed to goe in those voyages for fiue D d. a man, and are +bound to serue vs to Alepo: so that we passed very well without any +trouble: when the camels cried out to rest, our pauilion was the first that +was erected. The Carouan maketh but small iourneis about 20. miles a day, +and they set forwards euery morning before day two houres, and about two in +the afternoone they sit downe. We had great good hap in our voyage, for +that it rained: For which cause we neuer wanted water, but euery day found +good water, so that we could not take any hurt for want of water. Yet we +caried a camel laden alwayes with water for euery good respect that might +chance in the desert, so that wee had no want neither of one thing, nor +other that was to bee had in the countrey. For wee came very well furnished +of euery thing, and euery day we eat fresh mutton, because there came many +shepheards with vs with their flocks, who kept those sheepe that we bought +in Babylon, and euery marchant marked his sheepe with his owne marke, and +we gaue the shepheards a Medin, which is two pence of our money for the +keeping and feeding our sheep on the way and for killing of them. And +beside the Medin they haue the heads, the skinnes, and the intrals of euery +sheepe they kil. We sixe bought 20. sheepe, and when we came to Alepo we +had 7. aliue of them. And in the Carouan they vse this order, that the +marchants doe lende flesh one to another, because they will not cary raw +flesh with them, but pleasure one another by lending one one day and +another another day. + +[Sidenote: 36. Dayes iourney ouer the wildernes.] From Babylon to Alepo is +40. dayes iourney, of the which they make 36. dayes ouer the wildernes, in +which 36. dayes they neither see house, trees nor people that inhabite it, +but onely a plaine, and no signe of any way in the world. The Pilots goe +before, and the Carouan followeth after. And when they sit downe all the +Carouan vnladeth and sitteth downe, for they know the stations where the +wells are. I say, in 36. dayes we pass ouer the wildernesse. For when wee +depart from Babylon two dayes we passe by villages inhabited vntil we haue +passed the riuer Euphrates. And then within two dayes of Alepo we haue +villages inhabited. [Sidenote: An order how to prouide for the going to +Ierusalem.] In this Carouan there goeth alway a Captaine that doth Iustice +vnto all men: and euery night they keepe watch about the Carouan, and +comming to Alepo we went to Tripoli, whereas Master Florin, and Master +Andrea Polo, and I with a Frier, went and hired a barke to goe with vs to +Ierusalem. Departing from Tripolie, we arriued at Iaffa: from which place +in a day and a halfe we went to Ierusalem, and we gaue order to our barke +to tary for vs vntill our returne. [Sidenote: The author returned to Venice +1581.] Wee stayed in Ierusalem 14. dayes, to visite those holy places: from +whence we returned to Iaffa, and from Iaffa to Tripolie, and there wee +shipped our selues in a ship of Venice called the Bagazzana: And by the +helpe of the deuine power, we arriued safely in Venice the fift of Nouember +1581. If there be any that hath any desire to goe into those partes of +India, let him not be astonied at the troubles that I haue passed: because +I was intangled in many things: for that I went very poore from Venice with +1200. duckets imployed in marchandize, and when I came to Tripolie, I fell +sicke in the house of Master Regaly Oratio, and this man sent away my goods +with a small Carouan that went from Tripolie to Alepo, and the Carouan was +robd, and all my goods lost sauing foure chests of glasses which cost me +200. duckets, of which glasses I found many broken: because the theeues +thinking it had bene other marchandize, brake them vp, and seeing they were +glasses they let them all alone. And with this onely stocke I aduentured to +goe into the Indies: And thus with change and rechange, and by diligence in +my voyage, God did blesse and helpe mee, so that I got a good stocke. I +will not be vnmindfull to put them in remembrance, that haue a desire to +goe into those parts, how they shall keepe their goods, and giue them to +their heires at the time of their death, [Marginal note: A very good order +that they haue in those Countreys for the recouering of the goods of the +dead.] and howe this may be done very securely. In all the cities that the +Portugales haue in the Indies, there is a house called the schoole of +Sancta misericordia comissaria: the gouernours whereof, if you giue them +for their paines, will take a coppy of your will and Testament, which you +must alwayes cary about you; and chiefly when you go into the Indies. In +the countrey of the Moores and Gentiles, in those voyages alwayes there +goeth a Captaine to administer Iustice to all Christians of the Portugales. +Also this captaine hath authoritie to recouer the goods of those Marchants +that by chance die in those voyages, and they that haue not made their +Wills and registred them in the aforesayde schooles, the Captaines wil +consume their goods in such wise, that litle or nothing will be left for +their heires and friends. Also there goeth in these same voyages some +marchants that are commissaries of the schoole of Sancta misericordia, that +if any Marchant die and haue his Will made, and hath giuen order that the +schoole of Misericordia shall haue his goods and sell them, then they sende +the money by exchange to the schoole of Misericordia in Lisbone, with that +copie of his Testament, then from Lisbon they giue intelligence thereof, +into what part of Christendome soeuer it be, and the heires of such a one +comming thither, with testimoniall that they be heires, they shall receiue +there the value of his goods: in such wise that they shall not loose any +thing. But they that die in the kingdome of Pegu loose the thirde part of +their goods by antient custome of the Countrey, that if any Christian dieth +in the kingdome of Pegu, the king and his officers rest heires of a thirde +of his goods, and there hath neuer bene any deceit or fraude vsed in this +matter. I haue knowen many rich men that haue dwelled in Pegu, and in their +age they haue desired to go into their owne Countrey to die there, and haue +departed with al their goods and substance without let or troubles. + +[Sidenote: Order of apparel in Pegu.] In Pegu the fashion of their apparel +is all one, as well the noble man as the simple: the onely difference is in +the finenes of the cloth, which is cloth of Bombast one finer then another, +and they weare their apparell in this wise: First a white Bombast cloth +which serueth for a shirt, then they gird another painted bombast cloth of +foureteene brases, which they binde vp betwixt their legges, and on their +heads they weare a small tock of three braces, made in guize of a myter, +and some goe without tocks, and cary (as it were) a hiue on their heades, +which doeth not passe the lower part of his eare, when it is lifted vp: +they goe all bare footed, but the Noble men neuer goe on foote, but are +caried by men in a seate with great reputation, with a hat made of the +leaues of a tree to keepe him from the raine and Sunne, or otherwise they +ride on horsebacke with their feete bare in the stirops. [Sidenote: The +order of the womens apparel in Pegu.] All sorts of women whatsoeuer they +be, weare a smocke downe to the girdle, and from the girdle downewards to +the foote they weare a cloth of three brases, open before; so straite that +they cannot goe, but they must shewe their secret as it were aloft, and in +their going they faine to hide it with their hand, but they cannot by +reason of the straitnes of their cloth. They say that this vse was inuented +by a Queene to be an occasion that the sight thereof might remoue from men +the vices against nature, which they are greatly giuen vnto; which sight +should cause them to regard women the more. Also the women goe bare footed, +their armes laden with hoopes of golde and Iewels: And their fingers full +of precious rings, with their haire rolled vp about their heads. Many of +them weare a cloth about their shoulders instead of a cloake. + +Now to finish that which I haue begunne to write, I say, that those parts +of the Indies are very good, because that a man that hath litle, shall make +a great deale thereof; alwayes they must gouerne themselues that they be +taken for honest men. For why? to such there shal neuer want helpe to doe +wel, but he that is vicious, let him tary at home and not go thither, +because he shall alwayes be a beggar, and die a poore man. + + * * * * * + +The money and measures of Babylon, Balsara, and the Indies, with the + customes, &c. written from Aleppo in Syria, An. 1584. by M. Will. Barret. + +BABYLON: + +The weight, measure, and money currant there, and the customes of +marchandize. + +A Mana of Babylon is of Aleppo 1 roue 5 ounces and a halfe: and 68 manas +and three seuenth parts, make a quintall of Aleppo, which is 494 li. 8 +ounces of London: and 100 manas is a quintall of Babylon, which maketh in +Aleppo 146 roues, and of London 722 li. and so much is the sayd quintall: +but the marchants accord is by so much the mana, and in the sayd place they +bate the tare in all sorts of commodities, according to the order of Aleppo +touching the tare. + +The measure of Babylon is greater then that of Aleppo 21 in the 100. For +bringing 100 pikes of any measurable ware from Aleppo thither, there is +found but 82 pikes in Babylon, so that the 100 pikes of Babylon is of +Aleppo l2l pikes, very litle lesse. + +The currant mony of Babylon are Saies, which Say is 5 medines, as in +Aleppo, and 40 medines being 8 Saies make a duckat currant, and 47 medines +passe in value as the duckat of gold of Venice, and the dollars of the best +sort are worth 33 medines. The roials of plate are sold by the 100 drams at +prise, according as they be in request: but amongst the marchants they +bargaine by the 100 metrals, which are 150 drams of Aleppo, which 150 drams +are 135 single roials of plate: but in the mint or castle, they take them +by the 100 drams, which is 90 roials of plate, and those of the mint giue 5 +medines lesse in each 100 drams then they are woorth to be sold among the +marchants, and make paiment at the terme of 40 dayes in Sayes. + +The custome in Babylon, as wel inward as outward, is in this maner: Small +wares at 6 per 100, Coral and amber at 5 and a halfe per 100, Venice cloth, +English cloth, Kersies, Mockairs, Chamblets, Silks, Veluets, Damasks, +Sattins and such like at 5 per 100: and they rate the goods without reason +as they lust themselues. The Toafo, Boabo, and other exactions 6 medines +per bale, all which they pay presently in ready mony, according to the +custome and vse of the emperor. + +To the Ermin of the mint the ordinarie vse is to giue 30 Saies in curtesie, +otherwise he would by authoritie of his office come aboord, and for +despight make such search in the barke, that he would turne all things +topsie teruie. + + +BALSARA: + +The weight, measure, and money in the citie of Balsara. + +A Mana of Balsara answereth 5 roues 2 ounces and a halfe of Aleppo weight, +and 19 manas and one 4 part of Balsara, answereth the quintall of Aleppo, +which is 494 roues, 8 ounces English, and 20 manas is the quintall of +Balsara, which is 104 Alepine, and of London 514 li. 8. ounces, and so much +is the sayd quintall, but the marchants bargaine at so much the mana or +wolsene (which is all one) and they abate the tare in euery mana, as the +sort of spice is, and the order taken therefore in that place. + +The measure of Balsara is called a pike, which is iust as the measure of +Babylon, to say, 100 pikes of Balsara make of Aleppo 121 pikes, vt supra in +the rate of Babylon. + +The currant mony of Balsara is as foloweth. There is a sort of flusses of +copper called Estiui, whereof 12 make a mamedine, which is the value of one +medine Aleppine, the said mamedine is of siluer, hauing the Moresco stampe +on both sides, and two of these make a danine, which is 2 medines Aleppine. + +The said danine is of siluer, hauing the Turkesco stampe on both sides, and +2 and a halfe of these make a Saie, which is in value as the Saie of +Aleppo. + +The said Saie is of the similitude and stampe of Aleppo, being (as +appeares) 60 estiues. Also one Say and 20 estiues make a larine, which is +of Aleppo money 6 medines and a halfe. + +The sayd larine is a strange piece of money, not being round as all other +currant money in Christianitie, but is a small rod of siluer of the +greatnesse of the pen of a goose feather, wherewith we vse to write, and in +length about one eight part thereof, which is wrested, so that the two ends +meet at the iust halfe part, and in the head thereof is a stampe Turkesco, +and these be the best currant money in all the Indias, and 6 of these +larines make a duckat, which is 40 medines or eight Saies of Aleppo. + +The duckat of gold is woorth there 7 larines, and one danine, which is of +Aleppo money 48 medines and a halfe. + +The Venetian money is worth larines 88 per hundred meticals which is 150 +drams of Aleppo, vt supra. + +The roials of plate are worth 88 larines by the 100 meticals, and albeit +among the marchants they sel by the 100 meticals, yet in the mint or +castle, they sel by the 100 drams, hauing there lesse then the worth 5 +medines in each hundred drams, and haue their paiment in 40 dayes made them +in Saies or larines. + +The custome of the said places, aswell inward as outward, are alike of all +sorts of goods, to say 6 by the 100, and Toafo, Boabo, and scriuan medines +6 by the bale inward and outward, to say, 3 inward, and as much outward: +but whoso leaueth his goods in the custome house paieth nothing, where +otherwise at the taking thereof away, he should pay 3 med. by the bale, and +of the said goods there is no other duty to pay, and this commeth to passe +when the customers esteeme the goods too high. For in such a case they may +be driuen to take so much commoditie as the custome amounteth to, and not +to pay them in money, for such is the order from the Grand Signior. + +Hauing paid the custome, it behoueth to haue a quittance or cocket sealed +and firmed with the customers hand, in confirmation of the dispatch and +clearing, and before departure thence, to cause the sayd customer to cause +search to be made, to the end that at the voiages returne there be no +cauilation made, as it oftentimes happeneth. + +Note that 100 meticals of Balsara weigh 17 ounces and a halfe sottile +Venetian, and of Aleppo drams 150, vt supra. + +The fraight of the barkes from Ormuz to Balsara, I would say from Balsara +to Ormuz, they pay according to the greatnesse thereof. To say, for cariage +of 10 cares 180 larines, those of 15 cares 270 larines, those of 20 cares +360 larines, those of 30 cares 540 larines. Note that a cara is 4 quintals +of Balsara. They pay also to the pilot of the bark for his owne cariage one +care, and to all the rest of the mariners amongst them 3. cares fraight, +which is in the whole 4 cares, and paying the abouesayd prises and +fraights, they are at no charges of victuals with them, but it is requisite +that the same be declared in the charter partie, with the condition that +they lade not aboord one rotilo more then the fraight, vnder paines that +finding more in Ormuz, it is forfeit, and besides that to pay the fraight +of that which they haue laden. + +And in this accord it behoueth to deale warilie, and in the presence of the +Ermin or some other honest man (whereof there are but few) for they are the +worst people in all Arabia. And this diligence must be put in execution, to +the end the barks may not be ouerladen, because they are to passe many +sands betwixt Balsara and Ormuz. + + +ORMVZ: + +The weight, measure, and money currant in the kingdom of Ormuz: + +Spices and drugs they weigh by the bar, and of euery sort of goods the +weight is different. To say, of some drugs 3 quintals, and 3 erubi or +roues, and other some 4 quintals 25 rotiloes, and yet both is called a +barre, which barre, as well as great as litle, is 20 frasoli, and euery +frasoll is 10 manas, and euery mana 23 chiansi, and euery chianso 10 +meticals and a halfe. [Sidenote: What a rotilo is.] Note that euery +quintall maketh 4 erubi or roues, and euery roue 32 rotiloes, and euery +rotilo 16 ounces, and euery ounce 7 meticals, so that the quintall commeth +to be 128 rotiloes, which is Aleppine 26 rotiloes and one third part, which +is 132 li. English weight. And contrarywise the quintal of Aleppo (which is +494 rotiloes 8 ounces English) maketh 477 rotiloes and a halfe of Ormuz, +which is 3 quintals 2 roues, 29 rotiloes and a halfe. + +Note that there are bars of diuers weights, vt supra, of which they +bargaine simply, according to the sort of commoditie, but if they bargaine +of the great barre, the same is 7 quintals and 24 rotiloes, which is 958 +li. 9 ounces of London weight, and of Aleppo 193 rotiloes and a halfe. + +Touching the money of Ormuz, they bargaine in marchandize at so many leches +by the barre, which lech is 100 Asaries, and maketh larines 100 and a +halfe, which maketh pardaos 38, and larines one halfe, at larines 5 by the +pardao. One asarie is sadines 10, and euery sadine is 100. danarie. + +The larine is worth 5 sadines and one fourth part, so that the sadine is +worth of Aleppo mony 1 medine and 1 fourth part, and the larine as in +Balsara worth of Aleppo mony 6 medines and a half. + +The pardao is 5 larines of Balsara. + +There is also stamped in Ormuz a seraphine of gold, which is litle and +round, and is worth 24 sadines, which maketh 30 medines of Aleppo. + +The Venetian mony is worth in Ormuz larines 88 per 100 meticals, and the +roials are worth larines 86 lesse one sadine, which is euery thousand +meticals, 382 asures: but those that will not sel them, vse to melt them, +and make them so many larines in the king of Ormuz his mint, whereby they +cleare 2 per 100, and somewhat more: and this they doe because neither +Venetian money nor roials run as currant in Ormuz, per aduise. + +The measure of Ormuz is of two sorts, the one called codo which increaseth +vpon the measure of Aleppo 3 per 100, for bringing 100 pikes of any +measurable wares from Aleppo to Ormuz, it is found in Ormuz to be 103 +codes. Also these measures of Ormuz increase vpon those of Balsara and +Babylon 25 and two third parts per 100: for bringing 100 pikes of any +measurable wares from Balsara or Babylon, there is found in Ormuz 125 codes +and two third parts. + +The other measure is called a vare, which was sent from the king of +Portugall to the India, by which they sell things of small value, which +measure is of 5 palmes or spans, and is one code and two third parts, so +that buying 100 codes of any measurable wares, and returning to measure it +by the sayd vare, there are found but 60 vares, contrarywise 100 vares make +166 codes and two third parts. + +Note that al such ships as lade horses in Ormuz for Goa or any other place +of India, lading 10 horses or vpwards, in what places soeuer the said +horses be taken a shore in the India, the marchandize which is to be +discharged out of that ship wherein the said horses come, are bound to pay +no custome at all, but if they lade one horse lesse then ten, then the +goods are bound to pay the whole custome. And this law was made by Don +Emanuel king of Portugall, but it is to be diligently foreseene, whither +all those horses laden be bound to pay the king his custome: for many times +by the king of Portugall his commandement, there is fauour shewed to the +king of Cochin his brother in armes, so that his horses that come in the +same ship, are not to answere custome. As for example: If there were 4 +horses laden in one ship, all which were to pay custome to the king, and +one other of the king of Cochins which were not to pay any custome, the +same causeth all the marchandize of that ship to be subiect to pay custome, +per aduise. But if they lade ten horses vpon purpose to pay the king his +custome in Goa, and in the voyage any of them should die in that case, if +they bring the taile of the dead horse to the custome in Goa, then the +marchandize is free from all custome, because they were laden in Ormuz to +pay custome in Goa. Moreouer, if the horses should die before the midst of +the voyage, they pay no custome at all, and if they die in the midst of the +voyage, then they pay halfe custome, but if any horse die after the mid +voiage, they pay custome no lesse than if they arriue safe. +Notwithstanding, the marchandize (whether the said horses die before or in +the mid voyage or after the mid voiage) are free from all custome. + +The custome of Ormuz is eleuen in the 100, to say, 10 for the king, and 1 +for the arming of the foists: but for small wares as glasses, and looking +glasses of all sorts, and such like, made for apparell, pay no custome. But +cloth of Wooll, Karsies, Mockaires, Chamlets, and all sortes of Silke, +Saffron, and such like, pay custome, being esteemed reasonably. + +There is also another custome, which they call caida, which is, that one +bringing his goods into Ormuz, with purpose to send the same further into +India, the same are bound to pay 3 by the 100, but none other are bound to +pay this custome, except the Armenians, Moores, and Iewes: for the +Portugals and Venetians pay nothing thereof. + +Note that in Ormuz they abate tare of all sorts of commodities, by an order +obserued of custome. + +The fraight from Ormuz to Chaul, Goa, and Cochin, is as followeth: +Mokaires, larines 6 per table of 60 pikes. Aquariosa 8 larines by ordinarie +chist, raisins 10 by chist, which is a quintall of roues 128. Ruuia of +Chalangi larines 10 per quintall, glasses larines 8 per chist, of 4 foote +and a halfe, glasses in great chists 14 and 15 larines by chist. Small +wares larines 12 by chist of fiue foot. Tamari for Maschat sadines 2 and a +half, and 3 by the fardle. Tamarie for Diu and Chaul 4 sadines, and 4 and a +halfe by bale. Other drugs and things which come from Persia pay according +to the greatnesse of the bales. + +The fraight mentioned, they pay as appeareth, when they ship the sayd goods +in ships where horses goe: otherwise not hauing horses, they pay somewhat +lesse, because of the custom which they are to pay. + +The vse of the India ships is, that the patrones thereof are not at any +charge neither with any passenger, not yet with any mariner in the ship, +but that euery one at the beginning of the voyage doe furnish to maintaine +his owne table (if he will eate) and for drinke they haue a great iarre of +water, which is garded with great custodie. + + +GOA. + +The weight, measure, and mony currant in Goa. + +The quintall of Goa is 5 manas, and 8 larines, and the mana is 24 rotilos, +so that the quintall of Goa is 128 rot. and euery rot. is 16 ounces, which +is of Venice weight 1 li. and a halfe, so that the quintall of Goa is 192 +li. sotile Venice, which is 26 rotiloes 8 ounces Aleppine, and of London +weight 132 li. English, as the weight of Ormuz. + +All the marchandize, spices and drugs, are sold by this quintal, except +some drugs, as lignum de China, Galanga, and others, whereof they bargaine +at so much per candill, aduertising that there be two sorts of candill, one +of 16 manas, the other of 20 manas, that of 16 manas commeth to be iust 3 +quintals, and that of 26 manas, 3 quintals, 3 roues. Note that 4 roues make +a quintall, and the roue is 32 rotiloes, as in Ormuz. + +There is also another weight which they call Marco, which is eight ounces +or halfe a rotilo of Goa, and 9 ounces of Venice sotile: with this they +weigh amber, corall, muske, ambracan, ciuet, and other fine wares. + +There is also another sort of weight called Mangiallino, which is 5 graines +of Venice weight and therewith they weigh diamants and other iewels. + +[Sidenote: Muske of Tartarie by the way of China.] Note that in Goa they +vse not to abate any tare of any goods, except of sacks or wraps, and +therefore it requireth great aduisement in buying of the goods, especially +in the muske of Tartaria which commeth by way of China in bladders, and so +weigh it without any tare rebating. + +The measure of Goa is called a tode, which encreaseth vpon the measure of +Babylon and Balsara after the rate of 17 and one eight part by the 100, so +that bringing 100 pikes of any measurable ware from thence to Goa, it is +found 117 pikes 7 eight parts, and bringing 100 codes from Ormuz to Goa, +there is found but 93 codes and one fourth part. + +There is also the vare in Goa, which is iust as the vare of Ormuz, and +therewith they measure onely things that are of small value. + +For the mony of Goa, there is a kind of mony made of lead and tin mingled, +being thicke and round, and stamped on the one side with a spheare or globe +of the world, and on the other side two arrowes and 5 rounds: and this kind +of mony is called Basaruchi, and 15 of these make a vinton of naughty mony, +and 5 vintons make a tanga, and 4 vintenas make a tanga of base money: so +that the tanga of base mony is 60 basaruchies, and the tanga of good mony +75. basaruchies, and 5 tangas make a seraphine of gold, which in +merchandize is worth 5 tangas good money: but if one would change them into +basaruchies, he may haue 5 tangas, and 16 basaruchies, which ouerplus they +cal cerafagio, and when they bargain of the pardaw of gold, each pardaw is +ment to be 6 tangas good mony, but in merchandise they vse not to demaund +pardawes of gold in Goa, except it be for iewels and horses, for all the +rest they take of seraphines of siluer, per aduiso. + +The roials of plate, I say, the roial of 8 are worth per custome and +commandement of the king of Portugall 400 reies, and euery rey is one +basaruchie and one fourth part, which maketh tangas 6, and 53 basaruchies +as their iust value, but for that the said roials are excellent siluer and +currant in diuers places of the India, and chiefly in Malacca, when the +ships are to depart at their due times (called Monsons) euery one to haue +the said roials pay more then they are worth, and the ouerplus, as is +abouesaid they call serafagio. And first they giue the iust value of the +100 roials of 8, at 5 tangas 50 basaruchies a piece, which done, they giue +seraphins 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, vntill 22 by the 100, according as +they are in request. + +The ducket of gold is worth 9 tangas and a halfe good money, and yet not +stable in price, for that when the ships depart from Goa to Cochin, they +pay them at 9 tangas and 3 fourth partes, and 10 tangas, and that is the +most that they are woorth. + +The larines are woorth by iust value basaruchies 93 and 3 fourth parts, and +4 larines make a seraphine of siluer, which is 5 tangas of good money, and +these also haue serafagion of 6, 7, 8, 10, vntill 16, by the hundred, for +when the ships depart for the North, to say, for Chaul, Diu, Cambaia, or +Bassaim, all cary of the same, because it is money more currant then any +other. + +There is also a sort of seraphins of gold of the stampe of Ormuz, whereof +there are but fewe in Goa, but being there, they are woorth fiue larines +and somewhat more, according as they are in request. + +There is also another litle sort of mony, round, hauing on the one side a +crosse, and on the other side a crowne, which is woorth one halfe a tanga +of good money, and another of the same stampe lesse than that which they +call Imitiuo de buona moneda, which is worth 18 basaruches 3 fourth parts a +piece. + +Note that if a man bargaine in marchandize, it behooueth to demaund tangas +of good money: for by nominating tangas onely, is vnderstood to be base +money of 60 basaruches, which wanteth of the good money vt supra. + +The custome of Goa is 8 in the 100 inwards, and as much outward, and the +goods are esteemed iustly rather to the marchants aduantage then the kings. +The custome they pay in this order. Comming with a ship from Ormuz to Goa +without horses, they pay 8 in the 100 whether they sell part or all, but if +they would carie of the sayd marchandise to any other place, they pay none +other custome, except others buy it and carie it foorth of the countrey, +and then they pay it 8 in the 100. And if one hauing paied the custome +should sell to another with composition to passe it forth as for his proper +accounts to saue the custome, this may not be, because the seller is put to +his oth, whether he send the goods for his owne account, or for the account +of any others that haue bought the same, and being found to the contrary +they pay custome as abouesaid. And in this order the marchants pay of all +the goods which come from any part of the Indies. But if they come from +Ormuz to Goa with horses, they are not subiect to pay any custome inward, +notwithstanding if they send all or any part thereof for any other place, +or returne it to Ormuz, they pay the custome outward, although they could +not sell. + +They vse also in Goa amongst the common sort to bargaine for coales, wood, +lime, and such like, at so many braganines, accounting 24 basaruches for +one braganine, albeit there is no such mony stamped. The custome of the +Portugals is, that any Moore or Gentile, of what condition or state soeuer +he be, may not depart from Goa to go within the land, without licence of +certaine deputies deputed for that office, who (if they be Moores or +Gentiles) doe set a seale vpon the arme, hauing thereon the armes of +Portugal, to be knowen of the porters of the citie, whether they haue the +said licence or no. + + +COCHIN. + +The weight, measure, and money, currant in Cochin. + +All the marchandise which they sell or buy within the sayd citie, they +bargaine for at so many serafines per quintal, which is 128. rotilos of +iust weight, with the quintal and rotilo of Goa and Ormuz: aduertising that +there are diuers sorts of bars according to the sorts of commodities, and +in traffiquing, they reason at so much the bar. Note that there are bars of +3 quintals and 3 quintals and halfe, and 4 quintals. They abate a vsed tare +of all marchandize, according to the sort of goods, and order taken for the +same. + +The measure of Goa and Cochin are all one. + +The money of Cochin are all the same sorts which are currant in Goa, but +the duckat of gold in value is 10 tangas of good money. + +The custome of Cochin as wel inward as outward for all strangers is eight +in the hundred, but those that haue bene married foure yeere in the +countrey pay but foure in the hundred, per aduiso. + + +MALACCA. + +The weight, measure, and money of Malacca. + +For the marchandise bought and sold in the citie they reckon at so much the +barre, which barre is of diuers sorts, great and small, according to the +ancient custome of the said citie, and diuersitie of the goods. But for the +cloues they bargaine at so much the barre, which barre is 3 quintals, 2 +roues and 10 rotilos. As I haue abouesaid, all kind of drugs haue their +sorts of barres limited. Note that euery quintal is 4 roues, and euery roue +32 rotilos, which is 128 rotilos the quintall, the which answereth to +Aleppo 95 rotilos, and to London 472 li. per quintal. + +The measures of Malacca are as the measures of Goa. In Malacca they abate +tare according to their distinction and agreement, for that there is no +iust tare limited. + +For the money of Malacca, the least money currant is of tinne stamped with +the armes of Portugall, and 12 of these make a Chazza. + +The Chazza is also of tinne with the said armes, and 2. of these make a +challaine. + +The Challaine is of tinne with the said armes, and 40 of these make a tanga +of Goa good money, but not stamped in Malacca. + +There is also a sort of siluer money which they call Patachines, and is +worth 6 tangas of good money, which is 360 reyes, and is stamped with two +letters, S. T. which is S. Thomas on the one side, and the armes of +Portugall on the other side. + +There is also a kind of mony called Cruzados stamped with the +atmes of Portugall, and is worth 6 tangas good mony, the larines +are euery 9 of them worth 2 cruzados, which is 12 tangas good +mony, and these larines be of those which are stamped in Balsara +and Ormuz. + +The roials of 8 they call Pardaos de Reales, and are worth 7 tangas of good +money. + +The custome of Malacca is 10 in the 100 as wel inward as outward, and those +which pay the custome inwards, if in case they send the same goods for any +other place within terme of a yeere and a day, pay no custome for the same. + + +A note of charges from Aleppo to Goa, as foloweth. + +For camels from Aleppo to Birrha. Medines 60 per somme.[A] +For mules from Aleppo to Birrha, med. 45. per somme. +For custome at Birrha, med. 10. per somme. +For Auania of the Cady at Birrha, med. 200. +For 4 dishes raisins, and 20 pounds sope, med. 35. +For a present to the Ermine the summe of med. 400. +For a barke of 30 or 35 sommes. Duc. 60 is med. 2400. per barke. +For meat for the men the summe of med. 200. +For custome at Racca the summe of med. 5. per somme. +For 3 platters of raisins, and 15 pounds of sope, med. 25. +For custome to king Aborissei, Duc. 20 is med. 800 +For custome at Dea the summe of med. 230. per barke +For 4 dishes raisins, and 20 pounds of sope, med. 35. +For custom at Bosara, the summe of med. 10. per barke. +For 2 dishes raisins, and 10 pound of sope, med. 17. +For custome in Anna, in 10 per summe, med. 10. per somme. +For 4 dishes of raisins and 20 pound of sope, med. 35. +For custome in Adite, medines 10 per barke, med. 10. per barke. +For 2 dishes raisins, and 10 pound of sope, med. 17. +For custome at Gweke, med. 10. per barke. +For 2 dishes raisins, and 20 pound of sope, med. 17. +For custome at Ist, med. 10. per somme. +For 4 platters raisins, and 20 pound of sope, med. 35. +Charges of presents at Felugia, med. 30. +For camels from Felugia to Babylon, med. 30. per somme. +For custome in Babylon, as in the booke appeareth. +For a barke from Babylon to Balsara, med. 900. +For custome of small wares, at Corno med. 20. per somme. +For custome of clothes at Corno, the summe of med. per somme. +For 3 dishes raisins, and 20 pound of sope, med. 26. +For fraight from Balsara to Ormus, according to the greatnesse, as in this + booke appeareth. +For custome in Ormus, as is abouesaid in this booke. +For fraight from Ormus to Goa, as is in this booke shewed. +For custome in Goa, as is abouesaid. + +[A: Or, by the Camels burden.] + + +A declaration of the places from whence the goods subscribed doe come. + +Cloues, from Maluco, Tarenate, Amboina, by way of Iaua. +Nutmegs, from Banda. +Maces from Banda, Iaua, and Malacca. +Pepper Gawrie, from Cochin. +Pepper common from Malabar. +Sinnamon, from Seilan. +Tinne, from Malacca. +Sandals wilde, from Cochin. +Sandales domestick, from Malacca. +Verzini, from S. Thomas, and from China. +Spicknard from Zindi, and Lahor. +Quicksiluer, from China. +Galls, from Cambaia, Bengala, Istria and Syria. +Ginger Dabulin, from Dabul. +Ginger Belledin, from the Countrie within Cambaia. +Gmger Sorattin, from Sorat within Cambaia. +Ginger Mordassi, from Mordas within Cambaia. +Ginger Meckin, from Mecca. +Mirabolans of all sorts, from Cambaia. +White sucket, from Zindia, Cambaia, and China. +Corcunia, from diuers places of India. +Corall of Leuant, from Malabar. +Chomin, from Balsara. +Requitria, from Arabia Felix. +Garble of Nutmegs from Banda. +Sal Armoniacke, from Zindi and Cambaia. +Zedoari, from diuers places of India. +Cubeb, from China. +Amomum, from China. +Camphora, from Brimeo neere to China. +Myrrha, from Arabia Felix. +Costo dulce, from Zinde, and Cambaia. +Borazo, from Cambaia, and Lahor. +Asa fetida, from Lahor. +Waxe, from Bengala. +Seragni, from Persia. +Cassia, from Cambaia, and from Gran Cayro. +Storax calamita, from Rhodes, to say, from Aneda, and Canemarie within + Caramania. +Storax liquida, from Rhodes. +Tutia, from Persia. +Cagiers, from Malabar, and Maldiua. +Ruuia to die withall, from Chalangi. +Alumme di Rocca, from China, and Constantinople. +Chopra, from Cochin and Malabar. +Oppopanax, from Persia. +Lignum Aloes, from Cochin, China, and Malacca. +Demnar, from Siacca and Blinton. +Galangæ, from China, Chaul, Goa, and Cochin. +Laccha, from Pegu, and Balaguate. +Carabbe, from Almanie. +Coloquintida, from Cyprus. +Agaricum, from Alemania. +Scamonea, from Syria, and Persia. +Bdellium, from Arabia felix, and Mecca. +Cardamomum small, from Barcelona. +Cardamomum great, from Bengala. +Tamarinda, from Balsara. +Aloe Secutrina, from Secutra. +Aloe Epatica, from Pat. +Safran, from Balsara, and Persia. +Lignum de China, from China. +Rhaponticum, from Persia, and Pugia. +Thus, from Secutra. +Turpith, from Diu, and Cambaia. +Nuts of India, from Goa, and other places of India. +Nux vomica, from Malabar. +Sanguis Draconis, from Secutra. +Armoniago, from Persia. +Spodio di Cana, from Cochin. +Margaratina, from Balaguate. +Muske from Tartarie, by way of China. +Ambracban, from Melinde, and Mosombique. +Indico, from Zindi and Cambaia. +Silkes fine, from China. +Long pepper, from Bengala and Malacca. +Latton, from China. +Momia, from the great Cayro. +Belzuinum Mandolalo, from Sian, and Baros. +Belzuinum burned, from Bonnia. +Castorium, from Almania. +Corallina, from the red sea. +Masticke, from Sio. +Mella, from Romania. +Oppium, from Pogia, and Cambaia. +Calamus Aromaticus, from Constantinople. +Capari, from Alexandria and other places. +Dates, from Arabia felix and Alexandria. +Dictamnum album, from Lombardia. +Draganti, from Morea. +Euphorbium, from Barbaria. +Epithymum, from Candia. +Sena, from Mecca. +Gumme Arabike, from Zaffo. +Grana, from Coronto. +Ladanum, from Cyprus and Candia. +Lapis lazzudis, from Persia. +Lapis Zudassi, from Zaffetto. +Lapis Spongij is found in sponges. +Lapis Hæmatites, from Almanie. +Manna, from Persia. +Auripigmentum, from manie places of Turkie. +Pilatro, from Barbaria. +Pistaches, from Doria. +Worme-seede, from Persia. +Sumack, from Cyprus. +Sebesten, from Cyprus. +Galbanum from Persia. +Dente d'Abolio, from Melinde, and Mosambique. +Folium Indicum, from Goa, and Cochin. +Diasprum viride, from Cambaia. +Petra Bezzuar, from Tartaria. +Sarcacolla, from Persia. +Melleghete, from the West parts. +Sugo di Requillicie, from Arabia felix. +Chochenillo, from the West India. +Rubarbe, from Persia, and China. + + +The times or seasonable windes called Monsons, wherein the ships depart + from place to place in the East Indies. + +Note that the Citie of Goa is the principall place of all the Orientall +India, and the winter there beginneth the 15 of May with very great raine, +and so continueth till the first of August, so that during that space, no +shippe can passe ouer the barre of Goa, because through the continuall +shoures of raine all the sandes ioyne together neere vnto a mountaine +called Oghane, and all these sandes being ioyned together, runne into the +shoales of the barre and port of Goa, and can haue no other issue, but to +remaine in that port, and therefore it is shut vp vntill the first of +August, but at the 10 of August it openeth by reason of the raine which +ceaseth, and the sea doeth then scoure the sands away againe. + + +The monson from Goa to the Northward, to say, for Chaul, Diu, Cambaia, + Daman, Basaim, and other places. + +The ships depart from betwixt the tenth and 24 of August, for the Northward +places abouesayde, and to these places they may saile all times of the +yeere, except in the winter, which beginneth and endeth at the times +abouesaid. + + +The monson from the North parts, for Goa. + +The ships depart from Chaul, Diu, Cambaia, and other places Northwards for +Goa, betwixt the 8 and 15 of Ianuarie, and come to Goa about the end of +Februarie. + + +The first monson from Diu for the straight of Mecca. + +The ships depart from Diu about the 15 of Ianuarie, and returne from the +straights to Diu in the moneth of August. + + +The second monson from Diu for the straight of Mecca. + +The ships depart betwixt the 25 and first of September, and returne from +the straights to Diu, the first and 15 of May. + + +The monson from Secutra for Ormus. + +The ships depart about the tenth of August for Ormus: albeit Secutra is an +Iland and hath but few ships, which depart as abouesaid. + + +The monson wherein the Moores of the firme land come to Goa. + +About the fifteenth of September the Moores of the firme lande beginne to +come to Goa, and they come from all parts, as well from Balaguate, +Bezenegar, as also from Sudalacan, and other places. + + +The monson wherein the Moores of the firme land depart from Goa. + +They depart from Goa betwixt the 10 and 15 day of Nouember. Note that by +going for the North is ment the departing from Goa, for Chaul, Diu, +Cambaia, Daman, Basaim, Ghassain, and other places vnto Zindi: and by the +South is vnderstood, departing from Goa, for Cochin, and all that coast +vnto Cape Comori. + + +The first monson from Goa for Ormus. + +The shippes depart in the moneth of October from Goa, for Ormus, passing +with Easterly windes along the coast of Persia. + + +The second monson from Goa to Ormus. + +The ships depart about the 20 of Ianuarie passing by the like nauigation +and windes as in the first monson, and this is called of the Portugals and +Indians Entremonson. + + +The third monson from Goa to Ormus. + +The ships depart betwixt the 25 of March, and 6 of Aprill, hauing Easterly +windes, till they passe Secutra, and then they find Westerly windes, and +therefore they set their course ouer for the coast of Arabia, till they +come to Cape Rasalgate and the Straight of Ormus, and this monson is most +troublesome of all: for they make two nauigations in the heigth of Seylan, +which is 6 degrees and somewhat lower. + + +The first monson from Ormus for Chaul, and Goa. + +The ships depart from Ormus for Chaul, and Goa in the moneth of September, +with North and Northeast windes. + + +The second monson from Ormus for Chaul and Goa. + +The second monson is betwixt the fiue and twentie and last of December, +with like winds as the former monson. + + +The third monson from Ormus for Chaul and Goa. + +The third monson the ships depart from Ormus, for Chaul and Goa, betwixt +the first and 15. of April, and they saile with Southeast windes, East and +Northeast windes, coasting vpon the Arabia side from Cape Mosandon vnto +Cape Rasalgate, and hauing lost the sight of Cape Rasalgate, they haue +Westerly windes, and so come for Chaul and Goa, and if the said ships +depart not before the 25 of April, they are not then to depart that monson, +but to winter in Ormus because of the winter. + + +The first monson from Ormus for Zindi. + +The ships depart from Ormus betwixt the 15 and 26 of Aprill. + + +The second monson from Ormus for Zindi. + +The ships depart betwixt the 10 and 20 of October for Zindi from Ormus. + + +The monson from Ormus for the red sea. + +The ships depart from Ormus betwixt the first and last of Ianuarie. + + +Hitherto I haue noted the monsons of the ships departing from Goa to the + Northward: Now follow the monsons wherein the ships depart from Goa, to + the Southward. + +The Monson from Goa for Calicut, Cochin, Seilan, and all that coast. + +The ships depart from those places betwixt the 1 and 15 of August, and +there they find it nauigable all the yeere except in the winter, which +continueth as is aforesayd, from the 15 of May till the 10 of August. +[Sidenote: Note.] In like maner the ships come from these places for Goa at +euery time in the yeere except in the winter, but of all other the best +time is to come in Nouember, December and Ianuary. + + +The first monson from Goa, for Pegu. + +The ships depart from Goa, betwixt the 15 and 20 of April, and winter at S. +Thomas, and after the 5 of August, they depart from S. Thomas for Pegu. + + +The second monson from Goa, for Pegu. + +The ships depart from Goa betwixt the 8 and 24 of August, going straight +for Pegu, and if they passe the 24 of August, they cannot passe that +monson, neither is there any more monsons till April as is aforesaid. +[Sidenote: Marchandize good for Pegu.] Note that the chiefest trade is to +take money of S. Thomas rials, and patechoni, and to goe to S. Thomas, and +there to buy Tellami, which is fine cloth of India, whereof there is great +quantitie made in Coromandel, and brought thither, and other marchandise +are not good for that place except some dozen of very faire Emeraulds +orientall. For of golde, siluer, and Rubies, there is sufficient store in +Pegu. + + +The monson from Pegu for the Indies. + +The ships depart from Pegu betwixt the 15 and 25 of Ianuarie, and come to +Goa about the 25 of March, or in the beginning of April. Note, that if it +passe the 10 of May before the sayde ships be arriued in Goa, they cannot +come thither that monson, and if they haue not then fet the coast of India, +they shall with great perill fetch S. Thomas. + + +The first monson from Goa for Malacca. + +The ships depart betwixt the 15 and last of September, and arriue in +Malacca about the end of October. + + +The second monson from Goa to Malacca. + +The ships depart about the 5 of May from Goa, and arriue in Malacca about +the 15 of Iune. + + +The first monson from Malacca to Goa. + +The ships depart about the 10 of September, and come to Goa about the end +of October. + + +The second monson from Malacca to Goa. + +The ships depart from Malacca about the 10 of February, and come to Goa +about the end of March. But if the said ships should stay till the 10 of +May they cannot enter into Goa, and if at that time also they should not be +arriued at Cochin, they are forced to retume to Malacca, because the winter +and contrary windes then come vpon them. + + +The monson from Goa for China. + +The ships depart from Goa in the moneth of April. + + +The monson from China for Goa. + +The ships depart to be the 10 of May in Goa, and being not then arriued, +they turne backe to Cochin, and if they cannot fetch Cochin, they returne +to Malacca. + + +The monson from Goa to the Moluccaes. + +The ships depart about 10 or 15 of May, which time being past, the shippes +can not passe ouer the barre of Goa for the cause abouesaid. + + +The monson of the ships of the Moluccaes arriuall in Goa. + +The ships which come from the Moluccaes arriue vpon the bar of Goa about +the 15. of April. + + +The monsons of the Portingall ships for the Indies. + +[Sidenote: Note.] The ships which come from Portugall depart thence +ordinarily betwixt the tenth and fifteenth of March, comming the straight +way during the moneth of Iuly to the coast of Melinde, and Mosambique, and +from thence goe straight for Goa, and if in the moneth Iuly they should not +be at the coast of Melinde, they can in no wise that yeere fetch Melinde, +but returne to the Isle of Saint Helena, and so are not able, that time +being past, to fetch the coast of India, and to come straight for Goa. +Therefore (as is abouesaid) they returne to the Island of Saint Helena, and +if they cannot make the said Island, then they runne as lost vpon the Coast +of Guinea: but if the said ships be arriued in time vpon the coast of +Melinde, they set forwardes for Goa, and if by the fifteenth of September +they cannot fetch Goa, they then goe for Cochin, but if they see they +cannot fetch Cochin, they returne to Mosambique to winter there vpon the +sayd coast. [Sidenote: Note.] Albeit in the yeere of our Lord 1580 there +arriued the ship called San Lorenzo, being wonderfull sore sea-beaten, the +eight of October, which was accounted as a myracle for that the like had +not beene seene before. + + +The monson from India for Portugall. + +The shippes depart from Cochin betweene the fifteenth and last of Ianuary, +going on till they haue sight of Capo de buona speranza, and the Isle of +Saint Helena, which Islande is about the midway, being in sixteene degrees +to the South. And it is a litle Island being fruitfull of all things which +a man can imagine, with great store of fruit: and this Island is a great +succour to the shipping which returne for Portugall. And not long since the +said Island was found by the Portugales, and was discouered by a shippe +that came from the Indies in a great storme, in which they found such +abundance of wilde beastes, and boares, and all sort of fruite, that by +meanes thereof that poore ship which had been foure moneths at sea, +refreshed themselues both with water and meate very well, and this Island +they called S. Helena, because it was discouered vpon S. Helens day. And +vndoubtedly this Island is a great succour, and so great an ayde to the +ships of Portugall, that many would surely perish if that helpe wanted. And +therefore the king of Portugall caused a Church to be made there for +deuotion of S. Helena: where there are onely resident Eremits, and all +other are forbidden to inhabite there by the kings commaundement, to the +ende that the ships may be the more sufficiently furnished with victuals, +because the ships which come from India come but slenderly victualled, +[Sidenote: Note.] because there groweth no corne there, neither make they +any wine: but the ships which come from Portugall to the Indies touch not +in the sayd Island, because they set out being sufficiently furnished with +bread and water from Portugall for eight moneths voyage. Any other people +then the two Eremites abouesaid, cannot inhabite this Island, except some +sicke man that may be set there a shore to remaine in the Eremites +companie, for his helpe and recouery. + + +The monson from Goa to Mosambique. + +The ships depart betwixt the 10 and 15 of Ianuarie. + + +The monson from Mosambique to Goa. + +The ships depart betweene the 8 and last of August, and arriue in Chaul or +Goa in the moneth of October, till the 15 of Nouember. + + +The monson from Ormus to Bengala. + +The ships depart betwixt the 15 and 20 of Iune, and goe to winter at Teue +and depart thence about the 15 of August for Bengala. + + * * * * * + +A briefe extract specifying the certaine dayly paiments, answered quarterly + in time of peace, by the Grand Signior, out of his Treasurie, to the + Officers of his Seraglio or Court, successiuely in degrees: collected in + a yeerely totall summe, as followeth. + +For his owne diet euery day, one thousand and one aspers, according to a +former custome receiued from his auncestors: notwithstanding that otherwise +his diurnall expence is very much, and not certainly knowen, which summe +maketh sterling mony by the yere, two thousand, one hundred, 92. pounds, +three shillings, eightpence. + +The fiue and fourtie thousand Ianizaries dispersed in sundry places of his +dominions, at sixe aspers the day, amounteth by the yeere to fiue hundreth, +fourescore and eleuen thousand, and three hundreth pounds. + +The Azamoglans, tribute children, farre surmount that number, for that they +are collected from among the Christians, from whom betweene the yeeres of +sixe and twelue, they are pulled away yeerely perforce: whereof I suppose +those in seruice may be equall in number with the Ianizaries abouesayd, at +three aspers a day, one with another, which is two hundred fourescore and +fifteene thousand, sixe hundred and fiftie pounds. + +The fiue Bassas, whereof the Viceroy is supreme, at one thousand aspers the +day, besides their yerely reuenues, amounteth sterling by the yeere to ten +thousand, nine hundred and fiftie pounds. + +The fiue Beglerbegs, chiefe presidents of Greece, Hungary, and Sclauonia, +being in Europe, in Natolia, and Caramania of Asia, at one thousande aspers +the day: as also to eighteene other gouernours of Prouinces, at fiue +hundred aspers the day, amounteth by the yeere, to thirtie thousand sixe +hundred, and threescore pounds. + +The Bassa, Admirall of the Sea, one thousand aspers the day, two thousand, +one hundred foure score and ten pounds. + +The Aga of the Ianizaries, generall of the footemen, fiue hundred aspers +the day, and maketh by the yeere in sterling money, one thousand, foure +score and fifteene pounds. + +The Imbrahur Bassa, Master of his horse, one hundred and fiftie aspers the +day, is sterling money, three hundred and eight and twenty pounds. + +The chiefe Esquire vnder him, one hundred and fiftie aspers, is three +hundred and eight and twenty pounds. + +The Agas of the Spahi, Captaines of the horsemen, sixe, at one hundred and +fiftie aspers to either of them, maketh sterling, one thousand, nine +hundred, three score and eleuen pounds. + +The Capagi Bassas head porters foure, one hundred and fiftie aspers to ech, +and maketh out in sterling money by the yeere, one thousand, three hundred, +and fourteene pounds. + +The Sisinghir Bassa, Controller of the housholde, one hundred and twentie +aspers the day, and maketh out in sterling money by the yeere, two hundred, +threescore and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Chaus Bassa, Captaine of the Pensioners, one hundred and twentie aspers +the day, and amounteth to by the yeere in sterling money, two hundred, +threescore and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Capigilar Caiasi Captaine of his Barge, one hundreth and twentie aspers +the day, and maketh out by the yeere in sterling money, two hundred, +threescore and two poundes, sixteene shillings. + +The Solach Bassi, Captaine of his guard, one hundred and twentie aspers, +two hundred, three score and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Giebrigi Bassi, master of the armoury, one hundred and twentie aspers, +two hundred, three score and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Topagi Bassi, Master of the artillerie, one hundred and twentie aspers, +two hundred, three score and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Echim Bassi, Phisition to his person, one hundred and twentie aspers, +two hundred, three score and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +To fourtie Phisitions vnder him, to ech fourtie aspers, is three thousand, +eight hundred, three score and sixe pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Mustafaracas spearemen, attending on his person, in number fiue +hundred, to either three score aspers, and maketh sterling, threescore and +fiue thousand, and seuen hundred pounds. + +The Cisingeri gentlemen, attending vpon his diet, fourtie, at fourtie +aspers ech of them, and amounteth to sterling by the yeere, three thousand, +fiue hundred and foure pounds. + +The Chausi Pensioners, foure hundred and fourtie, at thirtie aspers, twenty +eight thousand, nine hundred and eight pounds. + +The Capagi porters of the Court and City, foure hundred, at eight aspers, +and maketh sterling money by the yeere, seuen thousand, and eight pounds. + +The Solachi, archers of his guard, three hundred and twenty, at nine +aspers, and commeth vnto in English money, the summe of sixe thousand, +three hundred and sixe pounds. + +The Spahi, men of Armes of the Court and the City, ten thousand, at twenty +fiue asters, and maketh of English money, fiue hundred, forty and seuen +thousand, and fiue hundred pounds. + +The Ianizaires sixteene thousand, at six aspers, is two hundred and ten +thousand, and two hundred and forty pounds. + +The Giebegi furbushers of armor, one thousand, fiue hundred, at sixe +aspers, and amounteth to sterling money, nineteene thousand, seuen hundred, +and fourescore pounds. + +The Seiesir, seruitors in his Equier or stable, fiue hundred, at two +aspers, and maketh sterling money, two thousand, one hundred, fourescore +and ten pounds. + +The Saesi, Sadlers and bit makers, five hundred, at seuen aspers, seuen +thousand, six hundred, threescore and fiue pounds. + +The Catergi, Carriers vpon Mules, two hundred, at fiue aspers, two +thousand, one hundred, fourescore and ten pounds. + +The Cinegi, Carriers vpon Camels, one thousand, fiue hundred, at eight +aspers, and amounteth in sterling money, to twenty sixe thousand, two +hundred, and fourescore pounds. + +The Reiz, or Captaines of the Gallies, three hundred, at ten aspers, and +amounteth in English money by the yeere, the summe of sixe thousand, fiue +hundred, threescore and ten pounds. + +The Alechingi, Masters of the said Gallies, three hundred, at seven aspers, +foure thousand, fiue hundred, fourescore and nineteene pounds. + +The Getti, Boateswaines thereof, three hundred, at sixe aspers, is three +thousande, nine hundred, fourty and two pounds. + +The Oda Bassi, Pursers, three hundred, at fiue aspers, maketh three +thousand two hundred, and fourescore pounds. + +The Azappi souldiers two thousand sixe hundred at foure Aspers, whereof the +six hundred do continually keepe the gallies, two and twentie thousand, +seuen hundred fourscore and six pounds. + +The Mariers Bassi masters over the shipwrights and kalkers of the navie, +nine, at 20. Aspers the piece, amounteth to three thousand fourescore and +foure pound, foure shillings. + +The Master Dassi shipwrights and kalkers, one thousand at fourteene aspers, +which amounteth by the yeere, to thirtie thousand, sixe hundred threescore +pound. + +Summa totalis of dayly paiments amounteth by the yeere sterling, one + million, nine hundred threescore eight thousand, seuen hundred thirty + fiue pounds, nineteene shillings eight pence, answered quarterly without + default, with the summe of foure hundred fourescore twelue thousand, one + hundred fourescore and foure pounds foure shillings eleven pence, and is + for every day fiue thousand three hundred, fourescore and thirteene + pounds, fifteene shillings ten pence. + +Annuities of lands neuer improued, fiue times more in value then their + summes mentioned, giuen by the saide Grand Signior, as followeth. + +To the Viceroy for his Timar or annuitie 60. thousand golde ducats. +To the second Bassa for his annuitie 50. thousand ducats. +To the third Bassa for his annuitie 40. thousand ducats. +To the fourth Bassa for his annuitie 30. thousand ducats. +To the fifth Bassa for his annuitie 20. thousand ducats. +To the Captaine of the Ianizaries 20. thousand ducats. +To the Ieu Merhorbassi master of his horse 15. thousand ducats. +To the Captaine of the pensioners 10. thousand ducats. +To the Captaine of his guard 5. thousand ducats. + +Summa totalls 90. thousand li. sterling. + +Beside these aboue specified, be sundry other annuities giuen to diuers +others of his aforesaid officers, as also to certaine called Sahims, +diminishing from three thousand to two hundred ducats, esteemed treble to +surmount the annuitie abouesaid. + + +The Turkes chiefe officers. + +The Viceroy is high Treasurer, notwithstanding that vnder him be three +subtreasurers called Teftadars, which bee accomptable to him of the +receipts out of Europe, Asia and Africa, saue their yeerely annuitie of +lands. + +The Lord Chancellor is called Nissangi Bassa, who sealeth with a certaine +proper character such licences, safe conducts, passeports, especiall +graunts, &c. as proceed from the Grand Signior: notwithstanding all letters +to forreine princes so firmed be after inclosed in a bagge, and sealed by +the Grand Signior, with a signet which he ordinarily weareth about his +necke, credited of them to haue bene of ancient appertayning to king +Salomon the wise. + +The Admirall giueth his voyce in the election of all Begs, Captaines of the +Islandes, to whom hee giueth their charge, as also appointeth the +Subbasses, Bayliffes or Constables ouer Cities and Townes vpon the Sea +coastes about Constantinople, and in the Archipelago, whereof hee reapeth +great profit. + +The Subbassi of Pera payeth him yeerely fifteene thousande ducats, and so +likewise either of the others according as they are placed. + +The Ressistop serueth in office to the Viceroy and Chancellor, as +Secretary, and so likewise doeth the Cogie Master of the Rolls, before +which two, passe all writings presented to, or granted by the said Viceroy +and Chancellor, offices of especiall credite and like profile, moreouer +rewarded with annuities of lands. + +There are also two chiefe Iudges named Cadi Lesker, the one ouer Europe, +and the other ouer Asia and Africa, which in Court doe sit on the Bench at +the left hand of the Bassas. These sell all offices to the vnder Iudges of +the land called Cadies, whereof is one in euery Citie or towne, before whom +all matters in controuersie are by iudgement decided, as also penalties and +corrections for crimes ordained to be executed vpon the offenders by the +Subbassi. + + +The number of Souldiers continually attending vpon the Beglerbegs the + gouernours of Prouinces and Saniacks, and their petie Captaines + mainteined of these Prouinces. + +The Beglerbegs of + + Græcia, fourtie thousand persons. + Buda, fifteene thousand persons. + Sclauonia, fifteene thousand persons. + Natolia, fifteene thousand persons. + Caramania, fifteene thousand persons. + Armenia, eighteene thousand persons. + Persia, twentie thousand persons. + Vsdrum, fifteene thousand persons. + Chirusta, fifteene thousand persons. + Caraemiti, thirtie thousand persons. + Gierusal, two and thirtie thousand persons. + +The Beglerbegs of + + Bagdat, fiue and twentie thousand persons. + Balsara, two and twenty thousand persons. + Lassaija, seuenteene thousand persons. + Alepo, fiue and twentie thousand persons. + Damasco, seuenteene thousand persons. + Cayro, twelue thousand persons. + Abes, twelue thousand persons. + Mecca, eight thousand persons. + Cyprus, eighteene thousand persons. + Tunis in Barbary, eight thousand persons. + Tripolis in Syria, eight thousand persons. + Alger, fourtie thousand persons. + +Whose Sangiacks and petie Captaines be three hundred sixtie eight, euery of +which retaining continually in pay from fiue hundreth to two hundreth +Souldiers, may be one with another at the least, three hundreth thousand +persons. + +Chiefe officers in his Seraglio about his person. Be these-- + + Capiaga, High Porter. + Alnader Bassi, Treasurer. + Oda Bassi, Chamberlaine. + Killergi Bassi, Steward. + Saraiaga, Comptroller. + Peskerolen, Groome of the chamber. + Edostoglan, Gentleman of the Ewer. + Sehetaraga, Armour bearer. + Choataraga, he that carieth his riding cloake. + Ebietaraga, Groome of the stoole. + +There be many other maner Officers, which I esteeme superfluous to write. + + +The Turkes yeerely reuenue. + +The Grand Signiors annual reuenue is said to be fourteene Millions and an +halfe of golden ducats, which is sterling fiue millions, eight score +thousand pounds. + +The tribute payd by the Christians his Subiects is one gold ducat yeerely +for the redemption of euery head, which may amount vnto not so litle as one +Million of golden ducats, which is sterling three hundred threescore +thousand pounds. + +Moreouer, in time of warre, he exacteth manifolde summes for maintenance of +his Armie and Nauie of the said Christians. + +The Emperour payeth him yeerely tribute for Hungary, threescore thousand +dollers, which is sterling thirteene thousand pound, besides presents to +the Viceroy and Bassas, which are said to amount to twentie thousand +dollers. + + +Ambassadors Allowances. + +The Ambassadour of the Emperour is allowed one thousand Aspers the day. + +The Ambassadour of the French king heretofore enioyed the like: but of late +yeeres by meanes of displeasure conceiued by Mahumet then Viceroy, it was +reduced to sixe crownes the day, beside the prouision of his Esquire of his +stable. + +The Ambassadours of Poland, and for the state of Venice are not Ligiers as +these two abouesaid. The said Polack is allowed 12. Frenche crownes the day +during his abode, which may be for a moneth. Very seldome do the state of +Venice send any Ambassador otherwise, then enforced of vrgent necessity: +but in stead thereof keepe their Agent, president ouer other Marchants of +them termed a bailife, who hath none allowance of the Grand Signior, +although his port and state is in maner as magnifical as the other +aforesaid Ambassadors. The Spanish Ambassador was equall with other in +Ianizaries: but for so much as he would not according to custome folow the +list of other Ambassadors in making presents to the Grand Signior, he had +none alowance. His abode there was 3. yeres, at the end whereof, hauing +concluded a truce for six yeres, taking place from his first comming in +Nouember last past 1580. he was not admitted to the presence of the Grand +Signior. + + * * * * * + +To the Worshipfull and his very loving Vncle M. Rowland Hewish, Esquier, at + Sand in Devonshire. + +Sir, considering the goodnesse of your Nature which is woont kindely to +accept from a friend, euen of meane things being giuen with a good heart, I +haue presumed to trouble you with the reading of this rude discourse of my +trauels into Turkie, and of the deliuerie of the present with such other +occurrents as there happened woorthie the obseruation: of all which +proceedings I was an eie-witnesse, it pleasing the Ambassadour to take mee +in with him to the Grand Signior. If for lacke of time to put it in order I +haue not performed it so well as it ought, I craue pardon, assuring you +that to my knowledge I haue not missed in the trueth of any thing. If you +aske me what in my trauels I haue learned, I answere as a noble man of +France did to the like demaund, Hoc vnum didici, mundi contemptum: and so +concluding with the wise man in the booke of the Preacher, that all is +vanitie, and one thing onely is necessarie, I take my leaue and commit you +to the Almightie. From London the 16. March 1597. + +Your louing Nephew +Richard Wrag. + + +A description of a Voiage to Constantinople and Syria, begun the 21. of + March 1593. and ended the 9. of August, 1595. wherein is shewed the order + of deliuering the second Present by Master Edward Barton her maiesties + Ambassador, which was sent from her Maiestie to Sultan Murad Can, + Emperour of Turkie. + +We set saile in the Ascension of London, a new shippe very well appointed, +of two hundred and three score tunnes (whereof was master one William +Broadbanke, a prouident and skilfull man in his facultie) from Grauesend +the one and twentie of March 1593. And vpon the eight of Aprill folowing +wee passed the streights of Gibraltar, and with a small Westerne gale, the +24. of the same, we arriued at Zante an Iland vnder the Venetians. The +fourth of May wee departed, and the one and twentie wee arriued at +Alexandretta in Cilicia in the very bottome of the Mediterrane sea, a roade +some 25. miles distance from Antioch, where our marchants land their goods +to bee sent for Aleppo. From thence wee set saile the fift of Iune, and by +contrary windes were driuen vpon the coast of Caramania into a road neere a +litle Iland where a castle standeth, called Castle Rosso, some thirtie +leagues to the Eastwards of the Rhodes, where after long search for fresh +water, we could finde none, vntil certaine poore Greekes of the Iland +brought vs to a well where we had 5 or 6 tuns. That part of the country +next the sea is very barren and full of mountains, yet found we there an +olde tombe of marble, with an epitaph of an ancient Greeke caracter, by +antiquity neere worne out and past reading; which to the beholders seemed a +monument of the greatnesse of the Grecian monarchy. [Sidenote: Candie.] +From thence we went to the Rhodes, and by contrary windes were driuen into +a port of Candy, called Sittia: this Iland is vnder the Venetians, who haue +there 600 souldiers, besides certaine Greeks, continually in pay. Here with +contrary winds we stayed six weeks, and in the end, hauing the winde +prosperous, we sailed by Nicaria, Pharos, Delos, and Andros, with sight of +many other Ilands in the Archipelago, and arriued at the two castles in +Hellespont the 24 of August. Within few dayes after we came to Galipoli +some thirty miles from this place, where foure of vs tooke a Parma or boat +of that place, with two watermen, which rowed us along the Thracian shore +to Constantinople, which sometime sailing and sometime rowing, in foure +dayes they performed. The first of September we arriued at the famous port +of the Grand Signior, where we were not a little welcome to M. Edward +Barton vntil then her Maiesties Agent, who (with many other great persons) +had for many dayes expected the present. [Sidenote: The Ascension arriued +at the 7 towers.] Fiue or sixe dayes after the shippe arriued neere the +Seuen towers, which is a very strong hold, and so called of so many +turrets, which it hath, standing neere the sea side, being the first part +of the city that we came vnto. [Sidenote: The ship saluteth the grand +Signior.] Heere the Agent appointed the master of the Ascension to stay +with the shippe vntill a fitte winde and opportunity serued to bring her +about the Seraglio to Salute the Grand Signior in his moskyta or church: +for you shall vnderstand that he hath built one neere the wall of his +Seraglio or pallace adioyning to the Sea side; whereunto twise or thrise a +weeke he resorteth to performe such religious rites as their law requireth: +where hee being within few dayes after, our shippe set out in their best +maner with flagges, streamers and pendants of diuers coloured silke, with +all the mariners, together with most of the Ambassadours men, hauing the +winde faire, and came within two cables length of this his moskita, where +(hee to his great content beholding the shippe in such brauery) they +discharged first two volies of small shot, and then all the great ordinance +twise ouer, there being seuen and twentie or eight and twentie pieces in +the ship. Which performed, he appointed the Bustangi-Bassa or captaine of +the great and spacious garden or parke, to giue our men thankes, with +request that some other day they would shew him the like sporte when hee +would have the Sultana or Empresse a beholder thereof, which few dayes +after at the shippes going to the Custome-house they performed. + +The grand Signiors salutation thus ended, the master brought the ship to an +anker at Rapamat neere the ambassadors house, where hee likewise saluted +him with all his great ordinance once ouer, and where he landed the +Present, the deliuerie whereof for a time was staied: the cause of which +staie it shall neither be dishonorable for our nation, or that woorthie man +the ambassador to shew you. [Sidenote: The cause of staying the present.] +At the departure of Sinan Bassa the chiefe Vizir, and our ambassadors great +friend toward the warres of Hungarie there was another Bassa appointed in +his place, a churlish and harsh natured man, who vpon occasion of certaine +Genouezes, escaping out of the castles standing toward the Euxine Sea, nowe +called the black Sea, there imprisoned, apprehended and threatened to +execute one of our Englishmen called Iohn Field, for that hee was taken +thereabouts, and knowen not many dayes before to haue brought a letter to +one of them: vpon the soliciting of whose libertie there fell a iarre +betweene the Bassa (being now chiefe Vizir) and our ambassador, and in +choler he gaue her maiesties ambassador such words, as without sustaining +some great indignitie hee could not put vp. [Sidenote: An Arz to the grand +Signior] Whereupon after the arriual of the Present, he made an Arz, that +is, a bill of Complaint to the grand Signior against him, the manner in +exhibiting whereof is thus performed. + +The plaintifes expect the grand Signiors going abroad from his pallace, +either to Santa Sophia or to his church by the sea side, whither, with a +Perma (that is one of their vsuall whirries) they approch within some two +or three score yards, where the plaintife standeth vp, and holdeth his +petition ouer his forehead in sight of the grand Signior (for his church is +open to the Sea side) the rest sitting still in the boat, who appointeth +one of his Dwarfes to receiue them, and to bring them to him. A Dwarfe, one +of the Ambassadors fauorites, so soone as he was discerned, beckned him to +the shore side, tooke his Arz, and with speed caried it to the grand +Signior. Now the effect of it was this; that except his highnesse would +redresse this so great an indignitie, which the Vizir his slaue had offered +him and her maiestie in his person, he was purposed to detaine the Present +vntill such time as he might by letters ouer-land from her maiestie bee +certified, whither she would put vp so great an iniurie as it was. +[Sidenote: The great hall of Iustice.] Whereupon he presently returned +answere, requesting the ambassador within an houre after to goe to the +Douan of the Vizir, vnto whom himselfe of his charge would send a gowne of +cloth of gold, and commaund him publikely to put it vpon him, and with kind +entertainment to imbrace him in signe of reconciliation. [Sidenote: +Reconceliation with the Vizir made.] Whereupon our ambassador returning +home, tooke his horse, accompanied with his men, and came to the Vizirs +court, where, according to the grand Signiors command, he with all shew of +kindnesse embraced the ambassador, and with curteous speeches reconciled +himselfe, and with his own hands put the gowne of cloth of gold vpon his +backe. Which done, hee with his attendants returned home, to the no small +admiration of all Christians, that heard of it, especially of the French +and Venetian ambassadors, who neuer in the like case against the second +person of the Turkish Empire durst haue attempted so bold an enterprise +with hope of so friendly audience, and with so speedie redresse. This +reconciliation with the great Vizir thus made, the ambassador prepared +himselfe for the deliuerie of the Present, which vpon the 7 of October +1593. in this maner he performed. + +[Sidenote: The ambassador goeth to the court with the present.] The +Ascension with her flags and streamers, as aforesaid, repaired nigh vnto +the place where the ambassador should land to go vp to the Seraglio: for +you must vnderstand that all Christian ambassadors haue their dwelling in +Pera where most Christians abide, from which place, except you would go 4 +or 5 miles about, you cannot go by land to Constantinople, whereas by Sea +it is litle broder then the Thames. Our Ambassador likewise apparelled in a +sute of cloth of siluer, with an vpper gowne of cloth of gold, accompanied +with 7 gentlemen in costly sutes of Sattin, with 40 other of his men very +well apparelled, and all in one liuerie of sad French russet cloth gownes, +at his house tooke boate: at whose landing the ship discharged all her +ordinance, where likewise attended 2 Bassas, with 40 or 50 Chauses to +accompany the ambassador to the court, and also horses for the ambassador +and his gentlemen, very richly furnished, with Turkish seruants attendant +to take the horses when they should light. [Sidenote: The Ambass. came to +the Seraglio.] The ambassador thus honorably accompanied, the Chauses +foremost, next his men on foote all going by two and two, himselfe last +with his Chause and Drugaman or Interpreter, and 4 Ianissaries, which he +doeth vsually entertaine in his house to accompany him continually abroad, +came to the Seraglio about an Engush mile from the water side, where first +hee passed a great gate into a large court (much like the space before +Whitehall gate) where he with his gentlemen alighted and left their horses. +From hence they passed into an other stately court, being about 6 score in +bredth, and some 10 score yards long, with many trees in it: where all the +court was with great pompe set in order to entertaine our ambassador. +[Sidenote: All these are captaines of hundreds and of fifties.] Vpon the +right hand all the length of the court was a gallerie arched ouer, and +borne vp with stone pillars, much like the Roiall Exchange, where stood +most of his guard in rankes from the one end to the other in costly aray, +with round head pieces on their heads of mettall and gilt ouer, with a +great plume of fethers somewhat like a long brush standing vp before. On +the left hand stood the Cappagies or porters, and the Chauses. All these +courtiers being about the number of 2000. (as I might well gesse) most of +them apparelled in cloth of gold, siluer, veluet, sattin and scarlet, did +together with bowing their bodies, laying their hands vpon their brests in +curteous maner of salutation, entertain the Ambassador: who likewise +passing between them, and turning himself sometime to the right hand and +sometime to the left, answered them with the like. [Sidenote: The +ambassador receiued by the Vizir with all kindnesse.] As he thus passed +along, certaine Chauses conducted him to the Douan, which is the seat of +Iustice, where certaine dayes of the weeke the grand Vizir, with the other +Vizirs, the Cadi-lesker or lord chiefe Iustice, and the Mufti or high +priest do sit to determine vpon such causes as be brought before them, +which place is vpon the left side of this great court, whither the +ambassador with his gentlemen came, where hee found the Vizir thus +accompanied as aforesayd, who with great shew of kindnes receiued him: and +after receit of her maiesties letters, and conference had of the Present, +of her maiesties health, of the state of England, and such other matters as +concerned our peaceable traffique in those parts: [Sidenote: Diner brought +in.] dinner being prepared was by many of the Courtiers brought into +another inner roome next adioining, which consisted of an hundred dishes or +therabouts, most boiled and rosted, where the ambassador accompanied with +the Vizirs went to dinner, his gentlemen likewise with the rest of his men +hauing a dinner with the like varietie prepared vpon the same side of the +court, by themselues sate downe to their meat, 40 or 50 Chauses standing at +the vpper end attending vpon the gentlemen to see them serued in good +order; their drinke was water mingled with rose water and sugar brought in +a Luthro (that is a goates skinne) which a man carieth at his backe, and +vnder his arme letteth it run out at a spout into cups as men will call for +it. [Sidenote: Diner taken away] The dinner thus with good order brought +in, and for halfe an houre with great sobrietie and silence performed, was +not so orderly taken vp; for certaine Moglans officers of the kitchin (like +her maiesties black guard) came in disordered maner and tooke away the +dishes, and he whose hungry eie one dish could not satisfie, turned two or +three one into the other, and thus of a sudden was a cleane riddance made +of all. The ambassador after dinner with his gentlemen, by certaine +officers were placed at the vpper ende vpon the left side of the court, +nere vnto a great gate which gaue entrance to a third court being but +litle, paued with stone. [Sidenote: Gownes of cloth of gold for the +ambassador and his gentlemen.] In the midst whereof was a litle house built +of marble, as I take it, within which sate the grand Signor, according to +whose commandement giuen there were gownes of cloth of gold brought out of +the wardrope, and put vpon the ambassador and 7 of his gentlemen, the +ambassador himselfe hauing 2, one of gold and the other of crimosin veluet, +all the rest one a piece. [Sidenote: The Present.] Then certaine Cappagies +had the Present, which was in trunks there ready, deliuered them by the +ambassadors men, it being 12 goodly pieces of gilt plate, 36 garments of +fine English cloth of al colors, 20 garments of cloth of gold, 10 garments +of sattin, 6 pieces of fine Holland, and certaine other things of good +value; al which were caried round about the court, each man taking a piece, +being in number very neere 100 parcels, and so 2 and 2 going round that all +might see it, to the greater glory of the present, and of him to whom it +was giuen: [Sidenote: The Present viewed.] they went into the innermost +court passing by the window of that roome, where the grand Signior sate, +who, as it went by to be laid vp in certaine roomes adioining, tooke view +of all. Presently after the present followed the ambassador with his +gentlemen; at the gate of which court stoode 20 or 30 Agaus which be +eunuchs. Within the court yard were the Turkes Dwarfes and Dumbe men, being +most of them youths. At the doore of his roome stood the Bustangi-bassa, +with another Bassa to lead the ambassador and his folowers to the grand +Signior who sate in a chaire of estate, apparelled in a gowne of cloth of +siluer. The floore vnder his feete, which part was a foote higher then the +rest, was couered with a carpet of green sattin embrodered most richly with +siluer, orient perles and great Turkesses; the other part of the house was +couered with a carpet of Cornation sattin imbrodered with gold, none were +in the roome with him, but a Bassa who stood next the wall ouer against him +banging down his head, and looking submissely vpon the ground as all his +subjects doe in his presence. [Sidenote: The ambassador kisseth the grand +Signiors hand.] The ambassador thus betwixt two which stood at the doore +being led in, either of them taking an arme, kissed his hand, and so +backward with his face to the Turke they brought him nigh the dore againe, +where he stood vntill they had likewise done so with all the rest of his +gentlemen. [Sidenote: The ambassadors demands granted.] Which ended, the +ambassador, according as it is the custome when any present is deliuered, +made his three demaunds, such as he thought most expedient for her +maiesties honor, and the peaceable traffique of our nation into his +dominions: whereunto he answered in one word, Nolo, which is in Turkish as +much as, it shal be done: for it is not the maner of the Turkish emperor +familiarly to confer with any Christian ambassador, but he appointeth his +Vizir in his person to graunt their demaunds if they be to his liking: as +to our ambassador he granted all his demands, and gaue order that his daily +allowance for his house of mony, flesh, wood, and haie, should be augmented +with halfe as much more as it had bene before. Hereupon the ambassador +taking his leaue, departed with his gentlemen the same way he came, the +whole court saluting him as they did at his comming in: and comming to the +second court to take our horses, after we were mounted, we staied halfe an +houre, vntil the captain of the guard with 2000 horsemen at the least +passed before, after whom folowed 40 or 50 Chauses next before the +ambassador to accompany him to his house. And as before at his landing, so +now at his taking boat, the ship discharged all her great ordinance, where +arriuing, he likewise had a great banquet prepared to entertaine those +which came to bring him home. [Sidenote: The Sultanas present.] The pompe +and solemnitie of the Present, with the day thus ended, he shortly after +presented the Sultana or empresse who (by reason that she is mother to him +which was heire to the crown Imperial) is had in far greater reuerence then +any of his other Queens or concubines. The Present sent her in her +maiesties name was a iewel of her maiesties picture, set with some rubies +and diamants, 3 great pieces of gilt plate, 10 garments of cloth of gold, a +very fine case, of glass bottles siluer and gift, with 2 pieces of fine +Holland, which so gratefully she accepted, as that she sent to know of the +ambassador what present he thought she might return that would most delight +her maiestie: who sent word that a sute of princely attire being after the +Turkish fashion would for the rarenesse thereof be acceptable in England. +[The Sultanas present to the Queene. Letters sent for England.] Whereopon +she sent an vpper gowne of cloth of gold very rich, an vnder gowne of cloth +of siluer, and a girdle of Turkie worke, rich and faire, with a letter of +gratification, which for the rarenesse of the stile, because you may be +acquainted with it, I haue at the ende of this discourse hereunto annexed, +which letter and present, with one from the grand Signor, was sent by M. +Edward Bushell, and M. William Aldridge ouer-land the 20 of March, who +passed through Valachia and Moldauia, and so through Poland, where Michael +prince of Valachia, and Aron Voiuoda prince of Moldauia receiuing letters +from the ambassador, entertained them with al curtesie, through whose +meanes by the great fauour which his lordship had with the grand Signior, +they had not long before both of them bene aduanced to their princely +dignities. [Sidenote: The other Vizirs presented.] Hee likewise presented +Sigala the Admirall of the Seas, with Abrim Bassa, who maried the great +Turkes daughter, and all the other Vizirs with diuers pieces of plate, fine +English cloth and other costly things: the particulars whereof, to auoid +tediousnesse, I omit. [Sidenote: The Ascension departeth.] All the presents +thus ended, the ship shooting ten pieces of ordinance at the Seraglio +point, as a last farewell, departed on her iourney for England the first of +Nouember, my selfe continuing in Constantinople vntill the last of Iuly +after. This yere in the spring there was great preparation for the +Hungarian wars: and the great Turke threatned to goe himselfe in person: +but like Heliogabalus, his affections being more seruiceable to Venus then +to Mars, he stayed at home. Yet a great army was dispatched this yere; who, +as they came out of Asia to goe for Hungary, did so pester the streets of +Constantinople for the space of two moneths in the spring time, as scarse +either Christian or Iew could without danger of losing his money passe vp +and downe the city. What insolencies, murders and robberies were committed +not onely vpon Christians but also vpon Turks I omit to write, and I pray +God in England the like may neuer be seene: and yet I could wish, that such +amongst vs as haue inioyed the Gospel with such great and admirable peace +and prosperity vnder her Maiesties gouerment this forty yeeres, and haue +not all this time brought forth better fruits of obedience to God, and +thankfulnesse to her Maiesty, were there but a short time to beholde the +miserable condition both of Christians and others liuing vnder such an +infidell prince, who not onely are wrapped in most palpable and grosse +ignorance of minde, but are cleane without the meanes of the true knowledge +of God: I doubt not but the sight hereof (if they be not cleane void of +grace) would stirre them vp to more thankefulnesse to God, that euer they +were borne in so happy a time, and vnder so wise and godly a prince +professing the true religion of Christ. + +The number of souldiours which went to the warres of Hungary this yeere +were 470000, as by the particulars giuen by the Admirall to the Ambassadour +hereunder doe appeare. Although all these were appointed and supposed to +goe, yet the victories which the Christians in the spring had against the +Turks strooke such a terrour in many of the Turkish souldiours, as by +report diuers vpon the way thither left their Captaines and stole away. + + +The number of Turkish souldiours which were appointed to goe into Hungary + against the Christian Emperour. May 1594. + +Sinan Bassa generall, with the Saniacke masould, that is, out of office, + with the other Saniacks in office or of degree, 40000. +Achmigi, that is, Aduenturers, 50000. +The Agha or Captaine with his Ianisaries, and his Giebegies, 20000. +The Beglerbeg of Græcia, with all his Saniacks, 40000. +The company of Spaheis or horsemen, 10000. +The company of Silitari, 6000. +The company of Sagbulue and of Solbulue both together, 8000. +The Bassa of Belgrad. } +The Bassa of Temiswar. } +The Bassa of Bosna. } 80000. +The Bassa of Buda. } +The Siniack of Gersech. } + +Out of Asia. + +The Bassa of Caramania. } +The Bassa of Laras. } +The Bassa of Damasco. } +The Bassa of Suas. } 120000 +The Bassa of Van or Nan. } +The Bassa of Vsdrum. } +Of Tartars there be about 100000. } + +Thus you may see that the great Turke maketh warre with no small numbers. +And in anno 1597, when Sultan Mahomet himselfe went in person into Hungary, +if a man may beleeue reports, he had an army of 600000. + +For the city of Constantinople you shall vnderstand that it is matchable +with any city in Europe, as well in bignesse as for the pleasant situation +thereof, and commodious traffike and bringing of all maner of necessary +prouision of victuals, and whatsoeuer els mans life for the sustentation +thereof shall require, being seated vpon a promontory, looking toward +Pontus Euxinus vpon the Northeast, and to Propontis on the Southwest, by +which two seas by shipping is brought great store of all maner of victuals. +The city it selfe in forme representeth a triangular figure, the sea +washing the walles vpon two sides thereof, the other side faceth the +continent of Thracia; the grand Signiors seraglio standeth vpon that point +which looketh into the sea, being cut off from the city by a wall; so that +the wall of his pallace conteineth in circuit about two English miles: the +seuen towers spoken of before stand at another corner, and Constantines +olde pallace to the North at the third corner. The city hath a threefolde +wall about it; the innermost very high, the next lower then that, and the +third a countermure and is in circuit about ten English miles: it hath +foure and twentie gates: and when the empire was remooued out of the West +into the East, it was inriched with many spoiles of olde Rome by Vespasian +and other emperours, hauing many monuments and pillars in it worthy the +obseruation; amongst the rest in the midst of Constantinople standeth one +of white marble called Vespasians pillar, of 38 or 40 yards high, which +hath from the base to the top proportions of men in armour fighting on +horsebacke: it is likewise adorned with diuers goodly buildings and stately +Mesquitas, whereof the biggest is Sultan Solimans a great warriour, which +liued in the time of Charles the fifth; but the fairest is Santa Sophia, +which in the time of the Christian emperours was the chiefe cathedrall +church, and is still in greatest account with the great Turke: it is built +round like other Greekish churches, the pavements and walles be all of +marble, it hath beneath 44 pillars of diuers coloured marble of admirable +height and bignesse, which stand vpon great round feet of brasse, much +greater then the pillars, and of a great height, some ten yards distant +from the wall: from which vnto these pillars is a great gallery built, +which goeth round about the church; and vpon the outside of the gallery +stand 66 marble pillars which beare vp the round roofe being the top of the +church: it hath three pulpits or preaching places, and about 2000 lampes +brought in by the Turke. Likewise vpon one side in the top is the picture +of Christ with the 12 Apostles, but their faces are defaced, with two or +three ancient tombs of Christians: to the West sticketh an arrow in the +toppe of the Church, which, as the Turks report, Sultan Mahomet shot when +he first tooke the city. Neere adioyning be two chapels of marble, where +lie buried most of the emperours with their children and sultanas. The 16 +of Iuly, accompanied with some other of our nation we went by water to the +Blacke sea, being 16 miles distant from Constantinople, the sea al the way +thither being little broader then the Thames; both sides of the shore are +beautified with faire and goodly buildings. At the mouth of this Bosphorus +lieth a rocke some fourescore yards from the maine land, wherevpon standeth +a white marble pillar called Pompeys pillar, the shadow whereof was 23 +foote long at nine of the clocke in the forenoone: over against it is a +turret of stone upon the maine land 120 steps high, hauing a great +glass-lanthorne in the toppe foure yards in diamiter and three in height, +with a great copper pan in the midst to holde oile, with twenty lights in +it, and it serueth to giue passage into this straight in the night to such +ships as come from all parts of those seas to Constantinople: it is +continually kept by a Turke, who to that end hath pay of the grand Signior. +And thus hauing spent eleuen moneths in Constantinople, accompanied with a +chause, and carying certaine mandates from the grand Signior to the Bassa +of Aleppo for the kinde vsage of our nation in those parts, the 30 of Iuly +I tooke passage in a Turkish carmosale or shippe bound for Sidon; and +passing thorow Propontis, hauing Salimbria with Heraclia most pleasantly +situated on the right hand, and Proconesus now called Marmora on the left, +we came to Gallipoly, and so by Hellespont, betweene the two castles before +named called Sestos and Abydos, famous for the passages made there both by +Xerxes and great Alexander, the one into Thracia, the other into Asia, and +so by the Sigean Promontory, now called Cape Ianitzary, at the mouth of +Hellespont vpon Asia side, where Troy stood, where are yet ruines of olde +walles to be seene, with two hils rising in a piramidall forme, not +vnlikely to be the tombs of Achilles and Ajax. From thence we sailed along, +hauing Tenedos and Lemnos on the right hand, and the Troian fields on the +left: at length we came to Mitylen and Sio long time inhabited by the +Genoueses, but now vnder the Turke. The Iland is beautified with goodly +buildings and pleasant gardens, and aboundeth with fruits, wine, and the +gum masticke. From thence sailing alongst the gulfe of Ephesus with Nicaria +on the right hand, Samos and Smirna on the left, we came to Patmos, where +S. Iohn wrote the Revelation. The Iland is but small, not aboue five miles +in compasse: the chiefe thing it yeeldeth is corn: it hath a port for +shipping, and in it is a monastery of Greekish Caloieros. From thence by +Cos (now called Lango) where Hipocrates was borne: and passing many other +Ilands and rocks, we arriued at Rhodes, one of the strongest and fairest +cities of the East: here we stayed three or foure dayes; and by reason of a +By which went in the ship to Paphos in Cyprus, who vsed me with all +kindnesse, I went about the city, and tooke the view of all: which city is +still with all the houses and walles thereof maintained in the same order +as they tooke it from the Rhodian knights. Ouer the doores of many of the +houses, which be strongly built of stone, do remaine vndefaced, the armes +of England, France, Spaine, and many other Christian knights, as though the +Turkes in the view thereof gloried in the taking of all Christendome, whose +armes they beholde. From thence we sailed to Paphos an olde ruinous towne +standing vpon the Westerne part of Cyprus, where S. Paul in the Acts +conuerted the gouernor. Departing hence, we came to Sidon, by the Turkes +called Saytosa, within tenne or twelue miles of the place where Tirus +stood, which now being eaten in by the sea, is, as Ezekiel prophesied, a +place for the spreading out of a net. Sidon is situated in a small bay at +the foot of mount Libanus, vpon the side of an hill looking to the North: +it is walled about, with a castle nigh to the sea, and one toward the land +which is ruinated, but the walle thereof standeth. Some halfe mile vp +toward the mountaine be certaine ruines of buildings, with marble pillars, +remaining: heere for three dayes we were kindly entertained of the Captaine +of the castle: and in a small barke we sailed from hence along the shore to +Tripoli, and so to Alexandretta, where the 24 of August we arriued. From +thence with a Venetian carauan we went by land to Aleppo, passing by +Antioch, which is seated vpon the side of an hill, whose walles still stand +with 360 turrets upon them, and neere a very great plaine which beareth the +name of the city, thorow which runneth the riuer Orontes, in Scripture +called Farfar. In Aleppo I stayed vntill February following; in this city, +as at a mart, meete many nations out of Asia with the people of Europe, +hauing continuall traffike and interchangeable course of marchandise one +with another: the state and trade of which place, because it is so well +knowen to most of our nation I omitte to write of. The 27 of February I +departed from Aleppo, and the fifth of March imbarked my selfe at +Alexandretta in a great ship of Venice called the Nana Ferra, to come to +England. The 14 we put into Salino in Cyprus, where the ship staying many +dayes to lade cotton wool, and other commodities, in the meane time +accompanied with M. William Barret my countrey man, the master of the ship +a Greeke, and others wee tooke occasion to see Nicosia, the chiefe city of +this Iland, which was some twenty miles from this place, which is situated +at the foot of an hill: to the East is a great plaine, extending it selfe +in a great length from the North to the South: it is walled about, but of +no such strength as Famagusta (another city in this Iland neere the Sea +side) whose walles are cut out of the maine rocke. In this city be many +sumptuous and goodly buildings of stone, but vninhabited; the cause whereof +doth giue me iust occasion to shew you of a rare iudgement of God vpon the +owners sometime of these houses, as I was credibly informed by a Cipriot, a +marcham of, great wealth in this city. [Sidenote: A great iudgement of God +vpon the noble men of Cyprus.] Before it came in subiection to the Turks, +while it was vnder the Venetians, there were many barons and noble men of +the Cipriots, who partly by vsurping more superiority ouer the common +people then they ought, and partly through their great reuenues which +yeerly came in by their cotton wooll and wines, grew so insolent and proud, +and withall so impiously wicked, as that they would at their pleasure +command both the wiues and children of their poore tenants to serue their +vncleane lusts, and holding them in such slauery as though they had beene +no better then dogges, would wage them against a grayhound or spaniell, and +he who woon the wager should euer after holde them as his proper goods and +chattels, to doe with them as he listed, being Christians as well as +themselues, if they may deserue so good a name. As they behaued themselues +most vnchristianly toward their brethren, so and much more vngodly (which I +should haue put in the first place) did they towards God: for as though +they were too great, standing on foot or kneeling to serue God, they would +come riding on horsebacke into the church to heare their masse: which +church now is made a publicke basistane or market place for the Turkes to +sell commodities in: but beholde the iudgement of the righteous God, who +payeth the sinner measure for measure. The Turkes the yeere before the +ouerthrowe giuen them at Lepanto by Don Iohn tooke Cyprus. These mighty +Nimrods fled some in holes and some into mountaines to hide themselues; +whereupon the Turkes made generall proclamation, that if they would all +come in and yeeld themselues, they would restore them to their former +reuenues and dignities: who not mistrusting the mischieuous pretense of the +Turkes, assembled together to make themselues knowen; whom after the Turkes +had in possession, they (as the Lords executioners) put them with their +wiues and children all to the sword, pretending thereby to cut of all +future rebellion, so that at this day is not one of the noble race knowen +aliue in the Iland, onely two or three remaine in Venice but of litle +wealth, which in the time of the warres escaped. After we had stayed in +this Iland some thirty dayes, we set saile in the foresayd shippe being +about the burthen of 900 tunnes, hauing in her passengers of diuers +nations, as Tartars, Persians, Iewes, and sundry Christians. Amongst all +which I had often conference with a Iew, who by reason of his many yeeres +education at Safet a place in Iudea neere Ierusalem, where they study the +Rabbines with some other arts as they thinke good, as also: for his trauels +into Persia and Ormus, he seemed to be of good experience in matters +abroad, who related vnto me such conference as he had with a Baniane at +Ormus, being one of the Indians inhabiting the countrey of Cambaia. +[Sidenote: Indians skilful in Astronomy.] This Baniane being a Gentile had +skill in Astronomie, as many of that nation haue, who by his books written +in his owne tongue and Characters, could tell the time of Eclipses both of +Sunne and Moone, with the Change and Full, and by iudgement in Astrologie +gaue answere to any question demanded. Being asked concerning his opinion +in religion, what he thought of God? He made answere that they held no +other god but the sun, (to which planet they pray both at the rising and +setting) as I haue seene sundry doe in Aleppo: his reason was drawen from +the effects which it worketh in giuing light to the moone and other +starres, and causing all things to grow and encrease vpon the earth: +answere was made, that it did moue with the rest as the wheeles of a +clocke, and therefore of force must haue a moouer. Likewise in the Eclipse +being darkened it is manifestly prooued that it is not god, for God is +altogether goodnesse and brightnesse, which can neither be darkened nor +receiue detriment or hurt: but the Sunne receiueth both in the Eclipse, as +is aparant: to which hee could not answere; but so they had receiued from +their ancestors, that it was without beginning or ende, as in any Orbicular +or round body neither beginning or end could be found. He likewise sayd, +that there were other Gentiles in the Indies which worship the moone as +chiefe, and their reason is. The moone when she riseth goeth with thousands +of starres accompanied like a king, and therefore is chiefe: but the Sunne +goeth alone, and therefore not so great. Against whom the Banianes reason, +that it is not true; because the Moone and starres receiue their light from +the Sunne, neither doth the Sunne vouchsafe them his company but when he +list, and therefore like a mighty prince goeth alone, yet they acknowledge +the Moone as Queene or Viceroy. Law they hold hone, but only seuen precepts +which they say were giuen them from their father Noe, not knowing Abraham +or any other. [Sidenote: The seven precepts of Banianes.] First, to honor +father and mother; secondly, not to steale; thirdly not to commit adultery; +fourthly not to kill any thing liuing; fiftly, not to eat any thing liuing; +sixtly not to cut their haire; seuenthly to go barefoot in their churches. +These they hold most strictly, and by no means will breake them: but he +that breaketh one is punished with twenty stripes; but for the greatest +fault they will kill none, neither by a short death nor a long, onely he is +kept some time in prison with very little meat, and hath at the most not +aboue twenty or fiue and twenty stripes. In the yeere they haue 16 feasts, +and then they go to their church, where is pictured in a broad table the +Sun, as we vse to paint it, the face of a man with beames round about, not +hauing any thing els in it. At their feast they spot their faces in diuers +parts with saffron all yellow, and so walke vp and downe the streets; and +this they doe as a custome. They hold, there shalbe a resurrection, and all +shall come to iudgement, but the account shalbe most streight, insomuch +that but one of 10000 shalbe receiued to fauor, and those shall liue againe +in this world in great happinesse: the rest shalbe tormented. And because +they will escape this iudgdment, when any man dieth, he and his wife be +both burnt together euen to ashes, and then they are thrown into a river, +and so dispersed as though they had neuer bene. If the wife will not burne +with her dead husband, she is holden euer after as a whore. And by this +meanes they hope to escape the iudgement to come. As for the soule, that +goeth to the place from whence it came, but where the place is they know +not. That the body should not be made againe they reason with the +philosophers, saying, that of nothing nothing can be made (not knowing that +God made the whole world and their god the Sun of nothing) but beholding +the course of nature, that nothing is made but by a meanes, as by the seed +of a man is made another, and by corne cast into the ground there commeth +vp new corne: so, say they, man cannot be made except some part of him be +left, and therefore they burne the whole: for if he were buried in the +earth, they say there is a small bone in the necke which would neuer be +consumed: or if he were eaten by a beast, that bone would not consume, but +of that bone would come another man; and then the soule being restored +againe, he should come into iudgement, whereas now the body being +destroyed, the soule shall not be iudged: for their opinion is, that both +body and soule must be vnited together, as they haue sinned together, to +receiue iudgement; and therefore the soule alone cannot. Their seuen +precepts which they keepe so strictly are not for any hope of reward they +haue after this life, but onely that they may be blessed in this world, for +they thinke that he which breaketh them shall haue ill successe in all his +businesse. + +They say, the three chiefe religions in the world be of the Christians, +Iewes, and Turks, and yet but one of them true: but being in doubt which is +the truest of the three, they will be of none: for they hold that all these +three shall be iudged, and but few of them which be of the true shall be +saued, the examination shall be so straight; and therefore, as I haue sayd +before, to preuent this iudgement, they burne their bodies to ashes. They +say, these three religions haue too many precepts to keepe them all wel, +and therefore wonderfull hard it wil be to make account, because so few doe +obserue all their religion aright. And thus passing the time for the space +of three moneths in this sea voyage, we arriued at Venice the tenth of +Iune: and after I had seene Padua, with other English men, I came the +ordinary way ouer the Alpes, by Augusta, Noremberg and so for England; +where to the praise of God I safely arriued the ninth of August 1595. + +END OF VOL. IX. + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Principal Navigations, +Voyages, Traffiques, and Discoveries of The English Nation, Volume 9, +by Richard Hakluyt + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 10673 *** diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a7c6159 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #10673 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/10673) diff --git a/old/10673-8.txt b/old/10673-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c0fe7b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10673-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,13012 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Principal Navigations, Voyages, +Traffiques, and Discoveries of The English Nation, Volume 9, +by Richard Hakluyt + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Principal Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques, + and Discoveries of The English Nation, Volume 9 + Asia, Part 2 + +Author: Richard Hakluyt + +Release Date: January 11, 2004 [EBook #10673] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PRINCIPAL NAVIGATIONS, V9 *** + + + + +Produced by Karl Hagen and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team. +This file was produced from images generously made available by the +Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions. + + + + + +THE PRINCIPAL +Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques, +AND +Discoveries +OF THE ENGLISH NATION. + +Collected by + +RICHARD HAKLUYT, PREACHER + +AND + +Edited by + +EDMUND GOLDSMID, F.R.H.S. + +VOL. IX. + +ASIA. PART II. + + + + +Nauigations, Voyages, Traffiques, and Discoueries + +OF THE ENGLISH NATION IN ASIA. + + + +CAPVT. 38. + +De territorio Cathay, et moribus Tartarorum. + +Totum Imperium Imperatoris Grand Can distinctum est in 12. magnas +prouincias, iuxta numerum duodecim filiorum primi Genitoris Can, quarum +quælibet in se continet circiter 6. millia ciuitatum, præter villas non +numeratas quæ sunt Velut ábsque numero. Habent et singulæ prouinciæ regem +principalem, hoc est 12. reges prouinciales, et horum quisque sub se reges +Insularum plurimos, alij 50. alij centum, alij plures, qui omnes et singuli +subiectissimè obediunt Grand Can Imperatori. Harum prouinciarum maior, et +nobilior dícitur Cathay, qui consistit in Asia profunda. Tres enim sunt +Asiæ, scilicet quæ profunda dicitur, et Asia dicta maior quæ nobis est +satis propinquior et tertia minor intra quam est Ephesus beati Ioannis +Euangelistæ sepultura, de qua habes in præcedentibus. Audistis statum +magnatum et nobilium esse permagnificum, et gloriosum, sed sciatis longè +secus esse apud communes et priuatos homines tam in ciuitatibus quam in +forensibus totius Tartariae. In prouincijs autem Cathay habetur tantum de +mercimonijs specierum, et de operibus sericosis; quòd multis facilius +acquirere esset praetiosum indumentam, quàm camisium de lino. Vnde et +quicunque sunt alicuius honestatis non carent desuper precioso vestimento. + +Omnes tam viri quam faemina similibus in forma vestibus inducuntur, +videlicet valdè latis, et breuibus vsque ad genua cum apertura in lateribus +quam firmant (dum volunt) ansis quibusdam, nam vtérque sexus est brachijs +seu femoralibus plenè tectus. Nunquam vtuntur toga aut collobio, sed nec +caputio vndè nec per aspectum indumentorum potest haberi differentia inter +virum et mulierem innuptam. Sed nupta (vt supra dictum est) gestat per +aliquod tegumentum in capite formam pedes viri. + +Nubit illic vir quotquot placet mulieribus, vt nonnulli habeant decem vel +duodecim vxores aut plures. Nam quísque maritus iungitur licentèr cuilibet +mulieri, exceptis matre, et amita, sorore, et filia. Sicut viri equitant, +tendunt, et currunt per patriam pro negotijs sic et mulieres, quoniam et +ipse operantur omnia ferè artificia mechanica sicut pannos et quicquid +efficiter de panno, corio, sericoque, minantque carrucas, et vehicula, sed +viri fabricant de ferro et de omni metallo, lapidibus atque ligno, nec vir +nec mulier nobilis aut degener comedit vltra semel in die communiter. Multa +nutriunt pecora sed nullos porcos, parum comeditur ibi de pane exceptis +magnatibus et diuitibus, sed carnes edunt pecorum, bestiarum, et +bestiolarum vtpote boum, ouium, caprarum, equorum, asinorum, canum, +cattorum, murium, et rattorum, ius carnium sorbentes, et omnis generis lac +bibentes. + +Nobiles autem bibunt lac equarum, seu lamentorum, pro nobilissimo potu et +pauperes aquam bullitam cum modico mellis, quia nec vinum ibi habetur, nec +ceruisia confictur: et multi ac plurimi fontes consulunt in sua siti, per +villas, et rura. Domus, et habitacula rotundae sunt formae, compositae et +contextae paruis lignis, et flexilibus virgulis, ad modum cauearum quas nos +facimus pro auiculis, habentes rotundam in culmine aperturam praestantem +duo beneficia habitationi, quoniam et ignis quem in medio domus +constituunt, fumum emittit, et pro aspiciendo lumen immittit. Intrinsecus +sunt parietes vndíque de filtro, sed et tectum filtreum est: has domus, dum +locum habitandi mutare volunt, vel dum indiuitina expeditione procedunt, +ducunt secum in plaustris quasi tentoria. + +Multas superuacuas obseruant ceremonias, quia respiciunt in vanitates et +insanias falsas: solem et lunam praecipuè adorant, eisque frequentèr genua +curuant, et ad nouilunium, quicquid est magni estimant inchoandum. + +Nullus omnino vtitur calcaribus in equitando, sed cogunt equum flagello +scorpione, reputantes peccatum non leue si quis ad hoc flagellum appodiat, +aut iumentum percuteret suo freno, pleráque similia, quæ parum aut nihil +nocent, ponderant vt grauia, sicut imponere cultellum in igne, os osse +confringere, lac seu aliud potabile in terram effundere, nec non et +huiusmodi multa. + +[Sidenote: Mingere intra dominum peccatum capitale.] Sed super hæc, tenent +pro grauiori admisso mingere intra domum quæ inhabitatur, et qui de tanto +crimine proclamaretur assuetus, mitteretur ad mortem. Et de singulis +necesse est vt confiteatur peccator Flamini suæ legis, et soluat summam +pecuniarum delicti. Et si peccatum deturpationis habitaculi venerit in +publicum, oportebit reconciliari domum per sacerdotem, priusquam vllus +audebit intrare. Insuper et peccatorem necesse erit pertransire ignem, +semel, bis, dut ter iuxta iudicium Flaminis, quatenus per ignis acrimoniam +purgetur à tanti inquinatione peccati. + +Neminem hominum prohibent inter se habitare, sed indifferentèr receptant, +Iudæos, Christiános, Saracenos, et homines cuiuscúnque nationis, vel legis, +dicentes se satis putare suum ritum non ita securum ad salutem, nisi +quandóque; traherentur ad ritum magis salutarem, quem tamen determinate +nunc ignorant, imò multi de nobilibus sunt iam in Christianitate baptizati. + +Attamen qui illorum sunt curiales Imperatoris non vellent in palatio +publicari. + +Poenè oblitus eram, quod nunc hic dico notandum, quia dum ab extra +Imperium, quis veniens nuntius aut legatus cupit tradere proprijs manibus +literas Imperatori [Marginal note: Seu Gubernatorum.], vel deponere coram +illo mandata, non permittitur, donec prius in puris transeat liueas ad +venum ad minus regurn pro sui purgatione, ne quid forsitan afferat cuius +visu, vel odoratu seu tactu rex possit grauari. + +[Sidenote: Arma Tartarorum.] Porrò Tartari in præcincto expeditionis habent +singuli duos arcus, cum magna pluralitate teloram: Nam omnes sunt +sagittarij ad manum et cum rigida et longa lancea. Nobilis autem in equis +preciosè phaleratis ferunt gladios, ver spatas breues et latas, scindentes +pro vno latere, et in capitibus galeas, de corio cocto, non altas, sed ad +capitis formara depressas. + +Quicúnque de suis fugerit de prælio, ipso facto conseriptus est, vt +siquando inuentus fuerit occidatur. Si Castrum vel ciuitas obsessa se illis +reddere voluerit, nullam acceptant conditionem nisi cum morte omnium +inimicorum, vel si quis homo singularis se dederit victum nihilominus +ábsque vlla miseratione occidunt, detruncantes illi protinus aures, quas +postea coquentes, et in aceto (dum habuerint) ponentes mittunt inuicem ad +conuiuia pro extremo ferculo: [Sidenote: Tartari retro sagittantes.] dumque +ipsi in bellis arte fugam simulant, periculosum est eos insequi, quoniam +iaciunt sagittas à tergo, quibus equos et homines occidere norunt. Et +quando in prima acie comparant ad bellandum, mirabilitèr sese constringunt, +vt media pars numeri eoram vix credatur. + +Generalitèr noueritis, omnes Tartaros habere paruos oculos, et modicam vel +raram barbam: in proprijs locis raro inter se litigant, contendunt, aut +pugnant, timentes legum pergraues emendas. Et inuenitur ibi rarius +vespilio, latro, fur, homicida, iniurians, adulter, aut fornicarius, quia +tales criminatores inuestigatione sollicita requiruntur, et sine +redemptione aliqua perimuntur. + +Dum quis decumbit infirmus figitur lancea iuxta illum in terra, et cum +appropinquauerit morti, nullus remanet ìuxta ipsum, cum verò mortuus esse +scitur, confestim in campis, et cum lancea sepelitur. + + +The English Version. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, that the empire of this gret Chane is devyded +in 12 provynces; and every provynce hathe mo than 2000 cytees; and of +townes with outen nombre. This contree is fulle gret. For it hathe 12 +pryncypalle kynges, in 12 provynces. And every of tho kynges han many +kynges undre hem; and alle thei ben obeyssant to the gret Chane. And his +lond and his lordschipe durethe so ferre that a man may not gon from on hed +to another, nouther be see ne lond, the space of 7 zeer. And thorghe the +desertes of his lordschipe, there as men may fynde no townes, there ben +innes ordeyned be every iorneye, to resceyve bothe man and hors; in the +whiche thei schalle fynde plentee of vytaylle, and of alle thing, that hem +nedethe, for to go be the contree. + +And there is a marveylouse custom in that contree, (but is profitable) that +zif ony contrarious thing, that scholde ben preiudice or grevance to the +Emperour, in ony kynde, anon the Emperour hathe tydynges there of and fulle +knowleche in a day, thoughe it be 3 or 4 iorneys fro him or more. For his +ambassedours taken here dromedaries or hire hors, and thei priken in alle +that evere thei may toward on of the innes: and whan thei comen there, anon +thei blowen an horne; and anon thei of the in knowen wel y now that there +ben tydynges to warnen the Emperour of sum rebellyoun azenst him. And +thanne anon thei maken other men redy, in alle haste that thei may, to +beren lettres, and pryken in alle that evere thei may, tille thei come to +the other innes with here lettres: and thanne thei maken fressche men redy, +to pryke forthe with the lettres, toward the Emperour; whille that the +laste bryngere reste him, and bayte his dromedarie or his hors. And so fro +in to in, tille it come to the Emperour. And thus anon hathe he hasty +tydynges of ony thing, that berethe charge, be his corrours, that rennen so +hastyly, thorghe out alle the contree. And also whan the Emperour sendethe +his corrours hastyly, thorghe out his lond, everyche of hem hathe a large +thong fulle of smale belles; and whan thei neyghen nere to the innes of +other corroures, that ben also ordeyned be the iorneyes, thei ryngen here +belles, and anon the other corrours maken hem redy, and rennen here weye +unto another in: and thus rennethe on to other, fulle spedyly and swyftly, +till the Emperours entent be served, in alle haste. And theise currours ben +clept chydydo, aftre here langage, that is to seye, a messagere. + +Also whan the Emperour gothe from o contree to another, as I have told you +here before, and he passe thorghe cytees and townes, every man makethe a +fuyr before his dore, and puttethe there inne poudre of gode gommes, that +ben swete smellynge, for to make gode savour to the Emperour. And alle the +peple knelethe doun azenst him, and don him gret reverence. And there where +religyouse Cristene men dwellen, as thei don in many cytees in thei lond, +thei gon before him with processioun with cros and holy watre; and thei +seyngen, _Veni Creator, spiritus_, with an highe voys, and gon towardes +him. And whan he herethe hem, he commaundethe to his lordes to ryde besyde +him, that the religiouse men may come to him. And whan thei ben nyghe him, +with the cros, thanne he dothe a down his galaothe, that syt upon his hede, +in manere of a chapelet, that is made of gold and preciouse stone and grete +perles. And it is so ryche, that, men preysen it to the value of a roialme, +in that contre. And than he knelethe to the cros. And than the prelate of +the religiouse men seythe before him certeyn orisouns, and zevethe him a +blessynge with the cros: and he enclynethe to the blessynge fulle devoutly. +And thanne the prelate zevethe him sum maner frute, to the nombre of 9, in +a platere of sylver, with peres or apples or other manere frute. And he +takethe on; and than men zeven to the othere lordes, that ben aboute him. +For the custom is suche, that no straungere schalle come before him, but +zif he zeve hym sum manere thing, aftre the olde lawe, that seythe, _Nemo +accedat in conspectu meo vacuus_. And thanne the Emperour seythe to the +religious men, that thei withdrawe hem azen, that thei ne be hurt ne harmed +of the gret multytude of hors that comen behynde him. And also in the same +maner don the religious men, that dwellen there, to the Emperesses, that +passen by hem, and to his eldest sone; and to every of hem, thei presenten +frute. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, that the people, that he hathe so many hostes +offe, abouten hym and aboute his wyfes and his sone, thei dwelle not +contynuelle with him: but alle weys, whan him lykethe, thei ben sent fore; +and aftre whan thei han don, thei retournen to hire owne housholdes; saf +only thei that ben dwellynge with hym in houshold, for to serven him and +his wyfes and his sones, for to governen his houshold. And alle be it, that +the othere ben departed fro him, aftre that thei han perfourmed hire +servyse, zit there abydethe contynuelly with him in court, 50000 men at +horse, and 200000 men a fote; with outen mynstrelles, and tho that kepen +wylde bestes and dyverse briddes, of the whiche I have tolde zou the nombre +before. + +Undre the firmament, is not so gret a lord, ne so myghty, ne so riche, as +the gret Chane: nought Prestre Johan, that is Emperour of the highe Ynde, +ne the Sowdan of Babylone, ne the Emperour of Persye. Alle theise ne ben +not in comparisoun to the grete Chane; nouther of myght, ne of noblesse, ne +of ryaltee, ne of richesse: for in alle theise, he passethe alle erthely +princes. Wherfore it is gret harm, that he belevethe not feithfully in God. +And natheles he wil gladly here speke of God; and he suffrethe wel, that +Cristene men duelle in his lordschipe, and that men of his feythe ben made +Cristene men, zif thei wile, thorghe out alle his contree. For he +defendethe no man to holde no lawe, other than him lykethe. + +In that contree, sum man hathe an 100 wyfes, summe 60, mo, somme lesse. And +thei taken the nexte of hire kyn, to hire wyfes, saf only, that thei out +taken hire modres, hire doughtres, and hire sustres on the fadir syde, of +another womman, thei may wel take; and hire bretheres wyfes also aftre here +dethe; and here step modres also in the same wyse. + + +Of the Lawe and customs of the Tartarienes, duellynge in Chatay; and how + that men don, whan the Emperour schal dye, and how he schal be chosen. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXIII.] The folk of that contree usen alle longe clothes, +with outen furroures. And thei ben clothed with precious clothes of +Tartarye; and of clothes of gold. And here clothes ben slytt at the syde; +and thei ben festned with laces of silk. And thei clothen hem also with +pylches, and the hyde with outen. And thei usen nouther cappe ne hood. And +in the same maner as the men gon, the wommen gon; so that no man may unethe +knowe the men fro the wommen, saf only tho wommen, that ben maryed, that +beren the tokne upon hire hedes of a mannes foot, in signe that thei ben +undre mannes fote and undre subieccioun of man. And here wyfes ne dwelle +not to gydere but every of hem be hire self. And the husbonde may ligge +with whom of hem, that him lykethe. Everyche hathe his hous, bothe man and +womman. And here houses ben made rounde of staves; and it hathe a rounde +wyndowe aboven, that zevethe hem light, and also that servethe for +delyverance of smoke. And the helynge of here houses, and the wowes and the +dores ben alle of wode. + +And whan thei gon to werre, thei leiden hire houses with hem, upon +chariottes; as men don tentes or pavyllouns. And thei maken hire fuyr, in +the myddes of hire houses. And thei han gret multytude of alle maner of +bestes, saf only of swyn: for thei bryngen non forthe. And thei beleeven +wel, o God, that made and formede alle thinges. And natheles zit han thei +ydoles of gold and sylver, and of tree, and of clothe. And to tho ydoles, +thei offren alle weys hyre first mylk of hire bestes, and also of hire +metes, and of hire drynkes, before thei eten. And thei offren often tymes +hors and bestes. And the clepen the God of Kynde, Yroga. And hire Emperour +also, what name that evere behave, thei putten evermore therto Chane. And +whan I was there, hire Emperour had to name Thiaut; so that he was clept +Thiaut Chane. And his eldeste sone was clept Tossue. And whanne he schalle +ben emperour, he schalle ben clept Tossue Chane. And at that tyme, the +Emperour hadde 12 sones, with outen him; that were named, Cuncy, Ordii, +Chahaday, Buryn, Negu, Nocab, Cadu, Siban, Cuten, Balacy, Babylan and +Garegan, And of his 3 wyfes, the firste and the pryncypalle, that was +Prestre Johnes doughtre, hadde to name Serioche Chan; and the tother Borak +Chan; and the tother Karanke Chan. + +The folk of that contree begynnen alle hire thinges in the newe mone: and +thei worschipen moche the mone and the sonne, and often tyme knelen azenst +hem. And alle the folk of the contree ryden comounly with outen spores: but +thei beren alle weys a lytille whippe in hire hondes, for to chacen with +hire hors. And thei had gret conscience, and holden it for a gret synne, to +casten a knyf in the fuyr, and for to drawe flessche out of a pot with a +knyf, and for to smyte an hors with the handille of a whippe, or to smyte +an hors with a brydille, or to breke o bon with another, or for to caste +mylk or ony lykour, that men may drynke, upon the erthe, or for to take and +sle lytil children. And the moste synne, that ony man may do, is to pissen +in hire houses, that thei dwellen in. And who so that may be founden with +that synne, sykerly thei slen hym. And of everyche of theise synnes, it +behovethe hem to ben schryven of hire prestes, and to paye gret somme of +silver for hire penance. And it behovethe also, that the place, that men +han pissed in, be halewed azen; and elles dar no man entren there inne. And +whan thei han payed hire penance, men maken hem passen thorghe a fuyr or +thorghe 2, for to clensen hem of hire synnes. And also whan ony messangere +comethe and bryngethe lettres or ony present to the Emperour, it behovethe +him, that he with the thing that he bryngethe, passe thorghe 2 brennynge +fuyres, for to purgen hem, that he brynge no poysoun ne venym, ne no wykked +thing, that myght be grevance to the lord. And also, zif ony man or womman +be taken in avowtery or fornycacyoun, anon thei sleen him. Men of that +contree ben alle gode archeres, and schooten right welle, bothe men and +women, als wel on hors bak, prykynge, as on fote, rennynge. And the wommen +maken alle thinges and alle maner mysteres and craftes; as of clothes, +botes and other thinges; and thei dryven cartes, plowes and waynes and +chariottes; and thei maken houses and alle maner of mysteres, out taken +bowes and arwes and armures, that men maken. And alle the wommen weren +breech, as wel as men. Alle the folk of that contree ben fulle obeyssant to +hire sovereynes; ne thei fighten not ne chiden not, on with another. And +there ben nouther thefes ne robboures in that contree; and every man +worschipethe othere: but no man there dothe no reverence to no straungeres, +but zif thei ben grete princes. And thei eten houndes, lyounes, lyberdes, +mares and foles, asses, rattes and mees, and alle maner of bestes, grete +and smale; saf only swyn, and bestes that weren defended by the olde lawe. +And thei eaten alle the bestes, with outen and with inne, with outen +castynge awey of ony thing, saf only the filthe. And thei eten but litille +bred, but zif it be in courtes of grete lordes. And thei have not, in many +places, nouther pesen ne benes, ne non other potages, but the brothe of the +flessche. For littile ete thei ony thing, but flessche and the brothe. And +whan thei han eten, thei wypen hire hondes upon hire skirtes: for thei use +non naperye, ne towaylles, but zif it be before grete lordes: but the +common peple hathe none. And whan thei han eten, thei putten hire dissches +unwasschen in to the pot or cawdroun, with remenant of the flessche and of +the brothe, till thei wole eten azen. And the ryche men drynken mylk of +mares or of camaylles or of asses or of other bestes. And thei wil ben +lightly dronken of mylk, or of another drynk, that is made of hony and of +watre soden to gidre. For in that contree is nouther wyn ne ale. Thei lyven +fulle wrecched liche; and thei eten but ones in the day, and that but +lyttle, nouther in courtes ne in other places. And in soothe, o man allone +in this contree wil ete more in a day, than on of hem will ete in 3 dayes. +And zif ony straunge messagre come there to a lord, men maken him to ete +but ones a day, and that fulle litille. + +And whan thei werren, thei werren fulle wisely, and alle weys don here +besynes, to destroyen hire enemyes. Every man there berethe 2 bowes or 3, +and of arwes gret plentee, and a gret ax. And the gentyles han schorte +speres and large, and fulle trenchant on that o syde: and thei han plates +and helmes, made of quyrboylle; and hire hors covertoures of the same. And +who so fleethe fro the bataylle, thei sle him. And whan thei holden ony +sege abouten castelle or toun, that is walled and defensable, thei behoten +to hem that ben with inne, to don alle the profite and gode, that it is +marveylle to here: and thei graunten also to hem that ben with inne, alle +that thei wille asken hem. And aftre that thei ben zolden, anon thei sleen +hem alle, and kutten of hire eres, and sowcen hem in vynegre, and there of +thei maken gret servyse for lordes. Alle here lust and alle here +ymaginacioun, is for to putten alle londes undre hire subieccioun. And thei +seyn, that thei knowen wel be hire prophecyes, that thei schulle ben +overcomen by archieres, and be strengthe of hem: but they knowe not of what +nacioun, ne of what lawe thei schulle ben offe, that schulle overcomen hem. +And therfore thei suffren, that folk of alle lawes may peysibely duellen +amonges hem. + +Also whan thei wille make hire ydoles, or an ymage of ony of hire frendes, +for to have remembrance of hym, thei maken alle weys the ymage alle naked, +with outen any maner of clothinge. For thei seyn, that in gode love scholde +be no coverynge, that man scholde not love for the faire clothinge, ne for +the riche aray, but only for the body, suche as God hathe made it, and for +the gode vertues that the body is endowed with of nature; but only for fair +clothinge, that is not of kyndely nature. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, that it is gret drede for to pursue the +Tartarines, zif thei fleen in bataylle. For in fleynge, thei schooten +behynden hem, and sleen bothe men and hors. And whan thei wil fighte, thei +wille schokken hem to gidre in a plomp; that zif there be 20000 men, men +schalle not wenen, that there be scant 10000. And thei cone wel wynnen lond +of straungeres, but thei cone not kepen it. For thei han grettre lust to +lye in tentes with outen, than for to lye in castelle or in townes. And +thei preysen no thing the wytt of other naciouns. And amonges hem, oyle of +olyve is fulle dere: for thei holden it for fulle noble medicyne. And alle +the Tartarienes han smale eyen and litille of berd, and not thikke hered, +but schiere. And thei ben false and traytoures: and thei lasten noghte that +thei behoten. Thei ben fulle harde folk, and moche peyne and wo mow suffren +and disese, more than ony other folk: for thei ben taughte therto in hire +owne contree, of Zouthe: and therfore thei spenden, as who seythe, right +nought. + +And whan ony man schalle dye, men setter a spere besyde him: and whan he +drawethe towardes the dethe, every man fleethe out of the hous, tille he be +ded; and aftre that, thei buryen him in the feldes. + + +CAPVT. 39. + +De sepultura Imperatoris Grand Can, et creatione successoris. + +Imperator Grand Can postquam eius cognita fuerit defunctio defertur mox à +paucis viris in parco palatij, ad præuisum locum vbi debeat sepeliri. Et +nudato prius toto illo loco à graminibus cum cespite figitur ibi tentorium, +in quo velut in solio regali de ligno corpus defuncti residens collocatur, +paraturque mensa plena coram eo cibarijs præciosis, et potu de lacte +iumentorum. Instabulatur ibi et equa cum suo pullo, sed et ipse albus, +nobilitèr phaleratus, et onustatus certo pondere auri et argenti. Et est +totum Tentorij pauimentum de mundo stramine stratum. + +Tuncque effodiunt in circuitu fossam latam valdè, et profundam vt totum +tentorium cum omnibus contentis descendat in illam. Eoque facto ita +equalitèr terram planificantes adoperiunt graminibus, vt in omni tempore +locus sepulturæ non valeat apparere. Et quoniam ignorantiæ nubilo turpiter +excæcati putant in alio seculo homines delectationibus frui, dicunt quòd +tentorium erit ei pro hospitio, cibi ad edendum, lac ad potandum, equus ad +equitandum, aurum et argentum ad respiciendum, sed et equa lac sempèr +præstabit, et pullos equinos successiue generabit. + +Post has itaque Imperatoris defuncti miseras exequias, nullus omnino +audebit de ipso loqui coram vxoribus et filijs, et propinquis, sed nec +nominare, quia per hoc putarent derogari paci, et quieti illius, qua non +dubitant eum dominari, in maiori satis gloria Paradisi quam hic stetit. + +Igitur Imperatore Grand Can sepulto obliuioni tradito, conueniunt quàm citò +nobiles de septem tribubus prouinciæ Cathay, et cui Imperium ex +propinquitate competit, dicunt sic. + + Ecce volumus, ordinamus, atque precamur, vt sis noster Dominus et + Imperator. + +Qui respondet + + Si vultis me super vos, sicut et iuris mei est, imperare, oportebit + vos fore mihi obedientes tam ad mortem quàm ad vitam. + +Et respondentes dicunt. + + Nos faciemus quicquid praeceperitis. + +Túncque Imperator addit hæc verba: Ergo scitote, quod ex nunc verbum meum +acutum et scindens erit vt meus ensis: [Sidenote: i. cathedra.] Pergit +quóque sessum in suo Philtro nigro super pauimentum in conspectu throni +expanso, et cum ipso Philtro eleuatur ab omnibus, et infertur Imperij +solio, ac coronatur diademate præcedentis Imperatoris. + +De inde singuli principes, et singuæ ciuitates, oppida, et villæ per +vniuersum imperium mittunt ei munera iocalia, vasa, pannos, equos, +elephantes, aurum, argentum, et lapides preciosos, quorum, qualium, et +quantorum vix vel in numero haberi potest aestimatio. + + +CAPVT. 40. + +De multis regionibus Imperio Tartariae subiectis. + +Breuitèr et nunc intendo cursum describere aliquarum magnarum regionum et +Insularum Imperij Tartariæ. Et primò illas quæ descendunt à prouincia +Cathay per septentrionalem plagam, vsque ad fines Christianitatis Prussiae, +et Russiae. + +Ergò prouincia Cathay descendens in sui oriente à regno Tharsis iungitur ab +occidente regno Turquescen, in quo et sunt plurimae ciuitates, quarum +formosior dicitur Octopar. Ipsum autem Turquescen regnum iungitur ad +occidentem sui regno, seu Imperio. Persiae, et ad septentrionem regno +Corasinae, quod spaciosum este valde, habens versus orientem sui vltra +centum diaetas deserti: hoc regnum est multis bonis abundans, et appellatur +eius melior ciuitas etiam Corasine. + +Isti quoque regno iungitur in occidente versus partes nostras regnum +Commanorum, quod et similiter longum est, et latum, sed in paucis sui locis +inhabitatum: Nam in quibusdam est frigus nimium, in alijs nimius calor, et +in nonnullis nimia muscarum multitudo. + +De istis Commanis venit olim fugata quædam pluralitas populi vsque in +terram Ægypti quae ibidem succreta nunc ita inualuit, vt suppressis +indigenis videatur regnare: Nam et de seipsis constituerunt hunc, qui modo +est Soldanus, Melech Mandibron. Per Commanorum regnum decurrit Grandis +fluuius Echil, qui omni hyemali tempore in magna spissitudine gelatur; in +superiori quoque parte huius regni inter duo freta Caspiæ, et Oceani, mons +sublimis est valde Chocas. Nota quod à nostris partibus non possit vsque in +Indiam superiorem duci magnus exercitus per terras, nisi per tres +tantummodo transitus, quorum iste est vnus, qui tamen non valet transiri +nisi tempore glaciei, et hic appellatus est Lodekonc. + +Alter per Turquescen, et per Persiam, tamen ibi sunt deserta plurium +dietarum, in quibus nisi esset exercitus bene prouisus, posset perire. + +Tertius ad primos fines regni Commanorum, transfretando tamen mare vsque in +regnum Abchaz: principalis ciuitas Commanorum dicitur Sarach. + +Ab hoc regno versus partes nostras inuenitur regio Laiton quae est vltima +paganismi, iungitur iste finis terræ Christianitatitis regno Prussiæ, et +Russiæ. + +Post potestatem Imperij Tartariæ descendendo à prouincia Cathay in +Australem plagam venitur versus Persiam, Syriam, et Greciam. Versus terram +Christianorum possum aliqualiter in summa (quantum conuenit huic scripto) +connotare. Dixi supra iam prouinciam Cathay iungi regno Turquescen ad +occidentem, et illud quòque iungi regno seu Imperio Persiæ. Ad quod +sciendum, quamuis rex Persiæ habet etiam ab olim nomen Imperatoris; quia +(cum tenet aliquas terras sui Imperij ab Imperatore Tartarorum) necesse est +vt in tanto subiectus sit illi. + +Sunt autem in Persia duæ regiones: vna altæ Persiæ, quæ à regno Turquescen +descendens, iungitur ad occidentem sui fluuis Pyson. In ista habentur +renominatæ ciuitates, quarum meliores duæ dicuntur Bocura et Seonargant, +quam aliqui appellant Samarkand. Et altera Regio bassæ Persiæ, descendens à +flumine Pyson, qui ad sui occidentem iungiter regno Mediæ et terræ minoris +Armeniæ, et ad Aquilonem mari Caspio, et ad Austrum terræ minoris Indiæ. + +In hac bassa Persia tres principaliores ciuitates sunt Aessabor, Saphaon, +Sarmasaule. In terra autem maioris Armeniæ quondam habebantur quatuor regna +quæ nunc dicuntur subesse Imperio Persarum, habétque famam terræ nobilis, +et ad occidentem sui iungitur Regno Turciæ. + +Hec Armenia multas valdè bonas continet ciuitates, quarum famosior est +Taurisa. Regnum Mediæ quod subest Regi Persarum quamuis non latum est, +tamen longum est, et ad occidentem sui regno Chaldeæ coniunctum. In Media +meliores duæ ciuitates sunt, Seras, et Keremen. + +[Sidenote: Georgia. Abchas, aliàs Alchaz.] Hinc ad occidentem sui, iuncta +est regio Georgiæ, quæ modo constat diuisa in duo regna: Nam pars superior, +quæ iungitur Mediæ, reseruauit sibi nomen Georgiæ, sed inferior pars +dicitur regnum Abchaz. Ambo hæc regna, et regis eorum, sunt de fide +Christiana, et homines ita deuoti vt ad minus semel in hebdomada +communicent sacramentis, iuxta ritum Græcorum confectis. Et quidem regnum +Georgiæ subiacet imperio Grand Can: sed Abchaz nunquam ab ipso Imperatore +Tartariæ, neque Persarum, neque Medorum domino subdi potuit, eo quòd +munitum est aquis et rupibus et alijs prouisionibus contra impugnationes +hostiles. + +[Sidenote: In parte regni Georgiæ sunt tenebrae.] Iuxta hoc regnum Abchaz +habetur vnum minum et mirabile, nam magnus est territorij locus dictus +Hamson, et continens in circuitu spacium viæ quatuor diætarum: videter +semper opertus tenebris densis vt nemo audeat illic intrare profundè, +quoniam si qui presumpserint, non sunt visi reuerti. Attamen fatentur +vicini sub illis se tenebris audisse nonnunquam clamores hominum, hinnitus, +mugitus, rugitus, et boatus pecudum, et bestiarum, sed et cantus gallorum, +vt per hæc et alia signa constet ibi habitare gentes: nam et fluuius +decurrens monstrat signa sæpè certissima in suo exitu: ignoratur tamen si +tenebræ per totum territorium sint eiusdem densitatis, an forte sint in +circuitu per aliquod spacium, et intrinsecus plus luminosum. + +Dicuntur autem tenebræ istæ olim per diuinum miraculum aduenisse. Saboere +enim Imperatore Persarum, circa annum Gratiæ ducentessimum quinquagessimum +in persecutione Christianorum tendente cum pleno exercitu per hunc locum, +et Christianis tyrannidem eius fugientibus, contigit ex improuiso eos ità +arctari, vt se effugere desperarent, quapropter statim ad orationis +refugium omnes se sternentes clamauerunt ad Christum auxiliatorem suum: Et +deus, qui pro puro corde Christianos ad se orantes semper exaudit, expleuit +illic literam vaticinij Isaiæ: quia ecce tenebræ operient terram et caligo +populos, monstrans per tenebram terrenam, quam eis superduxit, quas passuri +essent inimici nominis Christi tenebras infernales, indicansque per +temporalem vitam, quam sibi fidelibus conseruauit, eam quam possessuri sunt +viri Christiani vitam perpetuam, et coelestem. + +Itaque hoc regnum Abchaz ad occidentem sui iungitur regno Turciæ, quod in +longo et lato valdè extensum multas continet prouincias scilicet Iconiæ, +Cappadociæ, Sauræ, Brike, Besicon, Patan, et Gennoch; hij omnes Turci, cum +tota Syria et Arabia vsque ad Galliziam Hispaniæ, subsunt Imperatori +Babyloniæ Soldano, et sunt in singulis prouinciis et regionibus ciuitates +magnæ, ac multæ nimis. Consequentèr huic regno Turciæ ad Occidentem sui in +ciuitate Cathasa [Marginal note: Vel Sathata.] iungitur per mare Greciæ +superior pars potestatis Imperatoris Constantinopolitani, et quasi ad +Aquilonem contiguatur regno Syriæ: cuius vna prouincia est terra +promissionis, prout hoc satis dictum est suprà. Sunt et aliæ terre, et +Insulæ, et patriæ latæ, et spatiosæ, continentes in se multa regna, et +reges, et gentes diuersas, de quibus nunc per singula pertractare non est +consilij. + +Ad supradictam Chaldæam iungitur Mesopotamia, et minor Armenia, et velut ad +Austrum eius Æthiopia, Mauritania, Lybia alta et bassa, et Nubia. +[Sidenote: Extensio Imperij Grand Can.] Excepto ergò duntaxat districtu +Imperij Persiæ, et potestate Soldani, omnes sæpè pertractatæ terræ, +regiones, regna et Insulæ descendendo tam par Aquilonem, quam ad Austrum à +prouincia Cathay, vsque ad Christianitatem sunt de Imperio Tartariæ Grand +Can. [Sidenote: Distantia à Roma ad Cathayam per Institores.] Et notandum +de spacio distantiæ, quod institores de Roma, vel Venetia festinantes tam +per terras, quàm per mare, expendunt de tempore 11. menses, et quandoque +duodecim, priusquam in Cathay valeant peruenire. + +Hijs itaque visis describam saltem aliquas à prouincia Cathay in orientem +terras Imperij Tartarorum. [Sidenote: Cadilla Regio orientalior Cathay. +Angli nostri hanc bestiolam nuper viderunt in Persia.] Illic habetur regio +Cadilla spaciosa multum, simul et speciosa: crescunt namque in ea fructus +ad quantitatem magnorum Cawardorum, in quibus inuenitur vna bestiola, in +carne et sanguine ad formam agnelli absque lana, et manducatur totus +fructus cum bestiola. Sunt et alij plures diuersi fructus, quorum penes nos +non est respectus nec vsus. Nam et sunt ibi nonnullæ speciales vites +ferentes botros incredibiliter magnos, quorum vnum vix virilis vir valet in +hasta portare. + +Et deinde in meridiem per aliquas diætas, potest perueniri ad primas Caspiæ +alpes, quæ descendendo descendunt vsque ad Amazoniam, insulam mulierum, de +qua tractatum est. Inter has Alpes retinetur maxima multitudo Iudæorum +decem tribum Israel, per Dei voluntatem ita inclusa, vt in copiosa +numerositate non possint à nostra parte exire, quamuis aliqui pauci +nonnunquam sunt visi transisse. Haberent autem competentem exitum circa +insulam Amazoniæ, sed illum diligenter regina obseruat. + +[Sidenote: Bacchariæ Regnum vel Boghariæ.] Porrò de regione Cadilla in +orientem venitur ad regnum Backariae, in qua mali et multum crudeles +habitant homines, nec est securum itinerare per illam, quòd ad modicam +occasionem (si Deus non conseruaret) occiderent viatorem et manducarent. +[Sidenote: Arbor Lanifera.] Illic sunt arbores ferentes lanam velut ouium, +ex qua texunt pannos ad vestimenta. Hypocentauri sunt ibi pro media +superiori parte in forma humana, et pro inferiori figura equorum, seu +taurorum, venantes in terris, et piscantes in aquis quod comedunt, et super +omnia carnes hominum, quos capere possunt. [Sidenote: Gryphones, de quibus +Paulus Venetæ] Nec non et gryphi illic apparent pro media posteriori parte +in forma leonis, pro anteriori in forma aquilæ. Sed sciatis, corpus magni +gryphi maius esse octo leonibus de partibus istis. Nam postquam equum, +bouem vel hominem, etiam asinum occiderit, leuat et asportat pleno volatu: +tanquam cornua bouis aut vaccae sunt illi vngulæ, de quibus etiam fieri +solent ciphi ad bibendum, qui plurimùm reputantur preciosi. Fiunt quóque de +pennis alarum eius arcus rigidi, et fortes ad iaciendum missilia et +sagittas. Ad istius regni Baccariae extremitates in Orientum finitur terra +potestatis Grand Can: Et iungitur ei terra potestatis magni Imperatoris +Indiæ, qui semper vocatur Præsbyter Ioannes. Notandum, quoties per +prouincias totius Imperij Grand Can, quicquam accidit, quod Imperatorem non +oportet latere, confestim mittuntur per reges aut barones nuncij in +dromedarijs aut equis, qui celerrimè festinant ad certa hospitia, ad hoc +ipsum, velut ábsque numero per imperium instituta: Isque nuncius hospitio +appropinquans, et cornu resonans, dum auditor paratur minicius alter, qui +de manu suscipiens literas, per recentem dromedarium festinat ad aliud +hospitium, et sic in breui tempore perferuntur rumores ad curia aures. +[Sidenote: Cursores, Chidibo Tartaricè dicti.] Similique modo nuncij +pedites permutantur de hospitio in hospitium, vt citiùs percipiatur +negocium huius nuncij: appellantur sua lingua Chidibo. + +[Sidenote: Charita Mandeuilli.] Ergò per præmissa satis elucet magnam esse +nobilitatem, potestatem, reuerentiam, et dominationem Imperatoris Tartariæ +Grand Can de Cathay, et quòd nullus ab ista parte Imperator nec Persiæ, nec +Babylonia, nec Greciæ, sed nec Romæ est illi comparandus. Vndè et multum +miserandum est, quia ipse cùm toto Imperio nec est fide Catholica +illustratus, nec salutari lauachro regeneratus: et hoc oremus vt in breui +eueniat, per Iesum Christum Dominum nostrum. + +Explicit pars secunda huius opens. + + +The English Version. + +And whan the emperour dyethe, men setten him in a chayere in myddes the +place of his tent: and men setten a table before him clene, covered with a +clothe, and there upon flesche and dyverse vyaundes, and a cuppe fulle of +mares mylk: And men putten a mare besyde him, with hire fole, and an hors +saddled and brydeled; and thei leyn upon the hors gold and silver gret +quantytee: and thei putten abouten him gret plentee of stree: and than men +maken a gret pytt and a large; and with the tent and alle theise other +thinges, then putten him in erthe. And thei seyn, that whan he schalle come +in to another world, he schalle not ben with outen an hows, ne with owten +hors, ne with outen gold and sylver: and the mare schalle zeven him mylk, +and bryngen him forthe mo hors, tille he be wel stored in the tother world. +For thei trowen, that aftre hire dethe, thei schulle be etynge and +drynkynge in that other world, and solacynge hem with hire wifes, as thei +diden here. And aftre tyme, that the emperour is thus entered, no man +schalle be so hardy to speke of him before his frendes, And zit natheles +somtyme fallethe of manye, that thei maken hem to ben entered prevylly be +nyghte, in wylde places, and putten azen the grasse over the pytt for to +growe: or elle men coveren the pytt with gravelle and sond, that no man +schalle perceyve where, ne knowe where the pytt is, to that entent, that +never aftre, non of his frendes schulle han mynde ne rememberance of him. +And thanne thei seyn, that he is ravissht in to another world where he is a +grettre lord, than he was here. And thanne aftre the dethe of the emperour, +the 7 lynages assemblen hem to gidere, and chesen his eldest sone, or the +nexte aftre him, of his blood: and thus thei seye to him; wee wolen and wee +preyen and ordeynen, that zee ben oure lord and oure emperour. And thanne +he answerethe, zif yee wile, that I regne over zou, as lord, do eyeryche of +zou, that I schalle commanden him, outher to abyde or to go; and whom +soever that I commaunde to ben slayn, that anon he be slayn. And thei +answeren alle with o voys, what so evere zee commanden, it schalle be don. +Thanne seythe the emperour, now undirstondethe wel, that my woord from hens +forthe, is scharp and bytynge as a swerd. After men setten him upon a blak +stede, and so men bryngen him to a cheyere fulle richely arrayed, and there +thei crownen hym. And thanne alle the cytees and gode townes senden hym +ryche presentes; so that at that iourneye, he schalle have more than 60 +chariottes charged with gold and sylver, with outen jewelles of gold and +precyouse stones, that lordes zeven hym, that ben withouten estymacioun: +and with outen hors and clothes of gold and of Camakaas and Tartarynes, +that ben with outen nombre. + + +Of the Roialme of Thurse and the Londes and Kyngdomes towardes the + Septentrionale parties, in comynge down from the Lond of Cathay. + +This lond of Cathay is in Asye the depe. And aftre, on this half, is +Asyetthe more. The kyngdom of Cathay marchethe toward the west, unto the +kyngdom of Tharse; the whiche was on of the kinges, that cam to presente +our Lord in Betheleem. And thei that ben of the lynage of that kyng, arn +somme Cristene. In Tharse, thei eten no flessche, ne thei drynken no wyn. +And on this half, towardes the west, is the kyngdom of Turquesten, that +strecchethe him toward the west, to the kyngdom of Persie; and toward the +Septrentionalle, to the kyngdom of Chorasme. In the contre of Turquesten, +ben but fewe gode cytees: but the beste cytee of that lond highte Octorar. +There ben grete pastures; but fewe Coornes; and therfore, for the most +partie, thei ben alle herdemen: and thei lyzn in tentes, and thei drynken a +maner ale, made of hony. + +And aftre, on this half, is the kyngdom of Chorasme, that is a gode lond +and a plentevous, with outen wyn. And it hathe a desert toward the est, +that lastethe more than an 100 iourneyes. And the beste cytee of that +contree is clept Chorasme. And of that cytee, berethe the contree his name. +The folk of that contree ben hardy werryoures. And on this half is the +kyngdom of Comanye, where of the Comayns that dwelleden in Grece, somtyme +weren chaced out. This is on of the grettest kyngdomes of the world: but it +is not alle enhabyted. For at on of the parties, there is so gret cold, +that no man may dwelle there: and in another partie, there is so grete +hete, that no man may endure it. And also there ben so many flyes, that no +man may knowe on what syde he may turne him. In that contree is but lytille +arberye, ne trees that beren frute, ne othere. Thei lyzn in tentes. And +thei brenen the dong of bestes for defaute of wode. + +This kyngdom descendeth on this half toward us, and toward Pruysse, and +toward Rossye. And thorghe that contree rennethe the ryvere of Ethille, +that is on of the grettest ryveres of the world. And it fresethe so +strongly alle zeres, that many tymes men han foughten upon the Ise with +grete hostes, bothe parties on fote, and hire hors voyded for the tyme: and +what on hors and on fote, mo than 200000 persones on every syde. And +betweene that ryvere and the grete see ocean, that thei clepen the see +maure, lyzn alle theise Roialmes. And toward the hede benethe in that +Roialme, is the mount Chotaz, that is the hiest mount of the world: and it +is betwene the see Maure and the see Caspy. There is fulle streyt and +dangerous passage, for to go toward Ynde. And therfore Kyng Alysandre leet +make there a strong cytee, that men clepen Alizandre, for to kepe the +contree, that no man scholde passe with outen his leve. And now men clepen +that cytee, the Zate of Helle. And the princypalle cytee of Comenye is +clept Sarak, that is on of the 3 weyes for to go in to Ynde: but be the +weye, ne may not passe no gret multytude of peple, but zif it be in wyntre. +And that passage men clepen the Derbent. The tother weye is for to go fro +the citee of Turquesten, be Persie: and be that weye, ben manye iourneyes +be desert. And the thridde weye is that comethe fro Comanye, and than to go +be the grete see and be the kyngdom of Abchaz. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, that alle theise kyngdomes and alle theise +londes aboveseyd, unto Pruysse and to Rossye, ben alle obeyssant to the +grete Chane of Cathay; and many othere contrees, that marchen to other +costes. Wherfore his powere and his lordschipe is fulle gret, and fulle +myghty. + + +Of the Emperour of Persye, and of the lond of darknesse and of other + Kyngdomes, that belongen to the grete Chane of Cathay, and other Londes + of his, unto the See of Greece. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXV.] Now sithe I have devysed zou the londes and the +kyngdoms toward the parties septentrionales, in comynge down from the lond +of Cathay, unto the londes of the Cristene, towardes Pruysse and Rossye; +now schalle I devyse zou of other londes and kyngdomes, comynge doun be +other costes, toward the right syde, unto the see of Grece, toward the lond +of Cristene men: and therfore that, aftre Ynde and aftre Cathay, the +Emperour of Persie is the gretteste lord. Therfore I schalle telle zou of +the kyngdom of Persie. First, where he hathe 2 kyngdomes; the firste +kyngdom begynnethe toward the est, toward the kyngdom of Turquesten, and it +strecchethe toward the west, unto the ryyere of Phison, that is on of the 4 +ryveres, that comen out of paradys. And on another syde, it strecchethe +toward the septemtrion, unto the see of Caspye: and also toward the southe, +unto the desert of Ynde. And this contree is gode and pleyn and fulle of +peple. And there ben manye gode cytees. But the 2 princypalle cytees ben +theise, Boyturra and Seornergant, that sum men clepen Sormagant. The tother +kyngdom of Persie strecchethe toward the ryvere of Phison, and the parties +of the west, unto the kyngdom of Mede: and fro the grete Armenye, and +toward the septemtrion, to the see of Caspie; and toward the southe, to the +land of Ynde. That is also a gode lond and a plentefous; and it hath 3 +grete princypalle cytees, Messabor, Caphon and Sarmassane. + +And thanne aftre is Armenye, in the which weren wont to ben 4 kyngdomes: +that is a noble contree, and fulle of godes. And it begyinnethe at Persie, +and strecchethe toward the west in lengthe, unto Turkye. And in largenesse, +it durethe to the cytee of Alizandre, that now is clept the Zate of Helle, +that I spak offe beforn, undre the kyngdom of Mede. In this Armenye ben +fulle manye gode cytees: but Tanrizo is most of name. + +Aftre this, is the kyngdom of Mede, that is fulle long: but it is not fulle +large, that begynnethe toward the est, to the land of Persie, and to Ynde +the lesse. And it strecchethe toward the west, toward the kyngdom of +Caldee, and toward the septemtrion, descendynge toward the litille Armenye. +In that kyngdom of Medee, ther ben many grere hilles, and litille of pleyn +erthe. There duellen Sarazines, and another maner of folk, that men clepen +Cordynes. The beste 2 cytees of that kyngdom, ben Sarras and Karemen. + +Aftre that, is the kyngdom of George, that begynnethe toward the est; to +the gret mountayne, that is clept Abzor; where that duellen many dyverse +folk of dyverse naciouns. And men clepen the contree Alamo. This kyngdom +strecchethe him towardes Turkye, and toward the grete see: and toward the +south, it marchethe to the grete Armenye. And there ben 2 kyngomes in that +contree; that on is the kyngdom of Georgie, and that other is the kyngdom +of Abcaz. And alle weys in that contree ben 2 kynges, and thei ben bothe +Cristene: but the Kyng of Georgie is in subieccioun to the grete Chane. And +the King of Abcaz hathe the more strong contree: and he alle weyes +vigerously defendethe his contree; azenst alle tho that assaylen him; so +that no man may make him in subieccioun to no man. In that kyngdom of Abcaz +is a gret marvaylle. For a provynce of the contree, that hathe wel in +circuyt 3 iorneyes, that men clepen Hanyson, is alle covered with +derknesse, with outen ony brightnesse or light; so that no man may see ne +here, ne no man dar entren in to hem. And natheles, thei of the contree +seyn, that som tyme men heren voys of folk, and hors nyzenge, and cokkes +crowynge. And men witen wel, that men duellen there: but thei knowe not +what men. And thei seyn, that the derknesse befelle be myracle of God. For +a cursed Emperour of Persie, that highte Saures, pursuede alle Cristene +men, to destroye hem, and to compelle hem to make sacrifise to his ydoles; +and rood with grete host, in alle that ever he myghte, for to confounde the +Cristene men. And thanne in that contree, dwellen manye gode Cristene men, +the whiche that laften hire godes, and wolde han fled in to Grece: and whan +they weren in a playn, that highte Megon, anon this cursed emperour mett +with hem, with his hoost, for to have slayn hem, and hewen hem to peces. +And anon the Cristene men kneleden to the grounde, and made hire preyeres +to God to sokoure hem. And anon a gret thikke clowde cam, and covered the +emperour and alle his hoost: and so thei enduren in that manere, that thei +ne mowe not gon out, on no syde; and so schulle thei ever more abyden in +derknesse, tille the day of dome, be the myracle of God. And thanne the +Cristene men wenten, where hem lykede best, at hire own plesance, with +outen lettynge of ony creature; and hire enemyes enclosed and confounded in +derknesse, with outen ony strok. Wherfore we may wel seye, with David, _A +Domino factum est istud; et est mirable in oculis nostris_. And that was a +gret myracle, that God made for hem. Wherfore methinkethe, that Cristene +men scholden ben more devoute, to serven oure Lord God, than ony other men +of ony other secte. For with outen ony drede, ne were cursednesse and synne +of Cristene men, thei scholden be lordes of alle the world. For the banere +of Jesu Crist is alle weys displayed, and redy on alle sydes, to the help +of his trewe lovynge servauntes: in so moche, that o gode Cristene man, in +gode beleeve, scholde overcomen and out chacen a 1000 cursed mysbeleevynge +men: as David seyth in the Psautere, _Quoniam persequebatur unus mille, et +duo fugarent decem milia_. Et, _Cadent a latere tuo mille, et decem milia a +dextris tuis_. And how that it myghte ben, that on scholde chacen a 1000, +David himself seythe, folewynge, _Quia manus Domini fecit hæc omnia_. And +oure Lord himself seythe, be the prophetes mouth, _Si in viis meis +ambulaveritis, super tribulantes vos misissem manum meam_. So that wee may +seen apertely, that zif wee wil be gode men, non enemye ne may not enduren +azenst us. Also zee schulle undirstonde, that out of that lond of +derknesse, gothe out a gret ryvere, that schewethe wel, that there ben folk +dwellynge, be many redy tokenes: but no man dar not entre in to it. + +And wytethe well, that in the kyngdoms of Georgie, of Abchaz and of the +litile Armenye, ben gode Cristene men and devoute. For thei schryven hem +and howsele hem evermore ones or twyes in the woke. And there ben many of +hem, that howsele hem every day: and so do wee not on this half; alle be it +that Seynt Poul commandethe it, seyenge, _Omnibus diebus dominicis ad +communicandum hortor_. Thei kepen that commandement: but wee ne kepen it +not. + +Also aftre, on this half, is Turkye, that marchethe to the gret Armenye. +And there ben many provynces, as Capadoche, Saure, Brique, Quesiton, Pytan +and Gemethe. And in everyche of theise ben many gode cytees. This Turkye +strecchethe unto the cytee of Sachala, that sittethe upon the see of Grece; +and so it marchethe to Syrie. Syrie is a gret contree and a gode, as I have +told zou before. And also it hathe, aboven toward Ynde, the kyngdom of +Caldee, that strecchethe fro the mountaynes of Calde, toward the est, unto +the cytee of Nynyvee, that sittethe upon the ryvere of Tygre: and in +largenesse, it begynnethe toward the northe, to the cytee of Maraga; and it +strecchethe toward the southe, unto the see occean. In Caldee is a pleyn +contree, and fewe hilles and few ryveres. + +Aftre is the kyngdom of Mesopotayme, that begynnethe toward the est, to the +flom of Tygre, unto a cytee that is clept Moselle: and it strecchethe +toward the west, to the flom of Eufrate, unto a cytee that is clept Roianz: +and in lengthe it gothe to the mount of Armenye, unto the desert of Ynde +the lesse. This is a gode contree and a pleyn; but it hathe fewe ryveres. +It hathe but 2 mountaynes in that contree: of the whiche, on highte Symar, +and that other Lyson. And this lond marchethe to the kyngdom of Caldee. + +Zit there is, toward the parties meridionales, many contrees and many +regyouns; as the lond of Ethiope, that marchethe, toward the est, to the +grete desertes; toward the west, to the kyngdom of Nubye; toward the +southe, to the kyngdom of Moretane; and toward the north to the Rede See. +Aftre is Moretane, that durethe fro the mountaynes of Ethiope, unto Lybie +the hize. And that contree lyzth a long fro the see ocean, toward the +southe; and toward the northe, it marchethe to Nubye, and to the highe +Lybye. (Theise men of Nubye ben Cristene.) And it marchethe fro the londes +aboveseyd to the desertes of Egypt. And that is the Egypt, that I have +spoken of before. And aftre is Libye the hye, and Lybye the lowe, that +descendethe down lowe, toward the grete see of Spayne. In the whiche +contree ben many kyngdomes and many dyverse folk. Now I have devysed zou +many contrees, on this half the kyngdom of Cathay: of the whiche, many ben +obeyssant to the grete Chane. + + +Of the Contrees and Yles, that ben bezonde the Lond of Cathay; and of the + Frutes there; and of 22 Kynges enclosed within the Mountaynes. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXVI.] + +Now schalle I seye zou sewyngly of contrees and yles, that ben bezonde the +contrees that I have spoken of. Wherfore I seye zou, in passynge be the +lond of Cathaye, toward the highe Ynde, and toward Bacharye, men passen be +a kyngdom, that men clepen Caldilhe; that is a fulle fair contree. And +there growethe a maner of fruyt, as thoughe it weren gowrdes: and whan thei +ben rype, men kutten hem a to, and men fynden with inne a lytylle best, in +flessche, in bon and blode, as though it were a lytylle lomb, with outen +wolle. And men eten bothe the frut and the best: and that is a gret +marveylle. Of that frute I have eten; alle thoughe it were wondirfulle: but +that I knowe wel, that God is marveyllous in his werkes. And natheles I +told hem, of als gret a marveylle to hem, that is amonges us: and that was +of the Bernakes. For I tolde hem, that in oure contree weren trees, that +beren a fruyt, that becomen briddes fleeynge: and tho that fellen in the +water, lyven; and thei that fallen on the erthe, dyen anon: and thei ben +right gode to mannes mete. And here of had thei als gret marvaylle, that +summe of hem trowed, it were an impossible thing to be. [Footnote: The +Barnacle-bearing trees are said to have grown in Ireland.] In that contree +ben longe apples of gode savour; where of ben mo than 100 in a clustre, and +als manye in another; and thei han gret longe leves and large, of 2 fote +long or more. And in that contree, and in other contrees there abouten, +growen many trees, that beren clowe gylofres and notemuges, and grete notes +of Ynde and of canelle and of many other spices. And there ben vynes, that +beren so grete grapes, that a strong man scholde have y now to done, for to +bere o clustre with alle the grapes. In that same regioun ben the +mountaynes of Caspye, that men clepen Uber in the contree. Betwene the +mountaynes, the Jewes of 10 lynages ben enclosed, that men clepen Gothe and +Magothe: and thei mowe not gon out on no syde. There weren enclosed 22 +kynges with hire peple, that duelleden betwene the mountaynes of Sythye. +There Kyng Alisandre chacede hem betwene tho mountaynes; and there he +thoughte for to enclose hem thorghe werk of his men. But whan he saughe, +that he myghte not don it, ne bryng it to an ende, he preyed to God of +Nature, that he wolde parforme that that he had begonne. And alle were it +so, that he was a Payneme and not worthi to ben herd, zit God of his grace +closed the mountaynes to gydre: so that thei dwellen there, alle faste y +lokked and enclosed with highe mountaynes alle aboute, saf only on o syde; +and on that syde is the see of Caspye. Now may sum men asken, Sithe that +the see is on that o syde, wherfore go thei not out on the see syde, for to +go where that hem lykethe? But to this question, I schal answere, That see +of Caspye gothe out be londe, undre the mountaynes, and rennethe be the +desert at o syde of the contree; and aftre it strecchethe unto the endes of +Persie. And alle thoughe it be clept a see, it is no see, ne it touchethe +to non other see; but it is a lake, the grettest of the world. And thoughe +thei wolden putten hem in to that see, thei ne wysten never, where that +thei scholde arryven. And also thei conen no langage, but only hire owne, +that no man knowethe but thei: and therfore mowe thei not gon out. And also +zee schulle undirstond, that the Jewes han no propre lond of hire owne for +to dwellen inne, in alle the world, but only that lond betwene the +mountaynes. And zit thei zelden tribute for that lond to the Queen of +Amazoine, the whiche makethe hem to ben kept in cloos fulle diligently, +that thei schalle not gon out on no syde, but be the cost of hire lond. For +hire lond marchethe to tho mountaynes. And often it hathe befallen, that +summe of the Jewes han gon up the mountaynes, and avaled down to the +valeyes: but gret nombre of folk ne may not do so. For the mountaynes ben +so hye and so streghte up, that thei moste abyde there, maugre hire myghte. +For thei mowe not gon out, but be a littille issue, that was made be +strengthe of men; and it lastethe wel a 4 gret myle. And aftre, is there +zit a lond alle desert, where men may fynde no watre, ne for dyggynge, ne +for non other thing. Wherfore men may not dwellen in that place: so it is +fulle of dragounes, of serpentes and of other venymous bestes, that no man +dar not passe, but zif it be strong wyntre. And that streyt passage, men +clepen in that contree, Clyron. And that is the passage, that the Queen of +Amazoine makethe to ben kept. And thoghe it happene, sum of hem, be +fortune, to gon out; thei conen no maner of langage but Ebrow: so that thei +can not speke to the peple. And zit natheles, men seyn, thei schalle gon +out in the tyme of Antecrist, and that thei schulle maken gret slaughtre of +Cristene men. And therfore alle the Jewes, that dwellen in alle londes, +lernen alle weys to speken Ebrew, in hope that whan the other Jewes schulle +gon out, that thei may undirstonden hire speche, and to leden hem in to +Cristendom, for to destroye the Cristene peple. For the Jewes seyn, that +they knowen wel, be hire Prophecyes, that thei of Caspye schulle been undre +hire subieccioun, als longe as they had ben in subieccioun of hem. And zif +that zee wil wyte, how that thei schulle fynden hire Weye, aftre that I +have herd seye, I schalle telle zou. In the time of Antecrist, a fox +schalle make there his trayne, and mynen an hole, where Kyng Alisandre leet +make the Zates: and so longe he schalle mynen and perce the erthe, till +that he schalle passe thorghe, towardes that folk. And whan thei seen the +fox thei schulle have gret marveylle of him, be cause that thei saughe +never suche a best. For of alle other bestes, thei han enclosed amonges +hem, saf only the fox. And thanne thei schullen chacen him and pursuen him +so streyte, tille that he come to the same place, that he cam fro. And +thanne thei schullen dyggen and mynen so strongly, tille that thei fynden +the zates, that Kyng Alisandre leet make of grete stones and passynge huge, +wel symented and made stronge for the maystrie. And tho zates thei schulle +breken, and so gon out, be fyndynge of that issue. + +Fro that lond, gon men toward the lond of Bacharie, where ben fulle +cruelle. In that lond ben trees, that beren wolle, as thoghe it were of +scheep; where of men maken clothes, and alle thing that may ben made of +wolle. In that contree ben many Ipotaynes, that dwellen somtyme in the +watre, and somtyme on the lond: and thei ben half man and half hors, as I +have seyd before: and thei eten men, whan thei may take hem. And there ben +ryveres of watres, that ben fulle byttere, three sythes more than is the +watir of the see. In that contree ben many Griffounes, more plentee than in +ony other contree. Sum men seyn, that thei han the body upward, as an +eagle, and benethe as a Lyoun: and treuly thei seyn sothe, that thei ben of +that schapp. But o griffoun hathe the body more gret and is more strong +thanne 8 lyouns, of suche lyouns as ben o this half; and more gret and +strongere, than an 100 egles, suche as we han amonges us. For o griffoun +there will bere, fleynge to his neste, a gret hors, or 2 oxen zoked to +gidere, as thei gon at the plowghe. For he hathe his talouns so longe and +so large and grete, upon his feet, as thoughe thei weren hornes of grete +oxen or of bugles or of Kyzn; so that men maken cuppes of hem, to drynken +of: and of hire ribbes and of the pennes and of hire wenges, men maken +bowes fulle stronge, to schote with arwes and quarelle. From thens gon men, +be many iourneyes, thorghe the lond of Prestre John, the grete Emperour of +Ynde. And men clepen his Roialme, the Yle of Pentexoire, + + +END OF PART II. + + + +MANDEVILLE'S VOYAGES. + +PART III. + + +Tertia pars. + +CAPVT. 41. + +De magnificentia Imperatoris Indiæ et preciositate Palatij. + +[Sidenote: Seu Pentoxoria Ciuitas Nyse] Cum in præcedentibus Imperator +Indiæ dictus sit magnus, restat de illius magnificentia aliquid poni hoc +loco: cuius vtique gloria, nobilitas, et potestas, dici non habetur minor, +est tamen in aliquibus satis maior, quia omne æquale non est idem cum illo +cui æquatur: itáque à finibus regni Bachariæ supradicti vbi contiguatur +Imperio Indiæ, eundo per multas diætas intratur in Pentoxyriæ quod est +magnæ latitudinis, et abundantiæ in multis bonis: huius nominatior ciuitas, +dicitur Nyse, et in ea habet Imperator palatium Imperiale, in quo residet +dum sibi placet. Imperator iste semper vocitatus est Præsbyter Ioannes, +cuius nominis causam audieram quandoque non veram: sed in illis partibus +accepi rationem indubitatam, quam breuiter hîc enarro. [Sidenote: Narratio +de rebus gestis Ogeri Ducis Daniæ.] Circa annum ab incarnatione Domini +octingentessimum, dux Ogerus de Danemarchia, cum quindecim cognationis suæ +baronibus, et armatis viginti milibus transiuit mare Greciæ, et fauente +sibi Deo conquisiuit Christianitati per multa prælia pené omnes terras, +regiones, et insulas, quas esse de potestate Grand Can prædixi, nec non et +omnes, quæ sunt de potestate Imperij huius Imperatoris Indiæ. Eratque inter +Barones vnus denominatus Ioannes filius Goudebucf, regis Frisonum: qui +dictus Ioannes Deo deuotus fuit, et dum licuit Ecclesiarum limina iniuit, +vnde et barones ei dabant quasi per iocum Præsbyter Ioannes vocabulum. +[Sidenote: Vndè Presbyter Ioannis sit dictus. 4000. Insulæ.] Dum ergo +Ogerus dictas regiones expugnatas diuideret in hijs quindecim suis +cognatis, et quemlibet eorum in suo loco constitueret regem, quatenus +Christiana religio in illa orbis superficie semper stabilis permaneret, +tradidit isti Præsbytero Ioanni superiorem Indiam, cum 4000. insulis, +regionibus, et ipsum præfecit Imperatorem super reliquos cognatos, vt ei +certa tributa impenderent, et in omnibus obedirent, átque ex tunc omnes +successores Indiæ sunt vocati Præsbyter Ioannes et vsque in hodiernum +tempus boni manserunt Christiani, et religionis æmulatores. Interim cum +causa matrimoniorum aut procurationis filiorum dispersa est primi Imperij +integritas, et multæ de insulis conuersæ vel potius peruersæ retrocesserunt +ad vetustum squalorem paganismi primi. Nota. Recedens à Cambalu versus +orientem post 50. dietas ad terram Præsbyteri Ioannes, principalis ciuitas +terræ vocatur Cosan, satis parua sicut Vincentia: habet etiam sub se multas +alias ciuitates. Ex pacto semper habet in vxorem vnam de filiabus Grand +Can. + +Per multas peruenitur ad prouinciam Casan, quæ est secunda melior de mundo, +vbi subtilior est, habet dietas 50. longior, 60. et est vna de duodecim +partibus Imperij Grand Can. Odericus. Vide infra capitulo 49. de Cassan, et +de Epulone. Deinde venitur in Thebeth prouinciam, quæ India est confinis. +Itaque Rex et Imperator iste tenet spatiosissimum Imperium plenum valdè +multis Regionibus et Insulis amplis, diuisum inter quatuor flumina magna de +Paradiso terrestri descendentia, Pyson, Gyon, Tygrim, et Euphratem. Nam +vltra fines orientales eius Imperij, et terrestram Paradisum, nullus +hominum habitat vel domitatur. + +Præterea imperat multis alijs regionibus et insulis quæ distinguntur per +brachia maris Oceani, et in quibus singulis continetur grandis numerositas +ciuitatum ac villarum, et multitudo innumera populorum præ abundantia, et +præciositate omnium terrenorum bonorum. + +Imperium Indiæ habetur famosum per vniuersum orbem. Sed et famosius +haberetur si mercatores mundi communitèr possint et auderent adire sicut +Cathay, Nostratibus enim perrarus est illic accessus, tam præ +longinquitate, quàm præ marinis periculis. Nam exceptis alijs sunt ibi +quamplures Adamantini colles, ad oram maris, et intra mare, qui sua virtute +attrahunt sibi naues ferrum continentes. Quoniam et mihi nauiganti +monstrabatur per nautas à remotis quasi paruula Insula in mari, quam +asserebant totalitèr ab antiquis temporibus paulatim ibi cumulatam de +nauibus per Adamantes retentis. + +[Sidenote: Latitudo Imperij Præsbyteri Ioannis est 4. mensium iter.] +Estimatur autem latitudo huius Imperij per dietas quatuor mensium, sed +longitudini non datur estimatio, eo quòd tenditur vsque Paradisum vbi +nullus accedit. + +Distinctum est Imperium per duodecim prouincias, quibus totidem præsunt +reges principales seu prouinciales, et quorum singuli habent sub se Reges, +Duces, Marchiones, et Barones, praestantes atque reddentes Praesbytero +Ioanni promptam obedientiam, et certa tributa. Saepius et communitèr tenet +Sedem Imperator in palatio vrbis Imperialis Suse. Hoc autem Palatium tale +et tantum est, vt per me non credatur debite estimandum. Istud tamen dico +audentèr in summa, quòd grandius, nobilius, preciosius, et placidius est, +in auro, gemmis, structuris, et schemate supra descripto palatio Grand Can +in Caydo. + +Et ex speciali sciatis, istius palatij principales portas esse de +Sardonico, vndìque in ebore circumcluso: sed et transuersæ lineæ sunt omnes +Eburneæ, aularum et cubiculorum fenestræ christallinæ. Mensarum quaedam +Smaragdinæ, aliquæ Haematistinæ, caeterorumque lapidum preciosorum per +aurum sibimet coniunctorum. Et nonnullæ in toto aureæ vel gemmunculis +disseminatæ, et vnaquaeque de mensis cum stabilimento proprij generis. De +throni quoque preciositate, quia meæ demonstrationis excellit modum, +solummodo dico, singulos ascensionis gradus esse singulorum lapidum +preciosorum: Primum onychis, secundum christallai, tertium iaspidis, +quartum haematisti, quintum sardij, sextum cornelij. Et septimus qui est +sub sedentis Imperatoris pedibus, ipse est, chrysolitus, omnes circumfusi, +et inclusoria arte formati, auro splendida relucentes. Sed et ambo throni +reclinatoria ex smaragdis auro combinatis, eoque distincto nobilissimis +granis, et gemmis: cuncti pilarij in camera Regis dormitoria consistunt de +auro fuluo, disseminati baccis, et quampluribus carbunculorum rubetis, +totum de nocte habitaculum illustrantibus. + +Et nihilominus in ea christallina lampas plena balsamo pistico sed ardens +et lucens, tam pro augendo lumine, quàm pro corrigendo aere, tamen etiam +pro ministrando optimo odore. + +Forma lecti Imperatoris compacta est de puris et nobilissimis Saphyris, +conclusi vtique aureis vel eburneis ligaturis, vt virtute lapidum capiat +suauem somnum, motusque carnis inhonesti stimuli, in eo refrenentur. +Nunquam enim iungitur mulieri nisi soli coniugi propriæ, sed nec illi nisi +quatuor quindenis anni videlicet in capite hyemis, veris, æstatis, et +autumni causa sobolis generandæ. + +Vtque breuitèr transeam de multa huius palatij nobilitate, mirabile hoc +solummodò praemissis super addo. Quia circa medium illius in summo apice +turris maioris, duo sunt nodi seu pomella de decoctissimi auri metallo miræ +magnitudinis, et serenæ resplendentiæ, et in ipsis formati duo carbunculi +grandes, et lati, sua virtute tenebras effugantes, et velut splendorem +plenilunij nocturno tempore mentientes. + + +The English Version. + +Of the Ryalle estate of Prestre John; and of a riche man, that made a + marveyllous Castelle, and cleped it Paradys; and of his Sotyltee. + +[Sidenote: Chap. XXVII.] This Emperour Prestre John holt fulle gret lond, +and hathe many fulle noble cytees and gode townes in his royalme, and many +grete dyvene yles ond large. For alle the contree of Ynde is devysed in +yles, for the grete flodes, that comen from Paradys, that departen alle the +lond in many parties. And also in the see, he hathe fulle manye yles. And +the beste cytee in the yle of Pentexoire is Nyse, that is a fulle ryalle +cytee and a noble, and fulle riche. This Prestre John hathe undre him many +kynges and many yles and many dyverse folk of dyverse condiciouns. And this +lond is fulle gode and ryche; but not so riche as is the lond of the grete +Chane. For the marchauntes come not thidre so comounly, for to bye +marchandises, as thei don in the lond of the gret Chane: for it is to fer +to travaylle to. And on that other partie, in the yle of Cathay, men fynden +alle maner thing, that is nede to man; clothes of gold, of silk, and +spycerie. And therfore, alle be it that men han grettre chep in the yle of +Prestre John, natheles men dreden the longe wey and the grete periles in +the see, in tho parties. For in many places of the see ben grete roches of +stones of the adamant, that of his propre nature drawethe iren to him. And +therfore there passen no schippes, that han outher bondes or nayles of iren +with in hem: and zif there do, anon the roches of the adamantes drawen hem +to hem, that never thei may go thens. I my self have seen o ferrom in that +see, as thoughe it hadde ben a gret yle fulle of trees and buscaylle, fulle +of thornes and breres, gret plentee. And the schipmen tolde us, that alle +that was of schippes, that weren drawen thidre be the adamauntes, for the +iren that was in hem. And of the rotenesse and other thing that was with in +the schippes, grewen suche buscaylle and thornes and breres and grene +grasse and suche maner of thing; and of the mastes and the seylle zerdes; +it semed a gret wode or a grove. And suche roches ben in many places there +abouten. And therfore dur not the marchauntes passen there, but zif thei +knowen wel the passages, or elle that thei han gode lodes men. And also +thei dreden the longe weye: and therfore thei gon to Cathay; for it is more +nyghe: and zit is not so nyghe, but that men moste ben travayllynge be see +and lond, 11 monethes or 12, from Gene or from Venyse, or he come to +Cathay. And zit is the lond of Prestre John more ferr, be many dredfulle +iourneyes. And the marchauntes passen be the kyngdom of Persie, and gon to +a cytee that is clept Hermes: for Hermes the philosophre founded it. And +aftre that, thei passen an arm of the see, and thanne thei gon to another +cytee that is clept Golbache: and there thei fynden marchandises, and of +popengayes, as gret plentee as men fynden here of gees. And zif thei will +passen ferthere, thei may gon sykerly i now. In that contree is but lytylle +whete or berley: and therfore thei eten ryzs and hony and mylk and chese +and frute. + +This Emperour Prestre John takethe alle weys to his wif, the doughtre of +the grete Chane: and the gret Chane also in the same wise, the doughtre of +Prestre John. For theise 2 ben the grettest lordes undir the firmament. + +In the lond of Prestre John, ben manye dyverse thinges and many precious +stones, so gret and so large, that men maken of hem vesselle: as plateres, +dissches and cuppes. And many other marveylles ben there; that it were to +cumbrous and to long to putten it in scripture of bokes. + + +CAPVT 42. + +De frequentia palatij et comitatu Imperatoris. + +Seruiunt et praestò sunt iugitèr Domino Imperatori septem reges, qui in +capite singulorum mensium, alijs septem regibus pro illis palatium +ingredientibus recedunt ad propria, donec reuoluatur eis tempus statutum. +Hij curam habent de gubernatione administrationum in aula maiori per +subiectos eis 72. duces, et 300. et 63. comites seu barones, quorum +vnusquisque optimè nouit et diligentèr intendit proprio ministerio. + +Nam isti sunt Imperatoris Cubicularij, isti Camerarij, isti scindunt Regi +morsellos: alij de apponendis curam gerunt ferculis et deponendis, +deafferendis, deasportandis, alij pincernæ, Archimandritæ, ostiarij, et sic +de singulis. + +Nec non absque iam dictis, manducant omni die in aula coràm Imperatore, +duodecim Archiepiscopi, 220. Episcopi, quibus etiam alij totidem certis +temporibus succedunt per vices. Verumtamem ad quotidianas expensas vsque +praemissas, veniunt de Curia 300. millia personarum, sed non ampliùs: sed +sicut praedixi de Curia praecedentis Imperatoris sic nullus hic, +cuiuscunque sit status, aut sexus, comedit vltrà semel in die, et hoc ipsum +sobriè satis: quoniam prout æstimare possum, expensæ duodecim hominum de +nostris communitèr compensarent triginta hominum in partibus illis. + +Dum Ioannem Presbyterum contingit procedere cum exercitu in plena +exhibitione, non deferuntur vexilla, sed tredecim cruces magnæ altitudinis +et grossitudinis, de auro distincto pretiosissimis petris, in honorem +Christi et suorum Apostolorum duodecim. Hæ vectantur in singulis curribus, +et singularum ad hoc maximis curribus cum custodia cuiuscunque crucis, +decem mille equitum, et centum mille peditum, nec tamen hic numerus auget +vel minuit principalem exercitum Paganorum. + +Tempore pacis per terras proprias de palatio ad palatium, aut de regno ad +regnum, dum tendere ei placet, comitatur vtique magna multitudine hominum +antè et retrò, et ex vtroque laterum. + +Tùncque portantur coràm eo tria valdè notabilia, quæ tam illi quàm omnibus +ea dignè notantibus esse possunt salutaria. Praecedit enim eum in spatio +circiter octodecim passuum discus onustus velut omni genere pretiosorum +vasorum auri et argenti, gemmarum, et inæstimabilis artificij. Illumque +discum subsequitur propinquiùs Imperatori ad spatium centum passuum, alia +crux lignea nullo penitùs auro, nulloue colore aut preciositate +artificialis operis adornata. + +Dehinc ad sex passuum succedit ibidem propinquans Imperatori discus aureus +terra nigerrima plenus. Sunt enim prædicti comitatus in custodiam et +honorem personæ Imperatoris, discus vassorum in ostensionem diuitiarum, et +maiestatis Imperialis. Crux in recordatione passionis et mortis, quam in +cruce ligni simplice Christus passus est pro nobis. Et terra nigra in +memoriam diræ mortis, qua caro ipsius Imperatoris, quæ terra est, in terram +ibit corruptionis. + + +The English Version. + +But of the princypalle yles and of his estate and of his lawe, I schalle +telle zou som partye. This Emperour Prestre John is Cristene; and a gret +partie of his contree also; but zit thei have not alle the articles of oure +feythe, as wee have. Thei beleven wel in the Fadre, in the Sone and in the +Holy Gost: and thei ben fulle devoute, and righte trewe on to another. And +thei sette not be no barettes, ne by cawteles, ne of no disceytes. And he +hathe undre him 72 provynces; and in every provynce is a kyng. And theise +kynges han kynges undre hem; and alle ben tributaries to Prestre John. + + +CAPVT. 43. + +De quibusdam miris per regiones Indiæ. + +Licèt plurima mira habeantur in terra Imperij Presbyteri Ioannis, ne +materia operis nimiùm proteletur, multa tego silentio: et solùm de +quibusdam in principalibus Insulis narro. [Sidenote: Magnum mare arenosum] +Ergò in primis dico vidisse me magnum mare arenosum, quod de solùm minuta +arena sine vlla aqua cum lapillorum granellis currit, et fluit per altas +eleuationes, et depressiones ad similitudinem maris aquæ, nec vnquam +quiescit: et quòd ipse non cesso stupere, inueniuntur pisces ad littus +proiecti, qui cum sint alterius formæ et speciei, quàm de nostro mari, +videntur tamen gustui in edendo delicatiores. [Sidenote: In orientali India +vsque hodie venti anniuersarij arenis ostia fluminum suffocant.] Nullo +tamen humano ingenio videtur hoc mare transuadari, aut nauigari, aut illo +piscari, sed nec propter sui longitudinem, et plura impedimenta de propè +circuiri. + +Item ab hoc latere maris per tres dietas habentur magnæ montium alpes, +inter quas venit quasi oriens de Paradiso fluuius decurrentibus petris, +nihil penitùs habens aquæ, in quibus æstimandæ sunt plurimum magnarum esse +virtutum, quamuis de singulis humanæ scientiæ constare non potest. + +Hîc petrarum fluuius currit ad intercisum tempus, quasi in tribus septimanæ +diebus, per spatium deserti Indiæ plurium dietarum, velut fluuius, quousque +tandem se perdat in mare arenosum praedictum, atque ex tunc ipsi lapides +penitùs non comparent. Tempore autem sui cursus nullus appropinquare +praesumit, præ strepitu eius et motu: sed tempore quietis aditur sine +periculo vitæ. + +In Orientem versus fluuij originem ad ingressum deserti magni inter quosdam +de montibus, cernitur grandis terræ planicies tanquam spatiosi campi +totalitèr arenosi, in quo videntur ad Solis ortum exurgere de arena, et +secundùm eleuationem Solis excrescere quaedam virgulta, atque in feruore +meridiei producere fructum. Ac de illo in Solis decliuo fructus cum +arbustulis paulatim minui, et in occasu penitùs deperire, vnde et nullus +hominum audet illorum vti fructibus, ne sit quid fantasticum et nociuum. + +In huius deserti interioribus, vidi homines in toto syluestres, qui etsi in +superioribus formam praetendere videantur humanam, descendunt in +subterioribus ad formam bestiæ alicuius. + +Horum quidam frontes gerunt cornibus asperatas, grinientes vt feræ vel +apri: alij nonnulla vti videntur loquela, quam nemo rationalium nonit, et +quibusdam signis concepta depromunt. Et est illic pluralitas syluestrium +canum, qui dicuntur papiones, quibus postquam edomiti, et ad venandum +instructi fuerint, valent capi multæ bestiæ per desertum. [Sidenote: +Papagalli.] Est et copiositas papingonum auium viridium in colore quas +appellant phicake, et quarum diuersa sunt genera, nobiliores habent latas +in rostro linguas, et in vtroque pede digitos duos. Et quaedam ex istis +naturaliter loquuntur verba aut prouerbia, seu salutationes, in patriæ +idiomate, vt euidenter salutes, concedant, et reddant viatoribus, et +nonnunquam debitum iter errantibus per desertum ostendant. Minus autem +nobiles non loquuntur ex natura, sed si latas habent linguas, et non sunt +vltrà duorum annorum ætatis, possunt per assiduitatem instrui ad loquelam. + +Aliæ nec loquuntur, nec eradiuntur, sed solùm clamitant pro voce milui, et +nisi tres digitos habent in pede. + +Nota: in quarta orientali Deus dedit fratribus minoribus magnam gratiam, +vnde in magna Tartaria ita expellunt ab obsessis daemones, sicut de domo +canes: vnde quandoque per decem dietas ad eos adducuntur daemoniaci +alligati, et statim fratribus praecipientibus in nomine Iesu Christi, +exeunt, et liberati baptizantur, et comburunt idola, et plures credunt, et +quandoque exeunt idola de igne, et fratres proijciunt aquam benedictam, et +clamat daemon, Vide, de meo habitaculo expellor propter fratres minores. +Ita multi credunt, et baptizantur. Odericus. + +[Sidenote Melescorde Regio. Vel regionis.] Item nota: dum recederem de +terra Praesbyteri Ioannis versos occidentem, applicui ad contratam vnam, +quæ dicitur Melescorde, quæ pulchra est, et multùm fertilis: inter montes +duos huius contratæ fecerat quidam murum circundantem montem, et in eo +fontes nobilissimos, et omne detectabile. Et hunc locum dicebant paradisum, +sicut hic ferè continetur. Ideò Odericus, qui posteà narrat de valle +infausta in hoc se terminat. + +[Sidenote: Mischorach.] Ad supradictum Indiæ regnum Pentexoriæ satis propè, +et lata est et longa Insula, Mischorach, bonis copiosè referta, de qua vnum +scribo praeteritum mirum. + +Ante paucos hos annos, villanus ditissimus, sibi valdè preciosum +construxerat palatium, quasi pro Paradiso terrestri, circundatum, munitum +fortalitijs, ac repletum omnibus corporalibus delicijs. + +Illic areæ, turres, cameræ, cubicula, cum alijs ædificijs, in multo numero, +et gloria permagnifica, ac historiarum picturis, inter quas, nonnunquam +prodigioso artificio bestiæ et bestiolæ, aues et auiculæ discurrebant, +volitibant, et per pugnas, garritus, collusiones, mentiebantur viuere. + +[Sidenote: Ditissimi villani paradisus fictitius.] Illic prata, et pometa, +et seruatoria circà deliciosi collis congestum, distincta velut omni genere +florum, arborum, et herbarum, cum multis fontibus et riuulis, quorum +perspicuitas, et fluxus in glaris suauem et auditui praestabant +refectionem, et super aliquos fuerunt exceptioris artificij, circumstructi +auro, et argento, et gemmis, et tres principales fontes emittentes ad +palatium Domini per occultas conductas, riuulos vini, lactis, et mellis. + +Copiosus quoque numerus formosorum puerorum, et puellarum, ætatis inter +decem et sex decem annos, indutorum torquibus, et cycladibus exauratis, +exercentium inter iocos cantus et spectacula, ac seruientium suo Domino +prope nutum. Audiebantur ex turrium custodibus, nec non videbantur +dulcisonæ, symphoniæ, generum diuersorum, vt certissimè putares, non +hominum, sed Angelorum: et in istis, ac similibus, deliciebatur iste +villanus. + +Sed et aurum liuido nil iuuat, imò nocet: quia enim hic inuidiæ et otij +facibus super ingenuitatem mentis omnium generaliter nobilium principum +verebatur in corde: (ingenuitas enim, et rusticitas nunquam cohabitant in +cordis vno domicilio) Composuerat ista sibi in hunc finem, vt per se +singulos aduocaret aliquos vasallos corpore robustos, menteque audaces, +atque ad omnem proteruiam benè procliues: et cuilibet pro placitis +muneribus commisit vt illum seu illum principem seu Baronem, quem dicebat +sibi aduersarium, clàm per insidias vel impetum, occideret, promittens +quenquam post factum ad se recepturum perpetuò in hunc locum: sed et velut +vaticinans pseudo praedicauit, si quem illorum pro his flagitijs contigeret +corporaliter tradi morti, nihilominùs animam eius in hunc amoenum Paridisum +recipi, et viuere in æeternum. + +[Sidenote: Mandeuillus oculatus testis.] Per hunc igitur modum nonnulis +nobilibus occisis, et interfectis, tandem nudabatur eius nequitia tanta, et +congregati regionis Barones miserum occiderunt, eius opera destruentes. +Ipse ego inibi ductus vidi fontium loca, et multa rei vestigia. + + +CAPVT. 44. + +De loco et dispositione vallis infaustæ. + +Huius ad insulæ extremitates non procul à fluuio Pyson, habetur locus +mirabilis pariter et terribilis, vltrà omne mundanum, penè et procul: de +euentibus, ac laboribus infinitis, quæ mihi meísque in tempore +itinerationis acciderunt hucusque subticui, cùm iam vnum de maioribus ecce +narro. + +Est illic in alpibus vallis infausta, quatuor fermè leucarum: longitudo +vallis, quasi ad quatuor milliaria Lombardica, appellata vallis +incantationis, seu periculosa, seu propiùs daemoniosa: intrà quam diebus ac +noctibus resonant boatus et tumultus tonitruorum, tempestatum, clamorum, et +stridorum, diuersique generis sonituum terribilium, quos illic exercet +multitudo spirituum malignorum. + +Propè ad vallis medium sub vna rupium, apparet omni tempore visibiliter +integrum ac maximum caput daemonis vsque ad humeros tantùm, cuius speciem +præ horrore nullus pleno intuitu humanus audet diu oculus sustinere: nam +respicientes contrà aspicit truculentèr, agitans oculos minacitèr, tanquam +ex palpebris eiecturus (quæ et scintillant) flammas in altum. Totumque +caput sese rotat ad minas, et variat terribilitèr modum et continentiam sub +repentè diuersis maneriebus. Exitque de illo per totum ignis obscuratus +fumo, et foetor, tantus, quòd per magnum spatium viæ pessimam vallem +infectat. + +Ingredi autem volentibus, apparet semper ad introitum vallis, magna copia +auri, argenti, vasorum, vestium, et rerum pretiosarum, quas proculdubio ibi +daemones confingunt, quibus et ab olim multi insipientium hominum +concupiscentia tracti intrarunt, et vsque nunc intrant pro colligendo +thesauro: sed de Infidelibus paucissimi reuertuntur, imò nec de +Christianis, qui auaritiæ causa ingrediuntur: per vallis autem semitam, quæ +inter montes et monticulos, tortuosa et aspera est, gradientes vident, et +audiunt, daemoniacos spiritus multos volutantes, et imaginibus corporum +visibilium, serpentum, volucrum, vlularum, lamiarum, et huiusmodi specierum +horribilium dentibus minitantes, vngulas erigentes, incognitos sibilos +spirantes propè super capita ad aures transgredientium. Sempérque minuitur +lumen aeris, donec ventum fuerit ad terribilissimum locum capitis +antedicti. + +Si quis autem sinceræ fidei Christianus per contritionem veram et +confessionem, se posuerit in statu saluationis, munitus corporis Christi +mysterijs, ac signo crucis, cum intentione ibidem agendi poenitentiam de +admissis, et cauendi de admittendis, putatur posse hanc transire vallem +securus quidem à morte, non tamen liber à laboribus, horroribus, et +tormentis, et exire, de omnibus culpis praeteritis corruptis, ac de futuris +magis solito cautus, sicut scriptum est, territi purgabuntur. + +Nota aliud mirabile magnum. Vidi cùm irem per vnam vallem positam iuxta +flumen quod egreditur de paradiso, vidi in ea multa corpora mortuorum, in +qua etiam audiui multa genera Musicorum, qui ibi mirabilitèr pulsabant: +tantus erat ibi tinnitus Musicorum, quòd incussit mihi timorem horribilem. + +Est autem longitudo illius vallis quasi ad quatuor milliaria Lombardica, in +qua si vnus Infidelis intrat, nunquam egreditur, sed sine mora moritur: Et +licet sciui, quòd intrantes moriuntur, tamen acceptaui intrare, vt viderem +quid ibi esset. Dum intrassem tot humana cadauera ibi vidi, quod nisi quis +videret, credere non posset. + +In hac valle, ab vno eius latere, vidi faciem hominis valdè horribilem, qui +tantum horrorem mihi incussit, quòd putaui me spiritum exhalare, propter +quod saepè repetij verbum vitæ, scilicet, verbum Caro factum est. + +Ad illam faciem non audebam accedere, nisi ad distantiam octo passuum: +posteà iui ad caput vallis, et ascendi super montem arenosum, in quo +vndique circumspiciens, nihil videbam, nisi instrumenta musicalia, quæ +audiebam fortitèr pulsare. Cùm fuissem in capite montis, reperi multum +argentum congregatum ibi in similitudinem squamarum piscium, vnde posui in +gremio, sed quod de ipso non curabam, dimisi illud, et sic illaesus +transiui Deo concedente. + +Sarraceni cùm hoc scirent, reuerebantur me esse baptizatum, et sanctum: +mortuos nunc in valle dicebant, homines infernales. + +Odericus ad literam hic terminat suum librum: non fuit tot perpessus in +valle, sicut ego. Anno Domini 1331. Ianuarij nono, migrauit ad Christum, in +conuentu Minorum: cuius vitam statim in fine, et vsque nunc claris +miraculis diuina prouidentia approbat, et commendat, prout continebatur in +quaterno, à quo concordantias hic superseminaui. + + +CAPVT. 45. + +De periculo et tormentis in valle eadem. + +Itaque dico vobis, cùm sodalibus, qui simul eramus, quatuordecim diuersarum +nationum ante ingressum huius tanti periculi peruenissemus, nos tractatu +longo, et deliberatione acuta consiliabamur, vtrùmnam ingredi deberemus, et +quidam affirmabant, alii verò negabant. Erant autem in numero duo deuoti +fratres, de religione beati Francisci, natione Lombardi, qui videbantur pro +seipsis non multum curare ingressum, nisi quia noluerunt nos animare ad +ingressum, dicentes, si qui nostrum per confessionem, et Eucharistiæ +susceptionem se ibidem praemunirent, ingrederentur cum illis: quo, ab +omnibus mediante debita prouisione, quam ipsi fratres penes se gerebant +peracto, parauimus mentes nostras cum pedibus ad intrandum. + +Sed ecce quinque de nobis, duo Graeci et tres Hispani, semetipsos ab alijs +segregantes, visi sunt alium requirere introitum nos praecedere cupientes, +et certè nos illos exinde non vidimus, et quid eis acciderit an periculum +subierint, velne ignoramus. + +Nos autem nouem per vallem processimus in silentio, et cum cordis ea +deuotione, quam quisque sibi potuerit obtinere: et ecce in breui transacto +spatio apparuerunt cumuli massarum auri et argenti, et preciosorum copia +vasorum. Sed dico vobis pro parte mea, quia nihil horum tetigi, reputans id +fallaciam daemonum confinxisse ad mittendum concupiscentiam in cor nostram, +imò sine intermissione conabar cor meum custodire ad deuotionem inceptam. + +Procedentibus igitur nobis lux coeli minuebator paulatim et augebatur +horror, quoniam propè nos vndique etiam sub pedibus nostris apparebant +iacere cadauera mortuorum hominum penitùs defuncta: alia adhuc spirantia, +et nonulla semiuiua, super quæ dum nos aliquando calcare contingeret, +conquerebantur, ac dolorosè submurmurabant. + +Et licèt non certum id habebam, æstimaui hoc fieri in parte vel in toto +fictione daemonum, reputans in breui tempore tantam multitudinem hominum +spontaneè vallem intrasse, et si à longo tempore in ea perijssent +putrefactos fuisse. + +Ergò in initio nostri processus quasi propè leucam inuenitur iter sub +pedibus satis promptum, sed lumine tanquam ad medium nobis sufficiente, via +torquebatur nimis, et asperabatur: et ecce figuræ daemonum, circum et suprà +in aere se ferentium, ad imagines horribilium luporum, leonum, laruarum, +megerarum, iuxtà cuiuscunque genus vlulantium, rugentium, stridentium, +gannientium, hiantes ore, intentantes dentibus, rostris, ac vnguibus, nos +terrere, mordere, discerpere, deglutire. + +Quapropter pro breui interdum soluto silentio nos inuicèm hortabamur, ne +quis pro pusillanimitate terrori cederet, et tanto deficeret in agone. Hoc +igitur modo per secundam leucam expirante nobis vsque ad tenebras lumine, +quousque quis vix vmbram proximi agnoscere possit, praeter praedicta in +aere tormenta, incurrebant nobis ad tibias, et pedes pluralitas quasi +porcorum, vrsorum, et caprarum grinnientium, et impellentium nos ad lapsum, +quod vel ad tertium, vel quartum, aut sextum passum solatenus cadebamus in +palmas, seu genua, vel prosternebamur in faciem, aut supini. + +Ac superuenere praeter hoc ventorum turbines, fulgurum coruscationes, +tonitruorum boatus, drandium casus et exundatio pluuiarum, quantas et +quales nunquam accepimus in hoc mundo, quibus iactabamur, ruebamus, +quassabamur, et periclitati fuimus extrà narrandum. + +Interdum quoque sensimus tanquam graues baculorum ictus, per humeros, +dorsa, latera, et ad renes, alij quidem grauiores, alij vt puta secundum +demeritum vniuscuiusque. Et certè dum per tanta tormenta, quasi exhaustis +totis viribus, iam propè medium locum vallis erat ventum, accidit repentè, +sub vnico instanti temporis, quibusdam nostrum expalmatio ita dura, vt +omnes paritèr collisi, et prostrati iaceremus in extasi per vnam vul duas +forsitan horas. + +Et isto defectu vidit quilibet suo modo spiritualem visionem +supermirabilem, et excedentem omne dictum, et scriptum. + +Ego verò de visione mea nihil ausus sum scribere, vel loqui, quia et +fratres singuli inhibuerunt, nisi de his, quæ corporalitèr intuebamur, et +passi sumus. + +Grauissimum singuli sustinuimus ictum per corporis loca diuersa, vnus in +facie, alius in pectore, ad costas, in dorso, vel ad humerum, et mansit +cuique signum percussuræ nigerrimum, ad formam virilis manus humanæ: + +[Sidenote: Mirabilis ictus.] Ictum autem meum in colli ceruice tali ac +tanta passione, vt putabam caput abscissum de corpore auolare: et hinc ad +octodecimum annum mansit mihi in prima magnitudine signum: sed et vsque +nunc variato colore locus ille demonstrat penissimè cicatricem, donec cum +cadauere tota mutabitur in sepulchro: porrò vbi nos ab extasi in his +tenebris separauimus singuli per diuinam gratiam respirando, loquendo, +palpando, erigendo nos ipsos mutua humanitate, vt potuimus, recollegimus, +et cohortabamur, cùm subitò nobis apparuit sub tenebroso lumine, vel potiùs +fumosa caligine, locus ille spatiosus mediæ vallis, continens antedictum +horribile caput daemonis, plenus foetore inaestimabili, et iugi occupatus +exercitatione innumerorum spirituum malignorum. + +Hunc ergo locum ineptum cùm vitare vellemus in toto nequiuimus extremitatem +eius, quocunque girantes, nullus nostrorum perfecto aspectu audebat +respicere quæ gerebantur ibidem, quia inuadens tremor statuebat +horripilationem extrahebat, sudorem, et pudorem omnes extinguere +videbantur. Nec tamen potuit esse consilium de reuertendo, ne propter +immutatum propositum confestim à daemonibus strangularemur. + +Transiuimus, Dei gratia nobis opitulante, sed non sine maximo horroris, +foetorisque tormento: rursumque ex tunc procedentes nos apprehendebat +tenebrosa, validaque tempestas, ventorum, coruscationum, tonitruum, +grandinum, et pluuiarum, cuius, quassatione collabebamur in facies, et in +dorso dextrorsum, et sinistrorsum, interuoluente ad tibias, sicut priùs +multitudine grinnientium bestiarum, nec dubito scribere quoque ampliùs, +quàm 500. vicibus per hanc vallem quisque nostrum sternebatur ad terram. + +Post verò exactam tertiam leucam, coepit nobis augeri lux aeris, ex quo +animosiores effecti, in vno tranquilliori loco nos parùm pausantes, gratias +Deo palmis extensis in caelum, reddidimus immensas, et praecipuè quod +nullus deesset de nouenario numero sociorum. + +Nihilominùs tamen spiritus in aere nobis minari non cessabant, pretendentes +in derisionem sua pudenda simul, et foeda virilia et posteriora. + +Pro certo ergò habeatis de his quæ vidi, et sensi, nullam possum vobis +tradere æquipollentiam verborum, cùm quia grauissima erant, tum quia, +singulis ne mihi deuotionem minueret non attendebam, tum etiam, quod præ +horrore, labore, et dolore multa memoriæ non commendabam. + +Per quartam autem leucam (ductrice gratia) leuiùs transeuntes, sustinuimus +tamen sub pedibus hominum cadauera mortuorum, propè vallis exitum rerum +tentamina preciosarum. + +Nunc itaque obsecro magno cordis effectu, haec legentes et audientes ego, +qui in illa hora quid erga me agebat misericordissimi Dei pietas ignorabam, +vt velitis pro me, simul et mecum ex mentis intimo collaudare ipsum +Dominum, qui tunc de potestate tenebrarum illarum eripuit me indignum, et +prout confido, à delictis iuuentutis me purgauit, quatenùs de posteà +commissis, et committendis, mihi propitiùs fore dignetur, cùm iam senior +sim effectus. Quoniam etsi ex tunc proposui mores corrigere, ex nunc statuo +in melius emendare, per filium eius Iesum Christum Dominum nostrum. + +Ad hoc, addo breuitèr, quòd non auderem hortari quenquam, me consulentem, +vt spontaneè ingrederetur hanc vallem infaustam, quamuis ego curiosus +intraui. Venientes posthac ad proximas habitationes, necesse fuit nobis +intendere ad recreandum corpora cibarijs, et balneis, et ad medendum +vulneribus, et quassaturis, donec per aliquod tempus vnusquisque acciperet +deliberationem super suo futuro. + +CAPVT. 46. + +De quibusdam alijs admirandis per Indorum insulas. + +[Sidenote: Gigantes Anthropophagi.] Vt modò procedam in tractatu. Sciatis +ad paucas inde dietas grandem insulam haberi gigantum, ad straturam +altitudinis viginti quinque pedum nostrorum, de quibus ipse vidi nonnullos, +sed extrà terram eorum, et audiuimus esse intrinsecùs quosdam triginta +pedum, et vltrà: hi operiuntur non vestibus, sed bestiarum pellibus +vtcunque sibi appensis, comedentes animalium carnes crudas, et lac pro potu +sorbentes, atque appetentes super omnem esum carnes humanas. + +Istorum non curaui intrare insulam: nam et audiui quòd ad maris littus +solent insidiari nauigantibus, nauesque submergere, nisi interdum +redimantur tribus aut quatuor per sortem hominibus sibi datis. + +[Sidenote: Letiferi aspectus mulierum.] Versus Austrum hinc in mari Oceano, +habetur inter alias insulas vna, vbi crudelibus quibusdam mulieribus +nascitur in oculis lapis rarus, et malus, quæ si per iram respexerint +hominem, more Basilisci interficiunt solo visu. + +Et vltrà hanc insulam alia maior et populosior, vbi cùm multi sint vsus +nobis insueti, vnum describo. + +[Sidenote: Insula vbi virgines vitiantur antequam nubant.] Dum +desponsauerit vir puellam, virginem, mandat hominem incompositum, velut +ribaldum, qui sua idonea claue per expertos super hoc diligentèr +considerata, si reputatur idonea reseret et vestiget sub nocte vnica +virginalem conclauem, pro mercede sibi tradita competenti. Et si postera +nocte accedens sponsus ita non inuenerit, poterit, et consueuit hominem +impetere ad mortis iudicium indeclinabile. Cumque huius moris discere +voluissem causam, accepi responsum, pro certis temporibus apud eos, +virgines habuisse in matricibus paruos serpentes, quibus nocebantur primi +ad illas intrantes. + +Ideoque et viri, que pro mercede tantum subeunt periculum, vocant sua +loquela cadibrum, est, stultos desperatos. + +Ex hac, apparet Insula in qua inter alios vsus, peruersæ sunt matres contra +naturam et scripturam, cum pepererent contristantur, et dum proles moritur +iocundantur, iactantes in magno igne cum conuiuio et exultatione, dumque +maritus ante vxorem decidit, patebit vxoris plena dilectio, si cum corpore +mariti, quod rogo traditur se iactat cremandum, vt quia in isto seculo +steterunt amoris vinculo colligati, non sint alio separati. + +Nec tamen intelligunt illud seculum, nisi quod sibi confingunt terrestrem +Paradisum. Purum aut minorem annis, trahet mater secum si placet, sed +ætatis puer perfectæ, eliget pro proprio placito viuere superstes, aut mori +iuxta parentes. + +Hic etiam non succedunt Reges per generationem sed per electionem, vt +assumatur non nobilior, aut fortior, sed morigeratior, et iustior, 50 ad +minus annorum, nullam habens sobolem aut vxorem, seruaturque illic iusticiæ +rigor in plena censura, in omnibus et contra omnes, etiamsi forefecerit +ipse Rex, qui nec eximitur a traditis legibus pro concupiscentia vel +contemptione quarumlibet personarum. + +Veruntamen Rex si peccauerit non occiditur ob reuerentiam, sed quòd sub +poena mortis, publicè inhibetur, ne quispiam in Regione ei verbo vel vllo +facto communicet, et quoniam sui loco alter rex constituitur, necesse est +illi breui vita degere vel perpetuò exulare. Constat post ipsam, et alia +Insula, multis bonis locuples, et hominibus populosa, de qua recolo +scribendum, quod nulla occasione comedunt tria genera carnium, gallinarum, +leporam, et aucarum, quas etsi nutriant in copijs, vtuntur duntaxat +pellibus aut plumis. + +Caeterarum vero bestiarum et animalium licitè vescuntur carnibus pro victu, +et lacte pro potu. Ibi quisque vir licitè potest coniungi cuique mulieri; +quantumcunque propinquet, exceptis progenitoribus, patre matre. Nam +cohabitatio, et commixtio omnium virorum ad singulas mulieres apparet ibi +communis, vnde mater natum paruulum suum, adicit pro sui placito cuicunque +viro, qui circa generationis tempus secumn dormierit, nec valet vllus +virorum esse certus de proprio generato, quem modum exlegem arbitror et +turpem. + +Sicut ergò praefatus sum, multa mira videntur per Regiones Indorum, mira +quidem nobis, sed illis assueta, quibus si nostra recitarentur assueta, +audirent pro miris. Nam et dum quibusdam dixi aucas viuas apud nos nasci in +arboribus, admirati sunt satis. In multis locis seminatur singulis annis +sementum de Cothon, quod nos dicimus lanam arboream, exurgunt ei modica +arbusta, vel potius arbustula de quibus talis lana habetur: est arbor +luniperus, de cuius ligno desiccato, si carbones viuos sub proprijs +cineribus tenueris diligenter opertos, igniti seruabuntur ad annum. + +Est et genus Nucum incredibilis magnitudinis ad quantitatem magni capitis: +et bestia vocata, oraflans, vel serfans, corpore in nostrorum aldtudine +caballorum, et collo in 20 longitudine cubitorum ad prospiciendum vltra +domos et muros, quorum posteriora apparent vt hinniculi siue lerni. + +Genus est etiam Camelionum ad formam hynnulorum, qui semper patulo tendunt +ore, vel nil manducantes. Viuunt de aere, quæ etiam ad suum libitum +videntur sibi variare colorem, exceptis (vt dicitur) albo vel rubeo. + +Maximi quóque serpentes, inuicem qualitate, et genere differentes +atque colore. + +Aliqui cristam in capite gerunt, quidam more hominum ad duos pedes erecti +incedunt, et nonnulli qui dicuntur Reguli, venenum per ora distillare non +cessant, nec non quam plures cocodrilli, de quibus aliquid in +praecedentibus retuli; [Sidenote: Apri ingentes. Leones albi. Louheraus.] +et apri in nostrorum magnitudine boum, spinosi ericij, in quantitate +porcorum, leones albi in altitudine dextrariorum. Louheraus, seu Edouches +per Indiam habentur, quod ferarum genus satis est maius nostris communibus +equis, geren in fronte tetri capitis tria longa cornua, ad formam pugionis, +ex vtraque parte scindentia, vt eis nonnunquam interficiant Elephantes. + +Aliæ quoque bestiæ crudeles vt vrsi cum capitibus ferè aprorum et habentes +pedes senos, qui finduntur latis vngulis bis acutis, et cum caudis leonum +siue pardorum. + +Et quod vix credetur, mures pro quantitate, 10, aut 12. nostrorum et +vespertiliones ad modum coruorum. + +Sed et aucæ in triplo maiores nostris, plumis indutæ rubris, nisi quod in +pectore et collo apparet nigredo. + +Et breuiter tam ibi quàm alibi, habentur pisces, bestiæ, volucres, aut +vermes diuersorum generum, aut specierum, de quibus hoc loco, vel inutilis, +vel prolixa posset fieri narratio, quod nec illis qui nunquam propria +exierunt, credibilis videretur. + + +The English Version. + +And he hathe in his lordschipes many grete marveyles. For in his contree, +is the see that men clepen the Gravely See, that is alle gravelle and sond, +with outen ony drope of watre: and it ebbethe and flowethe in grete wawes, +as other sees don: and it is never stille ne in pes, in no maner cesoun. +And no man may passe that see be navye, be no maner of craft: and therfore +may no man knowe, what lond is bezond that see. And alle be it that it have +no watre, zit men fynden there in and on the bankes, fulle gode fissche of +other maner of kynde and schappe, thanne men fynden in ony other see; and +thei ben of right goode tast, and delycious to mannes mete. + +And a 3 iourneys long fro that see, ben gret mountaynes; out of the whiche +gothe out a gret flood, that comethe out of paradys: and it is fulle of +precious stones, with outen ony drope of water: and it rennethe thorghe the +desert, on that o syde; so that it makethe the see gravely: and it berethe +in to that see, and there it endethe. And that flomme rennethe also, 3 +dayes in the woke, and bryngethe with him grete stones, and the roches also +therewith, and that gret plentee. And anon as thei ben entred in to the +gravely see, thei ben seyn no more; but lost for evere more. And in tho 3 +dayes, that that ryvere rennethe, no man dar entren in to it: but in the +other dayes, men dar entren wel y now. Also bezonde that flomme, more +upward to the desertes, is a gret pleyn alle gravelly betwene the +mountaynes: and in that playn, every day at the sonne risynge, begynnen to +growe smale trees; and thei growen til mydday, berynge frute: but no man +dar taken of that frute; for it is a thing of fayrye. And aftre mydday, +thei discrecen and entren azen in to the Erthe, so that at the goynge doun +of the Sonne, thei apperen no more; and so thei don every day; and that is +a gret marvaille. + +In that desert ben many wylde men, that ben hidouse to loken on: for thei +ben horned; and thei speken nought, but thei gronten, as pygges. And there +is also gret plentee of wylde Houndes. And there ben manye popegayes, that +thei clepen psitakes in hire langage: and thei speken of hire propre +nature, and salven men that gon thorghe the desertes, and speken to hem als +appertely, as thoughe it were a man. And thei that speken wel, han a large +tonge, and han 5 toos upon a Fote. And there ben also of other manere, that +han but 3 toos upon a fote; and thei speken not, or but litille: for thei +cone not but cryen. + +This Emperour Prestre John, whan he gothe in to battaylle, azenst ony other +Lord, he hathe no baneres born before him: but he hathe 3 crosses of gold, +fyn, grete and hye, fulle of precious stones: and every of the crosses ben +sett in a chariot, fulle richely arrayed. And for to kepen every cros, ben +ordeyned 10000 men at Armes, and mo than 100000 men on Fote, in maner as +men wolde kepe a Stondard in oure Contrees, whan that wee ben in lond of +werre. And this nombre of folk is with outen the pryncipalle Hoost, and +with outen Wenges ordeynd for the bataylle. And he hathe no werre, but +ridethe with a pryvy meynee, thanne he hathe bore before him but o cross of +tree, with outen peynte peynture, and with outen gold or silver or precious +stones; in remembrance, that Jesus suffred dethe upon a cros of tree. And +he hathe born before him also a plater of gold fulle of erthe, in tokene +that his noblesse and his myghte and his flessche schalle turnen to erthe. +And he hathe born before him also a vesselle of silver, fulle of noble +jewelles of gold fulle riche, and of precious stones, in tokene of his +lordschipe and of his noblesse and of his myght. He duellethe comounly in +the cytee of Suse; and there is his principalle palays, that is so riche +and so noble, that no man wil trowe it by estymacioun, but he had seen it. +And aboven the chief tour of the palays, ben 2 rounde pomeles of gold; and +in everyche of hem ben 2 carboncles grete and large, that schynen fulle +brighte upon the nyght. And the principalle zates of his palays ben of +precious ston, that men clepen sardoyne: and the bordure and the barres ben +of ivorye: and the wyndowes of the halles and chambres ben of cristalle: +and the tables where on men eten, somme ben of emeraudes, summe of amatyst +and summe of gold, fulle of precious stones; and the pileres, that beren up +the tables, ben of the same precious stones. And the degrees to gon up to +his throne, where he sittethe at the mete, on is of oniche, another is of +cristalle, and another of jaspre grene, another of amatyst, another of +sardyne, another of corneline, and the sevene that he settethe on his feet, +is of crisolyte. And alle theise degrees ben bordured with fyn gold, with +the tother precious stones, sett with grete perles oryent. And the sydes of +the sege of his throne ben of emeraudes, and bordured with gold fulle +nobely, and dubbed with other precious stones and grete perles. And alle +the pileres in his chambre, ben of fyne gold with precious stones, and with +many carboncles, that zeven gret lyght upon the nyght to alle peple. And +alle be it that the charboncle zeve lyght right y now, natheles at alle +tymes brennethe a vesselle of cristalle fulle of bawme, for to zeven gode +smelle, and odour to the emperour, and to voyden awey alle wykkede eyres +and corrupciouns. And the forme of his bedd is of fyne saphires bended with +gold, for to make him slepen wel, and to refreynen him from lecherye. For +he wille not lyze with his wyfes, but 4 sithes in the zeer, aftre the four +cesouns: and that is only for to engendre children. He hathe also a fulle +fayr palays and a noble, at the cytee of Nyse, where that he dwellethe, +whan him best lykethe; but the ayr is not so attempree, as it is at the +cytee of Suse. And zee schulle undirstonde, that in alle his contree, ne in +the contrees there alle aboute, men eten noghte but ones in the day, as men +don in the court of the grete Chane. And so thei eten every day in his +court, mo than 30000 persones, with outen goeres and comeres. But the 30000 +persones of his contree, ne of the contree of the grete Chane, ne spenden +noghte so moche gode, as don 12000 of oure contree. This Emperour Prestre +John hathe evere more 7 kynges with him, to serve him: and thei departen +hire service be certeyn monethes. And with theise kynges serven alle weys +72 dukes and 360 erles. And alle the dayes of the zeer, there eten in his +houshold and in his court, 12 erchebysshoppes and 20 bisshoppes. And the +patriark of Seynt Thomas is there, as is the Pope here. And the +erchebisshoppes and the bisshoppes and the abboties in that contree, ben +alle kynges. And everyche of theise grete lordes knowen wel y now the +attendance of hire servyse. This on is mayster of his houshold, another is +his chamberleyn, another servethe him of a dissche, another of the cuppe, +another is styward, another is mareschalle, another is prynce of his armes: +and thus is he fulle nobely and ryally served. And his lond durethe in +verry brede 4 moneths iorneyes, and in lengthe out of measure; that is to +seyn, alle the yles undir erthe, that wee supposen to ben undir us. + +Besyde the yle of Pentexoire, that is the lond of Prestre John, is a gret +yle long and brode, that men clepen Milsterak; and it is in the lordschipe +of Prestre John. In that yle is gret plentee of godes. There was dwellynge +somtyme a ryche man, and it is not longe sithen, and men clept him +Gatholonabes; and he was fulle of cauteles and of sotylle disceytes; and he +hadde a fulle fair castelle, and a strong, in a mountayne, so strong and so +noble, that no man cowde devise a fairere ne a strangere. And he had let +muren alle the mountayne aboute with a strong walle and a fair. And with +inne tho walles he had the fairest gardyn, that ony man myghte beholde; and +therein were trees berynge alle maner of frutes, that ony man cowde devyse; +and there in were also alle maner vertuous herbes of gode smelle, and alle +other herbes also, that beren faire floures. And he had also in that +gardyn, many faire welles; and beside tho welles, he had lete make faire +halles and faire chambres, depeynted alle with gold and azure. And there +weren in that place many a dyverse thinges and many dyverse stories: and of +bestes and of bryddes, that songen fulle delectabely; and meveden be craft, +that it semede that thei weren quyke. And he had also in his gardyn alle +maner of foules and of bestes that ony man myghte thenke on, for to have +pley or desport to beholde hem. And he had also in that place, the faireste +zonge Damyseles, that myghte ben founde undir the age of 15 zere, and the +faireste zonge striplynges, that men myghte gete of that same age: and alle +thei weren clothed in clothes of gold fully richely: and he seyde, that tho +weren aungeles. And he had also let make 3 welles, faire and noble, and +alle envyround with ston of jaspre, of cristalle, pyapred with gold, and +sett with precious stones and grete orient perles. And he had made a +conduyt undir erthe, so that the 3 weles, at his list, on scholde renne +milk, another wyn, and another hony. And that place he clept paradys. And +whan that ony gode knyghte, that was hardy and noble, cam to see this +rialtee, he wolde lede him into his paradys, and schewen him theise +wondirfulle thinges, to his desport, and the marveyllous and delicious song +of dyverse briddes, and the faire damyseles, and the faire welles of mylk, +wyn and hony, plentevous rennynge. And he wolde let make dyyerse +Instrumentes of Musick to sownen in an highe Tour, so merily that it was +joye for to here; and no man scholde see the craft thereof: and tho, he +seyde, weren aungeles of God, and that place was paradys, that God had +behighte to his frendes, seyenge, _Dabo vobis terram fluentem lacte et +mel_. And thanne wolde he maken hem to drynken of certeyn drynk, where of +anon thei scholden be dronken. And thanne wolde hem thinken gretter delyt, +than thei hadden before. And than wolde he seye to hem, that zif thei wolde +dyen for him and for his love, that aftir hire dethe, thei scholde come to +his paradys; and thei scholde ben of the age of the damyseles, and thei +scholde pleyen with hem, and zit ben maydenes. And aftir thai, zit scholde +he putten hem in a fayrere paradys, where that thei schold see God of +Nature visibely, in His majestee and in His blisse. And than wolde He +schewe hem His entent, and seye hem, that zif thei wolde go sle suche a +Lord, or suche a man, that was his enemye, or contrarious to his list, that +thei scholde not dred to done it, and for to be slayn therefore hemself: +for aftir hire dethe, he wold putten hem into another paradys, that was an +100 fold fairer than ony of the tothere; and there schode thei dwellen with +the most fairest damyselles that myghte be, and play with hem ever more. +And thus wenten many dyverse lusty bacheleres for to sle grete lords, in +dyverse countrees, that weren his enemyes, and maden hem self to ben slayn, +in hope to have that paradys. And thus often tyme, he was revenged of his +enemyes, be his sotylle disceytes and false cauteles. And whan the worthi +men of the contree hadden perceyved this sotylle falshod of this +Gatholonabes, thei assembled hem with force, and assayleden his castelle, +and slowen him, and destroyden alle the faire places, and alle the +nobletees of that paradys. The place of the welles and of the walles and of +many other thinges, ben zit apertly sene: but the richesse is voyded clene. +And it is not longe gon, sithe that place was destroyed. + + +Of the Develes Hede in the Valeye perilous; and of the Customs of folk in + dyverse Yles, that ben abouten, in the Lordschipe of Prestre John. + +[Sidenote: Chap. XXVIII.] Besyde that Yle of Mistorak, upon the left syde, +nyghe to the ryvere of Phison, is a marveylous thing. There is a vale +betwene the mountaynes, that durethe nyghe a 4 myle: and summen clepen it +the Vale Enchaunted; some clepen it the Vale of Develes, and some clepen it +the Vale Perilous. In that vale, heren men often tyme grete tempestes and +thondres and grete murmures and noyses, alle dayes and nyghtes: and gret +noyse, as it were sown of tabours and of nakeres and trompes, as thoughe it +were of a gret feste; This ale is alle fulle of develes, and hathe ben alle +weyes. And men seyn there, that it is on of the entrees of helle. In that +vale is gret plentee of gold and sylver: wherefore many mysbelevynge men, +and manye Christene men also, gon in often tyme, for to have of the +thresoure, that there is: but fewe comen azen; and namely of the mys +belevynge men, ne of the Cristene men nouther: for thei ben anon strangled +of develes. And in mydde place of that vale, undir a roche, is an hed and +the visage of a devyl bodyliche, fulle horrible and dreadfulle to see, and +it schewethe not but the hed, to the schuldres. But there is no man in the +world so hardy, Cristene man ne other, but that he wolde ben a drad for to +beholde it: and that it wolde semen him to dye for drede; so is it hidous +for to beholde. For he beholdethe even man so scharply, with dreadfulle +eyen, that ben evere more mevynge and sparklynge, as fuyr, and chaungethe +and sterethe so often in dyverse manere, with so horrible countenance, that +no man dar not neighen towardes him. And fro him comethe out smoke and +stynk and fuyr, and so moche abhomynacioun, that unethe no man may there +endure. But the gode Cristene men, that ben stable in the feythe, entren +welle withouten perile. For thei wil first schryven hem, and marken hem +with the tokene of the Holy Cros; so that the fendes ne han no power over +hem. But alle be it that thei ben with outen perile, zit natheles ne ben +thei not with outen drede, whan that thei seen the develes visibely and +bodyly alle aboute hem, that maken fully dyverse assautes and manaces in +eyr and in erthe, and agasten hem with strokes of thondre blastes and of +tempestes. And the most drede is, that God wole taken vengeance thanne, of +that men han mys don azen his wille. And zee schulle undirstonde, that whan +my fellows and I weren in that vale, wee weren in gret thought, whether +that wee dursten putten oure bodyes in aventure, to gon in or non, in the +proteccioun of God. And somme of oure fellowes accordeden to enter, and +somme noght. So there weren with us 2 worthi men, Frere Menoures, that +weren of Lombardye, that seyden, that zif ony man wolde entren, thei wolde +gon in with us. And when thei hadden seyd so, upon the gracyous trust of +God and of hem, wee leet synge masse, and made every man to ben schryven +and houseld: and thanne wee entreden 14 personnes; but at oure goynge out, +wee weren but 9. And so we wisten nevere, whether that oure fellowes weren +lost, or elle turned azen for drede: but wee ne saughe hem never after: and +tho weren 2 men of Grece and 3 of Spayne. And oure other fellows, that +wolden not gon in with us, thei wenten by another coste, to ben before us, +and so thei were. And thus wee passeden that perilous vale, and founden +thereinne gold and sylver and precious stones and riche jewelles gret +plentee, both here and there, as us semed: but whether that it was, as us +semede, I wot nere: for I touched none, because that the develes ben so +subtyle to make a thing to seme otherwise than it is, for to disceyve +mankynde; and therfore I towched none; and also because that I wolde not +ben put out of my devocioun: for I was more devout thanne, than evere I was +before or after, and alle for the drede of fendes, that I saughe in dyverse +figures; and also for the gret multytude of dede bodyes, that I saughe +there liggynge be the weye, be alle the vale, as thoughe there had ben a +bataylle betwene 2 kynges and the myghtyest of the contree, and that the +gretter partye had ben discomfyted and slayn. And I trowe, that unethe +scholde ony contree have so moche peple with in him, as lay slayn in that +vale, as us thoughte; the whiche was an hidouse sight to seen. And I +merveylled moche, that there weren so manye, and the bodyes all hole, with +outen rotynge. But I trowe, that fendes made hem semen to ben so hole, with +outen rotynge. But that myghte not ben to myn avys, that so manye scholde +have entred so newely, ne so manye newely slayn, with outen stynkynge and +rotynge. And manye of hem were in habite of Cristene men: but I trowe wel, +that it weren of suche, that wenten in for covetyse of the thresoure, that +was there, and hadden over moche feblenesse in feithe; so that hire hertes +ne myghte not enduren in the beleve for drede. And therfore weren wee the +more devout a gret del: and zit wee weren cast doun and beten down many +tymes to the hard erthe, be wyndes and thondres and tempestes: but evere +more God of His grace halp us: and so we passed that perilous vale, with +outen perile and with outen encombrance. Thanked be alle myghty Godd. + +Aftre this, bezonde the vale, is a gret yle, where the folk ben grete +geauntes of 28 fote longe or of 30 fote longe; and thei han no clothinge, +but of skynnes of bestes, that thei hangen upon hem: and thei eten no +breed, but alle raw flesche: and thei drynken mylk of bestes; for thei han +plentee of alle bestaylle. And thei have none houses, to lyen inne. And +thei eten more gladly mannes flessche, thanne ony other flesche. In to that +yle dar no man gladly entren: and zif thei seen a schipp and men there +inne, anon thei entren in to the see, for to take hem. + +And men seyden us, that in an yle bezonde that, weren geantes of grettere +stature: summe of 45 fote, or 50 fote long, and as some men seyn, summe of +50 cubytes long: but I saghe none of tho; for I hadde no lust to go to tho +parties, because that no man comethe nouther in to that yle ne in to the +other, but zif he be devoured anon. And among tho geauntes ben scheep, als +grete as oxen here; and thei beren gret wolle and roughe. Of the scheep I +have seyn many tymes. And men han seyn many tymes tho geauntes taken men in +the see out of hire schippes, and broughte hem to lond, 2 in on hond and 2 +in another, etynge hem goynge, alle rawe and alle quyk. + +Another yle is there toward the northe, in the see occean, where that ben +fulle cruele and ful evele wommen of nature; and thei han precious stones +in hire eyen: and thei ben of that kynde, that zif thei beholden ony man +with wratthe, thei slen him anon with the beholdynge, as dothe the +basilisk. + +Another yle is there, fulle fair and gode and gret, and fulle of peple, +where the custom is suche, that the firste nyght that thei ben maryed, thei +maken another man to lye be hire wifes, for to have hire maydenhode: and +therfore thei taken gret huyre and gret thank. And ther ben certeyn men in +every town, that serven of non other thing; and thei clepen hem Cadeberiz, +that is to seyne, the foles of Wanhope. For thei of the contree holden it +so gret a thing and so perilous, for to haven the maydenhode of a woman, +that hem semethe that thei that haven first the maydenhode, puttethe him in +aventure of his lif. And zif the husbonde fynde his wif mayden, that other +next nyghte, aftre that she scholde have ben leyn by of the man, that is +assigned therefore, perauntes for dronkenesse or for some other cause, the +husbonde schalle pleyne upon him, that he hathe not don his deveer, in +suche cruelle wise, as thoughe he wolde have him slayn therfore. But after +the firste nyght, that they ben leyn by, thei kepen hem so streytely, that +thei ben not so hardy to speke with no man. And I asked hem the cause, whi +that thei helden suche custom: and thei seyden me, that of old tyme, men +hadden ben dede for deflourynge of maydenes, that hadden serpentes in hire +bodyes, that stongen men upon hire zerdes, that thei dyeden anon: and +therfore thei helden that custom, to make other men, ordeyn'd therefore, to +lye be hire wyfes, for drede of dethe, and to assaye the passage be +another, rather than for to putte hem in that aventure. + +Aftre that, is another yle, where that wommen maken gret sorwe, whan hire +children ben y born: and whan thei dyen, thei maken gret feste and gret +joye and revelle, and thanne thei casten hem into a gret fuyr brennynge. +And tho that loven wel hire husbondes, zif hire husbondes ben dede, thei +casten hem also in the fuyr, with hire children, and brennen hem. And thei +seyn, that the fuyr schalle clensen hem of alle filthes and of alle vices, +and thei schulle gon pured and clene in to another world, to hire +husbondes, and thei schulle leden hire children with hem. And the cause whi +that they wepen, when hire children ben born, is this, for whan thei comen +in to this world, thei comen to labour, sorwe and hevynesse: and whi thei +maken ioye and gladnesse at hire dyenge, is be cause that, as thei seyn, +thanne thei gon to Paradys, where the ryveres rennen mylk and hony, where +that men seen hem in ioye and in habundance of godes, with outen sorwe and +labour. In that yle men maken hire kyng evere more be eleccioun: and thei +ne chese him nought for no noblesse ne for no ricchesse, but suche an on as +is of gode maneres and of gode condiciouns, and therewith alle rightfulle; +and also that he be of gret age, and that he have no children. In that yle +men ben fulle rightfulle, and thei don rightfulle iuggementes in every +cause, bothe of riche and pore, smale and grete, aftre the quantytee of the +trespas, that is mys don. And the kyng may nought deme no man to dethe, +with outen assent of his barouns and other wyse men of conseille, and that +alle the court accorde therto. And zif the kyng him self do ony homycydie +or ony cryme, as to sle a man, or ony suche cas, he schalle dye therefore; +but he schalle not be slayn, as another man, but men schulle defende in +peyne of dethe, that no man be so hardy to make him companye, ne to speke +with hym, ne that no man zeve him ne selle him ne serve him nouther of mete +ne drynk: and so schalle he dye in myschef. Thei spare no man that hath +trespaced, nouther for love ne for favour ne for ricchesse ne for noblesse, +but that he schalle have aftre that he hathe don. + +Bezonde that yle, is another yle, where is gret multytude of folk; and thei +wole not for nothing eten flesche of hares, ne of hennes, ne of gees: and +zit thei bryngen forthe y now, for to seen hem and to beholden hem only. +But thei eten Flesche of alle other bestes, and drynken mylk. In that +contre, thei taken hire doughtres and hire sustres to here wyfes, and hire +other kynneswomen. And zif there ben 10 or 12 men or mo dwellynge in an +hows, the wif of eyeryche of hem schalle ben comoun to hem alle, that +duellen in that hows; so that every man may liggen with whom he wole of +hem, on o nyght. And zif sche have ony child, sche may zeve it to what man +sche list, that hathe companyed with hire; so that no man knoweth there, +whether the child be his or anotheres. And zif ony man seye to hem, that +thei norrischen other mennes children, thei answeren, that so don other men +hires. In that contre and be all Ynde, ben gret plentee of cokodrilles, +that is the maner of a longe serpent, as I haye seyd before. And in the +nyght, thei dwellen in the watir, and on the day, upon the lond, in roches +and caves. And thei ete no mete in all the wynter: but thei lyzn as in a +drem, as don the serpentes. Theise serpentes slen men, and thei eten hem +wepynge: and whan thei eten, thei meven the over Jowe, and noughte the +nether Jowe; and thei have no Tonge. In that contree, and in many other +bezonde that, and also in manye on this half, men putten in werke the sede +of cotoun: and thei sowen it every zeer, and than growthe it in smale +trees, that beren cotoun. And so don men every zeer; so that there is +plentee of cotoun, at alle tymes. Item, in this yle and in many other, +there is a manner of wode, hard and strong: who so coverethe the coles of +that wode undir the assches there offe, the coles wil duellen and abyden +alle quyk, a zere or more. And that tre hathe many leves, as the gynypre +hathe. And there ben also many trees, that of nature thei wole never brenne +ne rote in no manere. And there ben note trees, that beren notes, als grete +as a mannes hed. There also ben many bestes, that ben clept orafles. +[Footnote: Giraffes.] In Arabye, thei ben clept gerfauntz; that is a best +pomelee or apotted; that is but a litylle more highe, than is a stede; but +he hathe the necke a 20 cubytes long: and his croup and his tayl is as of +an hert: and he may loken over a gret highe Hous. And there ben also in +that contree manye camles, that is a lytille best as a goot, that is wylde +and he lyvethe be the eyr, and etethe nought ne drynkethe nought at no +tyme. And he chaungethe his colour often tyme: for men seen him often +scithes, now in o colour and now in another colour: and he may chaunge him +in to alle maner of coloures that him list, saf only in to red and white. +There ben also in that contree passynge grete serpentes, sume of 120 Fote +long, and thei ben of dyverse coloures, as rayed, rede, grene and zalowe, +blewe and blake, and alle spekelede. And there ben othere, that han crestes +upon hire hedes: and thei gon upon hire feet upright: and thei ben wel a 4 +fadme gret or more: and thei duellen alle weye in roches or in mountaynes: +and thei han alle wey the throte open, of whens thei droppen venym alle +weys. And there ben also wylde swyn of many coloures, als gret as ben oxen +in oure contree, and thei ben alle spotted, as ben zonge fownes. And there +ben also urchounes, als gret as wylde swyn here. Wee clepen hem poriz de +spyne. And ther ben lyouns alle whyte gret and myghty. And ther ben also of +other bestes, als grete and more gretter than is a destrere: and men clepen +hem loerancz: and sum men clepen hem odenthos: and thei han a blak hed and +3 longe hornes trenchant in the front, scharpe as a sword; and the body is +sclender. And he is a fulle felonous best: and he chacethe and sleethe the +olifaunt. There ben also manye other bestes, fullye wykked and cruelle, +that ben not mocheles more than a bere; and thei han the hed lyche a bore; +and thei han 6 feet: and on every foote 2 large clawes trenchant: and the +body is lyche a bere, and the tayl as a lyoun. And there ben also myse, als +gret as houndes; and zalowe myse, als grete as ravenes. And ther ben gees +alle rede, thre sithes more gret than oure here: and thei han the hed, the +necke and the brest alle black. And many other dyverse bestes ben in tho +contrees, and elle where there abouten: and manye dyverse briddes also; of +the whiche, it were to longe for to telle zou: and therefore I passe over +at this tyme. + + +CAPVT. 47. + +De Bracmannorum et aliorum Insulis. + +Bracmannorum Insula quasi ad medium Imperij consistit Praesbyteri Ioannis. +Hic licet Christiani non sunt, viuunt tamen naturali optimo more. Rudes +enim et incomparati, simplices, et inscij omnis artis apparent. Non cupidi, +superbi, inuidi, iracundi, gulosi, aut luxuriosi nec iurant, fraudant, aut +mentiuntur. Laborant corpora, sed intendunt animo implere quo ad valent +naturale mandatum, hoc facias alijs quod tibi vis fieri: credentes et +adorantes omnium creatorum Deum, et sperantes ab ipso simpliciter +Paradisum. + +Sobrij quoque sunt, quapropter et longo tempore viuunt: et si quis ab eorum +moribus degenerat, proscribitur perpetuò sine mora, omnibus nulla posita +differentia personarum, vnde et in iusto Dei iudicio, quòd naturalem +exercere iustitiam contendunt, Elementa eis naturaliter obsequuntur, et +rarò eos tangit tempestas, aut fames, pestilentia aut gladius. + +[Sidenote: Flumen Chene.] Magna riparia dicta Chene currit per Insulam, +ministrans piscium et aquarum copiam: Istos olim Alexander rex Grecorum +debellare cupiens, misit eis literas comminationis, cui inter caetera +notabilia remandauerunt, nihil se habere curiosi, quod Rex tantus deberet +concupiscere, nihilque ita se timere perdituros sicut pacem bonam, quam +hactenus habuerunt inconcussam: sicque diuino nutu est actum vt Rex +truculentus ad alia se verteret, atque in breui postmodùm caderet, quia +dissipat Dominus eos, qui bella volunt, et istis manet pax multa +diligentibus eam. + +[Sidenote: Pytan.] Pytan Insula breuis continet paucos et breues +habitatores, Pygmaeis modico longiores, qui decoris vultibus nullo vnquam +cibo vescentes, specialis pomi quod secum portant sustentantur odore, quo +si carerent ad parum, color in vultu marcesceret, et die tertia vita +periret. + +Discretio et rationabilitas ijs adest modica, nec enim habent laborare nisi +pro vestitu, quem sibi circa arbusta colligunt: Et conficit vnusquisque pro +12 annis vitæ suæ. + +Vltra hanc Insulam siluestres, et fortes habentur homines, sed bestiales, +vestiti per totum corpus proprijs capillis et pilis, exceptis palmis, et +faciebus, qui videntur penitus gubernatione et politia carere: venantur +carnes per siluas, et discurrunt piscantes in aquis, omnia cruda vorantes. + +[Sidenote: Fluius Briemer.] Huius ad terræ metas manat fluuius Briemer +latitudinis duarum leucarum, et semis, quem nos transire nequiuimus, nec +ausi fuimus. Quoniam illo transmisso instant deserta 15, aut plurium +diætatum inhabitata nunc temporis (prout audieramus) diuersis et nobis +ignotis generibus bestiarum, serpentum, draconum, gryphium, aspidum, +dypsarum, et colubrorum in multitudine tanta, vt centum millia armatorum +simul pertingere vsquè ad arbores, quæ ibi dicuntur solis et lunæ, vix +possent. Attamen suo tempore Alexander magnus scribitur pertigisse, et +quaedam ab arboribus fictitia succepisse responsa. + +[Sidenote: Balsamum indicum.] Circa has arbores excolitur Balsamum, cuius +liquoris comparatio nusquam scitur contineri sub coelo. Nam ibidem homines, +de istarum arborum fructibus et Balsamo vtentes dicuntur illorum virtute +quadringentis aut pluribus annis viuere. + +Peruenit autem et Dux Danus Ogerus, ac manducauit de illis, vnde et +nonnulli præ sensus stoliditate vel fidei leuitate putant ipsum adhuc alibi +viuere in terris. Ego autem quia tantum pro dilatanda Christianitate +laborauit arbitror magis, eum regnare cum Christo in coelis. + +[Sidenote: Taprobana Insula, et eius descriptio.] Versus Orientales partes +Indorum consistit magna regio Taprobane exuberans optimis terrenorum +bonorum, in quam nauigio intrauimus in octo vel circa diaetis per aquam +satis tenuem, haud profundam. Ibi, sicut et in alijs multis Insulis, rex +non nascitur sed eligitur per partes terræ: et est haec vna de quindecim +nominatis Regionibus conquisitionis Ogeri. Ista, cum modicum declinet à +circulo terræ sub Æquatore, patitur in anno duas æstates, et duas hyemes, +si tamen hyems aliqua dici debeat, et non magis æstas, quia nullus hic dies +anni caret fructu, flore, germine. + +Habitatores sunt discreti, et honesti, vnde et mercatores de remotis +partibus libenter cum ijs communicant: et sparsim per regionem habitant +plurimi diuites Christiani. + +[Sidenote: Orilla. Argita.] Hijs iunguntur duæ insulæ (quas nos vocamus, +Orilla, et Argita), quanquam illa lingua aliter nominentur. In quarum prima +sunt multæ mineriæ auri, in secunda argenti, et propter quandam +crassitudinem aeris continuam, perpauca apparent sydera, praeter vnum quod +dicunt Canopum, quod æstimo planetam Veneris. [Sidenote: Hunc locum notat +Gerardus Mercator in sua charta generali.] Et quod mirum est valdè de omni +lunatione ijs apparet nisi 2. quarta. Cuius rei probabilis ratio effugit +etiam Astronomos valdè peritos. Atque per has Insulas quoddam rubrum mare à +mari Oceano segregatur. + +Itaque in Orilla in locis multis effoditur, colligitur, et conflatur +optimum auri metallum, per viros, mulieres, et paruulos in hoc instructos, +sed et in nonnullis ibi montibus monstrantur congregationes bestiolarum in +quantitate nostrorum catulorum, in formicarum forma ac natura totali: qui +pro suis viribus effodiunt, purificant, et colligunt cum intenta +occupatione auri minutias, eas reponentes, et repositas retrahentes de +cauernis et specubus in cauernas et specus. Et in conseruando sum +diligentes et acres, vt nemo audeat de facili propinquare, nisi quod +interdum ab illis pausantibus; seu ab æstu se occultantibus, aliqui non +sine periculo in dromedarijs et veredarijs rapiunt, vel furantur. + +Solet etiam ab eis obtineri, quòd excogitato ingenio super equam quæ nuper +foetum ediderit, imponentes homines duas de ligno cistulas, seu cophinos +nouos, vacuos, et apertos à lateribus dependentes propè terram: hanc +famelicam dimittunt vt se pascat ad herbas in montem: Quam formicæ videntes +solam salientes et iocantes, colludunt ad eam et ad eius confines pro +nouitate: et quoniam eis est naturale, vt circa se omne vacuum implere +conentur comportant certatim aurum suum in vasculis suis mundis. Cumque +homines a remotis tempus obseruauerint, emittunt pellum equæ vt videat +matrem, cuius aspectu iam diu stetit priuatus, ad cuius hinnitum protinus +equa reuertitur onusta de auro. Hijs ergò et similibus modis homines aurum +diripiunt à formicis. + + +CAPVT. 48. + +Aliquid de loco Paradisi terrestris per auditum. + +A Finibus Imperij Indiæ recta linea in orientem nihil est habitatum vel +habitabile, propter rupium, et montium altitudinem, et asperitatem, et +propter aeris inter Alpes diuersitatem: nam in multis locis, licet +quandoque aer sit serenus, nunc fit spissus nunc fumosus, vel venenosus, et +frequenter die medio tenebrosus. Durantque aut potius aggrauescunt +huiusmodi difficultates, vsque ad illum amænissimum Paradisi locum, quem +protoplausti per inobedientiam sibi et posteris perdidisse noscuntur, quod +spacium si metiri posset, est multarum vtique diætarum. Quia iam non +vlterius processi, nec procedere quiui, pauca duntaxat de illo loco referam +verisimilia, quæ didici per auditum. + +[Sidenote: Descriptio Paradisi.] Paradisus terrestris dicitur locus +spaciosus ad amplitudinem quasi quinque Insularum nostrarum, Angliæ, +Normanniæ, Hiberniæ, Scotiæ, et Noruegiæ, aut forsan satis plurium. Cuius +situs est pertingens in altitudine ad aeris supremam superficiem, eò quod +illic terra vel terræ orbis sit multum spissior quàm alibi per modum +excentricum à vero centro mundi, nec valet hoc deinde ab aliquo experto +refelli, scriptura veritatis clamante, quòd ibi sit fons irrigans vniuersam +superficiem terrae: aquae enim est natura semper fluere ad Ima. + +Exeunt autem ab illo fonte versus nostri partes hemispherij, hoc est nobis +de illo loco in occidentem quatuor flumina, Pyson, Gyon, Tygris, et +Euphrates, ab ista dimidia parte terrae circa Æquatoris circulum terrae +influentes, quapropter et merito credendum videtur, exire de eodem fonte et +alia quatuor flumina irrigantia terram oppositam, quae est circa alteram +dimidiam partem circuli Æquatoris, quamuis nos eorum fluminum loca, +virtutes, et nomina ignoramus, quòd homines habitant ab alia parte +Æquinoctij. + +[Sidenote: Gentes ad austrum Aequatoris.] Hoc tamen volo sciri pro vero et +audiui, illic terræ faciem inhabitatam in maxima multitudine ciuitatum, +vrbium, et regionum, quoniam et eorum institores Indiam frequentant, et +nunciant sibi inuicem gentes et principes per literas, ac alijs modis +destinare sunt visi. + +[Sidenote: Ganges fluuius.] Vnus nostrorum fluuiorum Pyson currit per +Indiam, et per eius deserta quandoque sub terra, sed saepiùs supra, qui et +Ganges illic appellatus est, ab illo vltimo Paganitatis rege, quem Dux +Ogerus deuictum cùm baptizari renueret in ipso flumine proiectum submersit. + +Ad littus huius reperiuntur multi lapides praeciositatis immensæ et metalli +grani carissimi, nec non et auri mineriæ, multumque descendit in eo natans +lignum Aloes ex Paradiso, quod rebus miræ virtutis inserit Salomon in +Canticis. + +Hinc secundus fluuius Gyon, currit per Aethiopiam, vnde dum venit in +Ægyptum, accipit nomen Nilus. Tertius Tygris veniens per Assyriam influit +maiorem Armeniam et Persiam: tandemque fluuij singuli per loca singula se +iactant in mare per quod defluunt vsque ad Nador, id est, ad oppositum +diametrum paradisi: Ideoque merito æstimantur omnes vniuerso orbe aquæ +dulces originem capere, à supradicto paradisi fonte, quamuis secundum +distantiam maiorem vel minorem, et secundum naturas rerum per quas meant +diuersos habere inueniuntur sapores, atque virtutes. + +Porrò ipsum Paradisi locum audiui à tribus plagis, orientali, meridionali, +et septentrionali, inaccessibilem tam hominibus quàm bestijs, eo quòd +apparet ripis perpendiculariter abscissa, tanquam inestimabilis +altitudinis. Et ab occidente id est nostra parte tanquam super omnium +humanorum intuitum rogus ardens, qui in scripturis rumphea flammea +appellator, vt nulli creaturæ terrenæ ascensus in eum credatur nisi +quibusdam volatilibus, prout decreuit iusti iudicij Deus. + +Ambulantibus enim illuc siue repentibus hominibus obstarent tenebræ imo +rupes, aer infestus, bestiæ, serpentes, frigus, et camua. Nauigare autem +contra ictum fluminis nitentes impediret intrinsecus recursus, ac +impetuosus et quandoque subterraneus aquæ cursus descendentis cum +vehementia ab euectissimo, vt dictum est, loco, qui suo quoque strepitu, +per petras atque strictos aliosque diuersos cadens gurgites, efficeret +surdos, et aeris mutatio caecos, vnde et multi tam nobiles quàm ignobiles, +fatua sese audacia in isto ponentes periculo perierunt, alijs excoecatis, +alijs absurdatis, et nonnullis in ipso accessu subitanea morte peremptis. +Ex quo nimirum credi habetur isto Deum displicere conatum. + +Quapropter et ego ex illo loco statui animum ad repatriandum, quatenus Deo +propitio, Anglia quæ me produxit seculo viuentem, usciperet morientem. + + +Of the Godenesse of the folk of the Yle of Bragman. Of Kyng Alisandre: and + wherfore the Emperour of Ynde is clept Prestre John. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXIX.] And bezonde that yle, is another yle, gret and gode, +and, plentyfous, where that ben gode folk and trewe, and of gode lyvynge, +aftre hire beleve, and of gode feythe. And alle be it that thei ben not +cristned, ne have no perfyt lawe, zit natheles of kyndely lawe, thei ben +fulle of alle vertue, and thei eschewen alle vices and alle malices and +alle synnes. For thei ben not proude ne coveytous ne envyous ne wrathefulle +ne glotouns ne leccherous; ne thei don to no man other wise than thei wolde +that other men diden to hem: and in this poynt, thei fullefillen the 10 +commandementes of God: and thei zive no charge of aveer ne of ricchesse: +and thei lye not, ne thei swere not, for non occasioun; but thei seyn +symply, ze and nay. For thei seyn, He that swerethe, wil disceyve his +neyghbore: and therfore alle that thei don, thei don it with outen othe. +And men clepen that yle, the Yle of Bragman: and somme men clepen it the +Lond of Feythe. And thorgh that lond runnethe a gret ryvere, that is clept +Thebe. And in generalle, alle the men of tho yles and of alle the marches +there abouten, ben more trewe than in ony othere contrees there abouten, +and more righte fulle than othere, in alle thinges. In that yle is no +thief, ne mordrere, ne comoun woman, ne pore beggere, ne nevere was man +slayn in that contree. And thei ben so chast, and leden so gode lif, as tho +thei weren religious men: and thei fasten alle dayes. And because thei ben +so trewe and so rightfulle and so fulle of alle gode condiciouns, thei +weren nevere greved with tempestes ne with thondre ne with leyt ne with +hayl ne with pestylence ne with werre ne with hungre ne with non other +tribulaccioun, as wee ben many tymes amonges us, for our synnes. Wherfore +it semethe wel, that God lovethe hem and is plesed with hire creance, for +hire gode dedes. Thei beleven wel in God, that made alle thinges; and him +thei worschipen. And thei preysen non erthely ricchesse; and so thei ben +alle right fulle. And thei lyven fulle ordynatly, and so sobrely in met and +drynk, that thei lyven right longe. And the most part of hem dyen with +outen syknesse, whan nature faylethe hem for elde. And it befelle in Kyng +Alisandres tyme, that he purposed him to conquere that yle, and to maken +hem to holden of him. And whan thei of the contree herden it, thei senten +messangeres to him with lettres, that seyden thus: What may ben y now to +that man, to whom alle the world is insuffisant: thou schalt fynde no thing +in us, that may cause the to warren azenst us: for wee have no ricchesse, +ne none wee coveyten: and alle the godes of our contree ben in comoun. Oure +mete, that we susteyne with alle oure bodyes, is our richesse: and in stede +of tresoure of gold and sylver, wee maken oure tresoure of accord and pees, +and for to love every man other. And for to apparaylle with oure bodyes, +wee usen a sely litylle clout, for to wrappen in oure carcynes. Oure wyfes +ne ben not arrayed for to make no man plesance, but only connable array, +for to eschewe folye. Whan men peynen hem to arraye the body, for to make +it semen fayrere than God made it, thei don gret synne. For man scholde not +devise no aske grettre beautee, than God hathe ordeyned man to ben at his +birthe. The erthe mynystrethe to us 2 thynges; our liflode, that comethe of +the erthe that wee lyve by, and oure sepulture aftre oure dethe. Wee have +ben in perpetuelle pees tille now, that thou come to disherite us; and also +wee have a kyng, nought for to do justice to every man, for he schalle +fynde no forfete amonge us; but for to kepe noblesse, and for to schewe +that wee ben obeyssant, wee have a kyng. For justice ne hathe not among us +no place: for wee don no man otherwise than wee desiren that man don to us; +so that rightwisnesse ne vengeance han nought to don amonges us; so that no +thing thou may take fro us, but oure god pes, that alle weys hath dured +amonge us. And whan Kyng Alisandre had rad theise lettres, he thoughte that +he scholde do gret synne, for to trouble hem: and thanne he sente hem +surteez, that thei scholde not ben aferd of him, and that thei scholde +kepen hire gode maneres and hire gode pees, as thei hadden used before of +custom; and so he let hem allone. + +Another yle there is, that men clepen Oxidrate; and another yle, that men +clepen Gynosophe, where there is also gode folk, and fulle of gode feythe: +and thei holden for the most partye the gode condiciouns and customs and +gode maneres, as men of the contree above seyd: but thei gon alle naked. In +to that yle entred Kyng Alisandre, to see the manere. And when he saughe +hire gret feythe and hire trouthe, that was amonges hem, he seyde that he +wolde not greven hem: and bad hem aske of him, what that they wolde have of +hym, ricchesse or ony thing elles; and thei scholde have it with gode +wille. And thei answerden, that he was riche y now, that hadde mete and +drynke to susteyne the body with. For the ricchesse of this world, that is +transitorie, is not worthe: but zif it were in his power to make hem +immortalle, there of wolde thei preyen him, and thanken him. And Alisandre +answerde hem, that it was not in his powere to don it, because he was +mortelle, as thei were. And thanne thei asked him, whi he was so proud and +so fierce and so besy, for to putten alle the world undre his subieccioun, +righte as thou were a god; and hast no terme of this lif, neither day ne +hour; and wylnest to have alle the world at thi commandement, that schalle +leve the with outen fayle, or thou leve it. And righte as it hathe ben to +other men before the, right so it schalle ben to othere aftre the: and from +hens schal thou bere no thyng; but as thou were born naked, righte so alle +naked schalle thi body ben turned in to erthe, that thou were made of. +Wherfore thou scholdest thenke and impresse it in thi mynde, that nothing +is immortalle, but only God, that made alle thing. Be the whiche answere, +Alisandre was gretly astoneyed and abayst; and alle confuse departe from +hem. And alle be it that theyse folk han not the articles of oure feythe, +as wee han, natheles for hire gode feythe naturelle, and for hire gode +entent, I trowe fulle, that God lovethe hem, and that God take hire servyse +to gree, right as he did of Job, that was a Paynem, and held him for his +trewe servaunt. And therfore alle be it that there ben many dyverse lawes +in the world, zit I trowe, that God lovethe alweys hem that loven him, and +serven him mekely in trouthe; and namely, hem that dispysen the veyn glorie +of this world; as this folk don, and as Job did also: and therfore seyde +oure Lorde, be the mouthe of Ozee the prophete, _Ponam eis multiplices +leges meas_. And also in another place, _Qui totum orbem subdit suis +legibus_. And also our Lord seythe in the Gospelle, _Alias oves habeo, que +non sunt ex hoc ovili_; that is to seyne, that he hadde othere servauntes, +than tho that ben undre Cristene lawe. And to that acordethe the avisioun, +that Seynt Petir saughe at Jaffe, how the aungel cam from Hevene, and +broughte before him diverse bestes, as serpentes and other crepynge bestes +of the erthe, and of other also gret plentee, and bad him take and ete. And +Seynt Petir answerde; I ete never, quoth he, of unclene bestes. And thanne +seyde the aungelle, _Non dices immunda, que Deus mundavit_. And that was in +tokene, that no man scholde have in despite non erthely man, for here +diverse lawes: for wee knowe not whom God lovethe, ne whom God hatethe. And +for that ensample, whan men seyn _De profundis_, thei seyn it in comoun and +in generalle, with the Cristene, _pro animabus omnium defunctorum, pro +quibus sit orandum_. And therfore seye I of this folk, that ben so trewe +and so feythefulle, that God lovethe hem. For he hathe amonges hem many of +the prophetes, and alle weye hathe had. And in tho yles, thei prophecyed +the incarnacioun of oure Lord Jesu Crist, how he scholde ben born of a +mayden; 3000 zeer or more or oure Lord was born of the Virgyne Marie. And +thei beleeven wel in the incarnacioun, and that fulle perfitely: but thei +knowe not the manere, how be suffred his passioun and dethe for us. + +And bezonde theise yles, there is another yle, that is clept Pytan. The +folk of that contree ne tyle not, ne laboure not the erthe: for thei eten +no manere thing: and thei ben of gode colour, and of faire schap, aftre +hire gretnesse: but the smalle ben as dwerghes: but not so litylle, as ben +the pigmeyes. Theise men lyven be the smelle of wylde apples, and whan thei +gon ony fer weye, thei beren the apples with hem. For zif the hadde lost +the savour of the apples, thei scholde dyen anon. Thei ne ben not fulle +resonable: but thei ben symple and bestyalle. + +Aftre that, is another yle, where the folk ben alle skynned, roughe heer, +as a rough best, saf only the face and the pawme of the hond. Theise folk +gon als wel undir the watir of the see, as thei don above the lond, alle +drye. And thei eten bothe flessche and fissche alle raughe. In this yle is +a great ryvere, that is wel a 2 myle and an half of brede, that is clept +Beumare. And fro that rivere a 15 journeyes in lengthe, goynge be the +desertes of the tother syde of the ryvere, (whoso myght gon it, for I was +not there: but it was told us of hem of the contree, that with inne tho +desertes) weren the trees of the sonne, and of the mone, that spaken to +Kyng Alisandre, and warned him of his dethe. And men seyn, that the folk +that kepen tho trees, and eten of the frute and of the bawme that growethe +there, lyven wel 400 zeere or 500 zere, be vertue of the frut and of the +bawme. For men seyn, that bawme growethe there in gret plentee, and no +where elles, saf only at Babyloyne, as I have told zou before. Wee wolde +han gon toward the trees fulle gladly, zif wee had myght: but I trowe, that +100000 men of armes myghte not passen the desertes safly, for the gret +multytude of wylde bestes, and of grete dragouns, and of grete multytude +serpentes, that there ben, that slen and devouren alle that comen aneyntes +hem. In that contre ben manye white olifantes with outen nombre, and of +unycornes, and of lyouns of many maneres, and many of suche bestes, that I +have told before, and of many other hydouse bestes with outen nombre. + +Many other yles there ben in the lond of Prestre John, and many grete +marveyles, that weren to long to tellen alle, bothe of his ricchesse and of +his noblesse, and of the gret plentee also of precious stones, that he +hathe. I trow that zee knowe wel y now, and have herd seye, wherefore the +Emperour is clept Prestre John. But nathales for hem that knowen not, I +schalle seye zou the cause. It was somtyme an Emperour there, that was a +worthi and a fulle noble prynce, that hadde Cristene knyghtes in his +companye, as he hathe that is how. So it befelle, that he hadde gret list +for to see the service in the chirche, among Cristen men. And than dured +Cristendom bezonde the zee, alle Turkye, Surrye, Tartarie, Jerusalem, +Palestyne, Arabye, Halappee, and alle the lond of Egypte. So it befelle, +that this emperour cam, with a Cristene knyght with him, into a chirche in +Egypt: and it was the Saterday in Wyttson woke. And the bishop made ordres. +And he beheld and listend the servyse fulle tentyfly: and he askede the +Cristene knight, what men of degree thei scholden ben prestes. And than the +emperour seyde, that he wolde no longer ben clept kyng ne emperour, but +preest; and that he wolde have the name of the first preest, that went out +of the chirche: and his name was John. And so evere more sithens, he is +cleped Prestre John. + +In his lond ben manye Cristene men of gode feythe and of gode lawe; and +namely of hem of the same contree; and han comounly hire prestes, that +syngen the messe, and maken the sacrement of the awtier of bred, right as +the Grekes don: but thei seyn not so many thinges as the messe, as men don +here. For thei seye not but only that, that the apostles seyden, as oure +Lord taughte hem: righte as seynt Peter and seynt Thomas and the other +apostles songen the messe, seyenge the Pater-noster, and the wordes of the +sacrement. But wee have many mo addiciouns, that dyverse popes han made, +that thei ne knowe not offe; + + +Of the Hilles of Gold, that Pissemyres kepen: and of the 4 Flodes, that + comen fro Paradys terrestre. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXX.] Toward the est partye of Prestre Johnes lond, is an +yle gode an gret, that men clepen Taprobane, that is fulle noble and fulle +fructuous: and the kyng thereof is fulle ryche, and is undre the obeyssance +of Prestre John. And alle weys there thei make hire king be eleccyoun. In +that ile ben 2 someres and 2 wyntres; and men harvesten the corn twyes a +zeer. And in alle the cesouns of the zeer ben the gardynes florisht. There +dwellen gode folke and resonable, and manye Cristene men amonges hem, that +ben so riche, that thei wyte not what to done with hire godes. Of olde +tyme, whan men passed from the lond of Prestre John unto that yle, men +maden ordynance for to passe by schippe, 23 dayes or more: but now men +passen by schippe in 7 dayes. And men may see the botme of the see in many +places: for it is not fulle depe. + +Besyde that yle, toward the est, ben 2 other yles: and men clepen that on +Orille, and that other Argyte; of the whiche alle the lond is myne of gold +and sylver. And tho yles ben right where that the Rede See departethe fro +the see occean. And in tho yles men seen ther no sterres so clerly as in +other places: for there apperen no sterres, but only o clere sterre, that +men clepen Canapos. And there is not the mone seyn in alle the lunacioun, +saf only the seconde quarteroun. In the yle also of this Taprobane ben gret +hilles of gold, that Pissemyres kepen fulle diligently. And thei fynen the +pured gold, and casten away the unpured. And theise Pissemyres ben gret as +houndes: so that no man dar come to tho hilles: for the Pissemyres wolde +assaylen hem and devouren hem anon; so that no man may gete of that gold, +but be gret sleighte. And therfore whan it is gret hete, the Pissemyres +resten hem in the erthe, from pryme of the day in to noon: and than the +folk of the con tree taken camayles, dromedaries and hors and other bestes +and gon thidre, and chargen hem in alle haste that thei may. And aftre that +thei fleen away, in alle haste that the bestes may go, or the Pissemyres +comen out of the erthe. And in other tymes, whan it is not so hote, and +that he Pissemyres ne resten hem not in the erthe, than thei geten gold be +this sotyltee: thei taken mares, that han zonge coltes or foles, and leyn +upon the mares voyde vesselles made therfore; and thei ben alle open +aboven, and hangynge lowe to the erthe: and thanne thei sende forth tho +mares for to pasturen aboute the hilles, and with holden the foles with hem +at home. And whan the Pissemyres sen tho vesselles, thei lepen in anon, and +thei han this kynde, that thei lete no thing ben empty among hem, but anon +thei fillen it, be it what maner of thing that it be: and so thei fillen +tho vesselles with gold. And whan that the folk supposen, that the vesselle +ben fulle, thei putten forthe anon the zonge foles, and maken hem to nyzen +aftre hire dames; and than anon the mares retornen towardes hire foles, +with hire charges of gold; and than men dischargen hem, and geten gold y +now be this sotyltee. For the Pissemyres wole suffren bestes to gon and +pasturen amonges hem; but no man in no wyse. + +And bezonde the lond and the yles and the desertes of Prestre Johnes +lordschipe, in goynge streyght toward the est, men fynde nothing but +mountaynes and roches fulle grete: and there is the derke regyoun, where no +man may see, nouther be day ne be nyght, as thei of the contree seyn. And +that desert, and that place of derknesse, duren fro this cost unto Paradys +terrestre; where that Adam oure foremost fader, and Eve weren putt, that +dwelleden there but lytylle while; and that is towards the est, at the +begynnynge of the erthe. But that is not that est, that wee clep oure est, +on this half, where the sonne risethe to us: for whenne the sonne is est in +tho partyes, toward Paradys terrestre, it is thanne mydnyght in oure +parties o this half, for the rowndenesse of the erthe, of the whiche I have +towched to zou before. For oure Lord God made the erthe alle round, in the +mydde place of the firmament. And there as mountaynes and hilles ben, and +valeyes, that is not but only of Noes flode, that wasted the softe ground +and the tendre, and felle doun into valeyes: and the harde erthe, and the +roche abyden mountaynes, whan the soft erthe and tendre wax nessche, +throghe the water, and felle and becamen valeyes. + +Of Paradys, ne can not I speken propurly: for I was not there. It is fer +bezonde; and that forthinkethe me: and also I was not worthi. But as I have +herd seye of wyse men bezonde, I schalle telle zou with gode wille. Paradys +terrestre, as wise men seyn, is the highest place of erthe, that is in alle +the world: and it is so highe, that it touchethe nyghe to the cercle of the +mone, there as the mone makethe hire torn. For sche is so highe, that the +flode of Noe ne myght not come to hire, that wolde have covered alle the +erthe of the world alle aboute, and aboven and benethen, saf Paradys only +allone. And this Paradys is enclosed alle aboute with a walle; and men wyte +not wherof it is. For the walles ben covered alle over with mosse; as it +semethe. And it semethe not that the walle is ston of nature. And that +walle strecchethe fro the southe to the northe; and it hathe not but on +entree, that is closed with fyre brennynge; so that no man, that is +mortalle, ne dar not entren. And in the moste highe place of Paradys, evene +in the myddel place, is a welle, that castethe out the 4 flodes, that +rennen be dyverse londes: of the whiche, the first is clept Phison or +Ganges, that is alle on: and it rennethe thorghe out Ynde or Emlak: in the +whiche ryvere ben manye preciouse stones, and mochel of lignum aloes, and +moche gravelle of gold. And that other ryvere is clept Nilus or Gyson, that +gothe be Ethiope, and aftre be Egypt. And that other is clept Tigris, that +rennethe be Assirye and be Armenye the grete. And that other is clept +Eufrate, that rennethe also be Medee and be Armonye and be Persye. And men +there bezonde seyn, that alle the swete watres of the world aboven and +benethen, taken hire begynnynge of the welle of Paradys: and out of that +welle, alle watres comen and gon. The firste ryvere is clept Phison, that +is to seyne in hire langage, Assemblee: for many other ryveres meten hem +there, and gon in to that ryvere. And sum men clepen it Ganges; for a kyng +that was in Ynde, that highte Gangeres, and that it ran thorge out his +lond. And that water is in sum place clere, and in sum place trouble: in +sum place hoot, and in sum place cole. The seconde ryvere is clept Nilus or +Gyson: for it is alle weye trouble: and Gyson, in the langage of Ethiope, +is to seye trouble: and in the langage of Egipt also. The thridde ryvere, +that is clept Tigris, is as moche for to seye as faste rennynge: for he +rennethe more faste than ony of the tother. And also there is a best, that +is cleped Tigris, that is faste rennynge. The fourthe ryvere is clept +Eufrates, that is to seyne, wel berynge: for there growen manye godes upon +that ryvere, as cornes, frutes, and othere godes y nowe plentee. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, that no man that is mortelle, ne may not +approchen to that paradys. For be londe no man may go for wylde bestes, +that ben in the desertes, and for the highe mountaynes and gret huge +roches, that no man may passe by, for the derke places that ben there, and +that manye: and be the ryveres may no man go; for the water rennethe so +rudely and so scharply, because that it comethe doun so outrageously from +the highe places aboven, that it rennethe in so grete wawes, that no schipp +may not rowe ne seyle azenes it: and the watre rorethe so, and makethe so +huge noyse, and so gret tempest, that no man may here other in the schipp, +thoughe he cryede with alle the craft that he cowde, in the hyeste voys +that he myghte. Many grete lordes han assayed with gret wille many tymes +for to passen be tho ryveres toward paradys, with fulle grete companyes: +but thei myghte not speden in hire viage; and manye dyeden for werynesse of +rowynge azenst tho stronge wawes; and many of hem becamen blynde, and many +deve, for the noyse of the water: and summe weren perisscht and loste, with +inne the wawes: so that no mortelle man may approche to that place, with +outen specyalle grace of God: so that of that place I can seye zou no more. +And therfore I schall holde me stille, and retornen to that that I have +seen. + + +CAPVT. 49. + +In reuertendo de Cassan, et Riboth, et de diuite Epulone. + +[Sidenote: Via per quam Mandeuillus redijt in Angliam.] Ex hinc de illis +quæ in reuertendo vidi scribo cursim pauca, ne modum excedere videatur +materia. [Sidenote: Cassan.] Reuertebar itaque quasi per Aquilonare latus +Imperij Presbyteri Ioannis, et nunc terræ, non mari nos commendantes, +transiuimus Deo Ductore, multas Insulas in multis diaetis, et peruenimus ad +regionem magnam Cassan: haec cum sit vna de quindecim habens longitudinem +diaetarum 60. et latitudinem propè 30. posset esse nominatior omnibus ibi +circa prouincijs, si a nostris frequentaretur. + +Notandum. Cassan (secundum Odericum) est melior prouincia de mundo, vbi +strictior est, habet diaetas 50. vbi longior 60, et est vna de 12. +prouincijs Imperij Grand Can. Est ista populosa, distincta ciuitatibus, vt +quisque à quacunque plaga de vna exeat ciuitate nouerit aliam in media +diaeta propinquam. Tenétque istam regionem Cassan rex diues et potens, pro +parte de Imperio Praebyteri Ioannis, et pro parte de Imperio Grand Can. + +[Sidenote: Riboth.] De ista in reuersione nostra venimus ad Regnum Riboth, +quod similiter est vnum de quindecim, latum, et speciosum, in quo de multis +bonis, habetur plena copia. Hoc tenetur in toto de Imperio Tartarorum. + +[Sidenote: Labassi, summus idolorum pontifex.] Vna est ibi inter et super +omnes ciuitas Sacerdotalis, et Regia, in qua Rex habet suum magnificum +palatium, et summus Idolorum Pontifex quem Labassi appellant, cui omnes +Regni obediunt et populi sicut Domino Papæ nos Christiani quoniam et iubet, +et benedicit, ac confert sacerdotibus beneficia idolorum. + +Ciuitatis vndique muri sunt compacti albis et nigris lapidibus conquadratis +ad modum scakarij, omnesque contractæ simili pauimento sunt stratæ. Tanta +est illic reuerentia sacrificiorum vt si quis vel in modica quantitate, +sanguinem hominis, seu immolaticiæ pecudis fudisse deprehensus fuerit, +nequaquam iudicium mortis euadet. Et inter innumeras superstitiones est +illic vna talis. + +Haeres cuius pater defungitur, si alicuius vult esse reputationis, mandat +cognatos, amicos, Relligiosos, et sacerdotes pro posse, qui certo Die +conuenientes sub magno Symphoniæ festo, corportant defuncti cadauer, in +montis sublime cacumen. Ibi accedens dignior Praelatorum, funeris caput +abscindit, tradens haeredi in aureo disco decantanti sub deuotione suas +orationes cum suis in propria lingua. Atque interim aues regionis rapaces, +et immundæ, vt corui, vultures, et aquilæ, quæ pro consuetudine optimè +morem norunt, aduolant magno numero in aere: Tuncque Relligiosi cum +sacerdotibus detruncant corpus in frusta velut in macello, proijcientes +pecias in altum auibus, ac decantantes certam ad hoc compositam orationem, +tanquam si nostri sacerdotes cantarent. Subuenite sancti Dei, etc. + +Et habet eorum oratio, hunc sensum in sua lingua. Respice quàm iustus et +sanctus extitit homo iste, quem Angeli Dei conueniunt accipere et in +Paradisum deferre. Talique diabolico errore delusi, putant filius, et +amici, quod defunctus sit in Paradisum translatus, viuat illic sempiterne +beatus, quoniam, vbi plures conuenere volucrum, ibi maiorem laetantur et +iactant fuisse numerum Angelorum. + +Hinc deinde reuertentes, cum choris, et resonantia Musicorum, filius +paratum praestat omnibus conuiuium, in cuius fine pro extremo ferculo, +tradit singulis particulam, de patris capite summa cum devotione. Hanc +etiam capitis caluariam filius facit postmodum debitè formari et poliri +sibi pro cypho, in quo bibit in conuijs, ob recordationem amantissimi +patris. + +Ab hoc Regno decem dietis per potestatem Imperatoris Grand Can, inuenitur +Insula delectabilis, et speciosa satis: cuius Rex est praepotens in gloria, +et in diuitijs superabundans, et de multis quæ illic geruntur admirandis +vnum recito solum. + +[Sidenote: Diues Epulo.] Quòd est ibi homo quidam ditissimus nullius +dignitatis nomine honoratus, sed bysso, ac serico adornatus, et splendide +omni tempore epulatus: non ergo vult dici princeps, Dux, comes, miles, aut +huiusmodi, licet superioritatem habeat super marchiones aliquos et barones. +Eius possessionis valor æstimatur in anno 30. cuman de assinarijs bladi, et +risi, nec quærit nisi delitiosè viuere in isto seculo, vt cum diuite +Epulone sepeliatur in inferno. Cum etiam sibi derelictus sit, iste viuendi +modus a retrogenitoribus, eum et ipse posteris derelinquet. Hic tanquam +Imperiali residet palatio, cuius muri ambitus ad tractum leucæ tenditur, +continens arbusta, vineta, rinulos, fontes et stagna, aulas, et cubicula +auro strata depictaque mirè, et sculpta artificiosè, vltra quam vales +explicare, et inter omnia ad medium palatium in celso vertice atrium +amaenum, valdè tamen modico, sed cunctis praeciosius, ædificio, quasi ad +seema nostrarum Ecclesiarium, cum turribus, pilarijs, et columnis, in +quibus nihil prominet indignius auro. Nunquam vel rarò hic exit de suo +palatio cum solis pulchris quos sibi conuocat et conuariat paruis pueris et +puellis, non excedentibus 16. annos ætatis. Tendit dum libet pedibus, +quandoque vectatur equo, interdum ducitur vehiculo, nonnunquam vult ferri +gestatorio, vel certè puellaribus brachijs, et visitat saepissimè praefatum +praeciosius ædificium: atque hijs et modis alijs excogitat delectare visum +pulchris, auditum suauibus, olfactum redolentibus, tactum lenibus, et +gustum pascere delicatis. Electas semper habet praesto 50. puellas ei, et +de proximo exquisitissimè ministrantes tam ad mensam quàm ad cubiculum, et +ad omne libitum. + +[Sidenote: Versus.] Hæ ad prandium recumbenti afferunt processionis more +pro singulo ferculo semper 5. genera dapum nobilium cum dulcisonæ +resonantia cantilenæ, quarum aliquæ ei singulos detruncant genu flexo +morsellos, aliquæ ponunt in ore, mundis tergentes comedentis labia mappis. + +Nam ipse quidem in mensa continet iacentes manus puras et quietas. Post +deseruitionem ferculi primi, seruitur pro secundo in 5. alijs dapum +generibus modo quo supra, et renouatur in apponendo cantus suauior melodia. + +Ista àbsque vlla Domini cura per ministros quotidiè reparantur etiam in +maiori satis quam effor nobilitate, nisi dum ipse pro placito iusserit, +quandoque temperari. + +Deliciosius igitur quo vult deducit carnem, non curans animam, sed nec +probitatem curans terrenam, pascit sterilem, et viduæ non benefacit. Et + + Quia viuit sicut porcus, + Morientem suscipit orcus. + +[Sidenote: Longitudo vnguium. Vtunturetiam in Florida principes longis +vnguibus.] Porrò quod eum dixi manus tenere quietas, noueritis nimirum nil +posse manibus capere vel tenere, propter longitudinem, et recuruitatem +vnguium in digitis, qui sibi nullo tempore praescinduntur. Seruatur enim +hoc pro nobili more patriæ, et viri diuites delicati, qui proprios possunt +habere ministros nunquàm sibi dimittunt vngues resecare, vnde et nonnullis +circumdantur vndique manus, acsi uiderentur armatæ. + +[Sidenote: Noua historia Chinensis hoc testatur.] Foeminarum autem mos est +nobilis si habeant paruos pedes, vnde et generosarum in cunis strictissimè +simè obuoluuntur, vt vix ad medium debitæ quantitatis excrescere possint. + + +The English Version. + +Of the Customs of Kynges, and othere that dwellen in the Yles costynge to + Prestre Johnes Lond. And of the Worschipe that the Sone dothe to the + Fader, whan he is dede. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXXI.] From tho yles, that I have spoken of before, in the +lond of Prestre John, that ben undre erthe as to us, that ben o this half, +and of other yles, that ben more furthere bezonde; who so wil, pursuen hem, +for to comen azen right to pursuen hem, for to comen azen right to the +parties that he cam fro; and so environne alle erthe: but what for the +yles, what for the see, and what for strong rowynge, fewe folk assayen for +to passen that passage; alle be it that men myghte don it wel, that myght +ben of power to dresse him thereto; as I have seyd zou before. And therfore +men returnen from tho yles aboveseyd, be other yles costynge fro the lond +of Prestre John. And thanne comen men in returnynge to an yle, that is +clept Casson: and that yle hathe wel 60 jorrneyes in lengthe, and more than +50 in brede. This is the beste yle, and the beste kyngdom, that is in alle +tho partyes, out taken Cathay. And zif the merchauntes useden als moche +that contre an thei don Cathay, it wolde ben better than Cathay, in a +schort while. This contree is fulle well enhabyted, and so fulle of cytees, +and of gode townes, and enhabyted with peple, that whan a man gothe out of +o cytee, men seen another cytee, evene before hem: and that is what partye +that a man go, in alle that contree. In that yle is gret plentee of alle +godes for to lyve with, and of alle manere of spices. And there ben grete +forestes of chesteynes. The kyng of that yle is fulle ryche and fulle +myghty: and natheles he holt his lond of the grete Chane, and is obeyssant +to hym. For it is on of the 12 provynces, that the grete Chane hathe undre +him, with outen his propre lond, and with outen other lesse yles, that he +hathe: for he hathe fulle manye. + +From that kyngdom comen men, in returnynge, to another yle, that is clept +Rybothe: and it is also under the grete Chane. That is a fulle gode +contree, and fulle plentefous of alle godes and of wynes and frut, and alle +other ricchesse. And the folk of that contree han none houses: but thei +dwellen and lyggen all under tentes, made of black ferne, by alle the +contree. And the princypalle cytee, and the most royalle, is alle walled +with black ston and white. And alle the stretes also ben pathed of the same +stones. In that cytee is no man so hardy, to schede Blode of no man, ne of +no best, for the reverence of an ydole, that is worschipt there. And in +that yle dwellethe the pope of hire lawe, that they clepen Lobassy. This +Lobassy zevethe alle the benefices, and alle other dignytees, and all other +thinges, that belongen to the ydole. And alle tho that holden ony thing of +hire chirches, religious and othere, obeyen to him; as men don here to the +Pope of Rome. + +In that yle thei han a custom, be alle the contree, that whan the fader is +ded of ony man, and the sone list to do gret worchipe to his fader, he +sendethe to alle his frendes, and to all his kyn, and for religious men and +preestes, and for mynstralle also, gret plentee. And thanne men beren the +dede body unto a gret hille, with gret joye and solempnyte. And when thei +han brought it thider, the chief prelate smytethe of the hede, and leythe +it upon a gret platere of Gold and of sylver, zif so be he be a riche man; +and than he takethe the hede to the sone; and thanne the sone and his other +kyn syngen and seyn manye orisouns: and thanne the prestes, and the +religious men, smyten alle the body of the dede man in peces: and thanne +thei seyn certeyn orisouns. And the fowles of raveyne of alle the contree +abouten knowen the custom of long tyme before, and comen fleenge aboyen in +the eyr, as egles, gledes, ravenes and othere foules of raveyne, that eten +flesche. And than the preestes casten the gobettes of the flesche; and than +the foules eche of hem takethe that he may, and gothe a litille thens and +etethe it: and so thei don whils ony pece lastethe of the dede body. And +aftre that, as preestes amonges us syngen for the dede, _Subvenite sancti +Dei_, &c. right so the preestes syngen with highe voys in hire langage, +beholdethe how so worthi a man, and how gode a man this was, that the +aungeles of God comen for to sechen him, and for to bryngen him in to +paradys. And thanne semethe in to the sone, that he is highliche worschipt, +whan that many briddes and foules and raveyne comen and eten his fader. And +he that hathe most nombre of foules, is most worschiped. Thanne the sone +bryngethe hoom with him alle his kyn, and his frendes, and alle the othere +to his hows, and makethe hem a gret feste. And thanne alle his frendes +maken hire avaunt and hire dalyance, how the fowles comen thider, here 5, +here 6, here 10, and there 20, and so forthe: and thei rejoyssen hem hugely +for to speke there of. And whan thei ben at mete, the sone let brynge +forthe the hede of his fader, and there of he zevethe of the flesche to his +most specyalle frendes, in stede of entre messe, or a sukkarke. And of the +brayn panne, he letethe make a cuppe, and there of drynkethe he and his +other frendes also, with great devocioun, in remembrance of the holy man, +that the aungeles of God han eten. And that cuppe the sone schalle kepe to +drynken of, alle his lif tyme, in remembrance of his fadir. + +From that lond, in returnynge be 10 jorneyes thorghe out the lond of the +grete Chane, is another gode yle, and a gret kyngdom, where the kyng is +fulle riche and myghty. And amonges the riche men of his contree, is a +passynge riche man, that is no prince, ne duke ne erl; but he hathe mo that +holden of him londes and other lordschipes: for he is more riche. For he +hathe every zeer of annuelle rente 300000 hors charged with corn of dyverse +greynes and of ryzs: and so he ledethe a fulle noble lif, and a delycate, +aftre the custom of the contree. For he hathe every day, 50 fair damyseles, +alle maydenes, that serven him everemore at his mete, and for to lye be hem +o nyght, and for to do with hem that is to his pleasance. And whan he is at +the table, they bryngen him hys mete at every tyme, 5 and 5 to gedre. And +in bryngynge hire servyse, thei syngen a song. And aftre that, thei kutten +his mete, and putten it in his mouthe; for he touchethe no thing ne +handlethe nought, but holdethe evere more his hondes before him, upon the +table. For he hathe so long nayles, that he may take no thing, ne handle no +thing. For the noblesse of that contree is to have longe nayles, and to +make hem growen alle weys to ben as longe as men may. And there ben manye +in that contree, that han hire nayles so longe, that thei envyronne alle +the hond: and that is a gret noblesse. And the noblesse of the wommen, is +for to haven smale feet and litille: and therfore anon as thei ben born, +they leet bynde hire feet so streyte, that thei may not growen half as +nature wolde; and alle weys theise damyseles, that I spak of beforn, syngen +alle the tyme that this riche man etethe: and whan that he etethe no more +of his firste cours, than other 5 and 5 of faire damyseles bryngen him his +seconde cours, alle weys syngynge, as thei dide beforn. And so thei don +contynuelly every day, to the ende of his mete. And in this manere he +ledethe his lif. And so dide thei before him, that weren his auncestres; +and so schulle thei that comen aftre him, with outen doynge of ony dedes of +armes: but lyven evere more thus in ese, as a swyn, that is fedde in sty, +for to ben made fatte. He hathe a fulle fair palays and fulle riche, where +that he dwellethe inne: of the whiche, the walles ben in circuyt 2 myle: +and he hathe with inne many faire gardynes, and many faire halles and +chambres, and the pawment of his halles and chambres ben of gold and +sylver. And in the myd place of on of his gardynes, is a lytylle mountayne, +wher there is a litylle medewe: and in that medewe, is a litylle toothille +with toures and pynacles, alle of gold: and in that litylle toothille wole +he sytten often tyme, for to taken the ayr and to desporten hym: for that +place is made for no thing elles, but only for his desport. + +Fro that contree men comen be the lond of the grete Chane also, that I have +spoken of before. + +And ze schulle undirstonde, that of alle theise contrees, and of alle +theise yles, and of alle the dyverse folk, that I have spoken of before, +and of dyverse lawes, and of dyverse beleeves that thei han; zit is there +non of hem alle, but that thei han sum resoun with in hem and +undirstondynge, but zif it be the fewere: and that han certeyn articles of +oure feithe and summe gode poyntes of oure beleeve: and that thei beleeven +in God, that formede alle thinges and made the world; and clepen him God of +Nature, aftre that the prophete seythe, _Et metuent cum omnes fines terre_: +and also in another place, _Omnes gentes servient ei_; that is to seyn, +_Alle folke schalle serven Him_. But zit thei cone not speken perfytly; +(for there is no man to techen hem) but only that thei cone devyse be hire +naturelle wytt. For thei han no knouleche of the Sone, ne of the Holy Gost: +but thei cone alle speken of the Bible: and namely of Genesis, of the +prophetes lawes, and of the Bokes of Moyses. And thei seyn wel, that the +creatures, that thei worschipen, ne ben no goddes: but thei worschipen hem, +for the vertue that is in hem, that may not be, but only be the grace of +God. And of simulacres and of ydoles, thei seyn, that there ben no folk, +but that thei han simulacres: and that thei seyn, for we Cristene men han +ymages, as of Oure Lady, and of othere seyntes, that wee worschipen; nohte +the ymages of tree or of ston, but the seyntes, in whoos name thei ben made +aftre. For righte as the bokes of the Scripture of hem techen the clerkes, +how and in what manere thei schulle beleeven, righte so the ymages and the +peyntynges techen the lewed folk to worschipen the seyntes, and to have hem +in hire mynde, in whoos name that the ymages ben made aftre. Thei seyn +also, that the aungeles of God speken to hem in tho ydoles, and that thei +don manye grete myracles. And thei seyn sothe, that there is an aungele +with in hem: for there ben 2 maner of aungeles, a gode and an evelle; as +the Grekes seyn, Cacho and Calo; this Cacho is the wykked aungelle, and +Calo is the gode aungelle: but the tother is not the gode aungelle, but the +wykked aungelle, that is with inne the ydoles, for to disceyven hem, and +for to meyntenen hem in hire errour. + + +CAPVT. 50. + +De compositione huius tractatus in nobili ciuitate Leodiensi. + +In reuertendo igitur venitur ab hac insula per prouincias magnas Imperij +Tartarorum, in quibus semper noua, semper mira, imo nonnunquam incredibilia +viator potest videre, percipere, et audire. + +Et Noueritis, vt praedixi, me pauca eorum vidisse, quæ in terris sunt +mirabilium, sed nec hic scripsisse centessimam partem eorum quæ vidi, quod +nec omnia memoriæ commendare potui, et de commendatis multa subticui, +proptèr modestiam, quam decet omnibus actibus addi. + +Idcirco vt et alijs, qui vel antè me in partibus illis steterunt, vel ituri +sunt, maneat locus narrandi siue scribendi, modum huius pono tractatus, +potius decurtans quàm complens, quoniam aliàs loquendi non esset finis, nec +aures implerentur auditu. + +[Sidenote: Concludit opus suum.] Itàque anno à natiuitate Domini nostri +Iesu Christi 1355. in patriando, cum ad nobilem Legiæ, seu Leodij ciuitatem +peruenissem, et præ grandeuitate ac artericis guttis illic decumberem in +vico qui dicitur, Bassessanemi, consului causa conualescendi aliquos +medicos ciuitatis: Et accidit, Dei nutu, vnum intrare physicum super alios +ætate simul et canicie venerandum, ac in sua arte euidenter expertum, qui +ibidem dicebatur communiter, Magister Ioannes ad barbam. + +Is, dum paritèr colloqueremur, interseruit aliquid dictis, per quod tandem +nostra inuicem renouabatur antiqua notitia, quam quondam habueramus in Cayr +Aegypti apud Melech Mandibron Soldanum, prout suprà tetigi in 7. capitulo +libri. + +Qui cum in me experientiam artis suæ excellenter monstrasset, adhortabatur +ac praecabatur instanter, vt de hijs quæ videram tempore peregrinationis, +et itinerationis meæ per mundum, aliquid digererem in scriptis ad legendum, +et audiendum pro vtilitate. + +Sicque tandem illius monitu et adiutorio, compositus est iste tractatus, de +quo certè nil scribere proposueram, donec saltem ad partes proprias in +Anglia peruenissem. [Sidenote: Edwardus tertius.] Et credo praemissa circa +me, per prouidentiam et gratiam Dei contigisse, quoniam à tempore quo +recessi, duo reges nostri Angliæ, et Franciæ, non cessauerunt inuicem +exercere destructiones, depraedationes, insidias, et interfectiones, inter +quas, nisi à Domino custoditus, non transissem sine morte, vel mortis +periculo, et sine criminum grandi cumulo. Et ecce nunc egressionis meæ anno +33. constitutus in Leodij ciuitate, quæ à mari Angliæ distat solum per duas +diætas, audio dictas Dominorum inimicitias, per gartiam Dei consopitas: +quapropter et spero, ac propono de reliquo secundum maturiorem ætatem me +posse in proprijs, intendere corporis quieti, animaeque saluti. + +Hie itaque finis sit scripti, in nomine Patris, et Filij, et spiritus +sancti, AMEN. + +Explicit itinerarium à terra Angliæ, in partes Hierosolimitanas, et in + vlteriores transmarinas, editum primò in lingua Gallicana, à Domino + Ioanne Mandeuille milite, suo authore, Anno incarnationis Domini 1355. in + Ciuitate Leodiensi: Et Paulò post in eadem ciuitate, translatum in dictam + formam Latinam. + + +The English Version. + +There ben manye other dyverse contrees and manye other marveyles bezonde, +that I have not seen: wherfore of hem I can not speke propurly, to telle +zou the manere of hem. And also in the contrees where I have ben, ben many +dyversitees of manye wondir fulle thinges, mo thanne I make mencioun of. +For it were to longe thing to devyse zou the manere. And therfore that that +I have devised zou of certeyn contrees, that I have spoken of before, I +beseche zoure worthi and excellent noblesse, that it suffise to zou at this +tyme. For zif that I devysed zou alle that is bezonde the see, another man +peraunter, that wolde peynen him and travaylle his body for to go in to tho +marches, for to encerche tho contrees, myghten ben blamed be my wordes, in +rehercynge many straunge thynges. For he myghten not seye no thing of newe, +in the whiche the hereres myghten haven outher solace or desport or lust or +lykynge in the herynge. For men seyn alle weys, that newe thynges and newe +tydynges ben plesant to here. Wherfore I wole holde me stille, with outen +ony more rehercyng of dyversiteez or of marvaylles, that ben bezonde, to +that entent and ende, that who so wil gon in to the contrees, he schalle +fynde y nowe to speke of, that I have not touched of in no wyse. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, zif it lyke zou, that at myn hom comynge, I +cam to Rome, and schewed my lif to oure holy fadir the Pope, and was +assoylled of alle that lay in my conscience, of many a dyverse grevous +poynt: as men mosten nedes, that ben in company, dwellyng amonges so many a +dyverse folk of dyverse secte and of beleeve, as I have ben. And amonges +alle, I schewed hym this tretys, that I had made aftre informacioun of men, +that knewen of thinges, that I had not seen my self; and also of marveyles +and customes, that I hadde seen my self; as fer as God wolde zeve me grace: +and besoughte his holy fadirhode, that my boke myghten be examyned and +corrected be avys of his wyse and discreet conscille. And oure holy fadir, +of his special grace, remytted my boke to ben examyned and preved be the +avys of his seyd conscille. Be the whiche, my boke was preeved for trewe; +in so moche that thei schewed me a boke, that my boke was examynde by, that +comprehended fulle moche more, ben an hundred part; be the whiche, the +_Mappa Mundi_ was made after. And so my boke (alle be it that many men ne +list not to zeve credence to no thing, but to that that thei seen with hire +eye, ne be the auctour ne the persone never so trewe) is affermed and +preved be oure holy fadir, in maner and forme as I have seyd. + +And I John Maundevylle knyghte aboveseyd, (alle thoughe I ben unworthi) +that departed from oure contrees and passed the see, the zeer of grace +1322, that have passed many londes and manye yles and contrees, and cerched +manye fulle straunge places, and have ben in manye a fulle gode honourable +comyanye, and at many a faire dede of armes, (alle be it that I dide none +my self, for myn unable insuffisance) now I am comen hom (mawgree my self) +to reste: for gowtes, artetykes, that me distreynen, tho diffynen the ende +of my labour, azenst my wille (God knowethe). And thus takynge solace in my +wrecched reste, recordynge the tyme passed, I have fulfilled theise thinges +and putte hem wryten in this boke, as it wolde come in to my mynde, the +zeer of grace 1356 in the 34 zeer that I departede from oure contrees. +Wherfore I preye to alle the rederes and hereres of this boke, zif it plese +hem, that thei wolde preyen to God for me: and I schalle preye for hem. And +alle tho that seyn for me a _Pater nostre_, with an _Ave Maria_, that God +forzeve me my synnes, I make hem parteneres, and graunte hem part of alle +the gode pilgrymages and of alle the gode dedes, that I have don, zif ony +be to his plesance: and noghte only of tho, but of alle that evere I +schalle do unto my lyfes ende. And I beseche Almighty God, fro whom alle +godenesse and grace comethe fro, that he vouchesaf, of his excellent mercy +and habundant grace, to fulle fylle hire soules with inspiracioun of the +Holy Gost, in makynge defence of alle hire gostly enemyes here in erthe, to +hire salvacioun, bothe of body and soule; to worschipe and thankynge of +Him, that is three and on, with outen begynnynge and withouten endynge; +that is, with outen qualitee, good, and with outen quantytee, gret; that in +alle places is present, and alle thinges conteynynge; the whiche that no +goodnesse may amende, ne non evelle empeyre; that in perfeyte Trynytee +lyvethe and regnethe God, be alle worldes and be alle tymes. Amen, Amen, +Amen. + + * * * * * + +Richardi Hakluyti breuis admonitio ad Lectorem. + +Ioannem Mandeuillum nostratem, eruditum et insignem Authorem (Balaeo, +Mercatore, Ortelio, et alijs, testibus) ab innumeris Scribarum et +Typographorum mendis repurgando, ex multorum, eorumque optimorum +exemplarium collatione, quid praestiterim, virorum doctorum, et eorum +praecipuè, qui Geographiæ et Antiquitatis periti sunt, esto iudicium. Quæ +autem habet de monstriferis hominum formis itinerarij sui praecedentis +capitibus trigessimo, trigessimo primo, trigessimo tertio, et sparsim in +sequentibus, quanquam non negem ab illo fortasse quædam eorum alicubi visa +fuisse, maiori tamen ex parte ex Caio Plinio secundo hausta videntur, vt +facile patebit ca cum his Plinianis, hic ideo a me appositis, collaturo, +quæ idem Plinius, singulis suis authoribus singula refert, in eorum +plærisque fidem suam minimè obstringens. Vale, atque aut meliora dato, aut +his vtere mecum. + + * * * * * + +Ex libro sexto Naturalis historiæ C. Plinij secundi. Cap. 30. + +Vniuersa verò gens Ætheria appellata est, deinde Atlantia, mox à Vulcani +filio Æthiope Æthiopia. Animalium hominumque effigies monstriferas circa +extremitates eius gigni minimè mirum, artifici ad formanda corpora +effigiésque caelandas mobilitate ignea. Ferunt certè ab Orientis parte +intimatgentes esse sine naribus. æquali totius oris planitie. Alias +superiore labro orbas, alias sine linguis. Pars etiam ore concreto et +naribus carens, vno tantùm foramine spirat, potùmque calamis auenæ trahit, +et grana eiusdem auenæ, sponte prouenientis ad vescendum; Quibusdam pro +sermone nutus motùsque membrorum est, &c. + + * * * * * + +Ex libro eiusdem Plinij septimo. Cap. 2. cui titulus est, De Scythis, et + aliarum diversitate gentium. + +Esse Scytharum genera, et quidem plura, quæ corporibus humanis vescerentur, +indicauimus. Idipsum incredibile fortasse, ni cogitimus in medio orbe +terrarum, ac Sicilia et Italia fuisse, gentes huius monstri, Cyclopas et +Laestrigonas, et nuperrimè trans Alpes hominem immolari gentium carum more +solitum: quod paulum à mandendo abest. Sed et iuxta eos, qui sunt ad +Septentrionem versi, haud procul ab ipso Aquilonis exortu, specuque eius +dicto, quem locum Gesclitron appellant, produntur Arimaspi, duos diximus, +vno oculo in fronte media insignes: quibus assiduè bellum esse circa +metalla cum gryphis, ferarum volucri genere, quale vulgò traditur, eruente +ex cuniculis aurum, mira cupiditate et feris custodientibus, et Arimaspis +rapientibus, multi, sed maximè illustres Herodotus, et Aristeas +Proconnesius scribunt. Super alios autem Anthropophagos Scythas, in quadam +conualle magna Imai montis, regio est, quæ vocatur Abarimon, in qua +syluestres viuunt homines, auersis post crura plantis, eximiæ velocitatis, +passim cum feris vagantes. Hos in alio non spirare coelo, ideoque ad +finitimos reges non pertrahi, neque ad Alexandrum magnum pertractos, Beton +itinerum eius mensor prodidit. Priores Anthropophagos, quos ad +Septentrionem esse diximus decem dierum itinere supra Borysthenem amnem, +ossibus humanorum capitum bibere, cutibusque cum capillo pro mantelibus +ante pectora vti, Isigonus Nicænsis. Idem in Albania gigni quosdam glauca +oculorum acie, à pueritia statim canos, qui noctu plusquàm interdiu +cernant. Idem itinere dierum x. supra Borysthenem, Sauromatas tertio die +cibum capere semper. Crates Pergamenus in Hellesponto circa Parium, genus +hominum fuisse tradit, quos Ophiogenes vocat serpentum ictus contactu +leuare solitos, et manu imposita venena extrahere corpori. Varro etiam nunc +esse paucos ibi, quorum saliuæ contra ictus serpentum medeantur. Similis et +in Africa gens Psyllorum fuit, vt Agatharchides scribit, à Psyllo rege +dicta, cuius sepulchrum in parte Syrtium maiorum est. Horum corpori +ingenitum fuit virus exitiale serpentibus, vt cuius odore sopirent eas. Mos +verò, liberos genitos protinus obijciendi saeuissimis earum, eòque genere +pudicitiam coniugum experiendi, non profugientibus adulterino sanguine +natos serpentibus. Haec gens ipsa quidem prope internicione sublata est à +Nasamonibus, qui nunc eas tenent sedes: genus tamen hominum ex his qui +profugerant, aut cùm pugnatum est, abfuerant, hodièque remanent in paucis. +Simile et in Italia Marsorum gentis durat, quos à Circes filio ortos +seruant, et ideo inesse ijs vim naturalem eam. Et tamen omnibus hominibus +contra serpentes inest venenum: ferùntque ictas saliua, vt feruentis aquæ +contactum fugere. Quòd si in fauces penetrauerit, etiam mori: idque maximè +humani ieiuni oris. Supra Nasamonis confinésque illis Machlyas, Androginos +esse vtriusque naturæ, inter se vicibus coeuntes, Calliphanes tradit. +Aristoteles adijcit, dextram mamman ijs virilem, lacuam muliebrem esse. In +eadem Africa familias quasdam effascinantium, Isigonus et Nymphodorus +tradunt quarum laudatione intereant probata, arescant arbores, emoriantur +infantes. Esse eiusdem generis in Triballis et Illyrijs, adijcit Isigonus, +qui visu quoque effascinent, interimantque quos diutius intueantur. Iratis +praecipuè oculis: quod eorum malum faciliùs sentire puberes. Notabilius +esse quòd pupillas binas in oculis singulis habeant. Huius generis et +foeminas in Scythia, quæ vocantur Bithyæ, prodit Apollonides. Philarchus et +in Ponto Thibiorum genus, multosque alios eiusdem naturæ: quorum notas +tradit in altero oculo geminam pupillam, in altero equi effigiem. Eosdem +praetereà non posse mergi, ne veste quidem degrauatos. Haud dissimile ijs +genus Pharnacum in Æthiopia prodidit Damon, quorum sudor tabem contactis +corporibus afferat. Foeminas quidem omnes vbique visu nocere, quæ duplices +pupillas habeant, Cicero quoque apud nos autor est. Adeò naturæ, cùm +ferarum morem vescendi humanis visceribus in homine genuisset, gignere +etiam in toto corpore et in quorundam oculis quoque venena placuit: ne quid +vsquam mali esset, quod in homine non esset. Haud procul vrbe Roma in +Faliscorum agro familiæ sum paucæ, quæ vocantur Hirpiæ: quæ sacrificio +annuo, quod fit ad montem Soractem Apollini, super ambustam ligni struem +ambulantes non aduruntur. Et ob id perpetuo senatusconsulto militiæ +omniumque aliorum numerum vacationem habent. Quorundam corpore partes +nascuntur ad aliqua mirabiles sicut Pyrrho regi pollex in dextero pede: +cuius tactu lienosis medebatur. Hunc cremari cum reliquo corpore non +potuisse tradunt, conditumque loculo in templo. Praecipuè India Æthiopumque +tractus, miraculis scatent. Maxima in India gignuntur animalia, Indicio +sunt canes grandioris caeteris. Arbores quidem tantæ proceritatis +traduntur, vt sagittis superari nequeant. Haec facit vbertas soli, +temperies coeli, aquarum abundantia (si libeat credere) vt sub vna ficu +turmæ condantur equitum. Arundines verò tantæ proceritatis, vt singula +internodia alueo nauigabili ternos interdum homines ferant. Multos ibi +quina cubita constat longitudine excedere: non expuere: non capitis, aut +dentium, aut oculorum vllo dolore affici, rarò aliarum corporis partium: +tam moderato Solis vapore durari. Philosophos eorum quos Gymnosophystas +vocant, ab exortu ad Occasum praestare, contuentes Solem immobilibus +oculis: feruentibus harenis toto die alternis pedibus insistere. In monte +cui nomen est Milo, homines esse auersis plantis, octonos digitos in +singulis pedibus habentes, autor est Megasthenes. In multis autem montibus +genus hominum capitibus caninis, ferarum pellibus velari, pro voce latratum +edere, vnguibus armatum venatu et aucupio vesci. Horum supra centum viginti +millia fuisse prodente se, Ctesias scribit: et in quadam gente Indiæ, +foeminas semel in vita parere, genitosque confestim canescere. Item hominum +genus, qui Monosceli vocarentur, singulis cruribus, miræ pernicitatis ad +saltum: eosdemque Sciopodas vocari, quòd in maiori æstu humi iacentes +resupini, vmbra se pedum protegant, non longè eos à Troglodytis abesse. +Rursusque ab his Occidentem versus quosdam sine ceruice, oculos in humeris +habentes. Sunt et Satyri subsolanis Indorum montibus (Cartadalorum dicitur +Regio) pernicissimum animal, tum quadrupedes, tum rectè currentes humana +effigie propter velocitatem, nisi senes aut ægri, non capiuntur. +Choromandarum gentem vocat Tauron siluestrem sine voce, stridoris horrendi, +hirtis corporibus, oculis glaucis, dentibus caninis. Eudoxus in meridianis +Indiæ viris plantas esse cubitales, foeminis adeò paruas, vt Struthopodes +appellentur. Megastenes gentem inter Nomadas Indos narium loco foramina +tantùm habentem, anguium modo loripedem, vocarit Syrictas. Ad extremos +fines Indiæ ab Oriente, circa fontem Gangis, Astomorum gentem sine ore, +corpore toto hirtam vestiri frondium lanugine, halitu tantùm viuentem et +odore quem naribus trahant: nullum illis cibum, nullumque potum: tantum +radicum florumque varios odores et syluestrium malorum, quæ secum portant +longiore itinere, ne desit olfactus, grauiore paulò odore haud difficulter +examinari. Supra hos extrema in parte montium Spithamaei Pygmaei narrantur, +ternas spithamas longitudine, hoc est, ternos dodrantos non excedentes, +salubri caelo, sempérque vernante, montibus ab Aquilone oppositis, quos à +gruibus infestari Homerus quoque prodidit: Fama est, insidentes arietum, +caprarumque dorsis, armatos sagittis, veris tempore, vniuerso agmine ad +mare descendere, et oua pullosque earum alitum consumere, ternis +expeditionem eam mensibus confici, aliter futuris gregibus non resisti. +Casas eorum luto, pennisque, et ouorum putaminibus construi. Aristotelis in +cauernis viuere Pygmaeos tradit. Caetera de his, vt reliqui. Cyrnos Indorum +genus Isigonus annis centenis quadragenis viuere. Item Aethiopas +Marcrobios, et Seras existimat, et qui Athon montem incolant: hos quidem +quia viperinis carnibus alantur, itaque nec capiti, nec vestibus eorum +noxia corpori inesse animalia. Onesicritus, quibus in locis Indiæ vmbræ non +sint, corpora hominum cubitorum quinum, et binorum palmorum existere, et +viuere annos centum triginta, nec senescere, sed vt medio æuo mori. Crates +Pergamenus Indos, qui centenos annos excedant Gymnætas appelat, non pauci +Macrobios. Ctesias gentem ex his, quæ appellatur Pandore, in conuallibus +sitam, annos ducenos viuere, in iuuenta candido capillo, qui in senectute +nigrescat. Contra alios quadragenos non excedere annos, iunctos Macrobijs, +quorum foeminæ semel pariant: idque et Agatharchides tradit, prætereà +locustis eos ali, et esse pernices. Mandrorum nomen ijs dedit Clitarchus et +Megastenes, trecentosque eorum vicos annumerat. Foeminas septimo ætatis +anno parere, senectam quadragesimo anno accedere. Artemidorus, in Taprobana +insula longissimam vitam sine vllo corporis languore traduci. Duris, +Indorum quosdam cum feris coire, mistosque et semiferos esse partus. In +Calingis eiusdem Indiæ gente quinquennes concipere foeminas, octauum vitæ +annum non excedere, et alibi cauda villosa homines nasci pernicitatis +eximiæ, alios auribus totos contegi. Oritas ab Indis Arbis fluuius +disterminat. Ii nullum alium cibum nouere, quàm piscium, quos vnguibus +dissectos sole torreant, atque ita panem ex his faciunt, vt refert +Clitarchus. Troglodytas super Aethiopiam velociores esse equis, Pergamenus +Crates. Item Aethiopas octona cubita longitudine excedere. Syrbotas vocari +gentem eam Nomadum Aethiopum, secundùm flumen Astapum ad Septentrionem +vregentium. [Marginal note: Vel vergentium.] Gens Menisminorum appellata, +abest ab oceana dierum itinere viginti, animalium que Cynocephalos vocamus, +lacte viuit, quorum armenta pacscit maribus interemptis, praeterquam +sobolis causa. In Africæ solitudinibus hominum species obuiæ subinde fiunt, +momentoque euanescunt. Haec atque talia, ex hominum genere ludibria sibi, +nobis miracula, ingeniosa fecit natura: et singula quidem, quæ facit +indies, ac propè horas, quis enumerare valeat? Ad detegendam eius +potentiam, satis sit inter prodigia posuisse gentes. + + +END OF MANDEVILLE'S VOYAGES. + + * * * * * + +Anthony Beck bishop of Durisme was elected Patriarch of Hierusalem, and + confirmed by Clement the fift bishop of Rome: in the 34 yere of Edward + the first. Lelandus. + +Antonius Beckus episcopus Dunelmensis fuit, regnante Edwardo eius +appelationis ab aduentu Gulielmi magni in Angliam primo. Electus est in +patriarcham Hierosolymitanum anno Christo 1305, et a Clemente quinto Rom. +pontifice confirmatus. Splendidus erat supra quàm decebat episcopum. +Construxit castrum Achelandæ, quatuor passuum millibus a Dunelmo in ripa +Vnduglessi fluuioli. Elteshamum etiam vicinum Grenouico, ac Somaridunum +castellum Lindianæ prouinciæ, ædificijs illustria reddidit. Deinde et +palatium Londini erexit, quod nunc Edwardi principis est. Tandem ex +splendore nimio, et potentia conflauit sibi apud nobilitatem ingentem +inuidiam, quam viuens nunquam extinguere potuit. Sed de Antonio, et eius +scriptis fusiùs in opere, cuius titulus de pontificibus Britannicis, +dicemus. Obijt Antonius anno a nato in salutem nostram Christo, 1310, +Edwardo secundo regnante. + + +The same in English. + +Anthony Beck was bishop of Durisme in the time of the reigne of Edward the +first of that name after the inuasion of William the great into England. +This Anthony was elected patriarch of Ierusalem in the yeere of our Lord +God 1305, and was confirmed by Clement the fift, pope of Rome. He was of +greater magnificence then for the calling of a bishop. He founded also the +castle of Acheland foure miles from Durisme, on the shore of a prety riuer +called Vnduglesme. [Footnote: Probably Barnard Castle, on the Tees.] He +much beautified with new buildings Eltham mannor nere vnto Greenwich, and +the castle Somaridune in the county of Lindsey. [Footnote: Lindsey is the +popular name for the north part of County Lincoln.] And lastly, he built +new out of the ground the palace of London, which now is in possession of +prince Edward. Insomuch, that at length, through his ouer great +magnificence and power he procured to himselfe great enuy among the +nobility, which he could not asswage during the rest of his life. But of +this Anthony and of his writings we will speake more at large in our booke +intituled of the Britain bishops. This Anthony finished his life in the +yere of our Lord God, 1310, and in the reigne of king Edward the second. + + * * * * * + +Incipit Itinerarium fratris Odorici fratrum minorum de mirabilibus + Orientalium Tartarorum. + +Licet multa et varia de ritibus et conditionibus huius mundi enarrentur a +multis, ego tamen frater Odoricus de foro Iulij de portu Vahonis, volens ad +partes infidelium transfretare, magna et mira vidi et audiui, quæ possum +veracitèr enarrare. Primò transiens Mare Maius me de Pera iuxta +Constantinopolim transtuli Trapesundam, quæ antiquitùs Pontus vocabatur: +Haec terra benè situata est, sicut scala quaedam Persarum et Medorum, et +eorum qui sunt vltra mare. In hac terra vidi mirabile quod mihi placuit, +scilicet hominem ducentem secum plusquam 4000 perdicum. Homo autem per +terram gradiebatur, perdices vero volabant per aera, quas ipse ad quoddam +castrum dictum Zauena duxit, distans à Trapesunda per tres dietas. Hæ +perdices illius conditionis erant, cùm homo ille quiescere voluit, omnes se +aptabant circa ipsum, more pullorum gallinarum, et per illum modum duxit +eas vsque ad Trapesundam, et vsque ad palatium imperatoris, qui de illis +sumpsit quot voluit, et residuas vir ille ad locum vnde venerat, adduxit. +In hac ciuitate requiescit corpus Athanasij supra portem ciuitatis. +[Sidenote: Armenis maior.] Vltra transiui vsque in Armeniam maiorem, ad +quandam ciuitatem quæ vocatur Azaron, quæ erat multùm opulenta antiquitus, +sed Tartari eam pro magna parte destruxterunt: In ea erat abundantia panis +et carnium, et aliorum omnium victualium praeterquam vini et fructuum. Hæc +ciuitas est multum frigida, et de illa dicitur quòd altius situatur quàm +aliqua alia in hoc mundo: haec optimas habet aquas, nam venæ illarum +aquarum oriri videntur et scaturire à flumine magno Euphrate quod per vnam +dietam ab ciuitate distat: haec ciuitas via media eundi Taurisium. Vltra +progressus sum ad quendam montem dictum Sobissacato. In ilia contrau est +mons ille supra quem requicscit arca Noe; in quem libenter ascendissem, si +societas mea me praestolare voluisset: A gente tamen illius contratæ +dicitur quòd nullus vnquam illum montem ascendere potuit, quia vt dicitur, +hoc Deo altissimo non placet. [Sidenote: Tauris ciuitas Persiæ.] Vltra veni +Tauris ciuitatem magnam et regalem, quæ antiquitus Susis dicta est. Haec +ciuitas melior pro mercenarijs reputatur, quàm aliqua quæ sit in mundo, nam +nihil comestibile, nec aliquid quod ad mercimonium pertinet, reperitur, +quod illic in bona copia non habetur. Haec ciuitas multum benè situatur: +Nam ad eam quasi totus mundus pro mercimonijs confluere potest: De hac +dicunt Christiani qui ibi sunt, quòd credunt Imperatorem plus de ea +accipere, quám Regem Franciæ de toto regno suo: Iuxta illam ciuitatem est +mons salinus praebens sal ciuitati, et de illo sale vnusquisque tantum +accipit, quantum vult, nihil soluendo alicui. In hac ciuitate multi +Christiani de omni natione commorantur, quibus Saraceni in omnibus +dominantur. [Sidenote: Sultania.] Vltra iui per decem dietas ad ciuitatem +dictam Soldania, in qua imperator Persarum tempore æstiuo commoratur; In +hyeme autem vadit ad ciuitatem aliam sitam supra mare vocatam Bakuc: +Praedicta autem ciuitas magna est, et frigida, in se habens bonas aquas, ad +quam multa mercimonia portantur. Vltra cum quadam societate Carauanorum iui +versus Indiam superiorem, ad quam dum transissem per multas dietas perueni +ad ciuitatem trium Magorum quæ vocatur Cassan, [Marginal note: Vel +Cassibin.] quæ regia ciuitas est et nobilis, nisi quod Tartari eam in +magnaparte destruxerunt: haec abundat pane, vino, et alijsbonis multis. Ab +hac ciuitate vsque Ierusalem quo Magi iuerunt miraculosè, sunt L. dietiæ, +et multa mirabilia sunt in hac ciuitate quæ pertranseo. [Sidenote: Gest.] +Inde recessi ad quandam ciuitatem vocatam Gest a qua distat mare arenosum +per vnam dietam, quod mirè est mirabile et periculosum: In hac ciuitate est +abundantia omnium victualium, et ficuum potissimè, et vuarum siccarum et +viridium, plus vt credo quàm in alia parte mundi. Haec est tertia cuitas +melior quam Rex Persarum habet in toto regno suo: De illa dicunt Saraceni, +quod in ea nullus Christianus vltra annum viuere vnquam potest. [Sidenote: +Como.] Vltra per multas dietas iui ad quandam ciuitatem dictam Comum quæ +maxima ciuitas antiquitùs erat, cuius ambitus erat ferè L. Miliaria, quæ +magna damna intulit Romanis antiquis temporibus. In ea sunt palatia integra +non habitata, tamen multis victualibus abundat. Vltra per multas terras +transiens, perueni ad terram Iob nomine Hus quæ omnium victualium +plenissima est, et pulcherrimè situata; iuxta eam sunt montes in quibus +sunt pascua multa pro animilibus: Ibi manna in magna copia reperitur. Ibi +habentur quatuor perdices pro minori, quam pro vno grosso: In ea sunt +pulcherrimi senes, vbi homines nent et filant, et faeminæ non: haec terra +correspondet Chaldeæ versus transmontana. + + +De moribus Chaldæorum, et de India. + +Indè iui in Chaldaeam quæ est regnum magnum, et transiui iuxta turrim +Babel: Haec regio suam linguam propriam habet, et ibi sunt homines formosi, +et foeminæ turpes: et homines illius regionis vadunt compti crinibus, et +ornati, vt hîc mulieres, et portant super capita sua fasciola aurea cum +gemmis, et margaritis; mulieres verò solum vnam vilem camisiam attingentem +vsque ad genua, habentem manicas longas et largas, quæ vsque ad terram +protenduntur: Et vadunt discalceatæ portantes Serablans vsque ad terram. +Triceas non portant, sed capilli earum circumquaque disperguntur: et alia +multa et mirabilia sunt ibidem. Indé veni in Indiam quæ infra terram est, +quam Tartari multum destruxerunt; et in ea vt plurimum homines tantum +dactilos comedunt, quarum xlij, libræ habentur pro minori quam pro vno +grosso. [Sidenote: Ormus.] Vltra transsiui per multas dietas ad mare +oceanum, et prima terra, ad quam applicui, vocatur Ormes, quæ est optime +murata, et multa mercimonia et diuitiæ in ea sunt; in ea tantus calor est, +quod virilia hominum exeunt corpus et descendunt vsque ad mediam tibiarum: +ideò homines illius terræ volentes viuere, faciunt vnctionum, et vngunt +illa, et sic vncta in quibusdam sacculis ponunt circa se cingentes, et +aliter morerentur: In hac terra homines vtuntur nauigio quæ vocatur Iase, +suitium sparto. [Sidenote: Thana.] Ego autem ascendi in vnum illorum in quo +nullum ferrum potui reperrire, et in viginta octo dietis perueni ad +ciuitaten Thana, in qua pro fide Christi quatuor de fratribus nostris +martyrizati sunt. Hæc terra est optimè situata, et in ea abundantia panis +et vini, et aliorum victualium. Hæc terra antiquitus fuit valde magna, et +fuit regis Pori, qui cum rege Alexandro prælium magnum commisit. Huius +terræ populus Idolatrat, adorans ignem serpentes, et arbores: Et istam +terram regunt Saraceni, qui vio lenter eam acceperunt, et subiacent imperio +regis Daldili. Ibi sunt diuersa genera bestiarum, leones nigri in maxima +quantitate: sunt et ibi simiæ, gatimaymones, et noctuae magnæ sicut hic +habentur columbæ; ibi mures magni sunt, sicut sunt hîc scepi, et ideò canes +capiunt ibi mures, quia murelegi non valent. Ad hæc, in illa terra quilibet +homo habet ante domum suam vnum pedem fasciculorum, ita magnum sicut esset +vna columna, et pes ille non desiccatur, dummodò adhibeatur sibi aqua. +Multæ nouitates sunt ibi, quas pulcherrimum esset audire. + + +De martyrio fratrum. + +Martyrium autem quatuor fratrum nostrorum in illa ciuitate Thana fuit per +istum modum; dum praedicti fratres fuerant in Ormes, fecerunt pactum cum +vna naui vt nauigarent vsque Polumbrum, et violentèr deportati sunt vsque +Thanam vbi sunt 15. domus Christianorum, qui Nestoriani sunt et +Schismatici, et cum illic essent, hospitati sunt in domo cuiusdam illorum; +contigit dum ibi manerent litem oriri inter virum domus, et vxorem eius, +quam sero ver fortiter verberauit, quæ suo Kadi, i. Episcopo conquesta est; +à qua interrogauit Kadi, vtrum hoc probari posset? quæ dixit, quod sic; +quia 4. Franchi, i. viri religiosi erant in domo hoc videntes, ipsos +interrogate, qui dicent vobis veritatem: Muliere autem sic dicente, Ecce +vnus de Alexandria praesens rogauit Kadi vt mitteret pro eis, dicens eos +esse homines maximæ scientiæ et scripturas bene scire, et ideo dixit bonum +esse cum illis de fide disputare: Qui misit pro illis, et adducti sunt isti +quatuor, quorum nomina sunt frater de Tolentino de Marchia, frater Iacobus +de Padua, frater Demetrius Laicus, Petrus de Senis. Dimisso autem fratre +Petro, vt res suas custodiret, ad Kadi perrexerunt, qui coepit cum illis de +fide nostra disputare; dicens Christum tantum hominem esse et non Deum. E +contra frater Thomas rationibus et exemplis Christum verum Deum et hominem +esse euidenter ostendit, et in tantum confudit Kadi, et infideles qui cum +eo tenuerunt, quod non habuerunt quid rationabiliter contradicere: Tunc +videns Kadi se sic confusum, incepit clamare sic; Et quid dicis de +Machometo? Respondit frater Thomas: Si tibi probauimus Christum verum Deum +et hominem esse, qui legem posuit inter homines, et Machometus è contrario +venit, et legem contrariam docuit, si sapiens sis optime scire poteris, +quid de eo dicendum sit. Iterum Kadi et alij Saraceni clamabant, Et tu quid +iterum de Machometo dicis? Tunc frater T. respondit: vos omnes videre +potestis, quid dico de eo. Tum ex quo vultis quod plane loquar de eo, dico +quod Machometus vester filius perditionis est, et in inferno cum Diabolo +patre suo. Et non solum ipse, sed omnes ibi erunt qui tenent legem hanc, +quia ipsa tota pestifera est, et falsa, et contra Deum, et contra salutem +animæ. Hoc audientes Saraceni, coeperunt clamare, moriatur, moriatur ille, +qui sic contra Prophetam locutus est. Tunc acceperunt fratres et in sole +vrente stare permiserunt, vt ex calore solis adusti, dira morte interirent. +Tantus enim est calor solis ibi, quòd si homo in eo per spacium vnius missæ +persisteret, moreretur; fratres tamen illi sani et hilares à tertia vsque +ad nonam laudantes et glorificantes dominum in ardore solis permanserunt, +quod videntes Saraceni stupefacti ad fratres venerunt, et dixerunt, volumus +ignem accendere copiosum, et in illum vos proijcere, et si fides vestra sit +vt dicitis, ignis non poterit vos comburere: si autem vos combusserit, +patebit quòd fides vestra nulla sit. Responderunt fratres; parati sumus pro +fide nostra ignem, carcerem, et vincula, et omnium tormentorum genera +tolerare: verum tamen scire debetis, quòd si ignis potestatem habeat +comburendi nos hoc non erit propter fidem nostram, sed propter peccata +nostra: fides enim nostra perfectissima et verissima est, et non est alia +in mundo in qua animsæ hominum possunt saluæ fieri; Dum autem ordinaretur +quòd fratres conburerentur, rumor insonuit per totam ciuitatem, de qua +omnes senes, et iuuenes, viri et mulieres, qui ire poterant, accurrerunt ad +illud spectaculum intuendum. Fratres autem ducti fuerunt ad plateam +ciuitatis, vbi accensus est ignis copiosus, in quen frater Thomas voluit se +proijcere, sed quidam Saracenus cepit eam per caputium et retraxit dicens; +Non vadus tu cum sis senex, quia carmen aliquod vel experimentum habere +posses super te, quare te ignis non posset laedere, sed alium ire in ignem +permittas. Tunc 4 Saraceni sumentes fratrem Iacobum, eum in ignem proijcere +volebant; quibus ille, permittatis, me quia libenter pro fide mea ignem +intrabo: Cui Saraceni non adquiescentes eum violentèr in ignem proiecerunt: +ignis autem ita accensus erat, quòd nullus eum videre poteret, vocem tamen +eius audierunt, inuocantem semper nomen virginis gloriosæ; Igne autem +totalitèr consumpto stetit frater Iacobus super prunas illaesus, et laetus, +manibus in modum crucis eleuatis, in coelum respiciens, et Deum laudans et +glorificans, qui sic declararet fidem suam: nihil autem in eo nec pannus, +nec capillus laesus per ignem inuentus est; Quod videns populus vnanimitèr +conclamare coepit, sancti sunt, sancti sunt, nefas est offendere eos, modò +videmus quia fides eorum bona et sancta est. Tunc clamare coepit Kadi: +sanctus non est ille, quia combustus non est, quia tunica quam portat est +de lana terræ Habraæ, et ideò nudus exspolietur, et in ignem proijciatur, +et videbitur si comburetur vel non. Tunc Saraceni pessimi ad praeceptum +Kadi ignem in duplo magis quàm priùs accenderunt, et fratrem Iacobum +nudantes, corpus suum abluerunt, et oleo abundantissimè vnxerunt, insuper +et oleum maximum in struem lignorum ex quibus ignis fieret, fuderunt, et +igne accenso fratrem in ipsum proiecerunt. Frater autem Thomas, et frater +Demetrius extra populum in loco separato flexis genibus orantes cum +lachrymis deuotioni se dederunt Frater autem Iocobus iterum ignem exiuit +illaesus sicut prius fecerat: quod videns omnis populus clamare coepit, +peccatum est, deccatum est, offendere eos, quià sancti sunt. Hoc autem +tantum miraculum videns Melich. i. potestas ciuitatis, vocauit ad se +fratrem Iacobum, et fecit eum ponere indumenta, sua, et dixit, videte +fratres, Ite cum gratia Dei, quia nullum malum patiemini a nobis, modò benè +videmus vos sanctos esse, et fidem vestram bonam ac veram esse; et ideo +consulimus vobis, vt de ista terra exeatis, quàm citiùs poteritis, quia +Kadi pro posse suo vobis nocere curabit, quia sic confudistis eum: Hora +autem tunc erat quasi completorij, et dixerunt illi de populo, attoniti, +admirati, et stupefacti, tot, et tanta mirabilia vidimus ab istis +hominibus, quòd nescimus quid tenere et obseruare debemus. Melich verò +fecit duci illos tres fratres vltra vnum paruum brachium maris in quendam +Burgum modicum ab illa ciuitate distantem: ad quem etiam ille in cuius iam +domo fuerant hospitati associauit eos, vbi in domo cuiusdam idolatri +recepti sunt. Dum haec argerenter, Kadi iuit ad Melich, dicens quid +facimus? Lex Machometi destructa est, veruntamen hoc scire debes, quod +Machomet praecepit in suo Alcorano, quod si quis vnum Christianum +interficeret, tantum mereretur, ac si in Mecha ad ipsum peregrinaretur. Est +enim Alkoranus lex Sarracenorum sicut Euangelium, Mecha, verò est locus vbi +iacet Machomet. Quem locum ita visitant Saraceni, sicut Christiani +sepulchram Christi. Tunc Melich respondet, vade, et fac sicut vis: quo +dicto statim Kadi accepit quatuor homines armatos vt irent, et illos +fratres interficerent, qui cùm aquam transijssent, facta est nox, et illo +sero eos non inuenerunt, statim Melieh omnes Christianos in ciuitate capi +fecit, et incarcerauit, media autem nocte fratres surrexerunt dicere +matutinum, quos illi Saraceni qui missi fuerant, inuenerunt, et extra +burgum, sub quadam arbore adduxerunt, dixerunt eis. Sciatis fratres nos +mandatum habere a Kadi et Melich interficere vos, quod tamen faciemus +inuiti, quia vos estis boni homines et sancti, sed non audemus aliter +facere; quia si iussa sua non perficeremus, et nos cum liberis nostris et +vxoribus moreremur. Tunc fratres responderunt, vos qui huc venistis, et +tale mandatum recepistis, vt per mortem temporalem vitam æternam +adipiscamur, quod vobis iniunctum est perficite; quia pro amore domini +nostri Iesu Christi, qui pro nobis crucifigi et mori dignatus est, et pro +fide nostra, parati sumus omnia tormenta, et etiam mortem libenter +sustinere. Christianas autem qui fratres comitabatur, multum cum illis +quatuor armatis altercatus est dicens, quod si gladium haberet, vel eos à +nece tam sanctorum hominum impediret, vel ipse cum eis interfectus esset. +Tunc armati fecerunt fratres se exspoliare, et frater Thomas primus iunctis +manibus in modum crucis genuflectens capitis abscissionem suscepit: Fratrem +verò Iacobum vnus percussit in capite, et eum vsque ad oculos scidit, et +alio ictu totum caput abscidit. Frater autem Demetrius, primò percussus est +cum gladio in pectore, et secundò caput suum abscissum est: Statim vt +fratres suum martyrium compleuerunt, aer ita lucidus effectus est, quod +omnes admirati sunt, et luna maximam claritatem ostendit. Statim quasi +subito tanta tonitrua, et fulgura, et coruscationes, et obscuritas fiebant, +quòd omnes mori crediderunt: Nauis etiam illa quæ illos debuerat deportasse +submersa est cum omnibus quæ in se habuit, ita quod nunquam de illa posteà +aliquid scitum est. Facto mane misit Kadi pro rebus fratrum prædictorum +nostrorum, et tunc inuentus est frater Petrus de Senis quartus socius +fratrum prædictorum, quem ad Kadi duxerunt: Cui Kadi, et alij Saraceni +maxima promittentes persuaserunt quòd fidem suam renueret, et legem +Machometi confiteretur, et teneret. Frater autem Petrus de illis truffabat, +eos multum deridendo, quem de mane vsque ad meridiem diuersis pænarum ac +tormentorum generibus affixerunt ipso semper constantissimè in fide, et in +Dei laudibus persistente, et fidem illorum Machometi deridente et +destruente. Videntes autem Saraceni eum non posse a suo proposito euelli, +eum super quandam arborem suspenderunt, in qua de nona vsque ad noctem +viuus et illaesus pependit: nocte verò ipsum de arbore sumpserunt, et +videntes illum laetum, viuum et illaesum per medium suum corpus diuiserunt, +mane autem facto nihil de corpore eius inuentum est, vni tamen personæ fide +dignæ reuelatum est, quod Deus corpus eius occultauerat reuelandum in certo +tempore, quandò Deo placuerit Sanctorum corpora manifestare. Vt autem Deus +ostenderet animas suorum martyrum iam in coelis consistere, et congaudere +cum Deo et Angelis et alijs Sanctis eius, die sequenti post martyrium +fratrum praedictorum Melich dormitioni se dedit, et ecce apparuerunt sibi +isti fratres gloriosi, et sicut Sol, lucidi, singulos enses tenentes in +manibus, et supra eum eos sic vibrantes, quod vt si eum perfodere ac +diuidere vellent: qui excitatus horribilitèr exclamauit sic, quòd totam +familiam terruit: quæ sibi accurrens quaesiuit, quid sibi esset? quibus +ille, Illi Raban Franchi quos interfici iussi, venerunt hac ad me cum +ensibus, volentes me interficere. Et statim Melich misit pro Kadi, referens +sibi visionem et petens consilium, et consolationem, quia timuit per eos +finaliter interire. Tunc Kadi sibi consuluit, vt illis maximas eleemosynas +faceret, si de manibus interfectorum euadere vellet. Tunc misit pro +Christianis quos in carcere intrudi praeceperat: A quibus cum ad eum +venissent indulgentiam petijt pro facto suo, dicens se esse amodo socium +eorum, et confratrem: Praecepit autem et legem statuit, quòd pro tempore +suo, si quis aliquem Christianum offenderet, statim moreretur, et sic omnes +illaesos, et indemnes abire permisit: Pro illis autem quatuor fratribus +interfectis quatuor mosquetas. (i.) Ecclesias ædificari fecit, quas per +Sacerdotes Saracenorum inhabitari fecit. Audiens autem imperator Dodsi +istos tres fratres talem sententiam subijsse, misit pro Melich, vt vinctus +ad eum duceretur, A quo cùm adductus esset, quaesiuit imperator, quare ita +crudeliter illos fratres iusserat interfici, respondit, quia subuertere +volebant legem nostram, et malum et blasphemiam de propheta nostro +dicebant: et imperator ad eum; O crudelissime canis, cùm videres quod Deus +omnipotens bis ab igne eos liberauerit, quo modo ausus fuisti illis mortem +inferre tam crudelem. Et edicta sententia, ipsum Melich cum tota sua +familia per medium scindi fecit, sicut ipse talem mortem fratri inflixerat. +Kadi verò audiens, de terra illa, et etiam de imperatoris illius dominio +clàm fugit, et sic euasit. + + +De miraculis quatuor fratrum occisorum + +Est autem consuetudo in terra illa, quòd corpora mortua non traduntur +sepulturæ, sed in campis dimittuntur, et ex calore Solis citò resoluuntur, +et sic consumantur: Corpora autem trium fratrum praedictorum per 14. dies +illic in fuerore Solis iacuerunt, et ita recentia et redolentia inuenta +fuerunt sicut illa die quandò martirizati erant: quod videntes Christiani +qui in illa terra habitabant, praedicta corpora ceperunt, et honorificè +sepelierunt. Ego autem Odoricus audiens factum et martyrium illorum +fratrum, iui illuc, et corpora eorum effodi, et ossa omnia mecum accepi, et +in pulchris towallijs colligaui, et in Indiam superiorem ad vnum locum +fratrum nostrorum ea deportaui, habens mecum socium, et vnum famulum. Cum +autem essemus in via, hospitabamus in domo cuiusdam hospitarij, et ipsa +ossa capiti meo supposui, et dormiui: Et dùm dormirem domus illa à +Saracenis subitò accendebatur, vt me cum domo comburerent. Domo autem sic +accensa, socius meus et famulus de domo exierunt, et me solum cum ossibus +dimiserunt, qui videns ignem supra me, ossa accepi et cum illis in angulos +domus recollegi. Tres autem anguli domus statim combusti fuerunt, angulo in +quo steti cum ossibus saluo remanente: Supra me autem ignis se tenuit in +modum aeris lucidi, nec descendit quamdiu ibi persistebam; quàm citò autem +cum ossibus exiui, statim tota pars illa sicut aliæ priores igne consumpta +est, et multa alia loca circumadiacentia combusta sunt. Aliud miraculum +contigit, me cum ossibus per mare proficiente ad ciuitatem Polumbrum vbi +piper nascitur abundantèr, quia nobis ventus totaliter defecit: quapropter +venerunt Idolatræ adorantes Deos suos pro vento prospero, quem tamen non +obtinuerunt: Tunc Saraceni suas inuocationes, et adorationes laboriose +fecerunt, sed nihil profecerunt: Et praeceptum est mihi et socio meo vt +orationes funderemus Deo nostro: Et dixit rector nauis in Armenico mihi, +quod alij non intelligerent: quòd nisi possemus ventum prosperum à Deo +nostro impetrare, nos cum ossibus in mare proijcerent: Tunc ego et socius +fecimus orationes, vouentes multas missas de beata virgine celebrare, sic +quòd ventum placeret sibi nobis impetrare. Cum autem tempus transiret, et +ventus non veniret, accepi vnum de ossibus, et dedi famulo, vt ad caput +nauis iret, et clàm in mare proijceret; quo proiecto statim affuit ventus +prosper qui nunquam nobis defecit, vsquequò peruenimus ad portum, meritis +istorum martyrum cum salute. Deinde ascendimus aliam nauem vt in Indiam +superiorem iremus; Et venimus ad quandam ciuitatem vocatam Carchan in qua +sunt duo loca fratrum nostrorum, et ibi reponere istas reliquias volebamus. +In naui autem illa erant plus 700. mercatores et alij: Nunc illi Idolatræ +istam consuetudinem habebant, quòd semper antequàm ad portum applicuerint, +totam nauem perquirerent, si isti aliqua ossa mortuorum animalium +inuenirent, qui reperta statim in mare proijcerent, et per hoc bonum portum +attingere, et mortis periculum euadere crederent. Cùm autem frequentèr +perquirerent, et illa ossa frequenter tangerent, semper oculi delusi +fuerunt, sic quòd illa non perpenderunt; et sic ad locum fratrum +deportauimus cum omni reuerentia, vbi in pace requiescunt; vbi etiam inter +idolatras Deus continuè miracula operatur. Cum enim aliquo morbo grauantur, +in terra illa vbi fratres passi sunt ipsi vadunt; et de terra vbi corpora +sanguinolenta iacuerunt sumunt quam abluunt, et ablutionem bibunt, et sic +ab infirmitatibus suis liberantur. + + +Quo modo habetur Piper, et vbi nascitur. + +[Sidenote: Malabar.] Vt autem videatur quo modo habetur piper, sciendum +quòd in quodam imperio ad quod applicui, nomine Minibar, nascitur, et in +nulla parte mundi tantum, quantum ibi; Nemus enim in quo nascitur, continet +octodecim dietas, et in ipso nemore sunt duæ ciuitates vna nomine +Flandrini, alia nomine Cyncilim: In Flandrina habitant Iudaei aliqui et +aliqui Christiani, inter quos est bellum frequenter, sed Christiani vincunt +Iudaeos semper: In isto nemore habetur piper per istum modum. Nam primò +nascitur in folijs olerum, quæ iuxta magnas arbores plantantur, sicut nos +ponimus vites; et producunt fructum, sicut racemi nostri producunt vuas; +sed quandò maturescunt sunt viridis coloris, et sic vindemiantur vt inter +nos vindemiantut vuæ, et ponuntur grana ad solem vt desiccentur: quæ +desiccata reponuntur in vasis terreis, et sic fit piper, et custoditur. In +isto autem nemore sunt flumina multa in quibus sunt Crocodili multi, et +multi alij serpentes sunt in illo nemore, quos homines per stupam et paleas +comburunt, et sic ad colligendum piper securé accedunt. [Sidenote: +Polumbrum ciuitas. Adoratio bouis.] A capite illius nemoris versus meridiem +est ciuitas Polumbrum in qua maxima mercimonia cuiuscunque generis +reperiuntur Omnes autem de terra illa bouem viuum sicut Deum suum adorant, +quem 6. annis faciunt laborare, et in septimo faciunt ipsum quiescere ab +omni opere; ponentes ipsum in loco solemni, et communi, et dicentes ipsum +esse animal sanctum. Hunc autem ritum obseruant: quolibet mane accipiunt +duas pelues de auro, vel de argento, et vnam submittunt vrinæ bouis, et +aliam stercori, de vrina lauant sibi faciem et oculos, et omnes 5. sensus: +de stercore verò ponunt in vtròque oculo, posteà liniunt summitates +genarum, et tertiò pectus, et ex tunc dicunt se sanctificatos pro toto die +illo: et sicut facit populus, ita etiam facit rex et regina. Isti etiam +aliud idolum mortuum adorant, quod in medietate vna superior est homo, et +in alia est bos, et iliud idolum dat eis responsa, et aliquotièns pro +stipendio petit sanguinem, 40. virginum: et ideo homines illius regionis +ita vouent filias suas et filios, sicut Christiani aliqui alicui religioni, +vel sancto in coelis. Et per istum modum immolant filios et filias, et +multi homines per istum ritum moriuntur ante idolum illud, et multa alia +abominabilia facit populus iste bestialis, et multa mirabilia vidi inter +eos quæ nolui hic inserere. [Sidenote: Combustio mortuorum.] Aliam +consuetudinem vilissimam habet gens illa: Nam quamdo homo moritur, +comburunt ipsum mortuum, et si vxorem habet, ipsam comburunt viuam, quia +dicunt quod ipsa ibit in aratura, et cultura cum viro suo in alio mundo: si +autem vxor illa habeat liberos ex viro suo, potest manere cum eis si velit +sine verecundia et improperio, communiter tamen omnes praeeligunt comburi +cum marito; si autem vxor praemoriatur viro, lex illa non obligat virum, +sed potest aliam vxorem ducere. Aliam consuetudinem habet gens illa, quòd +foeminæ ibi bibunt vinum, et homines non: foeminæ etiam faciunt sibi radi +cilia, et supercilia, et barbam, et homines non: et sic de multis alijs +vilibus contra naturam sexus eorum. [Sidenote: Mobar regnum vel Maliapor.] +Ab isto regno iui decem dietas ad iliud regnum dictum Mobar, quod habet in +se multas ciuitates, et in illo requiescit in vna ecclesia corpus beati +Thomæ Apostoli, et est ecclesia illa plena idolis, et in circuitu ecclesiæ +simul Cononici viuunt in 15 domibus Nestoriani, id est, mali Christiani, et +schismatici. + + +De quodam idolo mirabili, et de quibusdam ritibus eorum. + +In hoc regno est vnum Idolum mirabile, quod omnes Indi reuerentur: et est +statura hominis ita magni, sicut noster Christophorus depictus, et est +totum de auro purissimo et splendidissimo, et circa collum habet vnam +chordulam sericam cum lapidibus pretiosissimis, quorum aliquis valet plus +quàm vnum regnum: Domus idoli est tota de auro, scilicet in tecto, et +pauimento, et superficie parietum interius et exterius. Ad illud idolum +peregrinantur Indi, sicut nos ad S. Petrum: Alij veniunt cum chorda ad +collum, alij cum manibus retro ligatis, alij cum cultello in brachio vel +tibia defixo, et si post peregrinationem fiat brachium marcidum, illum +reputant sanctum, et benè cum Deo suo. Iuxta ecclesiam illius idoli est +lacus vnus manufactus, et manifestus, in quem peregrini proijciunt aurum et +argentum, et lapides pretiosos in honorem Idoli, et ad ædificationem +ecclesiæ suæ, et ideo quando aliquid debet ornari, vel reparari, vadunt +homines ad hunc lacum, et proiecta extrahunt: die autem annua +constructionis illius idoli, rex et regina, cum toto populo et omnibus +peregrinis accedunt, et ponunt illud idolum in vno curru pretiosissimo +ipsum de ecclesia educentes cum Canticis, et omni genere musicorum, et +multae virgines antecedunt ipsum binæ et binæ, processionaliter combinatæ +modulantes: [Sidenote: Crudelissima Satanæ tyrannis, et carnificina.] +Peregrini etiam multi ponunt se sub curru, vt transeat Deus supra eos; et +omnes super quos currus transit, comminuit, et per medium scindit, et +interficit, et per hoc reputant se mori pro deo suo, sanctè et securè: et +in omni anno hoc modo moriuntur in via sub idolo plusquam 500. homines, +quorum corpora comburuntur, et cineres sicut reliquiæ custodiuntur, quia +sic pro Deo suo moriuntur. Alium ritum habent, quando aliquis homo offert +se mori pro deo suo, conueniunt omnes amici eius et parentes cum +histrionibus multis, facientes sibi festum magnum, et post festum appendunt +collo eius 5 cultellos acutissimos ducentes eum ante idolum, quo cum +peruenerit, sumit vnum ex cultellis, et clamat alta voce, pro deo meo +incido mihi de carne mea, et frustum incisum proijcit in faciem idoli: +vltima vero incisione per quam seipsum interficit, dicit, me mori pro deo +meo permitto, quo mortuo corpus eius comburitur, et sanctum fore ab omnibus +creditur. Rex illius regionis est ditissimus in auro et argento, et gemmis +pretiosis; ibi etiam sunt margaritæ pulchriores de mundo. Indè transiens +iui per mare oceanum versus meridiem per 50 dietas ad unam terram vocatam +Lammori, in qua ex immensitate caloris, tam viri quam foeminæ omnes +incedunt nudi in toto corpore: Qui videntes me vestitum, deridebant me, +dicentes Deum, Adam et Euam fecisse nudos. In illa regione omnes mulieres +sunt communes, ita quod nullus potest dicere, haec est vxor mea, et cùm +mulier aliqua parit filium vel filiam dat cui vult de hijs qui +concubuerunt: Tota etiam terra illius regionis habetur in communi, ita quod +non meum et tuum in diuisione terrarum, domos tamen habent speciales: +Carnes humanæ quando homo est pinguis ita benè comeduntur, sicut inter nos +bouinæ: et licet gens sit pestifera, tamen terra optima est, et abundat in +omnibus bonis, carnibus, bladis, riso, auro, argento, et lignis Aloe, +canfari, et multis alijs. Mercatores autem cum accedunt ad hanc regionem +ducunt secum homines pingues vendentes illos genti illius regionis, sicut +nos vendimus porcos, qui statim occidunt eos et comedunt. [Sidenote: +Simoltra vel Samotra.] In hac insula versus meridiem est aliud regnum +vocatum Symolcra, in quo tam viri quam mulieres signant se ferro calido in +facie, in 12. partibus, Et hij semper bellant cum hominibus nudis in alia +regione. Vltra transiú ad aliam insulam quæ vocatur Iaua cuius ambitus per +mare est trium millium milliarium, et rex illius insulæ habet sub se 7. +reges coronatos, et haec insula optimè inhabitatur, et melior secunda de +mundo reputatur. In ea nascuntur in copia garyophylli, cubibez, et nuces +muscatæ: et breuiter omnes species ibi sunt, et maxima abundantia omnium +victualium praeterquam vini. Rex illius terræ habet palatium nobilissimum +inter omnia quæ vidi altissime stat, et gradus et scalas habet altissimos, +quorum semper vnus gradus est aureus, alius argenteus: Pauimentum vero vnum +laterem habet de auro, alium de argento. Parietes vero omnes interius sunt +laminati laminis aureis, in quibus sculpti sunt Equites de auro habentes +circa caput circulum aureum plenum lapidibus pretiosis: Tectum est de auro +puro. Cum isto rege ille magnus Canis de Katay frequenter fuit in bello: +Quem tamen semper ille Rex vicit et superauit. + + +De arboribus dantibus farinam, et mel, et venenum. + +Iuxta istam Insulam est alia contrata vocata Panten, vel alio nomine +Tathalamasim, [Marginal note: Vel Malasmi.] et Rex illius contratæ multas +insulas habet sub se. In illa terra sunt arbores dantes farinam, et mel, et +vinum, et etiam venenum periculosius quod sit in mundo, quia contra illud +non est remedium, nisi vnum solum, et est illud. Si aliquis illud venenum +sumpsisset, si velit liberari, sumat stercus hominis et cum aqua temperet, +et in bona quantitate bíbat, et statim fugat venenum faciens exire per +inferiores partes. Farinam autem faciunt arbores hoc modo, sunt magnæ et +bassæ, et quandò inciduntur cum securi propè terram, exit de stipite liquor +quidam secut gummæ, quem accipiunt homines et ponunt in sacculis de folijs +factis, et per quindecim dies in sole dimittunt, et in fine decimi quinti +diei ex isto liquore desiccato fit farina, quam primò ponunt in aqua maris, +posteà lauant eam cum aqua dulci, et fit pasta valdè bona et odorifera, de +qua faciunt cibos vel panes sicut placet eis. De quibus panibus ego comedi, +et est panis exterius pulcher, sed interius aliquantulum niger. [Sidenote: +Mare quod semper currit versus meridiem.] In hac contrata est mare mortuum +quod semper currit versus meridiem, in quod si homo ceciderit, nunquam +posteà comparet. In contrata illa inueniuntur Cannæ longissimæ plures +passus habentes quàm 60 et sunt magnæ vt arbores. Aliæ etiam Cannæ sunt ibi +quæ vocantur Cassan quæ per terram diriguntur vt gramen, et in quolibet +nodo earum ramuli producuntur qui etiam prolongantur super terram per vnum +miliare ferè: in hijs Cannis reperiuntur lapides, quorum si quis vnum super +se portauerit, hon poterit incidi aliquo ferro, et ideò, communiter homines +illius contratæ portant illos lapides super: Multi etiam faciunt pueros +suos dum sunt parui incidi in vno brachio, et in vulnere ponunt vnum de +illis lapidibus, et faciunt vulnus recludere se per vnum puluerem de quodam +pisce, cuius nomen ignoro, qui puluis statim vulnus consolidat et sanat: et +virtute illorum lapidum communitèr isti homines triumphant in bellis, et in +mari, nec possent isti homines laedi per aliqua arma ferra: Vnum tamen +remedium est, quod aduersarij illius gentis scientes virtutem lapidum, +prouident sibi propugnacula ferrea contra spicula illorum, et arma venenata +de veneno arborum, et in manu portant palos ligneos accutissimos et ita +duros in extremitate sicut esset ferrum: Similitér sagittant cum sagittis +sino ferro, et sic confundunt aliquos et perforant inermes ex lapidum +securitate. [Sidenote: Vela ex arundinibus facta.] De istis etiam Cannis +Cassan faciunt sibi vela pro suis nauibus et domunculas paruas, et multa +sibi necessaria. [Sidenote: Campa.] Inde recessi per multas dietas ad aliud +regnum vocatum Campa, pulcherrimum, et opulentissimum in omnibus +victualibus. Cuius rex quamdo fui ibi tot habuit vxores, et alias mulieres, +quod de illis 300. filios et filias habuit. Iste rex habet decies millesies +et quatuor elephantum domesticorum, quos ita facit custodiri sicut inter +nos custodiunt boues, vel greges in pascuis. + + +De multitudine Piscium, qui se proijciunt in aridam. + +In hac contrata vnum mirabile valde reperitur, quod vnaquaeque generatio +piscium in mari ad istam contratam venit in tanta quantitate, quod per +magnum spatium maris nil videtur nisi dorsa piscium, et super aridam se +proijciunt quando prope ripam sunt, et permittunt homines per tres dies +venire, et de illis sumere quantum placuerint, et tunc redeunt ad mare: +Post illam speciem per illum modum venit alia species, et offert se, et sic +de omnibus speciebus, semel tamen tantum hoc faciunt in anno. Et quaesiui à +gente illa quomodo et qualiter hoc possit fieri? responderunt quod hoc modo +pisces per naturam docentur venire, et imperatorem suum reuereri. +[Sidenote: Testitudines magnæ.] Ibi etiam sunt testudines ita magnæ sicut +est vnus furnus, et multa alia vidi quæ incredibilia forent, nisi homo illa +vidisset. In illa etiam contrata homo mortuus conburitur, et vxor viua cum +eo, sicut superius de alia contrata dictum est, quia dicunt homines illi +quod illa vadit ad alium mundum ad morandum cum eo, ne ibi aliam vxorem +accipiat. [Sidenote: Moumoran.] Vltra transiui per mare Oceanum versus +meridiem, et transiui per multas contratas et insulas, quarum vna vocatur +Moumoran, et habet in circuitu 2000. milliaria, in qua homines portant +facies caninas et mulieres similitèr, et vnum bouem adorant pro Deo suo, et +ideo quilibet vnum bouem aureum vel argenteum in fronte portat: Homines +illius contratæ et mulieres vadunt totaliter nudi, nisi quod vnum pannum +lineum portant ante verenda sua. Homines illius regionis sunt maximi et +fortissimi, et quia vadunt nudi, quando debent bellare, portant vnum scutum +de ferro, quod cooperit eos à capite vsque ad pedes, et si contingat eos +aliquem de aduersarijs capere in bello qui pecunia non possit redimi, +statim comedunt eum; si autem possit se redimere pecunia, illum abire +permittunt: Rex eorum portat 300. margaritas ad collum suum maximas et +pulcherrimas, et 300. orationes omni die dicit Deo suo: Hic etiam portat in +digito suo vnum lapidem longitudinis vnius spansæ, et dum habet illum +videtur ab alijs quasi vna flamma ignis, et ideò nullus audet sibi +appropinquare, et dicitur quòd non est lapis in mundo pretiosior illo. +Magnus autem imperator Tartarorum de Katai, nunquam vi, nec pecunia, nec +ingenio illum obtinere potuit, cùm tamen circa hoc laborauerit. + + +De Insula Ceilan, et de monte vbi Adam planxit Abel filium suum. + +[Sidenote: Ceilan insula.] Transiui per aliam insulam vocatam Ceilan, quæ +habet in ambitu plusquam duo millia milliaria, in qua sunt serpentes quasi +infiniti, et maxima multitudo leonum, vrsarum, et omnium animalium +rapacium, et siluestrium, et potissimè elephantum. In illa contrata est +mons maximus, in quo dicunt gentes illius regionis quod Adam planxit Abel +filium suum 500. annis. In medio illius montis est planicies pulcherrima, +in qua est lacus paruus multum habens de aqua, et homines illi dicunt aquam +illam fuisse de lachrymis Adæ et Euæ, sed probaui hoc falsum esse, quia +vidi aquam in lacu scaturire: haec aqua plena est hirudinibus et +sanguisugis, et lapidibus pretiosis; istos lapides rex non accepit sibi, +sed semel vel bis in anno permittit pauperes sub aqua ire pro lapidibus, et +omnes quot possunt colligere illis concedit, vt orent pro anima sua. Vt +autem possint sub aqua ire accipiunt lymones, et cum illis vngunt se valdè +benè, et sic nudos se in aquam submergunt, et sanguisugæ illis nocere non +possunt. Ab isto lacu aqua exit et currit vsque ad mare, et in transitu +quando retrahit se, fodiuntur Rubiæ, et adamantes, et margaritæ, et aliæ +gemmæ pretiosæ: vndè opinio est quod rex ille magis abundat lapidibus +pretiosis, quàm aliquis in mundo. In contrata illa sunt quasi omnia genera +animalium et auium; et dixerunt mihi gentes illæ quod animalia illa nullum +forensem inuadunt, nec offendunt, sed tantum homines illius regionis. Vidi +in illa insula aues ita magnas sicut sunt hic anseres, habentes duo capita, +et alia mirabilia quæ non scribo. [Sidenote: Bodin Insula.] Vltra versus +meridiem transiui, et applicui, ad insulam quandam quæ vocatur Bodin, quod +idem est quod immundum in lingua nostra. In ea morantur pessimi homines, +qui comedunt carnes crudas, et omnem immunditiam faciunt quæ quasi +excogitari non poterit; nam pater comedit filium et filius patrem, et +maritus vxorem, et è contrario, et hoc per hunc modum: si pater alicuius +infirmetur, filius vadet ad Astrologum sacerdotem, scz. rogans eum quod +consulat Deum suum, si pater de tali infirmitate euadet, vel non. Tunc ambo +vadunt ad idolum aureum, vel argenteum, facientes orationes in hac forma. +Domine, tu es Deus noster, te adoramus, et rogamus vt nobis respondeas, +debetnè talis à tali infirmitate mori vel liberari? Tunc Daemon respondet, +et si dicat, viuet, filius vadit et ministrat illi vsque ad plenam +conualescentiam: Si autem dicat, morietur, Sacerdos ibit ad eum, et vnum +pannum super os eius ponet, et suffocabit eum, et ipsum mortuum incidet in +frusta, et inuitabuntur omnes amici, et parentes eius ad comedendum eum cum +canticis, et omni laetitia, ossa tamen eius honorificè sepelient. Cum autem +ego eos de tali ritu reprehendi, quaerens causam: Respondit vnus mihi, hoc +facimus ne vermes carnes eius comedant, tunc eius anima magnam poenam +sustinerit, nec poteram euellere eos ab isto errore: et multæ aliæ +nouitates sunt ibi, quas non crederent, nisi qui viderent. Ego autem coram +Deo nihil hic refero, nisi illud de quo certus sum sicut homo certificari +poterit. De ista insula inquisiui à multis expertis, qui omnes vno ore +responderunt mihi, dicentes, quod ista India 4400. insulas continet sub se, +siue in se, in qua etiam sunt 64. reges coronati, et etiam dicunt quod +maior pars illius insulæ benè inhabitatur. Et hic istius Indiæ facio finem. + + +De india superiori, et de Prouincia Manci. + +In primis refero, quòd cum transirem per mare Oceanum per multas dietas +versus Orientem, perueni ad illam magnam prouinciam Manci, quæ India +vocatur à Latinis. De ista India superiori inquisiui à Christianis, +Saracenis, idolatris, et omnibus, qui officiales sunt domini Canis magni, +qui omnes vno ore responderunt, quod hæ prouincia Manci habet plusquam +2000, magnarum ciuitatum, et in ipsa est maxima copia omnium victualium, +puta, panis, vini, risi, carnium, piscium, &c. Omnes homines istius +prouinciæ sunt artifices et mercatores, qui pro quacunque penuria, dummodo +proprijs manibus iuuare se possent per labores, nunquam ab aliquo +eleemosynam peterent. Viri istius prouinciæ sunt satis formosi, sed +pallidi, et rasas et paruas barbas habentes; foeminæ vero sunt pulcherrimæ +inter omnes do mundo. Prima ciuitas ad quam veni de ista India vocatur +Ceuskalon, [Marginal note: Vel Ceuscala.] et distat à mari per vnam dietam, +positaque est super flumen, cuius aqua propè mare cui contignatur, ascendit +super terram per 12. dietas. Totus populus illius Indiæ idolatrat. Ista +autem ciuitas tantum nauigium habet, quod incredibile foret nisi videnti. +[Sidenote: Hi sunt alcatrarsi vel onocratoli.] In hac ciuitate vidi quod +300. libræ de bono et recenti zinzibero habentur pro minori quam pro vno +grosso: Ibi sunt anseres grossiores et pulchriores, et maius forum de +illis, quam sit in mundo, vt credo, et sunt albissimi sicut lac, et habent +vnum os super caput quantitatis oui, et habet colorem sanguineum, sub gula +habent vnam pellem pendentem semipedalem: Pinguissimi sunt, et optimi fori: +et ita est de anatibus, et gallinis, quæ magnæ sunt valdé in illa terra +plusquam duæ de nostris. Ibi sunt serpentes maximi, et capiuntur et a gente +illa comeduntur: vnde qui faceret festum solemne, et non daret serpentes, +nihil reputaret se facere; breuiter in hac ciuitate sunt omnia victualia in +maxima abundantia. Indè transiui per ciuitates multas, et veni ad ciuitatem +nomine Kaitan, [Marginal note: Vel Zaiton.] in qua fratres Minores habent +duo loca, ad quæ portaui de ossibus fratrum nostrorum pro fidi Christi +interfectorum, de quibus supra. In hac est copia omnium victualium pro +leuissimo foro, haec ciuitas ita magna est, sicut bis Bononia, et in ea +multa monasteria religiosorum, qui omnes idolis seruiunt. In vno autem +istorum monasteriorum ego fui, et dictum est mihi quòd inerant 3000. +religiosorum habentium 11000. idoloram, et vnum illorum, quod quasi paruum +inter caetera mihi videbatur, est ita magnum sicut Christophorus noster. +Isti religiosi omni die pascunt Deos suos, vnde semel iui ad videntum +comestionem illam, et vidi quòd illa quæ detulerunt sibi comestibilia sunt, +et calidissima, et multum fumigantia, ita quòd fumus ascendit ad idola, et +dixerunt Deos illo fumo recreari. Totum autem cibum illi reportauerunt et +comederunt, et sic de fumo tantum Deos suos pauerunt. + + +De Ciuitate Fuko. + +Vltra versus Orientem veni ad ciuitatem quæ vocatur Fuko, [Marginal note: +Vel Foqaien.] cuius circuitus continet 30. milliaria, in qua sunt Galli +maximi et pulcherrimi, et gallinæ ita albæ sicut nix, lanam solum pro +pennis habentes sicut pecudes. Haec ciuitas pulcherrima est, et sita supra +mare. Vltra iui per 18. dietas, et pertransij multas terras et ciuitates, +et in transitu veni ad quendam montem magnum, et vidi quod in vno latere +montis omnia animalia erant nigra vt carbo, et homines et mulieres diuersum +modum viuendi habent: ab alio autem latere omnia animalia erant alba sicut +nix, et homines totaliter diuersè ab alijs vixerunt. Ibi omnes foeminæ quæ +sunt desponsatæ portant in signum quod habent maritos vnum magnum barile de +cornu in capita. [Sidenote: Magnum flumen.] Inde transiui per 18. dietas +alias, et veni ad quoddam magnum flumen, et intraui ciuitatem vnam, quæ +transuersum illius fluminis habet pontem maximum, et hospitabar in domo +vnius hospitarij, qui volens mihi complacere, dixit mihi: si velis videre +piscari, veni mecum; et duxit me super pontem, et vidi in brachijs suis +mergos ligatos super perticas, ad quorum gulam vbi ille ligauit vnum filum, +ne illi capientes pisces, comederent eos: Postea in brachio vno posuit 3. +cistas magnas, et tunc dissoluit mergos de perticis, qui statim in aquam +intrauerunt, et pisces ceperunt, et cistas illas repleuerunt in pania hora, +quibus repletis vir ille dissoluit fila à collis eorum, et ipsi reintrantes +flumen se de piscibus recreauerunt, et recreati ad perticas redierunt, et +se ligari sicut priùs permiserunt: Ego autem de illis piscibus comedi, et +optimi mihi videbantur. [Sidenote: Aliâs Cansai, vel Quinzai.] Inde +transiens per multas dietas veni ad vnam ciuitatem quæ vocatur Kanasia, quæ +sonat in lingua nostro ciuitas coeli: Nunquam ita magnam ciuitatem vidi, +Circuitus enim eus continet 100. millaria, nec in ea vidi spatium quin benè +inhabitaretur; Imo vidi multas domus habentes 10. vel 12. solaria vnum +supra aliud: haec habet suburbia maxima continentia maiorem populum quàm +ipsa ciuitas contineat 12. portas habet principales, et in via de qualibet +illarum portarum ad 8. milliaria sunt ciuitates fortè maiores vt æstimo, +quàm est ciuitas Venetiarum, et Padua. Haec ciuitas sita est in aquis quæ +semper stant, et nec fluunt, nec refluunt, vallum tamen habet propter +ventum sicut ciuitas Venetiarum. In ea sunt plus decem mille et 2. pontium, +quorum multos numeraui et transiui, et in qualibet ponte stant custodes +ciuitatis continuè custodientes ciuitatem pro magno Cane imperatore Catai. +Vnum mandatum dicunt gentes illius ciuitatis a domino se recepisse. Nam +quilibet ignis soluit vnum balis, i. 5. cartas bombicis, qui unum florenum +cum dimidio valent, et 10. vel 12. supellectiles facient vnum ignem, et sic +pro vno igne soluent. Isti ignes sunt benè 85. Thuman, eum alijs 4. +Saracenorum quæ faciunt 89. Thuma vero vnum decem milia ignium facit, +reliqui autem de populo ciuitatis sunt alij Christiani, alij mercatores, et +alij transeuntes per terram, vndè maximè fui miratus quo modo tot corpora +hominum poterant simul habitare: in ea est maxima copia victualium, scz. +panis et vini, et carnium de porco praecipué cum alijs necessarijs. + + +De monasterio vbi sunt multa animalia diuersa in quodam monte. + +In illa ciuitate 4. fratres nostri conuerterant vnum potentem ad fidem +Christi, in cuius hospitio continué habitabam, dum fui ibi, qui semèl dixit +mihi, Ara, i. pater, vis tu venire et videre ciuitatem istam: et dixi quòd +sic, et ascendimus vnam barcham, et iuimus ad vnum monasterium maximum, de +quo vocauit vnum religiosum sibi notum, et dixit sibi de me. Iste Raban +Francus, i. religiosus venit de indé vbi sol occidit, et nunc vadit +Cambaleth, vt deprecetur vitam pro magno Cane, et ideò ostendas sibi +aliquid, quòd si reuertatur ad contratas suas possit referre quod tale quid +nouum vidi in Canasia ciuitate: tunc sumpsit ille religiosus duos mastellos +magnos repletos reliquijs quæ supererant de mensa, et duxit me ad vnam +perclusam paruam, quam aperuit cum claue, et aparuit, viridarium gratiosum +et magnum in quod intrauimus, et in illo viridario stat vnas monticulus +sicut vnum campanile, repletus amoenis herbis et arboribus, et dum staremus +ibi, ipse sumpsit cymbalum, et incoepit percutere ipsum sicut percutitur +quando monachi intrant refectorium, ad cuius sonitum multa animalia diuersa +descenderunt de monte illo, aliqua vt simiæ, aliqua vt Cati, Maymones, et +aliqua faciem hominis habentia, et dum sic starem congregauerunt se circa +ipsum, 4000. de illis animalibus, et se in ordinibus collocauerunt, coram +quibus posuit paropsidem et dabat eis comedere, et cum comedissent iterum +cymbalum percussit, et omnia ad loca propria redierunt. Tunc admiratus +inquisiui quæ essent animalia ista? Et respondit mihi quod sunt animæ +nobilium virorum, quas nos hic pascimus amore Dei, qui regit orbem, et +sicut vnus homo fuit nobilis, ita anima eius post mortem in corpus nobilis +animalis intrat. Animæ verò simplicium et rusticorum, corpora vilium +animalium intrant. Incoepi istam abusionem improbare, sed nihil valuit +sibi, non enim poterat credere, quòd aliqua anima posset sine corpore +manere. [Sidenote: Chilenso.] Indè transiui ad quandam ciuitatem nomine +Chilenso, cuius muri per 40. milliaria circuerunt. In ista ciuitate sunt +360. pontes lapidei pulchriores quàm vnquam viderim, et benè inhabitatur, +et nauigium maxinium habet, et copiam omnium victualium et aliorum bonorum. +[Sidenote: Thalay. Kakam.] Inde iui ad quoddam flumen dictum Thalay, quod +vbi est strictius habet in latitudine 7. milliaria, et illud flumen per +medium terræ Pygmæorum transit, quorum ciuitas vocatur Kakam, quæ de +pulchrioribus ciuitatibus mundi est. Isti Pigmaei habent longitudinem trium +spansarum mearum, et faciunt maiora et meliora goton, et bombicinam quàm +aliqui homines in mundo. Indè per illud flumen transiens, veni ad vnam +ciuitatem Ianzu, in qua est vnus locus fratrum nostrorum, et sunt in ea +tres ecclesiæ Nestorianorum: haec ciuitas nobilis est, et magna, habens in +se 48. Thuman ignium, et in ea omnia victualia, et animalia in magna copia, +de quo Christiani viuunt: Dominus istius ciuitatis solum de sale habet in +redditibus 50. Thuman Balisi, et valet balisus vnum florenum cum dimidio: +Ita quod vnum Thuman facit 15. millia florenorum, vnam tamen gratiam facit +dominus populo, quia dimittit ei, ne sit caristia in eo, 200. Thuman. Habet +haec ciuitas consuetudinem, quod quando vnus vult facere conuiuium amicis +suis, ad hoc sunt hospitia deputata, et vbi ille circuit per hospites, +dicens sibi tales amicos meos habebis, quos festabis nomine meo, et tantum +in festo volo expendere, et per illum modum meliùs conuiuant amici in +pluribus hospitijs quam facerent in vno. [Sidenote: Montu.] Per 10. +milliaria ab ista ciuitate in capite fluminis Thalay est vna ciuitas vocata +Montu, quæ maius nauigium habet, quàm viderim in toto mundo; Et omnes naues +ibi sunt albæ sicùt nix, et in ipsis sunt hospitia, et multa alia quæ +nullus homo crederet nisi viderentur. + + +De ciuitate Cambaleth. + +[Sidenote: Caramoran.] Indè transiui per 8. dietas per multas terras et +ciuitates, et veni tandem per aquam dulcem ad quandam ciuitatem nomine +Leneyn, quæ est posita super flumen vocatum Caramoran, quod per medium +Catai transit, et magnum damnum sibi infert, quando erumpit. Indè transiens +per flumen versus Orientem per multas dietas et ciuitates, veni ad vnam +ciuitatem nomine Sumacoto, quæ maiorem copiam habet de serico, quàm aliqua +ciuitas in mundo: Quando enim est maior caristia Serici, ibi 40. libræ +habentur pro minori quàm pro 8. grossis. In ea est copia omnium +mercimoniorum et omnium victualium, panis, vini, carnium, piscium, et +omnium specierum electarum. [Sidenote: Cambalec.] Inde transiui versus +Orientem per multas ciuitates, et veni ad illam nobilem, et nominatam +Cambaleth quæ est ciuitas multum antiqua, et veni ad Catai, et eam ceperunt +Tartari: Et iuxta eam ad dimidium miliare aliam ciuitatem fecerunt, quæ +vocatur Caido et haec 12. portas habet, et semper inter vnam et aliam sunt +duo miliaria, et medium inter illas ciuitates benè inhabitatur, ita quòd +faciunt quasi vnam ciuitatem; Et ambitus istarum duarum ciuitatum est +plusquàm 40. milliaria. [Sidenote: Mandeuil cap. 33.] In hac ciuitate +magnus imperator Canis habet sedem suam principalem, et suum magnum +palatium, cuius muri bene 4. miliaria continent; et infra illud palatium +sunt multa alia palatia dominorum de familia sua. In palatio etiam illo est +vnus mons pulcherrimus consitus arboribus, propter quod mons viridis +nominatur, et in monte palatium amoenissimum in quo communitèr Canis +residet: A latere autem montis est vnus lacus magnus, supra quem pons +pulcherrimus est factus, et in illo lacu est magna copia anserum et anatum, +et omnium auium aquaticarum; et in silua montis copia omnium auium et +ferarum siluestrium, et ideo quando dominus Canis vult venari non oportet +eum exire palatium suum. Palatium vero principale, in quo sedes sua est, +est magnum valde, et habet interius 14. columnas aureas, et omnes muri eius +cooperti sunt pellibus rubeis quæ dicuntur nobiliores pelles de mundo: Et +in medio palatij est vna pigna altitudinis duorum passuum, quæ tota est de +vno lapide pretioso nomine merdochas; et est tota circumligata auro, et in +quolibet angulo eius est vnum serpens de auro qui verberatos fortissimé: +Habet etiam haec pignaretia de margaritis, et per istam pignam defertur +potus per meatus et conductus qui in curia regis habetur; et iuxta eam +pendent multa vasa aurea cum quibus volentes bibere possunt. In hoc autem +palatio sunt multi pauones de auro; et cùm aliquis Tartarus facit festum +domino suo, tunc quando conuiuantes collidunt manus suas præ gaudio et +læticia, pauones emittunt alas suas, et expandunt caudas, et videntur +tripudiare; Et hoc credo factura arte Magica, vel aliqua cautela +subterranea. + + +De gloria magni Canis. + +Qvando autem magnus ille Imperator Canis in sede sua imperiali residet, +tunc a sinistro latere sedet Regina, et per vnum gradum inferius duo +mulieres quas ipse tenet pro se; quando non potest ad Reginam accedere: In +infimo autem gradu resident omnes dominae de sua parentela. Omnes autem +mulieres nuptæ portant supra caput suum vnum pedem hominis, longitudinis +vnius brachij cum dimidio; et subter illum pedem sunt pennæ gruis, et totus +ille pes ornatur maximis margaritis. A latero verò dextro ipsius Canis +residet filius eius primogenitus, regnaturus post ipsum, et inferius ipso +omnes qui sunt de sanguine regio: Ibi etiam sunt 4. scriptores scribentes +omnia verba quæ dicit rex; Ante cuius conspectum sunt Barones sui, et multi +alij nobiles cum sua gente maxima, quorum nullus audet loqui nisi a domino +licentia petatur exceptis fatuis et histrionibus, qui suum dominum +consolari habent; Illi etiam nihil audent facere, nisi secundum quod +Dominus voluerit eis legem imponere. Ante portam palatij sunt Barones +custodientes, ne aliquis limen portæ tangat. Cùm autem ille Canis voluerit +facere conuiuium, habet secum 14000. Barones portantes circulos, et +coronulas in capite, et domino suo seruientes; Et quilibet portat vnam +vestem de auro et margaritis tot quot valent plus quam decies millies +florenorum. Curia eius optime ordinatur per denarios, centenarios, et +millenarios, et taliter quòd quilibet in suo ordine peragit officium sibi +deputatum, nec aliquis defectus reperitur. Ego frater Odoricus fui ibi per +tres annos, et multotiens in istis festis suis fui, quià nos fratres +minores in sua curia habemus locum nobis deputatum, et oportet nos semper +ire, et dare sibi nostram benedictionem: et inquisiui ab illis de curia, de +numero illorum qui sunt in curia domini, et responderunt mihi quod de +histrionibus sunt bene 18. Thuman; Custodes autem canum et bestiarum, et +auium sunt. 15. Thuman; Medici vero pro corpore Regis sunt 400. Christiani +autem 8. et vnus Saracenus. Et ego quando fui ibi, hij omnes omnia +necessaria tam ad victum, quam ad vestitum habebant de Curia domini Canis. +Quando autem vult equitare de vna terra ad aliam, habet 4. exercitus +equitum, et vnus per vnam dietam ipsum antecedit, secundus aliam, et +tertius similitèr, et quartus; ita quod semper ipse se tenet in medio in +modum crucis; et ita omnes exercitus habent omnes dietas suas ordinatas, +quod inueniunt omnia victualia parata sine defectu. Illémet autem dominus +Canis per illum modum vadit; Sedet in curru cum duabus rotis in quo facta +est pulcherrima sella tota de lignis Aloe, et auro ornata, et margaritis +maximis, et lapidibus pretiosis; et 4. Elephantes bene ordinati ducunt +istum currum, quos praecedunt 4. equi altissimi optime cooperti. Iuxta +currum à lateribus sunt 4. Barones tenentes currum, ne aliquis appropinquet +domino suo. Supra currum sedent duo Gerfalcones albissimi, et dùm videt +aues quos vult capere, dimittit Falcones volare, et capiunt eas; Et sic +habet solatium suum equitando, et per iactum vnius lapidis nullus audet +appropinquare currui nisi populus assignatus: vnde incredibile esset homini +qui non vidisset de numero gentis suæ, et reginæ, et primogeniei sui. Istæ +Dominus Canis imperium suum diuisit in 12. partes, et vna habet sub se 200. +magnarum ciuitatum: vnde ita latum et longum est suum imperium, quod ad +quamcunque partem iret, satis haberes facere in sex mensibus, exceptis +insulis, quæ sunt bene 5000. + + +De hospitijs paratis per totum imperium pro transeuntibus. + +Iste Dominus, vt transeuntes habeant omnia necessaria sua per totum suum +imperium, fecit hospitia praeparari vbique per vias; in quibus sunt omnia +parata quæ ad victualia pertinent: Cum autem aliqua nouitas oritur in +imperio suo, tunc si distat, ambassiatores super equos vel dromedarios +festinant, et cùm lassantur in cursu, pulsant cornu, et proximum hospitium +parat vnum similitèr, equum, qui quando alius venit fessus accipit literam, +et currit ad hospitium, et sic per hospitia, et per diuersos cursores rumor +per 30. dietas, vno die naturali venit ad imperatorem; et ideò nihil +ponderis potest fieri in imperio suo, quin statim scitur ab eo. Cum autem +ipse Canis vult ire venatum; istum modum habet. Extra Cambaleth ad 20. +dietas, est vna foresta quæ 6. dietas continet in ambitu; in qua sunt tot +genera animalium et auium quòd mirabile est dicere: Ad illud nemus vadit in +fine trium annorum vel quatuor cum tota gente, cum qua ipsum circuit, et +canes intrare permittit, qui animalia, scilicet leones, ceruos, et alia +animalia reducunt ad vnam planitiem pulcherrimam in medio nemoris, quia ex +clamoribus canum maximè tremunt omnes bestiæ syluæ. Tunc accedit magnus +Canis super tres elephantes et 5. sagittas mittit in totam multitudinem +animalium, et post ipsum omnes Barones, et post ipsos alij de familia sua +emittunt sagittas suas; et omnes sagittæ sunt signatæ certis signis et +diuersis: Tunc vadit ad animalia interfecta, dimittens viua nemus reintrare +vt aliàs habeat ex eis venationem suam, et quilibet illud animal habebit in +cuius corpere inuenit sagittam suam quam iaciebat. + + +De quatuor festis quæ tenet in anno Canis in curia. + +Quatuor magna festa in anno facit Dominus Canis, scilicet festum +natiuitatis, festum circumcisionis, coronationis, et desponsationis suæ; et +ad ista festa conuocat omnes Barones, et histriones, et omnes de parentela +sua. Tunc domino Cane in suo throno sedente, accedunt Barones cum circulis +et coronis in capite, vestiti vario modo, quia aliqui de viridi, scilicet +primi, secundi de sanguineo, et tertij de croceo, et tenent in manibus vnam +tabulam eburneam de dentibus Elephantum, et cinguntur cingulis aureis vno +semisse latis, et stant pedibus silentium tenentes. Circa illos stant +histriones cum suis instrumentis: In vno autem angulo cuiusdam magni +palatij resident Philosophi omnes ad certas horas, et puncta attendentes: +et cum deuenitur ad punctumn et horam petitam à philosopho, vnus praeco +clamat valentèr. Inclinetis vos omnes imperatori vestro: tunc omnes Barones +cadunt ad terram; et iterum clamat, Surgite omnes, et illi statim surgunt. +Iterum philosophi ad aliud punctum attendunt, et cùm peruentum fuerit, +iterum praeco clamat; ponite digitum in aurem, et statim dicit, extrahite +ipsum; iterùm ad aliud punctum clamat, Buratate farinam: et multa alia +faciunt, quæ omnia dicunt certam signifcationem habere, quæ scriberi nolui, +nec curaui, quia vana sunt et risu digna. Cùm autem peruentum fuerit ad +horam histrionum, time Philosophi dicunt, facite festum domino, et omnes +pulsant instrumenta sua, et faciunt maximum sonitum; et statim alius +clamat; Taceant omnes, et omnes tacent: Tunc accedunt histrionatrices ante +dominum dulcitèr modulantes, quod mihi plus placuit. Tunc veniunt leones, +et faciunt reuerentiam domino Cani; Et tunc histriones faciunt ciphos +aureos plenos vino volare per aerem, et ad ora hominum se applicare vt +bibant. Haec et multa alia mirabilia in curia illius Canis vidi, quæ nullus +crederet nisi videret; et ideò dimitto ea. De alio mirabili audiui à fide +dignis, quòd in vno regno istius Canis in quo sunt montes Kapsei (et +dicitur illud regnum Kalor) nascuntur pepones maximi, qui quando sunt +maturi aperiuntur, et intùs inuenitur vna bestiola similis vni agnello: +sicut audiui quòd in mari Hybernico stant arbores supra ripam maris et +portant fructum sicut essent cucurbitæ, quæ certo tempore cadunt in aquam +et fiunt aues vocatæ Bernakles, et illud est verum. + + +De diuersis Prouincijs et ciuitatibus. + +De isto imperio Katay recessi post tres annos, et transiui 50. dietas +versus Occidentem; et tandem veni ad terram Pretegoani, cuius ciuitas +principalis Kosan vocatur, quæ multas habet sub se ciuitates. [Sidenote: +Casan.] Vltra per multas dietas iui, et perueni ad vnam prouinciam vocatam +Kasan; et haec est secunda melior prouincia mundi, vt dicitur, et est +optimè habitata: Sic quod quando exitur à porta vnius ciuitatis, videntur +portæ alterius ciuitatis, sicut egomet vidi de multis. Latitudo Prouinciæ +est 50. dietarum, et longitudo plusquam 60. In ea est maxima copia omnium +victualium, et maximè castaneorum; et haec est vna de 12. prouincijs magni +Canis. [Sidenote: Tibec regio aliàs Tebet Guillielmo de Rubricis.] Vltra +veni ad vnum regnum vocatum Tibek quod est subiectum Cani, in quo est maior +copia panis et vini, quam sit in toto mundo vt credo. Gens illius terræ +moratur communiter in tenorijs factis ex feltris nigris: Principalis +ciuitas sua murata est pulcherrimè ex lapidibus albissimis, et nigerrimis +interescalariter dispositis et curiosè compositis, et omnes viæ eius optimè +pouatæ. In ista contrata nullus audet effundere sanguinem hominis, nec +alicuius animalis, ob reuerentiam vnius Idoli. In ista ciuitate moratur +Abassi i. Papa eorum, qui est caput et princeps omnium Idolatrarum; quibus +dat et distribuit beneficia secundum morem eorum; sicut noster Papa Romanus +est caput omnium Christianorum. Foeminæ in hoc regno portant plusquam +centum tricas, et habent duos dentes in ore ita longos sicut apri. Quando +etiam pater alicuius moritur, tunc filius conuocat omnes sacerdotes et +histriones, et dicit se velle patrem suum honorare, et facit eum ad campum +duci sequentibus parentibus omnibus, amicis, et vicinis, vbi sacerdotes cum +magna solemnitate amputant caput suum, dantes illud filio suo, et tunc +totum corpus in frusta concidunt, et ibi dimittunt, cum orationibus cum eo +redeuntes; [Sidenote: Eadem historia de eodem populo apud Guilielmum de +Rubricis.] Tunc veniunt vultures, de monte assuefacti ad huiusmodi, et +carnes omnes asportant: Et ex tunc currit fama de eo quòd sanctus est, quia +angeli domini ipsum portant in paradisum: Et iste est maximus honor, quem +reputat filius posse fieri patri suo mortuo: Tunc filius sumit caput +patris, et coquit ipsum, et comedit, de testa eius faciens ciphum in quo +ipse cum omnibus de domo et cognatione eius bibunt cum solemnitate et +laetitia in memoriam patris comesti. Et multa vilia et abominabilia facit +gens illa quæ non scribo, quia non valent, nec homines crederent nisi +viderent. + + +De diuite qui pascitur à 50. Virginibus. + +Dum fui in prouincia Manzi transiui iuxta palatium vnius hominis popularis, +qui habuit 50. domicellas virgines sibi continuè ministrantes, in omnibus +pascentes eum sicut auis auiculas, et habet semper 5. fercula triplicata; +et quando pascunt eum, continuè cantant dulcissimè: Iste habet in +redditibus Tagaris risi 30. Thuman, quorum quodlibet decies millies facit: +vnum autem Tagar pondus est asini. Palatium suum duo millaria tenet in +ambitu; cuius pauimentum semper vnum laterem habet aureum, alium argenteum: +Iuxta ambitum istius palatij est vnus monticulus artificialis de auro et +argento, super quo stant Monasteria, et campanilia, et alia delectabilia +pro solatio illius popularis; Et dictum fuit mihi, quòd quatuor tales +homines sunt in regno illo. [Sidenote: Mulierum parui pedes.] Nobilitas +virorum est longos habere vngues in digitis, praecipue pollicis quibus +circueunt sibi manus: Nobilitas autem et pulchritudo mulierem est pauos +habere pedes: Et ideò matres quando filiæ suæ sunt tenellæ ligant pedes +earum, et non dimittunt crescere. [Sidenote: Milestorite.] Vltra transiens +versus meridiem applicui ad quandam contratam, quæ vocatur Milestorite, quæ +pulchra est valdè et fertilis: Et in ista contrata erat vnus vocatus Senex +de monte, qui inter duos montes fecerat sibi vnum murum circumuentem istos +montes. Infra istum murum erant fontes pulcherrimi de mundo; Et iuxta +fontes erant pulcherrimæ virgines in maximo numero, et equi pulcherrimi, et +omni illud quod ad suauitatem, et delectationem corporis fieri poterit, et +ideo illum locum vocant homines illius contratæ Paradisum. Iste senex cùm +viderit aliquem iuuenem formosum et robustum, posuit eum in illo paradiso; +Per quosdam autem conductus descendere facit vinum et lac abundantèr. Iste +Senex cùm voluerit se vindicare, vel interficere regem aliquem vel Baronem, +dicit illi qui præerat illi paradiso vt aliquem de notis illius regis, vel +Baronis introduceret in paradisum illum, et illum delicijs frui +permitteret, et tunc daret sibi potionem vnam, quæ ipsum sopiebat in +tantum, quòd insensibilem redderet, et ipsum sic dormientem faceret extra +paradisum deportari: qui excitatus et se extra paradisum conspiciens, in +tanta tristitia positus foret, quòd nesciret quid faceret: Tunc ad illum +senem iret, rogans eum, vt interùm in paradisum introduceretur: qui sibi +dicit, tu illic introduci non poteris, nisi talem vel talem interficias; et +siue interfeceris, siue non, reponam te in paradiso, et ibidem poteris +semper manere; Tunc ille sic faceret, et omnes seni odiosos interficeret; +Et ideò omnes reges orientales illum senem timuerunt, et sibi tributum +magnum dederunt. + + +De morte Senis de monte. + +Cum autem Tartari magnam partem mundi cepissent, venerunt ad istum Senem, +et dominium illius Paradisi ab eo abstulerunt, qui multos sicarios de +Paradiso illo emisit, et nobiliores Tartarorum interfici fecit. Tartari +autem hoc videntes ciuitatem, in qua erat senex obsederunt, eum ceperunt, +et pessima morte interfecerunt. Hanc gratiam habent fratres ibidem, quod +citissimè per virtutem nominis Christi Iesu, et in virtute illius sanguinis +pretiosi, quem effudit in cruce pro salute generis humani, daemonia ab +obsessis corporibus expellunt; et quia multi ibidem sum obsessi, ducuntur +per decem dietas ad fratres ligati, qui liberati statim credunt in +Christum, qui liberauit ebs habentes ipsum pro Deo suo, et baptizati sunt, +et idola sua, et pecorum suorum statim dant fratribus, quæ sunt communitèr +de feltro, et de crinibus mulierum et fratres ignem in communi loci faciunt +ad quem populus confluit, vt videat Deos vicinorum suorum comburi et +fratres coram populo Idola in ignem proijciunt; Et prima vice de igne +exierunt; Tunc fratres ignem cum aqua benedicta conspercerunt, et interùm +Idola in ignem proiecerunt, et daemones in effigie fumi nigerrimi fugerunt, +et Idola remanserunt, et combusta sunt. Posteà auditor clamor per aerem +talis, vide, vide, quo modo de habitatione mea expulsus sum. Et per istum +modum fratres maximam multitudinem baptizant, qui citò recidiuant ad idola +pecorum: qui fratres continuò quasi stent cum illis, et illos informent. +Aliud terribile fuit quod ego vidi ibi. Nam cùm irem per vnam vallem quæ +sita est iuxta fluuium deliciarum, multa corpora mortua vidi, et in illa +valle audiui sonos musicos dulces et diuersos, et maximè de cytharis, vndè +multum timui. Haec vallis habet longitudinem septem, vel octo milliarium ad +plus, in quam si quis intrat, moritur, et nunquam viuus potest transire per +medium illius vallis, et ideò omnes de contrata declinant à latere: Et +tentatus eram intrare, et videre, quid hoc esset. Tandem oratis et Deo me +recommendans, et cruce signans, in nomine Iesu intraui, et vidi tot corpora +mortua ibi, quòd nullus crederet nisi videret In hac valle ab vno eius +latere, in vno saxo vnam faciem hominis vidi, quæ ita terribilitèr me +respexit, quòd omnino credidi ibi fuisse mortuus: Sed semper hoc verbum +(verbum caro factum est et habitauit in nobis) protuli, et cruce me +signaui, nec propiùs quàm per 7. passus, vel 8. accedere capiti ausus fui: +Iui autem fugiens ad aliud caput vallis, et super vnum monticulum arenosum +ascendi, in quo vndique circumspiciens nihil vidi nisi cytharas illas, quas +per se (vt mihi videbatur) pulsari et resonare mirabiliter audiui. Cùm vero +fui in cacumine montis, inueni ibi argentum in maxima quantitate, quasi +fuissent squamæ piscium. Congregans autem inde in gremio meo pro mirabili +ostendendo, sed ductus conscientia, in terram proieci, nihil mecum +reseruans, et sic per gratiam Dei liber exiui. Cùm autem homines illius +contratæ sciuerunt me viuum exisse, reuerebantur me multum, dicentes me +baptizatum et sanctum: et corpora illa fuisse daemonum infernalium qui +pulsant cytharas vt homines alliciant intare, et interficiant. Haec de +visis certudinalitér ego frater Odoricus hic inscripsi; et multa mirabilia +omisi ponere, quia homines hon credidissent nisi vidissent. + + +De honore et reuerentia factis Domino Cani. + +Vnum tantùm referam de magno Cane quod vidi. Consuetudo est in partibus +illis quòd quando praedictus dominus per aliquam contratam transit, homines +ante ostia sua accendunt ignem et apponunt aromata, ac faciunt fumum, vt +dominus transiens suauem sentiat adorem, et multi obuiam sibi vadunt. Dum +autem semel veniret in Cambeleth, et fama vndique diuulgaretur de suo +aduentu, vnus noster Episcopus, et aliqui nostri minores fratres et ego +iuimus obuiàm sibi benè per duas dietas: Et dum appropinquaremus ad eum, +posuimus crucem super lignum, et ego habebam mecum in manu thuribulum, et +incepimus cantare alta voce dicentes: Veni creator spiritus: Et dum sic +cantaremus audiuit voces, nostras, fecítque nos vocari, ac iussit nos ad +eum accedere; cùm vt suprà dictum est, nullus audeat appropinquare currui +suo ad iactum lapidis, nisi vocatus, exceptis illis qui currum custodiunt. +Et dum iuissemus ad eum, ipse deposuit galerum suum, sine capellum +inestimabilis quasi valoris, et fecit reuerentiam Cruci; et statim incensum +posui in thuribulo; Episcopus noster accepit thuribulum, et thurificauit +eum; ac sibi praedictus Episcopus dedit benedictionem suam. Accedentes verò +ad praedictum dominum, sempèr sibi aliquid offerendum deferunt; secum illam +antiquam legem obseruantes; Non apparebis in conspectu meo vacuus; Idcirco +portauimus nobiscum poma, et ea sibi super vnum incisorium reuerentèr +obtulimus; et ipse duo accepit, et de vno aliquantulum comedit: Et tunc +fecit nobis signum quod recederemus, ne equi venientes in aliquo nos +offenderent; statimque ab eo discessimus, atque diuertimus, et iuimus ad +aliquos Barones per fratres nostri ordinis ad fidem conuersos, qui in +exercitu eius erant, et eis obtulimus de pomis praedictis, qui cum maximo +gaudio ipsa accipientes ita videbantur laetari, ac si praebuissemus eis +familiaritèr magnum munus. Haec praedicta frater Guilelmus de Solangna in +scriptis redegit, sicùt praedictus frater Odoricus ore tenus exprimebat. +Anno Domini 1330, mense Maij in loco Sancti Antonij de Padua; Nec curauit +de latino difficili, et stilo ornato; Sed sicut ipse narrabat ad hoc vt +homines faciliùs intelligerent quæ dicuntur. Ego frater Odoricus de Foro +Iulij de quadam terra quæ dicitur Portus Vahonis de ordine minorum +testificor, et testimonium perhibeo reuerendo patri Guidoto ministro +prouinciæ Sancti Antonij in Marchia Triuisana, cùm ab eo fuerim per +obedientiam requisitus, quòd haec omnia quæ superiùs scripta sunt, aut +proprijs oculis ego vidi, aut a fide dignis audiui: Communis etiam loquutio +illarum terrarum illa quæ nec vidi testatur esse; Multa etiam alia ego +dimisissem, nisi illa proprijs oculis conspexissem. Ego autem de die in +diem me propono contratas seu terras accedere, in quibus mori, et viuere me +dispono, si placuerit Deo meo. + + +De morte fratris Odorici. + +Anno igitur Domini 1331. disponente se praedicto fratre Odorico ad +perficiendum iter suæ peregrinationis, prout mente conceperat, et etiam vt +via et labor esset sibi magnis ad meritum, decreuit primò praesentiam adire +Domini et patris omnium summi Pontificis Domini Ioannis Papæ 22: cuius +benedictione obedientiaque recepta cum societate fratrum secum ire +volentium ad partes infidelium se transferret: Cùmque sic eundo versus +summum Pontificem, non multum distaret à ciuitate Pisana, in quadam via +occurrit sibi quidam senex in habitu peregrini eum salutans ex nomine, Aue +(inquiens) frater Odorice: Et cùm frater quaereret quo modo ipsius haberet +noticiam? Respondit, Dum eras in India noui te, tuùm qui noui sanctum +propositum; Sed et tu modò ad conuentum vndè venisti reuertere, quia die +sequenti decimo ex hoc mundo migrabis. Verbis igitur senis attonitus et +stupefactus, praesertim cùm Senex ille statim post dictum ab eius aspectu +disparuit; reuerti decreuit; Et reuersus est in bona prosperitate nullam +sentiens grauedinem corporis, seu aliquam infirmitatem; Cùmque esset in +conuentu suo Vtinensi. N. in prouincia Paduana decimo die, prout facti sibi +fuir reuelatio, accepta communione, ipsoque ad Deum disponente, etiam +corpore existens incolumis in Domino foeliciter requieuit: Cuius sacer +obitus Domino summo Pontifici praefato sub manu Notarij publici +transmittitur; qui sic scribet. + +Anno Domini 1331. decima quarta die mensis Ianuarij obijt in Christo Beatus +Odoricus ordinis fratrum Minorum, cuius precibus omnipotens Deus multa, et +varia miracula demonstrauit; quæ ego Guetelus notarius communis Vtini, +filius domini Damiani de portu Gruario, de mandato et voluntate nobilis +viri Domini Conradi de Buardigio Castaldionis, et consilij Vtini, scripsi, +sicut potui, bona fide, et fratribus Minoribus exemplum dedi; sed non de +omnibus, quià sunt innumerabilia, et mihi difficilia ad scribendum. + + +The same in English. + +Here beginneth the iournall of Frier Odoricus, one of the order of the + Minorites, concerning strange things which hee sawe among the Tarters of + the East. + +Albeit many and sundry things are reported by diuers authors concerning the +fashions and conditions of this world: notwithstanding I frier Odoricus of +Friuli, de portu Vahonis being desirous to trauel vnto the foreign and +remote nations of infidels, sawe and heard great and miraculous things, +which I am able truely to auoch. [Sidenote: Pera. Trapesunda.] First of al +therefore sayling from Pera by Constantinople, I arrived at Trapesunda. +This place is right commodiously situate, as being an hauen for the +Persians and Medes, and other countreis beyonde the sea. In this lande I +behelde with great delight a very strange spectacle, namely a certaine man +leading about with him more then foure thousande partriges. The man +himselfe walked vpon the ground, and the partriges flew in the aire, which +he ledde vnto a certaine castle called Zauena, being three dayes iourney +distant from Trapesunda. The saide partriges were so tame, that when the +man was desirous to lie downe and rest, they would all come flocking about +him like chickens. And so hee led them vnto Trapesunda, and vnto the palace +of the Emperour, who tooke as many of them as he pleased, and the rest the +saide man carried vnto the place from whence he came. In this citie lyeth +the body of Athanasius, vpon the gate of the citie. [Sidenote: The citie of +Azaron in Armenia maior.] And then I passed on further vnto Armenia maior, +to a certaine citie called Azaron, which had bene very rich in olde time, +but nowe the Tarters haue almost layde it waste. In the saide citie there +was abundance of bread and flesh, and of all other victuals except wine and +fruites. This citie also is very colde, and is reported to be higher +situated, then any other city in the world. It hath most holesome and +sweete waters about it: for the veines of the said waters seeme to spring +and flow from the mighty riuer of Euphrates, which is but a dayes iourney +from the saide city. Also, the said citie stands directly in the way to +Tauris. [Sidenote: Sobissacalo.] And I passed on vnto a certaine mountaine +called Sobissacalo. In the foresaide countrey there is the very same +mountalne whereupon the Arke of Noah rested: vnto the which I would +willingly haue ascended, if my company would haue stayed for me. Howbeit +the people of that countrey report, that no man could euer ascend the said +mountaine, because (say they) it pleaseth not the highest God. [Sidenote: +Tauris a citie of Persia.] And I trauailed on further vnto Tauris that +great and royal city, which was in old time called Susis. This city is +accompted for traffique of marchandize the chiefe city of the world: for +there is no kinde of victuals, nor anything else belonging vnto +marchandize, which is not to be had there in great abundance. This city +stands very commodiously: for vnto it all the nations of the whole worlde +in a maner may resort for traffique. Concerning the saide citie, the +Christians in those parts are of opinion, that the Persian Emperour +receiues more tribute out of it, then the King of France out of all his +dominions. Neare vnto the said city there is a salt-hill yeelding salt vnto +the city: and of that salt ech man may take what pleaseth him, not paying +ought to any man therefore. In this city many Christians of all nations do +inhabite, ouer whom the Saracens beare rule in alle things. Then I +traueiled on further vnto a city called Soldania, [Marginal note: Or, +Sultania.] wherein the Persian Emperour lieth all Sommer time: but in +winter hee takes his progresse vnto another city standing upon the sea +called Baku. [Marginal note: The Caspian sea.] Also the foresaid city is +very great and colde, hauing good and holesome waters therein, vnto the +which also store of marchandize is brought. Moreouer I trauelled with a +certaine company of Carauans toward vpper India: and in the way, after many +days iourney, I came vnto the citie of the three wise men called Cassan +[Marginal Note: Or Cassibin.], which is a noble and renowmed city, sauing +that the Tartars haue destroyed a great part thereof, and it aboundeth with +bread, wine, and many other commodities. From this city vnto Ierusalem +(whither the three foresaid wise-men were miraculously led) it is fiftie +days iourney. There be many wonders in this citie also, which, for +breuities sake, I omit [Sidenote: Geste.] From thence I departed vnto a +certaine city called Geste, whence the Sea of Sand is distant, one dayes +iourney, which is a most wonderful and dangerous thing. In this city there +is abundance of all kinds of victuals, and especially of figs, reisins, and +grapes; more (as I suppose) then in any part of the whole world besides. +This is one of the three principall cities in all the Persian Empire. Of +this city the Saracens report, that no Christian can by any meanes liue +therein aboue a yeere. [Sidenote: Como.] Then passing many dayes ioumey on +forward, I came vnto a certaine citie called Comum, which was an huge and +mightie Citie in olde time, conteyning well nigh fiftie miles in circuite, +and hath done in times past great damage vnto the Romanes. In it there are +stately palaces altogether destitute of inhabitants, notwithstanding it +aboundeth with great store of victuals. From hence traueiling through many +countreys, at length I came vnto the land of Iob named Hus, which is fulle +of all kinde of victuals, and very pleasantly situated. Thereabouts are +certaine mountains hauing good pastures for cattell upon them. Here also +Manna is found in great aboundance. Four partriges are here solde for lesse +than a groat In this countrey there are most comely olde men. Here also the +men spin and card, and not the women. This land bordereth vpon the North +part of Chalddæa. + + +Of the maners of the Chaldaeans, and of India. + +[Sidenote: The Tower of Babel.] From thence I traueled into Chaldæa which +is a great kingdome, and I passed by the tower of Babel. This region hath a +language peculiar vnto it selfe, and there are beautifull men, and deformed +women. The men of the same countrey vse to haue their haire kempt, and +trimmed like vnto our women: and they weare golden turbants vpon their +heades richly set with pearle, and pretious stones. The women are clad in a +coarse smock onely reaching to their knees, and hauing long sleeues hanging +downe to the ground. And they goe bare-footed, wearing breeches which reach +to the ground also. Thei weare no attire vpon their heads, but their haire +hangs disheaueled about their eares: and there be many other strange things +also. From thence I came into the lower India, which the Tartars ouerran +and wasted. And in this countrey the people eat dates for the most part, +whereof 42. li. are there sold for lesse than a groat. [Sidenote: Ormus.] I +passed further also many dayes iourney vnto the Ocean sea, and the first +land where I arriued, is called Ormes, being well fortified, and hauing +great store of marchandize and treasure therein. Such and so extreme is the +heat in that countrey, that the priuities of men come out of their bodies +and hang down euen vnto their mid-legs. And therefore the inhabitants of +the same place, to preserue their own liues, do make a certaine ointment, +and anointing their priuie members therewith, do lap them up in certaine +bags fastened vnto their bodies, for otherwise they must needs die. Here +also they vse a kinde of Bark or shippe called Iase being compact together +onely with hempe. [Sidenote: Thana, whereof Frederick Cæsar maketh +mention.] And I went on bourd into one of them, wherein I could not finde +any yron at all, and in the space of 28 dayes I arriued at the city of +Thana, wherein foure of our friers were martyred for the faith of Christ. +This countrey is well situate, hauing abundance of bread and wine, and of +other victuals therein. This kingdome in olde time was very large and vnder +the dominion of king Porus, who fought a great battell with Alexander the +great. The people of this countrey are idolaters worshipping fire, serpents +and trees. And ouer all this land the Saracen do beare rule, who tooke it +by maine force, and they themselues are in subjection unto King Daldilus. +There be diuers kinds of beasts, as namely blacke lyouns in great +abundance, and apes also, and monkeis, and battes as bigge as our doues. +Also there are mise as bigge as our countrey dogs, because cats are not +able to incounter them. Moreouer in the same countrey euery man hath a +bundle of great boughs standing in a water-pot before his doore, which +bundle is as great as a pillar, and it will not wither, so long as water is +applied thereunto: with many other nouelties and strange things, the +relation whereof would breed great delight. + + +How peper is had: and where it groweth. + +[Sidenote: Malabar.] Moreouer, that it may be manifest how peper is had, it +is to be vnderstood that it groweth in a certaine kingdome whereat I my +selfe arriued, being called Minibar, and it is not so plentifull in any +other part of the worlde as it is there. For the wood wherein it growes +conteineth in circuit 18 dayes iourney. And in the said wood or forrest +there are two cities, one called Flandrina, and the other Cyncilim. In +Flandrina both Iewes and Christians doe inhabite, betweene whom there is +often contention and warre: howbeit the Christians ouercome the Iewes at +all times. In the foresaid wood pepper is had after this maner: first it +groweth in leaues like vnto pot-hearbs, which they plant neere vnto great +trees as we do our vines, and they bring forth pepper in clusters, as our +vines doe yeeld grapes, but being ripe, they are of a greene colour, and +are gathered as we gather grapes, and then the graines are layed in the +Sunne to be dried, and being dried are put into earthen vessels: and thus +is pepper made and kept. Now, in the same wood there be many riuers, +wherein are great store of Crocodiles, and of other serpents, which the +inhabitants thereabout do burne vp with straw and with other dry fewel, and +so they go to gather their pepper without danger. [Sidenote: Polumbrum.] At +the South end of the said forrest stands the city of Polumbrum, which +aboundeth with marchandize of all kinds. All the inhabitants of that +countrey do worship a liuing oxe, as their god, whom they put to labour for +sixe yeres, and in the seuenth yere they cause him to rest from al his +worke, placing him in a solemne and publique place, and calling him an holy +beast Moreouer they vse this foolish ceremonie: Euery morning they take two +basons, either of siluer, or of gold, and with one they receiue the vrine +of the oxe, and with the other his dung. With the vrine they wash their +face, their eyes, and all their fiue senses. Of the dung they put into both +their eyes, then they anoint the bals of the cheeks therewith, and thirdly +their breast: and then they say that they are sanctified for all that day; +And as the, people doe, euen so doe their King and Queene. This people +worshippeth also a dead idole, which, from the nauel vpward, resembleth a +man, and from the nauel downeward an oxe. The very same Idol deliuers +oracles vnto them, and sometimes requireth the blood of fourtie virgins for +his hire. And therefore the men of that region do consecrate their +daughters and their sonnes vnto their idols, euen as Christians do their +children vnto some Religion or Saint in heauen. Likewise they sacrifice +their sonnes and their daughters, and so, much people is put to death +before the said Idol by reason of that accursed ceremony. Also, many other +hainous and abominable villanies doeth that brutish beastly people commit: +and I sawe many moe strange things among them which I meane not here to +insert. [Sidenote: The burning of their dead.] Another most vile custome +the foresaide nation doeth retaine: for when any man dieth they burne his +dead corps to ashes: and if his wife suruiueth him, her they burne quicke, +because (say they) she shall accompany her husband in his tilthe and +husbandry, when he is come into a new world. Howbeit the said wife hauing +children by her husband, may if she will, remain with them, without shame +or reproach; notwithstanding, for the most part, they all of them make +choice to be burnt with their husbands. Now, albeit the wife dieth before +her husband, that law bindeth not the husband to any such inconuenience, +but he may mary another wife also. Likewise, the said nation hath another +strange custome, in that their women drink wine, but their men do not. Also +the Women haue the lids and brows of their eyes and beards shauen, but the +men haue not: with many other base and filthy fashions which the said women +do vse contrary to the nature of their sexe. [Sidenote: Mobar, or +Maliapor.] From that kingdom I traueiled 10. daies iourney vnto another +kingdome called Mobar, which containeth many cities. Within a certaine +church of the same countrey, the body of S. Thomas the Apostle is interred, +the very same church being full of idols: and in 15. houses round about the +said Church, there dwell certaine priests who are Nestorians, that is to +say, false, and bad Christians, and schismatiques. + + +Of a strange and vncouth idole: and of certaine customes and ceremonies. + +In the said kingdome of Mobar there is a wonderfull strange idole, being +made after the shape and resemblance of a man, as big as the image of our +Christopher, et [sic passim--KTH] consisting all of most pure and +glittering gold. And about the neck thereof hangeth a silke riband, ful of +most rich and precious stones, some one of which is of more value then a +whole kingdome. The house of this idol is all of beaten gold, namely the +roofe, the pauement, and the sieling of the wall within and without. Vnto +this idol the Indians go on pilgrimage, as we do vnto S. Peter. Some go +with halters about their necks, some with their hands bound behind them, +some others with kniues sticking on their armes or legs: and if after their +peregrination, the flesh of their wounded arme festereth or corrupteth, +they esteeme that limme to be holy, and thinke that their God is wel +pleased with them. Neare vnto the temple of that idol is a lake made by the +hands of men in an open et common place, whereinto the pilgrimes cast gold, +siluer, and precious stones, for the honour of the idol and the repairing +of his temple. And therefore when any thing is to be adorned or mended, +they go vnto this lake taking vp the treasure which was cast in. Moreouer +at euery yerely feast of the making or repairing of the said idol, the king +and queene, with the whole multitude of the people, and all the pilgrimes +assemble themselues, and placing the said idol in a most stately and rich +chariot, they cary him out of their temple with songs, and with all kind of +musical harmonie, and a great company of virgins go procession-wise two and +two in a rank singing before him. Many pilgrims also put themselues vnder +the chariot wheeles, to the end that their false god may go ouer them: and +al they ouer whom the chariot runneth, are crushed in pieces, and diuided +asunder in the midst, and slaine right out. Yea, and in doing this, they +think themselues to die most holily and securely, in the seruice of their +god. And by this meanes euery yere, there die vnder the said filthy idol, +mo then 500. persons, whose carkases are burned, and their ashes are kept +for reliques, because they died in that sort for their god. Moreouer they +haue another detestable ceremony. For when any man offers to die in the +seruice of his false god, his parents, and all his friends assemble +themselues together with a consort of musicians, making him a great and +solemne feast: which feast being ended, they hange 5. sharpe kniues about +his neck carying him before the idol, and so soone as he is come thither, +he taketh one of his kniues crying with a loud voice, For the worship of my +god do I cut this my flesh, and then he casteth the morsel which is cut, at +the face of his idol: but at the very last wound wherewith he murthereth +himselfe, he vttereth these words: Now do I yeeld my self to death in the +behalfe of my god, and being dead, his body is burned, and is esteemed by +al men to be holy. The king of the said region is most rich in gold, +siluer, and precious stones, and there be the fairest vnions in al the +world. Traueling from thence by the Ocean sea 50. daies iourney southward, +I came vnto a certain land named Lammori, [Marginal note: Perhaps he +meaneth Comori.] where, in regard of extreeme heat, the people both men and +women go stark-naked from top to toe: who seeing me apparelled scoffed at +me, saying that God made Adam et Eue naked. In this countrey al women are +common, so that no man can say, this is my wife. Also when any of the said +women beareth a son or a daughter, she bestowes it vpon any one that hath +lien with her, whom she pleaseth. Likewise al the land of that region is +possessed in common, so that there is not mine and thine, or any propriety +of possession in the diuision of lands: howbeit euery man hath is owne +house peculiar vnto himselfe. Mans flesh, if it be fat, is eaten as +ordinarily there, as beefe in our country. And albeit the people are most +lewd, yet the country is exceedingly good, abounding with al commodities, +as flesh, corne, rise, siluer, gold, wood of aloes, Campheir, and many +other things. Marchants comming vnto this region for traffique do vsually +bring with them fat men, selling them vnto the inhabitants as we sel hogs, +who immediatly kil and eat them. [Sidenote: Sumatra.] In this island +towards south, there is the another kingdome called Simoltra, where both +men and women marke themselues with red-hot yron in 12. sundry spots of +their faces: and this nation is at continual warre with certaine naked +people in another region. [Sidenote: Iaffa.] Then I traueled further vnto +another island called Iaua, the compasse whereof by sea is 3000. miles. The +king of this Iland hath 7. other crowned kings vnder his iurisdiction. The +said Island is throughly inhabited, and is thought to be one of the +principall Ilands of the whole world. In the same Iland there groweth great +plenty of cloues, cubibez, and nutmegs, and in a word all kinds of spices +are there to be had, and great abundance of all victuals except wine. The +king of the said land of Iaua hath a most braue and sumptuous pallace, the +most loftily built, that euer I saw any, and it hath most high greeses and +stayers to ascend vp to the roomes therein contained, one stayre being of +siluer, and another of gold, throughout the whole building. Also the lower +roomes were paued all ouer with one square plate of siluer, and another of +gold. All the wals vpon the inner side were seeled ouer with plates of +beaten gold, whereupon were engrauen the pictures of knights, hauing about +their temples, ech of them a wreath of golde, adorned with precious stones. +The roofe of the palace was of pure gold. With this king of Iaua the great +Can of Catay hath had many conflictes in war: whom notwithstanding the said +king hath alwayes ouercome and vanquished. + + +Of certaine trees yeelding meale, hony, and poyson. + +Nere vnto the said Iland is another countrey called Panten, or +Tathalamasin. And the king of the same country hath many Ilands vnder his +dominion: In this land there are trees yeelding meale, hony, and wine, and +the most deadly poison in all the whole world: for against it there is but +one only remedy: and that is this: if any man hath taken of the poyson, and +would be deliuered from the danger thereof, let him temper the dung of a +man in water, and so drinke a good quantitie thereof, and it expels the +poyson immediatly, making it to auoid at the fundament. Meale is produced +out of the said trees after this maner. They be mighty huge trees, and when +they are cut with an axe by the ground, there issueth out of the stocke a +certain licour like vnto gumme, which they take and put into bags made of +leaues, laying them for 15 daies together abroad in the sun, and at the end +of those 15 dayes, when the said licour is throughly parched, it becommeth +meale. Then they steepe it first in sea water, washing it afterward with +fresh water, and so it is made very good and sauorie paste, whereof they +make either meat or bread, as they thinke good. Of which bread I my selfe +did eate, and it is fayrer without and somewhat browne within. [Sidenote: A +sea running still Southward.] By this countrey is the sea called Mare +mortuum, which runneth continually Southward, into the which whoseuer +falleth is neuer seene after. In this countrey also are found canes of an +incredible length, namely 60 paces high or more, and they are as bigge as +trees. Other canes there be also called Cassan, which overspread the earth +like grasse, and out of euery knot of them spring foorth certaine branches, +which are continued vpon the ground almost for the space of a mile. In the +sayd canes there are found certaine stones, one of which stones, whoseuer +carryeth about with him, cannot be wounded with any yron: and therefore the +men of that countrey for most part, carry such stones with them, +whithersoeuer they goe. Many also cause one of the armes of their children, +while they are yong, to be launced, putting one of the said stones in the +wound, healing also, and closing vp the said wound with the powder of a +certaine fish (the name whereof I do not know) which powder doth immediatly +consolidate and cure the said wound. And by the vertue of these stones, the +people aforesaid doe for the most part triumph both on sea and land. +Howbeit there is one kind of stratageme, which the enemies of this nation, +knowing the vertue of the sayd stones, doe practise against them: namely, +they prouide themselues armour of yron or steele against their arrowes, and +weapons also poisoned with the poyson of trees, and they carry in their +hands wooden stakes most sharpe and hard-pointed, as if they were yron: +likewise they shoot arrowes without yron heads, and so they confound and +slay some of their vnarmed foes trusting too securely vnto the vertue of +their stones. [Sidenote: Sayles made of reedes.] Also Of the foresayd canes +called Cassan they make sayles for their ships, and litle houses, and many +other necessaries. [Sidenote: Campa.] From thence after many dayes trauell, +I arrived at another kingdome called Campa, a most beautiful and rich +countrey, and abounding with all kind of victuals: the king whereof, at my +being there, had so many wiues and concubines, that he had 300 sonnes and +daughters by them. This king hath 10004 tame Elephants, which are kept euen +as we keepe droues of oxen, or flocks of sheepe in pasture. + + +Of the abundance of fishes, which cast themselues vpon the shore. + +In this countrey there is one strange thing to be obserued, that euery +seueral kind of fishes in those seas come swimming towards the said +countrey in such abundance, that, for a great distance into the sea, +nothing can be seene but the backs of fishes: which, casting themselues +vpon the shore when they come neare vnto it, do suffer men, for the space +of 3. daies, to come and to take as many of them as they please, and then +they returne againe vnto the sea. After that kind of fishes comes another +kind, offering it selfe after the same maner, and so in like sort all other +kinds whatsoeuer: notwithstanding they do this but once in a yere. And I +demaunded of the inhabitants there, how, or by what meanes this strange +accident could come to passe: They answered, that fishes were taught, euen +by nature, to come and to do homage vnto their Emperour. [Sidenote: +Tortoises.] There be Tortoises also as bigge as an ouen. Many other things +I saw which are incredible, vnlesse a man should see them with his own +eies. In this country also dead men are burned, and their wiues are burned +aliue with them, as in the city of Polumbrum above mentioned: for the men +of that country say that she goeth to accompany him in another world, that +he should take none other wife in marriage. [Sidenote: Moumoran.] Moreouer +I traueled on further by the ocean-sea towards the south, and passed +through many countries and islands, whereof one is called Moumoran, and it +containeth in compasse ii. M. miles, wherein men and women haue dog faces, +and worship an oxe for their god: and therefore euery one of them cary the +image of an oxe of gold or siluer vpon their foreheads. The men and the +women of this country go all naked, sauing that they hang a linen cloth +before their priuities. The men of the said country are very tall and +mighty, and by reason that they goe naked, when they are to make battell, +they cary yron or steele targets before them, which do couer and defend +their bodies from top to toe: and whomsoeuer of their foes they take in +battel not being able to ransom himselfe for money, they presently deuoure +him: but if he be able to redeeme himselfe for money, they let him go free. +Their king weareth about his necke 300. great and most beautifull vnions, +and saith euery day 300. prayers vnto his god. He weareth vpon his finger +also a stone of a span long which seemeth to be a flame of fire, and +therefore when he weareth it, no man dare once approch vnto him: and they +say that there is not any stone in the whole world of more value then it. +Neither could at any time the great Tartarian Emperour of Katay either by +force, money, or policie obtaine it at his hands: notwithstanding that he +hath done the vtmost of his indeuour for this purpose. + + +Of the Island of Sylan: and of the mountaine where Adam mourned for his + sonne Abel. + +I passed also by another island called Sylan, which conteineth in compasse +aboue ii. M. miles: wherein are an infinit number of serpents, and great +store of lions, beares, and al kinds of rauening and wild beasts, and +especially of elephants. In the said country there is an huge mountaine, +whereupon the inhabitants of that region do report that Adam mourned for +his son Abel the space of 500. yeres. In the midst of this mountain there +is a most beautiful plain, wherin is a litle lake conteining great plenty +of water, which water the inhabitants report to haue proceeded from the +teares of Adam and Eue: howbeit I proued that to be false, because I saw +the water flow in the lake. This water is ful of hors-leeches, and +blood-suckers, and of precious stones also: which precious stones the king +taketh not vnto his owne vse, but once or twise euery yere he permitteth +certaine poore people to diue vnder the water for the said stones, and al +that they can get he bestoweth vpon them, to the end they may pray for his +soule. But that they may with lesse danger diue vnder the water, they take +limons which they pil, anointing themselues throughly with the iuice +therof, and so they may diue naked vnder the water, the hors-leeches not +being able to hurt them. From this lake the water runneth euen vnto the +sea, and at a low ebbe the inhabitants dig rubies, diamonds, pearls, and +other pretious stones out of the shore: wherupon it is thought, that the +king of this island hath greater abundance of pretious stones, then any +other monarch in the whole earth besides. In the said country there be al +kinds of beasts and foules: and the people told me, that those beasts would +not inuade nor hurt any stranger, but only the natural inhabitants. I saw +in this island fouls as big as our countrey geese, hauing two heads, and +other miraculous things, which I will not here write off. Traueling on +further toward the south, I arriued at a certain island called Bodin, +[Marginal note: Or, Dadin.] which signifieth in our language vnclean. In +this island there do inhabit most wicked persons, who deuour and eat raw +flesh committing al kinds of vncleannes and abominations in such sort, as +it is incredible. For the father eateth his son, and the son his father, +the husbande his owne wife, and the wife her husband: and that after this +maner. If any mans father be sick, the son straight goes vnto the +soothsaying or prognosticating priest, requesting him to demand of his god, +whether his father shall recouer of that infirmity of no: Then both of them +go vnto an idol of gold or of siluer, making their praiers vnto it in maner +folowing: Lord, thou art our God, and thee we do adore, beseeching thee to +resolue vs, whether such a man must die, or recouer of such an infirmity or +no: Then the diuel answereth out of the foresaid idol: if he saith (he shal +liue) then returneth his son and ministreth things necessary vnto him, til +he hath attained vnto his former health: but if he saith (he shal die) then +goes the priest vnto him, and putting a cloth into his mouth doth strangle +him therewith: which being done, he cuts his dead body into morsels, and al +his friends and kinsfolks are inuited vnto the eating thereof, with musique +and all kinde of mirth: howbeit his bones are solemnely buried. And when I +found fault with that custome demanding a reason thereof, one of them gaue +me this answer: this we doe, least the wormes should eat his flesh, for +then his soule should suffer great torments, neither could I by any meanes +remooue them from that errour. Many other nouelties and strange things +there bee in this countrey, which no man would credite, vnles he saw them +with his owne eyes. Howbeit, I (before almighty God) do here make relation +of nothing but of that only, whereof I am as sure, as a man may be sure. +Concerning the foresaid islands I inquired of diuers wel-experienced +persons, who al of them, as it were with one consent, answered me saying, +That this India contained 4400. islands vnder it, or within it: in which +islands there are sixtie and foure crowned kings: and they say moreouer, +that the greater part of those islands are wel inhabited. And here I +conclude concerning that part of India. + + +Of the vpper India: and of the prouince of Mancy. + +First of al therefore, hauing traueled many dayes iourney vpon the +Ocean-sea toward the East, at length I arriued at a certaine great prouince +called Mancy, being in Latine named India. Concerning this India I inquired +of Christians, of Saracens, and of Idolaters, and of al such as bare any +office vnder the great Can. Who all of them with one consent answered, that +this prouince of Mancy hath mo then 2000. great cities within the precincts +thereof, and that it aboundeth with all plenty of victuals, as namely with +bread, wine, rise, flesh, and fish. All the men of this prouince be +artificers and marchants, who, though they be in neuer so extreme penurie, +so long as they can helpe themselues by the labor of their hands, wil neuer +beg almes of any man. The men of this prouince are of a faire and comely +personage, but somewhat pale, hauing their heads shauen but a litle: but +the women are the most beautiful vnder the sunne. The first city of the +said India which I came vnto, is called Ceuskalon, [Marginal note: Or, +Ceuskala.] which being a daies iourney distant from the sea, stands vpon a +riuer, the water whereof, nere vnto the mouth, where it exonerateth it +selfe into the sea, doth ouerflow the land for the space of 12. daies +iourney. All the inhabitants of this India are worshippers of idols. The +foresaid city of Ceuskalon hath such an huge nauy belonging thereunto, that +no man would beleeue it vnlesse he should see it. In this city I saw 300. +li. of good and new ginger sold for lesse than a groat. There are the +greatest, and the fairest geese, and most plenty of them to be sold in al +the whole world, as I suppose: [Sidenote: He meaneth Pellicans, which the +Spaniards cal Alcatrarzi.] they are as white as milke, and haue a bone vpon +the crowne of their heads as bigge as an egge, being of the colour of +blood: vnder their throat they haue a skin or bag hanging downe halfe a +foot. They are exceeding fat and wel sold. Also they haue ducks and hens in +that country, one as big as two of ours. There be monstrous great serpents +likewise, which are taken by the inhabitants and eaten: whereupon a solemne +feast among them without serpents is not set by: and to be briefe, in this +city there are al kinds of victuals in great abundance. From thence I +passed by many cities, and at length I came vnto a city named Caitan, +[Marginal note: Or, Zaiton.] wherin the friers Minorites haue two places of +aboad, vnto the which I transported the bones of the dead friers, which +suffred martyrdom for the faith of Christ, as it is aboue mentioned. In +this city there is abundance of al kind of victuals very cheap. The said +city is as big as two of Bononia, and in it are many monasteries of +religious persons, al which do worship idols. I my selfe was in one of +those Monasteries, and it was told me, that there were in it iii. M. +religious men, hauing xi. M. idols: and one of the said idols which seemed +vnto me but litle in regard of the rest, was as big as our Christopher. +These religious men euery day do feed their idol-gods: wherupon at a +certeine time I went to behold the banquet: and indeed those things which +they brought vnto them were good to eat, and fuming hote, insomuch that the +steame of the smoke thereof ascended vp vnto their idols, and they said +that their gods were refreshed with the smoke: howbeit all the meat they +conueyed away, eating it vp their owne selues, and so they fed their dumb +gods with the smoke onely. + + +Of the citie Fuco. + +Traueling more eastward, I came vnto a city named Fuco, which conteineth +30. miles in circuit, wherin be exceeding great and faire cocks, and al +their hens are as white as the very snow, hauing wol in stead of feathers, +like vnto sheep. It is a most stately and beautiful city, and standeth vpon +the sea. Then I went 18. dates iourney on further, and passed by many +prouinces and cities, and in the way I went ouer a certain great mountaine, +vpon the one side whereof I beheld al liuing creatures to be as black as a +cole, and the men and women on that side differed somwhat in maner of +liuing from others: howbeit, on the other side of the said hil euery liuing +thing was snow-white, and the inhabitants in their maner of liuing, were +altogether vnlike vnto others. There, all maried women cary in token that +they haue husbands, a great trunke of horne vpon their heads. [Sidenote: A +great riuer.] From thence I trauelled 18. dayes journey further, and came +vnto a certaine great riuer, and entered also into a city, whereunto +belongeth a mighty bridge, to passe the said riuer. And mine hoste, with +whom I soiourned, being desirous to shew me some sport, said vnto me: Sir, +if you will see any fish taken, goe with me. [Sidenote: Foules catching +fish.] Then he led me vnto the foresaid bridge, carying in his armes with +him certaine diue-doppers or water-foules, bound vnto a company of poles, +and about euery one of their necks he tied a threed, lest they should eat +the fish as fast as they tooke them: and he carried 3. great baskets with +him also: then loosed he the diue doppers from the poles, which presently +went into the water, and within lesse then the space of one houre, caught +as many fishes as filled the 3. baskets: which being full, mine hoste +vntyed the threeds from about their neckes, and entering the second time +into the riuer they fed themselues with fish, and being satisfied they +returned and suffered themselues to be bound vnto the saide poles as they +were before. And when I did eate of those fishes, me thought they were +exceeding good. Trauailing thence many dayes iourneys, at length I arriued +at another city called Canasia, [Marginal note: Or Cansai, or Quinzai.] +which signifieth in our language, the city of heauen. Neuer in all my life +did I see so great a citie; for it conteineth in circuit an hundreth miles: +neither sawe I any plot thereof, which was not throughly inhabited: yea, I +sawe many houses of tenne or twelue stories high, one aboue another. It +hath mightie large suburbs containing more people than the city it selfe. +Also it hath twelue principall gates: and about the distance of eight +miles, in the high way vnto euery one of the saide gates standeth a city as +big by estimation as Venice, and Padua. The foresaid city of Canasia is +situated in waters or marshes, which alwayes stand still, neither ebbing +nor flowing: howbeit it hath a defence for the winde like vnto Venice. In +this city there are mo than 10002. bridges, many whereof I numbred and +passed ouer them: [Sidenote: The Italian copy in Ramusius, hath 11000. +bridges.] and vpon euery of those bridges stand certaine watchmen of the +citie, keeping continuall watch and ward about the said city, for the great +Can the Emperour of Catay. The people of this countrey say, that they haue +one duetie inioyned vnto them by their lord: for euery fire payeth one +Balis in regard of tribute: and a Balis is fiue papers or pieces of silke, +which are worth one floren and an halfe of our coine. Tenne or twelue +housholds are accompted for one fire, and so pay tribute but for one fire +onely. Al those tributary fires amount vnto the number of 85. Thuman, with +other foure Thuman of the Saracens, which make 89. in al; And one Thuman +consisteth of 10000. fires. The residue of the people of the city are some +of them Christians, some marchants, and some traueilers through the +countrey: whereupon I marueiled much howe such an infinite number of +persons could inhabite and liue together. There is great aboundance of +victuals in this citie, as namely of bread and wine, and especially of +hogs-flesh, with other necessaries. + + +Of a Monastery where many strange beastes of diuers kindes doe liue vpon an + hill. + +In the foresaide citie foure of our friers had conuerted a mighty and riche +man vnto the faith of Christ, at whose house I continually abode, for so +long time as I remained in the citie. Who vpon a certaine time saide vnto +me: Ara, that is to say, Father, will you goe and beholde the citie? And I +said, yea. Then embarqued we our selues, and directed our course vnto a +certaine great Monastery: where being arrived, he called a religious person +with whom he was acquainted, saying vnto him concerning me: this Raban +Francus, that is to say, this religious Frenchman commeth from the Westerne +parts of the world, and is now going to the city of Cambaleth to pray for +the life of the great Can, and therefore you must shew him some rare thing, +that when hee returnes into his owne countrey, he may say, this strange +sight or nouelty haue I seene in the city of Canasia. Then the said +religious man tooke two great baskets full of broken reliques which +remained of the table, and led me vnto a little walled parke, the doore +whereof he vnlocked with his key, and there appeared vnto vs a pleasant +faire green plot, into the which we entred. In the said greene stands a +litle mount in forme of a steeple, replenished with fragrant herbes and +fine shady trees. And while we stood there, he tooke a cymball or bell, and +rang therewith, as they vse to ring to dinner or beuoir in cloisters, at +the sound whereof many creatures of diuers kinds came downe from the mount, +some like apes, some like cats, some like monkeys and some hauing faces +like men. And while I stood beholding of them, they gathered themselues +together about him, to the number of 4200. of those creatures, putting +themselues in good order, before whom he set a platter, and gaue them the +said fragments to eate. And when they had eaten he rang vpon his cymbal the +second time, and they al returned vnto their former places. Then, wondring +greatly at the matter, I demanded what kind of creatures those might be? +They are (quoth he) the soules of noble men which we do here feed, for the +loue of God who gouerneth the world: and as a man was honorable or noble in +this life, so his soule after death, entreth into the body of some +excellent beast or other, but the soules of simple and rusticall people do +possesse the bodies of more vile and brutish creatures. Then I began to +refute that foule error: howbeit my speach did nothing at all preuaile with +him: for he could not be perswaded that any soule might remaine without a +body. [Sidenote: Chilenso.] From thence I departed vhto a certaine citie +named Chilenso, the walls whereof conteined 40. miles in circuit. In this +city there are 360. bridges of stone, the fairest that euer I saw: and it +is wel inhabited, hauing a great nauie belonging thereunto, and abounding +with all kinds of victuals and other commodities. [Sidenote: Thalay.] And +thence I went vnto a certaine riuer called Thalay, which where it is most +narrow, is 7. miles broad: [Sidenote: Cakam.] and it runneth through the +midst of the land of Pygmæi, whose chiefe city is called Cakam, and is one +of the goodliest cities in the world. These Pigmæans are three of my spans +high, and they make larger and better cloth of cotten and silke, then any +other nation vnder the sunne. [Sidenote: Ianzu.] And coasting along by the +saide riuer, I came vnto a certaine citie named Ianzu, in which citie there +is one receptacle for the Friers of our order, and there be also three +Churches of the Nestorians. This Ianzu is a noble and great citie, +containing 48 Thuman of tributarie fiers, and in it are all kindes of +victuals, and great plenty of such beastes, foules and fishes, as +Christians doe vsually liue vpon. The lord of the same citie hath in +yeerely reuenues for salt onely, fiftie Thuman of balis, and one balis is +worth a floren and a halfe of our coyne: insomuch that one Thuman of balis +amounteth vnto the value of fifteene thousand florens. Howbeit the sayd +lord fauoureth his people in one respect, for sometimes he forgiueth them +freely two hundred Thuman, least there should be any scarcity or dearth +among them. There is a custome in this citie, that when any man is +determined to banquet his friends, going about vnto certaine tauernes or +cookes houses appointed for the same purpose, he sayth vnto euery +particular hoste, you shall haue such, and such of my friendes, whom you +must intertaine in my name, and so much I will bestowe vpon the banquet. +And by that means his friendes are better feasted at diuerse places, then +they should haue beene at one. Tenne miles from the sayde citie, about the +head of the foresayd riuer of Thalay, there is a certaine other citie +called Montu, which hath the greatest nauy that I saw in the whole world. +All their ships are as white as snow, and they haue banqueting houses in +them, and many other rare things also, which no man would beleeue, vnlesse +he had seene them with his owne eyes. + + +Of the citie of Cambaleth. + +[Sidenote: Karamoron.] Traueiling eight dayes iourney further by diuers +territories and cities, at length I came by fresh water vnto a certaine +citie named Lencyn, standing vpon the riuer of Karauoran, which runneth +through the midst of Cataie, and doeth great harme in the countrey when it +ouerfloweth the bankes, or breaketh foorth of the chanell. [Sidenote: +Sumacoto.] From thence passing along the riuer Eastward, after many dayes +trauell, and the sight of the diuers cities, I arriued at a citie called +Sumakoto, which aboundeth more with silke then any other citie in the +world: for when there is great scarcitie of silke, fortie pound is sold for +lesse then eight groates. In this citie there is abundance of all +merchandize, and all kindes of victuals also, as of bread, wine, flesh, +fish, with all choise and delicate spices. Then traueiling on still towards +the East by many cities, I came vnto the noble and renowmed citie of +Cambaleth, which is of great antiquitie being situate in the prouince of +Cataie. This citie the Tartars tooke, and neare vnto it within the space of +halfe a mile, they built another citie called Caido. The citie of Caido +hath twelue gates, being each of them two miles distant from another. Also +the space lying in the midst betweene the two foresayd cities is very well +and throughly inhabited, so that they make as it were but one citie +betweene them both. The whole compasse or circuit of both cities together, +is 40. miles. In this citie the great emperour Can hath his principall +seat, and his Imperiall palace, the wals of which palace containe foure +miles in circuit: and neere vnto this his palace are many other palaces and +houses, of his nobles which belong vnto his court. Within the precincts of +the sayd palace Imperiall, there is a most beautiful mount, set and +replenished with trees, for which cause it is called the Greene mount, +hauing a most royall and sumptuous palace standing thereupon, in which, for +the most part, the great Can is resident. Vpon the one side of the sayd +mount there is a great lake, whereupon a most stately bridge is built, in +which lake is great abundance of geese, ducks, and all kindes of water +foules: and in the wood growing vpon the mount there is great store of all +birds, and wilde beasts. And therefore when the great Can will solace +himselfe with hunting or hauking, he needs not so much as once to step +forth of his palace. Moreouer, the principall palace, wherein he maketh his +abode, is very large, hauing within it 14 pillers of golde, and all the +walles thereof are hanged with red skinnes, which are sayd to be the most +costly skinnes in all the world. In the midst of the palace standes a +cisterne of two yards high, which consisteth of a precious stone called +Merdochas, and is wreathed about with golde, and at ech corner thereof is +the golden image of a serpent, as it were, furiously shaking and casting +forth his head. This cisterne also hath a kind of networke of pearle +wrought about it. Likewise by the sayd cisterne there is drinke conueyed +thorow certeine pipes and conducts, such as vseth to be drunke in the +emperors court, vpon the which also there hang many vessels of golde, +wherein, whosoeuer will may drinke of the sayd licour. In the foresayd +palace there are many peacocks of golde: and when any Tartar maketh a +banquet vnto his lord, if the guests chance to clap their hands for ioy and +mirth, the sayd golden peacocks also will spread abroad their wings, and +lift vp their traines, seeming as if they danced: and this I suppose to be +done by arte magike or by some secret engine vnder the ground. + + +Of the glory and magnificence of the great Can. + +Moreouer, when the great emperor Can sitteth in his imperiall throne of +estate, on his left hand sitteth his queene or empresse, and vpon another +inferior seate there sit two other women, which are to accompany the +emperor, when his spouse is absent, but in the lowest place of all, there +sit all the ladies of his kindred. All the maried women weare vpon their +heads a kind of ornament in shape like vnto a mans foote, of a cubite and a +halfe in length, and the lower part of the sayd foote is adorned with +cranes feathers, and is all ouer thicke set with great and orient pearles. +Vpon the right hand of the great Can sitteth his first begotten sonne and +heire apparent vnto his empire, and vnder him sit all the nobles of the +blood royall. There bee also foure Secretaries, which put all things in +writing that the emperor speaketh. In whose presence likewise stand his +Barons and diuers others of his nobilitie, with great traines of folowers +after them, of whom none dare speake so much as one word, vnlease they haue +obtained licence of the emperor so to doe, except his iesters and +stage-players, who are appointed of purpose to solace their lord. Neither +yet dare they attempt to doe ought, but onely according to the pleasure of +their emperor, and as hee inioineth them by lawe. About the palace gate +stand certaine Barons to keepe all men from treading vpon the threshold of +the sayd gate. When it pleassth the great Can to solemnize a feast, he hath +about him 14000. Barons, carying wreathes and litle crownes vpon their +heads, and giuing attendance vpon their lord, and euery one of them weareth +a garment of gold and precious stones, which is woorth ten thousand +Florens. His court is kept in very good order, by gouernours of tens, +gouernours of hundreds, and gouernours of thousands, insomuch that euery +one in his place performeth his duetie committed vnto him, neither is there +any defect to bee found. I Frier Odoricus was there present in person for +the space of three yeeres, and was often at the sayd banquets; for we +friers Minorites haue a place of aboad appointed out for vs in the emperors +court, and are enioined to goe and to bestow our blessing vpon him. And I +enquired of certaine Courtiers concerning the number of persons pertaining +to the emperors court? And they answered mee that of stage-players, +musicians, and such like, there were eighteene Thuman at the least, and +that the keepers of dogs, beasts and foules were fifteene Thuman, and the +physicians for the emperours body were foure hundred; the Christians also +were eight in number, together with one Saracen. At my being there, all the +foresayd number of persons had all kind of necessaries both for apparell +and victuals out of the emperors court. Moreouer, when he will make his +progresse from one countrey to another, hee hath foure troupes of horsemen, +one being appointed to goe a dayes iourney before, and another to come a +dayes iourney after him, the third to march on his right hand, and the +fourth on his left, in the manner of a crosse, he himselfe being in the +midst, and so euery particular troupe haue their daily iourneys limited +vnto them, to the ende they may prouide sufficient victuals without defect. +Nowe the great Can himselfe is caried in maner following; hee rideth in a +chariot with two wheeles, vpon which a maiesticall throne is built of the +wood of Aloe, being adorned with gold and great pearles, and precious +stones, and foure elephants brauely furnished doe drawe the sayd chariot, +before which elephants, foure great horses richly trapped and couered doe +lead the way. Hard by the chariot on both sides thereof, are foure Barons +laying hold and attending thereupon, to keepe all persons from approaching +neere vnto their emperour. Vpon the chariot also two milke-white +Ier-falcons doe sit, and seeing any game which hee would take, hee letteth +them flie, and so they take it, and after this maner doeth hee solace +himselfe as hee rideth. Moreover, no man dare come within a stones cast of +the chariot, but such as are appointed. The number of his owne followers, +of his wiues attendants, and of the traine of his first begotten sonne and +heire apparent, would seeme incredible vnto any man, vnlesse hee had seene +it with his owne eyes. The foresayd great Can hath diuided his Empire into +twelue partes or Prouinces, and one of the sayd prouinces hath two thousand +great cities within the precincts thereof. Whereupon his empire is of that +length and breadth, that vnto whatsoeuer part thereof he intendeth his +iourny, he hath space enough for six moneths continual progresse, except +his Islands which are at the least 5000. + + +Of certaine Innes or hospitals appointed for trauailers throughout the + whole empire. + +The foresayd Emperor (to the end that trauailers may haue all things +necessary throughout his whole empire) hath caused certaine Innes to be +prouided in sundry places vpon the high wayes, where all things pertaining +vnto victuals are in a continuall readinesse. And when any alteration or +newes happen in any part of his Empire, if he chance to be farre absent +from that part, his ambassadors vpon horses or dromedaries ride post vnto +him, and when themselues and their beasts are weary, they blow their horne, +at the noise whereof, the next Inne likewise prouideth a horse and a man, +who takes the letter of him that is weary and runneth vnto another Inne: +and so by diuers Innes, and diuers postes, the report, which ordinarily +could skarce come in 30. dayes, is in one naturall day brought vnto the +emperor: and therefore no matter of any moment can be done in his empire, +but straightway he hath intelligence thereof. Moreouer, when the great Can +himselfe will go on hunting, he vseth this custome. Some twenty dayes +iourney from the citie of Kambaleth there is a forrest containing sixe +dayes iourney in circuit, in which forrest there are so many kinds of +beasts and birds, as it is incredible to report. Vnto this forrest, at the +ende of euery third or fourth yere, himselfe with his whole traine +resorteth, and they all of them together enuiron the sayd forrest, sending +dogs into the same, which by hunting do bring foorth the beasts: namely, +lions and stags, and other creatures, vnto a most beautifull plaine in the +midst of the forrest, because all the beasts of the forrest doe tremble, +especially at the cry of hounds. Then commeth the great Can himselfe, being +caried vpon three elephants, and shooteth fine arrowes into the whole herd +of beasts, and after him all his Barons, and after them the rest of his +courtiers and family doe all in like maner discharge their arrowes also, +and euery mans arrow hath a sundry marke. Then they all goe vnto the beasts +which are slaine (suffering the liuing beasts to returne into the wood that +they may haue more sport with them another time) and euery man enjoyeth +that beast as his owne, wherein he findeth his arrow sticking. + + +Of the foure feasts which the great Can solemnizeth euery yeere in his + Court. + +Foure great feasts in a yeere doeth the emperor Can celebrate: namely the +feast of his birth, the feast of his circumcision, the feast of his +coronation, and the feast of his mariage. And vnto these feasts he inuiteth +all his Barons, his stage-players, and all such as are of his kinred. Then +the great Can sitting in his throne, all his Barons present themselues +before him, with wreaths and crownes vpon their heads, being diuersly +attired, for some of them are in greene, namely the principall: the second +are in red, and the third in yellow, and they hold each man in his hand a +little Iuorie table of elephants tooth, and they are girt with golden +girdles of halfe a foote broad, and they stand vpon their feete keeping +silence. About them stand the stage-players or musicians with their +instruments. And in one of the corners of a certaine great pallace, all the +Philosophers or Magicians remaine for certaine howers, and doe attend vpon +points or characters: and when the point and hower which the sayd +Philosophers expected for, is come, a certaine crier crieth out with a loud +voyce, saying, Incline or bowe your selues before your Emperour: with that +all the Barons fall flat vpon the earth. Then hee crieth out againe; Arise +all, and immediately they all arise. Likewise the Philosophers attend vpon +a point or character the second time, and when it is fulfilled, the crier +crieth out amaine; Put your fingers in your eares: and foorthwith againe he +saieth; Plucke them out. Againe, at the third point he crieth, Boult this +meale. Many other circumstances also doe they performe, all which they say +haue some certaine signification: howbeit, neither would I write them, nor +giue any heed vnto them, because they are vaine and ridiculous. And when +the musicians hower is come, then the Philosophers say, Solemnize a feast +vnto your Lord: with that all of them sound their instruments, making a +great and a melodious noyse. And immediately another crieth, Peace, peace, +and they are all whist. Then come the women-musicians and sing sweetly +before the Emperour, which musike was more delightfull vnto me. After them +come in the lions and doe their obeisance vnto the great Can. Then the +iuglers cause golden cups full of wine to flie vp and downe in the ayre, +and to apply themselues vnto mens mouthes that they may drinke of them. +These and many other strange things I sawe in the court of the great Can, +which no man would beleeue vnlesse he had seen with his owne eies, and +therefore I omit to speake of them. [Sidenote: A lambe in a gourd.] I was +informed also by certaine credible persons, of another miraculous thing, +namely, that in a certaine kingdome of the sayd Can, wherein stand the +mountains called Kapsei (the kingdomes name is Kalor) there grewe great +Gourds or Pompions, which being ripe, doe open at the tops, and within them +is found a little beast like vnto a yong lambe, euen as I my selfe haue +heard reported, that there stand certaine trees vpon the shore of the Irish +sea, bearing fruit like vnto a gourd, which, at a certaine time of the +yeere doe fall into the water, and become birds called Bernacles, and this +is most true. [Footnote: This report is first found in the writings of +Giraldus Cambreusis, tutor to King John.] + + +Of diuers prouinces and cities. + +And after three yeeres I departed out of the empire of Cataie, trauailing +fiftie dayes iourney towards the West. [Sidenote: His returne Westward.] +And at length I came vnto the empire of Pretegoani, whose principall citie +is Kosan, which hath many other cities vnder it. [Sidenote: Casan] From +thence passing many dayes trauell, I came vnto a prouince called Casan, +which is for good commodities, one of the onely prouinces vnder the Sunne, +and is very well inhabited, insomuch that when we depart out of the gates +of one city we may beholde the gates of another city, as I my selfe saw in +diuers of them. The breadth of the sayd prouince is fifty dayes iourney, +and the length aboue sixty. In it there is great plenty of all victuals, +and especially of chesnuts, and it is one of the twelue prouinces of the +great Can. Going on further, I came vnto a certaine kingdome called Tebek, +[Marginal note: Or Thebet.] which is in subiection vnto the great Can also, +wherein I thinke there is more plenty of bread and wine then in any other +part of the whole world besides. The people of the sayd countrey do, for +the most part, inhabit in tents made of blacke felt. Their principall city +is inuironed with faire and beautifull walles, being built of most white +and blacke stones, which are disposed chekerwise one by another, and +curiously compiled together: likewise all the high wayes in this countrey +are exceedingly well paued. In the sayd countrey none dare shed the bloud +of a man, or of any beast, for the reuerence of a certaine idole. In the +foresayd city their Abassi, that is to say, their Pope is resident, being +the head and prince of all idolaters (vpon whom he bestoweth and +distributeth gifts after his maner) euen as our pope of Rome accounts +himselfe to be the head of all Christians. The women of this countrey weare +aboue an hundreth tricks and trifles about them, and they haue two teeth in +their mouthes as long as the tushes of a boare. When any mans father +deceaseth among them, his sonne assembleth together all the priests and +musicians that he can get, saying that he is determined to honour his +father: then causeth he him to be caried into the field (all his kinsfolks, +friends, and neighbours, accompanying him in the sayd action) where the +priests with great solemnity cut off the father's head, giuing it vnto his +sonne, which being done, they diuide the whole body into morsels, and so +leaue it behinde them, returning home with prayers in the company of the +sayd sonne. So soone as they are departed, certaine vultures, which are +accustomed to such bankets, come flying from the mountaines, and cary away +all the sayd morsels of flesh: and from thenceforth a fame is spread +abroad, that the sayd party deceased was holy, because the angels of God +carried him into paradise. And this is the greatest and highest honour, +that the sonne can deuise to performe vnto his deceased father. [Sidenote: +The same story concerning the very same people is in William de Rubricis.] +Then the sayd sonne taketh his fathers head, seething it and eating the +flesh thereof, but of the skull he makes a drinking cup, wherein himselfe +with all his family and kindred do drinke with great solemnity and mirth, +in the remembrance of his dead and deuoured father. Many other vile and +abominable things doth the said nation commit, which I meane not to write, +because men neither can nor will beleeue, except they should haue the sight +of them. + + +Of a certaine rich man, who is fed and nourished by fiftie virgins. + +While I was in the prouince of Mancy, I passed by the palace of a certaine +famous man, which hath fifty virgin damosels continually attending vpon +him, feeding him euery meale, as a bird feeds her yoong ones. Also he hath +sundry kindes of meat serued in at his table, and three dishes of ech +kinde; and when the sayd virgins feed him, they sing most sweetly. This man +hath in yeerely reuenues thirty thuman of tagars of rise, euery of which +thuman yeeldeth tenne thousand tagars, and one tagar is the burthen of an +asse. His palace is two miles in circuit, the pauement whereof is one plate +of golde, and another of siluer. Neere vnto the wall of the sayd palace +there is a mount artificially wrought with golde and siluer, whereupon +stand turrets and steeples and other delectable things for the solace and +recreation of the foresayd great man. And it was tolde me that there were +foure such men in the sayd kingdome. [Sidenote: Long nailes.] It is +accounted a great grace for the men of that countrey to haue long nailes +vpon their fingers, and especially vpon their thumbes which nailes they may +fold about their hands: but the grace and beauty of their women is to haue +small and slender feet: and therefore the mothers when their daughters are +yoong, do binde vp their feet, that they may not grow great. [Sidenote: +Melistorte.] Trauelling on further towards the South, I arriued at a +certaine countrey called Melistorte, which is a pleasant and fertile place. +And in this countrey there was a certeine man called Senex de monte, who +round about two mountaines had built a wall to inclose the sayd mountaines. +Within this wall there were the fairest and most chrystall fountaines in +the whole world: and about the sayd fountaines there were most beautifull +virgins in great number, and goodly horses also, and in a word, euery thing +that could be deuised for bodily solace and delight, and therefore the +inhabitants of the countrey call the same place by the name of Paradise. + +The sayd olde Senex, when he saw any proper and valiant yoong man, he would +admit him into his paradise. Moreouer, by certaine conducts he makes, wine +and milke to flow abundantly. This Senex, when he hath a minde to reuenge +himselfe or to slay any king or baron, commandeth him that is gouernor of +the sayd paradise, to bring thereunto some of the acquaintance of the sayd +king or baron, permitting him a while to take his pleasure therein, and +then to giue him a certaine potion being of force, to cast him into such a +slumber as should make him quite voide of all sense, and so being in a +profound sleepe to conuey him out of his paradise: who being awaked, and +seeing himselfe thrust out of the paradise would become so sorrowfull, that +he could not in the world deuise what to do, or whither to turne him. Then +would he goe vnto the foresaid old man, beseeching him that he might be +admitted againe into his paradise: who saith vnto him, You cannot be +admitted thither, vnlesse you will slay such or such a man for my sake, and +if you will giue the attempt onely, whether you kill him or no, I will +place you againe in paradise, that there you may remaine alwayes: then +would the party without faile put the same in execution, indeuouring to +murther all those against whom the sayd olde man had conceiued any hatred. +And therefore all the kings of the east stood in awe of the sayd olde man, +and gaue vnto him great tribute. + + +Of the death of Senex de monte. + +And when the Tartars had subdued a great part of the world, they came vnto +the sayd olde man, and tooke from him the custody of his paradise: who +being incensed thereat, sent abroad diuers desperate and resolute persons +out of his forenamed paradise, and caused many of the Tartarian nobles to +be slaine. The Tartars seeing this, went and besieged the city wherein the +said olde man was, tooke him, and put him to a most cruell and ignominious +death. The friers in that place haue this speciall gift and prerogatiue: +namely, that by the vertue of the name of Christ Iesu, and in the vertue of +his pretious bloud, which he shedde vpon the crosse for the saluation of +mankinde, they doe cast foorth deuils out of them that are possessed. And +because there are many possessed men in those parts, they are bound and +brought ten dayes iourney unto the sayd friers, who being dispossessed of +the vncleane spirits, do presently beleeue in Christ who deliuered them, +accounting him for their God, and being baptized in his name, and also +deliuering immediatly vnto the friers all their idols, and the idols of +their cattell, which are commonly made of felt or of womens haire: then the +sayd friers kindle a fire in a publike place (whereunto the people resort, +that they may see the false gods of their neighbors burnt) and cast the +sayd idols thereinto: howbeit at the first those idols came out of the fire +againe. Then the friers sprinkled the sayd fire with holy water, casting +the idols into it the second time, and with that the deuils fled in the +likenesse of blacke smoake, and the idols still remained till they were +consumed vnto ashes. Afterward, this noise and outcry was heard in the +ayre: Beholde and see how I am expelled out of my habitation. And by these +meanes the friers doe baptize great multitudes, who presently reuolt againe +vnto their idols: insomuch that the sayd friers must eftsoones, as it were, +vnderprop them, and informe them anew. There was another terrible thing +which I saw there: for passing by a certaine valley, which is situate +beside a pleasant riuer, I saw many dead bodies, and in the sayd valley +also I heard diuers sweet sounds and harmonies of musike, especially the +noise of citherns, whereat I was greatly amazed. This valley conteineth in +length seuen or eight miles at the least; into the which whosoeuer entreth, +dieth presently, and can by no meanes passe aliue thorow the middest +thereof: for which cause all the inhabitants thereabout decline vnto the +one side. Moreouer, I was tempted to go in, and to see what it was. At +length, making my prayers, and recommending my selfe to God in the name of +Iesu, I entred, and saw such swarmes of dead bodies there, as no man would +beleeue vnlesse he were an eye witnesse thereof. At the one side of the +foresayd valley vpon a certaine stone, I saw the visage of a man, which +beheld me with such a terrible aspect, that I thought verily I should haue +died in the same place. But alwayes this sentence, the word became flesh, +and dwelt amongst vs, I ceased not to pronounce, signing my selfe with the +signe of the crosse, and neerer then seuen or eight pases I durst not +approach vnto the said head: but I departed and fled vnto another place in +the sayd valley, ascending vp into a little sand mountaine, where looking +round about, I saw nothing but the sayd citherns, which me thought I heard +miraculously sounding and playing by themselues without the help of +musicians. And being vpon the toppe of the mountaine, I found siluer there +like the scales of fishes in great abundance: and I gathered some part +thereof into my bosome to shew for a wonder, but my conscience rebuking me, +I cast it vpon the earth, reseruing no whit at all vnto my selfe, and so, +by Gods grace I departed without danger. And when the men of the countrey +knew that I was returned out of the valley aliue, they reuerenced me much, +saying that I was baptised and holy, and that the foresayd bodies were men +subiect vnto the deuils infernall, who vsed to play vpon citherns, to the +end they might allure people to enter, and so murther them. Thus much +concerning those things which I beheld most certainely with mine eyes, I +frier Odoricus haue heere written: many strange things also I haue of +purpose omitted, because men will not beleeue them vnlesse they should see +them. + + +Of the honour and reuerence done vnto the great Can. + +I will report one thing more, which I saw, concerning the great Can. It is +an vsuall custome in those parts, that when the forsayd Can traueileth +thorow any countrey, his subiects kindle fires before their doores, casting +spices thereinto to make a perfume, that their lord passing by may smell +the sweet and delectable odours thereof, and much people come forth to meet +him. And vpon a certaine time when he was cumming towardes Cambaleth, the +fame of his approch being published, a bishop of ours with certaine of our +minorite friers and my selfe went two dayes iourney to meet him: and being +come nigh vnto him, we put a crosse vpon wood, I my selfe hauing a censer +in my hand, and began to sing with a loud voice: Veni creator spiritus. And +as we were singing on this wise, he caused vs to be called, commanding vs +to come vnto him: notwithstanding (as it is aboue mentioned) that no man +dare approach within a stones cast of his chariot, vnlesse he be called, +but such onely as keepe his chariot. And when we came neere vnto him, he +vailed his hat or bonet being of an inestimable price, doing reuerance vnto +the crosse. And immediatly I put incense into the censer, and our bishop +taking the censer perfumed him, and gaue him his benediction. Moreouer, +they that come before the sayd Can do alwayes bring some oblation to +present vnto him, obseruing the antient law: Thou shall not appeare in my +presence with an empty hand. And for that cause we carried apples with vs, +and offered them in a platter with reuerence vnto him: and taking out two +of them he did eat some part of one. And then he signified vnto vs, that we +should go apart, least the horses comming on might in ought offend vs. With +that we departed from him, and turned aside, going vnto certaine of his +barons, which had bene conuerted to the faith by certeine friers of our +order, being at the same time in his army: and we offered vnto them of the +foresayd apples, who receiued them at our hands with great ioy, seeming +vnto vs to be as glad, as if we had giuen them some great gift. + +All the premisses abouewritten friar William de Solanga hath put downe in +writing euen as the foresayd frier Odoricus vttered them by word of mouth, +in the yeere of our Lord 1330. in the moneth of May, and in the place of S. +Anthony of Padua. Neither did he regard to write them in difficult Latine +or in an eloquent stile, but euen as Odoricus himselfe rehearsed them, to +the end that men might the more easily vnderstand the things reported. I +frier Odoricus of Friuli, of a certaine territory called Portus Vahonis, +and of the order of the minorites, do testifie and beare wimesse vnto the +reuerend father Guidotus minister of the prouince of S. Anthony, in the +marquesate of Treuiso (being by him required vpon mine obedience so to doe) +that all the premisses aboue written, either I saw with mine owne eyes, or +heard the same reported by credible and substantiall persons. The common +report also of the countreyes where I was, testifieth those things, which I +saw, to be true. Many other things I haue omitted, because I beheld them +not with mine owne eyes. Howbeit from day to day I purpose with my selfe to +trauell countreyes or lands, in which action I dispose myselfe to die or to +liue, as it shall please my God. + + +Of the death of frier Odoricus. + +In the yeere therefore of our Lord 1331 the foresayd frier Odoricus +preparing himselfe for the performance of his intended iourney, that his +trauel and labour might be to greater purpose, he determined to present +himselfe vnto Pope Iohn the two and twentieth, whose benediction and +obedience being receiued, he with a certaine number of friers willing to +beare him company, might conuey himselfe vnto all the countreyes of +infidels. And as he was trauelling towards the pope, and not farre distant +from the city of Pisa, there meets him by the waye a certaine olde man, in +the habit and attire of a pilgrime, saluting him by name, and saying: All +haile frier Odoricus. And when the frier demaunded how he had knowledge of +him: he answered: Whiles, you were in India I knew you full well, yea, and +I knew your holy purpose also: but see that you returne immediatly vnto the +couer from whence you came, for tenne dayes hence you shall depart out of +this present world. Wherefore being astonished and amazed at these wordes +(especially the olde man vanishing out of his sight, presently after he had +spoken them) he determined to returne. And so he returned in perfect +health, feeling no crazednesse nor infirmity of body. And being in his +couen at Vdene in the prouince of Padua, the tenth day after the foresayd +vision, hauing receiued the Communion, and preparing himselfe vnto God, +yea, being strong and sound of body, hee happily rested in the Lord; whose +sacred departure was signified vnto the Pope aforesaid, vnder the hand of +the publique notary in these words following. + +In the yeere of our Lord 1331, the 14. day of Ianuarie, Beatus Odoricus a +Frier minorite deceased in Christ, at whose prayers God shewed many and +sundry miracles, which I Guetelus publique notarie of Vtina, sonne of M. +Damianus de Porto Gruaro, at the commandement and direction of the +honorable Conradus of the Borough of Gastaldion, and one of the Councell of +Vtina, haue written as faithfully as I could, and haue deliuered a copie +thereof vnto the Friers minorites: howbeit not of all, because they are +innumerable, and too difficult for me to write. + + * * * * * + +The voyage of the Lord Iohn of Holland, Earle of Huntington, brother by the + mothers side to King Richard the second, to Ierusalem and Saint Katherins + mount. + +[Sidenote: 1394. Froyssart.] The Lord Iohn of Holland, Earle of Huntington, +was as then on his way to Ierusalem, and to Saint Katherins mount, and +purposed to returne by the Realme of Hungarie. For as he passed through +France (where he had great cheere of the King, and of his brother and +vncles) hee heard how the king of Hungary and the great Turke should haue +battell together: therefore he thought surely to be at that iourney. + + * * * * * + +The voiage of Thomas lord Moubray duke of Norfolke to Ierusalem, in the + yeere of our Lord 1399. written by Holinshed, pag. 1233. + +Thomas lord Moubray, second sonne of Elizabeth Segraue and Iohn lord +Moubray her husband, was advanced to the dukedome of Norfolke in the 21. +yeere of the reigne of Richard the 2. Shortly after which, hee was appealed +by Henry earle of Bullingbroke of treason; and caried to the castle of +Windsore, where he was strongly and safely garded, hauing a time of combate +granted to determine the cause betweene the two dukes, the 16. day of +September, in the 22. of the sayd king, being the yeere of our redemption +1398. But in the end the matter was so ordered, that this duke of Norfolke +was banished for euer: whereupon taking his iourney to Ierusalem, he died +at Venice in his returne from the said citie of Ierusalem, in the first +yeere of King Henry the 4. about the yeere of our redemption, 1399. + + * * * * * + +The Voiage of the bishop of Winchester to Ierusalem, in the sixt yeere of + the reigne of Henry the fift, which was the yeere of our Lord, 1417. + Thomas Walsingham. + +Vltimo die mensis Octobris, episcopus Wintoniensis accessit ad concilium +Constanciense, peregrinaturus Hierosolymam post electionem summi pontificis +celebratam, vbi tantum valuit eius facunda persuasio, vt et excitaret +dominos Cardinales ad concordiam, et ad electionem summi pontificis se +ocyùs præpararent. + + +The same in English. + +The last day of October the bishop of Winchester came to the Councell of +Constance, which after the chusing of the Pope determined to take his +iourney to Ierusalem: where his eloquent perswasion so much preuailed, that +he both perswaded my lords the Cardinals to vnity and concord, and also +moued them to proceed more speedily to the election of the Pope. + + * * * * * + +A preparation of a voyage of King Henrie the fourth to the Holy land + against the infidels in the yere 1413, being the last yere of his reigne: + wherein he was preuented by death: written by Walsingham, Fabian, + Polydore Virgile, and Holenshed. + +[Sidenote: Order taken for building of ships and gallies.] In this +fourteenth and last yere of king Henries reigne a councell was holden in +the White friers in London, at the which among other things, order was +taken for ships and gallies to be builded and made ready, and all other +things necessary to be prouided for a voyage, which he meant to make into +the Holy land, there to recouer the city of Ierusalem from the infidels: +for it grieued him to consider the great malice of Christian princes, that +were bent vpon a mischieuous purpose to destroy one another, to the perill +of their owne soules, rather than to make warre against the enemies of the +Christian faith, as in conscience, it seemed to him, they were bound. We +finde, sayeth Fabian in his Chronicle, that he was taken with his last +sickeness, while he was making his prayers at Saint Edwards shrine, there +as it were, to take his leaue, and so to proceede foorth on his iourney. He +was so suddenly and grieuously taken, that such as were about him feared +least he would haue died presently: wherefore to relieue him, if it were +possible, they bare him into a chamber that was next at hand, belonging to +the Abbot of Westminster, where they layd him on a pallet before the fire, +and vsed all remedies to reuiue him. At length he recouered his speech, and +perceiuing himselfe in a strange place which he knew not, he willed to +knowe if the chamber had any particular name, whereunto answere was made, +that it was called Ierusalem. Then sayde the king, Laudes be giuen to the +father of heauen: for now I knowe that I shall die here in this chamber, +according to the prophesie of mee declared, that I should depart this life +in Ierusalem. + + * * * * * + +Of this intended voyage Polydore Virgile writeth in manner following. + +Post haec Henricus Rex memor nihil homini debere esse antiquius, quàm ad +officium iustitiæ, quæ ad hominum vtilitatem pertinet, omne suum studium +conferre, protinùs omisso ciuili bello, quo pudebat videre Christianos omni +tempore turpitèr occupari, de republica Anglica benè gubernanda, de bello +in hostes communes sumendo, de Hierosolymis tandem aliquando recipiendis +plura destinabat, classemque iam parabat, cum ei talia agenti atque +meditanti casus mortem attulit: subito enim morbo tentatus, nulla medicina +subleuari potuit. Mortuus est apud Westmonasterium, annum agens +quadragesimum sextum, qui fuit annus salutis humanæ, 1413. + + +The same in English. + +Afterward, King Henry calling to minde, that nothing ought to be more +highly esteemed by any man, then to doe the vtmost of his indeuour for the +performance of iustice, which tendeth to the good and benefite of mankinde; +altogether abondoning ciuill warre (wherewith he was ashamed to see, how +Christians at all times were dishonourably busied) entered into a more +deepe consideration of well gouerning his Realme of England, of waging +warre against the common enemie, and of recouering, in processe of time the +citie of Ierusalem, yea, and was prouiding a nauie for the same purpose, +whenas in the very midst of this his heroicall action and enterprise, he +was surprised with death: for falling into a sudden disease, he could not +be cured by any kinde of physicke. He deceased at Westminster in the 46 +yeare of his age, which was in the yeere of our Lord, 1413. + + * * * * * + +The voyage of M. Iohn Locke to Ierusalem. + +In my voyage to Ierusalem, I imbarked my selfe the 26 of March 1553 in the +good shippe called the Mathew Gonson, which was bound for Liuorno, or +Legorne and Candia. It fell out that we touched in the beginning of Aprill +next ensuing at Cades in Andalozia, where the Spaniardes, according to +their accustomed maner with all shippes of extraordinarie goodnes and +burden, picked a quarell against the company, meaning to haue forfeited, or +at least to haue arrested the sayd shippe. And they grew so malicious in +their wrongfull purpose that I being vtterly out of hope of any speedie +release, to the ende that my intention should not be ouerthrowen, was +inforced to take this course following. Notwithstanding this hard +beginning, it fell out so luckily, that I found in the roade a great shippe +called the Caualla of Venice, wherein after agreement made with the patron, +I shipped my selfe the 24. of May in the said yere 1553. and the 25 by +reason of the winde blowing hard and contrary, we were not able to enter +the straits of Gibraltar, but were put to the coast of Barbarie, where we +ankered in the maine sea 2. leagues from shore, and continued so vntill two +houres before sunne set, and then we weighed againe, and turned our course +towards the Straits, where we entered the 26 day aforesayd, the winde being +calme, but the current of the straites very fauourable. The same day the +winde beganne to rise somewhat, and blew a furthering gale, and so +continued at Northwest vntill we arriued at Legorne the third of Iune. And +from thence riding ouer land vnto Venice, I prepared for my voyage to +Ierusalem in the Pilgrimes shippe. + +[Sidenote: The ship Fila Cauena departeth for Ierusalem. Rouigno a port in +Istria.] I John Locke, accompanied with Maister Anthony Rastwold, and +diuers other, Hollanders, Zelanders, Almaines and French pilgrimes entered +the good shippe called Fila Cauena of Venice, the 16 of July 1553. and the +17 in the morning we weighed our anker and sailed towardes the coast of +Istria, to the port of Rouigno, and the said day there came aboard of our +ship the Perceuena of the shippe named Tamisari, for to receiue the rest of +all the pilgrimes money, which was in all after the rate of 55. Crownes for +euery man for that voyage, after the rate of fiue shillings starling to the +crowne: This done, he returned to Venice. + +[Sidenote: Sancta Eufemia.] The 19 day we tooke fresh victuals aboard, and +with the bote that brought the fresh provision we went on land to the +Towne, and went to see the Church of Sancta Eufemia, where we sawe the +bodie of the sayd Saint. + +[Sidenote: Monte de Ancona.] The 20 day wee departed from Rouignio, and +about noone we had sight of Monte de Ancona, and the hilles of Dalmatia, or +else of Sclauonia both at one time, and by report they are 100. miles +distant from ech other, and more. + +[Sidenote: Il Pomo.] The 21 we sayled still in sight of Dalmatia, and a +little before noone, we had a sight of a rocke in the midst of the sea, +called in the Italian il Pomo, it appeareth a farre off to be in shape like +a sugarloafe. [Sidenote: Sant Andrea.] Also we sawe another rocke about two +miles compasse called Sant Andrea; on this rocke is only one Monasterie of +Friers: [Sidenote: Lissa an Iland.] we sayled betweene them both, and left +S. Andrea on the left hand of vs, and we had also kenning of another Iland +called Lissa, all on the left hande, these three Ilands lie East and West +in the sea, and at the sunne setting we had passed them. [Sidenote: Lezina +Iland.] Il pomo is distant from Sant Andrea 18 miles, and S. Andrea from +Lissa ten miles, and Lissa from another Iland called Lezina, which standeth +betweene the maine of Dalmatia and Lissa, tenne miles. This Iland is +inhabited and hath great plentie of wine and frutes and hereagainst we were +becalmed. + +[Sidenote: Catza. Pelagosa.] The 22. we had sight of another small Iland +called Catza, which is desolate and on the left hand, and on the right +hand, a very dangerous Iland called Pelagosa, this is also desolate, and +lyeth in the midst of the sea betweene both the maines: it is very +dangerous and low land, and it hath a long ledge of rockes lying out sixe +miles into the sea, so that many ships by night are cast away vpon them. +There is betweene Catza and Pelagosa 30 miles, and these two Ilands are +distant from Venice 400. miles. [Sidenote: Augusta.] There is also about +twelue miles eastward, a great Iland called Augusta, about 14 miles in +length, somewhat hillie, and well inhabited, and fruitfull of vines, corne +and other fruit, this also we left on the left hand: and we haue hitherto +kept our course from Rouignio East southeast. [Sidenote: Meleda. Mount Sant +Angelo.] This Iland is vnder the Signiorie or gouernement of Ragusa, it is +distant from Ragusa 50 miles, and there is by that Iland a greater, named +Meleda, which is also vnder the gouernement of Ragusa, it is about 30 miles +in length, and inhabited, and hath good portes, it lyeth by East from +Augusta, and ouer against this Iland lyeth a hill called Monte S. Angelo, +vpon the coast of Puglia in Italy, and we had sight of both landes at one +time. + +The 23 we sayled all the day long by the bowline alongst the coast of +Ragusa, and towardes night we were within 7. or 8. miles of Ragusa, that we +might see the white walles, but because it was night, we cast about to the +sea, minding at the second watch, to beare in againe to Ragusa, for to know +the newes of the Turkes armie, but the winde blew so hard and contrary, +that we could not. [Sidenote: Ragusa paieth 14000. Sechinos to the Turke +yerely.] This citie of Ragusa paieth tribute to the Turke yerely fourteene +thousand Sechinos, and euery Sechino is of Venetian money eight liuers and +two soldes, besides other presents which they giue to the Turkes Bassas +when they come thither. The Venetians haue a rocke or cragge within a mile +of the said towne, for the which the Raguseos would giue much money, but +they doe keepe it more for the namesake, then for profite. This rocke lieth +on the Southside of the towne, and is called Il Cromo, there is nothing on +it but onely a Monasterie called Sant Ieronimo. The maine of the Turkes +countrie is bordering on it within one mile, for the which cause they are +in great subiection. This night we were put backe by contrarie winds, and +ankered at Melleda. + +The 24 being at an anker vnder Melleda, we would haue gone on land, but the +winde came so faire that we presently set sayle and went our course, and +left on the right hand of vs the forenamed Iland, and on the left hand +betweene vs and the maine the Iland of Zupanna, and within a mile of that +vnder the maine by East, another Iland called Isola de Mezo. This Iland +hath two Monasteries in it, one called Santa Maria de Bizo, and the other +Sant Nicholo. Also there is a third rocke with a Frierie called Sant +Andrea: these Ilands are from the maine but two miles, and the channell +betweene Melleda and Zupanna is but foure or fiue miles ouer by gesse, but +very deepe, for we had at an anker fortie fathoms. The two Ilands of +Zupanno and Mezo are well inhabited, and very faire buildings, but nothing +plentie saue wine onely. This night toward sunne set it waxed calme, and we +sayled little or nothing. + +The 24 we were past Ragusa 14 miles, and there we mette with two Venetian +ships, which came from Cyprus, we thought they would haue spoken with vs, +for we were desirous to talke with them, to knowe the newes of the Turkes +armie, and to haue sent some letters by them to Venice. About noone, we had +scant sight of Castel nouo, which Castell a fewe yeeres past the Turke +tooke from the Emperour, in which fight were slaine three hundred Spanish +souldiers, besides the rest which were taken prisoners, and made gallie +slaves. This Castell is hard at the mouth of a channell called Boca de +Cataro. The Venetians haue a hold within the channell called Cataro, this +channell goeth vp to Budoa, and further vp into the countrey. About sunne +set we were ouer against the hilles of Antiueri in Sclauonia, in the which +hilles the Venetians haue a towne called Antiueri, and the Turkes haue +another against it called Marcheuetti, the which two townes continually +skirmish together with much slaughter. At the end of these hils endeth the +Countrey of Sclauonia, and Albania beginneth. These hilles are thirtie +miles distant from Ragusa. + +The 27 we kept our course towards Puglia, and left Albania on the left +hand. The 28. we had sight of both the maines, but we were neere the coast +of Puglia, for feare of Foystes. It is betweene Cape Chimera in Albania and +Cape Otranto in Puglia 60 miles. Puglia is a plaine low lande, and Chimera +in Albania is very high land, so that it is seene the further. Thus sayling +our course along the coast of Puglia, we saw diuerse white Towers, which +serue for sea-markes. About three of the clocke in the after noone, we had +sight of a rocke called Il fano, 48 miles from Corfu, and by sunne set we +discouered Corfu. Thus we kept on our course with a prosperous winde, and +made our way after twelue mile euery houre. Most part of this way we were +accompanied with certaine fishes called in the Italian tongue Palomide, it +is a fish three quarters of a yard in length, in colour, eating, and making +like a Makarell, somewhat bigge and thick in body, and the tayle forked +like a halfe moone, for the which cause it is said that the Turke will not +suffer them to be taken in all his dominions. + +The 29 in the morning we were in sight of an Iland, which we left on our +left hande called Cephalonia, it is vnder the Venetians, and well +inhabited, with a faire towne strongly situated on a hill of which hill the +Iland beareth her name, it hath also a very strong fortresse or Castle, and +plentie of corne and wine, their language is Greek, it is distant from the +maine of Morea, thirtie miles, it is in compasse 80 miles. One houre within +night we sayled by the towne standing on the South cape of Cephalonia, +whereby we might perceiue their lights. There come oftentimes into the +creeks and riuers, the Turkes foystes and gallies where at their arriual, +the Countrey people doe signifie vnto their neighbours by so many lights, +as there are foistes or gallies in the Iland, and thus they doe from one to +another the whole Iland ouer. Aboute three of the clocke in the afternoone +the winde scanted, and wee minded to haue gone to Zante, but we could not +for that night. [Sidenote: Zante.] This Iland of Zante is distant from +Cephalonia, 12 or 14 miles, but the towne of Cephalonia, from the towne of +Zante, is distant fortie miles. This night we went but little forward. + +The 30 day we remained still turning vp and downe because the winde was +contrary, and towards night the winde mended, so that we entered the +channell betweene Cephalonia, and Zante, the which chanell is about eight +or tenne miles ouer, and these two beare East and by South, and West and by +North from the other. The towne of Zante lieth within a point of the land, +where we came to an anker, at nine of the clocke at night. + +[Sidenote: Iohn Locke, and fiue Hollanders goe on land.] The 31 about sixe +of the clocke in the morning, I with fiue Hollanders went on land, and +hosted at the house of Pedro de Venetia. After breakfast we went to see the +towne, and passing along we went into some of the Greeke churches, wherein +we sawe their Altares, images, and other ornaments. [Sidenote: Santa Maria +de la Croce.] This done, wee went to a Monasterie of Friers called Sancta +Maria de la Croce, these are westerne Christians, for the Greekes haue +nothing to doe with them, nor they with the Greekes, for they differ very +much in religion. There are but 2. Friers in this Friery. [Sidenote: The +tombe of M. T. Cicero.] In this Monasterie we saw the tombe that M. T. +Cicero was buried in, with Terentia Antonia, his wife. This tombe was +founde about sixe yeeres since, when the Monastery was built, there was in +time past a streete where the tombe stoode. At the finding of the tombe +there was also found a yard vnder ground, a square stone somewhat longer +then broad, vpon which stone was found a writing of two seuerall handes +writing, the one as it seemed, for himselfe, and the other for his wife, +and vnder the same stone was found a glasse somewhat proportioned like an +vrinall, but that it was eight square and very thicke, wherein were the +ashes of the head and right arme of Mar. T. Cicero, for as stories make +mention he was beheaded as I remember at Capua, for insurrection. And his +wife hauing got his head and right arme, (which was brought to Rome to the +Emperor) went from Rome, and came to Zante, and there buried his head and +arme, and wrote vpon his tombe this style M. T Cicero. Haue. [Marginal +note: Or, Aue.] Then followeth in other letters, _Et tu Terentia Antonia_, +which difference of letters declare that they were not written both at one +time. [Sidenote: The Description of the tombe.] The tombe is long and +narrowe, and deepe, walled on euery side like a graue, in the botome +whereof was found the sayd stone with the writing on it, and the said +glasse of ashes, and also another litle glasse of the same proportion, +wherein, as they say, are the teares of his friendes, and in those dayes +they did vse to gather and bury with them, as they did vse in Italy and +Spaine to teare their haire, to bury with their friendes. In the sayde +tombe were a fewe bones. After dinner we rested vntill it drew towards +euening by reason of the heat. [Sidenote: Sant Elia, but one Frier.] And +about foure of the clocke we walked to another Frierie a mile out of the +towne called Sant Elia, these are white Friers, there were two, but one is +dead, not sixe dayes since. This Frierie hath a garden very pleasant, and +well furnished with Orenges, Lemons, pomegranates, and diuers other good +fruites. The way to it is somewhat ragged, vp hill and downe, and very +stonie, and in winter very durtie. It standeth very plesantly in a clift +betweene two hilles, with a good prospect. From thence we ascended the hill +to the Castle, which is situated on the very toppe of a hill. [Sidenote: +The description of the Castle of Zante.] This Castle is very strong, in +compasse a large mile and a halfe, which being victualed, (as it is neuer +vnfurnished) and manned with men of trust, it may defende itselfe against +any Princes power. This Castle taketh the iust compasse of the hill, and no +other hill neere it, it is so steepe downe, and so high and ragged, that it +will tyre any man or euer he be halfe way vp. Very nature hath fortified +the walles and bulwarkes: It is by nature foure square, and it commandeth +the towne and porte. The Venetians haue alwayes their Podesta, or +Gouernour, with his two Counsellours resident therein. The towne is welle +inhabited, and hath great quantity of housholders. The Iland by report is +threescore and tenne miles about, it is able to make twentie thousand +fighting men. They say they have alwayes fiue or sixe hundred horsemen +readie at an houres warning. They saye the Turke hath assayed it with 100. +Gallies, but he could neuer bring his purpose to passe. It is strange to +mee how they should maintains so many men in this Iland, for their best +sustenance is wine, and the rest but miserable. + +The first of August we were warned aboord by the patron, and towards +euening we set sayle, and had sight of a Castle called Torneste, which is +the Turkes, and is ten miles from Zante, it did belong to the Venetians, +but they haue now lost it, it standeth also on a hill on the sea side in +Morea. All that night we bare into the sea, because we had newes at Zante +of twelue of the Turkes gallies, that came from Rhodes, which were about +Modon, Coron, and Candia, for which cause we kept at the sea. + +The second of August, we had no sight of land, but kept our course, and +about the thirde watch the winde scanted, so that we bare with the shore, +and had sight of Modon and Coron. + +The third we had sight of Cauo Mattapan, and all that day by reason of +contrary windes, which blew somewhat hard, we lay a hull vntill morning. + +The fourth we were still vnder the sayd Cape, and so continued that day, +and towardes night there grewe a contention in the ship amongst the +Hollanders, and it had like to haue bene a great inconuenience, for we had +all our weapons, yea euen our kniues, taken from vs that night. + +The fift, we sayled by the Bowline, and out of the toppe we had sight of +the Iland of Candia, and towardes noone we might see it plaine, and towards +night the winde waxed calme. + +The sixt toward the breake of day we saw two small Ilands called Gozi, and +towards noone we were betweene them: the one of these Ilands is fifteene +miles about, and the other 10. miles. In those Ilands are nourished store +of cattell for butter and cheese. There are to the number of fiftie or +sixtie inhabitants, which are Greekes, and they liue chiefly on milke and +cheese. The Iland of Candia is 700 miles about, it is in length, from Cape +Spada, to Cape Salomon, 300 miles, it is as they say, able to make one +hundred thousand fighting men. We sayled betweene the Gozi, and Candia, and +they are distant from Candia 5 or 6 miles. The Candiots are strong men, and +very good archers, and shoot neere the marke. This Ilande is from Zante 300 +miles. + +The seuenth we sayled all along the sayd Iland with little winde and +vnstable, and the eight day towards night we drew to the East end of the +Iland. + +The 9 and 10 we sayled along with a prosperous winde and saw no land. + +The 11 in the morning, we had sight of the Iland of Cyprus, and towards +noone we were thwart the Cape called Ponta Malota, and about foure of the +clocke we were as farre as Baffo, and about sunne set we passed Cauo +Bianco, and towards nine of the clocke at night we doubled Cauo de la +gatte, and ankered afore Limisso, but the wind blew so hard, that we could +not come neere the towne, neither durst any man goe on land. The towne is +from Cauo de le gatte twelue miles distant. + +The 12. of August in the morning wee went on land to Limisso: this towne is +ruinated and nothing in it worth writing, saue onely in the midst of the +towne there hath bene a fortresse, which is now decayed, and the wals part +ouerthrowen, which a Turkish Rouer with certaine gallies did destroy about +10. or 12. yeeres past. [Sidenote: Caualette is a certaine vermine in the +Island of Cyprus.] This day walking to see the towne, we chanced to see in +the market place, a great quantitie of certaine vermine called in the +Italian tongue Caualette. It is as I can learne, both in shape and bignesse +like a grassehopper, for I can iudge but little difference. Of these many +yeeres they haue had such quantitie that they destroy all their corne. They +are so plagued with them, that almost euery yeere they doe well nie loose +halfe their corne, whether it be the nature of the countrey, or the plague +of God, that let them iudge that can best define. But that there may no +default be laied to their negligence for the destruction of them, they haue +throughout the whole land a constituted order, that euery Farmor or +husbandmen (which are euen as slaues bought and sold to their lord) shall +euery yeere pay according to his territorie, a measure full of the seede or +egges of these forenamed Caualette, the which they are bound to bring to +the market, and present to the officer appointed for the same, the which +officer taketh of them very straight measure, and writeth the names of the +presenters, and putteth the sayd egges or seed, into a house appointed for +the same, and hauing the house full, they beate them to pouder, and cast +them into the sea, and by this pollicie they doe as much as in them lieth +for the destruction of them. This vermine breedeth or ingendereth at the +time of corne being ripe, and the corne beyng had away, in the clods of the +same ground do the husbandmen find the nestes, or, as I may rather terme +them, cases of the egges, of the same vermine. Their nests are much like to +the keies of a hasel-nut tree, when they be dried, and of the same length, +but somewhat bigger, which case being broken you shall see the egges lie +much like vnto antes egges, but somewhat lesser. This much I haue written +at this time, because I had no more time of knowledge, but I trust at my +returne to note more of this island, with the commodities of the same at +large. + +[Sidenote: The pilgrimes going to the Greeke churches.] The 13. day we went +in the morning to the Greeks church, to see the order of their ceremonies, +and of their communion, of the which to declare the whole order with the +number of their ceremonious crossings, it were to long. Wherefore least I +should offend any man, I leaue it vnwritten: but onely that I noted well, +that in all their Communion or seruice, not one did euer kneele, nor yet in +any of their Churches could I euer see any grauen images, but painted or +portrayed. Also they haue store of lampes alight, almost for euery image +one. Their women are alwayes separated from the men, and generally they are +in the lower ende of the Church. This night we went aboord the ship, +although the wind were contrary, we did it because the patrone should not +find any lacke of vs, as sometimes he did: when as tarying vpon his owne +businesse, he would colour it with the delay of the pilgrimes. + +The 14. day in the morning we set saile, and lost sight of the Island of +Cyprus, and the 15. day we were likewise at Sea, and sawe no land: and the +16. day towards night, we looked for land, but we sawe none. But because we +supposed our selues to be neere our port, we tooke in all our sailes except +onely the foresaile and the mizzen, and so we remained all that night. + +The 17. day in the morning, we kept by report of the Mariners, some sixe +miles from Iaffa, but it prooued contrary. But because we would be sure, +wee made to an anker seuen miles from the shore, and sent the skiffe with +the Pilot and the master gunner, to learne the coast, but they returned, +not hauing seen tree nor house, nor spoken with any man. But when they came +to the sea side againe, they went vp a little hill standing hard by the +brinke, whereon as they thought, they sawe the hill of Ierusalem, by the +which the Pilot knew (after his iudgement) that we were past our port. And +so this place where we rode was, as the mariners sayd, about 50. mile from +Iaffa. This coast all alongst is very lowe, plaine, white, sandie, and +desert, for which cause it hath fewe markes or none, so that we rode here +as it were in a gulfe betweene two Capes. + +[Sidenote: A great currant.] The 18. day we abode still at anker, looking +for a gale to returne backe, but it was contrary: and the 19. we set saile, +but the currant hauing more force then the winde, we were driuen backe, +insomuch that the ship being vnder saile, we cast the sounding lead, and +(notwithstanding the wind) it remained before the shippe, there wee had +muddie ground at fifteene fadome. The same day about 4. of the clocke, wee +set saile againe, and sayled West alongst the coast with a fresh +side-winde. [Sidenote: A Cat fallen into the sea and recouered.] It chanced +by fortune that the shippes Cat lept into the Sea, which being downe, kept +her selfe very valiauntly aboue water, notwithstanding the great waues, +still swimming, the which the master knowing, he caused the Skiffe with +halfe a dozen men to goe towards her and fetch her againe, when she was +almost halfe a mile from the shippe, and all this while the ship lay on +staies. I hardly beleeue they would haue made such haste and meanes if one +of the company had bene in the like perill. They made the more haste +because it was the patrons cat. This I haue written onely to note the +estimation that cats are in, among the Italians, for generally they esteeme +their cattes, as in England we esteeme a good Spaniell. The same night +about tenne of the clocke the winde calmed, and because none of the shippe +knewe where we were, we let fall an anker about 6 mile from the place we +were at before, and there wee had muddie ground at twelue fathome. + +The 20 it was still calme, and the current so strong still one way, that we +were not able to stemme the streame: moreouer we knew not where we were, +whereupon doubting whither wee were past, or short of our port, the Master, +Pilot, and other Officers of the shippe entered into counsell what was best +to doe, wherevpon they agreed to sende the bote on lande againe, to seeke +some man to speake with all, but they returned as wise as they went. Then +we set sayle againe and sounded euery mile or halfe mile, and found still +one depth, so we not knowing where we were, came againe to an anker, seuen +or eight miles by West from the place we were at. Thus still doubting where +we were, the bote went on land againe, and brought newes that wee were +short 80 miles of the place, whereas we thought wee had beene ouershot by +east fiftie miles. Thus in these doubts we lost foure dayes, and neuer a +man in the shippe able to tell where we were, notwithstanding there were +diuerse in the shippe that had beene there before. [Sidenote: They met with +two Moores on land.] Then sayd the Pylot, that at his comming to the shore, +by chance he saw two wayfaring men, which were Moores, and he cryed to them +in Turkish, insomuch that the Moores, partly for feare, and partly for +lacke of vnderstanding, (seeing them to be Christians) beganne to flie, yet +in the end with much a doe, they stayed to speake with them, which men when +they came together, were not able to vnderstand ech other, but our men made +to them the signe of the Crosse on the sande, to giue them to vnderstand +that they were of the shippe that brought the pilgrims. Then the Moores +knowing (as al the country else doth) that it was the vse of Christians to +go to Ierusalem, shewed them to be yet by west of Iaffa. Thus we remained +ail that night at anker, and the farther west that we sayled, the lesse +water we had. + +The 21 we set sayle againe and kept our course Northeast, but because we +would not goe along the shore by night, wee came to an anker in foure and +twentie fathome water. [Sidenote: The two towers of Iaffa. Scolio di Santo +Petro.] Then the next morning being the 22 we set sayle againe, and kept +our course as before, and about three of the clocke in the afternoone, wee +had sight of the two towers of Iaffa, and about fiue of the clocke, wee +were with a rocke, called in the Italian tongue, Scolio di Santo Petro, on +the which rocke they say he fished, when Christ bid him cast his net on the +right side, and caught so many fishes. This rocke is now almost worne away. +It is from Iaffa two or three mile: here before the two towers we came to +an anker. Then the pilgrimes after supper, in salutation of the holy lande, +sang to the prayse of God, Te Deum laudamus, with Magnificat, and +Benedictus, but in the shippe was a Frier of Santo Francisco, who for anger +because he was not called and warned, would not sing with vs, so that he +stood so much vpon his dignitie, that he forgot his simplicitie, and +neglected his deuotion to the holy land for that time, saying that first +they ought to haue called him yer they did beginne, because he was a Fryer, +and had beene there, and knewe the orders. + +[Sidenote: A messenger departeth for Ierusalem.] The 23 we sent the bote on +land with a messenger to the Padre Guardian of Ierusalem. [Sidenote: +Mahomet is clothed in green.] This day it was notified vnto mee by one of +the shippe that had beene a slaue in Turkie, that no man might weare greene +in this land, because their prophet Mahomet went in greene. This came to my +knowledge by reason of the Scriuanello, who had a greene cap, which was +forbidden him to weare on the land. + +The 24. 25. and 26 we taryed in the shippe still looking for the comming of +the Padre guardian, and the 26 at night we had a storme which lasted all +the next day. + +[Sidenote: The Guardian of Ierusalem commeth to Iaffa, with the Cady, and +Subassi.] The 27 in the morning, came the Cadi, the Subassi, and the +Meniwe, with the Padre guardian, but they could not come at vs by reason of +the stormy weather: in the afternoone we assayed to send the bote on land, +but the weather would not suffer us. Then againe towards night the bote +went a shore, but it returned not that night. [Sidenote: A cloud called of +the Italians Cion most dangerous.] The same day in the afternoone we sawe +in the element, a cloud with a long tayle, like vnto the tayle of a +serpent, which cloud is called in Italian Cion, the tayle of this cloud did +hang as it were into the sea: and we did see the water vnder the sayde +cloude ascend, as it were like a smoke or myste, the which this Cion drew +vp to it. The Marriners reported to vs that it had this propertie, that if +it should happen to haue lighted on any part of the shippe, that it would +rent and wreth sayles, mast, shroudes and shippe and all in manner like a +wyth: on the land, trees, houses, in whatsoeuer else it lighteth on, it +would rent and wreth. [Sidenote: A coniuration.] These marriners did vse a +certaine coniuration to breake the said tayle, or cut it in two, which as +they say doth preuaile. They did take a blacke hafted knife, and with the +edge of the same did crosse the said taile as if they would cut it in +twain, saying these words, Hold thou Cion, eat this, and then they stucke +the knife on the ship side with the edge towards the said cloude, and I saw +it therewith vanish in lesse than one quarter of an houre. But whether it +was then consumed, or whether by vertue of the Inchantment it did vanish I +knowe not, but it was gone. Hereof let them iudge that know more then I. +This afternoone we had no winde, but the sea very stormy, insomuch that +neither cheste, pot, nor any thing else could stand in the shippe, and wee +were driuen to keepe our meate in one hand, and the pot in the other, and +so sit downe vpon the hatches to eate, for stand we could not, for that the +Seas in the very port at an anker went so high as if wee had bene in the +bay of Portugall with stormy weather. The reason is, as the Mariners said +to me, because that there meete all the waues from all places of the +Straights of Gibralter, and there breake, and that in most calmes there go +greatest seas, whether the winde blow or not. + +The 28. the weather growing somewhat calme, we went on land and rested our +selues for that day, and the next day we set forward toward the city of +Ierusalem. + +What I did, and what places of deuotion I visited in Ierusalem, and other +parts of the Holy land, from this my departure from Iaffa, vntill my +returne to the said port, may briefly be seene in my Testimoniall, vnder +the hand and seale of the Vicar generall of Mount Sion, which for the +contentment of the Reader I thought good here to interlace. + +Vniuersis et singulis præsentes litteras inspecturis salutem in Domino +nostro Iesu Christo. Attestamur vobis ac alijs quibuscunque qualiter +honorabilis vir Iohannes Lok ciuis Londoniensis, filius honorabilis viri +Guilhelmi Lok equitis aurati, ad sacratissima terræ sanctæ loca +personaliter se contulit, sanctissimum Domini nostri Iesu Christi +sepulchrum, equo die tertia gloriosus à mortuis resurrexit, sacratissimum +Caluariæ montem, in quo pro nobis omnibus cruci affixus mori dignatus est, +Sion etiam montem vbi coenam illam mirificam cum discipulis suis fecit, et +vbi spiritus sanctus in die sancto Pentecostes in discipulos eosdem in +linguis igneis descendit, Oliuetique montem vbi mirabiliter coelos +ascendit, intemeratæ virginis Mariæ Mausoleum in Iosaphat vallis medio +situm, Bethaniam quoque Bethlehem ciuitatem Dauid in qua de purissima +virgine Maria natus est, ibique inter animalia reclinatus, pluraque loca +alia tam in Hierusalem ciuitate sancta terre Iudææ, quàm extra, à modernis +peregrinis visitari solita, deuotissimè visitauit, pariterque adorauit. In +quorum fidem, ego frater Anthonius de Bergamo ordinis fratrum minorum +regularis obseruantiæ prouinciæ diui Anthonij Sacri conuentus montis Sion +vicarius (licet indignus) necnon aliorum locorum terræ Sanctæ, apostolica +authoritate comissarius et rector, has Sigillo maiori nostri officij +nostraque subscriptione muniri volui. Datum Hierosolymis apud sacratissimum +domini coenaculum in sæpè memorato monte Sion, Anno Domini millesimo +quingentesimo, quinquagesimo tertio, die vero sexto mensis Septembris. + +Frater Antonius qui supra. + +[Sidenote: The pilgrims returne from Ierusalem. Mount Carmel.] The 15. of +September being come from our pilgrimage, we went aborde our shippe, and +set saile, and kept our course West toward the Island of Cyprus, but al +that night it was calme, and the 16. the winde freshed, and we passed by +Mount Carmel. + +The 17. the winde was very scant, yet we kept the sea, and towards night +wee had a guste of raine whereby wee were constrained to strike our sailes, +but it was not very stormie, nor lasted very long. + +The 18. 19. 20. and 21. we kept still the sea and saw no land because we +had very little winde, and that not very fauourable. + +The 22. at noone the Boatswaine sent some of the Mariners into the boat, +(which we toed asterne from Iaffa) for certaine necessaries belonging to +the ship, wherein the Mariners found a certaine fish in proportion like a +Dace, about 6 inches long (yet the Mariners said they had seene the like a +foote long and more) the which fish had on euery side a wing, and toward +the taile two other lesser as it were finnes, on either side one, but in +proportion they were wings and of a good length. These wings grow out +betweene the gils and the carkasse of the same fish. [Sidenote: Pesce +columbini.] They are called in the Italian tongue Pesce columbini, for in +deede, the wings being spred it is like to a flying doue, they say it will +flie farre and very high. So it seemeth that being weary of her flight she +fell into the boate, and not being able to rise againe died there. + +The 23. 24. and 25. we sailed our direct course with a small gale of winde, +and this day we had sight of the Island of Cyprus. [Sidenote: Cauo de la +Griega.] The first land that we discouered was a headland called Cauo de la +Criega, and about midnight we ankered by North of the Gape. This cape is a +high hil, long and square, and on the East corner it hath a high cop, that +appeareth vnto those at the sea, like a white cloud, for toward the sea it +is white, and it lieth into the sea Southwest. This coast of Cyprus is high +declining toward the sea, but it hath no cliffes. + +The 26. we set saile againe, and toward noone we came into the port of +Salini, where we went on land and lodged that night at a towne one mile +from thence called Arnacho di Salini, this is but a village called in +Italian, Casalia. This is distant from Iaffa 250. Italian miles. + +The 27. we rested, and the 28. we hired horses to ride from Arnacho to +Sulina, which is a good mile. The salt pit is very neere two miles in +compasse, very plaine and leuell, into the which they let runne at the time +of raine a quantitie of water comming from the mountaines, which water is +let in vntil the pit be full to a certaine marke, which when it is full, +the rest is conueyed by a trench into the sea. The water is let runne in +about October, or sooner or later, as the time of the yeere doth afforde. +There they let it remaine vntill the ende of Iuly or the middest of August, +out of which pits at that time, in stead of water that they let in they +gather very faire white salt, without any further art or labour, for it is +only done by the great heate of the sunne. This the Venetians haue, and doe +maintaine to the vse of S. Marke, and the Venetian ships that come to this +Island are bound to cast out their ballast, and to lade with salt for +Venice. Also there may none in all the Iland buy salt but of these men, who +maintaine these pits for S. Marke. This place is watched by night with 6. +horsemen to the end it be not stolne by night. Also vnder the Venetians +dominions no towne may spende any salt, but they must buy it of Saint +Marke, neither may any man buy any salt at one towne to carie to another, +but euery one must buy his salt in the towne where he dwelleth. Neither may +any man in Venice buy more salt then he spendeth in the city, for if he be +knowen to carte but one ounce out of the due and be accused, hee looseth an +eare. The most part of all the salt they haue in Venice commeth from these +Salines, and they have it so plentifull, that they are not able, neuer a +yeere to gather the one halfe, for they onely gather in Iuly, August, and +September, and not fully these three moneths. Yet notwithstanding the +abundance that the shippes carie away yeerely, there remaine heapes like +hilles, some heapes able to lade nine or tenne shippes, and there are +heapes of two yeeres gathering, some of three and some of nine or tenne +yeeres making, to the value of a great somme of golde, and when the ships +do lade, they neuer take it by measure, but when they come at Venice they +measure it. This salt as it lyeth in the pit is like so much ice, and it is +sixe inches thicke: they digge it with axes, and cause their slaues to cary +it to the heapes. This night at midnight we rode to Famagusta, which is +eight leagues from Salina, which is 24 English miles. + +The 29 about two houres before day we alighted at Famagusta, and after we +were refreshed we went to see the towne. This is a very faire strong holde, +and the strongest and greatest in the Iland. The walks are faire and new, +and strongly rampired with foure principall bulwarkes, and bettweene them +turrions responding one to another, these walks did the Venetians make. +They haue also on the hauen side of it a Castle, and the hauen is chained, +the citie hath onely two gates, to say, one for the lande and another for +the sea, they haue in the towne continually, be it peace or warres, 800 +souldiers, and fortie and sixe gunners, besides Captaines, petie Captaines, +Gouernour and Generall The lande gate hath alwayes fiftie souldiers, pikes +and gunners with their harnes, watching thereat night and day. At the sea +gate fiue and twenties upon the walles euery night doe watch fifteene men +in watch houses, for euery watch house fiue men, and in the market place 30 +souldiers continually. There may no souldier serue there aboue 5 yeres, +neither will they without friendship suffer them to depart afore 5. yeres +be expired, and there may serue of all nations except Greekes. [Sidenote: +Morenigo.] They haue euery pay which is 45 dayes, 15 Morenigos, which is 15 +shillings sterling. [Sidenote: Solde of Venice] Their horsemen haue only +sixe soldes Venetian a day, and prouender for their horses, but truth I +maruell how they liue being so hardly fed, for all the sommer they feede +only vpon chopt strawe and barley, for hay they haue none, and yet they be +faire, fat and seruiceable. [Sidenote: Castellani] The Venetians send euery +two yeres new rulers, which they call Castellani. The towne hath allotted +it also two gallies continually armed and furnished. + +[Sidenote: Saint Katherens Chappel in old Famagusta.] The 30. in the +morning we ridde to a chappell, where they say Saint Katherin was borne. +This Chappell is in olde Famagusta, the which was destroyed by Englishmen, +and is cleane ouerthrowne to the ground, to this day desolate and not +inhabited by any person, it was of a great circuit, and there be to this +day mountaines of faire, great, and strong buildings, and not onely there, +but also in many places of the Iland. [Sidenote: Diuvers coines vnder +ground.] Moreouer when they digge, plowe, or trench they finde sometimes +olde antient coines, some of golde, some of siluer, and some of copper, yea +and many tombes and vautes with sepulchers in them. This olde Famagusta is +from the other, foure miles, and standeth on a hill, but the new towne on a +plaine. [Sidenote: Cornari, a family of Venice maried to king Iaques.] +Thence we returned to new Famagusta againe to dinner, and toward euening we +went about the towne, and in the great Church we sawe the tombe of king +Iaques, which was the last king of Cyprus, and was buried in the yere of +Christ one thousand foure hundred seuentie and three, and had to wife one +of the daughters of Venice, of the house of Cornari, the which family at +this day hath great reuenues in this Island, and by means of that mariage +the Venetians, chalenge the kingdome of Cyprus. + +The first of October in the morning, we went to see the reliefe of the +watches. That done, we went to one of the Greekes Churches to see a pot or +Iarre of stone, which is sayd to bee one of the seuen Iarres of water, the +which the Lord God at the mariage conuerted into wine. It is a pot of earth +very faire, white enamelled, and faireiy wrought vpon with drawen worke, +and hath on either side of it, instead of handles, eares made in fourme as +the painters make angels wings, it was about an elle high, and small at the +bottome, with a long necke and correspondent in circuit to the botome, the +belly very great and round, it holdeth full twelue gallons, and hath a +tap-hole to drawe wine out thereat, the Iarre is very auncient, but whether +it be one of them or no, I know not. The aire of Famagusta is very +vnwholesome, as they say, by reason of certaine marish ground adioyning +vnto it. They haue also a certaine yeerely sicknesse raigning in the same +towne, aboue all the rest of the Island: yet neuerthelesse, they haue it in +other townes, but not so much. It is a certaine rednesse and paine of the +eyes, the which if it bee not quickly holpen, it taketh away their sight, +so that yeerely almost in that towne, they haue about twentie that lose +their sight, either of one eye or both, and it commeth for the most part in +this moneth of October, and the last moneth: for I haue met diuers times +three and foure at once in companies, both men and women. [Sidenote: No +vitailes must be sold out of the city of Famagusta.] Their liuing is better +cheape in Famagusta then in any other place of the Island, because there +may no kinde of prouision within their libertie bee solde out of the Citie. + +The second of October we returned to Arnacho, where wee rested vntill the +sixt day. [Sidenote: Greate ruines in Cyprus.] This towne is a pretie +Village, there are thereby toward the Sea side diuers monuments, that there +hath bene great ouerthrow of buildings, for to this day there is no yere +when they finde not, digging vnder ground, either coines, caues, and +sepulcres of antiquities, as we walking, did see many, so that in effect, +all alongst the Sea coast, throughout the whole Island, there is much ruine +and ouerthrow of buildings, [Sidenote: Cyprus 36. yeres disinhabited for +lacke of water.] for as they say, it was disinhabited sixe and thirtie +yeres, before Saint Helens time for lacke of water. [Sidenote: Cypr. +ruinated by Rich. the I.] And since that time it hath bene ruinated and +ouerthrowen by Richard the first of that name king of England, which he did +in reuenge of his sisters rauishment comming to Ierusalem, the which +inforcement was done to her by the king of Famagusta. + +The sixt day we rid to Nicosia, which is from Arnacho seuen Cyprus miles, +which are one and twentie Italian miles. This is the ancientest citie of +the Iland, and is walled about, but it is not strong neither of walles nor +situation: It is by report three Cyprus miles about, it is not throughly +inhabited, but hath many great gardens in it, and also very many Date +trees, and plentie of Pomegranates and other fruites. There dwell all the +Gentilitie of the Island, and there hath euery Cauallier or Conte of the +Island an habitation. [Sidenote: A fountaine that watereth al the gardens +in the citie.] There is in this citie one fountaine rented by saint Marke, +which is bound euery eight dayes once, to water all the gardens in the +towne, and the keeper of this fountaine hath for euery tree a Bizantin, +which is twelue soldes Venice, and sixpence sterling. [Sidenote: A Bizantin +is 6. d. sterling.] He that hath that to farme, with a faire and profitable +garden thereto belonging, paieth euery yeere to saint Marke, fifteene +hundred crownes. The streetes of the citie are not paued, which maketh it +with the quantitie of the gardens, to seeme but a rurall habitation. But +there be many faire buildings in the Citie, there be also Monasteries both +of Franks and Greekes. [Sidenote: S. Sophia is a Cathedral church of +Nicosia.] The Cathedrall church is called Santa Sophia, in the which there +is an old tombe of Iaspis stone, all of one piece, made in forme of a +cariage coffer, twelue spannes long, sixe spannes broad, and seuen spannes +high, which they say was found vnder ground. It is as faire a stone as euer +I haue seene. + +The seuenth day we rid to a Greeke Frierie halfe a mile without the towne. +It is a very pleasaunt place, and the Friers feasted vs according to their +abilitie. These Friers are such as haue bene Priests, and their wiues dying +they must become Friers of this place, and neuer after eate flesh, for if +they do, they are depriued from saying masse: neither, after they haue +taken vpon them this order, may they marry againe, but they may keepe a +single woman. These Greekish Friers are very continent and chast, and +surely I haue seldome seen (which I haue well noted) any of them fat. + +The 8. day we returned to Arnacho, and rested there. [Sidenote: Monte de la +Croce.] The 9. after midnight my company rid to the hill called Monte de la +Croce (but I not disposed would not go) which hill is from Arnacho 15. +Italian miles. Vpon the sayd hill is a certaine crosse, which is, they say, +a holy Crosse. This Crosse in times past did by their report of the Island, +hang in the ayre, but by a certaine earthquake, the crosse and the chappeil +it hung in, were ouerthrowen, so that neuer since it would hang againe in +the aire. But it is now couered with siluer, and hath 3. drops of our +lordes blood on it (as they say) and there is in the midst of the great +crosse, a little crosse made of the crosse of Christ; but it is closed in +the siluer, you must (if you will) beleeue it is so, for see it you cannot. +This crosse hangeth nowe by both endes in the wall, that you may swing it +vp and downe, in token that it did once hang in the aire. This was told me +by my fellow pilgrimes, for I sawe it not. + +The 10. at night we went aboard by warning of the patron: and the 11. in +the morning we set saile, and crept along the shore, but at night we +ankered by reason of contrary windes. + +[Sidenote: Limisso.] The 12. we set saile toward Limisso, which is from +Salines 50. miles, and there we went on land that night. + +The 13. and 14. we remained still on land, and the 15. the patrone sent for +vs; but by reason that one of our company was not well, we went not +presently, but we were forced afterward to hire a boate, and to ouertake +the ship tenne miles into the sea. At this Limisso all the Venetian ships +lade wine for their prouision, and some for to sell, and also vineger. +[Sidenote: Carrobi.] They lade also great store of Carrobi: for all the +countrey thereabout adioning, and all the mountaines are full of Carrobi +trees, they lade also cotton wooll there. [Sidenote: Vulture.] In the sayd +towne we did see a certaine foule of the land (whereof there are many in +this Island) named in the Italian tongue Vulture. It is a foule that is as +big as a Swanne, and it liueth vpon carion. The skinne is full of soft +doune, like to a fine furre, which they vse to occupie when they haue euill +stomocks, and it maketh good digestion. This bird (as they say) will eat as +much at one meale as shall serue him fortie dayes after, and within the +compasse of that time careth for no more meate. The countrey people, when +they have any dead beast, they cary it into the mountaines, or where they +suppose the sayd Vultures to haunt, they seeing the carion doe immediately +greedily seize vpon it, and doe so ingraft their talents, that they cannot +speedily rise agayne, by reason whereof the people come and kill them: +sometimes they kill them with dogs, and sometimes with such weapons as they +haue. This foule is very great and hardy, much like an Eagle in the +feathers of her wings and backe, but vnder her great feathers she is onely +doune, her necke also long and full of doune. She hath on the necke bone, +betweene the necke and the shoulders a heape of fethers like a Tassell, her +thighs vnto her knees are couered with doune, her legs strong and great, +and dareth with her talents assault a man. [Sidenote: Great pleny of very +fat birds.] They haue also in this Island a certaine small bird, much like +vnto a Wagtaile in fethers and making, these are so extreme fat that you +can perceiue nothing els in all their bodies: these birds are now in +season. They take great quantitie of them, and they vse to pickle them with +vineger and salt, and to put them in pots and send them to Venice and other +places of Italy for presents of great estimation. They say they send almost +1200. Iarres or pots to Venice, besides those which are consumed in the +Island, which are a great number. These are so plentifull that when there +is no shipping, you may buy then for 10. Carchies, which coine are 4. to a +Venetian Soldo, which is peny farthing the dozen, and when there is store +of shipping, 2 pence the dozen, after that rate of their money. [Sidenote: +The Famagustans obserue the French statutes.] They of the limites of +Famagusta do keep the statutes of the Frenchmen which sometimes did rule +there. And the people of Nicosia, obserue the order of the Genoueses, who +sometimes also did rule them. All this day we lay in the sea with little +wind. + +The 16. we met a Venetian ship, and they willing to speake with vs, and we +with them, made towards each other, but by reason of the euil stirrage of +the other ship, we had almost boorded each other to our great danger. +[Sidenote: Cauo Bianco.] Toward night we ankered vnder Cauo Bianco, but +because the winde grew faire, we set saile againe presently. + +[Sidenote: Another Cion.] The 17. 18. 19, and 20 we were at sea with calme +sommer weather, and the 20. we had some raine, and saw another Cion in the +element. [Sidenote: A ship called el Bonna.] This day also we sawe, and +spake with a Venetian ship called el Bonna, bound for ciprus. + +The 21. we sailed with a reasonable gale, and saw no land vntil the 4. of +Nouember. [Sidenote: A great tempest.] This day we had raine, thunder, +lightening, and much wind and stormie weather, but God be praised we +escaped all dangers. + +[Sidenote: Candia, Gozi.] The 4. of Nouember we had sight of the Island of +Candia, and we fell with the Islands called Gozi, by south of Candia. +[Sidenote: Antonie Gelber departed this life.] This day departed this +present life, one of our company named Anthonie Gelber of Prussia, who +onely tooke his surfet of Cyprus wine. This night we determined to ride a +trie, because the wind was contrary, and the weather troublesome. + +The 5. we had very rough stormie weather. This day was the sayd Anthonie +Gelber sowed in a Chauina filled with stones and throwen into the sea. By +reason of the freshnes of the wind we would haue made toward the shore, but +the wind put vs to the sea, where we endured a great storme and a +troublesome night. + +The 6. 7. and 8. we were continually at the sea, and this day at noone the +wind came faire, whereby we recouered the way which we had lost, and sayled +out of sight of Candia. + +[Sidenote: Cauo Matapan. Modon.] The 9. we sailed all day with a prosperous +wind after 14. mile an houre: and the 10. in the morning, wee had sight of +Cauo Matapan, and by noone of Cauo Gallo, in Morea, with which land we made +by reason of contrary wind, likewise we had sight of Modon, vnder the which +place we ankered. This Modon is a strong towne, and built into the sea, +with a peere for litle ships and galleis to harbour in. [Sidenote: +Sapientia.] It hath on the South side of the chanell, the Iland of +Sapientia, with other litle Ilands all disinhabited. The chanell lieth +Southwest and Northeast betweene the Islands and Morea, which is firme +land. This Modon was built by the Venetians, but as some say it was taken +from them by force of the Turke, and others say by composition: [Sidenote: +Coron. Napolis de Romania.] in like case Coron, and Napolis de Romania, +which is also in Morea. This night the Flemmish pilgrimes being drunke, +would have slaine the patrone because he ankered here. + +The 11. day we set saile againe, and as we passed by Modon, we saluted them +with ordinance, for they that passe by this place, must salute with +ordinance, (if they haue) or els by striking their top sailes, for if they +doe not, the towne will shoot at them. [Sidenote: Prodeno. Zante and +Cephalonia.] This day toward 2. of the clocke wee passed by the Island of +Prodeno, which is but litle, and desert, vnder the Turke. About 2. houres +before night, we had sight of the Islands of Zante and Cephalonia, which +are from Modon one hundreth miles. + +The 12. day in the morning, with the wind at West, we doubled between +Castle Torneste, and the Island of Zante. [Sidenote: Castle Torneste vnder +the Turke.] This castle is on the firme land vnder the Turke. This night we +ankered afore the towne of Zante, where we that night went on land, and +rested there the 13. 14. and 15. at night we were warned aboord by the +patrone. This night the ship tooke in vitailes and other necessaries. + +The 16. in the morning we set saile with a prosperous wind, and the 17. we +had sight of Cauo de santa Maria in Albania on our right hand, and Corfu on +the left hand. This night we ankered before the castles of Corfu, and went +on land and refreshed our selues. + +[Sidenote: The description of the force of Corfu.] The 18. by meanes of a +friend we were licenced to enter the castle or fortresse of Corfu, which is +not onely of situation the strongest I haue seene, but also of edification. +It hath for the Inner warde two strong castles situated on the top of two +high cragges of a rocke, a bow shoot distant the one from the other: the +rocke is vnassaultable, for the second warde it hath strong walles with +rampiers and trenches made as well as any arte can deuise. For the third +warde and vttermost, it hath very strong walles with rampires of the rocke +it selfe cut out by force and trenched about with the sea. The bulwarkes of +the vttermost warde are not yet finished, which are in number but two: +there are continually in the castle seuen hundred souldiours. Also it hath +continually foure wardes, to wit, for the land entrie one, for the sea +entrie another, and two other wardes. Artillerie and other munition of +defence alwayes readie planted it hath sufficient, besides the store +remaining in their storehouses. The Venetians hold this for the key of all +their dominions, and for strength it may be no lesse. This Island is very +fruitfull and plentifull of wine and corne very good, and oliues great +store. This Island is parted from Albania with a chanell, in some places +eight and ten, and in other but three miles. Albania is vnder the Turke, +but in it are many Christians. All the horseman of Corfu are Albaneses; the +Island is not aboue 80. or 90. miles in compasse. + +The 19. 20. and 21. we remained in the towne of Corfu. + +The 22. day wee went aboord and set saile, the wind being very calme wee +toed the ship all that day, and toward Sunne set, the castle sent a +Fragatta vnto us to giue vs warning of three Foistes comming after vs, for +whose comming wee prepared and watched all night, but they came not. + +The 23. day in the morning being calme, wee toed out of the Streight, +vntill wee came to the olde towne, whereof there is no thing standing but +the walles. There is also a new Church of the Greekes called Santa Maria di +Cassopo, and the townes name is called Cassopo. It is a good porte. About +noone wee passed the Streight, and drew toward the ende of the Iland, +hauing almost no wind. This night after supper, by reason of a certaine +Hollander that was drunke, there arose in the ship such a troublesome +disturbance, that all the ship was in an vprore with weapons, and had it +not bene rather by Gods helpe, and the wisedome and patience of the +patrone, more then by our procurement, there had bene that night a great +slaughter. But as God would, there was no hurt, but onely the beginner was +put vnder hatches, and with the fall hurt his face very sore. All that +night the wind blew at Southeast, and sent vs forward. + +The 24. in the morning wee found ourselues before an Island called Saseno, +which is in the entrie to Valona, and the wind prosperous. + +The 25. day we were before the hils of Antiueri, and about sunne set wee +passed Ragusa, and three houres within night we ankered within Meleda, +hauing Sclauonia or Dalmatia on the right hand of vs, and the winde +Southwest. + +The 26. in the morning we set sayle, and passed the chanell between +Sclauonia and Meleda, which may be eight mile ouer at the most. This Iland +is vnder the Raguses. At after noone with a hard gale at west and by north +we entered the chanell betweene the Iland Curzola and the hilles of +Dalmatia, in which channell be many rockes, and the channell not past 3 +miles ouer, and we ankered before the towne of Curzolo. This is a pretie +towne walled about and built vpon the sea side, hauing on the toppe of a +round hill a faire Church. This Iland is vnder the Venetians, there grow +very good vines, also that part toward Dalmatia is well peopled and +husbanded, especially for wines. In the said Iland we met with the Venetian +armie, to wit, tennie gallies, and three foystes. All that night we +remained there. + +The 27 we set sayle and passed along the Iland, and towards afternoone we +passed in before the Iland of Augusta, and about sunne set before the towne +of Lesina, whereas I am informed by the Italians, they take all the +Sardinas that they spend in Italy. This day we had a prosperous winde at +Southeast. The Iland of Lesina is vnder the Venetians, a very fruitfull +Iland adioyning to the maine of Dalmatia, we left it on our right hand, and +passed along. + +[Sidenote: The gulfe of Quernero. Rouigno.] The 28 in the morning we were +in the Gulfe of Quernero, and about two houres after noone we were before +the cape of Istria, and at sunne set we were at anker afore Rouignio which +is also in Istria and vnder the Venetians, where all ships Venetian and +others are bound by order from Venice to take in their pilots to goe for +Venice. All the sommer the Pilots lie at Rouignio, and in winter at +Parenzo, which is from Rouignio 18 miles by West. + +[Sidenote: Parenzo.] The 29 we set sayle and went as farre as Parenzo, and +ankered there that day, and went no further. + +[Sidenote: S. Nicolo an Iland.] The 30 in the morning we rowed to Sant +Nicolo a litle Island hard by vninhabited, but only it hath a Monastery, +and is full of Oliue trees, after masse wee returned and went aboord. This +day we hired a Barke to imbarke the pilgrims for Venice, but they departed +not. In the afternoone we went to see the towne of Parenzo, it is a pretie +handsome towne, vnder the Venetians. After supper wee imbarked our selues +againe, and that night wee sayled towardes Venice. + +The first of December we past a towne of the Venetians, standing on the +entery to the Palude or marshes of Venice: which towne is called Caorle, +and by contrary windes we were driuen thither to take port. This is 60 +miles from Parenzo, and forty from Venice, there we remayned that night. + +The second two houres before day, with the winde at Southeast, we sayled +towards Venice, where we arriued (God be praysed) at two of the clocke +after dinner, and landed about foure, we were kept so long from landing, +because we durst not land vntill we had presented to the Prouidor de la +Sanita, our letter of health. + + * * * * * + +The first voyage or iourney, made by Master Laurence Aldersey, Marchant of + London, to the Cities of Ierusalem, and Tripolis, &c. in the yeere 1581. + Penned and set downe by himselfe. + +I departed from London the first day of April in the yeere of our Lord +1581, passing through the Nether-land and vp the riuer Rhene by Colen, and +other cities of Germanie. And vpon Thursday, the thirde day of May, I came +to Augusta, where I deliuered the letter I had to Master Ienise, and Master +Castler, whom I found very willing to pleasure me, in any thing that I +could or would reasonably demaund. He first furnished me with a horse to +Venice, for my money, and then tooke me with him a walking, to shew me the +Citie, for that I had a day to tary there, for him that was to be my guide. +He shewed me first the Statehouse, which is very faire, and beautiful: then +be brought mee to the finest garden, and orchard, that euer I sawe in my +life: for there was in it a place for Canarie birdes, as large as a faire +Chamber, trimmed with wier both aboue and beneath, with fine little +branches of trees for them to sit in, vhich was full of those Canarie +birdes. There was such an other for Turtle dooues: also there were two +pigeon houses ioyning to them, hauing in them store of Turtle dooues and +pigeons. In the same garden also were sixe or seuen fishponds, all railed +about, and full of very good fish. Also, seuen or eight fine fountaines, or +water springs, of diuers fashions: as for fruite, there wanted none of all +sorts, as Orenges, figges, raisons, wallnuts, grapes, besides apples, +peares, fillbirds, small nuts, and such other fruite, as wee haue in +England. + +Then did hee bring mee to the water tower of the same Citie, that by a +sleight and deuise hath the water brought vp as high as any Church in the +towne, and to tel you the strange deuises of all, it passeth my capacitie. +Then he brought me to another faire garden, called the Shooters hoose, +where are buts for the long bowe, the cross bowe, the stone bowe, the long +peece, and for diuers other exercises more. + +After this, we walked about the walles of the Citie, where is a great, +broade, and deepe ditch, vpon one side of the towne, so full of fish, as +euer I saw any pond in my life, and it is reserued onely for the States of +the Citie. And vpon the other side of the Citie is also a deepe place all +greene, wherein Deere are kept, and when it pleaseth the States to hunt for +their pleasure, thither they resort, and haue their courses with +grayhounds, which are kept for that purpose. + +The fift of May, I departed from Augusta towards Venice, and came thither +vpon Whitsunday the thirteenth of the same moneth. It is needlesse to +speake of the height of the mountaines that I passed ouer, and of the +danger thereof, it is so wel knowen already to the world: the heigth of +them is marueilous, and I was the space of sixe dayes in passing them. + +I came to Venice at the time of a Faire, which lasted foureteene dayes, +wherein I sawe very many, and faire shewes of wares. I came thither too +short for the first passage, which went away from Venice about the seuenth +or eight of May, and with them about three score pilgrims, which shippe was +cast away at a towne called Estria, two miles from Venice, and all the men +in her, sauing thirtie, or thereabout, lost. + +Within eight dayes after fell Corpus Christi day, which was a day amongst +them of procession, in which was shewed the plate and treasure of Venice, +which is esteemed to be worth two millions of pounds, but I do not accompt +it woorth halfe a quarter of that money, except there be more than I sawe. +To speake of the sumptuousnesse of the Copes and Vestments of the Church, I +leaue, but the trueth is, they be very sumptuous, many of them set all ouer +with pearle, and made of cloth of golde. And for the Iesuits, I thinke +there be as many at Venice, as there be in Colen. + +The number of Iewes is there thought to be 1000, who dwell in a certaine +place of the Citie, and haue also a place, to which they resort to pray, +which is called the Iewes Sinagogue. They all, and their offspring vse to +weare red caps, (for so they are commaunded) because they may thereby be +knowen from other men. For my further knowledge of these people, I went +into their Sinagogue vpon a Saturday, which is their Sabbath day: and I +found them in their seruice or prayers, very deuoute: they receiue the fiue +bookes of Moses, and honour them by carying them about their Church, as the +Papists doe their crosse. + +Their Synagogue is in forme round, and the people sit round about it, and +in the midst, there is a place for him that readeth to the rest: as for +their apparell, all of them weare a large white lawne ouer their garments, +which reacheth from their head, downe to the ground. + +The Psalmes they sing as wee doe, hauing no image, nor vsing any maner of +idolatrie: their error is, that they beleeue not in Christ, nor yet receiue +the New Testament. This Citie of Venice is very faire, and greatly to bee +commended, wherein is good order for all things: and also it is very strong +and populous: it standeth vpon the maine Sea, and hath many Islands about +it, that belong to it. + +To tell you of the duke of Venice, and of the Seigniory: there is one +chosen that euer beareth the name of a duke, but in trueth hee is but +seruant of his Seigniorie, for of himselfe hee can doe litle: it is no +otherwise with him, then with a Priest that is at Masse vpon a festiual +day, which putting on his golden garment, seemeth to be a great man, but if +any man come vnto him, and craue some friendship at his handes, hee will +say, you must goe to the Masters of the Parish, for I cannot pleasure you, +otherwise then by preferring to your suite: and so it is with the duke of +Venice, if any man hauing a suite, come to him and make his complaint, and +deliuer his supplication, it is not in him to helpe him, but hee will tell +him, You must come this day, or that day, and then I will preferre your +suite to the Seigniorie, and doe you the best friendship that I may. +Furthermore, if any man bring a letter vnto him, hee may not open it, but +in the presence of the Seigniorie, and they are to see it first, which +being read, perhaps they will deliuer it to him, perhaps not. Of the +Seigniory there be about three hundreth, and about fourtie of the priuie +Counsell of Venice, who vsually are arayed in gownes of crimsen Satten, or +crimsen Damaske, when they sit in Counsell. + +In the citie of Venice, no man may weare a weapon, except he be a souldier +for the Seigniorie, or a scholler of Padua, or a gentleman of great +countenance, and yet he may not do that without licence. + +As for the women of Venice, they be rather monsters then women. Euery +Shoomakers or Taylors wife will haue a gowne of silke, and one to carie vp +her traine, wearing their shooes very neere halfe a yarde high from the +ground: if a stranger meete one of them, he will surely thinke by the state +that she goeth with, that he meeteth a Lady. + +I departed from this citie of Venice, vpon Midsommer day, being +the foure and twentieth of Iune, and thinking that the ship would +the next day depart, I stayed, and lay a shippeboord all night, and +we were made beleeue from time to time, that we should this day, +and that day depart, but we taried still, till the fourteenth of July, +and then with scant winde we set sayle, and sayled that day and +that night, not aboue fiftie Italian miles: and vpon the sixteene +day at night the winde turned flat contrary, so that the Master +knewe not what to doe: and about the fift houre of the night, +which we reckon to be about one of the clocke after midnight, the +Pilot descried a saile, and at last perceiued it to be a Gallie of the +Turkes, whereupon we were in great feare. + +The Master being a wise fellowe, and a good sayler, beganne to deuise howe +to escape the danger, and to loose litle of our way: and while both he, and +all of vs were in our dumps, God sent vs a merry gale of winde, that we +ranne threescore and tenne leagues before it was twelue a clocke the next +day, and in sixe dayes after we were seuen leagues past Zante. And vpon +Munday morning, being the three and twentie of the same moneth, we came in +the sight of Candia which day the winde came contrary, with great blasts +and stormes, vntill the eight and twentie of the same moneth: in which +time, the Mariners cried out vpon me, because I was an English man, and +sayd, I was no good Christian, and wished that I were in the middest of the +Sea, saying, that they, and the shippe, were the worse for me. I answered, +truely it may well be, for I thinke my selfe the worst creature in the +worlde, and consider you your selues also, as I doe my selfe, and then vse +your discretion. The Frier preached, and the sermon being done, I was +demaunded whether I did vnderstand him: I answered, yea, and tolde the +Frier himselfe, thus you saide in your sermon, that we were not all good +Christians, or else it were not possible for vs to haue such weather: to +which I answered, be you well assured, that we are not indeede all good +Christians, for there are in the ship some that hold very vnchristian +opinions: so for that time I satisfied him, although (they said) that I +would not see, when they said the procession, and honoured their images, +and prayed to our Lady and S. Marke. + +There was also a Gentleman, an Italian, which was a passenger in the ship, +and he tolde me what they said of me, because I would not sing, Salue +Regina and Aue Maria, as they did: I told them, that they that praied to so +many, or sought helpe of any other, then of God the Father, or of Iesus +Christ his onely sonne, goe a wrong way to worke, and robbed God of his +honour, and wrought their owne destructions. + +All this was told of the Friers, but I heard nothing of it in three daies +after: and then at euening prayer, they sent the purser about with the +image of our Lady to euery one to kisse, and I perceiuing it went another +way from him, and would not see it: yet at last he fetched his course +about, so that he came to me, and offered it to me as he did to others, but +I refused it: whereupon there was a great stirre: the patron and all the +friers were told of it, and euery one saide I was a Lutheran, and so called +me: but two of the friers that were of greatest authoritie, seemed to beare +me better good will then the rest, and trauelled to the patron in my +behalfe, and made all well againe. + +The second day of August we arriued in Cyprus, at a towne called Missagh: +the people there be very rude, and like beasts, and no better they eat +their meat sitting vpon the ground, with their legges a crosse like +tailors, their beds for the most part be hard stones, but yet some of them +haue faire mattraces to lie vpon. + +Vpon Thursday the eight of August we came to Ioppa in a small barke, which +we hired betwixt Missagh and Salina, and could not be suffered to come on +land till noone the next day, and then we were permitted by the great +Basha, who sate vpon the top of a hill to see vs sent away. Being come on +land, we might not enter into any house for victuals, but were to content +our selues with our owne prouision, and that which we bought to carie with +vs was taken from vs. I had a paire of stirrops, which I bought at Venice +to serue me in my journey, and trying to make them fit for me, when the +Basha saw me vp before the rest of the companie, he sent one to dismount +me, and to strike me, whereupon I turned me to the Basha, and made a long +legge, saying, Grand mercie Signior: and after a while we were horsed vpon +litle asses, and sent away, with about fiftie light horsemen to be our +conduct through the wildernesse, called Deserta foelix, who made vs good +sport by the way with their pikes, gunnes, and fauchins. + +That day being S. Laurence day we came to Rama, which is tenne Italian +miles from Ioppa, and there we stayed that night, and payed to the captaine +of the castell euery man a chekin, which is seuen shillings and two pence +sterling. So then we had a new gard of souldiers, and left the other. + +The house we lodged in at Rama had a doore so low to enter into, that I was +faine to creepe in, as it were vpon my knees, and within it are three +roomes to lodge trauellers that come that way: there are no beds, except a +man buy a mat, and lay it on the ground, that is all the prouision, without +stooles or benches to sit vpon. Our victuals were brought vs out of the +towne, as hennes, egges, bread, great store of fruite, as pomgranates, +figges, grapes, oringes, and such like, and drinke we drue out of the well. +The towne it selfe is so ruinated that I take it rather to be a heape of +stones then a towne. + +Then the next morning we thought to haue gone away, but we could not be +permitted that day, so we stayed there till two of the clocke the next +morning, and then with a fresh gard of souldiers we departed toward +Ierusalem. We had not ridde fiue English miles, but we were incountred with +a great number of the Arabians, who stayed vs, and would not suffer vs to +passe till they had somewhat, so it cost vs for all our gard aboue twentie +shillings a man betwixt Ioppa and Ierusalem. These Arabians troubled vs +oftentimes. Our Truchman that payed the money for vs was striken down, and +had his head broken because be would not giue them as much as they asked: +and they that should haue rescued both him and vs, stood sill and durst do +nothing, which was to our cost. + +Being come within sight of Ierusalem, the maner is to kneele downe, and +giue God thankes, that it hath pleased him to bring vs to that holy place, +where he himselfe had beene: and there we leaue our horses and go on foote +to the towne, and being come to the gates, there they tooke our names, and +our fathers names, and so we were permitted to go to our lodgings. + +The gouernour of the house met vs a mile out of the towne, and very +curteously bade vs all welcome, and brought vs to the monasterie. The gates +of the citie are all couered with yron, the entrance into the house of the +Christians is a very low and narrow doore, barred or plated with yron, and +then come we into a very darke entry: the place is a monastery: there we +lay, and dieted of free cost, we fared reasonable well, the bread and wine +was excellent good, the chambers cleane, and all the meat well serued in, +with cleane linnen. + +We lay at the monasterie two days, Friday and Saturday, and then we went to +Bethlem with two or three of the friers of the house with vs: in the way +thither we saw many monuments, as: + +The mountaine where the Angell tooke vp Abacuck by the haire, and brought +him to Daniel in the Lions denne. + +The fountaine of the prophet Ieremie. + +The place where the wise men met that went to Bethlem to worship Christ, +where is a fountaine of stone. + +Being come to Bethlem we sawe the place where Christ was borne, which is +now a chappell with two altars, whereupon they say masse: the place is +built with gray marble, and hath bene beautifull, but now it is partly +decayed. + +Neere thereto is the sepulchre of the innocents slaine by Herod, the +sepulchres of Paul, of Ierome, and of Eusebius. + +Also a little from this monasterie is a place vnder the ground, where the +virgine Mary abode with Christ when Herod sought him to destroy him. + +We stayed at Bethlem that night, and the next day we went from thence to +the mountaines of Iudea, which are about eight miles from Ierusalem, where +are the ruines of an olde monasterie. In the mid way from the monasterie to +Ierusalem is the place where Iohn Baptist was borne, being now an olde +monasterie, and cattell kept in it. Also a mile from Ierusalem is a place +called Inuentio sanctæ crucis, where the wood was found that made the +crosse. + +In the citie of Ierusalem we saw the hall where Pilate sate in iudgement +when Christ was condemned, the staires whereof are at Rome, as they told +vs. A litle from thence is the house where the virgin Mary was borne. + +There is also the piscina or fishpoole where the sicke folkes were healed, +which is by the wals of Ierusalem. But the poole is now dry. + +The mount of Caluaria is a great church, and within the doore thereof, +which is litle, and barred with yron, and fiue great holes in it to looke +in, like the holes of taverne doores in London, they sit that are appointed +to receiue our money with a carpet vnder them vpon a banke of stone, and +their legges a crosse like tailors: hauing paid our money, we are permitted +to go into the church: right against the church doore is the graue where +Christ was buried, with a great long stone of white marble ouer it, and +rayled about, the outside of the sepulchre is very foule, by meanes that +euery man scrapes his name and marke vpon it, and is ill kept. + +Within the sepulchre is a partition, and in the further part thereof is a +place like an altar, where they say masse, and at the doore thereof is the +stone whereupon the Angell sate when he sayde to Marie, He is risen, which +stone was also rowled to the doore of the sepulchre. + +The altar stone within the sepulchre is of white marble, the place able to +confeine but foure persons, right ouer the sepulchre is a deuise or +lanterne for light, and ouer that a great louer such as are in England in +ancient houses. There is also the chappell of the sepulchre, and in the +mids thereof is a canopie as it were of a bed, with a great sort of +Estridge egges hanging at it, with tassels of silke and lampes. + +Behinde the sepulchre is a litle chappell for the Chaldeans and Syrians. + +Vpon the right hand comming into the church is the tombe of Baldwine king +of France, and of his sonne: and in the same place the tombe of +Melchisedech. + +There is a chappell also in the same church erected to S. Helen, through +which we go vp to the place where Christ was crucified: the stayres are +fiftie steps high, there are two altars in it: before the high altar is the +place where the crosse stood, the hole whereof is trimmed about with +siluer, and the depth of it is halfe a mans arme deepe: the rent also of +the mountaine is there to be seene in the creuis, wherein a man may put his +arme. + +Vpon the other side of the mount of Caluarie is the place where Abraham +would haue sacrificed his sonne. Where also is a chapell, and the place +paued with stones of diuers colours. + +There is also the house of Annas the high Priest, and the Oliue tree +whereunto Christ was bound to when he was whipt. Also the house of Caiphas, +and by it the prison where Christ was kept, which is but the roome of one +man, and hath no light but the opening of the doore. + +Without Ierusalem in the vally of Iosaphat is a church vnder the ground, +like to the shrouds in Pauls, where the sepulchre of the virgin Mary is: +the staires be very broad, and vpon the staires going downe are two +sepulchres: vpon the left hand lieth Iosaphat, and vpon the right hand +lieth Ioachim and Anna, the father and mother of the virgin Mary. + +Going out of the valley of Iosaphat we came to mount Oliuet, where Christ +praied vnto his father before his death: and there is to be seene (as they +tolde me) the water and blood that fell from the eyes of Christ. A litle +higher vpon the same mount is the place where the Apostles slept, and +watched not. At the foot of the mount is the place where Christ was +imprisoned. + +Vpon the mountaine also is the place where Christ stood when he wept ouer +Ierusalem, and where he ascended into heauen. + +Now hauing seene all these monuments, I with my company set from Ierusalem, +the 20 day of August, and came againe to Ioppa the 22 of the same moneth, +where wee tooke shipping presently for Tripolis, and in foure dayes we came +to Mecina the place where the ships lie that come for Tripolis. + +The citie of Tripolis is a mile and a halfe within the land, so that no +ship can come further then Mecina: so that night I came thither, where I +lay nine daies for passage, and at last we imbarked our selues in a good +ship of Venice called the Naue Ragasona. We entred the ship the second of +September, the fourth we set saile, the seuenth we came to Salina, which is +140 miles from Tripolis: there we stayed foure dayes to take in more +lading, in which meane time I fell sicke of an ague, but recouered againe, +I praise God. + +Salina is a ruinated citie, and was destroyed by the Turke ten yeeres past: +there are in it now but seuenteene persons, women and children. A litle +from this citie of Salina is a salt piece of ground, where the water +groweth salt that raineth vpon it. + +Thursday the 21 of September, we came to Missagh, and there we stayed eight +dayes for our lading: the 18 of September before we came to Missagh, and +within ten miles of the towne, as we lay at an anker, because the winde was +contrary, there came a great boat full of men to boord vs, they made an +excuse to seeke for foure men which (they said) our ship had taken from +theirs about Tripolis, but our captaine would not suffer any of them to +come into vs. + +The next morning they came to vs againe with a great gally, manned with 500 +men at the least, whereupon our captaine sent the boat to them with twelue +men to know their pleasure: they said they sought for 4 men, and therefore +would talke with our maister: so then the maisters mate was sent them, and +him they kept, and went their way; the next morning they came againe with +him, and with three other gallies, and then would needes speake with our +captaine, who went to them in a gowne of crimson damaske, and other very +braue apparell, and fiue or sixe other gentlemen richly apparelled also. +They hauing the Turkes safe conduct, shewed it to the captaine of the +gallies, and laid it vpon his head, charging him to obey it: so with much +adoe, and with the gift of 100 pieces of golde we were quit of them, and +had our man againe. + +That day as aforesaid, we came to Missagh, and there stayed eight dayes, +and at last departed towards Candie, with a scant winde. + +The 11 day of October we were boorded with foure gallies, manned with 1200 +men, which also made a sleeuelesse arrant, and troubled us very much, but +our captaines pasport, and the gift of 100 chekins discharged all. + +The 27 of October we passed by Zante with a merrie winde, the 29 by Corfu, +and the third of Nouember we arriued at Istria, and there we left our great +ship, and tooke small boates to bring vs to Venice. + +The 9 of Nouember I arriued again at Venice in good health, where I staied +nine daies, and the 25 of the same moneth I came to Augusta, and staied +there but one day. + +The 27 of Nouember I set towards Nuremberg where I came the 29, and there +staied till the 9 of December, and was very well interteined of the English +marchants there: and the gouernors of the towne sent me and my company +sixteene gallons of excellent good wine. + +From thence I went to Frankford, from Frankford to Collen, from Collen to +Arnam, from Arnam to Vtreight, from Vtreight to Dort, from Dort to +Antwerpe, from Antwerpe to Flushing, from Flushing to London, where I +arriued vpon Twelue eue in safetie, and gaue thanks to God, hauing finished +my iourney to Ierusalem and home againe, in the space of nine moneths and +fiue dayes. + + * * * * * + +The passeport made by the great Maister of Malta vnto the Englishmen in the + barke Raynolds. 1582. + +Frere Hugo de Loubeux Verdala, Dei gratia sacræ domus hospitalis sancti +Ioannis Hierosolymitani, magister humilis, pauperumque Iesu Christi custos, +vniuersis et singulis principibus ecclesiasticis et secularibus, +archiepiscopis, episcopis, ducibus, marchionibus, baronibus, nobilibus, +capitaneis, vicedominis, præfectis, castellanis, admiralijs, et +quibuscunque triremium vel aliorum nauigiorum patronis, ac ciuitatum +rectoribus, potestatibus ac magistratibus, cæterisque officialibus, et +quibuscunque personis cuiusuis dignitatis, gradus, status et conditionis +fuerint, vbilibet locorum et terrarum constitutis, salutem. + +Notum facimus et in verbo veritatis attestamur, come nel mese di Maggio +prossime passato le nostre galere vennero dal viaggio di Barberia, doue +hauendo mandato per socorrere a vn galionetto de Christiani che hauea dato +trauerso in quelle parti, essendo arriuati sopra questa isola alla parte de +ponente trouarono vno naue Inglesa, sopra cargo de essa il magnifico +Giouanni Keale, et Dauid Filly patrono, volendo la reconoscere che naue +fosse, han visto, che se metteua in ordine per defendersi, dubitando che +dette nostre galere fossero de inimici: et per che vn marinaro riuoltose +contra la volonta de detti magnifico Giouanni Keale et Dauid Filly, habbi +tirato vn tiro di artiglieria verso vna de dette galere, et che non se +amangnaua la vela de la Maiestra secondo la volonta de detti magnifico +Giouanni Keale et Dauid Filly patrono, furimensata detta naue nel presente +general porto di Malta, secondo l'ordine del venerando Generale de dette +galere, et essendo qua, monsignor Inquisitore ha impedita quella per conto +del sancto officio, et si diede parte alla santita di nostro signor +Gregorio papa xiij. A la fin fu licenciata per andarsene al suo viaggio. +Han donque humilmente supplicato detti magnifico Giouanni Keale et Dauid +Filly per nome et parte delli magnifici Edwardo Osborn senatore et Richardo +Staper merchanti Inglesi della nobile citta di Londra, et anco di Tomaso +Wilkinson scriuano, piloti, nocheri, et marinari, gli volessimo dare le +nostre lettere patente et saluo condutto, accioche potranno andare et +ritornare quando gli parera commodo con alcuna roba et mercantia a loro +benuista: si come noi, essendo cosa giusta et che retornera commoda a +nostra relligione et a questi forrestieri, per tenor de li presenti se gli +habiamo concesse con le conditione però infra scritte, videlicet: + +Che ogni volta che detti mercadanti con sopradetta naue o con altra non +porterano mercantie de contrabando, et che constara per fede authentica et +con lettere patente de sanita, poteran liberalmente victualiarse de tutte +le victuarie necessarie, et praticare in questa isola et dominij, et poi +partisene et seguire suo viaggio per doue volessero in leuante o altroue, +come tutti altri vaselli et specialmente de Francesi et aitri nationi, et +die venderi et comprare qual si voglia mercantia a loro benuista. + +Item, che potera portare poluere de canone et di archibuso, salnitro, +carboni di petra rosetta, platine de rame, stagno, acciale, ferro, carisée +commune, tela grossa bianca per far tende de galere, balle de ferro de +calibro, petre de molino fine, arbore et antenne de galere, bastardi et +alteri. Et in conclusione, hauenda visto che loro per il tempo che +restarano qua, si portorno da fideli et Catholici Christiani, et che sua +sanctita habbia trouata bono il saluo condutto del gran Turko a loro +concesso, per il timor della armata Turkesca et di altri vaselli de +inimici, inherendo alla volonta di sua sanctità, et massime per che hauera +de andare et passare per diuersi lochi et tanto lontani come Ingilterra, +Flandra, et tutti patri di ponente, et in altroue, a noi ha parso farle le +presente nostre lettere patente com fidele conuersatore nostro, accio piu +securamente et sensa obstaculo possa andare et ritornare quando li parera +con detta naue o con altre, a loro benuista. Per tanto donque tutti et +ciascun di voi sudetti affectuosamente pregamo, che per qual si voglia de +vostra iurisditione, alla quale detto magnifico Giouanni Keale et Dauid +Filly anome quo supra con la naue et marinari de detti loro principali o +altri caschera, nauigare, passare, et venire sicuramente, alla libera, +sensa alcuno disturbo o altro impedimento li lasciate, et facciate +lasciare, stare, et passare, tornare, et quando li parera partire, talmente +che per amore et contemplatione nostra il detto magnifico Giouanni Keale a +nome quo supra con le naue, marinari, et mercantia non habbi difficulta, +fastidio et ritentione alcuna, anzi se gli dia ogni agiuto et fauore, cosa +degnadi voi, giusta, et a noi gratissima, de recompensaruila con vagule et +maggior seruitio, quando dall'occasione ne saremo rechiesti. Et finalmente +commandammo a tutti et qual si voglia relligiosi et frati de nostra +relligione di qual si voglia conditione, grado et stato che siano, et a +tutti riceuitori et procuratori nostri in tutti et qual si voglia priorati +nostri deputati et deputandi in vertu di santa obedientia, et attuti nostri +vassalli et alla giurisditione di nostri relligione sogetti, che in tale et +per tale tenghino et reputino il detto magnifico Giouanni Keale a nome vt +supra, naue, marinari, et mercantia, sensa permittere, che nel detto suo +viaggio, o in alcun altro Iuogo sia molestato, o in qual si voglia manera +impedito, anzi rutte le cose sue et negotij loro sian da voi agioutati et +continuamente fauoriti. In cuius rei testimonium Bulla nostra magistralis +in cera nigra præsentibus est impressa. Datæ Melitæ in conuentu nostro die +duodecimo Mensis Iulij. 1582. + + +The same in English + +Frier Hugo of Loubeux Verdala, by the grace of God, master of the holy +house, the hospital of S. Iohn at Ierusalem, and an humble keeper of the +poore of Iesus Christ, to all and euery prince ecclesiastical and secular, +archbishops, bishops, Dukes, Marqueses, Barons, Capteines, Vicelords, +Maiors, Castellanes, Admirals, and whatsoeuer patrons of Gallies, or other +greater officers and persons whatsoeuer, of what dignitie, degree, state +and condition soeuer they be, dwelling in all places and landes, greeting. + +We make it knowne, and in the word of truth do witnesse, that in the moneth +of May last past, our gallies came on the voyage from Barbarie, where +hauing commandement to succour a little ship of the Christians which was +driuen ouer into that part being arriued vpon this Iland on the West part +they found one English ship vnder the charge of the worshipfull Iohn Keele, +and Dauid Fillie master: and our men willing to know what ship it was, they +seemed to put themselues in order for their defence, doubting that the said +our gallies were of the enemies, and therefore one mariner attempted +contrary to the will of the worshipfull Iohn Keele, and Dauid Fillie +maister: and had shot off a piece of artillerie against one of the said +gallies, and because she would not strike amaine her sayle, according to +the will of the saide worshipfull Iohn Keele, and Dauid Fillie master, the +said ship was brought backe again vnto the present port of Malta, according +to the order of the reuerend generall of the said gallies: and in being +there maister Inquisitor staid it by authoritie of the holy office, and in +that behalfe by the holinesse of our Lord pope Gregorie the thirteenth, in +the end was licenced to depart on her voyage. They therefore the said +worshipfull Iohn Keele and Dauid Fillie, in the name and behalfe of the +worshipfull master Edward Osborne and Alderman, and Richard Staper, English +marchants of the noble citie of London, haue humbly besought together with +Thomas Wilkinson the purser, pilots, master and mariners, that we would +giue our letters patents, and safe conducts, that they might goe and +returne, when they shall see opportunitie, with their goods and +marchandizes at their pleasure: whereupon the thing seeming vnto vs iust, +and that it might be for the profite of our religion, and of these +strangers, by the tenor of these presents we haue graunted the same to +them: yet, with the conditions hereunder written, viz. + +That euery time the said marchants of the said ship, or with any other, +shall not bring such merchandize as is forbidden, and that sufficient +proofe and letters testimonial it appeareth that they are free from the +infections of the plague, they may vituall themselues with all necessarie +victuals, and traffike with vs, and in this Iland and dominion, and +afterwarde may depart and follow their voyage whither they will into the +Luant or else where, as all other vessels, and especially of France and +other nations do, and sell and buy whatsoeuer marchandize they shal thinke +good. + +Item, that they may bring powder for cannon and harquebush, saltpeeter, +cole of Newcastle, plates of lattin, tinne, steele, yron, common karsies +white, course canuas to make saile for the gallies, balles of yron for +shot, fine milstones, trees and masts for gallies, litle and others, and in +conclusion, hauing seene that they for the time of their abode here, did +behaue themselues like faithfull and catholike Christians, and that his +holines hath allowed the safeconduct of the great Turke to them granted for +feare of the Turkish armie, and other vessels of the enemie, submitting our +selues to the pleasures of his holinesse, and especially because our people +haue occasion to passe by diuers places so farre off, as England, Flanders, +and all parts Westwards, and in other places, we haue vouchsafed to make +these our letters patents, as our faithfull assistant, so as more surely, +and with let they may go and returne when they shall thinke good, with the +said ship or with others at their pleasure. We therefore pray all and euery +of your subiects effectually that by what part soeuer of your iurisdiction, +vnto the which the said worshipful Iohn Keele and Daniel Fillie by name +abouesaid, with the ship and mariners of the said principall place or +other, shall haue accesse, saile, and passe, and come safely with libertie +without any disturbance or other impediment, that you giue leaue, and cause +leaue to be giuen that they may passe, stay and returne, and when they +please, depart, in such sort, that for loue and contention the said +worshipfull Iohn Keele, with the ship and mariners haue no let, hinderance, +or retention, also that you giue all helpe and fauour, a thing worthy of +your iustice, and to vs most acceptable, to be recompenced with equall and +greater seruice, when vpon occasion it shalbe required. + +And finally, we command all, and whatsoeuer religious people, and brothers +of our religion, of whatsoeuer condition, degree, and state they be, and +all other receiuers and procurators, in all and whatsoeuer our priories +deputed, and to be deputed by vertue of the holy obedience, and all our +people, and all that are subiect to the iurisdiction of our religion, that +in, and by the same they hold, and repute the said worshipfull Iohn Keele +in the name as abouesaid, the ship, mariners, and merchandize, without let +in the same their voyage, or in any other place, that they be not molested, +not in any wise hindered, but that in all their causes and businesse they +be of you holpen, and furthered continually. In witnesse whereof, our seale +of gouernment is impressed to these presents in blacke waxe. Giuen at Malta +in our Conuent, the twelfth of the moneth of Iuly, in the yeere 1582. + + * * * * * + +Commission giuen by M. William Harebourne the English Ambassadour, to + Richard Foster, authorising him Consul of the English nation in the parts + of Alepo, Damasco, Aman, Tripolis, Ierusalem, &c. + +I William Harborne, her Maiesties Ambassadour, Ligier with the Grand +Signior, for the affaires of the Leuant doe in her Maiesties name confirme +and appoint Richart Foster Gentleman, my Deputie and Consull in the parts +of Alepo, Damasco, Aman, Tripolis, Ierusalem and all other ports whatsoeuer +in the prouinces of Syria, Palestina, and Iurie, to execute the office of +Consull ouer all our Nation her Maiesties subiects, of what estate or +quality soeuer: giuing him hereby full power to defend, protect, and +maintaine all such her Maiesties subiects as to him shall be obedient, in +all honest and iest causes whatsoeuer: and in like case no lesse power to +imprison, punish, and correct any and all such as he shall finde +disobedient to him in the like causes, euen in such order as I myselfe +might doe by virtue to her Maiesties Commission giuen me the 26 of Nouember +1582, the copie whereof I haue annexed to this present vnder her Maiesties +Seale deliuered me to that vse. Straightly charging and commanding all her +Maiesties subiects in those parts, as they will auoid her Highnesse +displeasure and their owne harmes, to honour his authoritie, and haue due +respect vnto the same, aiding and assisting him there with their persons +and goods in any cause requisit to her Maiesties good seruice and +commoditie of her dominions. In witnesse whereof I haue confirmed and +sealed these these presents at Rapamat my house by Pera ouer against +Constantinople, to 20 of Iune 1583. + + * * * * * + +A letter of directions of the English Ambassadour to M. Richard Forster, + appointed the first English Consull at Tripolis in Syria. + +Cousin Forster, these few words are for your remembrance when it shall +please the Almighty to send you safe arriuall in Tripolis of Syria. When it +shall please God to send you thither, you are to certifie our Nation at +Tripolis of the certaine day of your landing, to the end they both may haue +their house in a readinesse, and also meet you personally at your entrance +to accompany you, being your selfe apparelled in the best manner. The next, +second, or third day, after your comming, giue it out that you be crazed +and not well disposed, by meanes of your trauell at Sea, during which time, +you and those there are most wisely to determine in what manner your are to +present your selfe to the Beglerbi, Cadi, and other officers: who euery of +them are to be presented according to the order accustomed of others +formerly in like office: which after the note of Iohn Blanke, late +Vice-consull of Tripolis for the French, deliuered you heerewith, is very +much: and therefore, if thereof you can saue any thing, I pray you doe it, +as I doubt not but you will. They are to giue you there also another +Ianizarie according as the French hath: whose outward procedings you are to +imitate and follow, in such sort as you be not his inferour, according as +those of our Nation heeretofore with him resident can informe you. Touching +your demeanour after your placing, your [sic--KTH] are wisely to proceede +considering both French and Venetian will haue an enuious eye on you: whome +if they perceiue wise and well aduised, they will feare to offer you any +iniurie. But if they shall perceiue any insufficiencie in you, they will +not omitte any occasion to harme you. They are subtile, malicious, and +disembling people, wherefore you must alwayes haue their doings for +suspected, and warily walke in all your actions: wherein if you call for +Gods diuine assistance, as doth become euery faithfull good Christian, the +same shall in such sort direct you as he shall be glorified, your selfe +preserued, your doings blessed, and your enemies confounded. Which if +contrarywise you omit and forget, your enemies malice shalbe satisfied with +your confusion, which God defend, and for his mercies sake keepe you. +Touching any outlopers of our nation, which may happen to come thither to +traffike, you are not to suffer, but to imprison the chiefe officers, and +suffer the rest not to traffike at any time, and together enter in such +bonds as you thinke meete, that both they shall not deale in the Grand +Signiors dominions, and also not harme, during their voyage, any his +subiects shippes, vessels, or whatsoeuer other, but quitely depart out of +the same country without any harme doing. And touching those there for the +company, your are to defend them according to your priuiledge and such +commandements as you haue had hence, in the best order you may. In all and +euery your actions, at any hand, beware of rashnesse and anger, after both +which repentance followeth. Touching your dealings in their affaires of +marchandise, you are not to deale otherwise then in secret and counsell. +You are carefully to foresee the charge of the house, that the same may be +in all honest measure to the companies profit and your owne health through +moderation in diet, and at the best hand, and in due time to prouide things +needfull to saue what may be: for he that buyeth euery thing when he needed +it, harmeth his owne house, and helpeth the retailer. So as it is, in mine +opinion, wisdome to foresee the buying of all things in their natiue soile, +in due time, and at the first hand euery yeere, as you are to send the +company the particular accounts of the same expenses. Touching your selfe, +your [sic--KTH] are to cause to be employed fifty or threescore ducats, +videlicet, twenty in Sope, and the rest in Spices, whereof the most part to +be Pepper, whereof we spend very much. The Spices are to be prouided by our +friend William Barrat, and the Sope buy you at your first arriuall, for +that this shippe lading the same commodity will cause it to amount in +price. From our mansion Rapamat, the fift of September 1583. + + * * * * * + +A commandement for Chio. + +Vobis, Beg et Cadi et Ermini, qui estis in Chio, significamus: quòd +serenissimæ Reginæ Maiestatis Angliæ orator, qui est in excelsa porta per +literas significauit nobis, quod ex nauibus Anglicis vna nauis venisset ad +portum Chico, et illinc Constantinopolim recto cursu voluisset venire, et +contra priuilegium detenuistis, et non siuistis venire. Hæc prædictus +orator significauit nobis: et petiuit a nobis in hoc negocio hoc mandatum, +vt naues Anglicæ veniant et rediant in nostras ditiones Cæsareas. +Priuilegium datum et concessum est ex parte Serenitatis Cæsareæ nostræ: et +huius priuilegij copia data est sub insigni nostro: Et contra nostrum +priuilegium Cæsareum quod ita agitur, quæ est causa? Quando cum hoc mandato +nostro homines illorum ad vos venerint ex prædicta Anglia, si nauis venerit +ad portum vestrum, et si res et merces ex naue exemerint, et vendiderint, +et tricessimam secundam partem reddiderint, et res quæ manserint +Constantinopolim auferre velint, patiantur: Et si aliquis contra +priuilegium et articulos eius aliquid ageret, non sinatis, nec vos facite: +et impediri non sinatis eos, vt rectà Constantinopolim venientes in suis +negotiationibus sine molestia esse possint. Et quicunque contra hoc +mandatum et priuilegium nostrum aliquid fecerit, nobis significate. Huic +mandato nostro et insigni fidem adhibete. In principio mensis Decembris. + + * * * * * + +A description of the yeerely voyage or pilgrimage of the Mahumitans, Turkes + and Moores vnto Mecca in Arabia. + +Of the Citie of Alexandria. + +Alexandria the most ancient citie in Africa situated by the seaside +containeth seuen miles in circuite, and is enuironed with two walles one +neere to the other with high towers, but the walles within be farre higher +than those without, with a great ditch round about the same: yet is not +this Citie very strong by reason of the great antiquitie, being almost +halfe destroyed and ruinated. The greatnesse of this Citie is such, that if +it were of double habitation, as it is compassed with a double wall, it +might be truely said, that there were two Alexandrias one builded vpon +another, because vnder the foundations of the said City are great +habitations, and incredible huge pillers. True it is, that this part +vnderneath remaineth at this day inhabitable, because of the corrupt aire, +as also for that by time, which consumeth all things, it is greately +ruinated. It might well be sayd, that the founder hereof, as he was worthy +in all his enterprises, so likewise in building hereof he did a worke +worthy of himselfe, naming it after his owne name. This Citie hath one +defect, for it is subiect to an euill ayre, which onely proceedeth of that +hollownesse vnderneath, out of the which issueth infinite moisture: and +that this is true the ayre without doth evidently testifie, which is more +subtile and holesome then that beneath. The waters hereof be salt, by +reason that the soile of it selfe is likewise so. And therefore the +inhabitants, at such time as the riuer Nilus floweth, are accustomed to +open a great ditch, the head wherof extendeth into the said riuer, and from +thence they conueigh the same within halfe a mile of Alexandria, and so +consequently by meanes of conduct-pipes the water commeth vnto the +cesternes of Alexandria, which being full serue the citie from one +inundation to another. Within the citie is a Pyramide mentioned of in +Histories, but not of great importance. Without the citie is La colonna di +Pompeio, or the pillar of Pompey, being of such height and thicknesse, that +it is supposed there is not the like in the whole world besides. Within the +citie there is nothing of importance saue a litle castle which is guarded +with 60 Ianizaries. Alexandria hath three portes, one towardes Rossetto, +another to the land ward, and the third to the sea ward, which is called +Babelbar, without which appeareth a broad Iland called Ghesira in the +Moores tongue, which is not wholy an Iland, because a litle point or corner +thereof toucheth the firme lande, and therefore may be called Peninsula, +that is to say, almost an Iland. Hereupon are builded many houses of the +Iewes, in respect of the aire. This Peninsula is situate betweene two very +good ports, one of them being much more safe then the other, called The old +port, into the which only the vessels of Barbarie, and the sixe Gallies of +the Grand Signior deputeth for the guard of Alexandria doe enter. And this +port hath vpon the right hand at the mouth or enterance thereof a castle of +small importance, and guarded but with fifteene men or thereabouts On the +other side of this Iland is the other called The new port, which name is +not vnfitly giuen vnto it, for that in all mens iudgement in times past +there hath not beene water there, because in the midst of this port, where +the water is very deepe, there are discouered and found great sepulchres +and other buildings, out of the which are dayly digged with engines Iaspar +and Porphyrie stones of great value, of the which great store are sent to +Constantinople for the ornament of the Mesquitas or Turkish Temples, and of +other buildings of the Grand Signior. Into this port enter all such vessels +as traffique to this place. This port hath on ech side a castle, whereof +that vpon the Peninsula is called Faraone, vpon the toppe whereof euery +night there is a light set in a great lanterne for direction of the ships, +and for the guard thereof are appointed 200 Ianizaries: the other on the +other side is but a litle castle kept by 18. men. It is certeine, that this +hauen of Alexandria is one of the chiefest hauens in the world: for hither +come to traffique people of euery Nation, and all sorts of vessels which +goe round about the citie. It is more inhabited by strangers, marchants, +and Christians, then by men of the countrey which are but a few in number. +[Sidenote: Fontecho signifieth an house of trafique, as the Stilyard.] +Within the citie are fiue Fontechi, that is to say, one of the Frenchmen, +where the Consul is resident, and this is the fairest and most commodious +of all the rest. Of the other foure, two belong to the Venetians, one to +the Raguseans, and the fourth to the Genoueses. And all strangers which +come to traffique there, except the Venetians, are vnder the French +Consull. It is also to be vnderstood, that all the Christians dwell within +their Fontechi, and euery euening at the going downe of the sunne, they +which are appointed for that office goe about and shut all the gates of the +saide Fontechi outward, and the Christians shut the same within: and so +likewise they doe on the Friday (which is the Moores and the Turkes +Sabboth) till their deuotions be expired. And by this meanes all parties +are secure and voide of feare: for in so doing the Christians may sleepe +quietly and not feare robbing, and the Moores neede not doubt whiles they +sleepe or pray, that the Christians should make any tumult, as in times +past hath happened. + + +Of the coast of Alexandria. + +[Sidenote: Bichier.] On the side towardes Barbarie along the sea-coast for +a great space there is founde neither hold, nor any thing worthy of +mention: but on the other side towards Syria 13 miles from Alexandria +standeth a litle castle called Bichier kept by fiftie Turkes, which castle +is very olde and weake, and hath a port which in times past was good, but +at this present is vtterly decayed and full of sand, so that the vessels +which come thither dare not come neere the shoare, but ride far off into +the sea. [Sidenote: Rossetto] Fortie miles further is Rossetto, which is a +litle towne without walles, and is situate vpon the banke of Nilus three +miles from the sea, at which place many times they build ships and other +vessels, for gouernement whereof is appointed a Saniacbey, without any +other guard: it is a place of traffique, and the inhabitants are very rich, +but naughtie varlets and traytours. Further downe along the sea-side and +the riuer banke is another litle castle like vnto the abouesayde, and +because the Moores beleeue, that Mecca will in short time be conquered by +the Christians, they holde opinion, that the same being lost shall be +renued in this place of Rossetto, namely, that all their prayers, vowes, +and pilgrimages shall be transported to Rossetto, as the religious order of +Saint Iohn of the Rhodes is translated thence to Malta. Further forwarde +thirtie miles standes another castle of small importance called Brulles, +kept continually by fourtie Turkes, which hath a good and secure port, in +forme like to a very great lake or ponde, wherein is taken great quantitie +of fish, whith they salt, and the marchants of Candie and Cyprus come +thither to lade the same, and it is greatly esteemed, especially of the +Candiots, who hauing great abundance of wine aduenture abroad to seeke +meate fitte for the taste of the sayd wine. Distant from Brulles fiue and +thirtie miles there is anothet castle like vnto the abouesayd kept by an +Aga with fourtie men or thereabout. More within the lande by the riuers +side is Damiata an auncient citie enuironed with walles contayning fiue +miles in circuit, and but of small strength. For the gouernement of this +place is a Sanjaco with all his housholde and no other companie. This citie +is very large, delightfull, and pleasant, abounding with gardens and faire +fountaines. Other fortie miles further is Latma, a castle of very small +importance, and kept as other with fortie Turkes vnder an Aga. In this +place is no port, but a roade very daungerous, and without other +habitation. Passing this place we enter Iudea. But because our intent is to +reason simply of the voyage to Mecca, we will proceede no further this way, +but returning to our first way, let it suffice to say, that from Alexandria +to Cairo are two hundred miles, in which way I finde nothing woorthie of +memorie. + + +Of the mightie Citie of Cairo. + +Cairo containeth in circuit eighteene miles, being so inhabited and +replenished with people, that almost it cannot receiue more; and therefore +they haue begunne to builde newe houses without the citie and about the +walles. In Cairo are people of all Nations, as Christians, Armenians, +Abexins, Turkes, Moores, Iewes, Indians, Medians, Persians, Arabians, and +other sortes of people, which resort thither by reason of the great +traffique. This citie is gouerned by a Basha, which ministreth iustice, +together with the Cadie throughout the whole kingdome. Also there are two +and twentie Saniackes, whose office is onely to ouersee and guarde the +kingdome of euery good respect. There are also seuen thousand Turkes in +pay, to wit, three thousand Ianizaries, and foure thousand horsemen: The +rest of the people in Cairo are for the most part marchants which goe and +come, and the remnant are Moores and other base people. About two miles +from Cairo there is another little Cairo called The olde Cairo, which +containeth in circuit litle more then tenne miles, and the better halfe is +not inhabited, but destroyed, whereof I neede not make any other mention. +The new Cairo answereth euery yeere in tribute to the grand Signior, 600000 +ducates of gold, neat and free of all charges growing on the same, which +money is sent to Constantinople, about the fine of September, by the way of +Aleppo, alwayes by lande, vnder the custodie of three hundred horsemen, and +two hundred Ianizaries footmen. The citie of Cairo is adorned with many +faire Mesquitas rich, great, and of goodly and gorgeous building, among +which are fiue principall. The first is called Morastano, that is to say, +The hospitall, which hath of rent fiue hundred ducats of golde euery day +left vnto it by a king of Damasco from auncient times; which king hauing +conquered Cairo, for the space of fiue daies continually put the people +thereof to the sword, and in the end repenting him of so great +manslaughter, caused this cruelty to cease, and to obtaine remission for +this sinne committed, caused this hospitall to be built, enriching it as is +abouesaid. The second famous monument of Cairo is called Neffisa, of one +Neffisa buried there, who was a Dame of honour, and mooued by lust, yeelded +her body voluntarily without rewarde, to any that required the same, and +sayde she bestowed this almes for the loue of her Prophet Mahomet, and +therefore at this day they adore her, reuerence her, and finally haue +canonized her for a Saint, affirming that shee did many miracles. The third +is called Zauia della Innachari, who was one of the foure Doctors in the +law. The fourth is called Imamsciafij, where is buried Sciafij the second +Doctor of this law. Of the other two Doctors one is buried in Damasco, the +other in Aleppo. The fift and last famous monument is Giamalazar, that is, +the house of Lazarus: and this is the generall Vniuersity of the whole +kingdome of Egypt. [Sidenote: 1566.] In this place Anno 1566 in the moneth +of Ianuary by misfortune of fire were burned nine thousand bookes of great +value, as well for that they were written by hand, as also wrought so +richly with golde, that they were worth 300 and 400 ducats a piece, one +with another. And because it could neuer be knowen yet how this fire +beganne, they haue and doe holde the same for a most sinister augurie, and +an euident and manifest signe of their vtter ruine. The houses of Cairo +without are very faire, and within the greater number richly adorned with +hangings wrought with golde. Euery person which resorteth to this place for +traffiques sake, is bound to pay halfe a duckat, except the gentlemen +Venetians, Siotes, and Rhaguseans, because they are tributarie to the Grand +Signior. [Sidenote: The description of Cairo.] Cairo is distant from the +riuer Nilus a mile and more, being situate on a plaine, saue that on the +one side it hath a faire little hill, on the toppe, whereof stands a faire +castle, but not strong, for that it may be battered on euery side, but very +rich and large, compassed about with faire gardens into the which they +conueigh water for their necessitie out of Nilus, with certaine wheeles and +other like engines. This magnificent citie is adorned with very fruitfull +gardens both pleasant and commodious, with great plenty of pondes to water +the same. Notwithstanding the great pleasures of Cairo are in the moneth of +August, when by meanes of the great raine in Ethiopia the riuer Nilus +ouerfloweth apd watereth all the countrey, and then they open the mouth of +a great ditch, which extendeth into the riuer, and passeth through the +midst of the citie, and entring there are innumerable barkes rowing too and +fro laden with gallant girles and beautifull dames, which with singing, +eating, drinking and feasting, take their solace. The women of this +countrey are most beautifull, and goe in rich attire bedeked with gold, +pretious stones, and iewels of great value, but chiefely perfumed with +odours, and are very libidinous, and the men likewise, but foule and hard +fauoured. The soile is very fertile and abundant, the flesh fat which they +sell without bones, their candles they make of the marowe of cattell, +because the Moores eate the tallow. They vse also certaine litle furnaces +made of purpose, vnder the which they make fire, putting into the furnace +foure or fiue hundred egges, and the said fire they nourish by litle and +litle, vntill the chickens be hatched, which after they be hatched, and +become somewhat bigger, they sell them by measure in such sort, as we sell +and measure nuts and chestnuts and such like. + + +Of certaine notable monuments without the citie of Cairo. + +Without the Citie, sixe miles higher into the land, are to be seene neere +vnto the riuer diuerse Piramides, among which are three marueilous great, +and very artificially wrought. Out of one of these are dayly digged the +bodies of auncient men, not rotten, but all whole, the cause whereof is the +qualitie of the Egyptian soile, which will not consume the flesh of man, +but rather dry and harden the same, and so alwayes conserueth it. And these +dead bodies are the Mummie which the Phisitians and Apothecaries doe +against our willes make vs to swallow. Also by digging in these Pyramides +oftentimes are found certaine Idoles or Images of gold, siluer, and other +mettall, but vnder the other piramides the bodies are not taken vp so whole +as in this, but there are found legges and armes comparable to the limmes +of giants. Neare to these piramides appeareth out of the sand a great head +of stone somewhat like marble, which is discouered so farre as the necke +ioyneth with the shoulders, being all whole, sauing that it wanteth a +little tippe of the nose. The necke of this head contayneth in circuit +about sixe and thirty foot, so that it may be according to the necke +considered, what greatnesse the head is of. The riuer Nilus is a mile +broad, wherein are very many great Croccodiles from Cairo vpward, but lower +than Cairo passeth no such creature: and this, they say, is by reason of an +inchantment made long since which hindereth their passage for comming any +lower then Cairo. Moreouer of these creatures there are sometimes found +some of an incredible bignesse, that is to say, of fourtie foot about. The +males haue their members like to a man, and the females like to a woman. +These monsters oftentimes issue out of the water to feede, and finding any +small beasts, as sheepe, lambes, goates, or other like, doe great harme. +And whiles they are foorth of the water, if they happen at vnawares vpon +any man, woman or childe, whom they can ouercome, they spare not their +liues. In the yeere of our Lord one thousand fiue hundred and sixtie it +happened, that certaine poore Christians trauelling by Cairo towardes the +countrey of Prete Ianni to rescue certaine slaues, were guided by a Chaus, +and iourneyed alongst the banke of the said riuer. The Chaus remained +lingering alone behinde to make his prayers (as their custome is) at a +place called Tana, whom being busie in his double deuotion one of these +Crocodiles ceazed by the shoulders, and drew him vnder water, so that he +was neuer after seene. And for this cause they haue made in sundry places +certaine hedges as bankes within the water, so that betwixt the hedge and +banke of the riuer there remaineth so much water, that the women washing +may take water without danger at their pleasure. This countrey is so +fruitfull, that it causeth the women as other creatures to bring foorth +one, two, and oft-times three at a birth. Fiue miles southwarde of Cairo is +a place called Matarea, where the balme is refined: and therefore some will +say, that the trees which beare the balme growe in the said place, wherein +they are deceiued: for the sayde trees growe two dayes iourney from Mecca, +in a place called Bedrihone, which yeeldeth balme in great plenty, but +saluage, wilde, and without vertue, and therefore the Moores carying the +same within litle chests from Bedrihone to Matarea, where the trees being +replanted (be it by vertue of the soyle, or the water, aire, or any other +thing whatsoeuer) it sufficeth that heare they beare the true balme and +licour so much in these dayes esteemed of. In this place of Matarea there +are certaine little houses, with most goodly gardens, and a chappell of +antiquity, where the very Moores themselues affirme, that the mother of the +blessed Christ fleeing from the fury of wicked Herode there saued her selfe +with the childe, wherein that saying of the Prophet was fulfilled, Ex +Ægypto vocaui fillium meum. The which Chappell in the yeare of our Lorde +one thousand fiue hundred and foure, the Magnifico Daniel Barbaro first +Consull of that place went to visite, and caused it to be renued and +reedified, so that in these dayes there resort thither many Christians, who +oftentimes bring with them a Priest, to say masse there. Also about an +Harque-buz-shotte from Matarea is a spire of great height like to that at +Rome, and more beautifull to beholde. Neere vnto the olde Cairo are yet +twelue storehouses of great antiquitie, but now very much decayed, and +these till late dayes serued to keepe corne for behoofe of the kingdome, +concerning which many are of opinion, that the founder hereof was Ioseph +the sonne of Iacob, for consideration of the seuen deare yeares. [Sidenote: +Olde Thebes.] Also passing higher vp by the banke of Nilus, there is to bee +seene a fayre Citie ouerflowed with water, the which at such time as Nilus +floweth lyeth vnder water, but when the water returneth to the marke, there +plainely appeare princely palaces, and stately pillars, being of some +called Thebes, where they say that Pharao was resident. Moroeuer three +dayes iourney higher vp are two great images of speckled marble, all whole, +and somewhat sunke into the earth, being things wonderfull to consider of, +for the nose of either is two spannes and a halfe long, and the space from +one eare to the other conteineth tenne spannes, the bodies being +correspondent to their heads, and grauen in excellent proportion, so that +they are shapes of maruellous hugenesse, and these they call The wife, and +The daughter of Pharao. + + +Of the patriarke of Greece. + +In Cairo are two Patriarkes, one of the Greekes, and another of the +Iacobites. The Greeke Patriarke called Gioechni, being about the age of one +hundred and thirteene yeeres, was a very good and holy man. They say, that +when Soldan Gauri of Egypt reigned, there was done this miracle following; +this good patriarke being enuied at by the Iewes of the countrey, for none +other cause, but for his good workes, and holy life, it happened (I say) +that being in disputation with certaine of the Hebrewes in presence of the +Sultan, and reasoning of their lawe and faith, it was sayd vnto him by one +of these Miscreants: sith thou beleeuest in the faith of Christ, take and +drinke this potion which I will giue thee; and if thy Christ be true +Messias and true God, he will (sayd he) deliuer thee from daunger. To whom +the auncient patriarke answered, that he was content: whereupon that cursed +Iewe brought him a cuppe of the most venemous and deadly poyson that could +be found, which the holy Patriarke hauing perceiued, said: In the name of +the father, of the sonne, and of the holy Ghost: and hauing so sayde he +dranke it quite vp; which done, he tooke a droppe of pure water, putting it +into that very cup, and gaue it vnto the Iewe, saying vnto him, I in the +name of my Christe haue drunke thy poyson, and therefore in the name of thy +expected Messias drinke this water of mine within thine owne cuppe. +Whereupon the Iewe tooke the cup out of the hand of the Patriarke, and +hauing drunke the water, within halfe an houre burst a sunder. And the +Patriarke had none other hurt, saue that he became somewhat pale in sight, +and so remained euer after. And this miracle (which meriteth to be called +no lesse) was done to the great commendation of the holy Patriarke in the +presence of a thousand persons, and namely of the Soldan of Egypt: who +seeing the despight of the Iewes, vnto their owne cost and confusion +compelled them to make the conduct, which with so many engines commeth into +the castle from Nilus aboue mentioned. And this triumphant Patriarke not +long since was aliue, and in perfect health, which God continue long time. + + +Of the preparation of the Carouan to goe to Mecca. + +As touching the Carouan which goeth to Mecca, it is to be vnderstoode, that +the Mahometans obserue a kinde of lent continuing one whole moone, and +being a moueable ceremonie, which sometimes falleth high, sometimes lowe in +the yeere called in their tongue Ramazan, and their feast is called Bairam. +During this time of lent all they which intende to goe vnto Mecca resort +vnto Cairo, because that twentie dayes after the feast the Carouan is +readie to depart on the voyage: and thither resort a great multitude of +people from Asia, Grecia, and Barbaria to goe on this voyage, some mooued +by deuotion, and some for traffiques sake, and some to passe away the time. +Nowe, within fewe dayes after the feast they which goe on the voyage depart +out of the citie two leagues vnto a place called Birca, where they expect +the Captaine of the Carouan. This place hath a great pond caused by the +inundation of Nilus, and so made that the camels and other beastes may +drinke therein: whereof, namely, of Mules, Camels, and Dromedaries there +are at least fortie thousand, and the persons which followe the Carouan +euerie yeere are about fiftie thousand, fewe more or lesse, according to +the times. Moreouer euery three yeeres they renue the Captaine of the +Carouan, called in the Arabian tongue Amarilla Haggi, that is, the Captaine +of the Pilgrimes, to whom the Grand Signior giueth euery voyage eighteene +purses, conteyning each of them sixe hundred twentie and fiue ducates of +golde, and these be for the behoofe of the Carouan, and also to doe almes +vnto the needfull pilgrimes. This Captaine, besides other seruingmen which +follow him, hath also foure Chausi to serue him. Likewise he hath with him +for the securitie of the Carouan foure hundred souldiers, to wit, two +hundred Spachi or horsemen mounted on Dromedaries, and two hundred +Ianizaries riding vpon Camels. The Chausi and the Spachi are at the charge +of the Captaine, but the Ianizaries not so, for their prouision is made +them from Cairo. The Spachi weare caps or bonnets like to the caps of +Sergeants, but the Ianizaries after another sort, with a lappe falling +downe behinde like a French-hoode, and hauing before a great piece of +wrought siluer on their heads. The charge of these is to cause the Carouan +to march in good array when neede requireth; these are not at the +commaundement of any but of the Captaine of the Carouan. Moreouer the +Captaine hath for his guide eight pilots, the office of whom is alwayes +stable and firme from heire to heire, and these goe before guiding the +Carouan, and shewing the way, as being well experienced in the place, and +in the night they gouerne them as the mariners, by the starre. [Sidenote: +Pieces of dry wood in stead of torches.] These also vse to sende before +foure or fiue men carying pieces of dry wood which giue light, because they +should not goe out of the way, and if at any time through their ill hap +they wander astray out of the way, they are caste downe and beaten with so +many bastonadoes vpon the soles of their feete, as serue them for a +perpetuall remembrance. The Captaine of the Carouan hath his Lieutenant +accompanied continually with fifteene Spachi, and he hath the charge to set +the Carouan in order, and to cause them to depart on their iourney when +neede requireth: and during the voyage their office is some whiles to goe +before with the forewarde, sometimes to come behinde with the rereward, +sometimes to march on the one side, and sometimes on the other, to spy, +that the coast be cleare. The Carouan carrieth with it sixe pieces of +ordinance drawen by 12 camels, which serue to terrifie the Arabians, as +also to make triumph at Mecca, and other places. The marchants which +followe the Carouan, some carry for marchandise cloth of silke, some +Corall, some tinne, others wheat, rise, and all sorts of graine. Some sell +by the way, some at Mecca, so that euery one bringeth something to gaine +by, because all marchandise that goeth by land payeth no custome, but that +which goeth by sea is bound to pay tenne in the hundred. + + +The beginning of the voyage. + +The feast before the Carouan setteth forth, the Captaine with all his +retinue and officers resort vnto the castle of Cairo before the Basha, +which giueth vnto euery man a garment, and that of the Captaine is wrought +with golde, and the others are serued according to their degree. Moreouer +he deliuereth vnto him the Chisua Talnabi, which signifieth in the Arabian +tongue, The garment of the Prophet: this vesture is of silke, wrought in +the midst with letters of golde, which signifie: La illa ill'alla Mahumet +Resullala: that is to say, There are no gods but God, and his ambassadour +Mahumet. This garment is made of purpose to couer from top to botome a +litle house in Mecca standing in the midst of the Mesquita, the which house +(they say) was builded by Abraham or by his sonne Ismael. After this he +deliuereth to him a gate made of purpose for the foresaid house of Abraham +wrought all with fine golde, and being of excellent workmanship, and it is +a thing of great value. Besides, he deliuereth vnto him a couering of +greene veluet made in maner of a pyramis, about nine palmes high, and +artificially wrought with most fine golde, and this is to couer the tombe +of their prophet within Medina, which tombe is built in manner of a +pyramis: and besides that couering there are brought many others of golde +and silke, for the ornament of the sayde tombe. Which things being +consigned, the Basha departeth not from his place; but the Captaine of the +Carouan taketh his leaue with all his officers and souldiers, and departeth +accompanied with all the people of Cairo orderly in manner of a procession, +with singing, shouting and a thousand other ceremonies too long to recite. +From the castle they goe to a gate of the citie called Bab-Nassera, without +the which standes a Mosquita, and therein they lay vp the sayd vestures +very well kept and guarded. And of this ceremony they make so great +account, that the world commeth to see this sight, yea the women great with +childe, and others with children in their armes, neither is it lawfull for +any man to forbid his wife the going to this feast, for that in so doing +the wife may separate her selfe from her husband, and may lie with any +other man, in regard of so great a trespasse. Now this procession +proceeding from the castle towardes the Mosquita, the Camels which bring +the vestures are all adorned with cloth of golde, with many little belles, +and passing along the streete you may see the multitude casting vpon the +said vesture thousands of beautifull flowers of diuers colours, and sweete +water, others bringing towels and fine cloth touch the same, which euer +after they keepe as reliques with great reuerence. Afterward hauing left +the vesture in the Mosquita, as is aforesaid, they returne againe into the +citie, where they remaine the space of 20 dayes, and then the captaine +departeth with his company, and taking the vestures out of the Mosquita, +carieth the same to the foresaid place of Birca, where the Captaine hauing +pitched his tent with the standard of the grand Signior ouer the gate, and +the other principall tents standing about his, stayeth there some tenne +dayes and no more: in which time all those resort thither that meane to +follow the Carouan in this voyage to Mecca. Where you shall see certaine +women which intend to goe on this voiage accompanied with their parents and +friends mounted vpon Camels, adorned with so many tryfles, tassels, and +knots, that in beholding the same a man cannot refraine from laughter. The +last night before their departure they make great feasting and triumph +within the Carouan, with castles and other infinite deuises of fireworke, +the Ianizaries alwayes standing round about the tent of the Captaine with +such shouting and ioy, that on euery side the earth resoundeth, and this +night they discharge all their ordinance, foure or sixe times, and after at +the breake of the day vpon the sound of a trumpet they march forward on +their way. + + +What times the Carouan trauelleth, and when it resteth. + +It is to be noted, that from Cairo to Mecca they make 40 dayes iourney or +thereabout, and the same great dayes iourneies. For the custome of the +Carouan is to trauell much and rest little, and ordinarily they iourney in +this maner: They trauell from two a clock in the morning vntill the sunne +rising, then hauing rested till noone, they set forward, and so continue +till night, and then also rest againe, as is abouesaid, till two of the +clocke; and this order they obserue vntill the end of the voiage, neuer +changing the same, except in some places, whereof we will hereafter speake, +where for respect of water they rest sometimes a day and an halfe, and this +they obserue to refresh themselues, otherwise both man and beast would die. + + +In what order the Carouan trauelleth. + +The maner and order which the Carouan obserueth in marching is this. It +goeth diuided into three parts, to wit, the foreward, the maine battell, +and the rereward. In the foreward go the 8 Pilots before with a Chaus, +which hath foure knaues, and ech knaue carrieth a sinew of a bul, to the +end that if occasion requireth, the bastonado may be giuen to such as +deserue the same. These knaues cast offendours downe, turning vp the soles +of their feete made fast to a staffe, giuing them a perpetuall remembrance +for them and the beholders. This Chaus is as the Captaine of the foreward, +which commandeth lights to be carried before when they trauell in the +night. Also there go in this foreward 6 Santones with red turbants vpon +their heads, and these eat and ride at the cost of the Captaine of the +Carouan. These Santones when the Carouan arriueth at any good lodging, +suddenly after they haue escried the place, cry with an horrible voyce +saying, good cheare, good cheare, we are neere to the wished lodging. For +which good newes the chiefe of the company bestow their beneuolence vpon +them. In this foreward goeth very neere the third part of the people of the +Carouan, behind whom go alwayes 25 Spachi armed with swords, bowes and +arrowes to defend them from thieues. Next vnto the foreward, within a +quarter of a mile, followeth the maine battell, and before the same are +drawen the sayd sixe pieces of ordinance, with their gunners, and fifteene +Spachi Archers. And next vnto these commeth the chiefe physicion, who is an +olde man of authoritie, hauing with him many medicines, oyntments, salues, +and other like refreshings for the sicke, hauing also camels with him for +the sicke to ride on, which haue no horse nor beast. Next vnto him goeth +one Camell alone, the fairest that can be found: for with great industrie +is sought the greatest and fairest which may be found within the dominions +of the Grand Signior. This camell also is decked with cloth of golde and +silke, and carieth a little chest made of pure Legmame made in likenesse of +the arke of the olde Testament: but, as is abouesayd, made of pure Legmame, +without golde or any other thing of cost. Within this chest is the Alcoran +all written with great letters of golde, bound betweene two tables of +massie golde, and the chest during their voyage is couered with Silke, but +at their entring into Mecca it is all couered with cloth of golde adorned +with iewels, and the like at the enterance into Medina. The Camell +aforesayd which carrieth the chest, is compassed about with many Arabian +singers and musicians, alwayes singing and playing vpon instruments. After +this folow fiftene other most faire Camels, euery one carying one of the +abouesayd vestures, being couered from toppe to toe with silke. Behind +these goe twentie other Camels which carrie the money, apparell, and +prouision of the Amir el Cheggi captaine of the Carouan. After foloweth the +royall Standard of the Grand Signior, accompanied continually with the +musicians of the captaine, and fiue and twentie Spachi archers, with a +Chaus before them, and about these marueilous things goe all the people and +Camels which follow the Carouan. Behind these, lesse then a mile, foloweth +the rereward, whereof the greater part are pilgrimes: the occasion whereof +is, for that the merchants seeke alwayes to be in the foreward for the +securitie of their goods, but the pilgrimes which haue litle to loose care +not though they come behind. Behind these alwayes goe fiue and twentie +other Spachi well armed with another Chaus their captaine, and fortie +Arabians all Archers for guard of the rereward. And because the Carouan +goeth alwayes along the red sea banke, which in going forth they haue on +their right hand, therfore the two hundred Ianissaries parted into three +companies goe vpon their left hand well armed and mounted vpon Camels bound +one to another, for vpon that side is all the danger of thieues, and on the +other no danger at all, the captaine of the Carouan alwayes going about his +people, sometimes on the one side, and sometimes on the other, neuer +keeping any firme place, being continually accompanied with a Chaus and 25. +Spachi, armed and mounted vpon Dromedaries, and 8. musicians with violes in +their handes, which cease not sounding till the captaine take his rest, +vpon whom they attend, till such time as he entreth his pauillion, and then +licencing all his attendants and folowers to depart, they goe each man to +their lodging. + + +Of things notable which are seene in this voyage by the way. + +Because in the way there are not many things found woorthy memorie, for +that the Carouan seldome resteth in places of habitation, of which in the +way there are but fewe, yea rather the Carouan resteth altogether in the +field: therefore in this our voyage wee will onely make mention of certaine +Castles found in the way, which bee these, namely Agerut, Nachel, Acba, +Biritem, Muel and Ezlem. Of which fiue the two first are kept of Moores, +and the other three of Turkes, and for guard they haue eight men or tenne +at the most in euery Castle, with foure or fiue Smerigli, which serue to +keepe the water from the Arabians, so that the Carouan comming thither may +haue wherewithall to refresh it selfe. Agerut is distant from Suez a port +of the red sea eight miles, where are alwayes resident fiue and twentie +gallies of the Grand Signior for the keeping of that Sea. Nachel is distant +from the Sea a dayes iourney. The walles of Acba are founded vpon the red +Sea banke. Biritem and Muel likewise are dashed by the waues of the Sea. +Ezlem is distant from thence aboue a dayes iourney. These fiue Castles +abouesayd are not of force altogether to defend themselues agaynst an +hundred men. The Carouan departing from Birca vntill Agerut findeth no +water by the way to drinke, neither from Agerut till Nachel, nor from +Nachel till Acba, but betweene Acba and Biritem are found two waters, one +called Agiam el Cassap, and the other Magarraxiaibi, that is to say, the +riuer of Iethro the father in lawe of Moses, for this is the place +mentioned in the second chapter of Exodus, whither it is sayd that Moses +fledde from the anger of Pharao, who would haue killed him, because hee had +slaine the Ægyptian, which fought with the Hebrew, in which place stoode +the citie of Midian; and there are yet the pondes, neere vnto the which +Moses sate downe. And from that place forward they finde more store of +water by the way, and in more places, though not so good. It is also to bee +noted, that in this voiage it is needfull and an vsuall thing, that the +captaine put his hand to his purse, in these places, and bestow presents, +garments, and turbants vpon certaine of the chiefe of the Arabians, to the +ende they may giue him and his Carouan, free passage: who also promise, +that their followers likewise shall doe no damage to the Carouan, and bind +themselues to accomplish the same, promising also by worde of mouth, that +if the Carouan bee robbed, they will make restitution of such things as are +stollen: but notwithstanding the Carouan is by them oftentimes damnified, +and those which are robbed haue no other restitution at the Arabians handes +then the shewing of them a paire of heeles, flying into such places as it +is impossible to finde them. Nowe the Carouan continuing her accustomed +iourneys, and hauing passed the abouesayd castles, and others not woorthie +mention, at length commeth to a place called Iehbir, which is the beginning +and confine of the state and realme of Serifo the king of Mecca: where, at +their approching issueth out to meete them the gouernour of the land, with +all his people to receiue the Carouan, with such shouting and triumph, as +is impossible to expresse, where they staie one whole day. This place +aboundeth with fresh and cleare waters, which with streames fall downe from +the high mountaines. Moreouer, in this place are great store of dates, and +flesh great store and good cheape, and especially laced muttons which +willingly fall downe, and here the weary pilgrimes haue cummoditie to +refresh themselues, saying, that this wicked fact purgeth them from a +multitude of sinnes, and besides increaseth deuotion to prosecute the +voiage. Touching the building in these places, it is to bee iudged by the +houses halfe ruinated, that it hath bene a magnificent citie: but because +it was in times past inhabited more with thieues then true men, it was +therefore altogether destroyed by Soldan Gauri king of Ægypt, who going on +pilgrimage vnto Mecca, and passing by this place, there was by the +inhabitants hereof some iniurie done vnto his Carauan, which he +vnderstandeng of, dissembled till his returne from Mecca, and then caused +it to bee burned and destroyed in pitifull sort for reuenge of the iniurie +done vnto the Carouan. The Carouan hauing rested and being refreshed as is +abouesayd, the next day departed on the way, and the first place they +arriue at woorthy mention is called Bedrihonem, in which place (as is +aforesayd) grow those little shrubbes whereout Balme issueth. And before +the Carouan arriueth at this place a mile from the citie is a large and +great field enuironed about with most high and huge mountaines. And in this +field, according to the Alcoran, their prophet Mahomet had a most fierce +and cruel battell giuen by the Christians of the countrey and other people +which set themselues agaynst them, and withstood his opinion, so that hee +was ouercome and vanquished of the Christians, and almost halfe of his +people slaine in the battell. Whereupon the Phrophet seeing himselfe in +such extremitie, fell to his prayers, and they say, that God hauing +compassion vpon his deare friend and prophet, heard him, and sent him +infinite thousands of angels, wherewith returning to the battell, they +conquered and ouercame the conquerour. And therefore in memorie of this +victorie, the Carouan lodgeth euery yeere one night in this place, making +great bonefires with great mirth. And they say that as yet there is heard +vpon the mountaines a litle drumme, which while the Carouan passeth, neuer +ceaseth sounding. And they say further, that the sayd drumme is sounded by +the angels in signe of that great victory graunted of God to their prophet. +Also the Mahumetan writings affirme, that after the ende of the sayd +battell, the prophet commaunded certaine of his people to goe and burie all +the Mahumetans which were dead in the fields, who going, knew not the one +from the other, because as yet they vsed not circumcision, so they returned +vnto him, answering, that they had bene to doe his commaundement, but they +knew not the Musulmans from the Christians. To whom the prophet answered, +saying. Turne againe, and all those which you shall finde with their faces +downeward, leaue them, because all they are misbeleeuers: and the other +which you shall finde with their faces turned vpward, them burie, for they +are the true Musulmani, and so his commaundement was done. + +The next morning by Sunne rising, the Carouan arriueth at Bedrihomen, in +which place euery man washeth himselfe from toppe to toe, as well men as +women, and leauing off their apparell, hauing each a cloth about their +priuities, called in their tongue Photah, and another white one vpon their +shoulders, all which can goe to Mecca in this habite, doe so, and are +thought to merite more then the other, but they which cannot doe so make a +vowe to sacrifice a Ramme at the mountaine of pardons; and after they bee +washed, it is not lawfull for any man or women, to kill either flea or +lowse with their handes, neither yet to take them with their nailes, vntill +they haue accomplished their vowed orations in the mountaine of pardons +abouesayd: and therefore they cary with them certaine stickes made of +purpose in maner of a File, called in their language Arca, Cassah Guch, +with which they grate their shoulders. And so the Carouan marching, commeth +within two miles of Mecca, where they rest that night. In the morning at +the breake of day, with all pompe possible they set forward toward Mecca, +and drawing neere thereunto, the Seripho issueth foorth of the citie with +his guard, accompanied with an infinite number of people, shouting, and +making great triumph. And being come out of the citie a boweshoote into a +faire field, where a great multitude of tents are pitched, and in the +middest the pauillion of the captaine, who meeting with the Serifo, after +salutations on each side, they light from their horses and enter the +pauillion, where the king of Mecca depriueth himselfe of all authoritie and +power, and committeth the same to the aboue named captaine, giuing him full +licence and authoritie to commaund, gouerne, and minister Justice during +his aboad in Mecca with his company, and on the other side the captaine to +requite this liberalitie vsed toward him by the Serifo giueth him a garment +of cloth of gold of great value, with certaine iewels and other like +things. After this, sitting downe together vpon carpets and hides they eate +together, and rising from thence with certaine of the chiefest, and taking +with them the gate abouesayd, they goe directly to the Mosxuita, attended +on but with a fewe, and being entered, they cause the olde to be pulled +downe, and put the newe couerture vpon the house of Abraham, and the olde +vesture is the eunuchs which serue in the sayde Mosquita, who after sell it +vnto the pilgrimes at foure or fiue serafines the pike: and happy doth that +man thinke himselfe, which can get neuer so litle a piece thereof, to +conserue euer after as a most holy relique: and they say, that putting the +same vnder the head of a man at the houre of his death, through vertue +thereof all his sinnes are forgiuen. Also they take away the old doore, +setting in the place the new doore, and the old by custome they giue vnto +the Serifo. After hauing made their praiers with certaine ordinarie and +woonted ceremonies, the Serifo rematneth in the citie, and the captaine of +the pilgrimage returneth vnto his pauillion. + + +Of the Serifo the king of Mecca. + +The Serifo is descended of the prophet Mahomet by Fatma daughter of that +good prophet, and Alli husband to her, and sonne in lawe to Mahumet, who +had no issue male, saue this stocke of the Serifo, to the eldest sonne +whereof the realme commeth by succession. This realme hath of reuenues +royall, euery yeere halfe a million of golde, or litle more: and all such +as are of the prophets kinred, or descended of that blood (which are almost +innumerable) are called Emyri, that is to say, lordes. These all goe +clothed in greene, or at the least haue their turbant greene, to bee knowen +from the other. Neither is it permitted that any of those Christians which +dwell or traffique in their Countrey goe clothed in greene, neither may +they haue any thing of green about them: for they say it is not lawfull for +misbeleeuers to weare that colour, wherein that great friend the prophet of +God Mahomet was woont to be apparelled. + + +Of the citie of Mecca. + +The Citie of Mecca in the Arabian tongue is called Macca, that is to say, +an habitation. This citie is inuironed about with exceeding high and barren +mountaines, and in the plaine betweene the sayde mountaines and the citie +are many pleasant gardens, where groweth great abundaunce of figges, +grapes, apples, and melons. There is also great abundance of good water and +fleshe, but not of bread. This citie hath no walles about it, and +containeth in circuite fiue miles. The houses are very handsome and +commodious, and are built like to the houses in Italie. The palace of the +Serifo is sumptuous and gorgeously adorned. The women of the place are +courteous, iocund, and louely, faire, with alluring eyes, being hote and +libidinous, and the most of them naughtie packes. The men of this place are +giuen to that abhominable, cursed, and opprobrious vice, whereof both men +and women make but small account by reason of the pond Zun Zun, wherein +hauing washed themselues, their opinion is, that although like the dog they +returne to their vomite, yet they are clensed from all sinne whatsoeuer, of +which sin we will hereafter more largely discourse. In the midst of the +city is the great Mosquita, with the house of Abraham standing in the very +middest thereof, which Mosquita was built in the time when their prophet +liued. It is foure square, and so great, that it containeth two miles in +circuit, that is to say, halfe a mile each side. Also it is made in maner +of a cloister, for that in the midst thereof separate from the rest, is the +abouesayd house of Abraham, also the galleries round about are in maner of +4. streetes, and the partitions which diuide the one street from the other +are pillars, whereof some are of marble, and others of lime and stone. This +famous and sumptuous Mosquita hath 99. gates, and 5. steeples, from whence +the Talismani call the people to the Mosquita. And the pilgrimes which are +not prouided of tents, resort hither, and for more deuotion the men and +women lie together aloft and beneath, one vpon another, so that their house +of praier becommeth worse sometimes then a den of thieues. + + +Of the house of Abraham. + +The house of Abraham is also foure square, and made of speckled stone, 20. +paces high, and 40 in circuit. And vpon one side of this house within the +wall, there is a stone of a span long, and halfe a span broad, which stone +(as they say) before this house was builded, fell downe from heauen, at the +fall whereof was heard a voyce, that wheresoeuer this stone fell, there +should be built the house of God, wherein God will heare sinners. Moreouer, +they say that when this stone fell from heauen, it was not blacke as now, +but as white as the whitest snow, and by reason it hath bene so oft kissed +by sinners, it is therewith become blacke: for all the pilgrimes are bound +to kisse this stone, otherwise they cary their sinnes home with them again. +The entrance into this house is very small, made in maner of a window, and +as high from the ground as a man can reach, so that it is painful to enter. +This house hath without 31. pillars of brasse, set vpon cubike or square +stones being red and greene, the which pillars sustaine not ought els saue +a threed of copper, which reacheth from one to another, whereunto are +fastened many burning lampes. These pillars of brasse were caused to be +made by Sultan Soliman grandfather to Sultan Amurath now Emperor. After +this, hauing entred with the difficultie abouesayd, there stand at the +entrance two pillars of marble, to wit, on each side one. In the midst +there are three of Aloes-wood not very thicke, and couered with tiles of +India 1000. colours which serue to vnderproppe the Terratza. It is so +darke, that they can hardly see within for want of light, not without an +euill smell. Without the gate fiue pases is the abouesayd pond Zun Zun, +which is that blessed pond that the angell of the Lord shewed vnto Agar +whiles she went seeking water for her sonne Ismael to drinke. + + +Of the ceremonies of the pilgrimes. + +In the beginning we haue sayd how the Mahumetans haue two feasts in the +yeere. The one they call Pascha di Ramazaco, that is to say, The feast of +fasting, and this feast of fasting is holden thirtie dayes after the feast, +wherein the Carouan trauelleth to Mecca. The other is called the feast of +the Ramme, wherin all they which are of abilitie are bound to sacrifice a +Ramme, and this they call Bine Bairam, that is to say, The great feast. And +as the Carouan departeth from Cairo, thirtie dayes after the little feast, +so likewise they come hither fiue or sixe dayes before the great feast, to +the ende the pilgrimes may haue time before the feast to finish their rites +and ceremonies, which are these. Departing from the Carouan, and being +guided by such as are experienced in the way, they goe vnto the citie +twentie or thirtie in a company as they thinke good, walking through a +streete which ascendeth by litle and litle till they come vnto a certaine +gate, whereupon is written on each side in marble stone, Babel Salema, +which in the Arabian tongue signifieth, the gate of health. And from this +place is descried the great Mosquita, which enuironeth the house of +Abraham, which being descried, they reuerently salute twise, saying, Salem +Alech Iara sul Alia, that is to say, Peace to thee, ambassadour of God. +This salutation being ended, proceeding on the way, they finde an arche +vpon their right hand, whereon they ascend fiue steps, vpon the which is a +great voyd place made of stone: after, descending other fiue steps, and +proceeding the space of a flight-shoot, they finde another arche like vnto +the first, and this way from the one arche to the other they go and come 7. +times, saying alwaies some of their prayers, which (they say) the afflicted +Agar sayd, whiles she sought and found not water for her sonne Ismael to +drinke. This ceremonie being ended, the pilgrimes enter into the Mosquita, +and drawing neere vnto the house of Abraham, they goe round about it other +seuen times, alwayes saying: This is the house of God, and of his seruant +Abraham: This done they goe to kisse the black stone abouesayd. After they +go vnto the pond Zun Zun, and in their apparell as they be, they wash +themselues from head to foote, saying, Tobah Allah, Tobah Allah, that is to +say, Pardon Lord, Pardon Lord, drinking also of that waier, which is both +mudie, filthie, and of an ill sauour, and in this wise washed and watered, +euery one returneth to his place of abode, and these ceremonies euery one +is bound to doe once at the least. But those which haue a mind to ouergoe +their fellowes, and to goe into paradise before the rest, doe the same once +a day while the Carouan remaineth there. + + +What the Carouan doeth after hauing rested at Mecca. + +[Sidenote: The mountaine of pardons.] The Carouan hauing abode within the +citie of Mecca fiue dayes, the night before the euening of their feast, the +captaine with all his company setteth forward towards the mountaine of +pardons, which they call in the Arabian tongue, Iabel Arafata. This +mountaine is distant from Mecca 15. miles, and in the mid way thereto is a +place called Mina, that is to say, The hauen, and a litle from thence are +4. great pillars, of which hereafter we will speake. Now first touching the +mountaine of Pardons, which is rather to be called a litle hill, then a +mountain, for that it is low, litle, delightful and pleasant, containing in +circuit two miles, and enuironed round about with the goodliest plaine that +euer with mans eie could be seen, and the plaine likewise compassed with +exceeding high mountains, in such sort that this is one of the goodliest +situations in the world: and it seemeth verily, that nature hath therein +shewed all her cunning, in making this place vnder the mountaine of pardons +so broad and pleasant. Vpon the side towards Mecca there are many pipes of +water cleare, faire, and fresh, and aboue all most wholesome, falling down +into certaine vessels made of purpose, where the people refresh and wash +themselues, and water their cattel. And when Adam and Euah were cast out of +paradise by the angel of the Lord, the Mahumetans say, they came to +inhabite this litle mountaine of pardons. Also they say, that they had lost +one another, and were separated for the space of 40. yeeres, and in the end +met at this place with great ioy and gladnesse, and builded a litle house +vpon the top of this mountaine, the which at this day they call Beyt Adam, +that is to say, the house of Adam. + + +Of the three Carouans. + +The same day that the Carouan of Cairo commeth to this place, hither come +2. Carouans also, one of Damasco, the other of Arabia, and in like maner +all the inhabitants for ten dayes iourney round about, so that at one time +there is to be seene aboue 200000. persons, and more then 300000. cattell. +Now all this company meeting together in this place the night before the +feast, the three hostes cast themselues into a triangle, setting the +mountaine in the midst of them: and all that night there is nothing to be +heard nor seene, but gunshot and fireworkes of sundry sortes, with such +singing, sounding, shouting, halowing, rumors, feasting, and triumphing, as +is wonderfull. After this, the day of the feast being come, they are all at +rest and silence, and that day they attend on no other thing, then to +sacrifice oblations and prayers vnto God, and in the euening all they which +haue horses mount thereon, and approch as nigh vnto the mountaine as they +can, and those which haue no horses make the best shift they can on foote, +giuing euer vnto the captaine of Cairo the chiefe place, the second to the +captaine of Damasco, and the third to the captaine of Arabia, and being all +approched as is abouesayd, there commeth a square squire, one of the +Santones, mounted on a camell well furnished, who at the other side of the +mountain ascendeth fiue steps into a pulpit made for that purpose, and all +being silent, turning his face towards the people he maketh a short sermon +of the tenour folowing. + +The summe of the Santones sermon. + +The summe of this double doctors sermon is thus much in briefe. He sheweth +them how many and how great benefits God hath giuen to the Mahumetan people +by the hand of his beloued friend and prophet Mahomet, hauing deliuered +them from the seruitude of sinne and from idolatry, in which before time +they were drowned, and how he gaue vnto them the house of Abraham wherein +they should be heard, and likewise the mountaine of pardons, by meanes +whereof they might obtaine grace and remission of their sinnes: adding, +that the mercifull God, who is a liberall giuer of all good things, +commaunded his secretarie Abraham to build him an house in Mecca, where his +successours might make their prayers vnto him and bee heard, at which time +all the mountains in the world came together thither with sufficiencie of +stones for building hereof, except that litle and low hill, which for +pouertie could not go to discharge this debt, for the which it became +sorrowful, weeping beyond all measure for the space of thirtie yeeres, at +the ende whereof the eternall God hauing pitie and compassion vpon this +poore Mountaine, saide vnto it: Weepe no more (my daughter) for thy bitter +plaints haue ascended vp into mine eares, therefore comfort thy selfe: for +I will cause all those that shall goe to visite the house of my friend +Abraham, that they shall not be absolued from their sinnes, vnlesse they +first come to doe thee reuerence, and to keepe in this place their holiest +feast. And this I haue commanded vnto my people by the mouth of my friend +and prophet Mahumet. This said, he exhorteth them vnto the loue of God, and +to prayer and almes. The sermon being done at the Sunne-setting they make +3. prayers, namely the first for the Serifo, the second for the Grand +Signior with his hoste, and the third for all the people: to which prayers +all with one voice cry saying; Amni Ia Alla, Amni Ia Alla, that is to say, +Be it so lord, be it so Lord. Thus hauing had the Santones blessing and +saluted the Mountaine of pardons, they returne the way they came vnto Mina, +whereof wee haue made mention. In returning at the end of the plaine are +the abouesaid 4. pillers, to wit, two on ech side of the way, through the +midst whereof they say it is needfull that euery one passe, saying, that +who so passeth without looseth all that merit which in his pilgrimage he +had gotten. Also from the mountaine of pardons vntill they be passed the +said pillers none dare looke backward, for feare least the sinnes which he +hath left in the mountains returne to him againe. Being past these pillers +eueryone lighteth downe, seeking in this sandy field 50. or 60. litle +stones, which being gathered and bound in an hankerchiffe they carry to the +abouesaid place of Mina, where they stay 5. dayes, because at that time +there is a faire free and franke of al custome. And in this place are other +3. pillers, not together, but set in diuers places, where (as their prophet +saith) were the three apparitions which the diuel made vnto Abraham, and to +Ismael his sonne; for amongst them they make no mention of Isaac, as if he +had neuer bene borne. So they say, that the blessed God hauing commanded +Abraham his faithfull seruant to sacrifice his first begotten Ismael, the +old Abraham went to do according to God's wil, and met with the infernall +enemie in the shape of a man, and being of him demanded whither he went, he +answered, that he went to sacrifice his sonne Ismael, as God had commanded +him. Against whom the diuel exclaiming said: Oh doting old man, sith God in +thine old age hath marueilously giuen thee this son (in whom all nations +shalbe blessed) wherefore giuing credite vnto vaine dreames, wilt thou kill +him whom so much thou hast desired, and so intirely loued. But Abraham +shaking him off proceeded on his way, whereupon the diuel seeing his words +could not preuaile with the father attempted the sonne, saying; Ismael, +haue regard vnto thyselfe betimes in this thing which is so dangerous. +Wherefore? answered the childe. Because (saith the diuel) thy doting father +seeketh to take away thy life. For what occasion, said Ismael? Because +(saith the enemie) he saith, that God hath commanded him. Which Ismael +hearing hee tooke vp stones and threw at him, saying, Auzu billahi minal +scia itanil ragini, which is to say, I defend me with God from the diuel +the offender, as who would say, wee ought to obey the commandement of God +and resist the diuel with al our force. But to returne to our purpose, the +pilgrimes during their abode there goe to visite these three pillers, +throwing away the little stones which before they gathered, whiles they +repeat the same words which they say, that Ismael said to the diuell, when +he withstoode him. From hence halfe a mile is a mountaine, whither Abraham +went to sacrifice his sonne, as is abouesaid. In this mountaine is a great +den whither the pilgrims resort to make their prayers, and there is a great +stone naturally separated in the midst; and they say, that Ismael, while +his father Abraham was busie about the sacrifice, tooke the knife in hand +to prooue how it would cut, and making triall diuided the stone in two +parts. The fiue dayes being expired, the captaine ariseth with all the +Carouan, and returneth againe to Mecca, where they remaine other fiue +dayes. And while these rest, we will treat of the city and port of Grida +vpon the Red Sea. + + +Of Grida. + +[Grida a port neere Mecca.] Therefore wee say that from Mecca to Grida they +make two small dayes iourney: and because in those places it is ill +traueiling in the day-time by reason of the great heat of the Sunne, +therefore they depart in the euening from Mecca, and in the morning before +Sunne-rising they are arriued halfe way, where there certaine habitations +well furnished, and good Innes to lodge in, but especially women ynough +which voluntarily bestowe their almes vpon the poore pilgrims: likewise +departing the next euening, the morning after, they come vnto Grida. This +citie is founded vpon the Red Sea banke, enuironed with wals and towers to +the land-ward, but through continuance of time almost consumed and wasted: +on the side to seaward it stands vnwalled. Grida hath three gates, one on +eche side, and the thirde in the midst towarde the lande, which is called +the port of Mecca, neere vnto which are 6. or 7. Turks vpon the old towers +for guard thereof with foure faulcons vpon one of the corners of the city +to the land-ward. Also to sea-ward where the wall ioyneth with the water, +there is lately made a fort like vnto a bulwarke, where they haue planted +25 pieces of the best ordinance that might be had, which are very well kept +and guarded. More outward towards the sea vpon the farthest olde tower are +other fiue good pieces with 30 men to guard them. [Sidenote: The Portugals +greatly feared in the Red Sea.] On the other side of the city at the end of +the wall there is lately builded a bulwarke strong and well guarded by a +Saniaccho with 150 Turks wel prouided with ordinance and all other +necessaries and munition, and all these fortifyings are for none other +cause then for feare and suspition of the Portugals. And if the port were +good this were in vaine: but the port cannot be worse nor more dangerous; +being all full of rocks and sands, in such wise, that the ships cannot come +neere, but perforce ride at the least two miles off. [Sidenote: Forty or +fifty rich ships arriue yeerely at Grida.] At this port arriue euery yeere +forty or fifty great shippes laden with spices and other rich marchandize +which yeeld in custome 150000 ducats, the halfe whereof goeth vnto the +Grand Signior, and the other halfe to the Serifo. And because there is none +other thing worthy mention in Grida we wil returne to our Carouan which +hath almost rested enough. + + +Of their going to Medina. + +The Carouan departeth for Medina returning the same way they came vnto +Bedrihonem abouesayd, where they leaue their ordinance and other cariages, +whereof they haue no need, with the pilgrims which haue seene Medina +aforetime, and desire not to see it againe, but stay in that place, +expecting the carouan, and resting vntill the carouan go from Bedrihonem to +Medina, where they alwayes finde goodly habitations, with abundance of +sweet waters, and dates enough, and being within foureteene miles of Medina +they come vnto a great plaine called by them Iabel el salema, that is to +say, the mountaine of health, from which they begin to descry the citie and +tombe of Mahomet, at which sight they light from their horses in token of +reuerence. And being ascended vp the sayd mountaine with shouting which +pierceth the skies they say, Sala tuua salema Alaccha Iarah sul Allah. Sala +tuua Salema Alaccha Ianabi Allah, Sala tuua Salema Allaccha Iahabit Allah: +which words in the Arabian tongue signifie: Prayer and health be vnto thee, +oh prophet of God: prayer and health be vpon thee, oh beloued of God. And +hauing pronounced this salutacion, they proceed on their iourney, so that +they lodge that night within three miles of Medina: and the next morning +the captaine of the pilgrimage ariseth, and proceeding towards the city, +and drawing neere, there commeth the gouernour vnder the Serifo, +accompanied with his people to receiue the Carouan, hauing pitched their +tents in the midst of a goodly field where they lodge. + + +Of Medina. + +Medina is a little city of great antiquity, containing in circuit not aboue +two miles, hauing therein but one castle, which is olde and weake, guarded +by an Aga with fifty pieces of artillery, but not very good. The houses +thereof are faire and well situated, built of lime and stone, and in the +midst of the city stands a fouresquare Mosquita, not so great as that of +Mecca, but more goodly, rich, and sumptuous in building. Within the same in +a corner thereof is a tombe built vpon foure pillers with a vault, as if it +were vnder a pauement, which bindeth all the foure pillers together. The +tombe is so high, that it farre exceedeth in heighth the Mosquita, being +couered with lead, and the top all inamelled with golde, with an halfe +moone vpon the top: and within the pauement it is all very artificially +wrought with golde. Below there are round about very great staires of yron +ascending vp vntill the midst of the pillers, and in the very midst thereof +is buried the body of Mahomet, and not in a chest of yron cleauing to the +adamant, as many affirme that know not the trueth thereof. Moreouer, ouer +the body they haue built a tombe of speckled stone a brace and a halfe +high, [Marginal note: Or, a fathom.] and ouer the same another of Legmame +fouresquare in maner of a pyramis. After this, round about the sepulture +there hangeth a curtaine of silke, which letteth the sight of those without +that they cannot see the sepulture. Beyond this in the same Mosquita are +other two sepulchres couered with greene cloth, and in the one of them is +buried Fatma the daughter of Mahomet, and Alli is buried in the other, who +was the husband of the sayd Fatma. The attendants vpon these sepulchres are +fifty eunuches white and tawny, neither is it granted to any of them to +enter within the tombe, sauing to three white eunuches the oldest and best +of credit; vnto whom it is lawfull to enter but twise in the day, to light +the lamps, and to doe other seruices. All the other eunuchs attend without +to the seruice of the Mosquita, and the other two sepulchres of Fatma, and +Alli, where euery one may go and touch at his pleasure, and take of the +earth for deuotion, as many do. + + +Of things without the City. + +Without the city and on euery side are most faire gardens, with many +fountaines of most sweet water, infinite pondes, abundance of fruit, with +much honest liuing, so that this place is very pleasant and delightfull. +This city hath three gates, one of which is an hospitall caused to be built +by Cassachi, called the Rosel who was wife to Sultan Solimam grandfather to +this emperour. The sayd Hospitall hath nought els woorthy mention, saue +that it is fairely built, and hath large reuenues belonging thereunto, and +nourisheth many poore people. A mile from the city are certaine houses +whereof they affirme one to be the same, where Mahumet in his lifetime +dwelt. This house hath on euery side very many faire date trees, amongst +which there are two which grow out of one stocke exceeding high, and these, +they say, their Prophet graffed with his owne hand: the fruit thereof is +alwayes sent to Constantinople, to be presented vnto the Grand Signior, and +is sayd to be that blessed fruit of the Prophet. Nere vnto the date trees +is a faire fountaine of cleere and sweet water, the which by a conduct pipe +is brought into the city of Medina. Also there is a little Mosquita, +wherein three places are counted holy, and greatly reuerenced: the first +they affirme, that their Prophet made his first prayer in, after he knew +God: the second is that whither he went when he would see the holy house of +Abraham, where when he sate down to that intent, they say the mountaines +opened from toppe to bottome to shew him the house, and after closed againe +as before: the third holy place is in the midst of the sayd Mosquita, where +is a tombe made of lime and stone fouresquare, and full of sand, wherein, +they say, was buried that blessed camel which Mahumet was alwayes woont to +ride vpon. On the other side of the city are other tombes of holy +Mahumetans, and euery one or them hath a tombe built vpon foure pillers, +amongst which three were the companions of Mahumet, to wit, Abubacar; +Ottoman, and Omar; all which are visited of the pilgrims as holy places. + + +The offering of the vestures vnto the sepulchres. + +The Carouan being come to Medina two houres before day, and resting there +till the euening, the captaine then with his company and other pilgrims +setteth forward, with the greatest pompe possible: and taking with him the +vesture which is made in maner of a pyramis, with many other of golde and +silke, departeth, going thorow the midst of the city, vntill he come to the +Mosquita, where hauing praied, he presenteth vnto the tombe of his prophet +(where the eunuchs receiuing hands are ready) the vesture for the sayd +tombe: and certaine eunuchs entring in take away the old vesture, and lay +on the new, burning the olde one, and diuiding the golde thereof into +equall portions. After this are presented other vestures for the ornament +of the Mosquita. Also the people without deliuer vnto the eunuchs ech man +somewhat to touch the tombe therewith, which they keepe as a relique with +great deuotion. This ceremony being ended, the captaine resteth in Medina +two dayes, to the end the pilgrims may finish their deuotion and +ceremonies: and after they depart to Iambor. A good dayes iourney thence is +a steepe mountaine, ouer which is no passage, sauing by one narrow path +called Demir Capi, which was in times past called the yron gate. Of this +gate the Mahumetans say, that Ally the companion and sonne in law of +Mahumet, being here pursued by many Christians, and comming vnto this +mountaine, not seeing any way whereby to flee, drew out his sword, and +striking the said mountaine, diuided it in sunder, and passing thorow saued +his life on the other side. Moreouer, this Alli among the Persians is had +in greater reuerence than Mahumet, who affirme, that the sayd Alli hath +done greater things and more miraculous than Mahumet, and therefore they +esteeme him for God almighty his fellow. But to returne to our matter, the +captaine with the carouan within two dayes after returneth for Cairo, and +comming to Ezlem, findeth there a captaine with threescore horses come +thither to bring refreshments to the said captaine of the pilgrimage, as +also to sell vnto the pilgrims some victuals. From thence they set forward, +and comming to Birca within two leagues of Cairo, there is the master of +the house of the Bassha of Cairo with all his horsemen come thither to +receiue him with a sumptuous and costly banket made at the cost of the +Basha for the captaine and his retinue, who after he is well refreshed +departeth toward the castle of Cairo to salute the Basha, who receiuing him +with great ioy and gladnesse in token of good wil presenteth him with a +garment of cloth of golde very rich: and the captaine taking the Alcaron +out of the chest presenteth it to the Basha, who hauing kissed it, +commandeth to lay it vp againe. Some there are which affirme, that being +arriued at Cairo, they kill that goodly camell which caried the Alcaron, +and eate him; which is nothing so: for they are so superstitious to the +contrary, that to gaine all the world they would not kill him. But if by +casuality he should die, in this case happy and blessed they thinke +themselues, which can get a morsell to eat. And thus much concerning the +voyage of the captaine of the carouan of Cairo. + + * * * * * + +The voyage and trauell of M. Cæsar Fredericke, Marchant of Venice, into the + East India, and beyond the Indies. Wherein are conteined the customes and + rites of those countries, the merchandises and commodities, as well of + golde and siluer, as spices, drugges, pearles, and other iewels: + translated out of Italian by M. Thomas Hickocke. + +Cæsare Fredericke to the Reader. + +[Sidenote: Cæsare Fredericke trauelled eighteene yeeres in the East +Indies.] I hauing (gentle Reader) for the space of eighteene yeeres +continually coasted and trauelled, as it were, all the East Indies, and +many other countreys beyond the Indies, wherein I haue had both good and +ill successe in my trauels: and hauing seene and vnderstood many things +woorthy the noting, and to be knowen to all the world, the which were neuer +as yet written of any: I thought it good (seeing the Almighty had giuen me +grace, after so long perils in passing such a long voyage to returne into +mine owne countrey, the noble city of Venice) I say, I thought it good, as +briefly as I could, to write and set forth this voyage made by me, with the +maruellous things I haue seene in my trauels in the Indies: The mighty +Princes that gouerne those countreys, their religion and faith that they +haue, the rites and customes which they vse, and liue by, of the diuers +successe that happened vnto me, and how many of these countreys are +abounding with spices, drugs, and iewels, giuing also profitable +aduertisement to all those that haue a desire to make such a voyage. And +because that the whole world may more commodiously reioyce at this my +trauell, I haue caused it to be printed in this order: and now I present it +vnto you (gentle and louing Readers) to whom for the varieties of things +heerein contented, I hope that it shall be with great delight receiued. And +thus God of his goodnesse keepe you. + + +A voyage to the East Indies, and beyond the Indies, &c. + +[Sidenote: The authours going from Venice to Cyprus and Tripoly.] In the +yere of our Lord God 1653, I Cæsar Fredericke being in Venice, and very +desirous to see the East parts of the world, shipped my selfe in a shippe +called the Gradaige of Venice, with certaine marchandise, gouerned by M. +Iacomo Vatica, which was bound to Cyprus with his ship, with whom I went: +and when we were arriued in Cyprus, I left that ship, and went in a lesser +to Tripoly in Soria, where I stayed a while. Afterward, I tooke my iourney +to Alepo, and there I acquainted my selfe with marchants of Armenia, and +Moores, that were marchants, and consorted to go with them to Ormus, and +wee departed from Alepo, and in two dayes iourney and a halfe, we came to a +city called Bir. + + +Of the city called Bir. + +Bir is a small city very scarse of all maner of victuals, and nere vnto the +walles of the city runneth the riuer of Euphrates. [Sidenote: The river +Euphrates.] In this city the marchants diuide themselues into companies, +according to their merchandise that they haue, and there either they buy or +make a boat to carry them and their goods to Babylon downe the riuer +Euphrates, with charge of a master and mariners to conduct the boat in the +voyage: these boats are in a maner flat bottomed, yet they be very strong: +and for all that they are so strong, they will serue but for one voyage. +They are made according to the sholdnesse of the riuer, because that the +riuer is in many places full of great stones, which greatly hinder and +trouble those that goe downe the riuer. These boats serue but for one +voyage downe the riuer vnto a village called Feluchia, because it is +impossible to bring them vp the riuer backe againe. [Sidenote: Feluchia a +small city on Euphrates.] At Feluchia the marchants plucke their boats in +pieces, or else sell them for a small price, for that at Bir they cost the +marchants forty or fifty chickens a piece, and they sell them at Feluchia +for seuen or eight chickens a piece, because that when the marchants +returne from Babylon backe againe, if they haue marchandise or goods that +oweth custome, then they make their returne in forty dayes thorow the +wildernesse, passing that way with a great deale lesser charges then the +other way. [Sidenote: Mosul.] And if they haue not marchandise that oweth +custome, then they goe by the way of Mosul, where it costeth them great +charges both the Carouan and company. From Bir where the marchants imbarke +themselues to Feluchia ouer agains Babylon, if the riuer haue good store of +water, they shall make their voyage in fifteene or eighteene dayes downe +the riuer, and if the water be lowe, and it hath not rained, then it is +much trouble, and it will be forty or fifty dayes journey downe, because +that when the barks strike on the stones that be in the riuer, then they +must vnlade them, which is great trouble, and then lade them againe when +they haue mended them: therefore it is not necessary, neither doe the +marchants go with one boat alone, but with two or three, that if one boat +split and be lost with striking on the sholdes, they may haue another ready +to take in their goods, vntil such time as they haue mended the broken +boat, and if they draw the broken boat on land to mend her, it is hard to +defend her in the night from the great multitude of Arabians that will come +downe there to robbe you: [Sidenote: The Arabian theeues are in number like +to Ants.] and in the riuers euery night, when you make fast your boat to +the banckeside, you must keepe good watch against the Arabians which are +theeues in number like to ants, yet when they come to robbe, they will not +kill, but steale and run away. Harquebuzes are very good weapons against +them, for that they stand greatly in feare of the shot. And as you passe +the riuer Euphrates from Bir to Feluchia, there are certein places which +you must passe by, where you pay custome certaine medines vpon a bale, +which custome is belonging to the sonne of Aborise king of the Arabians and +of the desert, who hath certaine cities and villages on the riuer +Euphrates. + + +Feluchia and Babylon. + +[Sidenote: The olde Babylon hath great trade with marchants still.] +Feluchia is a village where they that come from Bir doe vnbarke themselues +and vnlade their goods, and it is distant from Babylon a dayes iourney and +an halfe by land: Babylon is no great city but it is very populous, and of +great trade of strangers because it is a great thorowfare for Persia, +Turkia, and Arabia: and very often times there goe out from thence Carouans +into diuers countreys: and the city is very copious of victuals, which +comme out of Armenia downe the riuer of Tygris, on certaine Zattares or +Raffes made of blowen hides or skinnes called Vtrij. This riuer Tygris +doeth wash the walles of the city. These Raffes are bound fast together, +and then they lay boards on the aforesayd blowen skinnes, and on the boards +they lade the commodities, and so come they to Babylon, where they vnlade +them, and being vnladen, they let out the winde out of the skinnes, and +lade them on cammels to make another voyage. This city of Babylon is +situate in the kingdome of Persia, but now gouerned by the Turks. On the +other side of the riuer towards Arabia, ouer against the city, there is a +faire place or towne, and in it a faire Bazarro for marchants, with very +many lodgings, where the greatest part of the marchants strangers which +come to Babylon do lie with their marchandize. [Sidenote: A bridge made of +boats.] The passing ouer Tygris from Babylon to this Borough is by a long +bridge made of boates chained together with great chaines: prouided, that +when the riuer waxeth great with the abundance of raine that falleth, then +they open the bridge in the middle, where the one halfe of the bridge +falleth to the walles of Babylon, and the other to the brinks of this +Borough, on the other side of the riuer: and as long as the bridge is open, +they passe the riuer in small boats with great danger, because of the +smalnesse of the boats, and the ouerlading of them, that with the +fiercenesse of the streame they be ouerthrowen, or els the streame doth +cary them away, so that by this meanes, many people are lost and drowned: +this thing by proofe I haue many times seene. + +Of the tower of Babylon. + +The Tower of Nimrod or Babel is situate on that side of Tygris that Arabia +is, and in a very great plaine distant from Babylon seuen or eight miles: +which tower is ruinated on euery side, and with the falling of it there is +made a great mountaine, so that it hath no forme at all, yet there is a +great part of it standing which is compassed and almost couered with the +aforesayd fallings: this Tower was builded and made of foure square +Brickes, which Brickes were made of earth, and dried in the Sunne in maner +and forme following: first they layed a lay of Brickes, [Footnote: These +bricks be in thicknes six or seuen inches, and a foot and a halfe square.] +then a Mat made of Canes, square as the Brickes, and in stead of lime, they +daubed it with earth: these Mats of Canes are at this time so strong, that +it is a thing woonderfull to beholde, being of such great antiquity: I haue +gone round about it, and haue not found any place where there hath bene any +doore or entrance: it may be in my iudgement in circuit about a mile, and +rather lesse then more. + +This Tower in effect is contrary to all other things which are seene afar +off, for they seeme small, and the more nere a man commeth to them the +bigger they be: but this tower afar off seemeth a very great thing, and the +nerer you come to it the lesser. My iudgment and reason of this is, that +because the Tower is set in a very great plaine, and hath nothing more +about to make any shew sauing the ruines of it which it hath made round +about, and for this respect descrying it a farre off, that piece of the +Tower which yet standeth with the mountaine that is made of the substance +that hath fallen from it, maketh a greater shew then you shall finde +comming neere to it. + + +Babylon and Basora. + +From Babylon I departed for Basora, shipping my selfe in one of the barks +that vse to go in the riuer Tigris from Babylon to Basora, and from Basora +to Babylon: which barks are made after the maner of Fusts or Galliots with +a Speron and a couered poope: they haue no pumpe in them because of the +great abundance of pitch which they haue to pitch them with all: which +pitch they haue in abundance two dayes iourney from Babylon. Nere vnto the +riuer Euphrates, there is a city called Heit, nere vnto which city there is +a great plaine full of pitch, very maruellous to beholde, a thing almost +incredible, that out of a hole [Footnote: This hole where out commeth this +pitch is most true, and the water and pitch runneth into the valley or +Iland where the pitch resteth, and the water runneth into the riuer +Euphrates, and it maketh all the riuer to be as it were brackish with the +smell of pitch and brimstone.] in the earth, which continually throweth out +pitch into the aire with continuall smoake, this pitch is throwen with such +force, that being hot it falleth like as it were sprinckled ouer all the +plaine, in such abundance that the plaine is alwayes full of pitch: the +Mores and Arabians of that place say, that that hole is the mouth of hell: +and in trueth, it is a thing very notable to be marked: and by this pitch +the whole people haue great benefit to pitch their barks, which barks they +call Daneck and Saffin. When the riuer of Tygris is well replenished with +water, you may passe from Babylon to Basora in eight or nine dayes, and +sometimes more and sometimes lesse: we were halfe so much more which is 14 +or 15 daies, because the waters were low: they may saile day and night, and +there are some places in this way where you pay so many medins on a baile: +if the waters be lowe, it is 18 dayes iourney. + + +Basora. + +[Sidenote: Zizarij an ancient people.] Basora is a city of the Arabians, +which of olde time was gouerned by those Arabians called Zizarij, but now +it is gouerned by the great Turke where he keepeth an army to his great +charges. + +The Arabians called Zizarij haue the possession of a great countrey, and +cannot be ouercome by the Turke, because that the sea hath deuided their +countrey into an Iland by channels with the ebbing and flowing of the sea, +and for that cause the Turke cannot bring an army against them, neither by +sea nor by land, and another reason is, the inhabitants of that Iland are +very strong and warlike men. [Sidenote: At the castle of Corna the riuer +Euphrates and Tygris do meet.] A dayes iourney before you come to Basora, +you shall haue a little castle or fort, which is set on that point of the +land where the riuers of Euphrates and Tygris meet together, and the castle +is called Corna: at this point, the two riuers make a monstrous great +riuer, that runneth into the sea, which is called the gulfe of Persia, +which is towards the South: Basora is distant from the sea fifteene miles, +and it is a city of great trade of spices and drugges which come from +Ormus. Also there is a great store of corne, Rice, and Dates, which the +countrey doth yeeld. [Sidenote: Ormus is the barrenest Iland in all the +world.] I shipped my selfe in Basora to go for Ormus, and so we sailed, +thorow the Persian sea six hundred miles, which is the distance from Basora +to Ormus, and we sailed in small ships made of boards, bound together with +small cords or ropes, and in stead of calking they lay betweene euery board +certaine straw which they haue, and so they sowe board and board together, +with the straw betweene, wherethorow there commeth much water, and they are +very dangerous. [Sidenote: Carichij an Iland in the gulfe of Persia.] +Departing from Basora we passed 200 miles with the sea on our right hand, +along the gulfe, vntil at length we arriued at an Iland called Carichij, +fro whence we sailed to Ormus in sight of the Persian shore on the left +side, and on the right side towards Arabia we discouered infinite Ilands. + + +Ormus. + +Ormus [Footnote: Ormus is alwayes replenished with abundance of victuall, +and yet there is none that groweth in the Iland.] is an Iland in circuit +fiue and twenty or thirty miles, and it is the barrenest and most drie +Iland in all the world, because that in it there is nothing to be had, but +salt water, and wood, all other things necessary for mans life are brought +out of Persia twelue miles off, and out of other Ilands neere thereunto +adioyning, in such abundance and quantity, that the city is alwayes +replenished with all maner of store: there is standing neere vnto the +waters side a very faire castell, in the which the captaine of the king of +Portugall is alwayes resident with a good band of Portugalles, and before +this castell is a very faire prospect: in the city dwell the maried men, +souldiers and marchants of euery nation, amongst whom there are Moores and +Gentiles. [Sidenote: Great trade of merchandise in Ormus.] In this city +there is very great trade for all sorts of spices, drugges, silke, cloth of +silke, brocardo, and diuers other sorts of marchandise come out of Persia: +and amongst all other trades of marchandise, the trade of Horses is very +great there, which they carry from thence into the Indies. This Iland hath +a Moore king of the race of the Persians, who is created and made king by +the Captaine of the castle, in the name of the king of Portugall. At the +creation of this king I was there, and saw the ceremonies that they vse in +it, which are as followeth. The olde King being dead, the Captaine of the +Portugals chuseth another of the blood royall, and maketh this election in +the castle with great ceremonies, and when hee is elected, the Captaine +sweareth him to be true and faithfull to the King of Portugall, as his Lord +and Gouernour, and then he giueth him the Scepter regall. After this with +great feasting and pompe, and with great company, he is brought into the +royall palace in the city. This King keepeth a good traine, and hath +sufficient reuenues to maintaine himselfe without troubling of any, because +the Captaine of the castle doth mainteine and defend his right, and when +that the Captaine and he ride together, he is honoured as a king, yet be +cannot ride abroad with his traine, without the consent of the Captaine +first had: it behooueth them to doe this, and it is necessary, because of +the great trade that is in the city: their proper language is the Persian +tongue. There I shipped my selfe to goe for Goa, a city in the Indies, in a +shippe that had fourescore horses in her. [Sidenote: A priuilege for +Marchants.] This is to aduertise those Marchants that go from Ormus to Goa +to shippe themselues in those shippes that carry horses, because euery +shippe that carrieth twenty horses and vpwards is priuileged, that all the +marchandise whatsoeuer they carry shall pay no custome, whereas the shippes +that carry no horses are bound to pay eight per cento of all goods they +bring. + + +Goa, Diu, and Cambaia. + +Goa is the principall city that the Portugals haue in the Indies, where is +resident the Viceroy with his Court and ministers of the King of Portugall. +From Ormus to Goa is nine hundred foure score and ten miles distance, in +which passage the first city that you come to in the Indies, is called Diu, +[Footnote: Off South extremity of Kathiawar Peninsula, Bombay Presidency.] +and is situate in a little Iland in the kingdome of Cambaia, which is the +greatest strength that the Portugals haue in all the Indies, yet a small +city, but of great trade, because there they lade very many great ships for +the straights of Mecca and Ormus with merchandise, and these shippes belong +to the Moores and Christians, but the Moores can not trade neither saile +into those seas without the licence of the Viceroy of the King of +Portugall, otherwise they are taken and made good prises. The marchandise +that they lade these ships withall commeth from Cambaietta a port in the +kingdome of Cambaia, which they bring from thence in small barks, because +there can no great shippes come thither, by reason of the sholdnesse of the +water thereabouts, and these sholds are an hundred or fourescore miles +about in a straight or gulfe, which they call Macareo, which is as much as +to say, as a race of a tide, because the waters there run out of that place +without measure, so that there is no place like to it, vnlesse it be in the +kingdome of Pegu, where there is another Macareo, where the waters run out +with more force than these doe. The principall city in Cambaia is called +Amadauar, it is a dayes iourney and an halfe from Cambaietta, it is a very +great city and very populous, and for a city of the Gentiles it is very +well made and builded with faire houses and large streets, with a faire +place in it with many shippes, and in shew like to Cairo, but not so great: +also Cambaietta is situate on the seas side, and is a very faire city. The +time that I was there, the city was in great calamity and scarsenesse, so +that I haue seene the men of the countrey that were Gentiles take their +children, their sonnes and their daughters, and haue desired the Portugals +to buy them, and I haue seene them sold for eight or ten larines a piece, +which may be of our money x.s. or xiii.s. iiii.d. For all this if I had not +seene it, I could not haue beleeued that there should be such a trade at +Cambaietta as there is: for in the time of euery new Moone and euery full +Moone, the small barks (innumerable) come in and out, for at those times of +the Moone the tides and waters are higher then at other times they be. +These barkes be laden with all sorts of spices, with silke of China, with +Sandols, with Elephants teeth, Veluets of Vercini, great quantity of +Pannina, which commeth from Mecca, Chickinos which be pieces of golde +woorth seuen shillings a piece sterling, with money, and with diuers sorts +of other marchandize. Also these barks lade out, as it were, an infinite +quantity of cloth made of Bumbast of all sorts, as white stamped and +painted, with great quantity of Indico, dried ginger and conserued, +Myrabolans drie and condite, Boraso in paste, great store of sugar, great +quantity of Cotton, abundance of Opium, Assa Fetida, Puchio, with many +other sorts of drugges, turbants made in Diu, great stones like to +Corneolaes, Granats, Agats, Diaspry, Calcidonij, Hematists, and some kinde +of naturall diamonds. There is in the city of Cambaietta an order, but no +man is bound to keepe it, but they that will; but all the Portugall +marchants keepe it, the which is this. There are in this city certain +Brokers which are Gentiles and of great authority, and haue euery one of +them fifteene or twenty seruants, and the Marchants that vse that countrey +haue their Brokers, with which they be serued: and they that haue not bene +there are informed by their friends of the order, and of what Broker they +shall be serued. [Sidenote: Marchants that trauell to the Indies must cary +their prouision of houshold with them.] Now euery fifteene dayes (as +abouesayd) that the fleet of small shippes entreth into the port, the +Brokers come to the water side, and these Marchants assoone as they are +come on land, do giue the cargason of all their goods to that Broker that +they will haue to do their businesse for them, with the marks of all the +fardles and packs they haue; and the marchant hauing taken on land all his +furniture for his house, because it is needful that the Marchants that +trade to the Indies carry prouision of housholde with them, because that in +euery place where they come they must haue a new house, the Broker that +hath receiued his cargason, commandeth his seruants to carry the Marchants +furniture for his house home, and load it on some cart, and carry it into +the city, where the Brokers haue diuers empty houses meet for the lodging +of Marchants, furnished onely with bedsteads, tables, chaires, and empty +iarres for water: then the Broker sayth to the Marchant, Goe and repose +your selfe, and take your rest in the city. The Broker tarrieth at the +water side with the cargason, and causeth all his goods to be discharged +out of the ship, and payeth the custome, and causeth it to be brought into +the house where the marchant lieth, the Marchant not knowing any thing +thereof, neither custome, nor charges. These goods being brought to this +passe into the house of the Marchant, the Broker demandeth of the Marchant +if he haue any desire to sell his goods or marchandise, at the prises that +such wares are worth at that present time? And if he hath a desire to sell +his goods presently, then at that instant the Broker selleth them away. +After this the Broker sayth to the Marchant, you haue so much of euery sort +of marchandise neat and cleare of euery charge, and so much ready money. +And if the Marchant will employ his money in other commodities, then the +Broker telleth him that such and such commodities will cost so much, put +aboord without any maner of charges. The Marchant vnderstanding the effect, +maketh his account; and if he thinke to buy or sell at the prices currant, +he giueth order to make his marchandise away: and if he hath commodity for +20000 dukets, all shalbe bartred or solde away in fifteene dayes without +any care or trouble: and when as the Marchant thinketh that he cannot sell +his goods at the prise currant, he may tary as long as he will, but they +cannot be solde by any man but by that Broker that hath taken them on land +and payed the custome: and purchance tarying sometimes for sale of their +commodity, they make good profit, and sometimes losse: but those +marchandise that come not ordinarily euery fifteene dayes, in tarying for +the sale of them, there is great profit. [Sidenote: Great store of men of +warre and rouers on the coast of Cambaia.] The barks that lade in +Cambaietta go for Diu to lade the ships that go from thence for the +streights of Mecca and Ormus, and some go to Chaul and Goa: and these ships +be very well appointed, or els are guarded by the Armada of the Portugals, +for that there are many Corsaires or Pyrats which goe coursing alongst that +coast, robbing and spoiling: and for feare of these theeues there is no +safe sailing in those seas, but with ships very well appointed and armed, +or els with the fleet of the Portugals, as is aforesayd. In fine the +kingdome of Cambaia is a place of great trade, and hath much doings and +traffique with all men, although hitherto it hath bene in the hands of +tyrants, because that at 75 yeeres of age the true king being at the +assault of Diu, was there slaine: whose name Sultan Badu. At that time +foure or fiue captaines of the army diuided the kingdome amongst +themselues, and euery one of them shewed in his countrey what tyranny he +could: but twelue yeeres ago the great Mogul a Moore king of Agra and +Delly, forty dayes iourny within the land of Amadauar, became the gouernour +of all the kingdome of Cambaia without any resistance, because he being of +great power and force, deuising which way to enter the land with his +people, there was not any man that would make him any resistance, although +they were tyrants and a beastly people, they were soone brought vnder +obedience. [Sidenote: A maruellous fond delight in women.] During the time +I dwelt in Cambaietta I saw very maruellous things: there were an infinite +number of artificers that made bracelets called Mannij, or bracelets of +elephants teeth, of diuers colours, for the women of the Gentiles, which +haue their armes full decked with them. And in this occupation there are +spent euery yeere many thousands of crownes: the reason whereof is this, +that when there dieth any whatsoeuer of their kindred, then in signe and +token of mourning and sorrow, they breake all their bracelets from their +armes, and presently they go and buy new againe, because that they had +rather be without their meat then without their bracelets. + + +Daman. Basan. Tana. + +Hauing passed Diu, I came to the second city that the Portugals haue, +called Daman, situated in the territory of Cambaia, distant from Diu an +hundred and twenty miles: it is no towne of merchandise, saue Rice and +corne, and hath many villages vnder it, where in time of peace the +Portugals take their pleasure, but in time of warre the enemies haue the +spoile of them; in such wise that the Portugals haue little benefit by +them. Next vnto Daman you shall haue Basan, which is a filthy place in +respect of Daman: in this place is Rice, Corne, and Timber to make shippes +and gallies. And a small distance beyond Bassan is a little Iland called +Tana, a place very populous with Portugals, Moores, and Gentiles: these +haue nothing but Rice, there are many makers of Armesie, and weauers of +girdles of wooll and bumbast blacke and redde like to Moocharies. + + +Of the cities of Chaul, and of the Palmer tree. + +Beyond this Iland you shall finde Chaul in the firme land; and they are two +cities, one of the Portugals, and the other of the Moores: that city which +the Portugals haue is situate lower then the other, and gouerneth the mouth +of the harbour, and is very strongly walled: and as it were a mile and an +halfe distant from this is the city of Moores, gouerned by their king +Zamalluco. In the time of warres there cannot any great ships come to the +city of the Moores, because the Portugals with their ordinance will sincke +them, for that they must perforce passe by the castles of the Portugals: +both the cities are ports of the sea, and are great cities, and haue vnto +them great traffique and trade of merchandise, of all sorts of spices, +drugges, silke, cloth of silke, Sandols, Marsine, Versin, Porcelane of +China, Veluets and Scarlets that come from Portugall and from Meca: with +many other sortes of merchandise. There come euery yeere from Cochin, and +from Cananor tenne or fifteene great shippes laden with great Nuts cured, +and with sugar made of the selfe same Nuts called Giagra: the tree whereon +these Nuts doe grow is called the Palmer tree: and thorowout all the +Indies, and especially from this place to Goa there is great abundance of +them, and it is like to the Date tree. In the whole world there is not a +tree more profitable and of more goodnesse then this tree is, neither doe +men reape so much benefit of any other tree as they doe of this, there is +not any part of it but serueth for some vse, and none of it is woorthy to +be burnt. With the timber of this tree they make shippes without the +mixture of any other tree, and with the leaues thereof they make sailes, +and with the fruit thereof, which be a kinde of Nuts, they make wine, and +of the wine they make Sugar and Placetto, which wine they gather in the +spring of the yeere: out of the middle of the tree where continually there +goeth or runneth out white liquour like vnto water, in that time of the +yeere they put a vessel vnder euery tree, and euery euening and morning +they take it away full, and then distilling it with fire it maketh a very +strong liquour: and then they put it into buts, with a quantity of Zibibbo, +white or blacke and in short time it is made a perfect wine. After this +they make of the Nuts great store of oile: of the tree they make great +quantity of boordes and quarters for buildings. Of the barke of this tree +they make cables, ropes, and other furniture for shippes, and, as they say, +these ropes be better then they that are made of Hempe. They make of the +bowes, bedsteds, after the Indies fashion, and Scauasches for merchandise. +The leaues they cut very small, and weaue them, and so make sailes of them, +for all maner of shipping, or els very fine mats. And then the first rinde +of the Nut they stampe, and make thereof perfect Ockam to calke shippes, +great and small: and of the hard barke thereof they make spoones and other +vessels for meat, in such wise that there is no part thereof throwen away +or cast to the fire. When these Mats be greene they are full of an +excellent sweet water to drinke: and if a man be thirsty, with the liquour +of one of the Mats he may satisfie himselfe: and as this Nut ripeneth, the +liquour thereof turneth all to kernell. There goeth out of Chaul for +Mallaca, for the Indies, for Macao, for Portugall, for the coasts of +Melinde, for Ormus, as it were an infinite number and quantity of goods and +merchandise that come out of the kingdome of Cambaia, as cloth of bumbast +white, painted, printed, great quantity of Indico, Opium, Cotton, Silke of +euery sort, great store of Boraso in Paste, great store of Fetida, great +store of yron, corne, and other merchandise. [Sidenote: Great ordinance +made in pieces, and yet seruiceable.] The Moore king Zamalluco is of great +power, as one that at need may command, and hath in his camp, two hundred +thousand men of warre, and hath great store of artillery, some of them made +in pieces, which for their greatnesse can not bee carried to and fro: yet +although they bee made in pieces, they are so commodious that they worke +with them maruellous well, whose shotte is of stone, and there hath bene of +that shot sent vnto the king of Portugall for the rarenes of the thing. The +city where the king Zamalluco hath his being, is within the land of Chaul +seuen or eight dayes iourney, which city is called Abneger. Three score and +tenne miles from Chaul, towards the Indies, is the port of Dabul, an hauen +of the king Zamalluco: from thence to Goa is an hundred and fifty miles. + + +Goa. + +[Sidenote: The chiefe place the Portugals have in the Indies.] Goa is the +principall city that the Portugals haue in the Indies, wherein the Viceroy +with his royall Court is resident, and is in an Iland which may be in +circuit fiue and twenty or thirty miles: and the city with the boroughs is +reasonable bigge, and for a citie of the Indies it is reasonable faire, but +the Iland is farre more fairer: for it is as it were full of goodly +gardens, replenished with diuers trees and with the Palmer trees as is +aforesayd. This city is of great trafique for all sorts of marchandise +which they trade withall in those parts: and the fleet which commeth euery +yeere from Portugall, which are fiue or sixe great shippes that come +directly for Goa, arriue there ordinarily the sixth or tenth of September, +and there they remaine forty or fifty dayes, and from thence they goe to +Cochin, where they lade for Portugall, and often times they lade one shippe +at Goa and the other at Cochin for Portugall. Cochin is distant from Goa +three hundred miles. The city of Goa is situate in the kingdome of Dialcan +a king of the Moores, whose chiefe city is vp in the countrey eight dayes +iourney, and is called Bisapor: the king is of great power, for when I was +in Goa in the yeere of our Lord 1570, this king came to giue assault to +Goa, being encamped neere vnto it by a riuer side with an army of two +hundred thousand men of warre, and he lay at this siege foureteene moneths +in which time there was peace concluded, and as report went amongst his +people, there was great calamity and mortality which bred amongst them in +the time of Winter, and also killed very many elephants. [Sidenote: A very +good sale for horses.] Then in the yeere of our Lord 1567, I went from Goa +to Bezeneger the chiefe city of the king dome of Narsinga eight dayes +iourney from Goa, within the land, in the company of two other merchants +which carried with them three hundred Arabian horses to that king: because +the horses of that countrey are of a small stature, and they pay well for +the Arabian horses: and is requisite that the merchants sell them well, for +that they stand them in great charges to bring them out of Persia to Ormus, +and from Ormus to Goa, where the ship that bringeth twenty horses and +vpwards payeth no custome, neither ship nor goods whatsoeuer; whereas if +they bring no horses, they pay 8 per cento of all their goods: and at the +going out of Goa the horses pay custome, two and forty pagodies for euery +horse, which pagody may be of sterling money sixe shillings eight pence, +they be pieces of golde of that value. So that the Arabian horses are of +great value in those countreys, as 300, 400, 500 duckets a horse, and to +1000 duckets a horse. + + +Bezeneger. + +The city of Bezeneger was sacked in the yeere 1565, by foure kings of the +Moores, which were of great power and might: the names of these foure kings +were these following, the first was called Dialcan, the second Zamaluc, the +third Cotamaluc, and the fourth Viridy: and yet these foure kings were not +able to ouercome the city and the king of Bezeneger, but by treason. The +king of Bezeneger was a Gentile, and had, amongst all other of his +captaines, two which were notable, and they were Moores: and these two +captaines had either of them in charge threescore and ten or fourescore +thousand men. These two captaines being of one religion with the foure +kings which were Moores, wrought meanes with them to betray their owne king +into their hands. [Footnote: A most vnkind and wicked treason against their +prince: this they haue for giuing credit to strangers, rather then to their +owne natiue people.] The king of Bezeneger esteemed not the force of the +foure kings his enemies, but went out of his city to wage battell with them +in the fieldes; and when the armies were ioyned, the battell lasted but a +while not the space of foure houres, because the two traitourous captaines, +in the chiefest of the fight, with their companies turned their faces +against their king, and made such disorder in his armie, that as astonied +they set themselues to flight. Thirty yeeres was this kingdome gouerned by +three brethren which were tyrants, the which keeping the rightful king in +prison, it was their vse euery yeere once to shew him to the people, and +they at their pleasures ruled as they listed. These brethren were three +captaines belonging to the father of the king they kept in prison, which +when he died, left his sonne very yong, and then they tooke the gouernment +to themselues. The chiefest of these three was called Ramaragio, and sate +in the royall throne, and was called the king: the second was called +Temiragio, and he tooke the gouernment on him: the third was called +Bengatre, and he was captaine generall of the army. These three brethren +were in this battell, in the which the chiefest and the last were neuer +heard of quicke nor dead. [Sidenote: The sacking of the city.] Onely +Temiragio fled in the battel, hauing lost one of his eyes: when the newes +came to the city of the ouerthrow in the battell, the wiues and children of +these three tyrants, with their lawfull king (kept prisoner) fled away, +spoiled as they were, and the foure kings of the Moores entred the city +Bezeneger with great triumph, and there they remained sixe moneths, +searching vnder houses and in all places for money and other things that +were hidden, and then they departed to their owne kingdomes because they +were not able to maintaine such a kingdome as that was, so farre distant +from their owne countrey. + +When the kings were departed from Bezeneger, this Temiragio returned to the +city, and then beganne for to repopulate it, and sent word to Goa to the +Merchants, if they had any horses, to bring them to him, and he would pay +well for them, and for this cause the foresayd two Merchants that I went in +company withall, carried those horses that they had to Bezeneger. +[Sidenote: An excellent good policy to intrap men.] Also this Tyrant made +an order or lawe, that if any Merchant had any of the horses that were +taken in the foresayd battell or warres, although they were of his owne +marke, that he would giue as much for them as they would: and besides he +gaue generall safe conduct to all that should bring them. When by this +meanes he saw that there were great store of horses brought thither vnto +him, hee gaue the Merchants faire wordes, vntill such time as he saw they +could bring no more. Then he licenced the Merchants to depart, without +giuing them any thing for their horses, which when the poore men saw, they +were desperate, and as it were mad with sorrow and griefe. + +I rested in Bezeneger seuen moneths; although in one moneth I might haue +discharged all my businesse, for it was necessary to rest there vntill the +wayes were cleere of theeues, which at that time ranged vp and downe. And +in the time I rested there, I saw many strange and beastly deeds done by +the Gentiles. First, when there is any Noble man or woman dead, they burne +their bodies: and if a married man die, his wife must burne herselfe aliue, +for the loue of her husband, and with the body of her husband: so that when +any man dieth, his wife will take a moneths leaue, two or three, or as shee +will, to burne her selfe in, and that day being come, wherein shee ought to +be burnt, that morning shee goeth out of her house very earely, either on +horsebacke or on an eliphant, or else is borne by eight men on a smal +stage: in one of these orders she goeth, being apparelled like to a Bride, +carried round about the City, with her haire downe about her shoulders, +garnished with iewels and flowers, according to the estate of the party, +and they goe with as great ioy as Brides doe in Venice to their nuptials: +shee carrieth in her left hand a looking glasse, and in her right hand an +arrow, and singeth thorow the City as she passeth, and sayth, that she +goeth to sleepe with her deere spowse and husband. [Sidenote: A discription +of the burning place.] She is accompanied with her kindred and friends +vntill it be one or two of the clocke in the afternoone, then they goe out +of the City, and going along the riuers side called Nigondin, which runneth +vnder the walles of the City, vntill they come vnto a place where they vse +to make this burning of women, being widdowes, there is prepared in this +place a great square caue, with a little pinnacle hard by it, foure or fiue +steppes vp: the foresayd caue is full of dried wood. [Sidenote: Feasting +and dancing when they should mourne.] The woman being come thither, +accompanied with a great number of people which come to see the thing, then +they make ready a great banquet, and she that shall be burned eateth with +as great ioy and gladnesse, as though it were her wedding day: and the +feast being ended, then they goe to dancing and singing a certeine time, +according as she will. After this, the woman of her owne accord, commandeth +them to make the fire in the square caue where the drie wood is, and when +it is kindled, they come and certifie her thereof, then presently she +leaueth the feast, and taketh the neerest kinseman of her husband by the +hand, and they both goe together to the banke of the foresayd riuer, where +shee putteth off all her iewels and all her clothes, and giueth them to her +parents or kinsefolke and couering herselfe with a cloth, because she will +not be seene of the people being naked, she throweth herselfe into the +riuer, saying, O wretches, wash away your sinnes. Comming out of the water, +she rowleth herselfe into a yellow cloth of fourteene braces long: and +againe she taketh her husbands kinseman by the hand, and they go both +together vp to the pinnacle of the square caue wherein the fire is made. +When she is on the pinnacle, shee talketh and reasoneth with the people, +recommending vnto them her children and kindred. Before the pinnacle they +vse to set a mat, because they shall not see the fiercenesse of the fire, +yet there are many that will haue them plucked away, shewing therein an +heart not fearefull, and that they are not affrayd of that sight. When this +silly woman hath reasoned with the people a good while to her content, +there is another women that taketh a pot with oile, and sprinckleth it ouer +her head, and with the same she anoynteth all her body, and afterwards +throweth the pot into the fornace, and both the woman and the pot goe +together into the fire, and presently the people that are round about the +fornace throw after her into the caue great pieces of wood, so by this +meanes, with the fire and with the blowes that she hath with the wood +throwen after her, she is quickly dead, and after this there groweth such +sorrow and such lamentation among the people, that all their mirth is +turned into howling and weeping, in such wise, that a man could scarse +beare the hearing of it. [Sidenote: Mourning when they should reioice.] I +haue seene many burnt in this maner, because my house was neere to the gate +where they goe out to the place of burning: and when there dieth any great +man, his wife with all his slaues with whom hee hath had carnall +copulation, burne themselues together with him. Also in this kingdome I +haue seene amongst the base sort of people this vse and order, that the man +being dead, he is carried to the place where they will make his sepulchre, +and setting him as it were vpright, then commeth his wife before him on her +knees, casting her armes about his necke, with imbracing and clasping him, +vntill such time as the Masons haue made a wall round about them, and when +the wall is as high as their neckes, there commeth a man behinde the women +and strangleth her: then when she is dead, the workemen finish the wall +ouer their heads, and so they lie buried both together. Besides these, +there are an infinite number of beastly qualities amongst them, of which I +haue no desire to write. [Sidenote: The cause why the women do so burne +themselues.] I was desirous to know the cause why these women would so +wilfully burne themselues against nature and law, and it was told mee that +this law was of an antient time, to make prouision against the slaughters +which women made of their husbands. For in those dayes before this law was +made, the women for euery little displeasure that their husbands had done +vnto them, would presently poison their husbands, and take other men, and +now by reason of this law they are more faithfull vnto their husbands, and +count their liues as deare as their owne, because that after his death her +owne followeth presently. + +In the yeere of our Lord God 1567, for the ille successe that the people of +Bezeneger had, in that their City was sacked by the foure kings, the king +with his Court went to dwell in a castle eight dayes iourney vp in the land +from Bezenger, called Penegonde. Also sixe dayes iourney from Bezenger, is +the place where they get Diamants: I was not there, but it was tolde me +that it is a great place, compassed with a wall, and that they sell the +earth within the wall, for so much a squadron, and the limits are set how +deepe or how low they shall digge. Those Diamante that are of a certaine +sise and bigger then that sise, are all for the king, it is many yeeres +agone, since they got any there, for the troubles that haue bene in that +kingdome. The first cause of this trouble was, because the sonne of this +Temeragio had put to death the lawfull king which he had in prison, for +which cause the Barons and Noblemen in that kingdome would not acknowledge +him to be their king, and by this meanes there are many kings, and great +diuision in that kingdome, and the city of Bezeneger is not altogether +destroyed, yet the houses stand still, but empty, and there is dwelling in +them nothing, as is reported, but Tygers and other wilde beasts. The +circuit of this city is foure and twentie miles about, and within the +walles are certeine mountaines. The houses stand walled with earth, and +plaine, all sauing the three palaces of the three tyrant brethren, and the +Pagodes which are idole houses: these are made with lime and fine marble. I +haue seene many kings Courts, and yet haue I seene none in greatnesse like +to this of Bezeneger, I say, for the ordes of his palace, for it hath nine +gates or ports. First when you goe into the place where the king did lodge, +there are fiue great ports or gates: these are kept with Captaines and +souldiers: then within these there are foure lesser gates: which are kept +with Porters. Without the first gate there is a little porch, where there +is a Captaine with fiue and twentie souldiers, that keepeth watch and ward +night and day: and within that another, with the like guard, wherethorow +they come to a very faire Court, and at the end of that Court there is +another porch as the first, with the like guard, and within that another +Court. And in this wise are the first fiue gates guarded and kept with +those Captaines: and then the lesser gates within are kept with a guard of +Porters: which gates stand open the greatest part of the night, because the +custome of the Gentiles is to doe their businesse, and make their feasts in +the night, rather then by day. The city is very safe from theeues, for the +Portugall merchants sleepe in the streets, or vnder porches, for the great +heat which is there, and yet they neuer had any harme in the night. At the +end of two monethes, I determined to goe for Goa in the company of two +other Portugall Marchants, which were making ready to depart, with two +palanchines or little litters, which are very commodious for the way, with +eight Falchines which are men hired to cary the palanchines, eight for a +palanchine, foure at a time: they carry them as we vse to carry barrowes. +[Sidenote: Men ride on bullocks and trauell with them on the way.] And I +bought me two bullocks, one of them to ride on, and the other to carry my +victuals and prouision, for in that countrey they ride on bullocks with +pannels, as we terme them, girts and bridles, and they haue a very good +commodious pace. From Bezeneger to Goa in Summer it is eight dayes iourney, +but we went in the midst of Winter, in the moneth of Iuly, and were +fifteene dayes comming to Ancola on the sea coast, so in eight dayes I had +lost my two bullocks: for he that carried my victuals, was weake and could +not goe, the other when I came vnto a riuer where was a little bridge to +passe ouer, I put my bullocke to swimming, and in the middest of the riuer +there was a little Iland, vnto the which my bullocke went, and finding +pasture, there he remained still, and in no wise we could come to him: and +so perforce, I was forced to leaue him, and at that time there was much +raine, and I was forced to go seuen dayes a foot with great paines: and by +great chance I met with Falchines by the way, whom I hired to carry my +clothes and victuals. We had great trouble in our iourney, for that euery +day wee were taken prisoners, by reason of the great dissension in that +kingdome: and euery morning at our departure we must pay rescat foure or +fiue pagies a man. And another trouble wee had as bad as this, that when as +wee came into a new gouernours countrey, as euery day we did, although they +were al tributary to the king of Bezeneger, yet euery one of them stamped a +seueral coine of Copper, so that the money that we tooke this day would not +serue the next: at length, by the helpe of God, we came safe to Ancola, +which is a country of the Queene of Gargopam, tributary to the king of +Bezeneger. [Sidenote: The marchandise that come in and out to Bezeneger +euery yere.] The marchandise that went euery yere from Goa to Bezeneger +were Arabian Horses, Veluets, Damasks, and Sattens, Armesine of Portugall, +and pieces of China, Saffron, and Skarlets: and from Bezeneger they had in +Turky for their commodities, iewels, and Pagodies which be ducats of golde: +[Sidenote: the apparell of those people.] the apparell that they vse in +Bezeneger is Veluet, Satten, Damaske, Scarlet, or white Bumbast cloth, +according, to the estate of the person with long hats on their heads, +called Colae, made of Veluet, Satten, Damaske, or Scarlet, girding +themselues in stead of girdles with some fine white bombast doth: they +haue breeches after the order of the Turks: they weare on their feet plaine +high things called of them Aspergh, and at their eares they haue hanging +great plenty of golde. + +Returning to my voyage, when we were together in Ancola, one of my +companions that had nothing to lose, tooke a guide, and went to Goa, +whither they goe in foure dayes, the other Portugall not being disposed to +go, tarried in Ancola for that Winter. [Sidenote: Their Winter is our +Summer.] The Winter in those parts of the Indies beginneth the fifteenth of +May, and lasteth vnto the end of October: and as we were in Ancola, there +came another Marchant of horses in a palanchine, and two Portugall +souldiers which came from Zeilan, and two cariers of letters, which were +Christians borne in the Indies; all these consorted to goe to Goa together, +and I determined to goe with them, and caused a pallanchine to be made for +me very poorely of Canes; and in one of them Canes I hid priuily all the +iewels I had, and according to the order, I tooke eight Falchines to cary +me: and one day about eleuen of the clocke wee set forwards on our iourney, +and about two of the clocke in the afternoone, as we passed a mountains +which diuideth the territory of Ancola and Dialcan, I being a little +behinde my company was assaulted by eight theeues, foure of them had +swordes and targets, and the other foure had bowes and arrowes. When the +Falchines that carried me vnderstood the noise of the assault, they let the +pallanchine and me fall to the ground, and ranne away and left me alone, +with my clothes wrapped about me: presently the theeues were on my necke +and rifeling me, they stripped me starke naked, and I fained my selfe +sicke, because I would not leaue the pallanchine, and I had made me a +little bedde of my clothes; the theeues sought it very narrowly and +subtilly, and found two pursses that I had, well bound vp together, wherein +I had put my Copper money which I had changed for foure pagodies in Ancola. +The theeues thinking it had beene so many duckats of golde, searched no +further: then they threw all my clothes in a bush, and hied them away, and +as God would haue it, at their departure there fell from them an +handkercher, and when I saw it, I rose from my Pallanchine or couch, and +tooke it vp, and wrapped it together within my Pallanchine. Then these my +Falchines were of so good condition, that they returned to seeke mee, +whereas I thought I should not haue found so much goodnesse in them: +because they were payed their mony aforehand, as is the vse, I had thought +to haue seene them no more. Before their comming I was determined to plucke +the Cane wherein my iewels were hidden, out of my coutch, and to haue made +me a walking staffe to carry in my hand to Goa, thinking that I should haue +gone thither on foot, but by the faithfullness of my Falchines, I was rid +of that trouble, and so in foure dayes they carried me to Goa, in which +time I made hard fare, for the theeues left me neither money, golde, nor +siluer, and that which I did eat was giuen me of my men for Gods sake: and +after at my comming to Goa I payed them for euery thing royally that I had +of them. [Sidenote: Foure small fortes of the Portugals.] From Goa I +departed for Cochin, which is a voyage of three hundred miles, and betweene +these two cities are many holdes of the Portugals, as Onor, Mangalor, +Barzelor, and Cananor. The Holde or Fort that you shall haue from Goa to +Cochin that belongeth to the Portugals is called Onor, which is in the +kingdome of the queene of Battacella, which is tributary to the king of +Bezeneger: there is no trade there, but onely a charge with the Captaine +and company he keepeth there. And passing this place, you shall come to +another small castle of the Portugals called Mangalor, and there is very +small trade but onely for a little Rice: and from thence you goe to a +little fort called Bazelor, there they haue good store of Rice which is +carried to Goa: and from thence you shall goe to a city called Cananor, +which is a harquebush shot distant from the chiefest city that the king of +Cananor hath in his kingdome being a king of the Gentiles: and he and his +are very naughty and malicious people, alwayes hauing delight to be in +warres with the Portugales, and when they are in peace, it is for their +interest to let their merchandize passe: there goeth out of this kingdom of +Cananor, all the Cardamomum, great store of Pepper, Ginger, Honie, ships +laden with great Nuts, great quantitie of Archa, which is a fruit of the +bignesse of Nutmegs, which fruite they eate in all those partes of the +Indies and beyond the Indies, with the leafe of an Herbe which they call +Bettell, the which is like vnto our Iuie leafe, but a litle lesser and +thinner: [Sidenote: Bettel is a very profitable herbe in that countrey.] +they eate it made in plaisters with the lime made of Oistershels, and +thorow the Indies they spend great quantitie of money in this composition, +and it is vsed daily, which thing I would not haue beleeued, if I had not +seene it. The customers get great profite by these Herbes, for that they +haue custome for them. When this people eate and chawe this in their +mouthes, it maketh their spittle to bee red like vnto blood, and they say, +that it maketh a man to haue a very good stomacke and a sweete breath, but +sure in my iudgement they eate it rather to fulfill their filthie lustes, +and of a knauerie, for this Herbe is moyst and hote, and maketh a very +strong expulsion. [Sidenote: Enimies to the king of Portugall.] From +Cananor you go to Cranganor, which is another smal Fort of the Portugales +in the land of the king of Cranganor, which is another king of the +Gentiles, and a countrey of small importance, and of an hundreth and +twentie miles, full of thieues, being vnder the king of Calicut, a king +also of the Gentiles, and a great enemie to the Portugales, which when hee +is alwayes in warres, hee and his countrey is the nest and resting for +stranger theeues, and those bee called Moores of Carposa, because they +weare on their heads long red hats, and these thieues part the spoyles that +they take on the Sea with the king of Calicut, for hee giueth leaue vnto +all that will goe a rouing, liberally to goe, in such wise, that all along +that coast there is such a number of thieues, that there is no sailing in +those Seas but with great ships and very well armed, or els they must go in +company with the army of the Portugals from Cranganor to Cochin is 15. +miles. + + +Cochin. + +[Sidenote: Within Cochin is the kingdom of Pepper.] Cochin is, next vnto +Goa, the chiefest place that the Portugales haue in the Indies, and there +is great trade of Spices, drugges, and all other sortes of merchandize for +the kingdome of Portugale, and there within the land is the kingdome of +Pepper, which Pepper the Portugales lade in their shippes by bulke and not +in sackes: [Marginal note: The Pepper that the Portugals bring, is not so +good as that which goeth for Mecca, which is brought hither by the +streights.] the Pepper that goeth for Portugale is not so good as that +which goeth for Mecca, because that in times past the officers of the king +of Portugale made a contract with the king of Cochin, in the name of the +king of Portugale, for the prizes of Pepper, and by reason of that +agreement betweene them at that time made, the price can neither rise nor +fall, which is a very lowe and base price, and for this cause the villaines +bring it to the Portugales, greene and full of filthe. The Moores of Mecca +that giue a better price, haue it cleane and drie, and better conditioned. +All the Spices and drugs that are brought to Mecca, are stollen from thence +as Contrabanda. Cochin is two cities, one of the Portugales, and another of +the king of Cochin: that of the Portugales is situate neerest vnto the Sea, +and that of the king of Cochin is a mile and a halfe vp higher in the land, +but they are both set on the bankes of one riuer which is very great and of +a good depth of water, which riuer commeth out of the mountaines of the +king of the Pepper, which is a king of the Gentiles, in whose kingdom are +many Christians of saint Thomas order: the king of Cochin is also a king of +the Gentiles and a great faithfull friend to the king of Portugale, and to +those Portugales which are married, and are Citizens in the Citie Cochin of +the Portugales. And by this name of Portugales throughout all the Indies, +they call all the Christians that come out of the West, whether they bee +Italians, Frenchmen, or Almaines, and all they that marrie in Cochin do get +an office according to the trade he is of: [Sidenote: Great priuiledges +that the citizens of Cochin haue.] this they haue by the great priuileges +which the Citizens haue of that city, because there are two principal +commodities that they deale withal in that place, which are these. The +great store of Silke that commeth from China, and the great store of Sugar +which commeth from Bengala: the married Citizens pay not any custome for +these two commodities: for they pay 4. per cento custome to the king of +Cochin, rating their goods at their owne pleasure. Those which are not +married and strangers, pay in Cochin to the king of Portugale eight per +cento of all maner of merchandise. I was in Cochin when the Viceroy of the +king of Portugale wrought what hee coulde to breake the priuilege of the +Citizens, and to make them to pay custome as other did: at which time the +Citizens were glad to waigh their Pepper in the night that they laded the +ships withall that went to Portugale and stole the custome in the night. +The king of Cochin hauing vnderstanding of this, would not suffer any more +Pepper to bee weighed. Then presently after this, the marchants were +licensed to doe as they did before, and there was no more speach of this +matter, nor any wrong done. This king of Cochin is of a small power in +respect of the other kings of the Indies, for hee can make but seuentie +thousand men of armes in his campe: hee hath a great number of Gentlemen +which hee calleth Amochi, and some are called Nairi: these two sorts of men +esteeme not their liues any thing, so that it may be for the honour of +their king, they will thrust themselues forward in euery danger, although +they know they shall die. These men goe naked from the girdle vpwardes, +with a clothe rolled about their thighs, going barefooted, and hauing their +haire very long and rolled vp together on the toppe of their heads, and +alwayes they carrie their Bucklers or Targets with them and their swordes +naked, these Nairi haue their wiues common amongst themselues, and when any +of them goe into the house of any of these women, hee leaueth his sworde +and target at the doore, and the time that hee is there, there dare not any +bee so hardie as to come into that house. The kings children shall not +inherite the kingdome after their father, because they hold this opinion, +that perchance they were not begotten of the king their father, but of some +other man, therfore they accept for their king, one of the sonnes of the +kings sisters, or of some other woman of the blood roial, for that they be +sure, they are of the blood roiall. + +[Sidenote: A very strange thing hardly to be beleeued.] The Nairi and their +wiues vse for a brauerie to make great holes in their eares, and so bigge +and wide, that it is incredible, holding this opinion, that the greater the +holes bee, the more noble they esteeme themselues. I had leaue of one of +them to measure the circumference of one of them with a threed, and within +that circumference I put my arme vp to the shoulder, clothed as it was, so +that in effect they are monstrous great. Thus they doe make them when they +be litle, for then they open the eare, and hang a piece of gold or lead +thereat, and within the opening, in the whole they put a certaine leafe +that they haue for that purpose, which maketh the hole so great. They lade +ships in Cochin for Portugale and for Ormus, but they that goe for Ormus +carrie no Pepper but by Contrabanda, as for Sinamome they easilie get leaue +to carrie that away, for all other Spices and drugs they may liberally +carie them to Ormus or Cambaia, and so all other merchandize which come +from other places, but out of the kingdom of Cochin properly they cary away +with them into Portugale great abundance of Pepper, great quantitie of +Ginger dried and conserued, wild Sinamon, good quantity of Arecca, great +store of Cordage of Cairo, made of the barke of the tree of the great Nut, +and better then that of Hempe, of which they carrie great store into +Portugale. + +[Sidenote: Note the departing of ships from Cochin.] The shippes euery +yeere depart from Cochin to goe for Portugall, on the fift day December, or +the fift day of Ianuary. Nowe to follow my voyage for the Indies: from +Cochin I went to Coulam, distant from Cochin seuentie and two miles, which +Coulam is a small Fort of the king of Portugales, situate in the kingdom of +Coulam, which is a king of the Gentiles, and of small trade: at that place +they lade onely halfe a ship of Pepper, and then she goeth to Cochin to +take in the rest, and from thence to Cao Comori is seuentie and two miles, +and there endeth the coast of the Indies: and alongst this coast, neere to +the water side, and also to Cao Comori, downe to the lowe land of Chialon, +which is about two hundred miles, the people there are as it were all +turned to the Christian faith: there are also Churches of the Friers of S. +Pauls order, which Friers doe very much good in those places in turning the +people, and in conuerting them, and take great paines in instructing them +in the law of Christ. + + +The fishing for Pearles. + +[Sidenote: The order how they fish for pearles.] The Sea that lieth +betweene the coast which descendeth from Cao Comori, to the lowe land of +Chiaoal, and the Iland Zeilan, they call the fishing of Pearles, which +fishing they make euery yeere, beginning in March or Aprill, and it lasteth +fiftie dayes, but they doe not fishe euery yeere in one place, but one +yeere in one place, and another yeere in another place of the same sea. +When the time of this fishing draweth neere, then they send very good +Diuers, that goe to discouer where the greatest heapes of Oisters bee vnder +water, and right agaynst that place where greatest store of Oisters bee, +there they make or plant a village with houses and a Bazaro, all of stone, +which standeth as long as the fishing time lasteth, and it is furnished +with all things necessarie, and nowe and then it is neere vnto places that +are inhabited, and other times farre off, according to the place where they +fishe. The Fishermen are all Christians of the countrey, and who so will +may goe to fishing, paying a certaine dutie to the king of Portugall, and +to the Churches of the Friers of Saint Paule, which are in that coast. All +the while that they are fishing, there are three or foure Fustes armed to +defend the Fishermen from Rouers. It was my chance to bee there one time in +my passage, and I saw the order that they vsed in fishing, which is this. +There are three or foure Barkes that make consort together, which are like +to our litle Pilot boates, and a litle lesse, there goe seuen or eight men +in a boate: and I haue seene in a morning a great number of them goe out, +and anker in fifteene or eighteene fadome of water, which is the Ordinarie +depth of all that coast. When they are at anker, they cast a rope into the +Sea, and at the ende of the rope, they make fast a great stone, and then +there is readie a man that hath his nose and his eares well stopped, and +annointed with oyle, and a basket about his necke, or vnder his left arme, +then hee goeth downe by the rope to the bottome of the Sea, and as fast as +he can he filleth the basket, and when it is full, he shaketh the rope, and +his fellowes that are in the Barke hale him vp with the basket: and in such +wise they goe one by one vntill they haue laden their barke with oysters, +and at euening they come to the village, and then euery company maketh +their mountaine or heape of oysters one distant from another, in such wise +that you shall see a great long rowe of mountaines or heapes of oysters, +and they are not touched vntill such time as the fishing bee ended, and at +the ende of the fishing euery companie sitteth round about their mountaine +or heape of oysters, and fall to opening of them, which they may easilie +doe because they bee dead, drie and brittle: and if euery oyster had +pearles in them, it would bee a very good purchase, but there are very many +that haue no pearles in them: when the fishing is ended, then they see +whether it bee a great gathering or a badde: there are certaine expert in +the pearles whom they call Chitini, which set and make the price of pearles +[Marginal note: These pearles are prised according to the caracts which +they weigh, euery caract is 4. graines, and these men that prise hem haue +an instrument of copper with holes in it, which be made by degrees for to +sort the perles withall.] according to their carracts, beautie, and +goodnesse, making foure sortes of them. The first sort bee the round +pearles, and they be called Aia of Portugale, because the Portugales doe +buy them. The second sorte which are not round, are called Aia of Bengala. +The third sort which are not so good as the second, they call Aia of +Canara, that is to say, the kingdome of Bezeneger. The fourth and last +sort, which are the least and worst sort, are called Aia of Cambaia. Thus +the price being set, there are merchants of euery countrey which are readie +with their money in their handes, so that in a fewe dayes all is bought vp +at the prises set according to the goodnesse and caracts of the pearles. + +In this Sea of the fishing of pearles is an Iland called Manar, which is +inhabited by Christians of the countrey which first were Gentiles, and haue +a small hold of the Portugales being situate ouer agaynst Zeilan: and +betweene these two Ilands there is a chanell, but not very big, and hath +but a small depth therein; by reason whereof there cannot any great shippe +passe that way, but small ships, and with the increase of the water which +is at the change or the full of the Moone, and yet for all this they must +vnlade them and put their goods into small vessels to lighten them before +they can passe that way for feare of Sholdes that lie in the chanell, and +after lade them into their shippes to goe for the Indies, and this doe all +small shippes that passe that way, but those shippes that goe for the +Indies Eastwardes, passe by the coast of Coromandel, on the other side by +the land of Chilao which is betweene the firme land and the Iland Manor: +and going from the Indies to the coast of Coromandel, they loose some +shippes, but they bee emptie, because that the shippes that passe that way +discharge their goods at an Iland called Peripatane, and there land their +goods into small flat bottomed boates which drawe litle water, and are +called Tane, and can run ouer euery Shold without either danger or losse of +any thing, for that they tarrie in Peripatane vntill such time as it bee +faire weather. Before they depart to passe the Sholds, the small shippes +and flat bottomed boates goe together in companie, and when they haue +sailed sixe and thirtie miles, they arriue at the place where the Sholdes +are, and at that place the windes blowe so forciblie, that they are forced +to goe thorowe, not hauing any other refuge to saue themselues. The flat +bottomed boates goe safe thorow, where as the small shippes if they misse +the aforesayd chanell, sticke fast on the Sholdes, and by this meanes many +are lost: and comming backe for the Indies, they goe not that way, but +passe by the chanell of Manar as is abouesayd, whose chanell is Oazie, and +if the shippes sticke fast, it is a great chance if there be any danger at +all. The reason why this chanell is not more sure to goe thither, is, +because the windes that raigne or blowe betweene Zeilan and Manar, make the +chanell so shalow with water, that almost there is not any passage. From +Coa Comori to the Iland of Zeilan is 120. miles ouerthwart. + + +Zeilan. [Footnote: Ceylon.] + +Zeilan is an Iland, in my iudgement, a great deale bigger then Cyprus: on +that side towards the Indies lying Westward is the citie called Columba, +which is a hold of the Portugales, but without walles or enimies. It hath +towards the Sea a free port, the awfull king of that Iland is in Colombo, +and is turned Christian, and maintained by the king of Portugall, being +depriued of his kingdome. The king of the Gentiles, to whom this kingdome +did belong, was called Madoni, which had two sonnes, the first named +Barbinas the prince; and the second Ragine. This king by the pollicie of +his yoonger sonne, was depriued of his kingdome, who because hee had +entised and done that which pleased the armie and souldiours, in despight +of his father and brother being prince, vsurped the kingdome, and became a +great warriour. First, this Iland had three kings; the King of Cotta with +his conquered prisoners: the king of Candia, which is a part of that Iland, +and is so called by the name of Candia, which had a reasonable power, and +was a great friend to the Portugals, which sayd that hee liued secretly a +Christian; the third was the king of Gianifampatan. In thirteene yeeres +that this Ragine gouerned this Iland, he became a great tyrant. + +In this Iland there groweth fine Sinamom, great store of Pepper, great +store of Nuttes and Arochoe: there they make great store of Cairo +[Footnote: Cairo is a stuffe that they make rope with, the which is the +barke of a tree.] to make Cordage: it bringeth foorth great store of +Christall Cats eyes, or Ochi de Gati, and they say that they finde there +some Rubies, but I haue sold Rubies well there that I brought with me from +Pegu. I was desirous to see how they gather the Sinamom, or take it from +the tree that it groweth on, and so much the rather, because the time that +I was there, was the season which they gather it in, which was in the +moneth of Aprill, at which time the Portugals were in armes, and in the +field, with the king of the countrey; yet I to satisfie my desire, although +in great danger, tooke a guide with mee and went into a wood three miles +from the Citie, in which wood was great store of Sinamome trees growing +together among other wilde trees; and this Sinamome tree is a small tree, +and not very high, and hath leaues like to our Baie tree. In the moneth of +March or Aprill, when the sappe goeth vp to the toppe of the tree, then +they take the Sinamom from that tree in this wise. [Sidenote: The cutting +and gathering of Sinamom.] They cut the barke of the tree round about in +length from knot to knot, or from ioint to ioint, aboue and belowe, and +then easilie with their handes they take it away, laying it in the Sunne to +drie, and in this wise it is gathered, and yet for all this the tree dieth +not, [Sidenote: A rare thing.] but agaynst the next yeere it will haue a +new barke, and that which is gathered euery yeere is the best Sinamome: for +that which groweth two or three yeares is great, and not so good as the +other is; and in these woods groweth much Pepper. + + +Negapatan. + +From the Iland of Zeilan men vse to goe with small shippes to Negapatan, +within the firme land, and seuentie two miles off is a very great Citie, +and very populous of Portugals and Christians of the countrey, and part +Gentiles: it is a countrey of small trade, neither haue they any trade +there, saue a good quantitie of Rice, and cloth of Bumbast which they carie +into diuers partes: it was a very plentifull countrey of victuals but now +it hath a great deale lesse; and that abundance of victuals caused many +Portugales to goe thither and build houses, and dwell there with small +charge. + +This Citie belongeth to a nobleman of the kingdome of Bezeneger being a +Gentile, neuerthelesse the Portugales and other Christians are well +intreated there, and haue their Churches there with a monasterie of Saint +Francis order, with great deuotion and very well accommodated, with houses +round about: yet for all this, they are amongst tyrants, which alwayes at +their pleasure may doe them some harme, as it happened in the yeere of our +Lord God one thousand fiue hundred, sixtie and fiue: [Sidenote: A foolish +feare of Portugals.] for I remember very well, how that the Nayer, that is +to say, the lord of the citie, sent to the citizens to demaund of them +certaine Arabian horses, and they hauing denied them vnto him, and +gainesayd his demaund, it came to passe that this lord had a desire to see +the Sea, which when the poore citizens vnderstood, they doubted some euill, +to heare a thing which was not woont to bee, they thought that this man +would come to sacke the Citie, and presently they embarked themselues the +best they could with their mooueables, marchandize, iewels, money, and all +that they had, and caused the shippes to put from the shore. When this was +done, as their euill chance would haue it, the next night following, there +came such a great storme that it put all the shippes on land perforce, and +brake them to pieces, and all the goods that came on land and were saued, +were taken from them by the souldiours and armie of this lord which came +downe with him to see the Sea, and were attendant at the Sea side, not +thinking that any such thing would haue happened. + + +Saint Thomas or San Tome. + +[Sidenote: St. Thomas his sepulchre.] From Negapatan following my voyage +towards the East an hundred and fiftie miles, I found the house of blessed +Saint Thomas, which is a Church of great deuotion, and greatly regarded of +the Gentiles for the great miracles they haue heard to haue bene done by +that blessed Apostle: neere vnto this Church the Portugals haue builded +them a Citie in the countrey subiect to the king of Bezeneger, which Citie +although it bee not very great, yet in my iudgement, it is the fairest in +all that part of the Indies: and it hath very faire houses and faire +gardens in vacant places very well accommodated: it hath streetes large and +streight, with many Churches of great deuotion, their houses be set close +one vnto another, with little doores, euery house hath his defence, so that +by that meanes it is of force sufficient to defend the Portugals against +the people of that countrey. The Portugals there haue no other possession +but their gardens and houses that are within the citie: the customes belong +to the king of Bezeneger, which are very small and easie, for that it is a +countrey of great riches and great trade: there come euery yeere two or +three great ships very rich, besides many other small ships: one of the two +great ships goeth for Pegu, and the other for Malacca, laden with fine +Bumbast [Marginal Note: A painted kind of cloth and died of diuers colours +which those people delight much in, and esteeme them of great price.] cloth +of euery sort, painted, which is a rare thing, because those kinde of +clothes shew as they were gilded, with diuers colours, and the more they be +washed, the liuelier the colours will shew. Also there is other cloth of +Bumbast which is wouen with diuers colours, and is of great value: also +they make in Sant Tome great store of red Yarne, which they die with a +roote called Saia, and this colour will neuer waste, but the more it is +washed, the more redder it will shew: they lade this yarne the greatest +part of it for Pegu, because that there they worke and weaue it to make +cloth according to their owne fashion, and with lesser charges. It is a +maruelous thing to them which haue not seene the lading and vnlading of men +and marchandize in S. Tome as they do: it is a place so dangerous, that a +man cannot bee serued with small barkes, neither can they doe their +businesse with the boates of the shippes, because they would be beaten in a +thousand pieces, but they make certaine barkes (of purpose) high, which +they call Masadie, they be made of litle boards; one board being sowed to +another with small cordes, and in this order are they made. And when they +are thus made, and the owners will embarke any thing in them, either men or +goods, they lade them on land, and when they are laden, the Barke-men +thrust the boate with her lading into the streame, and with great speed +they make haste all that they are able to rowe out against the huge waues +of the sea that are on that shore, vntill that they carie them to the +ships: and in like maner they lade these Masadies at the shippes with +merchandise and men. When they come neere the shore, the Barke-men leap out +of the Barke into the Sea to keepe the Barke right that she cast not +athwart the shore, and being kept right, the Suffe of the Sea setteth her +lading dry on land without any hurt or danger, and sometimes there are some +of them that are ouerthrowen, but there can be no great losse, because they +lade but a litle at a time. All the marchandize they lade outwards, they +emball it well with Oxe hides, so that if it take wet, it can haue no great +harme. + +[Sidenote: In the Iland of Banda they lade Nutmegs for there they grow.] In +my voyage, returning in the yeere of our Lord God one thousand, fiue +hundred, sixtie and sixe, I went from Goa vnto Malacca, in a shippe or +Gallion of the king of Portugal, which went vnto Banda for to lade Nutmegs +and Maces: from Goa to Malacca are one thousand eight hundred miles, we +passed without the Iland Zeilan, and went through the chanell of Nicubar, +or els through the chanell of Sombero, which is by the middle of the Iland +of Sumatra, called in olde time Taprobana: [Sidenote: In the Ilands of +Andemaon, they eate one another.] and from Necubar to Pegu is as it were a +rowe or chaine of an infinite number of Ilands, of which many are inhabited +with wilde people, and they call those Ilands the Ilands of Andemaon, and +they call their people sauage or wilde, because they eate one another: also +these Ilands haue warre one with another, for they haue small Barkes, and +with them they take one another, and so eate one another: and if by euil +chance any ship be lost on those Ilands, as many haue bene, there is not +one man of those ships lost there that escapeth vneaten or vnslaine. These +people haue not any acquaintance with any other people, neither haue they +trade with any, but liue onely of such fruites as those Ilands yeeld: and +if any ship come neere vnto that place or coast as they passe that way, as +in my voyage it happened as I came from Malacca through the chanell of +Sombrero, there came two of their Barkes neere vnto our ship laden with +fruite, as with Mouces which wee call Adam apples, with fresh Nuts, and +with a fruite called Inani, which fruite is like to our Turneps, but is +very sweete and good to eate: they would not come into the shippe for any +thing that wee could doe: neither would they take any money for their +fruite, but they would trucke for olde shirtes or pieces of olde linnen +breeches, these ragges they let downe with a rope into their Barke vnto +them, and looke what they thought those things to bee woorth, so much +fruite they would make fast to the rope and let vs hale it in: and it was +told me that at sometimes a man shall haue for an old shirt a good piece of +Amber. + + +Sumatra. + +This Iland of Sumatra is a great Iland and deuided and gouerned by many +kings, and deuided into many chanels, where through there is passage: upon +the headland towardes the West is the kingdom of Assi gouerned by a Moore +king: this king is of great force and strength, as he that beside his great +kingdom, hath many Foists and Gallies. In his kingdom groweth great store +of Pepper, Ginger, Beniamin: he is an vtter enemy to the Portugals, and +hath diuers times bene at Malacca to fight against it, and hath done great +harme to the boroughes thereof, but the citie alway withstood him +valiantly, and with their ordinance did great spoile to his campe. At +length I came to the citie of Malacca. + + +The Citie Malacca. + +Malacca is a Citie of marueilous great trade of all kind of marchandize, +which come from diuers partes, because that all the shippes that saile in +these seas, both great and small, are bound to touch at Malacca to paie +their custome there, although they vnlade nothing at all, as we do at +Elsinor: and if by night they escape away, and pay not their custome, then +they fall into a greater danger after: for if they come into the Indies and +haue not the seale of Malacca, they pay double custome. I haue not passed +further then Malacca towards the East, but that which I wil speake of here +is by good information of them that haue bene there. The sailing from +Malacca towards the East is not common for all men, as to China and Iapan, +and so forwards to go who will, but onely for the king of Portugall and his +nobles, with leaue granted vnto them of the king to make such voiage, or to +the iurisdiction of the captaine of Malacca, where he expecteth to know +what voiages they make from Malacca thither, and these are the kings +voiages, that euery yere there departeth from Malacca 2. gallions of the +kings, one of them goeth to the Moluccos to lade Cloues, and the other +goeth to Banda to lade Nutmegs and Maces. These two gallions are laden for +the king, neither doe they carie any particular mans goods, sauing the +portage of the Mariners and souldiers, and for this cause they are not +voiages for marchants, because that going thither, they shal not haue where +to lade their goods of returne; and besides this, the captaine wil not cary +any marchants for either of these two places. There goe small shippes of +the Moores thither, which come from the coast of Iaua, and change or guild +their commodities in the kingdom of Assa, and these be the Maces, Cloues, +and Nutmegs, which go for the streights of Mecca. The voiages that the king +of Portugall granteth to his nobles are these, of China and Iapan, from +China to Iapan, and from Iapan to China, and from China to the Indies, and +the voyage of Bengala, Maluco, and Sonda, with the lading of fine cloth, +and euery sort of Bumbast cloth. Sonda is an Iland of the Moores neere to +the coast of Iaua, and there they lade pepper for China. [Sidenote: The +ship of drugs, so termed of the Portugals.] The ship that goeth euery yeere +from the Indies to China, is called the ship of Drugs, because she carieth +diuers drugs of Cambaia, but the greatest part of her lading is siluer. +From Malacca to China is eighteene hundred miles: and from China to Iapan +goeth euery yeere a shippe of great importance laden with Silke, which for +returne of their Silke bringeth barres of siluer which they trucke in +China. The distance betweene China and Iapan is foure and twentie hundred +miles, and in this way there are diuers Ilands not very bigge, in which the +Friers of saint Paul, by the helpe of God, make many Christians there like +to themselues. From these Ilands hitherwards the place is not yet +discouered for the great sholdnesse of Sandes that they find. The Portugals +haue made a small citie neere vnto the coast of China called Macao, whose +church and houses are of wood, and it hath a bishoprike, but the customs +belong to the king of China, and they goe and pay the same at a citie +called Canton which is a citie of great importance and very beautifull two +dayes iourney and a halfe from Macao. The people of China are Gentiles, and +are so iealous and fearefull, that they would not haue a stranger to put +his foote within their land: so that when the Portugals go thither to pay +their custome, and to buy their merchandize, they will not consent that +they shall lie or lodge within the citie, but send them foorth into the +suburbes. The countrey of China [Marginal note: China is vnder the +gouernment of the great Tartar.] is neere the kingdom of great Tartria, and +is a very great countrey of the Gentiles and of great importance, which may +be iudged by the rich and precious marchandize that come from thence, then +which I beleeue there are not better nor in greater quantitie, in the whole +world besides. + +First, great store of golde, which they carie to the Indies, made in plates +like to little shippes, and in value three and twentie caracts a peece, +very great aboundance of fine silke, cloth of damaske and taffata, great +quantitie of muske, great quantitie of Occam in barres, great quantitie of +quicksiluer and of Cinaper, great store of Camfora, an infinite quantitie +of Porcellane, made in vessels of diuerse sortes, great quantitie of +painted cloth and squares, infinite store of the rootes of China: and euery +yeere there commeth from China to the Indies, two or three great shippes, +laden with most rich and precious merchandise. [Sidenote: A yeerely Carouan +from Persia to China.] The Rubarbe commeth from thence ouer lande, by the +way of Persia, because that euery yeere there goeth a great Carouan from +Persia to China, which is in going thither sixe moneths. The Carouan +arriueth at a Citie called Lanchin, the place where the king is resident +with his Court. I spake with a Persian that was three yeeres in that citie +of Lanchin, and he tolde me that it was a great Citie and of great +importance. The voiages of Malacca which are in the iurisdiction of the +Captaine of the castle, are these: Euery yeere he sendeth a small shippe to +Timor to lade white Sandols, for all the best commeth from this Iland: +there commeth some also from Solor, but that is not so good: also he +sendeth another small ship euery yere to Cauchin China, to lade there wood +of Aloes, for that all the wood of Aloes commeth from this place, which is +in the firme land neere vnto China, and in that kingdome I could not knowe +how that wood groweth by any meanes. [Sidenote: A market kept aboord of the +ships.] For that the people of the countrey will not suffer the Portugales +to come within the land, but onely for wood and water, and as for all other +things that they wanted, as victuals or marchandise, the people bring that +a boord the ship in small barkes, so that euery day there is a mart kept in +the ship, vntill such time as she be laden: also there goeth another ship +for the said Captaine of Malacca to Sion, to lade Verzino: all these +voiages are for the Captaine of the castle of Malacca, and when he is not +disposed to make these voiages he selleth them to another. + + +The citie of Sion, or Siam. + +[Sidenote: A prince of marueilous strength and power.] Sion was the +imperiall seat, and a great Citie, but in the yeere of our Lord God one +thousand five hundred sixtie and seuen, it was taken by the king of Pegu, +which king made a voyage or came by lande foure moneths iourney with an +armie of men through his lande, and the number of his armie was a million +and foure hundreth thousand men of warre: when hee came to the Citie, he +gaue assault to it, and besieged it one and twentie moneths before he could +winne it, with great losse of his people, this I know, for that I was in +Pegu sixe moneths after his departure, and sawe when that his officers that +were in Pegu, sent fiue hundreth thousand men of warre to furnish the +places of them that were slaine and lost in that assault: yet for all this, +if there had not beene treason against the citie, it had not beene lost: +for on a night there was one of the gates set open, through the which with +great trouble the king gate into the citie, and became gouernour of Sion: +and when the Emperour sawe that he was betrayed, and that his enemie was in +the citie, he poysoned himselfe: and his wiues and children, friends and +noblemen, that were not slaine in the first affront of the entrance into +the citie, were all caried captiues into Pegu, where I was at the comming +home of the king with his triumphs and victorie, which comming home and +returning from the warres was a goodly sight to behold, to see the +Elephants come home in a square, laden with golde, siluer, iewels, and with +Noble men and women that were taken prisoners in that citie. + +Now to returne to my yoyage: I departed from Malacca in a great shippe +which went for Saint Tome, being a Citie situate on the coast of +Coromandel: and because the Captaine of the castles of Malacca had +vnderstanding by aduise that the king of Assi [Marginal note: Or Achem.] +would come with a great armie and power of men against them, therefore vpon +this he would not giue licence that any shippes should depart: Wherefore in +this ship wee departed from thence in the night, without making any +prouision of our water: and wee were in that shippe foure hundreth and odde +men: [Sidenote: The mountaines of Zerzeline.] we departed from thence with +intention to goe to an Iland to take in water, but the windes were so +contrary, that they would not suffer vs to fetch it, so that by this meanes +wee were two and fortie dayes in the sea as it were lost, and we were +driuen too and fro, so that the first lande that we discouered, was beyonde +Saint Tome, more then fiue hundreth miles, which were the mountaines of +Zerzerline, neere vnto the kingdome of Orisa, and so wee came to Orisa with +many sicke, and more that were dead for want of water: and they that were +sicke in foure dayes dyed; and I for the space of a yeere after had my +throat so sore and hoarse, that I could neuer satisfie my thirst in +drinking of water: I iudge the reason of my hoarsenesse to bee with soppes +that I wet in vineger and oyle, wherewith I susteyned my selfe many dayes. +There was not any want of bread nor of wine: but the wines of that countrey +are so hot that being drunke without water they will kill a man: neither +are they able to drinke them: when we beganne to want water, I sawe +certaine Moores that were officers in the ship, that solde a small dish +full for a duckat, after this I sawe one that would haue giuen a barre of +Pepper, which is two quintalles and a halfe, for a litle measure of water, +and he could not haue it. Truely I beleeue that I had died with my slaue, +whom then I had to serue mee, which cost mee verie deare: but to prouide +for the daunger at hand, I solde my slaue for halfe that he was worth, +because that I would saue his drinke that he drunke, to serue my owne +purpose, and to saue my life. + + +Of the kingdome of Orisa, and the riuer Ganges. + +Orisa was a faire kingdome and trustie, through the which a man might haue +gone with golde in his hande without any daunger at all, as long as the +lawefull King reigned which was a Gentile, who continued in the citie +called Catecha, which was within the lande size dayes iourney. This king +loued strangers marueilous well, especially marchants which had traffique +in and out of his kingdome, in such wise that hee would take no custome of +them, neither any other grieuous thing. [Sidenote: The commodities that go +out of Orisa.] Onely the shippe that came thither payde a small thing +according to her portage, and euery yeere in the port of Orisa were laden +fiue and twentie or thirtie ships great and small, with ryce and diuers +sortes of fine white bumbaste cloth, oyle of Zerzeline which they make of a +seed, and it is very good to eate and to fry fish withal, great store of +butter, Lacca, long pepper, Ginger, Mirabolans dry and condite, great store +of cloth of herbes, which is a kinde of silke which groweth amongst the +woods without any labour of man, [Marginal note: This cloth we call Nettle +cloth.] and when the bole thereof is growen round as bigge as an Orenge, +then they take care onely to gather them. About sixteene yeeres past, this +king with his kingdome were destroyed by the king of Patane, which was also +king of the greatest part of Bengala, and when he had got the kingdome, he +set custome there twenty pro cento, as Marchants paide in his kingdome: but +this tyrant enioyed his kingdome but a small time, but was conquered by +another tyrant, which was the great Mogol king of Agra, Delly, and of all +Cambaia, without any resistance. I departed from Orisa to Bengala, to the +harbour Piqueno, which is distant from Orisa towardes the East a hundred +and seuentie miles. [Sidenote: The riuer of Ganges.] They goe as it were +rowing alongst the coast fiftie and foure miles, and then we enter into the +riuer Ganges: from the mouth of this riuer, to a citie called Satagan, +where the marchants gather themselues together with their trade, are a +hundred miles, which they rowe in eighteene houres with the increase of the +water: in which riuer it floweth and ebbeth as it doth in the Thamis, and +when the ebbing water is come, they are not able to rowe against it, by +reason of the swiftnesse of the water, yet their barkes be light and armed +with oares, like to Foistes, yet they cannot preuaile against that streame, +but for refuge must make them fast to the banke of the riuer vntill the +next flowing water, and they call these barkes Bazaras and Patuas: they +rowe as well as a Galliot, or as well as euer I haue seene any. A good +tides rowing before you come to Satagan, you shall haue a place which is +called Buttor, and from thence vpwards the ships doe not goe, because that +vpwardes the riuer is very shallowe, and litle water. Euery yeere at Buttor +they make and vnmake a Village, with houses and shoppes made of strawe, and +with all things necessarie to their vses, and this village standeth as long +as the ships ride there, and till they depart for the Indies, and when they +are departed, euery man goeth to his plot of houses, and there setteth fire +on them, which thing made me to maruaile. For as I passed vp to Satagan, I +sawe this village standing with a great number of people, with an infinite +number of ships and Bazars, and at my returne comming downe with my +Captaine of the last ship, for whom I tarried, I was al amazed to see such +a place so soone razed and burnt, and nothing left but the signe of the +burnt houses. The small ships go to Satagan, and there they lade. + + +Of the citie of Satagan. + +[Sidenote: The commodities that are laden in Satagan.] In the port of +Satagan euery yeere lade thirtie or fiue and thirtie ships great and small, +with rice, cloth of Bombast of diuerse sortes, Lacca, great abundance of +sugar, Mirabolans dried and preserued, long pepper, oyle of Zerzeline, and +many other sorts of marchandise. The citie of Satagan is a reasonable faire +citie for a citie of the Moores, abounding with all things, and was +gouerned by the king of Patane, and now is subiect to the great Mogol. I +was in this kingdome foure moneths, whereas many marchants did buy or +fraight boates for their benefites, and with these barkes they goe vp and +downe the riuer of Ganges to faires, buying their commoditie with a great +aduantage, because that euery day in the weeke they haue a faire, now in +one place, and now in another, and I also hired a barke, and went vp and +downe the riuer and did my businesse, and so in the night I saw many +strange things. The kingdome of Bengala in times past hath bene as it were +in the power of Moores, neuerthelesse there is great store of Gentiles +among them; alwayes whereas I haue spoken of Gentiles, is to be vnderstood +Idolaters, and whereas I speak of Moores I meane Mahomets sect. [Sidenote: +A ceremony of the gentiles when they be dead.] Those people especially that +be within the land doe greatly worship the riuer of Ganges: for when any is +sicke, he is brought out of the countrey to the banke of the riuer, and +there they make him a small cottage of strawe, and euery day they wet him +with that water, whereof there are many that die, and when they are dead, +they make a heape of stickes and boughes and lay the dead bodie thereon, +and putting fire thereunto, they let the bodie alone vntill it be halfe +rosted, and then they take it off from the fire, and make an emptie iarre +fas about his necke, and so throw him into the riuer. These things euery +night as I passed vp and downe the riuer I saw for the space of two +moneths, as I passed to the fayres to buy my commodities with the +marchants. And this is the cause that the Portugales will not drinke of the +water of the riuer Ganges, yet to the sight it is more perfect and clearer +then the water of Nilus is. From the port Piqueno I went to Cochin, and +from Cochin to Malacca, from whence I departed for Pegu being eight hundred +miles distant. That voyage is woont to be made in fiue and twentie or +thirtie dayes, but we were foure moneths, and at the ende of three moneths +our ship was without victuals. The Pilot told vs that wee were by his +altitude not farre from a citie called Tanasary, in the kingdome of Pegu, +and these his words were not true, but we were (as it were) in the middle +of many Ilands, and many vninhabited rockes, and there were also some +Portugales that affirmed that they knew the land, and knewe also where the +citie of Tanasari was. + +[Sidenote: Marchandise comming from Sion.] This citie of right belongeth to +the kingdome of Sion, which is situate on a great riuers side, which +commeth out of the kingdome of Sion: and where this riuer runneth into the +sea, there is a village called Mirgim, in whose harbour euery yeere there +lade some ships with Verzina, Nypa, and Beniamin, a few cloues, nutmegs and +maces which come from the coast of Sion, but the greatest marchandise there +is Verzin and Nypa, which is an excellent wine, which is made of the flower +of a tree called Nyper. [Sidenote: Niper wine good to cure the French +disease.] Whose licquour they distill, and so make an excellent drinke +cleare as christall, good to the mouth, and better to the stomake, and it +hath an excellent gentle vertue, that if one were rotten with the French +pockes, drinking good store of this, he shall be whole againe, and I haue +seene it proued, because that when I was in Cochin, there was a friend of +mine, whose nose beganne to drop away with that disease, and he was +counselled of the doctors of phisicke, that he should goe to Tanasary at +the time of the new wines, and that he should drinke of the myper wine, +night and day, as much as he could before it was distilled, which at that +time is most delicate, but after that it is distilled, it is more strong, +and if you drinke much of it, it will fume into the head with drunkennesse. +This man went thither, and did so, and I haue seene him after with a good +colour and sound. This wine is very much esteemed in the Indies, and for +that it is brought so farre off, it is very deare: in Pegu ordinarily it it +good cheape, because it is neerer to the place where they make it, and +there is euery yeere great quantitie made thereof. And returning to my +purpose, I say, being amongst these rockes, and farre from the land which +is ouer against Tanasary, with great scarcitie of victuals, and that by the +saying of the Pylot and two Portugales, holding then firme that wee were in +front of the aforesayd harbour, we determined to goe thither with our boat +and fetch victuals, and that the shippe should stay for vs in a place +assigned. We were twentie and eight persons in the boat that went for +victuals, and on a day about twelue of the clocke we went from the ship, +assuring our selues to bee in the harbour before night in the aforesaid +port, wee rowed all that day and a great part of the next night, and all +the next day without finding harbour, or any signe of good landing, and +this came to passe through the euill counsell of the two Portugales that +were with vs. + +For we had ouershot the harbour and left it behind vs, in such wise that we +had lost the lande inhabited, together with the shippe, and we eight and +twentie men had no maner of victuall with vs in the boate, but it was the +Lords will that one of the Mariners had brought a little rice with him in +the boate to barter away for some other thing, and it was not so much but +that three or foure men would haue eaten it at a meale: I tooke the +gouernment of this Ryce, promising that by the helpe of God that Ryce +should be nourishment for vs vntil it pleased God to send vs to some place +that was inhabited: [Sidenote: Great extemitie at sea.] and when I slept I +put the ryce into my bosome because they should not rob it from me: we were +nine daies rowing alongst the coast, without finding any thing but +countreys vninhabited, and desert Ilands, where if we had found but grasse +it would haue seemed sugar vnto vs, but wee could not finde any, yet we +found a fewe leaues of a tree, and they were so hard that we could not +chewe them, we had water and wood sufficient, and as wee rowed, we could +goe but by flowing water, for when it was ebbing water, wee made fast our +boat to the banke of one of those Ilandes, and in these nine dayes that we +rowed, we found a caue or nest of Tortoises egges, wherein were one hundred +fortie and foure egges, the which was a great helpe vnto vs: these egges +are as bigge as a hennes egge, and haue no shell about them but a tender +skinne, euery day we sodde a kettle full of those egges, with an handfull +of rice in the broth thereof: it pleased God that at the ende of nine dayes +we discouered certaine fisher men, a fishing with small barkes, and we +rowed towardes them, With a good cheare, for I thinke there were neuer men +more glad then we were, for wee were so sore afflicted with penurie, that +we could scarce stande on our legges. Yet according to the order that we +set for our ryce, when we sawe those fisher men, there was left sufficient +for foure dayes. [Sidenote: Tauay under the king of Pegu.] The first +village that we came to was in the gulfe of Tauay, vnder the king of Pegu, +whereas we found great store of victuals: then for two or three dayes after +our arriuall there, we would eate but litle meate any of vs, and yet for +all this, we were at the point of death the most part of vs. From Tauay to +Martauan, in the kingdome of Pegu, are seuentie two miles. We laded our +bote with victuals which were aboundantly sufficient for sixe moneths, from +whence we departed for the port and Citie of Martauan, where in short time +we arriued, but we found not our ship there as we had thought we should, +from whence presently we made out two barkes to goe to looke for her. And +they found her in great calamitie and neede of water, being at an anker +with a contrary winde, which came very ill to passe, because that she +wanted her boat a moneth, which should haue made her prouision of wood and +water, the shippe also by the grace of God arriued safely in the aforesaid +port of Martauan. + + +The Citie of Martauan. + +[Sidenote: Martauan a citie vnder the king of Pegu.] We found in the Citie +of Martauan ninetie Portugales of Merchants and other base of men, which +had fallen at difference with the Retor or gouernour of the citie, and all +for this cause, that certaine vagabondes of the Portugales had slaine fiue +falchines of the king of Pegu, which chaunced about a moneth after the king +of Pegu was gone with a million and foure hundred thousand men to conquere +the kingdome of Sion. [Sidenote: A custome that these people haue when the +king is in the warres.] They haue for custome in this Countrey and +kingdome, the king being wheresoeuer his pleasure is to bee out of his +kingdome, that euery fifteene dayes there goeth from Pegu a Carouan of +Falchines, with euery one a basket on his head full of some fruites or +other delicates or refreshings, and with cleane clothes: it chaunced that +this Carauan passing by Martauan, and resting themselues there a night, +there happened betweene the Portugales and them wordes of despight, and +from wordes to blowes, and because it was thought that the Portugales had +the worse, the night following, when the Falchines were a sleepe with their +companie, the Portugales went and cut off their heads. [Sidenote: A law in +Pegu for killing of men.] Now there is a law in Pegu, that whosoeuer +killeth a man, he shall buy the shed blood with his money, according to the +estate of the person that is slaine, but these Falchines being the seruants +of the king, the Retors durst hot doe any thing in the matter, without the +consent of the king, because it was necessarie that the king should knowe +of such a matter. When the king had knowledge thereof, he gaue +commaundement that the malefactors should be kept vntill his comming home, +and then be would duely minister iustice, but the Captaine of the +Portugales would not deliuer those men, but rather set himselfe with all +the rest in armes, and went euery day through the Citie marching with his +Drumme und ensignes displayd. [Sidenote: Great pride of the Portugales.] +For at that time the Citie was emptie of men, by reason they were gone all +to the warres, and in businesse of the king: in the middest of this rumour +wee came thither, and I thought it, a strange thing to see the Portugales +vse such insolencie in another mans Citie. And I stoode in doubt of that +which came to passe, and would not vnlade my goods because that they were +more sure in the shippe then on the land, the greatest part of the lading +was the owners of the shippe, who was in Malacca, yet there were diuerse +marchants there, but their goods were of small importance, all those +marchants tolde me that they would not vnlade any of their goods there, +vnlesse I would vnlade first, yet after they left my counsell and followed +their owne, and put their goods a lande and lost euery whit. The Retor with +the customer sent for mee, and demaunded why I put not my goods a lande, +and payed my custome as other men did? To whom I answered, that I was a +marchant that was newly come thither, and seeing such disorder amongst the +Portugales, I doubted the losse of my goods which cost me very deare, with +the sweate of my face, and for this cause I was determined not to put my +goods on lande, vntil such time as his honour would assure me in the name +of the king, that I should haue no losse, and although there came harme to +the Portugales, that neither I nor my goods should haue any hurt, because I +had neither part nor any difference with them in this tumult: my reason +sounded well in the Retors eares, and so presently he sent for the Bargits, +which are as Counsellors of the Citie, and then they promised mee on the +kings head or in the behalfe of the king, that neither I nor my goods +should haue any harme, but that we should be safe and sure: of which +promise there were made publike notes. And then I sent for my goods and had +them on land, and payde my custome, which is in that countrey ten in the +hundreth of the same goods, and for my more securitie I tooke a house right +against the Retors house. The Captaine of the Portugales, and all the +Portugall marchants were put out of the Citie, and I with twentie and two +poore men which were officers in the shippe had my dwelling in the Citie. +[Sidenote: A reuenge on the Portugales.] After this the Gentiles deuised to +be reuenged of the Portugales; but they would not put it in execution, +vntil such time as our small shippe had discharged all her goods, and then +the next night following came from Pegu foure thousand souldiers with some +Elephants of warre; and before that they made any tumult in the citie, the +Retor sent, and gaue commaundement to all Portugales that were in the +Citie, when they heard any rumour or noyse, that for any thing they should +not goe out of their houses, as they tendered their owne health. Then foure +houres within night I heard a great rumour and noyse of men of warre, with +Elephants which threw downe the doores of the ware-houses of the +Portugales, and their houses of wood and strawe, in the which tumult there +were some Portugales wounded, and one of them slaine; and others without +making proofe of their manhoode, which the day before did so bragge, at +that time put themselues to flight most shamefully, and saued themselues a +boord of litle shippes, that were at an anker in the harbour, and some that +were in their beds fled away naked, and that night they caried away all the +Portugalles goods out of the suburbes into the Citie, and those Portugales +that had their goods in the suburbes also. After this the Portugales that +were fledde into the shippes to saue themselues, tooke a newe courage to +themselues, and came on lande and set fire on the houses in the suburbes, +which houses being made of boorde and strawe, and the winde blowing fresh, +in small time were burnt and consumed, with which fire halfe the Citie had +like to haue beene burnt; when the Portugales had done this, they were +without all hope to recouer any part of their goods againe, which goods +might amount to the summe of sixteene thousand duckats, which, if they had +not set fire to the towne, they might haue had againe without any losse at +all. Then the Portugales vnderstanding that this thing was not done by the +consent of the king, but by his Lieutenant and the Retor of the citie were +very ill content, knowing that they had made a great fault, yet the next +morning following, the Portugales beganne to bende and shoot their +ordinance against the Citie, which batterie of theirs continued foure +dayes, but all was in vaine, for the shotte neuer hit the Citie, but +lighted on the top of a small hill neere vnto it, so that the citie had no +harme. When the Retor perceiued that the Portugales made battery against +the Citie, be tooke one and twentie Portugales that were there in the +Citie, and sent them foure miles into the Countrey, there to tarry vntill +such time as the other Portugales were departed, that made the batterie, +who after their departure let them goe at their owne libertie without any +harme done vnto them. I my selfe was alwayes in my house with a good guard +appointed me by the Retor, that no man should doe me iniurie, nor harme me +nor my goods; in such wise that hee perfourmed all that he had promised me +in the name of the king, but he would not let me depart before the comming +of the king, which was greatly to my hinderance, because I was twenty and +one moneths sequestred, that I could not buy nor sell any kinde of +marchandise. Those commodities that I brought thither, were peper, sandols, +and Porcellan of China: so when the king was come home, I made my +supplication vnto him, and I was licenced to depart when I would. + +From Martauan I departed to goe to the chiefest Citie in the kingdome of +Pegu, which is also called after the name of the kingdome, which voyage is +made by sea in three or foure daies: they may goe also by lande, but it is +better for him that hath marchandize to goe by sea and lesser charge. And +in this voyage you shall haue a Macareo, which is one of the most +marueilous things [Marginal note: A thing most marueilous, that at the +comming of a tide the earth should quake.] in the world that Nature hath +wrought, and I neuer saw any thing so hard to be beleeued as this, to wit, +the great increasing and diminishing of the water there at one push or +instant, and the horrible earthquake and great noyse that the said Macareo +maketh where it commeth. We departed from Martauan in barkes, which are +like to our Pylot boates, with the increase of the water, and they goe as +swift as an arrowe out of a bow, so long as the tide runneth with them, and +when the water is at the highest, then they drawe themselues out of the +Channell towardes some banke, and there they come to anker, and when the +water is diminished, then they rest on dry land: and when the barkes rest +dry, they are as high from the bottome of the Chanell, as any house top is +high from the ground. [Sidenote: This tide is like to the tides in our +riuer of Seuerne.] They let their barkes lie so high for this respect, that +if there should any shippe rest or ride in the Chanell, with such force +commeth in the water, that it would ouerthrowe shippe or barke: yet for all +this, that the barkes be so farre out of the Chanell, and though the water +hath lost her greatest strength and furie before it come so high, yet they +make fast their prowe to the streme, and oftentimes it maketh them very +fearefull, and if the anker did not holde her prowe vp by strength, shee +would be ouerthrowen and lost with men and goods. [Sidenote: These tides +make their iust coarse as ours doe.] When the water beginneth to increase, +it maketh such a noyse and so great that you would think it an earthquake, +and presently at the first it maketh three waues. So that the first washeth +ouer the barke, from stemme to sterne, the second is not so furious as the +first, and the thirde rayseth the Anker, and then for the space of sixe +houres while the water encreaseth, they rowe with such swiftnesse that you +would thinke they did fly: in these tydes there must be lost no iot of +time, for if you arriue not at the stagions before the tyde be spent, you +must turne back from whence you came. For there is no staying at any place, +but at these stagions, and there is more daunger at one of these places +then at another, as they be higher and lower one then another. When as you +returne from Pegu to Martauan, they goe but halfe the tide at a time, +because they will lay their barkes vp aloft on the bankes, for the reason +aforesayd. I could neuer gather any reason of the noyse that this water +maketh in the increase of the tide, and in deminishing of the water. There +is another Macareo in Cambaya, [Sidenote: The Macareo is a tide or a +currant.] but that is nothing in comparison of this. By the helpe of God we +came safe to Pegu, which are two cities, the olde and the newe, in the olde +citie are the Marchant strangers, and marchants of the Countrey, for there +are the greatest doings and the greatest trade. This citie is not very +great, but it hath very great suburbes. Their houses be made with canes, +and couered with leaues, or with strawe, but the marehants haue all one +house or Magason, which house they call Godon which is made of brickes, and +there they put all their goods of any valure, to saue them from the often +mischances that there happen to houses made of such stuffe. In the newe +citie is the pallace of the king, and his abiding place with all his barons +and nobles, and other gentlemen; and in the time that I was there, they +finished the building of the new citie: it is a great citie, very plaine +and flat, and foure square, walled round about and with ditches that +compasse the wals about with water, in which ditches are many crocodils, it +hath no drawe bridges, yet it hath twentie gates, fiue for euery square on +the walles, there are many places made for centinels to watch, made of wood +and couered or guilt with gold, the streetes thereof are the fayrest that I +haue seene, they are as straight as a line from one gate to another, and +standing at the one gate you may discouer to the other, and they are as +broad as 10 or 12 men may ride a breast in them: [Sidenote: A rich and +stately palace.] and those streetes that be thwart are faire and large, +these streetes, both on the one side and on the other, are planted at the +doores of the houses, with nut trees of India, which make a very commodious +shadowe, the houses be made of wood and couered with a kind of tiles in +forme of cups, very necessary for their vse, the kings palace is in the +middle of the citie, made in forme of a walled castle, with ditches full of +water round about it, the lodgings within are made of wood all ouer gilded, +with fine pinacles, and very costly worke, couered with plates of golde. +Truely it may be a kings house: within the gate there is a faire large +court, from the one side to the other, wherein there are made places for +the strongest and stoutest Eliphants appointed for the seruice of the kings +person, and amongst all other Eliphants, he hath foure that be white, a +thing so rare that a man shall hardly finde another king that hath any +such, and if this king knowe any other that hath white Eliphantes, he +sendeth for them as for a gift. The time that I was there, there were two +brought out of a farre Countrey, and that cost me something the sight of +them, for they commaund the marchants to goe to see them, and then they +must giue somewhat to the men that bring them: the brokers of the marchants +giue for euery man halfe a duckat, which they call a Tansa, [Marginal note: +This money called Tansa is halfe a duckat which may be three shillings and +foure pence.] which amounteth to a great summe, for the number of merchants +that are in that citie; and when they haue payde the aforesayde Tansa, they +may chuse whether they will see them at that time or no, because that when +they are in the kings stall, euery man may see them that will: but at that +time they must goe and see them, for it is the kings pleasure it should be +so. This king amongst all other his titles, is called the King of the white +Eliphantes and it is reported that if this king knewe any other king that +had any of these white Eliphantes, and woud not send them vnto him, that he +would hazard his whole kingdome to conquer them, he esteemeth these white +Eliphantes very deerely, and they are had in great regard, and kept with +very meete seruice, euery one of them is in a house, all guilded ouer, and +they haue their meate giuen them in vessels of siluer and golde, there is +one blacke Eliphant the greatest that hath bene seene, and is kept +according to his bignesse, he is nine cubites high, which is a marueilous +thing. [Sidenote: A warlike policie.] It is reported that this king hath +foure thousand Eliphantes of warre, and all haue their teeth, and they vse +to put on their two vppermost teeth sharpe spikes of yron, and make them +fast with rings, because these beastes fight, and make battell with their +teeth; hee hath also very many yong Eliphants that haue not their teeth +sprowted foorth: also this king hath a braue deuise in hunting to take +these Eliphantes when hee will, two miles from the Citie. [Sidenote: An +excellent deuise to hunt, and take wilde Elephants.] He hath builded a +faire pallace all guilded, and within it a faire Court, and within it and +rounde about there are made an infinite number of places for men to stande +to see this hunting: neere vnto this Pallace is a mighty great wood, +through the which the hunts-men of the king ride continually on the backs +of the feminine Eliphants, teaching them in this businesse. Euery hunter +carieth out with him fiue or sixe of these feminines, and they say that +they anoynt the secret places with a certaine composition that they haue, +that when the wilde Eliphant doeth smell thereunto, they followe the +feminines and cannot leaue them: when the hunts-men haue made prouision and +the Eliphant is so entangled, they guide the feminines towards the Pallace +which is called Tambell, and this Pallace hath a doore which doth open and +shut with engines, before which doore there is a long streight way with +trees on both the sides, which couereth the way in such wise as it is like +darkenesse in a corner: the wilde Eliphant when he commeth to this way, +thinketh that he is in the woods. At end of this darke way there is a great +field, when the hunters haue gotten this praye, when they first come to +this field, they send presently to giue knowledge thereof to the Citie, and +with all speed there go out fiftie or sixtie men on horsebacke, and doe +beset the fielde rounde about: in the great fielde then the females which +are taught in this businesse goe directly to the mouth of the darke way, +and when as the wilde Eliphant is entred in there, the hunters shoute and +make a great noyse, as much as is possible, to make the wilde Eliphant +enter in at the gate of that Pallace, which is then open, and as soone as +he is in, the gate is shut without any noyse, and so the hunters with the +female Eliphants and the wilde one are all in the Court together, and then +within a small time the females withdraw themselues away one by one out of +the Court, leauing the wilde Eliphant alone: [Sidenote: An excellent +pastime of the Eliphants.] and when he perceiueth that he is left alone, he +is so madde that for two or three houres to see him, it is the greatest +pleasure in the world: he weepeth, hee flingeth, hee runneth, he iustleth, +hee thrusteth vnder the places where the people stand to see him, thinking +to kil some of them, but the posts and timber is so strong and great, that +hee cannot hurt any body, yet hee oftentimes breaketh his teeth in the +grates; at length when hee is weary and hath laboured his body that hee is +all wet with sweat, then hee plucketh in his truncke into his mouth, and +then hee throweth out so much water out of his belly, that he sprinckleth +it ouer the heades of the lookers on, to the vttermost of them, although it +bee very high: and then when they see him very weary, there goe certaine +officers into the Court with long sharpe canes [Marginal note: These canes +are like to them in Spain which they call Ioco de tore.] in their hands, +and prick him that they make him to goe into one of the houses that is made +alongst the Court for the same purpose: as there are many which are made +long and narrow, and when the Eliphant is in, he cannot turne himself to go +backe againe. And it is requisite that these men should be very wary and +swift, for although their canes be long, yet the Eliphant would kill them +if they were not swift to saue themselues: at length when they haue gotten +him into one of those houses, they stand ouer him in a loft and get ropes +vnder his belly and about his necke, and about his legges, and binde him +fast, and so let him stand foure or fiue dayes, and giue him neither meate +nor drinke. At the ende of these foure or fiue dayes, they vnloose him and +put one of the females vnto him, and giue him meate and drinke, and in +eight dayes he is become tame. In my. iudgement there is not a beast so +intellectiue as are these Eliphants, nor of more vnderstanding in al the +world: for he wil do all things that his keeper saith, so that he lacketh +nothing but humaine speech. + +It is reported that the greatest strength that the king of Pegu hath is in +these Eliphants, for when they goe to battell, they set on their backes a +Castle of wood bound thereto, with bands vnder their bellies: and in euery +Castle foure men very commodiously set to fight with harqubushes, with +bowes and arrowes, with darts and pikes, and other launcing weapons: and +they say that the skinne of this Eliphant is so hard, that an harquebusse +will not pierce it, vnlesse it bee in the eye, temples, or some other +tender place of his body. [Sidenote: A goodly order in a barbarous people.] +And besides this, they are of great strength, and haue a very excellent +order in their battel, as I haue seene at their feastes which they make in +the yeere, in which feastes the king maketh triumphes, which is a rare +thing and worthy memorie, that in so barbarous a people should be such +goodly orders as they haue in their armies, which be distinct in squares of +Eliphants, of horsemen, of harquebushers and pikemen, that truly the number +of men are infinite: but their armour and weapons are very nought and weake +as well the one as the other: they haue very bad pikes, their swords are +worse made, like long kniues without points, his harquebushes are most +excellent, and alway in his warres he hath eightie thousand harquebushes, +and the number of them encreaseth dayly. Because the king will haue them +shoote every day at the Plancke, and so by continuall exercise they become +most excellent shot: also hee hath great ordinance made of very good +mettall; to conclude there is not a King on the earth that hath more power +or strength then this king of Pegu, because hee hath twentie and sixe +crowned kings at his commaunde. He can make in his campe a million and a +halfe of men of warre in the fielde against his enemies. The state of his +kingdome and maintenance of his army, is a thing incredible to consider, +and the victuals that should maintaine such a number of people in the +warres: but he that knoweth the nature and quality of that people, will +easily beleeue it. [Sidenote: Eating of serpents.] I haue seene with mine +eyes, that those people and souldiers haue eaten of all sorts of wild +beastes that are on the earth, whether it bee very filthie or otherwise all +serueth for their mouthes: yea, I haue seene them eate Scorpions and +Serpents, also they feed of all kinde of herbes and grasse. So that if such +a great armie want not water and salt, they will maintaine themselues a +long time in a bush with rootes, flowers and leaues of trees, they cary +rice with them for their voyage, and that serueth them in stead of comfits; +it is so daintie vnto them. This king of Pegu hath not any army or power by +sea, but in the land, for people, dominions, golde and siluer, he farre +exceeds the power of the great Turke in treasure and strength. [Sidenote: +The riches of the king of Pegu.] This king hath diuers Magasons full of +treasure, as gold, and siluer, and euery day he encreaseth it more and +more, and it is neuer diminished. Also hee is Lord of the Mines of Rubies, +Safires and Spinels. Neere vnto his royall pallace there is an inestimable +treasure whereof hee maketh no accompt, for that it standeth in such a +place that euery one may see it, and the place where this treasure is, is a +great Court walled round about with walles of stone, with two gates which +stand open euery day. And within this place or Court are foure gilded +houses couered with lead, and in euery one of these are certaine heathenish +idoles of a very great valure. In the first house there is a stature of the +image of a man of gold very great, and on his head a crowne of gold beset +with most rare Rubies and Safires, and round about him are 4. litle +children of gold. In the second house there is the stature of a man of +siluer, that is set as it were sitting on heapes of money: whose stature in +height, as hee sitteth, is so high, that his highnesse exceeds the height +of any one roofe of an house; I measured his feete, and found that they +were as long as all my body was in height, with a crowne on his head like +to the first. And in the thirde house, there is a stature of brasse of the +same bignesse, with a like crowne on his head. In the 4. and last house +there is a stature of a man as big as the other, which is made of Gansa, +which is the metall they make their money of, and this metall is made of +copper and leade mingled together. This stature also hath a crowne on his +head like the first: this treasure being of such a value as it is, standeth +in an open place that euery man at his pleasure may go and see it: for the +keepers therof neuer forbid any man the sight thereof. I say as I haue said +before, that this king euery yere in his feastes triumpheth: and because it +is worthy of the noting, I thinke it meet to write therof, which is as +foloweth. [Sidenote: The great pompe of the king.] The king rideth on a +triumphant cart or wagon all gilded, which is drawen by 16. goodly horses: +and this cart is very high with a goodly canopy ouer it, behind the cart +goe 20. of his Lords and nobles, with euery one a rope in his hand made +fast to the cart for to hold it vpright that it fal not. The king sitteth +in the middle of the cart; and vpon the same cart about the king stande 4. +of his nobles most fauored of him, and before this cart wherein the king is +goeth all his army as aforesaid, and in the middle of his army goeth all +his nobilitie, round about the cart, that are in his dominions, a +marueilous thing it is to see so many people, such riches and such good +order in a people so barbarous as they be. This king of Pegu hath one +principal wife which is kept in a Seralio, he hath 300. concubines, of whom +it is reported that he hath 90. children. [Sidenote: The order of Iustice.] +This king sitteth euery day in person to heare the suites of his subiects, +but he nor they neuer speake one to another, but by supplications made in +this order. [Sidenote: No difference of persons before the King in +controuersies or in iustice.] The king sitteth vp aloft, in a great hall, +on a tribunall seat, and lower vnder him sit all his Barons round about, +then those that demaund audience enter into a great Court before the king, +and there set them downe on the ground 40. paces distant from the kings +person, and amongst those people there is no difference in matters of +audience before the king, but all alike, and there they sit with their +supplications in their hands, which are made of long leaues of a tree, +these leaues are 3. quarters of a yard long, and two fingers broad, which +are written with a sharpe iron made for that purpose, and in those leaues +are their supplications written, and with their supplications, they haue in +their hands a present or gift, according to the waightines of their matter. +Then come the secretaries downe to read these supplications, taking them +and reading them before the king, and if the king think it good to do to +them that fauour or iustice that they demaund, then he commandeth to take +the presents out of their hands: but if he thinke their demand be not iust +or according to right, he commandeth them away without taking of their +gifts or presents. In the Indies there is not any marchandise that is good +to bring to Pegu, vnlesse it bee at some times by chance to bring Opium of +Cambaia, and if he bring money he shall lose by it. Now the commodities +that come from S. Tome are the onely marchandise for that place, which is +the great quantity of cloth made, which they vse in Pegu: which cloth is +made of bombast wouen and painted, so that the more that kinde of cloth is +washed, the more liuelie they shewe their colours, which is a rare thing, +and there is made such accompt of this kinde of cloth which is so great +importance, that a small bale of it will cost a thousand or two thousand +duckets. Also from S. Tome they layd great store of red yarne, of bombast +died with a roote which they call Saia, as aforesayd, which colour will +neuer out. With which marchandise euery yeere there goeth a great shippe +from S. Tome to Pegu, of great importance, and they vsually depart from S. +Tome to Pegu the 11. or 12. of September, and if she stay vntill the +twelfth, it is a great hap if she returne not without making of her voiage. +Their vse was to depart the sixt of September, and then they made sure +voyages, and now because there is a great labour about that kind of cloth +to bring it to perfection, and that it be well dried, as also the +greedinesse of the Captaine that would made an extraordinary gaine of his +fraight, thinking to haue the wind alwayes to serue their turne, they stay +so long, that at sometimes the winde turneth. For in those parts the windes +blow firmely for certaine times, with the which they goe to Pegu with the +winde in poope, and if they arriue not there before the winde change, and +get ground to anker, perforce they must returne backe againe: for that the +gales of the winde blowe there for three or foure moneths together in one +place with great force. But if they get the coast and anker there, then +with great labour they may saue their voyage. Also there goeth another +great shippe from Bengala euery yeere, laden with fine cloth of bombast of +all sorts, which arriueth in the harbour of Pegu, when the ship that +commeth from S. Tome departeth. The harbour where these two ships arriue is +called Cosmin. From Malaca to Martauan, which is a port in Pegu, there come +many small ships, and great, laden with pepper, Sandolo, Porcellan of +China, Camfora, Bruneo and other marchandise. The ships that come from +Mecca enter into the port of Pegu and Cirion, and those shippes bring cloth +of Wooll, Scarlets, Veluets, Opium, and Chickinos, [Sidenote: The Chikinos +are pieces of gold worth sterling 7. shillings.] by the which they lose, +and they bring them because they haue no other thing that is good for Pegu: +but they esteeme not the losse of them, for they make such great gaine of +their commodities that they cary from thence out of that kingdome. Also the +king of Assi his ships come thither into the same port laden with peper; +from the coast of S. Tome of Bengala, out of the Sea of Bara to Pegu are +three hundreth miles, and they go it vp the riuer in foure daies, with the +encreasing water, or with the flood, to a City called Cosmin, and there +they discharge their ships, whither the Customers of Pegu come to take the +note and markes of all the goods of euery man, and take the charge of the +goods on them, and conuey them to Pegu, into the kings house, wherein they +make the custome of the marchandize. When the Customers haue taken the +charge of the goods and put them into barks, the Retor of the City giueth +licence to the Marchants to take barke, and goe vp to Pegu with their +marchandize; and so three or foure of them take a barke and goe vp to Pegu +in company. [Sidenote: Great rigour for the stealing of customes.] God +deliuer euery man that hee giue not a wrong note, and entrie, or thinke to +steale any custome: for if they do, for the least trifle that is, he is +vtterly vndone, for the king doeth take it for a most great affront to bee +deceiued of his custome: and therefore they make diligent searches, three +times at the lading and vnlading of the goods, and at the taking of them a +land. In Pegu this search they make when they goe out of the ship for +Diamonds, Pearles, and fine cloth which taketh little roome: for because +that all the iewels that come into Pegu, and are not found of that +countrey, pay custome, but Rubies, Safyres, and Spinels pay no custome in +nor out: because they are found growing in that Countrey. I haue spoken +before, how that all Marchants that meane to goe thorow the Indies, must +cary al manor of houshold stuffe with them which is necessary for a house, +because that there is not any lodging nor Innes nor hostes, nor chamber +roome in that Countrey, but the first thing a man doth when he commeth to +that City is to hier a house, either by the yeere or by the moneth, or as +he meanes to stay in those parts. + +In Pegu their order is to hire their houses for sixe moneths. Nowe from +Cosmin to the Citie of Pegu they goe in sixe houres with the flood, and if +it be ebbing water, then they make fast their boate to the riuer side, and +there tary vntil the water flow againe. [Sidenote: Description of the +fruitfulnesse of that soyle.] It is a very commodious and pleasant voyage, +hauing on both sides of the riuers many great vilages, which they call +Cities: in the which hennes, pigeons, egges, milke, rice, and other things +be very goode cheape. It is all plaine, and a goodly Countrey, and in eight +dayes you may make your voyage vp to Macceo, distant from Pegu twelue +miles, and there they discharge their goods, and lade them in Carts or +waines drawen with oxen, and the Marchants are caried in a closet which +they call Deling, [Sidenote: Deling is a small litter carried with men as +is aforesaid.] in the which a man shall be very well accommodated, with +cushions under his head, and couered for the defence of the Sunne and +raine, and there he may sleep if he haue will thereunto: and his foure +Falchines cary him running away, changing two at one time and two at +another. The custome of Pegu and fraight thither, may amount vnto twentie +or twentie two per cento, and 23. according as he hath more or lesse stolen +from him that day they custome the goods. It is requisite that a man haue +his eyes watchfull, and to be carefull, and to haue many friendes, for when +they custome in the great hall of the king, there come many gentlemen +accompanied with a number of their slaues, and these gentlemen haue no +shame that their slaues rob strangers; whether it be cloth in shewing of it +or any other thing, they laugh at it. And although the Marchants helpe one +another to keepe watch, and looke to their goods, they cannot looke therto +so narrowly but one or other will rob something, either more or lesse, +according as their marchandise is more or lesse: and yet on this day there +is a worse thing then this: although you haue set so many eyes to looke +there for your benefit, that you escape vnrobbed of the slaues, a man +cannot choose but that he must be robbed of the officers of the custome +house. For paying the custome with the same goods oftentimes they take the +best that you haue, and not by rate of euery sort as they ought to do, by +which meanes a man payeth more then his dutie. At length when the goods be +dispatched out of the custome house in this order, the Marchant causeth +them to be caried to his house, and may do with them at his pleasure. + +There are in Pegu 8. brokers of the kings, which are called Tareghe, who +are bound to sell all the marchandize which come to Pegu, at the common or +the currant price: then if the marchants wil sell their goods at that +price, they sel them away, and the brokers haue two in the hundreth of +euery sort of marchandise, and they are bound to make good the debts of +those goods, because they be sold by their hands or meanes, and on their +wordes, and oftentimes the marchant knoweth not to whom he giueth his +goods, yet he cannot lose anything thereby, for that the broker is bound in +any wise to pay him, and if the marchant sel his goods without the consent +of the broker, yet neuerthelesse he must pay him two per cento, and be in +danger of his money: [Sidenote: A lawe for Bankrupts.] but this is very +seldom seene, because the wife, children, and slaues of the debtor are +bound to the creditor, and when his time is expired and paiment not made, +the creditor may take the debtor and cary him home to his house, and shut +him vp in a Magasin, whereby presently he hath his money, and not being +able to pay the creditor, he may take the wife, children, and slaues of the +debtor and sel them, for so is the lawe of that kingdome. [Sidenote: Euery +man may stampe what money he wil.] The currant money that is in this city, +and throughout all this kingdom is called Gansa or Ganza, which is made of +Copper and leade: It is not the money of the king, but euery man may stamp +it that wil, because it hath his iust partition or value: but they make +many of them false, by putting ouermuch lead into them, and those will not +passe, neither will any take them. With this money Ganza, you may buy golde +or siluer, Rubies and Muske, and other things. For there is no other money +currant amongst them. And Golde, siluer and other marchandize are at one +time dearer than another, as all other things be. + +This Ganza goeth by weight of Byze, and this name of Byza goeth for the +accompt of the weight, and commonly a Byza of a Ganza is worth (after our +accompt) halfe a ducat, litle more or lesse: and albeit that Gold and +siluer is more or lesse in price, yet the Byza neuer changeth: euery Byza +maketh a hundreth Ganza of weight, and so the number of the money is Byza. +[Sidenote: How a man may dispose himselfe for the trade in Pegu.] He that +goeth to Pegu to buy Iewels, if he wil do well, it behoueth him to be a +whole yere there to do his businesse. For if so be that he would return +with the ship he came in, he cannot do any thing so conueniently for the +breuitie of the time, because that when they custome their goods in Pegu +that come from S. Tome in their ships, it is as it were about Christmas: +and when they haue customed their goods, then must they sell them for their +credits sake for a moneth or two: and then at the beginning of March the +ships depart. The Marchants that come from S. Tome take for the paiment of +their goods, gold and siluer, which is neuer wanting there. [Sidenote: Good +instructions.] And 8. or 10. daies before their departure they are all +satisfied: also they may haue Rubies in paiment, but they make no accompt +of them: and they that will winter there for another yere, it is needfull +that they be aduertized, that in the sale of their goods, they specifie in +their bargaine, the terme of two or 3. moneths paiment, and that their +paiment shal be in so many Ganza, and neither golde nor siluer: because +that with the Ganza they may buy and sel euery thing with great aduantage. +And how needfull is it to be aduertized, when they wil recouer their +paiments, in what order they shal receiue their Ganza? Because he that is +not experienced may do himselfe great wrong in the weight of the Gansa, as +also in the falsenesse of them: in the weight he may be greatly deceiued, +because that from place to place it doth rise and fall greatly: and +therefore when any wil receiue money or make paiment, he must take a +publique wayer of money, a day or two before he go about his businesse, and +giue him in paiment for his labour two Byzaes a moneth, and for this he is +bound to make good all your money, and to maintaine it for good, for that +hee receiueth it and seales the bags with his scale: and when hee hath +receiued any store, then hee causeth it to bee brought into the Magason of +the Marchant, that is the owner of it. + +That money is very weightie, for fortie Byza is a strong Porters burden; +and also where the Marchant hath any payment to be made for those goods +which he buyeth, the Common wayer of money that receiueth his money must +make the payment thereof. So that by this meanes, the Marchant with the +charges of two Byzes a moneth, receiueth and payeth out his money without +losse or trouble. [Sidenote: The marchandizes that goe out of Pegu.] The +Marchandizes that goe out of Pegu are Gold, Siluer, Rubies, Saphyres, +Spinelles, great store of Beniamin, long peper, Leade, Lacca, rice, wine, +some sugar, yet there might be great store of sugar made in the Countrey, +for that they haue aboundance of Canes, but they giue them to Eliphants to +eate, and the people consume great store of them for food, and many more +doe they consume in vaine things, as these following. In that kingdome they +spend many of these Sugar canes in making of houses and tents which they +call Varely for their idoles, which they call Pagodes, whereof there are +great aboundance, great and smal, and these houses are made in forme of +little hilles, like to Sugar loaues or to Bells, and some of these houses +are as high as a reasonable steeple, at the foote they are very large, some +of them be in circuit a quarter of a mile. The saide houses within are full +of earth, and walled round about with brickes and dirt in steade of lime, +and without forme, from the top to the foote they make a couering for them +with Sugar canes, and plaister it with lime all ouer, for otherwise they +would bee spoyled, by the great aboundance of raine that falleth in those +Countreys. [Sidenote: Idol houses couered with gold.] Also they consume +about these Varely or idol houses great store of leafe-gold, for that they +ouerlay all the tops of the houses with gold, and some of them are couered +with golde from the top to the foote: in couering whereof there is great +store of gold spent, for that euery 10. yeeres they new ouerlay them with +gold, from the top to the foote, so that with this vanitie they spend great +aboundance of golde. For euery 10. yeres the raine doth consume the gold +from these houses. And by this meanes they make golde dearer in Pegu then +it would bee, if they consumed not so much in this vanitie. Also it is a +thing to bee noted in the buying of iewels in Pegu, that he that hath no +knowledge shall haue as good iewels, and as good cheap, as he that hath +bene practized there a long time, which is a good order, and it is in this +wise. There are in Pegu foure men of good reputation, which are called +Tareghe, or brokers of Iewels. These foure men haue all the Iewels or +Rubies in their handes, and the Marchant that wil buy commeth to one of +these Tareghe and telleth him, that he hath so much money to imploy in +Rubies. [Sidenote: Rubies exceeding cheape in Pegu.] For through the hands +of these foure men passe all the Rubies: for they haue such quantitie, that +they knowe not what to doe with them, but sell them at most vile and base +prices. When the Marchant hath broken his mind to one of these brokers or +Tareghe, they cary him home to one of their Shops, although he hath no +knowledge in Iewels: and when the Iewellers perceiue that hee will employ a +good round summe, they will make a bargaine, and if not, they let him +alone. The vse generally of this Citie is this: that when any Marchant hath +bought any great quantitie of Rubies, and hath agreed for them, hee carieth +them home to his house, let them be of what value they will, he shall haue +space to looke on them and peruse them two or three dayes: and if he hath +no knowledge in them, he shall alwayes haue many Marchants in that Citie +that haue very good knowledge in Iewels; with whom he may alwayes conferre +and take counsell, and may shew them vnto whom he will; and if he finde +that hee hath not employed his money well, hee may returne his Iewels backe +to them whom hee had them of, without any losse at all. Which thing is such +a shame to the Tareghe to haue his Iewels returned, that he had rather +beare a blow on the face then that it should be thought that he solde them +so deere to haue them returned. [Sidenote: An honest care of heathen +people.] For these men haue alwayes great care that they afford good +peniworths, especially to those that haue no knowledge. This they doe, +because they woulde not loose their credite: and when those Marchants that +haue knowledge in Iewels buy any, if they buy them deere, it is their own +faults and not the brokers: yet it is good to haue knowledge in Iewels, by +reason that it may somewhat ease the price. [Sidenote: Bargaines made with +the nipping of fingers vnder a cloth.] There is also a very good order +which they haue in buying of Iewels, which is this; There are many +Marchants that stand by at the making of the bargaine, and because they +shall not vnderstand howe the Iewels be solde, the Broker and the Marchants +haue their hands vnder a cloth, and by touching of fingers and nipping the +ioynts they know what is done, what is bidden, and what is asked. So that +the standers by knowe not what is demaunded for them, although it be for a +thousand or 10. thousand duckets. For euery ioynt and euery finger hath his +signification. For if the Marchants that stande by should vnderstand the +bargaine, it would breede great controuersie amongst them. And at my being +in Pegu in the moneth of August, in Anno 1569, hauing gotten well by my +endeuour, I was desirous to see mine owne Countrey, and I thought it good +to goe by the way of S. Tome, but then I should tary vntil March. + +In which iourney I was counsailed, yea, and fully resolued to go by the way +of Bengala, with a shippe there ready to depart for that voyage. And then +wee departed from Pegu to Chatigan a great harbour or port, from whence +there goe smal ships to Cochin, before the fleete depart for Portugall, in +which ships I was fully determined to goe to Lisbon, and so to Venice. +[Sidenote: This Touffon is an extraordinary storme at Sea.] When I had thus +resolued my selfe, I went a boord of the shippe of Bengala, at which time +it was the yeere of Touffon: concerning which Touffon ye are to vnderstand, +that in the East Indies often times, there are not stormes as in other +countreys; but euery 10. or 12. yeeres there are such tempests and stormes, +that it is a thing incredible, but to those that haue seene it, neither do +they know certainly what yeere they wil come. + +[Sidenote: The Touffon commeth but euery 10. or 12. yeeres.] Vnfortunate +are they that are at sea in that yere and time of the Touffon, because few +there are that escape that danger. In this yere it was our chance to be at +sea with the like storme, but it happened well vnto vs, for that our ship +was newly ouer-plancked, and had not any thing in her saue victuall and +balasts, Siluer and golde, which from Pegu they cary to Bengala, and no +other kinde of Marchandise. This Touffon or cruel storme endured three +dayes and three nights: in which time it caried away our sailes, yards, and +rudder; and because the shippe laboured in the Sea, wee cut our mast ouer +boord: which when we had done she laboured a great deale more then before, +in such wise, that she was almost full with water that came ouer the +highest part of her and so went downe: and for the space of three dayes and +three nights sixtie men did nothing but hale water out of her in this wise, +twentie men in one place, and twentie men in another place, and twentie in +a thirde place: and for all this storme, the shippe was so good, that shee +tooke not one iot of water below through her sides, but all ran downe +through the hatches, so that those sixtie men did nothing but cast the Sea +into the Sea. And thus driuing too and fro as the winde and Sea would, we +were in a darke night about foure of the clocke cast on a sholde: yet when +it was day, we could neither see land on one side nor other, and knew not +where we were: And as it pleased the diuine power, there came a great waue +of the Sea, which draue vs beyonde the should. [Sidenote: A manifest token +of the ebbing and flowing in those Countries.] And when wee felt the shippe +aflote, we rose vp as men reuiued, because the Sea was calme and smooth +water, and then sounding we found twelue fadome water, and within a while +after wee had but sixe fadome, and then presently we came to anker with a +small anker that was left vs at the sterne, for all our other were lost in +the storme: and by and by the shippe stroke a ground, and then we did prop +her that she should not ouerthrow. + +When it was day the shippe was all dry, and wee found her a good mile from +the Sea on drie land. [Sidenote: This Island is called Sondiua.] This +Touffon being ended, we discouered an Island not farre from vs, and we went +from the shippe on the sands to see what Island it was: and wee found it a +place inhabited, and, to my iudgement, the fertilest Island in all the +world, the which is diuided into two parts by a chanell which passeth +betweene it, and with great trouble we brought our ship into the same +chanel, which parteth the Island at flowing water, and there we determined +to stay 40. dayes to refresh vs. And when the people of the Island saw the +ship, and that we were comming a land: presently they made a place of bazar +or a market, with shops right ouer against the ship with all maner of +prouision of victuals to eate, which they brought downe in great abundance, +and sold it so good cheape, that we were amazed at the cheapenesse thereof. +I bought many salted kine there, for the prouision of the ship, for halfe a +Larine a piece, which Larine may be 12. shillings sixe pence, being very +good and fat; and 4. wilde hogges ready dressed for a Larine, great fat +hennes for a Bizze a piece, which is at the most a pennie: and the people +told vs that we were deceiued the halfe of our money, because we bought +things so deare. Also a sacke of fine rice for a thing of nothing, and +consequently all other things for humaine sustenance were there in such +aboundance, that it is a thing incredible but to them that haue seene it. +[Sidenote: Sondiua is the fruitfullest Countrey in al the world.] This +Island is called Sondiua belonging to the kingdome of Bengala, distant 120. +miles from Chatigan, to which place wee were bound. The people are Moores, +and the king a very good man of a Moore king, for if he had bin a tyrant as +others be, he might haue robbed vs of all, because the Portugall captaine +of Chatigan was in armes against the Retor of that place, and euery day +there were some slaine, at which newes we rested there with no smal feare, +keeping good watch and ward aboord euery night as the vse is, but the +gouernour of the towne did comfort vs, and bad vs that we should feare +nothing, but that we should repose our selues securely without any danger, +although the Portugales of Chatigan had slaine the gouernour of that City, +and said that we were not culpable in that fact: and moreouer he did vs +euery day what pleasure he could, which was a thing contrary to our +expectations considering that they and the people of Chatigan were both +subiects to one king. [Sidenote: Chatigan is a port in Bengala, whither the +Portugales go with their ships.] We departed from Sondiua, and came to +Chatigan the great port of Bengala, at the same time when the Portugales +had made peace and taken a truce with the gouernours of the towne, with +this condition that the chiefe Captaine of the Portugales with his ship +should depart without any lading: for there were then at that time 18. +ships of Portugales great and small. This Captaine being a Gentleman and of +good courage, was notwithstanding contented to depart to his greatest +hinderance, rather than hee would seeke to hinder so many of his friends as +were there, as also because the time of the yeere was spent to go to the +Indies. The night before he departed, euery ship that had any lading +therein, put it aboord of the Captaine to helpe to ease his charge and to +recompense his courtesies. [Sidenote: The King of Rachim, or Aracam, +neighbour to Bengala.] In this time there came a messenger from the king of +Rachim to this Portugal Captaine, who saide in the behalfe of his king, +that hee had heard of the courage and valure of him, desiring him gently +that he would vouchsafe to come with the ship into his port, and comming +thither he should be very wel intreated. This Portugal went thither and was +very well satisfied of this King. + +This King of Rachim hath his seate in the middle coast betweene Bengala and +Pegu, and the greatest enemie he hath is the king of Pegu: which king of +Pegu deuiseth night and day how to make this king of Rachim his subiect, +but by no meanes hee is able to doe it: because the king of Pegu hath no +power nor armie by Sea. And this king of Rachim [Marginal note: Or, +Aracam.] may arme two hundreth Galleyes or Fusts by Sea, and by land he +hath certaine sluses with the which when the king of Pegu pretendeth any +harme towards him, hee may at his pleasure drowne a great part of the +Countrey. So that by this meanes hee cutteth off the way whereby the king +of Pegu should come with his power to hurt him. + +[Sidenote: The commodities that goe from Chatigan to the Indies.] From the +great port of Chatigan they cary for the Indies great store of rice, very +great quantitie of Bombast cloth of euery sort, Suger, corne, and money, +with other marchandize. And by reason of the warres in Chatigan, the +Portugall ships taried there so long, that they arriued not at Cochin so +soone as they were wont to doe other yeeres. For which cause the fleete +that was at Cochin [Marginal note: The Portugal ships depart toward +Portugall out of the harbor of Cochin.] was departed for Portugal before +they arriued there, and I being in one of the small shippes before the +fleete, in discouering of Cochin, we also discouered the last shippe of the +Fleete that went from Cochin to Portugall, where shee made saile, for which +I was marueilously discomforted, because that all the yeere following, +there was no going for Portugale, and when we arriued at Cochin I was fully +determined to goe for Venice by the way of Ormus, [Sidenote: Goa was +besieged.] and at that time the Citie of Goa was besieged by the people of +Dialcan, but the Citizens forced not this assault, because they supposed +that it would not continue long. For all this I embarked my selfe in a +Galley that went for Goa, meaning there to shippe my selfe for Ormus: but +when we came to Goa, the Viceroy would not suffer any Portugal to depart, +by reason of the warres. And being in Goa but a small time, I fell sicke of +an infirmitie that helde mee foure moneths: which with phisicke and diet +cost me eight hundreth duckets, and there I was constrained to sell a smal +quantitie of Rubies to sustaine my neede: and I solde that for fiue +hundreth duckets, that was worth a thousand. And when I beganne to waxe +well of my disease, I had but little of that money left, euery thing was so +scarse: For euery chicken (and yet not good) cost mee seuen or eight +Liuers, which is sixe shillings, or sixe shillings eight pence. Beside this +great charges, the Apothecaries with their medicines were no small charge +to me. At the ende of sixe moneths they raised the siege, and then I +beganne to worke, for Iewels were risen in their prices: for whereas before +I sold a few of refused Rubies, I determined then to sell the rest of all +my Iewels that I had there, and to make an other voyage to Pegu. [Sidenote: +Opium a good commoditie in Pegu.] And for because that at my departure from +Pegu, Opium was in great request, I went then to Cambaya to imploy a good +round summe of money in Opium, and there I bought 60. percels of Opium, +which cost me two thousand and a hundreth duckets, euery ducket at foure +shillings two pence. Moreouer I bought three bales of Bombast cloth, which +cost me eight hundred duckats, which was a good commoditie for Pegu: when I +had bought these things, the Viceroy commanded that the custome of the +Opium should be paide in Goa, and paying custome there I might cary it +whither I would. I shipped my 3. bales of cloth at Chaul in a shippe that +went for Cochin, and I went to Goa to pay the aforesaid custome for my +Opium, and from Goa I departed to Cochin in a ship that was for the voyage +of Pegu, and went to winter then at S. Tome. When I come to Cochin, I +vnderstood that the ship that had my three bales of cloth was cast away and +lost, so that I lost my 800. Serafins or duckats: and departing from Cochin +to goe for S. Tome, in casting about for the Island of Zeilan the Pilote +was deceiued, for that the Cape of the Island of Zeilan lieth farre out +into the sea, and the Pilot thinking that he might haue passed hard aboord +the Cape, and paying roomer in the night; when it was morning we were farre +within the Cape, and past all remedy to go out, by reason the winds blew so +fiercely against vs. So that by this meanes we lost our voyage for that +yere, and we went to Manar with the ship to winter there, the ship hauing +lost her mastes, and with great dilligence we hardly saued her, with great +losses to the Captaine of the ship, because he was forced to fraight +another ship in S. Tome for Pegu with great losses and interest, and I with +my friends agreed together in Manar to take a bark to cary vs to S. Tome; +which thing we did with al the rest of the marchants; and arriuing at S. +Tome I had news through or by the way of Bengala, that in Pegu Opium was +very deare, and I knew that in S. Tome there was no Opium but mine to go +for Pegu that yere, so that I was holden of al the marchants there to be +very rich: and so it would haue proued, if my aduerse fortune had not bin +contrary to my hope, which was this. At that time there went a great ship +from Cambaya, to the king of Assi, with great quantitie of Opium, and there +to lade peper: in which voyage there came such a storme, that the ship was +forced with wether to goe roomer 800. miles, and by this meanes came to +Pegu, whereas they arriued a day before mee; so that Opium which was before +very deare, was now at a base price: so that which was sold for fiftie +Bizze before, was solde for 2. Bizze and an halfe, there was such quantitie +came in that ship; so that I was glad to stay two yeres in Pegu vnlesse I +would haue giuen away my commoditie: and at the end of two yeres of my +2100. duckets which I bestowed in Cambaya, I made but a thousand duckets. +Then I departed againe from Pegu to goe for the Indies for Chaul, and from +Chaul to Cochin, and from Cochin to Pegu. Once more I lost occasion to make +me riche, for whereas I might haue brought good store of Opium againe, I +brought but a little, being fearefull of my other voyage before. In this +small quantitie I made good profite. And now againe I determined to go for +my Countrey, and departing from Pegu, I tarried and wintered in Cochin, and +then I left the Indies and came for Ormus. + +I thinke it very necessary before I ende my voyage, to reason somewhat, and +to shewe what fruits the Indies do yeeld and bring forth. First, In the +Indies and other East parts of India there is Peper and ginger, which +groweth in all parts of India. And in some parts of the Indies, the +greatest quantitie of peper groweth amongst wilde bushes, without any maner +of labour: sauing, that when it is ripe they goe and gather it. The tree +that the peper groweth on is like to our Iuie, which runneth vp to the tops +of trees wheresoeuer it groweth: and if it should not take holde of some +tree, it would lie flat and rot on the ground. This peper tree hath his +floure and berry like in all parts to our Iuie berry, and those berries be +graines of peper: so that when they gather them they be greene, and then +they lay them in the Sunne, and they become blacke. + +The Ginger groweth in this wise: the land is tilled and sowen, and the +herbe is like to Panizzo, and the roote is the ginger. These two spices +grow in diuers places. + +The Cloues come all from the Moluccas, which Moluccas are two Islands, not +very great, and the tree that they grow on is like to our Lawrell tree. + +The Nutmegs and Maces, which grow both together, are brought from the +Island of Banda, whose tree is like to our walnut tree, but not so big. + +All the good white Sandol is brought from the Island of Timor. Canfora +being compound commeth all from China, and all that which groweth in canes +commeth from Borneo, and I thinke that this Canfora commeth not into these +parts: for that in India they consume great store, and that is very deare. +The good Lignum Aloes commeth from Cauchinchina. + +The Beniamin commeth from the kingdome of Assi and Sion. + +Long pepper groweth in Bengala, Pegu, and Iaua. + +Muske [Marginal note: This Muske the Iewes doe counterfeit and take out +halfe the good muske and beat the flesh of an asse and put in the roome of +it.] commeth from Tartaria, which they make in this order, as by good +information I haue bene told. There is a certaine beast in Tartaria, which +is wilde and as big as a wolfe, which beast they take aliue, and beat him +to death with small staues that his blood may be spread through his whole +body, then they cut it in pieces and take out all the bones, and beat the +flesh with the blood in a morter very smal, and dry it, and make purses to +put it in of the skin, and these be the cods of muske. + +Truely I know not whereof the Amber is made, and there are diuers opinions +of it, but this is most certaine, it is cast out of the Sea, and throwne on +land, and found vpon the sea bankes. + +The Rubies, Saphyres, and the Spinels be gotten in the kingdome of Pegu. +The Diamants come from diuers places; and I know but three sorts of them. +That sort of Diamants that is called Chiappe, commeth from Bezeneger. Those +that be pointed naturally come from the land of Delly, and from Iaua, but +the Diamants of Iaua are more waightie then the other. I could neuer +vnderstand from whence they that are called Balassi come. [Sidenote: The +Balassi grow in Zeilan.] + +Pearles they fish in diuers places, as before in this booke is showne. + +From Cambaza commeth the Spodiom which congeleth in certaine canes, whereof +I found many in Pegu, when I made my house there, because that (as I haue +sayd before) they make their houses there of wouen canes like to mats. From +Chaul they trade alongst the coast of Melinde in Ethiopia, [Marginal note: +On the coast of Melynde in Ethiopia, in the land of Cafraria, the great +trade that the Portugals haue.] within the land of Cafraria: on that coast +are many good harbors kept by the Moores. Thither the Portugals bring a +kinde of Bombast cloth of a low price, and great store of Paternosters or +beads made of paltrie glasse, which they make in Chaul according to the vse +of the Countrey: and from thence they cary Elephants teeth for India, +slaues called Cafari, and some Amber and Gold. On this coast the king of +Portugall hath his castle called Mozambique, which is of as great +importance as any castle that hee hath in all his Indies vnder his +protection, and the Captaine of this castle hath certaine voyages to this +Cafraria, to which places no Marchants may goe, but by the Agent of this +Captaine: [Sidenote: Buying and selling without words one to another.] and +they vse to goe in small shippes, and trade with the Cafars, and their +trade in buying and selling is without any speach one to the other. In this +wise the Portugals bring their goods by litle and litle alongst the Sea +coast, and lay them downe: and so depart, and the Cafar Marchants come and +see the goods, and there they put downe as much gold as they thinke the +goods are worth, and so goe their way and leaue their golde and the goods +together, then commeth the Portugal, and finding the golde to his content, +hee taketh it and goeth his way into his ship, and then commeth the Cafar, +and taketh the goods and carieth them away: and if he finde the golde there +still, it is a signe that the Portugals are not contented, and if the Cafar +thinke he hath put too little, he addeth more, as he thinketh the thing is +worth: and the Portugales must not stand with them too strickt; for if they +doe, then they will haue no more trade with them: For they disdaine to be +refused, when they thinke that they haue offered ynough, for they bee a +peeuish people, and haue dealt so of a long time: [Sidenote: Golden trades +that the Portugals haue.] and by this trade the Portugals change their +commodities into gold, and cary it to the Castle of Mozambique, which is an +Island not farre distant from the firme land of Cafraria on the coast of +Ethiopia, and is distant from India 2800. miles. Nowe to returne to my +voyage, when I came to Ormus, I found there Master Francis Berettin of +Venice, and we fraighted a bark together to goe for Basora for 70. duckets, +and with vs there went other Marchants, which did ease our fraight, and +very commodiously wee came to Basora and there we stayed 40. dayes for +prouiding a Carouan of barks to go to Babylon, because they vse not to goe +two or 3. barkes at once, but 25. or 30. because in the night they cannot +go, but must make them fast to the banks of the riuer, and then we must +make a very good and strong guard, and be wel prouided of armor, for +respect and safegard of our goods, because the number of theeues is great +that come to spoile and rob the marchants. And when we depart for Babylon +we goe a litle with our saile, and the voyage is 38. or 40. dayes long, but +we were 50. dayes on it. When we came to Babylon we stayed there 4. +moneths, vntill the Carouan was ready to go ouer the wildernes, or desert +for Alepo; in this city we were 6. Marchants that accompanied together, +fiue Venetians and a Portugal: whose names were as followeth, Messer +Florinasa with one of his kinsmen, Messer Andrea de Pola, the Portugal and +M. Francis Berettin and I, and so wee furnished our selues with victuals +and beanes for our horses for 40. dayes; [Marginal note: An order how to +prouide to goe ouer the Desert from Babylon to Alepo.] and wee bought +horses and mules, for that they bee very good cheape there, I my selfe +bought a horse there for 11. akens, and solde him after in Alepo for 30. +duckets. Also we bought a Tent which did vs very great pleasure: we had +also amongst vs 32. Camels laden with marchandise: for the which we paid 2. +duckets for euery camels lading, and for euery 10. camels they made 11, for +so is their vse and custome. We take also with vs 3. men to serue vs in the +voyage, which are vsed to goe in those voyages for fiue D d. a man, and are +bound to serue vs to Alepo: so that we passed very well without any +trouble: when the camels cried out to rest, our pauilion was the first that +was erected. The Carouan maketh but small iourneis about 20. miles a day, +and they set forwards euery morning before day two houres, and about two in +the afternoone they sit downe. We had great good hap in our voyage, for +that it rained: For which cause we neuer wanted water, but euery day found +good water, so that we could not take any hurt for want of water. Yet we +caried a camel laden alwayes with water for euery good respect that might +chance in the desert, so that wee had no want neither of one thing, nor +other that was to bee had in the countrey. For wee came very well furnished +of euery thing, and euery day we eat fresh mutton, because there came many +shepheards with vs with their flocks, who kept those sheepe that we bought +in Babylon, and euery marchant marked his sheepe with his owne marke, and +we gaue the shepheards a Medin, which is two pence of our money for the +keeping and feeding our sheep on the way and for killing of them. And +beside the Medin they haue the heads, the skinnes, and the intrals of euery +sheepe they kil. We sixe bought 20. sheepe, and when we came to Alepo we +had 7. aliue of them. And in the Carouan they vse this order, that the +marchants doe lende flesh one to another, because they will not cary raw +flesh with them, but pleasure one another by lending one one day and +another another day. + +[Sidenote: 36. Dayes iourney ouer the wildernes.] From Babylon to Alepo is +40. dayes iourney, of the which they make 36. dayes ouer the wildernes, in +which 36. dayes they neither see house, trees nor people that inhabite it, +but onely a plaine, and no signe of any way in the world. The Pilots goe +before, and the Carouan followeth after. And when they sit downe all the +Carouan vnladeth and sitteth downe, for they know the stations where the +wells are. I say, in 36. dayes we pass ouer the wildernesse. For when wee +depart from Babylon two dayes we passe by villages inhabited vntil we haue +passed the riuer Euphrates. And then within two dayes of Alepo we haue +villages inhabited. [Sidenote: An order how to prouide for the going to +Ierusalem.] In this Carouan there goeth alway a Captaine that doth Iustice +vnto all men: and euery night they keepe watch about the Carouan, and +comming to Alepo we went to Tripoli, whereas Master Florin, and Master +Andrea Polo, and I with a Frier, went and hired a barke to goe with vs to +Ierusalem. Departing from Tripolie, we arriued at Iaffa: from which place +in a day and a halfe we went to Ierusalem, and we gaue order to our barke +to tary for vs vntill our returne. [Sidenote: The author returned to Venice +1581.] Wee stayed in Ierusalem 14. dayes, to visite those holy places: from +whence we returned to Iaffa, and from Iaffa to Tripolie, and there wee +shipped our selues in a ship of Venice called the Bagazzana: And by the +helpe of the deuine power, we arriued safely in Venice the fift of Nouember +1581. If there be any that hath any desire to goe into those partes of +India, let him not be astonied at the troubles that I haue passed: because +I was intangled in many things: for that I went very poore from Venice with +1200. duckets imployed in marchandize, and when I came to Tripolie, I fell +sicke in the house of Master Regaly Oratio, and this man sent away my goods +with a small Carouan that went from Tripolie to Alepo, and the Carouan was +robd, and all my goods lost sauing foure chests of glasses which cost me +200. duckets, of which glasses I found many broken: because the theeues +thinking it had bene other marchandize, brake them vp, and seeing they were +glasses they let them all alone. And with this onely stocke I aduentured to +goe into the Indies: And thus with change and rechange, and by diligence in +my voyage, God did blesse and helpe mee, so that I got a good stocke. I +will not be vnmindfull to put them in remembrance, that haue a desire to +goe into those parts, how they shall keepe their goods, and giue them to +their heires at the time of their death, [Marginal note: A very good order +that they haue in those Countreys for the recouering of the goods of the +dead.] and howe this may be done very securely. In all the cities that the +Portugales haue in the Indies, there is a house called the schoole of +Sancta misericordia comissaria: the gouernours whereof, if you giue them +for their paines, will take a coppy of your will and Testament, which you +must alwayes cary about you; and chiefly when you go into the Indies. In +the countrey of the Moores and Gentiles, in those voyages alwayes there +goeth a Captaine to administer Iustice to all Christians of the Portugales. +Also this captaine hath authoritie to recouer the goods of those Marchants +that by chance die in those voyages, and they that haue not made their +Wills and registred them in the aforesayde schooles, the Captaines wil +consume their goods in such wise, that litle or nothing will be left for +their heires and friends. Also there goeth in these same voyages some +marchants that are commissaries of the schoole of Sancta misericordia, that +if any Marchant die and haue his Will made, and hath giuen order that the +schoole of Misericordia shall haue his goods and sell them, then they sende +the money by exchange to the schoole of Misericordia in Lisbone, with that +copie of his Testament, then from Lisbon they giue intelligence thereof, +into what part of Christendome soeuer it be, and the heires of such a one +comming thither, with testimoniall that they be heires, they shall receiue +there the value of his goods: in such wise that they shall not loose any +thing. But they that die in the kingdome of Pegu loose the thirde part of +their goods by antient custome of the Countrey, that if any Christian dieth +in the kingdome of Pegu, the king and his officers rest heires of a thirde +of his goods, and there hath neuer bene any deceit or fraude vsed in this +matter. I haue knowen many rich men that haue dwelled in Pegu, and in their +age they haue desired to go into their owne Countrey to die there, and haue +departed with al their goods and substance without let or troubles. + +[Sidenote: Order of apparel in Pegu.] In Pegu the fashion of their apparel +is all one, as well the noble man as the simple: the onely difference is in +the finenes of the cloth, which is cloth of Bombast one finer then another, +and they weare their apparell in this wise: First a white Bombast cloth +which serueth for a shirt, then they gird another painted bombast cloth of +foureteene brases, which they binde vp betwixt their legges, and on their +heads they weare a small tock of three braces, made in guize of a myter, +and some goe without tocks, and cary (as it were) a hiue on their heades, +which doeth not passe the lower part of his eare, when it is lifted vp: +they goe all bare footed, but the Noble men neuer goe on foote, but are +caried by men in a seate with great reputation, with a hat made of the +leaues of a tree to keepe him from the raine and Sunne, or otherwise they +ride on horsebacke with their feete bare in the stirops. [Sidenote: The +order of the womens apparel in Pegu.] All sorts of women whatsoeuer they +be, weare a smocke downe to the girdle, and from the girdle downewards to +the foote they weare a cloth of three brases, open before; so straite that +they cannot goe, but they must shewe their secret as it were aloft, and in +their going they faine to hide it with their hand, but they cannot by +reason of the straitnes of their cloth. They say that this vse was inuented +by a Queene to be an occasion that the sight thereof might remoue from men +the vices against nature, which they are greatly giuen vnto; which sight +should cause them to regard women the more. Also the women goe bare footed, +their armes laden with hoopes of golde and Iewels: And their fingers full +of precious rings, with their haire rolled vp about their heads. Many of +them weare a cloth about their shoulders instead of a cloake. + +Now to finish that which I haue begunne to write, I say, that those parts +of the Indies are very good, because that a man that hath litle, shall make +a great deale thereof; alwayes they must gouerne themselues that they be +taken for honest men. For why? to such there shal neuer want helpe to doe +wel, but he that is vicious, let him tary at home and not go thither, +because he shall alwayes be a beggar, and die a poore man. + + * * * * * + +The money and measures of Babylon, Balsara, and the Indies, with the + customes, &c. written from Aleppo in Syria, An. 1584. by M. Will. Barret. + +BABYLON: + +The weight, measure, and money currant there, and the customes of +marchandize. + +A Mana of Babylon is of Aleppo 1 roue 5 ounces and a halfe: and 68 manas +and three seuenth parts, make a quintall of Aleppo, which is 494 li. 8 +ounces of London: and 100 manas is a quintall of Babylon, which maketh in +Aleppo 146 roues, and of London 722 li. and so much is the sayd quintall: +but the marchants accord is by so much the mana, and in the sayd place they +bate the tare in all sorts of commodities, according to the order of Aleppo +touching the tare. + +The measure of Babylon is greater then that of Aleppo 21 in the 100. For +bringing 100 pikes of any measurable ware from Aleppo thither, there is +found but 82 pikes in Babylon, so that the 100 pikes of Babylon is of +Aleppo l2l pikes, very litle lesse. + +The currant mony of Babylon are Saies, which Say is 5 medines, as in +Aleppo, and 40 medines being 8 Saies make a duckat currant, and 47 medines +passe in value as the duckat of gold of Venice, and the dollars of the best +sort are worth 33 medines. The roials of plate are sold by the 100 drams at +prise, according as they be in request: but amongst the marchants they +bargaine by the 100 metrals, which are 150 drams of Aleppo, which 150 drams +are 135 single roials of plate: but in the mint or castle, they take them +by the 100 drams, which is 90 roials of plate, and those of the mint giue 5 +medines lesse in each 100 drams then they are woorth to be sold among the +marchants, and make paiment at the terme of 40 dayes in Sayes. + +The custome in Babylon, as wel inward as outward, is in this maner: Small +wares at 6 per 100, Coral and amber at 5 and a halfe per 100, Venice cloth, +English cloth, Kersies, Mockairs, Chamblets, Silks, Veluets, Damasks, +Sattins and such like at 5 per 100: and they rate the goods without reason +as they lust themselues. The Toafo, Boabo, and other exactions 6 medines +per bale, all which they pay presently in ready mony, according to the +custome and vse of the emperor. + +To the Ermin of the mint the ordinarie vse is to giue 30 Saies in curtesie, +otherwise he would by authoritie of his office come aboord, and for +despight make such search in the barke, that he would turne all things +topsie teruie. + + +BALSARA: + +The weight, measure, and money in the citie of Balsara. + +A Mana of Balsara answereth 5 roues 2 ounces and a halfe of Aleppo weight, +and 19 manas and one 4 part of Balsara, answereth the quintall of Aleppo, +which is 494 roues, 8 ounces English, and 20 manas is the quintall of +Balsara, which is 104 Alepine, and of London 514 li. 8. ounces, and so much +is the sayd quintall, but the marchants bargaine at so much the mana or +wolsene (which is all one) and they abate the tare in euery mana, as the +sort of spice is, and the order taken therefore in that place. + +The measure of Balsara is called a pike, which is iust as the measure of +Babylon, to say, 100 pikes of Balsara make of Aleppo 121 pikes, vt supra in +the rate of Babylon. + +The currant mony of Balsara is as foloweth. There is a sort of flusses of +copper called Estiui, whereof 12 make a mamedine, which is the value of one +medine Aleppine, the said mamedine is of siluer, hauing the Moresco stampe +on both sides, and two of these make a danine, which is 2 medines Aleppine. + +The said danine is of siluer, hauing the Turkesco stampe on both sides, and +2 and a halfe of these make a Saie, which is in value as the Saie of +Aleppo. + +The said Saie is of the similitude and stampe of Aleppo, being (as +appeares) 60 estiues. Also one Say and 20 estiues make a larine, which is +of Aleppo money 6 medines and a halfe. + +The sayd larine is a strange piece of money, not being round as all other +currant money in Christianitie, but is a small rod of siluer of the +greatnesse of the pen of a goose feather, wherewith we vse to write, and in +length about one eight part thereof, which is wrested, so that the two ends +meet at the iust halfe part, and in the head thereof is a stampe Turkesco, +and these be the best currant money in all the Indias, and 6 of these +larines make a duckat, which is 40 medines or eight Saies of Aleppo. + +The duckat of gold is woorth there 7 larines, and one danine, which is of +Aleppo money 48 medines and a halfe. + +The Venetian money is worth larines 88 per hundred meticals which is 150 +drams of Aleppo, vt supra. + +The roials of plate are worth 88 larines by the 100 meticals, and albeit +among the marchants they sel by the 100 meticals, yet in the mint or +castle, they sel by the 100 drams, hauing there lesse then the worth 5 +medines in each hundred drams, and haue their paiment in 40 dayes made them +in Saies or larines. + +The custome of the said places, aswell inward as outward, are alike of all +sorts of goods, to say 6 by the 100, and Toafo, Boabo, and scriuan medines +6 by the bale inward and outward, to say, 3 inward, and as much outward: +but whoso leaueth his goods in the custome house paieth nothing, where +otherwise at the taking thereof away, he should pay 3 med. by the bale, and +of the said goods there is no other duty to pay, and this commeth to passe +when the customers esteeme the goods too high. For in such a case they may +be driuen to take so much commoditie as the custome amounteth to, and not +to pay them in money, for such is the order from the Grand Signior. + +Hauing paid the custome, it behoueth to haue a quittance or cocket sealed +and firmed with the customers hand, in confirmation of the dispatch and +clearing, and before departure thence, to cause the sayd customer to cause +search to be made, to the end that at the voiages returne there be no +cauilation made, as it oftentimes happeneth. + +Note that 100 meticals of Balsara weigh 17 ounces and a halfe sottile +Venetian, and of Aleppo drams 150, vt supra. + +The fraight of the barkes from Ormuz to Balsara, I would say from Balsara +to Ormuz, they pay according to the greatnesse thereof. To say, for cariage +of 10 cares 180 larines, those of 15 cares 270 larines, those of 20 cares +360 larines, those of 30 cares 540 larines. Note that a cara is 4 quintals +of Balsara. They pay also to the pilot of the bark for his owne cariage one +care, and to all the rest of the mariners amongst them 3. cares fraight, +which is in the whole 4 cares, and paying the abouesayd prises and +fraights, they are at no charges of victuals with them, but it is requisite +that the same be declared in the charter partie, with the condition that +they lade not aboord one rotilo more then the fraight, vnder paines that +finding more in Ormuz, it is forfeit, and besides that to pay the fraight +of that which they haue laden. + +And in this accord it behoueth to deale warilie, and in the presence of the +Ermin or some other honest man (whereof there are but few) for they are the +worst people in all Arabia. And this diligence must be put in execution, to +the end the barks may not be ouerladen, because they are to passe many +sands betwixt Balsara and Ormuz. + + +ORMVZ: + +The weight, measure, and money currant in the kingdom of Ormuz: + +Spices and drugs they weigh by the bar, and of euery sort of goods the +weight is different. To say, of some drugs 3 quintals, and 3 erubi or +roues, and other some 4 quintals 25 rotiloes, and yet both is called a +barre, which barre, as well as great as litle, is 20 frasoli, and euery +frasoll is 10 manas, and euery mana 23 chiansi, and euery chianso 10 +meticals and a halfe. [Sidenote: What a rotilo is.] Note that euery +quintall maketh 4 erubi or roues, and euery roue 32 rotiloes, and euery +rotilo 16 ounces, and euery ounce 7 meticals, so that the quintall commeth +to be 128 rotiloes, which is Aleppine 26 rotiloes and one third part, which +is 132 li. English weight. And contrarywise the quintal of Aleppo (which is +494 rotiloes 8 ounces English) maketh 477 rotiloes and a halfe of Ormuz, +which is 3 quintals 2 roues, 29 rotiloes and a halfe. + +Note that there are bars of diuers weights, vt supra, of which they +bargaine simply, according to the sort of commoditie, but if they bargaine +of the great barre, the same is 7 quintals and 24 rotiloes, which is 958 +li. 9 ounces of London weight, and of Aleppo 193 rotiloes and a halfe. + +Touching the money of Ormuz, they bargaine in marchandize at so many leches +by the barre, which lech is 100 Asaries, and maketh larines 100 and a +halfe, which maketh pardaos 38, and larines one halfe, at larines 5 by the +pardao. One asarie is sadines 10, and euery sadine is 100. danarie. + +The larine is worth 5 sadines and one fourth part, so that the sadine is +worth of Aleppo mony 1 medine and 1 fourth part, and the larine as in +Balsara worth of Aleppo mony 6 medines and a half. + +The pardao is 5 larines of Balsara. + +There is also stamped in Ormuz a seraphine of gold, which is litle and +round, and is worth 24 sadines, which maketh 30 medines of Aleppo. + +The Venetian mony is worth in Ormuz larines 88 per 100 meticals, and the +roials are worth larines 86 lesse one sadine, which is euery thousand +meticals, 382 asures: but those that will not sel them, vse to melt them, +and make them so many larines in the king of Ormuz his mint, whereby they +cleare 2 per 100, and somewhat more: and this they doe because neither +Venetian money nor roials run as currant in Ormuz, per aduise. + +The measure of Ormuz is of two sorts, the one called codo which increaseth +vpon the measure of Aleppo 3 per 100, for bringing 100 pikes of any +measurable wares from Aleppo to Ormuz, it is found in Ormuz to be 103 +codes. Also these measures of Ormuz increase vpon those of Balsara and +Babylon 25 and two third parts per 100: for bringing 100 pikes of any +measurable wares from Balsara or Babylon, there is found in Ormuz 125 codes +and two third parts. + +The other measure is called a vare, which was sent from the king of +Portugall to the India, by which they sell things of small value, which +measure is of 5 palmes or spans, and is one code and two third parts, so +that buying 100 codes of any measurable wares, and returning to measure it +by the sayd vare, there are found but 60 vares, contrarywise 100 vares make +166 codes and two third parts. + +Note that al such ships as lade horses in Ormuz for Goa or any other place +of India, lading 10 horses or vpwards, in what places soeuer the said +horses be taken a shore in the India, the marchandize which is to be +discharged out of that ship wherein the said horses come, are bound to pay +no custome at all, but if they lade one horse lesse then ten, then the +goods are bound to pay the whole custome. And this law was made by Don +Emanuel king of Portugall, but it is to be diligently foreseene, whither +all those horses laden be bound to pay the king his custome: for many times +by the king of Portugall his commandement, there is fauour shewed to the +king of Cochin his brother in armes, so that his horses that come in the +same ship, are not to answere custome. As for example: If there were 4 +horses laden in one ship, all which were to pay custome to the king, and +one other of the king of Cochins which were not to pay any custome, the +same causeth all the marchandize of that ship to be subiect to pay custome, +per aduise. But if they lade ten horses vpon purpose to pay the king his +custome in Goa, and in the voyage any of them should die in that case, if +they bring the taile of the dead horse to the custome in Goa, then the +marchandize is free from all custome, because they were laden in Ormuz to +pay custome in Goa. Moreouer, if the horses should die before the midst of +the voyage, they pay no custome at all, and if they die in the midst of the +voyage, then they pay halfe custome, but if any horse die after the mid +voiage, they pay custome no lesse than if they arriue safe. +Notwithstanding, the marchandize (whether the said horses die before or in +the mid voyage or after the mid voiage) are free from all custome. + +The custome of Ormuz is eleuen in the 100, to say, 10 for the king, and 1 +for the arming of the foists: but for small wares as glasses, and looking +glasses of all sorts, and such like, made for apparell, pay no custome. But +cloth of Wooll, Karsies, Mockaires, Chamlets, and all sortes of Silke, +Saffron, and such like, pay custome, being esteemed reasonably. + +There is also another custome, which they call caida, which is, that one +bringing his goods into Ormuz, with purpose to send the same further into +India, the same are bound to pay 3 by the 100, but none other are bound to +pay this custome, except the Armenians, Moores, and Iewes: for the +Portugals and Venetians pay nothing thereof. + +Note that in Ormuz they abate tare of all sorts of commodities, by an order +obserued of custome. + +The fraight from Ormuz to Chaul, Goa, and Cochin, is as followeth: +Mokaires, larines 6 per table of 60 pikes. Aquariosa 8 larines by ordinarie +chist, raisins 10 by chist, which is a quintall of roues 128. Ruuia of +Chalangi larines 10 per quintall, glasses larines 8 per chist, of 4 foote +and a halfe, glasses in great chists 14 and 15 larines by chist. Small +wares larines 12 by chist of fiue foot. Tamari for Maschat sadines 2 and a +half, and 3 by the fardle. Tamarie for Diu and Chaul 4 sadines, and 4 and a +halfe by bale. Other drugs and things which come from Persia pay according +to the greatnesse of the bales. + +The fraight mentioned, they pay as appeareth, when they ship the sayd goods +in ships where horses goe: otherwise not hauing horses, they pay somewhat +lesse, because of the custom which they are to pay. + +The vse of the India ships is, that the patrones thereof are not at any +charge neither with any passenger, not yet with any mariner in the ship, +but that euery one at the beginning of the voyage doe furnish to maintaine +his owne table (if he will eate) and for drinke they haue a great iarre of +water, which is garded with great custodie. + + +GOA. + +The weight, measure, and mony currant in Goa. + +The quintall of Goa is 5 manas, and 8 larines, and the mana is 24 rotilos, +so that the quintall of Goa is 128 rot. and euery rot. is 16 ounces, which +is of Venice weight 1 li. and a halfe, so that the quintall of Goa is 192 +li. sotile Venice, which is 26 rotiloes 8 ounces Aleppine, and of London +weight 132 li. English, as the weight of Ormuz. + +All the marchandize, spices and drugs, are sold by this quintal, except +some drugs, as lignum de China, Galanga, and others, whereof they bargaine +at so much per candill, aduertising that there be two sorts of candill, one +of 16 manas, the other of 20 manas, that of 16 manas commeth to be iust 3 +quintals, and that of 26 manas, 3 quintals, 3 roues. Note that 4 roues make +a quintall, and the roue is 32 rotiloes, as in Ormuz. + +There is also another weight which they call Marco, which is eight ounces +or halfe a rotilo of Goa, and 9 ounces of Venice sotile: with this they +weigh amber, corall, muske, ambracan, ciuet, and other fine wares. + +There is also another sort of weight called Mangiallino, which is 5 graines +of Venice weight and therewith they weigh diamants and other iewels. + +[Sidenote: Muske of Tartarie by the way of China.] Note that in Goa they +vse not to abate any tare of any goods, except of sacks or wraps, and +therefore it requireth great aduisement in buying of the goods, especially +in the muske of Tartaria which commeth by way of China in bladders, and so +weigh it without any tare rebating. + +The measure of Goa is called a tode, which encreaseth vpon the measure of +Babylon and Balsara after the rate of 17 and one eight part by the 100, so +that bringing 100 pikes of any measurable ware from thence to Goa, it is +found 117 pikes 7 eight parts, and bringing 100 codes from Ormuz to Goa, +there is found but 93 codes and one fourth part. + +There is also the vare in Goa, which is iust as the vare of Ormuz, and +therewith they measure onely things that are of small value. + +For the mony of Goa, there is a kind of mony made of lead and tin mingled, +being thicke and round, and stamped on the one side with a spheare or globe +of the world, and on the other side two arrowes and 5 rounds: and this kind +of mony is called Basaruchi, and 15 of these make a vinton of naughty mony, +and 5 vintons make a tanga, and 4 vintenas make a tanga of base money: so +that the tanga of base mony is 60 basaruchies, and the tanga of good mony +75. basaruchies, and 5 tangas make a seraphine of gold, which in +merchandize is worth 5 tangas good money: but if one would change them into +basaruchies, he may haue 5 tangas, and 16 basaruchies, which ouerplus they +cal cerafagio, and when they bargain of the pardaw of gold, each pardaw is +ment to be 6 tangas good mony, but in merchandise they vse not to demaund +pardawes of gold in Goa, except it be for iewels and horses, for all the +rest they take of seraphines of siluer, per aduiso. + +The roials of plate, I say, the roial of 8 are worth per custome and +commandement of the king of Portugall 400 reies, and euery rey is one +basaruchie and one fourth part, which maketh tangas 6, and 53 basaruchies +as their iust value, but for that the said roials are excellent siluer and +currant in diuers places of the India, and chiefly in Malacca, when the +ships are to depart at their due times (called Monsons) euery one to haue +the said roials pay more then they are worth, and the ouerplus, as is +abouesaid they call serafagio. And first they giue the iust value of the +100 roials of 8, at 5 tangas 50 basaruchies a piece, which done, they giue +seraphins 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, vntill 22 by the 100, according as +they are in request. + +The ducket of gold is worth 9 tangas and a halfe good money, and yet not +stable in price, for that when the ships depart from Goa to Cochin, they +pay them at 9 tangas and 3 fourth partes, and 10 tangas, and that is the +most that they are woorth. + +The larines are woorth by iust value basaruchies 93 and 3 fourth parts, and +4 larines make a seraphine of siluer, which is 5 tangas of good money, and +these also haue serafagion of 6, 7, 8, 10, vntill 16, by the hundred, for +when the ships depart for the North, to say, for Chaul, Diu, Cambaia, or +Bassaim, all cary of the same, because it is money more currant then any +other. + +There is also a sort of seraphins of gold of the stampe of Ormuz, whereof +there are but fewe in Goa, but being there, they are woorth fiue larines +and somewhat more, according as they are in request. + +There is also another litle sort of mony, round, hauing on the one side a +crosse, and on the other side a crowne, which is woorth one halfe a tanga +of good money, and another of the same stampe lesse than that which they +call Imitiuo de buona moneda, which is worth 18 basaruches 3 fourth parts a +piece. + +Note that if a man bargaine in marchandize, it behooueth to demaund tangas +of good money: for by nominating tangas onely, is vnderstood to be base +money of 60 basaruches, which wanteth of the good money vt supra. + +The custome of Goa is 8 in the 100 inwards, and as much outward, and the +goods are esteemed iustly rather to the marchants aduantage then the kings. +The custome they pay in this order. Comming with a ship from Ormuz to Goa +without horses, they pay 8 in the 100 whether they sell part or all, but if +they would carie of the sayd marchandise to any other place, they pay none +other custome, except others buy it and carie it foorth of the countrey, +and then they pay it 8 in the 100. And if one hauing paied the custome +should sell to another with composition to passe it forth as for his proper +accounts to saue the custome, this may not be, because the seller is put to +his oth, whether he send the goods for his owne account, or for the account +of any others that haue bought the same, and being found to the contrary +they pay custome as abouesaid. And in this order the marchants pay of all +the goods which come from any part of the Indies. But if they come from +Ormuz to Goa with horses, they are not subiect to pay any custome inward, +notwithstanding if they send all or any part thereof for any other place, +or returne it to Ormuz, they pay the custome outward, although they could +not sell. + +They vse also in Goa amongst the common sort to bargaine for coales, wood, +lime, and such like, at so many braganines, accounting 24 basaruches for +one braganine, albeit there is no such mony stamped. The custome of the +Portugals is, that any Moore or Gentile, of what condition or state soeuer +he be, may not depart from Goa to go within the land, without licence of +certaine deputies deputed for that office, who (if they be Moores or +Gentiles) doe set a seale vpon the arme, hauing thereon the armes of +Portugal, to be knowen of the porters of the citie, whether they haue the +said licence or no. + + +COCHIN. + +The weight, measure, and money, currant in Cochin. + +All the marchandise which they sell or buy within the sayd citie, they +bargaine for at so many serafines per quintal, which is 128. rotilos of +iust weight, with the quintal and rotilo of Goa and Ormuz: aduertising that +there are diuers sorts of bars according to the sorts of commodities, and +in traffiquing, they reason at so much the bar. Note that there are bars of +3 quintals and 3 quintals and halfe, and 4 quintals. They abate a vsed tare +of all marchandize, according to the sort of goods, and order taken for the +same. + +The measure of Goa and Cochin are all one. + +The money of Cochin are all the same sorts which are currant in Goa, but +the duckat of gold in value is 10 tangas of good money. + +The custome of Cochin as wel inward as outward for all strangers is eight +in the hundred, but those that haue bene married foure yeere in the +countrey pay but foure in the hundred, per aduiso. + + +MALACCA. + +The weight, measure, and money of Malacca. + +For the marchandise bought and sold in the citie they reckon at so much the +barre, which barre is of diuers sorts, great and small, according to the +ancient custome of the said citie, and diuersitie of the goods. But for the +cloues they bargaine at so much the barre, which barre is 3 quintals, 2 +roues and 10 rotilos. As I haue abouesaid, all kind of drugs haue their +sorts of barres limited. Note that euery quintal is 4 roues, and euery roue +32 rotilos, which is 128 rotilos the quintall, the which answereth to +Aleppo 95 rotilos, and to London 472 li. per quintal. + +The measures of Malacca are as the measures of Goa. In Malacca they abate +tare according to their distinction and agreement, for that there is no +iust tare limited. + +For the money of Malacca, the least money currant is of tinne stamped with +the armes of Portugall, and 12 of these make a Chazza. + +The Chazza is also of tinne with the said armes, and 2. of these make a +challaine. + +The Challaine is of tinne with the said armes, and 40 of these make a tanga +of Goa good money, but not stamped in Malacca. + +There is also a sort of siluer money which they call Patachines, and is +worth 6 tangas of good money, which is 360 reyes, and is stamped with two +letters, S. T. which is S. Thomas on the one side, and the armes of +Portugall on the other side. + +There is also a kind of mony called Cruzados stamped with the +atmes of Portugall, and is worth 6 tangas good mony, the larines +are euery 9 of them worth 2 cruzados, which is 12 tangas good +mony, and these larines be of those which are stamped in Balsara +and Ormuz. + +The roials of 8 they call Pardaos de Reales, and are worth 7 tangas of good +money. + +The custome of Malacca is 10 in the 100 as wel inward as outward, and those +which pay the custome inwards, if in case they send the same goods for any +other place within terme of a yeere and a day, pay no custome for the same. + + +A note of charges from Aleppo to Goa, as foloweth. + +For camels from Aleppo to Birrha. Medines 60 per somme.[A] +For mules from Aleppo to Birrha, med. 45. per somme. +For custome at Birrha, med. 10. per somme. +For Auania of the Cady at Birrha, med. 200. +For 4 dishes raisins, and 20 pounds sope, med. 35. +For a present to the Ermine the summe of med. 400. +For a barke of 30 or 35 sommes. Duc. 60 is med. 2400. per barke. +For meat for the men the summe of med. 200. +For custome at Racca the summe of med. 5. per somme. +For 3 platters of raisins, and 15 pounds of sope, med. 25. +For custome to king Aborissei, Duc. 20 is med. 800 +For custome at Dea the summe of med. 230. per barke +For 4 dishes raisins, and 20 pounds of sope, med. 35. +For custom at Bosara, the summe of med. 10. per barke. +For 2 dishes raisins, and 10 pound of sope, med. 17. +For custome in Anna, in 10 per summe, med. 10. per somme. +For 4 dishes of raisins and 20 pound of sope, med. 35. +For custome in Adite, medines 10 per barke, med. 10. per barke. +For 2 dishes raisins, and 10 pound of sope, med. 17. +For custome at Gweke, med. 10. per barke. +For 2 dishes raisins, and 20 pound of sope, med. 17. +For custome at Ist, med. 10. per somme. +For 4 platters raisins, and 20 pound of sope, med. 35. +Charges of presents at Felugia, med. 30. +For camels from Felugia to Babylon, med. 30. per somme. +For custome in Babylon, as in the booke appeareth. +For a barke from Babylon to Balsara, med. 900. +For custome of small wares, at Corno med. 20. per somme. +For custome of clothes at Corno, the summe of med. per somme. +For 3 dishes raisins, and 20 pound of sope, med. 26. +For fraight from Balsara to Ormus, according to the greatnesse, as in this + booke appeareth. +For custome in Ormus, as is abouesaid in this booke. +For fraight from Ormus to Goa, as is in this booke shewed. +For custome in Goa, as is abouesaid. + +[A: Or, by the Camels burden.] + + +A declaration of the places from whence the goods subscribed doe come. + +Cloues, from Maluco, Tarenate, Amboina, by way of Iaua. +Nutmegs, from Banda. +Maces from Banda, Iaua, and Malacca. +Pepper Gawrie, from Cochin. +Pepper common from Malabar. +Sinnamon, from Seilan. +Tinne, from Malacca. +Sandals wilde, from Cochin. +Sandales domestick, from Malacca. +Verzini, from S. Thomas, and from China. +Spicknard from Zindi, and Lahor. +Quicksiluer, from China. +Galls, from Cambaia, Bengala, Istria and Syria. +Ginger Dabulin, from Dabul. +Ginger Belledin, from the Countrie within Cambaia. +Gmger Sorattin, from Sorat within Cambaia. +Ginger Mordassi, from Mordas within Cambaia. +Ginger Meckin, from Mecca. +Mirabolans of all sorts, from Cambaia. +White sucket, from Zindia, Cambaia, and China. +Corcunia, from diuers places of India. +Corall of Leuant, from Malabar. +Chomin, from Balsara. +Requitria, from Arabia Felix. +Garble of Nutmegs from Banda. +Sal Armoniacke, from Zindi and Cambaia. +Zedoari, from diuers places of India. +Cubeb, from China. +Amomum, from China. +Camphora, from Brimeo neere to China. +Myrrha, from Arabia Felix. +Costo dulce, from Zinde, and Cambaia. +Borazo, from Cambaia, and Lahor. +Asa fetida, from Lahor. +Waxe, from Bengala. +Seragni, from Persia. +Cassia, from Cambaia, and from Gran Cayro. +Storax calamita, from Rhodes, to say, from Aneda, and Canemarie within + Caramania. +Storax liquida, from Rhodes. +Tutia, from Persia. +Cagiers, from Malabar, and Maldiua. +Ruuia to die withall, from Chalangi. +Alumme di Rocca, from China, and Constantinople. +Chopra, from Cochin and Malabar. +Oppopanax, from Persia. +Lignum Aloes, from Cochin, China, and Malacca. +Demnar, from Siacca and Blinton. +Galangæ, from China, Chaul, Goa, and Cochin. +Laccha, from Pegu, and Balaguate. +Carabbe, from Almanie. +Coloquintida, from Cyprus. +Agaricum, from Alemania. +Scamonea, from Syria, and Persia. +Bdellium, from Arabia felix, and Mecca. +Cardamomum small, from Barcelona. +Cardamomum great, from Bengala. +Tamarinda, from Balsara. +Aloe Secutrina, from Secutra. +Aloe Epatica, from Pat. +Safran, from Balsara, and Persia. +Lignum de China, from China. +Rhaponticum, from Persia, and Pugia. +Thus, from Secutra. +Turpith, from Diu, and Cambaia. +Nuts of India, from Goa, and other places of India. +Nux vomica, from Malabar. +Sanguis Draconis, from Secutra. +Armoniago, from Persia. +Spodio di Cana, from Cochin. +Margaratina, from Balaguate. +Muske from Tartarie, by way of China. +Ambracban, from Melinde, and Mosombique. +Indico, from Zindi and Cambaia. +Silkes fine, from China. +Long pepper, from Bengala and Malacca. +Latton, from China. +Momia, from the great Cayro. +Belzuinum Mandolalo, from Sian, and Baros. +Belzuinum burned, from Bonnia. +Castorium, from Almania. +Corallina, from the red sea. +Masticke, from Sio. +Mella, from Romania. +Oppium, from Pogia, and Cambaia. +Calamus Aromaticus, from Constantinople. +Capari, from Alexandria and other places. +Dates, from Arabia felix and Alexandria. +Dictamnum album, from Lombardia. +Draganti, from Morea. +Euphorbium, from Barbaria. +Epithymum, from Candia. +Sena, from Mecca. +Gumme Arabike, from Zaffo. +Grana, from Coronto. +Ladanum, from Cyprus and Candia. +Lapis lazzudis, from Persia. +Lapis Zudassi, from Zaffetto. +Lapis Spongij is found in sponges. +Lapis Hæmatites, from Almanie. +Manna, from Persia. +Auripigmentum, from manie places of Turkie. +Pilatro, from Barbaria. +Pistaches, from Doria. +Worme-seede, from Persia. +Sumack, from Cyprus. +Sebesten, from Cyprus. +Galbanum from Persia. +Dente d'Abolio, from Melinde, and Mosambique. +Folium Indicum, from Goa, and Cochin. +Diasprum viride, from Cambaia. +Petra Bezzuar, from Tartaria. +Sarcacolla, from Persia. +Melleghete, from the West parts. +Sugo di Requillicie, from Arabia felix. +Chochenillo, from the West India. +Rubarbe, from Persia, and China. + + +The times or seasonable windes called Monsons, wherein the ships depart + from place to place in the East Indies. + +Note that the Citie of Goa is the principall place of all the Orientall +India, and the winter there beginneth the 15 of May with very great raine, +and so continueth till the first of August, so that during that space, no +shippe can passe ouer the barre of Goa, because through the continuall +shoures of raine all the sandes ioyne together neere vnto a mountaine +called Oghane, and all these sandes being ioyned together, runne into the +shoales of the barre and port of Goa, and can haue no other issue, but to +remaine in that port, and therefore it is shut vp vntill the first of +August, but at the 10 of August it openeth by reason of the raine which +ceaseth, and the sea doeth then scoure the sands away againe. + + +The monson from Goa to the Northward, to say, for Chaul, Diu, Cambaia, + Daman, Basaim, and other places. + +The ships depart from betwixt the tenth and 24 of August, for the Northward +places abouesayde, and to these places they may saile all times of the +yeere, except in the winter, which beginneth and endeth at the times +abouesaid. + + +The monson from the North parts, for Goa. + +The ships depart from Chaul, Diu, Cambaia, and other places Northwards for +Goa, betwixt the 8 and 15 of Ianuarie, and come to Goa about the end of +Februarie. + + +The first monson from Diu for the straight of Mecca. + +The ships depart from Diu about the 15 of Ianuarie, and returne from the +straights to Diu in the moneth of August. + + +The second monson from Diu for the straight of Mecca. + +The ships depart betwixt the 25 and first of September, and returne from +the straights to Diu, the first and 15 of May. + + +The monson from Secutra for Ormus. + +The ships depart about the tenth of August for Ormus: albeit Secutra is an +Iland and hath but few ships, which depart as abouesaid. + + +The monson wherein the Moores of the firme land come to Goa. + +About the fifteenth of September the Moores of the firme lande beginne to +come to Goa, and they come from all parts, as well from Balaguate, +Bezenegar, as also from Sudalacan, and other places. + + +The monson wherein the Moores of the firme land depart from Goa. + +They depart from Goa betwixt the 10 and 15 day of Nouember. Note that by +going for the North is ment the departing from Goa, for Chaul, Diu, +Cambaia, Daman, Basaim, Ghassain, and other places vnto Zindi: and by the +South is vnderstood, departing from Goa, for Cochin, and all that coast +vnto Cape Comori. + + +The first monson from Goa for Ormus. + +The shippes depart in the moneth of October from Goa, for Ormus, passing +with Easterly windes along the coast of Persia. + + +The second monson from Goa to Ormus. + +The ships depart about the 20 of Ianuarie passing by the like nauigation +and windes as in the first monson, and this is called of the Portugals and +Indians Entremonson. + + +The third monson from Goa to Ormus. + +The ships depart betwixt the 25 of March, and 6 of Aprill, hauing Easterly +windes, till they passe Secutra, and then they find Westerly windes, and +therefore they set their course ouer for the coast of Arabia, till they +come to Cape Rasalgate and the Straight of Ormus, and this monson is most +troublesome of all: for they make two nauigations in the heigth of Seylan, +which is 6 degrees and somewhat lower. + + +The first monson from Ormus for Chaul, and Goa. + +The ships depart from Ormus for Chaul, and Goa in the moneth of September, +with North and Northeast windes. + + +The second monson from Ormus for Chaul and Goa. + +The second monson is betwixt the fiue and twentie and last of December, +with like winds as the former monson. + + +The third monson from Ormus for Chaul and Goa. + +The third monson the ships depart from Ormus, for Chaul and Goa, betwixt +the first and 15. of April, and they saile with Southeast windes, East and +Northeast windes, coasting vpon the Arabia side from Cape Mosandon vnto +Cape Rasalgate, and hauing lost the sight of Cape Rasalgate, they haue +Westerly windes, and so come for Chaul and Goa, and if the said ships +depart not before the 25 of April, they are not then to depart that monson, +but to winter in Ormus because of the winter. + + +The first monson from Ormus for Zindi. + +The ships depart from Ormus betwixt the 15 and 26 of Aprill. + + +The second monson from Ormus for Zindi. + +The ships depart betwixt the 10 and 20 of October for Zindi from Ormus. + + +The monson from Ormus for the red sea. + +The ships depart from Ormus betwixt the first and last of Ianuarie. + + +Hitherto I haue noted the monsons of the ships departing from Goa to the + Northward: Now follow the monsons wherein the ships depart from Goa, to + the Southward. + +The Monson from Goa for Calicut, Cochin, Seilan, and all that coast. + +The ships depart from those places betwixt the 1 and 15 of August, and +there they find it nauigable all the yeere except in the winter, which +continueth as is aforesayd, from the 15 of May till the 10 of August. +[Sidenote: Note.] In like maner the ships come from these places for Goa at +euery time in the yeere except in the winter, but of all other the best +time is to come in Nouember, December and Ianuary. + + +The first monson from Goa, for Pegu. + +The ships depart from Goa, betwixt the 15 and 20 of April, and winter at S. +Thomas, and after the 5 of August, they depart from S. Thomas for Pegu. + + +The second monson from Goa, for Pegu. + +The ships depart from Goa betwixt the 8 and 24 of August, going straight +for Pegu, and if they passe the 24 of August, they cannot passe that +monson, neither is there any more monsons till April as is aforesaid. +[Sidenote: Marchandize good for Pegu.] Note that the chiefest trade is to +take money of S. Thomas rials, and patechoni, and to goe to S. Thomas, and +there to buy Tellami, which is fine cloth of India, whereof there is great +quantitie made in Coromandel, and brought thither, and other marchandise +are not good for that place except some dozen of very faire Emeraulds +orientall. For of golde, siluer, and Rubies, there is sufficient store in +Pegu. + + +The monson from Pegu for the Indies. + +The ships depart from Pegu betwixt the 15 and 25 of Ianuarie, and come to +Goa about the 25 of March, or in the beginning of April. Note, that if it +passe the 10 of May before the sayde ships be arriued in Goa, they cannot +come thither that monson, and if they haue not then fet the coast of India, +they shall with great perill fetch S. Thomas. + + +The first monson from Goa for Malacca. + +The ships depart betwixt the 15 and last of September, and arriue in +Malacca about the end of October. + + +The second monson from Goa to Malacca. + +The ships depart about the 5 of May from Goa, and arriue in Malacca about +the 15 of Iune. + + +The first monson from Malacca to Goa. + +The ships depart about the 10 of September, and come to Goa about the end +of October. + + +The second monson from Malacca to Goa. + +The ships depart from Malacca about the 10 of February, and come to Goa +about the end of March. But if the said ships should stay till the 10 of +May they cannot enter into Goa, and if at that time also they should not be +arriued at Cochin, they are forced to retume to Malacca, because the winter +and contrary windes then come vpon them. + + +The monson from Goa for China. + +The ships depart from Goa in the moneth of April. + + +The monson from China for Goa. + +The ships depart to be the 10 of May in Goa, and being not then arriued, +they turne backe to Cochin, and if they cannot fetch Cochin, they returne +to Malacca. + + +The monson from Goa to the Moluccaes. + +The ships depart about 10 or 15 of May, which time being past, the shippes +can not passe ouer the barre of Goa for the cause abouesaid. + + +The monson of the ships of the Moluccaes arriuall in Goa. + +The ships which come from the Moluccaes arriue vpon the bar of Goa about +the 15. of April. + + +The monsons of the Portingall ships for the Indies. + +[Sidenote: Note.] The ships which come from Portugall depart thence +ordinarily betwixt the tenth and fifteenth of March, comming the straight +way during the moneth of Iuly to the coast of Melinde, and Mosambique, and +from thence goe straight for Goa, and if in the moneth Iuly they should not +be at the coast of Melinde, they can in no wise that yeere fetch Melinde, +but returne to the Isle of Saint Helena, and so are not able, that time +being past, to fetch the coast of India, and to come straight for Goa. +Therefore (as is abouesaid) they returne to the Island of Saint Helena, and +if they cannot make the said Island, then they runne as lost vpon the Coast +of Guinea: but if the said ships be arriued in time vpon the coast of +Melinde, they set forwardes for Goa, and if by the fifteenth of September +they cannot fetch Goa, they then goe for Cochin, but if they see they +cannot fetch Cochin, they returne to Mosambique to winter there vpon the +sayd coast. [Sidenote: Note.] Albeit in the yeere of our Lord 1580 there +arriued the ship called San Lorenzo, being wonderfull sore sea-beaten, the +eight of October, which was accounted as a myracle for that the like had +not beene seene before. + + +The monson from India for Portugall. + +The shippes depart from Cochin betweene the fifteenth and last of Ianuary, +going on till they haue sight of Capo de buona speranza, and the Isle of +Saint Helena, which Islande is about the midway, being in sixteene degrees +to the South. And it is a litle Island being fruitfull of all things which +a man can imagine, with great store of fruit: and this Island is a great +succour to the shipping which returne for Portugall. And not long since the +said Island was found by the Portugales, and was discouered by a shippe +that came from the Indies in a great storme, in which they found such +abundance of wilde beastes, and boares, and all sort of fruite, that by +meanes thereof that poore ship which had been foure moneths at sea, +refreshed themselues both with water and meate very well, and this Island +they called S. Helena, because it was discouered vpon S. Helens day. And +vndoubtedly this Island is a great succour, and so great an ayde to the +ships of Portugall, that many would surely perish if that helpe wanted. And +therefore the king of Portugall caused a Church to be made there for +deuotion of S. Helena: where there are onely resident Eremits, and all +other are forbidden to inhabite there by the kings commaundement, to the +ende that the ships may be the more sufficiently furnished with victuals, +because the ships which come from India come but slenderly victualled, +[Sidenote: Note.] because there groweth no corne there, neither make they +any wine: but the ships which come from Portugall to the Indies touch not +in the sayd Island, because they set out being sufficiently furnished with +bread and water from Portugall for eight moneths voyage. Any other people +then the two Eremites abouesaid, cannot inhabite this Island, except some +sicke man that may be set there a shore to remaine in the Eremites +companie, for his helpe and recouery. + + +The monson from Goa to Mosambique. + +The ships depart betwixt the 10 and 15 of Ianuarie. + + +The monson from Mosambique to Goa. + +The ships depart betweene the 8 and last of August, and arriue in Chaul or +Goa in the moneth of October, till the 15 of Nouember. + + +The monson from Ormus to Bengala. + +The ships depart betwixt the 15 and 20 of Iune, and goe to winter at Teue +and depart thence about the 15 of August for Bengala. + + * * * * * + +A briefe extract specifying the certaine dayly paiments, answered quarterly + in time of peace, by the Grand Signior, out of his Treasurie, to the + Officers of his Seraglio or Court, successiuely in degrees: collected in + a yeerely totall summe, as followeth. + +For his owne diet euery day, one thousand and one aspers, according to a +former custome receiued from his auncestors: notwithstanding that otherwise +his diurnall expence is very much, and not certainly knowen, which summe +maketh sterling mony by the yere, two thousand, one hundred, 92. pounds, +three shillings, eightpence. + +The fiue and fourtie thousand Ianizaries dispersed in sundry places of his +dominions, at sixe aspers the day, amounteth by the yeere to fiue hundreth, +fourescore and eleuen thousand, and three hundreth pounds. + +The Azamoglans, tribute children, farre surmount that number, for that they +are collected from among the Christians, from whom betweene the yeeres of +sixe and twelue, they are pulled away yeerely perforce: whereof I suppose +those in seruice may be equall in number with the Ianizaries abouesayd, at +three aspers a day, one with another, which is two hundred fourescore and +fifteene thousand, sixe hundred and fiftie pounds. + +The fiue Bassas, whereof the Viceroy is supreme, at one thousand aspers the +day, besides their yerely reuenues, amounteth sterling by the yeere to ten +thousand, nine hundred and fiftie pounds. + +The fiue Beglerbegs, chiefe presidents of Greece, Hungary, and Sclauonia, +being in Europe, in Natolia, and Caramania of Asia, at one thousande aspers +the day: as also to eighteene other gouernours of Prouinces, at fiue +hundred aspers the day, amounteth by the yeere, to thirtie thousand sixe +hundred, and threescore pounds. + +The Bassa, Admirall of the Sea, one thousand aspers the day, two thousand, +one hundred foure score and ten pounds. + +The Aga of the Ianizaries, generall of the footemen, fiue hundred aspers +the day, and maketh by the yeere in sterling money, one thousand, foure +score and fifteene pounds. + +The Imbrahur Bassa, Master of his horse, one hundred and fiftie aspers the +day, is sterling money, three hundred and eight and twenty pounds. + +The chiefe Esquire vnder him, one hundred and fiftie aspers, is three +hundred and eight and twenty pounds. + +The Agas of the Spahi, Captaines of the horsemen, sixe, at one hundred and +fiftie aspers to either of them, maketh sterling, one thousand, nine +hundred, three score and eleuen pounds. + +The Capagi Bassas head porters foure, one hundred and fiftie aspers to ech, +and maketh out in sterling money by the yeere, one thousand, three hundred, +and fourteene pounds. + +The Sisinghir Bassa, Controller of the housholde, one hundred and twentie +aspers the day, and maketh out in sterling money by the yeere, two hundred, +threescore and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Chaus Bassa, Captaine of the Pensioners, one hundred and twentie aspers +the day, and amounteth to by the yeere in sterling money, two hundred, +threescore and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Capigilar Caiasi Captaine of his Barge, one hundreth and twentie aspers +the day, and maketh out by the yeere in sterling money, two hundred, +threescore and two poundes, sixteene shillings. + +The Solach Bassi, Captaine of his guard, one hundred and twentie aspers, +two hundred, three score and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Giebrigi Bassi, master of the armoury, one hundred and twentie aspers, +two hundred, three score and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Topagi Bassi, Master of the artillerie, one hundred and twentie aspers, +two hundred, three score and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Echim Bassi, Phisition to his person, one hundred and twentie aspers, +two hundred, three score and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +To fourtie Phisitions vnder him, to ech fourtie aspers, is three thousand, +eight hundred, three score and sixe pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Mustafaracas spearemen, attending on his person, in number fiue +hundred, to either three score aspers, and maketh sterling, threescore and +fiue thousand, and seuen hundred pounds. + +The Cisingeri gentlemen, attending vpon his diet, fourtie, at fourtie +aspers ech of them, and amounteth to sterling by the yeere, three thousand, +fiue hundred and foure pounds. + +The Chausi Pensioners, foure hundred and fourtie, at thirtie aspers, twenty +eight thousand, nine hundred and eight pounds. + +The Capagi porters of the Court and City, foure hundred, at eight aspers, +and maketh sterling money by the yeere, seuen thousand, and eight pounds. + +The Solachi, archers of his guard, three hundred and twenty, at nine +aspers, and commeth vnto in English money, the summe of sixe thousand, +three hundred and sixe pounds. + +The Spahi, men of Armes of the Court and the City, ten thousand, at twenty +fiue asters, and maketh of English money, fiue hundred, forty and seuen +thousand, and fiue hundred pounds. + +The Ianizaires sixteene thousand, at six aspers, is two hundred and ten +thousand, and two hundred and forty pounds. + +The Giebegi furbushers of armor, one thousand, fiue hundred, at sixe +aspers, and amounteth to sterling money, nineteene thousand, seuen hundred, +and fourescore pounds. + +The Seiesir, seruitors in his Equier or stable, fiue hundred, at two +aspers, and maketh sterling money, two thousand, one hundred, fourescore +and ten pounds. + +The Saesi, Sadlers and bit makers, five hundred, at seuen aspers, seuen +thousand, six hundred, threescore and fiue pounds. + +The Catergi, Carriers vpon Mules, two hundred, at fiue aspers, two +thousand, one hundred, fourescore and ten pounds. + +The Cinegi, Carriers vpon Camels, one thousand, fiue hundred, at eight +aspers, and amounteth in sterling money, to twenty sixe thousand, two +hundred, and fourescore pounds. + +The Reiz, or Captaines of the Gallies, three hundred, at ten aspers, and +amounteth in English money by the yeere, the summe of sixe thousand, fiue +hundred, threescore and ten pounds. + +The Alechingi, Masters of the said Gallies, three hundred, at seven aspers, +foure thousand, fiue hundred, fourescore and nineteene pounds. + +The Getti, Boateswaines thereof, three hundred, at sixe aspers, is three +thousande, nine hundred, fourty and two pounds. + +The Oda Bassi, Pursers, three hundred, at fiue aspers, maketh three +thousand two hundred, and fourescore pounds. + +The Azappi souldiers two thousand sixe hundred at foure Aspers, whereof the +six hundred do continually keepe the gallies, two and twentie thousand, +seuen hundred fourscore and six pounds. + +The Mariers Bassi masters over the shipwrights and kalkers of the navie, +nine, at 20. Aspers the piece, amounteth to three thousand fourescore and +foure pound, foure shillings. + +The Master Dassi shipwrights and kalkers, one thousand at fourteene aspers, +which amounteth by the yeere, to thirtie thousand, sixe hundred threescore +pound. + +Summa totalis of dayly paiments amounteth by the yeere sterling, one + million, nine hundred threescore eight thousand, seuen hundred thirty + fiue pounds, nineteene shillings eight pence, answered quarterly without + default, with the summe of foure hundred fourescore twelue thousand, one + hundred fourescore and foure pounds foure shillings eleven pence, and is + for every day fiue thousand three hundred, fourescore and thirteene + pounds, fifteene shillings ten pence. + +Annuities of lands neuer improued, fiue times more in value then their + summes mentioned, giuen by the saide Grand Signior, as followeth. + +To the Viceroy for his Timar or annuitie 60. thousand golde ducats. +To the second Bassa for his annuitie 50. thousand ducats. +To the third Bassa for his annuitie 40. thousand ducats. +To the fourth Bassa for his annuitie 30. thousand ducats. +To the fifth Bassa for his annuitie 20. thousand ducats. +To the Captaine of the Ianizaries 20. thousand ducats. +To the Ieu Merhorbassi master of his horse 15. thousand ducats. +To the Captaine of the pensioners 10. thousand ducats. +To the Captaine of his guard 5. thousand ducats. + +Summa totalls 90. thousand li. sterling. + +Beside these aboue specified, be sundry other annuities giuen to diuers +others of his aforesaid officers, as also to certaine called Sahims, +diminishing from three thousand to two hundred ducats, esteemed treble to +surmount the annuitie abouesaid. + + +The Turkes chiefe officers. + +The Viceroy is high Treasurer, notwithstanding that vnder him be three +subtreasurers called Teftadars, which bee accomptable to him of the +receipts out of Europe, Asia and Africa, saue their yeerely annuitie of +lands. + +The Lord Chancellor is called Nissangi Bassa, who sealeth with a certaine +proper character such licences, safe conducts, passeports, especiall +graunts, &c. as proceed from the Grand Signior: notwithstanding all letters +to forreine princes so firmed be after inclosed in a bagge, and sealed by +the Grand Signior, with a signet which he ordinarily weareth about his +necke, credited of them to haue bene of ancient appertayning to king +Salomon the wise. + +The Admirall giueth his voyce in the election of all Begs, Captaines of the +Islandes, to whom hee giueth their charge, as also appointeth the +Subbasses, Bayliffes or Constables ouer Cities and Townes vpon the Sea +coastes about Constantinople, and in the Archipelago, whereof hee reapeth +great profit. + +The Subbassi of Pera payeth him yeerely fifteene thousande ducats, and so +likewise either of the others according as they are placed. + +The Ressistop serueth in office to the Viceroy and Chancellor, as +Secretary, and so likewise doeth the Cogie Master of the Rolls, before +which two, passe all writings presented to, or granted by the said Viceroy +and Chancellor, offices of especiall credite and like profile, moreouer +rewarded with annuities of lands. + +There are also two chiefe Iudges named Cadi Lesker, the one ouer Europe, +and the other ouer Asia and Africa, which in Court doe sit on the Bench at +the left hand of the Bassas. These sell all offices to the vnder Iudges of +the land called Cadies, whereof is one in euery Citie or towne, before whom +all matters in controuersie are by iudgement decided, as also penalties and +corrections for crimes ordained to be executed vpon the offenders by the +Subbassi. + + +The number of Souldiers continually attending vpon the Beglerbegs the + gouernours of Prouinces and Saniacks, and their petie Captaines + mainteined of these Prouinces. + +The Beglerbegs of + + Græcia, fourtie thousand persons. + Buda, fifteene thousand persons. + Sclauonia, fifteene thousand persons. + Natolia, fifteene thousand persons. + Caramania, fifteene thousand persons. + Armenia, eighteene thousand persons. + Persia, twentie thousand persons. + Vsdrum, fifteene thousand persons. + Chirusta, fifteene thousand persons. + Caraemiti, thirtie thousand persons. + Gierusal, two and thirtie thousand persons. + +The Beglerbegs of + + Bagdat, fiue and twentie thousand persons. + Balsara, two and twenty thousand persons. + Lassaija, seuenteene thousand persons. + Alepo, fiue and twentie thousand persons. + Damasco, seuenteene thousand persons. + Cayro, twelue thousand persons. + Abes, twelue thousand persons. + Mecca, eight thousand persons. + Cyprus, eighteene thousand persons. + Tunis in Barbary, eight thousand persons. + Tripolis in Syria, eight thousand persons. + Alger, fourtie thousand persons. + +Whose Sangiacks and petie Captaines be three hundred sixtie eight, euery of +which retaining continually in pay from fiue hundreth to two hundreth +Souldiers, may be one with another at the least, three hundreth thousand +persons. + +Chiefe officers in his Seraglio about his person. Be these-- + + Capiaga, High Porter. + Alnader Bassi, Treasurer. + Oda Bassi, Chamberlaine. + Killergi Bassi, Steward. + Saraiaga, Comptroller. + Peskerolen, Groome of the chamber. + Edostoglan, Gentleman of the Ewer. + Sehetaraga, Armour bearer. + Choataraga, he that carieth his riding cloake. + Ebietaraga, Groome of the stoole. + +There be many other maner Officers, which I esteeme superfluous to write. + + +The Turkes yeerely reuenue. + +The Grand Signiors annual reuenue is said to be fourteene Millions and an +halfe of golden ducats, which is sterling fiue millions, eight score +thousand pounds. + +The tribute payd by the Christians his Subiects is one gold ducat yeerely +for the redemption of euery head, which may amount vnto not so litle as one +Million of golden ducats, which is sterling three hundred threescore +thousand pounds. + +Moreouer, in time of warre, he exacteth manifolde summes for maintenance of +his Armie and Nauie of the said Christians. + +The Emperour payeth him yeerely tribute for Hungary, threescore thousand +dollers, which is sterling thirteene thousand pound, besides presents to +the Viceroy and Bassas, which are said to amount to twentie thousand +dollers. + + +Ambassadors Allowances. + +The Ambassadour of the Emperour is allowed one thousand Aspers the day. + +The Ambassadour of the French king heretofore enioyed the like: but of late +yeeres by meanes of displeasure conceiued by Mahumet then Viceroy, it was +reduced to sixe crownes the day, beside the prouision of his Esquire of his +stable. + +The Ambassadours of Poland, and for the state of Venice are not Ligiers as +these two abouesaid. The said Polack is allowed 12. Frenche crownes the day +during his abode, which may be for a moneth. Very seldome do the state of +Venice send any Ambassador otherwise, then enforced of vrgent necessity: +but in stead thereof keepe their Agent, president ouer other Marchants of +them termed a bailife, who hath none allowance of the Grand Signior, +although his port and state is in maner as magnifical as the other +aforesaid Ambassadors. The Spanish Ambassador was equall with other in +Ianizaries: but for so much as he would not according to custome folow the +list of other Ambassadors in making presents to the Grand Signior, he had +none alowance. His abode there was 3. yeres, at the end whereof, hauing +concluded a truce for six yeres, taking place from his first comming in +Nouember last past 1580. he was not admitted to the presence of the Grand +Signior. + + * * * * * + +To the Worshipfull and his very loving Vncle M. Rowland Hewish, Esquier, at + Sand in Devonshire. + +Sir, considering the goodnesse of your Nature which is woont kindely to +accept from a friend, euen of meane things being giuen with a good heart, I +haue presumed to trouble you with the reading of this rude discourse of my +trauels into Turkie, and of the deliuerie of the present with such other +occurrents as there happened woorthie the obseruation: of all which +proceedings I was an eie-witnesse, it pleasing the Ambassadour to take mee +in with him to the Grand Signior. If for lacke of time to put it in order I +haue not performed it so well as it ought, I craue pardon, assuring you +that to my knowledge I haue not missed in the trueth of any thing. If you +aske me what in my trauels I haue learned, I answere as a noble man of +France did to the like demaund, Hoc vnum didici, mundi contemptum: and so +concluding with the wise man in the booke of the Preacher, that all is +vanitie, and one thing onely is necessarie, I take my leaue and commit you +to the Almightie. From London the 16. March 1597. + +Your louing Nephew +Richard Wrag. + + +A description of a Voiage to Constantinople and Syria, begun the 21. of + March 1593. and ended the 9. of August, 1595. wherein is shewed the order + of deliuering the second Present by Master Edward Barton her maiesties + Ambassador, which was sent from her Maiestie to Sultan Murad Can, + Emperour of Turkie. + +We set saile in the Ascension of London, a new shippe very well appointed, +of two hundred and three score tunnes (whereof was master one William +Broadbanke, a prouident and skilfull man in his facultie) from Grauesend +the one and twentie of March 1593. And vpon the eight of Aprill folowing +wee passed the streights of Gibraltar, and with a small Westerne gale, the +24. of the same, we arriued at Zante an Iland vnder the Venetians. The +fourth of May wee departed, and the one and twentie wee arriued at +Alexandretta in Cilicia in the very bottome of the Mediterrane sea, a roade +some 25. miles distance from Antioch, where our marchants land their goods +to bee sent for Aleppo. From thence wee set saile the fift of Iune, and by +contrary windes were driuen vpon the coast of Caramania into a road neere a +litle Iland where a castle standeth, called Castle Rosso, some thirtie +leagues to the Eastwards of the Rhodes, where after long search for fresh +water, we could finde none, vntil certaine poore Greekes of the Iland +brought vs to a well where we had 5 or 6 tuns. That part of the country +next the sea is very barren and full of mountains, yet found we there an +olde tombe of marble, with an epitaph of an ancient Greeke caracter, by +antiquity neere worne out and past reading; which to the beholders seemed a +monument of the greatnesse of the Grecian monarchy. [Sidenote: Candie.] +From thence we went to the Rhodes, and by contrary windes were driuen into +a port of Candy, called Sittia: this Iland is vnder the Venetians, who haue +there 600 souldiers, besides certaine Greeks, continually in pay. Here with +contrary winds we stayed six weeks, and in the end, hauing the winde +prosperous, we sailed by Nicaria, Pharos, Delos, and Andros, with sight of +many other Ilands in the Archipelago, and arriued at the two castles in +Hellespont the 24 of August. Within few dayes after we came to Galipoli +some thirty miles from this place, where foure of vs tooke a Parma or boat +of that place, with two watermen, which rowed us along the Thracian shore +to Constantinople, which sometime sailing and sometime rowing, in foure +dayes they performed. The first of September we arriued at the famous port +of the Grand Signior, where we were not a little welcome to M. Edward +Barton vntil then her Maiesties Agent, who (with many other great persons) +had for many dayes expected the present. [Sidenote: The Ascension arriued +at the 7 towers.] Fiue or sixe dayes after the shippe arriued neere the +Seuen towers, which is a very strong hold, and so called of so many +turrets, which it hath, standing neere the sea side, being the first part +of the city that we came vnto. [Sidenote: The ship saluteth the grand +Signior.] Heere the Agent appointed the master of the Ascension to stay +with the shippe vntill a fitte winde and opportunity serued to bring her +about the Seraglio to Salute the Grand Signior in his moskyta or church: +for you shall vnderstand that he hath built one neere the wall of his +Seraglio or pallace adioyning to the Sea side; whereunto twise or thrise a +weeke he resorteth to performe such religious rites as their law requireth: +where hee being within few dayes after, our shippe set out in their best +maner with flagges, streamers and pendants of diuers coloured silke, with +all the mariners, together with most of the Ambassadours men, hauing the +winde faire, and came within two cables length of this his moskita, where +(hee to his great content beholding the shippe in such brauery) they +discharged first two volies of small shot, and then all the great ordinance +twise ouer, there being seuen and twentie or eight and twentie pieces in +the ship. Which performed, he appointed the Bustangi-Bassa or captaine of +the great and spacious garden or parke, to giue our men thankes, with +request that some other day they would shew him the like sporte when hee +would have the Sultana or Empresse a beholder thereof, which few dayes +after at the shippes going to the Custome-house they performed. + +The grand Signiors salutation thus ended, the master brought the ship to an +anker at Rapamat neere the ambassadors house, where hee likewise saluted +him with all his great ordinance once ouer, and where he landed the +Present, the deliuerie whereof for a time was staied: the cause of which +staie it shall neither be dishonorable for our nation, or that woorthie man +the ambassador to shew you. [Sidenote: The cause of staying the present.] +At the departure of Sinan Bassa the chiefe Vizir, and our ambassadors great +friend toward the warres of Hungarie there was another Bassa appointed in +his place, a churlish and harsh natured man, who vpon occasion of certaine +Genouezes, escaping out of the castles standing toward the Euxine Sea, nowe +called the black Sea, there imprisoned, apprehended and threatened to +execute one of our Englishmen called Iohn Field, for that hee was taken +thereabouts, and knowen not many dayes before to haue brought a letter to +one of them: vpon the soliciting of whose libertie there fell a iarre +betweene the Bassa (being now chiefe Vizir) and our ambassador, and in +choler he gaue her maiesties ambassador such words, as without sustaining +some great indignitie hee could not put vp. [Sidenote: An Arz to the grand +Signior] Whereupon after the arriual of the Present, he made an Arz, that +is, a bill of Complaint to the grand Signior against him, the manner in +exhibiting whereof is thus performed. + +The plaintifes expect the grand Signiors going abroad from his pallace, +either to Santa Sophia or to his church by the sea side, whither, with a +Perma (that is one of their vsuall whirries) they approch within some two +or three score yards, where the plaintife standeth vp, and holdeth his +petition ouer his forehead in sight of the grand Signior (for his church is +open to the Sea side) the rest sitting still in the boat, who appointeth +one of his Dwarfes to receiue them, and to bring them to him. A Dwarfe, one +of the Ambassadors fauorites, so soone as he was discerned, beckned him to +the shore side, tooke his Arz, and with speed caried it to the grand +Signior. Now the effect of it was this; that except his highnesse would +redresse this so great an indignitie, which the Vizir his slaue had offered +him and her maiestie in his person, he was purposed to detaine the Present +vntill such time as he might by letters ouer-land from her maiestie bee +certified, whither she would put vp so great an iniurie as it was. +[Sidenote: The great hall of Iustice.] Whereupon he presently returned +answere, requesting the ambassador within an houre after to goe to the +Douan of the Vizir, vnto whom himselfe of his charge would send a gowne of +cloth of gold, and commaund him publikely to put it vpon him, and with kind +entertainment to imbrace him in signe of reconciliation. [Sidenote: +Reconceliation with the Vizir made.] Whereupon our ambassador returning +home, tooke his horse, accompanied with his men, and came to the Vizirs +court, where, according to the grand Signiors command, he with all shew of +kindnesse embraced the ambassador, and with curteous speeches reconciled +himselfe, and with his own hands put the gowne of cloth of gold vpon his +backe. Which done, hee with his attendants returned home, to the no small +admiration of all Christians, that heard of it, especially of the French +and Venetian ambassadors, who neuer in the like case against the second +person of the Turkish Empire durst haue attempted so bold an enterprise +with hope of so friendly audience, and with so speedie redresse. This +reconciliation with the great Vizir thus made, the ambassador prepared +himselfe for the deliuerie of the Present, which vpon the 7 of October +1593. in this maner he performed. + +[Sidenote: The ambassador goeth to the court with the present.] The +Ascension with her flags and streamers, as aforesaid, repaired nigh vnto +the place where the ambassador should land to go vp to the Seraglio: for +you must vnderstand that all Christian ambassadors haue their dwelling in +Pera where most Christians abide, from which place, except you would go 4 +or 5 miles about, you cannot go by land to Constantinople, whereas by Sea +it is litle broder then the Thames. Our Ambassador likewise apparelled in a +sute of cloth of siluer, with an vpper gowne of cloth of gold, accompanied +with 7 gentlemen in costly sutes of Sattin, with 40 other of his men very +well apparelled, and all in one liuerie of sad French russet cloth gownes, +at his house tooke boate: at whose landing the ship discharged all her +ordinance, where likewise attended 2 Bassas, with 40 or 50 Chauses to +accompany the ambassador to the court, and also horses for the ambassador +and his gentlemen, very richly furnished, with Turkish seruants attendant +to take the horses when they should light. [Sidenote: The Ambass. came to +the Seraglio.] The ambassador thus honorably accompanied, the Chauses +foremost, next his men on foote all going by two and two, himselfe last +with his Chause and Drugaman or Interpreter, and 4 Ianissaries, which he +doeth vsually entertaine in his house to accompany him continually abroad, +came to the Seraglio about an Engush mile from the water side, where first +hee passed a great gate into a large court (much like the space before +Whitehall gate) where he with his gentlemen alighted and left their horses. +From hence they passed into an other stately court, being about 6 score in +bredth, and some 10 score yards long, with many trees in it: where all the +court was with great pompe set in order to entertaine our ambassador. +[Sidenote: All these are captaines of hundreds and of fifties.] Vpon the +right hand all the length of the court was a gallerie arched ouer, and +borne vp with stone pillars, much like the Roiall Exchange, where stood +most of his guard in rankes from the one end to the other in costly aray, +with round head pieces on their heads of mettall and gilt ouer, with a +great plume of fethers somewhat like a long brush standing vp before. On +the left hand stood the Cappagies or porters, and the Chauses. All these +courtiers being about the number of 2000. (as I might well gesse) most of +them apparelled in cloth of gold, siluer, veluet, sattin and scarlet, did +together with bowing their bodies, laying their hands vpon their brests in +curteous maner of salutation, entertain the Ambassador: who likewise +passing between them, and turning himself sometime to the right hand and +sometime to the left, answered them with the like. [Sidenote: The +ambassador receiued by the Vizir with all kindnesse.] As he thus passed +along, certaine Chauses conducted him to the Douan, which is the seat of +Iustice, where certaine dayes of the weeke the grand Vizir, with the other +Vizirs, the Cadi-lesker or lord chiefe Iustice, and the Mufti or high +priest do sit to determine vpon such causes as be brought before them, +which place is vpon the left side of this great court, whither the +ambassador with his gentlemen came, where hee found the Vizir thus +accompanied as aforesayd, who with great shew of kindnes receiued him: and +after receit of her maiesties letters, and conference had of the Present, +of her maiesties health, of the state of England, and such other matters as +concerned our peaceable traffique in those parts: [Sidenote: Diner brought +in.] dinner being prepared was by many of the Courtiers brought into +another inner roome next adioining, which consisted of an hundred dishes or +therabouts, most boiled and rosted, where the ambassador accompanied with +the Vizirs went to dinner, his gentlemen likewise with the rest of his men +hauing a dinner with the like varietie prepared vpon the same side of the +court, by themselues sate downe to their meat, 40 or 50 Chauses standing at +the vpper end attending vpon the gentlemen to see them serued in good +order; their drinke was water mingled with rose water and sugar brought in +a Luthro (that is a goates skinne) which a man carieth at his backe, and +vnder his arme letteth it run out at a spout into cups as men will call for +it. [Sidenote: Diner taken away] The dinner thus with good order brought +in, and for halfe an houre with great sobrietie and silence performed, was +not so orderly taken vp; for certaine Moglans officers of the kitchin (like +her maiesties black guard) came in disordered maner and tooke away the +dishes, and he whose hungry eie one dish could not satisfie, turned two or +three one into the other, and thus of a sudden was a cleane riddance made +of all. The ambassador after dinner with his gentlemen, by certaine +officers were placed at the vpper ende vpon the left side of the court, +nere vnto a great gate which gaue entrance to a third court being but +litle, paued with stone. [Sidenote: Gownes of cloth of gold for the +ambassador and his gentlemen.] In the midst whereof was a litle house built +of marble, as I take it, within which sate the grand Signor, according to +whose commandement giuen there were gownes of cloth of gold brought out of +the wardrope, and put vpon the ambassador and 7 of his gentlemen, the +ambassador himselfe hauing 2, one of gold and the other of crimosin veluet, +all the rest one a piece. [Sidenote: The Present.] Then certaine Cappagies +had the Present, which was in trunks there ready, deliuered them by the +ambassadors men, it being 12 goodly pieces of gilt plate, 36 garments of +fine English cloth of al colors, 20 garments of cloth of gold, 10 garments +of sattin, 6 pieces of fine Holland, and certaine other things of good +value; al which were caried round about the court, each man taking a piece, +being in number very neere 100 parcels, and so 2 and 2 going round that all +might see it, to the greater glory of the present, and of him to whom it +was giuen: [Sidenote: The Present viewed.] they went into the innermost +court passing by the window of that roome, where the grand Signior sate, +who, as it went by to be laid vp in certaine roomes adioining, tooke view +of all. Presently after the present followed the ambassador with his +gentlemen; at the gate of which court stoode 20 or 30 Agaus which be +eunuchs. Within the court yard were the Turkes Dwarfes and Dumbe men, being +most of them youths. At the doore of his roome stood the Bustangi-bassa, +with another Bassa to lead the ambassador and his folowers to the grand +Signior who sate in a chaire of estate, apparelled in a gowne of cloth of +siluer. The floore vnder his feete, which part was a foote higher then the +rest, was couered with a carpet of green sattin embrodered most richly with +siluer, orient perles and great Turkesses; the other part of the house was +couered with a carpet of Cornation sattin imbrodered with gold, none were +in the roome with him, but a Bassa who stood next the wall ouer against him +banging down his head, and looking submissely vpon the ground as all his +subjects doe in his presence. [Sidenote: The ambassador kisseth the grand +Signiors hand.] The ambassador thus betwixt two which stood at the doore +being led in, either of them taking an arme, kissed his hand, and so +backward with his face to the Turke they brought him nigh the dore againe, +where he stood vntill they had likewise done so with all the rest of his +gentlemen. [Sidenote: The ambassadors demands granted.] Which ended, the +ambassador, according as it is the custome when any present is deliuered, +made his three demaunds, such as he thought most expedient for her +maiesties honor, and the peaceable traffique of our nation into his +dominions: whereunto he answered in one word, Nolo, which is in Turkish as +much as, it shal be done: for it is not the maner of the Turkish emperor +familiarly to confer with any Christian ambassador, but he appointeth his +Vizir in his person to graunt their demaunds if they be to his liking: as +to our ambassador he granted all his demands, and gaue order that his daily +allowance for his house of mony, flesh, wood, and haie, should be augmented +with halfe as much more as it had bene before. Hereupon the ambassador +taking his leaue, departed with his gentlemen the same way he came, the +whole court saluting him as they did at his comming in: and comming to the +second court to take our horses, after we were mounted, we staied halfe an +houre, vntil the captain of the guard with 2000 horsemen at the least +passed before, after whom folowed 40 or 50 Chauses next before the +ambassador to accompany him to his house. And as before at his landing, so +now at his taking boat, the ship discharged all her great ordinance, where +arriuing, he likewise had a great banquet prepared to entertaine those +which came to bring him home. [Sidenote: The Sultanas present.] The pompe +and solemnitie of the Present, with the day thus ended, he shortly after +presented the Sultana or empresse who (by reason that she is mother to him +which was heire to the crown Imperial) is had in far greater reuerence then +any of his other Queens or concubines. The Present sent her in her +maiesties name was a iewel of her maiesties picture, set with some rubies +and diamants, 3 great pieces of gilt plate, 10 garments of cloth of gold, a +very fine case, of glass bottles siluer and gift, with 2 pieces of fine +Holland, which so gratefully she accepted, as that she sent to know of the +ambassador what present he thought she might return that would most delight +her maiestie: who sent word that a sute of princely attire being after the +Turkish fashion would for the rarenesse thereof be acceptable in England. +[The Sultanas present to the Queene. Letters sent for England.] Whereopon +she sent an vpper gowne of cloth of gold very rich, an vnder gowne of cloth +of siluer, and a girdle of Turkie worke, rich and faire, with a letter of +gratification, which for the rarenesse of the stile, because you may be +acquainted with it, I haue at the ende of this discourse hereunto annexed, +which letter and present, with one from the grand Signor, was sent by M. +Edward Bushell, and M. William Aldridge ouer-land the 20 of March, who +passed through Valachia and Moldauia, and so through Poland, where Michael +prince of Valachia, and Aron Voiuoda prince of Moldauia receiuing letters +from the ambassador, entertained them with al curtesie, through whose +meanes by the great fauour which his lordship had with the grand Signior, +they had not long before both of them bene aduanced to their princely +dignities. [Sidenote: The other Vizirs presented.] Hee likewise presented +Sigala the Admirall of the Seas, with Abrim Bassa, who maried the great +Turkes daughter, and all the other Vizirs with diuers pieces of plate, fine +English cloth and other costly things: the particulars whereof, to auoid +tediousnesse, I omit. [Sidenote: The Ascension departeth.] All the presents +thus ended, the ship shooting ten pieces of ordinance at the Seraglio +point, as a last farewell, departed on her iourney for England the first of +Nouember, my selfe continuing in Constantinople vntill the last of Iuly +after. This yere in the spring there was great preparation for the +Hungarian wars: and the great Turke threatned to goe himselfe in person: +but like Heliogabalus, his affections being more seruiceable to Venus then +to Mars, he stayed at home. Yet a great army was dispatched this yere; who, +as they came out of Asia to goe for Hungary, did so pester the streets of +Constantinople for the space of two moneths in the spring time, as scarse +either Christian or Iew could without danger of losing his money passe vp +and downe the city. What insolencies, murders and robberies were committed +not onely vpon Christians but also vpon Turks I omit to write, and I pray +God in England the like may neuer be seene: and yet I could wish, that such +amongst vs as haue inioyed the Gospel with such great and admirable peace +and prosperity vnder her Maiesties gouerment this forty yeeres, and haue +not all this time brought forth better fruits of obedience to God, and +thankfulnesse to her Maiesty, were there but a short time to beholde the +miserable condition both of Christians and others liuing vnder such an +infidell prince, who not onely are wrapped in most palpable and grosse +ignorance of minde, but are cleane without the meanes of the true knowledge +of God: I doubt not but the sight hereof (if they be not cleane void of +grace) would stirre them vp to more thankefulnesse to God, that euer they +were borne in so happy a time, and vnder so wise and godly a prince +professing the true religion of Christ. + +The number of souldiours which went to the warres of Hungary this yeere +were 470000, as by the particulars giuen by the Admirall to the Ambassadour +hereunder doe appeare. Although all these were appointed and supposed to +goe, yet the victories which the Christians in the spring had against the +Turks strooke such a terrour in many of the Turkish souldiours, as by +report diuers vpon the way thither left their Captaines and stole away. + + +The number of Turkish souldiours which were appointed to goe into Hungary + against the Christian Emperour. May 1594. + +Sinan Bassa generall, with the Saniacke masould, that is, out of office, + with the other Saniacks in office or of degree, 40000. +Achmigi, that is, Aduenturers, 50000. +The Agha or Captaine with his Ianisaries, and his Giebegies, 20000. +The Beglerbeg of Græcia, with all his Saniacks, 40000. +The company of Spaheis or horsemen, 10000. +The company of Silitari, 6000. +The company of Sagbulue and of Solbulue both together, 8000. +The Bassa of Belgrad. } +The Bassa of Temiswar. } +The Bassa of Bosna. } 80000. +The Bassa of Buda. } +The Siniack of Gersech. } + +Out of Asia. + +The Bassa of Caramania. } +The Bassa of Laras. } +The Bassa of Damasco. } +The Bassa of Suas. } 120000 +The Bassa of Van or Nan. } +The Bassa of Vsdrum. } +Of Tartars there be about 100000. } + +Thus you may see that the great Turke maketh warre with no small numbers. +And in anno 1597, when Sultan Mahomet himselfe went in person into Hungary, +if a man may beleeue reports, he had an army of 600000. + +For the city of Constantinople you shall vnderstand that it is matchable +with any city in Europe, as well in bignesse as for the pleasant situation +thereof, and commodious traffike and bringing of all maner of necessary +prouision of victuals, and whatsoeuer els mans life for the sustentation +thereof shall require, being seated vpon a promontory, looking toward +Pontus Euxinus vpon the Northeast, and to Propontis on the Southwest, by +which two seas by shipping is brought great store of all maner of victuals. +The city it selfe in forme representeth a triangular figure, the sea +washing the walles vpon two sides thereof, the other side faceth the +continent of Thracia; the grand Signiors seraglio standeth vpon that point +which looketh into the sea, being cut off from the city by a wall; so that +the wall of his pallace conteineth in circuit about two English miles: the +seuen towers spoken of before stand at another corner, and Constantines +olde pallace to the North at the third corner. The city hath a threefolde +wall about it; the innermost very high, the next lower then that, and the +third a countermure and is in circuit about ten English miles: it hath +foure and twentie gates: and when the empire was remooued out of the West +into the East, it was inriched with many spoiles of olde Rome by Vespasian +and other emperours, hauing many monuments and pillars in it worthy the +obseruation; amongst the rest in the midst of Constantinople standeth one +of white marble called Vespasians pillar, of 38 or 40 yards high, which +hath from the base to the top proportions of men in armour fighting on +horsebacke: it is likewise adorned with diuers goodly buildings and stately +Mesquitas, whereof the biggest is Sultan Solimans a great warriour, which +liued in the time of Charles the fifth; but the fairest is Santa Sophia, +which in the time of the Christian emperours was the chiefe cathedrall +church, and is still in greatest account with the great Turke: it is built +round like other Greekish churches, the pavements and walles be all of +marble, it hath beneath 44 pillars of diuers coloured marble of admirable +height and bignesse, which stand vpon great round feet of brasse, much +greater then the pillars, and of a great height, some ten yards distant +from the wall: from which vnto these pillars is a great gallery built, +which goeth round about the church; and vpon the outside of the gallery +stand 66 marble pillars which beare vp the round roofe being the top of the +church: it hath three pulpits or preaching places, and about 2000 lampes +brought in by the Turke. Likewise vpon one side in the top is the picture +of Christ with the 12 Apostles, but their faces are defaced, with two or +three ancient tombs of Christians: to the West sticketh an arrow in the +toppe of the Church, which, as the Turks report, Sultan Mahomet shot when +he first tooke the city. Neere adioyning be two chapels of marble, where +lie buried most of the emperours with their children and sultanas. The 16 +of Iuly, accompanied with some other of our nation we went by water to the +Blacke sea, being 16 miles distant from Constantinople, the sea al the way +thither being little broader then the Thames; both sides of the shore are +beautified with faire and goodly buildings. At the mouth of this Bosphorus +lieth a rocke some fourescore yards from the maine land, wherevpon standeth +a white marble pillar called Pompeys pillar, the shadow whereof was 23 +foote long at nine of the clocke in the forenoone: over against it is a +turret of stone upon the maine land 120 steps high, hauing a great +glass-lanthorne in the toppe foure yards in diamiter and three in height, +with a great copper pan in the midst to holde oile, with twenty lights in +it, and it serueth to giue passage into this straight in the night to such +ships as come from all parts of those seas to Constantinople: it is +continually kept by a Turke, who to that end hath pay of the grand Signior. +And thus hauing spent eleuen moneths in Constantinople, accompanied with a +chause, and carying certaine mandates from the grand Signior to the Bassa +of Aleppo for the kinde vsage of our nation in those parts, the 30 of Iuly +I tooke passage in a Turkish carmosale or shippe bound for Sidon; and +passing thorow Propontis, hauing Salimbria with Heraclia most pleasantly +situated on the right hand, and Proconesus now called Marmora on the left, +we came to Gallipoly, and so by Hellespont, betweene the two castles before +named called Sestos and Abydos, famous for the passages made there both by +Xerxes and great Alexander, the one into Thracia, the other into Asia, and +so by the Sigean Promontory, now called Cape Ianitzary, at the mouth of +Hellespont vpon Asia side, where Troy stood, where are yet ruines of olde +walles to be seene, with two hils rising in a piramidall forme, not +vnlikely to be the tombs of Achilles and Ajax. From thence we sailed along, +hauing Tenedos and Lemnos on the right hand, and the Troian fields on the +left: at length we came to Mitylen and Sio long time inhabited by the +Genoueses, but now vnder the Turke. The Iland is beautified with goodly +buildings and pleasant gardens, and aboundeth with fruits, wine, and the +gum masticke. From thence sailing alongst the gulfe of Ephesus with Nicaria +on the right hand, Samos and Smirna on the left, we came to Patmos, where +S. Iohn wrote the Revelation. The Iland is but small, not aboue five miles +in compasse: the chiefe thing it yeeldeth is corn: it hath a port for +shipping, and in it is a monastery of Greekish Caloieros. From thence by +Cos (now called Lango) where Hipocrates was borne: and passing many other +Ilands and rocks, we arriued at Rhodes, one of the strongest and fairest +cities of the East: here we stayed three or foure dayes; and by reason of a +By which went in the ship to Paphos in Cyprus, who vsed me with all +kindnesse, I went about the city, and tooke the view of all: which city is +still with all the houses and walles thereof maintained in the same order +as they tooke it from the Rhodian knights. Ouer the doores of many of the +houses, which be strongly built of stone, do remaine vndefaced, the armes +of England, France, Spaine, and many other Christian knights, as though the +Turkes in the view thereof gloried in the taking of all Christendome, whose +armes they beholde. From thence we sailed to Paphos an olde ruinous towne +standing vpon the Westerne part of Cyprus, where S. Paul in the Acts +conuerted the gouernor. Departing hence, we came to Sidon, by the Turkes +called Saytosa, within tenne or twelue miles of the place where Tirus +stood, which now being eaten in by the sea, is, as Ezekiel prophesied, a +place for the spreading out of a net. Sidon is situated in a small bay at +the foot of mount Libanus, vpon the side of an hill looking to the North: +it is walled about, with a castle nigh to the sea, and one toward the land +which is ruinated, but the walle thereof standeth. Some halfe mile vp +toward the mountaine be certaine ruines of buildings, with marble pillars, +remaining: heere for three dayes we were kindly entertained of the Captaine +of the castle: and in a small barke we sailed from hence along the shore to +Tripoli, and so to Alexandretta, where the 24 of August we arriued. From +thence with a Venetian carauan we went by land to Aleppo, passing by +Antioch, which is seated vpon the side of an hill, whose walles still stand +with 360 turrets upon them, and neere a very great plaine which beareth the +name of the city, thorow which runneth the riuer Orontes, in Scripture +called Farfar. In Aleppo I stayed vntill February following; in this city, +as at a mart, meete many nations out of Asia with the people of Europe, +hauing continuall traffike and interchangeable course of marchandise one +with another: the state and trade of which place, because it is so well +knowen to most of our nation I omitte to write of. The 27 of February I +departed from Aleppo, and the fifth of March imbarked my selfe at +Alexandretta in a great ship of Venice called the Nana Ferra, to come to +England. The 14 we put into Salino in Cyprus, where the ship staying many +dayes to lade cotton wool, and other commodities, in the meane time +accompanied with M. William Barret my countrey man, the master of the ship +a Greeke, and others wee tooke occasion to see Nicosia, the chiefe city of +this Iland, which was some twenty miles from this place, which is situated +at the foot of an hill: to the East is a great plaine, extending it selfe +in a great length from the North to the South: it is walled about, but of +no such strength as Famagusta (another city in this Iland neere the Sea +side) whose walles are cut out of the maine rocke. In this city be many +sumptuous and goodly buildings of stone, but vninhabited; the cause whereof +doth giue me iust occasion to shew you of a rare iudgement of God vpon the +owners sometime of these houses, as I was credibly informed by a Cipriot, a +marcham of, great wealth in this city. [Sidenote: A great iudgement of God +vpon the noble men of Cyprus.] Before it came in subiection to the Turks, +while it was vnder the Venetians, there were many barons and noble men of +the Cipriots, who partly by vsurping more superiority ouer the common +people then they ought, and partly through their great reuenues which +yeerly came in by their cotton wooll and wines, grew so insolent and proud, +and withall so impiously wicked, as that they would at their pleasure +command both the wiues and children of their poore tenants to serue their +vncleane lusts, and holding them in such slauery as though they had beene +no better then dogges, would wage them against a grayhound or spaniell, and +he who woon the wager should euer after holde them as his proper goods and +chattels, to doe with them as he listed, being Christians as well as +themselues, if they may deserue so good a name. As they behaued themselues +most vnchristianly toward their brethren, so and much more vngodly (which I +should haue put in the first place) did they towards God: for as though +they were too great, standing on foot or kneeling to serue God, they would +come riding on horsebacke into the church to heare their masse: which +church now is made a publicke basistane or market place for the Turkes to +sell commodities in: but beholde the iudgement of the righteous God, who +payeth the sinner measure for measure. The Turkes the yeere before the +ouerthrowe giuen them at Lepanto by Don Iohn tooke Cyprus. These mighty +Nimrods fled some in holes and some into mountaines to hide themselues; +whereupon the Turkes made generall proclamation, that if they would all +come in and yeeld themselues, they would restore them to their former +reuenues and dignities: who not mistrusting the mischieuous pretense of the +Turkes, assembled together to make themselues knowen; whom after the Turkes +had in possession, they (as the Lords executioners) put them with their +wiues and children all to the sword, pretending thereby to cut of all +future rebellion, so that at this day is not one of the noble race knowen +aliue in the Iland, onely two or three remaine in Venice but of litle +wealth, which in the time of the warres escaped. After we had stayed in +this Iland some thirty dayes, we set saile in the foresayd shippe being +about the burthen of 900 tunnes, hauing in her passengers of diuers +nations, as Tartars, Persians, Iewes, and sundry Christians. Amongst all +which I had often conference with a Iew, who by reason of his many yeeres +education at Safet a place in Iudea neere Ierusalem, where they study the +Rabbines with some other arts as they thinke good, as also: for his trauels +into Persia and Ormus, he seemed to be of good experience in matters +abroad, who related vnto me such conference as he had with a Baniane at +Ormus, being one of the Indians inhabiting the countrey of Cambaia. +[Sidenote: Indians skilful in Astronomy.] This Baniane being a Gentile had +skill in Astronomie, as many of that nation haue, who by his books written +in his owne tongue and Characters, could tell the time of Eclipses both of +Sunne and Moone, with the Change and Full, and by iudgement in Astrologie +gaue answere to any question demanded. Being asked concerning his opinion +in religion, what he thought of God? He made answere that they held no +other god but the sun, (to which planet they pray both at the rising and +setting) as I haue seene sundry doe in Aleppo: his reason was drawen from +the effects which it worketh in giuing light to the moone and other +starres, and causing all things to grow and encrease vpon the earth: +answere was made, that it did moue with the rest as the wheeles of a +clocke, and therefore of force must haue a moouer. Likewise in the Eclipse +being darkened it is manifestly prooued that it is not god, for God is +altogether goodnesse and brightnesse, which can neither be darkened nor +receiue detriment or hurt: but the Sunne receiueth both in the Eclipse, as +is aparant: to which hee could not answere; but so they had receiued from +their ancestors, that it was without beginning or ende, as in any Orbicular +or round body neither beginning or end could be found. He likewise sayd, +that there were other Gentiles in the Indies which worship the moone as +chiefe, and their reason is. The moone when she riseth goeth with thousands +of starres accompanied like a king, and therefore is chiefe: but the Sunne +goeth alone, and therefore not so great. Against whom the Banianes reason, +that it is not true; because the Moone and starres receiue their light from +the Sunne, neither doth the Sunne vouchsafe them his company but when he +list, and therefore like a mighty prince goeth alone, yet they acknowledge +the Moone as Queene or Viceroy. Law they hold hone, but only seuen precepts +which they say were giuen them from their father Noe, not knowing Abraham +or any other. [Sidenote: The seven precepts of Banianes.] First, to honor +father and mother; secondly, not to steale; thirdly not to commit adultery; +fourthly not to kill any thing liuing; fiftly, not to eat any thing liuing; +sixtly not to cut their haire; seuenthly to go barefoot in their churches. +These they hold most strictly, and by no means will breake them: but he +that breaketh one is punished with twenty stripes; but for the greatest +fault they will kill none, neither by a short death nor a long, onely he is +kept some time in prison with very little meat, and hath at the most not +aboue twenty or fiue and twenty stripes. In the yeere they haue 16 feasts, +and then they go to their church, where is pictured in a broad table the +Sun, as we vse to paint it, the face of a man with beames round about, not +hauing any thing els in it. At their feast they spot their faces in diuers +parts with saffron all yellow, and so walke vp and downe the streets; and +this they doe as a custome. They hold, there shalbe a resurrection, and all +shall come to iudgement, but the account shalbe most streight, insomuch +that but one of 10000 shalbe receiued to fauor, and those shall liue againe +in this world in great happinesse: the rest shalbe tormented. And because +they will escape this iudgdment, when any man dieth, he and his wife be +both burnt together euen to ashes, and then they are thrown into a river, +and so dispersed as though they had neuer bene. If the wife will not burne +with her dead husband, she is holden euer after as a whore. And by this +meanes they hope to escape the iudgement to come. As for the soule, that +goeth to the place from whence it came, but where the place is they know +not. That the body should not be made againe they reason with the +philosophers, saying, that of nothing nothing can be made (not knowing that +God made the whole world and their god the Sun of nothing) but beholding +the course of nature, that nothing is made but by a meanes, as by the seed +of a man is made another, and by corne cast into the ground there commeth +vp new corne: so, say they, man cannot be made except some part of him be +left, and therefore they burne the whole: for if he were buried in the +earth, they say there is a small bone in the necke which would neuer be +consumed: or if he were eaten by a beast, that bone would not consume, but +of that bone would come another man; and then the soule being restored +againe, he should come into iudgement, whereas now the body being +destroyed, the soule shall not be iudged: for their opinion is, that both +body and soule must be vnited together, as they haue sinned together, to +receiue iudgement; and therefore the soule alone cannot. Their seuen +precepts which they keepe so strictly are not for any hope of reward they +haue after this life, but onely that they may be blessed in this world, for +they thinke that he which breaketh them shall haue ill successe in all his +businesse. + +They say, the three chiefe religions in the world be of the Christians, +Iewes, and Turks, and yet but one of them true: but being in doubt which is +the truest of the three, they will be of none: for they hold that all these +three shall be iudged, and but few of them which be of the true shall be +saued, the examination shall be so straight; and therefore, as I haue sayd +before, to preuent this iudgement, they burne their bodies to ashes. They +say, these three religions haue too many precepts to keepe them all wel, +and therefore wonderfull hard it wil be to make account, because so few doe +obserue all their religion aright. And thus passing the time for the space +of three moneths in this sea voyage, we arriued at Venice the tenth of +Iune: and after I had seene Padua, with other English men, I came the +ordinary way ouer the Alpes, by Augusta, Noremberg and so for England; +where to the praise of God I safely arriued the ninth of August 1595. + +END OF VOL. IX. + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Principal Navigations, +Voyages, Traffiques, and Discoveries of The English Nation, Volume 9, +by Richard Hakluyt + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PRINCIPAL NAVIGATIONS, V9 *** + +***** This file should be named 10673-8.txt or 10673-8.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/6/7/10673/ + +Produced by Karl Hagen and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team. +This file was produced from images generously made available by the +Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions. + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS," WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + + https://www.gutenberg.org/etext06 + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: + https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: + https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL + + diff --git a/old/10673-8.zip b/old/10673-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..02783a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10673-8.zip diff --git a/old/10673.txt b/old/10673.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..859f121 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10673.txt @@ -0,0 +1,13012 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Principal Navigations, Voyages, +Traffiques, and Discoveries of The English Nation, Volume 9, +by Richard Hakluyt + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Principal Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques, + and Discoveries of The English Nation, Volume 9 + Asia, Part 2 + +Author: Richard Hakluyt + +Release Date: January 11, 2004 [EBook #10673] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PRINCIPAL NAVIGATIONS, V9 *** + + + + +Produced by Karl Hagen and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team. +This file was produced from images generously made available by the +Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions. + + + + + +THE PRINCIPAL +Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques, +AND +Discoveries +OF THE ENGLISH NATION. + +Collected by + +RICHARD HAKLUYT, PREACHER + +AND + +Edited by + +EDMUND GOLDSMID, F.R.H.S. + +VOL. IX. + +ASIA. PART II. + + + + +Nauigations, Voyages, Traffiques, and Discoueries + +OF THE ENGLISH NATION IN ASIA. + + + +CAPVT. 38. + +De territorio Cathay, et moribus Tartarorum. + +Totum Imperium Imperatoris Grand Can distinctum est in 12. magnas +prouincias, iuxta numerum duodecim filiorum primi Genitoris Can, quarum +quaelibet in se continet circiter 6. millia ciuitatum, praeter villas non +numeratas quae sunt Velut absque numero. Habent et singulae prouinciae regem +principalem, hoc est 12. reges prouinciales, et horum quisque sub se reges +Insularum plurimos, alij 50. alij centum, alij plures, qui omnes et singuli +subiectissime obediunt Grand Can Imperatori. Harum prouinciarum maior, et +nobilior dicitur Cathay, qui consistit in Asia profunda. Tres enim sunt +Asiae, scilicet quae profunda dicitur, et Asia dicta maior quae nobis est +satis propinquior et tertia minor intra quam est Ephesus beati Ioannis +Euangelistae sepultura, de qua habes in praecedentibus. Audistis statum +magnatum et nobilium esse permagnificum, et gloriosum, sed sciatis longe +secus esse apud communes et priuatos homines tam in ciuitatibus quam in +forensibus totius Tartariae. In prouincijs autem Cathay habetur tantum de +mercimonijs specierum, et de operibus sericosis; quod multis facilius +acquirere esset praetiosum indumentam, quam camisium de lino. Vnde et +quicunque sunt alicuius honestatis non carent desuper precioso vestimento. + +Omnes tam viri quam faemina similibus in forma vestibus inducuntur, +videlicet valde latis, et breuibus vsque ad genua cum apertura in lateribus +quam firmant (dum volunt) ansis quibusdam, nam vterque sexus est brachijs +seu femoralibus plene tectus. Nunquam vtuntur toga aut collobio, sed nec +caputio vnde nec per aspectum indumentorum potest haberi differentia inter +virum et mulierem innuptam. Sed nupta (vt supra dictum est) gestat per +aliquod tegumentum in capite formam pedes viri. + +Nubit illic vir quotquot placet mulieribus, vt nonnulli habeant decem vel +duodecim vxores aut plures. Nam quisque maritus iungitur licenter cuilibet +mulieri, exceptis matre, et amita, sorore, et filia. Sicut viri equitant, +tendunt, et currunt per patriam pro negotijs sic et mulieres, quoniam et +ipse operantur omnia fere artificia mechanica sicut pannos et quicquid +efficiter de panno, corio, sericoque, minantque carrucas, et vehicula, sed +viri fabricant de ferro et de omni metallo, lapidibus atque ligno, nec vir +nec mulier nobilis aut degener comedit vltra semel in die communiter. Multa +nutriunt pecora sed nullos porcos, parum comeditur ibi de pane exceptis +magnatibus et diuitibus, sed carnes edunt pecorum, bestiarum, et +bestiolarum vtpote boum, ouium, caprarum, equorum, asinorum, canum, +cattorum, murium, et rattorum, ius carnium sorbentes, et omnis generis lac +bibentes. + +Nobiles autem bibunt lac equarum, seu lamentorum, pro nobilissimo potu et +pauperes aquam bullitam cum modico mellis, quia nec vinum ibi habetur, nec +ceruisia confictur: et multi ac plurimi fontes consulunt in sua siti, per +villas, et rura. Domus, et habitacula rotundae sunt formae, compositae et +contextae paruis lignis, et flexilibus virgulis, ad modum cauearum quas nos +facimus pro auiculis, habentes rotundam in culmine aperturam praestantem +duo beneficia habitationi, quoniam et ignis quem in medio domus +constituunt, fumum emittit, et pro aspiciendo lumen immittit. Intrinsecus +sunt parietes vndique de filtro, sed et tectum filtreum est: has domus, dum +locum habitandi mutare volunt, vel dum indiuitina expeditione procedunt, +ducunt secum in plaustris quasi tentoria. + +Multas superuacuas obseruant ceremonias, quia respiciunt in vanitates et +insanias falsas: solem et lunam praecipue adorant, eisque frequenter genua +curuant, et ad nouilunium, quicquid est magni estimant inchoandum. + +Nullus omnino vtitur calcaribus in equitando, sed cogunt equum flagello +scorpione, reputantes peccatum non leue si quis ad hoc flagellum appodiat, +aut iumentum percuteret suo freno, pleraque similia, quae parum aut nihil +nocent, ponderant vt grauia, sicut imponere cultellum in igne, os osse +confringere, lac seu aliud potabile in terram effundere, nec non et +huiusmodi multa. + +[Sidenote: Mingere intra dominum peccatum capitale.] Sed super haec, tenent +pro grauiori admisso mingere intra domum quae inhabitatur, et qui de tanto +crimine proclamaretur assuetus, mitteretur ad mortem. Et de singulis +necesse est vt confiteatur peccator Flamini suae legis, et soluat summam +pecuniarum delicti. Et si peccatum deturpationis habitaculi venerit in +publicum, oportebit reconciliari domum per sacerdotem, priusquam vllus +audebit intrare. Insuper et peccatorem necesse erit pertransire ignem, +semel, bis, dut ter iuxta iudicium Flaminis, quatenus per ignis acrimoniam +purgetur a tanti inquinatione peccati. + +Neminem hominum prohibent inter se habitare, sed indifferenter receptant, +Iudaeos, Christianos, Saracenos, et homines cuiuscunque nationis, vel legis, +dicentes se satis putare suum ritum non ita securum ad salutem, nisi +quandoque; traherentur ad ritum magis salutarem, quem tamen determinate +nunc ignorant, imo multi de nobilibus sunt iam in Christianitate baptizati. + +Attamen qui illorum sunt curiales Imperatoris non vellent in palatio +publicari. + +Poene oblitus eram, quod nunc hic dico notandum, quia dum ab extra +Imperium, quis veniens nuntius aut legatus cupit tradere proprijs manibus +literas Imperatori [Marginal note: Seu Gubernatorum.], vel deponere coram +illo mandata, non permittitur, donec prius in puris transeat liueas ad +venum ad minus regurn pro sui purgatione, ne quid forsitan afferat cuius +visu, vel odoratu seu tactu rex possit grauari. + +[Sidenote: Arma Tartarorum.] Porro Tartari in praecincto expeditionis habent +singuli duos arcus, cum magna pluralitate teloram: Nam omnes sunt +sagittarij ad manum et cum rigida et longa lancea. Nobilis autem in equis +preciose phaleratis ferunt gladios, ver spatas breues et latas, scindentes +pro vno latere, et in capitibus galeas, de corio cocto, non altas, sed ad +capitis formara depressas. + +Quicunque de suis fugerit de praelio, ipso facto conseriptus est, vt +siquando inuentus fuerit occidatur. Si Castrum vel ciuitas obsessa se illis +reddere voluerit, nullam acceptant conditionem nisi cum morte omnium +inimicorum, vel si quis homo singularis se dederit victum nihilominus +absque vlla miseratione occidunt, detruncantes illi protinus aures, quas +postea coquentes, et in aceto (dum habuerint) ponentes mittunt inuicem ad +conuiuia pro extremo ferculo: [Sidenote: Tartari retro sagittantes.] dumque +ipsi in bellis arte fugam simulant, periculosum est eos insequi, quoniam +iaciunt sagittas a tergo, quibus equos et homines occidere norunt. Et +quando in prima acie comparant ad bellandum, mirabiliter sese constringunt, +vt media pars numeri eoram vix credatur. + +Generaliter noueritis, omnes Tartaros habere paruos oculos, et modicam vel +raram barbam: in proprijs locis raro inter se litigant, contendunt, aut +pugnant, timentes legum pergraues emendas. Et inuenitur ibi rarius +vespilio, latro, fur, homicida, iniurians, adulter, aut fornicarius, quia +tales criminatores inuestigatione sollicita requiruntur, et sine +redemptione aliqua perimuntur. + +Dum quis decumbit infirmus figitur lancea iuxta illum in terra, et cum +appropinquauerit morti, nullus remanet iuxta ipsum, cum vero mortuus esse +scitur, confestim in campis, et cum lancea sepelitur. + + +The English Version. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, that the empire of this gret Chane is devyded +in 12 provynces; and every provynce hathe mo than 2000 cytees; and of +townes with outen nombre. This contree is fulle gret. For it hathe 12 +pryncypalle kynges, in 12 provynces. And every of tho kynges han many +kynges undre hem; and alle thei ben obeyssant to the gret Chane. And his +lond and his lordschipe durethe so ferre that a man may not gon from on hed +to another, nouther be see ne lond, the space of 7 zeer. And thorghe the +desertes of his lordschipe, there as men may fynde no townes, there ben +innes ordeyned be every iorneye, to resceyve bothe man and hors; in the +whiche thei schalle fynde plentee of vytaylle, and of alle thing, that hem +nedethe, for to go be the contree. + +And there is a marveylouse custom in that contree, (but is profitable) that +zif ony contrarious thing, that scholde ben preiudice or grevance to the +Emperour, in ony kynde, anon the Emperour hathe tydynges there of and fulle +knowleche in a day, thoughe it be 3 or 4 iorneys fro him or more. For his +ambassedours taken here dromedaries or hire hors, and thei priken in alle +that evere thei may toward on of the innes: and whan thei comen there, anon +thei blowen an horne; and anon thei of the in knowen wel y now that there +ben tydynges to warnen the Emperour of sum rebellyoun azenst him. And +thanne anon thei maken other men redy, in alle haste that thei may, to +beren lettres, and pryken in alle that evere thei may, tille thei come to +the other innes with here lettres: and thanne thei maken fressche men redy, +to pryke forthe with the lettres, toward the Emperour; whille that the +laste bryngere reste him, and bayte his dromedarie or his hors. And so fro +in to in, tille it come to the Emperour. And thus anon hathe he hasty +tydynges of ony thing, that berethe charge, be his corrours, that rennen so +hastyly, thorghe out alle the contree. And also whan the Emperour sendethe +his corrours hastyly, thorghe out his lond, everyche of hem hathe a large +thong fulle of smale belles; and whan thei neyghen nere to the innes of +other corroures, that ben also ordeyned be the iorneyes, thei ryngen here +belles, and anon the other corrours maken hem redy, and rennen here weye +unto another in: and thus rennethe on to other, fulle spedyly and swyftly, +till the Emperours entent be served, in alle haste. And theise currours ben +clept chydydo, aftre here langage, that is to seye, a messagere. + +Also whan the Emperour gothe from o contree to another, as I have told you +here before, and he passe thorghe cytees and townes, every man makethe a +fuyr before his dore, and puttethe there inne poudre of gode gommes, that +ben swete smellynge, for to make gode savour to the Emperour. And alle the +peple knelethe doun azenst him, and don him gret reverence. And there where +religyouse Cristene men dwellen, as thei don in many cytees in thei lond, +thei gon before him with processioun with cros and holy watre; and thei +seyngen, _Veni Creator, spiritus_, with an highe voys, and gon towardes +him. And whan he herethe hem, he commaundethe to his lordes to ryde besyde +him, that the religiouse men may come to him. And whan thei ben nyghe him, +with the cros, thanne he dothe a down his galaothe, that syt upon his hede, +in manere of a chapelet, that is made of gold and preciouse stone and grete +perles. And it is so ryche, that, men preysen it to the value of a roialme, +in that contre. And than he knelethe to the cros. And than the prelate of +the religiouse men seythe before him certeyn orisouns, and zevethe him a +blessynge with the cros: and he enclynethe to the blessynge fulle devoutly. +And thanne the prelate zevethe him sum maner frute, to the nombre of 9, in +a platere of sylver, with peres or apples or other manere frute. And he +takethe on; and than men zeven to the othere lordes, that ben aboute him. +For the custom is suche, that no straungere schalle come before him, but +zif he zeve hym sum manere thing, aftre the olde lawe, that seythe, _Nemo +accedat in conspectu meo vacuus_. And thanne the Emperour seythe to the +religious men, that thei withdrawe hem azen, that thei ne be hurt ne harmed +of the gret multytude of hors that comen behynde him. And also in the same +maner don the religious men, that dwellen there, to the Emperesses, that +passen by hem, and to his eldest sone; and to every of hem, thei presenten +frute. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, that the people, that he hathe so many hostes +offe, abouten hym and aboute his wyfes and his sone, thei dwelle not +contynuelle with him: but alle weys, whan him lykethe, thei ben sent fore; +and aftre whan thei han don, thei retournen to hire owne housholdes; saf +only thei that ben dwellynge with hym in houshold, for to serven him and +his wyfes and his sones, for to governen his houshold. And alle be it, that +the othere ben departed fro him, aftre that thei han perfourmed hire +servyse, zit there abydethe contynuelly with him in court, 50000 men at +horse, and 200000 men a fote; with outen mynstrelles, and tho that kepen +wylde bestes and dyverse briddes, of the whiche I have tolde zou the nombre +before. + +Undre the firmament, is not so gret a lord, ne so myghty, ne so riche, as +the gret Chane: nought Prestre Johan, that is Emperour of the highe Ynde, +ne the Sowdan of Babylone, ne the Emperour of Persye. Alle theise ne ben +not in comparisoun to the grete Chane; nouther of myght, ne of noblesse, ne +of ryaltee, ne of richesse: for in alle theise, he passethe alle erthely +princes. Wherfore it is gret harm, that he belevethe not feithfully in God. +And natheles he wil gladly here speke of God; and he suffrethe wel, that +Cristene men duelle in his lordschipe, and that men of his feythe ben made +Cristene men, zif thei wile, thorghe out alle his contree. For he +defendethe no man to holde no lawe, other than him lykethe. + +In that contree, sum man hathe an 100 wyfes, summe 60, mo, somme lesse. And +thei taken the nexte of hire kyn, to hire wyfes, saf only, that thei out +taken hire modres, hire doughtres, and hire sustres on the fadir syde, of +another womman, thei may wel take; and hire bretheres wyfes also aftre here +dethe; and here step modres also in the same wyse. + + +Of the Lawe and customs of the Tartarienes, duellynge in Chatay; and how + that men don, whan the Emperour schal dye, and how he schal be chosen. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXIII.] The folk of that contree usen alle longe clothes, +with outen furroures. And thei ben clothed with precious clothes of +Tartarye; and of clothes of gold. And here clothes ben slytt at the syde; +and thei ben festned with laces of silk. And thei clothen hem also with +pylches, and the hyde with outen. And thei usen nouther cappe ne hood. And +in the same maner as the men gon, the wommen gon; so that no man may unethe +knowe the men fro the wommen, saf only tho wommen, that ben maryed, that +beren the tokne upon hire hedes of a mannes foot, in signe that thei ben +undre mannes fote and undre subieccioun of man. And here wyfes ne dwelle +not to gydere but every of hem be hire self. And the husbonde may ligge +with whom of hem, that him lykethe. Everyche hathe his hous, bothe man and +womman. And here houses ben made rounde of staves; and it hathe a rounde +wyndowe aboven, that zevethe hem light, and also that servethe for +delyverance of smoke. And the helynge of here houses, and the wowes and the +dores ben alle of wode. + +And whan thei gon to werre, thei leiden hire houses with hem, upon +chariottes; as men don tentes or pavyllouns. And thei maken hire fuyr, in +the myddes of hire houses. And thei han gret multytude of alle maner of +bestes, saf only of swyn: for thei bryngen non forthe. And thei beleeven +wel, o God, that made and formede alle thinges. And natheles zit han thei +ydoles of gold and sylver, and of tree, and of clothe. And to tho ydoles, +thei offren alle weys hyre first mylk of hire bestes, and also of hire +metes, and of hire drynkes, before thei eten. And thei offren often tymes +hors and bestes. And the clepen the God of Kynde, Yroga. And hire Emperour +also, what name that evere behave, thei putten evermore therto Chane. And +whan I was there, hire Emperour had to name Thiaut; so that he was clept +Thiaut Chane. And his eldeste sone was clept Tossue. And whanne he schalle +ben emperour, he schalle ben clept Tossue Chane. And at that tyme, the +Emperour hadde 12 sones, with outen him; that were named, Cuncy, Ordii, +Chahaday, Buryn, Negu, Nocab, Cadu, Siban, Cuten, Balacy, Babylan and +Garegan, And of his 3 wyfes, the firste and the pryncypalle, that was +Prestre Johnes doughtre, hadde to name Serioche Chan; and the tother Borak +Chan; and the tother Karanke Chan. + +The folk of that contree begynnen alle hire thinges in the newe mone: and +thei worschipen moche the mone and the sonne, and often tyme knelen azenst +hem. And alle the folk of the contree ryden comounly with outen spores: but +thei beren alle weys a lytille whippe in hire hondes, for to chacen with +hire hors. And thei had gret conscience, and holden it for a gret synne, to +casten a knyf in the fuyr, and for to drawe flessche out of a pot with a +knyf, and for to smyte an hors with the handille of a whippe, or to smyte +an hors with a brydille, or to breke o bon with another, or for to caste +mylk or ony lykour, that men may drynke, upon the erthe, or for to take and +sle lytil children. And the moste synne, that ony man may do, is to pissen +in hire houses, that thei dwellen in. And who so that may be founden with +that synne, sykerly thei slen hym. And of everyche of theise synnes, it +behovethe hem to ben schryven of hire prestes, and to paye gret somme of +silver for hire penance. And it behovethe also, that the place, that men +han pissed in, be halewed azen; and elles dar no man entren there inne. And +whan thei han payed hire penance, men maken hem passen thorghe a fuyr or +thorghe 2, for to clensen hem of hire synnes. And also whan ony messangere +comethe and bryngethe lettres or ony present to the Emperour, it behovethe +him, that he with the thing that he bryngethe, passe thorghe 2 brennynge +fuyres, for to purgen hem, that he brynge no poysoun ne venym, ne no wykked +thing, that myght be grevance to the lord. And also, zif ony man or womman +be taken in avowtery or fornycacyoun, anon thei sleen him. Men of that +contree ben alle gode archeres, and schooten right welle, bothe men and +women, als wel on hors bak, prykynge, as on fote, rennynge. And the wommen +maken alle thinges and alle maner mysteres and craftes; as of clothes, +botes and other thinges; and thei dryven cartes, plowes and waynes and +chariottes; and thei maken houses and alle maner of mysteres, out taken +bowes and arwes and armures, that men maken. And alle the wommen weren +breech, as wel as men. Alle the folk of that contree ben fulle obeyssant to +hire sovereynes; ne thei fighten not ne chiden not, on with another. And +there ben nouther thefes ne robboures in that contree; and every man +worschipethe othere: but no man there dothe no reverence to no straungeres, +but zif thei ben grete princes. And thei eten houndes, lyounes, lyberdes, +mares and foles, asses, rattes and mees, and alle maner of bestes, grete +and smale; saf only swyn, and bestes that weren defended by the olde lawe. +And thei eaten alle the bestes, with outen and with inne, with outen +castynge awey of ony thing, saf only the filthe. And thei eten but litille +bred, but zif it be in courtes of grete lordes. And thei have not, in many +places, nouther pesen ne benes, ne non other potages, but the brothe of the +flessche. For littile ete thei ony thing, but flessche and the brothe. And +whan thei han eten, thei wypen hire hondes upon hire skirtes: for thei use +non naperye, ne towaylles, but zif it be before grete lordes: but the +common peple hathe none. And whan thei han eten, thei putten hire dissches +unwasschen in to the pot or cawdroun, with remenant of the flessche and of +the brothe, till thei wole eten azen. And the ryche men drynken mylk of +mares or of camaylles or of asses or of other bestes. And thei wil ben +lightly dronken of mylk, or of another drynk, that is made of hony and of +watre soden to gidre. For in that contree is nouther wyn ne ale. Thei lyven +fulle wrecched liche; and thei eten but ones in the day, and that but +lyttle, nouther in courtes ne in other places. And in soothe, o man allone +in this contree wil ete more in a day, than on of hem will ete in 3 dayes. +And zif ony straunge messagre come there to a lord, men maken him to ete +but ones a day, and that fulle litille. + +And whan thei werren, thei werren fulle wisely, and alle weys don here +besynes, to destroyen hire enemyes. Every man there berethe 2 bowes or 3, +and of arwes gret plentee, and a gret ax. And the gentyles han schorte +speres and large, and fulle trenchant on that o syde: and thei han plates +and helmes, made of quyrboylle; and hire hors covertoures of the same. And +who so fleethe fro the bataylle, thei sle him. And whan thei holden ony +sege abouten castelle or toun, that is walled and defensable, thei behoten +to hem that ben with inne, to don alle the profite and gode, that it is +marveylle to here: and thei graunten also to hem that ben with inne, alle +that thei wille asken hem. And aftre that thei ben zolden, anon thei sleen +hem alle, and kutten of hire eres, and sowcen hem in vynegre, and there of +thei maken gret servyse for lordes. Alle here lust and alle here +ymaginacioun, is for to putten alle londes undre hire subieccioun. And thei +seyn, that thei knowen wel be hire prophecyes, that thei schulle ben +overcomen by archieres, and be strengthe of hem: but they knowe not of what +nacioun, ne of what lawe thei schulle ben offe, that schulle overcomen hem. +And therfore thei suffren, that folk of alle lawes may peysibely duellen +amonges hem. + +Also whan thei wille make hire ydoles, or an ymage of ony of hire frendes, +for to have remembrance of hym, thei maken alle weys the ymage alle naked, +with outen any maner of clothinge. For thei seyn, that in gode love scholde +be no coverynge, that man scholde not love for the faire clothinge, ne for +the riche aray, but only for the body, suche as God hathe made it, and for +the gode vertues that the body is endowed with of nature; but only for fair +clothinge, that is not of kyndely nature. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, that it is gret drede for to pursue the +Tartarines, zif thei fleen in bataylle. For in fleynge, thei schooten +behynden hem, and sleen bothe men and hors. And whan thei wil fighte, thei +wille schokken hem to gidre in a plomp; that zif there be 20000 men, men +schalle not wenen, that there be scant 10000. And thei cone wel wynnen lond +of straungeres, but thei cone not kepen it. For thei han grettre lust to +lye in tentes with outen, than for to lye in castelle or in townes. And +thei preysen no thing the wytt of other naciouns. And amonges hem, oyle of +olyve is fulle dere: for thei holden it for fulle noble medicyne. And alle +the Tartarienes han smale eyen and litille of berd, and not thikke hered, +but schiere. And thei ben false and traytoures: and thei lasten noghte that +thei behoten. Thei ben fulle harde folk, and moche peyne and wo mow suffren +and disese, more than ony other folk: for thei ben taughte therto in hire +owne contree, of Zouthe: and therfore thei spenden, as who seythe, right +nought. + +And whan ony man schalle dye, men setter a spere besyde him: and whan he +drawethe towardes the dethe, every man fleethe out of the hous, tille he be +ded; and aftre that, thei buryen him in the feldes. + + +CAPVT. 39. + +De sepultura Imperatoris Grand Can, et creatione successoris. + +Imperator Grand Can postquam eius cognita fuerit defunctio defertur mox a +paucis viris in parco palatij, ad praeuisum locum vbi debeat sepeliri. Et +nudato prius toto illo loco a graminibus cum cespite figitur ibi tentorium, +in quo velut in solio regali de ligno corpus defuncti residens collocatur, +paraturque mensa plena coram eo cibarijs praeciosis, et potu de lacte +iumentorum. Instabulatur ibi et equa cum suo pullo, sed et ipse albus, +nobiliter phaleratus, et onustatus certo pondere auri et argenti. Et est +totum Tentorij pauimentum de mundo stramine stratum. + +Tuncque effodiunt in circuitu fossam latam valde, et profundam vt totum +tentorium cum omnibus contentis descendat in illam. Eoque facto ita +equaliter terram planificantes adoperiunt graminibus, vt in omni tempore +locus sepulturae non valeat apparere. Et quoniam ignorantiae nubilo turpiter +excaecati putant in alio seculo homines delectationibus frui, dicunt quod +tentorium erit ei pro hospitio, cibi ad edendum, lac ad potandum, equus ad +equitandum, aurum et argentum ad respiciendum, sed et equa lac semper +praestabit, et pullos equinos successiue generabit. + +Post has itaque Imperatoris defuncti miseras exequias, nullus omnino +audebit de ipso loqui coram vxoribus et filijs, et propinquis, sed nec +nominare, quia per hoc putarent derogari paci, et quieti illius, qua non +dubitant eum dominari, in maiori satis gloria Paradisi quam hic stetit. + +Igitur Imperatore Grand Can sepulto obliuioni tradito, conueniunt quam cito +nobiles de septem tribubus prouinciae Cathay, et cui Imperium ex +propinquitate competit, dicunt sic. + + Ecce volumus, ordinamus, atque precamur, vt sis noster Dominus et + Imperator. + +Qui respondet + + Si vultis me super vos, sicut et iuris mei est, imperare, oportebit + vos fore mihi obedientes tam ad mortem quam ad vitam. + +Et respondentes dicunt. + + Nos faciemus quicquid praeceperitis. + +Tuncque Imperator addit haec verba: Ergo scitote, quod ex nunc verbum meum +acutum et scindens erit vt meus ensis: [Sidenote: i. cathedra.] Pergit +quoque sessum in suo Philtro nigro super pauimentum in conspectu throni +expanso, et cum ipso Philtro eleuatur ab omnibus, et infertur Imperij +solio, ac coronatur diademate praecedentis Imperatoris. + +De inde singuli principes, et singuae ciuitates, oppida, et villae per +vniuersum imperium mittunt ei munera iocalia, vasa, pannos, equos, +elephantes, aurum, argentum, et lapides preciosos, quorum, qualium, et +quantorum vix vel in numero haberi potest aestimatio. + + +CAPVT. 40. + +De multis regionibus Imperio Tartariae subiectis. + +Breuiter et nunc intendo cursum describere aliquarum magnarum regionum et +Insularum Imperij Tartariae. Et primo illas quae descendunt a prouincia +Cathay per septentrionalem plagam, vsque ad fines Christianitatis Prussiae, +et Russiae. + +Ergo prouincia Cathay descendens in sui oriente a regno Tharsis iungitur ab +occidente regno Turquescen, in quo et sunt plurimae ciuitates, quarum +formosior dicitur Octopar. Ipsum autem Turquescen regnum iungitur ad +occidentem sui regno, seu Imperio. Persiae, et ad septentrionem regno +Corasinae, quod spaciosum este valde, habens versus orientem sui vltra +centum diaetas deserti: hoc regnum est multis bonis abundans, et appellatur +eius melior ciuitas etiam Corasine. + +Isti quoque regno iungitur in occidente versus partes nostras regnum +Commanorum, quod et similiter longum est, et latum, sed in paucis sui locis +inhabitatum: Nam in quibusdam est frigus nimium, in alijs nimius calor, et +in nonnullis nimia muscarum multitudo. + +De istis Commanis venit olim fugata quaedam pluralitas populi vsque in +terram AEgypti quae ibidem succreta nunc ita inualuit, vt suppressis +indigenis videatur regnare: Nam et de seipsis constituerunt hunc, qui modo +est Soldanus, Melech Mandibron. Per Commanorum regnum decurrit Grandis +fluuius Echil, qui omni hyemali tempore in magna spissitudine gelatur; in +superiori quoque parte huius regni inter duo freta Caspiae, et Oceani, mons +sublimis est valde Chocas. Nota quod a nostris partibus non possit vsque in +Indiam superiorem duci magnus exercitus per terras, nisi per tres +tantummodo transitus, quorum iste est vnus, qui tamen non valet transiri +nisi tempore glaciei, et hic appellatus est Lodekonc. + +Alter per Turquescen, et per Persiam, tamen ibi sunt deserta plurium +dietarum, in quibus nisi esset exercitus bene prouisus, posset perire. + +Tertius ad primos fines regni Commanorum, transfretando tamen mare vsque in +regnum Abchaz: principalis ciuitas Commanorum dicitur Sarach. + +Ab hoc regno versus partes nostras inuenitur regio Laiton quae est vltima +paganismi, iungitur iste finis terrae Christianitatitis regno Prussiae, et +Russiae. + +Post potestatem Imperij Tartariae descendendo a prouincia Cathay in +Australem plagam venitur versus Persiam, Syriam, et Greciam. Versus terram +Christianorum possum aliqualiter in summa (quantum conuenit huic scripto) +connotare. Dixi supra iam prouinciam Cathay iungi regno Turquescen ad +occidentem, et illud quoque iungi regno seu Imperio Persiae. Ad quod +sciendum, quamuis rex Persiae habet etiam ab olim nomen Imperatoris; quia +(cum tenet aliquas terras sui Imperij ab Imperatore Tartarorum) necesse est +vt in tanto subiectus sit illi. + +Sunt autem in Persia duae regiones: vna altae Persiae, quae a regno Turquescen +descendens, iungitur ad occidentem sui fluuis Pyson. In ista habentur +renominatae ciuitates, quarum meliores duae dicuntur Bocura et Seonargant, +quam aliqui appellant Samarkand. Et altera Regio bassae Persiae, descendens a +flumine Pyson, qui ad sui occidentem iungiter regno Mediae et terrae minoris +Armeniae, et ad Aquilonem mari Caspio, et ad Austrum terrae minoris Indiae. + +In hac bassa Persia tres principaliores ciuitates sunt Aessabor, Saphaon, +Sarmasaule. In terra autem maioris Armeniae quondam habebantur quatuor regna +quae nunc dicuntur subesse Imperio Persarum, habetque famam terrae nobilis, +et ad occidentem sui iungitur Regno Turciae. + +Hec Armenia multas valde bonas continet ciuitates, quarum famosior est +Taurisa. Regnum Mediae quod subest Regi Persarum quamuis non latum est, +tamen longum est, et ad occidentem sui regno Chaldeae coniunctum. In Media +meliores duae ciuitates sunt, Seras, et Keremen. + +[Sidenote: Georgia. Abchas, alias Alchaz.] Hinc ad occidentem sui, iuncta +est regio Georgiae, quae modo constat diuisa in duo regna: Nam pars superior, +quae iungitur Mediae, reseruauit sibi nomen Georgiae, sed inferior pars +dicitur regnum Abchaz. Ambo haec regna, et regis eorum, sunt de fide +Christiana, et homines ita deuoti vt ad minus semel in hebdomada +communicent sacramentis, iuxta ritum Graecorum confectis. Et quidem regnum +Georgiae subiacet imperio Grand Can: sed Abchaz nunquam ab ipso Imperatore +Tartariae, neque Persarum, neque Medorum domino subdi potuit, eo quod +munitum est aquis et rupibus et alijs prouisionibus contra impugnationes +hostiles. + +[Sidenote: In parte regni Georgiae sunt tenebrae.] Iuxta hoc regnum Abchaz +habetur vnum minum et mirabile, nam magnus est territorij locus dictus +Hamson, et continens in circuitu spacium viae quatuor diaetarum: videter +semper opertus tenebris densis vt nemo audeat illic intrare profunde, +quoniam si qui presumpserint, non sunt visi reuerti. Attamen fatentur +vicini sub illis se tenebris audisse nonnunquam clamores hominum, hinnitus, +mugitus, rugitus, et boatus pecudum, et bestiarum, sed et cantus gallorum, +vt per haec et alia signa constet ibi habitare gentes: nam et fluuius +decurrens monstrat signa saepe certissima in suo exitu: ignoratur tamen si +tenebrae per totum territorium sint eiusdem densitatis, an forte sint in +circuitu per aliquod spacium, et intrinsecus plus luminosum. + +Dicuntur autem tenebrae istae olim per diuinum miraculum aduenisse. Saboere +enim Imperatore Persarum, circa annum Gratiae ducentessimum quinquagessimum +in persecutione Christianorum tendente cum pleno exercitu per hunc locum, +et Christianis tyrannidem eius fugientibus, contigit ex improuiso eos ita +arctari, vt se effugere desperarent, quapropter statim ad orationis +refugium omnes se sternentes clamauerunt ad Christum auxiliatorem suum: Et +deus, qui pro puro corde Christianos ad se orantes semper exaudit, expleuit +illic literam vaticinij Isaiae: quia ecce tenebrae operient terram et caligo +populos, monstrans per tenebram terrenam, quam eis superduxit, quas passuri +essent inimici nominis Christi tenebras infernales, indicansque per +temporalem vitam, quam sibi fidelibus conseruauit, eam quam possessuri sunt +viri Christiani vitam perpetuam, et coelestem. + +Itaque hoc regnum Abchaz ad occidentem sui iungitur regno Turciae, quod in +longo et lato valde extensum multas continet prouincias scilicet Iconiae, +Cappadociae, Saurae, Brike, Besicon, Patan, et Gennoch; hij omnes Turci, cum +tota Syria et Arabia vsque ad Galliziam Hispaniae, subsunt Imperatori +Babyloniae Soldano, et sunt in singulis prouinciis et regionibus ciuitates +magnae, ac multae nimis. Consequenter huic regno Turciae ad Occidentem sui in +ciuitate Cathasa [Marginal note: Vel Sathata.] iungitur per mare Greciae +superior pars potestatis Imperatoris Constantinopolitani, et quasi ad +Aquilonem contiguatur regno Syriae: cuius vna prouincia est terra +promissionis, prout hoc satis dictum est supra. Sunt et aliae terre, et +Insulae, et patriae latae, et spatiosae, continentes in se multa regna, et +reges, et gentes diuersas, de quibus nunc per singula pertractare non est +consilij. + +Ad supradictam Chaldaeam iungitur Mesopotamia, et minor Armenia, et velut ad +Austrum eius AEthiopia, Mauritania, Lybia alta et bassa, et Nubia. +[Sidenote: Extensio Imperij Grand Can.] Excepto ergo duntaxat districtu +Imperij Persiae, et potestate Soldani, omnes saepe pertractatae terrae, +regiones, regna et Insulae descendendo tam par Aquilonem, quam ad Austrum a +prouincia Cathay, vsque ad Christianitatem sunt de Imperio Tartariae Grand +Can. [Sidenote: Distantia a Roma ad Cathayam per Institores.] Et notandum +de spacio distantiae, quod institores de Roma, vel Venetia festinantes tam +per terras, quam per mare, expendunt de tempore 11. menses, et quandoque +duodecim, priusquam in Cathay valeant peruenire. + +Hijs itaque visis describam saltem aliquas a prouincia Cathay in orientem +terras Imperij Tartarorum. [Sidenote: Cadilla Regio orientalior Cathay. +Angli nostri hanc bestiolam nuper viderunt in Persia.] Illic habetur regio +Cadilla spaciosa multum, simul et speciosa: crescunt namque in ea fructus +ad quantitatem magnorum Cawardorum, in quibus inuenitur vna bestiola, in +carne et sanguine ad formam agnelli absque lana, et manducatur totus +fructus cum bestiola. Sunt et alij plures diuersi fructus, quorum penes nos +non est respectus nec vsus. Nam et sunt ibi nonnullae speciales vites +ferentes botros incredibiliter magnos, quorum vnum vix virilis vir valet in +hasta portare. + +Et deinde in meridiem per aliquas diaetas, potest perueniri ad primas Caspiae +alpes, quae descendendo descendunt vsque ad Amazoniam, insulam mulierum, de +qua tractatum est. Inter has Alpes retinetur maxima multitudo Iudaeorum +decem tribum Israel, per Dei voluntatem ita inclusa, vt in copiosa +numerositate non possint a nostra parte exire, quamuis aliqui pauci +nonnunquam sunt visi transisse. Haberent autem competentem exitum circa +insulam Amazoniae, sed illum diligenter regina obseruat. + +[Sidenote: Bacchariae Regnum vel Boghariae.] Porro de regione Cadilla in +orientem venitur ad regnum Backariae, in qua mali et multum crudeles +habitant homines, nec est securum itinerare per illam, quod ad modicam +occasionem (si Deus non conseruaret) occiderent viatorem et manducarent. +[Sidenote: Arbor Lanifera.] Illic sunt arbores ferentes lanam velut ouium, +ex qua texunt pannos ad vestimenta. Hypocentauri sunt ibi pro media +superiori parte in forma humana, et pro inferiori figura equorum, seu +taurorum, venantes in terris, et piscantes in aquis quod comedunt, et super +omnia carnes hominum, quos capere possunt. [Sidenote: Gryphones, de quibus +Paulus Venetae] Nec non et gryphi illic apparent pro media posteriori parte +in forma leonis, pro anteriori in forma aquilae. Sed sciatis, corpus magni +gryphi maius esse octo leonibus de partibus istis. Nam postquam equum, +bouem vel hominem, etiam asinum occiderit, leuat et asportat pleno volatu: +tanquam cornua bouis aut vaccae sunt illi vngulae, de quibus etiam fieri +solent ciphi ad bibendum, qui plurimum reputantur preciosi. Fiunt quoque de +pennis alarum eius arcus rigidi, et fortes ad iaciendum missilia et +sagittas. Ad istius regni Baccariae extremitates in Orientum finitur terra +potestatis Grand Can: Et iungitur ei terra potestatis magni Imperatoris +Indiae, qui semper vocatur Praesbyter Ioannes. Notandum, quoties per +prouincias totius Imperij Grand Can, quicquam accidit, quod Imperatorem non +oportet latere, confestim mittuntur per reges aut barones nuncij in +dromedarijs aut equis, qui celerrime festinant ad certa hospitia, ad hoc +ipsum, velut absque numero per imperium instituta: Isque nuncius hospitio +appropinquans, et cornu resonans, dum auditor paratur minicius alter, qui +de manu suscipiens literas, per recentem dromedarium festinat ad aliud +hospitium, et sic in breui tempore perferuntur rumores ad curia aures. +[Sidenote: Cursores, Chidibo Tartarice dicti.] Similique modo nuncij +pedites permutantur de hospitio in hospitium, vt citius percipiatur +negocium huius nuncij: appellantur sua lingua Chidibo. + +[Sidenote: Charita Mandeuilli.] Ergo per praemissa satis elucet magnam esse +nobilitatem, potestatem, reuerentiam, et dominationem Imperatoris Tartariae +Grand Can de Cathay, et quod nullus ab ista parte Imperator nec Persiae, nec +Babylonia, nec Greciae, sed nec Romae est illi comparandus. Vnde et multum +miserandum est, quia ipse cum toto Imperio nec est fide Catholica +illustratus, nec salutari lauachro regeneratus: et hoc oremus vt in breui +eueniat, per Iesum Christum Dominum nostrum. + +Explicit pars secunda huius opens. + + +The English Version. + +And whan the emperour dyethe, men setten him in a chayere in myddes the +place of his tent: and men setten a table before him clene, covered with a +clothe, and there upon flesche and dyverse vyaundes, and a cuppe fulle of +mares mylk: And men putten a mare besyde him, with hire fole, and an hors +saddled and brydeled; and thei leyn upon the hors gold and silver gret +quantytee: and thei putten abouten him gret plentee of stree: and than men +maken a gret pytt and a large; and with the tent and alle theise other +thinges, then putten him in erthe. And thei seyn, that whan he schalle come +in to another world, he schalle not ben with outen an hows, ne with owten +hors, ne with outen gold and sylver: and the mare schalle zeven him mylk, +and bryngen him forthe mo hors, tille he be wel stored in the tother world. +For thei trowen, that aftre hire dethe, thei schulle be etynge and +drynkynge in that other world, and solacynge hem with hire wifes, as thei +diden here. And aftre tyme, that the emperour is thus entered, no man +schalle be so hardy to speke of him before his frendes, And zit natheles +somtyme fallethe of manye, that thei maken hem to ben entered prevylly be +nyghte, in wylde places, and putten azen the grasse over the pytt for to +growe: or elle men coveren the pytt with gravelle and sond, that no man +schalle perceyve where, ne knowe where the pytt is, to that entent, that +never aftre, non of his frendes schulle han mynde ne rememberance of him. +And thanne thei seyn, that he is ravissht in to another world where he is a +grettre lord, than he was here. And thanne aftre the dethe of the emperour, +the 7 lynages assemblen hem to gidere, and chesen his eldest sone, or the +nexte aftre him, of his blood: and thus thei seye to him; wee wolen and wee +preyen and ordeynen, that zee ben oure lord and oure emperour. And thanne +he answerethe, zif yee wile, that I regne over zou, as lord, do eyeryche of +zou, that I schalle commanden him, outher to abyde or to go; and whom +soever that I commaunde to ben slayn, that anon he be slayn. And thei +answeren alle with o voys, what so evere zee commanden, it schalle be don. +Thanne seythe the emperour, now undirstondethe wel, that my woord from hens +forthe, is scharp and bytynge as a swerd. After men setten him upon a blak +stede, and so men bryngen him to a cheyere fulle richely arrayed, and there +thei crownen hym. And thanne alle the cytees and gode townes senden hym +ryche presentes; so that at that iourneye, he schalle have more than 60 +chariottes charged with gold and sylver, with outen jewelles of gold and +precyouse stones, that lordes zeven hym, that ben withouten estymacioun: +and with outen hors and clothes of gold and of Camakaas and Tartarynes, +that ben with outen nombre. + + +Of the Roialme of Thurse and the Londes and Kyngdomes towardes the + Septentrionale parties, in comynge down from the Lond of Cathay. + +This lond of Cathay is in Asye the depe. And aftre, on this half, is +Asyetthe more. The kyngdom of Cathay marchethe toward the west, unto the +kyngdom of Tharse; the whiche was on of the kinges, that cam to presente +our Lord in Betheleem. And thei that ben of the lynage of that kyng, arn +somme Cristene. In Tharse, thei eten no flessche, ne thei drynken no wyn. +And on this half, towardes the west, is the kyngdom of Turquesten, that +strecchethe him toward the west, to the kyngdom of Persie; and toward the +Septrentionalle, to the kyngdom of Chorasme. In the contre of Turquesten, +ben but fewe gode cytees: but the beste cytee of that lond highte Octorar. +There ben grete pastures; but fewe Coornes; and therfore, for the most +partie, thei ben alle herdemen: and thei lyzn in tentes, and thei drynken a +maner ale, made of hony. + +And aftre, on this half, is the kyngdom of Chorasme, that is a gode lond +and a plentevous, with outen wyn. And it hathe a desert toward the est, +that lastethe more than an 100 iourneyes. And the beste cytee of that +contree is clept Chorasme. And of that cytee, berethe the contree his name. +The folk of that contree ben hardy werryoures. And on this half is the +kyngdom of Comanye, where of the Comayns that dwelleden in Grece, somtyme +weren chaced out. This is on of the grettest kyngdomes of the world: but it +is not alle enhabyted. For at on of the parties, there is so gret cold, +that no man may dwelle there: and in another partie, there is so grete +hete, that no man may endure it. And also there ben so many flyes, that no +man may knowe on what syde he may turne him. In that contree is but lytille +arberye, ne trees that beren frute, ne othere. Thei lyzn in tentes. And +thei brenen the dong of bestes for defaute of wode. + +This kyngdom descendeth on this half toward us, and toward Pruysse, and +toward Rossye. And thorghe that contree rennethe the ryvere of Ethille, +that is on of the grettest ryveres of the world. And it fresethe so +strongly alle zeres, that many tymes men han foughten upon the Ise with +grete hostes, bothe parties on fote, and hire hors voyded for the tyme: and +what on hors and on fote, mo than 200000 persones on every syde. And +betweene that ryvere and the grete see ocean, that thei clepen the see +maure, lyzn alle theise Roialmes. And toward the hede benethe in that +Roialme, is the mount Chotaz, that is the hiest mount of the world: and it +is betwene the see Maure and the see Caspy. There is fulle streyt and +dangerous passage, for to go toward Ynde. And therfore Kyng Alysandre leet +make there a strong cytee, that men clepen Alizandre, for to kepe the +contree, that no man scholde passe with outen his leve. And now men clepen +that cytee, the Zate of Helle. And the princypalle cytee of Comenye is +clept Sarak, that is on of the 3 weyes for to go in to Ynde: but be the +weye, ne may not passe no gret multytude of peple, but zif it be in wyntre. +And that passage men clepen the Derbent. The tother weye is for to go fro +the citee of Turquesten, be Persie: and be that weye, ben manye iourneyes +be desert. And the thridde weye is that comethe fro Comanye, and than to go +be the grete see and be the kyngdom of Abchaz. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, that alle theise kyngdomes and alle theise +londes aboveseyd, unto Pruysse and to Rossye, ben alle obeyssant to the +grete Chane of Cathay; and many othere contrees, that marchen to other +costes. Wherfore his powere and his lordschipe is fulle gret, and fulle +myghty. + + +Of the Emperour of Persye, and of the lond of darknesse and of other + Kyngdomes, that belongen to the grete Chane of Cathay, and other Londes + of his, unto the See of Greece. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXV.] Now sithe I have devysed zou the londes and the +kyngdoms toward the parties septentrionales, in comynge down from the lond +of Cathay, unto the londes of the Cristene, towardes Pruysse and Rossye; +now schalle I devyse zou of other londes and kyngdomes, comynge doun be +other costes, toward the right syde, unto the see of Grece, toward the lond +of Cristene men: and therfore that, aftre Ynde and aftre Cathay, the +Emperour of Persie is the gretteste lord. Therfore I schalle telle zou of +the kyngdom of Persie. First, where he hathe 2 kyngdomes; the firste +kyngdom begynnethe toward the est, toward the kyngdom of Turquesten, and it +strecchethe toward the west, unto the ryyere of Phison, that is on of the 4 +ryveres, that comen out of paradys. And on another syde, it strecchethe +toward the septemtrion, unto the see of Caspye: and also toward the southe, +unto the desert of Ynde. And this contree is gode and pleyn and fulle of +peple. And there ben manye gode cytees. But the 2 princypalle cytees ben +theise, Boyturra and Seornergant, that sum men clepen Sormagant. The tother +kyngdom of Persie strecchethe toward the ryvere of Phison, and the parties +of the west, unto the kyngdom of Mede: and fro the grete Armenye, and +toward the septemtrion, to the see of Caspie; and toward the southe, to the +land of Ynde. That is also a gode lond and a plentefous; and it hath 3 +grete princypalle cytees, Messabor, Caphon and Sarmassane. + +And thanne aftre is Armenye, in the which weren wont to ben 4 kyngdomes: +that is a noble contree, and fulle of godes. And it begyinnethe at Persie, +and strecchethe toward the west in lengthe, unto Turkye. And in largenesse, +it durethe to the cytee of Alizandre, that now is clept the Zate of Helle, +that I spak offe beforn, undre the kyngdom of Mede. In this Armenye ben +fulle manye gode cytees: but Tanrizo is most of name. + +Aftre this, is the kyngdom of Mede, that is fulle long: but it is not fulle +large, that begynnethe toward the est, to the land of Persie, and to Ynde +the lesse. And it strecchethe toward the west, toward the kyngdom of +Caldee, and toward the septemtrion, descendynge toward the litille Armenye. +In that kyngdom of Medee, ther ben many grere hilles, and litille of pleyn +erthe. There duellen Sarazines, and another maner of folk, that men clepen +Cordynes. The beste 2 cytees of that kyngdom, ben Sarras and Karemen. + +Aftre that, is the kyngdom of George, that begynnethe toward the est; to +the gret mountayne, that is clept Abzor; where that duellen many dyverse +folk of dyverse naciouns. And men clepen the contree Alamo. This kyngdom +strecchethe him towardes Turkye, and toward the grete see: and toward the +south, it marchethe to the grete Armenye. And there ben 2 kyngomes in that +contree; that on is the kyngdom of Georgie, and that other is the kyngdom +of Abcaz. And alle weys in that contree ben 2 kynges, and thei ben bothe +Cristene: but the Kyng of Georgie is in subieccioun to the grete Chane. And +the King of Abcaz hathe the more strong contree: and he alle weyes +vigerously defendethe his contree; azenst alle tho that assaylen him; so +that no man may make him in subieccioun to no man. In that kyngdom of Abcaz +is a gret marvaylle. For a provynce of the contree, that hathe wel in +circuyt 3 iorneyes, that men clepen Hanyson, is alle covered with +derknesse, with outen ony brightnesse or light; so that no man may see ne +here, ne no man dar entren in to hem. And natheles, thei of the contree +seyn, that som tyme men heren voys of folk, and hors nyzenge, and cokkes +crowynge. And men witen wel, that men duellen there: but thei knowe not +what men. And thei seyn, that the derknesse befelle be myracle of God. For +a cursed Emperour of Persie, that highte Saures, pursuede alle Cristene +men, to destroye hem, and to compelle hem to make sacrifise to his ydoles; +and rood with grete host, in alle that ever he myghte, for to confounde the +Cristene men. And thanne in that contree, dwellen manye gode Cristene men, +the whiche that laften hire godes, and wolde han fled in to Grece: and whan +they weren in a playn, that highte Megon, anon this cursed emperour mett +with hem, with his hoost, for to have slayn hem, and hewen hem to peces. +And anon the Cristene men kneleden to the grounde, and made hire preyeres +to God to sokoure hem. And anon a gret thikke clowde cam, and covered the +emperour and alle his hoost: and so thei enduren in that manere, that thei +ne mowe not gon out, on no syde; and so schulle thei ever more abyden in +derknesse, tille the day of dome, be the myracle of God. And thanne the +Cristene men wenten, where hem lykede best, at hire own plesance, with +outen lettynge of ony creature; and hire enemyes enclosed and confounded in +derknesse, with outen ony strok. Wherfore we may wel seye, with David, _A +Domino factum est istud; et est mirable in oculis nostris_. And that was a +gret myracle, that God made for hem. Wherfore methinkethe, that Cristene +men scholden ben more devoute, to serven oure Lord God, than ony other men +of ony other secte. For with outen ony drede, ne were cursednesse and synne +of Cristene men, thei scholden be lordes of alle the world. For the banere +of Jesu Crist is alle weys displayed, and redy on alle sydes, to the help +of his trewe lovynge servauntes: in so moche, that o gode Cristene man, in +gode beleeve, scholde overcomen and out chacen a 1000 cursed mysbeleevynge +men: as David seyth in the Psautere, _Quoniam persequebatur unus mille, et +duo fugarent decem milia_. Et, _Cadent a latere tuo mille, et decem milia a +dextris tuis_. And how that it myghte ben, that on scholde chacen a 1000, +David himself seythe, folewynge, _Quia manus Domini fecit haec omnia_. And +oure Lord himself seythe, be the prophetes mouth, _Si in viis meis +ambulaveritis, super tribulantes vos misissem manum meam_. So that wee may +seen apertely, that zif wee wil be gode men, non enemye ne may not enduren +azenst us. Also zee schulle undirstonde, that out of that lond of +derknesse, gothe out a gret ryvere, that schewethe wel, that there ben folk +dwellynge, be many redy tokenes: but no man dar not entre in to it. + +And wytethe well, that in the kyngdoms of Georgie, of Abchaz and of the +litile Armenye, ben gode Cristene men and devoute. For thei schryven hem +and howsele hem evermore ones or twyes in the woke. And there ben many of +hem, that howsele hem every day: and so do wee not on this half; alle be it +that Seynt Poul commandethe it, seyenge, _Omnibus diebus dominicis ad +communicandum hortor_. Thei kepen that commandement: but wee ne kepen it +not. + +Also aftre, on this half, is Turkye, that marchethe to the gret Armenye. +And there ben many provynces, as Capadoche, Saure, Brique, Quesiton, Pytan +and Gemethe. And in everyche of theise ben many gode cytees. This Turkye +strecchethe unto the cytee of Sachala, that sittethe upon the see of Grece; +and so it marchethe to Syrie. Syrie is a gret contree and a gode, as I have +told zou before. And also it hathe, aboven toward Ynde, the kyngdom of +Caldee, that strecchethe fro the mountaynes of Calde, toward the est, unto +the cytee of Nynyvee, that sittethe upon the ryvere of Tygre: and in +largenesse, it begynnethe toward the northe, to the cytee of Maraga; and it +strecchethe toward the southe, unto the see occean. In Caldee is a pleyn +contree, and fewe hilles and few ryveres. + +Aftre is the kyngdom of Mesopotayme, that begynnethe toward the est, to the +flom of Tygre, unto a cytee that is clept Moselle: and it strecchethe +toward the west, to the flom of Eufrate, unto a cytee that is clept Roianz: +and in lengthe it gothe to the mount of Armenye, unto the desert of Ynde +the lesse. This is a gode contree and a pleyn; but it hathe fewe ryveres. +It hathe but 2 mountaynes in that contree: of the whiche, on highte Symar, +and that other Lyson. And this lond marchethe to the kyngdom of Caldee. + +Zit there is, toward the parties meridionales, many contrees and many +regyouns; as the lond of Ethiope, that marchethe, toward the est, to the +grete desertes; toward the west, to the kyngdom of Nubye; toward the +southe, to the kyngdom of Moretane; and toward the north to the Rede See. +Aftre is Moretane, that durethe fro the mountaynes of Ethiope, unto Lybie +the hize. And that contree lyzth a long fro the see ocean, toward the +southe; and toward the northe, it marchethe to Nubye, and to the highe +Lybye. (Theise men of Nubye ben Cristene.) And it marchethe fro the londes +aboveseyd to the desertes of Egypt. And that is the Egypt, that I have +spoken of before. And aftre is Libye the hye, and Lybye the lowe, that +descendethe down lowe, toward the grete see of Spayne. In the whiche +contree ben many kyngdomes and many dyverse folk. Now I have devysed zou +many contrees, on this half the kyngdom of Cathay: of the whiche, many ben +obeyssant to the grete Chane. + + +Of the Contrees and Yles, that ben bezonde the Lond of Cathay; and of the + Frutes there; and of 22 Kynges enclosed within the Mountaynes. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXVI.] + +Now schalle I seye zou sewyngly of contrees and yles, that ben bezonde the +contrees that I have spoken of. Wherfore I seye zou, in passynge be the +lond of Cathaye, toward the highe Ynde, and toward Bacharye, men passen be +a kyngdom, that men clepen Caldilhe; that is a fulle fair contree. And +there growethe a maner of fruyt, as thoughe it weren gowrdes: and whan thei +ben rype, men kutten hem a to, and men fynden with inne a lytylle best, in +flessche, in bon and blode, as though it were a lytylle lomb, with outen +wolle. And men eten bothe the frut and the best: and that is a gret +marveylle. Of that frute I have eten; alle thoughe it were wondirfulle: but +that I knowe wel, that God is marveyllous in his werkes. And natheles I +told hem, of als gret a marveylle to hem, that is amonges us: and that was +of the Bernakes. For I tolde hem, that in oure contree weren trees, that +beren a fruyt, that becomen briddes fleeynge: and tho that fellen in the +water, lyven; and thei that fallen on the erthe, dyen anon: and thei ben +right gode to mannes mete. And here of had thei als gret marvaylle, that +summe of hem trowed, it were an impossible thing to be. [Footnote: The +Barnacle-bearing trees are said to have grown in Ireland.] In that contree +ben longe apples of gode savour; where of ben mo than 100 in a clustre, and +als manye in another; and thei han gret longe leves and large, of 2 fote +long or more. And in that contree, and in other contrees there abouten, +growen many trees, that beren clowe gylofres and notemuges, and grete notes +of Ynde and of canelle and of many other spices. And there ben vynes, that +beren so grete grapes, that a strong man scholde have y now to done, for to +bere o clustre with alle the grapes. In that same regioun ben the +mountaynes of Caspye, that men clepen Uber in the contree. Betwene the +mountaynes, the Jewes of 10 lynages ben enclosed, that men clepen Gothe and +Magothe: and thei mowe not gon out on no syde. There weren enclosed 22 +kynges with hire peple, that duelleden betwene the mountaynes of Sythye. +There Kyng Alisandre chacede hem betwene tho mountaynes; and there he +thoughte for to enclose hem thorghe werk of his men. But whan he saughe, +that he myghte not don it, ne bryng it to an ende, he preyed to God of +Nature, that he wolde parforme that that he had begonne. And alle were it +so, that he was a Payneme and not worthi to ben herd, zit God of his grace +closed the mountaynes to gydre: so that thei dwellen there, alle faste y +lokked and enclosed with highe mountaynes alle aboute, saf only on o syde; +and on that syde is the see of Caspye. Now may sum men asken, Sithe that +the see is on that o syde, wherfore go thei not out on the see syde, for to +go where that hem lykethe? But to this question, I schal answere, That see +of Caspye gothe out be londe, undre the mountaynes, and rennethe be the +desert at o syde of the contree; and aftre it strecchethe unto the endes of +Persie. And alle thoughe it be clept a see, it is no see, ne it touchethe +to non other see; but it is a lake, the grettest of the world. And thoughe +thei wolden putten hem in to that see, thei ne wysten never, where that +thei scholde arryven. And also thei conen no langage, but only hire owne, +that no man knowethe but thei: and therfore mowe thei not gon out. And also +zee schulle undirstond, that the Jewes han no propre lond of hire owne for +to dwellen inne, in alle the world, but only that lond betwene the +mountaynes. And zit thei zelden tribute for that lond to the Queen of +Amazoine, the whiche makethe hem to ben kept in cloos fulle diligently, +that thei schalle not gon out on no syde, but be the cost of hire lond. For +hire lond marchethe to tho mountaynes. And often it hathe befallen, that +summe of the Jewes han gon up the mountaynes, and avaled down to the +valeyes: but gret nombre of folk ne may not do so. For the mountaynes ben +so hye and so streghte up, that thei moste abyde there, maugre hire myghte. +For thei mowe not gon out, but be a littille issue, that was made be +strengthe of men; and it lastethe wel a 4 gret myle. And aftre, is there +zit a lond alle desert, where men may fynde no watre, ne for dyggynge, ne +for non other thing. Wherfore men may not dwellen in that place: so it is +fulle of dragounes, of serpentes and of other venymous bestes, that no man +dar not passe, but zif it be strong wyntre. And that streyt passage, men +clepen in that contree, Clyron. And that is the passage, that the Queen of +Amazoine makethe to ben kept. And thoghe it happene, sum of hem, be +fortune, to gon out; thei conen no maner of langage but Ebrow: so that thei +can not speke to the peple. And zit natheles, men seyn, thei schalle gon +out in the tyme of Antecrist, and that thei schulle maken gret slaughtre of +Cristene men. And therfore alle the Jewes, that dwellen in alle londes, +lernen alle weys to speken Ebrew, in hope that whan the other Jewes schulle +gon out, that thei may undirstonden hire speche, and to leden hem in to +Cristendom, for to destroye the Cristene peple. For the Jewes seyn, that +they knowen wel, be hire Prophecyes, that thei of Caspye schulle been undre +hire subieccioun, als longe as they had ben in subieccioun of hem. And zif +that zee wil wyte, how that thei schulle fynden hire Weye, aftre that I +have herd seye, I schalle telle zou. In the time of Antecrist, a fox +schalle make there his trayne, and mynen an hole, where Kyng Alisandre leet +make the Zates: and so longe he schalle mynen and perce the erthe, till +that he schalle passe thorghe, towardes that folk. And whan thei seen the +fox thei schulle have gret marveylle of him, be cause that thei saughe +never suche a best. For of alle other bestes, thei han enclosed amonges +hem, saf only the fox. And thanne thei schullen chacen him and pursuen him +so streyte, tille that he come to the same place, that he cam fro. And +thanne thei schullen dyggen and mynen so strongly, tille that thei fynden +the zates, that Kyng Alisandre leet make of grete stones and passynge huge, +wel symented and made stronge for the maystrie. And tho zates thei schulle +breken, and so gon out, be fyndynge of that issue. + +Fro that lond, gon men toward the lond of Bacharie, where ben fulle +cruelle. In that lond ben trees, that beren wolle, as thoghe it were of +scheep; where of men maken clothes, and alle thing that may ben made of +wolle. In that contree ben many Ipotaynes, that dwellen somtyme in the +watre, and somtyme on the lond: and thei ben half man and half hors, as I +have seyd before: and thei eten men, whan thei may take hem. And there ben +ryveres of watres, that ben fulle byttere, three sythes more than is the +watir of the see. In that contree ben many Griffounes, more plentee than in +ony other contree. Sum men seyn, that thei han the body upward, as an +eagle, and benethe as a Lyoun: and treuly thei seyn sothe, that thei ben of +that schapp. But o griffoun hathe the body more gret and is more strong +thanne 8 lyouns, of suche lyouns as ben o this half; and more gret and +strongere, than an 100 egles, suche as we han amonges us. For o griffoun +there will bere, fleynge to his neste, a gret hors, or 2 oxen zoked to +gidere, as thei gon at the plowghe. For he hathe his talouns so longe and +so large and grete, upon his feet, as thoughe thei weren hornes of grete +oxen or of bugles or of Kyzn; so that men maken cuppes of hem, to drynken +of: and of hire ribbes and of the pennes and of hire wenges, men maken +bowes fulle stronge, to schote with arwes and quarelle. From thens gon men, +be many iourneyes, thorghe the lond of Prestre John, the grete Emperour of +Ynde. And men clepen his Roialme, the Yle of Pentexoire, + + +END OF PART II. + + + +MANDEVILLE'S VOYAGES. + +PART III. + + +Tertia pars. + +CAPVT. 41. + +De magnificentia Imperatoris Indiae et preciositate Palatij. + +[Sidenote: Seu Pentoxoria Ciuitas Nyse] Cum in praecedentibus Imperator +Indiae dictus sit magnus, restat de illius magnificentia aliquid poni hoc +loco: cuius vtique gloria, nobilitas, et potestas, dici non habetur minor, +est tamen in aliquibus satis maior, quia omne aequale non est idem cum illo +cui aequatur: itaque a finibus regni Bachariae supradicti vbi contiguatur +Imperio Indiae, eundo per multas diaetas intratur in Pentoxyriae quod est +magnae latitudinis, et abundantiae in multis bonis: huius nominatior ciuitas, +dicitur Nyse, et in ea habet Imperator palatium Imperiale, in quo residet +dum sibi placet. Imperator iste semper vocitatus est Praesbyter Ioannes, +cuius nominis causam audieram quandoque non veram: sed in illis partibus +accepi rationem indubitatam, quam breuiter hic enarro. [Sidenote: Narratio +de rebus gestis Ogeri Ducis Daniae.] Circa annum ab incarnatione Domini +octingentessimum, dux Ogerus de Danemarchia, cum quindecim cognationis suae +baronibus, et armatis viginti milibus transiuit mare Greciae, et fauente +sibi Deo conquisiuit Christianitati per multa praelia pene omnes terras, +regiones, et insulas, quas esse de potestate Grand Can praedixi, nec non et +omnes, quae sunt de potestate Imperij huius Imperatoris Indiae. Eratque inter +Barones vnus denominatus Ioannes filius Goudebucf, regis Frisonum: qui +dictus Ioannes Deo deuotus fuit, et dum licuit Ecclesiarum limina iniuit, +vnde et barones ei dabant quasi per iocum Praesbyter Ioannes vocabulum. +[Sidenote: Vnde Presbyter Ioannis sit dictus. 4000. Insulae.] Dum ergo +Ogerus dictas regiones expugnatas diuideret in hijs quindecim suis +cognatis, et quemlibet eorum in suo loco constitueret regem, quatenus +Christiana religio in illa orbis superficie semper stabilis permaneret, +tradidit isti Praesbytero Ioanni superiorem Indiam, cum 4000. insulis, +regionibus, et ipsum praefecit Imperatorem super reliquos cognatos, vt ei +certa tributa impenderent, et in omnibus obedirent, atque ex tunc omnes +successores Indiae sunt vocati Praesbyter Ioannes et vsque in hodiernum +tempus boni manserunt Christiani, et religionis aemulatores. Interim cum +causa matrimoniorum aut procurationis filiorum dispersa est primi Imperij +integritas, et multae de insulis conuersae vel potius peruersae retrocesserunt +ad vetustum squalorem paganismi primi. Nota. Recedens a Cambalu versus +orientem post 50. dietas ad terram Praesbyteri Ioannes, principalis ciuitas +terrae vocatur Cosan, satis parua sicut Vincentia: habet etiam sub se multas +alias ciuitates. Ex pacto semper habet in vxorem vnam de filiabus Grand +Can. + +Per multas peruenitur ad prouinciam Casan, quae est secunda melior de mundo, +vbi subtilior est, habet dietas 50. longior, 60. et est vna de duodecim +partibus Imperij Grand Can. Odericus. Vide infra capitulo 49. de Cassan, et +de Epulone. Deinde venitur in Thebeth prouinciam, quae India est confinis. +Itaque Rex et Imperator iste tenet spatiosissimum Imperium plenum valde +multis Regionibus et Insulis amplis, diuisum inter quatuor flumina magna de +Paradiso terrestri descendentia, Pyson, Gyon, Tygrim, et Euphratem. Nam +vltra fines orientales eius Imperij, et terrestram Paradisum, nullus +hominum habitat vel domitatur. + +Praeterea imperat multis alijs regionibus et insulis quae distinguntur per +brachia maris Oceani, et in quibus singulis continetur grandis numerositas +ciuitatum ac villarum, et multitudo innumera populorum prae abundantia, et +praeciositate omnium terrenorum bonorum. + +Imperium Indiae habetur famosum per vniuersum orbem. Sed et famosius +haberetur si mercatores mundi communiter possint et auderent adire sicut +Cathay, Nostratibus enim perrarus est illic accessus, tam prae +longinquitate, quam prae marinis periculis. Nam exceptis alijs sunt ibi +quamplures Adamantini colles, ad oram maris, et intra mare, qui sua virtute +attrahunt sibi naues ferrum continentes. Quoniam et mihi nauiganti +monstrabatur per nautas a remotis quasi paruula Insula in mari, quam +asserebant totaliter ab antiquis temporibus paulatim ibi cumulatam de +nauibus per Adamantes retentis. + +[Sidenote: Latitudo Imperij Praesbyteri Ioannis est 4. mensium iter.] +Estimatur autem latitudo huius Imperij per dietas quatuor mensium, sed +longitudini non datur estimatio, eo quod tenditur vsque Paradisum vbi +nullus accedit. + +Distinctum est Imperium per duodecim prouincias, quibus totidem praesunt +reges principales seu prouinciales, et quorum singuli habent sub se Reges, +Duces, Marchiones, et Barones, praestantes atque reddentes Praesbytero +Ioanni promptam obedientiam, et certa tributa. Saepius et communiter tenet +Sedem Imperator in palatio vrbis Imperialis Suse. Hoc autem Palatium tale +et tantum est, vt per me non credatur debite estimandum. Istud tamen dico +audenter in summa, quod grandius, nobilius, preciosius, et placidius est, +in auro, gemmis, structuris, et schemate supra descripto palatio Grand Can +in Caydo. + +Et ex speciali sciatis, istius palatij principales portas esse de +Sardonico, vndique in ebore circumcluso: sed et transuersae lineae sunt omnes +Eburneae, aularum et cubiculorum fenestrae christallinae. Mensarum quaedam +Smaragdinae, aliquae Haematistinae, caeterorumque lapidum preciosorum per +aurum sibimet coniunctorum. Et nonnullae in toto aureae vel gemmunculis +disseminatae, et vnaquaeque de mensis cum stabilimento proprij generis. De +throni quoque preciositate, quia meae demonstrationis excellit modum, +solummodo dico, singulos ascensionis gradus esse singulorum lapidum +preciosorum: Primum onychis, secundum christallai, tertium iaspidis, +quartum haematisti, quintum sardij, sextum cornelij. Et septimus qui est +sub sedentis Imperatoris pedibus, ipse est, chrysolitus, omnes circumfusi, +et inclusoria arte formati, auro splendida relucentes. Sed et ambo throni +reclinatoria ex smaragdis auro combinatis, eoque distincto nobilissimis +granis, et gemmis: cuncti pilarij in camera Regis dormitoria consistunt de +auro fuluo, disseminati baccis, et quampluribus carbunculorum rubetis, +totum de nocte habitaculum illustrantibus. + +Et nihilominus in ea christallina lampas plena balsamo pistico sed ardens +et lucens, tam pro augendo lumine, quam pro corrigendo aere, tamen etiam +pro ministrando optimo odore. + +Forma lecti Imperatoris compacta est de puris et nobilissimis Saphyris, +conclusi vtique aureis vel eburneis ligaturis, vt virtute lapidum capiat +suauem somnum, motusque carnis inhonesti stimuli, in eo refrenentur. +Nunquam enim iungitur mulieri nisi soli coniugi propriae, sed nec illi nisi +quatuor quindenis anni videlicet in capite hyemis, veris, aestatis, et +autumni causa sobolis generandae. + +Vtque breuiter transeam de multa huius palatij nobilitate, mirabile hoc +solummodo praemissis super addo. Quia circa medium illius in summo apice +turris maioris, duo sunt nodi seu pomella de decoctissimi auri metallo mirae +magnitudinis, et serenae resplendentiae, et in ipsis formati duo carbunculi +grandes, et lati, sua virtute tenebras effugantes, et velut splendorem +plenilunij nocturno tempore mentientes. + + +The English Version. + +Of the Ryalle estate of Prestre John; and of a riche man, that made a + marveyllous Castelle, and cleped it Paradys; and of his Sotyltee. + +[Sidenote: Chap. XXVII.] This Emperour Prestre John holt fulle gret lond, +and hathe many fulle noble cytees and gode townes in his royalme, and many +grete dyvene yles ond large. For alle the contree of Ynde is devysed in +yles, for the grete flodes, that comen from Paradys, that departen alle the +lond in many parties. And also in the see, he hathe fulle manye yles. And +the beste cytee in the yle of Pentexoire is Nyse, that is a fulle ryalle +cytee and a noble, and fulle riche. This Prestre John hathe undre him many +kynges and many yles and many dyverse folk of dyverse condiciouns. And this +lond is fulle gode and ryche; but not so riche as is the lond of the grete +Chane. For the marchauntes come not thidre so comounly, for to bye +marchandises, as thei don in the lond of the gret Chane: for it is to fer +to travaylle to. And on that other partie, in the yle of Cathay, men fynden +alle maner thing, that is nede to man; clothes of gold, of silk, and +spycerie. And therfore, alle be it that men han grettre chep in the yle of +Prestre John, natheles men dreden the longe wey and the grete periles in +the see, in tho parties. For in many places of the see ben grete roches of +stones of the adamant, that of his propre nature drawethe iren to him. And +therfore there passen no schippes, that han outher bondes or nayles of iren +with in hem: and zif there do, anon the roches of the adamantes drawen hem +to hem, that never thei may go thens. I my self have seen o ferrom in that +see, as thoughe it hadde ben a gret yle fulle of trees and buscaylle, fulle +of thornes and breres, gret plentee. And the schipmen tolde us, that alle +that was of schippes, that weren drawen thidre be the adamauntes, for the +iren that was in hem. And of the rotenesse and other thing that was with in +the schippes, grewen suche buscaylle and thornes and breres and grene +grasse and suche maner of thing; and of the mastes and the seylle zerdes; +it semed a gret wode or a grove. And suche roches ben in many places there +abouten. And therfore dur not the marchauntes passen there, but zif thei +knowen wel the passages, or elle that thei han gode lodes men. And also +thei dreden the longe weye: and therfore thei gon to Cathay; for it is more +nyghe: and zit is not so nyghe, but that men moste ben travayllynge be see +and lond, 11 monethes or 12, from Gene or from Venyse, or he come to +Cathay. And zit is the lond of Prestre John more ferr, be many dredfulle +iourneyes. And the marchauntes passen be the kyngdom of Persie, and gon to +a cytee that is clept Hermes: for Hermes the philosophre founded it. And +aftre that, thei passen an arm of the see, and thanne thei gon to another +cytee that is clept Golbache: and there thei fynden marchandises, and of +popengayes, as gret plentee as men fynden here of gees. And zif thei will +passen ferthere, thei may gon sykerly i now. In that contree is but lytylle +whete or berley: and therfore thei eten ryzs and hony and mylk and chese +and frute. + +This Emperour Prestre John takethe alle weys to his wif, the doughtre of +the grete Chane: and the gret Chane also in the same wise, the doughtre of +Prestre John. For theise 2 ben the grettest lordes undir the firmament. + +In the lond of Prestre John, ben manye dyverse thinges and many precious +stones, so gret and so large, that men maken of hem vesselle: as plateres, +dissches and cuppes. And many other marveylles ben there; that it were to +cumbrous and to long to putten it in scripture of bokes. + + +CAPVT 42. + +De frequentia palatij et comitatu Imperatoris. + +Seruiunt et praesto sunt iugiter Domino Imperatori septem reges, qui in +capite singulorum mensium, alijs septem regibus pro illis palatium +ingredientibus recedunt ad propria, donec reuoluatur eis tempus statutum. +Hij curam habent de gubernatione administrationum in aula maiori per +subiectos eis 72. duces, et 300. et 63. comites seu barones, quorum +vnusquisque optime nouit et diligenter intendit proprio ministerio. + +Nam isti sunt Imperatoris Cubicularij, isti Camerarij, isti scindunt Regi +morsellos: alij de apponendis curam gerunt ferculis et deponendis, +deafferendis, deasportandis, alij pincernae, Archimandritae, ostiarij, et sic +de singulis. + +Nec non absque iam dictis, manducant omni die in aula coram Imperatore, +duodecim Archiepiscopi, 220. Episcopi, quibus etiam alij totidem certis +temporibus succedunt per vices. Verumtamem ad quotidianas expensas vsque +praemissas, veniunt de Curia 300. millia personarum, sed non amplius: sed +sicut praedixi de Curia praecedentis Imperatoris sic nullus hic, +cuiuscunque sit status, aut sexus, comedit vltra semel in die, et hoc ipsum +sobrie satis: quoniam prout aestimare possum, expensae duodecim hominum de +nostris communiter compensarent triginta hominum in partibus illis. + +Dum Ioannem Presbyterum contingit procedere cum exercitu in plena +exhibitione, non deferuntur vexilla, sed tredecim cruces magnae altitudinis +et grossitudinis, de auro distincto pretiosissimis petris, in honorem +Christi et suorum Apostolorum duodecim. Hae vectantur in singulis curribus, +et singularum ad hoc maximis curribus cum custodia cuiuscunque crucis, +decem mille equitum, et centum mille peditum, nec tamen hic numerus auget +vel minuit principalem exercitum Paganorum. + +Tempore pacis per terras proprias de palatio ad palatium, aut de regno ad +regnum, dum tendere ei placet, comitatur vtique magna multitudine hominum +ante et retro, et ex vtroque laterum. + +Tuncque portantur coram eo tria valde notabilia, quae tam illi quam omnibus +ea digne notantibus esse possunt salutaria. Praecedit enim eum in spatio +circiter octodecim passuum discus onustus velut omni genere pretiosorum +vasorum auri et argenti, gemmarum, et inaestimabilis artificij. Illumque +discum subsequitur propinquius Imperatori ad spatium centum passuum, alia +crux lignea nullo penitus auro, nulloue colore aut preciositate +artificialis operis adornata. + +Dehinc ad sex passuum succedit ibidem propinquans Imperatori discus aureus +terra nigerrima plenus. Sunt enim praedicti comitatus in custodiam et +honorem personae Imperatoris, discus vassorum in ostensionem diuitiarum, et +maiestatis Imperialis. Crux in recordatione passionis et mortis, quam in +cruce ligni simplice Christus passus est pro nobis. Et terra nigra in +memoriam dirae mortis, qua caro ipsius Imperatoris, quae terra est, in terram +ibit corruptionis. + + +The English Version. + +But of the princypalle yles and of his estate and of his lawe, I schalle +telle zou som partye. This Emperour Prestre John is Cristene; and a gret +partie of his contree also; but zit thei have not alle the articles of oure +feythe, as wee have. Thei beleven wel in the Fadre, in the Sone and in the +Holy Gost: and thei ben fulle devoute, and righte trewe on to another. And +thei sette not be no barettes, ne by cawteles, ne of no disceytes. And he +hathe undre him 72 provynces; and in every provynce is a kyng. And theise +kynges han kynges undre hem; and alle ben tributaries to Prestre John. + + +CAPVT. 43. + +De quibusdam miris per regiones Indiae. + +Licet plurima mira habeantur in terra Imperij Presbyteri Ioannis, ne +materia operis nimium proteletur, multa tego silentio: et solum de +quibusdam in principalibus Insulis narro. [Sidenote: Magnum mare arenosum] +Ergo in primis dico vidisse me magnum mare arenosum, quod de solum minuta +arena sine vlla aqua cum lapillorum granellis currit, et fluit per altas +eleuationes, et depressiones ad similitudinem maris aquae, nec vnquam +quiescit: et quod ipse non cesso stupere, inueniuntur pisces ad littus +proiecti, qui cum sint alterius formae et speciei, quam de nostro mari, +videntur tamen gustui in edendo delicatiores. [Sidenote: In orientali India +vsque hodie venti anniuersarij arenis ostia fluminum suffocant.] Nullo +tamen humano ingenio videtur hoc mare transuadari, aut nauigari, aut illo +piscari, sed nec propter sui longitudinem, et plura impedimenta de prope +circuiri. + +Item ab hoc latere maris per tres dietas habentur magnae montium alpes, +inter quas venit quasi oriens de Paradiso fluuius decurrentibus petris, +nihil penitus habens aquae, in quibus aestimandae sunt plurimum magnarum esse +virtutum, quamuis de singulis humanae scientiae constare non potest. + +Hic petrarum fluuius currit ad intercisum tempus, quasi in tribus septimanae +diebus, per spatium deserti Indiae plurium dietarum, velut fluuius, quousque +tandem se perdat in mare arenosum praedictum, atque ex tunc ipsi lapides +penitus non comparent. Tempore autem sui cursus nullus appropinquare +praesumit, prae strepitu eius et motu: sed tempore quietis aditur sine +periculo vitae. + +In Orientem versus fluuij originem ad ingressum deserti magni inter quosdam +de montibus, cernitur grandis terrae planicies tanquam spatiosi campi +totaliter arenosi, in quo videntur ad Solis ortum exurgere de arena, et +secundum eleuationem Solis excrescere quaedam virgulta, atque in feruore +meridiei producere fructum. Ac de illo in Solis decliuo fructus cum +arbustulis paulatim minui, et in occasu penitus deperire, vnde et nullus +hominum audet illorum vti fructibus, ne sit quid fantasticum et nociuum. + +In huius deserti interioribus, vidi homines in toto syluestres, qui etsi in +superioribus formam praetendere videantur humanam, descendunt in +subterioribus ad formam bestiae alicuius. + +Horum quidam frontes gerunt cornibus asperatas, grinientes vt ferae vel +apri: alij nonnulla vti videntur loquela, quam nemo rationalium nonit, et +quibusdam signis concepta depromunt. Et est illic pluralitas syluestrium +canum, qui dicuntur papiones, quibus postquam edomiti, et ad venandum +instructi fuerint, valent capi multae bestiae per desertum. [Sidenote: +Papagalli.] Est et copiositas papingonum auium viridium in colore quas +appellant phicake, et quarum diuersa sunt genera, nobiliores habent latas +in rostro linguas, et in vtroque pede digitos duos. Et quaedam ex istis +naturaliter loquuntur verba aut prouerbia, seu salutationes, in patriae +idiomate, vt euidenter salutes, concedant, et reddant viatoribus, et +nonnunquam debitum iter errantibus per desertum ostendant. Minus autem +nobiles non loquuntur ex natura, sed si latas habent linguas, et non sunt +vltra duorum annorum aetatis, possunt per assiduitatem instrui ad loquelam. + +Aliae nec loquuntur, nec eradiuntur, sed solum clamitant pro voce milui, et +nisi tres digitos habent in pede. + +Nota: in quarta orientali Deus dedit fratribus minoribus magnam gratiam, +vnde in magna Tartaria ita expellunt ab obsessis daemones, sicut de domo +canes: vnde quandoque per decem dietas ad eos adducuntur daemoniaci +alligati, et statim fratribus praecipientibus in nomine Iesu Christi, +exeunt, et liberati baptizantur, et comburunt idola, et plures credunt, et +quandoque exeunt idola de igne, et fratres proijciunt aquam benedictam, et +clamat daemon, Vide, de meo habitaculo expellor propter fratres minores. +Ita multi credunt, et baptizantur. Odericus. + +[Sidenote Melescorde Regio. Vel regionis.] Item nota: dum recederem de +terra Praesbyteri Ioannis versos occidentem, applicui ad contratam vnam, +quae dicitur Melescorde, quae pulchra est, et multum fertilis: inter montes +duos huius contratae fecerat quidam murum circundantem montem, et in eo +fontes nobilissimos, et omne detectabile. Et hunc locum dicebant paradisum, +sicut hic fere continetur. Ideo Odericus, qui postea narrat de valle +infausta in hoc se terminat. + +[Sidenote: Mischorach.] Ad supradictum Indiae regnum Pentexoriae satis prope, +et lata est et longa Insula, Mischorach, bonis copiose referta, de qua vnum +scribo praeteritum mirum. + +Ante paucos hos annos, villanus ditissimus, sibi valde preciosum +construxerat palatium, quasi pro Paradiso terrestri, circundatum, munitum +fortalitijs, ac repletum omnibus corporalibus delicijs. + +Illic areae, turres, camerae, cubicula, cum alijs aedificijs, in multo numero, +et gloria permagnifica, ac historiarum picturis, inter quas, nonnunquam +prodigioso artificio bestiae et bestiolae, aues et auiculae discurrebant, +volitibant, et per pugnas, garritus, collusiones, mentiebantur viuere. + +[Sidenote: Ditissimi villani paradisus fictitius.] Illic prata, et pometa, +et seruatoria circa deliciosi collis congestum, distincta velut omni genere +florum, arborum, et herbarum, cum multis fontibus et riuulis, quorum +perspicuitas, et fluxus in glaris suauem et auditui praestabant +refectionem, et super aliquos fuerunt exceptioris artificij, circumstructi +auro, et argento, et gemmis, et tres principales fontes emittentes ad +palatium Domini per occultas conductas, riuulos vini, lactis, et mellis. + +Copiosus quoque numerus formosorum puerorum, et puellarum, aetatis inter +decem et sex decem annos, indutorum torquibus, et cycladibus exauratis, +exercentium inter iocos cantus et spectacula, ac seruientium suo Domino +prope nutum. Audiebantur ex turrium custodibus, nec non videbantur +dulcisonae, symphoniae, generum diuersorum, vt certissime putares, non +hominum, sed Angelorum: et in istis, ac similibus, deliciebatur iste +villanus. + +Sed et aurum liuido nil iuuat, imo nocet: quia enim hic inuidiae et otij +facibus super ingenuitatem mentis omnium generaliter nobilium principum +verebatur in corde: (ingenuitas enim, et rusticitas nunquam cohabitant in +cordis vno domicilio) Composuerat ista sibi in hunc finem, vt per se +singulos aduocaret aliquos vasallos corpore robustos, menteque audaces, +atque ad omnem proteruiam bene procliues: et cuilibet pro placitis +muneribus commisit vt illum seu illum principem seu Baronem, quem dicebat +sibi aduersarium, clam per insidias vel impetum, occideret, promittens +quenquam post factum ad se recepturum perpetuo in hunc locum: sed et velut +vaticinans pseudo praedicauit, si quem illorum pro his flagitijs contigeret +corporaliter tradi morti, nihilominus animam eius in hunc amoenum Paridisum +recipi, et viuere in aeeternum. + +[Sidenote: Mandeuillus oculatus testis.] Per hunc igitur modum nonnulis +nobilibus occisis, et interfectis, tandem nudabatur eius nequitia tanta, et +congregati regionis Barones miserum occiderunt, eius opera destruentes. +Ipse ego inibi ductus vidi fontium loca, et multa rei vestigia. + + +CAPVT. 44. + +De loco et dispositione vallis infaustae. + +Huius ad insulae extremitates non procul a fluuio Pyson, habetur locus +mirabilis pariter et terribilis, vltra omne mundanum, pene et procul: de +euentibus, ac laboribus infinitis, quae mihi meisque in tempore +itinerationis acciderunt hucusque subticui, cum iam vnum de maioribus ecce +narro. + +Est illic in alpibus vallis infausta, quatuor ferme leucarum: longitudo +vallis, quasi ad quatuor milliaria Lombardica, appellata vallis +incantationis, seu periculosa, seu propius daemoniosa: intra quam diebus ac +noctibus resonant boatus et tumultus tonitruorum, tempestatum, clamorum, et +stridorum, diuersique generis sonituum terribilium, quos illic exercet +multitudo spirituum malignorum. + +Prope ad vallis medium sub vna rupium, apparet omni tempore visibiliter +integrum ac maximum caput daemonis vsque ad humeros tantum, cuius speciem +prae horrore nullus pleno intuitu humanus audet diu oculus sustinere: nam +respicientes contra aspicit truculenter, agitans oculos minaciter, tanquam +ex palpebris eiecturus (quae et scintillant) flammas in altum. Totumque +caput sese rotat ad minas, et variat terribiliter modum et continentiam sub +repente diuersis maneriebus. Exitque de illo per totum ignis obscuratus +fumo, et foetor, tantus, quod per magnum spatium viae pessimam vallem +infectat. + +Ingredi autem volentibus, apparet semper ad introitum vallis, magna copia +auri, argenti, vasorum, vestium, et rerum pretiosarum, quas proculdubio ibi +daemones confingunt, quibus et ab olim multi insipientium hominum +concupiscentia tracti intrarunt, et vsque nunc intrant pro colligendo +thesauro: sed de Infidelibus paucissimi reuertuntur, imo nec de +Christianis, qui auaritiae causa ingrediuntur: per vallis autem semitam, quae +inter montes et monticulos, tortuosa et aspera est, gradientes vident, et +audiunt, daemoniacos spiritus multos volutantes, et imaginibus corporum +visibilium, serpentum, volucrum, vlularum, lamiarum, et huiusmodi specierum +horribilium dentibus minitantes, vngulas erigentes, incognitos sibilos +spirantes prope super capita ad aures transgredientium. Semperque minuitur +lumen aeris, donec ventum fuerit ad terribilissimum locum capitis +antedicti. + +Si quis autem sincerae fidei Christianus per contritionem veram et +confessionem, se posuerit in statu saluationis, munitus corporis Christi +mysterijs, ac signo crucis, cum intentione ibidem agendi poenitentiam de +admissis, et cauendi de admittendis, putatur posse hanc transire vallem +securus quidem a morte, non tamen liber a laboribus, horroribus, et +tormentis, et exire, de omnibus culpis praeteritis corruptis, ac de futuris +magis solito cautus, sicut scriptum est, territi purgabuntur. + +Nota aliud mirabile magnum. Vidi cum irem per vnam vallem positam iuxta +flumen quod egreditur de paradiso, vidi in ea multa corpora mortuorum, in +qua etiam audiui multa genera Musicorum, qui ibi mirabiliter pulsabant: +tantus erat ibi tinnitus Musicorum, quod incussit mihi timorem horribilem. + +Est autem longitudo illius vallis quasi ad quatuor milliaria Lombardica, in +qua si vnus Infidelis intrat, nunquam egreditur, sed sine mora moritur: Et +licet sciui, quod intrantes moriuntur, tamen acceptaui intrare, vt viderem +quid ibi esset. Dum intrassem tot humana cadauera ibi vidi, quod nisi quis +videret, credere non posset. + +In hac valle, ab vno eius latere, vidi faciem hominis valde horribilem, qui +tantum horrorem mihi incussit, quod putaui me spiritum exhalare, propter +quod saepe repetij verbum vitae, scilicet, verbum Caro factum est. + +Ad illam faciem non audebam accedere, nisi ad distantiam octo passuum: +postea iui ad caput vallis, et ascendi super montem arenosum, in quo +vndique circumspiciens, nihil videbam, nisi instrumenta musicalia, quae +audiebam fortiter pulsare. Cum fuissem in capite montis, reperi multum +argentum congregatum ibi in similitudinem squamarum piscium, vnde posui in +gremio, sed quod de ipso non curabam, dimisi illud, et sic illaesus +transiui Deo concedente. + +Sarraceni cum hoc scirent, reuerebantur me esse baptizatum, et sanctum: +mortuos nunc in valle dicebant, homines infernales. + +Odericus ad literam hic terminat suum librum: non fuit tot perpessus in +valle, sicut ego. Anno Domini 1331. Ianuarij nono, migrauit ad Christum, in +conuentu Minorum: cuius vitam statim in fine, et vsque nunc claris +miraculis diuina prouidentia approbat, et commendat, prout continebatur in +quaterno, a quo concordantias hic superseminaui. + + +CAPVT. 45. + +De periculo et tormentis in valle eadem. + +Itaque dico vobis, cum sodalibus, qui simul eramus, quatuordecim diuersarum +nationum ante ingressum huius tanti periculi peruenissemus, nos tractatu +longo, et deliberatione acuta consiliabamur, vtrumnam ingredi deberemus, et +quidam affirmabant, alii vero negabant. Erant autem in numero duo deuoti +fratres, de religione beati Francisci, natione Lombardi, qui videbantur pro +seipsis non multum curare ingressum, nisi quia noluerunt nos animare ad +ingressum, dicentes, si qui nostrum per confessionem, et Eucharistiae +susceptionem se ibidem praemunirent, ingrederentur cum illis: quo, ab +omnibus mediante debita prouisione, quam ipsi fratres penes se gerebant +peracto, parauimus mentes nostras cum pedibus ad intrandum. + +Sed ecce quinque de nobis, duo Graeci et tres Hispani, semetipsos ab alijs +segregantes, visi sunt alium requirere introitum nos praecedere cupientes, +et certe nos illos exinde non vidimus, et quid eis acciderit an periculum +subierint, velne ignoramus. + +Nos autem nouem per vallem processimus in silentio, et cum cordis ea +deuotione, quam quisque sibi potuerit obtinere: et ecce in breui transacto +spatio apparuerunt cumuli massarum auri et argenti, et preciosorum copia +vasorum. Sed dico vobis pro parte mea, quia nihil horum tetigi, reputans id +fallaciam daemonum confinxisse ad mittendum concupiscentiam in cor nostram, +imo sine intermissione conabar cor meum custodire ad deuotionem inceptam. + +Procedentibus igitur nobis lux coeli minuebator paulatim et augebatur +horror, quoniam prope nos vndique etiam sub pedibus nostris apparebant +iacere cadauera mortuorum hominum penitus defuncta: alia adhuc spirantia, +et nonulla semiuiua, super quae dum nos aliquando calcare contingeret, +conquerebantur, ac dolorose submurmurabant. + +Et licet non certum id habebam, aestimaui hoc fieri in parte vel in toto +fictione daemonum, reputans in breui tempore tantam multitudinem hominum +spontanee vallem intrasse, et si a longo tempore in ea perijssent +putrefactos fuisse. + +Ergo in initio nostri processus quasi prope leucam inuenitur iter sub +pedibus satis promptum, sed lumine tanquam ad medium nobis sufficiente, via +torquebatur nimis, et asperabatur: et ecce figurae daemonum, circum et supra +in aere se ferentium, ad imagines horribilium luporum, leonum, laruarum, +megerarum, iuxta cuiuscunque genus vlulantium, rugentium, stridentium, +gannientium, hiantes ore, intentantes dentibus, rostris, ac vnguibus, nos +terrere, mordere, discerpere, deglutire. + +Quapropter pro breui interdum soluto silentio nos inuicem hortabamur, ne +quis pro pusillanimitate terrori cederet, et tanto deficeret in agone. Hoc +igitur modo per secundam leucam expirante nobis vsque ad tenebras lumine, +quousque quis vix vmbram proximi agnoscere possit, praeter praedicta in +aere tormenta, incurrebant nobis ad tibias, et pedes pluralitas quasi +porcorum, vrsorum, et caprarum grinnientium, et impellentium nos ad lapsum, +quod vel ad tertium, vel quartum, aut sextum passum solatenus cadebamus in +palmas, seu genua, vel prosternebamur in faciem, aut supini. + +Ac superuenere praeter hoc ventorum turbines, fulgurum coruscationes, +tonitruorum boatus, drandium casus et exundatio pluuiarum, quantas et +quales nunquam accepimus in hoc mundo, quibus iactabamur, ruebamus, +quassabamur, et periclitati fuimus extra narrandum. + +Interdum quoque sensimus tanquam graues baculorum ictus, per humeros, +dorsa, latera, et ad renes, alij quidem grauiores, alij vt puta secundum +demeritum vniuscuiusque. Et certe dum per tanta tormenta, quasi exhaustis +totis viribus, iam prope medium locum vallis erat ventum, accidit repente, +sub vnico instanti temporis, quibusdam nostrum expalmatio ita dura, vt +omnes pariter collisi, et prostrati iaceremus in extasi per vnam vul duas +forsitan horas. + +Et isto defectu vidit quilibet suo modo spiritualem visionem +supermirabilem, et excedentem omne dictum, et scriptum. + +Ego vero de visione mea nihil ausus sum scribere, vel loqui, quia et +fratres singuli inhibuerunt, nisi de his, quae corporaliter intuebamur, et +passi sumus. + +Grauissimum singuli sustinuimus ictum per corporis loca diuersa, vnus in +facie, alius in pectore, ad costas, in dorso, vel ad humerum, et mansit +cuique signum percussurae nigerrimum, ad formam virilis manus humanae: + +[Sidenote: Mirabilis ictus.] Ictum autem meum in colli ceruice tali ac +tanta passione, vt putabam caput abscissum de corpore auolare: et hinc ad +octodecimum annum mansit mihi in prima magnitudine signum: sed et vsque +nunc variato colore locus ille demonstrat penissime cicatricem, donec cum +cadauere tota mutabitur in sepulchro: porro vbi nos ab extasi in his +tenebris separauimus singuli per diuinam gratiam respirando, loquendo, +palpando, erigendo nos ipsos mutua humanitate, vt potuimus, recollegimus, +et cohortabamur, cum subito nobis apparuit sub tenebroso lumine, vel potius +fumosa caligine, locus ille spatiosus mediae vallis, continens antedictum +horribile caput daemonis, plenus foetore inaestimabili, et iugi occupatus +exercitatione innumerorum spirituum malignorum. + +Hunc ergo locum ineptum cum vitare vellemus in toto nequiuimus extremitatem +eius, quocunque girantes, nullus nostrorum perfecto aspectu audebat +respicere quae gerebantur ibidem, quia inuadens tremor statuebat +horripilationem extrahebat, sudorem, et pudorem omnes extinguere +videbantur. Nec tamen potuit esse consilium de reuertendo, ne propter +immutatum propositum confestim a daemonibus strangularemur. + +Transiuimus, Dei gratia nobis opitulante, sed non sine maximo horroris, +foetorisque tormento: rursumque ex tunc procedentes nos apprehendebat +tenebrosa, validaque tempestas, ventorum, coruscationum, tonitruum, +grandinum, et pluuiarum, cuius, quassatione collabebamur in facies, et in +dorso dextrorsum, et sinistrorsum, interuoluente ad tibias, sicut prius +multitudine grinnientium bestiarum, nec dubito scribere quoque amplius, +quam 500. vicibus per hanc vallem quisque nostrum sternebatur ad terram. + +Post vero exactam tertiam leucam, coepit nobis augeri lux aeris, ex quo +animosiores effecti, in vno tranquilliori loco nos parum pausantes, gratias +Deo palmis extensis in caelum, reddidimus immensas, et praecipue quod +nullus deesset de nouenario numero sociorum. + +Nihilominus tamen spiritus in aere nobis minari non cessabant, pretendentes +in derisionem sua pudenda simul, et foeda virilia et posteriora. + +Pro certo ergo habeatis de his quae vidi, et sensi, nullam possum vobis +tradere aequipollentiam verborum, cum quia grauissima erant, tum quia, +singulis ne mihi deuotionem minueret non attendebam, tum etiam, quod prae +horrore, labore, et dolore multa memoriae non commendabam. + +Per quartam autem leucam (ductrice gratia) leuius transeuntes, sustinuimus +tamen sub pedibus hominum cadauera mortuorum, prope vallis exitum rerum +tentamina preciosarum. + +Nunc itaque obsecro magno cordis effectu, haec legentes et audientes ego, +qui in illa hora quid erga me agebat misericordissimi Dei pietas ignorabam, +vt velitis pro me, simul et mecum ex mentis intimo collaudare ipsum +Dominum, qui tunc de potestate tenebrarum illarum eripuit me indignum, et +prout confido, a delictis iuuentutis me purgauit, quatenus de postea +commissis, et committendis, mihi propitius fore dignetur, cum iam senior +sim effectus. Quoniam etsi ex tunc proposui mores corrigere, ex nunc statuo +in melius emendare, per filium eius Iesum Christum Dominum nostrum. + +Ad hoc, addo breuiter, quod non auderem hortari quenquam, me consulentem, +vt spontanee ingrederetur hanc vallem infaustam, quamuis ego curiosus +intraui. Venientes posthac ad proximas habitationes, necesse fuit nobis +intendere ad recreandum corpora cibarijs, et balneis, et ad medendum +vulneribus, et quassaturis, donec per aliquod tempus vnusquisque acciperet +deliberationem super suo futuro. + +CAPVT. 46. + +De quibusdam alijs admirandis per Indorum insulas. + +[Sidenote: Gigantes Anthropophagi.] Vt modo procedam in tractatu. Sciatis +ad paucas inde dietas grandem insulam haberi gigantum, ad straturam +altitudinis viginti quinque pedum nostrorum, de quibus ipse vidi nonnullos, +sed extra terram eorum, et audiuimus esse intrinsecus quosdam triginta +pedum, et vltra: hi operiuntur non vestibus, sed bestiarum pellibus +vtcunque sibi appensis, comedentes animalium carnes crudas, et lac pro potu +sorbentes, atque appetentes super omnem esum carnes humanas. + +Istorum non curaui intrare insulam: nam et audiui quod ad maris littus +solent insidiari nauigantibus, nauesque submergere, nisi interdum +redimantur tribus aut quatuor per sortem hominibus sibi datis. + +[Sidenote: Letiferi aspectus mulierum.] Versus Austrum hinc in mari Oceano, +habetur inter alias insulas vna, vbi crudelibus quibusdam mulieribus +nascitur in oculis lapis rarus, et malus, quae si per iram respexerint +hominem, more Basilisci interficiunt solo visu. + +Et vltra hanc insulam alia maior et populosior, vbi cum multi sint vsus +nobis insueti, vnum describo. + +[Sidenote: Insula vbi virgines vitiantur antequam nubant.] Dum +desponsauerit vir puellam, virginem, mandat hominem incompositum, velut +ribaldum, qui sua idonea claue per expertos super hoc diligenter +considerata, si reputatur idonea reseret et vestiget sub nocte vnica +virginalem conclauem, pro mercede sibi tradita competenti. Et si postera +nocte accedens sponsus ita non inuenerit, poterit, et consueuit hominem +impetere ad mortis iudicium indeclinabile. Cumque huius moris discere +voluissem causam, accepi responsum, pro certis temporibus apud eos, +virgines habuisse in matricibus paruos serpentes, quibus nocebantur primi +ad illas intrantes. + +Ideoque et viri, que pro mercede tantum subeunt periculum, vocant sua +loquela cadibrum, est, stultos desperatos. + +Ex hac, apparet Insula in qua inter alios vsus, peruersae sunt matres contra +naturam et scripturam, cum pepererent contristantur, et dum proles moritur +iocundantur, iactantes in magno igne cum conuiuio et exultatione, dumque +maritus ante vxorem decidit, patebit vxoris plena dilectio, si cum corpore +mariti, quod rogo traditur se iactat cremandum, vt quia in isto seculo +steterunt amoris vinculo colligati, non sint alio separati. + +Nec tamen intelligunt illud seculum, nisi quod sibi confingunt terrestrem +Paradisum. Purum aut minorem annis, trahet mater secum si placet, sed +aetatis puer perfectae, eliget pro proprio placito viuere superstes, aut mori +iuxta parentes. + +Hic etiam non succedunt Reges per generationem sed per electionem, vt +assumatur non nobilior, aut fortior, sed morigeratior, et iustior, 50 ad +minus annorum, nullam habens sobolem aut vxorem, seruaturque illic iusticiae +rigor in plena censura, in omnibus et contra omnes, etiamsi forefecerit +ipse Rex, qui nec eximitur a traditis legibus pro concupiscentia vel +contemptione quarumlibet personarum. + +Veruntamen Rex si peccauerit non occiditur ob reuerentiam, sed quod sub +poena mortis, publice inhibetur, ne quispiam in Regione ei verbo vel vllo +facto communicet, et quoniam sui loco alter rex constituitur, necesse est +illi breui vita degere vel perpetuo exulare. Constat post ipsam, et alia +Insula, multis bonis locuples, et hominibus populosa, de qua recolo +scribendum, quod nulla occasione comedunt tria genera carnium, gallinarum, +leporam, et aucarum, quas etsi nutriant in copijs, vtuntur duntaxat +pellibus aut plumis. + +Caeterarum vero bestiarum et animalium licite vescuntur carnibus pro victu, +et lacte pro potu. Ibi quisque vir licite potest coniungi cuique mulieri; +quantumcunque propinquet, exceptis progenitoribus, patre matre. Nam +cohabitatio, et commixtio omnium virorum ad singulas mulieres apparet ibi +communis, vnde mater natum paruulum suum, adicit pro sui placito cuicunque +viro, qui circa generationis tempus secumn dormierit, nec valet vllus +virorum esse certus de proprio generato, quem modum exlegem arbitror et +turpem. + +Sicut ergo praefatus sum, multa mira videntur per Regiones Indorum, mira +quidem nobis, sed illis assueta, quibus si nostra recitarentur assueta, +audirent pro miris. Nam et dum quibusdam dixi aucas viuas apud nos nasci in +arboribus, admirati sunt satis. In multis locis seminatur singulis annis +sementum de Cothon, quod nos dicimus lanam arboream, exurgunt ei modica +arbusta, vel potius arbustula de quibus talis lana habetur: est arbor +luniperus, de cuius ligno desiccato, si carbones viuos sub proprijs +cineribus tenueris diligenter opertos, igniti seruabuntur ad annum. + +Est et genus Nucum incredibilis magnitudinis ad quantitatem magni capitis: +et bestia vocata, oraflans, vel serfans, corpore in nostrorum aldtudine +caballorum, et collo in 20 longitudine cubitorum ad prospiciendum vltra +domos et muros, quorum posteriora apparent vt hinniculi siue lerni. + +Genus est etiam Camelionum ad formam hynnulorum, qui semper patulo tendunt +ore, vel nil manducantes. Viuunt de aere, quae etiam ad suum libitum +videntur sibi variare colorem, exceptis (vt dicitur) albo vel rubeo. + +Maximi quoque serpentes, inuicem qualitate, et genere differentes +atque colore. + +Aliqui cristam in capite gerunt, quidam more hominum ad duos pedes erecti +incedunt, et nonnulli qui dicuntur Reguli, venenum per ora distillare non +cessant, nec non quam plures cocodrilli, de quibus aliquid in +praecedentibus retuli; [Sidenote: Apri ingentes. Leones albi. Louheraus.] +et apri in nostrorum magnitudine boum, spinosi ericij, in quantitate +porcorum, leones albi in altitudine dextrariorum. Louheraus, seu Edouches +per Indiam habentur, quod ferarum genus satis est maius nostris communibus +equis, geren in fronte tetri capitis tria longa cornua, ad formam pugionis, +ex vtraque parte scindentia, vt eis nonnunquam interficiant Elephantes. + +Aliae quoque bestiae crudeles vt vrsi cum capitibus fere aprorum et habentes +pedes senos, qui finduntur latis vngulis bis acutis, et cum caudis leonum +siue pardorum. + +Et quod vix credetur, mures pro quantitate, 10, aut 12. nostrorum et +vespertiliones ad modum coruorum. + +Sed et aucae in triplo maiores nostris, plumis indutae rubris, nisi quod in +pectore et collo apparet nigredo. + +Et breuiter tam ibi quam alibi, habentur pisces, bestiae, volucres, aut +vermes diuersorum generum, aut specierum, de quibus hoc loco, vel inutilis, +vel prolixa posset fieri narratio, quod nec illis qui nunquam propria +exierunt, credibilis videretur. + + +The English Version. + +And he hathe in his lordschipes many grete marveyles. For in his contree, +is the see that men clepen the Gravely See, that is alle gravelle and sond, +with outen ony drope of watre: and it ebbethe and flowethe in grete wawes, +as other sees don: and it is never stille ne in pes, in no maner cesoun. +And no man may passe that see be navye, be no maner of craft: and therfore +may no man knowe, what lond is bezond that see. And alle be it that it have +no watre, zit men fynden there in and on the bankes, fulle gode fissche of +other maner of kynde and schappe, thanne men fynden in ony other see; and +thei ben of right goode tast, and delycious to mannes mete. + +And a 3 iourneys long fro that see, ben gret mountaynes; out of the whiche +gothe out a gret flood, that comethe out of paradys: and it is fulle of +precious stones, with outen ony drope of water: and it rennethe thorghe the +desert, on that o syde; so that it makethe the see gravely: and it berethe +in to that see, and there it endethe. And that flomme rennethe also, 3 +dayes in the woke, and bryngethe with him grete stones, and the roches also +therewith, and that gret plentee. And anon as thei ben entred in to the +gravely see, thei ben seyn no more; but lost for evere more. And in tho 3 +dayes, that that ryvere rennethe, no man dar entren in to it: but in the +other dayes, men dar entren wel y now. Also bezonde that flomme, more +upward to the desertes, is a gret pleyn alle gravelly betwene the +mountaynes: and in that playn, every day at the sonne risynge, begynnen to +growe smale trees; and thei growen til mydday, berynge frute: but no man +dar taken of that frute; for it is a thing of fayrye. And aftre mydday, +thei discrecen and entren azen in to the Erthe, so that at the goynge doun +of the Sonne, thei apperen no more; and so thei don every day; and that is +a gret marvaille. + +In that desert ben many wylde men, that ben hidouse to loken on: for thei +ben horned; and thei speken nought, but thei gronten, as pygges. And there +is also gret plentee of wylde Houndes. And there ben manye popegayes, that +thei clepen psitakes in hire langage: and thei speken of hire propre +nature, and salven men that gon thorghe the desertes, and speken to hem als +appertely, as thoughe it were a man. And thei that speken wel, han a large +tonge, and han 5 toos upon a Fote. And there ben also of other manere, that +han but 3 toos upon a fote; and thei speken not, or but litille: for thei +cone not but cryen. + +This Emperour Prestre John, whan he gothe in to battaylle, azenst ony other +Lord, he hathe no baneres born before him: but he hathe 3 crosses of gold, +fyn, grete and hye, fulle of precious stones: and every of the crosses ben +sett in a chariot, fulle richely arrayed. And for to kepen every cros, ben +ordeyned 10000 men at Armes, and mo than 100000 men on Fote, in maner as +men wolde kepe a Stondard in oure Contrees, whan that wee ben in lond of +werre. And this nombre of folk is with outen the pryncipalle Hoost, and +with outen Wenges ordeynd for the bataylle. And he hathe no werre, but +ridethe with a pryvy meynee, thanne he hathe bore before him but o cross of +tree, with outen peynte peynture, and with outen gold or silver or precious +stones; in remembrance, that Jesus suffred dethe upon a cros of tree. And +he hathe born before him also a plater of gold fulle of erthe, in tokene +that his noblesse and his myghte and his flessche schalle turnen to erthe. +And he hathe born before him also a vesselle of silver, fulle of noble +jewelles of gold fulle riche, and of precious stones, in tokene of his +lordschipe and of his noblesse and of his myght. He duellethe comounly in +the cytee of Suse; and there is his principalle palays, that is so riche +and so noble, that no man wil trowe it by estymacioun, but he had seen it. +And aboven the chief tour of the palays, ben 2 rounde pomeles of gold; and +in everyche of hem ben 2 carboncles grete and large, that schynen fulle +brighte upon the nyght. And the principalle zates of his palays ben of +precious ston, that men clepen sardoyne: and the bordure and the barres ben +of ivorye: and the wyndowes of the halles and chambres ben of cristalle: +and the tables where on men eten, somme ben of emeraudes, summe of amatyst +and summe of gold, fulle of precious stones; and the pileres, that beren up +the tables, ben of the same precious stones. And the degrees to gon up to +his throne, where he sittethe at the mete, on is of oniche, another is of +cristalle, and another of jaspre grene, another of amatyst, another of +sardyne, another of corneline, and the sevene that he settethe on his feet, +is of crisolyte. And alle theise degrees ben bordured with fyn gold, with +the tother precious stones, sett with grete perles oryent. And the sydes of +the sege of his throne ben of emeraudes, and bordured with gold fulle +nobely, and dubbed with other precious stones and grete perles. And alle +the pileres in his chambre, ben of fyne gold with precious stones, and with +many carboncles, that zeven gret lyght upon the nyght to alle peple. And +alle be it that the charboncle zeve lyght right y now, natheles at alle +tymes brennethe a vesselle of cristalle fulle of bawme, for to zeven gode +smelle, and odour to the emperour, and to voyden awey alle wykkede eyres +and corrupciouns. And the forme of his bedd is of fyne saphires bended with +gold, for to make him slepen wel, and to refreynen him from lecherye. For +he wille not lyze with his wyfes, but 4 sithes in the zeer, aftre the four +cesouns: and that is only for to engendre children. He hathe also a fulle +fayr palays and a noble, at the cytee of Nyse, where that he dwellethe, +whan him best lykethe; but the ayr is not so attempree, as it is at the +cytee of Suse. And zee schulle undirstonde, that in alle his contree, ne in +the contrees there alle aboute, men eten noghte but ones in the day, as men +don in the court of the grete Chane. And so thei eten every day in his +court, mo than 30000 persones, with outen goeres and comeres. But the 30000 +persones of his contree, ne of the contree of the grete Chane, ne spenden +noghte so moche gode, as don 12000 of oure contree. This Emperour Prestre +John hathe evere more 7 kynges with him, to serve him: and thei departen +hire service be certeyn monethes. And with theise kynges serven alle weys +72 dukes and 360 erles. And alle the dayes of the zeer, there eten in his +houshold and in his court, 12 erchebysshoppes and 20 bisshoppes. And the +patriark of Seynt Thomas is there, as is the Pope here. And the +erchebisshoppes and the bisshoppes and the abboties in that contree, ben +alle kynges. And everyche of theise grete lordes knowen wel y now the +attendance of hire servyse. This on is mayster of his houshold, another is +his chamberleyn, another servethe him of a dissche, another of the cuppe, +another is styward, another is mareschalle, another is prynce of his armes: +and thus is he fulle nobely and ryally served. And his lond durethe in +verry brede 4 moneths iorneyes, and in lengthe out of measure; that is to +seyn, alle the yles undir erthe, that wee supposen to ben undir us. + +Besyde the yle of Pentexoire, that is the lond of Prestre John, is a gret +yle long and brode, that men clepen Milsterak; and it is in the lordschipe +of Prestre John. In that yle is gret plentee of godes. There was dwellynge +somtyme a ryche man, and it is not longe sithen, and men clept him +Gatholonabes; and he was fulle of cauteles and of sotylle disceytes; and he +hadde a fulle fair castelle, and a strong, in a mountayne, so strong and so +noble, that no man cowde devise a fairere ne a strangere. And he had let +muren alle the mountayne aboute with a strong walle and a fair. And with +inne tho walles he had the fairest gardyn, that ony man myghte beholde; and +therein were trees berynge alle maner of frutes, that ony man cowde devyse; +and there in were also alle maner vertuous herbes of gode smelle, and alle +other herbes also, that beren faire floures. And he had also in that +gardyn, many faire welles; and beside tho welles, he had lete make faire +halles and faire chambres, depeynted alle with gold and azure. And there +weren in that place many a dyverse thinges and many dyverse stories: and of +bestes and of bryddes, that songen fulle delectabely; and meveden be craft, +that it semede that thei weren quyke. And he had also in his gardyn alle +maner of foules and of bestes that ony man myghte thenke on, for to have +pley or desport to beholde hem. And he had also in that place, the faireste +zonge Damyseles, that myghte ben founde undir the age of 15 zere, and the +faireste zonge striplynges, that men myghte gete of that same age: and alle +thei weren clothed in clothes of gold fully richely: and he seyde, that tho +weren aungeles. And he had also let make 3 welles, faire and noble, and +alle envyround with ston of jaspre, of cristalle, pyapred with gold, and +sett with precious stones and grete orient perles. And he had made a +conduyt undir erthe, so that the 3 weles, at his list, on scholde renne +milk, another wyn, and another hony. And that place he clept paradys. And +whan that ony gode knyghte, that was hardy and noble, cam to see this +rialtee, he wolde lede him into his paradys, and schewen him theise +wondirfulle thinges, to his desport, and the marveyllous and delicious song +of dyverse briddes, and the faire damyseles, and the faire welles of mylk, +wyn and hony, plentevous rennynge. And he wolde let make dyyerse +Instrumentes of Musick to sownen in an highe Tour, so merily that it was +joye for to here; and no man scholde see the craft thereof: and tho, he +seyde, weren aungeles of God, and that place was paradys, that God had +behighte to his frendes, seyenge, _Dabo vobis terram fluentem lacte et +mel_. And thanne wolde he maken hem to drynken of certeyn drynk, where of +anon thei scholden be dronken. And thanne wolde hem thinken gretter delyt, +than thei hadden before. And than wolde he seye to hem, that zif thei wolde +dyen for him and for his love, that aftir hire dethe, thei scholde come to +his paradys; and thei scholde ben of the age of the damyseles, and thei +scholde pleyen with hem, and zit ben maydenes. And aftir thai, zit scholde +he putten hem in a fayrere paradys, where that thei schold see God of +Nature visibely, in His majestee and in His blisse. And than wolde He +schewe hem His entent, and seye hem, that zif thei wolde go sle suche a +Lord, or suche a man, that was his enemye, or contrarious to his list, that +thei scholde not dred to done it, and for to be slayn therefore hemself: +for aftir hire dethe, he wold putten hem into another paradys, that was an +100 fold fairer than ony of the tothere; and there schode thei dwellen with +the most fairest damyselles that myghte be, and play with hem ever more. +And thus wenten many dyverse lusty bacheleres for to sle grete lords, in +dyverse countrees, that weren his enemyes, and maden hem self to ben slayn, +in hope to have that paradys. And thus often tyme, he was revenged of his +enemyes, be his sotylle disceytes and false cauteles. And whan the worthi +men of the contree hadden perceyved this sotylle falshod of this +Gatholonabes, thei assembled hem with force, and assayleden his castelle, +and slowen him, and destroyden alle the faire places, and alle the +nobletees of that paradys. The place of the welles and of the walles and of +many other thinges, ben zit apertly sene: but the richesse is voyded clene. +And it is not longe gon, sithe that place was destroyed. + + +Of the Develes Hede in the Valeye perilous; and of the Customs of folk in + dyverse Yles, that ben abouten, in the Lordschipe of Prestre John. + +[Sidenote: Chap. XXVIII.] Besyde that Yle of Mistorak, upon the left syde, +nyghe to the ryvere of Phison, is a marveylous thing. There is a vale +betwene the mountaynes, that durethe nyghe a 4 myle: and summen clepen it +the Vale Enchaunted; some clepen it the Vale of Develes, and some clepen it +the Vale Perilous. In that vale, heren men often tyme grete tempestes and +thondres and grete murmures and noyses, alle dayes and nyghtes: and gret +noyse, as it were sown of tabours and of nakeres and trompes, as thoughe it +were of a gret feste; This ale is alle fulle of develes, and hathe ben alle +weyes. And men seyn there, that it is on of the entrees of helle. In that +vale is gret plentee of gold and sylver: wherefore many mysbelevynge men, +and manye Christene men also, gon in often tyme, for to have of the +thresoure, that there is: but fewe comen azen; and namely of the mys +belevynge men, ne of the Cristene men nouther: for thei ben anon strangled +of develes. And in mydde place of that vale, undir a roche, is an hed and +the visage of a devyl bodyliche, fulle horrible and dreadfulle to see, and +it schewethe not but the hed, to the schuldres. But there is no man in the +world so hardy, Cristene man ne other, but that he wolde ben a drad for to +beholde it: and that it wolde semen him to dye for drede; so is it hidous +for to beholde. For he beholdethe even man so scharply, with dreadfulle +eyen, that ben evere more mevynge and sparklynge, as fuyr, and chaungethe +and sterethe so often in dyverse manere, with so horrible countenance, that +no man dar not neighen towardes him. And fro him comethe out smoke and +stynk and fuyr, and so moche abhomynacioun, that unethe no man may there +endure. But the gode Cristene men, that ben stable in the feythe, entren +welle withouten perile. For thei wil first schryven hem, and marken hem +with the tokene of the Holy Cros; so that the fendes ne han no power over +hem. But alle be it that thei ben with outen perile, zit natheles ne ben +thei not with outen drede, whan that thei seen the develes visibely and +bodyly alle aboute hem, that maken fully dyverse assautes and manaces in +eyr and in erthe, and agasten hem with strokes of thondre blastes and of +tempestes. And the most drede is, that God wole taken vengeance thanne, of +that men han mys don azen his wille. And zee schulle undirstonde, that whan +my fellows and I weren in that vale, wee weren in gret thought, whether +that wee dursten putten oure bodyes in aventure, to gon in or non, in the +proteccioun of God. And somme of oure fellowes accordeden to enter, and +somme noght. So there weren with us 2 worthi men, Frere Menoures, that +weren of Lombardye, that seyden, that zif ony man wolde entren, thei wolde +gon in with us. And when thei hadden seyd so, upon the gracyous trust of +God and of hem, wee leet synge masse, and made every man to ben schryven +and houseld: and thanne wee entreden 14 personnes; but at oure goynge out, +wee weren but 9. And so we wisten nevere, whether that oure fellowes weren +lost, or elle turned azen for drede: but wee ne saughe hem never after: and +tho weren 2 men of Grece and 3 of Spayne. And oure other fellows, that +wolden not gon in with us, thei wenten by another coste, to ben before us, +and so thei were. And thus wee passeden that perilous vale, and founden +thereinne gold and sylver and precious stones and riche jewelles gret +plentee, both here and there, as us semed: but whether that it was, as us +semede, I wot nere: for I touched none, because that the develes ben so +subtyle to make a thing to seme otherwise than it is, for to disceyve +mankynde; and therfore I towched none; and also because that I wolde not +ben put out of my devocioun: for I was more devout thanne, than evere I was +before or after, and alle for the drede of fendes, that I saughe in dyverse +figures; and also for the gret multytude of dede bodyes, that I saughe +there liggynge be the weye, be alle the vale, as thoughe there had ben a +bataylle betwene 2 kynges and the myghtyest of the contree, and that the +gretter partye had ben discomfyted and slayn. And I trowe, that unethe +scholde ony contree have so moche peple with in him, as lay slayn in that +vale, as us thoughte; the whiche was an hidouse sight to seen. And I +merveylled moche, that there weren so manye, and the bodyes all hole, with +outen rotynge. But I trowe, that fendes made hem semen to ben so hole, with +outen rotynge. But that myghte not ben to myn avys, that so manye scholde +have entred so newely, ne so manye newely slayn, with outen stynkynge and +rotynge. And manye of hem were in habite of Cristene men: but I trowe wel, +that it weren of suche, that wenten in for covetyse of the thresoure, that +was there, and hadden over moche feblenesse in feithe; so that hire hertes +ne myghte not enduren in the beleve for drede. And therfore weren wee the +more devout a gret del: and zit wee weren cast doun and beten down many +tymes to the hard erthe, be wyndes and thondres and tempestes: but evere +more God of His grace halp us: and so we passed that perilous vale, with +outen perile and with outen encombrance. Thanked be alle myghty Godd. + +Aftre this, bezonde the vale, is a gret yle, where the folk ben grete +geauntes of 28 fote longe or of 30 fote longe; and thei han no clothinge, +but of skynnes of bestes, that thei hangen upon hem: and thei eten no +breed, but alle raw flesche: and thei drynken mylk of bestes; for thei han +plentee of alle bestaylle. And thei have none houses, to lyen inne. And +thei eten more gladly mannes flessche, thanne ony other flesche. In to that +yle dar no man gladly entren: and zif thei seen a schipp and men there +inne, anon thei entren in to the see, for to take hem. + +And men seyden us, that in an yle bezonde that, weren geantes of grettere +stature: summe of 45 fote, or 50 fote long, and as some men seyn, summe of +50 cubytes long: but I saghe none of tho; for I hadde no lust to go to tho +parties, because that no man comethe nouther in to that yle ne in to the +other, but zif he be devoured anon. And among tho geauntes ben scheep, als +grete as oxen here; and thei beren gret wolle and roughe. Of the scheep I +have seyn many tymes. And men han seyn many tymes tho geauntes taken men in +the see out of hire schippes, and broughte hem to lond, 2 in on hond and 2 +in another, etynge hem goynge, alle rawe and alle quyk. + +Another yle is there toward the northe, in the see occean, where that ben +fulle cruele and ful evele wommen of nature; and thei han precious stones +in hire eyen: and thei ben of that kynde, that zif thei beholden ony man +with wratthe, thei slen him anon with the beholdynge, as dothe the +basilisk. + +Another yle is there, fulle fair and gode and gret, and fulle of peple, +where the custom is suche, that the firste nyght that thei ben maryed, thei +maken another man to lye be hire wifes, for to have hire maydenhode: and +therfore thei taken gret huyre and gret thank. And ther ben certeyn men in +every town, that serven of non other thing; and thei clepen hem Cadeberiz, +that is to seyne, the foles of Wanhope. For thei of the contree holden it +so gret a thing and so perilous, for to haven the maydenhode of a woman, +that hem semethe that thei that haven first the maydenhode, puttethe him in +aventure of his lif. And zif the husbonde fynde his wif mayden, that other +next nyghte, aftre that she scholde have ben leyn by of the man, that is +assigned therefore, perauntes for dronkenesse or for some other cause, the +husbonde schalle pleyne upon him, that he hathe not don his deveer, in +suche cruelle wise, as thoughe he wolde have him slayn therfore. But after +the firste nyght, that they ben leyn by, thei kepen hem so streytely, that +thei ben not so hardy to speke with no man. And I asked hem the cause, whi +that thei helden suche custom: and thei seyden me, that of old tyme, men +hadden ben dede for deflourynge of maydenes, that hadden serpentes in hire +bodyes, that stongen men upon hire zerdes, that thei dyeden anon: and +therfore thei helden that custom, to make other men, ordeyn'd therefore, to +lye be hire wyfes, for drede of dethe, and to assaye the passage be +another, rather than for to putte hem in that aventure. + +Aftre that, is another yle, where that wommen maken gret sorwe, whan hire +children ben y born: and whan thei dyen, thei maken gret feste and gret +joye and revelle, and thanne thei casten hem into a gret fuyr brennynge. +And tho that loven wel hire husbondes, zif hire husbondes ben dede, thei +casten hem also in the fuyr, with hire children, and brennen hem. And thei +seyn, that the fuyr schalle clensen hem of alle filthes and of alle vices, +and thei schulle gon pured and clene in to another world, to hire +husbondes, and thei schulle leden hire children with hem. And the cause whi +that they wepen, when hire children ben born, is this, for whan thei comen +in to this world, thei comen to labour, sorwe and hevynesse: and whi thei +maken ioye and gladnesse at hire dyenge, is be cause that, as thei seyn, +thanne thei gon to Paradys, where the ryveres rennen mylk and hony, where +that men seen hem in ioye and in habundance of godes, with outen sorwe and +labour. In that yle men maken hire kyng evere more be eleccioun: and thei +ne chese him nought for no noblesse ne for no ricchesse, but suche an on as +is of gode maneres and of gode condiciouns, and therewith alle rightfulle; +and also that he be of gret age, and that he have no children. In that yle +men ben fulle rightfulle, and thei don rightfulle iuggementes in every +cause, bothe of riche and pore, smale and grete, aftre the quantytee of the +trespas, that is mys don. And the kyng may nought deme no man to dethe, +with outen assent of his barouns and other wyse men of conseille, and that +alle the court accorde therto. And zif the kyng him self do ony homycydie +or ony cryme, as to sle a man, or ony suche cas, he schalle dye therefore; +but he schalle not be slayn, as another man, but men schulle defende in +peyne of dethe, that no man be so hardy to make him companye, ne to speke +with hym, ne that no man zeve him ne selle him ne serve him nouther of mete +ne drynk: and so schalle he dye in myschef. Thei spare no man that hath +trespaced, nouther for love ne for favour ne for ricchesse ne for noblesse, +but that he schalle have aftre that he hathe don. + +Bezonde that yle, is another yle, where is gret multytude of folk; and thei +wole not for nothing eten flesche of hares, ne of hennes, ne of gees: and +zit thei bryngen forthe y now, for to seen hem and to beholden hem only. +But thei eten Flesche of alle other bestes, and drynken mylk. In that +contre, thei taken hire doughtres and hire sustres to here wyfes, and hire +other kynneswomen. And zif there ben 10 or 12 men or mo dwellynge in an +hows, the wif of eyeryche of hem schalle ben comoun to hem alle, that +duellen in that hows; so that every man may liggen with whom he wole of +hem, on o nyght. And zif sche have ony child, sche may zeve it to what man +sche list, that hathe companyed with hire; so that no man knoweth there, +whether the child be his or anotheres. And zif ony man seye to hem, that +thei norrischen other mennes children, thei answeren, that so don other men +hires. In that contre and be all Ynde, ben gret plentee of cokodrilles, +that is the maner of a longe serpent, as I haye seyd before. And in the +nyght, thei dwellen in the watir, and on the day, upon the lond, in roches +and caves. And thei ete no mete in all the wynter: but thei lyzn as in a +drem, as don the serpentes. Theise serpentes slen men, and thei eten hem +wepynge: and whan thei eten, thei meven the over Jowe, and noughte the +nether Jowe; and thei have no Tonge. In that contree, and in many other +bezonde that, and also in manye on this half, men putten in werke the sede +of cotoun: and thei sowen it every zeer, and than growthe it in smale +trees, that beren cotoun. And so don men every zeer; so that there is +plentee of cotoun, at alle tymes. Item, in this yle and in many other, +there is a manner of wode, hard and strong: who so coverethe the coles of +that wode undir the assches there offe, the coles wil duellen and abyden +alle quyk, a zere or more. And that tre hathe many leves, as the gynypre +hathe. And there ben also many trees, that of nature thei wole never brenne +ne rote in no manere. And there ben note trees, that beren notes, als grete +as a mannes hed. There also ben many bestes, that ben clept orafles. +[Footnote: Giraffes.] In Arabye, thei ben clept gerfauntz; that is a best +pomelee or apotted; that is but a litylle more highe, than is a stede; but +he hathe the necke a 20 cubytes long: and his croup and his tayl is as of +an hert: and he may loken over a gret highe Hous. And there ben also in +that contree manye camles, that is a lytille best as a goot, that is wylde +and he lyvethe be the eyr, and etethe nought ne drynkethe nought at no +tyme. And he chaungethe his colour often tyme: for men seen him often +scithes, now in o colour and now in another colour: and he may chaunge him +in to alle maner of coloures that him list, saf only in to red and white. +There ben also in that contree passynge grete serpentes, sume of 120 Fote +long, and thei ben of dyverse coloures, as rayed, rede, grene and zalowe, +blewe and blake, and alle spekelede. And there ben othere, that han crestes +upon hire hedes: and thei gon upon hire feet upright: and thei ben wel a 4 +fadme gret or more: and thei duellen alle weye in roches or in mountaynes: +and thei han alle wey the throte open, of whens thei droppen venym alle +weys. And there ben also wylde swyn of many coloures, als gret as ben oxen +in oure contree, and thei ben alle spotted, as ben zonge fownes. And there +ben also urchounes, als gret as wylde swyn here. Wee clepen hem poriz de +spyne. And ther ben lyouns alle whyte gret and myghty. And ther ben also of +other bestes, als grete and more gretter than is a destrere: and men clepen +hem loerancz: and sum men clepen hem odenthos: and thei han a blak hed and +3 longe hornes trenchant in the front, scharpe as a sword; and the body is +sclender. And he is a fulle felonous best: and he chacethe and sleethe the +olifaunt. There ben also manye other bestes, fullye wykked and cruelle, +that ben not mocheles more than a bere; and thei han the hed lyche a bore; +and thei han 6 feet: and on every foote 2 large clawes trenchant: and the +body is lyche a bere, and the tayl as a lyoun. And there ben also myse, als +gret as houndes; and zalowe myse, als grete as ravenes. And ther ben gees +alle rede, thre sithes more gret than oure here: and thei han the hed, the +necke and the brest alle black. And many other dyverse bestes ben in tho +contrees, and elle where there abouten: and manye dyverse briddes also; of +the whiche, it were to longe for to telle zou: and therefore I passe over +at this tyme. + + +CAPVT. 47. + +De Bracmannorum et aliorum Insulis. + +Bracmannorum Insula quasi ad medium Imperij consistit Praesbyteri Ioannis. +Hic licet Christiani non sunt, viuunt tamen naturali optimo more. Rudes +enim et incomparati, simplices, et inscij omnis artis apparent. Non cupidi, +superbi, inuidi, iracundi, gulosi, aut luxuriosi nec iurant, fraudant, aut +mentiuntur. Laborant corpora, sed intendunt animo implere quo ad valent +naturale mandatum, hoc facias alijs quod tibi vis fieri: credentes et +adorantes omnium creatorum Deum, et sperantes ab ipso simpliciter +Paradisum. + +Sobrij quoque sunt, quapropter et longo tempore viuunt: et si quis ab eorum +moribus degenerat, proscribitur perpetuo sine mora, omnibus nulla posita +differentia personarum, vnde et in iusto Dei iudicio, quod naturalem +exercere iustitiam contendunt, Elementa eis naturaliter obsequuntur, et +raro eos tangit tempestas, aut fames, pestilentia aut gladius. + +[Sidenote: Flumen Chene.] Magna riparia dicta Chene currit per Insulam, +ministrans piscium et aquarum copiam: Istos olim Alexander rex Grecorum +debellare cupiens, misit eis literas comminationis, cui inter caetera +notabilia remandauerunt, nihil se habere curiosi, quod Rex tantus deberet +concupiscere, nihilque ita se timere perdituros sicut pacem bonam, quam +hactenus habuerunt inconcussam: sicque diuino nutu est actum vt Rex +truculentus ad alia se verteret, atque in breui postmodum caderet, quia +dissipat Dominus eos, qui bella volunt, et istis manet pax multa +diligentibus eam. + +[Sidenote: Pytan.] Pytan Insula breuis continet paucos et breues +habitatores, Pygmaeis modico longiores, qui decoris vultibus nullo vnquam +cibo vescentes, specialis pomi quod secum portant sustentantur odore, quo +si carerent ad parum, color in vultu marcesceret, et die tertia vita +periret. + +Discretio et rationabilitas ijs adest modica, nec enim habent laborare nisi +pro vestitu, quem sibi circa arbusta colligunt: Et conficit vnusquisque pro +12 annis vitae suae. + +Vltra hanc Insulam siluestres, et fortes habentur homines, sed bestiales, +vestiti per totum corpus proprijs capillis et pilis, exceptis palmis, et +faciebus, qui videntur penitus gubernatione et politia carere: venantur +carnes per siluas, et discurrunt piscantes in aquis, omnia cruda vorantes. + +[Sidenote: Fluius Briemer.] Huius ad terrae metas manat fluuius Briemer +latitudinis duarum leucarum, et semis, quem nos transire nequiuimus, nec +ausi fuimus. Quoniam illo transmisso instant deserta 15, aut plurium +diaetatum inhabitata nunc temporis (prout audieramus) diuersis et nobis +ignotis generibus bestiarum, serpentum, draconum, gryphium, aspidum, +dypsarum, et colubrorum in multitudine tanta, vt centum millia armatorum +simul pertingere vsque ad arbores, quae ibi dicuntur solis et lunae, vix +possent. Attamen suo tempore Alexander magnus scribitur pertigisse, et +quaedam ab arboribus fictitia succepisse responsa. + +[Sidenote: Balsamum indicum.] Circa has arbores excolitur Balsamum, cuius +liquoris comparatio nusquam scitur contineri sub coelo. Nam ibidem homines, +de istarum arborum fructibus et Balsamo vtentes dicuntur illorum virtute +quadringentis aut pluribus annis viuere. + +Peruenit autem et Dux Danus Ogerus, ac manducauit de illis, vnde et +nonnulli prae sensus stoliditate vel fidei leuitate putant ipsum adhuc alibi +viuere in terris. Ego autem quia tantum pro dilatanda Christianitate +laborauit arbitror magis, eum regnare cum Christo in coelis. + +[Sidenote: Taprobana Insula, et eius descriptio.] Versus Orientales partes +Indorum consistit magna regio Taprobane exuberans optimis terrenorum +bonorum, in quam nauigio intrauimus in octo vel circa diaetis per aquam +satis tenuem, haud profundam. Ibi, sicut et in alijs multis Insulis, rex +non nascitur sed eligitur per partes terrae: et est haec vna de quindecim +nominatis Regionibus conquisitionis Ogeri. Ista, cum modicum declinet a +circulo terrae sub AEquatore, patitur in anno duas aestates, et duas hyemes, +si tamen hyems aliqua dici debeat, et non magis aestas, quia nullus hic dies +anni caret fructu, flore, germine. + +Habitatores sunt discreti, et honesti, vnde et mercatores de remotis +partibus libenter cum ijs communicant: et sparsim per regionem habitant +plurimi diuites Christiani. + +[Sidenote: Orilla. Argita.] Hijs iunguntur duae insulae (quas nos vocamus, +Orilla, et Argita), quanquam illa lingua aliter nominentur. In quarum prima +sunt multae mineriae auri, in secunda argenti, et propter quandam +crassitudinem aeris continuam, perpauca apparent sydera, praeter vnum quod +dicunt Canopum, quod aestimo planetam Veneris. [Sidenote: Hunc locum notat +Gerardus Mercator in sua charta generali.] Et quod mirum est valde de omni +lunatione ijs apparet nisi 2. quarta. Cuius rei probabilis ratio effugit +etiam Astronomos valde peritos. Atque per has Insulas quoddam rubrum mare a +mari Oceano segregatur. + +Itaque in Orilla in locis multis effoditur, colligitur, et conflatur +optimum auri metallum, per viros, mulieres, et paruulos in hoc instructos, +sed et in nonnullis ibi montibus monstrantur congregationes bestiolarum in +quantitate nostrorum catulorum, in formicarum forma ac natura totali: qui +pro suis viribus effodiunt, purificant, et colligunt cum intenta +occupatione auri minutias, eas reponentes, et repositas retrahentes de +cauernis et specubus in cauernas et specus. Et in conseruando sum +diligentes et acres, vt nemo audeat de facili propinquare, nisi quod +interdum ab illis pausantibus; seu ab aestu se occultantibus, aliqui non +sine periculo in dromedarijs et veredarijs rapiunt, vel furantur. + +Solet etiam ab eis obtineri, quod excogitato ingenio super equam quae nuper +foetum ediderit, imponentes homines duas de ligno cistulas, seu cophinos +nouos, vacuos, et apertos a lateribus dependentes prope terram: hanc +famelicam dimittunt vt se pascat ad herbas in montem: Quam formicae videntes +solam salientes et iocantes, colludunt ad eam et ad eius confines pro +nouitate: et quoniam eis est naturale, vt circa se omne vacuum implere +conentur comportant certatim aurum suum in vasculis suis mundis. Cumque +homines a remotis tempus obseruauerint, emittunt pellum equae vt videat +matrem, cuius aspectu iam diu stetit priuatus, ad cuius hinnitum protinus +equa reuertitur onusta de auro. Hijs ergo et similibus modis homines aurum +diripiunt a formicis. + + +CAPVT. 48. + +Aliquid de loco Paradisi terrestris per auditum. + +A Finibus Imperij Indiae recta linea in orientem nihil est habitatum vel +habitabile, propter rupium, et montium altitudinem, et asperitatem, et +propter aeris inter Alpes diuersitatem: nam in multis locis, licet +quandoque aer sit serenus, nunc fit spissus nunc fumosus, vel venenosus, et +frequenter die medio tenebrosus. Durantque aut potius aggrauescunt +huiusmodi difficultates, vsque ad illum amaenissimum Paradisi locum, quem +protoplausti per inobedientiam sibi et posteris perdidisse noscuntur, quod +spacium si metiri posset, est multarum vtique diaetarum. Quia iam non +vlterius processi, nec procedere quiui, pauca duntaxat de illo loco referam +verisimilia, quae didici per auditum. + +[Sidenote: Descriptio Paradisi.] Paradisus terrestris dicitur locus +spaciosus ad amplitudinem quasi quinque Insularum nostrarum, Angliae, +Normanniae, Hiberniae, Scotiae, et Noruegiae, aut forsan satis plurium. Cuius +situs est pertingens in altitudine ad aeris supremam superficiem, eo quod +illic terra vel terrae orbis sit multum spissior quam alibi per modum +excentricum a vero centro mundi, nec valet hoc deinde ab aliquo experto +refelli, scriptura veritatis clamante, quod ibi sit fons irrigans vniuersam +superficiem terrae: aquae enim est natura semper fluere ad Ima. + +Exeunt autem ab illo fonte versus nostri partes hemispherij, hoc est nobis +de illo loco in occidentem quatuor flumina, Pyson, Gyon, Tygris, et +Euphrates, ab ista dimidia parte terrae circa AEquatoris circulum terrae +influentes, quapropter et merito credendum videtur, exire de eodem fonte et +alia quatuor flumina irrigantia terram oppositam, quae est circa alteram +dimidiam partem circuli AEquatoris, quamuis nos eorum fluminum loca, +virtutes, et nomina ignoramus, quod homines habitant ab alia parte +AEquinoctij. + +[Sidenote: Gentes ad austrum Aequatoris.] Hoc tamen volo sciri pro vero et +audiui, illic terrae faciem inhabitatam in maxima multitudine ciuitatum, +vrbium, et regionum, quoniam et eorum institores Indiam frequentant, et +nunciant sibi inuicem gentes et principes per literas, ac alijs modis +destinare sunt visi. + +[Sidenote: Ganges fluuius.] Vnus nostrorum fluuiorum Pyson currit per +Indiam, et per eius deserta quandoque sub terra, sed saepius supra, qui et +Ganges illic appellatus est, ab illo vltimo Paganitatis rege, quem Dux +Ogerus deuictum cum baptizari renueret in ipso flumine proiectum submersit. + +Ad littus huius reperiuntur multi lapides praeciositatis immensae et metalli +grani carissimi, nec non et auri mineriae, multumque descendit in eo natans +lignum Aloes ex Paradiso, quod rebus mirae virtutis inserit Salomon in +Canticis. + +Hinc secundus fluuius Gyon, currit per Aethiopiam, vnde dum venit in +AEgyptum, accipit nomen Nilus. Tertius Tygris veniens per Assyriam influit +maiorem Armeniam et Persiam: tandemque fluuij singuli per loca singula se +iactant in mare per quod defluunt vsque ad Nador, id est, ad oppositum +diametrum paradisi: Ideoque merito aestimantur omnes vniuerso orbe aquae +dulces originem capere, a supradicto paradisi fonte, quamuis secundum +distantiam maiorem vel minorem, et secundum naturas rerum per quas meant +diuersos habere inueniuntur sapores, atque virtutes. + +Porro ipsum Paradisi locum audiui a tribus plagis, orientali, meridionali, +et septentrionali, inaccessibilem tam hominibus quam bestijs, eo quod +apparet ripis perpendiculariter abscissa, tanquam inestimabilis +altitudinis. Et ab occidente id est nostra parte tanquam super omnium +humanorum intuitum rogus ardens, qui in scripturis rumphea flammea +appellator, vt nulli creaturae terrenae ascensus in eum credatur nisi +quibusdam volatilibus, prout decreuit iusti iudicij Deus. + +Ambulantibus enim illuc siue repentibus hominibus obstarent tenebrae imo +rupes, aer infestus, bestiae, serpentes, frigus, et camua. Nauigare autem +contra ictum fluminis nitentes impediret intrinsecus recursus, ac +impetuosus et quandoque subterraneus aquae cursus descendentis cum +vehementia ab euectissimo, vt dictum est, loco, qui suo quoque strepitu, +per petras atque strictos aliosque diuersos cadens gurgites, efficeret +surdos, et aeris mutatio caecos, vnde et multi tam nobiles quam ignobiles, +fatua sese audacia in isto ponentes periculo perierunt, alijs excoecatis, +alijs absurdatis, et nonnullis in ipso accessu subitanea morte peremptis. +Ex quo nimirum credi habetur isto Deum displicere conatum. + +Quapropter et ego ex illo loco statui animum ad repatriandum, quatenus Deo +propitio, Anglia quae me produxit seculo viuentem, usciperet morientem. + + +Of the Godenesse of the folk of the Yle of Bragman. Of Kyng Alisandre: and + wherfore the Emperour of Ynde is clept Prestre John. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXIX.] And bezonde that yle, is another yle, gret and gode, +and, plentyfous, where that ben gode folk and trewe, and of gode lyvynge, +aftre hire beleve, and of gode feythe. And alle be it that thei ben not +cristned, ne have no perfyt lawe, zit natheles of kyndely lawe, thei ben +fulle of alle vertue, and thei eschewen alle vices and alle malices and +alle synnes. For thei ben not proude ne coveytous ne envyous ne wrathefulle +ne glotouns ne leccherous; ne thei don to no man other wise than thei wolde +that other men diden to hem: and in this poynt, thei fullefillen the 10 +commandementes of God: and thei zive no charge of aveer ne of ricchesse: +and thei lye not, ne thei swere not, for non occasioun; but thei seyn +symply, ze and nay. For thei seyn, He that swerethe, wil disceyve his +neyghbore: and therfore alle that thei don, thei don it with outen othe. +And men clepen that yle, the Yle of Bragman: and somme men clepen it the +Lond of Feythe. And thorgh that lond runnethe a gret ryvere, that is clept +Thebe. And in generalle, alle the men of tho yles and of alle the marches +there abouten, ben more trewe than in ony othere contrees there abouten, +and more righte fulle than othere, in alle thinges. In that yle is no +thief, ne mordrere, ne comoun woman, ne pore beggere, ne nevere was man +slayn in that contree. And thei ben so chast, and leden so gode lif, as tho +thei weren religious men: and thei fasten alle dayes. And because thei ben +so trewe and so rightfulle and so fulle of alle gode condiciouns, thei +weren nevere greved with tempestes ne with thondre ne with leyt ne with +hayl ne with pestylence ne with werre ne with hungre ne with non other +tribulaccioun, as wee ben many tymes amonges us, for our synnes. Wherfore +it semethe wel, that God lovethe hem and is plesed with hire creance, for +hire gode dedes. Thei beleven wel in God, that made alle thinges; and him +thei worschipen. And thei preysen non erthely ricchesse; and so thei ben +alle right fulle. And thei lyven fulle ordynatly, and so sobrely in met and +drynk, that thei lyven right longe. And the most part of hem dyen with +outen syknesse, whan nature faylethe hem for elde. And it befelle in Kyng +Alisandres tyme, that he purposed him to conquere that yle, and to maken +hem to holden of him. And whan thei of the contree herden it, thei senten +messangeres to him with lettres, that seyden thus: What may ben y now to +that man, to whom alle the world is insuffisant: thou schalt fynde no thing +in us, that may cause the to warren azenst us: for wee have no ricchesse, +ne none wee coveyten: and alle the godes of our contree ben in comoun. Oure +mete, that we susteyne with alle oure bodyes, is our richesse: and in stede +of tresoure of gold and sylver, wee maken oure tresoure of accord and pees, +and for to love every man other. And for to apparaylle with oure bodyes, +wee usen a sely litylle clout, for to wrappen in oure carcynes. Oure wyfes +ne ben not arrayed for to make no man plesance, but only connable array, +for to eschewe folye. Whan men peynen hem to arraye the body, for to make +it semen fayrere than God made it, thei don gret synne. For man scholde not +devise no aske grettre beautee, than God hathe ordeyned man to ben at his +birthe. The erthe mynystrethe to us 2 thynges; our liflode, that comethe of +the erthe that wee lyve by, and oure sepulture aftre oure dethe. Wee have +ben in perpetuelle pees tille now, that thou come to disherite us; and also +wee have a kyng, nought for to do justice to every man, for he schalle +fynde no forfete amonge us; but for to kepe noblesse, and for to schewe +that wee ben obeyssant, wee have a kyng. For justice ne hathe not among us +no place: for wee don no man otherwise than wee desiren that man don to us; +so that rightwisnesse ne vengeance han nought to don amonges us; so that no +thing thou may take fro us, but oure god pes, that alle weys hath dured +amonge us. And whan Kyng Alisandre had rad theise lettres, he thoughte that +he scholde do gret synne, for to trouble hem: and thanne he sente hem +surteez, that thei scholde not ben aferd of him, and that thei scholde +kepen hire gode maneres and hire gode pees, as thei hadden used before of +custom; and so he let hem allone. + +Another yle there is, that men clepen Oxidrate; and another yle, that men +clepen Gynosophe, where there is also gode folk, and fulle of gode feythe: +and thei holden for the most partye the gode condiciouns and customs and +gode maneres, as men of the contree above seyd: but thei gon alle naked. In +to that yle entred Kyng Alisandre, to see the manere. And when he saughe +hire gret feythe and hire trouthe, that was amonges hem, he seyde that he +wolde not greven hem: and bad hem aske of him, what that they wolde have of +hym, ricchesse or ony thing elles; and thei scholde have it with gode +wille. And thei answerden, that he was riche y now, that hadde mete and +drynke to susteyne the body with. For the ricchesse of this world, that is +transitorie, is not worthe: but zif it were in his power to make hem +immortalle, there of wolde thei preyen him, and thanken him. And Alisandre +answerde hem, that it was not in his powere to don it, because he was +mortelle, as thei were. And thanne thei asked him, whi he was so proud and +so fierce and so besy, for to putten alle the world undre his subieccioun, +righte as thou were a god; and hast no terme of this lif, neither day ne +hour; and wylnest to have alle the world at thi commandement, that schalle +leve the with outen fayle, or thou leve it. And righte as it hathe ben to +other men before the, right so it schalle ben to othere aftre the: and from +hens schal thou bere no thyng; but as thou were born naked, righte so alle +naked schalle thi body ben turned in to erthe, that thou were made of. +Wherfore thou scholdest thenke and impresse it in thi mynde, that nothing +is immortalle, but only God, that made alle thing. Be the whiche answere, +Alisandre was gretly astoneyed and abayst; and alle confuse departe from +hem. And alle be it that theyse folk han not the articles of oure feythe, +as wee han, natheles for hire gode feythe naturelle, and for hire gode +entent, I trowe fulle, that God lovethe hem, and that God take hire servyse +to gree, right as he did of Job, that was a Paynem, and held him for his +trewe servaunt. And therfore alle be it that there ben many dyverse lawes +in the world, zit I trowe, that God lovethe alweys hem that loven him, and +serven him mekely in trouthe; and namely, hem that dispysen the veyn glorie +of this world; as this folk don, and as Job did also: and therfore seyde +oure Lorde, be the mouthe of Ozee the prophete, _Ponam eis multiplices +leges meas_. And also in another place, _Qui totum orbem subdit suis +legibus_. And also our Lord seythe in the Gospelle, _Alias oves habeo, que +non sunt ex hoc ovili_; that is to seyne, that he hadde othere servauntes, +than tho that ben undre Cristene lawe. And to that acordethe the avisioun, +that Seynt Petir saughe at Jaffe, how the aungel cam from Hevene, and +broughte before him diverse bestes, as serpentes and other crepynge bestes +of the erthe, and of other also gret plentee, and bad him take and ete. And +Seynt Petir answerde; I ete never, quoth he, of unclene bestes. And thanne +seyde the aungelle, _Non dices immunda, que Deus mundavit_. And that was in +tokene, that no man scholde have in despite non erthely man, for here +diverse lawes: for wee knowe not whom God lovethe, ne whom God hatethe. And +for that ensample, whan men seyn _De profundis_, thei seyn it in comoun and +in generalle, with the Cristene, _pro animabus omnium defunctorum, pro +quibus sit orandum_. And therfore seye I of this folk, that ben so trewe +and so feythefulle, that God lovethe hem. For he hathe amonges hem many of +the prophetes, and alle weye hathe had. And in tho yles, thei prophecyed +the incarnacioun of oure Lord Jesu Crist, how he scholde ben born of a +mayden; 3000 zeer or more or oure Lord was born of the Virgyne Marie. And +thei beleeven wel in the incarnacioun, and that fulle perfitely: but thei +knowe not the manere, how be suffred his passioun and dethe for us. + +And bezonde theise yles, there is another yle, that is clept Pytan. The +folk of that contree ne tyle not, ne laboure not the erthe: for thei eten +no manere thing: and thei ben of gode colour, and of faire schap, aftre +hire gretnesse: but the smalle ben as dwerghes: but not so litylle, as ben +the pigmeyes. Theise men lyven be the smelle of wylde apples, and whan thei +gon ony fer weye, thei beren the apples with hem. For zif the hadde lost +the savour of the apples, thei scholde dyen anon. Thei ne ben not fulle +resonable: but thei ben symple and bestyalle. + +Aftre that, is another yle, where the folk ben alle skynned, roughe heer, +as a rough best, saf only the face and the pawme of the hond. Theise folk +gon als wel undir the watir of the see, as thei don above the lond, alle +drye. And thei eten bothe flessche and fissche alle raughe. In this yle is +a great ryvere, that is wel a 2 myle and an half of brede, that is clept +Beumare. And fro that rivere a 15 journeyes in lengthe, goynge be the +desertes of the tother syde of the ryvere, (whoso myght gon it, for I was +not there: but it was told us of hem of the contree, that with inne tho +desertes) weren the trees of the sonne, and of the mone, that spaken to +Kyng Alisandre, and warned him of his dethe. And men seyn, that the folk +that kepen tho trees, and eten of the frute and of the bawme that growethe +there, lyven wel 400 zeere or 500 zere, be vertue of the frut and of the +bawme. For men seyn, that bawme growethe there in gret plentee, and no +where elles, saf only at Babyloyne, as I have told zou before. Wee wolde +han gon toward the trees fulle gladly, zif wee had myght: but I trowe, that +100000 men of armes myghte not passen the desertes safly, for the gret +multytude of wylde bestes, and of grete dragouns, and of grete multytude +serpentes, that there ben, that slen and devouren alle that comen aneyntes +hem. In that contre ben manye white olifantes with outen nombre, and of +unycornes, and of lyouns of many maneres, and many of suche bestes, that I +have told before, and of many other hydouse bestes with outen nombre. + +Many other yles there ben in the lond of Prestre John, and many grete +marveyles, that weren to long to tellen alle, bothe of his ricchesse and of +his noblesse, and of the gret plentee also of precious stones, that he +hathe. I trow that zee knowe wel y now, and have herd seye, wherefore the +Emperour is clept Prestre John. But nathales for hem that knowen not, I +schalle seye zou the cause. It was somtyme an Emperour there, that was a +worthi and a fulle noble prynce, that hadde Cristene knyghtes in his +companye, as he hathe that is how. So it befelle, that he hadde gret list +for to see the service in the chirche, among Cristen men. And than dured +Cristendom bezonde the zee, alle Turkye, Surrye, Tartarie, Jerusalem, +Palestyne, Arabye, Halappee, and alle the lond of Egypte. So it befelle, +that this emperour cam, with a Cristene knyght with him, into a chirche in +Egypt: and it was the Saterday in Wyttson woke. And the bishop made ordres. +And he beheld and listend the servyse fulle tentyfly: and he askede the +Cristene knight, what men of degree thei scholden ben prestes. And than the +emperour seyde, that he wolde no longer ben clept kyng ne emperour, but +preest; and that he wolde have the name of the first preest, that went out +of the chirche: and his name was John. And so evere more sithens, he is +cleped Prestre John. + +In his lond ben manye Cristene men of gode feythe and of gode lawe; and +namely of hem of the same contree; and han comounly hire prestes, that +syngen the messe, and maken the sacrement of the awtier of bred, right as +the Grekes don: but thei seyn not so many thinges as the messe, as men don +here. For thei seye not but only that, that the apostles seyden, as oure +Lord taughte hem: righte as seynt Peter and seynt Thomas and the other +apostles songen the messe, seyenge the Pater-noster, and the wordes of the +sacrement. But wee have many mo addiciouns, that dyverse popes han made, +that thei ne knowe not offe; + + +Of the Hilles of Gold, that Pissemyres kepen: and of the 4 Flodes, that + comen fro Paradys terrestre. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXX.] Toward the est partye of Prestre Johnes lond, is an +yle gode an gret, that men clepen Taprobane, that is fulle noble and fulle +fructuous: and the kyng thereof is fulle ryche, and is undre the obeyssance +of Prestre John. And alle weys there thei make hire king be eleccyoun. In +that ile ben 2 someres and 2 wyntres; and men harvesten the corn twyes a +zeer. And in alle the cesouns of the zeer ben the gardynes florisht. There +dwellen gode folke and resonable, and manye Cristene men amonges hem, that +ben so riche, that thei wyte not what to done with hire godes. Of olde +tyme, whan men passed from the lond of Prestre John unto that yle, men +maden ordynance for to passe by schippe, 23 dayes or more: but now men +passen by schippe in 7 dayes. And men may see the botme of the see in many +places: for it is not fulle depe. + +Besyde that yle, toward the est, ben 2 other yles: and men clepen that on +Orille, and that other Argyte; of the whiche alle the lond is myne of gold +and sylver. And tho yles ben right where that the Rede See departethe fro +the see occean. And in tho yles men seen ther no sterres so clerly as in +other places: for there apperen no sterres, but only o clere sterre, that +men clepen Canapos. And there is not the mone seyn in alle the lunacioun, +saf only the seconde quarteroun. In the yle also of this Taprobane ben gret +hilles of gold, that Pissemyres kepen fulle diligently. And thei fynen the +pured gold, and casten away the unpured. And theise Pissemyres ben gret as +houndes: so that no man dar come to tho hilles: for the Pissemyres wolde +assaylen hem and devouren hem anon; so that no man may gete of that gold, +but be gret sleighte. And therfore whan it is gret hete, the Pissemyres +resten hem in the erthe, from pryme of the day in to noon: and than the +folk of the con tree taken camayles, dromedaries and hors and other bestes +and gon thidre, and chargen hem in alle haste that thei may. And aftre that +thei fleen away, in alle haste that the bestes may go, or the Pissemyres +comen out of the erthe. And in other tymes, whan it is not so hote, and +that he Pissemyres ne resten hem not in the erthe, than thei geten gold be +this sotyltee: thei taken mares, that han zonge coltes or foles, and leyn +upon the mares voyde vesselles made therfore; and thei ben alle open +aboven, and hangynge lowe to the erthe: and thanne thei sende forth tho +mares for to pasturen aboute the hilles, and with holden the foles with hem +at home. And whan the Pissemyres sen tho vesselles, thei lepen in anon, and +thei han this kynde, that thei lete no thing ben empty among hem, but anon +thei fillen it, be it what maner of thing that it be: and so thei fillen +tho vesselles with gold. And whan that the folk supposen, that the vesselle +ben fulle, thei putten forthe anon the zonge foles, and maken hem to nyzen +aftre hire dames; and than anon the mares retornen towardes hire foles, +with hire charges of gold; and than men dischargen hem, and geten gold y +now be this sotyltee. For the Pissemyres wole suffren bestes to gon and +pasturen amonges hem; but no man in no wyse. + +And bezonde the lond and the yles and the desertes of Prestre Johnes +lordschipe, in goynge streyght toward the est, men fynde nothing but +mountaynes and roches fulle grete: and there is the derke regyoun, where no +man may see, nouther be day ne be nyght, as thei of the contree seyn. And +that desert, and that place of derknesse, duren fro this cost unto Paradys +terrestre; where that Adam oure foremost fader, and Eve weren putt, that +dwelleden there but lytylle while; and that is towards the est, at the +begynnynge of the erthe. But that is not that est, that wee clep oure est, +on this half, where the sonne risethe to us: for whenne the sonne is est in +tho partyes, toward Paradys terrestre, it is thanne mydnyght in oure +parties o this half, for the rowndenesse of the erthe, of the whiche I have +towched to zou before. For oure Lord God made the erthe alle round, in the +mydde place of the firmament. And there as mountaynes and hilles ben, and +valeyes, that is not but only of Noes flode, that wasted the softe ground +and the tendre, and felle doun into valeyes: and the harde erthe, and the +roche abyden mountaynes, whan the soft erthe and tendre wax nessche, +throghe the water, and felle and becamen valeyes. + +Of Paradys, ne can not I speken propurly: for I was not there. It is fer +bezonde; and that forthinkethe me: and also I was not worthi. But as I have +herd seye of wyse men bezonde, I schalle telle zou with gode wille. Paradys +terrestre, as wise men seyn, is the highest place of erthe, that is in alle +the world: and it is so highe, that it touchethe nyghe to the cercle of the +mone, there as the mone makethe hire torn. For sche is so highe, that the +flode of Noe ne myght not come to hire, that wolde have covered alle the +erthe of the world alle aboute, and aboven and benethen, saf Paradys only +allone. And this Paradys is enclosed alle aboute with a walle; and men wyte +not wherof it is. For the walles ben covered alle over with mosse; as it +semethe. And it semethe not that the walle is ston of nature. And that +walle strecchethe fro the southe to the northe; and it hathe not but on +entree, that is closed with fyre brennynge; so that no man, that is +mortalle, ne dar not entren. And in the moste highe place of Paradys, evene +in the myddel place, is a welle, that castethe out the 4 flodes, that +rennen be dyverse londes: of the whiche, the first is clept Phison or +Ganges, that is alle on: and it rennethe thorghe out Ynde or Emlak: in the +whiche ryvere ben manye preciouse stones, and mochel of lignum aloes, and +moche gravelle of gold. And that other ryvere is clept Nilus or Gyson, that +gothe be Ethiope, and aftre be Egypt. And that other is clept Tigris, that +rennethe be Assirye and be Armenye the grete. And that other is clept +Eufrate, that rennethe also be Medee and be Armonye and be Persye. And men +there bezonde seyn, that alle the swete watres of the world aboven and +benethen, taken hire begynnynge of the welle of Paradys: and out of that +welle, alle watres comen and gon. The firste ryvere is clept Phison, that +is to seyne in hire langage, Assemblee: for many other ryveres meten hem +there, and gon in to that ryvere. And sum men clepen it Ganges; for a kyng +that was in Ynde, that highte Gangeres, and that it ran thorge out his +lond. And that water is in sum place clere, and in sum place trouble: in +sum place hoot, and in sum place cole. The seconde ryvere is clept Nilus or +Gyson: for it is alle weye trouble: and Gyson, in the langage of Ethiope, +is to seye trouble: and in the langage of Egipt also. The thridde ryvere, +that is clept Tigris, is as moche for to seye as faste rennynge: for he +rennethe more faste than ony of the tother. And also there is a best, that +is cleped Tigris, that is faste rennynge. The fourthe ryvere is clept +Eufrates, that is to seyne, wel berynge: for there growen manye godes upon +that ryvere, as cornes, frutes, and othere godes y nowe plentee. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, that no man that is mortelle, ne may not +approchen to that paradys. For be londe no man may go for wylde bestes, +that ben in the desertes, and for the highe mountaynes and gret huge +roches, that no man may passe by, for the derke places that ben there, and +that manye: and be the ryveres may no man go; for the water rennethe so +rudely and so scharply, because that it comethe doun so outrageously from +the highe places aboven, that it rennethe in so grete wawes, that no schipp +may not rowe ne seyle azenes it: and the watre rorethe so, and makethe so +huge noyse, and so gret tempest, that no man may here other in the schipp, +thoughe he cryede with alle the craft that he cowde, in the hyeste voys +that he myghte. Many grete lordes han assayed with gret wille many tymes +for to passen be tho ryveres toward paradys, with fulle grete companyes: +but thei myghte not speden in hire viage; and manye dyeden for werynesse of +rowynge azenst tho stronge wawes; and many of hem becamen blynde, and many +deve, for the noyse of the water: and summe weren perisscht and loste, with +inne the wawes: so that no mortelle man may approche to that place, with +outen specyalle grace of God: so that of that place I can seye zou no more. +And therfore I schall holde me stille, and retornen to that that I have +seen. + + +CAPVT. 49. + +In reuertendo de Cassan, et Riboth, et de diuite Epulone. + +[Sidenote: Via per quam Mandeuillus redijt in Angliam.] Ex hinc de illis +quae in reuertendo vidi scribo cursim pauca, ne modum excedere videatur +materia. [Sidenote: Cassan.] Reuertebar itaque quasi per Aquilonare latus +Imperij Presbyteri Ioannis, et nunc terrae, non mari nos commendantes, +transiuimus Deo Ductore, multas Insulas in multis diaetis, et peruenimus ad +regionem magnam Cassan: haec cum sit vna de quindecim habens longitudinem +diaetarum 60. et latitudinem prope 30. posset esse nominatior omnibus ibi +circa prouincijs, si a nostris frequentaretur. + +Notandum. Cassan (secundum Odericum) est melior prouincia de mundo, vbi +strictior est, habet diaetas 50. vbi longior 60, et est vna de 12. +prouincijs Imperij Grand Can. Est ista populosa, distincta ciuitatibus, vt +quisque a quacunque plaga de vna exeat ciuitate nouerit aliam in media +diaeta propinquam. Tenetque istam regionem Cassan rex diues et potens, pro +parte de Imperio Praebyteri Ioannis, et pro parte de Imperio Grand Can. + +[Sidenote: Riboth.] De ista in reuersione nostra venimus ad Regnum Riboth, +quod similiter est vnum de quindecim, latum, et speciosum, in quo de multis +bonis, habetur plena copia. Hoc tenetur in toto de Imperio Tartarorum. + +[Sidenote: Labassi, summus idolorum pontifex.] Vna est ibi inter et super +omnes ciuitas Sacerdotalis, et Regia, in qua Rex habet suum magnificum +palatium, et summus Idolorum Pontifex quem Labassi appellant, cui omnes +Regni obediunt et populi sicut Domino Papae nos Christiani quoniam et iubet, +et benedicit, ac confert sacerdotibus beneficia idolorum. + +Ciuitatis vndique muri sunt compacti albis et nigris lapidibus conquadratis +ad modum scakarij, omnesque contractae simili pauimento sunt stratae. Tanta +est illic reuerentia sacrificiorum vt si quis vel in modica quantitate, +sanguinem hominis, seu immolaticiae pecudis fudisse deprehensus fuerit, +nequaquam iudicium mortis euadet. Et inter innumeras superstitiones est +illic vna talis. + +Haeres cuius pater defungitur, si alicuius vult esse reputationis, mandat +cognatos, amicos, Relligiosos, et sacerdotes pro posse, qui certo Die +conuenientes sub magno Symphoniae festo, corportant defuncti cadauer, in +montis sublime cacumen. Ibi accedens dignior Praelatorum, funeris caput +abscindit, tradens haeredi in aureo disco decantanti sub deuotione suas +orationes cum suis in propria lingua. Atque interim aues regionis rapaces, +et immundae, vt corui, vultures, et aquilae, quae pro consuetudine optime +morem norunt, aduolant magno numero in aere: Tuncque Relligiosi cum +sacerdotibus detruncant corpus in frusta velut in macello, proijcientes +pecias in altum auibus, ac decantantes certam ad hoc compositam orationem, +tanquam si nostri sacerdotes cantarent. Subuenite sancti Dei, etc. + +Et habet eorum oratio, hunc sensum in sua lingua. Respice quam iustus et +sanctus extitit homo iste, quem Angeli Dei conueniunt accipere et in +Paradisum deferre. Talique diabolico errore delusi, putant filius, et +amici, quod defunctus sit in Paradisum translatus, viuat illic sempiterne +beatus, quoniam, vbi plures conuenere volucrum, ibi maiorem laetantur et +iactant fuisse numerum Angelorum. + +Hinc deinde reuertentes, cum choris, et resonantia Musicorum, filius +paratum praestat omnibus conuiuium, in cuius fine pro extremo ferculo, +tradit singulis particulam, de patris capite summa cum devotione. Hanc +etiam capitis caluariam filius facit postmodum debite formari et poliri +sibi pro cypho, in quo bibit in conuijs, ob recordationem amantissimi +patris. + +Ab hoc Regno decem dietis per potestatem Imperatoris Grand Can, inuenitur +Insula delectabilis, et speciosa satis: cuius Rex est praepotens in gloria, +et in diuitijs superabundans, et de multis quae illic geruntur admirandis +vnum recito solum. + +[Sidenote: Diues Epulo.] Quod est ibi homo quidam ditissimus nullius +dignitatis nomine honoratus, sed bysso, ac serico adornatus, et splendide +omni tempore epulatus: non ergo vult dici princeps, Dux, comes, miles, aut +huiusmodi, licet superioritatem habeat super marchiones aliquos et barones. +Eius possessionis valor aestimatur in anno 30. cuman de assinarijs bladi, et +risi, nec quaerit nisi delitiose viuere in isto seculo, vt cum diuite +Epulone sepeliatur in inferno. Cum etiam sibi derelictus sit, iste viuendi +modus a retrogenitoribus, eum et ipse posteris derelinquet. Hic tanquam +Imperiali residet palatio, cuius muri ambitus ad tractum leucae tenditur, +continens arbusta, vineta, rinulos, fontes et stagna, aulas, et cubicula +auro strata depictaque mire, et sculpta artificiose, vltra quam vales +explicare, et inter omnia ad medium palatium in celso vertice atrium +amaenum, valde tamen modico, sed cunctis praeciosius, aedificio, quasi ad +seema nostrarum Ecclesiarium, cum turribus, pilarijs, et columnis, in +quibus nihil prominet indignius auro. Nunquam vel raro hic exit de suo +palatio cum solis pulchris quos sibi conuocat et conuariat paruis pueris et +puellis, non excedentibus 16. annos aetatis. Tendit dum libet pedibus, +quandoque vectatur equo, interdum ducitur vehiculo, nonnunquam vult ferri +gestatorio, vel certe puellaribus brachijs, et visitat saepissime praefatum +praeciosius aedificium: atque hijs et modis alijs excogitat delectare visum +pulchris, auditum suauibus, olfactum redolentibus, tactum lenibus, et +gustum pascere delicatis. Electas semper habet praesto 50. puellas ei, et +de proximo exquisitissime ministrantes tam ad mensam quam ad cubiculum, et +ad omne libitum. + +[Sidenote: Versus.] Hae ad prandium recumbenti afferunt processionis more +pro singulo ferculo semper 5. genera dapum nobilium cum dulcisonae +resonantia cantilenae, quarum aliquae ei singulos detruncant genu flexo +morsellos, aliquae ponunt in ore, mundis tergentes comedentis labia mappis. + +Nam ipse quidem in mensa continet iacentes manus puras et quietas. Post +deseruitionem ferculi primi, seruitur pro secundo in 5. alijs dapum +generibus modo quo supra, et renouatur in apponendo cantus suauior melodia. + +Ista absque vlla Domini cura per ministros quotidie reparantur etiam in +maiori satis quam effor nobilitate, nisi dum ipse pro placito iusserit, +quandoque temperari. + +Deliciosius igitur quo vult deducit carnem, non curans animam, sed nec +probitatem curans terrenam, pascit sterilem, et viduae non benefacit. Et + + Quia viuit sicut porcus, + Morientem suscipit orcus. + +[Sidenote: Longitudo vnguium. Vtunturetiam in Florida principes longis +vnguibus.] Porro quod eum dixi manus tenere quietas, noueritis nimirum nil +posse manibus capere vel tenere, propter longitudinem, et recuruitatem +vnguium in digitis, qui sibi nullo tempore praescinduntur. Seruatur enim +hoc pro nobili more patriae, et viri diuites delicati, qui proprios possunt +habere ministros nunquam sibi dimittunt vngues resecare, vnde et nonnullis +circumdantur vndique manus, acsi uiderentur armatae. + +[Sidenote: Noua historia Chinensis hoc testatur.] Foeminarum autem mos est +nobilis si habeant paruos pedes, vnde et generosarum in cunis strictissime +sime obuoluuntur, vt vix ad medium debitae quantitatis excrescere possint. + + +The English Version. + +Of the Customs of Kynges, and othere that dwellen in the Yles costynge to + Prestre Johnes Lond. And of the Worschipe that the Sone dothe to the + Fader, whan he is dede. + +[Sidenote: Cap. XXXI.] From tho yles, that I have spoken of before, in the +lond of Prestre John, that ben undre erthe as to us, that ben o this half, +and of other yles, that ben more furthere bezonde; who so wil, pursuen hem, +for to comen azen right to pursuen hem, for to comen azen right to the +parties that he cam fro; and so environne alle erthe: but what for the +yles, what for the see, and what for strong rowynge, fewe folk assayen for +to passen that passage; alle be it that men myghte don it wel, that myght +ben of power to dresse him thereto; as I have seyd zou before. And therfore +men returnen from tho yles aboveseyd, be other yles costynge fro the lond +of Prestre John. And thanne comen men in returnynge to an yle, that is +clept Casson: and that yle hathe wel 60 jorrneyes in lengthe, and more than +50 in brede. This is the beste yle, and the beste kyngdom, that is in alle +tho partyes, out taken Cathay. And zif the merchauntes useden als moche +that contre an thei don Cathay, it wolde ben better than Cathay, in a +schort while. This contree is fulle well enhabyted, and so fulle of cytees, +and of gode townes, and enhabyted with peple, that whan a man gothe out of +o cytee, men seen another cytee, evene before hem: and that is what partye +that a man go, in alle that contree. In that yle is gret plentee of alle +godes for to lyve with, and of alle manere of spices. And there ben grete +forestes of chesteynes. The kyng of that yle is fulle ryche and fulle +myghty: and natheles he holt his lond of the grete Chane, and is obeyssant +to hym. For it is on of the 12 provynces, that the grete Chane hathe undre +him, with outen his propre lond, and with outen other lesse yles, that he +hathe: for he hathe fulle manye. + +From that kyngdom comen men, in returnynge, to another yle, that is clept +Rybothe: and it is also under the grete Chane. That is a fulle gode +contree, and fulle plentefous of alle godes and of wynes and frut, and alle +other ricchesse. And the folk of that contree han none houses: but thei +dwellen and lyggen all under tentes, made of black ferne, by alle the +contree. And the princypalle cytee, and the most royalle, is alle walled +with black ston and white. And alle the stretes also ben pathed of the same +stones. In that cytee is no man so hardy, to schede Blode of no man, ne of +no best, for the reverence of an ydole, that is worschipt there. And in +that yle dwellethe the pope of hire lawe, that they clepen Lobassy. This +Lobassy zevethe alle the benefices, and alle other dignytees, and all other +thinges, that belongen to the ydole. And alle tho that holden ony thing of +hire chirches, religious and othere, obeyen to him; as men don here to the +Pope of Rome. + +In that yle thei han a custom, be alle the contree, that whan the fader is +ded of ony man, and the sone list to do gret worchipe to his fader, he +sendethe to alle his frendes, and to all his kyn, and for religious men and +preestes, and for mynstralle also, gret plentee. And thanne men beren the +dede body unto a gret hille, with gret joye and solempnyte. And when thei +han brought it thider, the chief prelate smytethe of the hede, and leythe +it upon a gret platere of Gold and of sylver, zif so be he be a riche man; +and than he takethe the hede to the sone; and thanne the sone and his other +kyn syngen and seyn manye orisouns: and thanne the prestes, and the +religious men, smyten alle the body of the dede man in peces: and thanne +thei seyn certeyn orisouns. And the fowles of raveyne of alle the contree +abouten knowen the custom of long tyme before, and comen fleenge aboyen in +the eyr, as egles, gledes, ravenes and othere foules of raveyne, that eten +flesche. And than the preestes casten the gobettes of the flesche; and than +the foules eche of hem takethe that he may, and gothe a litille thens and +etethe it: and so thei don whils ony pece lastethe of the dede body. And +aftre that, as preestes amonges us syngen for the dede, _Subvenite sancti +Dei_, &c. right so the preestes syngen with highe voys in hire langage, +beholdethe how so worthi a man, and how gode a man this was, that the +aungeles of God comen for to sechen him, and for to bryngen him in to +paradys. And thanne semethe in to the sone, that he is highliche worschipt, +whan that many briddes and foules and raveyne comen and eten his fader. And +he that hathe most nombre of foules, is most worschiped. Thanne the sone +bryngethe hoom with him alle his kyn, and his frendes, and alle the othere +to his hows, and makethe hem a gret feste. And thanne alle his frendes +maken hire avaunt and hire dalyance, how the fowles comen thider, here 5, +here 6, here 10, and there 20, and so forthe: and thei rejoyssen hem hugely +for to speke there of. And whan thei ben at mete, the sone let brynge +forthe the hede of his fader, and there of he zevethe of the flesche to his +most specyalle frendes, in stede of entre messe, or a sukkarke. And of the +brayn panne, he letethe make a cuppe, and there of drynkethe he and his +other frendes also, with great devocioun, in remembrance of the holy man, +that the aungeles of God han eten. And that cuppe the sone schalle kepe to +drynken of, alle his lif tyme, in remembrance of his fadir. + +From that lond, in returnynge be 10 jorneyes thorghe out the lond of the +grete Chane, is another gode yle, and a gret kyngdom, where the kyng is +fulle riche and myghty. And amonges the riche men of his contree, is a +passynge riche man, that is no prince, ne duke ne erl; but he hathe mo that +holden of him londes and other lordschipes: for he is more riche. For he +hathe every zeer of annuelle rente 300000 hors charged with corn of dyverse +greynes and of ryzs: and so he ledethe a fulle noble lif, and a delycate, +aftre the custom of the contree. For he hathe every day, 50 fair damyseles, +alle maydenes, that serven him everemore at his mete, and for to lye be hem +o nyght, and for to do with hem that is to his pleasance. And whan he is at +the table, they bryngen him hys mete at every tyme, 5 and 5 to gedre. And +in bryngynge hire servyse, thei syngen a song. And aftre that, thei kutten +his mete, and putten it in his mouthe; for he touchethe no thing ne +handlethe nought, but holdethe evere more his hondes before him, upon the +table. For he hathe so long nayles, that he may take no thing, ne handle no +thing. For the noblesse of that contree is to have longe nayles, and to +make hem growen alle weys to ben as longe as men may. And there ben manye +in that contree, that han hire nayles so longe, that thei envyronne alle +the hond: and that is a gret noblesse. And the noblesse of the wommen, is +for to haven smale feet and litille: and therfore anon as thei ben born, +they leet bynde hire feet so streyte, that thei may not growen half as +nature wolde; and alle weys theise damyseles, that I spak of beforn, syngen +alle the tyme that this riche man etethe: and whan that he etethe no more +of his firste cours, than other 5 and 5 of faire damyseles bryngen him his +seconde cours, alle weys syngynge, as thei dide beforn. And so thei don +contynuelly every day, to the ende of his mete. And in this manere he +ledethe his lif. And so dide thei before him, that weren his auncestres; +and so schulle thei that comen aftre him, with outen doynge of ony dedes of +armes: but lyven evere more thus in ese, as a swyn, that is fedde in sty, +for to ben made fatte. He hathe a fulle fair palays and fulle riche, where +that he dwellethe inne: of the whiche, the walles ben in circuyt 2 myle: +and he hathe with inne many faire gardynes, and many faire halles and +chambres, and the pawment of his halles and chambres ben of gold and +sylver. And in the myd place of on of his gardynes, is a lytylle mountayne, +wher there is a litylle medewe: and in that medewe, is a litylle toothille +with toures and pynacles, alle of gold: and in that litylle toothille wole +he sytten often tyme, for to taken the ayr and to desporten hym: for that +place is made for no thing elles, but only for his desport. + +Fro that contree men comen be the lond of the grete Chane also, that I have +spoken of before. + +And ze schulle undirstonde, that of alle theise contrees, and of alle +theise yles, and of alle the dyverse folk, that I have spoken of before, +and of dyverse lawes, and of dyverse beleeves that thei han; zit is there +non of hem alle, but that thei han sum resoun with in hem and +undirstondynge, but zif it be the fewere: and that han certeyn articles of +oure feithe and summe gode poyntes of oure beleeve: and that thei beleeven +in God, that formede alle thinges and made the world; and clepen him God of +Nature, aftre that the prophete seythe, _Et metuent cum omnes fines terre_: +and also in another place, _Omnes gentes servient ei_; that is to seyn, +_Alle folke schalle serven Him_. But zit thei cone not speken perfytly; +(for there is no man to techen hem) but only that thei cone devyse be hire +naturelle wytt. For thei han no knouleche of the Sone, ne of the Holy Gost: +but thei cone alle speken of the Bible: and namely of Genesis, of the +prophetes lawes, and of the Bokes of Moyses. And thei seyn wel, that the +creatures, that thei worschipen, ne ben no goddes: but thei worschipen hem, +for the vertue that is in hem, that may not be, but only be the grace of +God. And of simulacres and of ydoles, thei seyn, that there ben no folk, +but that thei han simulacres: and that thei seyn, for we Cristene men han +ymages, as of Oure Lady, and of othere seyntes, that wee worschipen; nohte +the ymages of tree or of ston, but the seyntes, in whoos name thei ben made +aftre. For righte as the bokes of the Scripture of hem techen the clerkes, +how and in what manere thei schulle beleeven, righte so the ymages and the +peyntynges techen the lewed folk to worschipen the seyntes, and to have hem +in hire mynde, in whoos name that the ymages ben made aftre. Thei seyn +also, that the aungeles of God speken to hem in tho ydoles, and that thei +don manye grete myracles. And thei seyn sothe, that there is an aungele +with in hem: for there ben 2 maner of aungeles, a gode and an evelle; as +the Grekes seyn, Cacho and Calo; this Cacho is the wykked aungelle, and +Calo is the gode aungelle: but the tother is not the gode aungelle, but the +wykked aungelle, that is with inne the ydoles, for to disceyven hem, and +for to meyntenen hem in hire errour. + + +CAPVT. 50. + +De compositione huius tractatus in nobili ciuitate Leodiensi. + +In reuertendo igitur venitur ab hac insula per prouincias magnas Imperij +Tartarorum, in quibus semper noua, semper mira, imo nonnunquam incredibilia +viator potest videre, percipere, et audire. + +Et Noueritis, vt praedixi, me pauca eorum vidisse, quae in terris sunt +mirabilium, sed nec hic scripsisse centessimam partem eorum quae vidi, quod +nec omnia memoriae commendare potui, et de commendatis multa subticui, +propter modestiam, quam decet omnibus actibus addi. + +Idcirco vt et alijs, qui vel ante me in partibus illis steterunt, vel ituri +sunt, maneat locus narrandi siue scribendi, modum huius pono tractatus, +potius decurtans quam complens, quoniam alias loquendi non esset finis, nec +aures implerentur auditu. + +[Sidenote: Concludit opus suum.] Itaque anno a natiuitate Domini nostri +Iesu Christi 1355. in patriando, cum ad nobilem Legiae, seu Leodij ciuitatem +peruenissem, et prae grandeuitate ac artericis guttis illic decumberem in +vico qui dicitur, Bassessanemi, consului causa conualescendi aliquos +medicos ciuitatis: Et accidit, Dei nutu, vnum intrare physicum super alios +aetate simul et canicie venerandum, ac in sua arte euidenter expertum, qui +ibidem dicebatur communiter, Magister Ioannes ad barbam. + +Is, dum pariter colloqueremur, interseruit aliquid dictis, per quod tandem +nostra inuicem renouabatur antiqua notitia, quam quondam habueramus in Cayr +Aegypti apud Melech Mandibron Soldanum, prout supra tetigi in 7. capitulo +libri. + +Qui cum in me experientiam artis suae excellenter monstrasset, adhortabatur +ac praecabatur instanter, vt de hijs quae videram tempore peregrinationis, +et itinerationis meae per mundum, aliquid digererem in scriptis ad legendum, +et audiendum pro vtilitate. + +Sicque tandem illius monitu et adiutorio, compositus est iste tractatus, de +quo certe nil scribere proposueram, donec saltem ad partes proprias in +Anglia peruenissem. [Sidenote: Edwardus tertius.] Et credo praemissa circa +me, per prouidentiam et gratiam Dei contigisse, quoniam a tempore quo +recessi, duo reges nostri Angliae, et Franciae, non cessauerunt inuicem +exercere destructiones, depraedationes, insidias, et interfectiones, inter +quas, nisi a Domino custoditus, non transissem sine morte, vel mortis +periculo, et sine criminum grandi cumulo. Et ecce nunc egressionis meae anno +33. constitutus in Leodij ciuitate, quae a mari Angliae distat solum per duas +diaetas, audio dictas Dominorum inimicitias, per gartiam Dei consopitas: +quapropter et spero, ac propono de reliquo secundum maturiorem aetatem me +posse in proprijs, intendere corporis quieti, animaeque saluti. + +Hie itaque finis sit scripti, in nomine Patris, et Filij, et spiritus +sancti, AMEN. + +Explicit itinerarium a terra Angliae, in partes Hierosolimitanas, et in + vlteriores transmarinas, editum primo in lingua Gallicana, a Domino + Ioanne Mandeuille milite, suo authore, Anno incarnationis Domini 1355. in + Ciuitate Leodiensi: Et Paulo post in eadem ciuitate, translatum in dictam + formam Latinam. + + +The English Version. + +There ben manye other dyverse contrees and manye other marveyles bezonde, +that I have not seen: wherfore of hem I can not speke propurly, to telle +zou the manere of hem. And also in the contrees where I have ben, ben many +dyversitees of manye wondir fulle thinges, mo thanne I make mencioun of. +For it were to longe thing to devyse zou the manere. And therfore that that +I have devised zou of certeyn contrees, that I have spoken of before, I +beseche zoure worthi and excellent noblesse, that it suffise to zou at this +tyme. For zif that I devysed zou alle that is bezonde the see, another man +peraunter, that wolde peynen him and travaylle his body for to go in to tho +marches, for to encerche tho contrees, myghten ben blamed be my wordes, in +rehercynge many straunge thynges. For he myghten not seye no thing of newe, +in the whiche the hereres myghten haven outher solace or desport or lust or +lykynge in the herynge. For men seyn alle weys, that newe thynges and newe +tydynges ben plesant to here. Wherfore I wole holde me stille, with outen +ony more rehercyng of dyversiteez or of marvaylles, that ben bezonde, to +that entent and ende, that who so wil gon in to the contrees, he schalle +fynde y nowe to speke of, that I have not touched of in no wyse. + +And zee schulle undirstonde, zif it lyke zou, that at myn hom comynge, I +cam to Rome, and schewed my lif to oure holy fadir the Pope, and was +assoylled of alle that lay in my conscience, of many a dyverse grevous +poynt: as men mosten nedes, that ben in company, dwellyng amonges so many a +dyverse folk of dyverse secte and of beleeve, as I have ben. And amonges +alle, I schewed hym this tretys, that I had made aftre informacioun of men, +that knewen of thinges, that I had not seen my self; and also of marveyles +and customes, that I hadde seen my self; as fer as God wolde zeve me grace: +and besoughte his holy fadirhode, that my boke myghten be examyned and +corrected be avys of his wyse and discreet conscille. And oure holy fadir, +of his special grace, remytted my boke to ben examyned and preved be the +avys of his seyd conscille. Be the whiche, my boke was preeved for trewe; +in so moche that thei schewed me a boke, that my boke was examynde by, that +comprehended fulle moche more, ben an hundred part; be the whiche, the +_Mappa Mundi_ was made after. And so my boke (alle be it that many men ne +list not to zeve credence to no thing, but to that that thei seen with hire +eye, ne be the auctour ne the persone never so trewe) is affermed and +preved be oure holy fadir, in maner and forme as I have seyd. + +And I John Maundevylle knyghte aboveseyd, (alle thoughe I ben unworthi) +that departed from oure contrees and passed the see, the zeer of grace +1322, that have passed many londes and manye yles and contrees, and cerched +manye fulle straunge places, and have ben in manye a fulle gode honourable +comyanye, and at many a faire dede of armes, (alle be it that I dide none +my self, for myn unable insuffisance) now I am comen hom (mawgree my self) +to reste: for gowtes, artetykes, that me distreynen, tho diffynen the ende +of my labour, azenst my wille (God knowethe). And thus takynge solace in my +wrecched reste, recordynge the tyme passed, I have fulfilled theise thinges +and putte hem wryten in this boke, as it wolde come in to my mynde, the +zeer of grace 1356 in the 34 zeer that I departede from oure contrees. +Wherfore I preye to alle the rederes and hereres of this boke, zif it plese +hem, that thei wolde preyen to God for me: and I schalle preye for hem. And +alle tho that seyn for me a _Pater nostre_, with an _Ave Maria_, that God +forzeve me my synnes, I make hem parteneres, and graunte hem part of alle +the gode pilgrymages and of alle the gode dedes, that I have don, zif ony +be to his plesance: and noghte only of tho, but of alle that evere I +schalle do unto my lyfes ende. And I beseche Almighty God, fro whom alle +godenesse and grace comethe fro, that he vouchesaf, of his excellent mercy +and habundant grace, to fulle fylle hire soules with inspiracioun of the +Holy Gost, in makynge defence of alle hire gostly enemyes here in erthe, to +hire salvacioun, bothe of body and soule; to worschipe and thankynge of +Him, that is three and on, with outen begynnynge and withouten endynge; +that is, with outen qualitee, good, and with outen quantytee, gret; that in +alle places is present, and alle thinges conteynynge; the whiche that no +goodnesse may amende, ne non evelle empeyre; that in perfeyte Trynytee +lyvethe and regnethe God, be alle worldes and be alle tymes. Amen, Amen, +Amen. + + * * * * * + +Richardi Hakluyti breuis admonitio ad Lectorem. + +Ioannem Mandeuillum nostratem, eruditum et insignem Authorem (Balaeo, +Mercatore, Ortelio, et alijs, testibus) ab innumeris Scribarum et +Typographorum mendis repurgando, ex multorum, eorumque optimorum +exemplarium collatione, quid praestiterim, virorum doctorum, et eorum +praecipue, qui Geographiae et Antiquitatis periti sunt, esto iudicium. Quae +autem habet de monstriferis hominum formis itinerarij sui praecedentis +capitibus trigessimo, trigessimo primo, trigessimo tertio, et sparsim in +sequentibus, quanquam non negem ab illo fortasse quaedam eorum alicubi visa +fuisse, maiori tamen ex parte ex Caio Plinio secundo hausta videntur, vt +facile patebit ca cum his Plinianis, hic ideo a me appositis, collaturo, +quae idem Plinius, singulis suis authoribus singula refert, in eorum +plaerisque fidem suam minime obstringens. Vale, atque aut meliora dato, aut +his vtere mecum. + + * * * * * + +Ex libro sexto Naturalis historiae C. Plinij secundi. Cap. 30. + +Vniuersa vero gens AEtheria appellata est, deinde Atlantia, mox a Vulcani +filio AEthiope AEthiopia. Animalium hominumque effigies monstriferas circa +extremitates eius gigni minime mirum, artifici ad formanda corpora +effigiesque caelandas mobilitate ignea. Ferunt certe ab Orientis parte +intimatgentes esse sine naribus. aequali totius oris planitie. Alias +superiore labro orbas, alias sine linguis. Pars etiam ore concreto et +naribus carens, vno tantum foramine spirat, potumque calamis auenae trahit, +et grana eiusdem auenae, sponte prouenientis ad vescendum; Quibusdam pro +sermone nutus motusque membrorum est, &c. + + * * * * * + +Ex libro eiusdem Plinij septimo. Cap. 2. cui titulus est, De Scythis, et + aliarum diversitate gentium. + +Esse Scytharum genera, et quidem plura, quae corporibus humanis vescerentur, +indicauimus. Idipsum incredibile fortasse, ni cogitimus in medio orbe +terrarum, ac Sicilia et Italia fuisse, gentes huius monstri, Cyclopas et +Laestrigonas, et nuperrime trans Alpes hominem immolari gentium carum more +solitum: quod paulum a mandendo abest. Sed et iuxta eos, qui sunt ad +Septentrionem versi, haud procul ab ipso Aquilonis exortu, specuque eius +dicto, quem locum Gesclitron appellant, produntur Arimaspi, duos diximus, +vno oculo in fronte media insignes: quibus assidue bellum esse circa +metalla cum gryphis, ferarum volucri genere, quale vulgo traditur, eruente +ex cuniculis aurum, mira cupiditate et feris custodientibus, et Arimaspis +rapientibus, multi, sed maxime illustres Herodotus, et Aristeas +Proconnesius scribunt. Super alios autem Anthropophagos Scythas, in quadam +conualle magna Imai montis, regio est, quae vocatur Abarimon, in qua +syluestres viuunt homines, auersis post crura plantis, eximiae velocitatis, +passim cum feris vagantes. Hos in alio non spirare coelo, ideoque ad +finitimos reges non pertrahi, neque ad Alexandrum magnum pertractos, Beton +itinerum eius mensor prodidit. Priores Anthropophagos, quos ad +Septentrionem esse diximus decem dierum itinere supra Borysthenem amnem, +ossibus humanorum capitum bibere, cutibusque cum capillo pro mantelibus +ante pectora vti, Isigonus Nicaensis. Idem in Albania gigni quosdam glauca +oculorum acie, a pueritia statim canos, qui noctu plusquam interdiu +cernant. Idem itinere dierum x. supra Borysthenem, Sauromatas tertio die +cibum capere semper. Crates Pergamenus in Hellesponto circa Parium, genus +hominum fuisse tradit, quos Ophiogenes vocat serpentum ictus contactu +leuare solitos, et manu imposita venena extrahere corpori. Varro etiam nunc +esse paucos ibi, quorum saliuae contra ictus serpentum medeantur. Similis et +in Africa gens Psyllorum fuit, vt Agatharchides scribit, a Psyllo rege +dicta, cuius sepulchrum in parte Syrtium maiorum est. Horum corpori +ingenitum fuit virus exitiale serpentibus, vt cuius odore sopirent eas. Mos +vero, liberos genitos protinus obijciendi saeuissimis earum, eoque genere +pudicitiam coniugum experiendi, non profugientibus adulterino sanguine +natos serpentibus. Haec gens ipsa quidem prope internicione sublata est a +Nasamonibus, qui nunc eas tenent sedes: genus tamen hominum ex his qui +profugerant, aut cum pugnatum est, abfuerant, hodieque remanent in paucis. +Simile et in Italia Marsorum gentis durat, quos a Circes filio ortos +seruant, et ideo inesse ijs vim naturalem eam. Et tamen omnibus hominibus +contra serpentes inest venenum: feruntque ictas saliua, vt feruentis aquae +contactum fugere. Quod si in fauces penetrauerit, etiam mori: idque maxime +humani ieiuni oris. Supra Nasamonis confinesque illis Machlyas, Androginos +esse vtriusque naturae, inter se vicibus coeuntes, Calliphanes tradit. +Aristoteles adijcit, dextram mamman ijs virilem, lacuam muliebrem esse. In +eadem Africa familias quasdam effascinantium, Isigonus et Nymphodorus +tradunt quarum laudatione intereant probata, arescant arbores, emoriantur +infantes. Esse eiusdem generis in Triballis et Illyrijs, adijcit Isigonus, +qui visu quoque effascinent, interimantque quos diutius intueantur. Iratis +praecipue oculis: quod eorum malum facilius sentire puberes. Notabilius +esse quod pupillas binas in oculis singulis habeant. Huius generis et +foeminas in Scythia, quae vocantur Bithyae, prodit Apollonides. Philarchus et +in Ponto Thibiorum genus, multosque alios eiusdem naturae: quorum notas +tradit in altero oculo geminam pupillam, in altero equi effigiem. Eosdem +praeterea non posse mergi, ne veste quidem degrauatos. Haud dissimile ijs +genus Pharnacum in AEthiopia prodidit Damon, quorum sudor tabem contactis +corporibus afferat. Foeminas quidem omnes vbique visu nocere, quae duplices +pupillas habeant, Cicero quoque apud nos autor est. Adeo naturae, cum +ferarum morem vescendi humanis visceribus in homine genuisset, gignere +etiam in toto corpore et in quorundam oculis quoque venena placuit: ne quid +vsquam mali esset, quod in homine non esset. Haud procul vrbe Roma in +Faliscorum agro familiae sum paucae, quae vocantur Hirpiae: quae sacrificio +annuo, quod fit ad montem Soractem Apollini, super ambustam ligni struem +ambulantes non aduruntur. Et ob id perpetuo senatusconsulto militiae +omniumque aliorum numerum vacationem habent. Quorundam corpore partes +nascuntur ad aliqua mirabiles sicut Pyrrho regi pollex in dextero pede: +cuius tactu lienosis medebatur. Hunc cremari cum reliquo corpore non +potuisse tradunt, conditumque loculo in templo. Praecipue India AEthiopumque +tractus, miraculis scatent. Maxima in India gignuntur animalia, Indicio +sunt canes grandioris caeteris. Arbores quidem tantae proceritatis +traduntur, vt sagittis superari nequeant. Haec facit vbertas soli, +temperies coeli, aquarum abundantia (si libeat credere) vt sub vna ficu +turmae condantur equitum. Arundines vero tantae proceritatis, vt singula +internodia alueo nauigabili ternos interdum homines ferant. Multos ibi +quina cubita constat longitudine excedere: non expuere: non capitis, aut +dentium, aut oculorum vllo dolore affici, raro aliarum corporis partium: +tam moderato Solis vapore durari. Philosophos eorum quos Gymnosophystas +vocant, ab exortu ad Occasum praestare, contuentes Solem immobilibus +oculis: feruentibus harenis toto die alternis pedibus insistere. In monte +cui nomen est Milo, homines esse auersis plantis, octonos digitos in +singulis pedibus habentes, autor est Megasthenes. In multis autem montibus +genus hominum capitibus caninis, ferarum pellibus velari, pro voce latratum +edere, vnguibus armatum venatu et aucupio vesci. Horum supra centum viginti +millia fuisse prodente se, Ctesias scribit: et in quadam gente Indiae, +foeminas semel in vita parere, genitosque confestim canescere. Item hominum +genus, qui Monosceli vocarentur, singulis cruribus, mirae pernicitatis ad +saltum: eosdemque Sciopodas vocari, quod in maiori aestu humi iacentes +resupini, vmbra se pedum protegant, non longe eos a Troglodytis abesse. +Rursusque ab his Occidentem versus quosdam sine ceruice, oculos in humeris +habentes. Sunt et Satyri subsolanis Indorum montibus (Cartadalorum dicitur +Regio) pernicissimum animal, tum quadrupedes, tum recte currentes humana +effigie propter velocitatem, nisi senes aut aegri, non capiuntur. +Choromandarum gentem vocat Tauron siluestrem sine voce, stridoris horrendi, +hirtis corporibus, oculis glaucis, dentibus caninis. Eudoxus in meridianis +Indiae viris plantas esse cubitales, foeminis adeo paruas, vt Struthopodes +appellentur. Megastenes gentem inter Nomadas Indos narium loco foramina +tantum habentem, anguium modo loripedem, vocarit Syrictas. Ad extremos +fines Indiae ab Oriente, circa fontem Gangis, Astomorum gentem sine ore, +corpore toto hirtam vestiri frondium lanugine, halitu tantum viuentem et +odore quem naribus trahant: nullum illis cibum, nullumque potum: tantum +radicum florumque varios odores et syluestrium malorum, quae secum portant +longiore itinere, ne desit olfactus, grauiore paulo odore haud difficulter +examinari. Supra hos extrema in parte montium Spithamaei Pygmaei narrantur, +ternas spithamas longitudine, hoc est, ternos dodrantos non excedentes, +salubri caelo, semperque vernante, montibus ab Aquilone oppositis, quos a +gruibus infestari Homerus quoque prodidit: Fama est, insidentes arietum, +caprarumque dorsis, armatos sagittis, veris tempore, vniuerso agmine ad +mare descendere, et oua pullosque earum alitum consumere, ternis +expeditionem eam mensibus confici, aliter futuris gregibus non resisti. +Casas eorum luto, pennisque, et ouorum putaminibus construi. Aristotelis in +cauernis viuere Pygmaeos tradit. Caetera de his, vt reliqui. Cyrnos Indorum +genus Isigonus annis centenis quadragenis viuere. Item Aethiopas +Marcrobios, et Seras existimat, et qui Athon montem incolant: hos quidem +quia viperinis carnibus alantur, itaque nec capiti, nec vestibus eorum +noxia corpori inesse animalia. Onesicritus, quibus in locis Indiae vmbrae non +sint, corpora hominum cubitorum quinum, et binorum palmorum existere, et +viuere annos centum triginta, nec senescere, sed vt medio aeuo mori. Crates +Pergamenus Indos, qui centenos annos excedant Gymnaetas appelat, non pauci +Macrobios. Ctesias gentem ex his, quae appellatur Pandore, in conuallibus +sitam, annos ducenos viuere, in iuuenta candido capillo, qui in senectute +nigrescat. Contra alios quadragenos non excedere annos, iunctos Macrobijs, +quorum foeminae semel pariant: idque et Agatharchides tradit, praeterea +locustis eos ali, et esse pernices. Mandrorum nomen ijs dedit Clitarchus et +Megastenes, trecentosque eorum vicos annumerat. Foeminas septimo aetatis +anno parere, senectam quadragesimo anno accedere. Artemidorus, in Taprobana +insula longissimam vitam sine vllo corporis languore traduci. Duris, +Indorum quosdam cum feris coire, mistosque et semiferos esse partus. In +Calingis eiusdem Indiae gente quinquennes concipere foeminas, octauum vitae +annum non excedere, et alibi cauda villosa homines nasci pernicitatis +eximiae, alios auribus totos contegi. Oritas ab Indis Arbis fluuius +disterminat. Ii nullum alium cibum nouere, quam piscium, quos vnguibus +dissectos sole torreant, atque ita panem ex his faciunt, vt refert +Clitarchus. Troglodytas super Aethiopiam velociores esse equis, Pergamenus +Crates. Item Aethiopas octona cubita longitudine excedere. Syrbotas vocari +gentem eam Nomadum Aethiopum, secundum flumen Astapum ad Septentrionem +vregentium. [Marginal note: Vel vergentium.] Gens Menisminorum appellata, +abest ab oceana dierum itinere viginti, animalium que Cynocephalos vocamus, +lacte viuit, quorum armenta pacscit maribus interemptis, praeterquam +sobolis causa. In Africae solitudinibus hominum species obuiae subinde fiunt, +momentoque euanescunt. Haec atque talia, ex hominum genere ludibria sibi, +nobis miracula, ingeniosa fecit natura: et singula quidem, quae facit +indies, ac prope horas, quis enumerare valeat? Ad detegendam eius +potentiam, satis sit inter prodigia posuisse gentes. + + +END OF MANDEVILLE'S VOYAGES. + + * * * * * + +Anthony Beck bishop of Durisme was elected Patriarch of Hierusalem, and + confirmed by Clement the fift bishop of Rome: in the 34 yere of Edward + the first. Lelandus. + +Antonius Beckus episcopus Dunelmensis fuit, regnante Edwardo eius +appelationis ab aduentu Gulielmi magni in Angliam primo. Electus est in +patriarcham Hierosolymitanum anno Christo 1305, et a Clemente quinto Rom. +pontifice confirmatus. Splendidus erat supra quam decebat episcopum. +Construxit castrum Achelandae, quatuor passuum millibus a Dunelmo in ripa +Vnduglessi fluuioli. Elteshamum etiam vicinum Grenouico, ac Somaridunum +castellum Lindianae prouinciae, aedificijs illustria reddidit. Deinde et +palatium Londini erexit, quod nunc Edwardi principis est. Tandem ex +splendore nimio, et potentia conflauit sibi apud nobilitatem ingentem +inuidiam, quam viuens nunquam extinguere potuit. Sed de Antonio, et eius +scriptis fusius in opere, cuius titulus de pontificibus Britannicis, +dicemus. Obijt Antonius anno a nato in salutem nostram Christo, 1310, +Edwardo secundo regnante. + + +The same in English. + +Anthony Beck was bishop of Durisme in the time of the reigne of Edward the +first of that name after the inuasion of William the great into England. +This Anthony was elected patriarch of Ierusalem in the yeere of our Lord +God 1305, and was confirmed by Clement the fift, pope of Rome. He was of +greater magnificence then for the calling of a bishop. He founded also the +castle of Acheland foure miles from Durisme, on the shore of a prety riuer +called Vnduglesme. [Footnote: Probably Barnard Castle, on the Tees.] He +much beautified with new buildings Eltham mannor nere vnto Greenwich, and +the castle Somaridune in the county of Lindsey. [Footnote: Lindsey is the +popular name for the north part of County Lincoln.] And lastly, he built +new out of the ground the palace of London, which now is in possession of +prince Edward. Insomuch, that at length, through his ouer great +magnificence and power he procured to himselfe great enuy among the +nobility, which he could not asswage during the rest of his life. But of +this Anthony and of his writings we will speake more at large in our booke +intituled of the Britain bishops. This Anthony finished his life in the +yere of our Lord God, 1310, and in the reigne of king Edward the second. + + * * * * * + +Incipit Itinerarium fratris Odorici fratrum minorum de mirabilibus + Orientalium Tartarorum. + +Licet multa et varia de ritibus et conditionibus huius mundi enarrentur a +multis, ego tamen frater Odoricus de foro Iulij de portu Vahonis, volens ad +partes infidelium transfretare, magna et mira vidi et audiui, quae possum +veraciter enarrare. Primo transiens Mare Maius me de Pera iuxta +Constantinopolim transtuli Trapesundam, quae antiquitus Pontus vocabatur: +Haec terra bene situata est, sicut scala quaedam Persarum et Medorum, et +eorum qui sunt vltra mare. In hac terra vidi mirabile quod mihi placuit, +scilicet hominem ducentem secum plusquam 4000 perdicum. Homo autem per +terram gradiebatur, perdices vero volabant per aera, quas ipse ad quoddam +castrum dictum Zauena duxit, distans a Trapesunda per tres dietas. Hae +perdices illius conditionis erant, cum homo ille quiescere voluit, omnes se +aptabant circa ipsum, more pullorum gallinarum, et per illum modum duxit +eas vsque ad Trapesundam, et vsque ad palatium imperatoris, qui de illis +sumpsit quot voluit, et residuas vir ille ad locum vnde venerat, adduxit. +In hac ciuitate requiescit corpus Athanasij supra portem ciuitatis. +[Sidenote: Armenis maior.] Vltra transiui vsque in Armeniam maiorem, ad +quandam ciuitatem quae vocatur Azaron, quae erat multum opulenta antiquitus, +sed Tartari eam pro magna parte destruxterunt: In ea erat abundantia panis +et carnium, et aliorum omnium victualium praeterquam vini et fructuum. Haec +ciuitas est multum frigida, et de illa dicitur quod altius situatur quam +aliqua alia in hoc mundo: haec optimas habet aquas, nam venae illarum +aquarum oriri videntur et scaturire a flumine magno Euphrate quod per vnam +dietam ab ciuitate distat: haec ciuitas via media eundi Taurisium. Vltra +progressus sum ad quendam montem dictum Sobissacato. In ilia contrau est +mons ille supra quem requicscit arca Noe; in quem libenter ascendissem, si +societas mea me praestolare voluisset: A gente tamen illius contratae +dicitur quod nullus vnquam illum montem ascendere potuit, quia vt dicitur, +hoc Deo altissimo non placet. [Sidenote: Tauris ciuitas Persiae.] Vltra veni +Tauris ciuitatem magnam et regalem, quae antiquitus Susis dicta est. Haec +ciuitas melior pro mercenarijs reputatur, quam aliqua quae sit in mundo, nam +nihil comestibile, nec aliquid quod ad mercimonium pertinet, reperitur, +quod illic in bona copia non habetur. Haec ciuitas multum bene situatur: +Nam ad eam quasi totus mundus pro mercimonijs confluere potest: De hac +dicunt Christiani qui ibi sunt, quod credunt Imperatorem plus de ea +accipere, quam Regem Franciae de toto regno suo: Iuxta illam ciuitatem est +mons salinus praebens sal ciuitati, et de illo sale vnusquisque tantum +accipit, quantum vult, nihil soluendo alicui. In hac ciuitate multi +Christiani de omni natione commorantur, quibus Saraceni in omnibus +dominantur. [Sidenote: Sultania.] Vltra iui per decem dietas ad ciuitatem +dictam Soldania, in qua imperator Persarum tempore aestiuo commoratur; In +hyeme autem vadit ad ciuitatem aliam sitam supra mare vocatam Bakuc: +Praedicta autem ciuitas magna est, et frigida, in se habens bonas aquas, ad +quam multa mercimonia portantur. Vltra cum quadam societate Carauanorum iui +versus Indiam superiorem, ad quam dum transissem per multas dietas perueni +ad ciuitatem trium Magorum quae vocatur Cassan, [Marginal note: Vel +Cassibin.] quae regia ciuitas est et nobilis, nisi quod Tartari eam in +magnaparte destruxerunt: haec abundat pane, vino, et alijsbonis multis. Ab +hac ciuitate vsque Ierusalem quo Magi iuerunt miraculose, sunt L. dietiae, +et multa mirabilia sunt in hac ciuitate quae pertranseo. [Sidenote: Gest.] +Inde recessi ad quandam ciuitatem vocatam Gest a qua distat mare arenosum +per vnam dietam, quod mire est mirabile et periculosum: In hac ciuitate est +abundantia omnium victualium, et ficuum potissime, et vuarum siccarum et +viridium, plus vt credo quam in alia parte mundi. Haec est tertia cuitas +melior quam Rex Persarum habet in toto regno suo: De illa dicunt Saraceni, +quod in ea nullus Christianus vltra annum viuere vnquam potest. [Sidenote: +Como.] Vltra per multas dietas iui ad quandam ciuitatem dictam Comum quae +maxima ciuitas antiquitus erat, cuius ambitus erat fere L. Miliaria, quae +magna damna intulit Romanis antiquis temporibus. In ea sunt palatia integra +non habitata, tamen multis victualibus abundat. Vltra per multas terras +transiens, perueni ad terram Iob nomine Hus quae omnium victualium +plenissima est, et pulcherrime situata; iuxta eam sunt montes in quibus +sunt pascua multa pro animilibus: Ibi manna in magna copia reperitur. Ibi +habentur quatuor perdices pro minori, quam pro vno grosso: In ea sunt +pulcherrimi senes, vbi homines nent et filant, et faeminae non: haec terra +correspondet Chaldeae versus transmontana. + + +De moribus Chaldaeorum, et de India. + +Inde iui in Chaldaeam quae est regnum magnum, et transiui iuxta turrim +Babel: Haec regio suam linguam propriam habet, et ibi sunt homines formosi, +et foeminae turpes: et homines illius regionis vadunt compti crinibus, et +ornati, vt hic mulieres, et portant super capita sua fasciola aurea cum +gemmis, et margaritis; mulieres vero solum vnam vilem camisiam attingentem +vsque ad genua, habentem manicas longas et largas, quae vsque ad terram +protenduntur: Et vadunt discalceatae portantes Serablans vsque ad terram. +Triceas non portant, sed capilli earum circumquaque disperguntur: et alia +multa et mirabilia sunt ibidem. Inde veni in Indiam quae infra terram est, +quam Tartari multum destruxerunt; et in ea vt plurimum homines tantum +dactilos comedunt, quarum xlij, librae habentur pro minori quam pro vno +grosso. [Sidenote: Ormus.] Vltra transsiui per multas dietas ad mare +oceanum, et prima terra, ad quam applicui, vocatur Ormes, quae est optime +murata, et multa mercimonia et diuitiae in ea sunt; in ea tantus calor est, +quod virilia hominum exeunt corpus et descendunt vsque ad mediam tibiarum: +ideo homines illius terrae volentes viuere, faciunt vnctionum, et vngunt +illa, et sic vncta in quibusdam sacculis ponunt circa se cingentes, et +aliter morerentur: In hac terra homines vtuntur nauigio quae vocatur Iase, +suitium sparto. [Sidenote: Thana.] Ego autem ascendi in vnum illorum in quo +nullum ferrum potui reperrire, et in viginta octo dietis perueni ad +ciuitaten Thana, in qua pro fide Christi quatuor de fratribus nostris +martyrizati sunt. Haec terra est optime situata, et in ea abundantia panis +et vini, et aliorum victualium. Haec terra antiquitus fuit valde magna, et +fuit regis Pori, qui cum rege Alexandro praelium magnum commisit. Huius +terrae populus Idolatrat, adorans ignem serpentes, et arbores: Et istam +terram regunt Saraceni, qui vio lenter eam acceperunt, et subiacent imperio +regis Daldili. Ibi sunt diuersa genera bestiarum, leones nigri in maxima +quantitate: sunt et ibi simiae, gatimaymones, et noctuae magnae sicut hic +habentur columbae; ibi mures magni sunt, sicut sunt hic scepi, et ideo canes +capiunt ibi mures, quia murelegi non valent. Ad haec, in illa terra quilibet +homo habet ante domum suam vnum pedem fasciculorum, ita magnum sicut esset +vna columna, et pes ille non desiccatur, dummodo adhibeatur sibi aqua. +Multae nouitates sunt ibi, quas pulcherrimum esset audire. + + +De martyrio fratrum. + +Martyrium autem quatuor fratrum nostrorum in illa ciuitate Thana fuit per +istum modum; dum praedicti fratres fuerant in Ormes, fecerunt pactum cum +vna naui vt nauigarent vsque Polumbrum, et violenter deportati sunt vsque +Thanam vbi sunt 15. domus Christianorum, qui Nestoriani sunt et +Schismatici, et cum illic essent, hospitati sunt in domo cuiusdam illorum; +contigit dum ibi manerent litem oriri inter virum domus, et vxorem eius, +quam sero ver fortiter verberauit, quae suo Kadi, i. Episcopo conquesta est; +a qua interrogauit Kadi, vtrum hoc probari posset? quae dixit, quod sic; +quia 4. Franchi, i. viri religiosi erant in domo hoc videntes, ipsos +interrogate, qui dicent vobis veritatem: Muliere autem sic dicente, Ecce +vnus de Alexandria praesens rogauit Kadi vt mitteret pro eis, dicens eos +esse homines maximae scientiae et scripturas bene scire, et ideo dixit bonum +esse cum illis de fide disputare: Qui misit pro illis, et adducti sunt isti +quatuor, quorum nomina sunt frater de Tolentino de Marchia, frater Iacobus +de Padua, frater Demetrius Laicus, Petrus de Senis. Dimisso autem fratre +Petro, vt res suas custodiret, ad Kadi perrexerunt, qui coepit cum illis de +fide nostra disputare; dicens Christum tantum hominem esse et non Deum. E +contra frater Thomas rationibus et exemplis Christum verum Deum et hominem +esse euidenter ostendit, et in tantum confudit Kadi, et infideles qui cum +eo tenuerunt, quod non habuerunt quid rationabiliter contradicere: Tunc +videns Kadi se sic confusum, incepit clamare sic; Et quid dicis de +Machometo? Respondit frater Thomas: Si tibi probauimus Christum verum Deum +et hominem esse, qui legem posuit inter homines, et Machometus e contrario +venit, et legem contrariam docuit, si sapiens sis optime scire poteris, +quid de eo dicendum sit. Iterum Kadi et alij Saraceni clamabant, Et tu quid +iterum de Machometo dicis? Tunc frater T. respondit: vos omnes videre +potestis, quid dico de eo. Tum ex quo vultis quod plane loquar de eo, dico +quod Machometus vester filius perditionis est, et in inferno cum Diabolo +patre suo. Et non solum ipse, sed omnes ibi erunt qui tenent legem hanc, +quia ipsa tota pestifera est, et falsa, et contra Deum, et contra salutem +animae. Hoc audientes Saraceni, coeperunt clamare, moriatur, moriatur ille, +qui sic contra Prophetam locutus est. Tunc acceperunt fratres et in sole +vrente stare permiserunt, vt ex calore solis adusti, dira morte interirent. +Tantus enim est calor solis ibi, quod si homo in eo per spacium vnius missae +persisteret, moreretur; fratres tamen illi sani et hilares a tertia vsque +ad nonam laudantes et glorificantes dominum in ardore solis permanserunt, +quod videntes Saraceni stupefacti ad fratres venerunt, et dixerunt, volumus +ignem accendere copiosum, et in illum vos proijcere, et si fides vestra sit +vt dicitis, ignis non poterit vos comburere: si autem vos combusserit, +patebit quod fides vestra nulla sit. Responderunt fratres; parati sumus pro +fide nostra ignem, carcerem, et vincula, et omnium tormentorum genera +tolerare: verum tamen scire debetis, quod si ignis potestatem habeat +comburendi nos hoc non erit propter fidem nostram, sed propter peccata +nostra: fides enim nostra perfectissima et verissima est, et non est alia +in mundo in qua animsae hominum possunt saluae fieri; Dum autem ordinaretur +quod fratres conburerentur, rumor insonuit per totam ciuitatem, de qua +omnes senes, et iuuenes, viri et mulieres, qui ire poterant, accurrerunt ad +illud spectaculum intuendum. Fratres autem ducti fuerunt ad plateam +ciuitatis, vbi accensus est ignis copiosus, in quen frater Thomas voluit se +proijcere, sed quidam Saracenus cepit eam per caputium et retraxit dicens; +Non vadus tu cum sis senex, quia carmen aliquod vel experimentum habere +posses super te, quare te ignis non posset laedere, sed alium ire in ignem +permittas. Tunc 4 Saraceni sumentes fratrem Iacobum, eum in ignem proijcere +volebant; quibus ille, permittatis, me quia libenter pro fide mea ignem +intrabo: Cui Saraceni non adquiescentes eum violenter in ignem proiecerunt: +ignis autem ita accensus erat, quod nullus eum videre poteret, vocem tamen +eius audierunt, inuocantem semper nomen virginis gloriosae; Igne autem +totaliter consumpto stetit frater Iacobus super prunas illaesus, et laetus, +manibus in modum crucis eleuatis, in coelum respiciens, et Deum laudans et +glorificans, qui sic declararet fidem suam: nihil autem in eo nec pannus, +nec capillus laesus per ignem inuentus est; Quod videns populus vnanimiter +conclamare coepit, sancti sunt, sancti sunt, nefas est offendere eos, modo +videmus quia fides eorum bona et sancta est. Tunc clamare coepit Kadi: +sanctus non est ille, quia combustus non est, quia tunica quam portat est +de lana terrae Habraae, et ideo nudus exspolietur, et in ignem proijciatur, +et videbitur si comburetur vel non. Tunc Saraceni pessimi ad praeceptum +Kadi ignem in duplo magis quam prius accenderunt, et fratrem Iacobum +nudantes, corpus suum abluerunt, et oleo abundantissime vnxerunt, insuper +et oleum maximum in struem lignorum ex quibus ignis fieret, fuderunt, et +igne accenso fratrem in ipsum proiecerunt. Frater autem Thomas, et frater +Demetrius extra populum in loco separato flexis genibus orantes cum +lachrymis deuotioni se dederunt Frater autem Iocobus iterum ignem exiuit +illaesus sicut prius fecerat: quod videns omnis populus clamare coepit, +peccatum est, deccatum est, offendere eos, quia sancti sunt. Hoc autem +tantum miraculum videns Melich. i. potestas ciuitatis, vocauit ad se +fratrem Iacobum, et fecit eum ponere indumenta, sua, et dixit, videte +fratres, Ite cum gratia Dei, quia nullum malum patiemini a nobis, modo bene +videmus vos sanctos esse, et fidem vestram bonam ac veram esse; et ideo +consulimus vobis, vt de ista terra exeatis, quam citius poteritis, quia +Kadi pro posse suo vobis nocere curabit, quia sic confudistis eum: Hora +autem tunc erat quasi completorij, et dixerunt illi de populo, attoniti, +admirati, et stupefacti, tot, et tanta mirabilia vidimus ab istis +hominibus, quod nescimus quid tenere et obseruare debemus. Melich vero +fecit duci illos tres fratres vltra vnum paruum brachium maris in quendam +Burgum modicum ab illa ciuitate distantem: ad quem etiam ille in cuius iam +domo fuerant hospitati associauit eos, vbi in domo cuiusdam idolatri +recepti sunt. Dum haec argerenter, Kadi iuit ad Melich, dicens quid +facimus? Lex Machometi destructa est, veruntamen hoc scire debes, quod +Machomet praecepit in suo Alcorano, quod si quis vnum Christianum +interficeret, tantum mereretur, ac si in Mecha ad ipsum peregrinaretur. Est +enim Alkoranus lex Sarracenorum sicut Euangelium, Mecha, vero est locus vbi +iacet Machomet. Quem locum ita visitant Saraceni, sicut Christiani +sepulchram Christi. Tunc Melich respondet, vade, et fac sicut vis: quo +dicto statim Kadi accepit quatuor homines armatos vt irent, et illos +fratres interficerent, qui cum aquam transijssent, facta est nox, et illo +sero eos non inuenerunt, statim Melieh omnes Christianos in ciuitate capi +fecit, et incarcerauit, media autem nocte fratres surrexerunt dicere +matutinum, quos illi Saraceni qui missi fuerant, inuenerunt, et extra +burgum, sub quadam arbore adduxerunt, dixerunt eis. Sciatis fratres nos +mandatum habere a Kadi et Melich interficere vos, quod tamen faciemus +inuiti, quia vos estis boni homines et sancti, sed non audemus aliter +facere; quia si iussa sua non perficeremus, et nos cum liberis nostris et +vxoribus moreremur. Tunc fratres responderunt, vos qui huc venistis, et +tale mandatum recepistis, vt per mortem temporalem vitam aeternam +adipiscamur, quod vobis iniunctum est perficite; quia pro amore domini +nostri Iesu Christi, qui pro nobis crucifigi et mori dignatus est, et pro +fide nostra, parati sumus omnia tormenta, et etiam mortem libenter +sustinere. Christianas autem qui fratres comitabatur, multum cum illis +quatuor armatis altercatus est dicens, quod si gladium haberet, vel eos a +nece tam sanctorum hominum impediret, vel ipse cum eis interfectus esset. +Tunc armati fecerunt fratres se exspoliare, et frater Thomas primus iunctis +manibus in modum crucis genuflectens capitis abscissionem suscepit: Fratrem +vero Iacobum vnus percussit in capite, et eum vsque ad oculos scidit, et +alio ictu totum caput abscidit. Frater autem Demetrius, primo percussus est +cum gladio in pectore, et secundo caput suum abscissum est: Statim vt +fratres suum martyrium compleuerunt, aer ita lucidus effectus est, quod +omnes admirati sunt, et luna maximam claritatem ostendit. Statim quasi +subito tanta tonitrua, et fulgura, et coruscationes, et obscuritas fiebant, +quod omnes mori crediderunt: Nauis etiam illa quae illos debuerat deportasse +submersa est cum omnibus quae in se habuit, ita quod nunquam de illa postea +aliquid scitum est. Facto mane misit Kadi pro rebus fratrum praedictorum +nostrorum, et tunc inuentus est frater Petrus de Senis quartus socius +fratrum praedictorum, quem ad Kadi duxerunt: Cui Kadi, et alij Saraceni +maxima promittentes persuaserunt quod fidem suam renueret, et legem +Machometi confiteretur, et teneret. Frater autem Petrus de illis truffabat, +eos multum deridendo, quem de mane vsque ad meridiem diuersis paenarum ac +tormentorum generibus affixerunt ipso semper constantissime in fide, et in +Dei laudibus persistente, et fidem illorum Machometi deridente et +destruente. Videntes autem Saraceni eum non posse a suo proposito euelli, +eum super quandam arborem suspenderunt, in qua de nona vsque ad noctem +viuus et illaesus pependit: nocte vero ipsum de arbore sumpserunt, et +videntes illum laetum, viuum et illaesum per medium suum corpus diuiserunt, +mane autem facto nihil de corpore eius inuentum est, vni tamen personae fide +dignae reuelatum est, quod Deus corpus eius occultauerat reuelandum in certo +tempore, quando Deo placuerit Sanctorum corpora manifestare. Vt autem Deus +ostenderet animas suorum martyrum iam in coelis consistere, et congaudere +cum Deo et Angelis et alijs Sanctis eius, die sequenti post martyrium +fratrum praedictorum Melich dormitioni se dedit, et ecce apparuerunt sibi +isti fratres gloriosi, et sicut Sol, lucidi, singulos enses tenentes in +manibus, et supra eum eos sic vibrantes, quod vt si eum perfodere ac +diuidere vellent: qui excitatus horribiliter exclamauit sic, quod totam +familiam terruit: quae sibi accurrens quaesiuit, quid sibi esset? quibus +ille, Illi Raban Franchi quos interfici iussi, venerunt hac ad me cum +ensibus, volentes me interficere. Et statim Melich misit pro Kadi, referens +sibi visionem et petens consilium, et consolationem, quia timuit per eos +finaliter interire. Tunc Kadi sibi consuluit, vt illis maximas eleemosynas +faceret, si de manibus interfectorum euadere vellet. Tunc misit pro +Christianis quos in carcere intrudi praeceperat: A quibus cum ad eum +venissent indulgentiam petijt pro facto suo, dicens se esse amodo socium +eorum, et confratrem: Praecepit autem et legem statuit, quod pro tempore +suo, si quis aliquem Christianum offenderet, statim moreretur, et sic omnes +illaesos, et indemnes abire permisit: Pro illis autem quatuor fratribus +interfectis quatuor mosquetas. (i.) Ecclesias aedificari fecit, quas per +Sacerdotes Saracenorum inhabitari fecit. Audiens autem imperator Dodsi +istos tres fratres talem sententiam subijsse, misit pro Melich, vt vinctus +ad eum duceretur, A quo cum adductus esset, quaesiuit imperator, quare ita +crudeliter illos fratres iusserat interfici, respondit, quia subuertere +volebant legem nostram, et malum et blasphemiam de propheta nostro +dicebant: et imperator ad eum; O crudelissime canis, cum videres quod Deus +omnipotens bis ab igne eos liberauerit, quo modo ausus fuisti illis mortem +inferre tam crudelem. Et edicta sententia, ipsum Melich cum tota sua +familia per medium scindi fecit, sicut ipse talem mortem fratri inflixerat. +Kadi vero audiens, de terra illa, et etiam de imperatoris illius dominio +clam fugit, et sic euasit. + + +De miraculis quatuor fratrum occisorum + +Est autem consuetudo in terra illa, quod corpora mortua non traduntur +sepulturae, sed in campis dimittuntur, et ex calore Solis cito resoluuntur, +et sic consumantur: Corpora autem trium fratrum praedictorum per 14. dies +illic in fuerore Solis iacuerunt, et ita recentia et redolentia inuenta +fuerunt sicut illa die quando martirizati erant: quod videntes Christiani +qui in illa terra habitabant, praedicta corpora ceperunt, et honorifice +sepelierunt. Ego autem Odoricus audiens factum et martyrium illorum +fratrum, iui illuc, et corpora eorum effodi, et ossa omnia mecum accepi, et +in pulchris towallijs colligaui, et in Indiam superiorem ad vnum locum +fratrum nostrorum ea deportaui, habens mecum socium, et vnum famulum. Cum +autem essemus in via, hospitabamus in domo cuiusdam hospitarij, et ipsa +ossa capiti meo supposui, et dormiui: Et dum dormirem domus illa a +Saracenis subito accendebatur, vt me cum domo comburerent. Domo autem sic +accensa, socius meus et famulus de domo exierunt, et me solum cum ossibus +dimiserunt, qui videns ignem supra me, ossa accepi et cum illis in angulos +domus recollegi. Tres autem anguli domus statim combusti fuerunt, angulo in +quo steti cum ossibus saluo remanente: Supra me autem ignis se tenuit in +modum aeris lucidi, nec descendit quamdiu ibi persistebam; quam cito autem +cum ossibus exiui, statim tota pars illa sicut aliae priores igne consumpta +est, et multa alia loca circumadiacentia combusta sunt. Aliud miraculum +contigit, me cum ossibus per mare proficiente ad ciuitatem Polumbrum vbi +piper nascitur abundanter, quia nobis ventus totaliter defecit: quapropter +venerunt Idolatrae adorantes Deos suos pro vento prospero, quem tamen non +obtinuerunt: Tunc Saraceni suas inuocationes, et adorationes laboriose +fecerunt, sed nihil profecerunt: Et praeceptum est mihi et socio meo vt +orationes funderemus Deo nostro: Et dixit rector nauis in Armenico mihi, +quod alij non intelligerent: quod nisi possemus ventum prosperum a Deo +nostro impetrare, nos cum ossibus in mare proijcerent: Tunc ego et socius +fecimus orationes, vouentes multas missas de beata virgine celebrare, sic +quod ventum placeret sibi nobis impetrare. Cum autem tempus transiret, et +ventus non veniret, accepi vnum de ossibus, et dedi famulo, vt ad caput +nauis iret, et clam in mare proijceret; quo proiecto statim affuit ventus +prosper qui nunquam nobis defecit, vsquequo peruenimus ad portum, meritis +istorum martyrum cum salute. Deinde ascendimus aliam nauem vt in Indiam +superiorem iremus; Et venimus ad quandam ciuitatem vocatam Carchan in qua +sunt duo loca fratrum nostrorum, et ibi reponere istas reliquias volebamus. +In naui autem illa erant plus 700. mercatores et alij: Nunc illi Idolatrae +istam consuetudinem habebant, quod semper antequam ad portum applicuerint, +totam nauem perquirerent, si isti aliqua ossa mortuorum animalium +inuenirent, qui reperta statim in mare proijcerent, et per hoc bonum portum +attingere, et mortis periculum euadere crederent. Cum autem frequenter +perquirerent, et illa ossa frequenter tangerent, semper oculi delusi +fuerunt, sic quod illa non perpenderunt; et sic ad locum fratrum +deportauimus cum omni reuerentia, vbi in pace requiescunt; vbi etiam inter +idolatras Deus continue miracula operatur. Cum enim aliquo morbo grauantur, +in terra illa vbi fratres passi sunt ipsi vadunt; et de terra vbi corpora +sanguinolenta iacuerunt sumunt quam abluunt, et ablutionem bibunt, et sic +ab infirmitatibus suis liberantur. + + +Quo modo habetur Piper, et vbi nascitur. + +[Sidenote: Malabar.] Vt autem videatur quo modo habetur piper, sciendum +quod in quodam imperio ad quod applicui, nomine Minibar, nascitur, et in +nulla parte mundi tantum, quantum ibi; Nemus enim in quo nascitur, continet +octodecim dietas, et in ipso nemore sunt duae ciuitates vna nomine +Flandrini, alia nomine Cyncilim: In Flandrina habitant Iudaei aliqui et +aliqui Christiani, inter quos est bellum frequenter, sed Christiani vincunt +Iudaeos semper: In isto nemore habetur piper per istum modum. Nam primo +nascitur in folijs olerum, quae iuxta magnas arbores plantantur, sicut nos +ponimus vites; et producunt fructum, sicut racemi nostri producunt vuas; +sed quando maturescunt sunt viridis coloris, et sic vindemiantur vt inter +nos vindemiantut vuae, et ponuntur grana ad solem vt desiccentur: quae +desiccata reponuntur in vasis terreis, et sic fit piper, et custoditur. In +isto autem nemore sunt flumina multa in quibus sunt Crocodili multi, et +multi alij serpentes sunt in illo nemore, quos homines per stupam et paleas +comburunt, et sic ad colligendum piper secure accedunt. [Sidenote: +Polumbrum ciuitas. Adoratio bouis.] A capite illius nemoris versus meridiem +est ciuitas Polumbrum in qua maxima mercimonia cuiuscunque generis +reperiuntur Omnes autem de terra illa bouem viuum sicut Deum suum adorant, +quem 6. annis faciunt laborare, et in septimo faciunt ipsum quiescere ab +omni opere; ponentes ipsum in loco solemni, et communi, et dicentes ipsum +esse animal sanctum. Hunc autem ritum obseruant: quolibet mane accipiunt +duas pelues de auro, vel de argento, et vnam submittunt vrinae bouis, et +aliam stercori, de vrina lauant sibi faciem et oculos, et omnes 5. sensus: +de stercore vero ponunt in vtroque oculo, postea liniunt summitates +genarum, et tertio pectus, et ex tunc dicunt se sanctificatos pro toto die +illo: et sicut facit populus, ita etiam facit rex et regina. Isti etiam +aliud idolum mortuum adorant, quod in medietate vna superior est homo, et +in alia est bos, et iliud idolum dat eis responsa, et aliquotiens pro +stipendio petit sanguinem, 40. virginum: et ideo homines illius regionis +ita vouent filias suas et filios, sicut Christiani aliqui alicui religioni, +vel sancto in coelis. Et per istum modum immolant filios et filias, et +multi homines per istum ritum moriuntur ante idolum illud, et multa alia +abominabilia facit populus iste bestialis, et multa mirabilia vidi inter +eos quae nolui hic inserere. [Sidenote: Combustio mortuorum.] Aliam +consuetudinem vilissimam habet gens illa: Nam quamdo homo moritur, +comburunt ipsum mortuum, et si vxorem habet, ipsam comburunt viuam, quia +dicunt quod ipsa ibit in aratura, et cultura cum viro suo in alio mundo: si +autem vxor illa habeat liberos ex viro suo, potest manere cum eis si velit +sine verecundia et improperio, communiter tamen omnes praeeligunt comburi +cum marito; si autem vxor praemoriatur viro, lex illa non obligat virum, +sed potest aliam vxorem ducere. Aliam consuetudinem habet gens illa, quod +foeminae ibi bibunt vinum, et homines non: foeminae etiam faciunt sibi radi +cilia, et supercilia, et barbam, et homines non: et sic de multis alijs +vilibus contra naturam sexus eorum. [Sidenote: Mobar regnum vel Maliapor.] +Ab isto regno iui decem dietas ad iliud regnum dictum Mobar, quod habet in +se multas ciuitates, et in illo requiescit in vna ecclesia corpus beati +Thomae Apostoli, et est ecclesia illa plena idolis, et in circuitu ecclesiae +simul Cononici viuunt in 15 domibus Nestoriani, id est, mali Christiani, et +schismatici. + + +De quodam idolo mirabili, et de quibusdam ritibus eorum. + +In hoc regno est vnum Idolum mirabile, quod omnes Indi reuerentur: et est +statura hominis ita magni, sicut noster Christophorus depictus, et est +totum de auro purissimo et splendidissimo, et circa collum habet vnam +chordulam sericam cum lapidibus pretiosissimis, quorum aliquis valet plus +quam vnum regnum: Domus idoli est tota de auro, scilicet in tecto, et +pauimento, et superficie parietum interius et exterius. Ad illud idolum +peregrinantur Indi, sicut nos ad S. Petrum: Alij veniunt cum chorda ad +collum, alij cum manibus retro ligatis, alij cum cultello in brachio vel +tibia defixo, et si post peregrinationem fiat brachium marcidum, illum +reputant sanctum, et bene cum Deo suo. Iuxta ecclesiam illius idoli est +lacus vnus manufactus, et manifestus, in quem peregrini proijciunt aurum et +argentum, et lapides pretiosos in honorem Idoli, et ad aedificationem +ecclesiae suae, et ideo quando aliquid debet ornari, vel reparari, vadunt +homines ad hunc lacum, et proiecta extrahunt: die autem annua +constructionis illius idoli, rex et regina, cum toto populo et omnibus +peregrinis accedunt, et ponunt illud idolum in vno curru pretiosissimo +ipsum de ecclesia educentes cum Canticis, et omni genere musicorum, et +multae virgines antecedunt ipsum binae et binae, processionaliter combinatae +modulantes: [Sidenote: Crudelissima Satanae tyrannis, et carnificina.] +Peregrini etiam multi ponunt se sub curru, vt transeat Deus supra eos; et +omnes super quos currus transit, comminuit, et per medium scindit, et +interficit, et per hoc reputant se mori pro deo suo, sancte et secure: et +in omni anno hoc modo moriuntur in via sub idolo plusquam 500. homines, +quorum corpora comburuntur, et cineres sicut reliquiae custodiuntur, quia +sic pro Deo suo moriuntur. Alium ritum habent, quando aliquis homo offert +se mori pro deo suo, conueniunt omnes amici eius et parentes cum +histrionibus multis, facientes sibi festum magnum, et post festum appendunt +collo eius 5 cultellos acutissimos ducentes eum ante idolum, quo cum +peruenerit, sumit vnum ex cultellis, et clamat alta voce, pro deo meo +incido mihi de carne mea, et frustum incisum proijcit in faciem idoli: +vltima vero incisione per quam seipsum interficit, dicit, me mori pro deo +meo permitto, quo mortuo corpus eius comburitur, et sanctum fore ab omnibus +creditur. Rex illius regionis est ditissimus in auro et argento, et gemmis +pretiosis; ibi etiam sunt margaritae pulchriores de mundo. Inde transiens +iui per mare oceanum versus meridiem per 50 dietas ad unam terram vocatam +Lammori, in qua ex immensitate caloris, tam viri quam foeminae omnes +incedunt nudi in toto corpore: Qui videntes me vestitum, deridebant me, +dicentes Deum, Adam et Euam fecisse nudos. In illa regione omnes mulieres +sunt communes, ita quod nullus potest dicere, haec est vxor mea, et cum +mulier aliqua parit filium vel filiam dat cui vult de hijs qui +concubuerunt: Tota etiam terra illius regionis habetur in communi, ita quod +non meum et tuum in diuisione terrarum, domos tamen habent speciales: +Carnes humanae quando homo est pinguis ita bene comeduntur, sicut inter nos +bouinae: et licet gens sit pestifera, tamen terra optima est, et abundat in +omnibus bonis, carnibus, bladis, riso, auro, argento, et lignis Aloe, +canfari, et multis alijs. Mercatores autem cum accedunt ad hanc regionem +ducunt secum homines pingues vendentes illos genti illius regionis, sicut +nos vendimus porcos, qui statim occidunt eos et comedunt. [Sidenote: +Simoltra vel Samotra.] In hac insula versus meridiem est aliud regnum +vocatum Symolcra, in quo tam viri quam mulieres signant se ferro calido in +facie, in 12. partibus, Et hij semper bellant cum hominibus nudis in alia +regione. Vltra transiu ad aliam insulam quae vocatur Iaua cuius ambitus per +mare est trium millium milliarium, et rex illius insulae habet sub se 7. +reges coronatos, et haec insula optime inhabitatur, et melior secunda de +mundo reputatur. In ea nascuntur in copia garyophylli, cubibez, et nuces +muscatae: et breuiter omnes species ibi sunt, et maxima abundantia omnium +victualium praeterquam vini. Rex illius terrae habet palatium nobilissimum +inter omnia quae vidi altissime stat, et gradus et scalas habet altissimos, +quorum semper vnus gradus est aureus, alius argenteus: Pauimentum vero vnum +laterem habet de auro, alium de argento. Parietes vero omnes interius sunt +laminati laminis aureis, in quibus sculpti sunt Equites de auro habentes +circa caput circulum aureum plenum lapidibus pretiosis: Tectum est de auro +puro. Cum isto rege ille magnus Canis de Katay frequenter fuit in bello: +Quem tamen semper ille Rex vicit et superauit. + + +De arboribus dantibus farinam, et mel, et venenum. + +Iuxta istam Insulam est alia contrata vocata Panten, vel alio nomine +Tathalamasim, [Marginal note: Vel Malasmi.] et Rex illius contratae multas +insulas habet sub se. In illa terra sunt arbores dantes farinam, et mel, et +vinum, et etiam venenum periculosius quod sit in mundo, quia contra illud +non est remedium, nisi vnum solum, et est illud. Si aliquis illud venenum +sumpsisset, si velit liberari, sumat stercus hominis et cum aqua temperet, +et in bona quantitate bibat, et statim fugat venenum faciens exire per +inferiores partes. Farinam autem faciunt arbores hoc modo, sunt magnae et +bassae, et quando inciduntur cum securi prope terram, exit de stipite liquor +quidam secut gummae, quem accipiunt homines et ponunt in sacculis de folijs +factis, et per quindecim dies in sole dimittunt, et in fine decimi quinti +diei ex isto liquore desiccato fit farina, quam primo ponunt in aqua maris, +postea lauant eam cum aqua dulci, et fit pasta valde bona et odorifera, de +qua faciunt cibos vel panes sicut placet eis. De quibus panibus ego comedi, +et est panis exterius pulcher, sed interius aliquantulum niger. [Sidenote: +Mare quod semper currit versus meridiem.] In hac contrata est mare mortuum +quod semper currit versus meridiem, in quod si homo ceciderit, nunquam +postea comparet. In contrata illa inueniuntur Cannae longissimae plures +passus habentes quam 60 et sunt magnae vt arbores. Aliae etiam Cannae sunt ibi +quae vocantur Cassan quae per terram diriguntur vt gramen, et in quolibet +nodo earum ramuli producuntur qui etiam prolongantur super terram per vnum +miliare fere: in hijs Cannis reperiuntur lapides, quorum si quis vnum super +se portauerit, hon poterit incidi aliquo ferro, et ideo, communiter homines +illius contratae portant illos lapides super: Multi etiam faciunt pueros +suos dum sunt parui incidi in vno brachio, et in vulnere ponunt vnum de +illis lapidibus, et faciunt vulnus recludere se per vnum puluerem de quodam +pisce, cuius nomen ignoro, qui puluis statim vulnus consolidat et sanat: et +virtute illorum lapidum communiter isti homines triumphant in bellis, et in +mari, nec possent isti homines laedi per aliqua arma ferra: Vnum tamen +remedium est, quod aduersarij illius gentis scientes virtutem lapidum, +prouident sibi propugnacula ferrea contra spicula illorum, et arma venenata +de veneno arborum, et in manu portant palos ligneos accutissimos et ita +duros in extremitate sicut esset ferrum: Similiter sagittant cum sagittis +sino ferro, et sic confundunt aliquos et perforant inermes ex lapidum +securitate. [Sidenote: Vela ex arundinibus facta.] De istis etiam Cannis +Cassan faciunt sibi vela pro suis nauibus et domunculas paruas, et multa +sibi necessaria. [Sidenote: Campa.] Inde recessi per multas dietas ad aliud +regnum vocatum Campa, pulcherrimum, et opulentissimum in omnibus +victualibus. Cuius rex quamdo fui ibi tot habuit vxores, et alias mulieres, +quod de illis 300. filios et filias habuit. Iste rex habet decies millesies +et quatuor elephantum domesticorum, quos ita facit custodiri sicut inter +nos custodiunt boues, vel greges in pascuis. + + +De multitudine Piscium, qui se proijciunt in aridam. + +In hac contrata vnum mirabile valde reperitur, quod vnaquaeque generatio +piscium in mari ad istam contratam venit in tanta quantitate, quod per +magnum spatium maris nil videtur nisi dorsa piscium, et super aridam se +proijciunt quando prope ripam sunt, et permittunt homines per tres dies +venire, et de illis sumere quantum placuerint, et tunc redeunt ad mare: +Post illam speciem per illum modum venit alia species, et offert se, et sic +de omnibus speciebus, semel tamen tantum hoc faciunt in anno. Et quaesiui a +gente illa quomodo et qualiter hoc possit fieri? responderunt quod hoc modo +pisces per naturam docentur venire, et imperatorem suum reuereri. +[Sidenote: Testitudines magnae.] Ibi etiam sunt testudines ita magnae sicut +est vnus furnus, et multa alia vidi quae incredibilia forent, nisi homo illa +vidisset. In illa etiam contrata homo mortuus conburitur, et vxor viua cum +eo, sicut superius de alia contrata dictum est, quia dicunt homines illi +quod illa vadit ad alium mundum ad morandum cum eo, ne ibi aliam vxorem +accipiat. [Sidenote: Moumoran.] Vltra transiui per mare Oceanum versus +meridiem, et transiui per multas contratas et insulas, quarum vna vocatur +Moumoran, et habet in circuitu 2000. milliaria, in qua homines portant +facies caninas et mulieres similiter, et vnum bouem adorant pro Deo suo, et +ideo quilibet vnum bouem aureum vel argenteum in fronte portat: Homines +illius contratae et mulieres vadunt totaliter nudi, nisi quod vnum pannum +lineum portant ante verenda sua. Homines illius regionis sunt maximi et +fortissimi, et quia vadunt nudi, quando debent bellare, portant vnum scutum +de ferro, quod cooperit eos a capite vsque ad pedes, et si contingat eos +aliquem de aduersarijs capere in bello qui pecunia non possit redimi, +statim comedunt eum; si autem possit se redimere pecunia, illum abire +permittunt: Rex eorum portat 300. margaritas ad collum suum maximas et +pulcherrimas, et 300. orationes omni die dicit Deo suo: Hic etiam portat in +digito suo vnum lapidem longitudinis vnius spansae, et dum habet illum +videtur ab alijs quasi vna flamma ignis, et ideo nullus audet sibi +appropinquare, et dicitur quod non est lapis in mundo pretiosior illo. +Magnus autem imperator Tartarorum de Katai, nunquam vi, nec pecunia, nec +ingenio illum obtinere potuit, cum tamen circa hoc laborauerit. + + +De Insula Ceilan, et de monte vbi Adam planxit Abel filium suum. + +[Sidenote: Ceilan insula.] Transiui per aliam insulam vocatam Ceilan, quae +habet in ambitu plusquam duo millia milliaria, in qua sunt serpentes quasi +infiniti, et maxima multitudo leonum, vrsarum, et omnium animalium +rapacium, et siluestrium, et potissime elephantum. In illa contrata est +mons maximus, in quo dicunt gentes illius regionis quod Adam planxit Abel +filium suum 500. annis. In medio illius montis est planicies pulcherrima, +in qua est lacus paruus multum habens de aqua, et homines illi dicunt aquam +illam fuisse de lachrymis Adae et Euae, sed probaui hoc falsum esse, quia +vidi aquam in lacu scaturire: haec aqua plena est hirudinibus et +sanguisugis, et lapidibus pretiosis; istos lapides rex non accepit sibi, +sed semel vel bis in anno permittit pauperes sub aqua ire pro lapidibus, et +omnes quot possunt colligere illis concedit, vt orent pro anima sua. Vt +autem possint sub aqua ire accipiunt lymones, et cum illis vngunt se valde +bene, et sic nudos se in aquam submergunt, et sanguisugae illis nocere non +possunt. Ab isto lacu aqua exit et currit vsque ad mare, et in transitu +quando retrahit se, fodiuntur Rubiae, et adamantes, et margaritae, et aliae +gemmae pretiosae: vnde opinio est quod rex ille magis abundat lapidibus +pretiosis, quam aliquis in mundo. In contrata illa sunt quasi omnia genera +animalium et auium; et dixerunt mihi gentes illae quod animalia illa nullum +forensem inuadunt, nec offendunt, sed tantum homines illius regionis. Vidi +in illa insula aues ita magnas sicut sunt hic anseres, habentes duo capita, +et alia mirabilia quae non scribo. [Sidenote: Bodin Insula.] Vltra versus +meridiem transiui, et applicui, ad insulam quandam quae vocatur Bodin, quod +idem est quod immundum in lingua nostra. In ea morantur pessimi homines, +qui comedunt carnes crudas, et omnem immunditiam faciunt quae quasi +excogitari non poterit; nam pater comedit filium et filius patrem, et +maritus vxorem, et e contrario, et hoc per hunc modum: si pater alicuius +infirmetur, filius vadet ad Astrologum sacerdotem, scz. rogans eum quod +consulat Deum suum, si pater de tali infirmitate euadet, vel non. Tunc ambo +vadunt ad idolum aureum, vel argenteum, facientes orationes in hac forma. +Domine, tu es Deus noster, te adoramus, et rogamus vt nobis respondeas, +debetne talis a tali infirmitate mori vel liberari? Tunc Daemon respondet, +et si dicat, viuet, filius vadit et ministrat illi vsque ad plenam +conualescentiam: Si autem dicat, morietur, Sacerdos ibit ad eum, et vnum +pannum super os eius ponet, et suffocabit eum, et ipsum mortuum incidet in +frusta, et inuitabuntur omnes amici, et parentes eius ad comedendum eum cum +canticis, et omni laetitia, ossa tamen eius honorifice sepelient. Cum autem +ego eos de tali ritu reprehendi, quaerens causam: Respondit vnus mihi, hoc +facimus ne vermes carnes eius comedant, tunc eius anima magnam poenam +sustinerit, nec poteram euellere eos ab isto errore: et multae aliae +nouitates sunt ibi, quas non crederent, nisi qui viderent. Ego autem coram +Deo nihil hic refero, nisi illud de quo certus sum sicut homo certificari +poterit. De ista insula inquisiui a multis expertis, qui omnes vno ore +responderunt mihi, dicentes, quod ista India 4400. insulas continet sub se, +siue in se, in qua etiam sunt 64. reges coronati, et etiam dicunt quod +maior pars illius insulae bene inhabitatur. Et hic istius Indiae facio finem. + + +De india superiori, et de Prouincia Manci. + +In primis refero, quod cum transirem per mare Oceanum per multas dietas +versus Orientem, perueni ad illam magnam prouinciam Manci, quae India +vocatur a Latinis. De ista India superiori inquisiui a Christianis, +Saracenis, idolatris, et omnibus, qui officiales sunt domini Canis magni, +qui omnes vno ore responderunt, quod hae prouincia Manci habet plusquam +2000, magnarum ciuitatum, et in ipsa est maxima copia omnium victualium, +puta, panis, vini, risi, carnium, piscium, &c. Omnes homines istius +prouinciae sunt artifices et mercatores, qui pro quacunque penuria, dummodo +proprijs manibus iuuare se possent per labores, nunquam ab aliquo +eleemosynam peterent. Viri istius prouinciae sunt satis formosi, sed +pallidi, et rasas et paruas barbas habentes; foeminae vero sunt pulcherrimae +inter omnes do mundo. Prima ciuitas ad quam veni de ista India vocatur +Ceuskalon, [Marginal note: Vel Ceuscala.] et distat a mari per vnam dietam, +positaque est super flumen, cuius aqua prope mare cui contignatur, ascendit +super terram per 12. dietas. Totus populus illius Indiae idolatrat. Ista +autem ciuitas tantum nauigium habet, quod incredibile foret nisi videnti. +[Sidenote: Hi sunt alcatrarsi vel onocratoli.] In hac ciuitate vidi quod +300. librae de bono et recenti zinzibero habentur pro minori quam pro vno +grosso: Ibi sunt anseres grossiores et pulchriores, et maius forum de +illis, quam sit in mundo, vt credo, et sunt albissimi sicut lac, et habent +vnum os super caput quantitatis oui, et habet colorem sanguineum, sub gula +habent vnam pellem pendentem semipedalem: Pinguissimi sunt, et optimi fori: +et ita est de anatibus, et gallinis, quae magnae sunt valde in illa terra +plusquam duae de nostris. Ibi sunt serpentes maximi, et capiuntur et a gente +illa comeduntur: vnde qui faceret festum solemne, et non daret serpentes, +nihil reputaret se facere; breuiter in hac ciuitate sunt omnia victualia in +maxima abundantia. Inde transiui per ciuitates multas, et veni ad ciuitatem +nomine Kaitan, [Marginal note: Vel Zaiton.] in qua fratres Minores habent +duo loca, ad quae portaui de ossibus fratrum nostrorum pro fidi Christi +interfectorum, de quibus supra. In hac est copia omnium victualium pro +leuissimo foro, haec ciuitas ita magna est, sicut bis Bononia, et in ea +multa monasteria religiosorum, qui omnes idolis seruiunt. In vno autem +istorum monasteriorum ego fui, et dictum est mihi quod inerant 3000. +religiosorum habentium 11000. idoloram, et vnum illorum, quod quasi paruum +inter caetera mihi videbatur, est ita magnum sicut Christophorus noster. +Isti religiosi omni die pascunt Deos suos, vnde semel iui ad videntum +comestionem illam, et vidi quod illa quae detulerunt sibi comestibilia sunt, +et calidissima, et multum fumigantia, ita quod fumus ascendit ad idola, et +dixerunt Deos illo fumo recreari. Totum autem cibum illi reportauerunt et +comederunt, et sic de fumo tantum Deos suos pauerunt. + + +De Ciuitate Fuko. + +Vltra versus Orientem veni ad ciuitatem quae vocatur Fuko, [Marginal note: +Vel Foqaien.] cuius circuitus continet 30. milliaria, in qua sunt Galli +maximi et pulcherrimi, et gallinae ita albae sicut nix, lanam solum pro +pennis habentes sicut pecudes. Haec ciuitas pulcherrima est, et sita supra +mare. Vltra iui per 18. dietas, et pertransij multas terras et ciuitates, +et in transitu veni ad quendam montem magnum, et vidi quod in vno latere +montis omnia animalia erant nigra vt carbo, et homines et mulieres diuersum +modum viuendi habent: ab alio autem latere omnia animalia erant alba sicut +nix, et homines totaliter diuerse ab alijs vixerunt. Ibi omnes foeminae quae +sunt desponsatae portant in signum quod habent maritos vnum magnum barile de +cornu in capita. [Sidenote: Magnum flumen.] Inde transiui per 18. dietas +alias, et veni ad quoddam magnum flumen, et intraui ciuitatem vnam, quae +transuersum illius fluminis habet pontem maximum, et hospitabar in domo +vnius hospitarij, qui volens mihi complacere, dixit mihi: si velis videre +piscari, veni mecum; et duxit me super pontem, et vidi in brachijs suis +mergos ligatos super perticas, ad quorum gulam vbi ille ligauit vnum filum, +ne illi capientes pisces, comederent eos: Postea in brachio vno posuit 3. +cistas magnas, et tunc dissoluit mergos de perticis, qui statim in aquam +intrauerunt, et pisces ceperunt, et cistas illas repleuerunt in pania hora, +quibus repletis vir ille dissoluit fila a collis eorum, et ipsi reintrantes +flumen se de piscibus recreauerunt, et recreati ad perticas redierunt, et +se ligari sicut prius permiserunt: Ego autem de illis piscibus comedi, et +optimi mihi videbantur. [Sidenote: Alias Cansai, vel Quinzai.] Inde +transiens per multas dietas veni ad vnam ciuitatem quae vocatur Kanasia, quae +sonat in lingua nostro ciuitas coeli: Nunquam ita magnam ciuitatem vidi, +Circuitus enim eus continet 100. millaria, nec in ea vidi spatium quin bene +inhabitaretur; Imo vidi multas domus habentes 10. vel 12. solaria vnum +supra aliud: haec habet suburbia maxima continentia maiorem populum quam +ipsa ciuitas contineat 12. portas habet principales, et in via de qualibet +illarum portarum ad 8. milliaria sunt ciuitates forte maiores vt aestimo, +quam est ciuitas Venetiarum, et Padua. Haec ciuitas sita est in aquis quae +semper stant, et nec fluunt, nec refluunt, vallum tamen habet propter +ventum sicut ciuitas Venetiarum. In ea sunt plus decem mille et 2. pontium, +quorum multos numeraui et transiui, et in qualibet ponte stant custodes +ciuitatis continue custodientes ciuitatem pro magno Cane imperatore Catai. +Vnum mandatum dicunt gentes illius ciuitatis a domino se recepisse. Nam +quilibet ignis soluit vnum balis, i. 5. cartas bombicis, qui unum florenum +cum dimidio valent, et 10. vel 12. supellectiles facient vnum ignem, et sic +pro vno igne soluent. Isti ignes sunt bene 85. Thuman, eum alijs 4. +Saracenorum quae faciunt 89. Thuma vero vnum decem milia ignium facit, +reliqui autem de populo ciuitatis sunt alij Christiani, alij mercatores, et +alij transeuntes per terram, vnde maxime fui miratus quo modo tot corpora +hominum poterant simul habitare: in ea est maxima copia victualium, scz. +panis et vini, et carnium de porco praecipue cum alijs necessarijs. + + +De monasterio vbi sunt multa animalia diuersa in quodam monte. + +In illa ciuitate 4. fratres nostri conuerterant vnum potentem ad fidem +Christi, in cuius hospitio continue habitabam, dum fui ibi, qui semel dixit +mihi, Ara, i. pater, vis tu venire et videre ciuitatem istam: et dixi quod +sic, et ascendimus vnam barcham, et iuimus ad vnum monasterium maximum, de +quo vocauit vnum religiosum sibi notum, et dixit sibi de me. Iste Raban +Francus, i. religiosus venit de inde vbi sol occidit, et nunc vadit +Cambaleth, vt deprecetur vitam pro magno Cane, et ideo ostendas sibi +aliquid, quod si reuertatur ad contratas suas possit referre quod tale quid +nouum vidi in Canasia ciuitate: tunc sumpsit ille religiosus duos mastellos +magnos repletos reliquijs quae supererant de mensa, et duxit me ad vnam +perclusam paruam, quam aperuit cum claue, et aparuit, viridarium gratiosum +et magnum in quod intrauimus, et in illo viridario stat vnas monticulus +sicut vnum campanile, repletus amoenis herbis et arboribus, et dum staremus +ibi, ipse sumpsit cymbalum, et incoepit percutere ipsum sicut percutitur +quando monachi intrant refectorium, ad cuius sonitum multa animalia diuersa +descenderunt de monte illo, aliqua vt simiae, aliqua vt Cati, Maymones, et +aliqua faciem hominis habentia, et dum sic starem congregauerunt se circa +ipsum, 4000. de illis animalibus, et se in ordinibus collocauerunt, coram +quibus posuit paropsidem et dabat eis comedere, et cum comedissent iterum +cymbalum percussit, et omnia ad loca propria redierunt. Tunc admiratus +inquisiui quae essent animalia ista? Et respondit mihi quod sunt animae +nobilium virorum, quas nos hic pascimus amore Dei, qui regit orbem, et +sicut vnus homo fuit nobilis, ita anima eius post mortem in corpus nobilis +animalis intrat. Animae vero simplicium et rusticorum, corpora vilium +animalium intrant. Incoepi istam abusionem improbare, sed nihil valuit +sibi, non enim poterat credere, quod aliqua anima posset sine corpore +manere. [Sidenote: Chilenso.] Inde transiui ad quandam ciuitatem nomine +Chilenso, cuius muri per 40. milliaria circuerunt. In ista ciuitate sunt +360. pontes lapidei pulchriores quam vnquam viderim, et bene inhabitatur, +et nauigium maxinium habet, et copiam omnium victualium et aliorum bonorum. +[Sidenote: Thalay. Kakam.] Inde iui ad quoddam flumen dictum Thalay, quod +vbi est strictius habet in latitudine 7. milliaria, et illud flumen per +medium terrae Pygmaeorum transit, quorum ciuitas vocatur Kakam, quae de +pulchrioribus ciuitatibus mundi est. Isti Pigmaei habent longitudinem trium +spansarum mearum, et faciunt maiora et meliora goton, et bombicinam quam +aliqui homines in mundo. Inde per illud flumen transiens, veni ad vnam +ciuitatem Ianzu, in qua est vnus locus fratrum nostrorum, et sunt in ea +tres ecclesiae Nestorianorum: haec ciuitas nobilis est, et magna, habens in +se 48. Thuman ignium, et in ea omnia victualia, et animalia in magna copia, +de quo Christiani viuunt: Dominus istius ciuitatis solum de sale habet in +redditibus 50. Thuman Balisi, et valet balisus vnum florenum cum dimidio: +Ita quod vnum Thuman facit 15. millia florenorum, vnam tamen gratiam facit +dominus populo, quia dimittit ei, ne sit caristia in eo, 200. Thuman. Habet +haec ciuitas consuetudinem, quod quando vnus vult facere conuiuium amicis +suis, ad hoc sunt hospitia deputata, et vbi ille circuit per hospites, +dicens sibi tales amicos meos habebis, quos festabis nomine meo, et tantum +in festo volo expendere, et per illum modum melius conuiuant amici in +pluribus hospitijs quam facerent in vno. [Sidenote: Montu.] Per 10. +milliaria ab ista ciuitate in capite fluminis Thalay est vna ciuitas vocata +Montu, quae maius nauigium habet, quam viderim in toto mundo; Et omnes naues +ibi sunt albae sicut nix, et in ipsis sunt hospitia, et multa alia quae +nullus homo crederet nisi viderentur. + + +De ciuitate Cambaleth. + +[Sidenote: Caramoran.] Inde transiui per 8. dietas per multas terras et +ciuitates, et veni tandem per aquam dulcem ad quandam ciuitatem nomine +Leneyn, quae est posita super flumen vocatum Caramoran, quod per medium +Catai transit, et magnum damnum sibi infert, quando erumpit. Inde transiens +per flumen versus Orientem per multas dietas et ciuitates, veni ad vnam +ciuitatem nomine Sumacoto, quae maiorem copiam habet de serico, quam aliqua +ciuitas in mundo: Quando enim est maior caristia Serici, ibi 40. librae +habentur pro minori quam pro 8. grossis. In ea est copia omnium +mercimoniorum et omnium victualium, panis, vini, carnium, piscium, et +omnium specierum electarum. [Sidenote: Cambalec.] Inde transiui versus +Orientem per multas ciuitates, et veni ad illam nobilem, et nominatam +Cambaleth quae est ciuitas multum antiqua, et veni ad Catai, et eam ceperunt +Tartari: Et iuxta eam ad dimidium miliare aliam ciuitatem fecerunt, quae +vocatur Caido et haec 12. portas habet, et semper inter vnam et aliam sunt +duo miliaria, et medium inter illas ciuitates bene inhabitatur, ita quod +faciunt quasi vnam ciuitatem; Et ambitus istarum duarum ciuitatum est +plusquam 40. milliaria. [Sidenote: Mandeuil cap. 33.] In hac ciuitate +magnus imperator Canis habet sedem suam principalem, et suum magnum +palatium, cuius muri bene 4. miliaria continent; et infra illud palatium +sunt multa alia palatia dominorum de familia sua. In palatio etiam illo est +vnus mons pulcherrimus consitus arboribus, propter quod mons viridis +nominatur, et in monte palatium amoenissimum in quo communiter Canis +residet: A latere autem montis est vnus lacus magnus, supra quem pons +pulcherrimus est factus, et in illo lacu est magna copia anserum et anatum, +et omnium auium aquaticarum; et in silua montis copia omnium auium et +ferarum siluestrium, et ideo quando dominus Canis vult venari non oportet +eum exire palatium suum. Palatium vero principale, in quo sedes sua est, +est magnum valde, et habet interius 14. columnas aureas, et omnes muri eius +cooperti sunt pellibus rubeis quae dicuntur nobiliores pelles de mundo: Et +in medio palatij est vna pigna altitudinis duorum passuum, quae tota est de +vno lapide pretioso nomine merdochas; et est tota circumligata auro, et in +quolibet angulo eius est vnum serpens de auro qui verberatos fortissime: +Habet etiam haec pignaretia de margaritis, et per istam pignam defertur +potus per meatus et conductus qui in curia regis habetur; et iuxta eam +pendent multa vasa aurea cum quibus volentes bibere possunt. In hoc autem +palatio sunt multi pauones de auro; et cum aliquis Tartarus facit festum +domino suo, tunc quando conuiuantes collidunt manus suas prae gaudio et +laeticia, pauones emittunt alas suas, et expandunt caudas, et videntur +tripudiare; Et hoc credo factura arte Magica, vel aliqua cautela +subterranea. + + +De gloria magni Canis. + +Qvando autem magnus ille Imperator Canis in sede sua imperiali residet, +tunc a sinistro latere sedet Regina, et per vnum gradum inferius duo +mulieres quas ipse tenet pro se; quando non potest ad Reginam accedere: In +infimo autem gradu resident omnes dominae de sua parentela. Omnes autem +mulieres nuptae portant supra caput suum vnum pedem hominis, longitudinis +vnius brachij cum dimidio; et subter illum pedem sunt pennae gruis, et totus +ille pes ornatur maximis margaritis. A latero vero dextro ipsius Canis +residet filius eius primogenitus, regnaturus post ipsum, et inferius ipso +omnes qui sunt de sanguine regio: Ibi etiam sunt 4. scriptores scribentes +omnia verba quae dicit rex; Ante cuius conspectum sunt Barones sui, et multi +alij nobiles cum sua gente maxima, quorum nullus audet loqui nisi a domino +licentia petatur exceptis fatuis et histrionibus, qui suum dominum +consolari habent; Illi etiam nihil audent facere, nisi secundum quod +Dominus voluerit eis legem imponere. Ante portam palatij sunt Barones +custodientes, ne aliquis limen portae tangat. Cum autem ille Canis voluerit +facere conuiuium, habet secum 14000. Barones portantes circulos, et +coronulas in capite, et domino suo seruientes; Et quilibet portat vnam +vestem de auro et margaritis tot quot valent plus quam decies millies +florenorum. Curia eius optime ordinatur per denarios, centenarios, et +millenarios, et taliter quod quilibet in suo ordine peragit officium sibi +deputatum, nec aliquis defectus reperitur. Ego frater Odoricus fui ibi per +tres annos, et multotiens in istis festis suis fui, quia nos fratres +minores in sua curia habemus locum nobis deputatum, et oportet nos semper +ire, et dare sibi nostram benedictionem: et inquisiui ab illis de curia, de +numero illorum qui sunt in curia domini, et responderunt mihi quod de +histrionibus sunt bene 18. Thuman; Custodes autem canum et bestiarum, et +auium sunt. 15. Thuman; Medici vero pro corpore Regis sunt 400. Christiani +autem 8. et vnus Saracenus. Et ego quando fui ibi, hij omnes omnia +necessaria tam ad victum, quam ad vestitum habebant de Curia domini Canis. +Quando autem vult equitare de vna terra ad aliam, habet 4. exercitus +equitum, et vnus per vnam dietam ipsum antecedit, secundus aliam, et +tertius similiter, et quartus; ita quod semper ipse se tenet in medio in +modum crucis; et ita omnes exercitus habent omnes dietas suas ordinatas, +quod inueniunt omnia victualia parata sine defectu. Illemet autem dominus +Canis per illum modum vadit; Sedet in curru cum duabus rotis in quo facta +est pulcherrima sella tota de lignis Aloe, et auro ornata, et margaritis +maximis, et lapidibus pretiosis; et 4. Elephantes bene ordinati ducunt +istum currum, quos praecedunt 4. equi altissimi optime cooperti. Iuxta +currum a lateribus sunt 4. Barones tenentes currum, ne aliquis appropinquet +domino suo. Supra currum sedent duo Gerfalcones albissimi, et dum videt +aues quos vult capere, dimittit Falcones volare, et capiunt eas; Et sic +habet solatium suum equitando, et per iactum vnius lapidis nullus audet +appropinquare currui nisi populus assignatus: vnde incredibile esset homini +qui non vidisset de numero gentis suae, et reginae, et primogeniei sui. Istae +Dominus Canis imperium suum diuisit in 12. partes, et vna habet sub se 200. +magnarum ciuitatum: vnde ita latum et longum est suum imperium, quod ad +quamcunque partem iret, satis haberes facere in sex mensibus, exceptis +insulis, quae sunt bene 5000. + + +De hospitijs paratis per totum imperium pro transeuntibus. + +Iste Dominus, vt transeuntes habeant omnia necessaria sua per totum suum +imperium, fecit hospitia praeparari vbique per vias; in quibus sunt omnia +parata quae ad victualia pertinent: Cum autem aliqua nouitas oritur in +imperio suo, tunc si distat, ambassiatores super equos vel dromedarios +festinant, et cum lassantur in cursu, pulsant cornu, et proximum hospitium +parat vnum similiter, equum, qui quando alius venit fessus accipit literam, +et currit ad hospitium, et sic per hospitia, et per diuersos cursores rumor +per 30. dietas, vno die naturali venit ad imperatorem; et ideo nihil +ponderis potest fieri in imperio suo, quin statim scitur ab eo. Cum autem +ipse Canis vult ire venatum; istum modum habet. Extra Cambaleth ad 20. +dietas, est vna foresta quae 6. dietas continet in ambitu; in qua sunt tot +genera animalium et auium quod mirabile est dicere: Ad illud nemus vadit in +fine trium annorum vel quatuor cum tota gente, cum qua ipsum circuit, et +canes intrare permittit, qui animalia, scilicet leones, ceruos, et alia +animalia reducunt ad vnam planitiem pulcherrimam in medio nemoris, quia ex +clamoribus canum maxime tremunt omnes bestiae syluae. Tunc accedit magnus +Canis super tres elephantes et 5. sagittas mittit in totam multitudinem +animalium, et post ipsum omnes Barones, et post ipsos alij de familia sua +emittunt sagittas suas; et omnes sagittae sunt signatae certis signis et +diuersis: Tunc vadit ad animalia interfecta, dimittens viua nemus reintrare +vt alias habeat ex eis venationem suam, et quilibet illud animal habebit in +cuius corpere inuenit sagittam suam quam iaciebat. + + +De quatuor festis quae tenet in anno Canis in curia. + +Quatuor magna festa in anno facit Dominus Canis, scilicet festum +natiuitatis, festum circumcisionis, coronationis, et desponsationis suae; et +ad ista festa conuocat omnes Barones, et histriones, et omnes de parentela +sua. Tunc domino Cane in suo throno sedente, accedunt Barones cum circulis +et coronis in capite, vestiti vario modo, quia aliqui de viridi, scilicet +primi, secundi de sanguineo, et tertij de croceo, et tenent in manibus vnam +tabulam eburneam de dentibus Elephantum, et cinguntur cingulis aureis vno +semisse latis, et stant pedibus silentium tenentes. Circa illos stant +histriones cum suis instrumentis: In vno autem angulo cuiusdam magni +palatij resident Philosophi omnes ad certas horas, et puncta attendentes: +et cum deuenitur ad punctumn et horam petitam a philosopho, vnus praeco +clamat valenter. Inclinetis vos omnes imperatori vestro: tunc omnes Barones +cadunt ad terram; et iterum clamat, Surgite omnes, et illi statim surgunt. +Iterum philosophi ad aliud punctum attendunt, et cum peruentum fuerit, +iterum praeco clamat; ponite digitum in aurem, et statim dicit, extrahite +ipsum; iterum ad aliud punctum clamat, Buratate farinam: et multa alia +faciunt, quae omnia dicunt certam signifcationem habere, quae scriberi nolui, +nec curaui, quia vana sunt et risu digna. Cum autem peruentum fuerit ad +horam histrionum, time Philosophi dicunt, facite festum domino, et omnes +pulsant instrumenta sua, et faciunt maximum sonitum; et statim alius +clamat; Taceant omnes, et omnes tacent: Tunc accedunt histrionatrices ante +dominum dulciter modulantes, quod mihi plus placuit. Tunc veniunt leones, +et faciunt reuerentiam domino Cani; Et tunc histriones faciunt ciphos +aureos plenos vino volare per aerem, et ad ora hominum se applicare vt +bibant. Haec et multa alia mirabilia in curia illius Canis vidi, quae nullus +crederet nisi videret; et ideo dimitto ea. De alio mirabili audiui a fide +dignis, quod in vno regno istius Canis in quo sunt montes Kapsei (et +dicitur illud regnum Kalor) nascuntur pepones maximi, qui quando sunt +maturi aperiuntur, et intus inuenitur vna bestiola similis vni agnello: +sicut audiui quod in mari Hybernico stant arbores supra ripam maris et +portant fructum sicut essent cucurbitae, quae certo tempore cadunt in aquam +et fiunt aues vocatae Bernakles, et illud est verum. + + +De diuersis Prouincijs et ciuitatibus. + +De isto imperio Katay recessi post tres annos, et transiui 50. dietas +versus Occidentem; et tandem veni ad terram Pretegoani, cuius ciuitas +principalis Kosan vocatur, quae multas habet sub se ciuitates. [Sidenote: +Casan.] Vltra per multas dietas iui, et perueni ad vnam prouinciam vocatam +Kasan; et haec est secunda melior prouincia mundi, vt dicitur, et est +optime habitata: Sic quod quando exitur a porta vnius ciuitatis, videntur +portae alterius ciuitatis, sicut egomet vidi de multis. Latitudo Prouinciae +est 50. dietarum, et longitudo plusquam 60. In ea est maxima copia omnium +victualium, et maxime castaneorum; et haec est vna de 12. prouincijs magni +Canis. [Sidenote: Tibec regio alias Tebet Guillielmo de Rubricis.] Vltra +veni ad vnum regnum vocatum Tibek quod est subiectum Cani, in quo est maior +copia panis et vini, quam sit in toto mundo vt credo. Gens illius terrae +moratur communiter in tenorijs factis ex feltris nigris: Principalis +ciuitas sua murata est pulcherrime ex lapidibus albissimis, et nigerrimis +interescalariter dispositis et curiose compositis, et omnes viae eius optime +pouatae. In ista contrata nullus audet effundere sanguinem hominis, nec +alicuius animalis, ob reuerentiam vnius Idoli. In ista ciuitate moratur +Abassi i. Papa eorum, qui est caput et princeps omnium Idolatrarum; quibus +dat et distribuit beneficia secundum morem eorum; sicut noster Papa Romanus +est caput omnium Christianorum. Foeminae in hoc regno portant plusquam +centum tricas, et habent duos dentes in ore ita longos sicut apri. Quando +etiam pater alicuius moritur, tunc filius conuocat omnes sacerdotes et +histriones, et dicit se velle patrem suum honorare, et facit eum ad campum +duci sequentibus parentibus omnibus, amicis, et vicinis, vbi sacerdotes cum +magna solemnitate amputant caput suum, dantes illud filio suo, et tunc +totum corpus in frusta concidunt, et ibi dimittunt, cum orationibus cum eo +redeuntes; [Sidenote: Eadem historia de eodem populo apud Guilielmum de +Rubricis.] Tunc veniunt vultures, de monte assuefacti ad huiusmodi, et +carnes omnes asportant: Et ex tunc currit fama de eo quod sanctus est, quia +angeli domini ipsum portant in paradisum: Et iste est maximus honor, quem +reputat filius posse fieri patri suo mortuo: Tunc filius sumit caput +patris, et coquit ipsum, et comedit, de testa eius faciens ciphum in quo +ipse cum omnibus de domo et cognatione eius bibunt cum solemnitate et +laetitia in memoriam patris comesti. Et multa vilia et abominabilia facit +gens illa quae non scribo, quia non valent, nec homines crederent nisi +viderent. + + +De diuite qui pascitur a 50. Virginibus. + +Dum fui in prouincia Manzi transiui iuxta palatium vnius hominis popularis, +qui habuit 50. domicellas virgines sibi continue ministrantes, in omnibus +pascentes eum sicut auis auiculas, et habet semper 5. fercula triplicata; +et quando pascunt eum, continue cantant dulcissime: Iste habet in +redditibus Tagaris risi 30. Thuman, quorum quodlibet decies millies facit: +vnum autem Tagar pondus est asini. Palatium suum duo millaria tenet in +ambitu; cuius pauimentum semper vnum laterem habet aureum, alium argenteum: +Iuxta ambitum istius palatij est vnus monticulus artificialis de auro et +argento, super quo stant Monasteria, et campanilia, et alia delectabilia +pro solatio illius popularis; Et dictum fuit mihi, quod quatuor tales +homines sunt in regno illo. [Sidenote: Mulierum parui pedes.] Nobilitas +virorum est longos habere vngues in digitis, praecipue pollicis quibus +circueunt sibi manus: Nobilitas autem et pulchritudo mulierem est pauos +habere pedes: Et ideo matres quando filiae suae sunt tenellae ligant pedes +earum, et non dimittunt crescere. [Sidenote: Milestorite.] Vltra transiens +versus meridiem applicui ad quandam contratam, quae vocatur Milestorite, quae +pulchra est valde et fertilis: Et in ista contrata erat vnus vocatus Senex +de monte, qui inter duos montes fecerat sibi vnum murum circumuentem istos +montes. Infra istum murum erant fontes pulcherrimi de mundo; Et iuxta +fontes erant pulcherrimae virgines in maximo numero, et equi pulcherrimi, et +omni illud quod ad suauitatem, et delectationem corporis fieri poterit, et +ideo illum locum vocant homines illius contratae Paradisum. Iste senex cum +viderit aliquem iuuenem formosum et robustum, posuit eum in illo paradiso; +Per quosdam autem conductus descendere facit vinum et lac abundanter. Iste +Senex cum voluerit se vindicare, vel interficere regem aliquem vel Baronem, +dicit illi qui praeerat illi paradiso vt aliquem de notis illius regis, vel +Baronis introduceret in paradisum illum, et illum delicijs frui +permitteret, et tunc daret sibi potionem vnam, quae ipsum sopiebat in +tantum, quod insensibilem redderet, et ipsum sic dormientem faceret extra +paradisum deportari: qui excitatus et se extra paradisum conspiciens, in +tanta tristitia positus foret, quod nesciret quid faceret: Tunc ad illum +senem iret, rogans eum, vt interum in paradisum introduceretur: qui sibi +dicit, tu illic introduci non poteris, nisi talem vel talem interficias; et +siue interfeceris, siue non, reponam te in paradiso, et ibidem poteris +semper manere; Tunc ille sic faceret, et omnes seni odiosos interficeret; +Et ideo omnes reges orientales illum senem timuerunt, et sibi tributum +magnum dederunt. + + +De morte Senis de monte. + +Cum autem Tartari magnam partem mundi cepissent, venerunt ad istum Senem, +et dominium illius Paradisi ab eo abstulerunt, qui multos sicarios de +Paradiso illo emisit, et nobiliores Tartarorum interfici fecit. Tartari +autem hoc videntes ciuitatem, in qua erat senex obsederunt, eum ceperunt, +et pessima morte interfecerunt. Hanc gratiam habent fratres ibidem, quod +citissime per virtutem nominis Christi Iesu, et in virtute illius sanguinis +pretiosi, quem effudit in cruce pro salute generis humani, daemonia ab +obsessis corporibus expellunt; et quia multi ibidem sum obsessi, ducuntur +per decem dietas ad fratres ligati, qui liberati statim credunt in +Christum, qui liberauit ebs habentes ipsum pro Deo suo, et baptizati sunt, +et idola sua, et pecorum suorum statim dant fratribus, quae sunt communiter +de feltro, et de crinibus mulierum et fratres ignem in communi loci faciunt +ad quem populus confluit, vt videat Deos vicinorum suorum comburi et +fratres coram populo Idola in ignem proijciunt; Et prima vice de igne +exierunt; Tunc fratres ignem cum aqua benedicta conspercerunt, et interum +Idola in ignem proiecerunt, et daemones in effigie fumi nigerrimi fugerunt, +et Idola remanserunt, et combusta sunt. Postea auditor clamor per aerem +talis, vide, vide, quo modo de habitatione mea expulsus sum. Et per istum +modum fratres maximam multitudinem baptizant, qui cito recidiuant ad idola +pecorum: qui fratres continuo quasi stent cum illis, et illos informent. +Aliud terribile fuit quod ego vidi ibi. Nam cum irem per vnam vallem quae +sita est iuxta fluuium deliciarum, multa corpora mortua vidi, et in illa +valle audiui sonos musicos dulces et diuersos, et maxime de cytharis, vnde +multum timui. Haec vallis habet longitudinem septem, vel octo milliarium ad +plus, in quam si quis intrat, moritur, et nunquam viuus potest transire per +medium illius vallis, et ideo omnes de contrata declinant a latere: Et +tentatus eram intrare, et videre, quid hoc esset. Tandem oratis et Deo me +recommendans, et cruce signans, in nomine Iesu intraui, et vidi tot corpora +mortua ibi, quod nullus crederet nisi videret In hac valle ab vno eius +latere, in vno saxo vnam faciem hominis vidi, quae ita terribiliter me +respexit, quod omnino credidi ibi fuisse mortuus: Sed semper hoc verbum +(verbum caro factum est et habitauit in nobis) protuli, et cruce me +signaui, nec propius quam per 7. passus, vel 8. accedere capiti ausus fui: +Iui autem fugiens ad aliud caput vallis, et super vnum monticulum arenosum +ascendi, in quo vndique circumspiciens nihil vidi nisi cytharas illas, quas +per se (vt mihi videbatur) pulsari et resonare mirabiliter audiui. Cum vero +fui in cacumine montis, inueni ibi argentum in maxima quantitate, quasi +fuissent squamae piscium. Congregans autem inde in gremio meo pro mirabili +ostendendo, sed ductus conscientia, in terram proieci, nihil mecum +reseruans, et sic per gratiam Dei liber exiui. Cum autem homines illius +contratae sciuerunt me viuum exisse, reuerebantur me multum, dicentes me +baptizatum et sanctum: et corpora illa fuisse daemonum infernalium qui +pulsant cytharas vt homines alliciant intare, et interficiant. Haec de +visis certudinaliter ego frater Odoricus hic inscripsi; et multa mirabilia +omisi ponere, quia homines hon credidissent nisi vidissent. + + +De honore et reuerentia factis Domino Cani. + +Vnum tantum referam de magno Cane quod vidi. Consuetudo est in partibus +illis quod quando praedictus dominus per aliquam contratam transit, homines +ante ostia sua accendunt ignem et apponunt aromata, ac faciunt fumum, vt +dominus transiens suauem sentiat adorem, et multi obuiam sibi vadunt. Dum +autem semel veniret in Cambeleth, et fama vndique diuulgaretur de suo +aduentu, vnus noster Episcopus, et aliqui nostri minores fratres et ego +iuimus obuiam sibi bene per duas dietas: Et dum appropinquaremus ad eum, +posuimus crucem super lignum, et ego habebam mecum in manu thuribulum, et +incepimus cantare alta voce dicentes: Veni creator spiritus: Et dum sic +cantaremus audiuit voces, nostras, fecitque nos vocari, ac iussit nos ad +eum accedere; cum vt supra dictum est, nullus audeat appropinquare currui +suo ad iactum lapidis, nisi vocatus, exceptis illis qui currum custodiunt. +Et dum iuissemus ad eum, ipse deposuit galerum suum, sine capellum +inestimabilis quasi valoris, et fecit reuerentiam Cruci; et statim incensum +posui in thuribulo; Episcopus noster accepit thuribulum, et thurificauit +eum; ac sibi praedictus Episcopus dedit benedictionem suam. Accedentes vero +ad praedictum dominum, semper sibi aliquid offerendum deferunt; secum illam +antiquam legem obseruantes; Non apparebis in conspectu meo vacuus; Idcirco +portauimus nobiscum poma, et ea sibi super vnum incisorium reuerenter +obtulimus; et ipse duo accepit, et de vno aliquantulum comedit: Et tunc +fecit nobis signum quod recederemus, ne equi venientes in aliquo nos +offenderent; statimque ab eo discessimus, atque diuertimus, et iuimus ad +aliquos Barones per fratres nostri ordinis ad fidem conuersos, qui in +exercitu eius erant, et eis obtulimus de pomis praedictis, qui cum maximo +gaudio ipsa accipientes ita videbantur laetari, ac si praebuissemus eis +familiariter magnum munus. Haec praedicta frater Guilelmus de Solangna in +scriptis redegit, sicut praedictus frater Odoricus ore tenus exprimebat. +Anno Domini 1330, mense Maij in loco Sancti Antonij de Padua; Nec curauit +de latino difficili, et stilo ornato; Sed sicut ipse narrabat ad hoc vt +homines facilius intelligerent quae dicuntur. Ego frater Odoricus de Foro +Iulij de quadam terra quae dicitur Portus Vahonis de ordine minorum +testificor, et testimonium perhibeo reuerendo patri Guidoto ministro +prouinciae Sancti Antonij in Marchia Triuisana, cum ab eo fuerim per +obedientiam requisitus, quod haec omnia quae superius scripta sunt, aut +proprijs oculis ego vidi, aut a fide dignis audiui: Communis etiam loquutio +illarum terrarum illa quae nec vidi testatur esse; Multa etiam alia ego +dimisissem, nisi illa proprijs oculis conspexissem. Ego autem de die in +diem me propono contratas seu terras accedere, in quibus mori, et viuere me +dispono, si placuerit Deo meo. + + +De morte fratris Odorici. + +Anno igitur Domini 1331. disponente se praedicto fratre Odorico ad +perficiendum iter suae peregrinationis, prout mente conceperat, et etiam vt +via et labor esset sibi magnis ad meritum, decreuit primo praesentiam adire +Domini et patris omnium summi Pontificis Domini Ioannis Papae 22: cuius +benedictione obedientiaque recepta cum societate fratrum secum ire +volentium ad partes infidelium se transferret: Cumque sic eundo versus +summum Pontificem, non multum distaret a ciuitate Pisana, in quadam via +occurrit sibi quidam senex in habitu peregrini eum salutans ex nomine, Aue +(inquiens) frater Odorice: Et cum frater quaereret quo modo ipsius haberet +noticiam? Respondit, Dum eras in India noui te, tuum qui noui sanctum +propositum; Sed et tu modo ad conuentum vnde venisti reuertere, quia die +sequenti decimo ex hoc mundo migrabis. Verbis igitur senis attonitus et +stupefactus, praesertim cum Senex ille statim post dictum ab eius aspectu +disparuit; reuerti decreuit; Et reuersus est in bona prosperitate nullam +sentiens grauedinem corporis, seu aliquam infirmitatem; Cumque esset in +conuentu suo Vtinensi. N. in prouincia Paduana decimo die, prout facti sibi +fuir reuelatio, accepta communione, ipsoque ad Deum disponente, etiam +corpore existens incolumis in Domino foeliciter requieuit: Cuius sacer +obitus Domino summo Pontifici praefato sub manu Notarij publici +transmittitur; qui sic scribet. + +Anno Domini 1331. decima quarta die mensis Ianuarij obijt in Christo Beatus +Odoricus ordinis fratrum Minorum, cuius precibus omnipotens Deus multa, et +varia miracula demonstrauit; quae ego Guetelus notarius communis Vtini, +filius domini Damiani de portu Gruario, de mandato et voluntate nobilis +viri Domini Conradi de Buardigio Castaldionis, et consilij Vtini, scripsi, +sicut potui, bona fide, et fratribus Minoribus exemplum dedi; sed non de +omnibus, quia sunt innumerabilia, et mihi difficilia ad scribendum. + + +The same in English. + +Here beginneth the iournall of Frier Odoricus, one of the order of the + Minorites, concerning strange things which hee sawe among the Tarters of + the East. + +Albeit many and sundry things are reported by diuers authors concerning the +fashions and conditions of this world: notwithstanding I frier Odoricus of +Friuli, de portu Vahonis being desirous to trauel vnto the foreign and +remote nations of infidels, sawe and heard great and miraculous things, +which I am able truely to auoch. [Sidenote: Pera. Trapesunda.] First of al +therefore sayling from Pera by Constantinople, I arrived at Trapesunda. +This place is right commodiously situate, as being an hauen for the +Persians and Medes, and other countreis beyonde the sea. In this lande I +behelde with great delight a very strange spectacle, namely a certaine man +leading about with him more then foure thousande partriges. The man +himselfe walked vpon the ground, and the partriges flew in the aire, which +he ledde vnto a certaine castle called Zauena, being three dayes iourney +distant from Trapesunda. The saide partriges were so tame, that when the +man was desirous to lie downe and rest, they would all come flocking about +him like chickens. And so hee led them vnto Trapesunda, and vnto the palace +of the Emperour, who tooke as many of them as he pleased, and the rest the +saide man carried vnto the place from whence he came. In this citie lyeth +the body of Athanasius, vpon the gate of the citie. [Sidenote: The citie of +Azaron in Armenia maior.] And then I passed on further vnto Armenia maior, +to a certaine citie called Azaron, which had bene very rich in olde time, +but nowe the Tarters haue almost layde it waste. In the saide citie there +was abundance of bread and flesh, and of all other victuals except wine and +fruites. This citie also is very colde, and is reported to be higher +situated, then any other city in the world. It hath most holesome and +sweete waters about it: for the veines of the said waters seeme to spring +and flow from the mighty riuer of Euphrates, which is but a dayes iourney +from the saide city. Also, the said citie stands directly in the way to +Tauris. [Sidenote: Sobissacalo.] And I passed on vnto a certaine mountaine +called Sobissacalo. In the foresaide countrey there is the very same +mountalne whereupon the Arke of Noah rested: vnto the which I would +willingly haue ascended, if my company would haue stayed for me. Howbeit +the people of that countrey report, that no man could euer ascend the said +mountaine, because (say they) it pleaseth not the highest God. [Sidenote: +Tauris a citie of Persia.] And I trauailed on further vnto Tauris that +great and royal city, which was in old time called Susis. This city is +accompted for traffique of marchandize the chiefe city of the world: for +there is no kinde of victuals, nor anything else belonging vnto +marchandize, which is not to be had there in great abundance. This city +stands very commodiously: for vnto it all the nations of the whole worlde +in a maner may resort for traffique. Concerning the saide citie, the +Christians in those parts are of opinion, that the Persian Emperour +receiues more tribute out of it, then the King of France out of all his +dominions. Neare vnto the said city there is a salt-hill yeelding salt vnto +the city: and of that salt ech man may take what pleaseth him, not paying +ought to any man therefore. In this city many Christians of all nations do +inhabite, ouer whom the Saracens beare rule in alle things. Then I +traueiled on further vnto a city called Soldania, [Marginal note: Or, +Sultania.] wherein the Persian Emperour lieth all Sommer time: but in +winter hee takes his progresse vnto another city standing upon the sea +called Baku. [Marginal note: The Caspian sea.] Also the foresaid city is +very great and colde, hauing good and holesome waters therein, vnto the +which also store of marchandize is brought. Moreouer I trauelled with a +certaine company of Carauans toward vpper India: and in the way, after many +days iourney, I came vnto the citie of the three wise men called Cassan +[Marginal Note: Or Cassibin.], which is a noble and renowmed city, sauing +that the Tartars haue destroyed a great part thereof, and it aboundeth with +bread, wine, and many other commodities. From this city vnto Ierusalem +(whither the three foresaid wise-men were miraculously led) it is fiftie +days iourney. There be many wonders in this citie also, which, for +breuities sake, I omit [Sidenote: Geste.] From thence I departed vnto a +certaine city called Geste, whence the Sea of Sand is distant, one dayes +iourney, which is a most wonderful and dangerous thing. In this city there +is abundance of all kinds of victuals, and especially of figs, reisins, and +grapes; more (as I suppose) then in any part of the whole world besides. +This is one of the three principall cities in all the Persian Empire. Of +this city the Saracens report, that no Christian can by any meanes liue +therein aboue a yeere. [Sidenote: Como.] Then passing many dayes ioumey on +forward, I came vnto a certaine citie called Comum, which was an huge and +mightie Citie in olde time, conteyning well nigh fiftie miles in circuite, +and hath done in times past great damage vnto the Romanes. In it there are +stately palaces altogether destitute of inhabitants, notwithstanding it +aboundeth with great store of victuals. From hence traueiling through many +countreys, at length I came vnto the land of Iob named Hus, which is fulle +of all kinde of victuals, and very pleasantly situated. Thereabouts are +certaine mountains hauing good pastures for cattell upon them. Here also +Manna is found in great aboundance. Four partriges are here solde for lesse +than a groat In this countrey there are most comely olde men. Here also the +men spin and card, and not the women. This land bordereth vpon the North +part of Chalddaea. + + +Of the maners of the Chaldaeans, and of India. + +[Sidenote: The Tower of Babel.] From thence I traueled into Chaldaea which +is a great kingdome, and I passed by the tower of Babel. This region hath a +language peculiar vnto it selfe, and there are beautifull men, and deformed +women. The men of the same countrey vse to haue their haire kempt, and +trimmed like vnto our women: and they weare golden turbants vpon their +heades richly set with pearle, and pretious stones. The women are clad in a +coarse smock onely reaching to their knees, and hauing long sleeues hanging +downe to the ground. And they goe bare-footed, wearing breeches which reach +to the ground also. Thei weare no attire vpon their heads, but their haire +hangs disheaueled about their eares: and there be many other strange things +also. From thence I came into the lower India, which the Tartars ouerran +and wasted. And in this countrey the people eat dates for the most part, +whereof 42. li. are there sold for lesse than a groat. [Sidenote: Ormus.] I +passed further also many dayes iourney vnto the Ocean sea, and the first +land where I arriued, is called Ormes, being well fortified, and hauing +great store of marchandize and treasure therein. Such and so extreme is the +heat in that countrey, that the priuities of men come out of their bodies +and hang down euen vnto their mid-legs. And therefore the inhabitants of +the same place, to preserue their own liues, do make a certaine ointment, +and anointing their priuie members therewith, do lap them up in certaine +bags fastened vnto their bodies, for otherwise they must needs die. Here +also they vse a kinde of Bark or shippe called Iase being compact together +onely with hempe. [Sidenote: Thana, whereof Frederick Caesar maketh +mention.] And I went on bourd into one of them, wherein I could not finde +any yron at all, and in the space of 28 dayes I arriued at the city of +Thana, wherein foure of our friers were martyred for the faith of Christ. +This countrey is well situate, hauing abundance of bread and wine, and of +other victuals therein. This kingdome in olde time was very large and vnder +the dominion of king Porus, who fought a great battell with Alexander the +great. The people of this countrey are idolaters worshipping fire, serpents +and trees. And ouer all this land the Saracen do beare rule, who tooke it +by maine force, and they themselues are in subjection unto King Daldilus. +There be diuers kinds of beasts, as namely blacke lyouns in great +abundance, and apes also, and monkeis, and battes as bigge as our doues. +Also there are mise as bigge as our countrey dogs, because cats are not +able to incounter them. Moreouer in the same countrey euery man hath a +bundle of great boughs standing in a water-pot before his doore, which +bundle is as great as a pillar, and it will not wither, so long as water is +applied thereunto: with many other nouelties and strange things, the +relation whereof would breed great delight. + + +How peper is had: and where it groweth. + +[Sidenote: Malabar.] Moreouer, that it may be manifest how peper is had, it +is to be vnderstood that it groweth in a certaine kingdome whereat I my +selfe arriued, being called Minibar, and it is not so plentifull in any +other part of the worlde as it is there. For the wood wherein it growes +conteineth in circuit 18 dayes iourney. And in the said wood or forrest +there are two cities, one called Flandrina, and the other Cyncilim. In +Flandrina both Iewes and Christians doe inhabite, betweene whom there is +often contention and warre: howbeit the Christians ouercome the Iewes at +all times. In the foresaid wood pepper is had after this maner: first it +groweth in leaues like vnto pot-hearbs, which they plant neere vnto great +trees as we do our vines, and they bring forth pepper in clusters, as our +vines doe yeeld grapes, but being ripe, they are of a greene colour, and +are gathered as we gather grapes, and then the graines are layed in the +Sunne to be dried, and being dried are put into earthen vessels: and thus +is pepper made and kept. Now, in the same wood there be many riuers, +wherein are great store of Crocodiles, and of other serpents, which the +inhabitants thereabout do burne vp with straw and with other dry fewel, and +so they go to gather their pepper without danger. [Sidenote: Polumbrum.] At +the South end of the said forrest stands the city of Polumbrum, which +aboundeth with marchandize of all kinds. All the inhabitants of that +countrey do worship a liuing oxe, as their god, whom they put to labour for +sixe yeres, and in the seuenth yere they cause him to rest from al his +worke, placing him in a solemne and publique place, and calling him an holy +beast Moreouer they vse this foolish ceremonie: Euery morning they take two +basons, either of siluer, or of gold, and with one they receiue the vrine +of the oxe, and with the other his dung. With the vrine they wash their +face, their eyes, and all their fiue senses. Of the dung they put into both +their eyes, then they anoint the bals of the cheeks therewith, and thirdly +their breast: and then they say that they are sanctified for all that day; +And as the, people doe, euen so doe their King and Queene. This people +worshippeth also a dead idole, which, from the nauel vpward, resembleth a +man, and from the nauel downeward an oxe. The very same Idol deliuers +oracles vnto them, and sometimes requireth the blood of fourtie virgins for +his hire. And therefore the men of that region do consecrate their +daughters and their sonnes vnto their idols, euen as Christians do their +children vnto some Religion or Saint in heauen. Likewise they sacrifice +their sonnes and their daughters, and so, much people is put to death +before the said Idol by reason of that accursed ceremony. Also, many other +hainous and abominable villanies doeth that brutish beastly people commit: +and I sawe many moe strange things among them which I meane not here to +insert. [Sidenote: The burning of their dead.] Another most vile custome +the foresaide nation doeth retaine: for when any man dieth they burne his +dead corps to ashes: and if his wife suruiueth him, her they burne quicke, +because (say they) she shall accompany her husband in his tilthe and +husbandry, when he is come into a new world. Howbeit the said wife hauing +children by her husband, may if she will, remain with them, without shame +or reproach; notwithstanding, for the most part, they all of them make +choice to be burnt with their husbands. Now, albeit the wife dieth before +her husband, that law bindeth not the husband to any such inconuenience, +but he may mary another wife also. Likewise, the said nation hath another +strange custome, in that their women drink wine, but their men do not. Also +the Women haue the lids and brows of their eyes and beards shauen, but the +men haue not: with many other base and filthy fashions which the said women +do vse contrary to the nature of their sexe. [Sidenote: Mobar, or +Maliapor.] From that kingdom I traueiled 10. daies iourney vnto another +kingdome called Mobar, which containeth many cities. Within a certaine +church of the same countrey, the body of S. Thomas the Apostle is interred, +the very same church being full of idols: and in 15. houses round about the +said Church, there dwell certaine priests who are Nestorians, that is to +say, false, and bad Christians, and schismatiques. + + +Of a strange and vncouth idole: and of certaine customes and ceremonies. + +In the said kingdome of Mobar there is a wonderfull strange idole, being +made after the shape and resemblance of a man, as big as the image of our +Christopher, et [sic passim--KTH] consisting all of most pure and +glittering gold. And about the neck thereof hangeth a silke riband, ful of +most rich and precious stones, some one of which is of more value then a +whole kingdome. The house of this idol is all of beaten gold, namely the +roofe, the pauement, and the sieling of the wall within and without. Vnto +this idol the Indians go on pilgrimage, as we do vnto S. Peter. Some go +with halters about their necks, some with their hands bound behind them, +some others with kniues sticking on their armes or legs: and if after their +peregrination, the flesh of their wounded arme festereth or corrupteth, +they esteeme that limme to be holy, and thinke that their God is wel +pleased with them. Neare vnto the temple of that idol is a lake made by the +hands of men in an open et common place, whereinto the pilgrimes cast gold, +siluer, and precious stones, for the honour of the idol and the repairing +of his temple. And therefore when any thing is to be adorned or mended, +they go vnto this lake taking vp the treasure which was cast in. Moreouer +at euery yerely feast of the making or repairing of the said idol, the king +and queene, with the whole multitude of the people, and all the pilgrimes +assemble themselues, and placing the said idol in a most stately and rich +chariot, they cary him out of their temple with songs, and with all kind of +musical harmonie, and a great company of virgins go procession-wise two and +two in a rank singing before him. Many pilgrims also put themselues vnder +the chariot wheeles, to the end that their false god may go ouer them: and +al they ouer whom the chariot runneth, are crushed in pieces, and diuided +asunder in the midst, and slaine right out. Yea, and in doing this, they +think themselues to die most holily and securely, in the seruice of their +god. And by this meanes euery yere, there die vnder the said filthy idol, +mo then 500. persons, whose carkases are burned, and their ashes are kept +for reliques, because they died in that sort for their god. Moreouer they +haue another detestable ceremony. For when any man offers to die in the +seruice of his false god, his parents, and all his friends assemble +themselues together with a consort of musicians, making him a great and +solemne feast: which feast being ended, they hange 5. sharpe kniues about +his neck carying him before the idol, and so soone as he is come thither, +he taketh one of his kniues crying with a loud voice, For the worship of my +god do I cut this my flesh, and then he casteth the morsel which is cut, at +the face of his idol: but at the very last wound wherewith he murthereth +himselfe, he vttereth these words: Now do I yeeld my self to death in the +behalfe of my god, and being dead, his body is burned, and is esteemed by +al men to be holy. The king of the said region is most rich in gold, +siluer, and precious stones, and there be the fairest vnions in al the +world. Traueling from thence by the Ocean sea 50. daies iourney southward, +I came vnto a certain land named Lammori, [Marginal note: Perhaps he +meaneth Comori.] where, in regard of extreeme heat, the people both men and +women go stark-naked from top to toe: who seeing me apparelled scoffed at +me, saying that God made Adam et Eue naked. In this countrey al women are +common, so that no man can say, this is my wife. Also when any of the said +women beareth a son or a daughter, she bestowes it vpon any one that hath +lien with her, whom she pleaseth. Likewise al the land of that region is +possessed in common, so that there is not mine and thine, or any propriety +of possession in the diuision of lands: howbeit euery man hath is owne +house peculiar vnto himselfe. Mans flesh, if it be fat, is eaten as +ordinarily there, as beefe in our country. And albeit the people are most +lewd, yet the country is exceedingly good, abounding with al commodities, +as flesh, corne, rise, siluer, gold, wood of aloes, Campheir, and many +other things. Marchants comming vnto this region for traffique do vsually +bring with them fat men, selling them vnto the inhabitants as we sel hogs, +who immediatly kil and eat them. [Sidenote: Sumatra.] In this island +towards south, there is the another kingdome called Simoltra, where both +men and women marke themselues with red-hot yron in 12. sundry spots of +their faces: and this nation is at continual warre with certaine naked +people in another region. [Sidenote: Iaffa.] Then I traueled further vnto +another island called Iaua, the compasse whereof by sea is 3000. miles. The +king of this Iland hath 7. other crowned kings vnder his iurisdiction. The +said Island is throughly inhabited, and is thought to be one of the +principall Ilands of the whole world. In the same Iland there groweth great +plenty of cloues, cubibez, and nutmegs, and in a word all kinds of spices +are there to be had, and great abundance of all victuals except wine. The +king of the said land of Iaua hath a most braue and sumptuous pallace, the +most loftily built, that euer I saw any, and it hath most high greeses and +stayers to ascend vp to the roomes therein contained, one stayre being of +siluer, and another of gold, throughout the whole building. Also the lower +roomes were paued all ouer with one square plate of siluer, and another of +gold. All the wals vpon the inner side were seeled ouer with plates of +beaten gold, whereupon were engrauen the pictures of knights, hauing about +their temples, ech of them a wreath of golde, adorned with precious stones. +The roofe of the palace was of pure gold. With this king of Iaua the great +Can of Catay hath had many conflictes in war: whom notwithstanding the said +king hath alwayes ouercome and vanquished. + + +Of certaine trees yeelding meale, hony, and poyson. + +Nere vnto the said Iland is another countrey called Panten, or +Tathalamasin. And the king of the same country hath many Ilands vnder his +dominion: In this land there are trees yeelding meale, hony, and wine, and +the most deadly poison in all the whole world: for against it there is but +one only remedy: and that is this: if any man hath taken of the poyson, and +would be deliuered from the danger thereof, let him temper the dung of a +man in water, and so drinke a good quantitie thereof, and it expels the +poyson immediatly, making it to auoid at the fundament. Meale is produced +out of the said trees after this maner. They be mighty huge trees, and when +they are cut with an axe by the ground, there issueth out of the stocke a +certain licour like vnto gumme, which they take and put into bags made of +leaues, laying them for 15 daies together abroad in the sun, and at the end +of those 15 dayes, when the said licour is throughly parched, it becommeth +meale. Then they steepe it first in sea water, washing it afterward with +fresh water, and so it is made very good and sauorie paste, whereof they +make either meat or bread, as they thinke good. Of which bread I my selfe +did eate, and it is fayrer without and somewhat browne within. [Sidenote: A +sea running still Southward.] By this countrey is the sea called Mare +mortuum, which runneth continually Southward, into the which whoseuer +falleth is neuer seene after. In this countrey also are found canes of an +incredible length, namely 60 paces high or more, and they are as bigge as +trees. Other canes there be also called Cassan, which overspread the earth +like grasse, and out of euery knot of them spring foorth certaine branches, +which are continued vpon the ground almost for the space of a mile. In the +sayd canes there are found certaine stones, one of which stones, whoseuer +carryeth about with him, cannot be wounded with any yron: and therefore the +men of that countrey for most part, carry such stones with them, +whithersoeuer they goe. Many also cause one of the armes of their children, +while they are yong, to be launced, putting one of the said stones in the +wound, healing also, and closing vp the said wound with the powder of a +certaine fish (the name whereof I do not know) which powder doth immediatly +consolidate and cure the said wound. And by the vertue of these stones, the +people aforesaid doe for the most part triumph both on sea and land. +Howbeit there is one kind of stratageme, which the enemies of this nation, +knowing the vertue of the sayd stones, doe practise against them: namely, +they prouide themselues armour of yron or steele against their arrowes, and +weapons also poisoned with the poyson of trees, and they carry in their +hands wooden stakes most sharpe and hard-pointed, as if they were yron: +likewise they shoot arrowes without yron heads, and so they confound and +slay some of their vnarmed foes trusting too securely vnto the vertue of +their stones. [Sidenote: Sayles made of reedes.] Also Of the foresayd canes +called Cassan they make sayles for their ships, and litle houses, and many +other necessaries. [Sidenote: Campa.] From thence after many dayes trauell, +I arrived at another kingdome called Campa, a most beautiful and rich +countrey, and abounding with all kind of victuals: the king whereof, at my +being there, had so many wiues and concubines, that he had 300 sonnes and +daughters by them. This king hath 10004 tame Elephants, which are kept euen +as we keepe droues of oxen, or flocks of sheepe in pasture. + + +Of the abundance of fishes, which cast themselues vpon the shore. + +In this countrey there is one strange thing to be obserued, that euery +seueral kind of fishes in those seas come swimming towards the said +countrey in such abundance, that, for a great distance into the sea, +nothing can be seene but the backs of fishes: which, casting themselues +vpon the shore when they come neare vnto it, do suffer men, for the space +of 3. daies, to come and to take as many of them as they please, and then +they returne againe vnto the sea. After that kind of fishes comes another +kind, offering it selfe after the same maner, and so in like sort all other +kinds whatsoeuer: notwithstanding they do this but once in a yere. And I +demaunded of the inhabitants there, how, or by what meanes this strange +accident could come to passe: They answered, that fishes were taught, euen +by nature, to come and to do homage vnto their Emperour. [Sidenote: +Tortoises.] There be Tortoises also as bigge as an ouen. Many other things +I saw which are incredible, vnlesse a man should see them with his own +eies. In this country also dead men are burned, and their wiues are burned +aliue with them, as in the city of Polumbrum above mentioned: for the men +of that country say that she goeth to accompany him in another world, that +he should take none other wife in marriage. [Sidenote: Moumoran.] Moreouer +I traueled on further by the ocean-sea towards the south, and passed +through many countries and islands, whereof one is called Moumoran, and it +containeth in compasse ii. M. miles, wherein men and women haue dog faces, +and worship an oxe for their god: and therefore euery one of them cary the +image of an oxe of gold or siluer vpon their foreheads. The men and the +women of this country go all naked, sauing that they hang a linen cloth +before their priuities. The men of the said country are very tall and +mighty, and by reason that they goe naked, when they are to make battell, +they cary yron or steele targets before them, which do couer and defend +their bodies from top to toe: and whomsoeuer of their foes they take in +battel not being able to ransom himselfe for money, they presently deuoure +him: but if he be able to redeeme himselfe for money, they let him go free. +Their king weareth about his necke 300. great and most beautifull vnions, +and saith euery day 300. prayers vnto his god. He weareth vpon his finger +also a stone of a span long which seemeth to be a flame of fire, and +therefore when he weareth it, no man dare once approch vnto him: and they +say that there is not any stone in the whole world of more value then it. +Neither could at any time the great Tartarian Emperour of Katay either by +force, money, or policie obtaine it at his hands: notwithstanding that he +hath done the vtmost of his indeuour for this purpose. + + +Of the Island of Sylan: and of the mountaine where Adam mourned for his + sonne Abel. + +I passed also by another island called Sylan, which conteineth in compasse +aboue ii. M. miles: wherein are an infinit number of serpents, and great +store of lions, beares, and al kinds of rauening and wild beasts, and +especially of elephants. In the said country there is an huge mountaine, +whereupon the inhabitants of that region do report that Adam mourned for +his son Abel the space of 500. yeres. In the midst of this mountain there +is a most beautiful plain, wherin is a litle lake conteining great plenty +of water, which water the inhabitants report to haue proceeded from the +teares of Adam and Eue: howbeit I proued that to be false, because I saw +the water flow in the lake. This water is ful of hors-leeches, and +blood-suckers, and of precious stones also: which precious stones the king +taketh not vnto his owne vse, but once or twise euery yere he permitteth +certaine poore people to diue vnder the water for the said stones, and al +that they can get he bestoweth vpon them, to the end they may pray for his +soule. But that they may with lesse danger diue vnder the water, they take +limons which they pil, anointing themselues throughly with the iuice +therof, and so they may diue naked vnder the water, the hors-leeches not +being able to hurt them. From this lake the water runneth euen vnto the +sea, and at a low ebbe the inhabitants dig rubies, diamonds, pearls, and +other pretious stones out of the shore: wherupon it is thought, that the +king of this island hath greater abundance of pretious stones, then any +other monarch in the whole earth besides. In the said country there be al +kinds of beasts and foules: and the people told me, that those beasts would +not inuade nor hurt any stranger, but only the natural inhabitants. I saw +in this island fouls as big as our countrey geese, hauing two heads, and +other miraculous things, which I will not here write off. Traueling on +further toward the south, I arriued at a certain island called Bodin, +[Marginal note: Or, Dadin.] which signifieth in our language vnclean. In +this island there do inhabit most wicked persons, who deuour and eat raw +flesh committing al kinds of vncleannes and abominations in such sort, as +it is incredible. For the father eateth his son, and the son his father, +the husbande his owne wife, and the wife her husband: and that after this +maner. If any mans father be sick, the son straight goes vnto the +soothsaying or prognosticating priest, requesting him to demand of his god, +whether his father shall recouer of that infirmity of no: Then both of them +go vnto an idol of gold or of siluer, making their praiers vnto it in maner +folowing: Lord, thou art our God, and thee we do adore, beseeching thee to +resolue vs, whether such a man must die, or recouer of such an infirmity or +no: Then the diuel answereth out of the foresaid idol: if he saith (he shal +liue) then returneth his son and ministreth things necessary vnto him, til +he hath attained vnto his former health: but if he saith (he shal die) then +goes the priest vnto him, and putting a cloth into his mouth doth strangle +him therewith: which being done, he cuts his dead body into morsels, and al +his friends and kinsfolks are inuited vnto the eating thereof, with musique +and all kinde of mirth: howbeit his bones are solemnely buried. And when I +found fault with that custome demanding a reason thereof, one of them gaue +me this answer: this we doe, least the wormes should eat his flesh, for +then his soule should suffer great torments, neither could I by any meanes +remooue them from that errour. Many other nouelties and strange things +there bee in this countrey, which no man would credite, vnles he saw them +with his owne eyes. Howbeit, I (before almighty God) do here make relation +of nothing but of that only, whereof I am as sure, as a man may be sure. +Concerning the foresaid islands I inquired of diuers wel-experienced +persons, who al of them, as it were with one consent, answered me saying, +That this India contained 4400. islands vnder it, or within it: in which +islands there are sixtie and foure crowned kings: and they say moreouer, +that the greater part of those islands are wel inhabited. And here I +conclude concerning that part of India. + + +Of the vpper India: and of the prouince of Mancy. + +First of al therefore, hauing traueled many dayes iourney vpon the +Ocean-sea toward the East, at length I arriued at a certaine great prouince +called Mancy, being in Latine named India. Concerning this India I inquired +of Christians, of Saracens, and of Idolaters, and of al such as bare any +office vnder the great Can. Who all of them with one consent answered, that +this prouince of Mancy hath mo then 2000. great cities within the precincts +thereof, and that it aboundeth with all plenty of victuals, as namely with +bread, wine, rise, flesh, and fish. All the men of this prouince be +artificers and marchants, who, though they be in neuer so extreme penurie, +so long as they can helpe themselues by the labor of their hands, wil neuer +beg almes of any man. The men of this prouince are of a faire and comely +personage, but somewhat pale, hauing their heads shauen but a litle: but +the women are the most beautiful vnder the sunne. The first city of the +said India which I came vnto, is called Ceuskalon, [Marginal note: Or, +Ceuskala.] which being a daies iourney distant from the sea, stands vpon a +riuer, the water whereof, nere vnto the mouth, where it exonerateth it +selfe into the sea, doth ouerflow the land for the space of 12. daies +iourney. All the inhabitants of this India are worshippers of idols. The +foresaid city of Ceuskalon hath such an huge nauy belonging thereunto, that +no man would beleeue it vnlesse he should see it. In this city I saw 300. +li. of good and new ginger sold for lesse than a groat. There are the +greatest, and the fairest geese, and most plenty of them to be sold in al +the whole world, as I suppose: [Sidenote: He meaneth Pellicans, which the +Spaniards cal Alcatrarzi.] they are as white as milke, and haue a bone vpon +the crowne of their heads as bigge as an egge, being of the colour of +blood: vnder their throat they haue a skin or bag hanging downe halfe a +foot. They are exceeding fat and wel sold. Also they haue ducks and hens in +that country, one as big as two of ours. There be monstrous great serpents +likewise, which are taken by the inhabitants and eaten: whereupon a solemne +feast among them without serpents is not set by: and to be briefe, in this +city there are al kinds of victuals in great abundance. From thence I +passed by many cities, and at length I came vnto a city named Caitan, +[Marginal note: Or, Zaiton.] wherin the friers Minorites haue two places of +aboad, vnto the which I transported the bones of the dead friers, which +suffred martyrdom for the faith of Christ, as it is aboue mentioned. In +this city there is abundance of al kind of victuals very cheap. The said +city is as big as two of Bononia, and in it are many monasteries of +religious persons, al which do worship idols. I my selfe was in one of +those Monasteries, and it was told me, that there were in it iii. M. +religious men, hauing xi. M. idols: and one of the said idols which seemed +vnto me but litle in regard of the rest, was as big as our Christopher. +These religious men euery day do feed their idol-gods: wherupon at a +certeine time I went to behold the banquet: and indeed those things which +they brought vnto them were good to eat, and fuming hote, insomuch that the +steame of the smoke thereof ascended vp vnto their idols, and they said +that their gods were refreshed with the smoke: howbeit all the meat they +conueyed away, eating it vp their owne selues, and so they fed their dumb +gods with the smoke onely. + + +Of the citie Fuco. + +Traueling more eastward, I came vnto a city named Fuco, which conteineth +30. miles in circuit, wherin be exceeding great and faire cocks, and al +their hens are as white as the very snow, hauing wol in stead of feathers, +like vnto sheep. It is a most stately and beautiful city, and standeth vpon +the sea. Then I went 18. dates iourney on further, and passed by many +prouinces and cities, and in the way I went ouer a certain great mountaine, +vpon the one side whereof I beheld al liuing creatures to be as black as a +cole, and the men and women on that side differed somwhat in maner of +liuing from others: howbeit, on the other side of the said hil euery liuing +thing was snow-white, and the inhabitants in their maner of liuing, were +altogether vnlike vnto others. There, all maried women cary in token that +they haue husbands, a great trunke of horne vpon their heads. [Sidenote: A +great riuer.] From thence I trauelled 18. dayes journey further, and came +vnto a certaine great riuer, and entered also into a city, whereunto +belongeth a mighty bridge, to passe the said riuer. And mine hoste, with +whom I soiourned, being desirous to shew me some sport, said vnto me: Sir, +if you will see any fish taken, goe with me. [Sidenote: Foules catching +fish.] Then he led me vnto the foresaid bridge, carying in his armes with +him certaine diue-doppers or water-foules, bound vnto a company of poles, +and about euery one of their necks he tied a threed, lest they should eat +the fish as fast as they tooke them: and he carried 3. great baskets with +him also: then loosed he the diue doppers from the poles, which presently +went into the water, and within lesse then the space of one houre, caught +as many fishes as filled the 3. baskets: which being full, mine hoste +vntyed the threeds from about their neckes, and entering the second time +into the riuer they fed themselues with fish, and being satisfied they +returned and suffered themselues to be bound vnto the saide poles as they +were before. And when I did eate of those fishes, me thought they were +exceeding good. Trauailing thence many dayes iourneys, at length I arriued +at another city called Canasia, [Marginal note: Or Cansai, or Quinzai.] +which signifieth in our language, the city of heauen. Neuer in all my life +did I see so great a citie; for it conteineth in circuit an hundreth miles: +neither sawe I any plot thereof, which was not throughly inhabited: yea, I +sawe many houses of tenne or twelue stories high, one aboue another. It +hath mightie large suburbs containing more people than the city it selfe. +Also it hath twelue principall gates: and about the distance of eight +miles, in the high way vnto euery one of the saide gates standeth a city as +big by estimation as Venice, and Padua. The foresaid city of Canasia is +situated in waters or marshes, which alwayes stand still, neither ebbing +nor flowing: howbeit it hath a defence for the winde like vnto Venice. In +this city there are mo than 10002. bridges, many whereof I numbred and +passed ouer them: [Sidenote: The Italian copy in Ramusius, hath 11000. +bridges.] and vpon euery of those bridges stand certaine watchmen of the +citie, keeping continuall watch and ward about the said city, for the great +Can the Emperour of Catay. The people of this countrey say, that they haue +one duetie inioyned vnto them by their lord: for euery fire payeth one +Balis in regard of tribute: and a Balis is fiue papers or pieces of silke, +which are worth one floren and an halfe of our coine. Tenne or twelue +housholds are accompted for one fire, and so pay tribute but for one fire +onely. Al those tributary fires amount vnto the number of 85. Thuman, with +other foure Thuman of the Saracens, which make 89. in al; And one Thuman +consisteth of 10000. fires. The residue of the people of the city are some +of them Christians, some marchants, and some traueilers through the +countrey: whereupon I marueiled much howe such an infinite number of +persons could inhabite and liue together. There is great aboundance of +victuals in this citie, as namely of bread and wine, and especially of +hogs-flesh, with other necessaries. + + +Of a Monastery where many strange beastes of diuers kindes doe liue vpon an + hill. + +In the foresaide citie foure of our friers had conuerted a mighty and riche +man vnto the faith of Christ, at whose house I continually abode, for so +long time as I remained in the citie. Who vpon a certaine time saide vnto +me: Ara, that is to say, Father, will you goe and beholde the citie? And I +said, yea. Then embarqued we our selues, and directed our course vnto a +certaine great Monastery: where being arrived, he called a religious person +with whom he was acquainted, saying vnto him concerning me: this Raban +Francus, that is to say, this religious Frenchman commeth from the Westerne +parts of the world, and is now going to the city of Cambaleth to pray for +the life of the great Can, and therefore you must shew him some rare thing, +that when hee returnes into his owne countrey, he may say, this strange +sight or nouelty haue I seene in the city of Canasia. Then the said +religious man tooke two great baskets full of broken reliques which +remained of the table, and led me vnto a little walled parke, the doore +whereof he vnlocked with his key, and there appeared vnto vs a pleasant +faire green plot, into the which we entred. In the said greene stands a +litle mount in forme of a steeple, replenished with fragrant herbes and +fine shady trees. And while we stood there, he tooke a cymball or bell, and +rang therewith, as they vse to ring to dinner or beuoir in cloisters, at +the sound whereof many creatures of diuers kinds came downe from the mount, +some like apes, some like cats, some like monkeys and some hauing faces +like men. And while I stood beholding of them, they gathered themselues +together about him, to the number of 4200. of those creatures, putting +themselues in good order, before whom he set a platter, and gaue them the +said fragments to eate. And when they had eaten he rang vpon his cymbal the +second time, and they al returned vnto their former places. Then, wondring +greatly at the matter, I demanded what kind of creatures those might be? +They are (quoth he) the soules of noble men which we do here feed, for the +loue of God who gouerneth the world: and as a man was honorable or noble in +this life, so his soule after death, entreth into the body of some +excellent beast or other, but the soules of simple and rusticall people do +possesse the bodies of more vile and brutish creatures. Then I began to +refute that foule error: howbeit my speach did nothing at all preuaile with +him: for he could not be perswaded that any soule might remaine without a +body. [Sidenote: Chilenso.] From thence I departed vhto a certaine citie +named Chilenso, the walls whereof conteined 40. miles in circuit. In this +city there are 360. bridges of stone, the fairest that euer I saw: and it +is wel inhabited, hauing a great nauie belonging thereunto, and abounding +with all kinds of victuals and other commodities. [Sidenote: Thalay.] And +thence I went vnto a certaine riuer called Thalay, which where it is most +narrow, is 7. miles broad: [Sidenote: Cakam.] and it runneth through the +midst of the land of Pygmaei, whose chiefe city is called Cakam, and is one +of the goodliest cities in the world. These Pigmaeans are three of my spans +high, and they make larger and better cloth of cotten and silke, then any +other nation vnder the sunne. [Sidenote: Ianzu.] And coasting along by the +saide riuer, I came vnto a certaine citie named Ianzu, in which citie there +is one receptacle for the Friers of our order, and there be also three +Churches of the Nestorians. This Ianzu is a noble and great citie, +containing 48 Thuman of tributarie fiers, and in it are all kindes of +victuals, and great plenty of such beastes, foules and fishes, as +Christians doe vsually liue vpon. The lord of the same citie hath in +yeerely reuenues for salt onely, fiftie Thuman of balis, and one balis is +worth a floren and a halfe of our coyne: insomuch that one Thuman of balis +amounteth vnto the value of fifteene thousand florens. Howbeit the sayd +lord fauoureth his people in one respect, for sometimes he forgiueth them +freely two hundred Thuman, least there should be any scarcity or dearth +among them. There is a custome in this citie, that when any man is +determined to banquet his friends, going about vnto certaine tauernes or +cookes houses appointed for the same purpose, he sayth vnto euery +particular hoste, you shall haue such, and such of my friendes, whom you +must intertaine in my name, and so much I will bestowe vpon the banquet. +And by that means his friendes are better feasted at diuerse places, then +they should haue beene at one. Tenne miles from the sayde citie, about the +head of the foresayd riuer of Thalay, there is a certaine other citie +called Montu, which hath the greatest nauy that I saw in the whole world. +All their ships are as white as snow, and they haue banqueting houses in +them, and many other rare things also, which no man would beleeue, vnlesse +he had seene them with his owne eyes. + + +Of the citie of Cambaleth. + +[Sidenote: Karamoron.] Traueiling eight dayes iourney further by diuers +territories and cities, at length I came by fresh water vnto a certaine +citie named Lencyn, standing vpon the riuer of Karauoran, which runneth +through the midst of Cataie, and doeth great harme in the countrey when it +ouerfloweth the bankes, or breaketh foorth of the chanell. [Sidenote: +Sumacoto.] From thence passing along the riuer Eastward, after many dayes +trauell, and the sight of the diuers cities, I arriued at a citie called +Sumakoto, which aboundeth more with silke then any other citie in the +world: for when there is great scarcitie of silke, fortie pound is sold for +lesse then eight groates. In this citie there is abundance of all +merchandize, and all kindes of victuals also, as of bread, wine, flesh, +fish, with all choise and delicate spices. Then traueiling on still towards +the East by many cities, I came vnto the noble and renowmed citie of +Cambaleth, which is of great antiquitie being situate in the prouince of +Cataie. This citie the Tartars tooke, and neare vnto it within the space of +halfe a mile, they built another citie called Caido. The citie of Caido +hath twelue gates, being each of them two miles distant from another. Also +the space lying in the midst betweene the two foresayd cities is very well +and throughly inhabited, so that they make as it were but one citie +betweene them both. The whole compasse or circuit of both cities together, +is 40. miles. In this citie the great emperour Can hath his principall +seat, and his Imperiall palace, the wals of which palace containe foure +miles in circuit: and neere vnto this his palace are many other palaces and +houses, of his nobles which belong vnto his court. Within the precincts of +the sayd palace Imperiall, there is a most beautiful mount, set and +replenished with trees, for which cause it is called the Greene mount, +hauing a most royall and sumptuous palace standing thereupon, in which, for +the most part, the great Can is resident. Vpon the one side of the sayd +mount there is a great lake, whereupon a most stately bridge is built, in +which lake is great abundance of geese, ducks, and all kindes of water +foules: and in the wood growing vpon the mount there is great store of all +birds, and wilde beasts. And therefore when the great Can will solace +himselfe with hunting or hauking, he needs not so much as once to step +forth of his palace. Moreouer, the principall palace, wherein he maketh his +abode, is very large, hauing within it 14 pillers of golde, and all the +walles thereof are hanged with red skinnes, which are sayd to be the most +costly skinnes in all the world. In the midst of the palace standes a +cisterne of two yards high, which consisteth of a precious stone called +Merdochas, and is wreathed about with golde, and at ech corner thereof is +the golden image of a serpent, as it were, furiously shaking and casting +forth his head. This cisterne also hath a kind of networke of pearle +wrought about it. Likewise by the sayd cisterne there is drinke conueyed +thorow certeine pipes and conducts, such as vseth to be drunke in the +emperors court, vpon the which also there hang many vessels of golde, +wherein, whosoeuer will may drinke of the sayd licour. In the foresayd +palace there are many peacocks of golde: and when any Tartar maketh a +banquet vnto his lord, if the guests chance to clap their hands for ioy and +mirth, the sayd golden peacocks also will spread abroad their wings, and +lift vp their traines, seeming as if they danced: and this I suppose to be +done by arte magike or by some secret engine vnder the ground. + + +Of the glory and magnificence of the great Can. + +Moreouer, when the great emperor Can sitteth in his imperiall throne of +estate, on his left hand sitteth his queene or empresse, and vpon another +inferior seate there sit two other women, which are to accompany the +emperor, when his spouse is absent, but in the lowest place of all, there +sit all the ladies of his kindred. All the maried women weare vpon their +heads a kind of ornament in shape like vnto a mans foote, of a cubite and a +halfe in length, and the lower part of the sayd foote is adorned with +cranes feathers, and is all ouer thicke set with great and orient pearles. +Vpon the right hand of the great Can sitteth his first begotten sonne and +heire apparent vnto his empire, and vnder him sit all the nobles of the +blood royall. There bee also foure Secretaries, which put all things in +writing that the emperor speaketh. In whose presence likewise stand his +Barons and diuers others of his nobilitie, with great traines of folowers +after them, of whom none dare speake so much as one word, vnlease they haue +obtained licence of the emperor so to doe, except his iesters and +stage-players, who are appointed of purpose to solace their lord. Neither +yet dare they attempt to doe ought, but onely according to the pleasure of +their emperor, and as hee inioineth them by lawe. About the palace gate +stand certaine Barons to keepe all men from treading vpon the threshold of +the sayd gate. When it pleassth the great Can to solemnize a feast, he hath +about him 14000. Barons, carying wreathes and litle crownes vpon their +heads, and giuing attendance vpon their lord, and euery one of them weareth +a garment of gold and precious stones, which is woorth ten thousand +Florens. His court is kept in very good order, by gouernours of tens, +gouernours of hundreds, and gouernours of thousands, insomuch that euery +one in his place performeth his duetie committed vnto him, neither is there +any defect to bee found. I Frier Odoricus was there present in person for +the space of three yeeres, and was often at the sayd banquets; for we +friers Minorites haue a place of aboad appointed out for vs in the emperors +court, and are enioined to goe and to bestow our blessing vpon him. And I +enquired of certaine Courtiers concerning the number of persons pertaining +to the emperors court? And they answered mee that of stage-players, +musicians, and such like, there were eighteene Thuman at the least, and +that the keepers of dogs, beasts and foules were fifteene Thuman, and the +physicians for the emperours body were foure hundred; the Christians also +were eight in number, together with one Saracen. At my being there, all the +foresayd number of persons had all kind of necessaries both for apparell +and victuals out of the emperors court. Moreouer, when he will make his +progresse from one countrey to another, hee hath foure troupes of horsemen, +one being appointed to goe a dayes iourney before, and another to come a +dayes iourney after him, the third to march on his right hand, and the +fourth on his left, in the manner of a crosse, he himselfe being in the +midst, and so euery particular troupe haue their daily iourneys limited +vnto them, to the ende they may prouide sufficient victuals without defect. +Nowe the great Can himselfe is caried in maner following; hee rideth in a +chariot with two wheeles, vpon which a maiesticall throne is built of the +wood of Aloe, being adorned with gold and great pearles, and precious +stones, and foure elephants brauely furnished doe drawe the sayd chariot, +before which elephants, foure great horses richly trapped and couered doe +lead the way. Hard by the chariot on both sides thereof, are foure Barons +laying hold and attending thereupon, to keepe all persons from approaching +neere vnto their emperour. Vpon the chariot also two milke-white +Ier-falcons doe sit, and seeing any game which hee would take, hee letteth +them flie, and so they take it, and after this maner doeth hee solace +himselfe as hee rideth. Moreover, no man dare come within a stones cast of +the chariot, but such as are appointed. The number of his owne followers, +of his wiues attendants, and of the traine of his first begotten sonne and +heire apparent, would seeme incredible vnto any man, vnlesse hee had seene +it with his owne eyes. The foresayd great Can hath diuided his Empire into +twelue partes or Prouinces, and one of the sayd prouinces hath two thousand +great cities within the precincts thereof. Whereupon his empire is of that +length and breadth, that vnto whatsoeuer part thereof he intendeth his +iourny, he hath space enough for six moneths continual progresse, except +his Islands which are at the least 5000. + + +Of certaine Innes or hospitals appointed for trauailers throughout the + whole empire. + +The foresayd Emperor (to the end that trauailers may haue all things +necessary throughout his whole empire) hath caused certaine Innes to be +prouided in sundry places vpon the high wayes, where all things pertaining +vnto victuals are in a continuall readinesse. And when any alteration or +newes happen in any part of his Empire, if he chance to be farre absent +from that part, his ambassadors vpon horses or dromedaries ride post vnto +him, and when themselues and their beasts are weary, they blow their horne, +at the noise whereof, the next Inne likewise prouideth a horse and a man, +who takes the letter of him that is weary and runneth vnto another Inne: +and so by diuers Innes, and diuers postes, the report, which ordinarily +could skarce come in 30. dayes, is in one naturall day brought vnto the +emperor: and therefore no matter of any moment can be done in his empire, +but straightway he hath intelligence thereof. Moreouer, when the great Can +himselfe will go on hunting, he vseth this custome. Some twenty dayes +iourney from the citie of Kambaleth there is a forrest containing sixe +dayes iourney in circuit, in which forrest there are so many kinds of +beasts and birds, as it is incredible to report. Vnto this forrest, at the +ende of euery third or fourth yere, himselfe with his whole traine +resorteth, and they all of them together enuiron the sayd forrest, sending +dogs into the same, which by hunting do bring foorth the beasts: namely, +lions and stags, and other creatures, vnto a most beautifull plaine in the +midst of the forrest, because all the beasts of the forrest doe tremble, +especially at the cry of hounds. Then commeth the great Can himselfe, being +caried vpon three elephants, and shooteth fine arrowes into the whole herd +of beasts, and after him all his Barons, and after them the rest of his +courtiers and family doe all in like maner discharge their arrowes also, +and euery mans arrow hath a sundry marke. Then they all goe vnto the beasts +which are slaine (suffering the liuing beasts to returne into the wood that +they may haue more sport with them another time) and euery man enjoyeth +that beast as his owne, wherein he findeth his arrow sticking. + + +Of the foure feasts which the great Can solemnizeth euery yeere in his + Court. + +Foure great feasts in a yeere doeth the emperor Can celebrate: namely the +feast of his birth, the feast of his circumcision, the feast of his +coronation, and the feast of his mariage. And vnto these feasts he inuiteth +all his Barons, his stage-players, and all such as are of his kinred. Then +the great Can sitting in his throne, all his Barons present themselues +before him, with wreaths and crownes vpon their heads, being diuersly +attired, for some of them are in greene, namely the principall: the second +are in red, and the third in yellow, and they hold each man in his hand a +little Iuorie table of elephants tooth, and they are girt with golden +girdles of halfe a foote broad, and they stand vpon their feete keeping +silence. About them stand the stage-players or musicians with their +instruments. And in one of the corners of a certaine great pallace, all the +Philosophers or Magicians remaine for certaine howers, and doe attend vpon +points or characters: and when the point and hower which the sayd +Philosophers expected for, is come, a certaine crier crieth out with a loud +voyce, saying, Incline or bowe your selues before your Emperour: with that +all the Barons fall flat vpon the earth. Then hee crieth out againe; Arise +all, and immediately they all arise. Likewise the Philosophers attend vpon +a point or character the second time, and when it is fulfilled, the crier +crieth out amaine; Put your fingers in your eares: and foorthwith againe he +saieth; Plucke them out. Againe, at the third point he crieth, Boult this +meale. Many other circumstances also doe they performe, all which they say +haue some certaine signification: howbeit, neither would I write them, nor +giue any heed vnto them, because they are vaine and ridiculous. And when +the musicians hower is come, then the Philosophers say, Solemnize a feast +vnto your Lord: with that all of them sound their instruments, making a +great and a melodious noyse. And immediately another crieth, Peace, peace, +and they are all whist. Then come the women-musicians and sing sweetly +before the Emperour, which musike was more delightfull vnto me. After them +come in the lions and doe their obeisance vnto the great Can. Then the +iuglers cause golden cups full of wine to flie vp and downe in the ayre, +and to apply themselues vnto mens mouthes that they may drinke of them. +These and many other strange things I sawe in the court of the great Can, +which no man would beleeue vnlesse he had seen with his owne eies, and +therefore I omit to speake of them. [Sidenote: A lambe in a gourd.] I was +informed also by certaine credible persons, of another miraculous thing, +namely, that in a certaine kingdome of the sayd Can, wherein stand the +mountains called Kapsei (the kingdomes name is Kalor) there grewe great +Gourds or Pompions, which being ripe, doe open at the tops, and within them +is found a little beast like vnto a yong lambe, euen as I my selfe haue +heard reported, that there stand certaine trees vpon the shore of the Irish +sea, bearing fruit like vnto a gourd, which, at a certaine time of the +yeere doe fall into the water, and become birds called Bernacles, and this +is most true. [Footnote: This report is first found in the writings of +Giraldus Cambreusis, tutor to King John.] + + +Of diuers prouinces and cities. + +And after three yeeres I departed out of the empire of Cataie, trauailing +fiftie dayes iourney towards the West. [Sidenote: His returne Westward.] +And at length I came vnto the empire of Pretegoani, whose principall citie +is Kosan, which hath many other cities vnder it. [Sidenote: Casan] From +thence passing many dayes trauell, I came vnto a prouince called Casan, +which is for good commodities, one of the onely prouinces vnder the Sunne, +and is very well inhabited, insomuch that when we depart out of the gates +of one city we may beholde the gates of another city, as I my selfe saw in +diuers of them. The breadth of the sayd prouince is fifty dayes iourney, +and the length aboue sixty. In it there is great plenty of all victuals, +and especially of chesnuts, and it is one of the twelue prouinces of the +great Can. Going on further, I came vnto a certaine kingdome called Tebek, +[Marginal note: Or Thebet.] which is in subiection vnto the great Can also, +wherein I thinke there is more plenty of bread and wine then in any other +part of the whole world besides. The people of the sayd countrey do, for +the most part, inhabit in tents made of blacke felt. Their principall city +is inuironed with faire and beautifull walles, being built of most white +and blacke stones, which are disposed chekerwise one by another, and +curiously compiled together: likewise all the high wayes in this countrey +are exceedingly well paued. In the sayd countrey none dare shed the bloud +of a man, or of any beast, for the reuerence of a certaine idole. In the +foresayd city their Abassi, that is to say, their Pope is resident, being +the head and prince of all idolaters (vpon whom he bestoweth and +distributeth gifts after his maner) euen as our pope of Rome accounts +himselfe to be the head of all Christians. The women of this countrey weare +aboue an hundreth tricks and trifles about them, and they haue two teeth in +their mouthes as long as the tushes of a boare. When any mans father +deceaseth among them, his sonne assembleth together all the priests and +musicians that he can get, saying that he is determined to honour his +father: then causeth he him to be caried into the field (all his kinsfolks, +friends, and neighbours, accompanying him in the sayd action) where the +priests with great solemnity cut off the father's head, giuing it vnto his +sonne, which being done, they diuide the whole body into morsels, and so +leaue it behinde them, returning home with prayers in the company of the +sayd sonne. So soone as they are departed, certaine vultures, which are +accustomed to such bankets, come flying from the mountaines, and cary away +all the sayd morsels of flesh: and from thenceforth a fame is spread +abroad, that the sayd party deceased was holy, because the angels of God +carried him into paradise. And this is the greatest and highest honour, +that the sonne can deuise to performe vnto his deceased father. [Sidenote: +The same story concerning the very same people is in William de Rubricis.] +Then the sayd sonne taketh his fathers head, seething it and eating the +flesh thereof, but of the skull he makes a drinking cup, wherein himselfe +with all his family and kindred do drinke with great solemnity and mirth, +in the remembrance of his dead and deuoured father. Many other vile and +abominable things doth the said nation commit, which I meane not to write, +because men neither can nor will beleeue, except they should haue the sight +of them. + + +Of a certaine rich man, who is fed and nourished by fiftie virgins. + +While I was in the prouince of Mancy, I passed by the palace of a certaine +famous man, which hath fifty virgin damosels continually attending vpon +him, feeding him euery meale, as a bird feeds her yoong ones. Also he hath +sundry kindes of meat serued in at his table, and three dishes of ech +kinde; and when the sayd virgins feed him, they sing most sweetly. This man +hath in yeerely reuenues thirty thuman of tagars of rise, euery of which +thuman yeeldeth tenne thousand tagars, and one tagar is the burthen of an +asse. His palace is two miles in circuit, the pauement whereof is one plate +of golde, and another of siluer. Neere vnto the wall of the sayd palace +there is a mount artificially wrought with golde and siluer, whereupon +stand turrets and steeples and other delectable things for the solace and +recreation of the foresayd great man. And it was tolde me that there were +foure such men in the sayd kingdome. [Sidenote: Long nailes.] It is +accounted a great grace for the men of that countrey to haue long nailes +vpon their fingers, and especially vpon their thumbes which nailes they may +fold about their hands: but the grace and beauty of their women is to haue +small and slender feet: and therefore the mothers when their daughters are +yoong, do binde vp their feet, that they may not grow great. [Sidenote: +Melistorte.] Trauelling on further towards the South, I arriued at a +certaine countrey called Melistorte, which is a pleasant and fertile place. +And in this countrey there was a certeine man called Senex de monte, who +round about two mountaines had built a wall to inclose the sayd mountaines. +Within this wall there were the fairest and most chrystall fountaines in +the whole world: and about the sayd fountaines there were most beautifull +virgins in great number, and goodly horses also, and in a word, euery thing +that could be deuised for bodily solace and delight, and therefore the +inhabitants of the countrey call the same place by the name of Paradise. + +The sayd olde Senex, when he saw any proper and valiant yoong man, he would +admit him into his paradise. Moreouer, by certaine conducts he makes, wine +and milke to flow abundantly. This Senex, when he hath a minde to reuenge +himselfe or to slay any king or baron, commandeth him that is gouernor of +the sayd paradise, to bring thereunto some of the acquaintance of the sayd +king or baron, permitting him a while to take his pleasure therein, and +then to giue him a certaine potion being of force, to cast him into such a +slumber as should make him quite voide of all sense, and so being in a +profound sleepe to conuey him out of his paradise: who being awaked, and +seeing himselfe thrust out of the paradise would become so sorrowfull, that +he could not in the world deuise what to do, or whither to turne him. Then +would he goe vnto the foresaid old man, beseeching him that he might be +admitted againe into his paradise: who saith vnto him, You cannot be +admitted thither, vnlesse you will slay such or such a man for my sake, and +if you will giue the attempt onely, whether you kill him or no, I will +place you againe in paradise, that there you may remaine alwayes: then +would the party without faile put the same in execution, indeuouring to +murther all those against whom the sayd olde man had conceiued any hatred. +And therefore all the kings of the east stood in awe of the sayd olde man, +and gaue vnto him great tribute. + + +Of the death of Senex de monte. + +And when the Tartars had subdued a great part of the world, they came vnto +the sayd olde man, and tooke from him the custody of his paradise: who +being incensed thereat, sent abroad diuers desperate and resolute persons +out of his forenamed paradise, and caused many of the Tartarian nobles to +be slaine. The Tartars seeing this, went and besieged the city wherein the +said olde man was, tooke him, and put him to a most cruell and ignominious +death. The friers in that place haue this speciall gift and prerogatiue: +namely, that by the vertue of the name of Christ Iesu, and in the vertue of +his pretious bloud, which he shedde vpon the crosse for the saluation of +mankinde, they doe cast foorth deuils out of them that are possessed. And +because there are many possessed men in those parts, they are bound and +brought ten dayes iourney unto the sayd friers, who being dispossessed of +the vncleane spirits, do presently beleeue in Christ who deliuered them, +accounting him for their God, and being baptized in his name, and also +deliuering immediatly vnto the friers all their idols, and the idols of +their cattell, which are commonly made of felt or of womens haire: then the +sayd friers kindle a fire in a publike place (whereunto the people resort, +that they may see the false gods of their neighbors burnt) and cast the +sayd idols thereinto: howbeit at the first those idols came out of the fire +againe. Then the friers sprinkled the sayd fire with holy water, casting +the idols into it the second time, and with that the deuils fled in the +likenesse of blacke smoake, and the idols still remained till they were +consumed vnto ashes. Afterward, this noise and outcry was heard in the +ayre: Beholde and see how I am expelled out of my habitation. And by these +meanes the friers doe baptize great multitudes, who presently reuolt againe +vnto their idols: insomuch that the sayd friers must eftsoones, as it were, +vnderprop them, and informe them anew. There was another terrible thing +which I saw there: for passing by a certaine valley, which is situate +beside a pleasant riuer, I saw many dead bodies, and in the sayd valley +also I heard diuers sweet sounds and harmonies of musike, especially the +noise of citherns, whereat I was greatly amazed. This valley conteineth in +length seuen or eight miles at the least; into the which whosoeuer entreth, +dieth presently, and can by no meanes passe aliue thorow the middest +thereof: for which cause all the inhabitants thereabout decline vnto the +one side. Moreouer, I was tempted to go in, and to see what it was. At +length, making my prayers, and recommending my selfe to God in the name of +Iesu, I entred, and saw such swarmes of dead bodies there, as no man would +beleeue vnlesse he were an eye witnesse thereof. At the one side of the +foresayd valley vpon a certaine stone, I saw the visage of a man, which +beheld me with such a terrible aspect, that I thought verily I should haue +died in the same place. But alwayes this sentence, the word became flesh, +and dwelt amongst vs, I ceased not to pronounce, signing my selfe with the +signe of the crosse, and neerer then seuen or eight pases I durst not +approach vnto the said head: but I departed and fled vnto another place in +the sayd valley, ascending vp into a little sand mountaine, where looking +round about, I saw nothing but the sayd citherns, which me thought I heard +miraculously sounding and playing by themselues without the help of +musicians. And being vpon the toppe of the mountaine, I found siluer there +like the scales of fishes in great abundance: and I gathered some part +thereof into my bosome to shew for a wonder, but my conscience rebuking me, +I cast it vpon the earth, reseruing no whit at all vnto my selfe, and so, +by Gods grace I departed without danger. And when the men of the countrey +knew that I was returned out of the valley aliue, they reuerenced me much, +saying that I was baptised and holy, and that the foresayd bodies were men +subiect vnto the deuils infernall, who vsed to play vpon citherns, to the +end they might allure people to enter, and so murther them. Thus much +concerning those things which I beheld most certainely with mine eyes, I +frier Odoricus haue heere written: many strange things also I haue of +purpose omitted, because men will not beleeue them vnlesse they should see +them. + + +Of the honour and reuerence done vnto the great Can. + +I will report one thing more, which I saw, concerning the great Can. It is +an vsuall custome in those parts, that when the forsayd Can traueileth +thorow any countrey, his subiects kindle fires before their doores, casting +spices thereinto to make a perfume, that their lord passing by may smell +the sweet and delectable odours thereof, and much people come forth to meet +him. And vpon a certaine time when he was cumming towardes Cambaleth, the +fame of his approch being published, a bishop of ours with certaine of our +minorite friers and my selfe went two dayes iourney to meet him: and being +come nigh vnto him, we put a crosse vpon wood, I my selfe hauing a censer +in my hand, and began to sing with a loud voice: Veni creator spiritus. And +as we were singing on this wise, he caused vs to be called, commanding vs +to come vnto him: notwithstanding (as it is aboue mentioned) that no man +dare approach within a stones cast of his chariot, vnlesse he be called, +but such onely as keepe his chariot. And when we came neere vnto him, he +vailed his hat or bonet being of an inestimable price, doing reuerance vnto +the crosse. And immediatly I put incense into the censer, and our bishop +taking the censer perfumed him, and gaue him his benediction. Moreouer, +they that come before the sayd Can do alwayes bring some oblation to +present vnto him, obseruing the antient law: Thou shall not appeare in my +presence with an empty hand. And for that cause we carried apples with vs, +and offered them in a platter with reuerence vnto him: and taking out two +of them he did eat some part of one. And then he signified vnto vs, that we +should go apart, least the horses comming on might in ought offend vs. With +that we departed from him, and turned aside, going vnto certaine of his +barons, which had bene conuerted to the faith by certeine friers of our +order, being at the same time in his army: and we offered vnto them of the +foresayd apples, who receiued them at our hands with great ioy, seeming +vnto vs to be as glad, as if we had giuen them some great gift. + +All the premisses abouewritten friar William de Solanga hath put downe in +writing euen as the foresayd frier Odoricus vttered them by word of mouth, +in the yeere of our Lord 1330. in the moneth of May, and in the place of S. +Anthony of Padua. Neither did he regard to write them in difficult Latine +or in an eloquent stile, but euen as Odoricus himselfe rehearsed them, to +the end that men might the more easily vnderstand the things reported. I +frier Odoricus of Friuli, of a certaine territory called Portus Vahonis, +and of the order of the minorites, do testifie and beare wimesse vnto the +reuerend father Guidotus minister of the prouince of S. Anthony, in the +marquesate of Treuiso (being by him required vpon mine obedience so to doe) +that all the premisses aboue written, either I saw with mine owne eyes, or +heard the same reported by credible and substantiall persons. The common +report also of the countreyes where I was, testifieth those things, which I +saw, to be true. Many other things I haue omitted, because I beheld them +not with mine owne eyes. Howbeit from day to day I purpose with my selfe to +trauell countreyes or lands, in which action I dispose myselfe to die or to +liue, as it shall please my God. + + +Of the death of frier Odoricus. + +In the yeere therefore of our Lord 1331 the foresayd frier Odoricus +preparing himselfe for the performance of his intended iourney, that his +trauel and labour might be to greater purpose, he determined to present +himselfe vnto Pope Iohn the two and twentieth, whose benediction and +obedience being receiued, he with a certaine number of friers willing to +beare him company, might conuey himselfe vnto all the countreyes of +infidels. And as he was trauelling towards the pope, and not farre distant +from the city of Pisa, there meets him by the waye a certaine olde man, in +the habit and attire of a pilgrime, saluting him by name, and saying: All +haile frier Odoricus. And when the frier demaunded how he had knowledge of +him: he answered: Whiles, you were in India I knew you full well, yea, and +I knew your holy purpose also: but see that you returne immediatly vnto the +couer from whence you came, for tenne dayes hence you shall depart out of +this present world. Wherefore being astonished and amazed at these wordes +(especially the olde man vanishing out of his sight, presently after he had +spoken them) he determined to returne. And so he returned in perfect +health, feeling no crazednesse nor infirmity of body. And being in his +couen at Vdene in the prouince of Padua, the tenth day after the foresayd +vision, hauing receiued the Communion, and preparing himselfe vnto God, +yea, being strong and sound of body, hee happily rested in the Lord; whose +sacred departure was signified vnto the Pope aforesaid, vnder the hand of +the publique notary in these words following. + +In the yeere of our Lord 1331, the 14. day of Ianuarie, Beatus Odoricus a +Frier minorite deceased in Christ, at whose prayers God shewed many and +sundry miracles, which I Guetelus publique notarie of Vtina, sonne of M. +Damianus de Porto Gruaro, at the commandement and direction of the +honorable Conradus of the Borough of Gastaldion, and one of the Councell of +Vtina, haue written as faithfully as I could, and haue deliuered a copie +thereof vnto the Friers minorites: howbeit not of all, because they are +innumerable, and too difficult for me to write. + + * * * * * + +The voyage of the Lord Iohn of Holland, Earle of Huntington, brother by the + mothers side to King Richard the second, to Ierusalem and Saint Katherins + mount. + +[Sidenote: 1394. Froyssart.] The Lord Iohn of Holland, Earle of Huntington, +was as then on his way to Ierusalem, and to Saint Katherins mount, and +purposed to returne by the Realme of Hungarie. For as he passed through +France (where he had great cheere of the King, and of his brother and +vncles) hee heard how the king of Hungary and the great Turke should haue +battell together: therefore he thought surely to be at that iourney. + + * * * * * + +The voiage of Thomas lord Moubray duke of Norfolke to Ierusalem, in the + yeere of our Lord 1399. written by Holinshed, pag. 1233. + +Thomas lord Moubray, second sonne of Elizabeth Segraue and Iohn lord +Moubray her husband, was advanced to the dukedome of Norfolke in the 21. +yeere of the reigne of Richard the 2. Shortly after which, hee was appealed +by Henry earle of Bullingbroke of treason; and caried to the castle of +Windsore, where he was strongly and safely garded, hauing a time of combate +granted to determine the cause betweene the two dukes, the 16. day of +September, in the 22. of the sayd king, being the yeere of our redemption +1398. But in the end the matter was so ordered, that this duke of Norfolke +was banished for euer: whereupon taking his iourney to Ierusalem, he died +at Venice in his returne from the said citie of Ierusalem, in the first +yeere of King Henry the 4. about the yeere of our redemption, 1399. + + * * * * * + +The Voiage of the bishop of Winchester to Ierusalem, in the sixt yeere of + the reigne of Henry the fift, which was the yeere of our Lord, 1417. + Thomas Walsingham. + +Vltimo die mensis Octobris, episcopus Wintoniensis accessit ad concilium +Constanciense, peregrinaturus Hierosolymam post electionem summi pontificis +celebratam, vbi tantum valuit eius facunda persuasio, vt et excitaret +dominos Cardinales ad concordiam, et ad electionem summi pontificis se +ocyus praepararent. + + +The same in English. + +The last day of October the bishop of Winchester came to the Councell of +Constance, which after the chusing of the Pope determined to take his +iourney to Ierusalem: where his eloquent perswasion so much preuailed, that +he both perswaded my lords the Cardinals to vnity and concord, and also +moued them to proceed more speedily to the election of the Pope. + + * * * * * + +A preparation of a voyage of King Henrie the fourth to the Holy land + against the infidels in the yere 1413, being the last yere of his reigne: + wherein he was preuented by death: written by Walsingham, Fabian, + Polydore Virgile, and Holenshed. + +[Sidenote: Order taken for building of ships and gallies.] In this +fourteenth and last yere of king Henries reigne a councell was holden in +the White friers in London, at the which among other things, order was +taken for ships and gallies to be builded and made ready, and all other +things necessary to be prouided for a voyage, which he meant to make into +the Holy land, there to recouer the city of Ierusalem from the infidels: +for it grieued him to consider the great malice of Christian princes, that +were bent vpon a mischieuous purpose to destroy one another, to the perill +of their owne soules, rather than to make warre against the enemies of the +Christian faith, as in conscience, it seemed to him, they were bound. We +finde, sayeth Fabian in his Chronicle, that he was taken with his last +sickeness, while he was making his prayers at Saint Edwards shrine, there +as it were, to take his leaue, and so to proceede foorth on his iourney. He +was so suddenly and grieuously taken, that such as were about him feared +least he would haue died presently: wherefore to relieue him, if it were +possible, they bare him into a chamber that was next at hand, belonging to +the Abbot of Westminster, where they layd him on a pallet before the fire, +and vsed all remedies to reuiue him. At length he recouered his speech, and +perceiuing himselfe in a strange place which he knew not, he willed to +knowe if the chamber had any particular name, whereunto answere was made, +that it was called Ierusalem. Then sayde the king, Laudes be giuen to the +father of heauen: for now I knowe that I shall die here in this chamber, +according to the prophesie of mee declared, that I should depart this life +in Ierusalem. + + * * * * * + +Of this intended voyage Polydore Virgile writeth in manner following. + +Post haec Henricus Rex memor nihil homini debere esse antiquius, quam ad +officium iustitiae, quae ad hominum vtilitatem pertinet, omne suum studium +conferre, protinus omisso ciuili bello, quo pudebat videre Christianos omni +tempore turpiter occupari, de republica Anglica bene gubernanda, de bello +in hostes communes sumendo, de Hierosolymis tandem aliquando recipiendis +plura destinabat, classemque iam parabat, cum ei talia agenti atque +meditanti casus mortem attulit: subito enim morbo tentatus, nulla medicina +subleuari potuit. Mortuus est apud Westmonasterium, annum agens +quadragesimum sextum, qui fuit annus salutis humanae, 1413. + + +The same in English. + +Afterward, King Henry calling to minde, that nothing ought to be more +highly esteemed by any man, then to doe the vtmost of his indeuour for the +performance of iustice, which tendeth to the good and benefite of mankinde; +altogether abondoning ciuill warre (wherewith he was ashamed to see, how +Christians at all times were dishonourably busied) entered into a more +deepe consideration of well gouerning his Realme of England, of waging +warre against the common enemie, and of recouering, in processe of time the +citie of Ierusalem, yea, and was prouiding a nauie for the same purpose, +whenas in the very midst of this his heroicall action and enterprise, he +was surprised with death: for falling into a sudden disease, he could not +be cured by any kinde of physicke. He deceased at Westminster in the 46 +yeare of his age, which was in the yeere of our Lord, 1413. + + * * * * * + +The voyage of M. Iohn Locke to Ierusalem. + +In my voyage to Ierusalem, I imbarked my selfe the 26 of March 1553 in the +good shippe called the Mathew Gonson, which was bound for Liuorno, or +Legorne and Candia. It fell out that we touched in the beginning of Aprill +next ensuing at Cades in Andalozia, where the Spaniardes, according to +their accustomed maner with all shippes of extraordinarie goodnes and +burden, picked a quarell against the company, meaning to haue forfeited, or +at least to haue arrested the sayd shippe. And they grew so malicious in +their wrongfull purpose that I being vtterly out of hope of any speedie +release, to the ende that my intention should not be ouerthrowen, was +inforced to take this course following. Notwithstanding this hard +beginning, it fell out so luckily, that I found in the roade a great shippe +called the Caualla of Venice, wherein after agreement made with the patron, +I shipped my selfe the 24. of May in the said yere 1553. and the 25 by +reason of the winde blowing hard and contrary, we were not able to enter +the straits of Gibraltar, but were put to the coast of Barbarie, where we +ankered in the maine sea 2. leagues from shore, and continued so vntill two +houres before sunne set, and then we weighed againe, and turned our course +towards the Straits, where we entered the 26 day aforesayd, the winde being +calme, but the current of the straites very fauourable. The same day the +winde beganne to rise somewhat, and blew a furthering gale, and so +continued at Northwest vntill we arriued at Legorne the third of Iune. And +from thence riding ouer land vnto Venice, I prepared for my voyage to +Ierusalem in the Pilgrimes shippe. + +[Sidenote: The ship Fila Cauena departeth for Ierusalem. Rouigno a port in +Istria.] I John Locke, accompanied with Maister Anthony Rastwold, and +diuers other, Hollanders, Zelanders, Almaines and French pilgrimes entered +the good shippe called Fila Cauena of Venice, the 16 of July 1553. and the +17 in the morning we weighed our anker and sailed towardes the coast of +Istria, to the port of Rouigno, and the said day there came aboard of our +ship the Perceuena of the shippe named Tamisari, for to receiue the rest of +all the pilgrimes money, which was in all after the rate of 55. Crownes for +euery man for that voyage, after the rate of fiue shillings starling to the +crowne: This done, he returned to Venice. + +[Sidenote: Sancta Eufemia.] The 19 day we tooke fresh victuals aboard, and +with the bote that brought the fresh provision we went on land to the +Towne, and went to see the Church of Sancta Eufemia, where we sawe the +bodie of the sayd Saint. + +[Sidenote: Monte de Ancona.] The 20 day wee departed from Rouignio, and +about noone we had sight of Monte de Ancona, and the hilles of Dalmatia, or +else of Sclauonia both at one time, and by report they are 100. miles +distant from ech other, and more. + +[Sidenote: Il Pomo.] The 21 we sayled still in sight of Dalmatia, and a +little before noone, we had a sight of a rocke in the midst of the sea, +called in the Italian il Pomo, it appeareth a farre off to be in shape like +a sugarloafe. [Sidenote: Sant Andrea.] Also we sawe another rocke about two +miles compasse called Sant Andrea; on this rocke is only one Monasterie of +Friers: [Sidenote: Lissa an Iland.] we sayled betweene them both, and left +S. Andrea on the left hand of vs, and we had also kenning of another Iland +called Lissa, all on the left hande, these three Ilands lie East and West +in the sea, and at the sunne setting we had passed them. [Sidenote: Lezina +Iland.] Il pomo is distant from Sant Andrea 18 miles, and S. Andrea from +Lissa ten miles, and Lissa from another Iland called Lezina, which standeth +betweene the maine of Dalmatia and Lissa, tenne miles. This Iland is +inhabited and hath great plentie of wine and frutes and hereagainst we were +becalmed. + +[Sidenote: Catza. Pelagosa.] The 22. we had sight of another small Iland +called Catza, which is desolate and on the left hand, and on the right +hand, a very dangerous Iland called Pelagosa, this is also desolate, and +lyeth in the midst of the sea betweene both the maines: it is very +dangerous and low land, and it hath a long ledge of rockes lying out sixe +miles into the sea, so that many ships by night are cast away vpon them. +There is betweene Catza and Pelagosa 30 miles, and these two Ilands are +distant from Venice 400. miles. [Sidenote: Augusta.] There is also about +twelue miles eastward, a great Iland called Augusta, about 14 miles in +length, somewhat hillie, and well inhabited, and fruitfull of vines, corne +and other fruit, this also we left on the left hand: and we haue hitherto +kept our course from Rouignio East southeast. [Sidenote: Meleda. Mount Sant +Angelo.] This Iland is vnder the Signiorie or gouernement of Ragusa, it is +distant from Ragusa 50 miles, and there is by that Iland a greater, named +Meleda, which is also vnder the gouernement of Ragusa, it is about 30 miles +in length, and inhabited, and hath good portes, it lyeth by East from +Augusta, and ouer against this Iland lyeth a hill called Monte S. Angelo, +vpon the coast of Puglia in Italy, and we had sight of both landes at one +time. + +The 23 we sayled all the day long by the bowline alongst the coast of +Ragusa, and towardes night we were within 7. or 8. miles of Ragusa, that we +might see the white walles, but because it was night, we cast about to the +sea, minding at the second watch, to beare in againe to Ragusa, for to know +the newes of the Turkes armie, but the winde blew so hard and contrary, +that we could not. [Sidenote: Ragusa paieth 14000. Sechinos to the Turke +yerely.] This citie of Ragusa paieth tribute to the Turke yerely fourteene +thousand Sechinos, and euery Sechino is of Venetian money eight liuers and +two soldes, besides other presents which they giue to the Turkes Bassas +when they come thither. The Venetians haue a rocke or cragge within a mile +of the said towne, for the which the Raguseos would giue much money, but +they doe keepe it more for the namesake, then for profite. This rocke lieth +on the Southside of the towne, and is called Il Cromo, there is nothing on +it but onely a Monasterie called Sant Ieronimo. The maine of the Turkes +countrie is bordering on it within one mile, for the which cause they are +in great subiection. This night we were put backe by contrarie winds, and +ankered at Melleda. + +The 24 being at an anker vnder Melleda, we would haue gone on land, but the +winde came so faire that we presently set sayle and went our course, and +left on the right hand of vs the forenamed Iland, and on the left hand +betweene vs and the maine the Iland of Zupanna, and within a mile of that +vnder the maine by East, another Iland called Isola de Mezo. This Iland +hath two Monasteries in it, one called Santa Maria de Bizo, and the other +Sant Nicholo. Also there is a third rocke with a Frierie called Sant +Andrea: these Ilands are from the maine but two miles, and the channell +betweene Melleda and Zupanna is but foure or fiue miles ouer by gesse, but +very deepe, for we had at an anker fortie fathoms. The two Ilands of +Zupanno and Mezo are well inhabited, and very faire buildings, but nothing +plentie saue wine onely. This night toward sunne set it waxed calme, and we +sayled little or nothing. + +The 24 we were past Ragusa 14 miles, and there we mette with two Venetian +ships, which came from Cyprus, we thought they would haue spoken with vs, +for we were desirous to talke with them, to knowe the newes of the Turkes +armie, and to haue sent some letters by them to Venice. About noone, we had +scant sight of Castel nouo, which Castell a fewe yeeres past the Turke +tooke from the Emperour, in which fight were slaine three hundred Spanish +souldiers, besides the rest which were taken prisoners, and made gallie +slaves. This Castell is hard at the mouth of a channell called Boca de +Cataro. The Venetians haue a hold within the channell called Cataro, this +channell goeth vp to Budoa, and further vp into the countrey. About sunne +set we were ouer against the hilles of Antiueri in Sclauonia, in the which +hilles the Venetians haue a towne called Antiueri, and the Turkes haue +another against it called Marcheuetti, the which two townes continually +skirmish together with much slaughter. At the end of these hils endeth the +Countrey of Sclauonia, and Albania beginneth. These hilles are thirtie +miles distant from Ragusa. + +The 27 we kept our course towards Puglia, and left Albania on the left +hand. The 28. we had sight of both the maines, but we were neere the coast +of Puglia, for feare of Foystes. It is betweene Cape Chimera in Albania and +Cape Otranto in Puglia 60 miles. Puglia is a plaine low lande, and Chimera +in Albania is very high land, so that it is seene the further. Thus sayling +our course along the coast of Puglia, we saw diuerse white Towers, which +serue for sea-markes. About three of the clocke in the after noone, we had +sight of a rocke called Il fano, 48 miles from Corfu, and by sunne set we +discouered Corfu. Thus we kept on our course with a prosperous winde, and +made our way after twelue mile euery houre. Most part of this way we were +accompanied with certaine fishes called in the Italian tongue Palomide, it +is a fish three quarters of a yard in length, in colour, eating, and making +like a Makarell, somewhat bigge and thick in body, and the tayle forked +like a halfe moone, for the which cause it is said that the Turke will not +suffer them to be taken in all his dominions. + +The 29 in the morning we were in sight of an Iland, which we left on our +left hande called Cephalonia, it is vnder the Venetians, and well +inhabited, with a faire towne strongly situated on a hill of which hill the +Iland beareth her name, it hath also a very strong fortresse or Castle, and +plentie of corne and wine, their language is Greek, it is distant from the +maine of Morea, thirtie miles, it is in compasse 80 miles. One houre within +night we sayled by the towne standing on the South cape of Cephalonia, +whereby we might perceiue their lights. There come oftentimes into the +creeks and riuers, the Turkes foystes and gallies where at their arriual, +the Countrey people doe signifie vnto their neighbours by so many lights, +as there are foistes or gallies in the Iland, and thus they doe from one to +another the whole Iland ouer. Aboute three of the clocke in the afternoone +the winde scanted, and wee minded to haue gone to Zante, but we could not +for that night. [Sidenote: Zante.] This Iland of Zante is distant from +Cephalonia, 12 or 14 miles, but the towne of Cephalonia, from the towne of +Zante, is distant fortie miles. This night we went but little forward. + +The 30 day we remained still turning vp and downe because the winde was +contrary, and towards night the winde mended, so that we entered the +channell betweene Cephalonia, and Zante, the which chanell is about eight +or tenne miles ouer, and these two beare East and by South, and West and by +North from the other. The towne of Zante lieth within a point of the land, +where we came to an anker, at nine of the clocke at night. + +[Sidenote: Iohn Locke, and fiue Hollanders goe on land.] The 31 about sixe +of the clocke in the morning, I with fiue Hollanders went on land, and +hosted at the house of Pedro de Venetia. After breakfast we went to see the +towne, and passing along we went into some of the Greeke churches, wherein +we sawe their Altares, images, and other ornaments. [Sidenote: Santa Maria +de la Croce.] This done, wee went to a Monasterie of Friers called Sancta +Maria de la Croce, these are westerne Christians, for the Greekes haue +nothing to doe with them, nor they with the Greekes, for they differ very +much in religion. There are but 2. Friers in this Friery. [Sidenote: The +tombe of M. T. Cicero.] In this Monasterie we saw the tombe that M. T. +Cicero was buried in, with Terentia Antonia, his wife. This tombe was +founde about sixe yeeres since, when the Monastery was built, there was in +time past a streete where the tombe stoode. At the finding of the tombe +there was also found a yard vnder ground, a square stone somewhat longer +then broad, vpon which stone was found a writing of two seuerall handes +writing, the one as it seemed, for himselfe, and the other for his wife, +and vnder the same stone was found a glasse somewhat proportioned like an +vrinall, but that it was eight square and very thicke, wherein were the +ashes of the head and right arme of Mar. T. Cicero, for as stories make +mention he was beheaded as I remember at Capua, for insurrection. And his +wife hauing got his head and right arme, (which was brought to Rome to the +Emperor) went from Rome, and came to Zante, and there buried his head and +arme, and wrote vpon his tombe this style M. T Cicero. Haue. [Marginal +note: Or, Aue.] Then followeth in other letters, _Et tu Terentia Antonia_, +which difference of letters declare that they were not written both at one +time. [Sidenote: The Description of the tombe.] The tombe is long and +narrowe, and deepe, walled on euery side like a graue, in the botome +whereof was found the sayd stone with the writing on it, and the said +glasse of ashes, and also another litle glasse of the same proportion, +wherein, as they say, are the teares of his friendes, and in those dayes +they did vse to gather and bury with them, as they did vse in Italy and +Spaine to teare their haire, to bury with their friendes. In the sayde +tombe were a fewe bones. After dinner we rested vntill it drew towards +euening by reason of the heat. [Sidenote: Sant Elia, but one Frier.] And +about foure of the clocke we walked to another Frierie a mile out of the +towne called Sant Elia, these are white Friers, there were two, but one is +dead, not sixe dayes since. This Frierie hath a garden very pleasant, and +well furnished with Orenges, Lemons, pomegranates, and diuers other good +fruites. The way to it is somewhat ragged, vp hill and downe, and very +stonie, and in winter very durtie. It standeth very plesantly in a clift +betweene two hilles, with a good prospect. From thence we ascended the hill +to the Castle, which is situated on the very toppe of a hill. [Sidenote: +The description of the Castle of Zante.] This Castle is very strong, in +compasse a large mile and a halfe, which being victualed, (as it is neuer +vnfurnished) and manned with men of trust, it may defende itselfe against +any Princes power. This Castle taketh the iust compasse of the hill, and no +other hill neere it, it is so steepe downe, and so high and ragged, that it +will tyre any man or euer he be halfe way vp. Very nature hath fortified +the walles and bulwarkes: It is by nature foure square, and it commandeth +the towne and porte. The Venetians haue alwayes their Podesta, or +Gouernour, with his two Counsellours resident therein. The towne is welle +inhabited, and hath great quantity of housholders. The Iland by report is +threescore and tenne miles about, it is able to make twentie thousand +fighting men. They say they have alwayes fiue or sixe hundred horsemen +readie at an houres warning. They saye the Turke hath assayed it with 100. +Gallies, but he could neuer bring his purpose to passe. It is strange to +mee how they should maintains so many men in this Iland, for their best +sustenance is wine, and the rest but miserable. + +The first of August we were warned aboord by the patron, and towards +euening we set sayle, and had sight of a Castle called Torneste, which is +the Turkes, and is ten miles from Zante, it did belong to the Venetians, +but they haue now lost it, it standeth also on a hill on the sea side in +Morea. All that night we bare into the sea, because we had newes at Zante +of twelue of the Turkes gallies, that came from Rhodes, which were about +Modon, Coron, and Candia, for which cause we kept at the sea. + +The second of August, we had no sight of land, but kept our course, and +about the thirde watch the winde scanted, so that we bare with the shore, +and had sight of Modon and Coron. + +The third we had sight of Cauo Mattapan, and all that day by reason of +contrary windes, which blew somewhat hard, we lay a hull vntill morning. + +The fourth we were still vnder the sayd Cape, and so continued that day, +and towardes night there grewe a contention in the ship amongst the +Hollanders, and it had like to haue bene a great inconuenience, for we had +all our weapons, yea euen our kniues, taken from vs that night. + +The fift, we sayled by the Bowline, and out of the toppe we had sight of +the Iland of Candia, and towardes noone we might see it plaine, and towards +night the winde waxed calme. + +The sixt toward the breake of day we saw two small Ilands called Gozi, and +towards noone we were betweene them: the one of these Ilands is fifteene +miles about, and the other 10. miles. In those Ilands are nourished store +of cattell for butter and cheese. There are to the number of fiftie or +sixtie inhabitants, which are Greekes, and they liue chiefly on milke and +cheese. The Iland of Candia is 700 miles about, it is in length, from Cape +Spada, to Cape Salomon, 300 miles, it is as they say, able to make one +hundred thousand fighting men. We sayled betweene the Gozi, and Candia, and +they are distant from Candia 5 or 6 miles. The Candiots are strong men, and +very good archers, and shoot neere the marke. This Ilande is from Zante 300 +miles. + +The seuenth we sayled all along the sayd Iland with little winde and +vnstable, and the eight day towards night we drew to the East end of the +Iland. + +The 9 and 10 we sayled along with a prosperous winde and saw no land. + +The 11 in the morning, we had sight of the Iland of Cyprus, and towards +noone we were thwart the Cape called Ponta Malota, and about foure of the +clocke we were as farre as Baffo, and about sunne set we passed Cauo +Bianco, and towards nine of the clocke at night we doubled Cauo de la +gatte, and ankered afore Limisso, but the wind blew so hard, that we could +not come neere the towne, neither durst any man goe on land. The towne is +from Cauo de le gatte twelue miles distant. + +The 12. of August in the morning wee went on land to Limisso: this towne is +ruinated and nothing in it worth writing, saue onely in the midst of the +towne there hath bene a fortresse, which is now decayed, and the wals part +ouerthrowen, which a Turkish Rouer with certaine gallies did destroy about +10. or 12. yeeres past. [Sidenote: Caualette is a certaine vermine in the +Island of Cyprus.] This day walking to see the towne, we chanced to see in +the market place, a great quantitie of certaine vermine called in the +Italian tongue Caualette. It is as I can learne, both in shape and bignesse +like a grassehopper, for I can iudge but little difference. Of these many +yeeres they haue had such quantitie that they destroy all their corne. They +are so plagued with them, that almost euery yeere they doe well nie loose +halfe their corne, whether it be the nature of the countrey, or the plague +of God, that let them iudge that can best define. But that there may no +default be laied to their negligence for the destruction of them, they haue +throughout the whole land a constituted order, that euery Farmor or +husbandmen (which are euen as slaues bought and sold to their lord) shall +euery yeere pay according to his territorie, a measure full of the seede or +egges of these forenamed Caualette, the which they are bound to bring to +the market, and present to the officer appointed for the same, the which +officer taketh of them very straight measure, and writeth the names of the +presenters, and putteth the sayd egges or seed, into a house appointed for +the same, and hauing the house full, they beate them to pouder, and cast +them into the sea, and by this pollicie they doe as much as in them lieth +for the destruction of them. This vermine breedeth or ingendereth at the +time of corne being ripe, and the corne beyng had away, in the clods of the +same ground do the husbandmen find the nestes, or, as I may rather terme +them, cases of the egges, of the same vermine. Their nests are much like to +the keies of a hasel-nut tree, when they be dried, and of the same length, +but somewhat bigger, which case being broken you shall see the egges lie +much like vnto antes egges, but somewhat lesser. This much I haue written +at this time, because I had no more time of knowledge, but I trust at my +returne to note more of this island, with the commodities of the same at +large. + +[Sidenote: The pilgrimes going to the Greeke churches.] The 13. day we went +in the morning to the Greeks church, to see the order of their ceremonies, +and of their communion, of the which to declare the whole order with the +number of their ceremonious crossings, it were to long. Wherefore least I +should offend any man, I leaue it vnwritten: but onely that I noted well, +that in all their Communion or seruice, not one did euer kneele, nor yet in +any of their Churches could I euer see any grauen images, but painted or +portrayed. Also they haue store of lampes alight, almost for euery image +one. Their women are alwayes separated from the men, and generally they are +in the lower ende of the Church. This night we went aboord the ship, +although the wind were contrary, we did it because the patrone should not +find any lacke of vs, as sometimes he did: when as tarying vpon his owne +businesse, he would colour it with the delay of the pilgrimes. + +The 14. day in the morning we set saile, and lost sight of the Island of +Cyprus, and the 15. day we were likewise at Sea, and sawe no land: and the +16. day towards night, we looked for land, but we sawe none. But because we +supposed our selues to be neere our port, we tooke in all our sailes except +onely the foresaile and the mizzen, and so we remained all that night. + +The 17. day in the morning, we kept by report of the Mariners, some sixe +miles from Iaffa, but it prooued contrary. But because we would be sure, +wee made to an anker seuen miles from the shore, and sent the skiffe with +the Pilot and the master gunner, to learne the coast, but they returned, +not hauing seen tree nor house, nor spoken with any man. But when they came +to the sea side againe, they went vp a little hill standing hard by the +brinke, whereon as they thought, they sawe the hill of Ierusalem, by the +which the Pilot knew (after his iudgement) that we were past our port. And +so this place where we rode was, as the mariners sayd, about 50. mile from +Iaffa. This coast all alongst is very lowe, plaine, white, sandie, and +desert, for which cause it hath fewe markes or none, so that we rode here +as it were in a gulfe betweene two Capes. + +[Sidenote: A great currant.] The 18. day we abode still at anker, looking +for a gale to returne backe, but it was contrary: and the 19. we set saile, +but the currant hauing more force then the winde, we were driuen backe, +insomuch that the ship being vnder saile, we cast the sounding lead, and +(notwithstanding the wind) it remained before the shippe, there wee had +muddie ground at fifteene fadome. The same day about 4. of the clocke, wee +set saile againe, and sayled West alongst the coast with a fresh +side-winde. [Sidenote: A Cat fallen into the sea and recouered.] It chanced +by fortune that the shippes Cat lept into the Sea, which being downe, kept +her selfe very valiauntly aboue water, notwithstanding the great waues, +still swimming, the which the master knowing, he caused the Skiffe with +halfe a dozen men to goe towards her and fetch her againe, when she was +almost halfe a mile from the shippe, and all this while the ship lay on +staies. I hardly beleeue they would haue made such haste and meanes if one +of the company had bene in the like perill. They made the more haste +because it was the patrons cat. This I haue written onely to note the +estimation that cats are in, among the Italians, for generally they esteeme +their cattes, as in England we esteeme a good Spaniell. The same night +about tenne of the clocke the winde calmed, and because none of the shippe +knewe where we were, we let fall an anker about 6 mile from the place we +were at before, and there wee had muddie ground at twelue fathome. + +The 20 it was still calme, and the current so strong still one way, that we +were not able to stemme the streame: moreouer we knew not where we were, +whereupon doubting whither wee were past, or short of our port, the Master, +Pilot, and other Officers of the shippe entered into counsell what was best +to doe, wherevpon they agreed to sende the bote on lande againe, to seeke +some man to speake with all, but they returned as wise as they went. Then +we set sayle againe and sounded euery mile or halfe mile, and found still +one depth, so we not knowing where we were, came againe to an anker, seuen +or eight miles by West from the place we were at. Thus still doubting where +we were, the bote went on land againe, and brought newes that wee were +short 80 miles of the place, whereas we thought wee had beene ouershot by +east fiftie miles. Thus in these doubts we lost foure dayes, and neuer a +man in the shippe able to tell where we were, notwithstanding there were +diuerse in the shippe that had beene there before. [Sidenote: They met with +two Moores on land.] Then sayd the Pylot, that at his comming to the shore, +by chance he saw two wayfaring men, which were Moores, and he cryed to them +in Turkish, insomuch that the Moores, partly for feare, and partly for +lacke of vnderstanding, (seeing them to be Christians) beganne to flie, yet +in the end with much a doe, they stayed to speake with them, which men when +they came together, were not able to vnderstand ech other, but our men made +to them the signe of the Crosse on the sande, to giue them to vnderstand +that they were of the shippe that brought the pilgrims. Then the Moores +knowing (as al the country else doth) that it was the vse of Christians to +go to Ierusalem, shewed them to be yet by west of Iaffa. Thus we remained +ail that night at anker, and the farther west that we sayled, the lesse +water we had. + +The 21 we set sayle againe and kept our course Northeast, but because we +would not goe along the shore by night, wee came to an anker in foure and +twentie fathome water. [Sidenote: The two towers of Iaffa. Scolio di Santo +Petro.] Then the next morning being the 22 we set sayle againe, and kept +our course as before, and about three of the clocke in the afternoone, wee +had sight of the two towers of Iaffa, and about fiue of the clocke, wee +were with a rocke, called in the Italian tongue, Scolio di Santo Petro, on +the which rocke they say he fished, when Christ bid him cast his net on the +right side, and caught so many fishes. This rocke is now almost worne away. +It is from Iaffa two or three mile: here before the two towers we came to +an anker. Then the pilgrimes after supper, in salutation of the holy lande, +sang to the prayse of God, Te Deum laudamus, with Magnificat, and +Benedictus, but in the shippe was a Frier of Santo Francisco, who for anger +because he was not called and warned, would not sing with vs, so that he +stood so much vpon his dignitie, that he forgot his simplicitie, and +neglected his deuotion to the holy land for that time, saying that first +they ought to haue called him yer they did beginne, because he was a Fryer, +and had beene there, and knewe the orders. + +[Sidenote: A messenger departeth for Ierusalem.] The 23 we sent the bote on +land with a messenger to the Padre Guardian of Ierusalem. [Sidenote: +Mahomet is clothed in green.] This day it was notified vnto mee by one of +the shippe that had beene a slaue in Turkie, that no man might weare greene +in this land, because their prophet Mahomet went in greene. This came to my +knowledge by reason of the Scriuanello, who had a greene cap, which was +forbidden him to weare on the land. + +The 24. 25. and 26 we taryed in the shippe still looking for the comming of +the Padre guardian, and the 26 at night we had a storme which lasted all +the next day. + +[Sidenote: The Guardian of Ierusalem commeth to Iaffa, with the Cady, and +Subassi.] The 27 in the morning, came the Cadi, the Subassi, and the +Meniwe, with the Padre guardian, but they could not come at vs by reason of +the stormy weather: in the afternoone we assayed to send the bote on land, +but the weather would not suffer us. Then againe towards night the bote +went a shore, but it returned not that night. [Sidenote: A cloud called of +the Italians Cion most dangerous.] The same day in the afternoone we sawe +in the element, a cloud with a long tayle, like vnto the tayle of a +serpent, which cloud is called in Italian Cion, the tayle of this cloud did +hang as it were into the sea: and we did see the water vnder the sayde +cloude ascend, as it were like a smoke or myste, the which this Cion drew +vp to it. The Marriners reported to vs that it had this propertie, that if +it should happen to haue lighted on any part of the shippe, that it would +rent and wreth sayles, mast, shroudes and shippe and all in manner like a +wyth: on the land, trees, houses, in whatsoeuer else it lighteth on, it +would rent and wreth. [Sidenote: A coniuration.] These marriners did vse a +certaine coniuration to breake the said tayle, or cut it in two, which as +they say doth preuaile. They did take a blacke hafted knife, and with the +edge of the same did crosse the said taile as if they would cut it in +twain, saying these words, Hold thou Cion, eat this, and then they stucke +the knife on the ship side with the edge towards the said cloude, and I saw +it therewith vanish in lesse than one quarter of an houre. But whether it +was then consumed, or whether by vertue of the Inchantment it did vanish I +knowe not, but it was gone. Hereof let them iudge that know more then I. +This afternoone we had no winde, but the sea very stormy, insomuch that +neither cheste, pot, nor any thing else could stand in the shippe, and wee +were driuen to keepe our meate in one hand, and the pot in the other, and +so sit downe vpon the hatches to eate, for stand we could not, for that the +Seas in the very port at an anker went so high as if wee had bene in the +bay of Portugall with stormy weather. The reason is, as the Mariners said +to me, because that there meete all the waues from all places of the +Straights of Gibralter, and there breake, and that in most calmes there go +greatest seas, whether the winde blow or not. + +The 28. the weather growing somewhat calme, we went on land and rested our +selues for that day, and the next day we set forward toward the city of +Ierusalem. + +What I did, and what places of deuotion I visited in Ierusalem, and other +parts of the Holy land, from this my departure from Iaffa, vntill my +returne to the said port, may briefly be seene in my Testimoniall, vnder +the hand and seale of the Vicar generall of Mount Sion, which for the +contentment of the Reader I thought good here to interlace. + +Vniuersis et singulis praesentes litteras inspecturis salutem in Domino +nostro Iesu Christo. Attestamur vobis ac alijs quibuscunque qualiter +honorabilis vir Iohannes Lok ciuis Londoniensis, filius honorabilis viri +Guilhelmi Lok equitis aurati, ad sacratissima terrae sanctae loca +personaliter se contulit, sanctissimum Domini nostri Iesu Christi +sepulchrum, equo die tertia gloriosus a mortuis resurrexit, sacratissimum +Caluariae montem, in quo pro nobis omnibus cruci affixus mori dignatus est, +Sion etiam montem vbi coenam illam mirificam cum discipulis suis fecit, et +vbi spiritus sanctus in die sancto Pentecostes in discipulos eosdem in +linguis igneis descendit, Oliuetique montem vbi mirabiliter coelos +ascendit, intemeratae virginis Mariae Mausoleum in Iosaphat vallis medio +situm, Bethaniam quoque Bethlehem ciuitatem Dauid in qua de purissima +virgine Maria natus est, ibique inter animalia reclinatus, pluraque loca +alia tam in Hierusalem ciuitate sancta terre Iudaeae, quam extra, a modernis +peregrinis visitari solita, deuotissime visitauit, pariterque adorauit. In +quorum fidem, ego frater Anthonius de Bergamo ordinis fratrum minorum +regularis obseruantiae prouinciae diui Anthonij Sacri conuentus montis Sion +vicarius (licet indignus) necnon aliorum locorum terrae Sanctae, apostolica +authoritate comissarius et rector, has Sigillo maiori nostri officij +nostraque subscriptione muniri volui. Datum Hierosolymis apud sacratissimum +domini coenaculum in saepe memorato monte Sion, Anno Domini millesimo +quingentesimo, quinquagesimo tertio, die vero sexto mensis Septembris. + +Frater Antonius qui supra. + +[Sidenote: The pilgrims returne from Ierusalem. Mount Carmel.] The 15. of +September being come from our pilgrimage, we went aborde our shippe, and +set saile, and kept our course West toward the Island of Cyprus, but al +that night it was calme, and the 16. the winde freshed, and we passed by +Mount Carmel. + +The 17. the winde was very scant, yet we kept the sea, and towards night +wee had a guste of raine whereby wee were constrained to strike our sailes, +but it was not very stormie, nor lasted very long. + +The 18. 19. 20. and 21. we kept still the sea and saw no land because we +had very little winde, and that not very fauourable. + +The 22. at noone the Boatswaine sent some of the Mariners into the boat, +(which we toed asterne from Iaffa) for certaine necessaries belonging to +the ship, wherein the Mariners found a certaine fish in proportion like a +Dace, about 6 inches long (yet the Mariners said they had seene the like a +foote long and more) the which fish had on euery side a wing, and toward +the taile two other lesser as it were finnes, on either side one, but in +proportion they were wings and of a good length. These wings grow out +betweene the gils and the carkasse of the same fish. [Sidenote: Pesce +columbini.] They are called in the Italian tongue Pesce columbini, for in +deede, the wings being spred it is like to a flying doue, they say it will +flie farre and very high. So it seemeth that being weary of her flight she +fell into the boate, and not being able to rise againe died there. + +The 23. 24. and 25. we sailed our direct course with a small gale of winde, +and this day we had sight of the Island of Cyprus. [Sidenote: Cauo de la +Griega.] The first land that we discouered was a headland called Cauo de la +Criega, and about midnight we ankered by North of the Gape. This cape is a +high hil, long and square, and on the East corner it hath a high cop, that +appeareth vnto those at the sea, like a white cloud, for toward the sea it +is white, and it lieth into the sea Southwest. This coast of Cyprus is high +declining toward the sea, but it hath no cliffes. + +The 26. we set saile againe, and toward noone we came into the port of +Salini, where we went on land and lodged that night at a towne one mile +from thence called Arnacho di Salini, this is but a village called in +Italian, Casalia. This is distant from Iaffa 250. Italian miles. + +The 27. we rested, and the 28. we hired horses to ride from Arnacho to +Sulina, which is a good mile. The salt pit is very neere two miles in +compasse, very plaine and leuell, into the which they let runne at the time +of raine a quantitie of water comming from the mountaines, which water is +let in vntil the pit be full to a certaine marke, which when it is full, +the rest is conueyed by a trench into the sea. The water is let runne in +about October, or sooner or later, as the time of the yeere doth afforde. +There they let it remaine vntill the ende of Iuly or the middest of August, +out of which pits at that time, in stead of water that they let in they +gather very faire white salt, without any further art or labour, for it is +only done by the great heate of the sunne. This the Venetians haue, and doe +maintaine to the vse of S. Marke, and the Venetian ships that come to this +Island are bound to cast out their ballast, and to lade with salt for +Venice. Also there may none in all the Iland buy salt but of these men, who +maintaine these pits for S. Marke. This place is watched by night with 6. +horsemen to the end it be not stolne by night. Also vnder the Venetians +dominions no towne may spende any salt, but they must buy it of Saint +Marke, neither may any man buy any salt at one towne to carie to another, +but euery one must buy his salt in the towne where he dwelleth. Neither may +any man in Venice buy more salt then he spendeth in the city, for if he be +knowen to carte but one ounce out of the due and be accused, hee looseth an +eare. The most part of all the salt they haue in Venice commeth from these +Salines, and they have it so plentifull, that they are not able, neuer a +yeere to gather the one halfe, for they onely gather in Iuly, August, and +September, and not fully these three moneths. Yet notwithstanding the +abundance that the shippes carie away yeerely, there remaine heapes like +hilles, some heapes able to lade nine or tenne shippes, and there are +heapes of two yeeres gathering, some of three and some of nine or tenne +yeeres making, to the value of a great somme of golde, and when the ships +do lade, they neuer take it by measure, but when they come at Venice they +measure it. This salt as it lyeth in the pit is like so much ice, and it is +sixe inches thicke: they digge it with axes, and cause their slaues to cary +it to the heapes. This night at midnight we rode to Famagusta, which is +eight leagues from Salina, which is 24 English miles. + +The 29 about two houres before day we alighted at Famagusta, and after we +were refreshed we went to see the towne. This is a very faire strong holde, +and the strongest and greatest in the Iland. The walks are faire and new, +and strongly rampired with foure principall bulwarkes, and bettweene them +turrions responding one to another, these walks did the Venetians make. +They haue also on the hauen side of it a Castle, and the hauen is chained, +the citie hath onely two gates, to say, one for the lande and another for +the sea, they haue in the towne continually, be it peace or warres, 800 +souldiers, and fortie and sixe gunners, besides Captaines, petie Captaines, +Gouernour and Generall The lande gate hath alwayes fiftie souldiers, pikes +and gunners with their harnes, watching thereat night and day. At the sea +gate fiue and twenties upon the walles euery night doe watch fifteene men +in watch houses, for euery watch house fiue men, and in the market place 30 +souldiers continually. There may no souldier serue there aboue 5 yeres, +neither will they without friendship suffer them to depart afore 5. yeres +be expired, and there may serue of all nations except Greekes. [Sidenote: +Morenigo.] They haue euery pay which is 45 dayes, 15 Morenigos, which is 15 +shillings sterling. [Sidenote: Solde of Venice] Their horsemen haue only +sixe soldes Venetian a day, and prouender for their horses, but truth I +maruell how they liue being so hardly fed, for all the sommer they feede +only vpon chopt strawe and barley, for hay they haue none, and yet they be +faire, fat and seruiceable. [Sidenote: Castellani] The Venetians send euery +two yeres new rulers, which they call Castellani. The towne hath allotted +it also two gallies continually armed and furnished. + +[Sidenote: Saint Katherens Chappel in old Famagusta.] The 30. in the +morning we ridde to a chappell, where they say Saint Katherin was borne. +This Chappell is in olde Famagusta, the which was destroyed by Englishmen, +and is cleane ouerthrowne to the ground, to this day desolate and not +inhabited by any person, it was of a great circuit, and there be to this +day mountaines of faire, great, and strong buildings, and not onely there, +but also in many places of the Iland. [Sidenote: Diuvers coines vnder +ground.] Moreouer when they digge, plowe, or trench they finde sometimes +olde antient coines, some of golde, some of siluer, and some of copper, yea +and many tombes and vautes with sepulchers in them. This olde Famagusta is +from the other, foure miles, and standeth on a hill, but the new towne on a +plaine. [Sidenote: Cornari, a family of Venice maried to king Iaques.] +Thence we returned to new Famagusta againe to dinner, and toward euening we +went about the towne, and in the great Church we sawe the tombe of king +Iaques, which was the last king of Cyprus, and was buried in the yere of +Christ one thousand foure hundred seuentie and three, and had to wife one +of the daughters of Venice, of the house of Cornari, the which family at +this day hath great reuenues in this Island, and by means of that mariage +the Venetians, chalenge the kingdome of Cyprus. + +The first of October in the morning, we went to see the reliefe of the +watches. That done, we went to one of the Greekes Churches to see a pot or +Iarre of stone, which is sayd to bee one of the seuen Iarres of water, the +which the Lord God at the mariage conuerted into wine. It is a pot of earth +very faire, white enamelled, and faireiy wrought vpon with drawen worke, +and hath on either side of it, instead of handles, eares made in fourme as +the painters make angels wings, it was about an elle high, and small at the +bottome, with a long necke and correspondent in circuit to the botome, the +belly very great and round, it holdeth full twelue gallons, and hath a +tap-hole to drawe wine out thereat, the Iarre is very auncient, but whether +it be one of them or no, I know not. The aire of Famagusta is very +vnwholesome, as they say, by reason of certaine marish ground adioyning +vnto it. They haue also a certaine yeerely sicknesse raigning in the same +towne, aboue all the rest of the Island: yet neuerthelesse, they haue it in +other townes, but not so much. It is a certaine rednesse and paine of the +eyes, the which if it bee not quickly holpen, it taketh away their sight, +so that yeerely almost in that towne, they haue about twentie that lose +their sight, either of one eye or both, and it commeth for the most part in +this moneth of October, and the last moneth: for I haue met diuers times +three and foure at once in companies, both men and women. [Sidenote: No +vitailes must be sold out of the city of Famagusta.] Their liuing is better +cheape in Famagusta then in any other place of the Island, because there +may no kinde of prouision within their libertie bee solde out of the Citie. + +The second of October we returned to Arnacho, where wee rested vntill the +sixt day. [Sidenote: Greate ruines in Cyprus.] This towne is a pretie +Village, there are thereby toward the Sea side diuers monuments, that there +hath bene great ouerthrow of buildings, for to this day there is no yere +when they finde not, digging vnder ground, either coines, caues, and +sepulcres of antiquities, as we walking, did see many, so that in effect, +all alongst the Sea coast, throughout the whole Island, there is much ruine +and ouerthrow of buildings, [Sidenote: Cyprus 36. yeres disinhabited for +lacke of water.] for as they say, it was disinhabited sixe and thirtie +yeres, before Saint Helens time for lacke of water. [Sidenote: Cypr. +ruinated by Rich. the I.] And since that time it hath bene ruinated and +ouerthrowen by Richard the first of that name king of England, which he did +in reuenge of his sisters rauishment comming to Ierusalem, the which +inforcement was done to her by the king of Famagusta. + +The sixt day we rid to Nicosia, which is from Arnacho seuen Cyprus miles, +which are one and twentie Italian miles. This is the ancientest citie of +the Iland, and is walled about, but it is not strong neither of walles nor +situation: It is by report three Cyprus miles about, it is not throughly +inhabited, but hath many great gardens in it, and also very many Date +trees, and plentie of Pomegranates and other fruites. There dwell all the +Gentilitie of the Island, and there hath euery Cauallier or Conte of the +Island an habitation. [Sidenote: A fountaine that watereth al the gardens +in the citie.] There is in this citie one fountaine rented by saint Marke, +which is bound euery eight dayes once, to water all the gardens in the +towne, and the keeper of this fountaine hath for euery tree a Bizantin, +which is twelue soldes Venice, and sixpence sterling. [Sidenote: A Bizantin +is 6. d. sterling.] He that hath that to farme, with a faire and profitable +garden thereto belonging, paieth euery yeere to saint Marke, fifteene +hundred crownes. The streetes of the citie are not paued, which maketh it +with the quantitie of the gardens, to seeme but a rurall habitation. But +there be many faire buildings in the Citie, there be also Monasteries both +of Franks and Greekes. [Sidenote: S. Sophia is a Cathedral church of +Nicosia.] The Cathedrall church is called Santa Sophia, in the which there +is an old tombe of Iaspis stone, all of one piece, made in forme of a +cariage coffer, twelue spannes long, sixe spannes broad, and seuen spannes +high, which they say was found vnder ground. It is as faire a stone as euer +I haue seene. + +The seuenth day we rid to a Greeke Frierie halfe a mile without the towne. +It is a very pleasaunt place, and the Friers feasted vs according to their +abilitie. These Friers are such as haue bene Priests, and their wiues dying +they must become Friers of this place, and neuer after eate flesh, for if +they do, they are depriued from saying masse: neither, after they haue +taken vpon them this order, may they marry againe, but they may keepe a +single woman. These Greekish Friers are very continent and chast, and +surely I haue seldome seen (which I haue well noted) any of them fat. + +The 8. day we returned to Arnacho, and rested there. [Sidenote: Monte de la +Croce.] The 9. after midnight my company rid to the hill called Monte de la +Croce (but I not disposed would not go) which hill is from Arnacho 15. +Italian miles. Vpon the sayd hill is a certaine crosse, which is, they say, +a holy Crosse. This Crosse in times past did by their report of the Island, +hang in the ayre, but by a certaine earthquake, the crosse and the chappeil +it hung in, were ouerthrowen, so that neuer since it would hang againe in +the aire. But it is now couered with siluer, and hath 3. drops of our +lordes blood on it (as they say) and there is in the midst of the great +crosse, a little crosse made of the crosse of Christ; but it is closed in +the siluer, you must (if you will) beleeue it is so, for see it you cannot. +This crosse hangeth nowe by both endes in the wall, that you may swing it +vp and downe, in token that it did once hang in the aire. This was told me +by my fellow pilgrimes, for I sawe it not. + +The 10. at night we went aboard by warning of the patron: and the 11. in +the morning we set saile, and crept along the shore, but at night we +ankered by reason of contrary windes. + +[Sidenote: Limisso.] The 12. we set saile toward Limisso, which is from +Salines 50. miles, and there we went on land that night. + +The 13. and 14. we remained still on land, and the 15. the patrone sent for +vs; but by reason that one of our company was not well, we went not +presently, but we were forced afterward to hire a boate, and to ouertake +the ship tenne miles into the sea. At this Limisso all the Venetian ships +lade wine for their prouision, and some for to sell, and also vineger. +[Sidenote: Carrobi.] They lade also great store of Carrobi: for all the +countrey thereabout adioning, and all the mountaines are full of Carrobi +trees, they lade also cotton wooll there. [Sidenote: Vulture.] In the sayd +towne we did see a certaine foule of the land (whereof there are many in +this Island) named in the Italian tongue Vulture. It is a foule that is as +big as a Swanne, and it liueth vpon carion. The skinne is full of soft +doune, like to a fine furre, which they vse to occupie when they haue euill +stomocks, and it maketh good digestion. This bird (as they say) will eat as +much at one meale as shall serue him fortie dayes after, and within the +compasse of that time careth for no more meate. The countrey people, when +they have any dead beast, they cary it into the mountaines, or where they +suppose the sayd Vultures to haunt, they seeing the carion doe immediately +greedily seize vpon it, and doe so ingraft their talents, that they cannot +speedily rise agayne, by reason whereof the people come and kill them: +sometimes they kill them with dogs, and sometimes with such weapons as they +haue. This foule is very great and hardy, much like an Eagle in the +feathers of her wings and backe, but vnder her great feathers she is onely +doune, her necke also long and full of doune. She hath on the necke bone, +betweene the necke and the shoulders a heape of fethers like a Tassell, her +thighs vnto her knees are couered with doune, her legs strong and great, +and dareth with her talents assault a man. [Sidenote: Great pleny of very +fat birds.] They haue also in this Island a certaine small bird, much like +vnto a Wagtaile in fethers and making, these are so extreme fat that you +can perceiue nothing els in all their bodies: these birds are now in +season. They take great quantitie of them, and they vse to pickle them with +vineger and salt, and to put them in pots and send them to Venice and other +places of Italy for presents of great estimation. They say they send almost +1200. Iarres or pots to Venice, besides those which are consumed in the +Island, which are a great number. These are so plentifull that when there +is no shipping, you may buy then for 10. Carchies, which coine are 4. to a +Venetian Soldo, which is peny farthing the dozen, and when there is store +of shipping, 2 pence the dozen, after that rate of their money. [Sidenote: +The Famagustans obserue the French statutes.] They of the limites of +Famagusta do keep the statutes of the Frenchmen which sometimes did rule +there. And the people of Nicosia, obserue the order of the Genoueses, who +sometimes also did rule them. All this day we lay in the sea with little +wind. + +The 16. we met a Venetian ship, and they willing to speake with vs, and we +with them, made towards each other, but by reason of the euil stirrage of +the other ship, we had almost boorded each other to our great danger. +[Sidenote: Cauo Bianco.] Toward night we ankered vnder Cauo Bianco, but +because the winde grew faire, we set saile againe presently. + +[Sidenote: Another Cion.] The 17. 18. 19, and 20 we were at sea with calme +sommer weather, and the 20. we had some raine, and saw another Cion in the +element. [Sidenote: A ship called el Bonna.] This day also we sawe, and +spake with a Venetian ship called el Bonna, bound for ciprus. + +The 21. we sailed with a reasonable gale, and saw no land vntil the 4. of +Nouember. [Sidenote: A great tempest.] This day we had raine, thunder, +lightening, and much wind and stormie weather, but God be praised we +escaped all dangers. + +[Sidenote: Candia, Gozi.] The 4. of Nouember we had sight of the Island of +Candia, and we fell with the Islands called Gozi, by south of Candia. +[Sidenote: Antonie Gelber departed this life.] This day departed this +present life, one of our company named Anthonie Gelber of Prussia, who +onely tooke his surfet of Cyprus wine. This night we determined to ride a +trie, because the wind was contrary, and the weather troublesome. + +The 5. we had very rough stormie weather. This day was the sayd Anthonie +Gelber sowed in a Chauina filled with stones and throwen into the sea. By +reason of the freshnes of the wind we would haue made toward the shore, but +the wind put vs to the sea, where we endured a great storme and a +troublesome night. + +The 6. 7. and 8. we were continually at the sea, and this day at noone the +wind came faire, whereby we recouered the way which we had lost, and sayled +out of sight of Candia. + +[Sidenote: Cauo Matapan. Modon.] The 9. we sailed all day with a prosperous +wind after 14. mile an houre: and the 10. in the morning, wee had sight of +Cauo Matapan, and by noone of Cauo Gallo, in Morea, with which land we made +by reason of contrary wind, likewise we had sight of Modon, vnder the which +place we ankered. This Modon is a strong towne, and built into the sea, +with a peere for litle ships and galleis to harbour in. [Sidenote: +Sapientia.] It hath on the South side of the chanell, the Iland of +Sapientia, with other litle Ilands all disinhabited. The chanell lieth +Southwest and Northeast betweene the Islands and Morea, which is firme +land. This Modon was built by the Venetians, but as some say it was taken +from them by force of the Turke, and others say by composition: [Sidenote: +Coron. Napolis de Romania.] in like case Coron, and Napolis de Romania, +which is also in Morea. This night the Flemmish pilgrimes being drunke, +would have slaine the patrone because he ankered here. + +The 11. day we set saile againe, and as we passed by Modon, we saluted them +with ordinance, for they that passe by this place, must salute with +ordinance, (if they haue) or els by striking their top sailes, for if they +doe not, the towne will shoot at them. [Sidenote: Prodeno. Zante and +Cephalonia.] This day toward 2. of the clocke wee passed by the Island of +Prodeno, which is but litle, and desert, vnder the Turke. About 2. houres +before night, we had sight of the Islands of Zante and Cephalonia, which +are from Modon one hundreth miles. + +The 12. day in the morning, with the wind at West, we doubled between +Castle Torneste, and the Island of Zante. [Sidenote: Castle Torneste vnder +the Turke.] This castle is on the firme land vnder the Turke. This night we +ankered afore the towne of Zante, where we that night went on land, and +rested there the 13. 14. and 15. at night we were warned aboord by the +patrone. This night the ship tooke in vitailes and other necessaries. + +The 16. in the morning we set saile with a prosperous wind, and the 17. we +had sight of Cauo de santa Maria in Albania on our right hand, and Corfu on +the left hand. This night we ankered before the castles of Corfu, and went +on land and refreshed our selues. + +[Sidenote: The description of the force of Corfu.] The 18. by meanes of a +friend we were licenced to enter the castle or fortresse of Corfu, which is +not onely of situation the strongest I haue seene, but also of edification. +It hath for the Inner warde two strong castles situated on the top of two +high cragges of a rocke, a bow shoot distant the one from the other: the +rocke is vnassaultable, for the second warde it hath strong walles with +rampiers and trenches made as well as any arte can deuise. For the third +warde and vttermost, it hath very strong walles with rampires of the rocke +it selfe cut out by force and trenched about with the sea. The bulwarkes of +the vttermost warde are not yet finished, which are in number but two: +there are continually in the castle seuen hundred souldiours. Also it hath +continually foure wardes, to wit, for the land entrie one, for the sea +entrie another, and two other wardes. Artillerie and other munition of +defence alwayes readie planted it hath sufficient, besides the store +remaining in their storehouses. The Venetians hold this for the key of all +their dominions, and for strength it may be no lesse. This Island is very +fruitfull and plentifull of wine and corne very good, and oliues great +store. This Island is parted from Albania with a chanell, in some places +eight and ten, and in other but three miles. Albania is vnder the Turke, +but in it are many Christians. All the horseman of Corfu are Albaneses; the +Island is not aboue 80. or 90. miles in compasse. + +The 19. 20. and 21. we remained in the towne of Corfu. + +The 22. day wee went aboord and set saile, the wind being very calme wee +toed the ship all that day, and toward Sunne set, the castle sent a +Fragatta vnto us to giue vs warning of three Foistes comming after vs, for +whose comming wee prepared and watched all night, but they came not. + +The 23. day in the morning being calme, wee toed out of the Streight, +vntill wee came to the olde towne, whereof there is no thing standing but +the walles. There is also a new Church of the Greekes called Santa Maria di +Cassopo, and the townes name is called Cassopo. It is a good porte. About +noone wee passed the Streight, and drew toward the ende of the Iland, +hauing almost no wind. This night after supper, by reason of a certaine +Hollander that was drunke, there arose in the ship such a troublesome +disturbance, that all the ship was in an vprore with weapons, and had it +not bene rather by Gods helpe, and the wisedome and patience of the +patrone, more then by our procurement, there had bene that night a great +slaughter. But as God would, there was no hurt, but onely the beginner was +put vnder hatches, and with the fall hurt his face very sore. All that +night the wind blew at Southeast, and sent vs forward. + +The 24. in the morning wee found ourselues before an Island called Saseno, +which is in the entrie to Valona, and the wind prosperous. + +The 25. day we were before the hils of Antiueri, and about sunne set wee +passed Ragusa, and three houres within night we ankered within Meleda, +hauing Sclauonia or Dalmatia on the right hand of vs, and the winde +Southwest. + +The 26. in the morning we set sayle, and passed the chanell between +Sclauonia and Meleda, which may be eight mile ouer at the most. This Iland +is vnder the Raguses. At after noone with a hard gale at west and by north +we entered the chanell betweene the Iland Curzola and the hilles of +Dalmatia, in which channell be many rockes, and the channell not past 3 +miles ouer, and we ankered before the towne of Curzolo. This is a pretie +towne walled about and built vpon the sea side, hauing on the toppe of a +round hill a faire Church. This Iland is vnder the Venetians, there grow +very good vines, also that part toward Dalmatia is well peopled and +husbanded, especially for wines. In the said Iland we met with the Venetian +armie, to wit, tennie gallies, and three foystes. All that night we +remained there. + +The 27 we set sayle and passed along the Iland, and towards afternoone we +passed in before the Iland of Augusta, and about sunne set before the towne +of Lesina, whereas I am informed by the Italians, they take all the +Sardinas that they spend in Italy. This day we had a prosperous winde at +Southeast. The Iland of Lesina is vnder the Venetians, a very fruitfull +Iland adioyning to the maine of Dalmatia, we left it on our right hand, and +passed along. + +[Sidenote: The gulfe of Quernero. Rouigno.] The 28 in the morning we were +in the Gulfe of Quernero, and about two houres after noone we were before +the cape of Istria, and at sunne set we were at anker afore Rouignio which +is also in Istria and vnder the Venetians, where all ships Venetian and +others are bound by order from Venice to take in their pilots to goe for +Venice. All the sommer the Pilots lie at Rouignio, and in winter at +Parenzo, which is from Rouignio 18 miles by West. + +[Sidenote: Parenzo.] The 29 we set sayle and went as farre as Parenzo, and +ankered there that day, and went no further. + +[Sidenote: S. Nicolo an Iland.] The 30 in the morning we rowed to Sant +Nicolo a litle Island hard by vninhabited, but only it hath a Monastery, +and is full of Oliue trees, after masse wee returned and went aboord. This +day we hired a Barke to imbarke the pilgrims for Venice, but they departed +not. In the afternoone we went to see the towne of Parenzo, it is a pretie +handsome towne, vnder the Venetians. After supper wee imbarked our selues +againe, and that night wee sayled towardes Venice. + +The first of December we past a towne of the Venetians, standing on the +entery to the Palude or marshes of Venice: which towne is called Caorle, +and by contrary windes we were driuen thither to take port. This is 60 +miles from Parenzo, and forty from Venice, there we remayned that night. + +The second two houres before day, with the winde at Southeast, we sayled +towards Venice, where we arriued (God be praysed) at two of the clocke +after dinner, and landed about foure, we were kept so long from landing, +because we durst not land vntill we had presented to the Prouidor de la +Sanita, our letter of health. + + * * * * * + +The first voyage or iourney, made by Master Laurence Aldersey, Marchant of + London, to the Cities of Ierusalem, and Tripolis, &c. in the yeere 1581. + Penned and set downe by himselfe. + +I departed from London the first day of April in the yeere of our Lord +1581, passing through the Nether-land and vp the riuer Rhene by Colen, and +other cities of Germanie. And vpon Thursday, the thirde day of May, I came +to Augusta, where I deliuered the letter I had to Master Ienise, and Master +Castler, whom I found very willing to pleasure me, in any thing that I +could or would reasonably demaund. He first furnished me with a horse to +Venice, for my money, and then tooke me with him a walking, to shew me the +Citie, for that I had a day to tary there, for him that was to be my guide. +He shewed me first the Statehouse, which is very faire, and beautiful: then +be brought mee to the finest garden, and orchard, that euer I sawe in my +life: for there was in it a place for Canarie birdes, as large as a faire +Chamber, trimmed with wier both aboue and beneath, with fine little +branches of trees for them to sit in, vhich was full of those Canarie +birdes. There was such an other for Turtle dooues: also there were two +pigeon houses ioyning to them, hauing in them store of Turtle dooues and +pigeons. In the same garden also were sixe or seuen fishponds, all railed +about, and full of very good fish. Also, seuen or eight fine fountaines, or +water springs, of diuers fashions: as for fruite, there wanted none of all +sorts, as Orenges, figges, raisons, wallnuts, grapes, besides apples, +peares, fillbirds, small nuts, and such other fruite, as wee haue in +England. + +Then did hee bring mee to the water tower of the same Citie, that by a +sleight and deuise hath the water brought vp as high as any Church in the +towne, and to tel you the strange deuises of all, it passeth my capacitie. +Then he brought me to another faire garden, called the Shooters hoose, +where are buts for the long bowe, the cross bowe, the stone bowe, the long +peece, and for diuers other exercises more. + +After this, we walked about the walles of the Citie, where is a great, +broade, and deepe ditch, vpon one side of the towne, so full of fish, as +euer I saw any pond in my life, and it is reserued onely for the States of +the Citie. And vpon the other side of the Citie is also a deepe place all +greene, wherein Deere are kept, and when it pleaseth the States to hunt for +their pleasure, thither they resort, and haue their courses with +grayhounds, which are kept for that purpose. + +The fift of May, I departed from Augusta towards Venice, and came thither +vpon Whitsunday the thirteenth of the same moneth. It is needlesse to +speake of the height of the mountaines that I passed ouer, and of the +danger thereof, it is so wel knowen already to the world: the heigth of +them is marueilous, and I was the space of sixe dayes in passing them. + +I came to Venice at the time of a Faire, which lasted foureteene dayes, +wherein I sawe very many, and faire shewes of wares. I came thither too +short for the first passage, which went away from Venice about the seuenth +or eight of May, and with them about three score pilgrims, which shippe was +cast away at a towne called Estria, two miles from Venice, and all the men +in her, sauing thirtie, or thereabout, lost. + +Within eight dayes after fell Corpus Christi day, which was a day amongst +them of procession, in which was shewed the plate and treasure of Venice, +which is esteemed to be worth two millions of pounds, but I do not accompt +it woorth halfe a quarter of that money, except there be more than I sawe. +To speake of the sumptuousnesse of the Copes and Vestments of the Church, I +leaue, but the trueth is, they be very sumptuous, many of them set all ouer +with pearle, and made of cloth of golde. And for the Iesuits, I thinke +there be as many at Venice, as there be in Colen. + +The number of Iewes is there thought to be 1000, who dwell in a certaine +place of the Citie, and haue also a place, to which they resort to pray, +which is called the Iewes Sinagogue. They all, and their offspring vse to +weare red caps, (for so they are commaunded) because they may thereby be +knowen from other men. For my further knowledge of these people, I went +into their Sinagogue vpon a Saturday, which is their Sabbath day: and I +found them in their seruice or prayers, very deuoute: they receiue the fiue +bookes of Moses, and honour them by carying them about their Church, as the +Papists doe their crosse. + +Their Synagogue is in forme round, and the people sit round about it, and +in the midst, there is a place for him that readeth to the rest: as for +their apparell, all of them weare a large white lawne ouer their garments, +which reacheth from their head, downe to the ground. + +The Psalmes they sing as wee doe, hauing no image, nor vsing any maner of +idolatrie: their error is, that they beleeue not in Christ, nor yet receiue +the New Testament. This Citie of Venice is very faire, and greatly to bee +commended, wherein is good order for all things: and also it is very strong +and populous: it standeth vpon the maine Sea, and hath many Islands about +it, that belong to it. + +To tell you of the duke of Venice, and of the Seigniory: there is one +chosen that euer beareth the name of a duke, but in trueth hee is but +seruant of his Seigniorie, for of himselfe hee can doe litle: it is no +otherwise with him, then with a Priest that is at Masse vpon a festiual +day, which putting on his golden garment, seemeth to be a great man, but if +any man come vnto him, and craue some friendship at his handes, hee will +say, you must goe to the Masters of the Parish, for I cannot pleasure you, +otherwise then by preferring to your suite: and so it is with the duke of +Venice, if any man hauing a suite, come to him and make his complaint, and +deliuer his supplication, it is not in him to helpe him, but hee will tell +him, You must come this day, or that day, and then I will preferre your +suite to the Seigniorie, and doe you the best friendship that I may. +Furthermore, if any man bring a letter vnto him, hee may not open it, but +in the presence of the Seigniorie, and they are to see it first, which +being read, perhaps they will deliuer it to him, perhaps not. Of the +Seigniory there be about three hundreth, and about fourtie of the priuie +Counsell of Venice, who vsually are arayed in gownes of crimsen Satten, or +crimsen Damaske, when they sit in Counsell. + +In the citie of Venice, no man may weare a weapon, except he be a souldier +for the Seigniorie, or a scholler of Padua, or a gentleman of great +countenance, and yet he may not do that without licence. + +As for the women of Venice, they be rather monsters then women. Euery +Shoomakers or Taylors wife will haue a gowne of silke, and one to carie vp +her traine, wearing their shooes very neere halfe a yarde high from the +ground: if a stranger meete one of them, he will surely thinke by the state +that she goeth with, that he meeteth a Lady. + +I departed from this citie of Venice, vpon Midsommer day, being +the foure and twentieth of Iune, and thinking that the ship would +the next day depart, I stayed, and lay a shippeboord all night, and +we were made beleeue from time to time, that we should this day, +and that day depart, but we taried still, till the fourteenth of July, +and then with scant winde we set sayle, and sayled that day and +that night, not aboue fiftie Italian miles: and vpon the sixteene +day at night the winde turned flat contrary, so that the Master +knewe not what to doe: and about the fift houre of the night, +which we reckon to be about one of the clocke after midnight, the +Pilot descried a saile, and at last perceiued it to be a Gallie of the +Turkes, whereupon we were in great feare. + +The Master being a wise fellowe, and a good sayler, beganne to deuise howe +to escape the danger, and to loose litle of our way: and while both he, and +all of vs were in our dumps, God sent vs a merry gale of winde, that we +ranne threescore and tenne leagues before it was twelue a clocke the next +day, and in sixe dayes after we were seuen leagues past Zante. And vpon +Munday morning, being the three and twentie of the same moneth, we came in +the sight of Candia which day the winde came contrary, with great blasts +and stormes, vntill the eight and twentie of the same moneth: in which +time, the Mariners cried out vpon me, because I was an English man, and +sayd, I was no good Christian, and wished that I were in the middest of the +Sea, saying, that they, and the shippe, were the worse for me. I answered, +truely it may well be, for I thinke my selfe the worst creature in the +worlde, and consider you your selues also, as I doe my selfe, and then vse +your discretion. The Frier preached, and the sermon being done, I was +demaunded whether I did vnderstand him: I answered, yea, and tolde the +Frier himselfe, thus you saide in your sermon, that we were not all good +Christians, or else it were not possible for vs to haue such weather: to +which I answered, be you well assured, that we are not indeede all good +Christians, for there are in the ship some that hold very vnchristian +opinions: so for that time I satisfied him, although (they said) that I +would not see, when they said the procession, and honoured their images, +and prayed to our Lady and S. Marke. + +There was also a Gentleman, an Italian, which was a passenger in the ship, +and he tolde me what they said of me, because I would not sing, Salue +Regina and Aue Maria, as they did: I told them, that they that praied to so +many, or sought helpe of any other, then of God the Father, or of Iesus +Christ his onely sonne, goe a wrong way to worke, and robbed God of his +honour, and wrought their owne destructions. + +All this was told of the Friers, but I heard nothing of it in three daies +after: and then at euening prayer, they sent the purser about with the +image of our Lady to euery one to kisse, and I perceiuing it went another +way from him, and would not see it: yet at last he fetched his course +about, so that he came to me, and offered it to me as he did to others, but +I refused it: whereupon there was a great stirre: the patron and all the +friers were told of it, and euery one saide I was a Lutheran, and so called +me: but two of the friers that were of greatest authoritie, seemed to beare +me better good will then the rest, and trauelled to the patron in my +behalfe, and made all well againe. + +The second day of August we arriued in Cyprus, at a towne called Missagh: +the people there be very rude, and like beasts, and no better they eat +their meat sitting vpon the ground, with their legges a crosse like +tailors, their beds for the most part be hard stones, but yet some of them +haue faire mattraces to lie vpon. + +Vpon Thursday the eight of August we came to Ioppa in a small barke, which +we hired betwixt Missagh and Salina, and could not be suffered to come on +land till noone the next day, and then we were permitted by the great +Basha, who sate vpon the top of a hill to see vs sent away. Being come on +land, we might not enter into any house for victuals, but were to content +our selues with our owne prouision, and that which we bought to carie with +vs was taken from vs. I had a paire of stirrops, which I bought at Venice +to serue me in my journey, and trying to make them fit for me, when the +Basha saw me vp before the rest of the companie, he sent one to dismount +me, and to strike me, whereupon I turned me to the Basha, and made a long +legge, saying, Grand mercie Signior: and after a while we were horsed vpon +litle asses, and sent away, with about fiftie light horsemen to be our +conduct through the wildernesse, called Deserta foelix, who made vs good +sport by the way with their pikes, gunnes, and fauchins. + +That day being S. Laurence day we came to Rama, which is tenne Italian +miles from Ioppa, and there we stayed that night, and payed to the captaine +of the castell euery man a chekin, which is seuen shillings and two pence +sterling. So then we had a new gard of souldiers, and left the other. + +The house we lodged in at Rama had a doore so low to enter into, that I was +faine to creepe in, as it were vpon my knees, and within it are three +roomes to lodge trauellers that come that way: there are no beds, except a +man buy a mat, and lay it on the ground, that is all the prouision, without +stooles or benches to sit vpon. Our victuals were brought vs out of the +towne, as hennes, egges, bread, great store of fruite, as pomgranates, +figges, grapes, oringes, and such like, and drinke we drue out of the well. +The towne it selfe is so ruinated that I take it rather to be a heape of +stones then a towne. + +Then the next morning we thought to haue gone away, but we could not be +permitted that day, so we stayed there till two of the clocke the next +morning, and then with a fresh gard of souldiers we departed toward +Ierusalem. We had not ridde fiue English miles, but we were incountred with +a great number of the Arabians, who stayed vs, and would not suffer vs to +passe till they had somewhat, so it cost vs for all our gard aboue twentie +shillings a man betwixt Ioppa and Ierusalem. These Arabians troubled vs +oftentimes. Our Truchman that payed the money for vs was striken down, and +had his head broken because be would not giue them as much as they asked: +and they that should haue rescued both him and vs, stood sill and durst do +nothing, which was to our cost. + +Being come within sight of Ierusalem, the maner is to kneele downe, and +giue God thankes, that it hath pleased him to bring vs to that holy place, +where he himselfe had beene: and there we leaue our horses and go on foote +to the towne, and being come to the gates, there they tooke our names, and +our fathers names, and so we were permitted to go to our lodgings. + +The gouernour of the house met vs a mile out of the towne, and very +curteously bade vs all welcome, and brought vs to the monasterie. The gates +of the citie are all couered with yron, the entrance into the house of the +Christians is a very low and narrow doore, barred or plated with yron, and +then come we into a very darke entry: the place is a monastery: there we +lay, and dieted of free cost, we fared reasonable well, the bread and wine +was excellent good, the chambers cleane, and all the meat well serued in, +with cleane linnen. + +We lay at the monasterie two days, Friday and Saturday, and then we went to +Bethlem with two or three of the friers of the house with vs: in the way +thither we saw many monuments, as: + +The mountaine where the Angell tooke vp Abacuck by the haire, and brought +him to Daniel in the Lions denne. + +The fountaine of the prophet Ieremie. + +The place where the wise men met that went to Bethlem to worship Christ, +where is a fountaine of stone. + +Being come to Bethlem we sawe the place where Christ was borne, which is +now a chappell with two altars, whereupon they say masse: the place is +built with gray marble, and hath bene beautifull, but now it is partly +decayed. + +Neere thereto is the sepulchre of the innocents slaine by Herod, the +sepulchres of Paul, of Ierome, and of Eusebius. + +Also a little from this monasterie is a place vnder the ground, where the +virgine Mary abode with Christ when Herod sought him to destroy him. + +We stayed at Bethlem that night, and the next day we went from thence to +the mountaines of Iudea, which are about eight miles from Ierusalem, where +are the ruines of an olde monasterie. In the mid way from the monasterie to +Ierusalem is the place where Iohn Baptist was borne, being now an olde +monasterie, and cattell kept in it. Also a mile from Ierusalem is a place +called Inuentio sanctae crucis, where the wood was found that made the +crosse. + +In the citie of Ierusalem we saw the hall where Pilate sate in iudgement +when Christ was condemned, the staires whereof are at Rome, as they told +vs. A litle from thence is the house where the virgin Mary was borne. + +There is also the piscina or fishpoole where the sicke folkes were healed, +which is by the wals of Ierusalem. But the poole is now dry. + +The mount of Caluaria is a great church, and within the doore thereof, +which is litle, and barred with yron, and fiue great holes in it to looke +in, like the holes of taverne doores in London, they sit that are appointed +to receiue our money with a carpet vnder them vpon a banke of stone, and +their legges a crosse like tailors: hauing paid our money, we are permitted +to go into the church: right against the church doore is the graue where +Christ was buried, with a great long stone of white marble ouer it, and +rayled about, the outside of the sepulchre is very foule, by meanes that +euery man scrapes his name and marke vpon it, and is ill kept. + +Within the sepulchre is a partition, and in the further part thereof is a +place like an altar, where they say masse, and at the doore thereof is the +stone whereupon the Angell sate when he sayde to Marie, He is risen, which +stone was also rowled to the doore of the sepulchre. + +The altar stone within the sepulchre is of white marble, the place able to +confeine but foure persons, right ouer the sepulchre is a deuise or +lanterne for light, and ouer that a great louer such as are in England in +ancient houses. There is also the chappell of the sepulchre, and in the +mids thereof is a canopie as it were of a bed, with a great sort of +Estridge egges hanging at it, with tassels of silke and lampes. + +Behinde the sepulchre is a litle chappell for the Chaldeans and Syrians. + +Vpon the right hand comming into the church is the tombe of Baldwine king +of France, and of his sonne: and in the same place the tombe of +Melchisedech. + +There is a chappell also in the same church erected to S. Helen, through +which we go vp to the place where Christ was crucified: the stayres are +fiftie steps high, there are two altars in it: before the high altar is the +place where the crosse stood, the hole whereof is trimmed about with +siluer, and the depth of it is halfe a mans arme deepe: the rent also of +the mountaine is there to be seene in the creuis, wherein a man may put his +arme. + +Vpon the other side of the mount of Caluarie is the place where Abraham +would haue sacrificed his sonne. Where also is a chapell, and the place +paued with stones of diuers colours. + +There is also the house of Annas the high Priest, and the Oliue tree +whereunto Christ was bound to when he was whipt. Also the house of Caiphas, +and by it the prison where Christ was kept, which is but the roome of one +man, and hath no light but the opening of the doore. + +Without Ierusalem in the vally of Iosaphat is a church vnder the ground, +like to the shrouds in Pauls, where the sepulchre of the virgin Mary is: +the staires be very broad, and vpon the staires going downe are two +sepulchres: vpon the left hand lieth Iosaphat, and vpon the right hand +lieth Ioachim and Anna, the father and mother of the virgin Mary. + +Going out of the valley of Iosaphat we came to mount Oliuet, where Christ +praied vnto his father before his death: and there is to be seene (as they +tolde me) the water and blood that fell from the eyes of Christ. A litle +higher vpon the same mount is the place where the Apostles slept, and +watched not. At the foot of the mount is the place where Christ was +imprisoned. + +Vpon the mountaine also is the place where Christ stood when he wept ouer +Ierusalem, and where he ascended into heauen. + +Now hauing seene all these monuments, I with my company set from Ierusalem, +the 20 day of August, and came againe to Ioppa the 22 of the same moneth, +where wee tooke shipping presently for Tripolis, and in foure dayes we came +to Mecina the place where the ships lie that come for Tripolis. + +The citie of Tripolis is a mile and a halfe within the land, so that no +ship can come further then Mecina: so that night I came thither, where I +lay nine daies for passage, and at last we imbarked our selues in a good +ship of Venice called the Naue Ragasona. We entred the ship the second of +September, the fourth we set saile, the seuenth we came to Salina, which is +140 miles from Tripolis: there we stayed foure dayes to take in more +lading, in which meane time I fell sicke of an ague, but recouered againe, +I praise God. + +Salina is a ruinated citie, and was destroyed by the Turke ten yeeres past: +there are in it now but seuenteene persons, women and children. A litle +from this citie of Salina is a salt piece of ground, where the water +groweth salt that raineth vpon it. + +Thursday the 21 of September, we came to Missagh, and there we stayed eight +dayes for our lading: the 18 of September before we came to Missagh, and +within ten miles of the towne, as we lay at an anker, because the winde was +contrary, there came a great boat full of men to boord vs, they made an +excuse to seeke for foure men which (they said) our ship had taken from +theirs about Tripolis, but our captaine would not suffer any of them to +come into vs. + +The next morning they came to vs againe with a great gally, manned with 500 +men at the least, whereupon our captaine sent the boat to them with twelue +men to know their pleasure: they said they sought for 4 men, and therefore +would talke with our maister: so then the maisters mate was sent them, and +him they kept, and went their way; the next morning they came againe with +him, and with three other gallies, and then would needes speake with our +captaine, who went to them in a gowne of crimson damaske, and other very +braue apparell, and fiue or sixe other gentlemen richly apparelled also. +They hauing the Turkes safe conduct, shewed it to the captaine of the +gallies, and laid it vpon his head, charging him to obey it: so with much +adoe, and with the gift of 100 pieces of golde we were quit of them, and +had our man againe. + +That day as aforesaid, we came to Missagh, and there stayed eight dayes, +and at last departed towards Candie, with a scant winde. + +The 11 day of October we were boorded with foure gallies, manned with 1200 +men, which also made a sleeuelesse arrant, and troubled us very much, but +our captaines pasport, and the gift of 100 chekins discharged all. + +The 27 of October we passed by Zante with a merrie winde, the 29 by Corfu, +and the third of Nouember we arriued at Istria, and there we left our great +ship, and tooke small boates to bring vs to Venice. + +The 9 of Nouember I arriued again at Venice in good health, where I staied +nine daies, and the 25 of the same moneth I came to Augusta, and staied +there but one day. + +The 27 of Nouember I set towards Nuremberg where I came the 29, and there +staied till the 9 of December, and was very well interteined of the English +marchants there: and the gouernors of the towne sent me and my company +sixteene gallons of excellent good wine. + +From thence I went to Frankford, from Frankford to Collen, from Collen to +Arnam, from Arnam to Vtreight, from Vtreight to Dort, from Dort to +Antwerpe, from Antwerpe to Flushing, from Flushing to London, where I +arriued vpon Twelue eue in safetie, and gaue thanks to God, hauing finished +my iourney to Ierusalem and home againe, in the space of nine moneths and +fiue dayes. + + * * * * * + +The passeport made by the great Maister of Malta vnto the Englishmen in the + barke Raynolds. 1582. + +Frere Hugo de Loubeux Verdala, Dei gratia sacrae domus hospitalis sancti +Ioannis Hierosolymitani, magister humilis, pauperumque Iesu Christi custos, +vniuersis et singulis principibus ecclesiasticis et secularibus, +archiepiscopis, episcopis, ducibus, marchionibus, baronibus, nobilibus, +capitaneis, vicedominis, praefectis, castellanis, admiralijs, et +quibuscunque triremium vel aliorum nauigiorum patronis, ac ciuitatum +rectoribus, potestatibus ac magistratibus, caeterisque officialibus, et +quibuscunque personis cuiusuis dignitatis, gradus, status et conditionis +fuerint, vbilibet locorum et terrarum constitutis, salutem. + +Notum facimus et in verbo veritatis attestamur, come nel mese di Maggio +prossime passato le nostre galere vennero dal viaggio di Barberia, doue +hauendo mandato per socorrere a vn galionetto de Christiani che hauea dato +trauerso in quelle parti, essendo arriuati sopra questa isola alla parte de +ponente trouarono vno naue Inglesa, sopra cargo de essa il magnifico +Giouanni Keale, et Dauid Filly patrono, volendo la reconoscere che naue +fosse, han visto, che se metteua in ordine per defendersi, dubitando che +dette nostre galere fossero de inimici: et per che vn marinaro riuoltose +contra la volonta de detti magnifico Giouanni Keale et Dauid Filly, habbi +tirato vn tiro di artiglieria verso vna de dette galere, et che non se +amangnaua la vela de la Maiestra secondo la volonta de detti magnifico +Giouanni Keale et Dauid Filly patrono, furimensata detta naue nel presente +general porto di Malta, secondo l'ordine del venerando Generale de dette +galere, et essendo qua, monsignor Inquisitore ha impedita quella per conto +del sancto officio, et si diede parte alla santita di nostro signor +Gregorio papa xiij. A la fin fu licenciata per andarsene al suo viaggio. +Han donque humilmente supplicato detti magnifico Giouanni Keale et Dauid +Filly per nome et parte delli magnifici Edwardo Osborn senatore et Richardo +Staper merchanti Inglesi della nobile citta di Londra, et anco di Tomaso +Wilkinson scriuano, piloti, nocheri, et marinari, gli volessimo dare le +nostre lettere patente et saluo condutto, accioche potranno andare et +ritornare quando gli parera commodo con alcuna roba et mercantia a loro +benuista: si come noi, essendo cosa giusta et che retornera commoda a +nostra relligione et a questi forrestieri, per tenor de li presenti se gli +habiamo concesse con le conditione pero infra scritte, videlicet: + +Che ogni volta che detti mercadanti con sopradetta naue o con altra non +porterano mercantie de contrabando, et che constara per fede authentica et +con lettere patente de sanita, poteran liberalmente victualiarse de tutte +le victuarie necessarie, et praticare in questa isola et dominij, et poi +partisene et seguire suo viaggio per doue volessero in leuante o altroue, +come tutti altri vaselli et specialmente de Francesi et aitri nationi, et +die venderi et comprare qual si voglia mercantia a loro benuista. + +Item, che potera portare poluere de canone et di archibuso, salnitro, +carboni di petra rosetta, platine de rame, stagno, acciale, ferro, carisee +commune, tela grossa bianca per far tende de galere, balle de ferro de +calibro, petre de molino fine, arbore et antenne de galere, bastardi et +alteri. Et in conclusione, hauenda visto che loro per il tempo che +restarano qua, si portorno da fideli et Catholici Christiani, et che sua +sanctita habbia trouata bono il saluo condutto del gran Turko a loro +concesso, per il timor della armata Turkesca et di altri vaselli de +inimici, inherendo alla volonta di sua sanctita, et massime per che hauera +de andare et passare per diuersi lochi et tanto lontani come Ingilterra, +Flandra, et tutti patri di ponente, et in altroue, a noi ha parso farle le +presente nostre lettere patente com fidele conuersatore nostro, accio piu +securamente et sensa obstaculo possa andare et ritornare quando li parera +con detta naue o con altre, a loro benuista. Per tanto donque tutti et +ciascun di voi sudetti affectuosamente pregamo, che per qual si voglia de +vostra iurisditione, alla quale detto magnifico Giouanni Keale et Dauid +Filly anome quo supra con la naue et marinari de detti loro principali o +altri caschera, nauigare, passare, et venire sicuramente, alla libera, +sensa alcuno disturbo o altro impedimento li lasciate, et facciate +lasciare, stare, et passare, tornare, et quando li parera partire, talmente +che per amore et contemplatione nostra il detto magnifico Giouanni Keale a +nome quo supra con le naue, marinari, et mercantia non habbi difficulta, +fastidio et ritentione alcuna, anzi se gli dia ogni agiuto et fauore, cosa +degnadi voi, giusta, et a noi gratissima, de recompensaruila con vagule et +maggior seruitio, quando dall'occasione ne saremo rechiesti. Et finalmente +commandammo a tutti et qual si voglia relligiosi et frati de nostra +relligione di qual si voglia conditione, grado et stato che siano, et a +tutti riceuitori et procuratori nostri in tutti et qual si voglia priorati +nostri deputati et deputandi in vertu di santa obedientia, et attuti nostri +vassalli et alla giurisditione di nostri relligione sogetti, che in tale et +per tale tenghino et reputino il detto magnifico Giouanni Keale a nome vt +supra, naue, marinari, et mercantia, sensa permittere, che nel detto suo +viaggio, o in alcun altro Iuogo sia molestato, o in qual si voglia manera +impedito, anzi rutte le cose sue et negotij loro sian da voi agioutati et +continuamente fauoriti. In cuius rei testimonium Bulla nostra magistralis +in cera nigra praesentibus est impressa. Datae Melitae in conuentu nostro die +duodecimo Mensis Iulij. 1582. + + +The same in English + +Frier Hugo of Loubeux Verdala, by the grace of God, master of the holy +house, the hospital of S. Iohn at Ierusalem, and an humble keeper of the +poore of Iesus Christ, to all and euery prince ecclesiastical and secular, +archbishops, bishops, Dukes, Marqueses, Barons, Capteines, Vicelords, +Maiors, Castellanes, Admirals, and whatsoeuer patrons of Gallies, or other +greater officers and persons whatsoeuer, of what dignitie, degree, state +and condition soeuer they be, dwelling in all places and landes, greeting. + +We make it knowne, and in the word of truth do witnesse, that in the moneth +of May last past, our gallies came on the voyage from Barbarie, where +hauing commandement to succour a little ship of the Christians which was +driuen ouer into that part being arriued vpon this Iland on the West part +they found one English ship vnder the charge of the worshipfull Iohn Keele, +and Dauid Fillie master: and our men willing to know what ship it was, they +seemed to put themselues in order for their defence, doubting that the said +our gallies were of the enemies, and therefore one mariner attempted +contrary to the will of the worshipfull Iohn Keele, and Dauid Fillie +maister: and had shot off a piece of artillerie against one of the said +gallies, and because she would not strike amaine her sayle, according to +the will of the saide worshipfull Iohn Keele, and Dauid Fillie master, the +said ship was brought backe again vnto the present port of Malta, according +to the order of the reuerend generall of the said gallies: and in being +there maister Inquisitor staid it by authoritie of the holy office, and in +that behalfe by the holinesse of our Lord pope Gregorie the thirteenth, in +the end was licenced to depart on her voyage. They therefore the said +worshipfull Iohn Keele and Dauid Fillie, in the name and behalfe of the +worshipfull master Edward Osborne and Alderman, and Richard Staper, English +marchants of the noble citie of London, haue humbly besought together with +Thomas Wilkinson the purser, pilots, master and mariners, that we would +giue our letters patents, and safe conducts, that they might goe and +returne, when they shall see opportunitie, with their goods and +marchandizes at their pleasure: whereupon the thing seeming vnto vs iust, +and that it might be for the profite of our religion, and of these +strangers, by the tenor of these presents we haue graunted the same to +them: yet, with the conditions hereunder written, viz. + +That euery time the said marchants of the said ship, or with any other, +shall not bring such merchandize as is forbidden, and that sufficient +proofe and letters testimonial it appeareth that they are free from the +infections of the plague, they may vituall themselues with all necessarie +victuals, and traffike with vs, and in this Iland and dominion, and +afterwarde may depart and follow their voyage whither they will into the +Luant or else where, as all other vessels, and especially of France and +other nations do, and sell and buy whatsoeuer marchandize they shal thinke +good. + +Item, that they may bring powder for cannon and harquebush, saltpeeter, +cole of Newcastle, plates of lattin, tinne, steele, yron, common karsies +white, course canuas to make saile for the gallies, balles of yron for +shot, fine milstones, trees and masts for gallies, litle and others, and in +conclusion, hauing seene that they for the time of their abode here, did +behaue themselues like faithfull and catholike Christians, and that his +holines hath allowed the safeconduct of the great Turke to them granted for +feare of the Turkish armie, and other vessels of the enemie, submitting our +selues to the pleasures of his holinesse, and especially because our people +haue occasion to passe by diuers places so farre off, as England, Flanders, +and all parts Westwards, and in other places, we haue vouchsafed to make +these our letters patents, as our faithfull assistant, so as more surely, +and with let they may go and returne when they shall thinke good, with the +said ship or with others at their pleasure. We therefore pray all and euery +of your subiects effectually that by what part soeuer of your iurisdiction, +vnto the which the said worshipful Iohn Keele and Daniel Fillie by name +abouesaid, with the ship and mariners of the said principall place or +other, shall haue accesse, saile, and passe, and come safely with libertie +without any disturbance or other impediment, that you giue leaue, and cause +leaue to be giuen that they may passe, stay and returne, and when they +please, depart, in such sort, that for loue and contention the said +worshipfull Iohn Keele, with the ship and mariners haue no let, hinderance, +or retention, also that you giue all helpe and fauour, a thing worthy of +your iustice, and to vs most acceptable, to be recompenced with equall and +greater seruice, when vpon occasion it shalbe required. + +And finally, we command all, and whatsoeuer religious people, and brothers +of our religion, of whatsoeuer condition, degree, and state they be, and +all other receiuers and procurators, in all and whatsoeuer our priories +deputed, and to be deputed by vertue of the holy obedience, and all our +people, and all that are subiect to the iurisdiction of our religion, that +in, and by the same they hold, and repute the said worshipfull Iohn Keele +in the name as abouesaid, the ship, mariners, and merchandize, without let +in the same their voyage, or in any other place, that they be not molested, +not in any wise hindered, but that in all their causes and businesse they +be of you holpen, and furthered continually. In witnesse whereof, our seale +of gouernment is impressed to these presents in blacke waxe. Giuen at Malta +in our Conuent, the twelfth of the moneth of Iuly, in the yeere 1582. + + * * * * * + +Commission giuen by M. William Harebourne the English Ambassadour, to + Richard Foster, authorising him Consul of the English nation in the parts + of Alepo, Damasco, Aman, Tripolis, Ierusalem, &c. + +I William Harborne, her Maiesties Ambassadour, Ligier with the Grand +Signior, for the affaires of the Leuant doe in her Maiesties name confirme +and appoint Richart Foster Gentleman, my Deputie and Consull in the parts +of Alepo, Damasco, Aman, Tripolis, Ierusalem and all other ports whatsoeuer +in the prouinces of Syria, Palestina, and Iurie, to execute the office of +Consull ouer all our Nation her Maiesties subiects, of what estate or +quality soeuer: giuing him hereby full power to defend, protect, and +maintaine all such her Maiesties subiects as to him shall be obedient, in +all honest and iest causes whatsoeuer: and in like case no lesse power to +imprison, punish, and correct any and all such as he shall finde +disobedient to him in the like causes, euen in such order as I myselfe +might doe by virtue to her Maiesties Commission giuen me the 26 of Nouember +1582, the copie whereof I haue annexed to this present vnder her Maiesties +Seale deliuered me to that vse. Straightly charging and commanding all her +Maiesties subiects in those parts, as they will auoid her Highnesse +displeasure and their owne harmes, to honour his authoritie, and haue due +respect vnto the same, aiding and assisting him there with their persons +and goods in any cause requisit to her Maiesties good seruice and +commoditie of her dominions. In witnesse whereof I haue confirmed and +sealed these these presents at Rapamat my house by Pera ouer against +Constantinople, to 20 of Iune 1583. + + * * * * * + +A letter of directions of the English Ambassadour to M. Richard Forster, + appointed the first English Consull at Tripolis in Syria. + +Cousin Forster, these few words are for your remembrance when it shall +please the Almighty to send you safe arriuall in Tripolis of Syria. When it +shall please God to send you thither, you are to certifie our Nation at +Tripolis of the certaine day of your landing, to the end they both may haue +their house in a readinesse, and also meet you personally at your entrance +to accompany you, being your selfe apparelled in the best manner. The next, +second, or third day, after your comming, giue it out that you be crazed +and not well disposed, by meanes of your trauell at Sea, during which time, +you and those there are most wisely to determine in what manner your are to +present your selfe to the Beglerbi, Cadi, and other officers: who euery of +them are to be presented according to the order accustomed of others +formerly in like office: which after the note of Iohn Blanke, late +Vice-consull of Tripolis for the French, deliuered you heerewith, is very +much: and therefore, if thereof you can saue any thing, I pray you doe it, +as I doubt not but you will. They are to giue you there also another +Ianizarie according as the French hath: whose outward procedings you are to +imitate and follow, in such sort as you be not his inferour, according as +those of our Nation heeretofore with him resident can informe you. Touching +your demeanour after your placing, your [sic--KTH] are wisely to proceede +considering both French and Venetian will haue an enuious eye on you: whome +if they perceiue wise and well aduised, they will feare to offer you any +iniurie. But if they shall perceiue any insufficiencie in you, they will +not omitte any occasion to harme you. They are subtile, malicious, and +disembling people, wherefore you must alwayes haue their doings for +suspected, and warily walke in all your actions: wherein if you call for +Gods diuine assistance, as doth become euery faithfull good Christian, the +same shall in such sort direct you as he shall be glorified, your selfe +preserued, your doings blessed, and your enemies confounded. Which if +contrarywise you omit and forget, your enemies malice shalbe satisfied with +your confusion, which God defend, and for his mercies sake keepe you. +Touching any outlopers of our nation, which may happen to come thither to +traffike, you are not to suffer, but to imprison the chiefe officers, and +suffer the rest not to traffike at any time, and together enter in such +bonds as you thinke meete, that both they shall not deale in the Grand +Signiors dominions, and also not harme, during their voyage, any his +subiects shippes, vessels, or whatsoeuer other, but quitely depart out of +the same country without any harme doing. And touching those there for the +company, your are to defend them according to your priuiledge and such +commandements as you haue had hence, in the best order you may. In all and +euery your actions, at any hand, beware of rashnesse and anger, after both +which repentance followeth. Touching your dealings in their affaires of +marchandise, you are not to deale otherwise then in secret and counsell. +You are carefully to foresee the charge of the house, that the same may be +in all honest measure to the companies profit and your owne health through +moderation in diet, and at the best hand, and in due time to prouide things +needfull to saue what may be: for he that buyeth euery thing when he needed +it, harmeth his owne house, and helpeth the retailer. So as it is, in mine +opinion, wisdome to foresee the buying of all things in their natiue soile, +in due time, and at the first hand euery yeere, as you are to send the +company the particular accounts of the same expenses. Touching your selfe, +your [sic--KTH] are to cause to be employed fifty or threescore ducats, +videlicet, twenty in Sope, and the rest in Spices, whereof the most part to +be Pepper, whereof we spend very much. The Spices are to be prouided by our +friend William Barrat, and the Sope buy you at your first arriuall, for +that this shippe lading the same commodity will cause it to amount in +price. From our mansion Rapamat, the fift of September 1583. + + * * * * * + +A commandement for Chio. + +Vobis, Beg et Cadi et Ermini, qui estis in Chio, significamus: quod +serenissimae Reginae Maiestatis Angliae orator, qui est in excelsa porta per +literas significauit nobis, quod ex nauibus Anglicis vna nauis venisset ad +portum Chico, et illinc Constantinopolim recto cursu voluisset venire, et +contra priuilegium detenuistis, et non siuistis venire. Haec praedictus +orator significauit nobis: et petiuit a nobis in hoc negocio hoc mandatum, +vt naues Anglicae veniant et rediant in nostras ditiones Caesareas. +Priuilegium datum et concessum est ex parte Serenitatis Caesareae nostrae: et +huius priuilegij copia data est sub insigni nostro: Et contra nostrum +priuilegium Caesareum quod ita agitur, quae est causa? Quando cum hoc mandato +nostro homines illorum ad vos venerint ex praedicta Anglia, si nauis venerit +ad portum vestrum, et si res et merces ex naue exemerint, et vendiderint, +et tricessimam secundam partem reddiderint, et res quae manserint +Constantinopolim auferre velint, patiantur: Et si aliquis contra +priuilegium et articulos eius aliquid ageret, non sinatis, nec vos facite: +et impediri non sinatis eos, vt recta Constantinopolim venientes in suis +negotiationibus sine molestia esse possint. Et quicunque contra hoc +mandatum et priuilegium nostrum aliquid fecerit, nobis significate. Huic +mandato nostro et insigni fidem adhibete. In principio mensis Decembris. + + * * * * * + +A description of the yeerely voyage or pilgrimage of the Mahumitans, Turkes + and Moores vnto Mecca in Arabia. + +Of the Citie of Alexandria. + +Alexandria the most ancient citie in Africa situated by the seaside +containeth seuen miles in circuite, and is enuironed with two walles one +neere to the other with high towers, but the walles within be farre higher +than those without, with a great ditch round about the same: yet is not +this Citie very strong by reason of the great antiquitie, being almost +halfe destroyed and ruinated. The greatnesse of this Citie is such, that if +it were of double habitation, as it is compassed with a double wall, it +might be truely said, that there were two Alexandrias one builded vpon +another, because vnder the foundations of the said City are great +habitations, and incredible huge pillers. True it is, that this part +vnderneath remaineth at this day inhabitable, because of the corrupt aire, +as also for that by time, which consumeth all things, it is greately +ruinated. It might well be sayd, that the founder hereof, as he was worthy +in all his enterprises, so likewise in building hereof he did a worke +worthy of himselfe, naming it after his owne name. This Citie hath one +defect, for it is subiect to an euill ayre, which onely proceedeth of that +hollownesse vnderneath, out of the which issueth infinite moisture: and +that this is true the ayre without doth evidently testifie, which is more +subtile and holesome then that beneath. The waters hereof be salt, by +reason that the soile of it selfe is likewise so. And therefore the +inhabitants, at such time as the riuer Nilus floweth, are accustomed to +open a great ditch, the head wherof extendeth into the said riuer, and from +thence they conueigh the same within halfe a mile of Alexandria, and so +consequently by meanes of conduct-pipes the water commeth vnto the +cesternes of Alexandria, which being full serue the citie from one +inundation to another. Within the citie is a Pyramide mentioned of in +Histories, but not of great importance. Without the citie is La colonna di +Pompeio, or the pillar of Pompey, being of such height and thicknesse, that +it is supposed there is not the like in the whole world besides. Within the +citie there is nothing of importance saue a litle castle which is guarded +with 60 Ianizaries. Alexandria hath three portes, one towardes Rossetto, +another to the land ward, and the third to the sea ward, which is called +Babelbar, without which appeareth a broad Iland called Ghesira in the +Moores tongue, which is not wholy an Iland, because a litle point or corner +thereof toucheth the firme lande, and therefore may be called Peninsula, +that is to say, almost an Iland. Hereupon are builded many houses of the +Iewes, in respect of the aire. This Peninsula is situate betweene two very +good ports, one of them being much more safe then the other, called The old +port, into the which only the vessels of Barbarie, and the sixe Gallies of +the Grand Signior deputeth for the guard of Alexandria doe enter. And this +port hath vpon the right hand at the mouth or enterance thereof a castle of +small importance, and guarded but with fifteene men or thereabouts On the +other side of this Iland is the other called The new port, which name is +not vnfitly giuen vnto it, for that in all mens iudgement in times past +there hath not beene water there, because in the midst of this port, where +the water is very deepe, there are discouered and found great sepulchres +and other buildings, out of the which are dayly digged with engines Iaspar +and Porphyrie stones of great value, of the which great store are sent to +Constantinople for the ornament of the Mesquitas or Turkish Temples, and of +other buildings of the Grand Signior. Into this port enter all such vessels +as traffique to this place. This port hath on ech side a castle, whereof +that vpon the Peninsula is called Faraone, vpon the toppe whereof euery +night there is a light set in a great lanterne for direction of the ships, +and for the guard thereof are appointed 200 Ianizaries: the other on the +other side is but a litle castle kept by 18. men. It is certeine, that this +hauen of Alexandria is one of the chiefest hauens in the world: for hither +come to traffique people of euery Nation, and all sorts of vessels which +goe round about the citie. It is more inhabited by strangers, marchants, +and Christians, then by men of the countrey which are but a few in number. +[Sidenote: Fontecho signifieth an house of trafique, as the Stilyard.] +Within the citie are fiue Fontechi, that is to say, one of the Frenchmen, +where the Consul is resident, and this is the fairest and most commodious +of all the rest. Of the other foure, two belong to the Venetians, one to +the Raguseans, and the fourth to the Genoueses. And all strangers which +come to traffique there, except the Venetians, are vnder the French +Consull. It is also to be vnderstood, that all the Christians dwell within +their Fontechi, and euery euening at the going downe of the sunne, they +which are appointed for that office goe about and shut all the gates of the +saide Fontechi outward, and the Christians shut the same within: and so +likewise they doe on the Friday (which is the Moores and the Turkes +Sabboth) till their deuotions be expired. And by this meanes all parties +are secure and voide of feare: for in so doing the Christians may sleepe +quietly and not feare robbing, and the Moores neede not doubt whiles they +sleepe or pray, that the Christians should make any tumult, as in times +past hath happened. + + +Of the coast of Alexandria. + +[Sidenote: Bichier.] On the side towardes Barbarie along the sea-coast for +a great space there is founde neither hold, nor any thing worthy of +mention: but on the other side towards Syria 13 miles from Alexandria +standeth a litle castle called Bichier kept by fiftie Turkes, which castle +is very olde and weake, and hath a port which in times past was good, but +at this present is vtterly decayed and full of sand, so that the vessels +which come thither dare not come neere the shoare, but ride far off into +the sea. [Sidenote: Rossetto] Fortie miles further is Rossetto, which is a +litle towne without walles, and is situate vpon the banke of Nilus three +miles from the sea, at which place many times they build ships and other +vessels, for gouernement whereof is appointed a Saniacbey, without any +other guard: it is a place of traffique, and the inhabitants are very rich, +but naughtie varlets and traytours. Further downe along the sea-side and +the riuer banke is another litle castle like vnto the abouesayde, and +because the Moores beleeue, that Mecca will in short time be conquered by +the Christians, they holde opinion, that the same being lost shall be +renued in this place of Rossetto, namely, that all their prayers, vowes, +and pilgrimages shall be transported to Rossetto, as the religious order of +Saint Iohn of the Rhodes is translated thence to Malta. Further forwarde +thirtie miles standes another castle of small importance called Brulles, +kept continually by fourtie Turkes, which hath a good and secure port, in +forme like to a very great lake or ponde, wherein is taken great quantitie +of fish, whith they salt, and the marchants of Candie and Cyprus come +thither to lade the same, and it is greatly esteemed, especially of the +Candiots, who hauing great abundance of wine aduenture abroad to seeke +meate fitte for the taste of the sayd wine. Distant from Brulles fiue and +thirtie miles there is anothet castle like vnto the abouesayd kept by an +Aga with fourtie men or thereabout. More within the lande by the riuers +side is Damiata an auncient citie enuironed with walles contayning fiue +miles in circuit, and but of small strength. For the gouernement of this +place is a Sanjaco with all his housholde and no other companie. This citie +is very large, delightfull, and pleasant, abounding with gardens and faire +fountaines. Other fortie miles further is Latma, a castle of very small +importance, and kept as other with fortie Turkes vnder an Aga. In this +place is no port, but a roade very daungerous, and without other +habitation. Passing this place we enter Iudea. But because our intent is to +reason simply of the voyage to Mecca, we will proceede no further this way, +but returning to our first way, let it suffice to say, that from Alexandria +to Cairo are two hundred miles, in which way I finde nothing woorthie of +memorie. + + +Of the mightie Citie of Cairo. + +Cairo containeth in circuit eighteene miles, being so inhabited and +replenished with people, that almost it cannot receiue more; and therefore +they haue begunne to builde newe houses without the citie and about the +walles. In Cairo are people of all Nations, as Christians, Armenians, +Abexins, Turkes, Moores, Iewes, Indians, Medians, Persians, Arabians, and +other sortes of people, which resort thither by reason of the great +traffique. This citie is gouerned by a Basha, which ministreth iustice, +together with the Cadie throughout the whole kingdome. Also there are two +and twentie Saniackes, whose office is onely to ouersee and guarde the +kingdome of euery good respect. There are also seuen thousand Turkes in +pay, to wit, three thousand Ianizaries, and foure thousand horsemen: The +rest of the people in Cairo are for the most part marchants which goe and +come, and the remnant are Moores and other base people. About two miles +from Cairo there is another little Cairo called The olde Cairo, which +containeth in circuit litle more then tenne miles, and the better halfe is +not inhabited, but destroyed, whereof I neede not make any other mention. +The new Cairo answereth euery yeere in tribute to the grand Signior, 600000 +ducates of gold, neat and free of all charges growing on the same, which +money is sent to Constantinople, about the fine of September, by the way of +Aleppo, alwayes by lande, vnder the custodie of three hundred horsemen, and +two hundred Ianizaries footmen. The citie of Cairo is adorned with many +faire Mesquitas rich, great, and of goodly and gorgeous building, among +which are fiue principall. The first is called Morastano, that is to say, +The hospitall, which hath of rent fiue hundred ducats of golde euery day +left vnto it by a king of Damasco from auncient times; which king hauing +conquered Cairo, for the space of fiue daies continually put the people +thereof to the sword, and in the end repenting him of so great +manslaughter, caused this cruelty to cease, and to obtaine remission for +this sinne committed, caused this hospitall to be built, enriching it as is +abouesaid. The second famous monument of Cairo is called Neffisa, of one +Neffisa buried there, who was a Dame of honour, and mooued by lust, yeelded +her body voluntarily without rewarde, to any that required the same, and +sayde she bestowed this almes for the loue of her Prophet Mahomet, and +therefore at this day they adore her, reuerence her, and finally haue +canonized her for a Saint, affirming that shee did many miracles. The third +is called Zauia della Innachari, who was one of the foure Doctors in the +law. The fourth is called Imamsciafij, where is buried Sciafij the second +Doctor of this law. Of the other two Doctors one is buried in Damasco, the +other in Aleppo. The fift and last famous monument is Giamalazar, that is, +the house of Lazarus: and this is the generall Vniuersity of the whole +kingdome of Egypt. [Sidenote: 1566.] In this place Anno 1566 in the moneth +of Ianuary by misfortune of fire were burned nine thousand bookes of great +value, as well for that they were written by hand, as also wrought so +richly with golde, that they were worth 300 and 400 ducats a piece, one +with another. And because it could neuer be knowen yet how this fire +beganne, they haue and doe holde the same for a most sinister augurie, and +an euident and manifest signe of their vtter ruine. The houses of Cairo +without are very faire, and within the greater number richly adorned with +hangings wrought with golde. Euery person which resorteth to this place for +traffiques sake, is bound to pay halfe a duckat, except the gentlemen +Venetians, Siotes, and Rhaguseans, because they are tributarie to the Grand +Signior. [Sidenote: The description of Cairo.] Cairo is distant from the +riuer Nilus a mile and more, being situate on a plaine, saue that on the +one side it hath a faire little hill, on the toppe, whereof stands a faire +castle, but not strong, for that it may be battered on euery side, but very +rich and large, compassed about with faire gardens into the which they +conueigh water for their necessitie out of Nilus, with certaine wheeles and +other like engines. This magnificent citie is adorned with very fruitfull +gardens both pleasant and commodious, with great plenty of pondes to water +the same. Notwithstanding the great pleasures of Cairo are in the moneth of +August, when by meanes of the great raine in Ethiopia the riuer Nilus +ouerfloweth apd watereth all the countrey, and then they open the mouth of +a great ditch, which extendeth into the riuer, and passeth through the +midst of the citie, and entring there are innumerable barkes rowing too and +fro laden with gallant girles and beautifull dames, which with singing, +eating, drinking and feasting, take their solace. The women of this +countrey are most beautifull, and goe in rich attire bedeked with gold, +pretious stones, and iewels of great value, but chiefely perfumed with +odours, and are very libidinous, and the men likewise, but foule and hard +fauoured. The soile is very fertile and abundant, the flesh fat which they +sell without bones, their candles they make of the marowe of cattell, +because the Moores eate the tallow. They vse also certaine litle furnaces +made of purpose, vnder the which they make fire, putting into the furnace +foure or fiue hundred egges, and the said fire they nourish by litle and +litle, vntill the chickens be hatched, which after they be hatched, and +become somewhat bigger, they sell them by measure in such sort, as we sell +and measure nuts and chestnuts and such like. + + +Of certaine notable monuments without the citie of Cairo. + +Without the Citie, sixe miles higher into the land, are to be seene neere +vnto the riuer diuerse Piramides, among which are three marueilous great, +and very artificially wrought. Out of one of these are dayly digged the +bodies of auncient men, not rotten, but all whole, the cause whereof is the +qualitie of the Egyptian soile, which will not consume the flesh of man, +but rather dry and harden the same, and so alwayes conserueth it. And these +dead bodies are the Mummie which the Phisitians and Apothecaries doe +against our willes make vs to swallow. Also by digging in these Pyramides +oftentimes are found certaine Idoles or Images of gold, siluer, and other +mettall, but vnder the other piramides the bodies are not taken vp so whole +as in this, but there are found legges and armes comparable to the limmes +of giants. Neare to these piramides appeareth out of the sand a great head +of stone somewhat like marble, which is discouered so farre as the necke +ioyneth with the shoulders, being all whole, sauing that it wanteth a +little tippe of the nose. The necke of this head contayneth in circuit +about sixe and thirty foot, so that it may be according to the necke +considered, what greatnesse the head is of. The riuer Nilus is a mile +broad, wherein are very many great Croccodiles from Cairo vpward, but lower +than Cairo passeth no such creature: and this, they say, is by reason of an +inchantment made long since which hindereth their passage for comming any +lower then Cairo. Moreouer of these creatures there are sometimes found +some of an incredible bignesse, that is to say, of fourtie foot about. The +males haue their members like to a man, and the females like to a woman. +These monsters oftentimes issue out of the water to feede, and finding any +small beasts, as sheepe, lambes, goates, or other like, doe great harme. +And whiles they are foorth of the water, if they happen at vnawares vpon +any man, woman or childe, whom they can ouercome, they spare not their +liues. In the yeere of our Lord one thousand fiue hundred and sixtie it +happened, that certaine poore Christians trauelling by Cairo towardes the +countrey of Prete Ianni to rescue certaine slaues, were guided by a Chaus, +and iourneyed alongst the banke of the said riuer. The Chaus remained +lingering alone behinde to make his prayers (as their custome is) at a +place called Tana, whom being busie in his double deuotion one of these +Crocodiles ceazed by the shoulders, and drew him vnder water, so that he +was neuer after seene. And for this cause they haue made in sundry places +certaine hedges as bankes within the water, so that betwixt the hedge and +banke of the riuer there remaineth so much water, that the women washing +may take water without danger at their pleasure. This countrey is so +fruitfull, that it causeth the women as other creatures to bring foorth +one, two, and oft-times three at a birth. Fiue miles southwarde of Cairo is +a place called Matarea, where the balme is refined: and therefore some will +say, that the trees which beare the balme growe in the said place, wherein +they are deceiued: for the sayde trees growe two dayes iourney from Mecca, +in a place called Bedrihone, which yeeldeth balme in great plenty, but +saluage, wilde, and without vertue, and therefore the Moores carying the +same within litle chests from Bedrihone to Matarea, where the trees being +replanted (be it by vertue of the soyle, or the water, aire, or any other +thing whatsoeuer) it sufficeth that heare they beare the true balme and +licour so much in these dayes esteemed of. In this place of Matarea there +are certaine little houses, with most goodly gardens, and a chappell of +antiquity, where the very Moores themselues affirme, that the mother of the +blessed Christ fleeing from the fury of wicked Herode there saued her selfe +with the childe, wherein that saying of the Prophet was fulfilled, Ex +AEgypto vocaui fillium meum. The which Chappell in the yeare of our Lorde +one thousand fiue hundred and foure, the Magnifico Daniel Barbaro first +Consull of that place went to visite, and caused it to be renued and +reedified, so that in these dayes there resort thither many Christians, who +oftentimes bring with them a Priest, to say masse there. Also about an +Harque-buz-shotte from Matarea is a spire of great height like to that at +Rome, and more beautifull to beholde. Neere vnto the olde Cairo are yet +twelue storehouses of great antiquitie, but now very much decayed, and +these till late dayes serued to keepe corne for behoofe of the kingdome, +concerning which many are of opinion, that the founder hereof was Ioseph +the sonne of Iacob, for consideration of the seuen deare yeares. [Sidenote: +Olde Thebes.] Also passing higher vp by the banke of Nilus, there is to bee +seene a fayre Citie ouerflowed with water, the which at such time as Nilus +floweth lyeth vnder water, but when the water returneth to the marke, there +plainely appeare princely palaces, and stately pillars, being of some +called Thebes, where they say that Pharao was resident. Moroeuer three +dayes iourney higher vp are two great images of speckled marble, all whole, +and somewhat sunke into the earth, being things wonderfull to consider of, +for the nose of either is two spannes and a halfe long, and the space from +one eare to the other conteineth tenne spannes, the bodies being +correspondent to their heads, and grauen in excellent proportion, so that +they are shapes of maruellous hugenesse, and these they call The wife, and +The daughter of Pharao. + + +Of the patriarke of Greece. + +In Cairo are two Patriarkes, one of the Greekes, and another of the +Iacobites. The Greeke Patriarke called Gioechni, being about the age of one +hundred and thirteene yeeres, was a very good and holy man. They say, that +when Soldan Gauri of Egypt reigned, there was done this miracle following; +this good patriarke being enuied at by the Iewes of the countrey, for none +other cause, but for his good workes, and holy life, it happened (I say) +that being in disputation with certaine of the Hebrewes in presence of the +Sultan, and reasoning of their lawe and faith, it was sayd vnto him by one +of these Miscreants: sith thou beleeuest in the faith of Christ, take and +drinke this potion which I will giue thee; and if thy Christ be true +Messias and true God, he will (sayd he) deliuer thee from daunger. To whom +the auncient patriarke answered, that he was content: whereupon that cursed +Iewe brought him a cuppe of the most venemous and deadly poyson that could +be found, which the holy Patriarke hauing perceiued, said: In the name of +the father, of the sonne, and of the holy Ghost: and hauing so sayde he +dranke it quite vp; which done, he tooke a droppe of pure water, putting it +into that very cup, and gaue it vnto the Iewe, saying vnto him, I in the +name of my Christe haue drunke thy poyson, and therefore in the name of thy +expected Messias drinke this water of mine within thine owne cuppe. +Whereupon the Iewe tooke the cup out of the hand of the Patriarke, and +hauing drunke the water, within halfe an houre burst a sunder. And the +Patriarke had none other hurt, saue that he became somewhat pale in sight, +and so remained euer after. And this miracle (which meriteth to be called +no lesse) was done to the great commendation of the holy Patriarke in the +presence of a thousand persons, and namely of the Soldan of Egypt: who +seeing the despight of the Iewes, vnto their owne cost and confusion +compelled them to make the conduct, which with so many engines commeth into +the castle from Nilus aboue mentioned. And this triumphant Patriarke not +long since was aliue, and in perfect health, which God continue long time. + + +Of the preparation of the Carouan to goe to Mecca. + +As touching the Carouan which goeth to Mecca, it is to be vnderstoode, that +the Mahometans obserue a kinde of lent continuing one whole moone, and +being a moueable ceremonie, which sometimes falleth high, sometimes lowe in +the yeere called in their tongue Ramazan, and their feast is called Bairam. +During this time of lent all they which intende to goe vnto Mecca resort +vnto Cairo, because that twentie dayes after the feast the Carouan is +readie to depart on the voyage: and thither resort a great multitude of +people from Asia, Grecia, and Barbaria to goe on this voyage, some mooued +by deuotion, and some for traffiques sake, and some to passe away the time. +Nowe, within fewe dayes after the feast they which goe on the voyage depart +out of the citie two leagues vnto a place called Birca, where they expect +the Captaine of the Carouan. This place hath a great pond caused by the +inundation of Nilus, and so made that the camels and other beastes may +drinke therein: whereof, namely, of Mules, Camels, and Dromedaries there +are at least fortie thousand, and the persons which followe the Carouan +euerie yeere are about fiftie thousand, fewe more or lesse, according to +the times. Moreouer euery three yeeres they renue the Captaine of the +Carouan, called in the Arabian tongue Amarilla Haggi, that is, the Captaine +of the Pilgrimes, to whom the Grand Signior giueth euery voyage eighteene +purses, conteyning each of them sixe hundred twentie and fiue ducates of +golde, and these be for the behoofe of the Carouan, and also to doe almes +vnto the needfull pilgrimes. This Captaine, besides other seruingmen which +follow him, hath also foure Chausi to serue him. Likewise he hath with him +for the securitie of the Carouan foure hundred souldiers, to wit, two +hundred Spachi or horsemen mounted on Dromedaries, and two hundred +Ianizaries riding vpon Camels. The Chausi and the Spachi are at the charge +of the Captaine, but the Ianizaries not so, for their prouision is made +them from Cairo. The Spachi weare caps or bonnets like to the caps of +Sergeants, but the Ianizaries after another sort, with a lappe falling +downe behinde like a French-hoode, and hauing before a great piece of +wrought siluer on their heads. The charge of these is to cause the Carouan +to march in good array when neede requireth; these are not at the +commaundement of any but of the Captaine of the Carouan. Moreouer the +Captaine hath for his guide eight pilots, the office of whom is alwayes +stable and firme from heire to heire, and these goe before guiding the +Carouan, and shewing the way, as being well experienced in the place, and +in the night they gouerne them as the mariners, by the starre. [Sidenote: +Pieces of dry wood in stead of torches.] These also vse to sende before +foure or fiue men carying pieces of dry wood which giue light, because they +should not goe out of the way, and if at any time through their ill hap +they wander astray out of the way, they are caste downe and beaten with so +many bastonadoes vpon the soles of their feete, as serue them for a +perpetuall remembrance. The Captaine of the Carouan hath his Lieutenant +accompanied continually with fifteene Spachi, and he hath the charge to set +the Carouan in order, and to cause them to depart on their iourney when +neede requireth: and during the voyage their office is some whiles to goe +before with the forewarde, sometimes to come behinde with the rereward, +sometimes to march on the one side, and sometimes on the other, to spy, +that the coast be cleare. The Carouan carrieth with it sixe pieces of +ordinance drawen by 12 camels, which serue to terrifie the Arabians, as +also to make triumph at Mecca, and other places. The marchants which +followe the Carouan, some carry for marchandise cloth of silke, some +Corall, some tinne, others wheat, rise, and all sorts of graine. Some sell +by the way, some at Mecca, so that euery one bringeth something to gaine +by, because all marchandise that goeth by land payeth no custome, but that +which goeth by sea is bound to pay tenne in the hundred. + + +The beginning of the voyage. + +The feast before the Carouan setteth forth, the Captaine with all his +retinue and officers resort vnto the castle of Cairo before the Basha, +which giueth vnto euery man a garment, and that of the Captaine is wrought +with golde, and the others are serued according to their degree. Moreouer +he deliuereth vnto him the Chisua Talnabi, which signifieth in the Arabian +tongue, The garment of the Prophet: this vesture is of silke, wrought in +the midst with letters of golde, which signifie: La illa ill'alla Mahumet +Resullala: that is to say, There are no gods but God, and his ambassadour +Mahumet. This garment is made of purpose to couer from top to botome a +litle house in Mecca standing in the midst of the Mesquita, the which house +(they say) was builded by Abraham or by his sonne Ismael. After this he +deliuereth to him a gate made of purpose for the foresaid house of Abraham +wrought all with fine golde, and being of excellent workmanship, and it is +a thing of great value. Besides, he deliuereth vnto him a couering of +greene veluet made in maner of a pyramis, about nine palmes high, and +artificially wrought with most fine golde, and this is to couer the tombe +of their prophet within Medina, which tombe is built in manner of a +pyramis: and besides that couering there are brought many others of golde +and silke, for the ornament of the sayde tombe. Which things being +consigned, the Basha departeth not from his place; but the Captaine of the +Carouan taketh his leaue with all his officers and souldiers, and departeth +accompanied with all the people of Cairo orderly in manner of a procession, +with singing, shouting and a thousand other ceremonies too long to recite. +From the castle they goe to a gate of the citie called Bab-Nassera, without +the which standes a Mosquita, and therein they lay vp the sayd vestures +very well kept and guarded. And of this ceremony they make so great +account, that the world commeth to see this sight, yea the women great with +childe, and others with children in their armes, neither is it lawfull for +any man to forbid his wife the going to this feast, for that in so doing +the wife may separate her selfe from her husband, and may lie with any +other man, in regard of so great a trespasse. Now this procession +proceeding from the castle towardes the Mosquita, the Camels which bring +the vestures are all adorned with cloth of golde, with many little belles, +and passing along the streete you may see the multitude casting vpon the +said vesture thousands of beautifull flowers of diuers colours, and sweete +water, others bringing towels and fine cloth touch the same, which euer +after they keepe as reliques with great reuerence. Afterward hauing left +the vesture in the Mosquita, as is aforesaid, they returne againe into the +citie, where they remaine the space of 20 dayes, and then the captaine +departeth with his company, and taking the vestures out of the Mosquita, +carieth the same to the foresaid place of Birca, where the Captaine hauing +pitched his tent with the standard of the grand Signior ouer the gate, and +the other principall tents standing about his, stayeth there some tenne +dayes and no more: in which time all those resort thither that meane to +follow the Carouan in this voyage to Mecca. Where you shall see certaine +women which intend to goe on this voiage accompanied with their parents and +friends mounted vpon Camels, adorned with so many tryfles, tassels, and +knots, that in beholding the same a man cannot refraine from laughter. The +last night before their departure they make great feasting and triumph +within the Carouan, with castles and other infinite deuises of fireworke, +the Ianizaries alwayes standing round about the tent of the Captaine with +such shouting and ioy, that on euery side the earth resoundeth, and this +night they discharge all their ordinance, foure or sixe times, and after at +the breake of the day vpon the sound of a trumpet they march forward on +their way. + + +What times the Carouan trauelleth, and when it resteth. + +It is to be noted, that from Cairo to Mecca they make 40 dayes iourney or +thereabout, and the same great dayes iourneies. For the custome of the +Carouan is to trauell much and rest little, and ordinarily they iourney in +this maner: They trauell from two a clock in the morning vntill the sunne +rising, then hauing rested till noone, they set forward, and so continue +till night, and then also rest againe, as is abouesaid, till two of the +clocke; and this order they obserue vntill the end of the voiage, neuer +changing the same, except in some places, whereof we will hereafter speake, +where for respect of water they rest sometimes a day and an halfe, and this +they obserue to refresh themselues, otherwise both man and beast would die. + + +In what order the Carouan trauelleth. + +The maner and order which the Carouan obserueth in marching is this. It +goeth diuided into three parts, to wit, the foreward, the maine battell, +and the rereward. In the foreward go the 8 Pilots before with a Chaus, +which hath foure knaues, and ech knaue carrieth a sinew of a bul, to the +end that if occasion requireth, the bastonado may be giuen to such as +deserue the same. These knaues cast offendours downe, turning vp the soles +of their feete made fast to a staffe, giuing them a perpetuall remembrance +for them and the beholders. This Chaus is as the Captaine of the foreward, +which commandeth lights to be carried before when they trauell in the +night. Also there go in this foreward 6 Santones with red turbants vpon +their heads, and these eat and ride at the cost of the Captaine of the +Carouan. These Santones when the Carouan arriueth at any good lodging, +suddenly after they haue escried the place, cry with an horrible voyce +saying, good cheare, good cheare, we are neere to the wished lodging. For +which good newes the chiefe of the company bestow their beneuolence vpon +them. In this foreward goeth very neere the third part of the people of the +Carouan, behind whom go alwayes 25 Spachi armed with swords, bowes and +arrowes to defend them from thieues. Next vnto the foreward, within a +quarter of a mile, followeth the maine battell, and before the same are +drawen the sayd sixe pieces of ordinance, with their gunners, and fifteene +Spachi Archers. And next vnto these commeth the chiefe physicion, who is an +olde man of authoritie, hauing with him many medicines, oyntments, salues, +and other like refreshings for the sicke, hauing also camels with him for +the sicke to ride on, which haue no horse nor beast. Next vnto him goeth +one Camell alone, the fairest that can be found: for with great industrie +is sought the greatest and fairest which may be found within the dominions +of the Grand Signior. This camell also is decked with cloth of golde and +silke, and carieth a little chest made of pure Legmame made in likenesse of +the arke of the olde Testament: but, as is abouesayd, made of pure Legmame, +without golde or any other thing of cost. Within this chest is the Alcoran +all written with great letters of golde, bound betweene two tables of +massie golde, and the chest during their voyage is couered with Silke, but +at their entring into Mecca it is all couered with cloth of golde adorned +with iewels, and the like at the enterance into Medina. The Camell +aforesayd which carrieth the chest, is compassed about with many Arabian +singers and musicians, alwayes singing and playing vpon instruments. After +this folow fiftene other most faire Camels, euery one carying one of the +abouesayd vestures, being couered from toppe to toe with silke. Behind +these goe twentie other Camels which carrie the money, apparell, and +prouision of the Amir el Cheggi captaine of the Carouan. After foloweth the +royall Standard of the Grand Signior, accompanied continually with the +musicians of the captaine, and fiue and twentie Spachi archers, with a +Chaus before them, and about these marueilous things goe all the people and +Camels which follow the Carouan. Behind these, lesse then a mile, foloweth +the rereward, whereof the greater part are pilgrimes: the occasion whereof +is, for that the merchants seeke alwayes to be in the foreward for the +securitie of their goods, but the pilgrimes which haue litle to loose care +not though they come behind. Behind these alwayes goe fiue and twentie +other Spachi well armed with another Chaus their captaine, and fortie +Arabians all Archers for guard of the rereward. And because the Carouan +goeth alwayes along the red sea banke, which in going forth they haue on +their right hand, therfore the two hundred Ianissaries parted into three +companies goe vpon their left hand well armed and mounted vpon Camels bound +one to another, for vpon that side is all the danger of thieues, and on the +other no danger at all, the captaine of the Carouan alwayes going about his +people, sometimes on the one side, and sometimes on the other, neuer +keeping any firme place, being continually accompanied with a Chaus and 25. +Spachi, armed and mounted vpon Dromedaries, and 8. musicians with violes in +their handes, which cease not sounding till the captaine take his rest, +vpon whom they attend, till such time as he entreth his pauillion, and then +licencing all his attendants and folowers to depart, they goe each man to +their lodging. + + +Of things notable which are seene in this voyage by the way. + +Because in the way there are not many things found woorthy memorie, for +that the Carouan seldome resteth in places of habitation, of which in the +way there are but fewe, yea rather the Carouan resteth altogether in the +field: therefore in this our voyage wee will onely make mention of certaine +Castles found in the way, which bee these, namely Agerut, Nachel, Acba, +Biritem, Muel and Ezlem. Of which fiue the two first are kept of Moores, +and the other three of Turkes, and for guard they haue eight men or tenne +at the most in euery Castle, with foure or fiue Smerigli, which serue to +keepe the water from the Arabians, so that the Carouan comming thither may +haue wherewithall to refresh it selfe. Agerut is distant from Suez a port +of the red sea eight miles, where are alwayes resident fiue and twentie +gallies of the Grand Signior for the keeping of that Sea. Nachel is distant +from the Sea a dayes iourney. The walles of Acba are founded vpon the red +Sea banke. Biritem and Muel likewise are dashed by the waues of the Sea. +Ezlem is distant from thence aboue a dayes iourney. These fiue Castles +abouesayd are not of force altogether to defend themselues agaynst an +hundred men. The Carouan departing from Birca vntill Agerut findeth no +water by the way to drinke, neither from Agerut till Nachel, nor from +Nachel till Acba, but betweene Acba and Biritem are found two waters, one +called Agiam el Cassap, and the other Magarraxiaibi, that is to say, the +riuer of Iethro the father in lawe of Moses, for this is the place +mentioned in the second chapter of Exodus, whither it is sayd that Moses +fledde from the anger of Pharao, who would haue killed him, because hee had +slaine the AEgyptian, which fought with the Hebrew, in which place stoode +the citie of Midian; and there are yet the pondes, neere vnto the which +Moses sate downe. And from that place forward they finde more store of +water by the way, and in more places, though not so good. It is also to bee +noted, that in this voiage it is needfull and an vsuall thing, that the +captaine put his hand to his purse, in these places, and bestow presents, +garments, and turbants vpon certaine of the chiefe of the Arabians, to the +ende they may giue him and his Carouan, free passage: who also promise, +that their followers likewise shall doe no damage to the Carouan, and bind +themselues to accomplish the same, promising also by worde of mouth, that +if the Carouan bee robbed, they will make restitution of such things as are +stollen: but notwithstanding the Carouan is by them oftentimes damnified, +and those which are robbed haue no other restitution at the Arabians handes +then the shewing of them a paire of heeles, flying into such places as it +is impossible to finde them. Nowe the Carouan continuing her accustomed +iourneys, and hauing passed the abouesayd castles, and others not woorthie +mention, at length commeth to a place called Iehbir, which is the beginning +and confine of the state and realme of Serifo the king of Mecca: where, at +their approching issueth out to meete them the gouernour of the land, with +all his people to receiue the Carouan, with such shouting and triumph, as +is impossible to expresse, where they staie one whole day. This place +aboundeth with fresh and cleare waters, which with streames fall downe from +the high mountaines. Moreouer, in this place are great store of dates, and +flesh great store and good cheape, and especially laced muttons which +willingly fall downe, and here the weary pilgrimes haue cummoditie to +refresh themselues, saying, that this wicked fact purgeth them from a +multitude of sinnes, and besides increaseth deuotion to prosecute the +voiage. Touching the building in these places, it is to bee iudged by the +houses halfe ruinated, that it hath bene a magnificent citie: but because +it was in times past inhabited more with thieues then true men, it was +therefore altogether destroyed by Soldan Gauri king of AEgypt, who going on +pilgrimage vnto Mecca, and passing by this place, there was by the +inhabitants hereof some iniurie done vnto his Carauan, which he +vnderstandeng of, dissembled till his returne from Mecca, and then caused +it to bee burned and destroyed in pitifull sort for reuenge of the iniurie +done vnto the Carouan. The Carouan hauing rested and being refreshed as is +abouesayd, the next day departed on the way, and the first place they +arriue at woorthy mention is called Bedrihonem, in which place (as is +aforesayd) grow those little shrubbes whereout Balme issueth. And before +the Carouan arriueth at this place a mile from the citie is a large and +great field enuironed about with most high and huge mountaines. And in this +field, according to the Alcoran, their prophet Mahomet had a most fierce +and cruel battell giuen by the Christians of the countrey and other people +which set themselues agaynst them, and withstood his opinion, so that hee +was ouercome and vanquished of the Christians, and almost halfe of his +people slaine in the battell. Whereupon the Phrophet seeing himselfe in +such extremitie, fell to his prayers, and they say, that God hauing +compassion vpon his deare friend and prophet, heard him, and sent him +infinite thousands of angels, wherewith returning to the battell, they +conquered and ouercame the conquerour. And therefore in memorie of this +victorie, the Carouan lodgeth euery yeere one night in this place, making +great bonefires with great mirth. And they say that as yet there is heard +vpon the mountaines a litle drumme, which while the Carouan passeth, neuer +ceaseth sounding. And they say further, that the sayd drumme is sounded by +the angels in signe of that great victory graunted of God to their prophet. +Also the Mahumetan writings affirme, that after the ende of the sayd +battell, the prophet commaunded certaine of his people to goe and burie all +the Mahumetans which were dead in the fields, who going, knew not the one +from the other, because as yet they vsed not circumcision, so they returned +vnto him, answering, that they had bene to doe his commaundement, but they +knew not the Musulmans from the Christians. To whom the prophet answered, +saying. Turne againe, and all those which you shall finde with their faces +downeward, leaue them, because all they are misbeleeuers: and the other +which you shall finde with their faces turned vpward, them burie, for they +are the true Musulmani, and so his commaundement was done. + +The next morning by Sunne rising, the Carouan arriueth at Bedrihomen, in +which place euery man washeth himselfe from toppe to toe, as well men as +women, and leauing off their apparell, hauing each a cloth about their +priuities, called in their tongue Photah, and another white one vpon their +shoulders, all which can goe to Mecca in this habite, doe so, and are +thought to merite more then the other, but they which cannot doe so make a +vowe to sacrifice a Ramme at the mountaine of pardons; and after they bee +washed, it is not lawfull for any man or women, to kill either flea or +lowse with their handes, neither yet to take them with their nailes, vntill +they haue accomplished their vowed orations in the mountaine of pardons +abouesayd: and therefore they cary with them certaine stickes made of +purpose in maner of a File, called in their language Arca, Cassah Guch, +with which they grate their shoulders. And so the Carouan marching, commeth +within two miles of Mecca, where they rest that night. In the morning at +the breake of day, with all pompe possible they set forward toward Mecca, +and drawing neere thereunto, the Seripho issueth foorth of the citie with +his guard, accompanied with an infinite number of people, shouting, and +making great triumph. And being come out of the citie a boweshoote into a +faire field, where a great multitude of tents are pitched, and in the +middest the pauillion of the captaine, who meeting with the Serifo, after +salutations on each side, they light from their horses and enter the +pauillion, where the king of Mecca depriueth himselfe of all authoritie and +power, and committeth the same to the aboue named captaine, giuing him full +licence and authoritie to commaund, gouerne, and minister Justice during +his aboad in Mecca with his company, and on the other side the captaine to +requite this liberalitie vsed toward him by the Serifo giueth him a garment +of cloth of gold of great value, with certaine iewels and other like +things. After this, sitting downe together vpon carpets and hides they eate +together, and rising from thence with certaine of the chiefest, and taking +with them the gate abouesayd, they goe directly to the Mosxuita, attended +on but with a fewe, and being entered, they cause the olde to be pulled +downe, and put the newe couerture vpon the house of Abraham, and the olde +vesture is the eunuchs which serue in the sayde Mosquita, who after sell it +vnto the pilgrimes at foure or fiue serafines the pike: and happy doth that +man thinke himselfe, which can get neuer so litle a piece thereof, to +conserue euer after as a most holy relique: and they say, that putting the +same vnder the head of a man at the houre of his death, through vertue +thereof all his sinnes are forgiuen. Also they take away the old doore, +setting in the place the new doore, and the old by custome they giue vnto +the Serifo. After hauing made their praiers with certaine ordinarie and +woonted ceremonies, the Serifo rematneth in the citie, and the captaine of +the pilgrimage returneth vnto his pauillion. + + +Of the Serifo the king of Mecca. + +The Serifo is descended of the prophet Mahomet by Fatma daughter of that +good prophet, and Alli husband to her, and sonne in lawe to Mahumet, who +had no issue male, saue this stocke of the Serifo, to the eldest sonne +whereof the realme commeth by succession. This realme hath of reuenues +royall, euery yeere halfe a million of golde, or litle more: and all such +as are of the prophets kinred, or descended of that blood (which are almost +innumerable) are called Emyri, that is to say, lordes. These all goe +clothed in greene, or at the least haue their turbant greene, to bee knowen +from the other. Neither is it permitted that any of those Christians which +dwell or traffique in their Countrey goe clothed in greene, neither may +they haue any thing of green about them: for they say it is not lawfull for +misbeleeuers to weare that colour, wherein that great friend the prophet of +God Mahomet was woont to be apparelled. + + +Of the citie of Mecca. + +The Citie of Mecca in the Arabian tongue is called Macca, that is to say, +an habitation. This citie is inuironed about with exceeding high and barren +mountaines, and in the plaine betweene the sayde mountaines and the citie +are many pleasant gardens, where groweth great abundaunce of figges, +grapes, apples, and melons. There is also great abundance of good water and +fleshe, but not of bread. This citie hath no walles about it, and +containeth in circuite fiue miles. The houses are very handsome and +commodious, and are built like to the houses in Italie. The palace of the +Serifo is sumptuous and gorgeously adorned. The women of the place are +courteous, iocund, and louely, faire, with alluring eyes, being hote and +libidinous, and the most of them naughtie packes. The men of this place are +giuen to that abhominable, cursed, and opprobrious vice, whereof both men +and women make but small account by reason of the pond Zun Zun, wherein +hauing washed themselues, their opinion is, that although like the dog they +returne to their vomite, yet they are clensed from all sinne whatsoeuer, of +which sin we will hereafter more largely discourse. In the midst of the +city is the great Mosquita, with the house of Abraham standing in the very +middest thereof, which Mosquita was built in the time when their prophet +liued. It is foure square, and so great, that it containeth two miles in +circuit, that is to say, halfe a mile each side. Also it is made in maner +of a cloister, for that in the midst thereof separate from the rest, is the +abouesayd house of Abraham, also the galleries round about are in maner of +4. streetes, and the partitions which diuide the one street from the other +are pillars, whereof some are of marble, and others of lime and stone. This +famous and sumptuous Mosquita hath 99. gates, and 5. steeples, from whence +the Talismani call the people to the Mosquita. And the pilgrimes which are +not prouided of tents, resort hither, and for more deuotion the men and +women lie together aloft and beneath, one vpon another, so that their house +of praier becommeth worse sometimes then a den of thieues. + + +Of the house of Abraham. + +The house of Abraham is also foure square, and made of speckled stone, 20. +paces high, and 40 in circuit. And vpon one side of this house within the +wall, there is a stone of a span long, and halfe a span broad, which stone +(as they say) before this house was builded, fell downe from heauen, at the +fall whereof was heard a voyce, that wheresoeuer this stone fell, there +should be built the house of God, wherein God will heare sinners. Moreouer, +they say that when this stone fell from heauen, it was not blacke as now, +but as white as the whitest snow, and by reason it hath bene so oft kissed +by sinners, it is therewith become blacke: for all the pilgrimes are bound +to kisse this stone, otherwise they cary their sinnes home with them again. +The entrance into this house is very small, made in maner of a window, and +as high from the ground as a man can reach, so that it is painful to enter. +This house hath without 31. pillars of brasse, set vpon cubike or square +stones being red and greene, the which pillars sustaine not ought els saue +a threed of copper, which reacheth from one to another, whereunto are +fastened many burning lampes. These pillars of brasse were caused to be +made by Sultan Soliman grandfather to Sultan Amurath now Emperor. After +this, hauing entred with the difficultie abouesayd, there stand at the +entrance two pillars of marble, to wit, on each side one. In the midst +there are three of Aloes-wood not very thicke, and couered with tiles of +India 1000. colours which serue to vnderproppe the Terratza. It is so +darke, that they can hardly see within for want of light, not without an +euill smell. Without the gate fiue pases is the abouesayd pond Zun Zun, +which is that blessed pond that the angell of the Lord shewed vnto Agar +whiles she went seeking water for her sonne Ismael to drinke. + + +Of the ceremonies of the pilgrimes. + +In the beginning we haue sayd how the Mahumetans haue two feasts in the +yeere. The one they call Pascha di Ramazaco, that is to say, The feast of +fasting, and this feast of fasting is holden thirtie dayes after the feast, +wherein the Carouan trauelleth to Mecca. The other is called the feast of +the Ramme, wherin all they which are of abilitie are bound to sacrifice a +Ramme, and this they call Bine Bairam, that is to say, The great feast. And +as the Carouan departeth from Cairo, thirtie dayes after the little feast, +so likewise they come hither fiue or sixe dayes before the great feast, to +the ende the pilgrimes may haue time before the feast to finish their rites +and ceremonies, which are these. Departing from the Carouan, and being +guided by such as are experienced in the way, they goe vnto the citie +twentie or thirtie in a company as they thinke good, walking through a +streete which ascendeth by litle and litle till they come vnto a certaine +gate, whereupon is written on each side in marble stone, Babel Salema, +which in the Arabian tongue signifieth, the gate of health. And from this +place is descried the great Mosquita, which enuironeth the house of +Abraham, which being descried, they reuerently salute twise, saying, Salem +Alech Iara sul Alia, that is to say, Peace to thee, ambassadour of God. +This salutation being ended, proceeding on the way, they finde an arche +vpon their right hand, whereon they ascend fiue steps, vpon the which is a +great voyd place made of stone: after, descending other fiue steps, and +proceeding the space of a flight-shoot, they finde another arche like vnto +the first, and this way from the one arche to the other they go and come 7. +times, saying alwaies some of their prayers, which (they say) the afflicted +Agar sayd, whiles she sought and found not water for her sonne Ismael to +drinke. This ceremonie being ended, the pilgrimes enter into the Mosquita, +and drawing neere vnto the house of Abraham, they goe round about it other +seuen times, alwayes saying: This is the house of God, and of his seruant +Abraham: This done they goe to kisse the black stone abouesayd. After they +go vnto the pond Zun Zun, and in their apparell as they be, they wash +themselues from head to foote, saying, Tobah Allah, Tobah Allah, that is to +say, Pardon Lord, Pardon Lord, drinking also of that waier, which is both +mudie, filthie, and of an ill sauour, and in this wise washed and watered, +euery one returneth to his place of abode, and these ceremonies euery one +is bound to doe once at the least. But those which haue a mind to ouergoe +their fellowes, and to goe into paradise before the rest, doe the same once +a day while the Carouan remaineth there. + + +What the Carouan doeth after hauing rested at Mecca. + +[Sidenote: The mountaine of pardons.] The Carouan hauing abode within the +citie of Mecca fiue dayes, the night before the euening of their feast, the +captaine with all his company setteth forward towards the mountaine of +pardons, which they call in the Arabian tongue, Iabel Arafata. This +mountaine is distant from Mecca 15. miles, and in the mid way thereto is a +place called Mina, that is to say, The hauen, and a litle from thence are +4. great pillars, of which hereafter we will speake. Now first touching the +mountaine of Pardons, which is rather to be called a litle hill, then a +mountain, for that it is low, litle, delightful and pleasant, containing in +circuit two miles, and enuironed round about with the goodliest plaine that +euer with mans eie could be seen, and the plaine likewise compassed with +exceeding high mountains, in such sort that this is one of the goodliest +situations in the world: and it seemeth verily, that nature hath therein +shewed all her cunning, in making this place vnder the mountaine of pardons +so broad and pleasant. Vpon the side towards Mecca there are many pipes of +water cleare, faire, and fresh, and aboue all most wholesome, falling down +into certaine vessels made of purpose, where the people refresh and wash +themselues, and water their cattel. And when Adam and Euah were cast out of +paradise by the angel of the Lord, the Mahumetans say, they came to +inhabite this litle mountaine of pardons. Also they say, that they had lost +one another, and were separated for the space of 40. yeeres, and in the end +met at this place with great ioy and gladnesse, and builded a litle house +vpon the top of this mountaine, the which at this day they call Beyt Adam, +that is to say, the house of Adam. + + +Of the three Carouans. + +The same day that the Carouan of Cairo commeth to this place, hither come +2. Carouans also, one of Damasco, the other of Arabia, and in like maner +all the inhabitants for ten dayes iourney round about, so that at one time +there is to be seene aboue 200000. persons, and more then 300000. cattell. +Now all this company meeting together in this place the night before the +feast, the three hostes cast themselues into a triangle, setting the +mountaine in the midst of them: and all that night there is nothing to be +heard nor seene, but gunshot and fireworkes of sundry sortes, with such +singing, sounding, shouting, halowing, rumors, feasting, and triumphing, as +is wonderfull. After this, the day of the feast being come, they are all at +rest and silence, and that day they attend on no other thing, then to +sacrifice oblations and prayers vnto God, and in the euening all they which +haue horses mount thereon, and approch as nigh vnto the mountaine as they +can, and those which haue no horses make the best shift they can on foote, +giuing euer vnto the captaine of Cairo the chiefe place, the second to the +captaine of Damasco, and the third to the captaine of Arabia, and being all +approched as is abouesayd, there commeth a square squire, one of the +Santones, mounted on a camell well furnished, who at the other side of the +mountain ascendeth fiue steps into a pulpit made for that purpose, and all +being silent, turning his face towards the people he maketh a short sermon +of the tenour folowing. + +The summe of the Santones sermon. + +The summe of this double doctors sermon is thus much in briefe. He sheweth +them how many and how great benefits God hath giuen to the Mahumetan people +by the hand of his beloued friend and prophet Mahomet, hauing deliuered +them from the seruitude of sinne and from idolatry, in which before time +they were drowned, and how he gaue vnto them the house of Abraham wherein +they should be heard, and likewise the mountaine of pardons, by meanes +whereof they might obtaine grace and remission of their sinnes: adding, +that the mercifull God, who is a liberall giuer of all good things, +commaunded his secretarie Abraham to build him an house in Mecca, where his +successours might make their prayers vnto him and bee heard, at which time +all the mountains in the world came together thither with sufficiencie of +stones for building hereof, except that litle and low hill, which for +pouertie could not go to discharge this debt, for the which it became +sorrowful, weeping beyond all measure for the space of thirtie yeeres, at +the ende whereof the eternall God hauing pitie and compassion vpon this +poore Mountaine, saide vnto it: Weepe no more (my daughter) for thy bitter +plaints haue ascended vp into mine eares, therefore comfort thy selfe: for +I will cause all those that shall goe to visite the house of my friend +Abraham, that they shall not be absolued from their sinnes, vnlesse they +first come to doe thee reuerence, and to keepe in this place their holiest +feast. And this I haue commanded vnto my people by the mouth of my friend +and prophet Mahumet. This said, he exhorteth them vnto the loue of God, and +to prayer and almes. The sermon being done at the Sunne-setting they make +3. prayers, namely the first for the Serifo, the second for the Grand +Signior with his hoste, and the third for all the people: to which prayers +all with one voice cry saying; Amni Ia Alla, Amni Ia Alla, that is to say, +Be it so lord, be it so Lord. Thus hauing had the Santones blessing and +saluted the Mountaine of pardons, they returne the way they came vnto Mina, +whereof wee haue made mention. In returning at the end of the plaine are +the abouesaid 4. pillers, to wit, two on ech side of the way, through the +midst whereof they say it is needfull that euery one passe, saying, that +who so passeth without looseth all that merit which in his pilgrimage he +had gotten. Also from the mountaine of pardons vntill they be passed the +said pillers none dare looke backward, for feare least the sinnes which he +hath left in the mountains returne to him againe. Being past these pillers +eueryone lighteth downe, seeking in this sandy field 50. or 60. litle +stones, which being gathered and bound in an hankerchiffe they carry to the +abouesaid place of Mina, where they stay 5. dayes, because at that time +there is a faire free and franke of al custome. And in this place are other +3. pillers, not together, but set in diuers places, where (as their prophet +saith) were the three apparitions which the diuel made vnto Abraham, and to +Ismael his sonne; for amongst them they make no mention of Isaac, as if he +had neuer bene borne. So they say, that the blessed God hauing commanded +Abraham his faithfull seruant to sacrifice his first begotten Ismael, the +old Abraham went to do according to God's wil, and met with the infernall +enemie in the shape of a man, and being of him demanded whither he went, he +answered, that he went to sacrifice his sonne Ismael, as God had commanded +him. Against whom the diuel exclaiming said: Oh doting old man, sith God in +thine old age hath marueilously giuen thee this son (in whom all nations +shalbe blessed) wherefore giuing credite vnto vaine dreames, wilt thou kill +him whom so much thou hast desired, and so intirely loued. But Abraham +shaking him off proceeded on his way, whereupon the diuel seeing his words +could not preuaile with the father attempted the sonne, saying; Ismael, +haue regard vnto thyselfe betimes in this thing which is so dangerous. +Wherefore? answered the childe. Because (saith the diuel) thy doting father +seeketh to take away thy life. For what occasion, said Ismael? Because +(saith the enemie) he saith, that God hath commanded him. Which Ismael +hearing hee tooke vp stones and threw at him, saying, Auzu billahi minal +scia itanil ragini, which is to say, I defend me with God from the diuel +the offender, as who would say, wee ought to obey the commandement of God +and resist the diuel with al our force. But to returne to our purpose, the +pilgrimes during their abode there goe to visite these three pillers, +throwing away the little stones which before they gathered, whiles they +repeat the same words which they say, that Ismael said to the diuell, when +he withstoode him. From hence halfe a mile is a mountaine, whither Abraham +went to sacrifice his sonne, as is abouesaid. In this mountaine is a great +den whither the pilgrims resort to make their prayers, and there is a great +stone naturally separated in the midst; and they say, that Ismael, while +his father Abraham was busie about the sacrifice, tooke the knife in hand +to prooue how it would cut, and making triall diuided the stone in two +parts. The fiue dayes being expired, the captaine ariseth with all the +Carouan, and returneth againe to Mecca, where they remaine other fiue +dayes. And while these rest, we will treat of the city and port of Grida +vpon the Red Sea. + + +Of Grida. + +[Grida a port neere Mecca.] Therefore wee say that from Mecca to Grida they +make two small dayes iourney: and because in those places it is ill +traueiling in the day-time by reason of the great heat of the Sunne, +therefore they depart in the euening from Mecca, and in the morning before +Sunne-rising they are arriued halfe way, where there certaine habitations +well furnished, and good Innes to lodge in, but especially women ynough +which voluntarily bestowe their almes vpon the poore pilgrims: likewise +departing the next euening, the morning after, they come vnto Grida. This +citie is founded vpon the Red Sea banke, enuironed with wals and towers to +the land-ward, but through continuance of time almost consumed and wasted: +on the side to seaward it stands vnwalled. Grida hath three gates, one on +eche side, and the thirde in the midst towarde the lande, which is called +the port of Mecca, neere vnto which are 6. or 7. Turks vpon the old towers +for guard thereof with foure faulcons vpon one of the corners of the city +to the land-ward. Also to sea-ward where the wall ioyneth with the water, +there is lately made a fort like vnto a bulwarke, where they haue planted +25 pieces of the best ordinance that might be had, which are very well kept +and guarded. More outward towards the sea vpon the farthest olde tower are +other fiue good pieces with 30 men to guard them. [Sidenote: The Portugals +greatly feared in the Red Sea.] On the other side of the city at the end of +the wall there is lately builded a bulwarke strong and well guarded by a +Saniaccho with 150 Turks wel prouided with ordinance and all other +necessaries and munition, and all these fortifyings are for none other +cause then for feare and suspition of the Portugals. And if the port were +good this were in vaine: but the port cannot be worse nor more dangerous; +being all full of rocks and sands, in such wise, that the ships cannot come +neere, but perforce ride at the least two miles off. [Sidenote: Forty or +fifty rich ships arriue yeerely at Grida.] At this port arriue euery yeere +forty or fifty great shippes laden with spices and other rich marchandize +which yeeld in custome 150000 ducats, the halfe whereof goeth vnto the +Grand Signior, and the other halfe to the Serifo. And because there is none +other thing worthy mention in Grida we wil returne to our Carouan which +hath almost rested enough. + + +Of their going to Medina. + +The Carouan departeth for Medina returning the same way they came vnto +Bedrihonem abouesayd, where they leaue their ordinance and other cariages, +whereof they haue no need, with the pilgrims which haue seene Medina +aforetime, and desire not to see it againe, but stay in that place, +expecting the carouan, and resting vntill the carouan go from Bedrihonem to +Medina, where they alwayes finde goodly habitations, with abundance of +sweet waters, and dates enough, and being within foureteene miles of Medina +they come vnto a great plaine called by them Iabel el salema, that is to +say, the mountaine of health, from which they begin to descry the citie and +tombe of Mahomet, at which sight they light from their horses in token of +reuerence. And being ascended vp the sayd mountaine with shouting which +pierceth the skies they say, Sala tuua salema Alaccha Iarah sul Allah. Sala +tuua Salema Alaccha Ianabi Allah, Sala tuua Salema Allaccha Iahabit Allah: +which words in the Arabian tongue signifie: Prayer and health be vnto thee, +oh prophet of God: prayer and health be vpon thee, oh beloued of God. And +hauing pronounced this salutacion, they proceed on their iourney, so that +they lodge that night within three miles of Medina: and the next morning +the captaine of the pilgrimage ariseth, and proceeding towards the city, +and drawing neere, there commeth the gouernour vnder the Serifo, +accompanied with his people to receiue the Carouan, hauing pitched their +tents in the midst of a goodly field where they lodge. + + +Of Medina. + +Medina is a little city of great antiquity, containing in circuit not aboue +two miles, hauing therein but one castle, which is olde and weake, guarded +by an Aga with fifty pieces of artillery, but not very good. The houses +thereof are faire and well situated, built of lime and stone, and in the +midst of the city stands a fouresquare Mosquita, not so great as that of +Mecca, but more goodly, rich, and sumptuous in building. Within the same in +a corner thereof is a tombe built vpon foure pillers with a vault, as if it +were vnder a pauement, which bindeth all the foure pillers together. The +tombe is so high, that it farre exceedeth in heighth the Mosquita, being +couered with lead, and the top all inamelled with golde, with an halfe +moone vpon the top: and within the pauement it is all very artificially +wrought with golde. Below there are round about very great staires of yron +ascending vp vntill the midst of the pillers, and in the very midst thereof +is buried the body of Mahomet, and not in a chest of yron cleauing to the +adamant, as many affirme that know not the trueth thereof. Moreouer, ouer +the body they haue built a tombe of speckled stone a brace and a halfe +high, [Marginal note: Or, a fathom.] and ouer the same another of Legmame +fouresquare in maner of a pyramis. After this, round about the sepulture +there hangeth a curtaine of silke, which letteth the sight of those without +that they cannot see the sepulture. Beyond this in the same Mosquita are +other two sepulchres couered with greene cloth, and in the one of them is +buried Fatma the daughter of Mahomet, and Alli is buried in the other, who +was the husband of the sayd Fatma. The attendants vpon these sepulchres are +fifty eunuches white and tawny, neither is it granted to any of them to +enter within the tombe, sauing to three white eunuches the oldest and best +of credit; vnto whom it is lawfull to enter but twise in the day, to light +the lamps, and to doe other seruices. All the other eunuchs attend without +to the seruice of the Mosquita, and the other two sepulchres of Fatma, and +Alli, where euery one may go and touch at his pleasure, and take of the +earth for deuotion, as many do. + + +Of things without the City. + +Without the city and on euery side are most faire gardens, with many +fountaines of most sweet water, infinite pondes, abundance of fruit, with +much honest liuing, so that this place is very pleasant and delightfull. +This city hath three gates, one of which is an hospitall caused to be built +by Cassachi, called the Rosel who was wife to Sultan Solimam grandfather to +this emperour. The sayd Hospitall hath nought els woorthy mention, saue +that it is fairely built, and hath large reuenues belonging thereunto, and +nourisheth many poore people. A mile from the city are certaine houses +whereof they affirme one to be the same, where Mahumet in his lifetime +dwelt. This house hath on euery side very many faire date trees, amongst +which there are two which grow out of one stocke exceeding high, and these, +they say, their Prophet graffed with his owne hand: the fruit thereof is +alwayes sent to Constantinople, to be presented vnto the Grand Signior, and +is sayd to be that blessed fruit of the Prophet. Nere vnto the date trees +is a faire fountaine of cleere and sweet water, the which by a conduct pipe +is brought into the city of Medina. Also there is a little Mosquita, +wherein three places are counted holy, and greatly reuerenced: the first +they affirme, that their Prophet made his first prayer in, after he knew +God: the second is that whither he went when he would see the holy house of +Abraham, where when he sate down to that intent, they say the mountaines +opened from toppe to bottome to shew him the house, and after closed againe +as before: the third holy place is in the midst of the sayd Mosquita, where +is a tombe made of lime and stone fouresquare, and full of sand, wherein, +they say, was buried that blessed camel which Mahumet was alwayes woont to +ride vpon. On the other side of the city are other tombes of holy +Mahumetans, and euery one or them hath a tombe built vpon foure pillers, +amongst which three were the companions of Mahumet, to wit, Abubacar; +Ottoman, and Omar; all which are visited of the pilgrims as holy places. + + +The offering of the vestures vnto the sepulchres. + +The Carouan being come to Medina two houres before day, and resting there +till the euening, the captaine then with his company and other pilgrims +setteth forward, with the greatest pompe possible: and taking with him the +vesture which is made in maner of a pyramis, with many other of golde and +silke, departeth, going thorow the midst of the city, vntill he come to the +Mosquita, where hauing praied, he presenteth vnto the tombe of his prophet +(where the eunuchs receiuing hands are ready) the vesture for the sayd +tombe: and certaine eunuchs entring in take away the old vesture, and lay +on the new, burning the olde one, and diuiding the golde thereof into +equall portions. After this are presented other vestures for the ornament +of the Mosquita. Also the people without deliuer vnto the eunuchs ech man +somewhat to touch the tombe therewith, which they keepe as a relique with +great deuotion. This ceremony being ended, the captaine resteth in Medina +two dayes, to the end the pilgrims may finish their deuotion and +ceremonies: and after they depart to Iambor. A good dayes iourney thence is +a steepe mountaine, ouer which is no passage, sauing by one narrow path +called Demir Capi, which was in times past called the yron gate. Of this +gate the Mahumetans say, that Ally the companion and sonne in law of +Mahumet, being here pursued by many Christians, and comming vnto this +mountaine, not seeing any way whereby to flee, drew out his sword, and +striking the said mountaine, diuided it in sunder, and passing thorow saued +his life on the other side. Moreouer, this Alli among the Persians is had +in greater reuerence than Mahumet, who affirme, that the sayd Alli hath +done greater things and more miraculous than Mahumet, and therefore they +esteeme him for God almighty his fellow. But to returne to our matter, the +captaine with the carouan within two dayes after returneth for Cairo, and +comming to Ezlem, findeth there a captaine with threescore horses come +thither to bring refreshments to the said captaine of the pilgrimage, as +also to sell vnto the pilgrims some victuals. From thence they set forward, +and comming to Birca within two leagues of Cairo, there is the master of +the house of the Bassha of Cairo with all his horsemen come thither to +receiue him with a sumptuous and costly banket made at the cost of the +Basha for the captaine and his retinue, who after he is well refreshed +departeth toward the castle of Cairo to salute the Basha, who receiuing him +with great ioy and gladnesse in token of good wil presenteth him with a +garment of cloth of golde very rich: and the captaine taking the Alcaron +out of the chest presenteth it to the Basha, who hauing kissed it, +commandeth to lay it vp againe. Some there are which affirme, that being +arriued at Cairo, they kill that goodly camell which caried the Alcaron, +and eate him; which is nothing so: for they are so superstitious to the +contrary, that to gaine all the world they would not kill him. But if by +casuality he should die, in this case happy and blessed they thinke +themselues, which can get a morsell to eat. And thus much concerning the +voyage of the captaine of the carouan of Cairo. + + * * * * * + +The voyage and trauell of M. Caesar Fredericke, Marchant of Venice, into the + East India, and beyond the Indies. Wherein are conteined the customes and + rites of those countries, the merchandises and commodities, as well of + golde and siluer, as spices, drugges, pearles, and other iewels: + translated out of Italian by M. Thomas Hickocke. + +Caesare Fredericke to the Reader. + +[Sidenote: Caesare Fredericke trauelled eighteene yeeres in the East +Indies.] I hauing (gentle Reader) for the space of eighteene yeeres +continually coasted and trauelled, as it were, all the East Indies, and +many other countreys beyond the Indies, wherein I haue had both good and +ill successe in my trauels: and hauing seene and vnderstood many things +woorthy the noting, and to be knowen to all the world, the which were neuer +as yet written of any: I thought it good (seeing the Almighty had giuen me +grace, after so long perils in passing such a long voyage to returne into +mine owne countrey, the noble city of Venice) I say, I thought it good, as +briefly as I could, to write and set forth this voyage made by me, with the +maruellous things I haue seene in my trauels in the Indies: The mighty +Princes that gouerne those countreys, their religion and faith that they +haue, the rites and customes which they vse, and liue by, of the diuers +successe that happened vnto me, and how many of these countreys are +abounding with spices, drugs, and iewels, giuing also profitable +aduertisement to all those that haue a desire to make such a voyage. And +because that the whole world may more commodiously reioyce at this my +trauell, I haue caused it to be printed in this order: and now I present it +vnto you (gentle and louing Readers) to whom for the varieties of things +heerein contented, I hope that it shall be with great delight receiued. And +thus God of his goodnesse keepe you. + + +A voyage to the East Indies, and beyond the Indies, &c. + +[Sidenote: The authours going from Venice to Cyprus and Tripoly.] In the +yere of our Lord God 1653, I Caesar Fredericke being in Venice, and very +desirous to see the East parts of the world, shipped my selfe in a shippe +called the Gradaige of Venice, with certaine marchandise, gouerned by M. +Iacomo Vatica, which was bound to Cyprus with his ship, with whom I went: +and when we were arriued in Cyprus, I left that ship, and went in a lesser +to Tripoly in Soria, where I stayed a while. Afterward, I tooke my iourney +to Alepo, and there I acquainted my selfe with marchants of Armenia, and +Moores, that were marchants, and consorted to go with them to Ormus, and +wee departed from Alepo, and in two dayes iourney and a halfe, we came to a +city called Bir. + + +Of the city called Bir. + +Bir is a small city very scarse of all maner of victuals, and nere vnto the +walles of the city runneth the riuer of Euphrates. [Sidenote: The river +Euphrates.] In this city the marchants diuide themselues into companies, +according to their merchandise that they haue, and there either they buy or +make a boat to carry them and their goods to Babylon downe the riuer +Euphrates, with charge of a master and mariners to conduct the boat in the +voyage: these boats are in a maner flat bottomed, yet they be very strong: +and for all that they are so strong, they will serue but for one voyage. +They are made according to the sholdnesse of the riuer, because that the +riuer is in many places full of great stones, which greatly hinder and +trouble those that goe downe the riuer. These boats serue but for one +voyage downe the riuer vnto a village called Feluchia, because it is +impossible to bring them vp the riuer backe againe. [Sidenote: Feluchia a +small city on Euphrates.] At Feluchia the marchants plucke their boats in +pieces, or else sell them for a small price, for that at Bir they cost the +marchants forty or fifty chickens a piece, and they sell them at Feluchia +for seuen or eight chickens a piece, because that when the marchants +returne from Babylon backe againe, if they haue marchandise or goods that +oweth custome, then they make their returne in forty dayes thorow the +wildernesse, passing that way with a great deale lesser charges then the +other way. [Sidenote: Mosul.] And if they haue not marchandise that oweth +custome, then they goe by the way of Mosul, where it costeth them great +charges both the Carouan and company. From Bir where the marchants imbarke +themselues to Feluchia ouer agains Babylon, if the riuer haue good store of +water, they shall make their voyage in fifteene or eighteene dayes downe +the riuer, and if the water be lowe, and it hath not rained, then it is +much trouble, and it will be forty or fifty dayes journey downe, because +that when the barks strike on the stones that be in the riuer, then they +must vnlade them, which is great trouble, and then lade them againe when +they haue mended them: therefore it is not necessary, neither doe the +marchants go with one boat alone, but with two or three, that if one boat +split and be lost with striking on the sholdes, they may haue another ready +to take in their goods, vntil such time as they haue mended the broken +boat, and if they draw the broken boat on land to mend her, it is hard to +defend her in the night from the great multitude of Arabians that will come +downe there to robbe you: [Sidenote: The Arabian theeues are in number like +to Ants.] and in the riuers euery night, when you make fast your boat to +the banckeside, you must keepe good watch against the Arabians which are +theeues in number like to ants, yet when they come to robbe, they will not +kill, but steale and run away. Harquebuzes are very good weapons against +them, for that they stand greatly in feare of the shot. And as you passe +the riuer Euphrates from Bir to Feluchia, there are certein places which +you must passe by, where you pay custome certaine medines vpon a bale, +which custome is belonging to the sonne of Aborise king of the Arabians and +of the desert, who hath certaine cities and villages on the riuer +Euphrates. + + +Feluchia and Babylon. + +[Sidenote: The olde Babylon hath great trade with marchants still.] +Feluchia is a village where they that come from Bir doe vnbarke themselues +and vnlade their goods, and it is distant from Babylon a dayes iourney and +an halfe by land: Babylon is no great city but it is very populous, and of +great trade of strangers because it is a great thorowfare for Persia, +Turkia, and Arabia: and very often times there goe out from thence Carouans +into diuers countreys: and the city is very copious of victuals, which +comme out of Armenia downe the riuer of Tygris, on certaine Zattares or +Raffes made of blowen hides or skinnes called Vtrij. This riuer Tygris +doeth wash the walles of the city. These Raffes are bound fast together, +and then they lay boards on the aforesayd blowen skinnes, and on the boards +they lade the commodities, and so come they to Babylon, where they vnlade +them, and being vnladen, they let out the winde out of the skinnes, and +lade them on cammels to make another voyage. This city of Babylon is +situate in the kingdome of Persia, but now gouerned by the Turks. On the +other side of the riuer towards Arabia, ouer against the city, there is a +faire place or towne, and in it a faire Bazarro for marchants, with very +many lodgings, where the greatest part of the marchants strangers which +come to Babylon do lie with their marchandize. [Sidenote: A bridge made of +boats.] The passing ouer Tygris from Babylon to this Borough is by a long +bridge made of boates chained together with great chaines: prouided, that +when the riuer waxeth great with the abundance of raine that falleth, then +they open the bridge in the middle, where the one halfe of the bridge +falleth to the walles of Babylon, and the other to the brinks of this +Borough, on the other side of the riuer: and as long as the bridge is open, +they passe the riuer in small boats with great danger, because of the +smalnesse of the boats, and the ouerlading of them, that with the +fiercenesse of the streame they be ouerthrowen, or els the streame doth +cary them away, so that by this meanes, many people are lost and drowned: +this thing by proofe I haue many times seene. + +Of the tower of Babylon. + +The Tower of Nimrod or Babel is situate on that side of Tygris that Arabia +is, and in a very great plaine distant from Babylon seuen or eight miles: +which tower is ruinated on euery side, and with the falling of it there is +made a great mountaine, so that it hath no forme at all, yet there is a +great part of it standing which is compassed and almost couered with the +aforesayd fallings: this Tower was builded and made of foure square +Brickes, which Brickes were made of earth, and dried in the Sunne in maner +and forme following: first they layed a lay of Brickes, [Footnote: These +bricks be in thicknes six or seuen inches, and a foot and a halfe square.] +then a Mat made of Canes, square as the Brickes, and in stead of lime, they +daubed it with earth: these Mats of Canes are at this time so strong, that +it is a thing woonderfull to beholde, being of such great antiquity: I haue +gone round about it, and haue not found any place where there hath bene any +doore or entrance: it may be in my iudgement in circuit about a mile, and +rather lesse then more. + +This Tower in effect is contrary to all other things which are seene afar +off, for they seeme small, and the more nere a man commeth to them the +bigger they be: but this tower afar off seemeth a very great thing, and the +nerer you come to it the lesser. My iudgment and reason of this is, that +because the Tower is set in a very great plaine, and hath nothing more +about to make any shew sauing the ruines of it which it hath made round +about, and for this respect descrying it a farre off, that piece of the +Tower which yet standeth with the mountaine that is made of the substance +that hath fallen from it, maketh a greater shew then you shall finde +comming neere to it. + + +Babylon and Basora. + +From Babylon I departed for Basora, shipping my selfe in one of the barks +that vse to go in the riuer Tigris from Babylon to Basora, and from Basora +to Babylon: which barks are made after the maner of Fusts or Galliots with +a Speron and a couered poope: they haue no pumpe in them because of the +great abundance of pitch which they haue to pitch them with all: which +pitch they haue in abundance two dayes iourney from Babylon. Nere vnto the +riuer Euphrates, there is a city called Heit, nere vnto which city there is +a great plaine full of pitch, very maruellous to beholde, a thing almost +incredible, that out of a hole [Footnote: This hole where out commeth this +pitch is most true, and the water and pitch runneth into the valley or +Iland where the pitch resteth, and the water runneth into the riuer +Euphrates, and it maketh all the riuer to be as it were brackish with the +smell of pitch and brimstone.] in the earth, which continually throweth out +pitch into the aire with continuall smoake, this pitch is throwen with such +force, that being hot it falleth like as it were sprinckled ouer all the +plaine, in such abundance that the plaine is alwayes full of pitch: the +Mores and Arabians of that place say, that that hole is the mouth of hell: +and in trueth, it is a thing very notable to be marked: and by this pitch +the whole people haue great benefit to pitch their barks, which barks they +call Daneck and Saffin. When the riuer of Tygris is well replenished with +water, you may passe from Babylon to Basora in eight or nine dayes, and +sometimes more and sometimes lesse: we were halfe so much more which is 14 +or 15 daies, because the waters were low: they may saile day and night, and +there are some places in this way where you pay so many medins on a baile: +if the waters be lowe, it is 18 dayes iourney. + + +Basora. + +[Sidenote: Zizarij an ancient people.] Basora is a city of the Arabians, +which of olde time was gouerned by those Arabians called Zizarij, but now +it is gouerned by the great Turke where he keepeth an army to his great +charges. + +The Arabians called Zizarij haue the possession of a great countrey, and +cannot be ouercome by the Turke, because that the sea hath deuided their +countrey into an Iland by channels with the ebbing and flowing of the sea, +and for that cause the Turke cannot bring an army against them, neither by +sea nor by land, and another reason is, the inhabitants of that Iland are +very strong and warlike men. [Sidenote: At the castle of Corna the riuer +Euphrates and Tygris do meet.] A dayes iourney before you come to Basora, +you shall haue a little castle or fort, which is set on that point of the +land where the riuers of Euphrates and Tygris meet together, and the castle +is called Corna: at this point, the two riuers make a monstrous great +riuer, that runneth into the sea, which is called the gulfe of Persia, +which is towards the South: Basora is distant from the sea fifteene miles, +and it is a city of great trade of spices and drugges which come from +Ormus. Also there is a great store of corne, Rice, and Dates, which the +countrey doth yeeld. [Sidenote: Ormus is the barrenest Iland in all the +world.] I shipped my selfe in Basora to go for Ormus, and so we sailed, +thorow the Persian sea six hundred miles, which is the distance from Basora +to Ormus, and we sailed in small ships made of boards, bound together with +small cords or ropes, and in stead of calking they lay betweene euery board +certaine straw which they haue, and so they sowe board and board together, +with the straw betweene, wherethorow there commeth much water, and they are +very dangerous. [Sidenote: Carichij an Iland in the gulfe of Persia.] +Departing from Basora we passed 200 miles with the sea on our right hand, +along the gulfe, vntil at length we arriued at an Iland called Carichij, +fro whence we sailed to Ormus in sight of the Persian shore on the left +side, and on the right side towards Arabia we discouered infinite Ilands. + + +Ormus. + +Ormus [Footnote: Ormus is alwayes replenished with abundance of victuall, +and yet there is none that groweth in the Iland.] is an Iland in circuit +fiue and twenty or thirty miles, and it is the barrenest and most drie +Iland in all the world, because that in it there is nothing to be had, but +salt water, and wood, all other things necessary for mans life are brought +out of Persia twelue miles off, and out of other Ilands neere thereunto +adioyning, in such abundance and quantity, that the city is alwayes +replenished with all maner of store: there is standing neere vnto the +waters side a very faire castell, in the which the captaine of the king of +Portugall is alwayes resident with a good band of Portugalles, and before +this castell is a very faire prospect: in the city dwell the maried men, +souldiers and marchants of euery nation, amongst whom there are Moores and +Gentiles. [Sidenote: Great trade of merchandise in Ormus.] In this city +there is very great trade for all sorts of spices, drugges, silke, cloth of +silke, brocardo, and diuers other sorts of marchandise come out of Persia: +and amongst all other trades of marchandise, the trade of Horses is very +great there, which they carry from thence into the Indies. This Iland hath +a Moore king of the race of the Persians, who is created and made king by +the Captaine of the castle, in the name of the king of Portugall. At the +creation of this king I was there, and saw the ceremonies that they vse in +it, which are as followeth. The olde King being dead, the Captaine of the +Portugals chuseth another of the blood royall, and maketh this election in +the castle with great ceremonies, and when hee is elected, the Captaine +sweareth him to be true and faithfull to the King of Portugall, as his Lord +and Gouernour, and then he giueth him the Scepter regall. After this with +great feasting and pompe, and with great company, he is brought into the +royall palace in the city. This King keepeth a good traine, and hath +sufficient reuenues to maintaine himselfe without troubling of any, because +the Captaine of the castle doth mainteine and defend his right, and when +that the Captaine and he ride together, he is honoured as a king, yet be +cannot ride abroad with his traine, without the consent of the Captaine +first had: it behooueth them to doe this, and it is necessary, because of +the great trade that is in the city: their proper language is the Persian +tongue. There I shipped my selfe to goe for Goa, a city in the Indies, in a +shippe that had fourescore horses in her. [Sidenote: A priuilege for +Marchants.] This is to aduertise those Marchants that go from Ormus to Goa +to shippe themselues in those shippes that carry horses, because euery +shippe that carrieth twenty horses and vpwards is priuileged, that all the +marchandise whatsoeuer they carry shall pay no custome, whereas the shippes +that carry no horses are bound to pay eight per cento of all goods they +bring. + + +Goa, Diu, and Cambaia. + +Goa is the principall city that the Portugals haue in the Indies, where is +resident the Viceroy with his Court and ministers of the King of Portugall. +From Ormus to Goa is nine hundred foure score and ten miles distance, in +which passage the first city that you come to in the Indies, is called Diu, +[Footnote: Off South extremity of Kathiawar Peninsula, Bombay Presidency.] +and is situate in a little Iland in the kingdome of Cambaia, which is the +greatest strength that the Portugals haue in all the Indies, yet a small +city, but of great trade, because there they lade very many great ships for +the straights of Mecca and Ormus with merchandise, and these shippes belong +to the Moores and Christians, but the Moores can not trade neither saile +into those seas without the licence of the Viceroy of the King of +Portugall, otherwise they are taken and made good prises. The marchandise +that they lade these ships withall commeth from Cambaietta a port in the +kingdome of Cambaia, which they bring from thence in small barks, because +there can no great shippes come thither, by reason of the sholdnesse of the +water thereabouts, and these sholds are an hundred or fourescore miles +about in a straight or gulfe, which they call Macareo, which is as much as +to say, as a race of a tide, because the waters there run out of that place +without measure, so that there is no place like to it, vnlesse it be in the +kingdome of Pegu, where there is another Macareo, where the waters run out +with more force than these doe. The principall city in Cambaia is called +Amadauar, it is a dayes iourney and an halfe from Cambaietta, it is a very +great city and very populous, and for a city of the Gentiles it is very +well made and builded with faire houses and large streets, with a faire +place in it with many shippes, and in shew like to Cairo, but not so great: +also Cambaietta is situate on the seas side, and is a very faire city. The +time that I was there, the city was in great calamity and scarsenesse, so +that I haue seene the men of the countrey that were Gentiles take their +children, their sonnes and their daughters, and haue desired the Portugals +to buy them, and I haue seene them sold for eight or ten larines a piece, +which may be of our money x.s. or xiii.s. iiii.d. For all this if I had not +seene it, I could not haue beleeued that there should be such a trade at +Cambaietta as there is: for in the time of euery new Moone and euery full +Moone, the small barks (innumerable) come in and out, for at those times of +the Moone the tides and waters are higher then at other times they be. +These barkes be laden with all sorts of spices, with silke of China, with +Sandols, with Elephants teeth, Veluets of Vercini, great quantity of +Pannina, which commeth from Mecca, Chickinos which be pieces of golde +woorth seuen shillings a piece sterling, with money, and with diuers sorts +of other marchandize. Also these barks lade out, as it were, an infinite +quantity of cloth made of Bumbast of all sorts, as white stamped and +painted, with great quantity of Indico, dried ginger and conserued, +Myrabolans drie and condite, Boraso in paste, great store of sugar, great +quantity of Cotton, abundance of Opium, Assa Fetida, Puchio, with many +other sorts of drugges, turbants made in Diu, great stones like to +Corneolaes, Granats, Agats, Diaspry, Calcidonij, Hematists, and some kinde +of naturall diamonds. There is in the city of Cambaietta an order, but no +man is bound to keepe it, but they that will; but all the Portugall +marchants keepe it, the which is this. There are in this city certain +Brokers which are Gentiles and of great authority, and haue euery one of +them fifteene or twenty seruants, and the Marchants that vse that countrey +haue their Brokers, with which they be serued: and they that haue not bene +there are informed by their friends of the order, and of what Broker they +shall be serued. [Sidenote: Marchants that trauell to the Indies must cary +their prouision of houshold with them.] Now euery fifteene dayes (as +abouesayd) that the fleet of small shippes entreth into the port, the +Brokers come to the water side, and these Marchants assoone as they are +come on land, do giue the cargason of all their goods to that Broker that +they will haue to do their businesse for them, with the marks of all the +fardles and packs they haue; and the marchant hauing taken on land all his +furniture for his house, because it is needful that the Marchants that +trade to the Indies carry prouision of housholde with them, because that in +euery place where they come they must haue a new house, the Broker that +hath receiued his cargason, commandeth his seruants to carry the Marchants +furniture for his house home, and load it on some cart, and carry it into +the city, where the Brokers haue diuers empty houses meet for the lodging +of Marchants, furnished onely with bedsteads, tables, chaires, and empty +iarres for water: then the Broker sayth to the Marchant, Goe and repose +your selfe, and take your rest in the city. The Broker tarrieth at the +water side with the cargason, and causeth all his goods to be discharged +out of the ship, and payeth the custome, and causeth it to be brought into +the house where the marchant lieth, the Marchant not knowing any thing +thereof, neither custome, nor charges. These goods being brought to this +passe into the house of the Marchant, the Broker demandeth of the Marchant +if he haue any desire to sell his goods or marchandise, at the prises that +such wares are worth at that present time? And if he hath a desire to sell +his goods presently, then at that instant the Broker selleth them away. +After this the Broker sayth to the Marchant, you haue so much of euery sort +of marchandise neat and cleare of euery charge, and so much ready money. +And if the Marchant will employ his money in other commodities, then the +Broker telleth him that such and such commodities will cost so much, put +aboord without any maner of charges. The Marchant vnderstanding the effect, +maketh his account; and if he thinke to buy or sell at the prices currant, +he giueth order to make his marchandise away: and if he hath commodity for +20000 dukets, all shalbe bartred or solde away in fifteene dayes without +any care or trouble: and when as the Marchant thinketh that he cannot sell +his goods at the prise currant, he may tary as long as he will, but they +cannot be solde by any man but by that Broker that hath taken them on land +and payed the custome: and purchance tarying sometimes for sale of their +commodity, they make good profit, and sometimes losse: but those +marchandise that come not ordinarily euery fifteene dayes, in tarying for +the sale of them, there is great profit. [Sidenote: Great store of men of +warre and rouers on the coast of Cambaia.] The barks that lade in +Cambaietta go for Diu to lade the ships that go from thence for the +streights of Mecca and Ormus, and some go to Chaul and Goa: and these ships +be very well appointed, or els are guarded by the Armada of the Portugals, +for that there are many Corsaires or Pyrats which goe coursing alongst that +coast, robbing and spoiling: and for feare of these theeues there is no +safe sailing in those seas, but with ships very well appointed and armed, +or els with the fleet of the Portugals, as is aforesayd. In fine the +kingdome of Cambaia is a place of great trade, and hath much doings and +traffique with all men, although hitherto it hath bene in the hands of +tyrants, because that at 75 yeeres of age the true king being at the +assault of Diu, was there slaine: whose name Sultan Badu. At that time +foure or fiue captaines of the army diuided the kingdome amongst +themselues, and euery one of them shewed in his countrey what tyranny he +could: but twelue yeeres ago the great Mogul a Moore king of Agra and +Delly, forty dayes iourny within the land of Amadauar, became the gouernour +of all the kingdome of Cambaia without any resistance, because he being of +great power and force, deuising which way to enter the land with his +people, there was not any man that would make him any resistance, although +they were tyrants and a beastly people, they were soone brought vnder +obedience. [Sidenote: A maruellous fond delight in women.] During the time +I dwelt in Cambaietta I saw very maruellous things: there were an infinite +number of artificers that made bracelets called Mannij, or bracelets of +elephants teeth, of diuers colours, for the women of the Gentiles, which +haue their armes full decked with them. And in this occupation there are +spent euery yeere many thousands of crownes: the reason whereof is this, +that when there dieth any whatsoeuer of their kindred, then in signe and +token of mourning and sorrow, they breake all their bracelets from their +armes, and presently they go and buy new againe, because that they had +rather be without their meat then without their bracelets. + + +Daman. Basan. Tana. + +Hauing passed Diu, I came to the second city that the Portugals haue, +called Daman, situated in the territory of Cambaia, distant from Diu an +hundred and twenty miles: it is no towne of merchandise, saue Rice and +corne, and hath many villages vnder it, where in time of peace the +Portugals take their pleasure, but in time of warre the enemies haue the +spoile of them; in such wise that the Portugals haue little benefit by +them. Next vnto Daman you shall haue Basan, which is a filthy place in +respect of Daman: in this place is Rice, Corne, and Timber to make shippes +and gallies. And a small distance beyond Bassan is a little Iland called +Tana, a place very populous with Portugals, Moores, and Gentiles: these +haue nothing but Rice, there are many makers of Armesie, and weauers of +girdles of wooll and bumbast blacke and redde like to Moocharies. + + +Of the cities of Chaul, and of the Palmer tree. + +Beyond this Iland you shall finde Chaul in the firme land; and they are two +cities, one of the Portugals, and the other of the Moores: that city which +the Portugals haue is situate lower then the other, and gouerneth the mouth +of the harbour, and is very strongly walled: and as it were a mile and an +halfe distant from this is the city of Moores, gouerned by their king +Zamalluco. In the time of warres there cannot any great ships come to the +city of the Moores, because the Portugals with their ordinance will sincke +them, for that they must perforce passe by the castles of the Portugals: +both the cities are ports of the sea, and are great cities, and haue vnto +them great traffique and trade of merchandise, of all sorts of spices, +drugges, silke, cloth of silke, Sandols, Marsine, Versin, Porcelane of +China, Veluets and Scarlets that come from Portugall and from Meca: with +many other sortes of merchandise. There come euery yeere from Cochin, and +from Cananor tenne or fifteene great shippes laden with great Nuts cured, +and with sugar made of the selfe same Nuts called Giagra: the tree whereon +these Nuts doe grow is called the Palmer tree: and thorowout all the +Indies, and especially from this place to Goa there is great abundance of +them, and it is like to the Date tree. In the whole world there is not a +tree more profitable and of more goodnesse then this tree is, neither doe +men reape so much benefit of any other tree as they doe of this, there is +not any part of it but serueth for some vse, and none of it is woorthy to +be burnt. With the timber of this tree they make shippes without the +mixture of any other tree, and with the leaues thereof they make sailes, +and with the fruit thereof, which be a kinde of Nuts, they make wine, and +of the wine they make Sugar and Placetto, which wine they gather in the +spring of the yeere: out of the middle of the tree where continually there +goeth or runneth out white liquour like vnto water, in that time of the +yeere they put a vessel vnder euery tree, and euery euening and morning +they take it away full, and then distilling it with fire it maketh a very +strong liquour: and then they put it into buts, with a quantity of Zibibbo, +white or blacke and in short time it is made a perfect wine. After this +they make of the Nuts great store of oile: of the tree they make great +quantity of boordes and quarters for buildings. Of the barke of this tree +they make cables, ropes, and other furniture for shippes, and, as they say, +these ropes be better then they that are made of Hempe. They make of the +bowes, bedsteds, after the Indies fashion, and Scauasches for merchandise. +The leaues they cut very small, and weaue them, and so make sailes of them, +for all maner of shipping, or els very fine mats. And then the first rinde +of the Nut they stampe, and make thereof perfect Ockam to calke shippes, +great and small: and of the hard barke thereof they make spoones and other +vessels for meat, in such wise that there is no part thereof throwen away +or cast to the fire. When these Mats be greene they are full of an +excellent sweet water to drinke: and if a man be thirsty, with the liquour +of one of the Mats he may satisfie himselfe: and as this Nut ripeneth, the +liquour thereof turneth all to kernell. There goeth out of Chaul for +Mallaca, for the Indies, for Macao, for Portugall, for the coasts of +Melinde, for Ormus, as it were an infinite number and quantity of goods and +merchandise that come out of the kingdome of Cambaia, as cloth of bumbast +white, painted, printed, great quantity of Indico, Opium, Cotton, Silke of +euery sort, great store of Boraso in Paste, great store of Fetida, great +store of yron, corne, and other merchandise. [Sidenote: Great ordinance +made in pieces, and yet seruiceable.] The Moore king Zamalluco is of great +power, as one that at need may command, and hath in his camp, two hundred +thousand men of warre, and hath great store of artillery, some of them made +in pieces, which for their greatnesse can not bee carried to and fro: yet +although they bee made in pieces, they are so commodious that they worke +with them maruellous well, whose shotte is of stone, and there hath bene of +that shot sent vnto the king of Portugall for the rarenes of the thing. The +city where the king Zamalluco hath his being, is within the land of Chaul +seuen or eight dayes iourney, which city is called Abneger. Three score and +tenne miles from Chaul, towards the Indies, is the port of Dabul, an hauen +of the king Zamalluco: from thence to Goa is an hundred and fifty miles. + + +Goa. + +[Sidenote: The chiefe place the Portugals have in the Indies.] Goa is the +principall city that the Portugals haue in the Indies, wherein the Viceroy +with his royall Court is resident, and is in an Iland which may be in +circuit fiue and twenty or thirty miles: and the city with the boroughs is +reasonable bigge, and for a citie of the Indies it is reasonable faire, but +the Iland is farre more fairer: for it is as it were full of goodly +gardens, replenished with diuers trees and with the Palmer trees as is +aforesayd. This city is of great trafique for all sorts of marchandise +which they trade withall in those parts: and the fleet which commeth euery +yeere from Portugall, which are fiue or sixe great shippes that come +directly for Goa, arriue there ordinarily the sixth or tenth of September, +and there they remaine forty or fifty dayes, and from thence they goe to +Cochin, where they lade for Portugall, and often times they lade one shippe +at Goa and the other at Cochin for Portugall. Cochin is distant from Goa +three hundred miles. The city of Goa is situate in the kingdome of Dialcan +a king of the Moores, whose chiefe city is vp in the countrey eight dayes +iourney, and is called Bisapor: the king is of great power, for when I was +in Goa in the yeere of our Lord 1570, this king came to giue assault to +Goa, being encamped neere vnto it by a riuer side with an army of two +hundred thousand men of warre, and he lay at this siege foureteene moneths +in which time there was peace concluded, and as report went amongst his +people, there was great calamity and mortality which bred amongst them in +the time of Winter, and also killed very many elephants. [Sidenote: A very +good sale for horses.] Then in the yeere of our Lord 1567, I went from Goa +to Bezeneger the chiefe city of the king dome of Narsinga eight dayes +iourney from Goa, within the land, in the company of two other merchants +which carried with them three hundred Arabian horses to that king: because +the horses of that countrey are of a small stature, and they pay well for +the Arabian horses: and is requisite that the merchants sell them well, for +that they stand them in great charges to bring them out of Persia to Ormus, +and from Ormus to Goa, where the ship that bringeth twenty horses and +vpwards payeth no custome, neither ship nor goods whatsoeuer; whereas if +they bring no horses, they pay 8 per cento of all their goods: and at the +going out of Goa the horses pay custome, two and forty pagodies for euery +horse, which pagody may be of sterling money sixe shillings eight pence, +they be pieces of golde of that value. So that the Arabian horses are of +great value in those countreys, as 300, 400, 500 duckets a horse, and to +1000 duckets a horse. + + +Bezeneger. + +The city of Bezeneger was sacked in the yeere 1565, by foure kings of the +Moores, which were of great power and might: the names of these foure kings +were these following, the first was called Dialcan, the second Zamaluc, the +third Cotamaluc, and the fourth Viridy: and yet these foure kings were not +able to ouercome the city and the king of Bezeneger, but by treason. The +king of Bezeneger was a Gentile, and had, amongst all other of his +captaines, two which were notable, and they were Moores: and these two +captaines had either of them in charge threescore and ten or fourescore +thousand men. These two captaines being of one religion with the foure +kings which were Moores, wrought meanes with them to betray their owne king +into their hands. [Footnote: A most vnkind and wicked treason against their +prince: this they haue for giuing credit to strangers, rather then to their +owne natiue people.] The king of Bezeneger esteemed not the force of the +foure kings his enemies, but went out of his city to wage battell with them +in the fieldes; and when the armies were ioyned, the battell lasted but a +while not the space of foure houres, because the two traitourous captaines, +in the chiefest of the fight, with their companies turned their faces +against their king, and made such disorder in his armie, that as astonied +they set themselues to flight. Thirty yeeres was this kingdome gouerned by +three brethren which were tyrants, the which keeping the rightful king in +prison, it was their vse euery yeere once to shew him to the people, and +they at their pleasures ruled as they listed. These brethren were three +captaines belonging to the father of the king they kept in prison, which +when he died, left his sonne very yong, and then they tooke the gouernment +to themselues. The chiefest of these three was called Ramaragio, and sate +in the royall throne, and was called the king: the second was called +Temiragio, and he tooke the gouernment on him: the third was called +Bengatre, and he was captaine generall of the army. These three brethren +were in this battell, in the which the chiefest and the last were neuer +heard of quicke nor dead. [Sidenote: The sacking of the city.] Onely +Temiragio fled in the battel, hauing lost one of his eyes: when the newes +came to the city of the ouerthrow in the battell, the wiues and children of +these three tyrants, with their lawfull king (kept prisoner) fled away, +spoiled as they were, and the foure kings of the Moores entred the city +Bezeneger with great triumph, and there they remained sixe moneths, +searching vnder houses and in all places for money and other things that +were hidden, and then they departed to their owne kingdomes because they +were not able to maintaine such a kingdome as that was, so farre distant +from their owne countrey. + +When the kings were departed from Bezeneger, this Temiragio returned to the +city, and then beganne for to repopulate it, and sent word to Goa to the +Merchants, if they had any horses, to bring them to him, and he would pay +well for them, and for this cause the foresayd two Merchants that I went in +company withall, carried those horses that they had to Bezeneger. +[Sidenote: An excellent good policy to intrap men.] Also this Tyrant made +an order or lawe, that if any Merchant had any of the horses that were +taken in the foresayd battell or warres, although they were of his owne +marke, that he would giue as much for them as they would: and besides he +gaue generall safe conduct to all that should bring them. When by this +meanes he saw that there were great store of horses brought thither vnto +him, hee gaue the Merchants faire wordes, vntill such time as he saw they +could bring no more. Then he licenced the Merchants to depart, without +giuing them any thing for their horses, which when the poore men saw, they +were desperate, and as it were mad with sorrow and griefe. + +I rested in Bezeneger seuen moneths; although in one moneth I might haue +discharged all my businesse, for it was necessary to rest there vntill the +wayes were cleere of theeues, which at that time ranged vp and downe. And +in the time I rested there, I saw many strange and beastly deeds done by +the Gentiles. First, when there is any Noble man or woman dead, they burne +their bodies: and if a married man die, his wife must burne herselfe aliue, +for the loue of her husband, and with the body of her husband: so that when +any man dieth, his wife will take a moneths leaue, two or three, or as shee +will, to burne her selfe in, and that day being come, wherein shee ought to +be burnt, that morning shee goeth out of her house very earely, either on +horsebacke or on an eliphant, or else is borne by eight men on a smal +stage: in one of these orders she goeth, being apparelled like to a Bride, +carried round about the City, with her haire downe about her shoulders, +garnished with iewels and flowers, according to the estate of the party, +and they goe with as great ioy as Brides doe in Venice to their nuptials: +shee carrieth in her left hand a looking glasse, and in her right hand an +arrow, and singeth thorow the City as she passeth, and sayth, that she +goeth to sleepe with her deere spowse and husband. [Sidenote: A discription +of the burning place.] She is accompanied with her kindred and friends +vntill it be one or two of the clocke in the afternoone, then they goe out +of the City, and going along the riuers side called Nigondin, which runneth +vnder the walles of the City, vntill they come vnto a place where they vse +to make this burning of women, being widdowes, there is prepared in this +place a great square caue, with a little pinnacle hard by it, foure or fiue +steppes vp: the foresayd caue is full of dried wood. [Sidenote: Feasting +and dancing when they should mourne.] The woman being come thither, +accompanied with a great number of people which come to see the thing, then +they make ready a great banquet, and she that shall be burned eateth with +as great ioy and gladnesse, as though it were her wedding day: and the +feast being ended, then they goe to dancing and singing a certeine time, +according as she will. After this, the woman of her owne accord, commandeth +them to make the fire in the square caue where the drie wood is, and when +it is kindled, they come and certifie her thereof, then presently she +leaueth the feast, and taketh the neerest kinseman of her husband by the +hand, and they both goe together to the banke of the foresayd riuer, where +shee putteth off all her iewels and all her clothes, and giueth them to her +parents or kinsefolke and couering herselfe with a cloth, because she will +not be seene of the people being naked, she throweth herselfe into the +riuer, saying, O wretches, wash away your sinnes. Comming out of the water, +she rowleth herselfe into a yellow cloth of fourteene braces long: and +againe she taketh her husbands kinseman by the hand, and they go both +together vp to the pinnacle of the square caue wherein the fire is made. +When she is on the pinnacle, shee talketh and reasoneth with the people, +recommending vnto them her children and kindred. Before the pinnacle they +vse to set a mat, because they shall not see the fiercenesse of the fire, +yet there are many that will haue them plucked away, shewing therein an +heart not fearefull, and that they are not affrayd of that sight. When this +silly woman hath reasoned with the people a good while to her content, +there is another women that taketh a pot with oile, and sprinckleth it ouer +her head, and with the same she anoynteth all her body, and afterwards +throweth the pot into the fornace, and both the woman and the pot goe +together into the fire, and presently the people that are round about the +fornace throw after her into the caue great pieces of wood, so by this +meanes, with the fire and with the blowes that she hath with the wood +throwen after her, she is quickly dead, and after this there groweth such +sorrow and such lamentation among the people, that all their mirth is +turned into howling and weeping, in such wise, that a man could scarse +beare the hearing of it. [Sidenote: Mourning when they should reioice.] I +haue seene many burnt in this maner, because my house was neere to the gate +where they goe out to the place of burning: and when there dieth any great +man, his wife with all his slaues with whom hee hath had carnall +copulation, burne themselues together with him. Also in this kingdome I +haue seene amongst the base sort of people this vse and order, that the man +being dead, he is carried to the place where they will make his sepulchre, +and setting him as it were vpright, then commeth his wife before him on her +knees, casting her armes about his necke, with imbracing and clasping him, +vntill such time as the Masons haue made a wall round about them, and when +the wall is as high as their neckes, there commeth a man behinde the women +and strangleth her: then when she is dead, the workemen finish the wall +ouer their heads, and so they lie buried both together. Besides these, +there are an infinite number of beastly qualities amongst them, of which I +haue no desire to write. [Sidenote: The cause why the women do so burne +themselues.] I was desirous to know the cause why these women would so +wilfully burne themselues against nature and law, and it was told mee that +this law was of an antient time, to make prouision against the slaughters +which women made of their husbands. For in those dayes before this law was +made, the women for euery little displeasure that their husbands had done +vnto them, would presently poison their husbands, and take other men, and +now by reason of this law they are more faithfull vnto their husbands, and +count their liues as deare as their owne, because that after his death her +owne followeth presently. + +In the yeere of our Lord God 1567, for the ille successe that the people of +Bezeneger had, in that their City was sacked by the foure kings, the king +with his Court went to dwell in a castle eight dayes iourney vp in the land +from Bezenger, called Penegonde. Also sixe dayes iourney from Bezenger, is +the place where they get Diamants: I was not there, but it was tolde me +that it is a great place, compassed with a wall, and that they sell the +earth within the wall, for so much a squadron, and the limits are set how +deepe or how low they shall digge. Those Diamante that are of a certaine +sise and bigger then that sise, are all for the king, it is many yeeres +agone, since they got any there, for the troubles that haue bene in that +kingdome. The first cause of this trouble was, because the sonne of this +Temeragio had put to death the lawfull king which he had in prison, for +which cause the Barons and Noblemen in that kingdome would not acknowledge +him to be their king, and by this meanes there are many kings, and great +diuision in that kingdome, and the city of Bezeneger is not altogether +destroyed, yet the houses stand still, but empty, and there is dwelling in +them nothing, as is reported, but Tygers and other wilde beasts. The +circuit of this city is foure and twentie miles about, and within the +walles are certeine mountaines. The houses stand walled with earth, and +plaine, all sauing the three palaces of the three tyrant brethren, and the +Pagodes which are idole houses: these are made with lime and fine marble. I +haue seene many kings Courts, and yet haue I seene none in greatnesse like +to this of Bezeneger, I say, for the ordes of his palace, for it hath nine +gates or ports. First when you goe into the place where the king did lodge, +there are fiue great ports or gates: these are kept with Captaines and +souldiers: then within these there are foure lesser gates: which are kept +with Porters. Without the first gate there is a little porch, where there +is a Captaine with fiue and twentie souldiers, that keepeth watch and ward +night and day: and within that another, with the like guard, wherethorow +they come to a very faire Court, and at the end of that Court there is +another porch as the first, with the like guard, and within that another +Court. And in this wise are the first fiue gates guarded and kept with +those Captaines: and then the lesser gates within are kept with a guard of +Porters: which gates stand open the greatest part of the night, because the +custome of the Gentiles is to doe their businesse, and make their feasts in +the night, rather then by day. The city is very safe from theeues, for the +Portugall merchants sleepe in the streets, or vnder porches, for the great +heat which is there, and yet they neuer had any harme in the night. At the +end of two monethes, I determined to goe for Goa in the company of two +other Portugall Marchants, which were making ready to depart, with two +palanchines or little litters, which are very commodious for the way, with +eight Falchines which are men hired to cary the palanchines, eight for a +palanchine, foure at a time: they carry them as we vse to carry barrowes. +[Sidenote: Men ride on bullocks and trauell with them on the way.] And I +bought me two bullocks, one of them to ride on, and the other to carry my +victuals and prouision, for in that countrey they ride on bullocks with +pannels, as we terme them, girts and bridles, and they haue a very good +commodious pace. From Bezeneger to Goa in Summer it is eight dayes iourney, +but we went in the midst of Winter, in the moneth of Iuly, and were +fifteene dayes comming to Ancola on the sea coast, so in eight dayes I had +lost my two bullocks: for he that carried my victuals, was weake and could +not goe, the other when I came vnto a riuer where was a little bridge to +passe ouer, I put my bullocke to swimming, and in the middest of the riuer +there was a little Iland, vnto the which my bullocke went, and finding +pasture, there he remained still, and in no wise we could come to him: and +so perforce, I was forced to leaue him, and at that time there was much +raine, and I was forced to go seuen dayes a foot with great paines: and by +great chance I met with Falchines by the way, whom I hired to carry my +clothes and victuals. We had great trouble in our iourney, for that euery +day wee were taken prisoners, by reason of the great dissension in that +kingdome: and euery morning at our departure we must pay rescat foure or +fiue pagies a man. And another trouble wee had as bad as this, that when as +wee came into a new gouernours countrey, as euery day we did, although they +were al tributary to the king of Bezeneger, yet euery one of them stamped a +seueral coine of Copper, so that the money that we tooke this day would not +serue the next: at length, by the helpe of God, we came safe to Ancola, +which is a country of the Queene of Gargopam, tributary to the king of +Bezeneger. [Sidenote: The marchandise that come in and out to Bezeneger +euery yere.] The marchandise that went euery yere from Goa to Bezeneger +were Arabian Horses, Veluets, Damasks, and Sattens, Armesine of Portugall, +and pieces of China, Saffron, and Skarlets: and from Bezeneger they had in +Turky for their commodities, iewels, and Pagodies which be ducats of golde: +[Sidenote: the apparell of those people.] the apparell that they vse in +Bezeneger is Veluet, Satten, Damaske, Scarlet, or white Bumbast cloth, +according, to the estate of the person with long hats on their heads, +called Colae, made of Veluet, Satten, Damaske, or Scarlet, girding +themselues in stead of girdles with some fine white bombast doth: they +haue breeches after the order of the Turks: they weare on their feet plaine +high things called of them Aspergh, and at their eares they haue hanging +great plenty of golde. + +Returning to my voyage, when we were together in Ancola, one of my +companions that had nothing to lose, tooke a guide, and went to Goa, +whither they goe in foure dayes, the other Portugall not being disposed to +go, tarried in Ancola for that Winter. [Sidenote: Their Winter is our +Summer.] The Winter in those parts of the Indies beginneth the fifteenth of +May, and lasteth vnto the end of October: and as we were in Ancola, there +came another Marchant of horses in a palanchine, and two Portugall +souldiers which came from Zeilan, and two cariers of letters, which were +Christians borne in the Indies; all these consorted to goe to Goa together, +and I determined to goe with them, and caused a pallanchine to be made for +me very poorely of Canes; and in one of them Canes I hid priuily all the +iewels I had, and according to the order, I tooke eight Falchines to cary +me: and one day about eleuen of the clocke wee set forwards on our iourney, +and about two of the clocke in the afternoone, as we passed a mountains +which diuideth the territory of Ancola and Dialcan, I being a little +behinde my company was assaulted by eight theeues, foure of them had +swordes and targets, and the other foure had bowes and arrowes. When the +Falchines that carried me vnderstood the noise of the assault, they let the +pallanchine and me fall to the ground, and ranne away and left me alone, +with my clothes wrapped about me: presently the theeues were on my necke +and rifeling me, they stripped me starke naked, and I fained my selfe +sicke, because I would not leaue the pallanchine, and I had made me a +little bedde of my clothes; the theeues sought it very narrowly and +subtilly, and found two pursses that I had, well bound vp together, wherein +I had put my Copper money which I had changed for foure pagodies in Ancola. +The theeues thinking it had beene so many duckats of golde, searched no +further: then they threw all my clothes in a bush, and hied them away, and +as God would haue it, at their departure there fell from them an +handkercher, and when I saw it, I rose from my Pallanchine or couch, and +tooke it vp, and wrapped it together within my Pallanchine. Then these my +Falchines were of so good condition, that they returned to seeke mee, +whereas I thought I should not haue found so much goodnesse in them: +because they were payed their mony aforehand, as is the vse, I had thought +to haue seene them no more. Before their comming I was determined to plucke +the Cane wherein my iewels were hidden, out of my coutch, and to haue made +me a walking staffe to carry in my hand to Goa, thinking that I should haue +gone thither on foot, but by the faithfullness of my Falchines, I was rid +of that trouble, and so in foure dayes they carried me to Goa, in which +time I made hard fare, for the theeues left me neither money, golde, nor +siluer, and that which I did eat was giuen me of my men for Gods sake: and +after at my comming to Goa I payed them for euery thing royally that I had +of them. [Sidenote: Foure small fortes of the Portugals.] From Goa I +departed for Cochin, which is a voyage of three hundred miles, and betweene +these two cities are many holdes of the Portugals, as Onor, Mangalor, +Barzelor, and Cananor. The Holde or Fort that you shall haue from Goa to +Cochin that belongeth to the Portugals is called Onor, which is in the +kingdome of the queene of Battacella, which is tributary to the king of +Bezeneger: there is no trade there, but onely a charge with the Captaine +and company he keepeth there. And passing this place, you shall come to +another small castle of the Portugals called Mangalor, and there is very +small trade but onely for a little Rice: and from thence you goe to a +little fort called Bazelor, there they haue good store of Rice which is +carried to Goa: and from thence you shall goe to a city called Cananor, +which is a harquebush shot distant from the chiefest city that the king of +Cananor hath in his kingdome being a king of the Gentiles: and he and his +are very naughty and malicious people, alwayes hauing delight to be in +warres with the Portugales, and when they are in peace, it is for their +interest to let their merchandize passe: there goeth out of this kingdom of +Cananor, all the Cardamomum, great store of Pepper, Ginger, Honie, ships +laden with great Nuts, great quantitie of Archa, which is a fruit of the +bignesse of Nutmegs, which fruite they eate in all those partes of the +Indies and beyond the Indies, with the leafe of an Herbe which they call +Bettell, the which is like vnto our Iuie leafe, but a litle lesser and +thinner: [Sidenote: Bettel is a very profitable herbe in that countrey.] +they eate it made in plaisters with the lime made of Oistershels, and +thorow the Indies they spend great quantitie of money in this composition, +and it is vsed daily, which thing I would not haue beleeued, if I had not +seene it. The customers get great profite by these Herbes, for that they +haue custome for them. When this people eate and chawe this in their +mouthes, it maketh their spittle to bee red like vnto blood, and they say, +that it maketh a man to haue a very good stomacke and a sweete breath, but +sure in my iudgement they eate it rather to fulfill their filthie lustes, +and of a knauerie, for this Herbe is moyst and hote, and maketh a very +strong expulsion. [Sidenote: Enimies to the king of Portugall.] From +Cananor you go to Cranganor, which is another smal Fort of the Portugales +in the land of the king of Cranganor, which is another king of the +Gentiles, and a countrey of small importance, and of an hundreth and +twentie miles, full of thieues, being vnder the king of Calicut, a king +also of the Gentiles, and a great enemie to the Portugales, which when hee +is alwayes in warres, hee and his countrey is the nest and resting for +stranger theeues, and those bee called Moores of Carposa, because they +weare on their heads long red hats, and these thieues part the spoyles that +they take on the Sea with the king of Calicut, for hee giueth leaue vnto +all that will goe a rouing, liberally to goe, in such wise, that all along +that coast there is such a number of thieues, that there is no sailing in +those Seas but with great ships and very well armed, or els they must go in +company with the army of the Portugals from Cranganor to Cochin is 15. +miles. + + +Cochin. + +[Sidenote: Within Cochin is the kingdom of Pepper.] Cochin is, next vnto +Goa, the chiefest place that the Portugales haue in the Indies, and there +is great trade of Spices, drugges, and all other sortes of merchandize for +the kingdome of Portugale, and there within the land is the kingdome of +Pepper, which Pepper the Portugales lade in their shippes by bulke and not +in sackes: [Marginal note: The Pepper that the Portugals bring, is not so +good as that which goeth for Mecca, which is brought hither by the +streights.] the Pepper that goeth for Portugale is not so good as that +which goeth for Mecca, because that in times past the officers of the king +of Portugale made a contract with the king of Cochin, in the name of the +king of Portugale, for the prizes of Pepper, and by reason of that +agreement betweene them at that time made, the price can neither rise nor +fall, which is a very lowe and base price, and for this cause the villaines +bring it to the Portugales, greene and full of filthe. The Moores of Mecca +that giue a better price, haue it cleane and drie, and better conditioned. +All the Spices and drugs that are brought to Mecca, are stollen from thence +as Contrabanda. Cochin is two cities, one of the Portugales, and another of +the king of Cochin: that of the Portugales is situate neerest vnto the Sea, +and that of the king of Cochin is a mile and a halfe vp higher in the land, +but they are both set on the bankes of one riuer which is very great and of +a good depth of water, which riuer commeth out of the mountaines of the +king of the Pepper, which is a king of the Gentiles, in whose kingdom are +many Christians of saint Thomas order: the king of Cochin is also a king of +the Gentiles and a great faithfull friend to the king of Portugale, and to +those Portugales which are married, and are Citizens in the Citie Cochin of +the Portugales. And by this name of Portugales throughout all the Indies, +they call all the Christians that come out of the West, whether they bee +Italians, Frenchmen, or Almaines, and all they that marrie in Cochin do get +an office according to the trade he is of: [Sidenote: Great priuiledges +that the citizens of Cochin haue.] this they haue by the great priuileges +which the Citizens haue of that city, because there are two principal +commodities that they deale withal in that place, which are these. The +great store of Silke that commeth from China, and the great store of Sugar +which commeth from Bengala: the married Citizens pay not any custome for +these two commodities: for they pay 4. per cento custome to the king of +Cochin, rating their goods at their owne pleasure. Those which are not +married and strangers, pay in Cochin to the king of Portugale eight per +cento of all maner of merchandise. I was in Cochin when the Viceroy of the +king of Portugale wrought what hee coulde to breake the priuilege of the +Citizens, and to make them to pay custome as other did: at which time the +Citizens were glad to waigh their Pepper in the night that they laded the +ships withall that went to Portugale and stole the custome in the night. +The king of Cochin hauing vnderstanding of this, would not suffer any more +Pepper to bee weighed. Then presently after this, the marchants were +licensed to doe as they did before, and there was no more speach of this +matter, nor any wrong done. This king of Cochin is of a small power in +respect of the other kings of the Indies, for hee can make but seuentie +thousand men of armes in his campe: hee hath a great number of Gentlemen +which hee calleth Amochi, and some are called Nairi: these two sorts of men +esteeme not their liues any thing, so that it may be for the honour of +their king, they will thrust themselues forward in euery danger, although +they know they shall die. These men goe naked from the girdle vpwardes, +with a clothe rolled about their thighs, going barefooted, and hauing their +haire very long and rolled vp together on the toppe of their heads, and +alwayes they carrie their Bucklers or Targets with them and their swordes +naked, these Nairi haue their wiues common amongst themselues, and when any +of them goe into the house of any of these women, hee leaueth his sworde +and target at the doore, and the time that hee is there, there dare not any +bee so hardie as to come into that house. The kings children shall not +inherite the kingdome after their father, because they hold this opinion, +that perchance they were not begotten of the king their father, but of some +other man, therfore they accept for their king, one of the sonnes of the +kings sisters, or of some other woman of the blood roial, for that they be +sure, they are of the blood roiall. + +[Sidenote: A very strange thing hardly to be beleeued.] The Nairi and their +wiues vse for a brauerie to make great holes in their eares, and so bigge +and wide, that it is incredible, holding this opinion, that the greater the +holes bee, the more noble they esteeme themselues. I had leaue of one of +them to measure the circumference of one of them with a threed, and within +that circumference I put my arme vp to the shoulder, clothed as it was, so +that in effect they are monstrous great. Thus they doe make them when they +be litle, for then they open the eare, and hang a piece of gold or lead +thereat, and within the opening, in the whole they put a certaine leafe +that they haue for that purpose, which maketh the hole so great. They lade +ships in Cochin for Portugale and for Ormus, but they that goe for Ormus +carrie no Pepper but by Contrabanda, as for Sinamome they easilie get leaue +to carrie that away, for all other Spices and drugs they may liberally +carie them to Ormus or Cambaia, and so all other merchandize which come +from other places, but out of the kingdom of Cochin properly they cary away +with them into Portugale great abundance of Pepper, great quantitie of +Ginger dried and conserued, wild Sinamon, good quantity of Arecca, great +store of Cordage of Cairo, made of the barke of the tree of the great Nut, +and better then that of Hempe, of which they carrie great store into +Portugale. + +[Sidenote: Note the departing of ships from Cochin.] The shippes euery +yeere depart from Cochin to goe for Portugall, on the fift day December, or +the fift day of Ianuary. Nowe to follow my voyage for the Indies: from +Cochin I went to Coulam, distant from Cochin seuentie and two miles, which +Coulam is a small Fort of the king of Portugales, situate in the kingdom of +Coulam, which is a king of the Gentiles, and of small trade: at that place +they lade onely halfe a ship of Pepper, and then she goeth to Cochin to +take in the rest, and from thence to Cao Comori is seuentie and two miles, +and there endeth the coast of the Indies: and alongst this coast, neere to +the water side, and also to Cao Comori, downe to the lowe land of Chialon, +which is about two hundred miles, the people there are as it were all +turned to the Christian faith: there are also Churches of the Friers of S. +Pauls order, which Friers doe very much good in those places in turning the +people, and in conuerting them, and take great paines in instructing them +in the law of Christ. + + +The fishing for Pearles. + +[Sidenote: The order how they fish for pearles.] The Sea that lieth +betweene the coast which descendeth from Cao Comori, to the lowe land of +Chiaoal, and the Iland Zeilan, they call the fishing of Pearles, which +fishing they make euery yeere, beginning in March or Aprill, and it lasteth +fiftie dayes, but they doe not fishe euery yeere in one place, but one +yeere in one place, and another yeere in another place of the same sea. +When the time of this fishing draweth neere, then they send very good +Diuers, that goe to discouer where the greatest heapes of Oisters bee vnder +water, and right agaynst that place where greatest store of Oisters bee, +there they make or plant a village with houses and a Bazaro, all of stone, +which standeth as long as the fishing time lasteth, and it is furnished +with all things necessarie, and nowe and then it is neere vnto places that +are inhabited, and other times farre off, according to the place where they +fishe. The Fishermen are all Christians of the countrey, and who so will +may goe to fishing, paying a certaine dutie to the king of Portugall, and +to the Churches of the Friers of Saint Paule, which are in that coast. All +the while that they are fishing, there are three or foure Fustes armed to +defend the Fishermen from Rouers. It was my chance to bee there one time in +my passage, and I saw the order that they vsed in fishing, which is this. +There are three or foure Barkes that make consort together, which are like +to our litle Pilot boates, and a litle lesse, there goe seuen or eight men +in a boate: and I haue seene in a morning a great number of them goe out, +and anker in fifteene or eighteene fadome of water, which is the Ordinarie +depth of all that coast. When they are at anker, they cast a rope into the +Sea, and at the ende of the rope, they make fast a great stone, and then +there is readie a man that hath his nose and his eares well stopped, and +annointed with oyle, and a basket about his necke, or vnder his left arme, +then hee goeth downe by the rope to the bottome of the Sea, and as fast as +he can he filleth the basket, and when it is full, he shaketh the rope, and +his fellowes that are in the Barke hale him vp with the basket: and in such +wise they goe one by one vntill they haue laden their barke with oysters, +and at euening they come to the village, and then euery company maketh +their mountaine or heape of oysters one distant from another, in such wise +that you shall see a great long rowe of mountaines or heapes of oysters, +and they are not touched vntill such time as the fishing bee ended, and at +the ende of the fishing euery companie sitteth round about their mountaine +or heape of oysters, and fall to opening of them, which they may easilie +doe because they bee dead, drie and brittle: and if euery oyster had +pearles in them, it would bee a very good purchase, but there are very many +that haue no pearles in them: when the fishing is ended, then they see +whether it bee a great gathering or a badde: there are certaine expert in +the pearles whom they call Chitini, which set and make the price of pearles +[Marginal note: These pearles are prised according to the caracts which +they weigh, euery caract is 4. graines, and these men that prise hem haue +an instrument of copper with holes in it, which be made by degrees for to +sort the perles withall.] according to their carracts, beautie, and +goodnesse, making foure sortes of them. The first sort bee the round +pearles, and they be called Aia of Portugale, because the Portugales doe +buy them. The second sorte which are not round, are called Aia of Bengala. +The third sort which are not so good as the second, they call Aia of +Canara, that is to say, the kingdome of Bezeneger. The fourth and last +sort, which are the least and worst sort, are called Aia of Cambaia. Thus +the price being set, there are merchants of euery countrey which are readie +with their money in their handes, so that in a fewe dayes all is bought vp +at the prises set according to the goodnesse and caracts of the pearles. + +In this Sea of the fishing of pearles is an Iland called Manar, which is +inhabited by Christians of the countrey which first were Gentiles, and haue +a small hold of the Portugales being situate ouer agaynst Zeilan: and +betweene these two Ilands there is a chanell, but not very big, and hath +but a small depth therein; by reason whereof there cannot any great shippe +passe that way, but small ships, and with the increase of the water which +is at the change or the full of the Moone, and yet for all this they must +vnlade them and put their goods into small vessels to lighten them before +they can passe that way for feare of Sholdes that lie in the chanell, and +after lade them into their shippes to goe for the Indies, and this doe all +small shippes that passe that way, but those shippes that goe for the +Indies Eastwardes, passe by the coast of Coromandel, on the other side by +the land of Chilao which is betweene the firme land and the Iland Manor: +and going from the Indies to the coast of Coromandel, they loose some +shippes, but they bee emptie, because that the shippes that passe that way +discharge their goods at an Iland called Peripatane, and there land their +goods into small flat bottomed boates which drawe litle water, and are +called Tane, and can run ouer euery Shold without either danger or losse of +any thing, for that they tarrie in Peripatane vntill such time as it bee +faire weather. Before they depart to passe the Sholds, the small shippes +and flat bottomed boates goe together in companie, and when they haue +sailed sixe and thirtie miles, they arriue at the place where the Sholdes +are, and at that place the windes blowe so forciblie, that they are forced +to goe thorowe, not hauing any other refuge to saue themselues. The flat +bottomed boates goe safe thorow, where as the small shippes if they misse +the aforesayd chanell, sticke fast on the Sholdes, and by this meanes many +are lost: and comming backe for the Indies, they goe not that way, but +passe by the chanell of Manar as is abouesayd, whose chanell is Oazie, and +if the shippes sticke fast, it is a great chance if there be any danger at +all. The reason why this chanell is not more sure to goe thither, is, +because the windes that raigne or blowe betweene Zeilan and Manar, make the +chanell so shalow with water, that almost there is not any passage. From +Coa Comori to the Iland of Zeilan is 120. miles ouerthwart. + + +Zeilan. [Footnote: Ceylon.] + +Zeilan is an Iland, in my iudgement, a great deale bigger then Cyprus: on +that side towards the Indies lying Westward is the citie called Columba, +which is a hold of the Portugales, but without walles or enimies. It hath +towards the Sea a free port, the awfull king of that Iland is in Colombo, +and is turned Christian, and maintained by the king of Portugall, being +depriued of his kingdome. The king of the Gentiles, to whom this kingdome +did belong, was called Madoni, which had two sonnes, the first named +Barbinas the prince; and the second Ragine. This king by the pollicie of +his yoonger sonne, was depriued of his kingdome, who because hee had +entised and done that which pleased the armie and souldiours, in despight +of his father and brother being prince, vsurped the kingdome, and became a +great warriour. First, this Iland had three kings; the King of Cotta with +his conquered prisoners: the king of Candia, which is a part of that Iland, +and is so called by the name of Candia, which had a reasonable power, and +was a great friend to the Portugals, which sayd that hee liued secretly a +Christian; the third was the king of Gianifampatan. In thirteene yeeres +that this Ragine gouerned this Iland, he became a great tyrant. + +In this Iland there groweth fine Sinamom, great store of Pepper, great +store of Nuttes and Arochoe: there they make great store of Cairo +[Footnote: Cairo is a stuffe that they make rope with, the which is the +barke of a tree.] to make Cordage: it bringeth foorth great store of +Christall Cats eyes, or Ochi de Gati, and they say that they finde there +some Rubies, but I haue sold Rubies well there that I brought with me from +Pegu. I was desirous to see how they gather the Sinamom, or take it from +the tree that it groweth on, and so much the rather, because the time that +I was there, was the season which they gather it in, which was in the +moneth of Aprill, at which time the Portugals were in armes, and in the +field, with the king of the countrey; yet I to satisfie my desire, although +in great danger, tooke a guide with mee and went into a wood three miles +from the Citie, in which wood was great store of Sinamome trees growing +together among other wilde trees; and this Sinamome tree is a small tree, +and not very high, and hath leaues like to our Baie tree. In the moneth of +March or Aprill, when the sappe goeth vp to the toppe of the tree, then +they take the Sinamom from that tree in this wise. [Sidenote: The cutting +and gathering of Sinamom.] They cut the barke of the tree round about in +length from knot to knot, or from ioint to ioint, aboue and belowe, and +then easilie with their handes they take it away, laying it in the Sunne to +drie, and in this wise it is gathered, and yet for all this the tree dieth +not, [Sidenote: A rare thing.] but agaynst the next yeere it will haue a +new barke, and that which is gathered euery yeere is the best Sinamome: for +that which groweth two or three yeares is great, and not so good as the +other is; and in these woods groweth much Pepper. + + +Negapatan. + +From the Iland of Zeilan men vse to goe with small shippes to Negapatan, +within the firme land, and seuentie two miles off is a very great Citie, +and very populous of Portugals and Christians of the countrey, and part +Gentiles: it is a countrey of small trade, neither haue they any trade +there, saue a good quantitie of Rice, and cloth of Bumbast which they carie +into diuers partes: it was a very plentifull countrey of victuals but now +it hath a great deale lesse; and that abundance of victuals caused many +Portugales to goe thither and build houses, and dwell there with small +charge. + +This Citie belongeth to a nobleman of the kingdome of Bezeneger being a +Gentile, neuerthelesse the Portugales and other Christians are well +intreated there, and haue their Churches there with a monasterie of Saint +Francis order, with great deuotion and very well accommodated, with houses +round about: yet for all this, they are amongst tyrants, which alwayes at +their pleasure may doe them some harme, as it happened in the yeere of our +Lord God one thousand fiue hundred, sixtie and fiue: [Sidenote: A foolish +feare of Portugals.] for I remember very well, how that the Nayer, that is +to say, the lord of the citie, sent to the citizens to demaund of them +certaine Arabian horses, and they hauing denied them vnto him, and +gainesayd his demaund, it came to passe that this lord had a desire to see +the Sea, which when the poore citizens vnderstood, they doubted some euill, +to heare a thing which was not woont to bee, they thought that this man +would come to sacke the Citie, and presently they embarked themselues the +best they could with their mooueables, marchandize, iewels, money, and all +that they had, and caused the shippes to put from the shore. When this was +done, as their euill chance would haue it, the next night following, there +came such a great storme that it put all the shippes on land perforce, and +brake them to pieces, and all the goods that came on land and were saued, +were taken from them by the souldiours and armie of this lord which came +downe with him to see the Sea, and were attendant at the Sea side, not +thinking that any such thing would haue happened. + + +Saint Thomas or San Tome. + +[Sidenote: St. Thomas his sepulchre.] From Negapatan following my voyage +towards the East an hundred and fiftie miles, I found the house of blessed +Saint Thomas, which is a Church of great deuotion, and greatly regarded of +the Gentiles for the great miracles they haue heard to haue bene done by +that blessed Apostle: neere vnto this Church the Portugals haue builded +them a Citie in the countrey subiect to the king of Bezeneger, which Citie +although it bee not very great, yet in my iudgement, it is the fairest in +all that part of the Indies: and it hath very faire houses and faire +gardens in vacant places very well accommodated: it hath streetes large and +streight, with many Churches of great deuotion, their houses be set close +one vnto another, with little doores, euery house hath his defence, so that +by that meanes it is of force sufficient to defend the Portugals against +the people of that countrey. The Portugals there haue no other possession +but their gardens and houses that are within the citie: the customes belong +to the king of Bezeneger, which are very small and easie, for that it is a +countrey of great riches and great trade: there come euery yeere two or +three great ships very rich, besides many other small ships: one of the two +great ships goeth for Pegu, and the other for Malacca, laden with fine +Bumbast [Marginal Note: A painted kind of cloth and died of diuers colours +which those people delight much in, and esteeme them of great price.] cloth +of euery sort, painted, which is a rare thing, because those kinde of +clothes shew as they were gilded, with diuers colours, and the more they be +washed, the liuelier the colours will shew. Also there is other cloth of +Bumbast which is wouen with diuers colours, and is of great value: also +they make in Sant Tome great store of red Yarne, which they die with a +roote called Saia, and this colour will neuer waste, but the more it is +washed, the more redder it will shew: they lade this yarne the greatest +part of it for Pegu, because that there they worke and weaue it to make +cloth according to their owne fashion, and with lesser charges. It is a +maruelous thing to them which haue not seene the lading and vnlading of men +and marchandize in S. Tome as they do: it is a place so dangerous, that a +man cannot bee serued with small barkes, neither can they doe their +businesse with the boates of the shippes, because they would be beaten in a +thousand pieces, but they make certaine barkes (of purpose) high, which +they call Masadie, they be made of litle boards; one board being sowed to +another with small cordes, and in this order are they made. And when they +are thus made, and the owners will embarke any thing in them, either men or +goods, they lade them on land, and when they are laden, the Barke-men +thrust the boate with her lading into the streame, and with great speed +they make haste all that they are able to rowe out against the huge waues +of the sea that are on that shore, vntill that they carie them to the +ships: and in like maner they lade these Masadies at the shippes with +merchandise and men. When they come neere the shore, the Barke-men leap out +of the Barke into the Sea to keepe the Barke right that she cast not +athwart the shore, and being kept right, the Suffe of the Sea setteth her +lading dry on land without any hurt or danger, and sometimes there are some +of them that are ouerthrowen, but there can be no great losse, because they +lade but a litle at a time. All the marchandize they lade outwards, they +emball it well with Oxe hides, so that if it take wet, it can haue no great +harme. + +[Sidenote: In the Iland of Banda they lade Nutmegs for there they grow.] In +my voyage, returning in the yeere of our Lord God one thousand, fiue +hundred, sixtie and sixe, I went from Goa vnto Malacca, in a shippe or +Gallion of the king of Portugal, which went vnto Banda for to lade Nutmegs +and Maces: from Goa to Malacca are one thousand eight hundred miles, we +passed without the Iland Zeilan, and went through the chanell of Nicubar, +or els through the chanell of Sombero, which is by the middle of the Iland +of Sumatra, called in olde time Taprobana: [Sidenote: In the Ilands of +Andemaon, they eate one another.] and from Necubar to Pegu is as it were a +rowe or chaine of an infinite number of Ilands, of which many are inhabited +with wilde people, and they call those Ilands the Ilands of Andemaon, and +they call their people sauage or wilde, because they eate one another: also +these Ilands haue warre one with another, for they haue small Barkes, and +with them they take one another, and so eate one another: and if by euil +chance any ship be lost on those Ilands, as many haue bene, there is not +one man of those ships lost there that escapeth vneaten or vnslaine. These +people haue not any acquaintance with any other people, neither haue they +trade with any, but liue onely of such fruites as those Ilands yeeld: and +if any ship come neere vnto that place or coast as they passe that way, as +in my voyage it happened as I came from Malacca through the chanell of +Sombrero, there came two of their Barkes neere vnto our ship laden with +fruite, as with Mouces which wee call Adam apples, with fresh Nuts, and +with a fruite called Inani, which fruite is like to our Turneps, but is +very sweete and good to eate: they would not come into the shippe for any +thing that wee could doe: neither would they take any money for their +fruite, but they would trucke for olde shirtes or pieces of olde linnen +breeches, these ragges they let downe with a rope into their Barke vnto +them, and looke what they thought those things to bee woorth, so much +fruite they would make fast to the rope and let vs hale it in: and it was +told me that at sometimes a man shall haue for an old shirt a good piece of +Amber. + + +Sumatra. + +This Iland of Sumatra is a great Iland and deuided and gouerned by many +kings, and deuided into many chanels, where through there is passage: upon +the headland towardes the West is the kingdom of Assi gouerned by a Moore +king: this king is of great force and strength, as he that beside his great +kingdom, hath many Foists and Gallies. In his kingdom groweth great store +of Pepper, Ginger, Beniamin: he is an vtter enemy to the Portugals, and +hath diuers times bene at Malacca to fight against it, and hath done great +harme to the boroughes thereof, but the citie alway withstood him +valiantly, and with their ordinance did great spoile to his campe. At +length I came to the citie of Malacca. + + +The Citie Malacca. + +Malacca is a Citie of marueilous great trade of all kind of marchandize, +which come from diuers partes, because that all the shippes that saile in +these seas, both great and small, are bound to touch at Malacca to paie +their custome there, although they vnlade nothing at all, as we do at +Elsinor: and if by night they escape away, and pay not their custome, then +they fall into a greater danger after: for if they come into the Indies and +haue not the seale of Malacca, they pay double custome. I haue not passed +further then Malacca towards the East, but that which I wil speake of here +is by good information of them that haue bene there. The sailing from +Malacca towards the East is not common for all men, as to China and Iapan, +and so forwards to go who will, but onely for the king of Portugall and his +nobles, with leaue granted vnto them of the king to make such voiage, or to +the iurisdiction of the captaine of Malacca, where he expecteth to know +what voiages they make from Malacca thither, and these are the kings +voiages, that euery yere there departeth from Malacca 2. gallions of the +kings, one of them goeth to the Moluccos to lade Cloues, and the other +goeth to Banda to lade Nutmegs and Maces. These two gallions are laden for +the king, neither doe they carie any particular mans goods, sauing the +portage of the Mariners and souldiers, and for this cause they are not +voiages for marchants, because that going thither, they shal not haue where +to lade their goods of returne; and besides this, the captaine wil not cary +any marchants for either of these two places. There goe small shippes of +the Moores thither, which come from the coast of Iaua, and change or guild +their commodities in the kingdom of Assa, and these be the Maces, Cloues, +and Nutmegs, which go for the streights of Mecca. The voiages that the king +of Portugall granteth to his nobles are these, of China and Iapan, from +China to Iapan, and from Iapan to China, and from China to the Indies, and +the voyage of Bengala, Maluco, and Sonda, with the lading of fine cloth, +and euery sort of Bumbast cloth. Sonda is an Iland of the Moores neere to +the coast of Iaua, and there they lade pepper for China. [Sidenote: The +ship of drugs, so termed of the Portugals.] The ship that goeth euery yeere +from the Indies to China, is called the ship of Drugs, because she carieth +diuers drugs of Cambaia, but the greatest part of her lading is siluer. +From Malacca to China is eighteene hundred miles: and from China to Iapan +goeth euery yeere a shippe of great importance laden with Silke, which for +returne of their Silke bringeth barres of siluer which they trucke in +China. The distance betweene China and Iapan is foure and twentie hundred +miles, and in this way there are diuers Ilands not very bigge, in which the +Friers of saint Paul, by the helpe of God, make many Christians there like +to themselues. From these Ilands hitherwards the place is not yet +discouered for the great sholdnesse of Sandes that they find. The Portugals +haue made a small citie neere vnto the coast of China called Macao, whose +church and houses are of wood, and it hath a bishoprike, but the customs +belong to the king of China, and they goe and pay the same at a citie +called Canton which is a citie of great importance and very beautifull two +dayes iourney and a halfe from Macao. The people of China are Gentiles, and +are so iealous and fearefull, that they would not haue a stranger to put +his foote within their land: so that when the Portugals go thither to pay +their custome, and to buy their merchandize, they will not consent that +they shall lie or lodge within the citie, but send them foorth into the +suburbes. The countrey of China [Marginal note: China is vnder the +gouernment of the great Tartar.] is neere the kingdom of great Tartria, and +is a very great countrey of the Gentiles and of great importance, which may +be iudged by the rich and precious marchandize that come from thence, then +which I beleeue there are not better nor in greater quantitie, in the whole +world besides. + +First, great store of golde, which they carie to the Indies, made in plates +like to little shippes, and in value three and twentie caracts a peece, +very great aboundance of fine silke, cloth of damaske and taffata, great +quantitie of muske, great quantitie of Occam in barres, great quantitie of +quicksiluer and of Cinaper, great store of Camfora, an infinite quantitie +of Porcellane, made in vessels of diuerse sortes, great quantitie of +painted cloth and squares, infinite store of the rootes of China: and euery +yeere there commeth from China to the Indies, two or three great shippes, +laden with most rich and precious merchandise. [Sidenote: A yeerely Carouan +from Persia to China.] The Rubarbe commeth from thence ouer lande, by the +way of Persia, because that euery yeere there goeth a great Carouan from +Persia to China, which is in going thither sixe moneths. The Carouan +arriueth at a Citie called Lanchin, the place where the king is resident +with his Court. I spake with a Persian that was three yeeres in that citie +of Lanchin, and he tolde me that it was a great Citie and of great +importance. The voiages of Malacca which are in the iurisdiction of the +Captaine of the castle, are these: Euery yeere he sendeth a small shippe to +Timor to lade white Sandols, for all the best commeth from this Iland: +there commeth some also from Solor, but that is not so good: also he +sendeth another small ship euery yere to Cauchin China, to lade there wood +of Aloes, for that all the wood of Aloes commeth from this place, which is +in the firme land neere vnto China, and in that kingdome I could not knowe +how that wood groweth by any meanes. [Sidenote: A market kept aboord of the +ships.] For that the people of the countrey will not suffer the Portugales +to come within the land, but onely for wood and water, and as for all other +things that they wanted, as victuals or marchandise, the people bring that +a boord the ship in small barkes, so that euery day there is a mart kept in +the ship, vntill such time as she be laden: also there goeth another ship +for the said Captaine of Malacca to Sion, to lade Verzino: all these +voiages are for the Captaine of the castle of Malacca, and when he is not +disposed to make these voiages he selleth them to another. + + +The citie of Sion, or Siam. + +[Sidenote: A prince of marueilous strength and power.] Sion was the +imperiall seat, and a great Citie, but in the yeere of our Lord God one +thousand five hundred sixtie and seuen, it was taken by the king of Pegu, +which king made a voyage or came by lande foure moneths iourney with an +armie of men through his lande, and the number of his armie was a million +and foure hundreth thousand men of warre: when hee came to the Citie, he +gaue assault to it, and besieged it one and twentie moneths before he could +winne it, with great losse of his people, this I know, for that I was in +Pegu sixe moneths after his departure, and sawe when that his officers that +were in Pegu, sent fiue hundreth thousand men of warre to furnish the +places of them that were slaine and lost in that assault: yet for all this, +if there had not beene treason against the citie, it had not beene lost: +for on a night there was one of the gates set open, through the which with +great trouble the king gate into the citie, and became gouernour of Sion: +and when the Emperour sawe that he was betrayed, and that his enemie was in +the citie, he poysoned himselfe: and his wiues and children, friends and +noblemen, that were not slaine in the first affront of the entrance into +the citie, were all caried captiues into Pegu, where I was at the comming +home of the king with his triumphs and victorie, which comming home and +returning from the warres was a goodly sight to behold, to see the +Elephants come home in a square, laden with golde, siluer, iewels, and with +Noble men and women that were taken prisoners in that citie. + +Now to returne to my yoyage: I departed from Malacca in a great shippe +which went for Saint Tome, being a Citie situate on the coast of +Coromandel: and because the Captaine of the castles of Malacca had +vnderstanding by aduise that the king of Assi [Marginal note: Or Achem.] +would come with a great armie and power of men against them, therefore vpon +this he would not giue licence that any shippes should depart: Wherefore in +this ship wee departed from thence in the night, without making any +prouision of our water: and wee were in that shippe foure hundreth and odde +men: [Sidenote: The mountaines of Zerzeline.] we departed from thence with +intention to goe to an Iland to take in water, but the windes were so +contrary, that they would not suffer vs to fetch it, so that by this meanes +wee were two and fortie dayes in the sea as it were lost, and we were +driuen too and fro, so that the first lande that we discouered, was beyonde +Saint Tome, more then fiue hundreth miles, which were the mountaines of +Zerzerline, neere vnto the kingdome of Orisa, and so wee came to Orisa with +many sicke, and more that were dead for want of water: and they that were +sicke in foure dayes dyed; and I for the space of a yeere after had my +throat so sore and hoarse, that I could neuer satisfie my thirst in +drinking of water: I iudge the reason of my hoarsenesse to bee with soppes +that I wet in vineger and oyle, wherewith I susteyned my selfe many dayes. +There was not any want of bread nor of wine: but the wines of that countrey +are so hot that being drunke without water they will kill a man: neither +are they able to drinke them: when we beganne to want water, I sawe +certaine Moores that were officers in the ship, that solde a small dish +full for a duckat, after this I sawe one that would haue giuen a barre of +Pepper, which is two quintalles and a halfe, for a litle measure of water, +and he could not haue it. Truely I beleeue that I had died with my slaue, +whom then I had to serue mee, which cost mee verie deare: but to prouide +for the daunger at hand, I solde my slaue for halfe that he was worth, +because that I would saue his drinke that he drunke, to serue my owne +purpose, and to saue my life. + + +Of the kingdome of Orisa, and the riuer Ganges. + +Orisa was a faire kingdome and trustie, through the which a man might haue +gone with golde in his hande without any daunger at all, as long as the +lawefull King reigned which was a Gentile, who continued in the citie +called Catecha, which was within the lande size dayes iourney. This king +loued strangers marueilous well, especially marchants which had traffique +in and out of his kingdome, in such wise that hee would take no custome of +them, neither any other grieuous thing. [Sidenote: The commodities that go +out of Orisa.] Onely the shippe that came thither payde a small thing +according to her portage, and euery yeere in the port of Orisa were laden +fiue and twentie or thirtie ships great and small, with ryce and diuers +sortes of fine white bumbaste cloth, oyle of Zerzeline which they make of a +seed, and it is very good to eate and to fry fish withal, great store of +butter, Lacca, long pepper, Ginger, Mirabolans dry and condite, great store +of cloth of herbes, which is a kinde of silke which groweth amongst the +woods without any labour of man, [Marginal note: This cloth we call Nettle +cloth.] and when the bole thereof is growen round as bigge as an Orenge, +then they take care onely to gather them. About sixteene yeeres past, this +king with his kingdome were destroyed by the king of Patane, which was also +king of the greatest part of Bengala, and when he had got the kingdome, he +set custome there twenty pro cento, as Marchants paide in his kingdome: but +this tyrant enioyed his kingdome but a small time, but was conquered by +another tyrant, which was the great Mogol king of Agra, Delly, and of all +Cambaia, without any resistance. I departed from Orisa to Bengala, to the +harbour Piqueno, which is distant from Orisa towardes the East a hundred +and seuentie miles. [Sidenote: The riuer of Ganges.] They goe as it were +rowing alongst the coast fiftie and foure miles, and then we enter into the +riuer Ganges: from the mouth of this riuer, to a citie called Satagan, +where the marchants gather themselues together with their trade, are a +hundred miles, which they rowe in eighteene houres with the increase of the +water: in which riuer it floweth and ebbeth as it doth in the Thamis, and +when the ebbing water is come, they are not able to rowe against it, by +reason of the swiftnesse of the water, yet their barkes be light and armed +with oares, like to Foistes, yet they cannot preuaile against that streame, +but for refuge must make them fast to the banke of the riuer vntill the +next flowing water, and they call these barkes Bazaras and Patuas: they +rowe as well as a Galliot, or as well as euer I haue seene any. A good +tides rowing before you come to Satagan, you shall haue a place which is +called Buttor, and from thence vpwards the ships doe not goe, because that +vpwardes the riuer is very shallowe, and litle water. Euery yeere at Buttor +they make and vnmake a Village, with houses and shoppes made of strawe, and +with all things necessarie to their vses, and this village standeth as long +as the ships ride there, and till they depart for the Indies, and when they +are departed, euery man goeth to his plot of houses, and there setteth fire +on them, which thing made me to maruaile. For as I passed vp to Satagan, I +sawe this village standing with a great number of people, with an infinite +number of ships and Bazars, and at my returne comming downe with my +Captaine of the last ship, for whom I tarried, I was al amazed to see such +a place so soone razed and burnt, and nothing left but the signe of the +burnt houses. The small ships go to Satagan, and there they lade. + + +Of the citie of Satagan. + +[Sidenote: The commodities that are laden in Satagan.] In the port of +Satagan euery yeere lade thirtie or fiue and thirtie ships great and small, +with rice, cloth of Bombast of diuerse sortes, Lacca, great abundance of +sugar, Mirabolans dried and preserued, long pepper, oyle of Zerzeline, and +many other sorts of marchandise. The citie of Satagan is a reasonable faire +citie for a citie of the Moores, abounding with all things, and was +gouerned by the king of Patane, and now is subiect to the great Mogol. I +was in this kingdome foure moneths, whereas many marchants did buy or +fraight boates for their benefites, and with these barkes they goe vp and +downe the riuer of Ganges to faires, buying their commoditie with a great +aduantage, because that euery day in the weeke they haue a faire, now in +one place, and now in another, and I also hired a barke, and went vp and +downe the riuer and did my businesse, and so in the night I saw many +strange things. The kingdome of Bengala in times past hath bene as it were +in the power of Moores, neuerthelesse there is great store of Gentiles +among them; alwayes whereas I haue spoken of Gentiles, is to be vnderstood +Idolaters, and whereas I speak of Moores I meane Mahomets sect. [Sidenote: +A ceremony of the gentiles when they be dead.] Those people especially that +be within the land doe greatly worship the riuer of Ganges: for when any is +sicke, he is brought out of the countrey to the banke of the riuer, and +there they make him a small cottage of strawe, and euery day they wet him +with that water, whereof there are many that die, and when they are dead, +they make a heape of stickes and boughes and lay the dead bodie thereon, +and putting fire thereunto, they let the bodie alone vntill it be halfe +rosted, and then they take it off from the fire, and make an emptie iarre +fas about his necke, and so throw him into the riuer. These things euery +night as I passed vp and downe the riuer I saw for the space of two +moneths, as I passed to the fayres to buy my commodities with the +marchants. And this is the cause that the Portugales will not drinke of the +water of the riuer Ganges, yet to the sight it is more perfect and clearer +then the water of Nilus is. From the port Piqueno I went to Cochin, and +from Cochin to Malacca, from whence I departed for Pegu being eight hundred +miles distant. That voyage is woont to be made in fiue and twentie or +thirtie dayes, but we were foure moneths, and at the ende of three moneths +our ship was without victuals. The Pilot told vs that wee were by his +altitude not farre from a citie called Tanasary, in the kingdome of Pegu, +and these his words were not true, but we were (as it were) in the middle +of many Ilands, and many vninhabited rockes, and there were also some +Portugales that affirmed that they knew the land, and knewe also where the +citie of Tanasari was. + +[Sidenote: Marchandise comming from Sion.] This citie of right belongeth to +the kingdome of Sion, which is situate on a great riuers side, which +commeth out of the kingdome of Sion: and where this riuer runneth into the +sea, there is a village called Mirgim, in whose harbour euery yeere there +lade some ships with Verzina, Nypa, and Beniamin, a few cloues, nutmegs and +maces which come from the coast of Sion, but the greatest marchandise there +is Verzin and Nypa, which is an excellent wine, which is made of the flower +of a tree called Nyper. [Sidenote: Niper wine good to cure the French +disease.] Whose licquour they distill, and so make an excellent drinke +cleare as christall, good to the mouth, and better to the stomake, and it +hath an excellent gentle vertue, that if one were rotten with the French +pockes, drinking good store of this, he shall be whole againe, and I haue +seene it proued, because that when I was in Cochin, there was a friend of +mine, whose nose beganne to drop away with that disease, and he was +counselled of the doctors of phisicke, that he should goe to Tanasary at +the time of the new wines, and that he should drinke of the myper wine, +night and day, as much as he could before it was distilled, which at that +time is most delicate, but after that it is distilled, it is more strong, +and if you drinke much of it, it will fume into the head with drunkennesse. +This man went thither, and did so, and I haue seene him after with a good +colour and sound. This wine is very much esteemed in the Indies, and for +that it is brought so farre off, it is very deare: in Pegu ordinarily it it +good cheape, because it is neerer to the place where they make it, and +there is euery yeere great quantitie made thereof. And returning to my +purpose, I say, being amongst these rockes, and farre from the land which +is ouer against Tanasary, with great scarcitie of victuals, and that by the +saying of the Pylot and two Portugales, holding then firme that wee were in +front of the aforesayd harbour, we determined to goe thither with our boat +and fetch victuals, and that the shippe should stay for vs in a place +assigned. We were twentie and eight persons in the boat that went for +victuals, and on a day about twelue of the clocke we went from the ship, +assuring our selues to bee in the harbour before night in the aforesaid +port, wee rowed all that day and a great part of the next night, and all +the next day without finding harbour, or any signe of good landing, and +this came to passe through the euill counsell of the two Portugales that +were with vs. + +For we had ouershot the harbour and left it behind vs, in such wise that we +had lost the lande inhabited, together with the shippe, and we eight and +twentie men had no maner of victuall with vs in the boate, but it was the +Lords will that one of the Mariners had brought a little rice with him in +the boate to barter away for some other thing, and it was not so much but +that three or foure men would haue eaten it at a meale: I tooke the +gouernment of this Ryce, promising that by the helpe of God that Ryce +should be nourishment for vs vntil it pleased God to send vs to some place +that was inhabited: [Sidenote: Great extemitie at sea.] and when I slept I +put the ryce into my bosome because they should not rob it from me: we were +nine daies rowing alongst the coast, without finding any thing but +countreys vninhabited, and desert Ilands, where if we had found but grasse +it would haue seemed sugar vnto vs, but wee could not finde any, yet we +found a fewe leaues of a tree, and they were so hard that we could not +chewe them, we had water and wood sufficient, and as wee rowed, we could +goe but by flowing water, for when it was ebbing water, wee made fast our +boat to the banke of one of those Ilandes, and in these nine dayes that we +rowed, we found a caue or nest of Tortoises egges, wherein were one hundred +fortie and foure egges, the which was a great helpe vnto vs: these egges +are as bigge as a hennes egge, and haue no shell about them but a tender +skinne, euery day we sodde a kettle full of those egges, with an handfull +of rice in the broth thereof: it pleased God that at the ende of nine dayes +we discouered certaine fisher men, a fishing with small barkes, and we +rowed towardes them, With a good cheare, for I thinke there were neuer men +more glad then we were, for wee were so sore afflicted with penurie, that +we could scarce stande on our legges. Yet according to the order that we +set for our ryce, when we sawe those fisher men, there was left sufficient +for foure dayes. [Sidenote: Tauay under the king of Pegu.] The first +village that we came to was in the gulfe of Tauay, vnder the king of Pegu, +whereas we found great store of victuals: then for two or three dayes after +our arriuall there, we would eate but litle meate any of vs, and yet for +all this, we were at the point of death the most part of vs. From Tauay to +Martauan, in the kingdome of Pegu, are seuentie two miles. We laded our +bote with victuals which were aboundantly sufficient for sixe moneths, from +whence we departed for the port and Citie of Martauan, where in short time +we arriued, but we found not our ship there as we had thought we should, +from whence presently we made out two barkes to goe to looke for her. And +they found her in great calamitie and neede of water, being at an anker +with a contrary winde, which came very ill to passe, because that she +wanted her boat a moneth, which should haue made her prouision of wood and +water, the shippe also by the grace of God arriued safely in the aforesaid +port of Martauan. + + +The Citie of Martauan. + +[Sidenote: Martauan a citie vnder the king of Pegu.] We found in the Citie +of Martauan ninetie Portugales of Merchants and other base of men, which +had fallen at difference with the Retor or gouernour of the citie, and all +for this cause, that certaine vagabondes of the Portugales had slaine fiue +falchines of the king of Pegu, which chaunced about a moneth after the king +of Pegu was gone with a million and foure hundred thousand men to conquere +the kingdome of Sion. [Sidenote: A custome that these people haue when the +king is in the warres.] They haue for custome in this Countrey and +kingdome, the king being wheresoeuer his pleasure is to bee out of his +kingdome, that euery fifteene dayes there goeth from Pegu a Carouan of +Falchines, with euery one a basket on his head full of some fruites or +other delicates or refreshings, and with cleane clothes: it chaunced that +this Carauan passing by Martauan, and resting themselues there a night, +there happened betweene the Portugales and them wordes of despight, and +from wordes to blowes, and because it was thought that the Portugales had +the worse, the night following, when the Falchines were a sleepe with their +companie, the Portugales went and cut off their heads. [Sidenote: A law in +Pegu for killing of men.] Now there is a law in Pegu, that whosoeuer +killeth a man, he shall buy the shed blood with his money, according to the +estate of the person that is slaine, but these Falchines being the seruants +of the king, the Retors durst hot doe any thing in the matter, without the +consent of the king, because it was necessarie that the king should knowe +of such a matter. When the king had knowledge thereof, he gaue +commaundement that the malefactors should be kept vntill his comming home, +and then be would duely minister iustice, but the Captaine of the +Portugales would not deliuer those men, but rather set himselfe with all +the rest in armes, and went euery day through the Citie marching with his +Drumme und ensignes displayd. [Sidenote: Great pride of the Portugales.] +For at that time the Citie was emptie of men, by reason they were gone all +to the warres, and in businesse of the king: in the middest of this rumour +wee came thither, and I thought it, a strange thing to see the Portugales +vse such insolencie in another mans Citie. And I stoode in doubt of that +which came to passe, and would not vnlade my goods because that they were +more sure in the shippe then on the land, the greatest part of the lading +was the owners of the shippe, who was in Malacca, yet there were diuerse +marchants there, but their goods were of small importance, all those +marchants tolde me that they would not vnlade any of their goods there, +vnlesse I would vnlade first, yet after they left my counsell and followed +their owne, and put their goods a lande and lost euery whit. The Retor with +the customer sent for mee, and demaunded why I put not my goods a lande, +and payed my custome as other men did? To whom I answered, that I was a +marchant that was newly come thither, and seeing such disorder amongst the +Portugales, I doubted the losse of my goods which cost me very deare, with +the sweate of my face, and for this cause I was determined not to put my +goods on lande, vntil such time as his honour would assure me in the name +of the king, that I should haue no losse, and although there came harme to +the Portugales, that neither I nor my goods should haue any hurt, because I +had neither part nor any difference with them in this tumult: my reason +sounded well in the Retors eares, and so presently he sent for the Bargits, +which are as Counsellors of the Citie, and then they promised mee on the +kings head or in the behalfe of the king, that neither I nor my goods +should haue any harme, but that we should be safe and sure: of which +promise there were made publike notes. And then I sent for my goods and had +them on land, and payde my custome, which is in that countrey ten in the +hundreth of the same goods, and for my more securitie I tooke a house right +against the Retors house. The Captaine of the Portugales, and all the +Portugall marchants were put out of the Citie, and I with twentie and two +poore men which were officers in the shippe had my dwelling in the Citie. +[Sidenote: A reuenge on the Portugales.] After this the Gentiles deuised to +be reuenged of the Portugales; but they would not put it in execution, +vntil such time as our small shippe had discharged all her goods, and then +the next night following came from Pegu foure thousand souldiers with some +Elephants of warre; and before that they made any tumult in the citie, the +Retor sent, and gaue commaundement to all Portugales that were in the +Citie, when they heard any rumour or noyse, that for any thing they should +not goe out of their houses, as they tendered their owne health. Then foure +houres within night I heard a great rumour and noyse of men of warre, with +Elephants which threw downe the doores of the ware-houses of the +Portugales, and their houses of wood and strawe, in the which tumult there +were some Portugales wounded, and one of them slaine; and others without +making proofe of their manhoode, which the day before did so bragge, at +that time put themselues to flight most shamefully, and saued themselues a +boord of litle shippes, that were at an anker in the harbour, and some that +were in their beds fled away naked, and that night they caried away all the +Portugalles goods out of the suburbes into the Citie, and those Portugales +that had their goods in the suburbes also. After this the Portugales that +were fledde into the shippes to saue themselues, tooke a newe courage to +themselues, and came on lande and set fire on the houses in the suburbes, +which houses being made of boorde and strawe, and the winde blowing fresh, +in small time were burnt and consumed, with which fire halfe the Citie had +like to haue beene burnt; when the Portugales had done this, they were +without all hope to recouer any part of their goods againe, which goods +might amount to the summe of sixteene thousand duckats, which, if they had +not set fire to the towne, they might haue had againe without any losse at +all. Then the Portugales vnderstanding that this thing was not done by the +consent of the king, but by his Lieutenant and the Retor of the citie were +very ill content, knowing that they had made a great fault, yet the next +morning following, the Portugales beganne to bende and shoot their +ordinance against the Citie, which batterie of theirs continued foure +dayes, but all was in vaine, for the shotte neuer hit the Citie, but +lighted on the top of a small hill neere vnto it, so that the citie had no +harme. When the Retor perceiued that the Portugales made battery against +the Citie, be tooke one and twentie Portugales that were there in the +Citie, and sent them foure miles into the Countrey, there to tarry vntill +such time as the other Portugales were departed, that made the batterie, +who after their departure let them goe at their owne libertie without any +harme done vnto them. I my selfe was alwayes in my house with a good guard +appointed me by the Retor, that no man should doe me iniurie, nor harme me +nor my goods; in such wise that hee perfourmed all that he had promised me +in the name of the king, but he would not let me depart before the comming +of the king, which was greatly to my hinderance, because I was twenty and +one moneths sequestred, that I could not buy nor sell any kinde of +marchandise. Those commodities that I brought thither, were peper, sandols, +and Porcellan of China: so when the king was come home, I made my +supplication vnto him, and I was licenced to depart when I would. + +From Martauan I departed to goe to the chiefest Citie in the kingdome of +Pegu, which is also called after the name of the kingdome, which voyage is +made by sea in three or foure daies: they may goe also by lande, but it is +better for him that hath marchandize to goe by sea and lesser charge. And +in this voyage you shall haue a Macareo, which is one of the most +marueilous things [Marginal note: A thing most marueilous, that at the +comming of a tide the earth should quake.] in the world that Nature hath +wrought, and I neuer saw any thing so hard to be beleeued as this, to wit, +the great increasing and diminishing of the water there at one push or +instant, and the horrible earthquake and great noyse that the said Macareo +maketh where it commeth. We departed from Martauan in barkes, which are +like to our Pylot boates, with the increase of the water, and they goe as +swift as an arrowe out of a bow, so long as the tide runneth with them, and +when the water is at the highest, then they drawe themselues out of the +Channell towardes some banke, and there they come to anker, and when the +water is diminished, then they rest on dry land: and when the barkes rest +dry, they are as high from the bottome of the Chanell, as any house top is +high from the ground. [Sidenote: This tide is like to the tides in our +riuer of Seuerne.] They let their barkes lie so high for this respect, that +if there should any shippe rest or ride in the Chanell, with such force +commeth in the water, that it would ouerthrowe shippe or barke: yet for all +this, that the barkes be so farre out of the Chanell, and though the water +hath lost her greatest strength and furie before it come so high, yet they +make fast their prowe to the streme, and oftentimes it maketh them very +fearefull, and if the anker did not holde her prowe vp by strength, shee +would be ouerthrowen and lost with men and goods. [Sidenote: These tides +make their iust coarse as ours doe.] When the water beginneth to increase, +it maketh such a noyse and so great that you would think it an earthquake, +and presently at the first it maketh three waues. So that the first washeth +ouer the barke, from stemme to sterne, the second is not so furious as the +first, and the thirde rayseth the Anker, and then for the space of sixe +houres while the water encreaseth, they rowe with such swiftnesse that you +would thinke they did fly: in these tydes there must be lost no iot of +time, for if you arriue not at the stagions before the tyde be spent, you +must turne back from whence you came. For there is no staying at any place, +but at these stagions, and there is more daunger at one of these places +then at another, as they be higher and lower one then another. When as you +returne from Pegu to Martauan, they goe but halfe the tide at a time, +because they will lay their barkes vp aloft on the bankes, for the reason +aforesayd. I could neuer gather any reason of the noyse that this water +maketh in the increase of the tide, and in deminishing of the water. There +is another Macareo in Cambaya, [Sidenote: The Macareo is a tide or a +currant.] but that is nothing in comparison of this. By the helpe of God we +came safe to Pegu, which are two cities, the olde and the newe, in the olde +citie are the Marchant strangers, and marchants of the Countrey, for there +are the greatest doings and the greatest trade. This citie is not very +great, but it hath very great suburbes. Their houses be made with canes, +and couered with leaues, or with strawe, but the marehants haue all one +house or Magason, which house they call Godon which is made of brickes, and +there they put all their goods of any valure, to saue them from the often +mischances that there happen to houses made of such stuffe. In the newe +citie is the pallace of the king, and his abiding place with all his barons +and nobles, and other gentlemen; and in the time that I was there, they +finished the building of the new citie: it is a great citie, very plaine +and flat, and foure square, walled round about and with ditches that +compasse the wals about with water, in which ditches are many crocodils, it +hath no drawe bridges, yet it hath twentie gates, fiue for euery square on +the walles, there are many places made for centinels to watch, made of wood +and couered or guilt with gold, the streetes thereof are the fayrest that I +haue seene, they are as straight as a line from one gate to another, and +standing at the one gate you may discouer to the other, and they are as +broad as 10 or 12 men may ride a breast in them: [Sidenote: A rich and +stately palace.] and those streetes that be thwart are faire and large, +these streetes, both on the one side and on the other, are planted at the +doores of the houses, with nut trees of India, which make a very commodious +shadowe, the houses be made of wood and couered with a kind of tiles in +forme of cups, very necessary for their vse, the kings palace is in the +middle of the citie, made in forme of a walled castle, with ditches full of +water round about it, the lodgings within are made of wood all ouer gilded, +with fine pinacles, and very costly worke, couered with plates of golde. +Truely it may be a kings house: within the gate there is a faire large +court, from the one side to the other, wherein there are made places for +the strongest and stoutest Eliphants appointed for the seruice of the kings +person, and amongst all other Eliphants, he hath foure that be white, a +thing so rare that a man shall hardly finde another king that hath any +such, and if this king knowe any other that hath white Eliphantes, he +sendeth for them as for a gift. The time that I was there, there were two +brought out of a farre Countrey, and that cost me something the sight of +them, for they commaund the marchants to goe to see them, and then they +must giue somewhat to the men that bring them: the brokers of the marchants +giue for euery man halfe a duckat, which they call a Tansa, [Marginal note: +This money called Tansa is halfe a duckat which may be three shillings and +foure pence.] which amounteth to a great summe, for the number of merchants +that are in that citie; and when they haue payde the aforesayde Tansa, they +may chuse whether they will see them at that time or no, because that when +they are in the kings stall, euery man may see them that will: but at that +time they must goe and see them, for it is the kings pleasure it should be +so. This king amongst all other his titles, is called the King of the white +Eliphantes and it is reported that if this king knewe any other king that +had any of these white Eliphantes, and woud not send them vnto him, that he +would hazard his whole kingdome to conquer them, he esteemeth these white +Eliphantes very deerely, and they are had in great regard, and kept with +very meete seruice, euery one of them is in a house, all guilded ouer, and +they haue their meate giuen them in vessels of siluer and golde, there is +one blacke Eliphant the greatest that hath bene seene, and is kept +according to his bignesse, he is nine cubites high, which is a marueilous +thing. [Sidenote: A warlike policie.] It is reported that this king hath +foure thousand Eliphantes of warre, and all haue their teeth, and they vse +to put on their two vppermost teeth sharpe spikes of yron, and make them +fast with rings, because these beastes fight, and make battell with their +teeth; hee hath also very many yong Eliphants that haue not their teeth +sprowted foorth: also this king hath a braue deuise in hunting to take +these Eliphantes when hee will, two miles from the Citie. [Sidenote: An +excellent deuise to hunt, and take wilde Elephants.] He hath builded a +faire pallace all guilded, and within it a faire Court, and within it and +rounde about there are made an infinite number of places for men to stande +to see this hunting: neere vnto this Pallace is a mighty great wood, +through the which the hunts-men of the king ride continually on the backs +of the feminine Eliphants, teaching them in this businesse. Euery hunter +carieth out with him fiue or sixe of these feminines, and they say that +they anoynt the secret places with a certaine composition that they haue, +that when the wilde Eliphant doeth smell thereunto, they followe the +feminines and cannot leaue them: when the hunts-men haue made prouision and +the Eliphant is so entangled, they guide the feminines towards the Pallace +which is called Tambell, and this Pallace hath a doore which doth open and +shut with engines, before which doore there is a long streight way with +trees on both the sides, which couereth the way in such wise as it is like +darkenesse in a corner: the wilde Eliphant when he commeth to this way, +thinketh that he is in the woods. At end of this darke way there is a great +field, when the hunters haue gotten this praye, when they first come to +this field, they send presently to giue knowledge thereof to the Citie, and +with all speed there go out fiftie or sixtie men on horsebacke, and doe +beset the fielde rounde about: in the great fielde then the females which +are taught in this businesse goe directly to the mouth of the darke way, +and when as the wilde Eliphant is entred in there, the hunters shoute and +make a great noyse, as much as is possible, to make the wilde Eliphant +enter in at the gate of that Pallace, which is then open, and as soone as +he is in, the gate is shut without any noyse, and so the hunters with the +female Eliphants and the wilde one are all in the Court together, and then +within a small time the females withdraw themselues away one by one out of +the Court, leauing the wilde Eliphant alone: [Sidenote: An excellent +pastime of the Eliphants.] and when he perceiueth that he is left alone, he +is so madde that for two or three houres to see him, it is the greatest +pleasure in the world: he weepeth, hee flingeth, hee runneth, he iustleth, +hee thrusteth vnder the places where the people stand to see him, thinking +to kil some of them, but the posts and timber is so strong and great, that +hee cannot hurt any body, yet hee oftentimes breaketh his teeth in the +grates; at length when hee is weary and hath laboured his body that hee is +all wet with sweat, then hee plucketh in his truncke into his mouth, and +then hee throweth out so much water out of his belly, that he sprinckleth +it ouer the heades of the lookers on, to the vttermost of them, although it +bee very high: and then when they see him very weary, there goe certaine +officers into the Court with long sharpe canes [Marginal note: These canes +are like to them in Spain which they call Ioco de tore.] in their hands, +and prick him that they make him to goe into one of the houses that is made +alongst the Court for the same purpose: as there are many which are made +long and narrow, and when the Eliphant is in, he cannot turne himself to go +backe againe. And it is requisite that these men should be very wary and +swift, for although their canes be long, yet the Eliphant would kill them +if they were not swift to saue themselues: at length when they haue gotten +him into one of those houses, they stand ouer him in a loft and get ropes +vnder his belly and about his necke, and about his legges, and binde him +fast, and so let him stand foure or fiue dayes, and giue him neither meate +nor drinke. At the ende of these foure or fiue dayes, they vnloose him and +put one of the females vnto him, and giue him meate and drinke, and in +eight dayes he is become tame. In my. iudgement there is not a beast so +intellectiue as are these Eliphants, nor of more vnderstanding in al the +world: for he wil do all things that his keeper saith, so that he lacketh +nothing but humaine speech. + +It is reported that the greatest strength that the king of Pegu hath is in +these Eliphants, for when they goe to battell, they set on their backes a +Castle of wood bound thereto, with bands vnder their bellies: and in euery +Castle foure men very commodiously set to fight with harqubushes, with +bowes and arrowes, with darts and pikes, and other launcing weapons: and +they say that the skinne of this Eliphant is so hard, that an harquebusse +will not pierce it, vnlesse it bee in the eye, temples, or some other +tender place of his body. [Sidenote: A goodly order in a barbarous people.] +And besides this, they are of great strength, and haue a very excellent +order in their battel, as I haue seene at their feastes which they make in +the yeere, in which feastes the king maketh triumphes, which is a rare +thing and worthy memorie, that in so barbarous a people should be such +goodly orders as they haue in their armies, which be distinct in squares of +Eliphants, of horsemen, of harquebushers and pikemen, that truly the number +of men are infinite: but their armour and weapons are very nought and weake +as well the one as the other: they haue very bad pikes, their swords are +worse made, like long kniues without points, his harquebushes are most +excellent, and alway in his warres he hath eightie thousand harquebushes, +and the number of them encreaseth dayly. Because the king will haue them +shoote every day at the Plancke, and so by continuall exercise they become +most excellent shot: also hee hath great ordinance made of very good +mettall; to conclude there is not a King on the earth that hath more power +or strength then this king of Pegu, because hee hath twentie and sixe +crowned kings at his commaunde. He can make in his campe a million and a +halfe of men of warre in the fielde against his enemies. The state of his +kingdome and maintenance of his army, is a thing incredible to consider, +and the victuals that should maintaine such a number of people in the +warres: but he that knoweth the nature and quality of that people, will +easily beleeue it. [Sidenote: Eating of serpents.] I haue seene with mine +eyes, that those people and souldiers haue eaten of all sorts of wild +beastes that are on the earth, whether it bee very filthie or otherwise all +serueth for their mouthes: yea, I haue seene them eate Scorpions and +Serpents, also they feed of all kinde of herbes and grasse. So that if such +a great armie want not water and salt, they will maintaine themselues a +long time in a bush with rootes, flowers and leaues of trees, they cary +rice with them for their voyage, and that serueth them in stead of comfits; +it is so daintie vnto them. This king of Pegu hath not any army or power by +sea, but in the land, for people, dominions, golde and siluer, he farre +exceeds the power of the great Turke in treasure and strength. [Sidenote: +The riches of the king of Pegu.] This king hath diuers Magasons full of +treasure, as gold, and siluer, and euery day he encreaseth it more and +more, and it is neuer diminished. Also hee is Lord of the Mines of Rubies, +Safires and Spinels. Neere vnto his royall pallace there is an inestimable +treasure whereof hee maketh no accompt, for that it standeth in such a +place that euery one may see it, and the place where this treasure is, is a +great Court walled round about with walles of stone, with two gates which +stand open euery day. And within this place or Court are foure gilded +houses couered with lead, and in euery one of these are certaine heathenish +idoles of a very great valure. In the first house there is a stature of the +image of a man of gold very great, and on his head a crowne of gold beset +with most rare Rubies and Safires, and round about him are 4. litle +children of gold. In the second house there is the stature of a man of +siluer, that is set as it were sitting on heapes of money: whose stature in +height, as hee sitteth, is so high, that his highnesse exceeds the height +of any one roofe of an house; I measured his feete, and found that they +were as long as all my body was in height, with a crowne on his head like +to the first. And in the thirde house, there is a stature of brasse of the +same bignesse, with a like crowne on his head. In the 4. and last house +there is a stature of a man as big as the other, which is made of Gansa, +which is the metall they make their money of, and this metall is made of +copper and leade mingled together. This stature also hath a crowne on his +head like the first: this treasure being of such a value as it is, standeth +in an open place that euery man at his pleasure may go and see it: for the +keepers therof neuer forbid any man the sight thereof. I say as I haue said +before, that this king euery yere in his feastes triumpheth: and because it +is worthy of the noting, I thinke it meet to write therof, which is as +foloweth. [Sidenote: The great pompe of the king.] The king rideth on a +triumphant cart or wagon all gilded, which is drawen by 16. goodly horses: +and this cart is very high with a goodly canopy ouer it, behind the cart +goe 20. of his Lords and nobles, with euery one a rope in his hand made +fast to the cart for to hold it vpright that it fal not. The king sitteth +in the middle of the cart; and vpon the same cart about the king stande 4. +of his nobles most fauored of him, and before this cart wherein the king is +goeth all his army as aforesaid, and in the middle of his army goeth all +his nobilitie, round about the cart, that are in his dominions, a +marueilous thing it is to see so many people, such riches and such good +order in a people so barbarous as they be. This king of Pegu hath one +principal wife which is kept in a Seralio, he hath 300. concubines, of whom +it is reported that he hath 90. children. [Sidenote: The order of Iustice.] +This king sitteth euery day in person to heare the suites of his subiects, +but he nor they neuer speake one to another, but by supplications made in +this order. [Sidenote: No difference of persons before the King in +controuersies or in iustice.] The king sitteth vp aloft, in a great hall, +on a tribunall seat, and lower vnder him sit all his Barons round about, +then those that demaund audience enter into a great Court before the king, +and there set them downe on the ground 40. paces distant from the kings +person, and amongst those people there is no difference in matters of +audience before the king, but all alike, and there they sit with their +supplications in their hands, which are made of long leaues of a tree, +these leaues are 3. quarters of a yard long, and two fingers broad, which +are written with a sharpe iron made for that purpose, and in those leaues +are their supplications written, and with their supplications, they haue in +their hands a present or gift, according to the waightines of their matter. +Then come the secretaries downe to read these supplications, taking them +and reading them before the king, and if the king think it good to do to +them that fauour or iustice that they demaund, then he commandeth to take +the presents out of their hands: but if he thinke their demand be not iust +or according to right, he commandeth them away without taking of their +gifts or presents. In the Indies there is not any marchandise that is good +to bring to Pegu, vnlesse it bee at some times by chance to bring Opium of +Cambaia, and if he bring money he shall lose by it. Now the commodities +that come from S. Tome are the onely marchandise for that place, which is +the great quantity of cloth made, which they vse in Pegu: which cloth is +made of bombast wouen and painted, so that the more that kinde of cloth is +washed, the more liuelie they shewe their colours, which is a rare thing, +and there is made such accompt of this kinde of cloth which is so great +importance, that a small bale of it will cost a thousand or two thousand +duckets. Also from S. Tome they layd great store of red yarne, of bombast +died with a roote which they call Saia, as aforesayd, which colour will +neuer out. With which marchandise euery yeere there goeth a great shippe +from S. Tome to Pegu, of great importance, and they vsually depart from S. +Tome to Pegu the 11. or 12. of September, and if she stay vntill the +twelfth, it is a great hap if she returne not without making of her voiage. +Their vse was to depart the sixt of September, and then they made sure +voyages, and now because there is a great labour about that kind of cloth +to bring it to perfection, and that it be well dried, as also the +greedinesse of the Captaine that would made an extraordinary gaine of his +fraight, thinking to haue the wind alwayes to serue their turne, they stay +so long, that at sometimes the winde turneth. For in those parts the windes +blow firmely for certaine times, with the which they goe to Pegu with the +winde in poope, and if they arriue not there before the winde change, and +get ground to anker, perforce they must returne backe againe: for that the +gales of the winde blowe there for three or foure moneths together in one +place with great force. But if they get the coast and anker there, then +with great labour they may saue their voyage. Also there goeth another +great shippe from Bengala euery yeere, laden with fine cloth of bombast of +all sorts, which arriueth in the harbour of Pegu, when the ship that +commeth from S. Tome departeth. The harbour where these two ships arriue is +called Cosmin. From Malaca to Martauan, which is a port in Pegu, there come +many small ships, and great, laden with pepper, Sandolo, Porcellan of +China, Camfora, Bruneo and other marchandise. The ships that come from +Mecca enter into the port of Pegu and Cirion, and those shippes bring cloth +of Wooll, Scarlets, Veluets, Opium, and Chickinos, [Sidenote: The Chikinos +are pieces of gold worth sterling 7. shillings.] by the which they lose, +and they bring them because they haue no other thing that is good for Pegu: +but they esteeme not the losse of them, for they make such great gaine of +their commodities that they cary from thence out of that kingdome. Also the +king of Assi his ships come thither into the same port laden with peper; +from the coast of S. Tome of Bengala, out of the Sea of Bara to Pegu are +three hundreth miles, and they go it vp the riuer in foure daies, with the +encreasing water, or with the flood, to a City called Cosmin, and there +they discharge their ships, whither the Customers of Pegu come to take the +note and markes of all the goods of euery man, and take the charge of the +goods on them, and conuey them to Pegu, into the kings house, wherein they +make the custome of the marchandize. When the Customers haue taken the +charge of the goods and put them into barks, the Retor of the City giueth +licence to the Marchants to take barke, and goe vp to Pegu with their +marchandize; and so three or foure of them take a barke and goe vp to Pegu +in company. [Sidenote: Great rigour for the stealing of customes.] God +deliuer euery man that hee giue not a wrong note, and entrie, or thinke to +steale any custome: for if they do, for the least trifle that is, he is +vtterly vndone, for the king doeth take it for a most great affront to bee +deceiued of his custome: and therefore they make diligent searches, three +times at the lading and vnlading of the goods, and at the taking of them a +land. In Pegu this search they make when they goe out of the ship for +Diamonds, Pearles, and fine cloth which taketh little roome: for because +that all the iewels that come into Pegu, and are not found of that +countrey, pay custome, but Rubies, Safyres, and Spinels pay no custome in +nor out: because they are found growing in that Countrey. I haue spoken +before, how that all Marchants that meane to goe thorow the Indies, must +cary al manor of houshold stuffe with them which is necessary for a house, +because that there is not any lodging nor Innes nor hostes, nor chamber +roome in that Countrey, but the first thing a man doth when he commeth to +that City is to hier a house, either by the yeere or by the moneth, or as +he meanes to stay in those parts. + +In Pegu their order is to hire their houses for sixe moneths. Nowe from +Cosmin to the Citie of Pegu they goe in sixe houres with the flood, and if +it be ebbing water, then they make fast their boate to the riuer side, and +there tary vntil the water flow againe. [Sidenote: Description of the +fruitfulnesse of that soyle.] It is a very commodious and pleasant voyage, +hauing on both sides of the riuers many great vilages, which they call +Cities: in the which hennes, pigeons, egges, milke, rice, and other things +be very goode cheape. It is all plaine, and a goodly Countrey, and in eight +dayes you may make your voyage vp to Macceo, distant from Pegu twelue +miles, and there they discharge their goods, and lade them in Carts or +waines drawen with oxen, and the Marchants are caried in a closet which +they call Deling, [Sidenote: Deling is a small litter carried with men as +is aforesaid.] in the which a man shall be very well accommodated, with +cushions under his head, and couered for the defence of the Sunne and +raine, and there he may sleep if he haue will thereunto: and his foure +Falchines cary him running away, changing two at one time and two at +another. The custome of Pegu and fraight thither, may amount vnto twentie +or twentie two per cento, and 23. according as he hath more or lesse stolen +from him that day they custome the goods. It is requisite that a man haue +his eyes watchfull, and to be carefull, and to haue many friendes, for when +they custome in the great hall of the king, there come many gentlemen +accompanied with a number of their slaues, and these gentlemen haue no +shame that their slaues rob strangers; whether it be cloth in shewing of it +or any other thing, they laugh at it. And although the Marchants helpe one +another to keepe watch, and looke to their goods, they cannot looke therto +so narrowly but one or other will rob something, either more or lesse, +according as their marchandise is more or lesse: and yet on this day there +is a worse thing then this: although you haue set so many eyes to looke +there for your benefit, that you escape vnrobbed of the slaues, a man +cannot choose but that he must be robbed of the officers of the custome +house. For paying the custome with the same goods oftentimes they take the +best that you haue, and not by rate of euery sort as they ought to do, by +which meanes a man payeth more then his dutie. At length when the goods be +dispatched out of the custome house in this order, the Marchant causeth +them to be caried to his house, and may do with them at his pleasure. + +There are in Pegu 8. brokers of the kings, which are called Tareghe, who +are bound to sell all the marchandize which come to Pegu, at the common or +the currant price: then if the marchants wil sell their goods at that +price, they sel them away, and the brokers haue two in the hundreth of +euery sort of marchandise, and they are bound to make good the debts of +those goods, because they be sold by their hands or meanes, and on their +wordes, and oftentimes the marchant knoweth not to whom he giueth his +goods, yet he cannot lose anything thereby, for that the broker is bound in +any wise to pay him, and if the marchant sel his goods without the consent +of the broker, yet neuerthelesse he must pay him two per cento, and be in +danger of his money: [Sidenote: A lawe for Bankrupts.] but this is very +seldom seene, because the wife, children, and slaues of the debtor are +bound to the creditor, and when his time is expired and paiment not made, +the creditor may take the debtor and cary him home to his house, and shut +him vp in a Magasin, whereby presently he hath his money, and not being +able to pay the creditor, he may take the wife, children, and slaues of the +debtor and sel them, for so is the lawe of that kingdome. [Sidenote: Euery +man may stampe what money he wil.] The currant money that is in this city, +and throughout all this kingdom is called Gansa or Ganza, which is made of +Copper and leade: It is not the money of the king, but euery man may stamp +it that wil, because it hath his iust partition or value: but they make +many of them false, by putting ouermuch lead into them, and those will not +passe, neither will any take them. With this money Ganza, you may buy golde +or siluer, Rubies and Muske, and other things. For there is no other money +currant amongst them. And Golde, siluer and other marchandize are at one +time dearer than another, as all other things be. + +This Ganza goeth by weight of Byze, and this name of Byza goeth for the +accompt of the weight, and commonly a Byza of a Ganza is worth (after our +accompt) halfe a ducat, litle more or lesse: and albeit that Gold and +siluer is more or lesse in price, yet the Byza neuer changeth: euery Byza +maketh a hundreth Ganza of weight, and so the number of the money is Byza. +[Sidenote: How a man may dispose himselfe for the trade in Pegu.] He that +goeth to Pegu to buy Iewels, if he wil do well, it behoueth him to be a +whole yere there to do his businesse. For if so be that he would return +with the ship he came in, he cannot do any thing so conueniently for the +breuitie of the time, because that when they custome their goods in Pegu +that come from S. Tome in their ships, it is as it were about Christmas: +and when they haue customed their goods, then must they sell them for their +credits sake for a moneth or two: and then at the beginning of March the +ships depart. The Marchants that come from S. Tome take for the paiment of +their goods, gold and siluer, which is neuer wanting there. [Sidenote: Good +instructions.] And 8. or 10. daies before their departure they are all +satisfied: also they may haue Rubies in paiment, but they make no accompt +of them: and they that will winter there for another yere, it is needfull +that they be aduertized, that in the sale of their goods, they specifie in +their bargaine, the terme of two or 3. moneths paiment, and that their +paiment shal be in so many Ganza, and neither golde nor siluer: because +that with the Ganza they may buy and sel euery thing with great aduantage. +And how needfull is it to be aduertized, when they wil recouer their +paiments, in what order they shal receiue their Ganza? Because he that is +not experienced may do himselfe great wrong in the weight of the Gansa, as +also in the falsenesse of them: in the weight he may be greatly deceiued, +because that from place to place it doth rise and fall greatly: and +therefore when any wil receiue money or make paiment, he must take a +publique wayer of money, a day or two before he go about his businesse, and +giue him in paiment for his labour two Byzaes a moneth, and for this he is +bound to make good all your money, and to maintaine it for good, for that +hee receiueth it and seales the bags with his scale: and when hee hath +receiued any store, then hee causeth it to bee brought into the Magason of +the Marchant, that is the owner of it. + +That money is very weightie, for fortie Byza is a strong Porters burden; +and also where the Marchant hath any payment to be made for those goods +which he buyeth, the Common wayer of money that receiueth his money must +make the payment thereof. So that by this meanes, the Marchant with the +charges of two Byzes a moneth, receiueth and payeth out his money without +losse or trouble. [Sidenote: The marchandizes that goe out of Pegu.] The +Marchandizes that goe out of Pegu are Gold, Siluer, Rubies, Saphyres, +Spinelles, great store of Beniamin, long peper, Leade, Lacca, rice, wine, +some sugar, yet there might be great store of sugar made in the Countrey, +for that they haue aboundance of Canes, but they giue them to Eliphants to +eate, and the people consume great store of them for food, and many more +doe they consume in vaine things, as these following. In that kingdome they +spend many of these Sugar canes in making of houses and tents which they +call Varely for their idoles, which they call Pagodes, whereof there are +great aboundance, great and smal, and these houses are made in forme of +little hilles, like to Sugar loaues or to Bells, and some of these houses +are as high as a reasonable steeple, at the foote they are very large, some +of them be in circuit a quarter of a mile. The saide houses within are full +of earth, and walled round about with brickes and dirt in steade of lime, +and without forme, from the top to the foote they make a couering for them +with Sugar canes, and plaister it with lime all ouer, for otherwise they +would bee spoyled, by the great aboundance of raine that falleth in those +Countreys. [Sidenote: Idol houses couered with gold.] Also they consume +about these Varely or idol houses great store of leafe-gold, for that they +ouerlay all the tops of the houses with gold, and some of them are couered +with golde from the top to the foote: in couering whereof there is great +store of gold spent, for that euery 10. yeeres they new ouerlay them with +gold, from the top to the foote, so that with this vanitie they spend great +aboundance of golde. For euery 10. yeres the raine doth consume the gold +from these houses. And by this meanes they make golde dearer in Pegu then +it would bee, if they consumed not so much in this vanitie. Also it is a +thing to bee noted in the buying of iewels in Pegu, that he that hath no +knowledge shall haue as good iewels, and as good cheap, as he that hath +bene practized there a long time, which is a good order, and it is in this +wise. There are in Pegu foure men of good reputation, which are called +Tareghe, or brokers of Iewels. These foure men haue all the Iewels or +Rubies in their handes, and the Marchant that wil buy commeth to one of +these Tareghe and telleth him, that he hath so much money to imploy in +Rubies. [Sidenote: Rubies exceeding cheape in Pegu.] For through the hands +of these foure men passe all the Rubies: for they haue such quantitie, that +they knowe not what to doe with them, but sell them at most vile and base +prices. When the Marchant hath broken his mind to one of these brokers or +Tareghe, they cary him home to one of their Shops, although he hath no +knowledge in Iewels: and when the Iewellers perceiue that hee will employ a +good round summe, they will make a bargaine, and if not, they let him +alone. The vse generally of this Citie is this: that when any Marchant hath +bought any great quantitie of Rubies, and hath agreed for them, hee carieth +them home to his house, let them be of what value they will, he shall haue +space to looke on them and peruse them two or three dayes: and if he hath +no knowledge in them, he shall alwayes haue many Marchants in that Citie +that haue very good knowledge in Iewels; with whom he may alwayes conferre +and take counsell, and may shew them vnto whom he will; and if he finde +that hee hath not employed his money well, hee may returne his Iewels backe +to them whom hee had them of, without any losse at all. Which thing is such +a shame to the Tareghe to haue his Iewels returned, that he had rather +beare a blow on the face then that it should be thought that he solde them +so deere to haue them returned. [Sidenote: An honest care of heathen +people.] For these men haue alwayes great care that they afford good +peniworths, especially to those that haue no knowledge. This they doe, +because they woulde not loose their credite: and when those Marchants that +haue knowledge in Iewels buy any, if they buy them deere, it is their own +faults and not the brokers: yet it is good to haue knowledge in Iewels, by +reason that it may somewhat ease the price. [Sidenote: Bargaines made with +the nipping of fingers vnder a cloth.] There is also a very good order +which they haue in buying of Iewels, which is this; There are many +Marchants that stand by at the making of the bargaine, and because they +shall not vnderstand howe the Iewels be solde, the Broker and the Marchants +haue their hands vnder a cloth, and by touching of fingers and nipping the +ioynts they know what is done, what is bidden, and what is asked. So that +the standers by knowe not what is demaunded for them, although it be for a +thousand or 10. thousand duckets. For euery ioynt and euery finger hath his +signification. For if the Marchants that stande by should vnderstand the +bargaine, it would breede great controuersie amongst them. And at my being +in Pegu in the moneth of August, in Anno 1569, hauing gotten well by my +endeuour, I was desirous to see mine owne Countrey, and I thought it good +to goe by the way of S. Tome, but then I should tary vntil March. + +In which iourney I was counsailed, yea, and fully resolued to go by the way +of Bengala, with a shippe there ready to depart for that voyage. And then +wee departed from Pegu to Chatigan a great harbour or port, from whence +there goe smal ships to Cochin, before the fleete depart for Portugall, in +which ships I was fully determined to goe to Lisbon, and so to Venice. +[Sidenote: This Touffon is an extraordinary storme at Sea.] When I had thus +resolued my selfe, I went a boord of the shippe of Bengala, at which time +it was the yeere of Touffon: concerning which Touffon ye are to vnderstand, +that in the East Indies often times, there are not stormes as in other +countreys; but euery 10. or 12. yeeres there are such tempests and stormes, +that it is a thing incredible, but to those that haue seene it, neither do +they know certainly what yeere they wil come. + +[Sidenote: The Touffon commeth but euery 10. or 12. yeeres.] Vnfortunate +are they that are at sea in that yere and time of the Touffon, because few +there are that escape that danger. In this yere it was our chance to be at +sea with the like storme, but it happened well vnto vs, for that our ship +was newly ouer-plancked, and had not any thing in her saue victuall and +balasts, Siluer and golde, which from Pegu they cary to Bengala, and no +other kinde of Marchandise. This Touffon or cruel storme endured three +dayes and three nights: in which time it caried away our sailes, yards, and +rudder; and because the shippe laboured in the Sea, wee cut our mast ouer +boord: which when we had done she laboured a great deale more then before, +in such wise, that she was almost full with water that came ouer the +highest part of her and so went downe: and for the space of three dayes and +three nights sixtie men did nothing but hale water out of her in this wise, +twentie men in one place, and twentie men in another place, and twentie in +a thirde place: and for all this storme, the shippe was so good, that shee +tooke not one iot of water below through her sides, but all ran downe +through the hatches, so that those sixtie men did nothing but cast the Sea +into the Sea. And thus driuing too and fro as the winde and Sea would, we +were in a darke night about foure of the clocke cast on a sholde: yet when +it was day, we could neither see land on one side nor other, and knew not +where we were: And as it pleased the diuine power, there came a great waue +of the Sea, which draue vs beyonde the should. [Sidenote: A manifest token +of the ebbing and flowing in those Countries.] And when wee felt the shippe +aflote, we rose vp as men reuiued, because the Sea was calme and smooth +water, and then sounding we found twelue fadome water, and within a while +after wee had but sixe fadome, and then presently we came to anker with a +small anker that was left vs at the sterne, for all our other were lost in +the storme: and by and by the shippe stroke a ground, and then we did prop +her that she should not ouerthrow. + +When it was day the shippe was all dry, and wee found her a good mile from +the Sea on drie land. [Sidenote: This Island is called Sondiua.] This +Touffon being ended, we discouered an Island not farre from vs, and we went +from the shippe on the sands to see what Island it was: and wee found it a +place inhabited, and, to my iudgement, the fertilest Island in all the +world, the which is diuided into two parts by a chanell which passeth +betweene it, and with great trouble we brought our ship into the same +chanel, which parteth the Island at flowing water, and there we determined +to stay 40. dayes to refresh vs. And when the people of the Island saw the +ship, and that we were comming a land: presently they made a place of bazar +or a market, with shops right ouer against the ship with all maner of +prouision of victuals to eate, which they brought downe in great abundance, +and sold it so good cheape, that we were amazed at the cheapenesse thereof. +I bought many salted kine there, for the prouision of the ship, for halfe a +Larine a piece, which Larine may be 12. shillings sixe pence, being very +good and fat; and 4. wilde hogges ready dressed for a Larine, great fat +hennes for a Bizze a piece, which is at the most a pennie: and the people +told vs that we were deceiued the halfe of our money, because we bought +things so deare. Also a sacke of fine rice for a thing of nothing, and +consequently all other things for humaine sustenance were there in such +aboundance, that it is a thing incredible but to them that haue seene it. +[Sidenote: Sondiua is the fruitfullest Countrey in al the world.] This +Island is called Sondiua belonging to the kingdome of Bengala, distant 120. +miles from Chatigan, to which place wee were bound. The people are Moores, +and the king a very good man of a Moore king, for if he had bin a tyrant as +others be, he might haue robbed vs of all, because the Portugall captaine +of Chatigan was in armes against the Retor of that place, and euery day +there were some slaine, at which newes we rested there with no smal feare, +keeping good watch and ward aboord euery night as the vse is, but the +gouernour of the towne did comfort vs, and bad vs that we should feare +nothing, but that we should repose our selues securely without any danger, +although the Portugales of Chatigan had slaine the gouernour of that City, +and said that we were not culpable in that fact: and moreouer he did vs +euery day what pleasure he could, which was a thing contrary to our +expectations considering that they and the people of Chatigan were both +subiects to one king. [Sidenote: Chatigan is a port in Bengala, whither the +Portugales go with their ships.] We departed from Sondiua, and came to +Chatigan the great port of Bengala, at the same time when the Portugales +had made peace and taken a truce with the gouernours of the towne, with +this condition that the chiefe Captaine of the Portugales with his ship +should depart without any lading: for there were then at that time 18. +ships of Portugales great and small. This Captaine being a Gentleman and of +good courage, was notwithstanding contented to depart to his greatest +hinderance, rather than hee would seeke to hinder so many of his friends as +were there, as also because the time of the yeere was spent to go to the +Indies. The night before he departed, euery ship that had any lading +therein, put it aboord of the Captaine to helpe to ease his charge and to +recompense his courtesies. [Sidenote: The King of Rachim, or Aracam, +neighbour to Bengala.] In this time there came a messenger from the king of +Rachim to this Portugal Captaine, who saide in the behalfe of his king, +that hee had heard of the courage and valure of him, desiring him gently +that he would vouchsafe to come with the ship into his port, and comming +thither he should be very wel intreated. This Portugal went thither and was +very well satisfied of this King. + +This King of Rachim hath his seate in the middle coast betweene Bengala and +Pegu, and the greatest enemie he hath is the king of Pegu: which king of +Pegu deuiseth night and day how to make this king of Rachim his subiect, +but by no meanes hee is able to doe it: because the king of Pegu hath no +power nor armie by Sea. And this king of Rachim [Marginal note: Or, +Aracam.] may arme two hundreth Galleyes or Fusts by Sea, and by land he +hath certaine sluses with the which when the king of Pegu pretendeth any +harme towards him, hee may at his pleasure drowne a great part of the +Countrey. So that by this meanes hee cutteth off the way whereby the king +of Pegu should come with his power to hurt him. + +[Sidenote: The commodities that goe from Chatigan to the Indies.] From the +great port of Chatigan they cary for the Indies great store of rice, very +great quantitie of Bombast cloth of euery sort, Suger, corne, and money, +with other marchandize. And by reason of the warres in Chatigan, the +Portugall ships taried there so long, that they arriued not at Cochin so +soone as they were wont to doe other yeeres. For which cause the fleete +that was at Cochin [Marginal note: The Portugal ships depart toward +Portugall out of the harbor of Cochin.] was departed for Portugal before +they arriued there, and I being in one of the small shippes before the +fleete, in discouering of Cochin, we also discouered the last shippe of the +Fleete that went from Cochin to Portugall, where shee made saile, for which +I was marueilously discomforted, because that all the yeere following, +there was no going for Portugale, and when we arriued at Cochin I was fully +determined to goe for Venice by the way of Ormus, [Sidenote: Goa was +besieged.] and at that time the Citie of Goa was besieged by the people of +Dialcan, but the Citizens forced not this assault, because they supposed +that it would not continue long. For all this I embarked my selfe in a +Galley that went for Goa, meaning there to shippe my selfe for Ormus: but +when we came to Goa, the Viceroy would not suffer any Portugal to depart, +by reason of the warres. And being in Goa but a small time, I fell sicke of +an infirmitie that helde mee foure moneths: which with phisicke and diet +cost me eight hundreth duckets, and there I was constrained to sell a smal +quantitie of Rubies to sustaine my neede: and I solde that for fiue +hundreth duckets, that was worth a thousand. And when I beganne to waxe +well of my disease, I had but little of that money left, euery thing was so +scarse: For euery chicken (and yet not good) cost mee seuen or eight +Liuers, which is sixe shillings, or sixe shillings eight pence. Beside this +great charges, the Apothecaries with their medicines were no small charge +to me. At the ende of sixe moneths they raised the siege, and then I +beganne to worke, for Iewels were risen in their prices: for whereas before +I sold a few of refused Rubies, I determined then to sell the rest of all +my Iewels that I had there, and to make an other voyage to Pegu. [Sidenote: +Opium a good commoditie in Pegu.] And for because that at my departure from +Pegu, Opium was in great request, I went then to Cambaya to imploy a good +round summe of money in Opium, and there I bought 60. percels of Opium, +which cost me two thousand and a hundreth duckets, euery ducket at foure +shillings two pence. Moreouer I bought three bales of Bombast cloth, which +cost me eight hundred duckats, which was a good commoditie for Pegu: when I +had bought these things, the Viceroy commanded that the custome of the +Opium should be paide in Goa, and paying custome there I might cary it +whither I would. I shipped my 3. bales of cloth at Chaul in a shippe that +went for Cochin, and I went to Goa to pay the aforesaid custome for my +Opium, and from Goa I departed to Cochin in a ship that was for the voyage +of Pegu, and went to winter then at S. Tome. When I come to Cochin, I +vnderstood that the ship that had my three bales of cloth was cast away and +lost, so that I lost my 800. Serafins or duckats: and departing from Cochin +to goe for S. Tome, in casting about for the Island of Zeilan the Pilote +was deceiued, for that the Cape of the Island of Zeilan lieth farre out +into the sea, and the Pilot thinking that he might haue passed hard aboord +the Cape, and paying roomer in the night; when it was morning we were farre +within the Cape, and past all remedy to go out, by reason the winds blew so +fiercely against vs. So that by this meanes we lost our voyage for that +yere, and we went to Manar with the ship to winter there, the ship hauing +lost her mastes, and with great dilligence we hardly saued her, with great +losses to the Captaine of the ship, because he was forced to fraight +another ship in S. Tome for Pegu with great losses and interest, and I with +my friends agreed together in Manar to take a bark to cary vs to S. Tome; +which thing we did with al the rest of the marchants; and arriuing at S. +Tome I had news through or by the way of Bengala, that in Pegu Opium was +very deare, and I knew that in S. Tome there was no Opium but mine to go +for Pegu that yere, so that I was holden of al the marchants there to be +very rich: and so it would haue proued, if my aduerse fortune had not bin +contrary to my hope, which was this. At that time there went a great ship +from Cambaya, to the king of Assi, with great quantitie of Opium, and there +to lade peper: in which voyage there came such a storme, that the ship was +forced with wether to goe roomer 800. miles, and by this meanes came to +Pegu, whereas they arriued a day before mee; so that Opium which was before +very deare, was now at a base price: so that which was sold for fiftie +Bizze before, was solde for 2. Bizze and an halfe, there was such quantitie +came in that ship; so that I was glad to stay two yeres in Pegu vnlesse I +would haue giuen away my commoditie: and at the end of two yeres of my +2100. duckets which I bestowed in Cambaya, I made but a thousand duckets. +Then I departed againe from Pegu to goe for the Indies for Chaul, and from +Chaul to Cochin, and from Cochin to Pegu. Once more I lost occasion to make +me riche, for whereas I might haue brought good store of Opium againe, I +brought but a little, being fearefull of my other voyage before. In this +small quantitie I made good profite. And now againe I determined to go for +my Countrey, and departing from Pegu, I tarried and wintered in Cochin, and +then I left the Indies and came for Ormus. + +I thinke it very necessary before I ende my voyage, to reason somewhat, and +to shewe what fruits the Indies do yeeld and bring forth. First, In the +Indies and other East parts of India there is Peper and ginger, which +groweth in all parts of India. And in some parts of the Indies, the +greatest quantitie of peper groweth amongst wilde bushes, without any maner +of labour: sauing, that when it is ripe they goe and gather it. The tree +that the peper groweth on is like to our Iuie, which runneth vp to the tops +of trees wheresoeuer it groweth: and if it should not take holde of some +tree, it would lie flat and rot on the ground. This peper tree hath his +floure and berry like in all parts to our Iuie berry, and those berries be +graines of peper: so that when they gather them they be greene, and then +they lay them in the Sunne, and they become blacke. + +The Ginger groweth in this wise: the land is tilled and sowen, and the +herbe is like to Panizzo, and the roote is the ginger. These two spices +grow in diuers places. + +The Cloues come all from the Moluccas, which Moluccas are two Islands, not +very great, and the tree that they grow on is like to our Lawrell tree. + +The Nutmegs and Maces, which grow both together, are brought from the +Island of Banda, whose tree is like to our walnut tree, but not so big. + +All the good white Sandol is brought from the Island of Timor. Canfora +being compound commeth all from China, and all that which groweth in canes +commeth from Borneo, and I thinke that this Canfora commeth not into these +parts: for that in India they consume great store, and that is very deare. +The good Lignum Aloes commeth from Cauchinchina. + +The Beniamin commeth from the kingdome of Assi and Sion. + +Long pepper groweth in Bengala, Pegu, and Iaua. + +Muske [Marginal note: This Muske the Iewes doe counterfeit and take out +halfe the good muske and beat the flesh of an asse and put in the roome of +it.] commeth from Tartaria, which they make in this order, as by good +information I haue bene told. There is a certaine beast in Tartaria, which +is wilde and as big as a wolfe, which beast they take aliue, and beat him +to death with small staues that his blood may be spread through his whole +body, then they cut it in pieces and take out all the bones, and beat the +flesh with the blood in a morter very smal, and dry it, and make purses to +put it in of the skin, and these be the cods of muske. + +Truely I know not whereof the Amber is made, and there are diuers opinions +of it, but this is most certaine, it is cast out of the Sea, and throwne on +land, and found vpon the sea bankes. + +The Rubies, Saphyres, and the Spinels be gotten in the kingdome of Pegu. +The Diamants come from diuers places; and I know but three sorts of them. +That sort of Diamants that is called Chiappe, commeth from Bezeneger. Those +that be pointed naturally come from the land of Delly, and from Iaua, but +the Diamants of Iaua are more waightie then the other. I could neuer +vnderstand from whence they that are called Balassi come. [Sidenote: The +Balassi grow in Zeilan.] + +Pearles they fish in diuers places, as before in this booke is showne. + +From Cambaza commeth the Spodiom which congeleth in certaine canes, whereof +I found many in Pegu, when I made my house there, because that (as I haue +sayd before) they make their houses there of wouen canes like to mats. From +Chaul they trade alongst the coast of Melinde in Ethiopia, [Marginal note: +On the coast of Melynde in Ethiopia, in the land of Cafraria, the great +trade that the Portugals haue.] within the land of Cafraria: on that coast +are many good harbors kept by the Moores. Thither the Portugals bring a +kinde of Bombast cloth of a low price, and great store of Paternosters or +beads made of paltrie glasse, which they make in Chaul according to the vse +of the Countrey: and from thence they cary Elephants teeth for India, +slaues called Cafari, and some Amber and Gold. On this coast the king of +Portugall hath his castle called Mozambique, which is of as great +importance as any castle that hee hath in all his Indies vnder his +protection, and the Captaine of this castle hath certaine voyages to this +Cafraria, to which places no Marchants may goe, but by the Agent of this +Captaine: [Sidenote: Buying and selling without words one to another.] and +they vse to goe in small shippes, and trade with the Cafars, and their +trade in buying and selling is without any speach one to the other. In this +wise the Portugals bring their goods by litle and litle alongst the Sea +coast, and lay them downe: and so depart, and the Cafar Marchants come and +see the goods, and there they put downe as much gold as they thinke the +goods are worth, and so goe their way and leaue their golde and the goods +together, then commeth the Portugal, and finding the golde to his content, +hee taketh it and goeth his way into his ship, and then commeth the Cafar, +and taketh the goods and carieth them away: and if he finde the golde there +still, it is a signe that the Portugals are not contented, and if the Cafar +thinke he hath put too little, he addeth more, as he thinketh the thing is +worth: and the Portugales must not stand with them too strickt; for if they +doe, then they will haue no more trade with them: For they disdaine to be +refused, when they thinke that they haue offered ynough, for they bee a +peeuish people, and haue dealt so of a long time: [Sidenote: Golden trades +that the Portugals haue.] and by this trade the Portugals change their +commodities into gold, and cary it to the Castle of Mozambique, which is an +Island not farre distant from the firme land of Cafraria on the coast of +Ethiopia, and is distant from India 2800. miles. Nowe to returne to my +voyage, when I came to Ormus, I found there Master Francis Berettin of +Venice, and we fraighted a bark together to goe for Basora for 70. duckets, +and with vs there went other Marchants, which did ease our fraight, and +very commodiously wee came to Basora and there we stayed 40. dayes for +prouiding a Carouan of barks to go to Babylon, because they vse not to goe +two or 3. barkes at once, but 25. or 30. because in the night they cannot +go, but must make them fast to the banks of the riuer, and then we must +make a very good and strong guard, and be wel prouided of armor, for +respect and safegard of our goods, because the number of theeues is great +that come to spoile and rob the marchants. And when we depart for Babylon +we goe a litle with our saile, and the voyage is 38. or 40. dayes long, but +we were 50. dayes on it. When we came to Babylon we stayed there 4. +moneths, vntill the Carouan was ready to go ouer the wildernes, or desert +for Alepo; in this city we were 6. Marchants that accompanied together, +fiue Venetians and a Portugal: whose names were as followeth, Messer +Florinasa with one of his kinsmen, Messer Andrea de Pola, the Portugal and +M. Francis Berettin and I, and so wee furnished our selues with victuals +and beanes for our horses for 40. dayes; [Marginal note: An order how to +prouide to goe ouer the Desert from Babylon to Alepo.] and wee bought +horses and mules, for that they bee very good cheape there, I my selfe +bought a horse there for 11. akens, and solde him after in Alepo for 30. +duckets. Also we bought a Tent which did vs very great pleasure: we had +also amongst vs 32. Camels laden with marchandise: for the which we paid 2. +duckets for euery camels lading, and for euery 10. camels they made 11, for +so is their vse and custome. We take also with vs 3. men to serue vs in the +voyage, which are vsed to goe in those voyages for fiue D d. a man, and are +bound to serue vs to Alepo: so that we passed very well without any +trouble: when the camels cried out to rest, our pauilion was the first that +was erected. The Carouan maketh but small iourneis about 20. miles a day, +and they set forwards euery morning before day two houres, and about two in +the afternoone they sit downe. We had great good hap in our voyage, for +that it rained: For which cause we neuer wanted water, but euery day found +good water, so that we could not take any hurt for want of water. Yet we +caried a camel laden alwayes with water for euery good respect that might +chance in the desert, so that wee had no want neither of one thing, nor +other that was to bee had in the countrey. For wee came very well furnished +of euery thing, and euery day we eat fresh mutton, because there came many +shepheards with vs with their flocks, who kept those sheepe that we bought +in Babylon, and euery marchant marked his sheepe with his owne marke, and +we gaue the shepheards a Medin, which is two pence of our money for the +keeping and feeding our sheep on the way and for killing of them. And +beside the Medin they haue the heads, the skinnes, and the intrals of euery +sheepe they kil. We sixe bought 20. sheepe, and when we came to Alepo we +had 7. aliue of them. And in the Carouan they vse this order, that the +marchants doe lende flesh one to another, because they will not cary raw +flesh with them, but pleasure one another by lending one one day and +another another day. + +[Sidenote: 36. Dayes iourney ouer the wildernes.] From Babylon to Alepo is +40. dayes iourney, of the which they make 36. dayes ouer the wildernes, in +which 36. dayes they neither see house, trees nor people that inhabite it, +but onely a plaine, and no signe of any way in the world. The Pilots goe +before, and the Carouan followeth after. And when they sit downe all the +Carouan vnladeth and sitteth downe, for they know the stations where the +wells are. I say, in 36. dayes we pass ouer the wildernesse. For when wee +depart from Babylon two dayes we passe by villages inhabited vntil we haue +passed the riuer Euphrates. And then within two dayes of Alepo we haue +villages inhabited. [Sidenote: An order how to prouide for the going to +Ierusalem.] In this Carouan there goeth alway a Captaine that doth Iustice +vnto all men: and euery night they keepe watch about the Carouan, and +comming to Alepo we went to Tripoli, whereas Master Florin, and Master +Andrea Polo, and I with a Frier, went and hired a barke to goe with vs to +Ierusalem. Departing from Tripolie, we arriued at Iaffa: from which place +in a day and a halfe we went to Ierusalem, and we gaue order to our barke +to tary for vs vntill our returne. [Sidenote: The author returned to Venice +1581.] Wee stayed in Ierusalem 14. dayes, to visite those holy places: from +whence we returned to Iaffa, and from Iaffa to Tripolie, and there wee +shipped our selues in a ship of Venice called the Bagazzana: And by the +helpe of the deuine power, we arriued safely in Venice the fift of Nouember +1581. If there be any that hath any desire to goe into those partes of +India, let him not be astonied at the troubles that I haue passed: because +I was intangled in many things: for that I went very poore from Venice with +1200. duckets imployed in marchandize, and when I came to Tripolie, I fell +sicke in the house of Master Regaly Oratio, and this man sent away my goods +with a small Carouan that went from Tripolie to Alepo, and the Carouan was +robd, and all my goods lost sauing foure chests of glasses which cost me +200. duckets, of which glasses I found many broken: because the theeues +thinking it had bene other marchandize, brake them vp, and seeing they were +glasses they let them all alone. And with this onely stocke I aduentured to +goe into the Indies: And thus with change and rechange, and by diligence in +my voyage, God did blesse and helpe mee, so that I got a good stocke. I +will not be vnmindfull to put them in remembrance, that haue a desire to +goe into those parts, how they shall keepe their goods, and giue them to +their heires at the time of their death, [Marginal note: A very good order +that they haue in those Countreys for the recouering of the goods of the +dead.] and howe this may be done very securely. In all the cities that the +Portugales haue in the Indies, there is a house called the schoole of +Sancta misericordia comissaria: the gouernours whereof, if you giue them +for their paines, will take a coppy of your will and Testament, which you +must alwayes cary about you; and chiefly when you go into the Indies. In +the countrey of the Moores and Gentiles, in those voyages alwayes there +goeth a Captaine to administer Iustice to all Christians of the Portugales. +Also this captaine hath authoritie to recouer the goods of those Marchants +that by chance die in those voyages, and they that haue not made their +Wills and registred them in the aforesayde schooles, the Captaines wil +consume their goods in such wise, that litle or nothing will be left for +their heires and friends. Also there goeth in these same voyages some +marchants that are commissaries of the schoole of Sancta misericordia, that +if any Marchant die and haue his Will made, and hath giuen order that the +schoole of Misericordia shall haue his goods and sell them, then they sende +the money by exchange to the schoole of Misericordia in Lisbone, with that +copie of his Testament, then from Lisbon they giue intelligence thereof, +into what part of Christendome soeuer it be, and the heires of such a one +comming thither, with testimoniall that they be heires, they shall receiue +there the value of his goods: in such wise that they shall not loose any +thing. But they that die in the kingdome of Pegu loose the thirde part of +their goods by antient custome of the Countrey, that if any Christian dieth +in the kingdome of Pegu, the king and his officers rest heires of a thirde +of his goods, and there hath neuer bene any deceit or fraude vsed in this +matter. I haue knowen many rich men that haue dwelled in Pegu, and in their +age they haue desired to go into their owne Countrey to die there, and haue +departed with al their goods and substance without let or troubles. + +[Sidenote: Order of apparel in Pegu.] In Pegu the fashion of their apparel +is all one, as well the noble man as the simple: the onely difference is in +the finenes of the cloth, which is cloth of Bombast one finer then another, +and they weare their apparell in this wise: First a white Bombast cloth +which serueth for a shirt, then they gird another painted bombast cloth of +foureteene brases, which they binde vp betwixt their legges, and on their +heads they weare a small tock of three braces, made in guize of a myter, +and some goe without tocks, and cary (as it were) a hiue on their heades, +which doeth not passe the lower part of his eare, when it is lifted vp: +they goe all bare footed, but the Noble men neuer goe on foote, but are +caried by men in a seate with great reputation, with a hat made of the +leaues of a tree to keepe him from the raine and Sunne, or otherwise they +ride on horsebacke with their feete bare in the stirops. [Sidenote: The +order of the womens apparel in Pegu.] All sorts of women whatsoeuer they +be, weare a smocke downe to the girdle, and from the girdle downewards to +the foote they weare a cloth of three brases, open before; so straite that +they cannot goe, but they must shewe their secret as it were aloft, and in +their going they faine to hide it with their hand, but they cannot by +reason of the straitnes of their cloth. They say that this vse was inuented +by a Queene to be an occasion that the sight thereof might remoue from men +the vices against nature, which they are greatly giuen vnto; which sight +should cause them to regard women the more. Also the women goe bare footed, +their armes laden with hoopes of golde and Iewels: And their fingers full +of precious rings, with their haire rolled vp about their heads. Many of +them weare a cloth about their shoulders instead of a cloake. + +Now to finish that which I haue begunne to write, I say, that those parts +of the Indies are very good, because that a man that hath litle, shall make +a great deale thereof; alwayes they must gouerne themselues that they be +taken for honest men. For why? to such there shal neuer want helpe to doe +wel, but he that is vicious, let him tary at home and not go thither, +because he shall alwayes be a beggar, and die a poore man. + + * * * * * + +The money and measures of Babylon, Balsara, and the Indies, with the + customes, &c. written from Aleppo in Syria, An. 1584. by M. Will. Barret. + +BABYLON: + +The weight, measure, and money currant there, and the customes of +marchandize. + +A Mana of Babylon is of Aleppo 1 roue 5 ounces and a halfe: and 68 manas +and three seuenth parts, make a quintall of Aleppo, which is 494 li. 8 +ounces of London: and 100 manas is a quintall of Babylon, which maketh in +Aleppo 146 roues, and of London 722 li. and so much is the sayd quintall: +but the marchants accord is by so much the mana, and in the sayd place they +bate the tare in all sorts of commodities, according to the order of Aleppo +touching the tare. + +The measure of Babylon is greater then that of Aleppo 21 in the 100. For +bringing 100 pikes of any measurable ware from Aleppo thither, there is +found but 82 pikes in Babylon, so that the 100 pikes of Babylon is of +Aleppo l2l pikes, very litle lesse. + +The currant mony of Babylon are Saies, which Say is 5 medines, as in +Aleppo, and 40 medines being 8 Saies make a duckat currant, and 47 medines +passe in value as the duckat of gold of Venice, and the dollars of the best +sort are worth 33 medines. The roials of plate are sold by the 100 drams at +prise, according as they be in request: but amongst the marchants they +bargaine by the 100 metrals, which are 150 drams of Aleppo, which 150 drams +are 135 single roials of plate: but in the mint or castle, they take them +by the 100 drams, which is 90 roials of plate, and those of the mint giue 5 +medines lesse in each 100 drams then they are woorth to be sold among the +marchants, and make paiment at the terme of 40 dayes in Sayes. + +The custome in Babylon, as wel inward as outward, is in this maner: Small +wares at 6 per 100, Coral and amber at 5 and a halfe per 100, Venice cloth, +English cloth, Kersies, Mockairs, Chamblets, Silks, Veluets, Damasks, +Sattins and such like at 5 per 100: and they rate the goods without reason +as they lust themselues. The Toafo, Boabo, and other exactions 6 medines +per bale, all which they pay presently in ready mony, according to the +custome and vse of the emperor. + +To the Ermin of the mint the ordinarie vse is to giue 30 Saies in curtesie, +otherwise he would by authoritie of his office come aboord, and for +despight make such search in the barke, that he would turne all things +topsie teruie. + + +BALSARA: + +The weight, measure, and money in the citie of Balsara. + +A Mana of Balsara answereth 5 roues 2 ounces and a halfe of Aleppo weight, +and 19 manas and one 4 part of Balsara, answereth the quintall of Aleppo, +which is 494 roues, 8 ounces English, and 20 manas is the quintall of +Balsara, which is 104 Alepine, and of London 514 li. 8. ounces, and so much +is the sayd quintall, but the marchants bargaine at so much the mana or +wolsene (which is all one) and they abate the tare in euery mana, as the +sort of spice is, and the order taken therefore in that place. + +The measure of Balsara is called a pike, which is iust as the measure of +Babylon, to say, 100 pikes of Balsara make of Aleppo 121 pikes, vt supra in +the rate of Babylon. + +The currant mony of Balsara is as foloweth. There is a sort of flusses of +copper called Estiui, whereof 12 make a mamedine, which is the value of one +medine Aleppine, the said mamedine is of siluer, hauing the Moresco stampe +on both sides, and two of these make a danine, which is 2 medines Aleppine. + +The said danine is of siluer, hauing the Turkesco stampe on both sides, and +2 and a halfe of these make a Saie, which is in value as the Saie of +Aleppo. + +The said Saie is of the similitude and stampe of Aleppo, being (as +appeares) 60 estiues. Also one Say and 20 estiues make a larine, which is +of Aleppo money 6 medines and a halfe. + +The sayd larine is a strange piece of money, not being round as all other +currant money in Christianitie, but is a small rod of siluer of the +greatnesse of the pen of a goose feather, wherewith we vse to write, and in +length about one eight part thereof, which is wrested, so that the two ends +meet at the iust halfe part, and in the head thereof is a stampe Turkesco, +and these be the best currant money in all the Indias, and 6 of these +larines make a duckat, which is 40 medines or eight Saies of Aleppo. + +The duckat of gold is woorth there 7 larines, and one danine, which is of +Aleppo money 48 medines and a halfe. + +The Venetian money is worth larines 88 per hundred meticals which is 150 +drams of Aleppo, vt supra. + +The roials of plate are worth 88 larines by the 100 meticals, and albeit +among the marchants they sel by the 100 meticals, yet in the mint or +castle, they sel by the 100 drams, hauing there lesse then the worth 5 +medines in each hundred drams, and haue their paiment in 40 dayes made them +in Saies or larines. + +The custome of the said places, aswell inward as outward, are alike of all +sorts of goods, to say 6 by the 100, and Toafo, Boabo, and scriuan medines +6 by the bale inward and outward, to say, 3 inward, and as much outward: +but whoso leaueth his goods in the custome house paieth nothing, where +otherwise at the taking thereof away, he should pay 3 med. by the bale, and +of the said goods there is no other duty to pay, and this commeth to passe +when the customers esteeme the goods too high. For in such a case they may +be driuen to take so much commoditie as the custome amounteth to, and not +to pay them in money, for such is the order from the Grand Signior. + +Hauing paid the custome, it behoueth to haue a quittance or cocket sealed +and firmed with the customers hand, in confirmation of the dispatch and +clearing, and before departure thence, to cause the sayd customer to cause +search to be made, to the end that at the voiages returne there be no +cauilation made, as it oftentimes happeneth. + +Note that 100 meticals of Balsara weigh 17 ounces and a halfe sottile +Venetian, and of Aleppo drams 150, vt supra. + +The fraight of the barkes from Ormuz to Balsara, I would say from Balsara +to Ormuz, they pay according to the greatnesse thereof. To say, for cariage +of 10 cares 180 larines, those of 15 cares 270 larines, those of 20 cares +360 larines, those of 30 cares 540 larines. Note that a cara is 4 quintals +of Balsara. They pay also to the pilot of the bark for his owne cariage one +care, and to all the rest of the mariners amongst them 3. cares fraight, +which is in the whole 4 cares, and paying the abouesayd prises and +fraights, they are at no charges of victuals with them, but it is requisite +that the same be declared in the charter partie, with the condition that +they lade not aboord one rotilo more then the fraight, vnder paines that +finding more in Ormuz, it is forfeit, and besides that to pay the fraight +of that which they haue laden. + +And in this accord it behoueth to deale warilie, and in the presence of the +Ermin or some other honest man (whereof there are but few) for they are the +worst people in all Arabia. And this diligence must be put in execution, to +the end the barks may not be ouerladen, because they are to passe many +sands betwixt Balsara and Ormuz. + + +ORMVZ: + +The weight, measure, and money currant in the kingdom of Ormuz: + +Spices and drugs they weigh by the bar, and of euery sort of goods the +weight is different. To say, of some drugs 3 quintals, and 3 erubi or +roues, and other some 4 quintals 25 rotiloes, and yet both is called a +barre, which barre, as well as great as litle, is 20 frasoli, and euery +frasoll is 10 manas, and euery mana 23 chiansi, and euery chianso 10 +meticals and a halfe. [Sidenote: What a rotilo is.] Note that euery +quintall maketh 4 erubi or roues, and euery roue 32 rotiloes, and euery +rotilo 16 ounces, and euery ounce 7 meticals, so that the quintall commeth +to be 128 rotiloes, which is Aleppine 26 rotiloes and one third part, which +is 132 li. English weight. And contrarywise the quintal of Aleppo (which is +494 rotiloes 8 ounces English) maketh 477 rotiloes and a halfe of Ormuz, +which is 3 quintals 2 roues, 29 rotiloes and a halfe. + +Note that there are bars of diuers weights, vt supra, of which they +bargaine simply, according to the sort of commoditie, but if they bargaine +of the great barre, the same is 7 quintals and 24 rotiloes, which is 958 +li. 9 ounces of London weight, and of Aleppo 193 rotiloes and a halfe. + +Touching the money of Ormuz, they bargaine in marchandize at so many leches +by the barre, which lech is 100 Asaries, and maketh larines 100 and a +halfe, which maketh pardaos 38, and larines one halfe, at larines 5 by the +pardao. One asarie is sadines 10, and euery sadine is 100. danarie. + +The larine is worth 5 sadines and one fourth part, so that the sadine is +worth of Aleppo mony 1 medine and 1 fourth part, and the larine as in +Balsara worth of Aleppo mony 6 medines and a half. + +The pardao is 5 larines of Balsara. + +There is also stamped in Ormuz a seraphine of gold, which is litle and +round, and is worth 24 sadines, which maketh 30 medines of Aleppo. + +The Venetian mony is worth in Ormuz larines 88 per 100 meticals, and the +roials are worth larines 86 lesse one sadine, which is euery thousand +meticals, 382 asures: but those that will not sel them, vse to melt them, +and make them so many larines in the king of Ormuz his mint, whereby they +cleare 2 per 100, and somewhat more: and this they doe because neither +Venetian money nor roials run as currant in Ormuz, per aduise. + +The measure of Ormuz is of two sorts, the one called codo which increaseth +vpon the measure of Aleppo 3 per 100, for bringing 100 pikes of any +measurable wares from Aleppo to Ormuz, it is found in Ormuz to be 103 +codes. Also these measures of Ormuz increase vpon those of Balsara and +Babylon 25 and two third parts per 100: for bringing 100 pikes of any +measurable wares from Balsara or Babylon, there is found in Ormuz 125 codes +and two third parts. + +The other measure is called a vare, which was sent from the king of +Portugall to the India, by which they sell things of small value, which +measure is of 5 palmes or spans, and is one code and two third parts, so +that buying 100 codes of any measurable wares, and returning to measure it +by the sayd vare, there are found but 60 vares, contrarywise 100 vares make +166 codes and two third parts. + +Note that al such ships as lade horses in Ormuz for Goa or any other place +of India, lading 10 horses or vpwards, in what places soeuer the said +horses be taken a shore in the India, the marchandize which is to be +discharged out of that ship wherein the said horses come, are bound to pay +no custome at all, but if they lade one horse lesse then ten, then the +goods are bound to pay the whole custome. And this law was made by Don +Emanuel king of Portugall, but it is to be diligently foreseene, whither +all those horses laden be bound to pay the king his custome: for many times +by the king of Portugall his commandement, there is fauour shewed to the +king of Cochin his brother in armes, so that his horses that come in the +same ship, are not to answere custome. As for example: If there were 4 +horses laden in one ship, all which were to pay custome to the king, and +one other of the king of Cochins which were not to pay any custome, the +same causeth all the marchandize of that ship to be subiect to pay custome, +per aduise. But if they lade ten horses vpon purpose to pay the king his +custome in Goa, and in the voyage any of them should die in that case, if +they bring the taile of the dead horse to the custome in Goa, then the +marchandize is free from all custome, because they were laden in Ormuz to +pay custome in Goa. Moreouer, if the horses should die before the midst of +the voyage, they pay no custome at all, and if they die in the midst of the +voyage, then they pay halfe custome, but if any horse die after the mid +voiage, they pay custome no lesse than if they arriue safe. +Notwithstanding, the marchandize (whether the said horses die before or in +the mid voyage or after the mid voiage) are free from all custome. + +The custome of Ormuz is eleuen in the 100, to say, 10 for the king, and 1 +for the arming of the foists: but for small wares as glasses, and looking +glasses of all sorts, and such like, made for apparell, pay no custome. But +cloth of Wooll, Karsies, Mockaires, Chamlets, and all sortes of Silke, +Saffron, and such like, pay custome, being esteemed reasonably. + +There is also another custome, which they call caida, which is, that one +bringing his goods into Ormuz, with purpose to send the same further into +India, the same are bound to pay 3 by the 100, but none other are bound to +pay this custome, except the Armenians, Moores, and Iewes: for the +Portugals and Venetians pay nothing thereof. + +Note that in Ormuz they abate tare of all sorts of commodities, by an order +obserued of custome. + +The fraight from Ormuz to Chaul, Goa, and Cochin, is as followeth: +Mokaires, larines 6 per table of 60 pikes. Aquariosa 8 larines by ordinarie +chist, raisins 10 by chist, which is a quintall of roues 128. Ruuia of +Chalangi larines 10 per quintall, glasses larines 8 per chist, of 4 foote +and a halfe, glasses in great chists 14 and 15 larines by chist. Small +wares larines 12 by chist of fiue foot. Tamari for Maschat sadines 2 and a +half, and 3 by the fardle. Tamarie for Diu and Chaul 4 sadines, and 4 and a +halfe by bale. Other drugs and things which come from Persia pay according +to the greatnesse of the bales. + +The fraight mentioned, they pay as appeareth, when they ship the sayd goods +in ships where horses goe: otherwise not hauing horses, they pay somewhat +lesse, because of the custom which they are to pay. + +The vse of the India ships is, that the patrones thereof are not at any +charge neither with any passenger, not yet with any mariner in the ship, +but that euery one at the beginning of the voyage doe furnish to maintaine +his owne table (if he will eate) and for drinke they haue a great iarre of +water, which is garded with great custodie. + + +GOA. + +The weight, measure, and mony currant in Goa. + +The quintall of Goa is 5 manas, and 8 larines, and the mana is 24 rotilos, +so that the quintall of Goa is 128 rot. and euery rot. is 16 ounces, which +is of Venice weight 1 li. and a halfe, so that the quintall of Goa is 192 +li. sotile Venice, which is 26 rotiloes 8 ounces Aleppine, and of London +weight 132 li. English, as the weight of Ormuz. + +All the marchandize, spices and drugs, are sold by this quintal, except +some drugs, as lignum de China, Galanga, and others, whereof they bargaine +at so much per candill, aduertising that there be two sorts of candill, one +of 16 manas, the other of 20 manas, that of 16 manas commeth to be iust 3 +quintals, and that of 26 manas, 3 quintals, 3 roues. Note that 4 roues make +a quintall, and the roue is 32 rotiloes, as in Ormuz. + +There is also another weight which they call Marco, which is eight ounces +or halfe a rotilo of Goa, and 9 ounces of Venice sotile: with this they +weigh amber, corall, muske, ambracan, ciuet, and other fine wares. + +There is also another sort of weight called Mangiallino, which is 5 graines +of Venice weight and therewith they weigh diamants and other iewels. + +[Sidenote: Muske of Tartarie by the way of China.] Note that in Goa they +vse not to abate any tare of any goods, except of sacks or wraps, and +therefore it requireth great aduisement in buying of the goods, especially +in the muske of Tartaria which commeth by way of China in bladders, and so +weigh it without any tare rebating. + +The measure of Goa is called a tode, which encreaseth vpon the measure of +Babylon and Balsara after the rate of 17 and one eight part by the 100, so +that bringing 100 pikes of any measurable ware from thence to Goa, it is +found 117 pikes 7 eight parts, and bringing 100 codes from Ormuz to Goa, +there is found but 93 codes and one fourth part. + +There is also the vare in Goa, which is iust as the vare of Ormuz, and +therewith they measure onely things that are of small value. + +For the mony of Goa, there is a kind of mony made of lead and tin mingled, +being thicke and round, and stamped on the one side with a spheare or globe +of the world, and on the other side two arrowes and 5 rounds: and this kind +of mony is called Basaruchi, and 15 of these make a vinton of naughty mony, +and 5 vintons make a tanga, and 4 vintenas make a tanga of base money: so +that the tanga of base mony is 60 basaruchies, and the tanga of good mony +75. basaruchies, and 5 tangas make a seraphine of gold, which in +merchandize is worth 5 tangas good money: but if one would change them into +basaruchies, he may haue 5 tangas, and 16 basaruchies, which ouerplus they +cal cerafagio, and when they bargain of the pardaw of gold, each pardaw is +ment to be 6 tangas good mony, but in merchandise they vse not to demaund +pardawes of gold in Goa, except it be for iewels and horses, for all the +rest they take of seraphines of siluer, per aduiso. + +The roials of plate, I say, the roial of 8 are worth per custome and +commandement of the king of Portugall 400 reies, and euery rey is one +basaruchie and one fourth part, which maketh tangas 6, and 53 basaruchies +as their iust value, but for that the said roials are excellent siluer and +currant in diuers places of the India, and chiefly in Malacca, when the +ships are to depart at their due times (called Monsons) euery one to haue +the said roials pay more then they are worth, and the ouerplus, as is +abouesaid they call serafagio. And first they giue the iust value of the +100 roials of 8, at 5 tangas 50 basaruchies a piece, which done, they giue +seraphins 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, vntill 22 by the 100, according as +they are in request. + +The ducket of gold is worth 9 tangas and a halfe good money, and yet not +stable in price, for that when the ships depart from Goa to Cochin, they +pay them at 9 tangas and 3 fourth partes, and 10 tangas, and that is the +most that they are woorth. + +The larines are woorth by iust value basaruchies 93 and 3 fourth parts, and +4 larines make a seraphine of siluer, which is 5 tangas of good money, and +these also haue serafagion of 6, 7, 8, 10, vntill 16, by the hundred, for +when the ships depart for the North, to say, for Chaul, Diu, Cambaia, or +Bassaim, all cary of the same, because it is money more currant then any +other. + +There is also a sort of seraphins of gold of the stampe of Ormuz, whereof +there are but fewe in Goa, but being there, they are woorth fiue larines +and somewhat more, according as they are in request. + +There is also another litle sort of mony, round, hauing on the one side a +crosse, and on the other side a crowne, which is woorth one halfe a tanga +of good money, and another of the same stampe lesse than that which they +call Imitiuo de buona moneda, which is worth 18 basaruches 3 fourth parts a +piece. + +Note that if a man bargaine in marchandize, it behooueth to demaund tangas +of good money: for by nominating tangas onely, is vnderstood to be base +money of 60 basaruches, which wanteth of the good money vt supra. + +The custome of Goa is 8 in the 100 inwards, and as much outward, and the +goods are esteemed iustly rather to the marchants aduantage then the kings. +The custome they pay in this order. Comming with a ship from Ormuz to Goa +without horses, they pay 8 in the 100 whether they sell part or all, but if +they would carie of the sayd marchandise to any other place, they pay none +other custome, except others buy it and carie it foorth of the countrey, +and then they pay it 8 in the 100. And if one hauing paied the custome +should sell to another with composition to passe it forth as for his proper +accounts to saue the custome, this may not be, because the seller is put to +his oth, whether he send the goods for his owne account, or for the account +of any others that haue bought the same, and being found to the contrary +they pay custome as abouesaid. And in this order the marchants pay of all +the goods which come from any part of the Indies. But if they come from +Ormuz to Goa with horses, they are not subiect to pay any custome inward, +notwithstanding if they send all or any part thereof for any other place, +or returne it to Ormuz, they pay the custome outward, although they could +not sell. + +They vse also in Goa amongst the common sort to bargaine for coales, wood, +lime, and such like, at so many braganines, accounting 24 basaruches for +one braganine, albeit there is no such mony stamped. The custome of the +Portugals is, that any Moore or Gentile, of what condition or state soeuer +he be, may not depart from Goa to go within the land, without licence of +certaine deputies deputed for that office, who (if they be Moores or +Gentiles) doe set a seale vpon the arme, hauing thereon the armes of +Portugal, to be knowen of the porters of the citie, whether they haue the +said licence or no. + + +COCHIN. + +The weight, measure, and money, currant in Cochin. + +All the marchandise which they sell or buy within the sayd citie, they +bargaine for at so many serafines per quintal, which is 128. rotilos of +iust weight, with the quintal and rotilo of Goa and Ormuz: aduertising that +there are diuers sorts of bars according to the sorts of commodities, and +in traffiquing, they reason at so much the bar. Note that there are bars of +3 quintals and 3 quintals and halfe, and 4 quintals. They abate a vsed tare +of all marchandize, according to the sort of goods, and order taken for the +same. + +The measure of Goa and Cochin are all one. + +The money of Cochin are all the same sorts which are currant in Goa, but +the duckat of gold in value is 10 tangas of good money. + +The custome of Cochin as wel inward as outward for all strangers is eight +in the hundred, but those that haue bene married foure yeere in the +countrey pay but foure in the hundred, per aduiso. + + +MALACCA. + +The weight, measure, and money of Malacca. + +For the marchandise bought and sold in the citie they reckon at so much the +barre, which barre is of diuers sorts, great and small, according to the +ancient custome of the said citie, and diuersitie of the goods. But for the +cloues they bargaine at so much the barre, which barre is 3 quintals, 2 +roues and 10 rotilos. As I haue abouesaid, all kind of drugs haue their +sorts of barres limited. Note that euery quintal is 4 roues, and euery roue +32 rotilos, which is 128 rotilos the quintall, the which answereth to +Aleppo 95 rotilos, and to London 472 li. per quintal. + +The measures of Malacca are as the measures of Goa. In Malacca they abate +tare according to their distinction and agreement, for that there is no +iust tare limited. + +For the money of Malacca, the least money currant is of tinne stamped with +the armes of Portugall, and 12 of these make a Chazza. + +The Chazza is also of tinne with the said armes, and 2. of these make a +challaine. + +The Challaine is of tinne with the said armes, and 40 of these make a tanga +of Goa good money, but not stamped in Malacca. + +There is also a sort of siluer money which they call Patachines, and is +worth 6 tangas of good money, which is 360 reyes, and is stamped with two +letters, S. T. which is S. Thomas on the one side, and the armes of +Portugall on the other side. + +There is also a kind of mony called Cruzados stamped with the +atmes of Portugall, and is worth 6 tangas good mony, the larines +are euery 9 of them worth 2 cruzados, which is 12 tangas good +mony, and these larines be of those which are stamped in Balsara +and Ormuz. + +The roials of 8 they call Pardaos de Reales, and are worth 7 tangas of good +money. + +The custome of Malacca is 10 in the 100 as wel inward as outward, and those +which pay the custome inwards, if in case they send the same goods for any +other place within terme of a yeere and a day, pay no custome for the same. + + +A note of charges from Aleppo to Goa, as foloweth. + +For camels from Aleppo to Birrha. Medines 60 per somme.[A] +For mules from Aleppo to Birrha, med. 45. per somme. +For custome at Birrha, med. 10. per somme. +For Auania of the Cady at Birrha, med. 200. +For 4 dishes raisins, and 20 pounds sope, med. 35. +For a present to the Ermine the summe of med. 400. +For a barke of 30 or 35 sommes. Duc. 60 is med. 2400. per barke. +For meat for the men the summe of med. 200. +For custome at Racca the summe of med. 5. per somme. +For 3 platters of raisins, and 15 pounds of sope, med. 25. +For custome to king Aborissei, Duc. 20 is med. 800 +For custome at Dea the summe of med. 230. per barke +For 4 dishes raisins, and 20 pounds of sope, med. 35. +For custom at Bosara, the summe of med. 10. per barke. +For 2 dishes raisins, and 10 pound of sope, med. 17. +For custome in Anna, in 10 per summe, med. 10. per somme. +For 4 dishes of raisins and 20 pound of sope, med. 35. +For custome in Adite, medines 10 per barke, med. 10. per barke. +For 2 dishes raisins, and 10 pound of sope, med. 17. +For custome at Gweke, med. 10. per barke. +For 2 dishes raisins, and 20 pound of sope, med. 17. +For custome at Ist, med. 10. per somme. +For 4 platters raisins, and 20 pound of sope, med. 35. +Charges of presents at Felugia, med. 30. +For camels from Felugia to Babylon, med. 30. per somme. +For custome in Babylon, as in the booke appeareth. +For a barke from Babylon to Balsara, med. 900. +For custome of small wares, at Corno med. 20. per somme. +For custome of clothes at Corno, the summe of med. per somme. +For 3 dishes raisins, and 20 pound of sope, med. 26. +For fraight from Balsara to Ormus, according to the greatnesse, as in this + booke appeareth. +For custome in Ormus, as is abouesaid in this booke. +For fraight from Ormus to Goa, as is in this booke shewed. +For custome in Goa, as is abouesaid. + +[A: Or, by the Camels burden.] + + +A declaration of the places from whence the goods subscribed doe come. + +Cloues, from Maluco, Tarenate, Amboina, by way of Iaua. +Nutmegs, from Banda. +Maces from Banda, Iaua, and Malacca. +Pepper Gawrie, from Cochin. +Pepper common from Malabar. +Sinnamon, from Seilan. +Tinne, from Malacca. +Sandals wilde, from Cochin. +Sandales domestick, from Malacca. +Verzini, from S. Thomas, and from China. +Spicknard from Zindi, and Lahor. +Quicksiluer, from China. +Galls, from Cambaia, Bengala, Istria and Syria. +Ginger Dabulin, from Dabul. +Ginger Belledin, from the Countrie within Cambaia. +Gmger Sorattin, from Sorat within Cambaia. +Ginger Mordassi, from Mordas within Cambaia. +Ginger Meckin, from Mecca. +Mirabolans of all sorts, from Cambaia. +White sucket, from Zindia, Cambaia, and China. +Corcunia, from diuers places of India. +Corall of Leuant, from Malabar. +Chomin, from Balsara. +Requitria, from Arabia Felix. +Garble of Nutmegs from Banda. +Sal Armoniacke, from Zindi and Cambaia. +Zedoari, from diuers places of India. +Cubeb, from China. +Amomum, from China. +Camphora, from Brimeo neere to China. +Myrrha, from Arabia Felix. +Costo dulce, from Zinde, and Cambaia. +Borazo, from Cambaia, and Lahor. +Asa fetida, from Lahor. +Waxe, from Bengala. +Seragni, from Persia. +Cassia, from Cambaia, and from Gran Cayro. +Storax calamita, from Rhodes, to say, from Aneda, and Canemarie within + Caramania. +Storax liquida, from Rhodes. +Tutia, from Persia. +Cagiers, from Malabar, and Maldiua. +Ruuia to die withall, from Chalangi. +Alumme di Rocca, from China, and Constantinople. +Chopra, from Cochin and Malabar. +Oppopanax, from Persia. +Lignum Aloes, from Cochin, China, and Malacca. +Demnar, from Siacca and Blinton. +Galangae, from China, Chaul, Goa, and Cochin. +Laccha, from Pegu, and Balaguate. +Carabbe, from Almanie. +Coloquintida, from Cyprus. +Agaricum, from Alemania. +Scamonea, from Syria, and Persia. +Bdellium, from Arabia felix, and Mecca. +Cardamomum small, from Barcelona. +Cardamomum great, from Bengala. +Tamarinda, from Balsara. +Aloe Secutrina, from Secutra. +Aloe Epatica, from Pat. +Safran, from Balsara, and Persia. +Lignum de China, from China. +Rhaponticum, from Persia, and Pugia. +Thus, from Secutra. +Turpith, from Diu, and Cambaia. +Nuts of India, from Goa, and other places of India. +Nux vomica, from Malabar. +Sanguis Draconis, from Secutra. +Armoniago, from Persia. +Spodio di Cana, from Cochin. +Margaratina, from Balaguate. +Muske from Tartarie, by way of China. +Ambracban, from Melinde, and Mosombique. +Indico, from Zindi and Cambaia. +Silkes fine, from China. +Long pepper, from Bengala and Malacca. +Latton, from China. +Momia, from the great Cayro. +Belzuinum Mandolalo, from Sian, and Baros. +Belzuinum burned, from Bonnia. +Castorium, from Almania. +Corallina, from the red sea. +Masticke, from Sio. +Mella, from Romania. +Oppium, from Pogia, and Cambaia. +Calamus Aromaticus, from Constantinople. +Capari, from Alexandria and other places. +Dates, from Arabia felix and Alexandria. +Dictamnum album, from Lombardia. +Draganti, from Morea. +Euphorbium, from Barbaria. +Epithymum, from Candia. +Sena, from Mecca. +Gumme Arabike, from Zaffo. +Grana, from Coronto. +Ladanum, from Cyprus and Candia. +Lapis lazzudis, from Persia. +Lapis Zudassi, from Zaffetto. +Lapis Spongij is found in sponges. +Lapis Haematites, from Almanie. +Manna, from Persia. +Auripigmentum, from manie places of Turkie. +Pilatro, from Barbaria. +Pistaches, from Doria. +Worme-seede, from Persia. +Sumack, from Cyprus. +Sebesten, from Cyprus. +Galbanum from Persia. +Dente d'Abolio, from Melinde, and Mosambique. +Folium Indicum, from Goa, and Cochin. +Diasprum viride, from Cambaia. +Petra Bezzuar, from Tartaria. +Sarcacolla, from Persia. +Melleghete, from the West parts. +Sugo di Requillicie, from Arabia felix. +Chochenillo, from the West India. +Rubarbe, from Persia, and China. + + +The times or seasonable windes called Monsons, wherein the ships depart + from place to place in the East Indies. + +Note that the Citie of Goa is the principall place of all the Orientall +India, and the winter there beginneth the 15 of May with very great raine, +and so continueth till the first of August, so that during that space, no +shippe can passe ouer the barre of Goa, because through the continuall +shoures of raine all the sandes ioyne together neere vnto a mountaine +called Oghane, and all these sandes being ioyned together, runne into the +shoales of the barre and port of Goa, and can haue no other issue, but to +remaine in that port, and therefore it is shut vp vntill the first of +August, but at the 10 of August it openeth by reason of the raine which +ceaseth, and the sea doeth then scoure the sands away againe. + + +The monson from Goa to the Northward, to say, for Chaul, Diu, Cambaia, + Daman, Basaim, and other places. + +The ships depart from betwixt the tenth and 24 of August, for the Northward +places abouesayde, and to these places they may saile all times of the +yeere, except in the winter, which beginneth and endeth at the times +abouesaid. + + +The monson from the North parts, for Goa. + +The ships depart from Chaul, Diu, Cambaia, and other places Northwards for +Goa, betwixt the 8 and 15 of Ianuarie, and come to Goa about the end of +Februarie. + + +The first monson from Diu for the straight of Mecca. + +The ships depart from Diu about the 15 of Ianuarie, and returne from the +straights to Diu in the moneth of August. + + +The second monson from Diu for the straight of Mecca. + +The ships depart betwixt the 25 and first of September, and returne from +the straights to Diu, the first and 15 of May. + + +The monson from Secutra for Ormus. + +The ships depart about the tenth of August for Ormus: albeit Secutra is an +Iland and hath but few ships, which depart as abouesaid. + + +The monson wherein the Moores of the firme land come to Goa. + +About the fifteenth of September the Moores of the firme lande beginne to +come to Goa, and they come from all parts, as well from Balaguate, +Bezenegar, as also from Sudalacan, and other places. + + +The monson wherein the Moores of the firme land depart from Goa. + +They depart from Goa betwixt the 10 and 15 day of Nouember. Note that by +going for the North is ment the departing from Goa, for Chaul, Diu, +Cambaia, Daman, Basaim, Ghassain, and other places vnto Zindi: and by the +South is vnderstood, departing from Goa, for Cochin, and all that coast +vnto Cape Comori. + + +The first monson from Goa for Ormus. + +The shippes depart in the moneth of October from Goa, for Ormus, passing +with Easterly windes along the coast of Persia. + + +The second monson from Goa to Ormus. + +The ships depart about the 20 of Ianuarie passing by the like nauigation +and windes as in the first monson, and this is called of the Portugals and +Indians Entremonson. + + +The third monson from Goa to Ormus. + +The ships depart betwixt the 25 of March, and 6 of Aprill, hauing Easterly +windes, till they passe Secutra, and then they find Westerly windes, and +therefore they set their course ouer for the coast of Arabia, till they +come to Cape Rasalgate and the Straight of Ormus, and this monson is most +troublesome of all: for they make two nauigations in the heigth of Seylan, +which is 6 degrees and somewhat lower. + + +The first monson from Ormus for Chaul, and Goa. + +The ships depart from Ormus for Chaul, and Goa in the moneth of September, +with North and Northeast windes. + + +The second monson from Ormus for Chaul and Goa. + +The second monson is betwixt the fiue and twentie and last of December, +with like winds as the former monson. + + +The third monson from Ormus for Chaul and Goa. + +The third monson the ships depart from Ormus, for Chaul and Goa, betwixt +the first and 15. of April, and they saile with Southeast windes, East and +Northeast windes, coasting vpon the Arabia side from Cape Mosandon vnto +Cape Rasalgate, and hauing lost the sight of Cape Rasalgate, they haue +Westerly windes, and so come for Chaul and Goa, and if the said ships +depart not before the 25 of April, they are not then to depart that monson, +but to winter in Ormus because of the winter. + + +The first monson from Ormus for Zindi. + +The ships depart from Ormus betwixt the 15 and 26 of Aprill. + + +The second monson from Ormus for Zindi. + +The ships depart betwixt the 10 and 20 of October for Zindi from Ormus. + + +The monson from Ormus for the red sea. + +The ships depart from Ormus betwixt the first and last of Ianuarie. + + +Hitherto I haue noted the monsons of the ships departing from Goa to the + Northward: Now follow the monsons wherein the ships depart from Goa, to + the Southward. + +The Monson from Goa for Calicut, Cochin, Seilan, and all that coast. + +The ships depart from those places betwixt the 1 and 15 of August, and +there they find it nauigable all the yeere except in the winter, which +continueth as is aforesayd, from the 15 of May till the 10 of August. +[Sidenote: Note.] In like maner the ships come from these places for Goa at +euery time in the yeere except in the winter, but of all other the best +time is to come in Nouember, December and Ianuary. + + +The first monson from Goa, for Pegu. + +The ships depart from Goa, betwixt the 15 and 20 of April, and winter at S. +Thomas, and after the 5 of August, they depart from S. Thomas for Pegu. + + +The second monson from Goa, for Pegu. + +The ships depart from Goa betwixt the 8 and 24 of August, going straight +for Pegu, and if they passe the 24 of August, they cannot passe that +monson, neither is there any more monsons till April as is aforesaid. +[Sidenote: Marchandize good for Pegu.] Note that the chiefest trade is to +take money of S. Thomas rials, and patechoni, and to goe to S. Thomas, and +there to buy Tellami, which is fine cloth of India, whereof there is great +quantitie made in Coromandel, and brought thither, and other marchandise +are not good for that place except some dozen of very faire Emeraulds +orientall. For of golde, siluer, and Rubies, there is sufficient store in +Pegu. + + +The monson from Pegu for the Indies. + +The ships depart from Pegu betwixt the 15 and 25 of Ianuarie, and come to +Goa about the 25 of March, or in the beginning of April. Note, that if it +passe the 10 of May before the sayde ships be arriued in Goa, they cannot +come thither that monson, and if they haue not then fet the coast of India, +they shall with great perill fetch S. Thomas. + + +The first monson from Goa for Malacca. + +The ships depart betwixt the 15 and last of September, and arriue in +Malacca about the end of October. + + +The second monson from Goa to Malacca. + +The ships depart about the 5 of May from Goa, and arriue in Malacca about +the 15 of Iune. + + +The first monson from Malacca to Goa. + +The ships depart about the 10 of September, and come to Goa about the end +of October. + + +The second monson from Malacca to Goa. + +The ships depart from Malacca about the 10 of February, and come to Goa +about the end of March. But if the said ships should stay till the 10 of +May they cannot enter into Goa, and if at that time also they should not be +arriued at Cochin, they are forced to retume to Malacca, because the winter +and contrary windes then come vpon them. + + +The monson from Goa for China. + +The ships depart from Goa in the moneth of April. + + +The monson from China for Goa. + +The ships depart to be the 10 of May in Goa, and being not then arriued, +they turne backe to Cochin, and if they cannot fetch Cochin, they returne +to Malacca. + + +The monson from Goa to the Moluccaes. + +The ships depart about 10 or 15 of May, which time being past, the shippes +can not passe ouer the barre of Goa for the cause abouesaid. + + +The monson of the ships of the Moluccaes arriuall in Goa. + +The ships which come from the Moluccaes arriue vpon the bar of Goa about +the 15. of April. + + +The monsons of the Portingall ships for the Indies. + +[Sidenote: Note.] The ships which come from Portugall depart thence +ordinarily betwixt the tenth and fifteenth of March, comming the straight +way during the moneth of Iuly to the coast of Melinde, and Mosambique, and +from thence goe straight for Goa, and if in the moneth Iuly they should not +be at the coast of Melinde, they can in no wise that yeere fetch Melinde, +but returne to the Isle of Saint Helena, and so are not able, that time +being past, to fetch the coast of India, and to come straight for Goa. +Therefore (as is abouesaid) they returne to the Island of Saint Helena, and +if they cannot make the said Island, then they runne as lost vpon the Coast +of Guinea: but if the said ships be arriued in time vpon the coast of +Melinde, they set forwardes for Goa, and if by the fifteenth of September +they cannot fetch Goa, they then goe for Cochin, but if they see they +cannot fetch Cochin, they returne to Mosambique to winter there vpon the +sayd coast. [Sidenote: Note.] Albeit in the yeere of our Lord 1580 there +arriued the ship called San Lorenzo, being wonderfull sore sea-beaten, the +eight of October, which was accounted as a myracle for that the like had +not beene seene before. + + +The monson from India for Portugall. + +The shippes depart from Cochin betweene the fifteenth and last of Ianuary, +going on till they haue sight of Capo de buona speranza, and the Isle of +Saint Helena, which Islande is about the midway, being in sixteene degrees +to the South. And it is a litle Island being fruitfull of all things which +a man can imagine, with great store of fruit: and this Island is a great +succour to the shipping which returne for Portugall. And not long since the +said Island was found by the Portugales, and was discouered by a shippe +that came from the Indies in a great storme, in which they found such +abundance of wilde beastes, and boares, and all sort of fruite, that by +meanes thereof that poore ship which had been foure moneths at sea, +refreshed themselues both with water and meate very well, and this Island +they called S. Helena, because it was discouered vpon S. Helens day. And +vndoubtedly this Island is a great succour, and so great an ayde to the +ships of Portugall, that many would surely perish if that helpe wanted. And +therefore the king of Portugall caused a Church to be made there for +deuotion of S. Helena: where there are onely resident Eremits, and all +other are forbidden to inhabite there by the kings commaundement, to the +ende that the ships may be the more sufficiently furnished with victuals, +because the ships which come from India come but slenderly victualled, +[Sidenote: Note.] because there groweth no corne there, neither make they +any wine: but the ships which come from Portugall to the Indies touch not +in the sayd Island, because they set out being sufficiently furnished with +bread and water from Portugall for eight moneths voyage. Any other people +then the two Eremites abouesaid, cannot inhabite this Island, except some +sicke man that may be set there a shore to remaine in the Eremites +companie, for his helpe and recouery. + + +The monson from Goa to Mosambique. + +The ships depart betwixt the 10 and 15 of Ianuarie. + + +The monson from Mosambique to Goa. + +The ships depart betweene the 8 and last of August, and arriue in Chaul or +Goa in the moneth of October, till the 15 of Nouember. + + +The monson from Ormus to Bengala. + +The ships depart betwixt the 15 and 20 of Iune, and goe to winter at Teue +and depart thence about the 15 of August for Bengala. + + * * * * * + +A briefe extract specifying the certaine dayly paiments, answered quarterly + in time of peace, by the Grand Signior, out of his Treasurie, to the + Officers of his Seraglio or Court, successiuely in degrees: collected in + a yeerely totall summe, as followeth. + +For his owne diet euery day, one thousand and one aspers, according to a +former custome receiued from his auncestors: notwithstanding that otherwise +his diurnall expence is very much, and not certainly knowen, which summe +maketh sterling mony by the yere, two thousand, one hundred, 92. pounds, +three shillings, eightpence. + +The fiue and fourtie thousand Ianizaries dispersed in sundry places of his +dominions, at sixe aspers the day, amounteth by the yeere to fiue hundreth, +fourescore and eleuen thousand, and three hundreth pounds. + +The Azamoglans, tribute children, farre surmount that number, for that they +are collected from among the Christians, from whom betweene the yeeres of +sixe and twelue, they are pulled away yeerely perforce: whereof I suppose +those in seruice may be equall in number with the Ianizaries abouesayd, at +three aspers a day, one with another, which is two hundred fourescore and +fifteene thousand, sixe hundred and fiftie pounds. + +The fiue Bassas, whereof the Viceroy is supreme, at one thousand aspers the +day, besides their yerely reuenues, amounteth sterling by the yeere to ten +thousand, nine hundred and fiftie pounds. + +The fiue Beglerbegs, chiefe presidents of Greece, Hungary, and Sclauonia, +being in Europe, in Natolia, and Caramania of Asia, at one thousande aspers +the day: as also to eighteene other gouernours of Prouinces, at fiue +hundred aspers the day, amounteth by the yeere, to thirtie thousand sixe +hundred, and threescore pounds. + +The Bassa, Admirall of the Sea, one thousand aspers the day, two thousand, +one hundred foure score and ten pounds. + +The Aga of the Ianizaries, generall of the footemen, fiue hundred aspers +the day, and maketh by the yeere in sterling money, one thousand, foure +score and fifteene pounds. + +The Imbrahur Bassa, Master of his horse, one hundred and fiftie aspers the +day, is sterling money, three hundred and eight and twenty pounds. + +The chiefe Esquire vnder him, one hundred and fiftie aspers, is three +hundred and eight and twenty pounds. + +The Agas of the Spahi, Captaines of the horsemen, sixe, at one hundred and +fiftie aspers to either of them, maketh sterling, one thousand, nine +hundred, three score and eleuen pounds. + +The Capagi Bassas head porters foure, one hundred and fiftie aspers to ech, +and maketh out in sterling money by the yeere, one thousand, three hundred, +and fourteene pounds. + +The Sisinghir Bassa, Controller of the housholde, one hundred and twentie +aspers the day, and maketh out in sterling money by the yeere, two hundred, +threescore and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Chaus Bassa, Captaine of the Pensioners, one hundred and twentie aspers +the day, and amounteth to by the yeere in sterling money, two hundred, +threescore and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Capigilar Caiasi Captaine of his Barge, one hundreth and twentie aspers +the day, and maketh out by the yeere in sterling money, two hundred, +threescore and two poundes, sixteene shillings. + +The Solach Bassi, Captaine of his guard, one hundred and twentie aspers, +two hundred, three score and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Giebrigi Bassi, master of the armoury, one hundred and twentie aspers, +two hundred, three score and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Topagi Bassi, Master of the artillerie, one hundred and twentie aspers, +two hundred, three score and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Echim Bassi, Phisition to his person, one hundred and twentie aspers, +two hundred, three score and two pounds, sixteene shillings. + +To fourtie Phisitions vnder him, to ech fourtie aspers, is three thousand, +eight hundred, three score and sixe pounds, sixteene shillings. + +The Mustafaracas spearemen, attending on his person, in number fiue +hundred, to either three score aspers, and maketh sterling, threescore and +fiue thousand, and seuen hundred pounds. + +The Cisingeri gentlemen, attending vpon his diet, fourtie, at fourtie +aspers ech of them, and amounteth to sterling by the yeere, three thousand, +fiue hundred and foure pounds. + +The Chausi Pensioners, foure hundred and fourtie, at thirtie aspers, twenty +eight thousand, nine hundred and eight pounds. + +The Capagi porters of the Court and City, foure hundred, at eight aspers, +and maketh sterling money by the yeere, seuen thousand, and eight pounds. + +The Solachi, archers of his guard, three hundred and twenty, at nine +aspers, and commeth vnto in English money, the summe of sixe thousand, +three hundred and sixe pounds. + +The Spahi, men of Armes of the Court and the City, ten thousand, at twenty +fiue asters, and maketh of English money, fiue hundred, forty and seuen +thousand, and fiue hundred pounds. + +The Ianizaires sixteene thousand, at six aspers, is two hundred and ten +thousand, and two hundred and forty pounds. + +The Giebegi furbushers of armor, one thousand, fiue hundred, at sixe +aspers, and amounteth to sterling money, nineteene thousand, seuen hundred, +and fourescore pounds. + +The Seiesir, seruitors in his Equier or stable, fiue hundred, at two +aspers, and maketh sterling money, two thousand, one hundred, fourescore +and ten pounds. + +The Saesi, Sadlers and bit makers, five hundred, at seuen aspers, seuen +thousand, six hundred, threescore and fiue pounds. + +The Catergi, Carriers vpon Mules, two hundred, at fiue aspers, two +thousand, one hundred, fourescore and ten pounds. + +The Cinegi, Carriers vpon Camels, one thousand, fiue hundred, at eight +aspers, and amounteth in sterling money, to twenty sixe thousand, two +hundred, and fourescore pounds. + +The Reiz, or Captaines of the Gallies, three hundred, at ten aspers, and +amounteth in English money by the yeere, the summe of sixe thousand, fiue +hundred, threescore and ten pounds. + +The Alechingi, Masters of the said Gallies, three hundred, at seven aspers, +foure thousand, fiue hundred, fourescore and nineteene pounds. + +The Getti, Boateswaines thereof, three hundred, at sixe aspers, is three +thousande, nine hundred, fourty and two pounds. + +The Oda Bassi, Pursers, three hundred, at fiue aspers, maketh three +thousand two hundred, and fourescore pounds. + +The Azappi souldiers two thousand sixe hundred at foure Aspers, whereof the +six hundred do continually keepe the gallies, two and twentie thousand, +seuen hundred fourscore and six pounds. + +The Mariers Bassi masters over the shipwrights and kalkers of the navie, +nine, at 20. Aspers the piece, amounteth to three thousand fourescore and +foure pound, foure shillings. + +The Master Dassi shipwrights and kalkers, one thousand at fourteene aspers, +which amounteth by the yeere, to thirtie thousand, sixe hundred threescore +pound. + +Summa totalis of dayly paiments amounteth by the yeere sterling, one + million, nine hundred threescore eight thousand, seuen hundred thirty + fiue pounds, nineteene shillings eight pence, answered quarterly without + default, with the summe of foure hundred fourescore twelue thousand, one + hundred fourescore and foure pounds foure shillings eleven pence, and is + for every day fiue thousand three hundred, fourescore and thirteene + pounds, fifteene shillings ten pence. + +Annuities of lands neuer improued, fiue times more in value then their + summes mentioned, giuen by the saide Grand Signior, as followeth. + +To the Viceroy for his Timar or annuitie 60. thousand golde ducats. +To the second Bassa for his annuitie 50. thousand ducats. +To the third Bassa for his annuitie 40. thousand ducats. +To the fourth Bassa for his annuitie 30. thousand ducats. +To the fifth Bassa for his annuitie 20. thousand ducats. +To the Captaine of the Ianizaries 20. thousand ducats. +To the Ieu Merhorbassi master of his horse 15. thousand ducats. +To the Captaine of the pensioners 10. thousand ducats. +To the Captaine of his guard 5. thousand ducats. + +Summa totalls 90. thousand li. sterling. + +Beside these aboue specified, be sundry other annuities giuen to diuers +others of his aforesaid officers, as also to certaine called Sahims, +diminishing from three thousand to two hundred ducats, esteemed treble to +surmount the annuitie abouesaid. + + +The Turkes chiefe officers. + +The Viceroy is high Treasurer, notwithstanding that vnder him be three +subtreasurers called Teftadars, which bee accomptable to him of the +receipts out of Europe, Asia and Africa, saue their yeerely annuitie of +lands. + +The Lord Chancellor is called Nissangi Bassa, who sealeth with a certaine +proper character such licences, safe conducts, passeports, especiall +graunts, &c. as proceed from the Grand Signior: notwithstanding all letters +to forreine princes so firmed be after inclosed in a bagge, and sealed by +the Grand Signior, with a signet which he ordinarily weareth about his +necke, credited of them to haue bene of ancient appertayning to king +Salomon the wise. + +The Admirall giueth his voyce in the election of all Begs, Captaines of the +Islandes, to whom hee giueth their charge, as also appointeth the +Subbasses, Bayliffes or Constables ouer Cities and Townes vpon the Sea +coastes about Constantinople, and in the Archipelago, whereof hee reapeth +great profit. + +The Subbassi of Pera payeth him yeerely fifteene thousande ducats, and so +likewise either of the others according as they are placed. + +The Ressistop serueth in office to the Viceroy and Chancellor, as +Secretary, and so likewise doeth the Cogie Master of the Rolls, before +which two, passe all writings presented to, or granted by the said Viceroy +and Chancellor, offices of especiall credite and like profile, moreouer +rewarded with annuities of lands. + +There are also two chiefe Iudges named Cadi Lesker, the one ouer Europe, +and the other ouer Asia and Africa, which in Court doe sit on the Bench at +the left hand of the Bassas. These sell all offices to the vnder Iudges of +the land called Cadies, whereof is one in euery Citie or towne, before whom +all matters in controuersie are by iudgement decided, as also penalties and +corrections for crimes ordained to be executed vpon the offenders by the +Subbassi. + + +The number of Souldiers continually attending vpon the Beglerbegs the + gouernours of Prouinces and Saniacks, and their petie Captaines + mainteined of these Prouinces. + +The Beglerbegs of + + Graecia, fourtie thousand persons. + Buda, fifteene thousand persons. + Sclauonia, fifteene thousand persons. + Natolia, fifteene thousand persons. + Caramania, fifteene thousand persons. + Armenia, eighteene thousand persons. + Persia, twentie thousand persons. + Vsdrum, fifteene thousand persons. + Chirusta, fifteene thousand persons. + Caraemiti, thirtie thousand persons. + Gierusal, two and thirtie thousand persons. + +The Beglerbegs of + + Bagdat, fiue and twentie thousand persons. + Balsara, two and twenty thousand persons. + Lassaija, seuenteene thousand persons. + Alepo, fiue and twentie thousand persons. + Damasco, seuenteene thousand persons. + Cayro, twelue thousand persons. + Abes, twelue thousand persons. + Mecca, eight thousand persons. + Cyprus, eighteene thousand persons. + Tunis in Barbary, eight thousand persons. + Tripolis in Syria, eight thousand persons. + Alger, fourtie thousand persons. + +Whose Sangiacks and petie Captaines be three hundred sixtie eight, euery of +which retaining continually in pay from fiue hundreth to two hundreth +Souldiers, may be one with another at the least, three hundreth thousand +persons. + +Chiefe officers in his Seraglio about his person. Be these-- + + Capiaga, High Porter. + Alnader Bassi, Treasurer. + Oda Bassi, Chamberlaine. + Killergi Bassi, Steward. + Saraiaga, Comptroller. + Peskerolen, Groome of the chamber. + Edostoglan, Gentleman of the Ewer. + Sehetaraga, Armour bearer. + Choataraga, he that carieth his riding cloake. + Ebietaraga, Groome of the stoole. + +There be many other maner Officers, which I esteeme superfluous to write. + + +The Turkes yeerely reuenue. + +The Grand Signiors annual reuenue is said to be fourteene Millions and an +halfe of golden ducats, which is sterling fiue millions, eight score +thousand pounds. + +The tribute payd by the Christians his Subiects is one gold ducat yeerely +for the redemption of euery head, which may amount vnto not so litle as one +Million of golden ducats, which is sterling three hundred threescore +thousand pounds. + +Moreouer, in time of warre, he exacteth manifolde summes for maintenance of +his Armie and Nauie of the said Christians. + +The Emperour payeth him yeerely tribute for Hungary, threescore thousand +dollers, which is sterling thirteene thousand pound, besides presents to +the Viceroy and Bassas, which are said to amount to twentie thousand +dollers. + + +Ambassadors Allowances. + +The Ambassadour of the Emperour is allowed one thousand Aspers the day. + +The Ambassadour of the French king heretofore enioyed the like: but of late +yeeres by meanes of displeasure conceiued by Mahumet then Viceroy, it was +reduced to sixe crownes the day, beside the prouision of his Esquire of his +stable. + +The Ambassadours of Poland, and for the state of Venice are not Ligiers as +these two abouesaid. The said Polack is allowed 12. Frenche crownes the day +during his abode, which may be for a moneth. Very seldome do the state of +Venice send any Ambassador otherwise, then enforced of vrgent necessity: +but in stead thereof keepe their Agent, president ouer other Marchants of +them termed a bailife, who hath none allowance of the Grand Signior, +although his port and state is in maner as magnifical as the other +aforesaid Ambassadors. The Spanish Ambassador was equall with other in +Ianizaries: but for so much as he would not according to custome folow the +list of other Ambassadors in making presents to the Grand Signior, he had +none alowance. His abode there was 3. yeres, at the end whereof, hauing +concluded a truce for six yeres, taking place from his first comming in +Nouember last past 1580. he was not admitted to the presence of the Grand +Signior. + + * * * * * + +To the Worshipfull and his very loving Vncle M. Rowland Hewish, Esquier, at + Sand in Devonshire. + +Sir, considering the goodnesse of your Nature which is woont kindely to +accept from a friend, euen of meane things being giuen with a good heart, I +haue presumed to trouble you with the reading of this rude discourse of my +trauels into Turkie, and of the deliuerie of the present with such other +occurrents as there happened woorthie the obseruation: of all which +proceedings I was an eie-witnesse, it pleasing the Ambassadour to take mee +in with him to the Grand Signior. If for lacke of time to put it in order I +haue not performed it so well as it ought, I craue pardon, assuring you +that to my knowledge I haue not missed in the trueth of any thing. If you +aske me what in my trauels I haue learned, I answere as a noble man of +France did to the like demaund, Hoc vnum didici, mundi contemptum: and so +concluding with the wise man in the booke of the Preacher, that all is +vanitie, and one thing onely is necessarie, I take my leaue and commit you +to the Almightie. From London the 16. March 1597. + +Your louing Nephew +Richard Wrag. + + +A description of a Voiage to Constantinople and Syria, begun the 21. of + March 1593. and ended the 9. of August, 1595. wherein is shewed the order + of deliuering the second Present by Master Edward Barton her maiesties + Ambassador, which was sent from her Maiestie to Sultan Murad Can, + Emperour of Turkie. + +We set saile in the Ascension of London, a new shippe very well appointed, +of two hundred and three score tunnes (whereof was master one William +Broadbanke, a prouident and skilfull man in his facultie) from Grauesend +the one and twentie of March 1593. And vpon the eight of Aprill folowing +wee passed the streights of Gibraltar, and with a small Westerne gale, the +24. of the same, we arriued at Zante an Iland vnder the Venetians. The +fourth of May wee departed, and the one and twentie wee arriued at +Alexandretta in Cilicia in the very bottome of the Mediterrane sea, a roade +some 25. miles distance from Antioch, where our marchants land their goods +to bee sent for Aleppo. From thence wee set saile the fift of Iune, and by +contrary windes were driuen vpon the coast of Caramania into a road neere a +litle Iland where a castle standeth, called Castle Rosso, some thirtie +leagues to the Eastwards of the Rhodes, where after long search for fresh +water, we could finde none, vntil certaine poore Greekes of the Iland +brought vs to a well where we had 5 or 6 tuns. That part of the country +next the sea is very barren and full of mountains, yet found we there an +olde tombe of marble, with an epitaph of an ancient Greeke caracter, by +antiquity neere worne out and past reading; which to the beholders seemed a +monument of the greatnesse of the Grecian monarchy. [Sidenote: Candie.] +From thence we went to the Rhodes, and by contrary windes were driuen into +a port of Candy, called Sittia: this Iland is vnder the Venetians, who haue +there 600 souldiers, besides certaine Greeks, continually in pay. Here with +contrary winds we stayed six weeks, and in the end, hauing the winde +prosperous, we sailed by Nicaria, Pharos, Delos, and Andros, with sight of +many other Ilands in the Archipelago, and arriued at the two castles in +Hellespont the 24 of August. Within few dayes after we came to Galipoli +some thirty miles from this place, where foure of vs tooke a Parma or boat +of that place, with two watermen, which rowed us along the Thracian shore +to Constantinople, which sometime sailing and sometime rowing, in foure +dayes they performed. The first of September we arriued at the famous port +of the Grand Signior, where we were not a little welcome to M. Edward +Barton vntil then her Maiesties Agent, who (with many other great persons) +had for many dayes expected the present. [Sidenote: The Ascension arriued +at the 7 towers.] Fiue or sixe dayes after the shippe arriued neere the +Seuen towers, which is a very strong hold, and so called of so many +turrets, which it hath, standing neere the sea side, being the first part +of the city that we came vnto. [Sidenote: The ship saluteth the grand +Signior.] Heere the Agent appointed the master of the Ascension to stay +with the shippe vntill a fitte winde and opportunity serued to bring her +about the Seraglio to Salute the Grand Signior in his moskyta or church: +for you shall vnderstand that he hath built one neere the wall of his +Seraglio or pallace adioyning to the Sea side; whereunto twise or thrise a +weeke he resorteth to performe such religious rites as their law requireth: +where hee being within few dayes after, our shippe set out in their best +maner with flagges, streamers and pendants of diuers coloured silke, with +all the mariners, together with most of the Ambassadours men, hauing the +winde faire, and came within two cables length of this his moskita, where +(hee to his great content beholding the shippe in such brauery) they +discharged first two volies of small shot, and then all the great ordinance +twise ouer, there being seuen and twentie or eight and twentie pieces in +the ship. Which performed, he appointed the Bustangi-Bassa or captaine of +the great and spacious garden or parke, to giue our men thankes, with +request that some other day they would shew him the like sporte when hee +would have the Sultana or Empresse a beholder thereof, which few dayes +after at the shippes going to the Custome-house they performed. + +The grand Signiors salutation thus ended, the master brought the ship to an +anker at Rapamat neere the ambassadors house, where hee likewise saluted +him with all his great ordinance once ouer, and where he landed the +Present, the deliuerie whereof for a time was staied: the cause of which +staie it shall neither be dishonorable for our nation, or that woorthie man +the ambassador to shew you. [Sidenote: The cause of staying the present.] +At the departure of Sinan Bassa the chiefe Vizir, and our ambassadors great +friend toward the warres of Hungarie there was another Bassa appointed in +his place, a churlish and harsh natured man, who vpon occasion of certaine +Genouezes, escaping out of the castles standing toward the Euxine Sea, nowe +called the black Sea, there imprisoned, apprehended and threatened to +execute one of our Englishmen called Iohn Field, for that hee was taken +thereabouts, and knowen not many dayes before to haue brought a letter to +one of them: vpon the soliciting of whose libertie there fell a iarre +betweene the Bassa (being now chiefe Vizir) and our ambassador, and in +choler he gaue her maiesties ambassador such words, as without sustaining +some great indignitie hee could not put vp. [Sidenote: An Arz to the grand +Signior] Whereupon after the arriual of the Present, he made an Arz, that +is, a bill of Complaint to the grand Signior against him, the manner in +exhibiting whereof is thus performed. + +The plaintifes expect the grand Signiors going abroad from his pallace, +either to Santa Sophia or to his church by the sea side, whither, with a +Perma (that is one of their vsuall whirries) they approch within some two +or three score yards, where the plaintife standeth vp, and holdeth his +petition ouer his forehead in sight of the grand Signior (for his church is +open to the Sea side) the rest sitting still in the boat, who appointeth +one of his Dwarfes to receiue them, and to bring them to him. A Dwarfe, one +of the Ambassadors fauorites, so soone as he was discerned, beckned him to +the shore side, tooke his Arz, and with speed caried it to the grand +Signior. Now the effect of it was this; that except his highnesse would +redresse this so great an indignitie, which the Vizir his slaue had offered +him and her maiestie in his person, he was purposed to detaine the Present +vntill such time as he might by letters ouer-land from her maiestie bee +certified, whither she would put vp so great an iniurie as it was. +[Sidenote: The great hall of Iustice.] Whereupon he presently returned +answere, requesting the ambassador within an houre after to goe to the +Douan of the Vizir, vnto whom himselfe of his charge would send a gowne of +cloth of gold, and commaund him publikely to put it vpon him, and with kind +entertainment to imbrace him in signe of reconciliation. [Sidenote: +Reconceliation with the Vizir made.] Whereupon our ambassador returning +home, tooke his horse, accompanied with his men, and came to the Vizirs +court, where, according to the grand Signiors command, he with all shew of +kindnesse embraced the ambassador, and with curteous speeches reconciled +himselfe, and with his own hands put the gowne of cloth of gold vpon his +backe. Which done, hee with his attendants returned home, to the no small +admiration of all Christians, that heard of it, especially of the French +and Venetian ambassadors, who neuer in the like case against the second +person of the Turkish Empire durst haue attempted so bold an enterprise +with hope of so friendly audience, and with so speedie redresse. This +reconciliation with the great Vizir thus made, the ambassador prepared +himselfe for the deliuerie of the Present, which vpon the 7 of October +1593. in this maner he performed. + +[Sidenote: The ambassador goeth to the court with the present.] The +Ascension with her flags and streamers, as aforesaid, repaired nigh vnto +the place where the ambassador should land to go vp to the Seraglio: for +you must vnderstand that all Christian ambassadors haue their dwelling in +Pera where most Christians abide, from which place, except you would go 4 +or 5 miles about, you cannot go by land to Constantinople, whereas by Sea +it is litle broder then the Thames. Our Ambassador likewise apparelled in a +sute of cloth of siluer, with an vpper gowne of cloth of gold, accompanied +with 7 gentlemen in costly sutes of Sattin, with 40 other of his men very +well apparelled, and all in one liuerie of sad French russet cloth gownes, +at his house tooke boate: at whose landing the ship discharged all her +ordinance, where likewise attended 2 Bassas, with 40 or 50 Chauses to +accompany the ambassador to the court, and also horses for the ambassador +and his gentlemen, very richly furnished, with Turkish seruants attendant +to take the horses when they should light. [Sidenote: The Ambass. came to +the Seraglio.] The ambassador thus honorably accompanied, the Chauses +foremost, next his men on foote all going by two and two, himselfe last +with his Chause and Drugaman or Interpreter, and 4 Ianissaries, which he +doeth vsually entertaine in his house to accompany him continually abroad, +came to the Seraglio about an Engush mile from the water side, where first +hee passed a great gate into a large court (much like the space before +Whitehall gate) where he with his gentlemen alighted and left their horses. +From hence they passed into an other stately court, being about 6 score in +bredth, and some 10 score yards long, with many trees in it: where all the +court was with great pompe set in order to entertaine our ambassador. +[Sidenote: All these are captaines of hundreds and of fifties.] Vpon the +right hand all the length of the court was a gallerie arched ouer, and +borne vp with stone pillars, much like the Roiall Exchange, where stood +most of his guard in rankes from the one end to the other in costly aray, +with round head pieces on their heads of mettall and gilt ouer, with a +great plume of fethers somewhat like a long brush standing vp before. On +the left hand stood the Cappagies or porters, and the Chauses. All these +courtiers being about the number of 2000. (as I might well gesse) most of +them apparelled in cloth of gold, siluer, veluet, sattin and scarlet, did +together with bowing their bodies, laying their hands vpon their brests in +curteous maner of salutation, entertain the Ambassador: who likewise +passing between them, and turning himself sometime to the right hand and +sometime to the left, answered them with the like. [Sidenote: The +ambassador receiued by the Vizir with all kindnesse.] As he thus passed +along, certaine Chauses conducted him to the Douan, which is the seat of +Iustice, where certaine dayes of the weeke the grand Vizir, with the other +Vizirs, the Cadi-lesker or lord chiefe Iustice, and the Mufti or high +priest do sit to determine vpon such causes as be brought before them, +which place is vpon the left side of this great court, whither the +ambassador with his gentlemen came, where hee found the Vizir thus +accompanied as aforesayd, who with great shew of kindnes receiued him: and +after receit of her maiesties letters, and conference had of the Present, +of her maiesties health, of the state of England, and such other matters as +concerned our peaceable traffique in those parts: [Sidenote: Diner brought +in.] dinner being prepared was by many of the Courtiers brought into +another inner roome next adioining, which consisted of an hundred dishes or +therabouts, most boiled and rosted, where the ambassador accompanied with +the Vizirs went to dinner, his gentlemen likewise with the rest of his men +hauing a dinner with the like varietie prepared vpon the same side of the +court, by themselues sate downe to their meat, 40 or 50 Chauses standing at +the vpper end attending vpon the gentlemen to see them serued in good +order; their drinke was water mingled with rose water and sugar brought in +a Luthro (that is a goates skinne) which a man carieth at his backe, and +vnder his arme letteth it run out at a spout into cups as men will call for +it. [Sidenote: Diner taken away] The dinner thus with good order brought +in, and for halfe an houre with great sobrietie and silence performed, was +not so orderly taken vp; for certaine Moglans officers of the kitchin (like +her maiesties black guard) came in disordered maner and tooke away the +dishes, and he whose hungry eie one dish could not satisfie, turned two or +three one into the other, and thus of a sudden was a cleane riddance made +of all. The ambassador after dinner with his gentlemen, by certaine +officers were placed at the vpper ende vpon the left side of the court, +nere vnto a great gate which gaue entrance to a third court being but +litle, paued with stone. [Sidenote: Gownes of cloth of gold for the +ambassador and his gentlemen.] In the midst whereof was a litle house built +of marble, as I take it, within which sate the grand Signor, according to +whose commandement giuen there were gownes of cloth of gold brought out of +the wardrope, and put vpon the ambassador and 7 of his gentlemen, the +ambassador himselfe hauing 2, one of gold and the other of crimosin veluet, +all the rest one a piece. [Sidenote: The Present.] Then certaine Cappagies +had the Present, which was in trunks there ready, deliuered them by the +ambassadors men, it being 12 goodly pieces of gilt plate, 36 garments of +fine English cloth of al colors, 20 garments of cloth of gold, 10 garments +of sattin, 6 pieces of fine Holland, and certaine other things of good +value; al which were caried round about the court, each man taking a piece, +being in number very neere 100 parcels, and so 2 and 2 going round that all +might see it, to the greater glory of the present, and of him to whom it +was giuen: [Sidenote: The Present viewed.] they went into the innermost +court passing by the window of that roome, where the grand Signior sate, +who, as it went by to be laid vp in certaine roomes adioining, tooke view +of all. Presently after the present followed the ambassador with his +gentlemen; at the gate of which court stoode 20 or 30 Agaus which be +eunuchs. Within the court yard were the Turkes Dwarfes and Dumbe men, being +most of them youths. At the doore of his roome stood the Bustangi-bassa, +with another Bassa to lead the ambassador and his folowers to the grand +Signior who sate in a chaire of estate, apparelled in a gowne of cloth of +siluer. The floore vnder his feete, which part was a foote higher then the +rest, was couered with a carpet of green sattin embrodered most richly with +siluer, orient perles and great Turkesses; the other part of the house was +couered with a carpet of Cornation sattin imbrodered with gold, none were +in the roome with him, but a Bassa who stood next the wall ouer against him +banging down his head, and looking submissely vpon the ground as all his +subjects doe in his presence. [Sidenote: The ambassador kisseth the grand +Signiors hand.] The ambassador thus betwixt two which stood at the doore +being led in, either of them taking an arme, kissed his hand, and so +backward with his face to the Turke they brought him nigh the dore againe, +where he stood vntill they had likewise done so with all the rest of his +gentlemen. [Sidenote: The ambassadors demands granted.] Which ended, the +ambassador, according as it is the custome when any present is deliuered, +made his three demaunds, such as he thought most expedient for her +maiesties honor, and the peaceable traffique of our nation into his +dominions: whereunto he answered in one word, Nolo, which is in Turkish as +much as, it shal be done: for it is not the maner of the Turkish emperor +familiarly to confer with any Christian ambassador, but he appointeth his +Vizir in his person to graunt their demaunds if they be to his liking: as +to our ambassador he granted all his demands, and gaue order that his daily +allowance for his house of mony, flesh, wood, and haie, should be augmented +with halfe as much more as it had bene before. Hereupon the ambassador +taking his leaue, departed with his gentlemen the same way he came, the +whole court saluting him as they did at his comming in: and comming to the +second court to take our horses, after we were mounted, we staied halfe an +houre, vntil the captain of the guard with 2000 horsemen at the least +passed before, after whom folowed 40 or 50 Chauses next before the +ambassador to accompany him to his house. And as before at his landing, so +now at his taking boat, the ship discharged all her great ordinance, where +arriuing, he likewise had a great banquet prepared to entertaine those +which came to bring him home. [Sidenote: The Sultanas present.] The pompe +and solemnitie of the Present, with the day thus ended, he shortly after +presented the Sultana or empresse who (by reason that she is mother to him +which was heire to the crown Imperial) is had in far greater reuerence then +any of his other Queens or concubines. The Present sent her in her +maiesties name was a iewel of her maiesties picture, set with some rubies +and diamants, 3 great pieces of gilt plate, 10 garments of cloth of gold, a +very fine case, of glass bottles siluer and gift, with 2 pieces of fine +Holland, which so gratefully she accepted, as that she sent to know of the +ambassador what present he thought she might return that would most delight +her maiestie: who sent word that a sute of princely attire being after the +Turkish fashion would for the rarenesse thereof be acceptable in England. +[The Sultanas present to the Queene. Letters sent for England.] Whereopon +she sent an vpper gowne of cloth of gold very rich, an vnder gowne of cloth +of siluer, and a girdle of Turkie worke, rich and faire, with a letter of +gratification, which for the rarenesse of the stile, because you may be +acquainted with it, I haue at the ende of this discourse hereunto annexed, +which letter and present, with one from the grand Signor, was sent by M. +Edward Bushell, and M. William Aldridge ouer-land the 20 of March, who +passed through Valachia and Moldauia, and so through Poland, where Michael +prince of Valachia, and Aron Voiuoda prince of Moldauia receiuing letters +from the ambassador, entertained them with al curtesie, through whose +meanes by the great fauour which his lordship had with the grand Signior, +they had not long before both of them bene aduanced to their princely +dignities. [Sidenote: The other Vizirs presented.] Hee likewise presented +Sigala the Admirall of the Seas, with Abrim Bassa, who maried the great +Turkes daughter, and all the other Vizirs with diuers pieces of plate, fine +English cloth and other costly things: the particulars whereof, to auoid +tediousnesse, I omit. [Sidenote: The Ascension departeth.] All the presents +thus ended, the ship shooting ten pieces of ordinance at the Seraglio +point, as a last farewell, departed on her iourney for England the first of +Nouember, my selfe continuing in Constantinople vntill the last of Iuly +after. This yere in the spring there was great preparation for the +Hungarian wars: and the great Turke threatned to goe himselfe in person: +but like Heliogabalus, his affections being more seruiceable to Venus then +to Mars, he stayed at home. Yet a great army was dispatched this yere; who, +as they came out of Asia to goe for Hungary, did so pester the streets of +Constantinople for the space of two moneths in the spring time, as scarse +either Christian or Iew could without danger of losing his money passe vp +and downe the city. What insolencies, murders and robberies were committed +not onely vpon Christians but also vpon Turks I omit to write, and I pray +God in England the like may neuer be seene: and yet I could wish, that such +amongst vs as haue inioyed the Gospel with such great and admirable peace +and prosperity vnder her Maiesties gouerment this forty yeeres, and haue +not all this time brought forth better fruits of obedience to God, and +thankfulnesse to her Maiesty, were there but a short time to beholde the +miserable condition both of Christians and others liuing vnder such an +infidell prince, who not onely are wrapped in most palpable and grosse +ignorance of minde, but are cleane without the meanes of the true knowledge +of God: I doubt not but the sight hereof (if they be not cleane void of +grace) would stirre them vp to more thankefulnesse to God, that euer they +were borne in so happy a time, and vnder so wise and godly a prince +professing the true religion of Christ. + +The number of souldiours which went to the warres of Hungary this yeere +were 470000, as by the particulars giuen by the Admirall to the Ambassadour +hereunder doe appeare. Although all these were appointed and supposed to +goe, yet the victories which the Christians in the spring had against the +Turks strooke such a terrour in many of the Turkish souldiours, as by +report diuers vpon the way thither left their Captaines and stole away. + + +The number of Turkish souldiours which were appointed to goe into Hungary + against the Christian Emperour. May 1594. + +Sinan Bassa generall, with the Saniacke masould, that is, out of office, + with the other Saniacks in office or of degree, 40000. +Achmigi, that is, Aduenturers, 50000. +The Agha or Captaine with his Ianisaries, and his Giebegies, 20000. +The Beglerbeg of Graecia, with all his Saniacks, 40000. +The company of Spaheis or horsemen, 10000. +The company of Silitari, 6000. +The company of Sagbulue and of Solbulue both together, 8000. +The Bassa of Belgrad. } +The Bassa of Temiswar. } +The Bassa of Bosna. } 80000. +The Bassa of Buda. } +The Siniack of Gersech. } + +Out of Asia. + +The Bassa of Caramania. } +The Bassa of Laras. } +The Bassa of Damasco. } +The Bassa of Suas. } 120000 +The Bassa of Van or Nan. } +The Bassa of Vsdrum. } +Of Tartars there be about 100000. } + +Thus you may see that the great Turke maketh warre with no small numbers. +And in anno 1597, when Sultan Mahomet himselfe went in person into Hungary, +if a man may beleeue reports, he had an army of 600000. + +For the city of Constantinople you shall vnderstand that it is matchable +with any city in Europe, as well in bignesse as for the pleasant situation +thereof, and commodious traffike and bringing of all maner of necessary +prouision of victuals, and whatsoeuer els mans life for the sustentation +thereof shall require, being seated vpon a promontory, looking toward +Pontus Euxinus vpon the Northeast, and to Propontis on the Southwest, by +which two seas by shipping is brought great store of all maner of victuals. +The city it selfe in forme representeth a triangular figure, the sea +washing the walles vpon two sides thereof, the other side faceth the +continent of Thracia; the grand Signiors seraglio standeth vpon that point +which looketh into the sea, being cut off from the city by a wall; so that +the wall of his pallace conteineth in circuit about two English miles: the +seuen towers spoken of before stand at another corner, and Constantines +olde pallace to the North at the third corner. The city hath a threefolde +wall about it; the innermost very high, the next lower then that, and the +third a countermure and is in circuit about ten English miles: it hath +foure and twentie gates: and when the empire was remooued out of the West +into the East, it was inriched with many spoiles of olde Rome by Vespasian +and other emperours, hauing many monuments and pillars in it worthy the +obseruation; amongst the rest in the midst of Constantinople standeth one +of white marble called Vespasians pillar, of 38 or 40 yards high, which +hath from the base to the top proportions of men in armour fighting on +horsebacke: it is likewise adorned with diuers goodly buildings and stately +Mesquitas, whereof the biggest is Sultan Solimans a great warriour, which +liued in the time of Charles the fifth; but the fairest is Santa Sophia, +which in the time of the Christian emperours was the chiefe cathedrall +church, and is still in greatest account with the great Turke: it is built +round like other Greekish churches, the pavements and walles be all of +marble, it hath beneath 44 pillars of diuers coloured marble of admirable +height and bignesse, which stand vpon great round feet of brasse, much +greater then the pillars, and of a great height, some ten yards distant +from the wall: from which vnto these pillars is a great gallery built, +which goeth round about the church; and vpon the outside of the gallery +stand 66 marble pillars which beare vp the round roofe being the top of the +church: it hath three pulpits or preaching places, and about 2000 lampes +brought in by the Turke. Likewise vpon one side in the top is the picture +of Christ with the 12 Apostles, but their faces are defaced, with two or +three ancient tombs of Christians: to the West sticketh an arrow in the +toppe of the Church, which, as the Turks report, Sultan Mahomet shot when +he first tooke the city. Neere adioyning be two chapels of marble, where +lie buried most of the emperours with their children and sultanas. The 16 +of Iuly, accompanied with some other of our nation we went by water to the +Blacke sea, being 16 miles distant from Constantinople, the sea al the way +thither being little broader then the Thames; both sides of the shore are +beautified with faire and goodly buildings. At the mouth of this Bosphorus +lieth a rocke some fourescore yards from the maine land, wherevpon standeth +a white marble pillar called Pompeys pillar, the shadow whereof was 23 +foote long at nine of the clocke in the forenoone: over against it is a +turret of stone upon the maine land 120 steps high, hauing a great +glass-lanthorne in the toppe foure yards in diamiter and three in height, +with a great copper pan in the midst to holde oile, with twenty lights in +it, and it serueth to giue passage into this straight in the night to such +ships as come from all parts of those seas to Constantinople: it is +continually kept by a Turke, who to that end hath pay of the grand Signior. +And thus hauing spent eleuen moneths in Constantinople, accompanied with a +chause, and carying certaine mandates from the grand Signior to the Bassa +of Aleppo for the kinde vsage of our nation in those parts, the 30 of Iuly +I tooke passage in a Turkish carmosale or shippe bound for Sidon; and +passing thorow Propontis, hauing Salimbria with Heraclia most pleasantly +situated on the right hand, and Proconesus now called Marmora on the left, +we came to Gallipoly, and so by Hellespont, betweene the two castles before +named called Sestos and Abydos, famous for the passages made there both by +Xerxes and great Alexander, the one into Thracia, the other into Asia, and +so by the Sigean Promontory, now called Cape Ianitzary, at the mouth of +Hellespont vpon Asia side, where Troy stood, where are yet ruines of olde +walles to be seene, with two hils rising in a piramidall forme, not +vnlikely to be the tombs of Achilles and Ajax. From thence we sailed along, +hauing Tenedos and Lemnos on the right hand, and the Troian fields on the +left: at length we came to Mitylen and Sio long time inhabited by the +Genoueses, but now vnder the Turke. The Iland is beautified with goodly +buildings and pleasant gardens, and aboundeth with fruits, wine, and the +gum masticke. From thence sailing alongst the gulfe of Ephesus with Nicaria +on the right hand, Samos and Smirna on the left, we came to Patmos, where +S. Iohn wrote the Revelation. The Iland is but small, not aboue five miles +in compasse: the chiefe thing it yeeldeth is corn: it hath a port for +shipping, and in it is a monastery of Greekish Caloieros. From thence by +Cos (now called Lango) where Hipocrates was borne: and passing many other +Ilands and rocks, we arriued at Rhodes, one of the strongest and fairest +cities of the East: here we stayed three or foure dayes; and by reason of a +By which went in the ship to Paphos in Cyprus, who vsed me with all +kindnesse, I went about the city, and tooke the view of all: which city is +still with all the houses and walles thereof maintained in the same order +as they tooke it from the Rhodian knights. Ouer the doores of many of the +houses, which be strongly built of stone, do remaine vndefaced, the armes +of England, France, Spaine, and many other Christian knights, as though the +Turkes in the view thereof gloried in the taking of all Christendome, whose +armes they beholde. From thence we sailed to Paphos an olde ruinous towne +standing vpon the Westerne part of Cyprus, where S. Paul in the Acts +conuerted the gouernor. Departing hence, we came to Sidon, by the Turkes +called Saytosa, within tenne or twelue miles of the place where Tirus +stood, which now being eaten in by the sea, is, as Ezekiel prophesied, a +place for the spreading out of a net. Sidon is situated in a small bay at +the foot of mount Libanus, vpon the side of an hill looking to the North: +it is walled about, with a castle nigh to the sea, and one toward the land +which is ruinated, but the walle thereof standeth. Some halfe mile vp +toward the mountaine be certaine ruines of buildings, with marble pillars, +remaining: heere for three dayes we were kindly entertained of the Captaine +of the castle: and in a small barke we sailed from hence along the shore to +Tripoli, and so to Alexandretta, where the 24 of August we arriued. From +thence with a Venetian carauan we went by land to Aleppo, passing by +Antioch, which is seated vpon the side of an hill, whose walles still stand +with 360 turrets upon them, and neere a very great plaine which beareth the +name of the city, thorow which runneth the riuer Orontes, in Scripture +called Farfar. In Aleppo I stayed vntill February following; in this city, +as at a mart, meete many nations out of Asia with the people of Europe, +hauing continuall traffike and interchangeable course of marchandise one +with another: the state and trade of which place, because it is so well +knowen to most of our nation I omitte to write of. The 27 of February I +departed from Aleppo, and the fifth of March imbarked my selfe at +Alexandretta in a great ship of Venice called the Nana Ferra, to come to +England. The 14 we put into Salino in Cyprus, where the ship staying many +dayes to lade cotton wool, and other commodities, in the meane time +accompanied with M. William Barret my countrey man, the master of the ship +a Greeke, and others wee tooke occasion to see Nicosia, the chiefe city of +this Iland, which was some twenty miles from this place, which is situated +at the foot of an hill: to the East is a great plaine, extending it selfe +in a great length from the North to the South: it is walled about, but of +no such strength as Famagusta (another city in this Iland neere the Sea +side) whose walles are cut out of the maine rocke. In this city be many +sumptuous and goodly buildings of stone, but vninhabited; the cause whereof +doth giue me iust occasion to shew you of a rare iudgement of God vpon the +owners sometime of these houses, as I was credibly informed by a Cipriot, a +marcham of, great wealth in this city. [Sidenote: A great iudgement of God +vpon the noble men of Cyprus.] Before it came in subiection to the Turks, +while it was vnder the Venetians, there were many barons and noble men of +the Cipriots, who partly by vsurping more superiority ouer the common +people then they ought, and partly through their great reuenues which +yeerly came in by their cotton wooll and wines, grew so insolent and proud, +and withall so impiously wicked, as that they would at their pleasure +command both the wiues and children of their poore tenants to serue their +vncleane lusts, and holding them in such slauery as though they had beene +no better then dogges, would wage them against a grayhound or spaniell, and +he who woon the wager should euer after holde them as his proper goods and +chattels, to doe with them as he listed, being Christians as well as +themselues, if they may deserue so good a name. As they behaued themselues +most vnchristianly toward their brethren, so and much more vngodly (which I +should haue put in the first place) did they towards God: for as though +they were too great, standing on foot or kneeling to serue God, they would +come riding on horsebacke into the church to heare their masse: which +church now is made a publicke basistane or market place for the Turkes to +sell commodities in: but beholde the iudgement of the righteous God, who +payeth the sinner measure for measure. The Turkes the yeere before the +ouerthrowe giuen them at Lepanto by Don Iohn tooke Cyprus. These mighty +Nimrods fled some in holes and some into mountaines to hide themselues; +whereupon the Turkes made generall proclamation, that if they would all +come in and yeeld themselues, they would restore them to their former +reuenues and dignities: who not mistrusting the mischieuous pretense of the +Turkes, assembled together to make themselues knowen; whom after the Turkes +had in possession, they (as the Lords executioners) put them with their +wiues and children all to the sword, pretending thereby to cut of all +future rebellion, so that at this day is not one of the noble race knowen +aliue in the Iland, onely two or three remaine in Venice but of litle +wealth, which in the time of the warres escaped. After we had stayed in +this Iland some thirty dayes, we set saile in the foresayd shippe being +about the burthen of 900 tunnes, hauing in her passengers of diuers +nations, as Tartars, Persians, Iewes, and sundry Christians. Amongst all +which I had often conference with a Iew, who by reason of his many yeeres +education at Safet a place in Iudea neere Ierusalem, where they study the +Rabbines with some other arts as they thinke good, as also: for his trauels +into Persia and Ormus, he seemed to be of good experience in matters +abroad, who related vnto me such conference as he had with a Baniane at +Ormus, being one of the Indians inhabiting the countrey of Cambaia. +[Sidenote: Indians skilful in Astronomy.] This Baniane being a Gentile had +skill in Astronomie, as many of that nation haue, who by his books written +in his owne tongue and Characters, could tell the time of Eclipses both of +Sunne and Moone, with the Change and Full, and by iudgement in Astrologie +gaue answere to any question demanded. Being asked concerning his opinion +in religion, what he thought of God? He made answere that they held no +other god but the sun, (to which planet they pray both at the rising and +setting) as I haue seene sundry doe in Aleppo: his reason was drawen from +the effects which it worketh in giuing light to the moone and other +starres, and causing all things to grow and encrease vpon the earth: +answere was made, that it did moue with the rest as the wheeles of a +clocke, and therefore of force must haue a moouer. Likewise in the Eclipse +being darkened it is manifestly prooued that it is not god, for God is +altogether goodnesse and brightnesse, which can neither be darkened nor +receiue detriment or hurt: but the Sunne receiueth both in the Eclipse, as +is aparant: to which hee could not answere; but so they had receiued from +their ancestors, that it was without beginning or ende, as in any Orbicular +or round body neither beginning or end could be found. He likewise sayd, +that there were other Gentiles in the Indies which worship the moone as +chiefe, and their reason is. The moone when she riseth goeth with thousands +of starres accompanied like a king, and therefore is chiefe: but the Sunne +goeth alone, and therefore not so great. Against whom the Banianes reason, +that it is not true; because the Moone and starres receiue their light from +the Sunne, neither doth the Sunne vouchsafe them his company but when he +list, and therefore like a mighty prince goeth alone, yet they acknowledge +the Moone as Queene or Viceroy. Law they hold hone, but only seuen precepts +which they say were giuen them from their father Noe, not knowing Abraham +or any other. [Sidenote: The seven precepts of Banianes.] First, to honor +father and mother; secondly, not to steale; thirdly not to commit adultery; +fourthly not to kill any thing liuing; fiftly, not to eat any thing liuing; +sixtly not to cut their haire; seuenthly to go barefoot in their churches. +These they hold most strictly, and by no means will breake them: but he +that breaketh one is punished with twenty stripes; but for the greatest +fault they will kill none, neither by a short death nor a long, onely he is +kept some time in prison with very little meat, and hath at the most not +aboue twenty or fiue and twenty stripes. In the yeere they haue 16 feasts, +and then they go to their church, where is pictured in a broad table the +Sun, as we vse to paint it, the face of a man with beames round about, not +hauing any thing els in it. At their feast they spot their faces in diuers +parts with saffron all yellow, and so walke vp and downe the streets; and +this they doe as a custome. They hold, there shalbe a resurrection, and all +shall come to iudgement, but the account shalbe most streight, insomuch +that but one of 10000 shalbe receiued to fauor, and those shall liue againe +in this world in great happinesse: the rest shalbe tormented. And because +they will escape this iudgdment, when any man dieth, he and his wife be +both burnt together euen to ashes, and then they are thrown into a river, +and so dispersed as though they had neuer bene. If the wife will not burne +with her dead husband, she is holden euer after as a whore. And by this +meanes they hope to escape the iudgement to come. As for the soule, that +goeth to the place from whence it came, but where the place is they know +not. That the body should not be made againe they reason with the +philosophers, saying, that of nothing nothing can be made (not knowing that +God made the whole world and their god the Sun of nothing) but beholding +the course of nature, that nothing is made but by a meanes, as by the seed +of a man is made another, and by corne cast into the ground there commeth +vp new corne: so, say they, man cannot be made except some part of him be +left, and therefore they burne the whole: for if he were buried in the +earth, they say there is a small bone in the necke which would neuer be +consumed: or if he were eaten by a beast, that bone would not consume, but +of that bone would come another man; and then the soule being restored +againe, he should come into iudgement, whereas now the body being +destroyed, the soule shall not be iudged: for their opinion is, that both +body and soule must be vnited together, as they haue sinned together, to +receiue iudgement; and therefore the soule alone cannot. Their seuen +precepts which they keepe so strictly are not for any hope of reward they +haue after this life, but onely that they may be blessed in this world, for +they thinke that he which breaketh them shall haue ill successe in all his +businesse. + +They say, the three chiefe religions in the world be of the Christians, +Iewes, and Turks, and yet but one of them true: but being in doubt which is +the truest of the three, they will be of none: for they hold that all these +three shall be iudged, and but few of them which be of the true shall be +saued, the examination shall be so straight; and therefore, as I haue sayd +before, to preuent this iudgement, they burne their bodies to ashes. They +say, these three religions haue too many precepts to keepe them all wel, +and therefore wonderfull hard it wil be to make account, because so few doe +obserue all their religion aright. And thus passing the time for the space +of three moneths in this sea voyage, we arriued at Venice the tenth of +Iune: and after I had seene Padua, with other English men, I came the +ordinary way ouer the Alpes, by Augusta, Noremberg and so for England; +where to the praise of God I safely arriued the ninth of August 1595. + +END OF VOL. IX. + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Principal Navigations, +Voyages, Traffiques, and Discoveries of The English Nation, Volume 9, +by Richard Hakluyt + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PRINCIPAL NAVIGATIONS, V9 *** + +***** This file should be named 10673.txt or 10673.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/6/7/10673/ + +Produced by Karl Hagen and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team. +This file was produced from images generously made available by the +Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions. + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS," WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + + https://www.gutenberg.org/etext06 + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: + https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: + https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL + + diff --git a/old/10673.zip b/old/10673.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0d20ddb --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10673.zip |